ru 

00 


LIBRARY 

OF   THF. 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA 

OF* 


Accession  No. 


,    C/^5S 


THE 


p 


:ONTAINING    THE- 


ARTTOS  AND  I<ETT3R$ 


WRITTEN    BY 


PUBLISHED    BY 


Geo,  8.  Dove  &  Company. 


SAN    FRANCISCO  : 

J.   A.   DOVE  &  CO.,  PRINTERS. 

1886. 


f 

Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress  in  the  year  1886, 

BY    GEO.    S.    DOVE    &    CO., 

In  the  Office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington,  D.  C. 


PREFACE. 


IT  HAS  been  a  pleasure  to  me  to  have  been  entrusted  with  the 
responsibility  of  publishing  the  revelations  of  the  departed  prophet, 
Joseph  Morris.  For  twenty-four  years  the  revelations  have  been 
withheld  from  the  people,  ( with  the  exception  of  a  few  copies  that 
some  of  the  brethren  have  had  in  their  possession)  notwithstand- 
ing that  in  Rev.  88,  par.  7,  given  Aug.  23rd,  1861,  the  clerks  were 
commanded  to  copy  for  the  press  the  revelations  that  had  been 
given  up  to  that  time.  The  clerks  accomplished  their  part  of  the 
work,  but  the  revelations  were  not  produced  in  printed  form.  I 
feel  impressed  that  I,  with  the  aid  of  many  others,  have  been  in- 
strumental at  this  time  in  fulfilling  that  command,  by  presenting 
to  the  Weber  brethren  the  writings  of  Joseph  Morris  complete,  in 
book  form.  Many  of  the  brethren  were  opposed  -to  their  publica- 
tion, believing  that  it  would  not  be  prudent  to  advance  them  to 
the  world  in  their  crude  state :  some  contending  that  the  doctrines 
contained  in  them  were  fragmentary,  and  that  most  of  the  instuc- 
tion  was  appertaining  to  local  affairs ;  but  I  hope  that  their  publi- 
cation may  result  in  convincing  many  that  the  God  of  the  prophets 
still  speaks. 

The  forty  letters,  or  addresses,  that  were  written  to  Brigham 
Young,  contained  many  new  principles  which  have  been  made 
use  of  by  the  leaders  of  the  old  Church  whenever  they  had  an 
opportunity  to  present  them  to  the  saints  as  new  truths  which  had 
had  been  retained  until  wisdom  dictated  that  they  should  be  made 
known. 


IV  PREFACE. 

Brother  Joseph  Morris  in  the  night  of  his  earthly  afflictions,  was 
permitted  to  have  a  glimpse  of  divine  realities.  All  through  his 
life  the  course  of  the  world  appeared  to  be  against  him ;  and  dur- 
ing the  short  recognition  of  his  mission  which  he  enjoyed,  he  had 
to  carry  a  heavy  burden.  His  claim  for  recognition  rests  in 
the  hearts  of  those  who  were  with  him ;  and  the  hidden  spiritual 
truths  which  he  proclaimed,  will  remind  them  of  his  mission  in 
their  darkest  hours,  and  be  promulgated  for  future  generations 
to  profit  by. 

Although  no  claim  can  be  made  for  eloquence  in  the,  phrase- 
ology of  the  revelations,  ( as  they  bear  the  marks  of  an  unlearned 
man )  we  are  nevertheless  confident  of  the  divine  origin  of  the 
doctrines  and  principles  contained  in  them.  The  truths  were 
given  to  him  by  direct  impression,  and  he  conveyed  them  in  the 
language  he  had  at  command. 

Taking  the  principles  as  advanced  in  their  crude  state,  without 
the  aid  of  a  spiritual  understanding,  they  may  appear  mysterious 
and  obscure;  (some  who  are  opposed  to  the  advance  of  the  new 
doctrines,  may  take  advantage  of  this)  but,  under  the  guidance 
of  the  spirit  that  revealed  to  him  those  principles,  they  appear 
grand  in  their  simplicity. 

After  twenty-fotir  years  of  investigation  and  experience  in  re- 
ligious matters,  I  still  remain  a  believer  in  the  prophetic  mission 
of  Joseph  Morris,  feeling  convinced  that  the  truths  he  revealed 
were  from  the  Eternal  Fountain. 

GEORGE  S.   DOVE. 
SAN  FRANCISCO,  CAL.,  May,  1886. 


CONCERNING     THE     REVELATIONS. 


THE  REVELATIONS  contained  in  this  book  were  written  by 
Joseph  Morris,  between  the  years  of  1857  and  1862.  They  were 
inspired  and  written  as  the  spirit  dictated,  and  after  having  been 
read  before  the  congregation  of  the  saints,  they  were  deposited  in 
a  chest  under  lock  and  key.  Immediately  after  Joseph  was  shot, 
Hannah  Banks  and  other  sisters  took  the  box  from  the  office,  and 
buried  it  after  dark  in  the  Bowery,  where  he  had  on  many  occa- 
sions addressed  the  people.  After  three  days,  his  widow  took 
possession  of  it.  Her  father,  after  her  death,  sold  it  to  Abraham 
Taylor,  who  retained  it  safely  over  twenty  years,  and  before  his 
decease,  willed  it  to  his  son,  Joseph  Taylor,  of  San  Francisco. 

The  people  in  South  Weber,  during  the  ministrations  of  Joseph 
Morris,  dwelt  in  booths  and  tents  in  an  open  field ;  they  dfd  not 
erect  any  substantial  places  of  abode,  neither  did  they  till  the  • 
soil,  but  they  subsisted  on  the  means  that  they  had  previously 
acquired,  implicitly  believing  that  the  Lord  would  come  to  deliver 
them.  In  this  manner  they  lived  for  months,  expecting  a  deliver- 
ance from  the  bondage  that  had  oppressed  them  ;  and  while  wait- 
ing under  these  conditions,  the  prophet  received  many  revelations 
relative  to  spiritual  matters,  which  has  shed  a  new  light  on  the  to- 
morrow of  the  Scriptures. 

The  value  of.  the  property  consecrated  from  the  time  that  the 
law  of  consecration  was  revealed  up  to  the  time  that  the  people 
were  dispersed,  amounted  to  $167,622.54;  and  the  donations  for 
the  poor,  which  amounted  to  $7,306.16,  were  distributed  by  the 
bishop,  who  had  been  appointed  to  look  after  the  temporal  needs 
of  the  people ;  thus  the  saints  were  bound  together  as  one  family, 
having  made  a  covenant  with  the  Lord  by  sacrifice. 


4  HISTORY    OF    EVENTS. 

had  sometimes  worked  for.  One  day  when  Joseph  was  mowing 
hay,  he  said  to  Father  Jones:  "Do  you  know  who  I  am?"  ".Yes," 
he  replied,  "I  do  know  that  you  are  a  prophet  of  God,  for  the 
spirit  has  told  me  so."  This  was  the  first  recognition  Joseph  had 
met  with,  and  he  took  it  as  a  sign  that  the  work  would  go  on. 
He  was  very  much  opposed  by  Mother  Jones,  though  at  times  she 
admitted  the  new  truths,  was  very  friendly,  and  gave  him  advice 
how  to  avoid  the  enemies  who  were  constantly  on  his  track.  At 
last,  notice  was  given  him  by  some  of  the  leading  men  of  the 
place  that  he  must  leave  in  so  many  hours.  At  first  he  gave  but 
little  attention  to  it;  but  Mother  Jones  became  uneasy  and  said  : 
"Are  you  going?"  "Yes,  Him  going,  I  will  go,"  he  replied;  so 
he  started  next  day  for  South  Weber,  carrying  a  small  bundle. 
This  was  in  October,  1860. 

On  arriving  at  South  Weber  (formerly  called  Kingston  Fort), 
he  enquired  for  Richard  Cook,  whose  brother,  John  Cook,  he  had 
previously  met  at  the  Warm  Springs,  and  John  had  invited  him 
to  come  and  see  them.  Both  Richard  Cook,  who  was  at  that 
time  bishop  at  Wreber,  and  his  brother  John  carefully  investigated 
Joseph's  claims,  and  received  him  into  their  family.  John  Parson, 
who  lived  up  Weber  Canyon,  and  many  others  became  interested 
also,  and  they  were  convinced  that  Joseph  Morris  was  all  that  he 
claimed  to  be.  From  this  time  he  began  to  make  converts  to  the 
new  faith,  for  many  became  interested,  and  were  convinced  of  the 
truth  of  his  mission  ;  so  he  was  rewarded  for  all  his  anxious  weep- 
ing and  prayers,  and  all  the  scofrlngs  and  mockings  he  had  suf- 
fered, and  his  heart  was  filled  with  gratitude. 

This  little  uprising  caused  uneasiness  in  Salt  Lake  City,  and  in 
February,  1861,  two  of  the  apostles  of  the  old  Church  were  sent 
to  investigate.  They  called  the  people  together  and  demanded  to 
know  what  folly  was  going  on,  and  what  they  were  doing  there. 
They  said :  "We  hear  it  reported  that  you  have  a  prophet  among 
you,  and  we  cannot  accept  of  any  prophet  but  Brigham  Young." 
Joseph  being  questioned,  replied :  "I  am  by  right  of  my  heir- 
ship,  prophet,  seer  and  revelator  to  the  Church  of  the  Latter  Day 
Saints."  Seventeen  of  the  Weber  people  said  that  they  accepted 
him  as  a  prophet;  so  they  were  all  "cut  off"  from  the  Church. 

The  people  now  commenced  gathering  around  him,  as  if  drawn 
by  the  cords  of  genuine  love,  and  impelled  by  an  unseen  hand, 
and  the  minds  of  the  people  of  that  whole  country  were  lit  up  as 
by  the  effulgence  of  the  everlasting  light.  They'  began  to  look 
from  a  new  standpoint  and  to  a  higher  light ;  their  pride  was  sub- 
dued, and  the  black  cloud  of  prejudice,  which  so  often  hovers 
over  the  minds  of  men,  was  removed,  and  they  began  to  think 
freely  for  themselves,  not  judging  from  external  appearances.  So 
they  departed  from  their  old  habits  and  ways,  and  commenced  a 


HISTORY    OF    EVENTS.  5 

new  life  like  little  children  inquiring  after  a  new  treasure.  They 
endeavored  to  girt  themselves  with  truth  and  righteousness  and 
approach  the  mountain  of  purity  by  searching  diligently,  and  talk^ 
ing  one  to  another  constantly,  away  from  the  cares  and  labors  of 
life ;  for  that  was  a  day  in  which  it  was  hard  for  any  one  to  be- 
lieve without  a  great  struggle.  They  were  living  amongst  a  gener- 
ation whose  teeth  were  as  knives,  to  devour  the  poor  and  needy 
from  off  the  face  of  the  earth. 

Joseph  then  began  to  be  looked  upon  much  more  favorably,  and 
a  great  reformation  took  place,  and  a  wonderful  out-pouring  of  the 
spirit  and  divine  influence  prevailed.  The  gifts  and  powers  of 
the  gospel  gave  exceeding  joy  to  the  honest  in  heart  who  attended 
these  ministrations,  which  prepared  the  people  for  what  they  had  to 
undergo.  They  were  astonished  at  his  doctrine.  Sometimes  the 
prophet's  countenance  would  change  as  if  illuminated  by  the  true 
light  of  the  world ;  then  he  would  retire  and  others  would  go  on 
with  the  meeting. 

The  news  spread  throughout  the  Territory  that  a  new  prophet 
had  arisen  who  had  been  denounced  by  the  Church,  which  led 
many  to  inquire  into  the  matter. 

On  the  sixth  of  April,  1861,  six  persons  were  baptized.  From 
this  time  until  Fall,  people  arrived  from  all  parts  of  the  Territory, 
inquiring  the  way  to  the  prophet,  leaving  their  farms  and  all  that 
they  could  not  bring  with  them.  They  came  with  their  teams, 
flocks  and  herds,  intending  to  cast  in  their  all  with  Joseph ;  even 
some  came  who  had  spoken  against  the  new  prophet.  Thus  the 
membership  continued  to  increase  until  there  was  four  hundred 
and  twenty-five  baptized  believers.  Joseph  possessed  a  wonder- 
ful power  to  attract  the  attention  of  the  people,  and  to  hold  them 
together  under  the  most  trying  circumstances. 

He  was  married  to  Mary  Olsen,  a  Dane,  in  August,  1861. 
In  the  latter  part  of  April,  1862,  teams  were  sent  to  the  grist 
mill  with  wheat  to  be  ground  for  the  use  of  the  Camp.  As  the 
men  were  returning  home,  the  teams  were  taken  away  from  them. 
The  children  were  without  bread,  and  the  Camp  much  in  need. 
To  go  to  the  courts  of  Utah  for  redress  was  useless,  so  twenty-five 
men  were  sent  to,  Kaysward  to  take  the  men  prisonrers  who  had 
taken  the  flour,  and  bring  them  into  Camp ;  but  there  were  no 
legal  papers  for  doing  these  things.  The  Morrisites  taking  thes^e 
men  prisoners  raised  the  indignation  of  the  Mormons,  who 
determined  upon  .having  a  writ  issued  for  the  appearance  of  five 
persons  before  Judge  Kinney  at  the  Court  House  in  Salt  Lake 
City.  Judson  Stoddart  and  another  officer  came  with  the  writ ; 
but  before  coming  into  the  Fort  they  sent  a  messenger  to  enquire 
whether  they  could  come  in.  John  Banks  sent  John  Smith 
out  to  see  them.  Mr.  Smith  talked  with  them  a  few  minutes, 


6  HISTORY    OF     EVENTS. 

and  told  them  that  they  could  come  into  the  Fort,  which  they  did. 
Mr.  Stoddart  read  the  warrant  for  the  appearance  of  five  persons 
therein  named,  as  follows :  Joseph  Morris,  John  Banks,  Richard 
Cook,  John  Parson  and  Peter  Klemgard.  Joseph  Morris  was  not 
present,  for  he  was  writing  a  revelation.  John  Banks  said  for 
himself  that  he  would  not  take  any  notice  of  the  warrant,  and 
he  sent  for  some  fire  and  burned  it.  After  this,  Mr.  Stoddart 
went  away. 

On  the  3oth  of  May,  186.2,  occured  what  was  called  "Fore- 
shadowing Day."  The  officers  were  at  the  head  of  the  kingdom, 
the  generals  were  at  the  head  of  the  army,  and  Joseph  was  nailed 
as  Lord  of  the  whole  earth,  as  a  representative  of  Jesus.  Twelve 
generals  appeared  on  horseback,  the  first  four  riding  on  white,  red, 
black  and  pale  horses.  The  first  seven  of  these  generals  wore 
crowns  as  representatives  of  the  seven  presidents  of  the  earth. 
Seven  companies  of  infantry  well  armed  and  equipped  followed 
them,  and  they  marched  around  the  fort  seven  times.  After  this 
the  horses  were  given  up  to  twelve  other  persons,  who  represented 
the  twelve  princes  of  the  earth,  and  each  one  carried  a  rod. 
They  marched  around  the  fort  twelve  times  with  the  companies  of 
infantry  following  them,  as  a  representation  of  their  position  as 
princes  of  the  earth.  From  this  time  until  the  appearance  of  the 
Mormon  Militia  on  the  hills  around  Weber,  many  revelations  were 
given,  and  there  was  much  anxiety  among  the  people. 

On  the  morning  of  the  i3th  of  June,  1862,  Robert  T.  Burton, 
with  the  Mormon  Militia,  made  his  appearance  on  the  hills  around 
Weber.  They  hesitated  about  coming  into  the  Fort;  so  they 
sent  a  boy,  belonging  to  the  Morrisite  Camp,  with  a  note  ordering 
the  Morrisites  to  surrender,  within  thirty  minutes,  the  five  men 
mentioned  in  the  writ  that  had  been  served  about  three  weeks 
previous  to  this  time.  The  Morrisites  were  under  the  impression 
that  should  they  surrender  those  men  that  the  warrant  called  for, 
that  the  Mormons  would  injure  them  before  arriving  at  the  Court 
House  in  Salt  Lake  City ;  therefore  no  immediate  reply  was  sent 
to  Burton.  At  this  juncture  a  meeting  of  the  saints  was  called 
to  deliberate  upon  the  condition  of  affairs,  and  receive  instruction ; 
while  the  samts  were  assembled,  engaged  in  religious  services, 
in  a  bowery  composed  of  willows  and  green  branches,  supported 
by  posts,  a  cannon  ball  came  in  our  midst,  and  it  killed  two 
women,  one  a  nursing  mother,  with  a  babe  in  her  arms,  and 
the  other  an  old  lady.  A  girl  sixteen  years  of  age,  had  her  chin 
shattered  by  the  same  shot.  The  yells  of  the  attacking  party 
were  heard  all  around  us.  For  an  hour  and  a  half  after  they  com- 
menced firing,  not  a  man  in  the  Camp  of  Weber  took  up  arms, 
while  the  Mormon  Militia  poured  in  cannon  and  rifle  shot  on 
every  side;  then  the  men  said:  "What  shall  we  do;"  and  the 


HISTORY    OF    EVENTS.  7 

word  was  given:  "Protect  your  families  the  best  way  you  can,  but 
avoid  shedding  blood  if  possible."     This  was  carried  out  to  the 
letter ;  for  had  the  Morrisites  been  so   disposed,   they  could  have 
done  much  execution.       Only   ninety   men   in    our  Camp   carried 
arms,  while  Burton  started  from  Salt  Lake  with  two  hundred  and 
fifty  men,  and  that  number  was  about   doubled   by   the  time  he 
arrived  in  Weber.      They  poured  shot  and  shell  into  the  Camp  for 
three  successive  days,  from  Friday  morning  until  Sunday  evening, 
June  1 5th.     They  sent  to  Salt  Lake  for  rockets  to  fire  the  Camp, 
but  they  could  not  use  them,  for  it  rained  very  heavily  on  Satur- 
day.    Sunday  (the  i5th),  was  a  very  fine  day,  but  a  very  sad  day 
for  us.     We  had  been  almost  without  food,  and  were  weary,  and 
our  ammunition  was  about   exhausted.     Late  in  the  afternoon  the 
bugle  sounded  in  the  Fort,  and  a  white  flag  was  raised  and  carried 
by  Alonzo  Brown  to  the  western  part  of  the   Fort.     The   order  to 
do  this  was  given  by  brother  John  Parson  and  others,  who  stated 
to  Joseph  that  they  thought  the  men  had  done  all   they  could,  and 
that  they  were  willing  to  surrender  and  give  their  lives  for  the  sake 
of  the  people   if  necessary.     Orders  were  given   to   cease   firing, 
Robt.  Farley  continued  to  blow  the  bugle  while  bullets  were  flying 
around  him,  but  he  remained  unhurt.      While  the  white  flag  was 
being  carried  to  the  western  part  of  the  Fort,  Burton  and  his  men 
continued  to  advance  toward  us,  firing  all  the  time.     John  Parson 
called  out:  "For  God's  sake  and  the  sake  of  humanity  stop  your 
firing!"     Then  Burton  and  many  of  his  men  rushed  into  the  Fort 
and  ordered  the  Morrisites  to  stack  arms,  which  was  done  by  them 
without  hesitation.     After  they  had  done  this,   Burton   called   out 
for  Joseph  Morris,  John  Banks,  Richard  Cook,  John  Parsons  and 
Peter  Klemgard.     When  they  presented  themselves  before  him,  he 
said:  "I  want  no  more  of  your  apo.stacy.     I  do  not  know  how 
you  have  escaped  as  well  as  you  have  done.    I  have  fired  over  five 
thousand  rounds  of  cartridges  into  you,   and  a  hundred  cannon 
balls,  besides  some  shell."     Then  he  said  to  Joseph  Morris:  "Are 
you  willing  to  give  up,"  as  if  he  had  not  already  surrendered.     He 
was  so  overcome  with  rage  that  he  tried  to  ride  Joseph  down  with 
his  powerful  horse ;  but  Joseph  stepping  quietly  forward,  took  hold 
of  the  bridle-reins  with  each  hand  and  sent  the  horse  back  upon 
his  haunches.     Then  he  turned  to  the  people  and  said:    "I  have 
taught  you  righteous  principles  from  heaven ;    all   those  who  are 
willing  to  follow  me  to  the  death,  come  this  way."      The  general 
cry  was,  "Here  I  am!"  with  the  exception  of   about   twenty   per- 
sons,  who  formed  a  group  by  themselves   and   said  they  could 
stand  it  no  longer.     Then  Joseph  stepped  to  the  western  part  of 
the  Fort,  opposite  the  school  house.     Robert   Burton,  in  company 
with  some  others,  rode  up  to  him  there  and  commanded  him  to 
surrender  in  the  name  of   the  Lord  Jesus   Christ,    and  by   the 


*8  HISTORY    OF    EVENTS. 

authority  of  the  United  States.  Brother  Joseph  stood  firmly,  and 
looking  up  to  Burton,  replied:  "Never!  no,  never;  no,  never." 
Then  Burton  said:  "I  will  try  your  God,"  and  he  fired  five  shots 
at  him  ;  at  the  fifth  shot  Joseph  reeled,  and  was  caught  in  the 
arms  of  a  man  by  the  name  of  John  Eames,  who  laid  him  down 
gently  on  the  ground.  Such  was  the  earthly  end  of  Joseph 
Morris,  but  he  still  lives  in  the  hearts  of  those  who  received  his 
teachings. 

A  young  woman  named  Isabella  Bowman,  holding  in  her  arms 
the  babe  of  the  mother  who  had  been  killed  by  the  first  cannon 
ball  fired  into  camp,  stepped  forward  and  said  :  "You  blood-thirsty 
hell-hound,  why  do  you  shoot  at  that  good  man?"  Burton  took 
deliberate  aim  at  her,  and  shot  her  dead.  Mrs.  O'Hagg  was  shot 
at  the  same  time.  At  this  time,  John  Banks  was  standing  near 
the  steps  of  the  school  house,  when  one  of  the  mob  stepped  be- 
hind him  and  shot  him  in  the  back  of  the  neck ;  but  he  did  not 
die  until  that  night.  After  this  we  were  encamped  on  the  South 
Bench,  and  put  under  a  strong  guard  until  the  following  morning, 
when  we  were  marched  to  Salt  Lake  City.  We  arrived  there  after 
a  march  of  two  days,  and  were  brought  before  Judge  Kinney,  in 
the  Court^ House.  When  we  appeared  before  the  Judge,  he  said : 
"I  have  been  misinformed  about  you  men.  You  were  represented 
to  me  as  a  banditti  of  low,  degraded  men — robbers  and  thieves ; 
but  I  see  before  me  a  class  of  intelligent  men,  quite  different  to 
what  was  represented  to  me.  On  the  strength  of  the  repesenta- 
tions  that  were  made  to  me,  I  granted  a  writ  to  the  Mormon 
Militia  to  arrest  and  bring  before  me, — Joseph  Morris,  John 
Banks,  Richard  Cook,  John  Parson  and  Peter  Klemgard.  I  see 
that  I  have  been  completely  misinformed."  We  were  then  bound 
over — furnishing  bonds  for  each  other — to  keep  the  peace,  on  a 
bail  of  $1,500  each,  for  our  appearance  in  court  the  following 
March.  The  majority  appeared  for  trial ;  but  some  few  went 
East,  and  others  went  West  to  Carson  Valley  and  California.  At 
the  March  session  of  the  court,  the  names  were  called  and  the 
trial  proceeded.  Many  witnesses  were  there  to  testity.  Seven 
men  were  sentenced  to  terms  of  imprisonment,  varying  from 
seven  to  fourteen  years.  Their  names  were :  Peter  C.  Klemgard, 
John  Nielson,  Abraham  Taylor,  George  Lee,  Christian  Nelsen, 
Jens  Christiansen  and  John  E.  Jones.  But  they  only  served  three 
days  of  their  term,  for  Brother  John  Parson  exerted  himself 
vigorously  to  obtain  a  pardon  from  the  Governor  of  the  Territory, 
and  succeeded  in  doing  so.  He  then  took  a  wagon  to  the  prison 
for  the  men,  and  conveyed  them  to  Fort  Douglas. 


THE    PROPHET    CALLED. 


No.      i.  PROVO,  UTAH,  Spring  of  1857. 

THE   FIRST  REVELATION  RECEIVED  BY  JOSEPH  MORRIS,  IN  WHICH 

HIS  CALLING  AS  A  PROPHET  IS  MADE  KNOWN  TO  HIM. 

1.  Verily,  verily,  verily,  thus  saith  the  spirit  unto  thee,  my  ser- 
vant Joseph :  I,  the  Lord,  have  beheld  thy  afflictions,  and  know 
the   intentions  of  thy  heart     And  because  thou  art  pure  before 
me.   I  will  give  unto  thee  power  over  thine  enemies ;   and  thou 
shalt  know  that  I  am  the  Lord,  and  that  I  regard  not  the  persons 
of  men  only    in   their  obedience  to  me.     And,  now,   I  say  unto 
thee,  let  thy  heart  be  comforted,  and  know  that  I  am  with  thee, 
and  will  be  with  thee,  through  thy  faithfulness,  unto  the  end. 

2.  And  I  say  unto  thee,  my  servant,  that  I  have  chosen  thee 
from  before  the  foundation  of  the  world  to  be  a  mighty  man,  yea, 
to  be  a  prophet  in  Israel ;  and  thou  shalt  prophesy  to  many  na- 
tions, and  peoples,  and  kings,  and  tongues.     Yea,  I  say  unto  thee, 
that  the  mountains  shall  tremble  at  the  uttering  of  thy  voice  ;    and 
men  shall  seek  thy  life  from  place  to  place,  and  thirst  after  thy 
blood    as  an    ox    thirsteth   after  water ;  but  they  shall  not  have 
power  to  take  it  before  thy  work  is  finished. 

3.  Thou  shalt  be  betrayed  by  friends  and  relatives,  and  even 
by  thine  own  flesh  and  blood. 

4.  And  I  say  unto  thee,  that  I  have   chosen  my  servant  Brig- 
ham,  and  also  mine  apostles  to  lead  my  people  Israel ;  and  that 
power  shall  not  be  taken  out  of  their  hands  only  through  trans- 
gression. 

5.  And  I  say  unto  thee  that  thy  sacrifice  has  been  accepted; 
and  through  it  I  have  blessed  thee  and  thy  seed  after  thee  through^ 
out  all  their  generations ;  and  no  privilege  in  my  Holy  Temple 
shall  be  denied  thee  and  thy  posterity  forever.     Thus  saith  the 
Lord  by  the  voice  of  the  spirit. 


10  KEYS    OF    THE    PRIESTHOOD. 

KEYS    OF  THE  PRESTHOOD. 


No.  2.  SALT  LAKE  CITY,  Winter  of  1859. 

A  REVELATION  OF  JESUS    CHRIST,  GIVING  AN  EXPLANATION  OF 

THOSE  ONE  HUNDRED  AND  FORTY-FOUR    THOUSAND    WHOM    JOHN 
SAW  STANDING  WITH  JESUS  UPON  MOUNT  ZlON. 

1.  Who  are  they?     They  are  the  firstborn  sons  of  one  hun- 
dred and  forty-four  thousand  Gods,  all  in  advance  of  Jesus  Christ. 
John  said  that  they   were  the  first-fruits   unto   God.     Unto  what 
God  ?     Unto  each  of  their  own  Fathers.     How  did  they  become 
the  first-fruits  unto  the  Lamb  also?     In  that  they  were  appointed 
by  his  Father  to  assist  him  in  bringing  to  pass  the  salvation  and 
exaltation   of  Adam's   posterity,  and,  consequently,  they  received 
his  mark  in  their  foreheads  as  a  token  of  the  appointment  that  they 
had   received  from   him.     Why  did  they   come   forth  upon  this 
earth  to  assist  Jesus  in  bringing  to  pass  the  salvation  and  exalta- 
tion of  Adam's  posterity  ?     In  order  that  they  might   continue  to 
pass  on  from   one  stage  of  progression  to  another,  and,  ultimately, 
become  Gods  like  unto  the  Eternal  Father. 

2.  How  many  progressive  estates  did  the  Eternal  Father  pass 
through  before  he  became  a  God?    Ten.     What  were  they?     His 
FIRST  was  a  spiritual   estate ;  his  SECOND,  a  probation  in  the  flesh  ; 
his  THIRD,  a  resurrected  or  celestial  estate.     In  His  FOURTH  es- 
tate he  went  forth  upon  a  mortal  earth,  received  a  body,  died  up- 
on a  cross,  and  was  raised  again  from   the  dead.     In  his  FIFTH 
estate  he  sat  at  the  right  hand  of  his  Father,  and  was  a  Mediator, 
and  contended  against  and  conquered  death,  hell  and  the  grave, 
In  his  SIXTH   estate   he  took   mortal  bodies   upon  many   mortal 
earths,  and  officiated  in  the  office  of  a  high  priest,  a  prophet  and  a 
p/esident, 

3.  His  mission  to  each  of  the  last  five  of  those  earths,  was  to 
preside  over  a  dispensation  of  a  thousand  years  on  each  earth ;  on 
the  first  of  the  five,  he  presided  over  the  first  thousand  years  ;    on 
the  second  of  the  five,  over  the  second  thousand  years,  and  so  on, 
unto  and  including  the   fifth.     In   his    SEVENTH   estate   he   was   a 
prophet,   and  held  the   keys   of  the   sixth   dispensation.     In   his 
EIGHTH  estate  he  was  a  prophet,  Redeemer,   lawgiver  ond  presi- 
dent of  seventh  dispensation  holding  the  full  keys  of  the  holy 


KEYS    OF    THE    PRIESTHOOD.  II 

priesthood.    In  his  NINTH  estate  he  went  forth  upon  his  own  earth 
to  commence  mortality,  and  having  completed  his  mission,  he  died, 
He  afterwards  returned  to  his   own    earth  and  commenced  the — 
resurrection  of  his  own  posterity,  and  after  its  last  great  change  he 
ascended  his  throne,  and  this  was  his  TENTH  estate. 

4.  Who  is  Lucifer?     He  is  the  second  born   son  of  God  the 
Eternal  Father.     What  was  the  cause  of  his  fall  ?     He    sought    to 
take  away  the  birthright  from  Jesus  Christ,  and  to  break  the  con- 
necting link  of  the  holy  priesthood.     If  he  had  been  permitted  to 
come  forth  upon  this  earth  to  redeem  Adam's  posterity,  he  would 
have  brought  them  under  him;  and,   contrary  to  eternal  order, 
he  would  have  continued  to  hold  them  in   subjection ;   whereas, 
Jesus  being  a  firstborn  son,  he  was  under  a  covenant  by  which  he 
was  bound  to  deliver  up  to  the   Father  all  the  keys  of  authority 
pertaining  to  this  earth,   after  all  things  should  be  made  subject 
unto  him,  to  which  covenant  Lucifer  was  not  subject. 

5.  Did  Lucifer  come  forth  into  a  second  estate  and  receive 
a  body?     Yes,  and  those  who  fell  with  him  received  bodies  also, 
and  many  of  them  came  into  the   Church,  received  their  ordina- 
tions to  the  holy  priesthood,  and  also  their  endowments.     Why 
was  Lucifer  and  his  band  permitted  to  come  forth  into  a  second 
estate  and  receive  bodies  ?   In  order  that  they  might  come  into  the 
Church  of  Christ,  receive  their  ordinations  to  the  two  priesthoods, 
and  thereby  obtain  their  outfit ;  for  they  never  had  an  ordination 
to  any  authority  in  their  first  estate.     They  were  then  conquered, 
cast  out  of  the  Church,  and  their  bodies  destroyed  by  Michael 
who  was  at  that  time  a  seventh  angel ;  this  was  their  first  death. 

6.  Lucifer  then  became,  in  the  spirit,  the  reigning  devil  to  this 
earth.      How  long  will  he  reign?     Until  this  earth  is  perfected, 
when  he  and  his  band  will  be  cast  into  a  lake  of  fire  and  brim- 
stone ;  this  will  be  their  second  death. 

7.  Every  world  has  its  devil  whose  history  is  similar  to  that  of 
Lucifer's. 

8.  Do  devils  try  spirits  in  their  first  estate  ?     No,  they  do  not. 
The  firstborn  son  rules  in  that  estate,  and  the  devils  are  subject  to 
him.    But  there  is  an  eternal  law  of  the  Gods,  according  to  which, 
the  devil,  being  the  second  born  son,   claims  the  right  to  lead  off 
in  the  second  estate.    His  Father  enters  into  a  covenant  with*  him 


12  KEYS    OF   THE    PRIESTHOOD. 

when  he  falls,  which  is  this:  "Now,  my  second  born  son,  seeing 
that  you  have  revolted  from  under  my  government,  and  have  set 
up  a  government  of  your  own.,,  in  opposition  to  mine — as  my  first- 
born son  rules  in  the  first  estate,  so  you  shall  lead  off  in  the  second 
estate.  And  it  shall  come  to  pass,,  that  if  you  conquer  me  and  my 
prophets,  you  shall  hold  the  world  in  your  grasp.,  and  I  will  lose  all ; 
but  if  I  conquer  you,  you  shall  endure  both  the  first  and  second 
deaths." 

9.  Who  is  George  A.  Smith?     The  second  born  son  of  Adam. 
Is  he  a  fallen  angel?    Yes.     When  did  he  fall?    In  his  first  estate. 
Did  any  others  fall  with  him?   Yes,  a  large  train  in  like  manner  as, 
they  fell,  who  fell  with  Lucifer  that  was  before  him. 

10.  Is  George  A.  Smith  a  true  apostle?    No;  for  he  never  was 
ordained  either  to  that  or  to  any  other  office  by  any  of  the  Gods  of 
eternity.  In  what  sense  then  is  he  an  apostle?  In  the  same  sense 
that  Judas  was,  of  whom  Jesus  said,  "I  have   chosen  you    twelve 
and  one  of  you  is  a  devil."    And  as  such  he  has  gone  forth  teach- 
ing the  saints,  until  he  has  led  them  to  the  verge  of  destruction. 

1 1.  -What  are  those  one  hundred  and  forty-four  thousand  spok- 
en of  by  John  the  Revelator?  They  are  all  high  priests  after  the 
order  of  Melchiseflec— all  having  obtained  a  resurrected  body.  Why 
were  they  called  to  officiate  in  the  lesser   offices  of  the  priesthood? 
Because  it  was  not   known  who  they  were  while  the  Church  was 
under  an  imperfect  organization  ;   hence,  they  officiated  in  all  the 
lesser  offices  of  the  Church  for  the  work  of  the  ministry. 

12.  The  holy  priesthood  runs  by  birthright,  and  the  firstborn 
son  always  holds  the  keys  of  that  priesthood.      Has  the  firstborn 
son  the  privilege  of  becoming  a  God?     Yes.     Have  any  others 
the  same  privilege?     Yes.     When  the  firstborn  son  steps  out  of 
his  place  to  become  a  God,  the  next  to  him  steps  into  that  place, 
and  holds  the  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood ;  and  so  thfe  order  con- 
tinues from  one  to  another  until  they   all  hold  the  keys   of  the 
priesthood. 

13.  When  did  Jesus  Christ  receive  his  first   ordination  to  the 
office    of  a    high    priest?     Soon   after  he  and  his  brethren  had 
received   their    resurrected    bodies.      His    own    Father    ordained 
them  to   that    authority ;  and,    holding   the  holy  priesthood,  they 
were  appointed  to  fill  the   office   of  Holy  Ghpsts  pr   ministering 


O'F   tttE   PRlESTHOOl).  k3 

angels  to  those   of  this   earth   who   are   heirs  of  salvation — being 
filled  with  eternal  light 

14.  Where  and  by  whom  did   Abel  receive  his  ordination  to 
the  lesser  priesthood?     In  the  Garden  of  Eden  (so  called),  under 
the  hands  of  his  father*  Adam.     By  whom  do  the  younger  sons  of 
Adam  receive  their  ordinations  to  the  lesser  priesthood?    By  Abel. 

15.  By  whom  did  the  fallen  angels  receive  their  ordinations  to 
the  priesthood  as  pertaining  to  this  earth?     By  Cain;  and  Cain 
by  Lucifer.     Cain  claims  the  right  to  enter  into  the  Church,  and 
blind  the  eyes  of  all  the  servants  of  the  Lord  until  he  has  obtained 
his  outfit ;  he  then  becomes  a  reigning  devil. 

1 6.  By  whom  did  the  holy  priesthood  come  to  this  earth:'    By 
Seth,  who  received  his  ordination  from  Adam,  and  whose  seed  are 
the  chosen  of  the  Lord.      He  claims  the  ruling  power  over  this 
planet,  having  all  things  placed  under  his  feet. 

17.  Who  was  that  Elijah  (or  Elias)  who  accompanied  Moses 
when  he  appeared  unto  Jesus  upon  the  Mount>  and  ordained   him 
to  the  holy  priesthood?     It  was  Enos,,  the  firstborn  son  of  Seth. 
Why  did  Jesus  Christ,  when  he  was  upon  the  earth,  receive  an  or* 
dination  by  Moses  to  the  holy  priesthood?     Because   Moses  held 
the  full  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood  as  pertaining  to  this  earth  j 
and  when  Jesus  came  forth  under  his  presidency,  he  had  to  re- 
reive  an  ordination  from  him.     Had  Jesus  any  power  to  interfere 
with    the   I^aw  of  Moses?     No,   he   had   not      He  came  not  to 
destroy  the  law,  but  to  fulfill  it ;  and  by  fulfilling  it,  he  put  an  end 
to  the  ceremonial  portion  thereof  only. 

1 8.  What  are  Holy  Ghosts?     They  are  men   who  have  once 
lived  upon  a  mortal  earth  like  unto  this.     Upon   what  principle 
did  they,  being  many,  become  one?    Upon  the  same  principle  as 
that  by  which  the  Father  and    the  Son  became  one.     They  all 
obeyed  one  gospel,  were  all  perfected  by  the  same  law,   were  all 
counted  worthy  of  a  glorious  resurrection,  they  all  entered  into  the 
celestial  kingdom  of  their  Father,  by  whom  they  were  all  ordained 
to  the  high  and  holy  priesthood,  through  whom  and  by  whom  they 
were  appointed  to  fill  the  office  of  Holy  Ghosts,  and  to  be  minister- 
ing spirits  to  the  heirs  of  salvation  upon  this  earth. 

19.  Why  were  the  high  priests  after  the  order. of  Melchisedec 
•commanded  to  lay  their  hands  upon  the  members  of  the  Church 


14  KEYS    OF    THE    PRIESTHOOD. 

of  Christ  in  order  to  confer  upon  them  the  gift  of  the  Holy  Ghost? 
Because  high  priests  are  firstborn  sons,  holding  the  keys  of  the 
holy  priesthood  in  all  those  celestial  worlds  from  which  they  came; 
and  by  virtue  of  their  birthright,  and  being  their  superiors,  they 
claim  the  right  to  command  the  Holy  Ghosts. 

20.  Are  they  all  high  priests  by  birthright  who  are  now  holding 
that  office  in  my  Church  ?     No,  they  are  not.     What  are  they  ? 
Some  of  them  are  fallen  angels ;    others  are  sons  ©f  Aaron,  and 
but  few  of  them  are  high  priests  by  birthright ;  hence,   when  they 
lay  their  hands  upon  the  saints,  in  order  to  confer  upon  them  the 
gift  of  the  Holy  Ghost,  they  confer  upon  them  a  false  spirit  instead, 
thereof;  for  they  can  only  give  to  others  that  which  they,  them- 
selves, possess ;   and  being  deceived  themselves,,  they  deceive  all 
those  to  whom  they  administer. 

21.  Why  is  Aaron  and  his  seed  called  to  hold  the  lesser  priest- 
hood only  ?     Because  they  have  not  yet  been  resurrected ;  and 
their  calling  is  to  administer  in  temporal  things ;  therefore,  when 
they  act  in  the  offices  of  the  high  priesthood  they  deceive,  for  the 
Holy  Ghosts  are  not  subject  to  them. 

22.  It  is  contrary  to  the  eternal  law  ©f  heaven  for  the  lesser  to* 
rule   the   greater,   and    in  consequence   of   the  violation  of  this- 
law  vast  numbers  of  false  spirits  have  been  introduced  into  the 
Church, 

23.  According  to  the  eternal  law,,  one*  hundred  and  forty-four 
thousand  Gods   form   a  quorum.     The  first  God   of  a   quorum, 
assisted  by  the  next  two  below  him,  who  are  his  counselors,  rule? 
all  the  rest  ©f  the  quorum,,  and  he  is  subject  to  the  God  immedi- 
ately preceding  him,  and  so  on,  even  up  to  the  first  God  of  all 
who  rules  and  presides  over  all  the  quorums  of  the  Gods. 

25.  What  rod  was  that  which  Moses  used?  It  was  one  of  a 
series  of  rods  which  came  forth  from  the  first  God  of  all  which 
rods  he  signed  with  his  own  signature,,  and  covenanted  also  to  sus- 
tain those  men  who  should  be  called  to  use  them.  These  rods 
are  handed  down  from  one  G0d  t©  another,  and  ©ne  ©f  them  is. 
held  by  the  presiding  God  ©f  each  quorum  during  his  reign. 
There  are  many  quorums,,  and  to  each  quorum  is  connected  an. 
earth  in  mortality.  A  presiding  God  rules  for  the  space  of  seven 
thousand  years;  and  his  son,,  who  is  a  seventh  angel,  rules  at  the 


KEYS    OF    THE    PRIESTHOOD.  15 

same  time  upon  the  mortal  earth  belonging  to  that  quorum  over 
which  his  father  presides,  and  while  filling  that  mission  he  claims 
the  right  to  use  his  father's  rod.  Hence,  Moses  being  a  seventh- 
angel,  used  his  father's  rod,  and  none  other  could  use  it  unless 
appointed  by  him. 

25.  Upon  what  principle  does  the  Lord  know  all  things,  even 
from  the  beginning  to  the  end?  He  knows  the  principle  by  which 
all  worlds  that  have  been  were  organized,  governed,  saved  and 
exalted,  and  he  also  knows  that  all  worlds  to  come  must  be  organ- 
ized, governed,  saved  and  exalted  upon  the  same  principle ;  there- 
fore, the  Lord  knows  all  things. 

36.  And  now  I  say  unto  you,  O  ye  saints,  lift  up  your  heads 
and  rejoice !  for  I,  the  Lord,  have  raised  up  unto  you  a  mighty 
prophet,  who  shall  deliver  you  out  of  the  hands  of  your  enemies, 
rfnd  lead  you  triumphantly  over  them  all.  He  is  a  man  after 
mine  own  heart,  and  in  his  mouth  I  have  found  no  guile.  I  have 
tried  him  as  I  never  before  tried  man  upon  the  earth,  and  he  has 
never  flinched  from  his  integrity.  I  have  given  unto  him  the  keys 
of  my  kingdom,  and  whatsoever  he  shall  bind  on  earth,  shall  be 
bound  in  heaven ;  whosesoever  sins  he  shall  remit,  I  will  remit 
them ;  and  whosesoever  sins  he  shall  retain,  I  will  retain  them,  I 
am  he  whose  words  are  quick  and  powerful,  sharper  than  a  two- 
edged  sword ;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen, 


DISOBEDIENT  HIGH  PRIESTS. 


No.  3.  UTAH,  March  ipth,  1860. 

REVELATION  concerning  those  who  having  been  ordained  to 
the  office  of  High  Priests,  refuse  to  go  on  missions  when  they  are 
called  to  do  so  by  the  prophet  of  the  Lord,  or  other  legal  authori- 
ties. This  is  the  penalty  for  that  crime : 

Their  authority  in  the  Holy  Priesthood  shall  be  taken  from 
them  in  this  life,  and  they  shall  be  bereaved  of  their  wives  and 
children  for  time,  and  be  made  servants  to  those  who  fill  their 
mission,  I  am  Jesus  Christ  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen, 


1 6  THE    DELIVERANCE   OF   THE    PEOPLE    OF    GOD, 


THE    DELIVERANCE    OF   THE    PEOPLE    OF    GOEt 


No,  4,  UTAH,  August  iythr  1860. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  Jesus  Christ,,  the  Alpha  and  Omega,  even 
the  beginning  and  the  end. 

2.  I  have  uttered  my  voice,  and   it  shall  be  obeyed,  and  I 
testify  unto  you,  Or  ye  rebellious  shepherds  of  my  flock  that   I 
have  given  this   revelation  unto  my  servant  Joseph,-  according  to» 
the  commandment  which  I  have  received  of  my  Father. 

3.  I  have  done  my  duty  to  you  faithfully ;  but,  notwithstand- 
ing all  my  pleadings  with  you,  you  have  turned  a  deaf  ear  to  me 
from  the  beginning*     I  can  do  nothing  with  you.     You  have  pre- 
ferred your  own  judgment  to  mine,,  and  thus  you  are  going  on. 
destroying  my  Church, 

4.  The  cries  of  my  people  have  come  up  into  my  ears  for 
redress,  and,  as  I  live,  I  will  burst  their  bands  asunder,,  and  give 
unto  them   an  abundant  deliverance.     I  will  supply  their   needs 
both  in  food  and  raiment ;  and  I  will  be  their  God,  and  they  shall 
be  my  people;  and  I   will  leave  them  no  more,   for   my   bowels' 
have  yearned  with  pity  towards  them. 

5.  O!  ye  saints  who  trust  in  me,, 'let  your  hearts  be  comforted,, 
for  I  have  raised  up  unto  you  a  mighty  deliverer,  who  shall  lead 
you  victoriously  over  all  your  enemies ;  and  if  you  continue  faith- 
ful unto  me,  you  shall  see  no  more  affliction. 

6.  The  cries  of  the  fair  daughters  of  my  people  have  come  uj> 
before  me,  and  I  will  heal   up  their   wounds.     Oh,   ye  afflicted 
saints  !  hearken  to  the  .words  of  the  Lord  your  God,  and  prepare 
for  that  which  is  coming  upon  you ;    for  I  am  about  to  seperate 
the  sheep  from  the  goats,  and  if  you  are  prepared  for  it,  it  will 
be  well  with  you. 

7.  And,  inasmuch  as  I  have  sent  a   warning,  voice   unto  the 
chief  shepherds  of  my  flock,  which  they  have   partially  rejected,  I 
require  a  sacrifice  to  be  made  by  them  >  and  unless  this  sacrifice 
is  made,  there  is  no  salvation  for  them ;    for  when  men  enter  into 
a  covenant  with  me  to  become  mine  apostles,  and  take  an  oath  of 
the  Holy  Priesthood,  and  pledge  their  word  and  honor  to  uphold 


REORGANIZATION   OE   THE   HOLY   PRIESTHOOD.  17 

that  Priesthood,  and  to  live  by  every  word  that  proceeds  from  my 
mouth,  and  afterward  turn  a  deaf  ear  to  my  commandments,  they 
cannot  be  saved  only  by  the  shedding  of  their  blood. 

8.  Therefore,  O,   ye  shepherds  !   I  say  unto  you,  prepare  your- 
selves for  that  which  is  coming  upon  you  ;  for  I  will  shorten  your 
lives  —  you  shall  satisfy  the  demands  of  justice.      My  wrath  and 
indignation  are  kindled  against  you  ;    and  I  will  visit  you  in  a  day 
that  you  are  not  aware  of. 

9.  And,  now,  I  say  Unto  you,  my  servant,  that  I  will  make  up 
unto  you  for  all  the  disappointments   which   you  have  endured 
through  their  rebellion. 

I  now  add  no  more.     I  am  he  who  holds  the  keys  of  death  and 
hell  ;    even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


THE    RE-ORGANIZATION    OF  THE  HOLY 
PRIESTHOOD. 


No.  5.  UTAH,  September  6th,  1860, 

1.  BEHOLD!  Verily   1  say  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,  that 
inasmuch   as   I   have   chosen   you   to   stand   at   the  head   of  my 
Church,  as  the  Prophet,  Seer,  and  Revelator  of  the  same,  you  shall 
take  my  servant  Brigham  to  be  your   first  counselor,  and  place 
upon  him  the  presidency  of  my  Church,  under  your  direction ; 
and,   inasmuch  as  he  will  stand  by  you  and  take  your  counsel,  I 
will  greatly  multiply  blessings  upon  his  head. 

2.  As  concerning  my  servant  Heber,  I,  the  Lord,  am  not  well 
pleased  with  him;  for  he  has  committed  a  grevious  sin  against  me; 
and  if  he  humbleth  not  himself  before  me,  he  shall  be  destroyed ; 
but,  if  he  humbleth  himself  sufficiently  before  me,  he  shall  receive 
his  former  office  back  among  my  servants  the  Twelve,  and  I  will 
be  with  him. 

3.  I,  the  Lord,  have  ordained  that  another  shall  act  in  his 
place — even  my  servant  John   Banks ;  for  I  have  seen  his  afflic- 
tion, and  know  his   weakness,  and  I  will  strengthen  him,  and  give 
him  power  over  his  weakness,  and  he  shall  become  mighty  in  my 
Church,   and  no  privilege  shall  be  denied  him  that  is  lawful  and 
right ;  for  his  heart  is  upright  before  me. 


1 8  RE-ORGANIZATION  OF    THE    HOLY    PRIESTHOOD. 

4.  As    concerning  the  rest  of  the  quorums  of  my  Church,  I 
will  that  all  those  who  are  heirs  to   my  holy   priesthood  shall  be 
ordained  to  the  office  of  high  priests ;    but  the  quorums  of  seven- 
ties and  elders  shall  no  more  exist  in  my  Church. 

5.  There  shall  not,  henceforth,  but  two   quorums  exist  in  my 
Church :  the  high  priesthood  and  the  lesser  priesthood ;  and  those 
of  the  sons  of  Adam  who  are  faithful   shall  be  ordained  to  the 
lesser  priesthood. 

6.  As  concerning  the  rules  and  regulations  of  my  Church   per- 
taining to,  government,  I  will  give  unto  my  servant  Joseph  power  in 
mine  own  due  time ;  and  he  shall  write  a  book  which  shall  contain 
the  fulness  of  my  law,  and  it  shall  be  called  "The  Book  of  the 
Law  of  the  Lord,"  and  out  of  it  all  men  shall  be  judged — both 
small  and  great. 

7.  There  is  a  party  spirit  in  my  Church;  yea,  and  among  the 
first  elders  of  my  Church,  which  thing  is  an  abomination  in  my 
sight.     And  I  will  that  my   servants  should  cast  those  feelings  out 
of  their  hearts,  or  I  will  not  hold  them  guiltless. 

I  am  he  who  holds  in  his  hands  the  keys   of  -death  and  hell ; 
even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


THE    GREAT    COMET. 


No.  6.  UTAH,  September  6th,  1860. 

A  REVELATION  of  Jesus  Christ  giving  an  explanation  of  that 
great  comet  that  has  been  seen  of  late. 

1.  Verily  I  say  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,  that  inasmuch  as 
you  have  inquired  of  me  to  know  concerning  it,   I  will   make  it 
known  to  you,     It  is  the  seventh  star  spoken  of  by  John  the  Reve- 
lator,  representing  the  seventh  angel  that  has   come  forth ;  and  the 
tail  that  was  attached  to  it  is  a  representation  of  the  army  of 
heaven  that  was  to  follow  the  seventh  angel. 

2.  Behold,  I  am  Jesus  Christ,  and  I  testify  unto  all  men  that 
dwell  upon  the  face  of  the  earth  that  I  have  sent  forth  the  seventh 
angel  to  preside  over  my  Church  upon  the  earth,  and  it  will  be 
woe  unto  them  if  they  do  not  humble  themselves  and  obey  my 


JUDGMENT    UPON    HYPOCRITES.  19 

gospel,  for  I  will  cut  them  off  until  there  is  none  left  upon  the 
earth  to  cumber  it. 

3.  As  concerning  this  star  before  mentioned,  there  has  never 
been  the  like  of  it  seen  before  upon  this  earth  for  magnitude  and 
greatness,  nor  will  be  again  until  the  seventh  angel  comes  forth 
upon  another  earth  like  unto  this ;  therefore,  O  ye  saints  prepare 
for  that  which  is  coming  upon  you,  or  you  will  be  caught  in  a 
snare,  and  it  will  be  woe  unto  you  if  you  are  cast  out  of  my 
Church ;  therefore  hearken  unto  my  words  which  are1  quick  and 
powerful,  sharper  than  a  two-edged  sword ;  and  behold  I  come 
quickly.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


JUDGMENT  UPON   HYPOCRITES, 


No.  7.  UTAH,  September  6th,  1860. 

1.  BEHOLD,  verily  I  say  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,  prepare 
yourself  for  the  work  which  lies  before  you ;    for  I,  the  Lord,  am 
about  to  judge  between  those  who  serve  me,  and  those  who  serve 
me  not — but  who  are  liars  and  hypocrites — who  have  oppressed 
the  poor  of  my  people,  and  turned  them  away  from  their  rights, 
Behold,  I  will  settle  with  them. 

2.  And  I  say  unto  you  that   you  shall  gather  all  my   people 
Israel  together,  that  I  may  know  who  is  for  me ;   and,  at  the  time 
appointed,  I  will  make  known  unto  you  what  you  shall  do, 

3.  And  inasmuch  as  you  have  inquired  of  me  to  know  con- 
cerning my  saints  who  are  scattered  abroad  among  the  nations  of 
the  earth,  I  will  make  known  unto  you  that  which  you  desire.     I 
am  the  Lord,  and  I  will  preserve  them ;    and  in  my  own  due  time 
I  will  send  forth  deliverers  to  deliver  them,  and  bring  them  up  to 
the  head  of  my  Church. 

4.  As  concerning  the  people  of  the  nation  called  the  United 
States,   who  have   shed  the  blood  of  my  apostles  and  prophets, 
and  also  of  my  saints,  behold,  I  will  shortly  settle  with  them.     I 
I  have  given  unto  them  privileges  that  I   have  given  to  no  other 
nation  upon  the  earth ;   but  they  have  trampled  upon  all  my  bles- 
sings, and  come  out  as  a  nation  against  me  to  throw  down  my 


20  OATHS   TO   BE  TAKEN    BY   OFFICERS, 

Church,  and  to  destroy  my  saints ;  but  they  shall  know  that  1  am 
the  Lord,  and  that  I  will  hot  be  challenged  to  war  by  poor  mortal 
man.  Therefore,  I  will  come  out  of  my  hiding  place,  and  sweep 
them  out  of  existence ;  and  of  those  who  are  now  in  that  nation, 
I  will  leave  none  but  the  pure  in  heart,  and  they  shall  have  my 
gospel  when  the  wicked  are  cut  ofif, 

5.  Therefore,  O,  ye  inhabitants  of  the  earth  prepare  yourselves 
for  that  which  is  coming  upon  the  earth ;  for  the  day  of  judgment 
has  now  come  to  your  doors,  and  I  will  lay  you  low  by  famine,  by 
pestilence,  by  earthquakes,  and  by  flames  of  devouring  fire,  until 
you  are  wasted  away ;  for  my  wrath  is  kindled  against  the  rebell- 
ious, and  it  will  never  be  appeased  until  I  have  laid  them  low. 

I  now  add  no  more.  I  am  Jesus  Christ,  Even  so.  Amen 
and  Amen, 

AN  OATH  OF  THE  HOLY  PRIESTHOOD 

TO    BE     SWORN     BY     THE     PROPHET'S    TWO    COUNSELORS* 


No.  8.  UTAH,  September  8th.  1860. 

I  HAVING  been  duly  elected  and  ordained  to  the  high  priest- 
hood, to  be  a  counselor  to  the  prophet  of  the  Lord,  do  hereby  set 
my  hand  to  swear  an  oath  according  to  the  order  of  the  holy 
priesthood,  in  the  presence  of  the  Father,  and  of  the  Son,  and  of1 
his  servant,  the  prophet,  who  holds  the  keys  of  authority  on  this 
earth.  And  I  testify  that  I  will  uphold  him  with  all  my  power, 
and  abide  his  counsel  in  all  things  until  my  mission  is  completed 
upon  the  earth. 

The  person  will  then  kiss  the  written  word  of  the  Lord  and 
write  his  name. 

AN  OATH  OF  THE  HOLY  PRIESTHOOD 

TO    BE  SWORN  BY  THOSE    WHO    ARE  ORDAINED  TO  THE    OFFICE 
OF    APOSTLES. 


No.  9.  UTAH,  September  8th,  1860. 

I  HAVING  been  duly  elected  and  ordained  to  the  high  priesthood, 
to  be  an  apostle,  even  one  of  the  special  witnesses  of  Jesus  Christ, 


MANNER    OF    ANOINTING.  21 

to  bear  his  name  to  the  nations  of  the  earth,  do  hereby  set  my 
hand  to  swear  an  oath  according  to  the  order  of  the  holy  priest- 
hood, in  the  presence  of  the  Father,  and  of  the  Son,  and  of  his^scrr 
vant,  the  prophet,  who  holds  the  keys  of  authority  on  this  earth, 
And  I  testify  that  I  will  uphold  him  with  all  my  power  and  abide 
his  counsel  in  all  things  until  my  mission  is  completed. 

The  person  will  then  kiss  the  written  word  of  the  Lord,   and 
write  his  name. 


AN  OATH  OF  THE  HOLY  PRIESTHOOD 

TO    BE    SWORN    BY    THOSE  WHO  ARE  ORDAINED  TO  THE  OFFICE 
OF    HIGH    PRIESTS. 


No.  10.  UTAH,  September  pth,  1860. 

I  HAVING  been  ordained  to  the  office  of  a  high  priest  according 
to  my  birthright,  holding  all  keys  pertaining  to  this  high  and  holy' 
calling,  do  hereby  set  my  hand  to  swear  an  oath  according  to  the 
order  of  the  holy  priesthood,  in  the  presence  of  the  Feather,  and  of 
the  Son,  and  of  his  servant,  the  prophet,  who  holds  the  keys  of 
authority  on  this  earth.  And  I  testify  that  I  will  uphold  him 
with  all  my  power,  and  abide  his  counsel  in  all  things  until  my 
mission  is  completed  on  the  earth. 

The  person  will  then  kiss  the  written  word  of  the  Lord  and 
write  his  name. 


THE   MANNER    OF   ANOINTING   THE    ELECT    LADY. 


No.  ii.  UTAH,  September  9th,  1860. 

i.  I,  THE  PROPHET  the  of  the  Lord,  holding  the  full  keys  of 
the  holy  priesthood,  according  to  my  birthright,  anoint  you  in  the 
name  of  Jesus  Christ  with  this  holy  anointing,  according  to  your 
birthright,  to  be  a  prophetess,  even  the  elect  lady,  and  set  you  apart 
to  minister  in  holy  things  to  all  those  who  are  of  your  sex.  I, 
moreover,  anoint  your  womb  that  you  may  bring  forth  a  holy 
posterity  unto  the  Lord. 


22  MANNER    OF    ANOINTING. 

2.  The  prophet  will  then  lay  his  hands  upon  the  head  of  the 
elect  lady,  and  express  these  words :  I,  the  prophet  of  the  Lord, 
holding  the  full  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood,  according  to  my  birth- 
right, place  my  hands  upon  your  head,  and  seal  upon  you  this 
holy  anointing  in  the  name  of  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen 
and  Amen. 

The  person's  name  shall  then  be  recorded  in  the  "Lamb's  Book 
of  Life,"  to  be  no  more  blotted  out  forever, 


MANNER  OF  ANOINTING  FEMALES  IN  THE  CHURCH 
•     OF  CHRIST. 


No.  12,  UTAH,  September  9th,  1860. 

1.  I  HAVING  been  duly  elected  and  anointed  to  this  authority, 
according  to  my  birthright,  anoint  you  in  the  name  of  Jesus  Christ 
with  a  holy  anointing,  according  to  your  birthright ;  and  I   set  you 
apart  to  minister  in  holy  things,   according  as   you   shall  hereafter 
be    appointed.      I,    moreover,   anoint  your  womb  that  you  may 
bring  forth  a  holy  posterity  unto  the  Lord. 

2,  The  elect  lady  will  .then  place  her  hand  upon  the  head  of 
the  handmaiden,  and  express  these  words :     Beloved  handmaiden, 
I  having  been  duly  elected  and  anointed  with  a  holy  anointing, 
according  to  my  birthright  to  this  authority,  place  my  hands  upon 
your  head,  and  seal  upon  you  this  holy  anointing  in  the  name  of 
Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 

The  person's  name  shall  then  be  recorded  in  the  "Lamb's  Book 
of  Life,"  to  be  blotted  out  no  more  forever. 


MANNER  OF  ANOINTING  HIGH  PRIESTS. 


No.  13.  UTAH,  September  pth,  1860. 

i.  I,  the  prophet  of  the  Lord,  holding  the  full  keys  of  the  holy 
priesthood,  according  to  my  birthright,  anoint  you  in  the  name  of 
Jesus  Christ  with  a  holy  anointing  according  to  your  birthright, 
and  set  you  apart  to  minister  in  holy  things,  according  to  that 


MANNER    OF    ANOINTING    AND    ORDAINING.  23 

office  to  which  you  have  been  ordained.  I,  moreover,  anoint  your 
secret  member  that  you  may  beget  a  holy  posterity  unto  the  Lord. 
2.  The  prophet  will  then  place  his  hands  upon  the  head  of  the 
person,  and  express  these  words :  I,  the  prophet  of  the  Lord, 
holding  the  full  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood,  according  to  my  birth- 
right, place  my  hands  upon  your  head,  and  seal  upon  you  this 
holy  anointing  in  the  name  of  Jesus  Christ,  Even  so,  Amen 
and  Amen. 


MANNER  OF  ORDAINING  MEN  TO  THE  HIGH 
PRIESTHOOD, 


No,  14.  UTAH,  September  Qth,  1860, 

I,  BEING  a  servant  of  the  Lord,  holding  the  high  priesthood,  ac- 
cording to  my  birthright  and  ordination,  place  my  hands  upon 
your  head  in  the  name  of  Jesus  Christ.  And  inasmuch  as  yoij  arq 
an  heir  with  me  to  this  authority,  I  ordain  you  to  the  office  of  a 
high  priest,  and  confer  upon  you  all  the  gifts,  powers,  and  keys 
pertaining  to  this  high  and  holy  calling,  in  the  name  of  Jesqs 
Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and 


MANNER    OF    CONFIRMING    MEMBERS    IN    THE 
CHURCH    OF   JESUS    CHRIST. 


No.  15.  UTAH,  September  pth, 

DEAR  brother  (or  sister),  I  being  a  servant  of  the  Lord,  holding 
the  high  priesthood  according  to  my  birthright  and  ordination,  place 
my  hands  upon  yoyr  head,  and  confer  upon  you  the  gift  of  the 
Holy  Ghost ;  and  inasmuch  as  you  will  give  heed  to  the-  prompt- 
ings of  that  Holy  Messenger,  he  shall  lead  you  into  ajl  truth,  and 
direct  your  footsteps  until  the  perfect  day ;  and  I  seal  his  attend- 
ance upon  you  in  the.  name  of  Jesus  Christ.  J£y§n  sp,  Amen 
and  Amen. 


THE    OLD    CHURCH    REJECTED. 


THE    OLD    CHURCH    REJECTED. 


No.      1 6.  UTAH,  September  i6th,  1860. 

1.  BEHOLD!     Verily  I  say  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,   pie- 
pare  yourself  to  go  forth  and  deliver  my  people  Israel ;  for  the  set 
time  for  their  deliverance  has  now  come.     I   have  sent  a  warning 
voice  unto  the  chief  shepherds  of  my  flock,  and  they  have  treated 
it  as  a  light  thing,  and  trampled  it  under  their  feet   as   a   thing  of 
naqght ;  but  they  shall  now  know  that  I  am  the  Lord,  and  that  I 
can  deliver  my  people,  and  do  my  own   work  without  their  assist- 
ance. 

2.  I  have  done  my  duty  to  them ;  but  they  have   not  done 
their  duty  to  me ;  for  when  I  most   needed  their  assistance,  they 
withheld  it  from  me.     Yet  I  am  not  .without  friends  in  the  world, 
and  this  they  shall  shortly  see.     And  I  say  unto  you,   that   you 
shall  go  forth  and  open  your  mouth,  and  with  all  your  power  pro- 
claim both  loud  and  long  against  the  abominations  of  this  people ; 
for  they  have  altogether  departed  from  me,   and  I  have  rejected 
them. 

2.  And,  behold,  I  give  unto  you  a  commandment  that  you 
shall  gather  together  all  those  who  will  hearken  unto  me ;  and  I 
will  preserve  their  lives,  and  supply  their  needs  both  in  food  and 
raiment,  and  I  will  be  their  God,  and  they  shall  be  my  people  j 
and  I  will  feed  them  in  a  fat  pasture,  and  I  will  leave  them  no 
more. 

4.  And  I  will  cut  off  from  the  earth  all  those   who  will   not 
gather  themselves  together  according  to  your  command ;  for  I  am 
the  Lord.     And  I  will  establish  the  full  keys  of  the  holy   priest- 
hood upon  the  earth,  even  though  I   should  have   to   cut   off  the 
whole  community  in  order  to  do  so. 

5.  And  I  say  unto  you  that  you  shall   not   regard  those   shep- 
herds whom,  formerly,  I  placed  over   my   flock,  but  who   are   now 
mine  enemies  ;  for  tears  of  sorrow  shall  roll   down  their  cheeks.      I 
have  done  all  in  my  power  to  save  them,  but  it  is  all  in  vain ;  and 
they  shall  be  the  first  to  feel  my  withering   hand ;  for  my  wrath  is 
kindled  against  them  to  overflowing.     And  inasmuch  as  you  have 
desired  a  greater  manifestation  of  my  power,  I  will  grant  it  unto 


THE    ROD    OF    MOSES.  25 

you ;  and  when  you  are  called  to  deliver  my  people,  I  will  place 
the  rod  in  your  hand  with  all  the  power  that  accompanied  it  when 
it  was  upon  the  earth  before ;  for  thou  art  Moses,  the  legal  heir  to 
use  it,  and  no  person  save  thyself  shall  use  it ;  therefore,  prepare 
thyself  to  receive  it ;  for  I  will  speedily  send  a  holy  messenger  with 
it.  He  shall  place  it  in  your  hand,  and  no  power  shall  stand  be- 
fore you  all  your  days.  Yea,  verily  I  say  unto  thee,  kings  shall 
consume  away  and  drop  from  their  thrones,  and  nations  shall 
crumble  to  dust,  and  thou  shalt  have  the  power  to  smite  the  earth 
with  a  curse  as  often  as  thou  wilt,  until  thy  mission  is  ended ;  for 
I  will  be  with  thee  unto  the  end. 

I  now  add  no  more.     I  am  he  that  was,  and  is,  and  is  to  come ; 
even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


THE    ROD    OF   MOSES. 


No.  17.  UTAH,  September  24th,  1860. 

1.  THIS  rod  proceeded  forth  from  the  first  God  of  all,  and  it 
is  as  endurable  as  God  himself.   He  placed  his  superscription  upon 
it,  and  he  is  sworn  to  sustain  that  man  who  is  called  to  use  it,  and 
it  cannot   be  used  by  any  person  but  the  seventh  angel,  or  those 
whom   he   shall  appoint ;  for  the  seventh   angel  is  always  the  presi- 
dent  of  that  world  in   which  he  dwells.     It  is  his  duty  to  preside 
over  the  dispensation  of  the   fullness  of  times,  and    he  is  sustained 
by  all  the  Gods  of  eternity,  who  number  millions.      And  I  say  un- 
to you,  my  servant  Joseph,  that  I  will  place  the   rod   of  Moses   in 
your  hand,  for  you  are  worthy ;  therefore,   prepare  yourself  to  re- 
ceive it. 

2.  To  every  quorum  of  the  Gods  there   is   a   world  like   unto 
this  passing  through  a  state  of  mortality ;  and  to  the   creations   of 
the  great  King  of  Kings  and  Lord  of  Lords  there  is  no  end. 

3.  Behold,  I  am  Jesus  Christ,  and  I  testify  unto  all  the  inhabi- 
tants of  the  earth  that  I  have  opened  the  seventh  seal.     Therefore, 
I  say  unto  you,   O  ye  inhabitants  of  the  earth,   prepare  yourselves 
for  that  which  is  coming  upon  you ;  for  I  will  lay  the  wicked  low, 
for  my  wrath  is  kindled,  and  it  will  never  be  appeased  until  I 


26  REVELATION    TO    PRESIDENT    BRIGHAM    YOUNG. 

have  avenged  the  blood  of  all  my  saints  and  servants  that  has 
been  shed  upon  the  earth  since  the  world  began. 

4.  And,  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,  that  I 
have  raised  you  up,  that  through  you  I  might  make  manifest  mine 
almighty  power  in  the  defense  of  my  chosen  people.  Therefore, 
my  son,  be  of  good  courage,  and  I  will  be  with  you,  and  no  power 
shall  stand  before  you  unto  the  end ;  for  the  hand  that  is  raised 
against  you  shall  wither,  and  the  tongue  that  lies  against  you,  shall 
consume  away  in  its  mouth ;  and  I  will  bless  you  above  all  men 
with  an  abundance  of  blessings,  for  I  have  chosen  you. 

I  now  add  no  more.  I  am  he  that  was,  and  is,  and  is  to  come ; 
even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    TO    PRESIDENT    BRIGHAM     YOUNG. 


No.  1 8.  UTAH,  October  2nd,  1860. 

1.  WHEN  you  were  small  in  your  own  eyes,  I  took  you  and 
raised  you  up,  and  I  guarded  you  both  by  night  and  by  day ;  and 
when  you  were  afflicted  I  raised  you  up  again,  and  I  multiplied 
blessings  upon  you.     I   increased  your  cattle,  your  horses,  your 
houses  and  your  lands,   until  you  have  waxed  great.     I  guarded 
you  as  a  father  guards  his  son,  and  you  were  unto  me  as  the  apple 
of  mine  eye.     But  when  I  raised  up  a  prophet  to  deliver  my  peo- 
ple, and  sent  him  unto  you,  you  shut  your  door  against  him,  for 
which  thing  my   wrath  and  indignation  are  kindled  against  you. 
Therefore,  I  say  unto  you,  if  you  had  not  done  this  wicked  thing, 
I  would  have  established  both  you  and  your  seed  upon  the  throne 
of  Israel  forever ;  but  now  I  will  deliver  you  into  the  hands  of  my 
servant  Joseph,  and  what  he  does,  I  will  sanction ;  for  his  word 
shall  never  fail. 

2.  As  concerning  my  servant  Heber,  his  heart  was  bound  up  in 
my  servant  Joseph  Smith.    He  has  thought  that  my  servant  Joseph 
Smith  held  the  full  keys  of  this  last  dispensation,   and  also  the 
leading  keys  of  the  resurrection ;   but  he  has  been  deceived. 

3.  My  servant  Joseph  Smith  is  the  sixth  angel,  and  he  was  ap- 
pointed to  open  the  sixth  seal,   and  to  loose  the  four  angels  who 


REVELATION    TO    PRESIDENT    BRIGHAM    YOUNG.  27 

were  bound  in  the  great  river  Euphrates,  that  they  might  be  ready 
to  go  to  war  when  the  seventh  angel  should  open  the  seventh  seal. 
These  angels  represent  the  riders  of  the  four  horses  that  John  saw, 
and  they  are  the  captains  of  the  Lord's  hosts. 

4.  Did   my  servant  Joseph  Smith  hold  the  full  keys  of  the 
holy  priesthood?     No,   he  did  not;   he  only  held  them  in  part. 
Does  the  seventh  angel  hold  the  full  keys  of  my  holy  priesthood? 
Yes,  he  does ;  and  there  is  but  one  man  upon  the   earth   who  can 
hold  the  full  keys  of  that  priesthood.     Who  is  that  man?     It  is 
my  servant  Joseph  Morris.    He  holds  the  full  keys  of  my  kingdom 
on  the  earth ;  for  he  is  next  in  authority  to  Adam ;  and  he  received 
his  ordination   in  a  council  of  the  Gods  to  preside  over  Adam's 
posterity,  and  to  deliver  them  out  of  the  hands  of  all  their  enemies. 

5.  Does  my  servant  Joseph  Smith  hold  the  leading  keys  of 
the  resurrection    pertaining  to  Adam's   posterity?     No,  he  does 
not;  nor  he  never  will.     Does  my   servant  Joseph  Morris  hold 
those  keys?     No.      Who  does  then?     Adam  holds  the  leading 
keys  of  the  resurrection  pertaining  to  his  own  posterity. 

6.  How  many  persons  are  there  who  hold  the  leading  keys  of 
the  resurrection  pertaining  to  this  planet?     Two.     Who  are  they? 
Adam  and  Jesus. 

7.  Joseph  Smith  gives  up  to  Moses;  Moses  gives  up  to  Adam; 
Adam  gives  up  to  Jesus ;  and  Jesus  gives  up  to  the  Father,  that 
God  may  be  all  in  all. 

8.  When  Jesus  shall  have  finished   his   work  as  a   Mediator, 
he  will  step  out  of  that  place  and  will  go  forth  upon  other  earths 
and  preach  the  gospel ;  and  he  will  go  on  from  step  to  step  until 
he  becomes  a  God  like  unto  the  Eternal  Father. 

9.  And  when  this  world  becomes  celestialized,  and  moves  out 
of  its  present  position,  and  takes  its  place  among  celestial  planets, 
Adam  will  be  worshipped  by  the  posterity  of  Moses  as  the  Eternal 
Father  is  now  worshipped  by  Adam's   posterity — and  this  accord- 
ing to  the  law  of  eternal  progression. 

10.  Joseph  Smith  will  come  forth  upon  another  earth  like  un- 
to this,  and  hold  the  full  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood,  to  preside 
over  the  posterity  of  Moses. 

11.  Jesus  said,  "No  man  taketh  my   life  away;   but  I  lay  it 
down  of  myself.     I  have  power  to  lay  down  my  life,  and  I  have 


28  THE  DELIVERANCE  OF  GOD'S  PEOPLE. 

power  to  take  it  up  again — this  commandment  I  received  from 
my  Father." 

12.  O  ye  hundred  and  forty-four  thousand!  you  also  have 
power  to  lay  down  your  lives  and  to  take  them  up  again ;  for  you 
received  this  commandment  from  your  Fathers.  And  you,  in 
connection  with  Adam,  hold  the  keys  of  the  resurrection  per- 
taining to  his  posterity. 

I  now  add  no  more.  I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen 
and  Amen. 


THE  COMMENCEMENT  OF  THE    DELIVERANCE 
OF  GOD'S  PEOPLE. 


No.     19.  UTAH,  October  i3th,  1860. 

1.  VERILY  I  say  unto  you  my  servant  Joseph  that,  inasmuch  as 
you  have  desired  to  know  of  me  concerning  the  time  when  I  have 
concluded  to  commence  to   deliver  my  people,   I   will  make  it 
known  unto  you. 

2.  I  have  heard  your  prayers  and  seen  your  agonizing  groans 
in  behalf  of  mine  afflicted  people,  and  I  will  now  satisfy  your  feel- 
ings ;  for  I  have  borne  with  the  follies  of  those  chief  shepherds  of 
my  flock  until  I  will  bear  with  them  no  longer ;  therefore,  prepare 
yourself  for  the  work,  for  I  will  commence  to   deliver  my  people 
this  fall,  and  it  will  be  woe  unto  those  who  undertake  to  stay   my 
hand,  for  I  will  sweep  them  out  of  existence  as  with  the  besom  of 
destruction  until   there  shall  be  none  left  to  tell  the  tale.     I  have 
heard  the  cries  of  mine  afflicted  people  until  I  will  hear  them  no 
longer. 

3.  And  as  for  the  chief  shepherds   of  my  flock,  I  will  not  be 
trifled  with  by  them  any  longer.     Therefore,  if  they  are  not  ready 
to  do  their  duty  at  the  time  which   I  have  appointed,  I   will  cut 
them  off  first,  and  afterwards  those  who  uphold  them,   until  there 
shall  be  nothing  left  to  oppose  me ;  for  I  am  the   Lord,  and  I  am 
not  to  be  mocked.     Had  it  not  have  been  for  the  pure  that   are 
among  my  people,  I   would  have  cut  those  shepherds  off  before 
this  time ;  but  with  a  view  to  save  the  pure  of  my  people,  I  have 
suffered  them  to  run  thus  far;  but,  now  I   will,  at  all  hazards, 


THE  DELIVERANCE  OF  GOD'S  PEOPLE.  29 

deliver  all  those  who  will  hearken  unto  me,  and  the  rest  I  will 
destroy.  I  have  shown  mercy  the  rebellious  shepherds  of  my 
flock,  until  mercy  has  no  more  claim  upon  them. 

4.  And  I  say  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,  that  inasmuch  as 
you  are  surrounded  by  enemies  who   are   laying   snares   to  entrap 
you,  they  shall  have  no  power  over  you ;  but  I  will  break  up  all 
their  plans  by  confusing  them  in  their  councils  until  they  shall  feel 
that  it  is  hard  for  them  to  kick  against  me ;  for  my  course  is  one 
eternal  round,  and  my  purposes  never  fail. 

5.  And  I  say   unto  you,   that   whomsoever  you   curse,  I   will 
curse ;    and  whomsoever  you  bless,  I  will  bless.     And  your  power 
shall  be  felt  to  the  ends   of  the   earth.     And   although  you  have 
murmured  against  me  because  I  have  suffered  the  deliverance  of 
my  people  to  be  delayed  up  to  the  present  time,  yet  I  have  for- 
given you.     And  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  murmur  no  more ;  for  I 
will  be  with  you  to  the  end. 

I  now  add  no  more.     I  am  he  that  was,  and  is,  and  is  to  come ; 
even  Jesus  Christ.     Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  DESTRUCTION    OF  THE    SHEPHERDS  OF 

ISRAEL.— THE    REJECTION   OF   THE 

TEMPLE. 


No.   20.  UTAH,  October  i6th,   1860. 

BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Alpha  and  Omega,  even  Jesus  Christ.  I 
have  seen  the  distress  of  mine  afflicted  people,  and  I  have  pre- 
pared a  way  for  their  escape.  And  I  have  seen  the  disobedience 
of  those  men  with  whom  I  entrusted  the  souls  of  my  people. 
When  I  wished  to  change  things  I  could  not  work  with  them ;  for 
instead  of  assisting  me,  they  sought  their  own  way,  and  they  have 
been  my  greatest  opposers.  Nevertheless,  when  they  shall  have 
done  the  most  against  me  that  they  are  able  to  do,  I  shall  have 
power  in  mine  own  hands  to  accomplish  my  purposes.  I  can  do 
without  those  who  can  do  without  me.  But  they  wish  to  do  their 
own  will,  and  still  be  considered  my  servants.  I  would  that  they 
were  either  hot  or  cold ;  but  they  are  neither. 

2.     Oh!   how   my   bowels  yearn  with  pity  towards  the   pure 


30  THE    DESTRUCTION    OF   THE    FALSE    SHEPHERDS. 

of  my  people  who  are  going  on  like  lambs  to  the  slaughter,  and 
whom  I  shall  be  compelled  to  cut  off  on  account  of  the  wicked- 
ness of  those  chief  shepherds  of  my  flock.  But  I  will  satisfy  my- 
self upon  them ;  for  I  will  not  leave  one  of  their  seed  alive.  As  I 
did  to  Jeroboam,  so  I  will  do  to  them. 

3.  They   have    done    nothing  but   aggravate  me  in   all  their 
works.     When  I  have  commanded  them   to  do  one  thing,  they 
have  done  another  in  opposition  to  it.     When  I  commanded  them 
to  seal  no  more,  they  continued  sealing  as  though   I   had  never 
spoken ;  thus  trampling  my  words  under  their  feet.     And  when  I 
commanded  them  to  send  out  no   more  missionaries,   they   disre- 
garded my  word,  and  sent  missionaries  out  as  though  I  had  never 
spoken. 

4.  They  have  also  contemplated  building  the  temple  which  I 
have  rejected ;   but,  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  O  ye  rebellious  shep- 
herds !  you  have  gone  your  length,  and  I  will  now  stop   you ;   for 
the  man  that  undertakes  to  lay  a  stone  upon  that  temple  I  will  cut 
both  him  and  his  seed  off  from  the  earth  forthwith,  and  his  name 
shall  be  handed  down  in  shame  and  disgrace  from  generation  to 
generation. 

5.  And  as  for  the  men  who  have  been  sent  out  on  missions  in 
opposition  to  my  command,  I  will  deliver  them  into  the  hands  of 
their  enemies,  and  it  will  be  hard  for  them  to  escape.     And  they 
shall  be  confounded  on  every  hand ;  for  I  am  not  with  them.     I 
am  the  Lord. 

6.  And  as  for  the  sealing  which  has  been  done  in  opposition 
to  my  command,  I  will  cast  it  all  down,  and  visit  upon  those  who 
have  attended  to  that  matter  all  the  sins  which   have  been  com- 
mitted by  those  who  have  been  sealed  by  them ;  for  I  am  not  to 
be  mocked. 

7.  Therefore,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  place  yourself  in  readi- 
ness for  that  which  is  coming  upon  you ;  for  I  will  lay  your  way 
open,  and  you  shall  have  no  difficulty  in  going  forth  to  your  place. 
You    shall   meet   with  no    disappointments  as   you  have  hitherto 
done.     And,  at  the  time  appointed,  I  will  make  known  unto  you 
the  course  you  shall  take;   therefore,  place  your  confidence  in  me, 
and  I  will  lead  you  triumphantly  over   all  your  enemies,  and   my 
people  shall  see  no  more  affliction  forever ;  for  I  am  the   Lord 
and  I  will  be  their  shepherd  forever.    Even  so.    Amen  and  Amen' 


THE    GATHERING   TO    SALT    LAKE    CITY.  31 

THE  GATHERING  TO  SALT  LAKE  CITY. 


No.   21.  UTAH,  October  24th,   1860. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  Jesus  Christ,  the  Son  of  the  Eternal  Father, 
even  he  who  holds  the  keys  of  death   and  hell.     I   suffered   my 
blood  to  be  shed  upon  the  cross  for  the  sins  of  the   world  that  I 
might  save  as  many  as  my  Father  hath  put  within  my  power. 

2.  And  I  testify  unto  all  mankind  that  I  have  given  this  reve- 
lation unto  my  servant   Joseph  according  to  the  commandment 
which   I    received  from  my  Father.     Therefore,  I  say  unto  you, 
O  ye  saints  who  trust  in  me,  and  profess  to  live  by  every  word 
that  proceeds  from  my  mouth,  place  yourselves  in   readiness  for 
that  which  is  coming  upon  you,  for  you   shall   behold  scenes  that 
will  cause  your  hearts  to  melt  within  you. 

3.  For  I  am  about  to  gather  together,  unto  one  place,  all  those 
that  will  hearken  to  me ;  and  it  mattereth   not   unto  me  whether 
the  liars  and  hypocrites  gather  themselves  together,  or  not ;    for  I 
will  cut  them  off  let  them  be  wheresoever  they  may. 

4.  I  have  appointed  a  place  for  the  gathering  together  of  my 
people,  which  place  is  the  Public  Square  in  that  City  called  the 
Great  Salt  Lake  City — even  the  central  point. 

5.  And  I  will  there  stand  side  by  side  with  my  servant  Joseph, 
and  speak  to  him  mouth   to   mouth ;  and   I   will  instruct   him   in 
those  things  which   will  be  necessary   for  him  to  know   at   the 
appointed  time. 

6.  And  I  will  give  unto  him  power  to  discern  between  the 
sheep  and  the  goats  { so  called ) ;  and  he  shall  place  the  sheep   on 
the  one  side  and  the  goats  on  the  other ;  for  this   is  the   harvest 
spoken  of  in  the  Scripture,  when  the  angels  were  to  be  sent  to 
gather  out  the  tares'  from  among  the   wheat,  that  the  wheat  might 
l>e  save^  and  that  the  tares  might  be  destroyed, 

7.  And  at  that  time  the  hosts  of  heaven  shall  be  there,  and  I 
-will  lead  them  up  to  battle,  and  go  before  them  from  conquering 
to  conquer ;  and  I  will  never  again  stay  my  hand  until  I  have  laid 
mine  enemies  flow ;  for  my  time  is  now  come  to  make  manifest 
mine  almighty  power  among  the  nations  and  .kingdoms  of  the 
•earth. 


32  INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    PROPHET. 

8.  Therefore,  my  son  rest   assured  that  I   will  be  with  thee, 
and  make  known  unto  thee  all  things  which  may  be  necessary  for 
thee   to   know    unto   the    end.      And    although   thou    hast    been 
mocked  and  derided  by  thine  enemies,  and  hast  been  belied   by 
them,  and  been  driven  from  place  to  place  without  a  sure  place  to 
lay  thine  head,  yet  thou  hast  a  friend  in  me  who  is  greater  than  al] 
thine  enemies. 

9.  And  now,  O  ye  mockers,  hearken  to  the  words  of  the  Lord 
unto  you :     Your  race  is  now  run,  and  you  shall   know  that  when 
you  mock  my  servant  whom  I  have  called  to  hold  the  keys  of  my 
kingdom,  that  you  mock  me ;  and  I  will  settle  with  you.     Behold, 
I  am  Jesus  Christ,  and  I  testify  unto  all  the  inhabitants  of  the 
earth  that  I  have  sent  that  spirit  which  inhabited  the  body   of 
Moses  to  rule  rny  kingdom  upon  the  earth,  and  that  spirit  now  in- 
habits the  body  of  my  servant  Joseph ;   and  all  those  who  do  not 
believe  it,  shall  soon  feel  it.     Therefore,  O  ye  mockers,  mock  on, 
the   scene   will   soon   be  over.     I    am  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


TO  THE  PROPHET  JOSEPH  MORRIS. 


No.   22.  UTAH,  October  3oth,   1860. 

1.  BEHOLD,  verily  thus  saith  the  Lord  unto  you,  my  son,  mur- 
mur not  at  your  fate,  neither  be  faint-hearted   nor  faithless   inj[my 
promises  ;  but  be  of  good  courage,  and  remember  that  I  am  with 
you  to  fight  your  battles. 

2.  Why  should  you  doubt  in  my  promises?      Have   I   ever 
failed  to  fulfill  my  promises  as  far  as  I  have  gone  with  you  t     An- 
swer this  for  yourself ;    and   if  I  have   never  failed  to  fulfill  my 
promises,  and  you  do  not  believe  in  those  promises  which  yet  re- 
main to  be  fulfilled,  you  are  under  condemnation.     Yea,  I  require 
that  you  should  place  the   utmost  confidence  in  me.     Therefore, 
trifle  not  with  my  words ;  but  rise  up  and  do  your  duty,  and  pre- 
pare yourself  for  the  work  that  lies  before  you,   for  it  is  at  your 
door. 

3.  Do  you  suppose  that  I  am  driven  about  by  every  wind  that 


INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    PROPHET.  33 

blows,  and  tossed  about  like  a  wave  upon  the  ocean?    What  think 
you  about  it?     Then  trifle   with   me   no   more;  neither  use   any 
more  insulting  language  towards  me.      Oh  how   you  have  piercecL 
my  heart  with  the  language  that  you  have  used  to  me.     I  can  do 
my  duty  without  being  driven  to  it. 

4.  And  when  you  are  ready  to  go  forth   to  your  place — go ; 
and  if  I  am  not  there  to  open  your  way  and  guard  you  from  your 
enemies,  and  lead  you  triumphantly  over  them  all,  I  will  bear  the 
blame  forever.     And  if  you  do  not  speedily  rise  up   and  go,  you 
will  be  under  condemnation ;  for  I  am  now  ready,  and  I  will  con- 
sume everything  that  stands  in  your  way.     And,  as  a  token  of  this, 
I  will  cut  off  a  number  of  this  people  that  you  may  know  that  the 
time  for  the  work  to  commence  has  come ;  for  those   shepherds  of 
my  flock  will  not  open  the  way  for  you  unless  I  do  this.     When 
this  is  done,  you  shall  go  forth  speedily,  or  your  enemies  will  be 
upon  you,  and  I  will  not  protect  you  only  in  the  line  of  your  duty. 

5.  Therefore,  prepare  thyself  now,   and  hearken,  and   try  to 
satisfy  thy  mind.     I   say  unto  thee,  that  if  I   do  not  fulfill  the 
promises  which  I  have  made  to  the  very  letter,  thou  art  under  no 
further  obligation  to  me  and  to  this   people ;   and  I  will  do  unto 
thee  as  thou  hast  desired  of  me,  or  otherwise  I  will  bear  the  blame 
forever.     Therefore,  settle  thy  mind  upon  the  matter,  and  all  will 
be  well.      I    am  Jesus    Christ,   the  Son  of  the  Eternal  Father. 
Even   so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


BLESSINGS    FOR     THE    PROPHET'S    BENEFACTORS. 


No.     23.  UTAH,  November  8th,   1860. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Eternal  Father,  and  I  speak  unto  you, 
my  servant  Joseph,  through  mine  Only  Begotten  Son. 

2.  And  inasmuch  as  you  have  felt  dissatisfied  with  my  deal- 
ings with  you,  in  my  not  submitting  to  be  counselled  by  you,  be- 
hold I  will  satisfy  you  upon  this  matter.     In  consequence  of  the 
situation  in  which   you  have  been   placed,   I   have  withheld  the 
power  of  your  office  from  you  up  to   this  time ;  nevertheless,  I 
have  committed  unto  you  the  full  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood  ;  but 


34  BLESSINGS    FOR    THE    PROPHET'S    BENEFACTORS. 

now  I  will  committ  unto  you  the  full  power   of  your  office   unto 
your  satisfaction. 

3.  You  have  often  feared  that   I   would   not  fulfill   my  word ; 
but  I  am  unchangeable  in  my  course.     And  now   I   will  counsel 
with  you  in  all  things   with   which   you  have  to   deal ;   and  your 
command  shall  be  obeyed  in  all  things ;    for  I  will  go  before  you 
and  make  your  words  good. 

4.  Thou  art  that  prophet  of  whom   Moses  spoke,  who  was  to 
come  in  the  lat%er  days — whose  word  should  be  obeyed  by  all. 

5.  And  I  say  unto  you,  settle  your  affairs  at  the  place  where 
you  now  dwell,  and  get  ready.     Set  your  own  time  to  commence 
the  work,  and  it  shall  be  brought  about  at  your  appointed  time, 
and  in  your  appointed  way ;  for  I  have  now  committed  unto  you 
all  power ;  therefore,  all  things  are  now  placed  within  your  power ; 
and  I  will  influence  you,  and  make  you   understand  my  will  con- 
cerning all  things  with  which  you  have  to  deal.     And  whom  thou 
wilt,  I  will  save  alive ;   and  whom  thou  wilt,  I  will  destroy ;   there- 
fore, linger  not,  but  go  forth  as  thou  art  commanded,  and  start 
the    work.     I  am  the  Lord.      Even    so.     Amen. 

6.  And  now,  behold,  I  speak  unto  you  concerning  the  hand- 
maid in  whose  house  you  have  dwelt.     I   have   beheld  all  her 
affliction  with  her  husband,  and    I   have   prepared  a  blessing   for 
her ;   for  I  will  restore  her  husband  unto  her  again,  and  he  shall 
be  a  blessing  unto  her  all  her  days, 

7.  I  have  seen  his  affliction  until  my  bowels  have  yearned 
with  pity  towards  him ;  for  I  know  him.     He  is  a  chosen  vessel  to 
hold  my  holy  priesthood  upon  the  earth ;  and  I  will  make  of  him 
a  mighty  man ;  and  I  will  make  up  unto  him  for  all  his  distresses. 
And  because  they  opened  their  doors  for  you  when  you  were  in 
distress,  and  assisted  you  in  the  work  which  I  raised  you  up  to  do, 
their  names  shall  be  handed   down  from  generation  to  generation 
as  a  memorial  for  the  good  deeds  which  they  have   done  to  you. 
I  do  not  look  at  men  as  they  look  at  each  other ;  for  that  which  is 
highly  esteemed  among   men,  is  an  abomination  in  my  sight.     I 
am  Jesus  Christ     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


THE    SIGNS     OF  COMMAND.  35 

THE   SIGNS   OF   COMMAND. 


No.   24.  UTAH,  November  nth,   1860. 

1.  VERILY,  verily,  thus  saith  the  Lord,  even   Jesus   Christ  the 
Son  of  God,  I  have  settled  my  mind  concerning  the  course  which 
I  am  about  to  take  with  my  people — from  the  highest  of  them  to 
the  lowest.     And  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  that   I   will   now  settle 
the  matter  with  them  to  your   satisfaction.     Therefore,  settle  thy 
business  as   I  have   before  commanded  thee,    and   also  give  the 
command ;  and  from  the  very  hour  that  thou  shalt  do  this,  I   will 
commence  to  lay  mine  enemies  low.     If  I  do  not,  I  will  bear  the 
blame  forever,  and  thou  shalt   be  free   from   blame.     And   when 
thou  shalt  give  the  command,  thou  shalt  raise  thy   right   arm  to- 
ward heaven,  and  express  these  words : 

2.  O  God,  the  Eternal  Father,  in  the  name  of  thy  Son,  Jesus 
Christ,  I  call  upon  thee  on  this   solemn  occasion ;  and   inasmach 
as  thou  hast  conferred  upon  me  this  honor,  namely,  to  deliver  thy 
people  out  of  the  hands  of  all  their  enemies — having  placed  under 
my  charge  and  at  my  command  all  thy  heavenly  host — by  virtue 
of  my  authority  I  command  them  to  go  forth  from  this  very  hour, 
even  from  conquering  to  conquer. 

3.  And  when  thou  wishest  to  stop  me,  thou  shalt  again   raise 
thy  right  arm,  and  express  these  words : 

4.  O  God,  the  Eternal  Father,  by  virtue  of  my  authority,  I 
call  upon  thee,  in  the  name  of  thy  Son,  Jesus  Christ,  to  stay  thy 
hand. 

5.  And  when  thou  hast  expressed  these  words,  thou  shalt  drop 
thy  arm.     And  these  shall  be  the  signs  which  thou  shalt  manifest 
for  starting  and  stopping.     And  thou  shalt  prove  that  thy  word 
shall  never  fail. 

6.  And  when  I  commence,  I  will  never  stay  mine  hand  again 
until  thy  way  shall  be  opened,  and  thou  shalt  say  unto  me,  "stop." 
And* I  will  cut  off  everything  that  stands  in  the  way;   and  thou 
shalt  never  again  have  to  complain  of  me  for  my   backwardness. 
And,  for  thy  satisfaction,  I  say   unto  thee,  if  I    do   not  fulfill  this 
promise  to  the  very  letter,  I  will  take  thee  out  of  the  midst  of  this 
people  up  into  my  presence  at  one  hour's  notice ;   for  thou  shalt 


36  DESTRUCTION    OF    FALSE    SHEPHERDS, 

suffer  no  longer.  And  I  make  unto  thee  a  promise  that  thou 
shalt  never  lose  thy  life  by  the  hand  of  an  enemy ;  therefore,  I  say 
unto  thee,  give  the  command  when  thou  art  ready. 

I   now  add  no  more.     I   am  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen 
and  Amen. 


THE   DESTRUCTION  OF  THE  FALSE  SHEPHERDS. 


No.  25.  UTAH,  November  i3th,  1860. 

1.  VERILY  I  say  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,  be  not  fearful, 
nor  faint-hearted ;   but  be  of  good  courage,  for  I  am   with  thee, 
and  I  will  make  known  unto  thee  the  course  which  I  am  about  to 
take  with  mine  enemies. 

2.  Inasmuch  as  I  have  sent  a  warning  voice  unto  the  chief 
shepherds  of  my  flock,  and  they  have  rejected  it,  I  will  cut  both 
them  and  their  seed  off  first,  and  afterwards  I  will  continue  until 
I  shall  have  cut  off  all  the  responsible  men  in  my  Church,  who  are 
now  acting  under  their  influence,  until  there  shall  not  be  a  false 
shepherd  left  among  my  people,  neither  large  nor  small. 

3.  And  from  them  I  will  go  to  mine  enemies  who  have  come 
into  the  midst  of  my  people,  and  I  will  not  leave  one  of  them 
alive ;  .and  inasmuch  as  I  could  not  seperate  the  shepherds  of  my 
flock  from  the  enemy  which  has  deceived  them,  they  shall  all  die 
together  in  one  day. 

4.  Nevertheless,  I  will  save  alive  of  my  people  as  many  of  the 
pure  in  heart  as  I  can ;   and  I  will   save  alive   sufficient  faithful 
men  to  organize  my  Church  according  to.  mine  own  pattern. 

5.  And  inasmuch  as  thou  hast,  of  late,  been  visited  by  mine 
enemies,  who  have  laid  a  trap  for  thee,   I  will   move  thee   out   of 
their  way  before  the  time  which  they  have  appointed  to  ensnare 
thee  has  come ;  and  I  will  take  them  in  their  own  snare. 

6.  Therefore,  get  thee  ready,  and  go  to  some  secret  place,  "and 
give    the  command ;   and    I  will  go  forth  from  that  very  hour. 
And  as  soon  as  thou  hast  given  the  command,  hearken   out,  and 
be  ready  to  go  forth  to  take  thy  place ;    for  thou  shait   walk  the 
streets   without  fear.     And,  for  thy  satisfaction,  I  say  unto  thee, 


RICHARD    COOK    AND    JOHN    PARSON.  37 

that  if  I  do  not  fulfill  this  promise,  I  will  require  no  more  at  thy 
hands ;   but  I  will  take  thee  out  of  the  midst  of  this  people  that 
very  hour.     Thou  shalt  soon  prove  me  in  these  things.     I  shalL 
give  unto  thee  no  more  revelations  upon  this   subject  until  I  shall 
have  fulfilled  this  promise,  and  satisfied  thy  feelings. 

I  now  add  no  more.     I  am  Jesus  Christ.      Even  so.     Amen 
Amen. 

REVELATION  CONCERNING  RICHARD  COOK. 


No.   26.  UTAH,  November  29th,   1860. 

BEHOLD,  verily  I  say  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,  hearken 
unto  the  words  of  the  Lord  your  God,  for  I  am  about  to  make 
known  unto  you  my  will  concerning  my  servant  Richard  Cook. 

I  have  known  him  from  the  beginning,  and  I  have  been  with 
him  in  all  his  administrations  among  my  people,  and  my  eyes  have 
been  upon  him  for  good,  for  I  have  prepared  him  for  a  great 
work ;  therefore,  let  him  prepare  himself  for  that  which  has  to 
come,  for  I  will  satisfy  him.  Let  him  place  confidence  in  me, 
and  he  shall  never  be  disappointed.  He  is  a  chosen  vessel  to 
bear  my  name  to  the  nations  of  the  earth ;  and,  in  a  day  to  come, 
he  shall  receive  a  place  in  the  apostleship,  and  travel  from  place 
to  place  all  his  days ;  and  he  shall  gain  a  name  that  will  never 
die,  for  I  will  be  with  him.  Let  him  not  be  faithless  in  my 
promises ;  but  let  him  set  himself  for  the  work.  I  am  Jesus 
Christ,  the  Son  of  God.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 

REVELATION  CONCERNING  JOHN  PARSON. 


No.   27.  UTAH,   December  6th,   1860. 

BEHOLD  I  am  Alpha  and  Omega,  even  Jesus  Christ,  the  Son  of 
God,  and  I  speak  unto  him  according  to  his  desire.  I  have 
heard  his  prayers  which  he  has  offered  up  unto  me,  and  I  will 
answer  them  to  his  satisfaction.  I  have  seen  him  in  all  his  move- 
ments in  my  Church  from  his  beginning;  and  although  he  has 
thought  that  I  have  not  heard  him,  yet.  I  have  been  present  with 


38  JOHN    COOK. 

him  by  mine  holy  angels,  and  I  have  now  called  him  to  hold  an 
eminent  position  in  my  Church,  for  he  is  greatly  beloved  by  me. 
He  need  not  fear  that  I  will  not  fulfill  my  promises,  for  I  will  to 
the  very  letter;  and  I  will  give  unto  him  a  testimony  that  I  have 
raised  up  a  prophet  to  rule  my  Church  upon  the  earth  ;  and  inas- 
much as  he  has  desired  of  me  to  know  his  birthright,  behold  I 
will  make  it  known  unto  him.  He  is  an  heir  to  my  holy  priest- 
hood, and  he  shall  become  one  of  my  special  witnesses  to  bear  my 
name  to  the  nations  of  the  earth  ;  and  he  shall  bring  many  thou- 
sands to  the  knowledge  of  the  truth  ;  and  he  shall  open  his  mouth 
and  prophesy  in  my  name  ;  and  he  shall  seal  up  the  destiny  of 
nations,  and  live  as  long  upon  the  earth  as  he  desires,  and  pos- 
sess all  the  blessings  that  belong  to  the  high  priesthood.  I  am  he 
that  was,  and  is  to  come,  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen 
and  Amen. 


REVELATION  CONCERNING  JOHN  COOK. 


No.   28.  UTAH,  December  nth,   1860. 

1.  BEHOLD,  verily  thus  saith  the  Lord  unto  you,  my  servant 
Joseph : — that  inasmuch  as  you  have  inquired  of  me  to  know  my 
will  concerning  my  servant  John  Cook,  I  will  make  it   known  un- 
to you. 

2.  I   have  prepared  a  blessing  for  him ;  for  he  is  greatly  be- 
loved by  me  for  his  integrity  of  heart.     I  have   prepared  him  for 
a  mighty  work  upon  the  earth ;    and  although  he  is  of  slow  speech, 
yet  I  will   open  his  mouth   and  loose  his  tongue,    and   he  shall 
become   fluent  in  speech.     And  he  shall  travel,  and  preach  my 
gospel  from  land  to  land,  and  from  country  to  country,  until  he 
is  satisfied.     He  shall  go  at  his  pleasure,  and  return  at  the  same, 
and  be  subject  to  none  but  the  prophet  of  the  Lord ;  for  his  heart 
is  upright  before  me,  and  his  lineage  is  that  of  Ephriam. 

3.  He  is  an  heir  to  my  holy  priesthood,  and   I  have  blessed 
him  with  a  great  blessing,  and  none  of  his  fellows  shall  excel  him 
in  wisdom.     And  he  shall  be  blessed  with  great  stores  of  knowl- 
edge;   and  he  shall  become  a  counselor  to  one  of  the  greatest 
men   in   my  kingdom ;   and  he  shall    gain  the  favor  of  all  who 


RICHARD    COOK    AND    THE    PROPHET   JOSEPH    MORRIS.          39 

become  acquainted  with  him.  And,  in  a  day  to  come,  he  shall 
possess  great  riches,  and  his  posterity  shall  be  the  chosen  of  the 
Lord — holding  the  holy  priesthood — and  he  shall  live  upon  the 
earth  as  long  as  he  desires.  I  am  he  that  was,  and  is,  and  is  to 
come;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION  TO  RICHARD  COOK  AND  THE 
PROPHET  JOSEPH  MORRIS. 


No.   29.  UTAH,  December  i5th,    1860. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Alpha  and  Omega,  even  Jesus  Christ, 
the  Son  of  the  Eternal  Father. 

2.  And  I  say  unto  you  that  I  have  given  my  word  to  accom- 
plish a  mighty  work  upon  the  earth.     And  I  have  so  laid  my  plans 
that  they  cannot  be  frustrated  by  man's  power ;    and  I  shall  work 
to  their  accomplishment.     Therefore,  let  all  saints,  who  know  any- 
thing  about  my  plans,   rest  assured  that  I   will  accomplish  that 
whereunto  I  have  set  my  hands,  and  let  them  not  be   impatient ; 
for  the  day  of  my  power  will  come  as  soon  as  they  will  be  ready 
for  it ;    and  many  who  will  not  be  ready  will  be  taken  in  a  snare. 

3.  As  concerning  my  servant  Richard  Cook,  let  him  not  be 
impatient ;  but  let  him  trust  in   me,  and  I   will  satisfy  him.     I 
require  of  him  that  he  shall  place  all  confidence  in  my  words,  and 
not  trifle  with  them.     He  need  not  to  fear  mine  enemies,  for  they 
are  in  my  hands,  and  I  will  hold  them   with  an  almighty  hand. 
Let  him  prepare  himself  for  the  work  that  lies   before  him ;    for  I 
am  about  to  call  him  to  hold  an  eminent  position  in   my  Church ; 
and  he  shall  travel,  and  preach  my  gospel  all  his  days,    for  that  is 
his  calling. 

4.  And,  behold,  I  speak  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,  and  I 
say  unto  you,  settle  your  mind,  and  place  your  confidence  in  me, 
and  do  not  trifle  with  my   words.     Have  I  ever  neglected  you? 
Answer  this  for  yourself.     If  I  have  not,  why  should  you  insult  me 
in  such  a  manner  as  you  do  by  throwing  out  insinuations  to  me? 
As  I  have  said  unto  you  before,  so  say  I  unto  you  again,  get  your- 
self ready  to  start  the  work,  and  then  commence;    and  if  I  am 


40  A    PROPHESY. 

not  ready,  then  I  will  bear  the  blame   forever — you  will  be  clear, 
and  I  will  stand  for  myself. 

5.  Be  it  known  unto  you,  O  ye  inhabitants  of  Utah  Territory, 
that  I  have  spoken  all  these  things  through  my  servant  Joseph, 
and  I  am  responsible  for  them.  I  am  he  that  was,  and  is,  and  is 
to  come ;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


A  PROPHESY  TO  THE  INHABITANTS  OF  UTAH. 


No.  30.  UTAH,  December  2ist,   1860. 

1.  BEHOLD,  verily,  verily,  thus  saith  the  Lord:     It  shall  come 
to  pass  that  I   will   commence  a  mighty  work  upon  the  earth  in 
the  year  eighteen  hundred  and   sixty-one — commencing  in  Utah 
Territory. 

2.  I  will  begin  with  the  men  who  now  stand  at  the  head  of 
my  Church,  and  I  will  cut  them  off  first ;  and  from  them  I   will 
go  to  those  who  are  next  to  them  in  authority,  and  I  will  cut  them 
off  also ;  and  so  I  will  continue  until  I  shall  have  cut  off  every 
shepherd    in    my  Church — both    large   and   small — that  will  not 
stand  by  my  servant  whom  I  have  called. 

3.  And  I  will  gather  my  people  together  to  one  place,  even 
to  the  Great  Salt  Lake   City — the  central  point  in  this  Territory. 
And  I  will  be  there  myself,  and  stand  side  by  side  with  my  servant 
Joseph,  and  speak  to  him  mouth  to  mouth.     And  all  the  hosts  of 
heaven  shall  be  there.     I  will  lead  them  up  to  battle,  and   I  will 
separate  the  sheep  from  the  goats. 

4.  As  I  cut  off  all  the  firstborn   of  Egypt,   so  I  will  go  from 
settlement    to    settlement,    cutting   off  all  those  whom  I   do  not 
claim  as  mine   own ;    for   I  never  shed   my  blood   to    save    the 
goats — they  belong  to  Satan. 

5.  And  when  I  have  purged   my   Church,  I  will  go  to  that 
nation  called  the  United  States,  and  I  will  purge  her  also ;    for  I 
will  not  leave  anything  alive  in  that  land  but   the  pure  in   heart ; 
for  that  nation  is  ripe  for  the  harvest,  and  I  will  cut  them   down 
now.  * 

6.  And  not  many  years   shall   pass  away  before  my   people 


THE    DESTRUCTION    OF    IDOLATROUS    PEOPLE.  41 

shall  return  to  the  land  of  promise  ;  for  I  will  go  before  them  and 
fight  their  battles. 

7.  And  a  temple  shall  be  built  in  that  land;  and  I  will  make 
my  appearance  in  that  temple  from  time  to  time ;  but  I  will  not 
give  any  endowments,  under  the  fullness  of  the  holy  priesthood,  in 
this  place ;  for  my  saints  shall  not  remain  here  long — this  is  not 
the  place  for  them. 

8  And  when  I  shall  have  taken  my  people  back  to  that  land, 
I  will  give  unto  my  servant  Joseph  power  to  write  a  law  which 
shall  govern  the  nations  of  the  earth ;  and  they  shall  abide  it,  or 
be  cut  off  from  the  earth.  And  from  that  time,  I  will  go  forth 
from  nation  to  nation,  cutting  off  everything  that  opposes  my 
plans,  until  I  shall  have  utterly  wasted  away  the  heathen  nations. 

9.  And  it  shall  come  to  pass  that,  in  her  turn,  I  will  visit  the 
nation  of  Great  Britain ;  and  I  will  purge  out  of  her  everything 
that  offends ;  for  this  is  the  day  of  my  power.  And  I  will  be 
present  with  my  servant  Joseph,  and  speak  to  him  mouth  to  mouth, 
whenever  it  is  necessary,  until  his  mission  is  ended.  For  I  am 
the  Lord,  and  I  have  spoken  these  words.  Even  so.  Amen  and 
Amen. 


THE  DESTRUCTION  OF  IDOLATROUS  MEMBERS  OF 

THE  OLD  ORGANIZATION 'OF  THE  CHURCH 

OF  JESUS  CHRIST. 


No.   31.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  3ist,  1860. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts,  even  the  Eternal  Father, 
and   I   speak  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,  through  mine   Only 
Begotten  Son. 

2.  Oh,  how  my  wrath  is  kindled  against  these  idolatrous  peo- 
ple !     What  can  I  do  with  them  ?     They  are  innocently  led  away 
from  me.    WThat  can  I  do  with  them  !  I  will  now  make  known  unto 
you  what  I  will  do  with  them.     I  will  send  my  holy  messengers 
to  them,  and  they  shall  hold  them  by  a  power  that  those  people 
do  not  understand,  until  my  wrath  shall  be  over,  and    I  shall  have 
cut  off  all  those  who  are  worthy  of  death,  and  I   will  not   be  long 
about  it. 


42         THE  DESTRUCTION  OF  IDOLATROUS  PEOPLE. 

3.  Therefore,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  finish  up  your  writing  as 
soon  as  you  can,  and  hold  yourself  in  readiness ;  for  I  will,  shortly, 
make  a  breach.     I  shall  be  ready  as  soon  as  you  Avill  be.     I  am 
waiting  even  now  for  you ;   and  if  you  do  not  believe  me  now, 
you  soon  will  believe  me.     And  when  you  are  ready,  try  me ;  and 
if  I  do  not  satisfy  your  feelings,  then  I  will  bear  the  blame. 

4.  You  need  not  to  think  that  you  can  make  anything  of  those 
men  to  whom  I  have  sent  a  warning  voice ;    for  they  will  not  come 
to  my  terms  in  this  life ;   therefore,  I   have   concluded  to   move 
them  out  of  the  way;  even  as  I  have   before   spoken   in   former 
revelations. 

5.  Can  I  submit  to  let  the  devil  destroy  my  Church?     No,  I 
cannot.     I  have  power  to  accomplish  my  own  purposes ;   and  that 
you  shall  soon  see  to  your  heart's  content. 

6.  And  I  say  unto  you,   watch ;   for  you  are   surrounded  by 
enemies  that  thirst  for  your  blood ;   but  they  shall  have  no  power 
over  you,  for  I  will  hold  them  in  mine  almighty  hand. 

7.  You  are  guarded  by  the  hosts  of  heaven.     They  are  con- 
tinually around  you,  guarding  you  from   your  enemies.     Although 
you  do  not  see  them  always,  yet  you  are  surrounded  by  them  con- 
tinually, and  you  need  not  to  fear ;  for  the  man  that   shall  ap- 
proach   you   to  lay    violent   hands  upon  you,   shall   die  in  your 
presence. 

8.  And  it  is  my  will  that  all  those  who  know  anything  about 
me,  should  place  the  utmost   confidence  in  me  :    for  I    will  not 
betray  it. 

9.  And,  again,  I  say  unto  you,  that  you  shall  not  mourn  over 
those  men  whom  I  placed  over  my  flock ;    for  you  have  done  your 
duty  to  them.     I  must  either  cut  them   off,  or  give  up  to  them, 
and  let  them  do  their  own  will ;    and  this  I  cannot  allow.     I  must 
save  my  Church ;    for  the  pure  in  heart  have  a  claim  upon  me — I 
cannot  forsake  them. 

10.  And  inasmuch  as  you  have  desired  to  know  of  me  as  to 
the  course  that  you  shall  persue  with  my  people,  as  touching  their 
deliverance,  until  I  shall  place  the   rod   in  your  hands,  you  shall 
raise  your  right  arm  and  give  the  command,  and  that  shall  answer 
as  though  the  rod  was  in  your  hand ;   but  I  will  soon  place  it  in 
your  hand ;   even  as  soon  as  you  will  be  ready  to  use  it.     Remem- 


TO    THE    PROPHET    JOSEPH    MORRIS.  43 

ber  that  I  am  with  you — mine  eye  is  upon  you  for  good.  And 
it  is  my  will  that  you  should  instruct  those  men  with  whom  I  have 
made  you  acquainted ;  for  you  will  need  their  assistance  when 
you  commence  the  work. 

I  will  give  unto  you  no  mure  at  this  time.  I  am  the  Eternal 
Father ;  even  the  Father  of  Jesus  Christ,  through  whom  I  speak 
unto  you.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION  TO  THE    PROPHET,  JOSEPH    MORRIS. 


No.  32.  WEBER,  UTAH,  January  6th,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Alpha  and  Omega,  the  beginning  and 
the  end.     And  I  am  come  to  make  known  unto  you  those  things 
which  you  desire  to  know  of  me. 

2.  Why  are  you  so  faithless   in  my  word?     I  am  really  sur- 
prised at  you.     Have  I  not  blessed  you  above  all  other  men  that 
dwell  upon  the   face   of  the  earth?     I  am  sorry  that  I  have  to 
reprove  you  for  your  unbelief  and  lack  of  confidence  in  me.     If  I 
had  ever  given   you   cause   for  this,   I  would  willingly  bear  the 
blame ;  but  you  know  that  I  have  never  given  you  the  least  cause. 
Why,  then,  should  you  insult  me  in  such  a  manner  as  you  do?     I 
have   rights,    as    well    as   you    have;  and   when    my  feelings  are 
wounded,  I  can  feel  as  well  as  you  can.     I  am  ready  to  meet  you 
upon   any  just  ground ;  and  I  can  prove  to  you  that  I  have  never 
failed  to  fullfil  my   promises  in  any  one  thing.     And  now,  I  call 
upon   you  to  meet   me   and   let  us  have  a  settling,  and  if  you  can 
prove   one  case  in  which  I  have  failed  to  fullnll  my  promises,  then 
I  will  bear  the  blame  forever,  and   you   will  be  clear ;  but  if  you 
cannot  do  this,  you  will  be  under  condemnation. 

3.  And  if  you  do  not  stop  insulting  me  in  such  a  manner  as 
you  have   done,   I   will  greatly  chasten  you  for  your  follies.     You 
know  the  promises  which  I  have  made  unto  you,  and  why  do  you 
not  exercise  faith  in  them  ?     You  know  that  I   am   working  with 
you  continually ;  and  you  also  know  the  state  of  this,    my  people, 
even  as  I  do.     Then  why  do  you  act  so  strangely  ? 

4.  And,  inasmuch  as  you  know  that  you  are  not  ready  for  me 


44        MANNER    OF    SEALING    THE    PROPHET    AND    PROPHETESS. 

to  commence  the  work,  why  cannot  you  rest  satisfied  until  you  are 
ready?  I  have  told  you  to  get  ready  and  start  the  work;  and  if  I 
am  not  ready  at  that  time,  then  you  can  insult  me  as  much  as  you 
like,  and  I  will  never  complain  about  it.  I  know  my  duty,  and  I 
will  do  it  without  being  driven  to  it.  I  have  as  much  love  and 
affection  for  these  afflicted  people  as  you  have. 

5.  You  have  felt  grieved  in  your  feelings  at  me  for  permitting 
those  men  to  continue  sealing  in  opposition  to  my  command ;  you 
have  desired  in  your  heart  that  I  should  cut  them   off  when  they 
stand  before  the  altar;  but  I   have  concluded  to  cut  them  off  in 
another  way ;  for  I  will  cut  them  off  all  at  once.     When  I  begin  I 
will  finish ;  for  I  do  despise  them  in  my  heart. 

6.  And  again,  I  say  unto  you,  wind  up  your  affairs  as  soon  as 
you  can,  and  when  you   are  ready  I   will  be  ready  also.     It  may 
seem,  to  you,  almost  impossible  for  me  to  clear   your  way ;  but  I 
will  do  it  in  one  day.     Oh  !  the  woe  and  lamentation  that  will  be 
witnessed  at  that  time !  for  there  is  not  a  heart  that  will  not  be 
penetrated. 

I  now  add  no  more.  I  am  he  whose  words  are  quick  and 
powerful — sharper  than  a  two-edged  sword — even  Jesus  Christ. 
Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


MANNER    OF    SEALING    THE    PROPHET    AND 
PROPHETESS  FOR  TIME  AND  ETERNITY. 


No.   33.  WEBER,  UTAH,  January  yth,   1861. 

1.  THE  prophet  shall  express  these  words:  My  dearly  beloved 
bride,  I,  the  prophet  of  the  Lord,  having  chosen  you,   according 
to  your  birthright,  to  be  my   wife   for  time   and   all  eternity,  give 
unto  you  my  hand  and  heart  in   a  marriage  covenant,  according 
to  the  holy  order  of  heaven ;   and  swear,  in  the  presence  of  the 
Father,  and  of  the  Son,  that  I  will  be  a  true  and   faithful  husband 
unto  you. 

2.  The  prophetess  shall  then  express  these  words :     My  dearly 
beloved  bridegroom,  I,  having  chosen  you  to  be  my  husband  for 
time  and  for  all  eternity,  give  unto  you  my  hand   and  heart  in   a 


WILLIAM    KENDELL.  45 

marriage  covenant,  according  to  the  holy  order  of  heaven ;  and 
swear,  in  the  presence  of  the  Father,  and  of  the  Son,  that  I  will 
be  a  kind  and  faithful  wife  unto  you. 

3.  The  prophet  and  prophetess  will  then  kiss  the  written  word 
of  the  Lord,  and  each  other ;  and  their  names  shall  be  recorded 
in  a  book  set  apart  for  that  purpose.  I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even 
so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION  CONCERNING  WILLIAM  KENDELL. 


No.  34.  WEBER,  UTAH,  January  i4th,  1861. 

BEHOLD,  I   am  the  Lord  of  Hosts,  and  I  speak  unto  you,  my 
servant  Joseph,  concerning  my  servant  William  Kendell. 

2.  I  have  looked  down  upon  him,  and  I  have  noticed   him  in 
all  his  movements   in   my  Church  from  the   beginning.      I  have 
beheld  the  integrity  of  his  heart,  and  when  he  has  been  surrounded 
by  darkness  I  have  held  him  by  my  power.     And   now  I   have  a 
place  prepared  for  him  in  my  Church;  and,  inasmuch  as  he  has 
seen   great   darkness,   he   shall  witness  great  light ;  for  his  heart  is 
honest   before   me.     He  need  not  to  fear  nor  to  be  faint-hearted ; 
but  let  him  place  his  confidence  in  me,  and  I  will   not  betray   it. 
I   know  the  intentions  of  his  heart,  and  while  he  trusts  in  me,  he 
shall  never  be  confounded ;  for  I  will  be  with  him. 

3.  Let  him   settle  his   mind  and  prepare  himself  for  a  great 
work ;  for  he   is  an  heir  to  the  holy  priesthood,  and  his  lineage  is 
that  of   Joseph   who  was  sold  into   Egypt.     And  if  he  is  faithful 
before    me,    no  privilege  shall  be   denied  him.     I   will  open  his 
mouth   and  he   shall  have  a  fluency    of  speech,  and  bring   many 
thousands  to  a  knowledge  of  the  truth.     He  shall  go  from    nation 
to  nation,  preaching  my  gospel,  and  he  shall  seal  up  the  destinies 
of  nations.     He  shall  live  upon  the  earth  as  long  as   he    desires, 
and  he  shall  be  satisfied. 

4.  And,  inasmuch  as  his  partner  in  life  has  been  attacked  by 
an  evil  spirit,  which  has  greatly  afflicted  her,  let  both  him  and  her 
rest  assured  that  I  will  soon  release  her  from  it ;  and  I  will  grant 
unto  her  eternal  life.     I  am  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and 
Amen. 


46  THE    FIRST    TEST. 

THE  FIRST  TEST. 


No.   35.  WEBER,    UTAH,  January   i6th,   1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Alpha  and  Omega,  even  Jesus  Christ, 
the  Son  of  the  Eternal  Father ;   the  same  whose  blood  was  shed 
for  the  sins  of  the  world,  that  he  might  save  as  many  as  his  Father 
hath  placed  within  his  power. 

2.  I  am  come  to  make  known  unto  you,  my  servant   Joseph, 
my  will  concerning  this,  my  people,  and  the  course  which   you 
shall  take  with  them ;    for  the  test  is  near  at  hand.     And   let  all 
those  who  understand  my  plans,  trust  in  me,  and  they  shall  soon 
be  satisfied.     They  may  be  surrounded  by  enemies ;   but   not  a 
hair  of  their  heads  shall  be  hurt ;    for  I  will  surround  them  as  by 
a  wall  of  fire. 

3.  And  it  is  my  will  that  you  should  gather  together  all  those 
\o   whom    you  have  made  known  my  purposes  concerning    this 
my  people.     And  when  they  are  gathered  together,  I  will  speak 
to  them,  and  make  my  will  known  unto  them,   as  touching  the 
course  which  they  shall  persue  in    connection  with  you ;    for  I 
have  chosen  them.     I  am  the  Lord. 

4.  And,  again,  I   say  unto  you,  that  it   is  my   will  that  you 
should  remain  where  you  are  until  I  shall  have   cleared  your  way ; 
for  I  have  concluded  to  do  it  speedily.     And  when  your  enemies 
appear  to  crowd  upon  you,  be  calm  in  your  mind,  and  do  not  let 
your  feelings  be  ruffled ;    for  your  enemies  shall  be  as  straws   in 
your  way. 

5.  And,  again,  it  is  my  will  that  you  should  hold  yourself  in 
readiness,  and  do  not  be  faithless.     I  shall  be  ready  when  you 
are — never  fear.     It  is  my  business  to  lead  my  Church  triumph- 
antly over  all  its  enemies.      Do  you  think  that  I  shall  forsake  my 
Church,  and  let  the  destroyer  take  all,  after  having  given  my   life 
for  it?  What  think  you  of  this?  Do  not  act  so  strangely,  as  though 
you  knew  nothing  about  me.     You  know  that  I   cannot   fail  to 
fulfill  my  promises. 

6.  And,  inasmuch  as  you  have  desired  to  see  me  face  to  face, 
and  to  converse  with  me,   you  shall   soon  have  that  privilege.     I 
would  have  met  with  you  before  this  time,  if  I  had  had  a  place  where 


TO     THE    PROPHET.  47 

I  could  have  met  with  you.  But  I  will  soon  place  you  in  a 
position  where  I  can  speak  mouth  to  mouth  with  you ;  for  I  know 
that  you  wish  to  see  me. 

7.  And  as  concerning  my  servant  Richard  Cook,  it  is  my  will 
that  he  should  hold  his  office  as  the  bishop  in  this  place.  He 
shall  not  give  up  to  those,  mine  enemies,  who  are  seeking  to  move 
him  out  of  his  place ;  and  I  will  sustain  him.  And  as  for  those 
men  who  have  come  to  this  place  to  fight  against  me,  I  will  visit 
them  with  sudden  death ;  for  I  will  send  an  angel  to  them,  and 
he  shall  cut  tnem  off.  They  shall  know  that  they  cannot  stand 
against  me.  And  I  say  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,  that  you 
shall  open  your  mouth  and  curse  them,  and  I  will  fulfill  it  when 
they  have  left  this  place. 

I  now  add  no  more.  I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen 
and  Amen. 


TO  THE  PROPHET. 


No.  36.  •   WEBER,  UTAH,  January  lyth,  1861 

BEHOLD,  verily  saith  the  Lord  unto  you,  my  son,  set  yourself 
strong  against  mine  enemies ;  for  the  work  has  now  commenced, 
and  it  will  continue  until  I  have  put  all  enemies  under  my 
feet ;  and  you  shall  go  about  your  work  without  any  fear.  You 
have  complained  to  me  for  not  giving  unto  you  a  manifestation  of 
my  power.  How  could  I  do  this  before  I  had  placed  you  in  a 
position  for  it  ?  As  soon  as  I  can  give  unto  you  a  manifestation  of 
power,  I  will  do  so.  You  will  soon  need  it ;  therefore,  stand  to 
your  post  like  a  man,  and  be  not  faint-hearted,  and  I  will 
strengthen  you  for  the  work ;  and  I  will  make  your  enemies  flee 
before  you  as  chaff  before  the  wind.  And  when  the  day  has  come 
for  you  to  give  the  command,  I  will  make  it  known  unto  you ;  and 
at  that  time  all  doubt  will  leave  you,  and  you  will  be  satisfied  at 
once.  And  I  will  influence  you  continually,  and  I  will  stand  by 
your  side,  and  put  words  in  your  mouth,  and  your  oppression  shall 
soon  leave  you,  and  you  shall  never  have  to  complain  against  me 
after  I  have  once  started.  I  have  pitied  thee  when  I  have  seen 
thee  weighed  down  with  oppression;  but  I  will  release  thee  at 


48  SELECTION    OF    MEN    TO    THE    APOSTLESHIP. 

once.     I  will  now  take  thy  burden ;  therefore,  rest  thyself,  and  be 
satisfied. 

I  now  add  no  more.     I  am  he  that  holds  the  keys  of  death  and 
hell;  even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


CURSINGS,  AND  THE  SELECTION  OF   MEN  TO  THE 
APOSTLESHIP. 


No.  37.  WEBER,  UTAH,  January  2oth,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  verily  I  say   unto  you,   my    servant  Joseph,  that, 
when  you  curse  those  men  whom  I  commanded  you  to  curse,  you 
shall  raise  your  right  arm  towards  heaven,  and  express  these  words  : 
Oh  God,  the   eternal  Father,   I,   thy  servant,  raise   my  right  arm 
towards  heaven,  and,  having  been    called    by  thee  to   hold   the 
sealing   and   binding   power   upon   the    earth,    by  virtue    of  my 
authority,  and  in  the  name  of  thy  Son,  Jesus  Christ,  I  seal  a  curse 

upon and ,  which  shall  be  sudden 

death.     And  I  command  the  destroying  angel  to  follow  them  up, 
and  lay  them  low.     And  I  pronounce  this  curse  upon  them  in  the 
name   of  the  Father,   and   of  the  Son,   and  of  the  Holy  Ghost. 
Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 

2.  And  after  you  have  cursed  those  men,  you  shall  then  curse 
the  chief  shepherds  of  my  flock,  beginning  at  the  first  of  them; 
and  when  you  have   done  this,  you  shall  then  curse  all  the  false 
shepherds  of  my  flock. 

3.  And,  again,  I  say  unto  you,  that  you  shall  curse  all  your 
enemies  in  this  place ;  for  you  have  enemies  here  who  thirst  for 
your  blood ;  but  whom  I  will  speedily  destroy.     Before   I  do  this, 
however,  I  will  break  them  up,  and  confuse  them — and  I   will   so 
set  them  one  against  another,  that  they  shall   have  no  power  to 
unite  themselves  against  you ;  and  you  shall  pass  on  without  any 
difficulty,  until  I  clear  your  way  so  that  you  can  go  and  take  your 
place.     And  I  will  do  this  at  once.     And  when  I  have  done  with 
your  enemies  here,  I  will  cut  them  off  forthwith. 

4.  And,  inasmuch  as  I  have  committed  unto  you  the  keys   of 
my    kingdom  on  the  earth,  it  is  necessary  that  there  should  be  an 


SELECTION     OF     MEN    TO    THE    APQSTLESHIP.  49 

understanding  between  us,  as  touching  matters  of  importance.  I 
do  not  claim  the  authority  to  do  anything  upon  the  earth,  only 
through  you;  for  I  shall  work  according  the  law,  as  I  am  com- 
manded by  my  Father,  and  without  law  I  shall  do  nothing.  And 
I  will  make  known  unto  you  my  law  at  all  times  when  it  shall 
become  necessary  to  do  so;  therefore,  in  all  that  you  do,  regulate 
yourself  according  to  my  word;  and,  if  you  will  do  this,  I  am 
bound  to  fulfill  your  words  to  the  very  letter.  If  I  do  not,  I  shall 
have  broken  the  law  of  the  holy  priesthood,  which  I  cannot  do. 

5.  You  need  not,  any  more,  to  fear;  for   I  will  now  take  your 
burden  upon  myself,  and  I  will  see  if  I  cannot  bear  it.     My  heart 
has  been  pained   when  I  have  looked  down  upon  thee,  and  heard 
thy    groans  ;  but  thy   oppression  is   nearly   at  an  end.     Thou  art 
beloved    above    all  men  for  thy  patience,   thy  virtue,   and  thine 
integrity ;  for  there  is  none  like  unto  thee  upon  the  earth ;  and  the 
nations  thereof  shall  feel  thy  rod. 

6.  And    although    the    shepherds    of  my    flock   have    proven 
treacherous  to    me,   yet  I  have  selected  out  a  number  of  faithful 
men,  whom  I  will  give  unto  thee;  and  they  will    be  faithful  unto 
thee,  and    thou  shalt  ordain  them  to  the  apostleship;   and  thou 
shalt  have  twenty-four  apostles. 

7.  And   I  will   make  the   nations  bend  to  thee,   and,   at  thy 
command,  the  earth  shall  reel  to  and  fro  like  a  drunken    man. 
And  the  nations  of  the  earth  shall  abide  the  law  that  shall  come 
forth  from  thy  mouth,  or  be  cut  off;  for  I,  the  Lord,  have  spoken 
it.     And  whomsoever  thou  shalt  bless,  I  will  bless ;  and  whomso- 
ever thou  shalt  curse,  I  will  curse ;  for  I  am  one  with  thee. 

8.  And  it  is  my  will  that  all  those  who  know  me  shall  uphold 
thee    with  all  their   power.     And  I  will  send  unto  them  the  com- 
forter, and  he  shall  lead  them  into  all  truth.     And  I  will  give  unto 
them  a  powerful  testimony,  for  I    have  called  them ;  therefore,  let 
them  stand  firm  to  the  truth  which  shall  make  them  free.     And  I 
will  influence  those  men  who  are    now  absent  from  you,  and  they 
shall    come   forth   to  you    when  they  are    needed.     And  let  my 
servant  Richard  Cook  be  strong,  and  I  will  be  with  him,  and  put 
words  into  his  mouth  at  all  times,  when  it  becomes  necessary  for 
me  to  do  so. 

I  jnow  add  no  more  at  this  time.     I  am  he  who  holds  the  keys 
of  death  and  hell — even  Jesus  Christ.   Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


50  JUDGMENTS    OF    GOD    UPON    THE   WICKED. 

THE    JUDGMENTS    OF    GOD    UPON    THE    WICKED, 
AND  THE  DESTRUCTION  OF  THE  INNOCENT 
WHO  ARE  DECEIVED. 


No.   38.  WEBER,  UTAH,  January  25th,   1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  he  whose  words  are   quick  and  powerful, 
sharper  than  a  two-edged  sword  ;   the  same  whose  blood  was  shed 
upon  the  cross  for  the  sins  of  the  world ;    who  groaned  upon  the 
cross  and  bore  the  shame  of  the  wicked,  that  he  might  save  those 
who  were  heirs  to  salvation;   and  having  conquered  death,  hell, 
and  the   grave,  is  now   interceding  with  his   Father  in  behalf  of 
those  whom  he  shed  his  blood  to  save. 

2.  And  I   am  come  to   make  known  unto  you,    my  servant 
Joseph,    those    things  which   you  have   desired  to  know   of  me. 
Why  do  you  not  place  confidence  in  me?     You  know  that  I  am 
with  you.      You  have  nothing  to  fear.     I  am  all  sufficient  for  your 
enemies.     And  I  am  continually  watching  over  ycu,  and  holding 
your  enemies  off  you,  and  they  cannot   come  upon  you   until   I 
permit  them  to  do  so,  and  I  will  hold  them  until  I  am  ready  to 
make  a  breach ;    and  when  I  am   ready,  I  will  cut  them  off  sud- 
denly.    You  need  not  to  fear  that  you  will  be  injured  by  them ; 
for  I  will  take  care   of  you.     Your  work  is  not  yet   done.     You 
shall   never  be  slain  by  an   enemy.     Therefore,  let  your  mind  be 
at  rest,  and  make  your  calculations  for  speedily   commencing  the 
work. 

3.  I  will  stop  the  wicked  course   of  this  people.     They  shall 
not  go  on  as  they  are  going.     Oh  how  my  heart  is  pained  when  I 
look  down  upon  them,  and  see  their  situation.     They  know  not 
what  they  are  doing.     They  take  the  wrong  for  right,  and  right 
for  wrong.     What   can   I  justly  do  with  them?     I  do  not  want  to 
destroy  the  innocent  with  the  guilty ;   but  what  can  I  do  ?     I  shall 
be  compelled  to  cut  off  many  innocent  people  who,   being   de- 
ceived, I  cannot  undeceive — this  I  cannot  avoid  ;   but  I  will  save 
as  many  of  them  as  will  hearken  to  and  obey  my  word.     And  I 
will  take  this  matter  into  my  own  hands,  and  I  will  speedily  bear 
it   off.     And  I   will  be  present  at  the  time   wnen  I    shall    have 
brought  these  things  to  a  head,  and  then  I  will  manifest  my  power. 


JOHN    FIRTH.  51 

4.  And  as  soon  as  those   chief  shepherds  of  my  flock  have 
made  the  first  move  against  you,  I  make  the  second  move  against 
them ;    and  I  will  cut  them  off  instantly.     And  from  them    I   will" 
go  to  others,  and  cut  them  off  also — even   all   who  stand  in   your 
way,  and  mine  enemies  shall  see   that  I   am  more   powerful  than 
they  are.     And  until  this  matter  shall  be  brought  to  a  head,  I  will 
hold  off  from  you  all  other  surrounding  influences.    And  no  person 
shall  have  any   power  to  approach  you,   or  to  injure  you.     You 
shall  pass  on  without   any  fear.     And  as   concerning  the   curses 
which  you  have  uttered,  I  have  heard  them,  and  I  will  fulfill  them 
at  the  time  appointed. 

5.  And  as  concerning  my  servant  Richard  Cook,  let  him  not 
be  cast   down.     He  suffers  fear  and  unbelief  to  creep  upon  him, 
which  is  grievous  for  me  to  see.     There  is  no  cause  for  this.     He 
has  never  yet  suffered  any  loss  by  trusting  in  me ;  let  him,  there- 
fore, repent  of  his  follies,  and   lay  hold  of    my   promises,  and  let 
him  act  the  part  of  a  man.     I   have   poured  out   great  blessings 
upon  him,  and  let  him  prove  himseif  worthy  of  them.     I  am  dis- 
pleased with  him.     If  he  will  do  my  will,  let  him  place  the  utmost 
confidence  in  me,  and  I  will  not  betray  it ;  for  my  wrath  is  kindled 
against  none  so  much  as  it  is  against  those  who  confess  not   my 
hand  in  all  things ;    for  without  faith  it  is  impossible  to   please  me. 

I  now  add  no  more.  Let  this  suffice  for  the  present,  and  I  will 
make  known  more  unto  you  hereafter.  I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even 
so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION  CONCERNING  JOHN  FIRTH. 


No.  39.  WEBER,  UTAH,  January  2yth,  1861. 

1.  VERILY,  I  say  unto  you,  my  Son,  that  inasmuch  as  you  have 
inquired    of   me    to   know  my  will  concerning  my  servant  John 
Firth,  I  will  make  it  known  unto  you.     I  have  looked  down  upon 
him,  and  I  have  seen  the  darkness  which  has  surrounded  him,  and 
when  I  have  seen  him  labor  under  it,  I  have  pitied  him ;  but  with 
him  it  is  now  at  an  end. 

2.  He  is  greatly  beloved  by  me  for  his  humility,  his  faith,  and 


52     LANGUAGE DESTRUCTION  OF  WICKED  SHEPHERDS. 

his  honesty  of  purpose — and  he  shall  be  made  strong,  and  do  a 
mighty  work  upon  the  earth ;  for  he  is  an  heir  to  the  high  and  holy 
priesthood — which  priesthood  holds  the  sealing  and  binding  power. 
His  lineage  is  that  of  Ephraim  ;  and  I  have  prepared  a  place  for 
him  in  my  kingdom ;  for  his  calling  shall  be  to  go  from  nation  to 
nation  and  preach  my  gospel. 

3.  And,  in   a  day  to  come,  he  shall    become  a  counselor  to 
those  who  shall    be  ordained  to  the  office  of  apostles,  and  I  will 
open  his  mouth  and  loose  his  tongue,  and  he  shall    become  fluent 
in  speech.     Let  him  prepare  himself  for  the  work  which  lies  before 
him ;  for  I  shall  soon  need  his  assistance  in  connection  with  others; 
therefore,  if  he  will  be  my  friend,  let  him  hold  himself  in  readiness 
for  that  which  is  coming,  and,  in  the  time  of  trouble,  I  will    be  his 
friend  also. 

4.  The  great  last  test  is  near  at  hand,  and  I  now  need  friends, 
and  to  those  who  will    be  my  friends  now,  I  will    be   a  friend  in  a 
day  to  come — none  need  to  be  afraid  to  put  their  trust  in  me,  for 
I  will  not  betray  their  confidence. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.     I  am  he  that  was,   and   is,  and 
is  to   come — even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


LANGUAGE,     AND     THE     DESTRUCTION     OF      THE 
WICKED    SHEPHERDS. 


No.  40.  WEBER,  UTAH,  January  3oth, 

1.  VERILY,  I  say  unto  you,   my  son,  that  inasmuch  as  there 
has  been  some  dissatisfaction  manifested  by  some,  concerning  the 
language  which  I,  the  Lord,  have  made  use   of  in   the   revelations 
and  addresses  which  I   have  given,  I   will   satisfy  the  minds  of  all 
upon  this  subject. 

2.  I  have  taken  the  liberty  of  expressing  myself  in  the  plainest 
of  language,  that  all  might  understand.     I  do  not  imitate  the  great 
men  of  the  earth  (so  called);  for  their  wisdom  is   an   abomination 
in  my  sight — they  take  wrong  for  right,  and  right  for  wrong — they 
are  filled  with  vainness — they  know  not  what  they  are  doing.     And 
as  for  the  language  which  they  speak,  it  is  not   correct.     There  is 


LANGUAGE DESTRUCTION  OF  WICKED  SHEPHERDS.      53 

not  a  correct  language  now  spoken  upon  the  earth;  but,  in  a  day 
to  come,  I  will  give  unto  my  people  a  correct  language. 

3.  And,  inasmuch  as  there  have  been  some  disputations  about 
the  word  "isolate,"  I  will  explain  the  meaning  of  that  word,  as  it  is 
understood  in  heaven : — It  is  to  elevate,  or  place  on  high.     The 
world  does  not  know  the  correct  meaning  of  that  word ;  therefore, 
let  all  be  satisfied. 

4.  And  I  say  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,  that  you  shall  not 
alter  the  sense  of  any   revelation  that  I    have  given,  or  that  I  shall 
hereafter  give. 

5.  I  am,  indeed,  surprised  at  you,  my  son,    for  yo\ir  lack   of 
confidence  in  me.     I  am  holding  your  enemies  off  you;  this  you 
know.     You  are  afraid  that  I  shall  forsake, you ;  but  you  may  rest 
yourself  satisfied  that  I   will  never  leave  you;  neither  can  your 
enemies  injure  you. 

6.  And  you  shall  soon  be  called  to  give  the  word  of  command, 
and  then  you  will  be  satisfied  at  once ;  and  you  shall   have  things 
your  own  way. 

7.  You  have  greatly  desired  to  see  me,  I  know,  and  you  shall 
soon  have  the  privilege. 

8.  I  will  speedily  stop  the  course  of  those  wicked  shepherds 
of  my  flock — their  names  shall  not  grate  on  your  ears  but  a  few 
days    longer.     These    afflicted  people   shall    not  long  have  those 
wicked  men  to  look  to,  for  I  will  speedily  destroy  those  shepherds, 
and  leave  my  people  without  a  shepherd  to  look  to,  until    I  shall 
place  others  over  them. 

I  now  add  no  more.     I  am  he  that  was,  and  is,  and  is  to  come 
— even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amem. 


THE  CLOUD  NOW  GATHERING. 


No.   41.  WEBER,  UTAH,  February  2nd,   1861. 

1.  VERILY  I  say  unto  you,  my  servant,  that  inasmuch   as  the 
cloud  is  now  gathering,  and  must  shortly  burst,  it  is  necessary  that 
you  should  understand  my  will  upon  this  matter. 

2.  You  know  that  I  have  been  with  you  from  the  time  that   I 


54  THE    CLOUD    NOW    GATHERING. 

first  called  you  until  now,  and  no  person,  as  yet,  has  ever  had  the 
power  to  hurt  you.  You  know  that  if  I  had  not  preserved  you 
from  your  enemies,  they  would  have  slain  you  before  this  time  ; 
and  knowing,  as  you  do,  that  I  have  always  been  with  you,  why 
cannot  you  place  confidence  in  me  now?  I  have  always  worked 
according  to  the  law,  and  I  cannot  deviate  from  it. 

3.  What  would  you  have  me  to  do?     I  am  willing  to  do  any- 
thing that  lies  in  my  power  to  minister  comfort  unto  you.      I  know 
that  you  are  burdened  with  this  idolatrous   people,  and   you  wish 
me  to  clear  both  them  and  their  shepherds  out  of  your  way  with- 
out troubling  you  with  them.      And  inasmuch  as  you  desire  it,  I 
will  make  unto  you  a  promise,   that   your  enemies  shall   have   no 
power  over  you  ;    but  I,  will  deliver  this  people  into  your  hands, 
and  what  you  do,  I  will  acknowledge. 

4.  And  as  for  those   shepherds,  they  have  forgotten  all   that 
which  they  once  knew,  and  they  now  know  nothing  about  me.     They 
are  wholly  led  by  the  devil.     And  inasmuch  as  I  could   not  make 
them  hear  me,  I  will  make  them  fear  me.     As  I  have  said  unto 
you  before,  so  I  say  unto  you  again,  I  will  not  leave  one  of  their 
seed  alive.      I  will  clear  your  way  to  your  satisfaction.      I   will  cut 
off  everything  that   dwells  in   those  accursed  houses  which  have 
been  built  by  the  poor   of  my  people.     I  will  also  scatter  their 
flocks,  and  the  poor  of  my  people  shall  gather  them,  and  possess 
them ;    for  my  wrath  is  kindled  against  those   who  now   possess 
them.     And  I  say  unto  you  that  you  should  not  fear  your  enemies  ; 
but  remember  that  I  will  control  all  things  according  to  my  own 
will :    for  I  have  taken  the  matter  into  my  own  hands,  and  I  will 
carry  it  on  myself,  and  nothing  shall  go  wrong,  for  I   am  round 
about  my  people.     The  command  shall  soon  be  given  after  which 
I  will  commence  the   destruction  of  your  enemies ;   and  then   I 
will  go  on  from  conquering  to  conquer ;    and   I    will  lay  the  way 
open  for  you.      But  if  I  do  not  clear  your  way,  I  will  require  no 
more  at  your  hands. 

5.  Those  who  have  been  made    acquainted   with   my  plans, 
have  longed  to  see  a  manifestation  of  my    power,  and  they  shall 
soon  see  it  to  their  satisfaction.     Let  them  be  steadfast  in  me,  and 
know  that  I  am  with  them ;    and  if  they  will  be  true  to  me,   I  will 
be  true  to  them ;   but  if  they  prove  false  to  me,   I  will  cut  them 


WARNING    THE    INHABITANTS    OF    SOUTH    WEBER.  55 

off  instantly.     Those  who  seek  to  save  their  lives,  shall  lose  them ; 
for  I,  the  Lord,  despise  the  false  hearted. 

6.  And  as  for  my  servant  Richard  Cook,  let  him  be  strong, 
and  not  fear.     And  let  him  not  be  afraid  to  speak   boldly  those 
things  that  I  will  place  in  his  mouth,   for  I   will  be  present   with 
him.     And  let  him  hold  his  place,  and  I  will  uphold  him  :    and 
who  can  stay  my  hand?     Let  him  prove  me  in  this  thing;    for  I 
have  an  object  in  view  for   counselling  him  in  this  wise,  and    he 
will  know  the  secret  hereafter.     I  have  laid  my  plans,  and  I  am 
working  to  their  accomplishment ;  and,  when  the  test  is  over,  all 
will  be  satisfied. 

7.  I  now  close.     I  will  give  unto  you  more  hereafter.     I  am 
he  who  holds  in  his  hands  the  keys  of  death  and  hell ;    even  Jesus 
Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  LORD  ADVISES  THE  PROPHET  TO  PLACE 
MORE  CONFIDENCE  IN  HIM. 


No.  42.  WEBER,  UTAH,  February  6th,  1861. 

BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts,  even  Jesus  Christ,  and  I  am 
come  to  make  known  unto  you  those  things  which  you  have 
desired  to  know  of  me.  I  am  astonished  at  you  for  your  lack  of 
confidence  in  me.  What  is  the  cause  of  it?  Have  you  ever 
proved  me  false  in  one  thing?  You  know  that  you  have  not;  then 
it  is  your  duty  to  place  the  utmost  confidence  in  me.  You  know 
that  I  cannot  fail  to  fulfill  ^the  promises  which  I  have  made.  The 
influence  which  is  before  you  seems  too  great  for  you  to  strive 
against,  and  on  this  account  you  manifest  great  dissatisfaction 
with  me.  This  oppression  which  you  are  now  called  to  bear  I 
cannot  help.  I  have  done  everything  for  you  that  I  could  do. 
You  know  that  you  are  placed  in  a  position  where  you  have  to 
bear  oppression.  This  cannot  be  avoided.  I  know  what  oppres- 
sion is  as  well  as  you  do.  I  have  endured  everything  that  could 
have  been  placed  upon  man,  and  I  was  compelled  to  bear  it  or  all 
must  be  lost; -and  you  are  placed  in  a  similar  position.  Then 
why  do  you  murmur  at  your  fate?  Rise  up  and  stand  it  like  a 


56  THE    PROPHET    ADVISED. 

man,  and  I  will  be  with  you  continually,  and  stand  by  you.  I 
will  do  my  duty,  you  need  not  fear.  You  have  felt  dissatisfied 
with  me  for  suffering  this  matter  to  run  so  long,  but  it  is  all  right. 
I  am  working  to  the  point.  You  have  not  long  to  wait,  and  when 
my  presence  is  needed  I  will  be  there.  You  have  longed  to  see 
me,  and  you  have  not  long  to  wait.  You  have  also  felt  dissatisfied 
with  me  because  I  have  not  given  unto  you  the  power  of  your 
office.  I  have  given  it  unto  you,  but  you  have  never  yet  been 
placed  in  a  position  to  use  it.  You  will  find  that  you  have  the 
power  when  it  is  needed.  Oh,  then,  place  your  confidence  in  me, 
and  I  will  lead  you  safely  through  all  the  snares  of  your  enemies. 
It  will  be  woe  unto  them  that  set  themselves  against  you. 

And  as  concerning  those  men  who  now  stand  at  the  head  of 
my  Church :  They  have  now  turned  against  me,  and  they  have 
laid  their  plans  to  fight  against  me,  and  they  will  strive  to  break 
up  my  plans  which  I  have  laid  for  the  accomplishment  of  my 
purposes.  They  will  strive  to  divide  the  people  in  this  place  and 
to  remove  the  bishop  out  of  his  place :  and  I  will  meet  them  here, 
and  they  will  find  that  I  am  here.  I  will  reveal  a  secret  to  them 
that  will  satisfy  all.  I  have  tried  to  satisfy  them  by  word  of 
mouth,  but  it  is  no  use.  I  will  now  see  if  I  cannot  penetrate  them; 
therefore,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  get  yourself  ready  to  give  the 
command,  and  I  will  be  present  with  you.  At  that  time  I  will 
show  you  that  which  you  have  longed  to  see.  I  will  control  all 
things  to  your  satisfaction.  If  you  would  only  place  confidence 
in  me  you  would  set  my  feelings  at  rest  at  once.  You  must  place 
confidence  in  me.  I  require  it  at  your  hands.  Then  why  will  you 
not  do  the  thing  that  I  wish  you  to  do?  I  have  never  betrayed 
your  confidence,  and  why  cannot  you  try  me  ? 

And  as  concerning  my  servant  Rickard  Cook,  let  him  stand 
fast  to  his  place,  and  I  am  with  him,  and  he  shall  see  where  the 
power  lies.  And  as  concerning  the  rest  of  those  that  know  my 
plans,  let  them  be  strong,  and  I  will  fight  their  battles.  They  may 
place  their  confidence  in  me  without  any  fear,  and  their  minds 
will  soon  be  at  rest. 

I  give  unto  you  no  more  at  present.  I  am  he  whose  word  is 
quick  and  powerful — sharper  than  a  two-edged  sword  —even  Jesus 
Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


INHABITANTS    OF    WEBER    WARNED.  57 

WARNING  TO  THE  INHABITANTS  OF  SOUTH  WEBER 
AGAINST  FIGHTING  THE  PEOPLE  OF  GOD. 


No.  43.  SOUTH  WEBER,  UTAH,  February  yth,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  verily,  verily,   thus   saith  the  Lord:     That,  inas- 
much as  the  first  test  is  now  near  at  hand,  and    must  commence 
in  this  place,  it  is  necessary  that  those  who  love  and  fear  me,  and 
who  are  trusting  in  me  for  salvation,  should  know  my  will  concern- 
ing them,  that  they  may  escape  my  wrath  and  save  their  lives. 

2.  I,    the    Lord,    have    sent   a  warning  voice  unto  the  chief 
shepherds  of  my  flock,    and  they  have  rejected  it,  and  are  now 
fighting  against  me ;    and  it  is  necessary  that  all    those  who  expect 
to  receive  eternal  life  should  know  this  fact.     Therefore,   let  them 
make  up  their  minds  as  to  which  side  they  are  going  to  take.     I 
feel  in  duty  bound  to  lay  this  matter  before  them,  and  then  they 
can  please  themselves  as  to  what  they  will   do ;  but,   if  they  take 
sides  against  you,  I  will  cut  them  off  suddenly,  for  those  who  fight 
against    you,   fight  against  me,  and  of  such  I  will  not  leave  alive 
one  person  in  this  place. 

3.  But  I  will  stand  side  by  side  with  you  in  this    place,  and  I 
will  give  unto  you  that  courage  which  it  will    be  necessary  for  you 
to  have  at  the  time  when  it  will  be  needed.     You  need  not  to  fear, 
for  I  am  not  far  from  you,  and  the  hosts  of  heaven,  also,  are  with 
me,  and   you   shall  see   them  to  your  satisfaction — you  shall  see 
them  go   out   to  battle,   and  they   shall  both  go  and  stop  at  your 
bidding.     I  will  make  the  nations  of  the  earth  tremble.     I  cannot 
penetrate   all  men  by  my  word,   but  I   will  do  it  by  my  power. 
You  shall  not  have  cause  to  murmur  against  me  but  a  short  time 
longer ;   therefore,   treasure  up   in  your  heart  these  things  which  I 
have  made  known  unto  you,  and  I  will  be  with  you  unto  the  end. 

I   am  the    Lord,  and  I  have  spoken  these  things.     Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


58  COMMANDED    TO    PREPARE    FOR    THE    FIRST    TEST. 

THE  PROPHET  AND  THE  SAINTS  COMMANDED  TO 
PREPARE  FOR  THE  FIRST  TEST. 


No.  44.  WEBER,  UTAH,  February  ioth,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  Jesus  Christ,  and  I  am  come  to  make  my 
will  known  unto  you  concerning  this  first  test,  which  is  now  at 
hand.     It  is  necessary  that  you  should    know  my  will  concerning 
this  matter.     What  is  the  reason  that  you  cannot  place  your  con- 
fidence in  me.''     You  keep   my  feelings   continually  ruffled,  and 
unless  you  place  confidence  in  me  I  cannot  work  with  you. 

2.  I   am  all   sufficient  for  your  enemies.     I  have  marked  out 
their   course,    and    I  will   make  them  walk  in  it.     They  can  do 
nothing,  save  that  which  I  permit  them  to  do.     I  shall  be  present 
with  you  to  influence  you  in  this  affair,  and  all  things  shall  be  con- 
trolled to  your  satisfaction.     You   are  greatly  afraid  that  I  shall 
neglect  you  at  that  time.     Do  you  not  know  that  I  have  been  with 
you  always,  even  from  the  beginning?     I  have  told  you  to  cite  one 
case  in  which  I  have  failed  to  fulfill  my  promise,  and  if  you  can 
do  this,  then  I  will  bear  the  blame ;  but  if  you  cannot  do  this,  you 
are  under  condemnation  for  having  insulted  me  in  the  manner  in 
which  you  have  done.     You  keep  my  feelings  continually  wounded 
by  your  insults.     I  will  do  everything  that  I  can  do  to   ease  your 
burden ;  and,  as  I    have  said  unto  you  before,  so  I  say  unto  you 
again,  when  you  need  my  presence,  you  shall  see  me.     You  com- 
plain of   me  because  I  have  not  of  late  shown  unto  you  the  hosts 
of  heaven ;  but   when  it   becomes  necessary   you   shall  see  them. 
Tell  me,  therefore,  what  you  require  of  me,  and,  if   I  can  do  so,  I 
will  grant  it  unto  you.     The  influence  of  that  which  lies  before  you 
greatly  oppresses  you  ;  but  I  can  move  that  out  of  your  way  in  one 
day.     I  have  striven  to  bring  this  matter  to  a  head,  and  as  soon  as 
possible  I  will  do  so. 

3.  And  as  concerning  those  men  whom  you  have  made  ac- 
quainted with  my  plans,  who  profess  to  be  my  friends,  it  is  necessary 
that  they  should  now  set  themselves  for  a  test.     They  have  longed 
to  see  it  come,  and  it  is   now  close   upon  them,  and  their  hearts 
will   pain  them  before  it  is  through.     They  have  longed  to  see  a 
manifestation  of  my  power,  and   they  shall  shortly  see  one.      Let 


THE    FIRST   TEST.  59 

them  stand  firm  by  me ;  let  them  stand  up  and  testify  to  the  truth 
of  those  things  which  I  have  made  known  unto  them  through  you; 
for  this  thing  I  require  of  them,  and  they  shall  be  endued  with  the 
power  my  of  spirit ;  and  if  they  will  do  those  things  which  I  have 
commanded  them  to  do,  I  will  be  with  them.  The  hosts  of  heaven 
shall  be  round  about  them,  and  not  a  hair  of  their  heads  shall  be 
hurt.  They  have  never  yet  seen  my  wonder-working  hand  made 
bare  ;  but  they  shortly  shall  see  it. 

4.  And,  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  that  inasmuch  as  you 
have  desired  to  know  of  me  what  course  you  shall  take  in  this 
matter,  I  will  make  my  will  known  unto  at  this  time.  I  will 
influence  you,  and  lead  you  in  the  way  that  I  wish  you  to  go.  I 
will  take  the  responsibiltty  of  the  work  upon  myself,  and  no  person 
shall  do  anything  save  that  which  I  shall  permit  them  to  do. 
Therefore,  let  all  be  diligent,  and  do  the  things  which  I  have 
commanded  them,  and  all  shall  be  well. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.  I  am  Jesus  Christ,  the  Son  of 
the  eternal  Father,  and  I  have  given  this  revelation  unto  my 
servant  Joseph,  according  to  the  ,  commandment  of  my  Father. 
Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  FIRST  TEST. 


No.  45.  WEBER,  UTAH,  February  nth,  1861. 

1.  VERILY,  thus  saith  the  Lord,  that,  inasmuch  as  you  have 
desired  to  know  of  me  as  to  the  manner  in  which  you  shall  act 
in  this  affair,  I   will   make  my  will  known   unto  you  upon   this 
matter. 

2.  I  am  with  you  all  the  day  long;    and  you  have  no  cause  to 
fear.     And  I  will  prepare  you  for  the  work  that  lies  before  you; 
and,  when  you  are  called  to  go  into  the  assembly  of  the  people,  I 
will  go  in  with  you,  and  stand  side  by  side  with  you,  and  you  shall 
speak  those  things  which  I  place  in  your  mouth.     I  will  also  sus- 
tain your  words,  and  I  will  make  them  take  every  word  that  flows 
from  your  mouth.     They   shall  find  out  that  they  cannot  have 
things  their  own  way ;   but  when  you  are  in  that  assembly  all  shall 


60     INABILITY    OF    MAN    TO    UNDERSTAND    THE    WAYS    OF    GOD. 

be  subject  unto  you.  Your  command  shall  be  obeyed  without 
fail.  You  shall  declare  yourself  the  prophet  of  this  people,  and  I 
will  sustain  your  words  in  all  things. 

3.  And  it  is  my  will  that  all  those  whom  you  have  made 
acquainted  with  my  plans  should  sustain  your  words  also,  and 
leave  the  result  in  my  hands,  and  they  will  be  satisfied.  And  as 
to  those  men  who  are  coming  to  this  place,  I  will  reveal  a  few 
things  to  them  here.  And  when  this  first  test  is  over,  all  my 
friends  will  be  satisfied.  Therefore,  let  all  be  strong  ;  for  I  am 
with  them.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


THE    INABILITY    OF    MAN    TO    UNDERSTAND    THE 

WAYS    OF  THE    LORD— JOHN  PARSON   AND 

ROBERT    FARLEY    COMMANDED  TO 

MOVE  TO  SOUTH  WEBER. 


No.  46.  WEBER,  UTAH,  February  i2th,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  he  whose  words  are   quick  and   powerful, 
sharper  than  a  two-edged  sword ;   the  same  who  groaned  upon  the 
cross ;  who  bore  the  shame  of  the  wicked  that  he  might  break  the 
barrier  of  the  tomb,  and  set  the  captive  free. 

2.  Be  it  known  unto  all  that  I   am   at   work,    and  that   I  will 
never  stay  my  hand  until    I    have  laid  all  mine  enemies  under  my 
feet.     Let  not  those  men  who  have  trusted  in  me  be  discouraged 
at  the  prospect  that  is  before  them ;  for  I  will  satisfy  them.     They 
need  not  to  think  that  I    have  forgotten  them,  for  I    have  not.     I 
am  well  pleased  with  them  for  having  taken  the  course  which  they 
have    taken    in    this    the  first  test.     They  have   done  all  that  I 
required  at  their  hands.     I   will  work  the   next  test  to  their  satis- 
faction.     Let    them    stand    still    and    watch    my   wonder-working 
hand,  and  they  will  not  need  to  watch  it   long,   before  they  will 
have  received  that  which  they  have  longed  to  see,  which  will    be  a 
manifestation  of  my  power  unto  salvation. 

3.  I  am  not  trifling  either  with  them   or  with   this   people.      I 
am  placed  in  a  position  where  I  have  to  work  in  a  manner  that  all 
do  not  understand;  and,  not  understanding,  they  have  thought  that 


INABILITY    OF    MAN    TO    UNDERSTAND    THE    WAYS    OF    GOD.      6 1 

I  have  not  fulfilled  my  promises ;  but  I  have.  When  I  speak  I  do 
it  in  mine  own  way,  and  all  cannot  understand  me ;  but  to  you  it 
is  given  to  understand  my  ways,  to  others  it  is  not.  I  expect, 
therefore,  that  you  will  stand  for  me,  and  explain  my  meaning  to 
the  satisfaction  of  all  with  whom  you  have  or  may  become 
acquainted. 

4.  You  feel   hard  towards  me  because  I  do  not  cut  off  those 
shepherds  who  are   now  leading  my  flock ;  but  you  know  that  I 
have  before  told  you  that  I  am  bound  by  law ;  nevertheless,  when 
I  begin  I  will  finish  ;  and  when  the  test  is  over,  all  will  be  satisfied. 

5.  I  am  obliged  to  take  a  course  to  warn  this  people.     I    first 
sent  a  warning  voice  unto  the  chief   shepherds  of   my  flock,  and 
they  refused  to  warn  the  people.     But  they  must  be  warned,  and 
I  will  warn  them;  but  I  must  take  mine  own  course  to  do  it;  there- 
fore,  let  all   be   satisfied   with  what  I  do,  for  I  work  so  as  to  save 
the  innocent,  of  whom  I  do  not  want  to  cut  off  any  more  than  the 
law  compels  me  to  cut  off.     And   it   is   my  will  that  these   men 
should  rest  themselves  satisfied,  and  not  murmur  against   you.     I 
am  at  the  head  of  things,  and  I  will  work  them  to  the  point. 

6.  And    inasmuch  as  my   servant  John  Parson  has  desired  of 
me  to  know  my  will  concerning  him,  I  will    make   it   known  unto 
you.     If  he  cannot  remain  where  he  is  in  peace,   let   him   remove 
to  this  place,   and    all   shall    be   well  with  him — not  a  hair  of  his 
head  shall,  be  hurt;  for   I  will    be  present  with  him  by  my  holy 
angels. 

7.  And  as  concerning  my  servant  Robert  Farley,  let  him  settle 
his  affairs  where  he  is  now  living,  and  come  down  to  this  place  with 
my    servant    John   Parson.      I    have  prepared   a  blessing  for  him. 
Let  him  trust  in  me,  and  I  will   abundantly   bless   him ;  he  needs 
not  to  fear  his  enemies — I  am  all  sufficient  for  them. 

8.  As  concerning  my  servant  Richard  Cook,  let  him  rest  him- 
self  satisfied,   and  not  murmur   at  his    fate.      He    must    not   be 
impatient,  but  he  must  exercise  patience,  and   not  be  restless,  and 
I  will  be  with  him. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.     I  am  Jesus   Christ.     Even   so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


62  A    WARNING    TO    THE    PEOPLE. 

WARNING  TO  THE  PEOPLE  OF  GOD. 


No.  47.  WEBER,  UTAH,  February  i6th,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  Jesus  Christ,  the  Son  of  the  Eternal  Father, 
by  whose  command  I  have  come  to  speak  unto  you. 

2.  Oh,  my  servant  Joseph,  why  do  you   insult   me  in  such   a 
manner?     I  have  done  all  that  I  could  do  for  you.     I  cannot,  at 
the  present  time,  remove  the  oppression  which   you  are   called   to 
bear.     You  are  too  restless.     You  do  not  place  your  confidence 
in  me.     I  have  told  you  that   I  wish  to  warn  this  people,  and  I 
am  doing  so.     You  need  not  to   question   my  work ;    for  I   shall 
take  mine  own  course  to  warn  this  people ;    but,  when  the  test  is 
over,  all  will  be  satisfied.     I  know  what  I  am  doing,  whether  you 
think  that  I  do,  or  not.     I  have  to  work  according  to  law — I  can- 
not deviate  from  it.     I  take   no  pleasure   at  all  in  working  with 
you ;    for  you   are  continually  wounding   my   feelings.      I   know 
what  the  oppression  is  that  you  are  called  to  bear,   and   I  feel  for 
you;   but  what  can  I  do?     I  am  compelled  to  take  such  a  course 
as  that  which  will  warn  this  people,  among  whom  are  many  that 
are  innocent,  whom  I    desire  to  save.     If  you  would  only  place 
your  confidence  in  me,  all   would  be   right.     I    arn  round   about 
you  continually  by  my  holy  angels,  and  they  will  guard  you  from 
the  attacks  of  all  your  enemies. 

3.  You  wish  to  know  what  course  I  am  about  to  take  to  warn 
this   people,   and  I   will  reveal  it  unto  you.     You  know  that  I 
called  upon  you  to  declare  yourself  the  prophet  of  this  people,  and 
you  did  so — that  was  the  means  which  I  first  put  into  operation  to 
warn  this  people.     All  those  who  have  heard  of  that  declaration  are 
now  looking  towards  you ;  and  all  those  who  have  not  as  yet  heard 
of  it,  soon  will  do  so ;   and  they,  also,  will  then  look  towards  you. 
The  chief  shepherds  of  my  flock  will  rise  up  against  you,  and  seek 
to  stop  your  course;   but  when  they  do  so,  and  crowd  upon  you, 
I  will  come  out  of  my  hiding  place,  and  in  one  day  I   will   cut 
them  off  the  earth.     I  am  holding  the  surrounding  influences  off 
you    on   every  hand ;   and,   until  the   appointed  time  shall  have 
arrived,  your  enemies  cannot   come  upon  you  ;   and  when  they 
come,  I  will  preserve  you  from  their  grasp.     Before  I  shall  have 


THE    PEOPLE    MUST    BE    WARNED.  63 

cut  off  those  wicked  shepherds,  you  will  not  have  long  to  wait ; 
for,  in  my  heart,  I  do  despise  them,  and  I  will  shortly  move 
them  out  of  the  way. 

4.  You  are  afraid  lest  you  should  be  taken  by  your  enemies 
unawares  ;  but  you  need  not  to  be ;    for  I  will  so  reveal  unto  you, 
at  all  times,  when  it  becomes  necessary  to   do  so,  that  you   shall 
not  be  caught   by  them  unawares.     And  when  they  visit  you,  I 
will  give  you    the   power  to  look  them  through ;    and  you  shall 
answer  them   according  to  their   folly,  and    they  shall    not  have 
power  to  resist  your  words.     And  if  an  enemy  crowds  too  hard 
upon  you,  I  will  smite  him  dead  in  your  presence  in  one  minute. 
I  will  not  be  trifled  with  by  your  enemies.     You  shall  have  no 
cause  to  complain  against  me  on  that  account. 

5.  And  as  concerning  these  people  who  believe  in  your  words, 
let  them  be  comforted  ;  for  I  am  round  about  them   by   my  holy 
angels,  and  I   am   well   pleased  with  them  for  having  taken  the 
course  which  they  have ;   and,  if  they  will  abide  your  counsel,  not 
a  hair  of  their  heads  shall  be  hurt.     I  am  abundantly  able   to   do 
mine  own  work;   therefore,  let  all  stand  still,  and  watch   my  won- 
der-working hand,  and  all  shall  be  well. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.     I  am  he  who  holds  the  keys  of 
death  and  hell ;   even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  PEOPLE  MUST  BE  WARNED. 


No.  48.  WEBER,  UTAH,  February  24th,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  Jesus  Christ,  the  Son  of  the  Eternal  Father; 
even  he  who  is  from  everlasting  to  everlasting ;  the  same  who  bore 
the  shame  of  the  wicked  that  he  might  save  the  world,  and  cast 
the  destroyer  out. 

2.  And  I  am  come  to  speak  unto  you,   my  son,   according  to 
the  commandment  of  my  Father.     I  have  heard  your  prayers,  and 
I  know  the  anxiety  of  your  mind.     You  are  greatly  troubled  about 
this  people.     You  long  to  see  me  come  out  of  my  hiding-place  to 
deliver  them  out  of  the  hands  of  ail  their  enemies.    I  am  as  anxious 
to  see  this  take  place  as  you  are ;  but  I  am  bound  by  law — I  can- 


64  THE    PEOPLE    MUST    BE    WARNED. 

not  do  my  own  will.  You  have  greatly  afflicted  my  feelings  by 
talking  to  me  in  the  manner  that  you  have  done.  You  are  very 
restless.  If  I  could  help  you  I  would ;  but  you  have  not  long  to 
wait.  I  am  working  this  matter  up  to  a  head  as  fast  as  I  can. 

3.  The  warning  is  going  forth  at  a  rapid  speed,  and  it  will  soon 
reach  the   ears  of  all;  and,  when  that  is  done,  I  shall  be  ready  to 
fulfill  the  promises  which  I    have  made  to  you.     I  will  then  come 
out  of  my  hiding  place  and  clear  the  way  for  you  at  once.     I  shall 
then  be  at  liberty,  according  to  the  eternal  law  of  heaven,  to  come 
out  and  destroy  everything  that  stands  in  your  way ;  but  before  I 
cut  off  mine  enemies,  I  am  obliged  to  give  unto  all  a  warning,  and, 
until  I  have  done  this,  I  shall  not   require  anything  at  your  hands, 
nor  at  the  hands  of  those  men  who  are  one  with  you.     Let  them 
stand  still  and  watch    my  wonder-working  hand.     They   need  not 
to  think  that  they   can   do  anything  to  warn  this  people,  for  they 
cannot ;  that  is  my  business ;  but,  after  I  shall  have  done  my  part, 
I  shall    call    upon  them  to  do  theirs.     Let  them  make  themselves 
ready,  for  they  have  no  time  to  lose.     They  have  long  wished  that 
I  was  ready,  but  I  shall  be  ready  before  they  will  be,  and  this  they 
will  find  out.     Then  let  them  rise  up  like  men,  and   set  themselves 
for  the  work. 

4.  And   as  concerning  my  servant  John  Cook,  he  has  thought 
that  he  could  warn  his  friends  ;  but  he  has  been  deceived.      They 
will  not  give  hear  to  him ;  but  they  meet  him  with  a  delusive  spirit, 
and  overpower  him :  he  cannot  stand  against    them.     Therefore, 
let  him  be  still,  and  leave  the  warning  of  his  friends  to  me.     And 
inasmuch  as  his   business  calls  him  to  mingle  himself  with  those 
people  who   know  nothing  about  me,  who   have  departed  from  my 
ways,  who  know  not  what  they  are  doing,  who  take  wrong  for 
right,  and  right  for  wrong — let  him  leave  these  things  in  my  hands, 
and,  in  the  end,  I  will  satisfy  him.     And  as   for  those  chief  shep- 
herds, I  will  mark  out  their  course,  and  I  will  make  them  walk  in 
it.     They  cannot  do  what  they   wish  to  do.      They   shall  obey 
me — they  cannot  help  it. 

5.  All  power  that  is  upon  the  earth  is  in  my  hands,  and  I  will 
wield  it  to  accomplish  my  purposes.    I  shall  now  assume  my  rights 
upon  the  earth,  and   the  kings  of   the  earth  shall  feel  my  withering 
hand.     And  as  for  your  enemies  in  this  place,  and  throughout  this 


JUDGMENTS    TO    COME    AS    A    WHIRLWIND.  65 

Territory,  you  need  not  to  fear  them,  for  I  am   round  about  you, 
and  I  will  protect  you  from  them  all — only  be  strong. 

6.  And  as  concerning  my  servant  Richard  Cook,   let  him   be 
strong,   and   I  will   soon   liberate  him.      He  wishes  to  preach  my 
gospel,  and  he  shall  soon  have  that  privilege  granted  to  him. 

7.  Let  all  who  know  me  rest  assured  that  I  am  with  them,  and 
if  they  will  take  your  counsel,  not  a  hair  of  their  heads  shall    be 
hurt. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.  I  am  he  whose  words  are  quick 
and  powerful,  sharper  than  a  two-edged  sword ;  even  Jesus  Christ. 
Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  JUDGMENTS  OF  GOD    TO    COME  AS  A  WHIRL- 
WIND. 


No.  49.  WEBER,  UTAH,  March  3rd,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the   light  and  life  of  the   world;    even  he 
who  moves  forth  in  the  midst  of  darkness,  and  the  darkness  com- 
prehendeth  him  not ;   the  same  who  broke  the  barrier  of  the  tomb, 
and    set    the    captive    free ;    who   speaks    the    word,   and    all  the 
heavenly  hosts  obey. 

2.  And  I  am  come  to  speak  unto  you,  my  son.      Oh,  my  son, 
why    do   you    suffer  your  spirit  to  droop?     Why  do  you  not  do 
the    thing  that  I  wish  you   to  do?      Why  do  you  take  such  a 
course  as  you  have  taken,  when,  by  so  doing,  you  wound  my  feel- 
ings.    Have  I  not  called  upon   you,   time  after  time,  to  bring  up 
one  case  wherein  I  have  failed  to  fulfill  my  promises  as  far  as   I 
have  gone  with  you  ?     I  know  that  you  are  placed  in  a  painful 
position;   but  I  cannot  help  it.     I  have  done  my   best   for  you, 
whether  you  think  so,  or  not.      I  have  greatly  complained  of  you, 
because  you  have  not  placed  that  confidence   in  me  which  I  have 
required  of  you.      I  know  that  your  intentions  are  pure ;    but  you 
are    overpowered  by  the   influence  which   is    before   you,    which 
is  too  great  for  you  to   strive   against.      If  I  could  only  prevail 
upon  you   to  place   all  confidence   in   me,  my  feelings  would  be 
at  rest ;    but  it  seems  that  you  cannot  place  that  confidence  in  me 
which  I  require ;  therefore,  I  shall  have  to  be  content  without  it. 


66  JUDGMENTS    TO    COME    AS    A    WHIRLWIND. 

3.  Now   let    us    reason   together :     You    are    sensible   of  the 
course  that  I  have  taken   with  you   from  the  beginning.      I   have 
been  with  you  both  at  home  and  abroad.     You  have  been  to  me 
as  the  apple  of  mine  eye ;    and  wherever  you   have  been,  I  have 
been  with  you.     And  you  know  that  I   have   protected  you   from 
all  your  enemies;   and  you  know,  also,    that  if  I   had  not,  you 
would  have  been  slain   before  this  time.     Notwithstanding,  after 
all  that  you  have  witnessed  of  my  protecting   care,  which   I   have 
had  over  you,  you  cannot  place  that   confidence   in  me   which  is 
required  of  you.     O,  that  I  could  prevail  with  you  !     O,  that  you 
would  place  that  confidence  in  me  which  I  require — I  should  be 
released  at  once. 

4.  And,  now,  I  speak  unto  you  concerning  this  people :     You 
know  that  the  warning  voice  is  going  forth  at  a  rapid  speed,  and, 
as  soon  as  it  shall  have  reached  the  ears  of  all,  I  will  come  out  of 
my  hiding    place  and   clear  your   way   according  to   my  former 
promises.      I  will  not  keep    you  waiting  after  the   warning   has 
reached  the  ears  of  all,  and  it  will  not  be  long  before  it  will  have 
done  so.     You  may  be  setting  yourself  for  that  time ;   for  it  will 
come  as  a  whirlwind,  and  none  but  the  pure   in  heart  will  escape. 
And,  until  the  very  day  comes  for  me  to  commence  the   work,  I 
will  hold  the  surrounding  influences  off  you,   and  you   shall  have 
no  difficulty  in  passing  along  from  day  to   day.     And  let  these 
people  who  are  now  with  you,  be  strong   and  remember  that  I  am 
with   them,   and  that   I    will  fight   their  battles;   for   I   am    well 
pleased  with  them  for  that  which  they  have  done.     Their  good 
acts  shall    be    handed    down    from    generation    to   generation   in 
honor  to  their  names ;   for  they  have  wrought  a  good  work  for  me, 
and  for  their  poor   brethren.     They  are  blessed   of  me ;   and  the 
good  acts  which  they  have  performed  will  be  like  bread  cast  upon 
the  waters,  which  is  seen  after  many  days. 

5.  And,  as  concerning  my  servants  John  Parson  and  Richard 
Cook,    let   them  hold  themselves    in    readiness;    for  I  am   their 
friend,  and  I  am  all  sufficient  for  them.     They  shall  soon  be  liber- 
ated, and  they  shall  preach  my  gospel  until  they  are  satisfied. 

I  now  add  no  more  at  this   time.      I   am   he  that  was,   and  is, 
and  is  to  come  ;  even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


COMMANDED  TO  TARRY  AT  SOUTH  WEBER.         67 

COMMANDING  THE  PROPHET  TO  TARRY  AT  SOUTH 

WEBER. —FORETELLING    DESTRUCTIONS 

TO  COMMENCE   THERE. 


No.  50.  WEBER,  UTAH,  March  8th,  1861. 

1.  VERILY,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  that  inasmuch  as  the  cloud 
is  now  fast  gathering,  and  must  shortly,  burst  upon  the  heads   of 
your  enemies  to  the  destruction  of  many  thousands  of   souls,  it  is 
necessary  that    you    should    understand    my  will  concerning  this 
matter. 

2.  The  warning  has  now  reached  the  ears  of  almost  all  of  this 
people.     It    will   not   be  more  than  a  few  more  days  before  it  will 
have   reached   the   ears  of  all.     Your  enemies  are  already  setting 
themselves    against    you.     They    are    seeking   to  raise  a  mob  to 
destroy  you,  and  you  need  to  prepare  yourself  for  it ;  for,  although 
it  will  not  come  until  I  am  ready,  it  will,  nevertheless,  soon  come. 
I  am  controlling  it.     I  will  make  mine  enemies  do  what  I  wish 
them  to  do,  and  they  shall  go  so  far,  and  no  farther.     I  will  raise 
up  a  standard  against  them. 

3.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  that  the  men  who  now  stand 
at  the  head  of  my  Church  are  at  the  head  of  this  mob,  and  it  will 
involve  all  the  shepherds  who  are  corrupt  before   me.     As  I  said 
unto  you  in  a  former  revelation,  so  I   say  unto  you  again,  I    will 
not  keep  you  waiting  after  the  warning  has  reached  the  ears  of  all. 
And  when  your  enemies  come  upon  you,   you  must  not  fear,  but 
stand  to  your  post  like  a  man,  and  I  will  fight  your  battles.     I  will 
lay    your  enemies  low  before  your  face.     You   must  place  your 
confidence  in  me  in  this  case ;  for  I  shall  require  it  of  you.     And 
it  is  my   will  that  these  people,  who  are  one  with  you,  should  also 
place  their  confidence  in  me.     They  must  not  fear  their  enemies, 
for  the  great  test  is  near  at  hand,  and  those  who  forsake  me  through 
fear  and    turn  traitors  to  me,  as  they  may  suppose  to  save  their 
lives,  shall  lose  them,  for  I  will  cut  them    off  first.     But   if  they 
stand  fast  to  their  integrity,  and  act  honestly  towards  me,  I  will  be 
true  to  them,  and  not  a  hair  of  their  heads  shall    be  hurt ;  for  I 
love  those  who  are  filled  with  integrity. 

4.  And    if  your    enemies    should   send  unto  you  a  warning, 


68  COMMANDED    TO    TARRY    AT    SOUTH    WEBER. 

ordering  you  to  move  away  from  this  place,  you  shall  pay  no 
attention  to  it,  but  tell  them  to  "  come  on  "  as  soon  as  they  are 
ready.  Those  people  who  profess  to  be  one  with  you  will  behold 
scenes  that  will  cause  their  hearts  to  fail  them.  And  as  I  have 
said  unto  you  before,  so  I  say  unto  you  again,  I  will  stand  side 
by  side  with  you  in  this  place,  and  I  will  speak  with  you  mouth  to 
mouth  ;  and  you  shall  see  the  hosts  of  heaven  go  out  to  war.  I  have 
told  you  before,  that  when  my  presence  is  needed  you  shall  see 
me.  You  have  nothing  to  fear.  I  am  all  sufficient  for  your 
enemies.  And  when  you  are  called  to  give  the  command,  I  will 
come  up  and  speak  to  you,  and  you  shall  be  perfectly  satisfied 
in  every  respect. 

5.  And  when  the  test  comes  you  shall  call  these  people  who  are 
one  with  you  to  one  place,  even  to  the  place  that  I  shall  appoint. 
I  will  make  known  unto  you  more  upon  this  subject  hereafter. 

6.  And  inasmuch  as  those  men  whom  I  have  called  to  devote 
themselves   wholly   to   my  cause,    wish  to   know  what  I  mean  by 
telling  them  to   make  ready,   I   will    explain  the  matter  to  them. 
Let  them  store  their  minds  with  the  principles  of  my  gospel,   even 
those  principles  which  I  have  revealed  unto  them  through  you  ;  for 
they  will  be  called  upon  to  preach  the  fullness  of  my  gospel ;  and 
let    them    study    this    and  nothing  else,  and   I   will  supply  their 
temporal  needs.     They  need  not  to  think  that   they   can   both   do 
this  and  put  in  their  crops,  for  they  cannot.     They  may  set  them- 
selves for  the  test.     They  need   not  suppose  that  it  is  a  great  way 
off,  for  it  is  not;  let  them  judge  by  the  signs  of  the  times.     It  is 
nearer  than  they  think  it  is;  therefore,  let  them  harken  to  the 
words  of  my  mouth,  and  diligently  obey  them,  and  all  shall  be  well. 

I  now  add  no   more.     I   am  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen 
and  Amen. 


THE    ROD   OF  MOSES  IS  PROMISED. 


No.  51.  WEBER,  UTAH,  March  i6th  1861. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts,  even  Jesus  Christ,  the 
Son  of  the  Eternal  Father.  And  I  am  come  to  speak  unto  you, 
my  servant  Joseph,  according  to  your  desire. 


THE    ROD    OF    MOSES.  69 

2.  Oh,   that  you  could   only  place   your   confidence   in    me ! 
What    a    burden    it    would    remove    from    you !     When    you  are 
oppressed  I  feel  your  oppression,  even  as  you  do.     You  need   not 
to  think  that  I  pass  on  without  having  to  contend  with   evil,  for  I 
do  not.      I  am  responsible  for  my  words,  and  I  shall  have  to  fulfill 
them  or  suffer  the  consequences.     I  am  as  much  bound  by  law  as 
you  are.     I  cannot  swerve  from  the  eternal,  unchangeable  law  of 
heaven ;  and   I   have  sworn  an  oath  of  the  holy  priesthood,  that,  if 
you  will  be  led  by  me,  I  will  make  your  words  good.     If  I  could 
make  you  believe  that  you  have  nothing  to  fear,  I  should  gain  the 
point  which  I  wish  to  gain.     The  oppression  which  afflicts  you   is 
in  consequence   of  your   not   placing  sufficient  confidence  in  me. 
You  distrust  me  without  a  cause,  and,  by  so  doing,  you  afflict  both 
yourself  and  me. 

3.  You  see  the  pure  principles  of   my   gospel  trampled  under 
the  feet  of  those  'who  profess  to  be   my  people ;  you   witness  all 
manner  of  wickedness   among  this   people ;  you  hear  the  cries  of 
my   poor  and  afflicted  people,  who  are   oppressed  and  robbed  of 
their  rights'  by  liars   and    hypocrites ;  and   these    things  give  you 
sorrow  and  pain;  but  justice  has  come  to  their  doors.     And  I  will 
now   defend  the   rights   of  my   poor  and  afflicted  people,  for  my 
heart  has  been  pained  when  I  have  seen  their  distress.     I  am  now 
working  for  their  deliverance.     The  last  test  will  shortly  come,  and 
then  I  will  strike  the  final  blow. 

4.  As  I  said  unto  you   before,  so   I   say   unto  you  again,  pre- 
pare yourself  for  the  test,  for  whan  it  comes,  it  will  come  suddenly. 
Seek  to  strengthen  yourself  by  exercising  your  faith  in  me,  and  do 
not,  any  more,  show  such  weakness  as  you  have  done,  but  rise  up 
like  a  man  and  do  your  duty ;  but  leave  mine  to  me.     Each  of  us 
is  responsible  for  himself.     If  I  do  not  do  my  duty  I  shall  have  to 
bear  the  blame ;  if  you  do  not  do  yours,  you  will   have  to  bear  the 
blame. 

5.  You  think  that  I    have  not  done  my  duty  to  you,  because  I 
have  not  given  unto  you  the  rod.     But,  although  it  belongs  to  you, 
you  have   never  stood  in  need  of   it ;   nevetheless,  you  shortly  will 
need  it,  and  then  I   will  bring  it  unto  you,  for  I  have  it.     When 
my  servant  Moses  had  delivered  mine  own  covenant  people,  I  took 
the   rod   from  the   earth,   and  it  is  in  mine  own  possession.     It  is 


70  THE    ROD    OF    MOSES. 

never  upon  the  earth,  only  when  the  full  keys  of  the  holy  priest- 
hood are  upon  the  earth.  Inasmuch,  therefore,  as  you  hold  those 
keys,  when  I  visit  you  I  will  give  it  unto  you.  And  I  make  unto 
you  a  promise,  that  I  will  never  neglect  you.  Let  us  be  united 
and  work  together,  and  everything  will  move  on  well. 

6.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  that,   inasmuch  as  you  have 
many  enemies,  whose  tongues   are  continually  lying  against  you 
without  a  cause,  I  will  settle  with  them.     I  will  record  the  names 
of  all  those  who  maliciously  lie  against  you,  and  who  continue  to 
do   so,  and   I  will  visit  them  with  sudden  death.     And  when  the 
scourge  passes  through  this  Territory,  all  such  shall  be  destroyed, 
and  the  remnant  who  shall  be  left,  will  be  as  the  gleaning  of  grapes 
when  the  vintage   is  over;  for   I  shall  make  a  great  slaughter.     I 
know  that  you   are   weary   of  waiting  for  me,  but  I  am  bound  by 
law  to  take  the  course  which  I  am  taking. 

7.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  that  you  have  enemies  in  this 
place   who  are   seeking  to  lay   a  snare  for  your  feet.     Beware  of 
those  who  come  into  your  presence,  who  profess  to  be  your  friends. 
Open  your  eyes  and  look  at  them,  and    I  will  give  unto  you  power 
to  discern   who  they  are,  and  you  shall  shun  such,  and  they  shall 
fall  into  their  own  snare.     They  seek  to  lead  your  enemies  upon 
you  before  the  time  which  I  have  appointed  has  come ;  but,  if  you 
will  do  as  I  have  commanded  you,  they  shall  have  no  power  over 
you ;  but  if  you  do  not,   they   will   ensnare  you   and   cause   you 
trouble.     You   need  to  open  your   eyes  wide,   and  look  at  every 
one. who  comes  into  your  presence?     You  have  the  gift  of  discern- 
ment by  which,  if  you  will  use  it,  you  may  know  who   people  are. 

8.  And  as  concerning  those  people  who  are  one  with  you  in 
very  deed,  let  them  lift  up  their  hands  and  rejoice,  for   I  am  their 
shepherd ;   and    if  they  will  do  those  things '  which  I  have  com- 
manded them  to  do,  I  will  be  with  them  unto  the  end.     The  test  is 
close  upon  them.     I  know  that  they  are  weary  of  waiting  for  it ; 
nevertheless,  when  it  does  come,  it  will  come  too  soon  for  some  of 
those  who  have  been  wishing  for  it  to  come.     And  as  I  have  said 
unto  you  before,  so  I  say  unto  you  again,  as  soon  as  you  need  to 
see  me,  I  will  come  unto  you  and  talk  with  you,  and  I  will  make 
known  unto  you  all  things  which  are  necessary  for  you  to  know  at 
the  time. 


SAINTS    IN    FOREIGN    LANDS.  7 1 

9.  And  as  concerning  the  seed  which,  from  this  time  forward, 
may  be  put  into  the  ground  by  those  whom    I    have    commanded 
not  to  sow,  those  who  may  put  it  in  will  not  reap  it — they  will  have 
their  trouble   for  nothing.     I   have  told  them,  now,  and  they  can 
please  themselves  as  to  what  they  will  do. 

10.  And  as  concerning  the  warning  which  I  have  sent  forth,  it 
has  now  almost  reached    the  ears  of   all.     I  need  not  to  say  any 
more  to  you  at  this  time  upon  this  subject ;  therefore,  let  this,  for 
the  present,  suffice,  and    I  will  make  known  more  unto  you  here- 
after.    Therefore,  be  strong,  and  I  will    be  with  you  unto  the  end. 

I  am  he  whose  words  are  quick  and  powerful,  sharper  than  a 
two-edged  sword;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and 
Amen. 


THE  SAINTS  IN  FOREIGN  LANDS. 


No.  52.  WEBER,  UTAH,  March  24th,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Son  of  the   Eternal   Father,   even  Jesus 
Christ.     And,  inasmuch  as  you  have  desired  to  know  my  will  con- 
cerning my  saints  in  foreign  lands,  I  will  make  it  known  unto  you. 
You  know  that  they  are  now  in  the  hands  of  false  shepherds,  and 
are  held  by  them,  even  as  my  saints  are  held  by  false  shepherds  in 
this  Territory ;  and  I  will  make  known  unto  you  what  I  will  do  to 
release  them.     I  will  cut  off  those  false  shepherds,  and  I  will  leave 
my  saints  without  a  shepherd  to  look  to,  until  I  shall    have   placed 
others   over  them.     My    people  are  groaning  under  oppression  in 
foreign  lands,  even  as  they   are  here,  and    they  wish  to  know  my 
will  concerning  them ;  for  they   are  faint  for  lack   of  knowledge. 

2.  They  are  continually  calling  upon  me  to  release  them  from 
Babylon ;  but  if  they  were  here  they  would  be  worse  bound   than 
they  now  are.     Then  what  can  I  do  with  them  in  such  a  case  ?     I 
am  continually  looking  down  upon  them,  and    my  heart  is  pained 
when   I  behold  their  situation.     They   feel  as  though  they  were 
sheep  without  a  shepherd — as  though  there  was   nothing  for  them 
to  cling  to.     They  feel  as  though  I  had  betrayed  their  confidence ; 
as  though  they  had  believed  in  me  in  vain.     They  know  not  what 
they  are  doing.    They  would  serve  me  if  they  knew  how ;  but  they 


72  SAINTS    IN    FOREIGN    LANDS. 

know  but  little  about,  me,  notwithstanding  I  have  done  my  best  for 
them. 

3.  I  cannot  change  the  nature  of  things.      I  am   always   regu- 
lated by  law.      I  cannot  deviate  from  it.      I   have   never  failed  to 
abide  by  it.      I  need  not  to  be  driven  to  do  my  duty,  for  I  know 
what  it  is,  and  without  being  driven  thereto  (which  is  beneath  me) 
I  will  discharge  that  duty.     I  take  delight  in  defending  the  rights 
and  relieving  the  wants   of  the  poor,   the  distressed,  and  the  inno- 
cent.    Mine  afBicted  people    have  thought  that   I    have  neglected 
them,  and  suffered  them  to  be  afflicted  by  the  destroyer ;  but  their 
suffering  and  affliction  will  result  in   their  good.     And  I   will  give 
unto  them  a  great  endowment,  which  will  make  up  for  all  their 
losses    and   disappointments,    and   then  they  will    be  abundantly 
satisfied,  and  know  that  I  have  done  my  duty  to  them. 

4.  And  after  that  I  shall  have   purged  my  Church  here,  I  will 
go  to  my  churches  abroad,  and  purge   out   of  them,  also,   every- 
thing that   offends.      I   will   overturn  all  things  pertaining  to   my 
Church,  whether  at  home  or  abroad. 

5.  And,   as  concerning  my  saints  who   are  in  this  place,  let 
them  lift  up  their  heads  and  rejoice !    for  I  am  with  them,  and  all 
is  well.      I  am  working  to  their  deliverance,  and  the  cloud  that  is 
gathering  against   them  will  soon  burst.     All   things  are  working 
well,  whether  you  see  it  or  not.     There  is  a   calm   now,   but   there 
soon  will  be  a  storm.     Their  enemies  are  now  counseling  together 
about  this  matter,  in  order  to  find   out  the  best  plan  to  put  a  stop 
to  my  work ;  but  I  will  control  them  in  their  councils,  and    bring 
them  to  my  terms.     They  cannot  do  anything   save  that  which   I 
permit  them  to  do. 

6.  Let  not  these  people  who  are  one  with   you  grow  weary  in 
waiting  for  me.      I  am  doing  all  that  I  can  .  to  satisfy   them.      Let 
them  be  patient — not  restless.     I  am  working  as  fast  as  I  can,  and 
they  ought  to  be  satisfied.     They   know  that  I  have  given  unto 
them    the   keys  of  the  holy  priesthood,  about  which  they  before 
knew  nothing,  and  they  know  that  those  keys  of  knowledge  came 
from  me ;  they  know,  also,  that  they  could  not  have  come  from  any 
other  source.     Let  them,  therefore,  rise  up  like  men,  and  use  their 
judgment,  and  put  away  all  doubt  from  them.     They  have  good 
sense,    if  they  would  use  it.     Let  them  not  trifle  with  me.     They 


THE  PROPHET  AND  OTHERS  REPROVED.          73 

have  never  lost  anything  by  trusting  in  me.  The  things  that  come 
from  above  are  sacred,  and  they  must  be  treated  with  care ;  they 
must  not  be  trifled  with.  Let  them  treat  these  things  with 
solemity,  and  not  with  light-mindedness. 

7.  And  again,  as  touching  those  people  who  are  one  with  you. 
When  the  test  is  about  to  commence  I  will  make  it  known  unto 
them  through  you,  and  you  shall  call  them  together  to  the  place 
which  I  shall  appoint.  And  I  will  make  known  unto  you  where 
the  place  is,  which  I  shall  have  appointed  for  that  purpose,  in  time 
for  you  to  gather  the  people  to  it.  Therefore,  let  them  all  be 
satisfied,  and  know  that,  if  they  will  abide  in  me,  I  will  be  with 
them  unto  the  end* 

I  now  add  no  more.  Let  this  suffice  for  the  present,  and  I  will 
give  unto  you  more  hereafter.  I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  PROPHET  AND  OTHERS  REPROVED. 


No.  53.  WEBER,  UTAH,  March  3ist,  186 1. 

1.  LIFT  up  your  head,  and  stand  to  your  post  like  a  man — do 
not  act  so  vainly.     You  act,  betimes,  as  though  you  knew  nothing 
either  about  me  or  my  plans,  and  you  let  others  also  see  your 
weakness.     Why    do  you   not   rise  up,  and    strive    against    those 
influences  that  oppress  you?     You  know  my  will  concerning  this 
people,    even    as    I   do;    consequently,   you    have  no  cause    to 
act    as  you  do.      I  have  many  times  told    you    that    you    have 
nothing  to  fear.      Do  you  think  that  I  have  nothing  to  do  with 
this  people?     What  did  I  give  my  life  for?     Have  I  no  claim  on 
them  ?     Have  they  no  claim  on  me  ?     If  neither  I  nor  they  have 
any  claim  upon  each  other,  then  all  is  lost. 

2.  I  am  abundantly  able  to  do  mine  own  work ;   for  I  have 
the  power,  and  I  will  use  it  to  the  deliverance  of  my  people ;   and 
that  you  shall  shortly  see.     You  do  not  need  to  doubt  my  power ; 
for  I  have  sufficient  to  cut  off  the  inhabitants  of  a  million  earths 
like  this,  if  the  law  required  me  to  do  so.     You  surely  think  that 
I  am  not  honest ;   but  whether  I  am,  or  not,  I  cannot  fail  to  ful- 
fill my  words ;   for  I  am  compelled  to  work  by  law,  that  Adam's 


74  THE  PROPHET  AND  OTHERS  REPROVED. 

posterity  may  be  saved ;  and  if  I  should  fail,  another  would  come 
and  take  my  place.  The  work  must  go  on — it  cannot  stop ;  and 
were  I  not  to  abide  the  law,  I  should  have  to  suffer  the  conse- 
quences. Then  let  me  prevail  upon  you  to  exercise  faith  in  me. 

3.  You  think  that  I  have  too  much   sympathy   for  those   chief 
shepherds  who  have  misled  my  people,  to  cut  them  off;    but  you 
are  mistaken.     They  have  no  sympathy  for  themselves ;   therefore, 
how  can  I  sympathize  with  them  ?    I  have  done  my  duty  to  them ; 
but,  instead  of  hearkening  to  me,  they  have  risen  up  and  set  them- 
selves in  war  against  me.     And  do  you  think  that   I  will   give   up 
to  them,  and  let  all  my  words  fall  to  the  ground   unfulfilled?     No, 
I  will  not.     If  they  are  presumptuous  enough  to  set  themselves  in 
war  against  me,  I  shall  be  compelled  to  cut  them  off.     But  I  shall 
not  strike  the  first  blow ;    for  it  is  contrary  to  the  law  of  heaven  for 
me  to  do  so.     But  I  will  work  them  up  to  a  head,  and  then  they 
will  come  out  openly  against  me,   and   strive   to  stop   my   course. 
And  when  they  do  this,  I  shall  be  at  liberty,  according  to  the  law 
by  which  I  am  governed,  to  cut  them   off.     And  I   cannot  break 
that  law.     I  cannot  deviate  from  it.     If  you   knew  my  situation, 
you  would  not  complain  of  me  as  you  have  done.     I  have   done 
the  best  that  I  could  for  you. 

4.  And  as  for  these  men  who  profess   to  be  one  with   you,   I 
am  astonished  at  them  also,  for  their  coolness  and  lack  of  faith   in 
me.     I  have  done  my  duty  to  them,  and   blessed  them  ;    but  they 
do  not  appreciate  the   blessings   that   I  have  placed    within   their 
reach.     They  know  that  I   have  committed  the  full   keys   of  the 
holy  priesthood  to  my  servant  upon  the  earth,  and  that  they  have 
received  a  knowledge  of  things   about   which   they   knew   nothing 
before.     And,  after  all,  how  lightly  they  value  these  things  !     They 
need  not  to  think  that  I  am  dependent  upon  them,  and  that  I  can- 
not do  without  them ;    for  I  can.     I  do  not  want  the  help  of  those 
who  render  help  grudgingly.     They  need  not  to  think  that  I  can- 
not do  without  their  help.     If  they   wish  to  forsake   me,  they  can 
do  so;    and  I  can  find  friends  when   they  have   forsaken   me.      If 
men  do  not  lay  hold  and  labor  for  me  with  all  their  hearts,  I  do 
not  want  their  labor  at  all.      I  dislike  those  who  are  half-hearted — 
they  will  do  me  no  good.     They   are  continually  filled  with  fear; 
so  much  so,  that  that  they  are   of  no  use  to  me ;    as  they  now  are 


THE  PROPHET  AND  OTHERS  REPROVED.  75 

I  can  do  nothing  with  them.  If  they  cannot  place  their  confi- 
dence in  me,  and  work  with  me,  I  have  no  use  for  them ;  and 
they  may  do  their  own  will.  When  I  sent  them  from  my  presence 
to  the  earth,  they  promised  to  assist  me  with  all  their  power ;  but 
now,  when  I  need  their  help,  they  are  a  burden  upon  me.  They 
are  so  much  afraid  of  me,  that  they  cannot  do  their  duty ;  never- 
theless, they  have  a  part  to  act  as  well  as  I  have ;  and  if  they  do 
not  act  that  part,  they  will  have  to  suffer  the  consequences.  They 
are  not  ignorant  about  my  plans ;  they  know  what  I  mean  to  do. 

5.  And  now,  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,  that 
I  will  establish  the  full  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood  upon  the  earth, 
even  if  I  have  to  cut  off  this  entire  people  in   order  to  do  so ;    for 
there  are  many  of  them  whom  I  despise.    They  will  do  anything  that 
those  corrupt  shepherds  tell  them  to  do.   They  have  laid  aside  their 
own  judgment  and  given  it  up  to  others  who  are  as  blind  as  them- 
selves ;    and  they  do  not  for  a  moment  think  about  what  they  are 
doing.     But  can  they  justify  themselves  before   me?     No,  they 
cannot ;    therefore,  I  will  visit  many   of  their  sins  upon  them.     I 
will  visit  them  shortly,  and  I  will  open  their  eyes  for  them  at  once. 

6.  And  inasmuch  as  you  wish  to  know  my  will  concerning  the 
gathering  together  of  these  people,  I  will  make  it  known  unto  you. 
When  your  enemies  are  about  to   come   upon  you,   I  will  speak 
unto  you  suddenly,  and  make  known  unto  you  the  place  which  I 
have  appointed  for  the  gathering  together  of  these  people. 

7.  And,  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  you  may   be   setting  yourself 
for  the  test.     And  you  must  take  care  of  your  writings,  and  lock 
them  up,  and  keep  them   safe.     And,  if  you   will   do  as  I  have 
commanded  you,  I  will  lead  you  safely  through  in   spite   of  your 
enemies.     And  remember  that,  when  the  test   is  about  to   com- 
mence, I  will  make  my  appearane  to  you ;  and  you  shall  have  no 
cause  to  complain  against  me  for  neglect  of  duty  towards  you. 

I  now  add  no  more.  I  am  he  whose  words  are  quick  and  pow- 
erful, sharper  than  a  two-edged  sword ;  even  Jesus  Christ  Even 
so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


76  REORGANIZATION    OF    THE    CHURCH. 

REOGANIZATION  OF  THE  CHURCH— APPOINTMENT 

OF  RICHARD  COOK,  JOHN  PARSON  AND 

OTHERS  TO  OFFICE. 


No.  54.  WEBER,  UTAH,  April  3d,  1861. 

1.  A  REVELATION  of  Jesus  Christ,  concerning  those  who  know 
his  plans,  and  who  are  willing  to  comply  with  his  request.     Let 
them  hearken  to  my  words,  which  are  quick  and  powerful,  sharper 
than  a  two-edged  sword,    and  all  shall   be  well  with  them.     It  is 
necessary  that  a  move  should  be   made  by  them  for  their  good. 
There  are  many  people  now  scattered  around,  who  have  no  stand- 
ard to  rally  to,   and,   on  this  account,  it  is  necessary  that  a  move 
should  be  made  for  their  benefit. 

2.  It  is  my  will   that  all  those  who  believe  in  me  should    be 
baptized  for  the  remission  of  sins,  and  they  shall  receive  the  gift 
of  the  Holy  Ghost  in  its  fullness,  and,   also,  that  testimony  which 
has  been  promised  to  them.     They  need  not  to  be  afraid  to  do  the 
thing  which  I  require  at  their  hands,  for  I  will  sustain  them  in  it. 
And  while  they  trust  in  me  they  have  nothing  to  fear ;  for  I  will 
be  round  about  them,  both  at  home  and  abroad,  and  they  shall  be 
as  giants.     Everything  shall  become  subject  to  them  ;  and,  as  soon 
as  they  are  ready,  I  will  deliver  them  out  of  the  hands  of  all  their 
enemies,  and  they  shall  know  no  more  affliction. 

3.  I  am  working  mine  enemies  up  to  a  head  at  a  rapid  speed, 
and  they  will  soon   break  out,  and  come  up  against  you  with  all 
their  power.     You  may  open  your  eyes  and  be  looking  out  for  them  ; 
fur  they  will  come  upon  you  suddenly.     You  have  no  time  to  lose. 
And   when  they   come,  your  hands  will  be  full.     But  I  will  be 
present  with  you  at  that  time  to  instruct  you. 

4.  I  cannot  make  you  understand  me  as  I  wish  to  do.     You 
are  continually  wishing  to  see  me,  that  you   may  know  whether  I 
am  ready  for  the  work,  or  not.     But,  if  I  come  unto  you  when  you 
need  to  see  me,  will  not  that  be  soon  enough?     What  think  you? 
You  know  that  you  have  not  yet  been  placed  in  a  position   where 
you  have  needed  a  manifestation  of  my  power ;  and,  until  you  are 
so  placed,  you   do   not   need  to  see  me.     If  I  am  not  with  you 
when  my  presence  and  power  are  needed,   then   yqu   will   have 


REORGANIZATION    OF    THE    CHURCH.  77 

cause  to  complain  of  me.  Why  do  you  not  act  reasonably?  You 
know  that,  according  to  my  promises,  I  have  kept  your  enemies 
off  you,  and  I  have  broken  them  up,  and  set  them  one  against- 
another,  and  they  have  had  no  power  over  you.  What  have  you 
to  complain  of?  Nothing  at  all.  Therefore,  let  your  mind  be  at 
rest.  And  if  ever  you  complain  against  me  again,  let  it  be  when 
I  deserve  it;  but  do  not  keep  wounding  my  feelings  without  a 
cause.  I  will  never  neglect  you,  never  fear. 

5.  And,  behold,  I  say   unto  you  that,   when  you   shall    have 
baptized  those  men  who  believe  in  me,  you  shall  ordain  those  of 
them  who   are  high  priests   by  birthright  to  the   office  of    high 
priests. 

6.  And  you  shall  take  my  servant  Richard  Cook  to  be  your 
first  counselor;   and,  in  a  day  to  come,   you  shall  make  him  the 
president  of  the  Church  under  your  direction.     Let  him  stand  up 
like  a  man  and  prove  himself  worthy  of  that  blessing. 

7.  And  as  concerning  my  servant  John  Parson,   you  shall  or- 
dain him  to  the  office  of  an  apostle,  and  he  shall  preside  over  the 
apostleship. 

8.  And  as  for  my  servants  John  Cook,  William  Kendall,  and 
John  Firth,  you  sfiall  ordain  them  to  the  office  of  high  priests ; 
and,   in  a  day  to  come,  they  shall  receive  their  appointments  to 
honorable  places  if  they  will  abide  in  me.     Let  them  store  their 
minds  with  all  necessary  information,  that  they  may  become  useful 
in  their  places ;  and  you  shall  ordain  others  as  they  come  along, 
and  place   them    in  their  own   places;  and  you  shall   show  no 
partiality  to  one   more  than    another;  for   I,   the  Lord,  am  just 
in    all    my    ways.       I   cannot    look    upon    sin    with    the  least 
degree    of    allowance.    And    unto  all    those    that    have    come 
forth    with    honest    hearts     and    contrite    spirits,  I    will    make 
unto   them   this    promise :     That    they    shall   receive  the   gift    of 
the  Holy    Ghost    in    its  fullness.     They    shall    speak  in  tongues 
and  prophesy,  and  receive  all  the  gifts  of  the  spirit.     And  if  they 
are  sick,  and  not  appointed  to  death,  I  will  heal   them,   and  their 
joy  shall  be  full. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.     I   am   he  that  was,  and  is,  and 
is  to  come;  even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


78  THE    ORDINANCE    OF    BAPTISM. 

THE     MANNER     OF     ADMINISTERING     THE    ORDI- 
NANCE OF  BAPTISM. 


No.   55.  WEBER,  UTAH,  April  3rd,  1861. 

A  REVELATION  of  Jesus  Christ,  showing  the  manner  of  admini- 
stering the  ordinance  of  baptism  to  those  who  wish  to  become 
members  of  the  Church  of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter  Day  Saints, 
under  the  fullness  of  the  gospel. 

The  person  called  to  administer  in  this  ordinance,  shall  raise 
his  right  arm  up  towards  heaven,  and  calling  the  person  by  name, 
shall  say:  I,  having  received  authority  from  Jesus  Christ,  baptize 
you  for  the  remission  of  your  sins,  and  into  the  fullness  of  the  gos- 
pel of  Jesus  Christ,  in  the  name  of  the  Father,  and  of  the  Son, 
and  of  the  Holy  Ghost.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


GOD'S  FAITHFULNESS  IN  FULFILLING  HIS 
PROMISES. 


No.  56.  WEBER,  UTAH,  April  4th,  1861. 

1.  INASMUCH  as   there  has  been  some    dissatisfaction    mani- 
fested   by  some  concerning  the  blessings  which  I    have  given  unto 
my  servants  whom  I  have   called,   I  will   answer  them  upon  this 
matter. 

2.  They  have  thought  that  I  am   partial  to  one  more  than  to 
another,  and  they  have  also  thought  that   I  have  not  fulfilled  my 
promises  which  I  have  made  in  those  blessings ;  but  they  condemn 
me  before  I  have  had   an   opportunity  of  fulfilling   them.     They 
judge  me  rashly,  and  condemn  me  as  though  I  had  not  the  power 
to  make  my  promises  good ;  but  I  shall  make  them  good.     They 
think  that  I  have  so  arranged  things  to  commence  with,  that  I  can- 
not make  good  the  promises  which  I    have  made ;  but  I  know  my 
business.     I   do  not  make  a  promise  that  I  am  not  able  to  fulfill ; 
and,  in  due  time,  I  will  fulfill  all  the  promises  that  I    have  made, 
to  the  satisfaction  of  all  those  who  are  concerned.     But  they  think 
that  if  I  do  not  fulfill  my  promises  immediately  after  I  have  made 
them,  that  all   is  over,   and  that  I  am  false.     They  do  not  know 


THE    FAITHFULNESS    OF    THE    LORD.  79 

much  about  me.  My  ways  are  not  like  the  ways  of  men.  All 
things  with  me  have  to  take  their  regular  rounds,  and  I  cannot 
turn  them  out  of  their  regular  course.  They  must  take  their  own 
time.  But  men  upon  the  earth  do  not  stand  for  law ;  they  ride 
over  it  and  do  as  they  please.  In  heaven  all  are  subject  to  the 
celestial  law,  which  law  cannot  be  changed.  Therefore,  immortal 
beings  cannot  be  subject  to  mortal  beings;  but  mortal  beings 
must  be  subject  to  immortal  beings. 

3.  And  as  concerning  my  servant  Richard  Cook,  I  have  called 
him,   and,   if  he   will    stand  to  his  post  like  a  man,  I  will  uphold 
him,   and   he   will    never  have   cause  to  complain  against  me  for 
neglecting   him;  but    he    is,   betimes,    very    impatient.     Let  him 
exercise  more  patience  than  he  has  hitherto  done. 

4.  vAnd  as  concerning  my  servant  John  Parson,  I    have  called 
him  to  preside  over  those  who  shall    be  called  to  hold  the  apostle- 
ship,  and  inasmuch  as  he  will  do  his  duty,  I   will   uphold   him  to 
his  satisfaction. 

5.  It  was  necessary  for  me  to  call    these  two  men,  in  order  to 
commence  an  organization ;  and,  as  soon   as  I  can  do  so,    I   will 
call  all  the  others,  and  place  them  in  honorable  places  also.     They 
shall  have  no  cause  to  complain,  if  they  will    be  honest  before  me, 
and  that   I   do   not   wish   to  doubt.     Let  them  rise  up  and  shake 
themselves,  and  cling  to  the  truth,  and  forsake  all  falsehood ;  and 
let    them    store    their    minds  with   those   principles  which  I  have 
revealed  to  them.     Let  them  not  sit  in  judgment  upon  anything 
that  I  have  revealed,  or  that   I  shall  hereafter  reveal  through  my 
servant ;  for  he  is  subject  to  me  only ;  and  let   all  others  obey  the 
words  that  come  from  his  mouth,  for  I  will  sustain  them. 

6.  Let  not  those   who   profess  to  believe  in  me  think  that  my 
servant  Joseph  is  partial    to  one  more  than  to  another ;   for  he  is 
not.     For  honesty  and  integrity,  there  is  none  like  unto  him  upon 
the  earth.     I  can  trust  him,  whether   others  can   or   not.     There- 
fore, I  command  all  those  who  profess  to  be  my  friends,  to  forsake 
all  their  follies,  and   not  dictate   to  me.     Let  them  learn  to  obey 
me,    and,    by    so    doing,    they    will   save  themselves   from   much 
affliction.     And  let  them  leave  those  things  which  belong  to   me. 
alone,  and  all  shall  be  well  with  them. 

I  now  add  no  more.     I  am  the  Son  of  the  Eternal  Father ;  even 
Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


8o  ORDINATION. 

ADVISING  SLOWNESS  OF  SPEECH  IN  ORDINATIONS. 


No.  57.  WEBER,  UTAH,  April  6th,  1861. 

BEHOLD,  verily  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  that  when  you  place 
your  hands  upon  the  head  of  a  person,  you  shall  pause  for  a  short 
time.  You  must  not  be  hasty  in  speaking.  And,  if  you  will  do 
as  I  command  you,  you  will  ordain  him  aright ;  for  I  will  'stand 
by  you  to  dictate  you.  Remember  that  I  do  not  work  in  haste — 
I  must  have  my  own  time.  And  if  you  will  observe  and  keep  my 
commandments,  you  will  never  be  led  wrong. 

I  am   Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 

ORDINATION. 


No.  58.  WEBER,  UTAH,  April  8th,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  speak  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,   according 
to  your  request.     You  are  greatly  afraid   lest  I    should   lead  you 
wrong  when  you  are  called  upon  to  ordain  men  to  the  priesthood ; 
but  you  need  not  to  fear,  for  I  will  sanction  what  you   do.     It  is 
my  business  to  direct  you  in  all  your  movements.     I  am  satisfied 
with  what  you  have  done,  and    I  will  record  it   in  heaven.     You 
must  not  fear,  but  trust  fully  in  me ;  and  if  there  is  anything  that 
goes  wrong,  I  will  bear  the  blame.     Do  your  own  duty,  and  leave 
mine  to  me. 

2.  You  are  astonished  at  my  leading  you  to  ordain  so  many 
high  priests.     You  have  thought  that  the  high  priests  were  scarce ; 
but  they  are  not.     There  are  many  thousands  of  them   now  upon 
the  earth ;   and,  although  there  are  quite  a  number  of  them  now  in 
my  Church,  there  are,  notwithstanding,   many  of  them  who  have 
not  yet  obeyed  my  gospel.     Of  those  who  have,  some  of  them  are 
in  the  lesser  priesthood ;  but  they  will  be  taken  out,  and  placed  in 
their  own  places.     And,    in   due  time,  all  things  pertaining  to  my 
Church  will  be  placed  in  their  own  order. 

3.  And  it  is  my  will  that  you  should  give  unto  all  those  whom 
you  have  ordained  to  the  high  priesthood  a  certificate  of  their 
ordination,  as  soon  as  you  can  make  it  convenient.     And,  behold, 


THE    CHIEF    ACTING    OFFICERS.  8 1 

I  speak  unto  all  those  who  have  complied  with  my  request; 
let  them  place  their  whole  confidence  in  me,  and  I  will  fight  their 
battles.  They  have  nothing  to  fear,  for  I  will  be  by  their  side  by 
my  holy  angels ;  and,  if  they  will  hearken  to  the  whisperings  of  the 
still  small  voice,  not  a  hair  of  their  heads  shall  be  hurt. 

4.  And  as  concerning  the  Holy  Ghost,  which  I  have  promised 
to  all  those  who  have  complied  with  my  request,  it  shall  commence 
to  influence  them  from  the  time  that  they  were  confirmed  into  my 
Church ;  and   its  influence  shall   continue  to  increase  with  them, 
and  seal  the  truth  upon  their   minds.     It    shall  be    a    continual 
light   to   their    pathway,    and    give    unto    them    the    promised 
testimony. 

5.  And  when  your  enemies  are  about  to  come  upon  you,  you 
shall  call  all  those  who  believe  in  me  together  ;  and  at  the  right  time 
I  will  appoint  unto  you  the  place  to   which   they  shall   gather.     I 
am  controlling  those  wicked  shepherds  who  oppose  you,  and  I  will 
bring  them  to  my  own  terms.     All  will  go  right.     Therefore,   let 
them  hearken  diligently  to  my  words,  and  obey  them,  and  I  will  be 
with  them  unto  the  end. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.  I  am  he  who  holds  in  his  hands 
the  destinies  of  all  men;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen 
and  Amen. 

THE  CHIEF  ACTING   OFFICERS  UNDER  THE  FULL- 
NESS OF  THE  HOLY  PRIESTHOOD. 


No.  59.  WEBER,  UTAH,  April  lyth,  1861. 

1.  INASMUCH  as  the  chief  acting  officers  of  my  holy  priesthood, 
under  the   fullness   of  the  gospel,  feel  that  I    have  not  given  unto 
them  a  sufficient  testimony  of  the    truth  of  the  mission    of  my 
servant,  the  prophet,  who  now  holds  the  keys  of  my  kingdom  upon 
the  earth,  let  them  hearken  unto  the  words  of  the  Lord  their  God ; 
for  I  am  about  to  reason  with  them  upon  this  matter. 

2.  They  bring  up  the  evidence  which  I  gave  unto  those   men 
whom  I    have  called  to  assist  my  servant,  Joseph  Smith,  and  com- 
pare it  with  the  evidence  which  they  have  received   under  the  full- 
ness of  the  priesthood ;  and  they  consider  that  the  evidence  which 


82  THE    CHIEF    ACTING    OFFICERS. 

I  gave  to  the  associates  of  the  Prophet  Joseph  Smith,  is  greater 
than  that  which  they  have  received ;  but  they  do  not  know  what 
they  are  saying.  They  think  that  it  was  a  great  thing  for  me  to 
send  a  holy  angel  unto  those  men,  who  were  one  with  my  servant 
Joseph  Smith,  in  his  beginning.  But  what  was  that  compared 
with  that  which  they  have  now  received?  Unto  them  I  have 
revealed  all  heights  of  exaltation,  both  of  Gods  and  angels,  and 
also  of  worlds  innumerable.  And  I  have  placed  them  in  a 
position  where  they  can  come  to  a  knowledge  of  the  inhabitants  of 
all  earths  which  have  been  created.  Moreover,  I  have  sent  unto 
them  the  angel  Gabriel,  clothed  in  mortality,  to  restore  all  things, 
and  to  bring  down  all  power  under  his  feet,  and  I  am  with  him ; 
but  it  seems  that  I  cannot  make  those  men  believe  it.  Oh,  how 
they  do  trifle  with  me !  How  they  aggravate  me  with  their  follies  ! 
If  they  would  only  act  reasonably  with  me,  I  could  do  with  them ; 
but  they  do  not.  They  think  that  I  ought  to  do  everything  that 
they  ask  me  to  do  in  a  minute.  They  will  not  give  me  time  to 
commence  to  do  it  before  they  censure  me  because  it  is  not  done. 
I  cannot  please  them,  do  what  I  will.  In  their  estimation  all  that 
I  do  is  wrong.  They  think  that  they  know  what  ought  to  be  done 
better  than  I  do.  They  cannot  do  their  own  duty,  for  fear  that  I 
shall  not  do  mine.  How  can  I  work  with  such  people?  They 
act  as  inconsistently  as  though  they  knew  nothing  about  me. 

3.  It    seems    that    they    cannot  place  their  confidence  in  me 
unless  they  could  see  me ;   but  they  cannot  see  me  until  there  shall 
be  a  temple  built,  and   a  holy  place  appointed  for  that  purpose ; 
and  then,   if  they  are  worthy,   I  will  meet  with  them,  and  speak 
with  them  mouth  to  mouth.     It  is  contrary  to  the  law  by  which  I 
am  governed  for  me  to  meet  with  them  in  the  open  air,  or  to  be  seen 
by  them.     No  person  can  see  me  without  being  transfigured ;    but 
I  will  show  myself  to  those  who  have  occasion  to  see  me.     If  I 
show  myself  to  my  servant  who  holds  the  keys  of  my  kingdom,  it 
is  sufficient  at  present ;  but,  in  due  time,   I  will  reveal  myself  to 
thousands.     When  I  met  with  mine  ancient  covenant  people,  they 
had  a  place  prepared  for  me,  where  I  could  meet  with  them,   and 
show  myself  unto  them ;  and  when  these  my  people  have  prepared 
a  place  for  me,  I  will  appear  to  them  also. 

4.  The  trouble  with  my  servants  is  this :     They  do  not  know 


THE    CHIEF    ACTING    OFFICERS.  83 

me.  Their  minds  have  been  exercised  too  much  with  the  foolish- 
ness of  men.  So  much  so,  that  they  neither  have  confidence  in 
me,  nor  in  anything  else.  Neither  do  they  reason  honestly,  or  they 
never  could  have  come  to  the  conclusion  to  which  they  have 
come.  But  I  suppose  that  they  will  justify  their  own  course,  and 
consider  that  it  is  I  who  am  wrong.  Suppose  that  I  should  make 
my  appearance  to  them,  what  benefit  would  that  be  to  them  ?  It 
would  not  relieve  them.  Suppose  that  I  should  open  the  heavens 
to  them,  and  they  should  see  all  the  heavenly  host,  what  benefit 
would  that  be  to  them.''  They  know  that  these  things  exist  in  the 
heavens,  as  well  as  if  I  had  shown  them  unto  them.  They  have  the 
keys  of  knowledge  by  which  all  these  things  are  known ;  and  if  they 
do  believe  in  those  keys,  which  reveal  all  things,  they  would  not 
believe  that  it  was  me,  even  should  they  see  me.  They  would  not 
acknowledge  the  sight  of  their  own  eyes.  There  is  a  spirit  that 
wars  against  them  that  would  lead  them  to  infidelity.  It  is  in  the 
Church,  and  they  have  felt  the  effects  of  it ;  and  they  must  strive 
against  it,  or  it  will  take  them  down  the  stream  to  destruction. 
But  if  they  cannot  believe  in  those  keys  of  knowledge  which  I 
have  given,  they  cannot  believe  in  me ;  for,  whosoever  under- 
stands the  laws  by  which  I  am  governed,  sees  me  in  all  my  glory, 
for  these  are  my  attributes.  And  by  this  means,  those  who  have 
any  knowledge  of  me,  know  me.  And  this  is  eternal  life  to  all 
people,  that  they  have  a  perfect  knowledge  of  my  laws  and  obey 
them. 

I  now  add  no  more ;  but  I  will  shortly  give  unto  you  more. 
For  the  present,  let  this  suffice.  I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  CHIEF  ACTING  OFFICERS    UNDER  THE  FULL- 
NESS OF  THE  HOLY  PRIESTHOOD. 


No.  60.  WEBER,  UTAH,  April  i8th,  1861. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts,  and  I  am  come  to  speak 
unto  you  again  concerning  those  chief  acting  officers  of  my 
Church  under  the  fullness  of  the  holy  priesthood. 


84  THE    CHIEF    ACTING    OFFICERS. 

2.  They  are  greatly  afflicted  in  their  feelings  without  a  cause. 
If  they  could  only  place  their  confidence  in  me,  what  a  burden  it 
would  remove  off  them.      But,   if  they  cannot   do  so,  they   must 
grapple  with  their  own  weakness.     I  have  done  my   duty  to  them 
as  far  as  I  have  gone  with  them ;    and  they  know  that   no   person 
as   yet  has  ever  injured  them.      And  if  I  have  preserved  them 
through  the  past,  why  cannot  they  place  their  confidence  in   me, 
and  trust  me  for  the  future?     If  men  could   only   act  reasonably 
with  me,  I  could  do  with  them.     Whoever  has  proved  me  false  in 
any   one  thing  that  I  have  ever  promised?     No.  one.     I  never 
failed  to  fulfill  my  word ;  yet  men  say  that  they  do  not  understand 
me.     It  is  only  given  to  one  man  upon  the  earth  to  understand  me 
perfectly ;   and  he  who  holds  the  keys  of  my  kingdom   upon  the 
earth  is  that  man ;   and  it  is  his  duty  to  explain  my  words  to  the 
satisfaction  of  all.     I  am  governed  by  a  celestial  law. 

3.  As  I  have  said  unto  you  in  a  former  revelation,  so  I   say 
unto  you  again,  what  benefit  would   it  be  unto  those  men  if  I 
should  send  unto  them  a  holy   angel?     What  would  they  know 
about  him  more  than  what  they  now  know?     They  know  that  an 
angel  is  a  resurrected  personage ;   and  what  more  do  they   need  to 
know  about  angels?     If  an  angel  was  sent  unto  them,  what  could 
he  tell  them  more  than  they  now  know?     Nothing  at  all.     They 
have  the  greatest  angel  now  in  their  midst  that  ever  surrounded 
my  throne;  but  they  do  not  appreciate  that  blessing.    But,  behold, 
I  say  unto  them,  if  they  do  not  alter  their  course,  I  will  take  him 
away  from  them.     I  will  not  suffer  that  his  feelings  shall  be   con- 
tinually wounded  by  their  foolishness. 

4.  They  need  not  to  think  that  I   am   dependent   upon  them ; 
for  I  am  not.      Should    they  leave   me  I   can   still   obtain  help. 
They  act  as  though  they  had  nothing  to  do  with  the  salvation  of 
man.     They  had  much  better  have  remained  with  their  fathers  at 
home,  than  to  have  come  here  to  grumble  and  complain  as  they 
do.     I  suppose  that  they  think  that  they  are  laboring  for  me ;    but 
they  are  not.     If  they  labor    at    all,  they  do    it   for   themselves. 
They  had  better  make  up  their  minds  what  they  are  going  to  do. 
And  if  they  are  going  to  draw  out  from  me,  the  sooner  they  do 
so,  the  better;    for,  as  they  now  are,  they  are  of  no  use  to  me. 
But  if  they  conclude  to  act  in  the  office  to  which  I  have  appointed 


THE    CHIEF    ACTING    OFFICERS.  85 

them,  I  wish  them  to  humble  themselves  before  me,  that  I  may 
pardon  their  sins;  for  they  have  grievously  sinned  against  me. 
They  think  that  I  should  do  everything  that  they  ask  me  to  do  in 
one  minute.  If  I  have  made  unto  them  a  promise,  and  they  are 
worthy,  I  will  fulfill  it  as  soon  as  I  can ;  but  the  way  in  which 
they  now  act,  renders  them  unworthy  of  the  least  of  my  blessings. 
They  consider  that  I  have  never  given  unto  them  a  manifestation 
of  my  power ;  as  yet,  they  have  never  needed  one.  When  they 
need  to  see  one,  they  shall  see  it.  They  can  read  in  the  Bible  of 
the  miracles  that  I  performed  through  my  servant  Moses ;  but  I 
did  not  manifest  my  power  through  him  until  I  had  first  raised 
him  up,  and  given  unto  him  all  the  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood. 
And  I  was  several  years  in  doing  so  before  I  began  to  manifest 
my  almighty  power  through  him.  But  after  I  had  started  my 
work  with  him,  I  never  staid  my  hand  while  he  was  upon  the 
earth;  and  I  will  do  the  same  now.  After  I  shall  have  once 
started,  I  will  never  stay  my  hand  again  until  I  shall  have  brought 
down  all  power  under  my  feet.  But  these  men  think  that  I  should 
now  give  unto  them  a  manifestation  of  my  power  to  satisfy  them. 
Should  I  do  this,  I  would  disturb  the  calm  which  I  wish  to  exist 
until  I  am  ready  to  burst  things  up,  and  then  they  will  se£  all  the 
manifestations  of  power  which  they  wish  to  see.-  When  they  see 
that  I  am  at  work,  the}-  ought  to  be  satisfied.  As  often  as  they 
need  information,  they  can  hear  from  me,  if  they  will  take  the 
right  course.  I  am  ready  and  willing  to  pour  out  blessings  upon 
all  those  who  seek  me  with  all  their  hearts. 

I  now  add  no  more.     I  am  he. that  was,  and  is,  and  is  to  come; 
even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


FORMER     REVELATIONS     EXPLAINED.— BAPTISM.— 
THE  SACRAMENT.— HEALING  OF  THE  SICK. 


No.  6 1.  WEBER,  UTAH,  April  i9th,  1861. 

i.  IT  is  necessary  that  you  should  know  my  will  concerning 
the  work  that  lies  before  you.  Those  men  who  are  connected 
with  you  in  this  work,  have  desired  to  know  of  me  what  I  meant 


86  BAPTISM. THE    SACRAMENT. 

by  calling  upon  them  to  be  baptized  for  the  remission  of  their  sins, 
and,  thereby,  commencing  an  organization.  It  was  necessary  for 
me  to  do  this,  in  order  to  prepare  a  number  of  men  to  preach  my 
gospel  in  its  fullness,  and  that  there  might  be  a  place  prepared  for 
the  people  to  rally  to,  when  I  shall  have  moved  the  obstacles  that 
now  bind  my  people  together  out  of  the  way,  and  those  obstacles 
I  will  remove  when  I  shall  have  worked  things  up  to  a  head.  I 
understand  my  business,  no  matter  whether  others  think  that  I  do 
or  not.  When  I  told  my  people  to  stand  still  and  watch  my 
wonder-working  hand,  I  did  not  mean  that  they  should  stand  still 
and  do  nothing  at  all ;  but,  on  the  contrary,  I  called  upon  them 
to  do  a  small  thing  to  loose  my  hands  so  that  I  could  work,  and  I 
expected  them  to  do  it.  Then  what  did  I  mean  by  telling  them 
to  stand  still?  I  meant  that  they  must  not  go  abroad  among  the 
people  to  preach,  until  I  shall  have  opened  the  way  for  them.  I 
told  them  that  they  could  not  convince  the  people  by  so  doing  t 
for  it  is  my  business  to  penetrate  their  hearts ;  and,  when  I  am 
ready,  I  can  do  it  effectually.  But  the  law  by  which  I  am 
governed  binds  me  to  take  a  course  to  save  alive  as  many  innocent 
people  as  I  shall  be  able  to :  besides  which,  I  do  not  delight  in 
shedding  the  blood  of  the  innocent. 

2.  And   now,   behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  it  is  necessary 
that  you  should  know  my  will  concerning  the   future.     You  have 
baptized  many  already;  others,  also,   will   flock  to  you,   and   call 
upon  you  for  baptism;  and,  as  much  as  possible,  I  will  send  unto 
you  those  who   are  worthy ;  but  the  rest   I  will  restrain.     I  will 
regulate    all   these   things    as    well    as    possible.     And    you  shall 
baptize  those   who   apply   to  you   for  baptism,  and  place  them  in 
their  own  places;  and  you  shall  continue  to  preach  to  those  who 
come  to  hear  you.     I  will  shortly  place  you  in  a  different  position 
to  that  in  which  you  are  now  placed.      Therefore,    hearken   to  my 
words,  and  be  content  to  remain  as  you  are  until  I   change   your 
circumstances. 

3.  As  touching  the   partaking  of  the  sacrament,  it  is  my  will 
that  these  my  people  should  wait  a  short   time  for  this   privilege, 
and    I    will    speak    unto    my   servant   again   upon  this  matter   at 
the  time  which  I  have  appointed,  and  reveal  unto  him  more  about 
it.     Until    then,    let    all    be   satisfied,    and  continue   on  as    they 
are. 


THE  SCHOOL  OF  THE  PROPHETS.  87 

4 

4.  And  as  for  the  healing  of  the  sick,   I   will  pour  out   that 
blessing  upon  my  people  in  rich  abundance  to  the  satisfaction  of 
all,  if  they  will  only  wait  until  the  time  has  arrived  for   me  to   do 
so.     But  the  difficulty  with  them  is,  that  they  must  have  a  thing 
done    immediately,    or  they   begin   to  murmur  against    me,    and 
charge  me  with  being  false.     I  do  not  work  in  haste.     All  things 
with  me  must  take  their  regular  round. 

5.  And  as  concerning  the  gifts  of  the  spirit,  I  will  shortly  pour 
them  out  upon  my  people  to  their  satisfaction.     I  am  doing  the 
best  that  I   can  for  them  in  every  respect.     Let  them  all  hearken 
to  my  words,  and  diligently  obey  them,  and  all  will  be  well. 

I  now  add  no  more.  I  am  he  whose  words  are  quick  and 
powerful,  sharper  than  a  two-edged  sword;  even  Jesus  Christ. 
Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  SCHOOL  OF  THE  PROPHETS. 


No.  62.  WEBER,  UTAH,  May  3d,  1861. 

BEHOLD,  I  am  the  light  and  the  life  of  the  world ;  the  same 
which  moves  forth  in  the  darkness,  and  the  darkness  compre- 
hendeth  it  not.  I  am  he  who  speaks  the  word,  and  all  the 
heavenly  hosts  obey ;  who  groaned  upon  the  cross,  and  all  eternity 
was  pained.  And  I  am  come  to  speak  unto  you,  my  son;  con- 
cerning those  whom  you  have  ordained  to  the  holy  priesthood. 
It  is  necessary  that  you  should  enter  into  an  order  whereby  to 
instruct  them  in  those  things  which  I  have  revealed  unto  you,  that 
they  may  be  prepared  for  the  work  which  I  have  called  them  to 
do.  There  is  a  great  work  lying  before  them,  and  they  need  to  be 
preparing  themselves  for  it.  And  this  order  which  you  must  com- 
mence, you  shall  call  the  "School  of  the  Prophets."  And  in  that 
school  you  shall  teach  the  hidden  mysteries  of  my  Church.  And 
you  shall  gather  together  the  high  priests  as  often  as  you  can  make 
it  convenient,  and  instruct  them  on  this  wise.  And,  for  the  time 
being,  you  may  admit  into  the  school  the  priests  of  Aaron ;  but,  in 
due  time,  there  will  be  none  admitted  into  this  school  but  high 
priests.  And  this  order  shall  be  fully  established  in  the  Church, 


88  THE    PROPHET    AND    HIS    ASSOCIATES. 

and  it  shall  continue  as  long  as  the  fullness  of  the  priesthood  con- 
tinues upon  the  earth.  And  you  shall  preside  over  this  school, 
and  it  shall  be  conducted  after  this  manner :  It  shall  be  opened 
by  singing  and  prayer,  and  there  shall  be  perfect  order  kept  in  the 
school.  There  shall  be  but  one  person  speak  at  once,  and  all 
others  shall  sit  in  silence  ;  and  there  shall  be  no  laughter  allowed 
in  the  school.  And,  inasmuch  as  my  servants  will  hearken  unto 
my  words  and  obey  them,  I  will  meet  with  them  in  this  holy  place, 
and  they  shall  be  filled  with  wisdom.  Every  endowment  neces- 
sary shall  be  granted  unto  them.  It  is  my  delight  to  build  them 
up  in  those  things  which  belong  to  eternal  life.  Let  them  not  fear, 
for,  if  they  will  hearken  unto  me,  I  will  be  with  them  unto  the 
end.  I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  PROPHET'S    SICKNESS,    AND    HIS    ASSOCIATES. 


No.  63.  WEBER,  UTAH,  May  3d,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  verily  I  say  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,  I    have 
looked  down  upon  you  and  seen  your  sickness.     You  have  passed 
through  so  much  since  I   called  you,   and  it  has  so  broken  your 
constitution,  that  it  is  with  great  difficulty  that  you  manage  to  live ; 
and  you  must  not  talk  any  more  at  this  time  than   duty  calls  you 
to  do,  and,  when  you   do  talk,  you  must   not  exert  yourself   any 
more  than  necessary.     The  ill  usage  which  you  have  been   called 
to  pass  through  was  more  than  mortal  man  could  well  endure ;  but 
I  will   shortly   heal  you  again,   and  you  shall  gradually  gain  your 
strength  back. 

2.  I  am  continually  at  work  with  this  people,  striving  to  bring 
about    a    change,    and    all    things   are    working  well.     There  are 
hundreds  of  people  who  now  believe  in   me,   and   they  will  soon 
call    upon    you  for  baptism ;  and   I   shall   soon  have  a  sufficient 
number  in  the  new  organization  of   my  Church  to  commence  the 
work    with,    and    then,    when  there  is   a  certain  number  in  the 
Church,  which  will  be  sufficient  for  me  to   commence  my  work 
with,    I  will  cut  a  clear  way  through  your  enemies.     I  will  then 
make  a  slaughter  among  them.     And  as  I  have  said  unto  you 


THE    PROPHET    AND    HIS    ASSOCIATES.  89 

before,  so  I  say  unto  you  again,  I  will  hold  all  your  enemies  off 
you  until  I  am  ready  to  cut  them  off.  When  I  am  ready,  then  I 
will  destroy  them  in  the  flesh.  I  will  act  with  you  in  such  a  way 
as  to  remove  all  the  burden  that  I  can  off  you  ;  for  I  do  not  delight 
to  see  you  continually  weighed  down  until  your  life  is  a  burden  to 
you. 

3.  And  it  is  my  will  that  those  men  who  are  one  with   you 
should  do  likewise.     Let  them  uphold  you,  and  I  will  uphold  them. 
And,  if  they  will  only  do  that  which  I  command  them,  all  will   be 
well  with  them.     They  must  take  a  course  to  hold  all  the  burden 
off  you  that  they  can.     Let  them  cease  their  light-mindedness  and 
loud  laughter,  for  it  is  sin  in  my  sight.     As  for  the  preaching 
which  they  have  done  to  those  who  have  come  to  hear,  I  am  well 
pleased  with  it.     In  this  respect  I   am  well  pleased  with  them. 
Notwithstanding  this,  they  are  light-minded.     This  is  the  greatest 
failing   that  they   have.     They  should  be  an  example  to  others. 
It  is  my  will  that  they  should  continue  in  preaching  as  they  have 
hitherto  done ;  and  let  them  place  their  whole  confidence  in  me. 
I   will  do  my  duty.     They  need  not  to  fear.     No  person    ever 
knew  my  works  to  fail.     It  is  not  the  work  of  the  Lord  that  is 
frustrated,  but  the  work  of  man.     They  can  see  the  works  of  man 
failing  all  around  them,  and,  on  this  account,  they  are   deceived ; 
for  they  judge  of  the  works  of  the  Lord    by  the  works  of  man ; 
therefore,  it  is  hard  to  find  faith  upon  the  earth. 

4.  And  as  concerning  my  servant   John  Parson,   I    have  seen 
his  sickness,  and  I  will  shortly  heal    his  body,  and   he  shall  enjoy 
good   health.     He   desires   that  blessing,  and  it  shall  be  granted 
unto  him. 

I  now  add  no  more.  I  am  he  whose  words  are  quick  and 
powerful,  sharper  than  a  two-edged  sword;  even  Jesus  Christ. 
Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


90  JOSEPH    SMITH,    JR. 

REVELATION  CONCERNING  JOSEPH  SMITH,  JR. 


No.  64.  WEBER,  UTAH,  May  4th,  1861. 

1.  IT  is  necessary  that  you  should  understand  my  movements 
among  men. 

2.  You  have  heard  of  a  new  sect  rising  up,  calling  themselves 
the  "True  Latter  Day  Saints,"  headed  by  the  son  of   my  servant, 
Joseph  Smith,  and  you  wish  to  know  whether  I  have  anything  to 
do  with  them,  or  not.     I  answer  that  I  have.     I  am  using  them  to 
be  a  scfourge  to  those    false  shepherds  of  my  flock,  that  through 
them  I  might  open  the  eyes  of   some.     But,  when  I    have  accom- 
plished my  purposes  with  them,  I  will  turn  them  another  way.     I 
have  given  unto  them  a  portion  of  my  holy  spirit  to   prepare  them 
for  the  work  which   I    have  called  them  to  do.     Therefore,  I  am 
using  them  to  assist  you,  and,  in  the  end,  I  will  bring  them  up  to 
you,  and  many  of  them  will  obey  the  fulness  of  my  go  spel,    and 
become  one  with  you.     They  are  in  my  hands,  and  I  will  turn 
them  hither  and  thither  as  it  seemeth  me  good.     They  enjoy,  in 
part,  the  gifts  of  my  spirit.     I    have  given  unto  them  wisdom,  and 
love  for  each  other ;  and  I  will  take  good  care  of  them.     You  need 
not  to  think  that  they  will  come  in  contact  with  you,  for  they  will 
not.     They  will  become  subject  to  you.     And,  at  the  time  which 
I  have  appointed,  I  will  bring  down  all  power  under  your  feet. 

3.  I    have   not,   as   yet,  called  my  servant,  Joseph  Smith,  who 
now  stands  at  the  head  of  that  party,  to  be  a  prophet.     I    have 
only  moved    upon   him   by  my  holy  spirit  for  a  certain  purpose. 
I  shall  do  nothing  in  that  respect,  but  what  I  do  through  you.     I 
do  not  claim  the  right  to  do  anything  upon  the  earth  that  concerns 
you,   without  your  consent.     Therefore,  when  I  call  my  servant 
Joseph  Smith  to  be  a  prophet,  I  shall  call  him  through  you. 

4.  There  will  be  many  prophets  called  to  assist  you  in  a   day 
to  come,  but  none  will    hold  the  keys  of  this  dispensation  except 
you.     All  others  will  be  subject  to  you.     There  is  an  order  in  my 
Church,  and  that  order  has  to  be  adhered  to.     There  can  be  but 
one  person  upon  the  earth   at  once  holding  the  keys  of  a    dis- 
pensation.    There  may  be  many  prophets  upon  the  earth  at  one 
time,  but  they  must  be  subject  to  him  who  holds  the  keys. 


THE    DELIVERANCE    OF    THE    RIGHTEOUS.  91 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.  I  am  he  who  holds  in  his  hands 
the  keys  of  death  and  hell ;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen 
and  Amen. 


THE    DELIVERANCE    OF    THE     RIGHTEOUS.— COM- 
MANDING THE  SAINTS  TO  GATHER  TO 
SOUTH  WEBER. 


No.  65.  WEBER,  UTAH,  May  nth,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  it  is  necessary  that  you 
should  know  my  will  concerning  those  people  who  have  obeyed 
the  fulness  of  my  gospel,  and  who  are  looking  to  me  for  deliver- 
ance.    They  are  chiefly  of  the  poor  class.     Not  many  rich,  as  yet, 
have  obeyed  the  fulness  of  my  gospel ;    but  I  have  looked  down 
upon  the  poor  of  my  people,  and  I  have  prepared  a  blessing  for 
them ;   for  they  shall  feast  upon    the  good  things  of  the    earth, 
and    the    blessings  of  heaven    shall    be    abundantly    poured    out 
upon  them ;   but  the  proud,   the   hypocrites,  and  the  liars,    I  will 
visit  as  with  a  whirlwind.     I  will   not  leave  one  of  them   alive. 
Yea,  verily,  I   will  feed  the  fat  with  judgment.     Those  men  who 
have  obeyed  the   fulness   of  my   gospel  think  that   I   am   a  long 
while  before  I  do  so.     They  are  tired  of  waiting  for  me. 

2.  Why  am  I  so  long  before  I  come  out  of  my  hiding  place  to 
sweep  away  the  refuge  of  lies  from  among  the  pure  in  heart?     I 
will  answer  this  question.     I  must  first  prepare  a  number  of  men  to 
preach  the  fulness  of  my  gospel  before  I  can  cut  off  the   wicked. 
If  I  do  not  do  this,  what  shall  I  do  with  those  who  will  be   left? 
Where  could  they   look  to  for  salvation,   if  I  had  not  prepared 
some  men  to  preach  to  them?     I  must  have  something  prepared 
for  them  to  cling  to.     Before  I  throw  down   one   government  I, 
must  commence  another.     I  must  lay  my  plans  out  in  a  way  to 
save  alive  all  that  I  can.     There  are  many  among  this  people  who 
are  pure  in  heart — who  think  that  they  are  doing  right  by  taking 
the  counsel  of  those  corrupt   shepherds  who  have   forsaken  me — 
they  know  no  better.     I  must  so  arrange  matters  as  to  have  them 
taught  of  my  ways.     I  am  taking  the  wisest  plan  to  save  alive  the 
pure  of  my  people ;   therefore,  let  all  be  satisfied  with  the  way  in 


92  THE    DELIVERANCE    OF    THE    RIGHTEOUS. 

which  I  am  working,  and  all  things  will  come  out  right. 

3.  Those  chief  shepherds  think  that  I  shall  not  cut  them  off; 
but  when  that  time  has  arrived,  I  will  show  them  whether  I  will, 
or  not.  They  will  shortly  try  what  they  can  do.  They  would 
have  come  against  you  before  this  time  if  I  had  not  held  them. 
They  cannot  come  up  against  you  until  I  permit  them.  They 
thirst  for  your  blood  ;  and  thirst  they  may ;  they  shall  never  have 
power  over  you.  They  cannot  kill  you  as  they  have  killed  other 
prophets — their  power  is  over — they  have  gone  their  length,  and  I 
will  shortly  settle  all  difficulties  with  them.  If  those  men  whom 
I  have  called  to  preach  the  fulness  of  my  gospel  wish  to  see  me 
come  out  of  my  hiding  place,  to  clear  their  way,  let  them  prepare 
themselves  for  it.  They  will  do  anything  but  that  which  I  com- 
mand them.  They  are  almost  continually  dabbling  with  those 
things  which  I  told  them  not  to  meddle  with.  They  want  to  take 
their  own  course,  and  still  they  are  not  willing  for  me  to  jtake 
mine ;  but  if  I  do  not  do  the  thing  which  they  think  that  I  ought 
to  do,  they  murmur  against  me :  they  will  not  meet  me  upon  fair 
grounds.  If  they  wish  me  to  come  out  of  my  hiding  place  to 
clear  the  way  for  them,  why  do  they  not  prepare  themselves  for  it? 
Are  they  prepared  to  preach  the  fulness  of  my  gospel?  No,  they 
are  not ;  neither  will  they  prepare  themselves  for  it.  But,  unless 
they  will  do  this,  if  they  put  in  their  crops,  they  shall  not  reap 
them,  and  continue  to  be  mine  apostles.  They  shall  find  out  that 
I  am  the  master.  If  they  will  not  do  as  I  command  them,  they 
will  have  to  suffer  the  consequences.  Those  who  are  blessed  the 
most,  are  the  most  unfaithful.  When  ^ave  any  of  them  proved 
my  word  to  fail  ?  I  am  waiting  for  them  to  prepare  themselves. 
Suppose  that  I  were  to  cut  off  mine  enemies  to-morrow,  are  they 
ready  for  it?  No.  How  much  do  they  know  about  the  fulness  of 
my  gospel  t  But  very  little.  Oh,  fyow  harcjl  ^  is  for  me  to  deal 
with  men  upon  thg  ear|:h !  If  I  would  give  up  to  them,  and  let 
them  take  the^r  /own  cpurse?  I  might  get  #?Png  w^n  them  ;  but  the 
moment;  that  I  cros,s  their  pgth,  they  'are  ready  to  deny  |he  truth, 
and  to  depart  from  me ;  but  I  wjU  chasten  the  rebellious,.  }f  I 
had  never  spoken  to  them,  they  could  but  do  as  they  are  $piqg. 
I  suppose  that  they  think  that  they  will  accomplish  their  own  ends^ 
and  then,  if  they  have  time  to  spare  afterwards,  they  will  attend  tq 


COMMANDING    THE    SAINTS    TO    SOUTH    WEBER.  93 

me.  I  can  get  plenty  of  such  servants  as  those.  If  I  have  men 
to  assist  me,  I  want  those  who  will  hearken  to  my  words  and  obey 
them. 

4.  And  as  concerning  those  people  who  have  obeyed  the  ful- 
ness of  my  gospel,  and  who  are  scattered  abroad  among  mine 
enemies,  it  is  my  will  that  they  should  gather  up  to  this  place  as 
soon  as  they  can  do  so  conveniently.  If  they  cannot  get  houses, 
let  them  get  tents.  And  they  must  come  as  well  prepared  with 
food  as  they  can  be,  that  they  may  not  be  any  more  burdensome 
to  others  than  possible.  If  any  of  my  people  have  surplus  property, 
let  them  sell  it  for  wheat  and  other  useful  provisions,  that  they  may 
have  a  sufficiency  to  live  upon  until  I  place  fresh  means  in  their 
hands ;  and  if  they  will  do  as  I  command  them,  they  shall  not 
lack  for  the  common  necessaries  of  life  ;  for  I  will  clear  the  way 
for  them  in  time  to  give  them  a  fresh  supply  of  necessary  means. 
I  call  upon  all  those  who  profess  to  live  by  every  word  that  proceeds 
from  my  mouth  to  hearken  to  this  revelation,  and  obey  it,  and  all 
will  be  well  with  them ;  and  if  they  do  not,  I  will  chasten  them. 
And  I  testify  unto  you,  O  ye  saints,  that  I  have  given  this  revela- 
tion unto  my  servant  Joseph.  I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    CONCERNING    RICHARD    COOK   AND 
JOHN  PARSON. 


No.  66.  WEBER,  UTAH,  May  1510,  1861. 

i.  LET  them  hearken  unto  my  words,  which  are  quick  and 
powerful,  sharper  than  a  two-edged  sword,  and  all  will  be  well  with 
them.  Let  them  know  that  I  am  not  displeased  with  them.  Their 
intentions  are  pure  before  me.  They  think  that  I  am  severe  with 
them,  when  I  am  not.  When  I  am  cutting  down  those  false 
principles  that  exist  in  the  world,  they  think  that  I  am  cutting 
them  down.  It  is  necessary  that  they  should  understand  me 
aright.  I  shall  never  reprove  them,  only  when  they  stand  in  need 
of  it.  My  yoke  is  easy,  and  my  burden  is  light.  I  do  not  mean 
to  break  up  the  feelings  of  men  without  a  cause.  They  have  done 
well  under  the  circumstances  which  have  existed.  I  have  now 


94  RICHARD    COOK    AND    JOHN    PARSON. 

given  the  fulness  of  the  holy  priesthood  unto  men,  and  these  keys 
of  knowledge  cannot  be  tested  by  anything  that  now  exists  upon 
the  earth ;  but  all  things  shall  be  tried  by  them,  and  I  will  make 
the  world  understand  them. 

2.  If  I  raise  up  a  prophet,  it  is  my  business  to  back  him  up, 
and  recommend  him  to  the  world.  He  cannot  be  tried  by  the 
testimony  of  inspired  writers.  The  greater  cannot  be  tried  by  the 
lesser ;  and  the  greatest  tries  all  things.  All  things  that  ever  have 
been  written  by  inspired  men  are  swallowed  up  in  that  which  is 
perfect;  but,  at  present,  and  until  I  come  out  in  power,  it  is 
necessary  to  assist  the  judgment  of  men  by  bringing  forth  all  the 
testimony  that  can  be  produced  from  the  writings  of  inspired  men, 
in  order  to  prove  to  the  world  that  the  holy  priesthood  is  now 
given  to  men  in  its  fulness.  When  I  shall  have  come  out  in 
power,  all  the  world  will  be  satisfied  of  the  mission  of  my  servant 
Joseph.  I  cannot  do  all  things  at  once.  I  must  work  gradually. 
All  things  pertaining  to  the  salvation  of  man  will  be  brought  about 
in  due  time.  Therefore,  let  my  people  be  comforted,  and  know 
that  I  am  with  them.  I  am  he  who  holds  in  nis  hands  the  destinies 
of  all  men ;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  FAITHLESS  CHASTENED. 


No.  67.  WEBER,  UTAH,  May  lyth,  1861. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  he  who  shuts,  and  no  one  opens  ;  and  who 
opens,  and  no  one  shuts ;  and  I  have  decreed  a  judgment  upon 
this  people.  Oh,  how  they  aggravate  me  with  their  follies  and 
unbelief!  How  long  can  I  bear  with  them?  Not  long.  Al- 
though I  have  spoken  and  revealed  all  heights  of  both  glory  and 
exaltation,  and  even  keys  of  knowledge  which  have  been  hid  from 
the  earth  for  many  thousand  years ;  yet  they  will  turn  round  and 
deny  those  things.  There  are  those  among  these  people  who  have 
been  baptized  into  the  fulness  of  my  gospel  who  have  denied  the 
revelations  which  I  have  given,  and  they  are  using  their  influence 
to  destroy  others ;  and  until  they  shall  have  humbled  themselves, 
I  have  rejected  them ;  and  if  they  do  not  speedily  do  so,  I  will  cut 


THE    FAITHLESS    CHASTENED.  95 

them  off  the  earth.  They  shall  know  that  I  have  spoken ;  for,  if  I 
cannot  make  them  hear  and  obey  my  words,  I  can  make  them 
feel  my  wrath.  Because  I  have  not  yet  come  out  in  power,  they 
take  the  advantage  of  me,  and  trample  my  words  under  their  feet 
as  a  thing  of  naught.  There  are  those  who  think  I  never  shall 
come  out  of  my  hiding  place  to  cut  off  mine  enemies ;  but  they 
may  rest  themselves  satisfied  upon  that  matter.  Let  them  prepare 
themselves  for  it.  I  cannot  make  people  understand  it  now  ;  but 
they  will  understand  it  when  it  comes.  If  they  could  understand 
it  now,  it  would  be  an  advantage  to  them.  It  will  come  suddenly, 
and  but  few  will  be  prepared  for  it. 

2.  I  am  under  an  obligation  to  these  people  to  save  as  many 
of  them  alive  as  possible.     In  order  to  do  this,  I  have  commenced 
an  organization,  and  appointed  a  gathering  place   for  all  those  to 
gather  to  who   will  gather,  and  who  are  worthy,  that  I  may  leave 
them  without  excuse ;  for,  when  I  begin,  I  shall  cut  off  everything 
that  stands  in  my   way.     But,   you   may   ask  the  question :  How 
long  shall  we  have  to  wait  for  you  ?     I  will  answer  you  as  touch- 
ing this  matter.     As   soon  as   you   have    gathered  a    number    of 
people   together,   and  taught   them  so  that  they  can  preach  the 
fulness  of  my  gospel,  then  I    will  cut  off  everything  that  stands  in 
your  way ;   and,  from  that  time,  you  shall   no  more  have  cause  to 
complain   of   me.     It   is  hard  for  me  to  keep  on  good  terms  with 
you,    while   I   permit  those   men  to  live  to  torment  you  with  their 
wickedness.     But  I  will  pay  you  a  visit  shortly,  and  then  you  will 
be    satisfied.     I    am    round   about    you    continually  by  my  holy 
angels.     You    have  nothing  to  fear.     Let  those  people  who  are 
gathering  up  to  this  place  be  of  good  courage,  and  know  that  I  am 
with  them,  and  that  I  will  fight  their  battles,  for  I  delight  in  them. 
They  shall  know  that  I  am  their  deliverer,   and  that   I   am  more 
than  sufficient  for  their  enemies. 

3.  And   now,   behold,   I  say  unto  you,   my*  son,  I  will  make 
known  unto  you   who  they   are,   whom  I  intend  to  cut  off  from 
among  this  people.      I  will  cut  off   all   those  who  have  given  up 
their  judgment  to  others — whom  I  cannot  penetrate  with  truth ;  for 
they  have  not  hearkened  unto  me,  or  they  would  not  have  given 
up  their  judgment  to  others.     They  know  that  I  have  placed  a 
curse  upon  those  who  trust  in  man,  and  refuse  to  hearken  to  me. 


96  THE    FAITHLESS    CHASTENED. 

I  have  a  duty  to  perform  to  mankind.  It  is  my  duty  when  I  raise 
up  a  prophet  to  back  him  up,  and  give  to  the  world  of  mankind  a 
sufficient  testimony  of  the  truth  of  his  mission ;  and  when  I  have 
done  this,  I  have  fulfilled  the  law.  And  if  I  cannot,  by  so  doing, 
penetrate  men,  I  can,  according  to  the  law  by  which  I  am 
governed,  cut  them  off  the  earth.  And  I  will  cut  off  all  those 
who  embrace  the  fulness  of  my  gospel,  and  afterwards  turn  away 
from  me.  And  I  will  cut  off  those,  also,  who  have  had  the 
opportunity  to  obey  the  fulness  of  my  gospel,  and  have  refused 
to  do  so  through  fear.  And  who  can  stay  my  hand?  I  will  not 
be  mocked.  I  shall  not  always  bear  with  people.  My  words  can- 
not any  longer  be  trampled  under  the  feet  of  those  who  have  had 
the  opportunity  to  obey  my  gospel.  Those  who  rebel  against  me 
— where  can  they  go  to  out  of  my  hands  ?  When  they  have  done 
their  worst,  I  can  bring  them  to  justice.  They  must  understand 
that  I  have  rights  as  well  as  they  have.  When  I  have  sent  my 
gospel  to  the  earth,  I  have  done  my  duty;  and  if  people  will 
obey  it,  they  will  do  their  duty  also;  but  if  they  will  not,  I  am 
bound  by  law  to  move  them  from  the  earth.  Therefore,  let  all 
those  who  wish  to  be  saved  in  my  kingdom,  consider  what  their 
duty  is,  and  do  it,  that  it  may  be  well  with  them  ;  for  if  they  do 
not,  I  will  bring  upon  them  all  the  curses  which  I  have  promised. 
I  now  add  no  more.  I  am  the  Sofa  of  the  Eternal  Father ;  even 
Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


THE    DESTRUCTION    OF    ENEMIES.— FORETELLING 
THE  TRIUMPH  OF  THE  SAINTS. 


No.  68.  WEBER,  UTAH,  May  25th,  1861. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts,  and  I  am  come  to 
speak  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,  concerning  the  test  which 
will  shortly  commence  at  this  place.  It  is  now  time  for  these  my 
people  to  prepare  themselves,  for  they  have  not  long  to  wait  before 
they  will  see  it  commence,  and  it  is  necessary  that  they  should 
understand  me  perfectly  upon  this  matter.  I  shall  suffer  your 
enemies  to  come  up  to  this  place,  and  they  will  seek  to  destroy 


THE    DESTRUCTION    OF    ENEMIES.  97 

both  you  and  all  those  who  believe  in  me ;  and  when  they  are 
ready  to  strike  the  first  blow,  I  will  smite  them  all  dead  in  one 
minute.  And  I  will,  also,  smite  dead  all  those  who  have  given 
their  sanction  for  those  murderers  to  come  against  you.  I  can 
and  will  penetrate  them. 

2.  And  as  concerning  that  man  who  now  stands  at  their  head, 
he  cannot  get  out  of  my  way.     And  I  will  settle  with  him  for  all 
the  blood  which  he  has  been  instrumental  in  shedding,  and  I  will 
now  avenge   all  the  innocent   blood   that  has   been  shed  in  this 
Territory  upon  the  heads   of  those  who  are  guilty.     Oh,  how  my 
wrath  is  kindled  against  those  murderers  who  are   in  the   midst   of 
this  people !     I  sent  a  warning  voice  unto  •  those   chief  shepherds 
and  promised   to   pardon  all  their  sins,  if  they  would  but  humble 
themselves  before  me,  but  they  would  not.     They  chose  to   go   on 
destroying  everything  that  came  in  their  way,   and  they  justify 
themselves  in  all  that  they  do.     They  believe  that  everything  that 
they  do  is  right,  and  they  shed  innocent  blood  without  feeling  the 
least   guilt   upon  their  consciences.     All  that  they  think  about  is 
destroying  everything  that  crosses  their  path.     They  care  nothing 
about  the  poor  and  innocent ;  but  they  want  to  possess  everything 
themselves,  and,  if  they  cannot  bring  the  rest  of  their  fellow  beings 
to  their  terms,  starve  them  to  death. 

3.  And  now,  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  that  when   I  shall   have 
cut  off  out  of  your  way  all  those  whom  I   have  before  mentioned, 
I  shall  send  you  up  to  the  head-quarters  of  my   Church,   and  you 
shall  have  no  trouble  to  take  your  place.     And   when  those   mur- 
derers  come  up  against  you,  I  will  ride  up  to  you,  and  talk  with 
you.     You  will   see  that   when   I   am  needed  I  shall  be  on  hand. 
But  I  will  not  plant   my  feet  upon  the  earth  at  this  time.     You 
have  nothing  to  fear,  for  I  am  always   with  you.     Satan  seeks  to 
afflict  you,  and  to  destroy  you ;  but  you  shall  ride   over  him,  and 
bring  his  power  to  the  ground. 

4.  And    as   concerning  these   people  who    have    obeyed   the 
fulness  of   my  gospel,   and   who  have  not,  as  yet,  gathered   up  to 
this   place,   let  them  hearken  unto  me.     It   is  my  will  that  they 
should  gather  up  here  as  soon  as  they  can,  or  they  will  be  too  late. 
And  I   will  not   protect  those  who  will  not  hearken  to  my  words. 
And  lo,  I  come  quickly  to  their  deliverance.     I  am  he  who  holds 
the  keys  of  death  and  hell;  even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen 
and  Amen. 


98  ALL    THINGS    ARE    REGULATED    BY    LAW. 

ALL  THINGS  ARE  REGULATED  BY  LAW. 


No.  69.  WEBER,  UTAH,  June  2nd,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  he  who  moves  forth  in  the  midst  of  dark- 
ness, and  the  darkness  comprehendeth  him  not.     And  I  am  come 
to  speak  unto  you  according  to  your  request. 

2.  Why  are  you  so  faithless   in   me?     You  know  that   I   am 
continually  with  you.      I  am  continually  watching  over  you,   both 
by  day  and  night ;  yet  you  are  afraid  to  trust  yourself  in   my  care. 
You  do  not  wish  me  to  let  the  enemies  of  my  people  come  up 
against  them  ;  but  you  wish  that  I  would  cut  them  off  before  they 
reach  this  place.     You  think  that  if  I  allow  your  enemies  to  come 
up  here,  both  you  and  this  people  will  be  running  a  great  hazard  of 
your  lives.    I  have  told  you  before  that  if  I  act  according  to  the  law 
I  cannot  strike  the  first  blow;    and  I  cannot  deviate  from  law.     I 
am  as  much  bound  by  law  as  you  are.    If  I  should  suffer  your  ene- 
mies to  come  upon  you,  and  upon  this  people,  and  slay  you  all,  I 
should  have  to  bear  the  blame ;  I  should  break  the  law  by  which  I 
am  governed ;  and  this  I  cannot  do.    According  to  the  law  of  heaven 
I  am  bound  to  protect  you.     It  is  ordained   in  heaven  that  you 
shall  never  be  slain ;   but  that  you  shall  live  until  your  mission  is 
ended.     Your  mortal  body  shall  be  renewed,  and  you   shall  have 
the  power  over  death.     You  shall  not  die  until  you  have  entirely 
done  your  work. 

3.  As  concerning  the  healing  of  the  sick,  it   is  necessary  that 
my  people  should  be  very  faithful  and  hearken  to  the  dictates  of 
my  holy  messengers ;   and  if  they  will  do  this,  my  holy  angels  will 
continually  surround  them   to  direct  their  footsteps,  and  to  heal 
them    when  they   are   sick.      My   people   should  attend  to  their 
secret  prayers.     They    must  be   faithful  to  me,  if  they  expect  to 
receive  my  blessings.     If  they  are  not  faithful,  I  will  deliver  them 
into  the  hands  of  the  destroyer,  and  he  will  afflict  them.     I  will 
not  suffer  that  my  people  shall  now  live  as  they  have  done  hereto- 
fore.    I  have  now  committed  the   fulness  of  the  holy  priesthood 
to  the  earth ;   and  where  I  have  given  much,  I  shall  also  require 
much.     I  will  not  be  trifled  with  now.         , 

4.  When  I  look  down  upon  the   people  I   am   pained ;    for   I 


ALL    THINGS    ARE    REGULATED    BY    LAW.  99 

see  among  them  those  whom  I  sent  from  my  presence  to  the  earth 
to  assist  me — such  as  might  have  been  a  blessing  to  their  fellow 
creatures — but  who  are  now  good  for  nothing.  Tfrey  suffer  them- 
selves to  be  held  by  the  chains  of  the  devil ;  and  they  do  not  exert 
themselves  in  the  least  to  come  out  from  under  his  power.  I  have 
opended  the  way  for  them  to  come  out  if  they  would  exert  them- 
selves to  do  so.  I  have  commenced  an  organization,  and  I  shall 
call  upon  all  those  who  wish  to  be  saved  to  come  unto  me ;  but 
if  they  will  not,  I  shall  be  clear  of  their  blood.  There  are  a  num- 
ber of  high  priests  whom  I  have  sent  down  to  the  earth  to  fill 
responsible  missions ;  and  now,  when  I  need  them  to  assist  me,  I 
can  do  nothing  with  them ;  but  I  have  put  their  names  down.  I 
will  not  spare  one  of  them  alive ;  for,  in  my  heart,  I  do  despise 
them.  I  can  find  men  when  they  are  moved  out  of  the  way.  I 
will  take  the  poor  of  my  people,  even  those  who  have  been 
despised,  and  I  will  make  them  the  chief  men  in  my  kingdom  ;  but 
the  proud  and  the  haughty  I  will  stamp  under  my  feet.  Oh,  how 
the  children  of  men  have  aggravated  me  with  their  wickedness ! 
I  could  scarcely  ever  place  a  little  authority  upon  men  but  they 
destroyed  themselves.  Even  since  the  days  of  Adam  to  the 
present  time  I  have  been  constantly  aggravated  by  the  children  of 
men.  I  have  never  had  perfect  satisfaction  from  them.  They 
would  either  be  at  one  thing  or  another  laboring  against  me  to 
wound  my  feelings ;  but  my  time  has  now  come,  and  I  will  make 
a  slaughter  among  them.  I  will  give  unto  you  no  more  at  this 
time ;  but  I  will  shortly  speak  unto  you  again.  Let  this  suffice  for 
the  present.  I  am  the  Son  of  the  Eternal  Father;  even  Jesus 
Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


TO  THE  PROPHET  JOSEPH  MORRIS. 


No.  70.  WEBER,  UTAH,  June  i2th,  1861. 

i.  IT  is  necessary  that  you  should  know  my  will  concerning 
this  people.  Why  are  you  so  fretful?  You  lay  many  charges 
against  me  for  neglect  of  duty  towards  you.  You  consider  that  I 
am  very  distant  with  you,  and  that,  in  this  thing,  I  am  blamable. 


100  TO    THE    PROPHET. 

You  consider,  also,  that  you  hold  the  full  keys  of  the  holy  priest- 
hood, as  well  as  I  do ;  and  that  on  this  account,  you  are  entitled 
to  the  blessing* of  beholding  my  presence.  You  consider  that  I 
have  laid  upon  you  the  burden  of  this  entire  people,  and  that  you 
will  have  to  do  your  duty,  whether  I  do  mine  or  not.  You  seem 
to  think  that  I  am  allowed  to  run  at  loose  ends  ;  and  that,  because 
I  have  the  power,  I  oppress  you.  You  say  that  I  will  not  do  the 
least  thing  to  console  you.  You  consider  that  I  have  never  cut  off 
any  of  your  enemies ;  and  that  there  is  difficulty  in  getting  me  to 
commence.  You  forget  that  I  have  told  you  that  I  do  not  want 
to  disturb  the  calm  that  exists  among  this  people,  until  I  am  ready 
to  break  them  up.  I  have  told  you  before  that  I  am  as  much 
bound  by  law  as  you  are ;  and  if  I  fail  to  do  my  duty,  I  shall  have 
to  bear  the  blame.  I  cannot  run  at  loose  ends  any  more  than  you 
can.  I  do  not  take  delight  in  oppressing  you.  I  have  told  you 
before  that  you  have  nothing  to  fear. 

2.  As  I  have  said  unto  you  before,  so  I  say  unto  you  again,  if 
I  come  unto  you  when  my  presence  is  needed,  is  not  that  suf- 
ficient? You  say  in  you  feelings,  No.  Then  what  would  you  have 
me  to  do  to  satisfy  you?  You  say,  in  your  feelings,  that  you  wish 
me  to  come  and  show  myself  to  you  now.  You  say,  also,  that  I 
feel  myself  a  very  important  character ;  but  that  you  have  rights 
as  well  as  I  have ;  and  that,  as  far  as  power  is  concerned,  you  are 
entitled  to  every  privilege  that  I  am.  I  do  not  deny  this.  I  know 
that  you  hold  all  the  keys  of  knowledge  that  I  hold,  and  that,  as 
far  as  the  priesthood  is  concerned,  you  are  entitled  to  all  the 
privileges  that  I  am.  But  you  charge  me  falsely  wherein  you  say 
that  I  feel  myself  an  important  character,  and  that  I  am  above  your 
society.  Then  you  may  ask,  Why  do  I  not  make  my  appearance 
to  you?  Because  it  is  not  necessary  for  me  to  do  so,  until  your 
enemies  come  up  against  you.  I  will  come  then  and  cut  off  every- 
thing that  opposes  you,  according  to  my  former  promises.  You 
know  that  you  are  placed  in  a  position  where  you  have  to  exercise 
faith  in  my  promises — it  cannot  b  e  avoided.  I  do  not  take  delight 
in  oppressing  you.  I  have  always  acted  according  to  the  celestial 
law  by  which  I  am  governed ;  and  when  you  blame  me,  you  do  it 
unjustly.  You  know  that  I  have  not  made  the  laws;  neither  can 
I  change  them.  If  I  act  according  to  the  law,  am  I  not  justified? 


TO    THE    PROPHET.  IOI 

What  think  you?  If  so,  cease  your  complaints.  I  cannot  run  at 
loose  ends,  any  more  than  you  can.  You  think  that  I  have  tied 
your  hands  so  that  you  have  no  power  to  control  this  people. 
When  you  need  the  power,  you  shall  have  it.  I  will  not  deny  you 
anything  that  you  stand  in  need  of.  I  will  give  unto  you  the  rod 
as  soon  as  you  are  ready  to  use  it.  I  have  it  and  I  will  bring  it 
unto  you,  and  place  it  in  your  hand  in  time  for  you  to  use  it. 
You  have  desired  to  see  me  and  the  host  of  warriors  that  I  have 
under  my  command.  You  know  that  I  have  shown  many  of  them 
unto  you  at  different  times.  You  are  not  ignorant  of  their  exist- 
ence. You  know  to  your  satisfaction  that  they  do  exist,  and  what 
more  do  you  wish  to  know  concerning  them?  If  I  were  to  satisfy 
you,  I  should  have  to  put  myself  to  a  great  deal  of  unnecessary 
trouble.  I  have  something  else  to  do  than  to  spend  my  time  un- 
necessarily to  gratify  your  curiosity.  My  hands  are  so  full  of 
business  that  I  have  no  useless  time  to  spend.  Then  why  cannot 
you  be  satisfied?  You  know  that  I  am  always  with  you. 

3.  Those  chief  shepherds  boast  of  their  wickedness.  They 
raise  themselves  up  in  the  pride  of  their  hearts,  and  flatter  them- 
selves that  I  shall  never  visit  them ;  but  their  time  is  short.  I 
shall  soon  be  ready — as  soon  as  there  is  a  certain  number  in  the 
new  organization  of  my  Church.  I  will  then  move  both  them  and 
their  seed  off  the  earth  in  one  day.  And  as  I  have  said  unto  you 
before,  so  I  say  unto  you  again,  I  will  hold  all  your  enemies  off  you 
until  I  am  ready  to  cut  them  off.  Therefore,  be  patient,  and 
labor  with  diligence.  And,  behold,  I  come  quickly  to  your 
deliverance.  I  am  the  Son  of  the  Eternal  Father ;  even  Jesus 
Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION  CONCERNING  WILIAM  HARRIS,  MARK 
H.  FORSCUTT  AND  JOHN  E.  JONES. 


No.  71.  WEBER,  UTAH,' June  i2th,  1861. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  he  that  was,  and  is,  and  is  to  come,  even 
Jesus  Christ.  And  I  am  come  to  speak  unto  you  concerning  the 
priesthood. 


102  APPOINTING    OFFICERS. 

2.  It  is  necessary  that  you  should  make  some  alterations  in   it 
for  the  benefit  of  my  people  who  are  called  to  officiate  in  the  two 
priesthoods. 

3.  It  is  my  will  that  you  should  place   a  president  over  the 
priesthood  of  Aaron  for  the  time  being,  and  until  the  literal  heir  to 
the  presidency  of  that  priesthood  comes  forth  to  fill  his  own  place. 
You  shall  place  my  servant  William   Harris  over  that  priesthood. 
And  he  shall  call  the  priests  of  Aaron  together,  and  instruct  them 
according  to  the  revelations  which   I  have  given.     And  he  shall 
preside  over  that  priesthood,  having  all  power  to  act  in  that  office ; 
and  you  shall  teach  him  his  duty.     And  inasmuch  as  he  will  be 
faithful  to  that  calling,  I   will  be  with  him  continually,  and  the 
spirit  of  revelation  shall  rest  upon  him.     And  I  will  reveal  many 
things  to  him,  from  time  to  time,  concerning  his  duty.     And  he 
shall  call  two  counsellors  to  assist  him :    such  as  the  spirit  shall 
dictate. 

4.  The  priests  of  Aaron  shall  be  admitted  into  the  "School  of 
the  Prophets,"  as  heretofore. 

5.  And  as  concerning  the  high  priesthood :     It  is  necessary 
that   you   should  make  some  alterations   in  it  also.       You  have 
ordained  but  few  to  the  apostleship  as  yet.     You  need  to  ordain 
some  more  to  assist  you. 

6.  You   shall  ordain  my  servant,  Mark  Hill  Forscutt,  to  the 
office  of  an  apostle,  and  I  will  be  with  him ;   for  his  heart   is   up- 
right before  me.     I  have  seen  his  affliction,  and  I  have  prepared 
him  for  a  mighty  work.     And  he  shall  see  no  more  distress ;    for  I 
will  abundantly  supply  him  with  that  which  is  necessary  for  his 
support  in  every  respect. 

7.  You  shall  ordain  my  servant,  John  E.  Jones,  to  the  office 
of  an  apostle,  also ;    for  I  am  well  pleased  with  him ;    and  he  shall 
preside  over  those  of  his  own  nation.     And  if  he  will  hearken  dili- 
gently unto  me,   I  will    surround  him  continually  with  my  holy 
angels.     And   I  will    bless  him  with  great  stores    of   knowledge. 
But  few  shall  surpass  him  in  wisdom ;    and  his  latter  days  shall  be 
his  best  days.     Therefore,  let  him  hearken  unto  my  words,  and 
act  in  the  office  to  which  I  have  called  him,  and  all  shall  be  well. 
I    will    call    others,   in  due  time,   when   I   need  their  assistance. 
Therefore,  let  all  be  satisfied  with  what  I  have  done.     I  am  the 
Son  of  the  Eternal  Father ;   even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen 
and  Amen. 


CONCERNING    DEBTS.  103 

REVELATION  CONCERING  DEBTS. 


No.  72.  WEBER,  UTAH,  June  i3th,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  come  to  make  known  unto  you  my  will  con- 
cerning mine  enemies,  by  whom  my  people  are  surronnded.     They 
seek  to  lay  snares  to  entrap  those  who  have  yielded   obedience  to 
the  fulness   of  my   gospel,  and   thereby  to  gain  power  over  them. 
By  this  means  they  seek  to  bring  up  a  mob   against  them.     They 
also  bring  up  and   charge  my  people  with  debts  that  are  not  honest 
debts,  in  order  to  get  a  clue  on  them.     They  want  to  raise  a  mob 
against  my  people,   and  yet  have  it  said  that  they  did  it  lawfully. 
All  the  murders  which  have  been  committed,  they  have  committed 
under  a  pretense  of  law;  and  they  seek  to  justify  and  clear  them- 
selves from  blame  for  whatever  they  do.     What   can  I   do   in  this 
case?     They  think  that  they  will  work  while  they  have  the  chance, 
and    I   shall    let  them  work   until  they  bring  things  up  to  a  head. 
They  shall  have  their  own  way  in  this  matter,  and    I  will  run   side 
by  side  with  them,  and  make  every  turn  which  is  necessary  for  the 
benefit  of  my  people ;  for  I  will    be  round  about  my  people  con- 
tinually, and  overrule  all  things  for  their  good.     I   shall   let  mine 
enemies  take  their  own  course — this  right  they  claim — and  I  shall 
take  mine  ;  and  I  will  control  all  things  aright. 

2.  It  is   my  will  that   those  people  who  have  embraced  the 
fulness    of  my  gospel  should    pay  their  honest    debts.;  but  those 
debts  which  are  not  honest  they  shall  not  pay  any  more.     Neither 
shall   my   people  go  to  their  courts   of  law  any  more ;  for  I  will 
defend  their  rights  from  this  time  henceforth. 

3.  And  as  concerning  those  of  my  people  who  have  embraced 
the  fulness  of  my  gospel,  and  who  emigrated  to  this   Territory  in 
the  hand-cart  companies,  and  who   are  poor — they   shall  not  pay 
for  their  emigration;  for  I,  the  Lord,  never  dictated  the  starting  of 
a  hand-cart  company.     That  plan  was   devised   by  the   devil   to 
destroy  my  saints ;  and  I  will  avenge  the  blood   of   all  those   who 
have  lost  their  lives  in  those  hand-cart  companies,  upon  those  who 
are  guilty  before  me. 

4.  Mine  enemies  have  committed  all  manner  of  iniquity,   and 
tried  to  make  the  people  believe  that   I  am   at  the  head  of   it.     If 


104  CONCERNING    DEBTS. 

it  had  not  been  for  the  poor  and  innocent  among  my  people,  I 
would  have  moved  them  out  of  the  way  long  since.  But  I  am 
bound  by  law  to  take  a  course  to  save  alive  as  many  of  the  inno- 
cent as  possible.  They  have  been  deceived  by  those  who  pro- 
fessed to  be  my  servants,  and  I  am  in  duty  bound  to  lay  out  my 
plans  to  save  them.  I  am  working  as  fast  as  I  can.  I  am  send- 
ing people  up  to  you  as  fast  as  I  can  under  existing  circumstances, 
and  I  am  holding  those  from  you  who  are  corrupt.  I  will  do  all 
that  I  can  to  assist  you. 

5.  I  am  well  pleased  with  the  services  of  my  servants  Richard 
Cook  and  John  Parson.     They  have  labored   diligently   for  the 
benefit  of  my  people.     Let  them  exercise  a  little  patience,  and  the 
long  looked  for  blessing  will  come. 

6.  And  as  touching  the  healing  of  the  sick,   that  blessing  has 
not  yet  been  poured  out  upon  my  people  to  any  great  extent.     I 
am  only,  as  it  were,  just  commencing  my  work,   and    I    can   only 
pour  out  my  blessings  upon  my  people  as  they  are  able  to  receive 
them,  and  this  I  will  continually  do.     I    have  to  work  gradually 
and  consistently.     But  the  difficulty  is  this,  some  people  want  me 
to  do  everything  at  once,  not  knowing  that,  if  I  were  to  do   so,    I 
should   destroy  them.     What  can    I   do  with  people  in  order  to 
please  them  ?     I  will  tell  you  what  I  will  do.     I  will  take  my  own ' 
course,  and  all  will  have  to  be  satisfied.     I  will  not  be  dictated  to 
by  mortal  men  upon  the  earth.     It  is  their  place  to  obey  and  not  to 
dictate.     Let  all  my  people  learn  their  duties,  and  do  them,   and 
leave  mine  to  me.     Some  people  are  very  fond  of  marking  out 
the   course  which  they  think  I  ought  to  walk  in ;  yet  they  do  not 
know  how  to  do  their  own  duty.     My  people  should  humble  them- 
selves, and  learn  of  me. 

I  now  add  no  more.  I  am  he  whose  words  are  quick  and 
powerful,  sharper  than  a  two-edged  sword;  even  Jesus  Christ. 
Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


ELECTING    OFFICERS. THE    UNFAITHFUL.  105 

MANNER  OF  ELECTING  OFFICERS. 


No.   73.  WEBER,  UTAH,  June  i6th,  1861. 

i.  BEHOLD,  verily  I  say  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,  that  it  is 
my  will  that  you  should  read  the  name  or  names  of  those  whom  I 
have  called  before  the  congregation  of  the  saints,  that  they  may 
know  my  will  in  all  business  matters ;  and  when  their  name  or 
names  shall  have  been  read  over,  you  shall  rise  up  and  call  upon 
the  congregation  to  sanction  what  I  have  done,  by  repeating  a 
loud  AMEN  ;  and  none  shall  rise  up  in  opposition  to  what  I  have 
done,  for  I  am  the  Lord,  and  my  word  shall  be  obeyed. 

I  now  add  no  more.  I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen 
and  Amen. 


CHASTENING    THE     REBELLIOUS     AND     UNFAITH- 
FUL.—COMMANDING  THE  RICH  TO 
ASSIST  THE  POOR. 


No.  74.  WEBER,  UTAH,  June  28th,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Son  of  the  Eternal  Father,  and   I  am 
come   to    speak    unto  you,    my  servant  Joseph,    concerning  this 
people. 

2.  There   are  those  among  them  who  find  fault  with  the  reve- 
lations which  I  have  given.     They  think  that  those  revelations  do 
not  agree  with  each   other ;  but  they   think  that   they  contradict 
each  other.     And  they  seek  to  find  fault  where  there  is  no  fault. 
Let  them  humble  themselves  before  me,  that  I   may   pardon  their 
sins.     If  they  would  use  their  judgment,  they  would  not  give  way 
to  such  feelings.     They  can  see  my  wonder-working  hand  made 
bare  before  their  eyes  continually.     They  know  that  I  am  bringing 
people  up  to  them  from  all  parts  of  the  Territory.     They  can  see 
my  spirit  moving  upon  the  people,  and  yet  they  will  quibble  about 
a  revelation  which  they  do  not  understand.     I  have  never  made  a 
promise  to  them  that  I  shall  not  fulfil  to  the  very  letter. 

3.  If  the  people  would  use  their  proper  senses,   I  could  do 
with  them ;  but  they  will  not     If  my  people  wish  to  do  my  will, 


106  THE    UNFAITHFUL    AND    REBELLIOUS. 

let  them  hearken  to  my  words  and  obey  them,  and  leave  off  their 
follies,  or  I  will  chasten  them  severely ;  for  I  will  not  always  be 
trifled  with.  If  I  want  a  people  at  all,  I  want  a  people  who  will 
serve  me  in  mine  own  appointed  way.  I  will  deliver  out  of  the 
hands  of  their  enemies  none  but  those  who  will  hearken  to  my 
words  and  obey  them.  I  want  none  but  the  pure  in  heart.  And 
if  those  of  whom  I  have  now  made  choice  will  not  serve  me 
acceptably,  I  will  cast  them  off,  as  I  have  done  the  old  church, 
and  seek  another  people  who  will  serve  me. 

4.  It  is  my  will  that  those  who  are  rich  among  my  people 
should  feed  the  poor  and  destitute  among  them  ;  for  I  will  that 
none  shall  go  hungry  or  destitute  of  clothing. 

5.  There  are  those,  also,  among  my  servants,  who  oppose  my 
servant  whom  I  have  called  to  hold  the  keys  of  my  kingdom,  which 
thing  is  displeasing  in  my  sight.     It  is  my  business  to  dictate  him 
in  his  course ;  therefore,  let  all  others  hearken   to  his   words,    and 
obey  them,  and  not  dictate  him.     I   will   dictate  him   myself.     I 
will  lead  him  aright ;  none  need  to  fear.     Whosoever  opposes  him, 
opposes  me ;   for  I  am  with  him  in   all  his  movements  among  my 
people. 

6.  There  are  those,  also,  among  these  people,  who  think  that  I 
shall  not  come  out  of  my  hiding  place  to  deliver  them  before  their 
substance  is    wasted.     They   fear  that  I  shall  lead  them  into  dif- 
ficulty, and  leave  them  there.     When  did  I  ever  lead  any  people 
into  trouble,  who  served  me  with  all  their  hearts?     Never.     I  have 
never  failed,  as  yet,  to  fulfil  my  words  to  men  upon  the  earth.     If 
people  are  satisfied  that  I  have  spoken,  they  may  rest  assured  that 
my  words  will  be  fulfilled.     Have  I  ever  spoken  to  them  through 
my  servant  Joseph?     I  answer,  Yes.     All  the  revelations  which  he 
has  written,  I  have  given  unto  him,  and  all  the  promises  which  have 
been  made  unto  my  people  through  the  revelations  which  I    have 
given,  I  will  fulfil  them  to  the  very  .letter,  for  I    have  made   them. 
Therefore,  let  my  people  trust  in  me,  and  I  will  supply  their  needs 
in  every  respect. 

7.  And  as  touching  the  reaping   of  the   crops,  it  is  necessary 
that  those  who  are  the  chief  acting  officers  under  the  fulness  of  the 
holy  priesthood,  should  know  my  will  concerning  them   upon   that 
matter.     When  I  called  them,  I  called  them  to  preach  my  gospel, 


THE  UNFAITHFUL  AND  REBELLIOUS.  1 07 

and  to  do  nothing  else ;  but  they  would  not  hearken  to  me,  for 
they  sought  to  take  their  own  course.  When  I  called  mine 
ancient  apostles,  I  commanded  them  to  leave  their  worldly  em- 
ployments, and  follow  me,  and  they  did  so,  and  continued  faithful 
all  their  days.  Oh,  that  I  had  men  to  assist  me  now,  as  faithful 
as  they  were !  They  thought  but  little  of  their  lives.  But  now, 
when  I  call  men,  I  cannot  prevail  upon  them  to  leave  all  and 
follow  me.  Their  minds  are  almost  continually  upon  their  worldly 
substance.  They  would  be  my  servants,  if  I  would  let  them  have 
their  own  way.  But  if  they  cannot  place  sufficient  confidence  in 
me  to  trust  themselves  in  Tny  care,  they  cannot  be  mine  apostles. 
No  man  can  hold  my  gospel  in  one  hand,  and  the  world  in  the 
other.  Therefore,  if  they  wish  to  serve  themselves,  and  cling  to 
the  world,  they  are  welcome  to  do  so.  But  if  they  wish  to  forsake 
all  as  mine  ancient  apostles  did,  then  I  will  accept  of  them  as 
apostles,  and  uphold  them  in  every  respect.  They  can  now  decide 
upon  the  course  which  they  intend  to  take.  That  revelation  which 
I  gave,  stating  that  my  people  must  not  put  in  their  crops,  was 
given  more  particularly  to  them.  I  did  not  want  them  to  waste 
their  time  in  that  way ;  but  I  wished  them  to  study  my  gospel  and 
nothing  else. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.     I  am  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  FIRST  COUNCIL  OF  THE  CHURCH. 


No.  75.  WEBER,  UTAH,  June  29th,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  verily  I  say  unto  you,   rny  servant  Joseph,  that 
inasmuch  as  business  is  fast  crowding  upon  you,  it  is  necessary  that 
you  should  enter  into  some  arrangements  in  order  to  prepare  your- 
self for  it. 

2.  It  is  necessary  that  you  should  form  a  Council,  consisting 
of  six  members,  for  the  time  being ;   and  this  Council  shall  decide 
upon  all  cases  of  difficulty  that  exist  among  my  people.      It   shall 
be   called   the   First  Council   of  my  Church;    and   I    will   make 
known  unto  you  whom  you  shall  call  as  councillors.     But,  in  due 


108  THE    FIRST    COUNCIL    OF    THE    CHURCH. 

time,  the  First  Council  shall  consist  of  but  three  persons,  namely, 
the  prophet  and  his  two  counsellors.  You  shall  call  this  Council 
together  as  often  as  it  may  be  necessary  to  do  so,  and  I  will  be 
with  you  in  your  Council  myself,  and  dictate  you  in  all  your  move- 
ments for  the  good  of  my  people.  And  it  is  my  will  that  my  peo- 
ple should  hearken  to  the  decision  of  this  Council  in  all  things ; 
and,  if  they  will  do  this,  I  will  be  with  them. 

3.  My  people  should  know  that  I  have  committed  the  fulness 
of  the  holy  priesthood  to  the  earth ;  and  where  I  have  given  much, 
I  shall  also  require  much.     I  will  not  be  trifled  with  any  longer  by 
the  children  of  men.     I  wish  my  people  to  place  their  confidence 
in  me,  and  act  well  their  part.     Why  should  they  be  afraid  of  me, 
inasmuch  as  I  have   never  broken   my   word?     They  have   more 
need  to  be  afraid  of  themselves,  lest  they  should  fail  to  do  those 
things  which  I  require  at  their  hands. 

4.  They  say  that  they  do  not  understand  me  when  I  do  speak. 
They  know  that,  inasmuch  as  they  had  yielded  obedience  to  the 
fulness  of  my   gospel,  I   commanded  them  to  gather  up  to  this 
place;    and  I  promised  to  supply  their  temporal   needs.     What 
more  do  they  want  ?     If  I   supply  them  with  all  that  they  need, 
until  I  come  out  in  power,  is  not  that  sufficient  for  them  ?     They 
will  have  to  place  their  confidence  in  me  ;   they  cannot  get  out  of 
it ;   therefore,  they  might  as  well  reconcile  themselves  to  their  fate. 
They  will   not   gain  anything  by   murmuring  against  me.      Why 
should  people  complain  against  me  when  I  have  always  done  my 
duty  ?     I  wish  that  men  upon  the  earth  would  do  their  duty  as 
faithfully  as  I  do  mine.      Oh,  how  men  do  sin  against  me  by  their 
murmurings  !     If  they  had  the  least  cause  of  complaint  against  me 
for  neglect  of  duty  towards  them,  I  would  willingly  bear  the  blame ; 
but  they  act  unreasonably. 

5.  These  people  need  not  to  think  that  I  shall  not  come   out 
of  my  hiding  place  in  time  to   deliver  4hem  out  of  the  hands  of 
their  enemies;  for  I   shall.     If  they   would  only   rest   upon  my 
word,  I  should  be  satisfied  with  them,     I  am  controlling  all  things 
aright.     My  people  have  nothing  to  fear;   for  I  am  all  sufficient 
for  their  enemies.     I  will  lay  a  stumbling-block  before  those  chief 
shepherds,  and  they  will  stumble  over  it,  and  be  destroyed.     My 
plans  are  laid  for  their  overthrow.     And  there  are  those  among 


COMMANDED    TO    COLLECT    THE    REVELATIONS.  109 

these  people,  who  have  obeyed  the  fulness  of  my  gospel,  who  will 
stumble  and  be  destroyed  also,  if  they  do  not  watch  their  foot- 
steps; therefore,  all  my  people  should  consider  well  the  course 
which  they  are  taking,  that  it  may  be  well  with  them. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.     I  am  the   Son   of  the   Eternal 
Father.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


THE    PROPHET    COMMANDED    TO     COLLECT     ALL 
THE    REVELATIONS. 


No.  76.  WEBER,  UTAH,  July  4th,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  he  that  shuts,  and  no  one  opens;  and  that 
opens,  and  no  one  shuts.     And  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  that  there 
are  jars   and   contentions   among  those   people  who  have  yielded 
obedience  to  the  fulness  of  my  gospel.     They  take  the  revelations 
which  I  have  given,  and  they  contend  with  each  other   about  the 
meaning  of  Jhem.     They   keep  up  an  uproar  among  my  people, 
and  they  are  destroying  themselves  thereby.     They  know  not  what 
they   are   doing.     I   am   greatly  displeased  with  those  contentious 
people.     They  seek  to  take  their  course  in  preference  to  the  course 
which  I  mark  out  for  them.     But,  if  they  do   not  stop   their  con- 
tentions, I  will  let  the  sword  of  my  indignation  fall  suddenly  upon 
them,   and    I   will  cut  many  of  them  off  the  earth.     They  wish  to 
see   me  come   out  of  my   hiding  place  in  power  to  destroy  mine 
enemies :  but,  if  they  do  not  humble  themselves   before   me,   and 
cease  their  contentions,   I  will  first   come  out  in  judgment  upon 
them.     I   have  conferred  upon  them  great   blessings,    and    their 
condemnation  will  be  great.     If  they  wish  to  do  my  will,  let  them 
take  the  counsel  of  my  servant  whom  I    have  called,  and  to  whom 
I  have  committed  the  keys  of   my  kingdom ;  and    if  they   will  do 
this,  all  will  be  well  with  them. 

2.  And  now,  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  servant   Joseph,  it  is 
my    will   that   you    shall  gather  in  all  the   revelations   which  are 
scattered   among  these   people,  and  you  shall  keep  them  in  your 
own   possession ;  and  if  my   people   wish  to  hear  the  revelations 
read  which  I  have  given,  let  them  gather  themselves  together  at 


110  COMMANDED    TO    OBEY    THE    HIGH    COUNCIL. 

seasonable  times,  and  one  shall  be  appointed  to  read  for  them, 
that  all  things  may  go  on  in  order,  for  I  am  the  Lord,  and  I  will 
that  all  things  shall  be  conducted  in  order  in  my  Church. 

3.  There  are  also   contentions   among   my   people   concerning 
the  reaping  of  their  crops.     They  are  greatly  afflicted  in  their  feel- 
ings, and  seem  disposed  ever  to  find  something  to  contend  about. 
How  long  shall  I  bear  with  those  who  continue  to  murmur  against 
me  ?     Not  long.     I    have   rights  as  well  as  my  people  have ;    and 
when  my  rights  are  trampled  upon,  I  can  feel  as  well  as  they  can. 
Oh,  that  the  children  of  men  would   act   consistently    and   reason- 
ably !  but  they  will  not.     As  concerning  the  reaping  of  their  crops, 
I  will  speak  unto  my   people  again   upon  the  subject,  then  they 
will  know  more  about  it ;    until  then,  let  them  rest  satisfied,  and  all 
will  be  well. 

4.  And  inasmuch  as  I    have  appointed  a  High  Council,  con- 
sisting of  six  members,  it  is  my  will  that  these,  my  people,  should 
uphold  them  in  all  their  decisions ;  for   I   am  at  the  head  of   this 
Council,  and  from  it  there  can  be  no  appeal.     I   will   control  this 
Council  myself;  therefore,  what  they  do,  I  do.     I  wall  back  up  all 
that  they  do.     Nothing  shall  go  wrong.     Therefore,  let  my  people 
hearken  to  them  in  all  things,  and  by  so  doing,  they  will  hearken 
unto  me ;  for  whosoever  upholds  them,  upholds  me ;  and   whoso- 
ever  rebels  against  them,  rebels   against  me ;  for  I  am  the  Lord, 
and  I  have  chosen  them. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.  I  am  he  who  holds  in  his  hands 
the  destinies  of  all  men;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen 
and  Amen. 


NO  RE-BAPTISM  FOR  BACKSLIDERS. 


No.  77.  WEBER,  UTAH,  July  6th,  1861. 

i.  IN  answer  to  your  prayer,  I  am  come  to  speak  unto  you. 
You  are  greatly  afflicted  with  these  people.  There  are  rebellious 
people  among  them,  wTho  rise  up  against  you,  and  sit  in  judgment 
upon  you.  They  are  not  willing  to  allow  me  to  dictate  you.  They 
think  that  they  know  what  you  ought  to  do.  They  are  all  in  con- 


NO    RE-BAPTISM    FOR    BACKSLIDERS.  Ill 

fusion,  and  my  spirit  is  grieved  with  them ;  and,  if  they  do  not 
humble  themselves  before  me,  it  will  not  abide  with  them.  There 
are,  also,  those  among  these  people  who  do  not  believe  in  me. 
They  treat  the  revelations  which  I  have  given  as  a  thing  of  naught, 
and  even  laugh  at  them  ;  but  when  they  have  gone  their  length,  I 
will  stop  them.  Because  I  have  not  yet  come  out  in  power,  they 
try  to  take  the  advantage  of  me.  I  do  not  delight  in  destroying 
those  that  can  be  saved ;  but  when  I  am  compelled  to  cut  people 
off  in  order  to  save  them,  I  shall  do  so.  Those  who  yield  obe- 
dience to  the  fulness  of  my  gospel,  and  afterwards  turn  away  from 
me,  can  never  be  baptized  again  for  the  remission  of  their  sins. 
They  must  pay  the  penalty  of  death  for  their  transgression.  Wher- 
ever they  go,  I  will  follow  them,  till  the  penalty  is  paid.  They 
cannot  get  out  of  my  hands,  for  I  do  in  my  heart  despise 
traitors. 

2.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  that  it  is  my  will  that 
you  should  strive  to  reconcile  these  people  to  me.     If  you   can  do 
this,  all  shall  be  well  with   them ;  but   if  you   cannot   yourself   do 
this,  then   I  will  come  out  in  power  to  assist  you.     And  I  will  cut 
off  all  those  that  offend   from  among  this  people,  and  I  will  give 
unto  you  the  power  to  govern  them.     I  do  not  delight  in  afflicting 
you.     You  shall  shortly  see  a  change  among  these  people  to  your 
satisfaction. 

3.  And  as  I  have  said  unto  you  on  a  former  occasion,  so  I  say 
unto  you  again,  you  shall  not  suffer  my  servants  who  assist  you  to 
destroy  the   sense  of  any  revelation  which  I  have  given,  or  which 
I   shall  hereafter  give.     They   may  have  the  privilege  to  correct 
your  spelling,  but  the  sense  of  revelations  they   shall  not  destroy. 
And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  servant,  that  you  are   not  learned 
after  the  manner  of  the  world ;  but   you   are   ignorant  of   many 
things  which   exist  among   men.     I   delight   in  plain  and  simple 
language ;  and   on  this  account,  I  did  not  suffer  you  to  receive  an 
education  after  the  manner  of  the  world.     I  have  controlled  you 
from  the  day  of  your  birth,  and  I  have  watched   over  you   myself. 
You  were  sent  to  the  earth  by  the  commandment  of  my  Father, 
and  both  I  and  my  Father  swore  an  oath  of  the  holy  priesthood, 
in  your   presence,  to   uphold  you,  and  to  bring  down  all  power 
under  your  feet. 


112  COUNSELLED    NOT   TO    SEEK    REDRESS. 

4.  You  are  beloved  above  all  men  upon  the  earth  ;  for  there  is 
none  upon  the  earth  like  unto  you  for  integrity  of  heart  and 
honesty  of  purpose,  and  I  will  make  your  words  good.  If  my 
people  wish  to  save  their  lives,  let  them  speedily  humble  them- 
selves before  me;  if  they  do  not,  I  will  come  out  in  judgment 
upon  them,  and  they  will  witness  such  sorrow  as  they  have  never 
before  witnessed.  They  had  better  think  about  what  they  are 
doing  before  it  will  be  too  late^  in  order  that  they  may  save  their 
lives. 

I  now  give  unto-  you  no  more.  I  am  he  whose  words  are  quick 
and  powerful,  sharper  than  a  two-edged  sword;  even  Jesus  Christ. 
Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  SAINTS  COUNSELLED  NOT  TO  SEEK  REDRESS 
EROM  SOME  OF  THEIR  ENEMIES. 


No.  78.  WEBER,  UTAH,  July  loth,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I   say  unto  you,  my  son,  it  is  necessary  that  you 
should  be  very  careful  in  dealing  with  mine  enemies,  for  they  are 
prompted    by    men  who  are  in  authority;   and  those    men  who 
prompted  them,  did  so  in  order  that  they  might  have  a  cause  to 
come  up  against  my  people.     But  I  will  give  them  what  they  are 
seeking  for,  and  I  will  fight  the  battles  of  my  people  myself.     I  do 
not  wish  them  to  fight  with  their  enemies.     Let  my  people  guard 
their  property  well.     I  wish  to  hold  mine  enemies  off  for  a  short 
time ;   yet,  if  my  people  will  do  as  I  command  them,  they  will  not 
be  the   losers.     They   must   not,   in   this   case,   lay  violent  hands 
upon  mine  enemies  ;   but  leave  them   in  my  hands,  and   I   will 
settle  with  them.     And,  in  due  time,  I  will   restore  to   my  people 
all  that  they  have  lost  by  their  enemies,  and  I  will  add  a  hundred- 
fold to  it. 

2.  They  must  not  quibble  about  small  things  at  this  time;   for 
this  is  a  day  of  great  events.     My  people  should  know  that  mine 
enemies  will  fight  against  me  as  long  as  I  permit  them  to  live,  and 
they  rnust  naturally  expect  a  little  trouble  from   them  ;  it  is  neces- 
sary for  them,  that  they  may   know  the   difference  between  good 


COUNSELLED    NOT   TO    SEEK    REDRESS.  113 

and  evil,  and  between  light  and  darkness.  They  must  expect 
opposition  in  the  world — this  cannot  be  avoided  ;  for  while  evil  is 
in  the  world,  they  will  have  to  come  in  contact  with  it ;  but,  if 
they  will  hearken  diligently  to  me,  not  a  hair  of  their  heads  shall 
be  hurt. 

3.  The  time  which  I  have  appointed  for  the  utter  destruction 
of  mine  enemies  will  soon  come,  and  until  that  appointed  time  has 
arrived,  I  will  hold  mine  enemies  as  with  an  iron  grasp,  and  they 
shall  not  have  the  power  to  do  a  great  deal  of  injury  to  my  people 
before  I  am  ready  to  come  out. 

4.  My  people  need  not  to  fret  about  their  situation,  for  I  will 
provide  for  them.     I  know  what  they  need,  and  I  will  supply  their 
needs  in  every  respect.     My  hand  is  not  shortened  any  more  -now 
than  it  was  when  I  delivered  mine  ancient   covenant  people ;    and 
as  I  was  with  them  then,  so  I  will  be  with  my  people  now. 

5.  But  they  do  not  fully  place   their  confidence  in   me  ;   they 
give  way  to  their  feelings,  and   are  filled  with  misgivings.     When 
people  fail  to  place  their  confidence  in  me,  they  treat  me  as  though 
I  was  a  deceiver ;   they  bring  down  my  wrath  upon  them,  and  sin 
grievously  against  me  ;  for  I  have  never  yet  betrayed  the  confidence 
of  any  person  upon  the  earth.     The'children  of  men  treat  me  with 
less  confidence  than  they  would  a  murderer,  and  they  do  not   deal 
as  fairly  with  me  as  they  do  with  each  other.     If  a  man  upon  the 
earth  be  honest,  they   will,    in   a  great  many   instances,  give  him 
credit  for  his  honesty ;  But  I,  who  never  failed  to  fulfil  my  promises 
to  people  upon  the  earth,  am  treated  a"s  a  traitor. 

6.  Oh,  how  unprincipled  the  children  of  men   are !     If  I  was 
not  merciful  towards  them,  I  should  sweep  them   out  of  existence 
in  one  minute ;    but  I  have  borne  with  them  until  my  patience   is 
almost  exhausted,  and  I  will   speedily   destroy  them.      I   will  that 
my  people  should   humble  themselves  before   me;   for  I   do   not 
want  to  come  out  first  against  them.     They  should  treat  sacredly 
the  revelations  which  I  have  given,   and   live   by  every   word  that 
proceeds  from  my  mouth ;    and  if  they  will  do  this,  I  shall  be  well 
pleased  with  them. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.     I  am  the  Son   of  the  Paternal 
Father;    even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


ATONEMENT. 

ATONEMENT. 


No.  79.  WEBER,  UTAH,  July  i6th,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  he   who  shuts,  and  no  one  opens;  and  who 
opens,   and  no  one  shuts ;  even  the  life  and  light  of  the  world. 
And  I  am  come  to  speak  unto  you  concerning  these  my  people. 
Oh,   how  they  have  sinned  against  me  !     They  do  not  know  how 
to   appreciate   my  blessings.     When   I   confer  blessings  upon  my 
people   they  turn  around   upon  me  and  insult   me,  and  trample 
them  under  their  feet.     Oh,  how  I  despise  those  ungrateful  people  ! 
If  they  do  not  forsake  their  sins,  and  turn  unto  me,  I  will  cut  them 
off  the  earth ;  and  I   will  raise   up  another  people  who  will  ap- 
preciate my  blessings. 

2.  There  are  those  among  these  people  who  are  a  stink  in  my 
nostrils.      They    are  not   worthy  of  an   existence   upon  the  earth. 
They  are  corrupt  themselves,   and  from  their  own  corrupt  hearts 
they  judge  me.     They   neither  have  confidence  in  me  or  in  any- 
thing else.     Being  corrupt  themselves,  they  think  that  every  other 
person  is  corrupt  also.     But  I  will  shortly  visit  them,  and  I  will 
follow  them  up,  let  them  go  wherever  they  may.     There  are  those 
among  these  people  who  are  traitors  to  me.     When  they  are  with 
my   people,   they  profess  to  be  my  friends ;  but  when  they  meet 
with  mine  enemies,  they  are  of  all  mine  enemies  the  most  bitter. 
After   yielding    obedience    to  the  fulness  of  my  gospel,  they  will 
seek  the  company  of   mine  enemies,  and  lie  to  them  against  me. 
Oh,  how  I  do  despise  them,  for  they  bring  trouble  upon  those  that 
are  innocent.     But  my  people  are  not  all  under  this  condemnation. 
Many  of  them  have  sought  to  serve  me  with  all  their  hearts ;  but 
others  have   brought  evil  upon  them.     If  those  traitojs  and  liars 
wish  to  remain  among  my  people,  they  had  better  stay  their  course; 
or,  if  they  do  not,  I  will  make  a  public  example  of  them. 

3.  I  shall  not  always  take  the  innocent  from  among  my  people 
to    atone    for  the  sins   of  the    guilty ;  but,   when  my    people  sin 
grievously  against  me,  either  an  atonement  must  be  made  for  them 
by  the  sacrifice  of  one   who  is  free  from  sin,  or  they  themselves 
must  be  destroyed.     And  in  this  case,  in  order  to  make  an  atone- 
ment for  others,  I    have  taken  one  who  was  free  from  sin.     I  was 


ATONEMENT.  115 

compelled  either  to  do  this,  or  to  cut  off  the  earth  many  of  these 
people,  for  they  have  sinned  grievously  against  me.  And  I  con- 
sider that  it  was  better  for  me  to  take  one  to  make  an  atonement 
for  those  who  had  *sinned,  than  to  cut  many  off.  I  considered, 
also,  that  I  would  try  them  again,  and  see  what  they  would  do. 
My  people  should  consider  that  they  have  yielded  obedience  to 
the  fulness  of  my  gospel ;  and  where  I  have  given  much,  I  shall, 
also,  require  much.  My  people  should  attend  to  their  secret 
prayers,  and  seek  me  with  all  their  hearts ;  and,  if  they  will  do 
this,  I  will  be  found  by  them.  They  must  be  diligent  in  all  their 
pursuits,  and  not  neglectful  of  their  duties;  but  they  should  be 
faithful  in  all  things. 

4.  And  as  concerning  my  servant  Abraham  Taylor,  whose 
child  I  have  taken,  he  should  know  that  I  have  taken  it  to  make 
an  atonement  for  others.  If  I  had  not  done  this,  I  must  have 
destroyed  many  souls.  Therefore,  let  him  be  reconciled  unto  me, 
and  know  that  I  have  done  it  for  the  best,  and  I  will  make  up 
unto  him  for  his  loss ;  and,  through  his  faithfulness  unto  me,  I 
will  be  with  him  unto  the  end.  Therefore,  let  all  be  satisfied  with 
what  I  have  done. 

I  now  add  no  more.  I  am  he  that  was,  and  is,  and  is  to  come ; 
even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 

ADVISING    THE    PURCHASE    OF    A    TRUMPET.  - 
THE    REMOVAL    OF    TRAITORS. 


No.  80.  WEBER,  UTAH,  July  i8th,  1861. 

i.  BEHOLD,  verily  I  say  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,  that 
inasmuch  as  the  people  are  fast  gathering  to  this  place,  and  it  is 
troublesome  to  you,  at  times,  to  gather  them  together  when  their 
presence  is  needed,  it  is  necessary  that  you  should  have  some 
means  adopted  whereby  to  gather  them  together  with  less  diffi- 
culty ;  and  in  order  to  do  this,  you  must  purchase  a  trumpet ;  and 
when  you  wish  to  gather  my  people  together,  you  must  sound  it. 
And  when  my  people  hear  the  sound  of  the  trumpet,  they  shall 
gather  themselves  together  according  to  your  request ;  and,  by 
doing  this,  it  will  save  you  much  trouble. 


Il6  THE    SOWING    AND    REAPING    OF    CROPS. 

2.  I  have  looked  down  upon  you,  and  I  have  seen  your  sickness 
and  affliction.  You  are  afflicted  by  those  traitors  who  have 
yielded  obedience  to  the  fulness  of  my  gospel,  and  who  are  now 
mine  enemies ;  but  I  am  on  their  track,  and  you  shall  not  long  be 
afflicted  by  them.  I  have  heard  your  prayer,  and  I  will  shortly 
answer  it.  I  despise  a  traitor  as  much  as  you  do.  And  I  will 
remove  every  obstacle  out  of  your  way,  so  that  you  shall  have  no 
cause  to  complain  of  my  neglect  of  duty  towards  you. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.  I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  SOWING  AND  REAPING  OF  CROPS. 


No.  8 1.  WEBER,  UTAH,  July  2oth,  1861. 

1.  LET  MY  people  hearken  unto  my  words,  which  are  quick 
and  powerful,  sharper  than  a  two-edged  sword,  and  all  will  be  well 
with  them. 

2.  It  is  necessary  that  they  should  understand  me  aright  when 
I  speak  unto  them.     When  I  spoke   unto  them  concerning  the 
sowing  and  reaping   of  their  crops,  they   did  not  understand   me 
aright.     I  spoke,  in  the  first  place,  unto  those   men  whom  I  had 
chosen  to  hold  a  place  in  the  apostleship.     I  called  upon  them  to 
study  my  gospel,  and  to  do  nothing  else ;   but,  at  that  time,  they 
did  not  hearken  unto  me ;   but  they  sought  to  do  their  own   will. 
They  had  not  sufficient  confidence  in  me ;   and   for  this  I  gave 
unto  them  a  rebuke.     I  told  them  that  if  they  sowed,  they  should 
not  reap.     I  wished  them  to  leave  all  their  worldly  affairs  alone, 
and  devote  all  their  time  to  the  ministry ;    for  when  I   need  their 
assistance  myself,  I  cannot  allow  them  to  dabble  with   the  things 
of  the  world ;  but  if  they  will  do  so  in  opposition  to  my  command, 
they  cannot  at  the  same  time  be  mine  apostles. 

3.  But  those  whom  I  have   neither  called  to  the   apostleship, 
nor  to  fill  any  other 'office  in  my   Church,   whereby  the  whole   of 
their  time  is  taken  up  in  my  service,  I  will  that  they  should  follow 
their  employments  until  they  are  called.      Let  them  prepare  them- 
selves for  that  which  is  coming  upon  them ;   and,   if    they  will   do 


THE    SOWING    AND    REAPING    OF    CROPS.  I  17 

this,  I  will,  in  due  time,  call  them  to  fill  honorable  places  in  my 
Church.  They  will  shortly  have  enough  to  do  in  preaching  my 
gospel. 

4.  When  I  spoke  about  the  crops,  I  spoke  also  unto  those  of 
my  people  who  had  yielded  obedience  to  the  fulness  of  my  gospel, 
who  did  not  reside  in  this  place ;    but  who  were  residing  in   other 
parts  of  the  Territory.     I  advised  them  not  to  plant  their  land.     I 
told  them  on  this  wise :  that  if  they  sowed  their  wheat,  and  planted 
their  land,  they  would  have  to  leave    it  again,   and  would,  con- 
sequently, have  their  trouble  for  naught. 

5.  I  also  told  my  people  to  sell  their  surplus   property,  and 
purchase  wheat  and  other  useful  provisions ;    but  they  have  not 
hearkened  unto  me  in  this  thing.      But  they  must  purchase  pro- 
visions, for  they  will  need  them.     There  are  people  gathering  here 
from  different  parts  of  the  Territory,  and  some  of  them  have   not 
much  provisions  with  them.     My  p'eople  must  feed  those  who  are 
hungry ;    and  if  they  do  as  I  command  them,  I  will  furnish  them 
with  fresh  means  by  the  time  that  they   require  them.     But   they 
are  afraid  that  I   shall  let  them  perish.     They  think  that   winter 
will  overtake  them  as  they  are  now   situated ;    but  they   may  trust 
themselves  in  my  care.     I  can  deliver  them  in   one  day,  and   can 
place  everything  which  they  need  in  their  hands.     And  unto  those 
who  are  faithful  unto  me,  I  will  give  cities  that  they  never  built, 
and  vineyards  that   they  never  planted ;    and,  in  due  time,  they 
shall  be  the  richest  of  all  people  upon  the  earth ;   for  I  will  deliver 
all  things  into  their  hands. 

6.  If  my  people  would  place  their  confidence  in  me,  I  could 
work  wtth  them ;  but,  through  their  lack  of  confidence,  they  afflict 
both  themselves  and  me.     They  often  look  on  the  dark  side,  and 
thereby  invite  trouble ;   give  way  to  misgivings,  and  afflict  them- 
selves without  a  cause.     O  ye  people  who  profess  my  name,  what 
do  you  think  about  me?     Do  you  think  that  I  am  false?     Have  I 
ever  broken  my  word?     Do  you  not  see  me  at  work?    Open  your 
eyes,  and  look  about  you !     For,  behold,  my  spirit  is  moving  upon 
all  the  heirs  of  salvation  who  are  in  this  Territory,  and,  even  now, 
there  are  hundreds  who  are  partially  believing  in  me.     Did  I  ever 
fail  to  deliver  a  people  when  I  set  myself  about  it?     Let  mankind 
answer.     And  if  I  never  did  fail  to  deliver  a  people  when  I   set 


Il8  THE     SOWING    AND    REAPING    OF    CROPS. 

myself  about  it,  why  should  my  people  look  upon  me  with  such  sus- 
picion? It  is  hard  to  deal  with  them.  They  look  for  evil  where 
there  is  none ;  but  they  must  make  up  their  minds  to  place  their 
confidence  in  me,  and  act  their  part,  or  they  will  have  no  claim 
upon  me.  If  my  people  have  a  claim  upon  me  to  deliver  them 
out  of  the  hands  of  all  their  enemies,  have  I  not  a  claim  upon  them 
to  serve  me  in  mine  own  appointed  way  ?  Yes,  this  is  just.  I  do 
not  ask  any  more  at  their  hands  towards  me  than  I  am  willing  to 
do  for  them.  If  they"  will  serve  me  in  mine  own  appointed  way, 
I  will  deliver  them  according  to  my  word ;  but  if  they  will  not  do 
this,  they  will  have  no  claim  upon  me.  I  have  rights  as  well  as  they 
have  ;  therefore,  let  them  meet  me  upon  equal  ground.  I  do  not 
require  impossibilities  at  their  hands.  All  that  I  wish  them  to  do, 
is  to  live  by  every  word  that  proceeds  from  my  mouth.  My  yoke 
is  easy,  and  my  burden  is  light.  My  people  must  decide  upon  that 
which  they  are  going  to  do ;  and,  if  they  decide  to  serve  me,  let 
them  hearken  to  the  words  that  proceed  from  my  mouth  and  obey 
them. 

7.  And  as  concerning  those  who  have  yielded  obedience   to 
the  fulness  of  my  gospel,  and  who  afterwards  turn  away  from  me, 
I  will  visit  them  with  sudden  death.     I  will   not  spare  the  life  of 
one  of  them.     There  are  some  people  against  whom  I  have  set  my- 
self now,  and  I  will  shortly  overthrow  them.     They  go  about  from 
one  place  to  another,  seeking  to  discourage  all  those  who  will  sub- 
mit to  be  talked  to  by  them.     I  am  in  duty  bound   to  tell  them 
before  I  cut  them  off,  and  give  them  a  chance  to  reform  if  they 
wish  to  do  so ;    if  not,  I  will   shortly  destroy  them ;    for  they  are 
not  worthy  to  live  upon  the  earth. 

8.  And  as  concerning  the  citizens  of  this  place  who  had  put 
in  their  crops  before  they  obeyed  the  fulness   of  my   gospel,  it  is 
my  will  that  they  should  reap  them. 

9.  And  as  concerning  my   people  who  have  moved  to  this 
place  from  afar,  they  need  not  to  trouble  themselves   about  their 
hay ;    for  I  will  provide  both  for  them  and  for  their  cattle.      They 
need  not  to  trouble    themselves  about  the   winter.      They  may 
behold  heart  rending  scenes  before  that  time.     They  will  shortly 
see  that  which  they  arc  wishing  to  see.      Let  them  humble  them- 
selves before   me;   for  they    do  not    understand  that  which  lies 
before  them. 


WILLIAM    KENDALL    AND    MOSES    BURNS.  119 

i  o.  It  is  my  will,  also,  that  those  people  now  scattered  abroad , 
who  believe  in  the  fulness  of  my  gospel,  should  gather  up  to  this 
place  as  soon  as  they  can,  or  they  will  have  trouble  to  get  here ; 
for  they  will  meet  with  great  opposition.  Therefore,  it  is  neces- 
sary that  they  should  gather  up  here  while  they  can  do  so  without 
much  difficulty. 

ii.  As  long  as  my  people  obey  me  in  all  things,  I  will  uphold 
them  in  all  things.  Therefore,  they  now  know  what  I  require  at 
ther  hands. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.  I  am  he  whose  words  are  quick 
and  powerful,  sharper  than  a  two-edged  sword;  even  Jesus  Christ. 
Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION     CONCERNING      WILLIAM      KENDALL 
AND    MOSES   BURNS. 


No.  82.  WEBER,  UTAH,  July  22nd,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts,  and  I  am  come  to  speak 
unto  you  concerning  those  of  mine  enemies  who  are  among  these 
people  who  have  yielded  obedience  to   the  fulness  of   my   gospel, 
and   who  are   now  my  most   bitter  enemies ;  and  who  are  going 
about  from  place  to  place   seeking  to  destroy  the   pure   in   heart. 
They  are  as  serpents  which  are  filled   with   poison.     They   cast  a 
deadly   influence   upon  everything  that  comes   within  their  power. 
They  are  false  hearted.     They  are  neither  true  to  me  nor  to  any- 
thing else. 

2.  And  now,  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  that  I  have  looked  down 
upon  WTilliam  Kendall    and    Moses  Burns,  and  I    have  sealed  up 
their    destiny.       They  do   not  believe  in   me   at   all.      They  are 
infidels,  and  would  deny  the  sight  of  their  own   eyes !     They  are 
in  the  possession  of   such  delusive  spirits  as  those  which  lead  men 
to  deny  me ;  and  if  my  people  are  not  aware  of  those  spirits,  they 
will   lead  them  down  to  destruction.     Those  men  have  given  way 
to   those  false  spirits  until  they  have  obtained  full  possession  of 
them,    and    they  cannot  be    reclaimed  in  mortality.     They  have 
sinned  unto  death,  and  I   will  shortly  destroy  them. 


120  WILLIAM    KENDALL    AND    MOSES    BURNS. 

3.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,   my  servant  Joseph,  that  you 
shall  separate  them  from  the  congregation  of  the  saints,  and  deliver 
them  up  into   my   hands,   and  I  will  settle  with  them.     And  you 
shall  warn  all  my  people  against  that  spirit. 

4.  Let  my  people  humble  themselves  before  me  ;  for  they  know 
not  the  dangers  to  which  they  are  exposed.     They  must  be  steady- 
minded,  and  leave  off  all  loud  laughter.     This  is  not  a  time   for 
trifling ;  but  it  is   time  for  deep  reflection ;  a  time  when  my  people 
need  to  place  their  full  confidence  in  me,  in  order  that  they  may 
be  able  to  stand. 

5.  And,  behold,  I   say  unto  you,  that  there  are  others  Who  are 
departing  from  me,  besides  those  whom  I  have  mentioned.     They 
have,    also,  given   way  to  delusive  spirits;  and    if    they   do    not 
speedily  repent,  and  retrace  their  steps,  I  will  separate  them  from 
the  congregation  of  the  saints,  and  destroy  them.      My  people  will 
either  have  to  live  by  every  word  that  proceeds  from  my  mouth,  or 
perish. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.     I  am  Jesus  Christ,  the  Son  of  the 
Eternal  Father.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  WORK  OF  TRAITORS.— DAY  OF  GOD'S 
VENGEANCE. 


No.  83.  WEBER,  UTAH,  February  24th,  1861. 

1.  IN  answer  to  your  prayer,  I  say  unto  you,  lift  up  your  head 
and  rejoice,  and  know  that  I  am  with  you ! 

2.  Why    should  you   disturb   yourself  about   those  false  men 
whom   I    have  cast  out  from  among  my  people?     I  have  done  it 
for  a  wise  purpose  in  myself,  and  this  you  will  see  hereafter.     You 
need   not  trouble  yourself  about  the  injury  which  they  are  able  to 
do  to  my  people,  for  I  will  take  care  of  them ;  and  those  men  will 
not  injure  those  whose  hearts  are  upright   before  me.     They  will 
only  draw  out  from  among  my  people  those  who  are  corrupt  like 
unto  themselves.     It   is  necessary  that  they  should  do  this,  for  I 
have  a  place  for  all  corrupt-hearted  people  to  fill,  and  I  will  make 
them  all  serve  me.     Those  men  shall  do  the  work  which  I    have 


THE    WORK    OF    TRAITORS.  121 

appointed  them  to  do,  and  I  have  appointed  them  to  gather  out 
of  my  Church  all  liars  and  hypocrites  who  are  like  unto  them- 
selves. And  when  they  have  done  this,  I  shall  have  nothing  more 
for  them  to  do  upon  the  earth,  and,  in  one  minute,  I  will  sweep 
them  off.  Their  presence  will  not  trouble  you  long ;  for  they  will 
soon  finish  the  work  which  I. have  appointed  them  to  do. 

3.  And,  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  that   I   will   send   the  people 
unto  you  as  fast  as  I  can  do  so ;  for  I  am  at  work  with  my  people 
who  are  scattered  abroad  throughout  this  Territory,  and  I  will  not 
let  them  rest  until  that  which   I  require  at  their  hands  is  accom- 
plished.    They  shall  know  that- 1  am  the  Lord,  and  that  I    have  a 
claim  upon  them,   which  claim  requires  them  to  do  my*  work.     I 
shed  my  blood  to  save  them,  and,  either  living  or    dead,  I  will 
make   them    walk    up  to  their  duty  and    do  it;  for  I  have  not 
shed   my   blood  in  vain.     I  will  undeceive  thousands  of  them  at 
once. 

4.  Oh,  how  foolish  my  people  are !     They  will  submit  to  all 
manner  of  wickedness,   and  abomination,  and  charge  me  with  it, 
and  say  that  I  am  at  the  head  of   it.     They  appear  to  know  noth- 
ing about  the  principles   of  right  and  wrong.     They  are  entirely 
given  up  to  wickedness.     Oh,  how  hard  it  is  for  me  to  bear  with 
them  !     But  the  day  of  my  power  and  vengeance  will  soon  come, 
and   then  I  will  destroy  mine  enemies.     You  long  for  that  day  to 
come  that  you  may   be  satisfied.     You  have  suffered  much  from 
your  enemies ;  but  I  will  pay  them  off   at  once.     I  long  for  that 
day  to  come  as  much  as  you  do,  for  I  am  weary  of  bearing  with 
those  wicked  people  who  call  themselves  after  my  name ;  but,  as  I 
am  governed  by  law  from  which  I  cannot  deviate,  I  am  compelled 
to  wait  until  the  appointed  time  has  come.     Therefore,  I  say  unto 
you,  my  son,  be  content  with  the  way  in  which  I  am  working,  and 
all  shall  be  well.     Seek   to  strengthen  yourself  for  the  work  that 
lies  before  you;  for  it  is  a  great  work,  and  leave  these  people  in  my 
hands,   and  I  will  settle  all  difficulties  with  them ;  this  is  my  busi- 
ness. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.     I  am  the  Son  of  the   Eternal 
Father;  even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


122  THE    COMET. 

CONCERNING  THE  COMET. 


No.  84.  WEBER,  UTAH,  August  3rd,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  he  that  moveth  forth  in  the  midst  of   dark- 
ness,   and    the    darkness    comprehendeth  him    not;    even    Jesus 
Christ. 

2.  And    I  am  come  to  speak  unto  you,  my  son,  concerning 
that  comet  which  has  astonished  the   world   of  mankind.     In    a 
revelation   which  I   gave  unto  my  servant  Joseph  Smith,  I  spoke 
concerning  it.     I  told  him  that  a  great  sign  should  appear  in  the 
heavens,   and  that  all  people  should  see  it;   that    another   angel 
should  sound   his  trump  both  long  and  loud,  and  that  all  nations 
should  hear  it. 

3.  And  now,  behold,  I  testify  unto  all  mankind,  that  this  comet, 
which  has  twice  made  its  appearance  in  the  heavens,  is  that  sign 
which  I  spoke  of  to  my  servant  Joseph  Smith,  which  sign  was  to 
appear   in   the   heavens  previous  to  the   sounding  of  the  seventh 
trump  by  the  seventh  angel,  whose  mission  is  to  throw- down  the 
Roman  Catholic  power,  and  to  bring  down  all  enemies  under  his 
feet. 

4.  When  this  comet  made   its   appearance  the  first    time,    it 
denoted  the    expiration    of  the  sixth  thousand  years ;   the  raising 
up  of  that  prophet  who  is  to  restore  all  things ;  the  ushering  in  of 
the  millennial  reign ;  the  opening  of  the  seventh  seal,  wherein  the 
curtain  that  has  hidden  the  eternal  worlds  from  the  view  of  mortals 
should  be  rolled  up,  and  the  face  of  the  Lord  should  be  unveiled. 
It  is  the  seventh  angel's  star ;  and  the  tail  attached  to  it  is  a  repre- 
sentation of  the  army  of  heaven  that  is  to  attend  the  mission  of 
the   seventh    angel — even  to  go  before  him  from    conquering  to 
conquer. 

5.  When  this  comet  made  its  appearance  the  first  time,  I  had 
just  commenced  to  raise  up  my  servant,  the  prophet ;  but  when  it 
appeared  the  second    time,  I    had  raised   him  up.     I    have  now 
fully  prepared  him  for  his  work,  and  I  am  now  ready  to  give  unto 
him   the  power  of  his  office,  as  soon  as  that  power  is  needed. 
Therefore,  let  all  mankind  know  that  I  have  raised  up  that  prophet, 
even  that  deliverer,  who  was  to  come  out  of  Zion  to  turn  away 


THE    SOLDIERS.  123 

ungodliness  from  the  house  of  Israel ;  even  from  mine  elect.  And 
it  shall  come  to  pass  that  I  will  cut  off  from  among  the  people  all 
who  will  not  obey  him. 

6.  Let  my  people  trust  fully  in  me,  and  I  will  be  their  never- 
failing  friend.  Without  my  help  they  can  do  nothing.  Let  them 
be  reconciled  to  me,  and  serve  me ;  for  this  is  the  best  thing  that 
they  can  do.  They  need  not  to  think  that  I  am  a  hard  master, 
for  I  am  not.  I  am  continually  working  for  their  benefit.  Let 
them  serve  me  in  mine  own  appointed  way,  and  all  will  be  well 
with  them. 

I  now  add  no  more.  I  am  he  that  was,  and  is,  and  is  to  come ; 
even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


CONCERNING    THE    SOLDIERS    THAT    CAME  INTO 
UTAH  TERRITORY. 


No.   85.  WEBER,  UTAH,  August  3rd,   1861. 

1.  BEHQLD,  I  am  the  Lord   of  Hosts,  even  the  Son  of  the 
Eternal  Father.     And    I  am  about  to  speak  unto  you  concerning 
those  soldiers  who  came  into  this  Territory. 

2.  Because  of  the  wickedness  of  those  people  who  called  them- 
selves after  my  name,  I  brought  that  army  up  to  this  place  to  rule 
over  them,  that  I  might  stay  the   murders   which  they   were  com- 
mitting; for,  of  all  people,  those  who   profess  my    name  are  the 
most  wicked.     They   would   shed  innocent  blood  without  feeling 
the  least  guilt  upon  their  consciences ;  hence,  I  brought  that  army 
upon  them,  in  order  to  stay  their  course,  until  I  raised  up  a  prophet 
to  take  the  reins  of  government  into  his  own  hands ;  for,  at  that 
time,   I  did  not  want  to  come  out  of  my  hiding  place  to  destroy 
the  murderers   from   among  those  people  who  profess  my  name. 
If  I   had  done  this,    I   should  have  caused  an  uproar  among  the 
people  too  soon — even  before  I  had  raised  up  a  prophet  to  lead 
my  people.     And    I  wished  to  keep  everything  as  still  as  I  could, 
until  I  should  be  ready  to  come  out  upon  mine  enemies ;  and,  on 
this  account,  I  brought  that  army  up  to  this  place  to  rule  over  this 
people.     That  army  has,  therefore,  done  the  work   which  I   set  it 
to  do. 


124  THE    SOLDIERS. 

3.  I  will  make  all  men  serve  me  whether  they  will,  or  not — 
they  cannot  help  it ;  for  I  shall  turn  them  hither  and  thither  at  my 
own  pleasure.  My  ways  are  not  as  the  ways  of  man,  nor  my 
thoughts  as  his  thoughts.  I  am  governed  by  an  unchangeable 
celestial  law,  and  mortal  men  do  not  know  anything  about  that 
law. 

•4.  And  now,  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,  that 
I  have  dispensed  with  that  army  which  I  brought  up  to  this  place, 
having  done  with  them ;  and  I  will  now  take  the  old  church  into 
mine  own  hands,  and  I  will  see  if  I  cannot  govern  it. 

5.  I  have  now  removed  everything  out  of  their  way,  and  they 
can  come  up  against  you  whenever  they  are  ready.  I  am  ready 
now.  Let  my  people  make  themselves  ready ;  for  they  will  soon 
see  that  which  they  are  wishing  to  see.  Let  them  humble  them- 
selves greatly  before  me ;  for  they  need  humility.  They  need  to 
fortify  themselves  against  every  evil,  for  the  day  of  their  deliverance 
is  at  hand.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,  hold 
yourself  in  readiness  for  your  enemies,  for  they  will  soon  come  up 
against  you.  And  I,  also,  will  come  up  to  you,  and  you  shall  see 
me  to  your  satisfaction.  I  will  remove  all  fear  both  from  you  and 
from  all  those  people  who  trust  in  me.  As  I  have  said  unto  you 
before,  so  I  say  unto  you  again,  I  will  make  a  slaughter  among 
your  enemies.  They  shall  not  stand  in  your  pathway  two  minutes 
after  they  are  ready  to  strike  the  first  blow.  I  shall  try  them  to 
see  what  they  will  do ;  and  when  they  make  the  attempt  to  kill,  I 
will  destroy  them  according  to  a  celestial  law.  Rest  yourself  con- 
tented, and  know  that  I  am  with  you  continually.  I  will  shortly 
speak  unto  you  again,  and  I  will  make  known  unto  you  all  things 
necessary  to  prepare  you  for  that  which  is  coming  upon  you.  You 
need  not,  therefore,  to  be  cast  down  at  the  prospect  which  lies  before 
you. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.  I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


CONCERNING    REVELATIONS  .  125 

THE    SENSE    OF  THE  REVELATIONS  MUST  REMAIN 
UNCHANGED. 


No.  86.  WEBER,  UTAH,  August  8th,  1861. 

1.  A  REVELATION  given  by  Jesus  Christ   concerning  the   cor- 
recting of  revelations,  and  other  articles  given  by  him. 

2.  Let    those,    my   servants,  who  are   engaged   in  this   work, 
hearken  unto  me,  and  I  will  make  known  my  will  unto  them  upon 
this  matter.    It  is  my  will  that  they  should  run  in  the  same  channel 
with  me.     They  must  follow  the  pattern  which  I  have  given,  and 
shall  hereafter  give  :    the  sense  they  shall  not  destroy.     They  must 
take  up  subject  after  subject  after  me.     In  some  instances  my  ser- 
vants study  to  imitate  the  work  and   wisdom  of  men.     If  I  had 
wanted  my  servant  Joseph  educated  after  the   manner  of  men,  I 
could  have  placed  him   in  a  position  for  it ;    but  this  I  did   not 
want.     The  wisdom  of  the   world   is  foolishness  in  my  sight.     I 
delight  in  plain  and  simple  language  that  all  can  understand ;  but 
those,  my  servants,  say  that  I  do  not  speak  plainly,  so  that  I  can 
be  understood.     They  should  know  that  I  speak  in  half  sentences. 
I  speak  plain  enough  for  those  to  understand  who  are  enlightened 
by  my  spirit.     I  can  make  all  those  understand  me  whom  I  wish 
to.     I  do  not  want  all-  people  to  understand.     Those  things  that 
belong  to  me  are  spiritually  discerned.     But  those,  my  servants, 
study  the  things  of  the  world,  and  how  they  can  turn  things  out  of 
their  hands  to  please  the  wise   and  learned  among  men.     Their 
minds  are  fixed  upon  the  world  and  its  wisdom. 

3.  It  is  my  business  to  make  people  understand  me ;    and  I  w^ll 
do  it.     It  is  not  my  will  that  any  people  should  understand  me 
but  those  who  are  heirs  to  the  resurrection ;  these  I  will  take  care 
of  myself. 

4.  Those,  my  servants,  wish  to  know  what  I   require  at  their 
hands.     They  are  at  liberty  to  correct  the  spelling  of  my  servant 
Joseph,  for  he  does  not  spell    correctly,  and  to  divide  the  revela- 
tions into  paragraphs ;   and  in  cases  where  he  has  made  use   of  a 
wrong  word  to  convey  the  right   sense,    in  all  such  cases   as   this, 
they  may  have  the  privilege  to  substitute   suitable   words  in  their 
places.     And,  again,  in  cases  where  a  word,  or  two,  needs  adding 


126          .  CONCERNING    REVELATIONS. 

to  render  the  sense  more  plain,,  they  may  have  the  privilege  to  add 
such  words ;  but  they  rmrst  be  very  careful  in  this  case.  They 
must  be  very  humble  and  prayerful  before  me ;  and  if  they  will 
do  this,  I  will  be  with  them  to  dictate  them.  They  need  the 
spirit  of  revelation  with  them  continually  when  they  are  writing 
those  sacred  things ;  and  that  spirit  will  not  attend  them  if  they 
are  not  very  faithful.  They  give  way  to  too  much  light-minded- 
ness and  laughter.  They  trifle  too  much.  They  let  themselves 
loose  to  be  operated  upon,  betimes,  by  false  spirits,  which  afflict 
them.  They  do  not  understand  the  spirits  that  operate  upon 
them.  They  should  be  lowly  in  heart,  and  of  solemn  counte- 
nances ;  for  they  cannot  fully  understand  the  destruction  that  is 
about  to  come  upon  the  people.  If  they  could  see  it  before  hand, 
as  it  will  be,  a  laugh  would  not  come  out  of  their  mouths.  They 
treat  lighty  those  things. 

5.  If  they  wish  to  be  my  servants,  let  them  hearken  unto  my 
words  and  obey  them ;  and  if  they  will  do  this,  I  will  be  with 
them  while  they  are  engaged  in  copying  off  those  sacred  writings 
which  I  have  given  through  my  servant  Joseph. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.  I  am  he  whose  words  are  quick 
and  powerful,  sharper  than  a  two  edged  sword ;  even  Jesus  Christ. 
Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 

INRTUCTION  FOR  THE  PROPHET. 


No.  87.  WEBER,  UTAH,  August  i4th,  1861. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  he  who  moves  forth  in  the  midst  of  darkness 
and  the  darkness  comprehendeth  him  not,  even  Jesus  Christ,  the 
Son  of  the  Eternal  Father ;  and  I  am  come  to  speak  unto  you 
concerning  those  things  which  you  desire  to  know  of  me.  You 
must  be  very  careful  who  you  read  this  revelation  to.  You  must 
read  it  to  your  two  counsellors,  and  to  none  else.  My  servants 
wish  to  know  when  I  am  about  to  come  out  of  my  hiding  place  to 
deliver  my  people  out  of  the  hands  of  their  enemies.  I  will  make 
known  unto  them  this  secret.  I  will  deliver  these  people  out  of 
the  hands  of  all  their  enemies  this  fall.  They  shall  not  be  hurt 


INSTRUCTION.  127 

by  the  winter ;  therefore,  let  my  people  provide  food  to  serve  them 
until  I  place  all  things  necessary  in  their  hands  ;  for  I  will  do  so 
according  to  my  words.  My  people  are  restless  where  they  are. 
They  would  like  to  know  how  long  I  intend  to  keep  them  there ; 
but  1  dare  not  tell  them  this  secret ;  if  I  did,  I  should  greatly 
injure  them.  I  wish  to  keep  them  quiet. 

2.  Let  my  servants  strive  to  keep   down  that  restless  feeling 
which  my  people  are  in  possession  of.     I  do  not  want  to  see  con- 
fusion among  them.     I  will  send  you  a  good  number  of  people  up 
to  this  place  between  this 'and  the  time  when  I  shall   come  out  in 
power  to  deliver  my   people.     My  plans   are  all   laid,   and  I  am 
working  to  them.     Mine  enemies  say  that  they  will   not   come   up 
against  me ;   they  say  that  they  will  make  my  words   fall  to  the 
ground  unfulfilled ;   but  I  shall  turn  them  hither  and  thither  as  it 
seemeth  me  good.      I    can    make    them    obey    me    without  any 
difficulty. 

3.  And  as  concerning  those  men  who  are  acting  as  clerks  in 
my  Church :     If  they  will  do  my  will,  they  will  humble  themselves 
before  me ;    or,  if  they  do  not,   I  will  chasten  them  severely,  and 
they  will  have  hard  work  to  stand.     They  suffer  pride  to  enter  into 
them,   and  they  raise  themselves  up   above  their  fellows,   which 
thing  is  an  abomination  in  my  sight.     They  need  not  to  think  that 
I  cannot  do  without  them  ;    for  I  can.     If  they   will  not  humble 
themselves,  and  do  as   I  wish  them  to  do,  I  can  get  others   that 
will  do  my  will. 

4.  And,  behol'd.  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  it  is  my  will  that  you, 
in  connection   with  your  two  counsellors,  should  strive   to   bring 
those  clerks  to  a  knowledge  of  their  true  position,     If  you  can  do 
this,  all  will  be  well  with  them ;    but  if  you  cannot  do  this,  I  will 
remove  them  out  of  that  office,  and  they   will  see  great  affliction. 
They  do  not  appreciate  my  blessings ;   but  they  lavish  them  away 
upon  their  lusts;    and  instead  of  doing  good,  they  do  injury  to  the 
rest  of  their  fellows,  which  are  as  good  as  they  are. 

Let  this  suffice  for  the  present,  and,  if  necessary,  I  will  speak 
unto  you  again  upon  this  subject.  I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


128        CONCERNING  THE  PROPHET  AND  OTHERS. 

REVELATION  CONCERNING  JOSEPH  MORRIS,  MARK 
H.  FORSCUTT  AND  JOHN  PARSON. 


No.  88.  WEBER,  UTAH,  August  23rd,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts,  even  Jesus  Christ.     And 
I  am  about  to  speak  unto  you  concerning  your  present   situation 
with  this    people.     You    know  their  present  situation.     Some  of 
them   are  poor  as   regards  the  things  of  this  world;  but  many  of 
them  are  willing  to  uphold  you  with  all  their  power. 

2.  You  have  hitherto  denied  yourself  of  that  which  would  have 
rendered  your   existence  more  tolerable.     You  have  denied  your- 
self of  earthly  comforts,  in  order  that  you -might  not  be  burdensome 
to  those  who  have  yielded  obedience  to  the  fulness  of  my  gospel. 

3.  If  you  had  been  placed  in  a  position  where  you  could  have 
enjoyed  the  society  of.  a  faithful  companion,  it  would    have  added 
many  comforts  to  you  in  your  distress,  of   which  you  have,  hither- 
to, been    under   the   necessity    of   denying    yourself.     And    now, 
behold,    I  say  unto  you,   my  servant  Joseph,  it  would  be  well  for 
you  to  look   for  -a  faithful  companion.     You  are  now  placed  in  a 
position  where  you  can   have  this  privilege ;  therefore,  use   your 
privilege,  and  I  will  uphold  you  in  all  things  which  are  lawful. 

4.  The  sufferings  of  no  person  upon  the  earth  have  been  equal 
to  yours — my   own  not   excepted.     I  suffered  until    I  sweat  as  it 
were   drops  of   blood ;  but   my  sufferings  did  not  last  as  long  as 
yours  have  done.     Through  the  many  agonies  of  your  soul,  caused 
by  the  weight  which  has  rested  upon  you,  your  inward  parts  have 
been  gradually  wasting  away.     You  must  take  all  the  care  of  your- 
self that  you  can  until  I  come  out  in  power,  and  then  I  will  heal 
you  again. 

5.  You  have  all  the  world  placed  upon   you,   even  as   I    had; 
therefore,    I   know   what   it  is1  to  bear  a  burden  as  well  as  you  do. 
Nevertheless,  I   am  at   many  times  pained  when  I    look  at  you  in 
your  agonies,  and    I    have  often  wished  that  I  could  relieve  you; 
but  I  am  bound  by  law.     I  can  only  take  a  certain  course ;   yet  I 
will  work  with   you   continually ;    therefore,  fear  not,    for  you  are 
always  surrounded  by  my  holy  angels.     You  are  guarded  so  that 
no  earthly  power  can  injure  you. 


CONCERNING  THE  PROPHET  AND  OTHERS.        129 

6.  You  complain  of   my  not  working  faster  among  the  people. 
I  am  working  fast,  but  you  cannot  always  see  it.     There  are  many 
hundreds  who  partially   believe  in   me   now;    and    when    I    have 
removed  mine  enemies  put  of  the  way,  I  will  bring  them  up  to  the 
head  of  my  Church.     Some  of  them  will  remain   where  they   are 
until  I    break  the  bands  which  now  bind  them  and  set  them  free ; 
others  will  come  up  here  before  I  come  out  in  power.     Some  will 
liberate  themselves  as  much  as  they  can ;  others  will   wait  until  I 
liberate  them. 

7.  And    behold,   I   speak  unto  you   concerning  my   servants 
Mark  Hill  Forscutt   and  John  Parson.     They  are  often*  troubled 
with  sickness ;  but  I  will  heal  them  in  the  day  of  my  power.     Let 
them  take  care  of  themselves  as  much   as  possible  until  that  day 
arrives.     I  am  compelled  to  work  according  to  the  law  by  which  I 
am  governed,  which   law  they  do  not  understand.     And  as  far  as 
their  health  will  permit,  let  them  prepare  for  the  press  as  many  as 
possible  of  those  revelations,  explanations  and  articles  which  I  have 
given.     They  have^  but    a  short   time   in  which   to  do  their  work 
before  I  show   my  power,  and   shortly  after  that  event,  which  will 
open  the  way,   I  shall  send  those  revelations  and  explanations  to 
the   world.     Therefore,   my   servants   will  now  know  my  will  con- 
cerning them,  and  let  them  work  accordingly. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.     I   am   Jesus  Christ.      Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


THE    MARRIAGE  COVENANT. 


No.  89.  WEBER,  UTAH,  August  23rd,  1861. 

i.  THE  candidates  for  marriage  shall  stand  before  the  high 
priest  appointed  to  minister  in  that  holy  ordinance,  and  the  bride- 
groom shall  take  the  bride  by  the  right  hand,  and,  after  the  high 
priest  officiating,  shall  repeat  the  following  words  :  "  My  dearly 
beloved  bride,  I,  agreeable  to  the  will  of  the  Lord,  and  all  the 
parties  concerned,  give  unto  you  my  hand  and  heart  in  a  marriage 
covenant  for  time  ;  and  hereby  pledge  my  word  and  honor  that  I 
will  be  a  true  and  faithful  husband  unto  you. " 


130  THE    MARRIAGE    COVENANT. 

2.  When  the  bridegroom  has  repeated  these  words  he  shall  loose 
the  bride's  hand. 

3.  The  bride  shall  then  take  the  bridegroom  by  the  right  hand, 
and,  after  the  high   priest  officiating,   shall   repeat    the    following 
words :     "  My  dearly  beloved  bridegroom,  I,  agreeable  to  the  will 
of  the  Lord,   and  all  other  parties  concerned,  give  unto  you  my 
hand    and   heart  in  a  marriage   covenant  for  time;  and    hereby 
pledge  my  word  and  honor  that  I   will    be  a  kind  and  affectionate 
wife  unto  you,-  keeping  myself  from  all  others— purely  for  you  only, 
so  long  as  we  both  shall  live." 

4.  When  the  bride  has  repeated  these  words  she  shall  loose  the 
bridegroom's  hand. 

5.  The  high  priest  officiating  in  the  ordinance  shall   then   say : 
"By  virtue  and  authority  of  my  holy  calling,  I   pronounce  you 
husband  and  wife.     Even  so.     Amen  and  "Amen." 

6.  Their  names  shall  then  be  recorded  in  a  book  set  apart  for 
that  purpose. 


REVELATION  SHOWING  THE  LORD'S  INDIGNATION 
AGAINST  MURDERERS  AND  TRAITORS. 


No.  90.  WEBER,  UTAH,  August  24th,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  he  who  shuts,  and  no  one  opens;  who  opens, 
and  no  one  shuts ;  even  Jesus  Christ.     And  I  am  come  to  speak 
unto  you,  my  son,  concerning  these  my  people  who  have  yielded 
obedience  unto  the  fulness  of  my  gospel. 

2.  There  are  some  among  them  who  grow  weary  in  waiting  for 
me.     They  begin  to  think  that  I  do  not  intend  to  come  out  of  my 
hiding  place  to  deliver  them,  according  to  my  promise ;  but  they 
may  rest  satisfied  upon  that  matter.     Some  of  my  people  can  see 
the    pit    from  which  they  have  been  dug;  but  they  cannot  feel 
sufficiently  for  those  who  now  sit  in  darkness.     They  ought  to  have 
some  sympathy  for  them.      I  wish  to  gather  as  many   of   the  pure 
in  heart  up  to  this  place  as  I  can  this  season   without  injuring,  by 
the  inclemency  of  the  winter,  those  who  are  already  gathered  ;  and 
I  will  satisfy  every  faithful  saint  who  trusts  fully   in  me.     Those 


CONCERNING    TRAITORS    AND    MURDERERS.  131 

people  who  are  growing  weary  should  seek  to  reconcile  themselves 
to  my  ways.  They  need  not  to  think  that  I  do  not  know  their 
situation,  for  I  do.  If  they  will  place  their  confidence  in  me,  I 
will  provide  for  them. 

3.  The  full  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood  are  now  upon  the  earth ; 
and  that  priesthood  brings  to  pass  a   change  of  things.      I    shall 
now  lead  these   my   people  day  by   day,   as  I  did  mine  ancient 
covenant   people  ^therefore,  they  might  as   well  reconcile  them* 
selves  to  their  fate,  for  they  will  have  to  trust  in   me.     They   need 
not  to  fret  and  fume  about  the  position  in  which  I  place  them,  for 
it  will  be  in  vain.     My  course  is  marked  out  for  me  by  law ;  and 
their  course  is  marked  out  for  them   by  law,   also ;  and  they   will 
have  to  walk  in  it,   or   die.     They  have  a  duty  to  perform,  as  well 
as  I  have.     If  they  can  hold  me  to  my  promises,  I  can  hold  them 
to  the  covenants   which  they  made  with  their  fathers  before  the 
world  took  its  present  position.     If   I  am  bound    by  law,  they  are 
also.     Therefore,    I  can   hold  them  to  their  duty,   or  slay  them. 
This  I  shall  do,   if  their  conduct  merits  it.     I  will  slay  all  those 
who,  having  yielded  obedience  to  the  fulness   of  my  go'spel,  after- 
wards turn   away   from   me ;  for  this  is  according  to  the  law  by 
which  I  am  governed. 

4.  There  are  some  who  have  already  turned  away  from  me ; 
and  they  are  now  boasting  that  I  have  not  cut  them  off;  but  I  will 
.cut  them  off  in  the  day  of  my  power.     When  I  come  out  of   my 
hiding  place  I  will  clear  them  out  of  the  way ;  therefore,  they  need 
not  to  boast.     I   have  never  spoken  a  word  that  I  shall  not  fulfil. 
My    people    may  think  that   I  am  severe :    with  traitors,    I  am. 
There  is  nothing  else   upon  the  earth  that  I  despise,  as  I  despise 
them.     The  sin  which  they  commit  is   almost   equal  to  the  sin 
against  the  Holy  Ghost,  which  is  committed    by  all  fallen   spirits. 
There  is  no  other  sin  that  can  be  committed  by  one  who  is  an  heir 
to  the  resurrection  equal  to  treason — the  sin  of  a  traitor.     Let  my 
people  be  aware  of  this  sin,  for  it  is  easily  committed.     All  those 
who  lose  my  spirit,  and  cannot  gain  it  again,  will  commit   the   sin. 
Therefore,  let  my  people  be  aware  how  they  act,  lest  they  lose  that 
spirit  which  leads  into  all  truth. 

5.  There  are,  even  now,  those  among  my  people  who  are  losing 
my  spirit.     Let  such  repent,  and  turn  unto  me  with  all  their  hearts, 


132  CONCERNING    MURDERERS    AND    TRAITORS. 

that  I  may  pardon  their  sins  and  send  my  holy  spirit  unto  them 
again.  If  they  do  not  do  this,  I  will  cast  them  out  from  among  my 
people.  They  have  no  cause  for  turning  against  me ;  therefore, 
let  them  speedily  retrace  their  steps,  that  it  may  be  well  with  them. 
If  they  will  do  this,  I  will  be  with  them.  They  need  not  to  sup- 
pose that  they  can  stand  without  my  assistance,  for  they  cannot. 
If  they  will  not  come  to  my  terms,  I  shall  not  come  to  theirs ;  and 
if  they  do  not  comply  with  my  request,  it  will  l^e  to  their  own  loss. 
People  may  set  themselves  against  me,  but  what  can  they  do? 
They  will,  after  all,  have  to  come  to  my  terms,  and  suffer  loss. 
None  need  to  think  that  I  shall  rob  them  of  their  rights,  for  I  will 
give  to  every  man  that  which  is  his  due ;  therefore,  let  all  people 
be  satisfied ;  for  I  will  do  that  which  it  is  my  duty  to  do  unto  all. 
Let  my  people  humble  themselves  before  me,  and  all  will  be  well 
with  them. 

6.  As   concerning  mine  enemies  abroad — they  cannot  under- 
stand the  object  of  the  gathering  of  my  people  to  this  place.     They 
ask  of  them  what  they  will  do  in  the  winter  season.     I  am  the 
Lord  of  Hosts,  and  I  will  answer  them  this  question  myself.     Hear 
me,  O  ye  enemies  of  my  truth  !     I  will  feed  you  with  judgment ! 
Yea,   I   will   send  you  to  your  graves  at  a  time  when  you  are  not 
looking  for  it.     You  have  polluted  my  holy  name,  and  you  have 
sought   to    destroy  my  poor   and  afflicted   people;  and,  as  your 
fathers  did  before  you,  so  you  have  cast  the  truth  to  the  ground; 
but  your  race  is  now  near  at  an  end.     I  will  give  unto  the  poor 
and  destitute,  whom  you  have  robbed  of  their  rights,  your  houses 
and  your  lands ;  and  when  you  are  suffering  in  hell  your  portion, 
they   shall  enjoy  the  good  things   of  the  earth.     I  will  give  unto 
them  those  blessings,  and  who  can  stay  my  hand? 

7.  And  as  concerning  that  man  who  now  stands  at  the  head  of 
mine  enemies,   let  him  know  that  his  days  are  short — he  cannot 
deceive  my  people  with  his  lying  tongue   much  longer.     He  com- 
mits all  manner  of  abominations  in  my  name,  and,  by  so  doing,  he 
lays  them  to  my  charge.     He  professes  to  be  my  servant,  when* he 
is  the  servant  of  the  devil.     He  has  not,  for  many  years,  led  my 
people  by  my  spirit ;  for  he  does  not  understand  its  operations ;  but 
he  takes  light  for  darkness,  and  darkness  for  light ;  and  he  is,  with 
all  his  power,  seeking  to  destroy  the  innocent.     He  will  justify  the 


THE    CLERKS    REPROVED.  133 

shedding  of  innocent  blood,  and  the  sin  against  the  Holy  Ghost. 
He  cannot  distinguish  the  innocent  from  the  guilty.  He  does  not 
know  them  apart.  Therefore,  he  justifies  the  guilty  and  condemns 
the  innocent.  He  does  not  understand  the  principles  of  right  and 
wrong.  What  shall  I  do  with  him?  I  will  take  him  from  the 
earth,  and  his  seed  with  him,  according  to  my  word.  And  I  will 
give  his  riches"  to  the  poor,  to  feed  and  clothe  them. 

8.  Let  my  people  hearken  to  my  words,  and  obey  them  ;  and, 
if  they  will  do  this,  I  will  feed  them  in  a  fat  pasture  when  their 
enemies  are  powerless ;  for  I  must  save  the  pure  in  heart.  They 
have  a  claim  upon  me. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.  I  am  he  whose  words  are  quick 
and  powerful,  sharper  than  a  two-edged  sword ;  even  Jesus  Christ. 
Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


THE    CLERKS   REPROVED. 


No.  91.  .  WEBER,  UTAH,  August  3oth,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  come  to  speak  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph; 
and  I  say  unto  you  that  you  must  stand  in  your  place.     You  must 
not  give  way  to  those  who  call  themselves  my  servants,  who  rebel 
against  you ;   but  you  must  dictate  to  all  my  servants.     They  shall 
obey  you,  and  if  they  do  not,  I  will  cast  them  off,  and  place  others 
in  their  places.     They  should  know  that  it  is  their  duty  to  obey 
you,  and   not   seek  to    dictate  to  you.     I  will  confound  all  those 
who  fight  against  you. 

2.  I  called  clerks  to  assist  you  ;   but  they  are  proud,  and   seek 
to  take  their  own  course ;    and  what  can  I   do  with  them?    they 
will  have  their  own  way.     They  cannot  stand  to  be   corrected.     I 
would  that  they  were  obedient  to  me.     It  would  save  them  much 
affliction  of  mind.     They  must  humble  themselves  before  me  ;  or, 
if  they  do  not,  they  will  lose  their  places  as  apostles  in  my  Church; 
for  no  person  can  hold  the  office  of  an  apostle  in  my  Church  with- 
out humility  of  heart.     Let  them  take  reproof,  and .  humble  them- 
selves before  me ;   and  if  they  will  do  this,  it  will   be  well  with 
them.     They  have  given  way  to  a  false  spirit,  which  is  at  war  with 


134  THE    CLERKS    REPROVED. 

me,  and  they  know  it  not,  and  it  greatly  afflicts  them.  This  spirit 
I  will  cast  out  of  my  Church.  It  would  destroy  my  people  if  I 
let  it  continue  amongst  them.  Therefore,  inasmuch  as  there  is 
difficulty  among  my  servants,  the  clerks,  it  would  be  well  for  them 
to  stop  their  labors  as  clerks  for  the  time  being,  until  they  under- 
stand me  more  perfectly  in  that  matter.  They  do  not  seem  to 
understand  their  duties  as  they  ought  to  do.  There  is  a  misun- 
derstanding among  them  in  relation  to  their  duties ;  therefore,  let 
.them  wait  a  short  time  until  they  know  my  will  perfectly  concern- 
ing themselves  and  their  duties.  And  if  they  will  humble  them- 
selves before  me,  and  satisfy  me,  and  work  according  to  the 
instruction  which  I  shall  give  unto  them  through  my  servant 
Joseph,  I  will,  shortly,  reinstate  them  as  the  clerks  of  my  Church ; 
but  if  they  will  not  do  this,  I  will  entirely  cast  them  out  of  that 
office.  All  that  I  require  of  them  is  to  work  according  to  the 
directions  of  my  servant  Joseph  ;  for  whosoever  obeys  him,  obeys 
me.  I  will  back  him  up,  for  he  is  right  before  me ;  and  all  my 
people  know  that  it  is  their  duty  to  obey  him  ;  for  they  know  that 
I  have  sent  him.  If  they  do  not  do  this,  I  shall  require  it  at  their 
hands. 

I  now  add  no  more.     I  am  he  that  was,  and  is,  and  is  to  come ; 
even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    CONCERNING    MARRIAGE. 


No.  92.  WEBER,  UTAH,  September  3rd,  1861. 

1.  LET    MY  people  hearken   unto  my   words,   and   diligently 
obey  them,  for  I  am  about  to  speak  unto  them  upon  the  subject 
of  marriage. 

2.  My  people  must  not  run  hastily  into  marriage ;  but  they  must 
move  very  carefully  in  this  matter.     They  must  not  enter  into  a 
covenant  of  courtship,  or  marriage,   with  each  other  without  first 
obtaining  the  consent  of  my  servant   Joseph.     And   if  they  will 
seek  his  counsel  upon  this  matter,  I  will   give   unto  him   to  know 
whether  it  is  right  in  my  sight  for  them  to  to  be  united,   or   not. 
If  my  people  will  do  as  I  have   commanded  them  in  this  thing, 


CONCERNING    MARRIAGE.  135 

their  unions  shall  be  attended  with  great  blessings ;  but  if  they 
will  not  abide  my  law  in  this  matter,  I  will  curse  them,  and  cast 
them  out  from  among  my  people,  and  destroy  them  in  the  flesh. 

3.  In  cases  where  the  candidates  for  marriage,  who  may  ap- 
pear before  the  prophet  to  ask  for  counsel  upon  this  subject,  are 
young,  and  have   parents  who  have  yielded  obedience  unto  the 
fulness  of  my  gospel,  it  is  the  duty  of  the  parents  to  sanction  what 
I  do  through  my  servant,  the  prophet ;    for  he  is  accountable  to 
me  only.     But  in  such  cases  as  those  where  the  candidates  have 
not  parents  in  my  Church,  it  is  their  duty  to  marry   according  to 
the  counsel  of  the   prophet,  who  holds  the  keys  of  my  kingdom, 
without  asking  the   permission  of  their  parents ;   for  there  is  no 
appeal  from  his  wrord. 

4.  And  inasmuch  as  there  are  men  in  my  Church   who  have 
left  their  wives  for  my  sake,  and  wives  who  have  left  their  hus- 
bands,  and  are  laboring  under  disadvantages,   let  them  hearken 
unto  the  counsel  of  my  servant  Joseph,  and  all  will  be  well  with 
them.     I  will  give  unto  him  to  know  whether  it  is  right  for  them 
to  marry,  or  not ;    and  what  he  does,  I  will  sanction ;    for  I   will 
be  with  him  in  all  his  works.     Therefore,  let  not  my  people   mur- 
mur at  what  he  does ;    neither  let  them  think  that  they  understand 
my  ways  better  than  he  does  •   but  rather  let  them  humble  them- 
selves before  me,  and  learn  from  him,  and  know  that  I  will  sanc- 
tion what  he  does.     If  they  will  do  this,  I  will  be  with  them.     I 
am  the  Lord  of  Hosts.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    SHOWING    WHOM    THE    LORD    WILL 
SLAY  IN  THE  DAY  OF  HIS  POWER.— APPOINT- 
ING JOHN  BANKS  AS  SPOKESMAN. 


No.  93.  WEBER,  UTAH,  September  yth,  1861. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  light  and  life  of  the  world;  even  that 
which  shines  forth  in  the  midst  of  darkness.  Through  me  all  light 
has  come  to  mankind,  and  all  power  is  in  my  possession,  and  I 
will  wield  it  to  defend  the,  right.  Ere  long  my  power  shall  be  felt 
throughout  this  Territory ;  and  every  knee  that  is  spared  shall  bow 


136  .  THE    DAY    OF    GOD'S    POWER. 

to  ray  sceptre,  which  I  will  place  in  the  hand  of  my  servant 
Joseph  when  I  visit  him.  And  after  I  shall  have  delivered  the 
sceptre  into  his  hand,  his  mind  will  be  at  rest ;  which  at  the  pres- 
ent time  is  not  the  case,  for  he  is  .very  restless,  and  it  is  difficult 
for  me  to  deal  with  him.  It  is  my  wish  to  satisfy  him  ;  but  I  am 
compelled  to  wait  until  the  appointed  time  has  arrived — even  until 
I  have  worked  mine  enemies  up  to  a  head.  When  I  shall  have 
done  this,  I  shall  be  ready  to  destroy  them. 

2.  My  servant  Joseph  complains  against  me,   because  I    have 
not   visited   him   to    his    satisfaction.     He    considers  that   I    am 
neglecting  him  in  this  matter;  but  such  is  not  the  case.     If  it  had 
been  necessary  for  me  to  have  visited  him  oftener  than  I  have  done, 
I  should  have  done  so.     I  am  leading  him,  and  I  know  his  situa- 
tion; therefore,  I  will  never  leave  him  in  trouble,  for  it  is  my  busi- 
ness to  attend  to  him,  and  I  will  not  fail  to  do  so.     He  also  fears 
that   I   will  neglect  him,    and  that,  when  mine  enemies  come  up' 
against  me,  I  will  not  be  there  to  fight  his'  battles ;    but  he  has  no 
need  to  fret  about  that,  for  I   despise  them  as  much  as  he  does. 
Neither  has  he   any  need  to  think  that  I  will  not  defend  my  own 
rights ;  for  I  am  determined  that  I  will.      For  what  purpose  did  I 
lay  my  life  down?     Was  it  not  to  save  the  posterity  of  Adam?     If 
so,   shall  I  fail  to  do  the  work  which  my  Father  appointed  unto 
me  ?     No.     While  I  have  the  power,  I  shall  use  it.     I  cannot  give 
way  to  the  devil ;  for,  if  I  should  do  this,  of  all  things  I  would  be 
the  most  corrupt.     All  of  Adam's  covenant  people  have  a  claim 
upon    me,   and  they  trust  in   me   as  their  saviour  and  deliverer. 
Therefore,  how  can  I  forsake  them?     I  cannot.     I    have  set   my 
hand  to  lead  them  triumphantly  over  all  earthly  powers,  and  I  will 
do  so. 

3.  As   I    have  previously  said   unto  my  people,  so  I  say  unto 
them  again,  after  I  shall  have  commenced  the  destruction  of  mine 
enemies,  I  will  never  stay  my  hand  until    I    have  brought  them  all 
under  my  feet.    My  people  may  wish  to  know  what  I  intend  to  do 
with  those  of  mine  enemies  who  will  come  up  against  them  to  des- 
troy them?     I  will  answer  my  people  this  question.     I  will  meet 
them  here,  and  smite  all  of  them  dead  in  one  minute.     They  shall 
not  have  the  power  to  hurt  one  saint  who  trusts  fully  in   me ;  but 
those  of  my  people  who  have  yielded  obedience  to  the  fulness  of 


JOHN    HANKS    APPOINTED.  137 

my  gospel,  who  may  turn  against  me  through  fear  when  their   ene- 
mies come  up  against  them,  I  will  slay  them  with  their  enemies. 

4.  My  people  may  also  wish  to   know  whether  I  intend  to  slay 
none  others   in  the  day  of  my  power  but  those  who  will  come  up 
against  them.     I   will  slay,    in   that  day,  all  those  who  have  sanc- 
tioned the  coming  of  those  murderers  against  them,  and  I  will  cut 
off  the  earth  all  those  who  stand  at  the  head  of  the  old  Church,  who 
oppose  me  in  my  course.     I  will    leave    those  of  my  people  who 
constitute  the  old  Church  without  their  present  deceitful  shepherds, 
and    I  will   plant   true  shepherds  over  them  instead  thereof;  for  I 
will  not  suffer  my  holy  name  to  be  profaned  by  them. 

5.  Let   my   people  examine  themselves,  and  see  whether  they 
are    right    before    me.     If  they    will  seek    the  attendance  of  my 
spirit,  it  will  show  unto  them  their  true  position  before   me.     Let 
them  not  trifle  too  much  with  sacred  things;  but  let  them  be  very 
careful  in  taking  my  name  in  their  lips,  for  it  is  sacred,  and  must 
be  "treated   as   such.      My  people  suffer  their  spirits  to  droop,  and 
unbelief  to  enter  into  their  minds,  and,  thereby,  allow*Satan  to  gain 
the  advantage  over  them.      They  know  that  I  am    at   work';  there- 
fore, let  them  rest  contentedly,  and  be  of  good  courage,  and  know 
that  I  am  all  sufficient  for  their  enemies.     They  have  no  cause  to 
fear  that   I  will  not  do  my  part  if  they  will  attend  to  their  duties ; 
but  rather   let   them   fear  lest  they  fall  short  in  the  performance  of 
their   duties,   and,   consequently,   ^11   before  my    presence;  for  I 
shall    come    as   a   whirlwind,   andj  but   few  will  stand  at  my  ap- 
pearing. 

6.  I  am  the  Root  and  Branch  of  Jesse — the  Bright  and  Morn- 
ing Star. 

7.  And  behold,  I  speak  u»to  you,  my  servant  Joseph,  concern- 
ing  my  servant   John   Banks.      Let   him   do   that  which  is  in  his 
heart  to  do,  and  I  will  uphold  him  therein.      He  has  no  cause  to 
fear,  for  I  am  with  him ;  and  I  am  well  pleased  with  him,  because 
his  heart  is  right  before   me.     Therefore,  I  will  uphold  him   in  all 
things  which  are  lawful  and  right ;  and  I  will  bless  him  with  power, 
and  with  great  stores  of  knowledge,  to  enable  him  to  carry  out  the 
desires  of  his  heart ;  for  I  have  chosen  him  to  be  your  spokesman. 
This  is   his   calling   in  my  Church ;  therefore,  let  him  act  therein, 
and   all  shall   be   well   with  him.     I   am  the   Son  of  the  Eternal 
Father ;  even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


138  TO    THE    PROPHET. 

TO  THE  PROPHET  JOSEPH  MORRIS. 


No.  94.  WEBER,  UTAH,  September  8th,  1861. 

1.  MY  SON,  why  do  you  suffer  your  feelings  to  be   worked   up 
to  such  a  pitch?     It  is  all  without  a  cause.     You  say  that  you  do 
not    understand    my    ways  in    dealing   with  you.     You  complain 
against   me   for  not  taking  a  straightforward  course  with  you,  and 
making  you  to  understand  me  aright.     You  know  that  I  have  told 
you  before  that  I  am  regulated  by  law,  and  that  I  cannot  deviate 
from  it.     I   am  compelled  to  lead  you  day  by  day,  and  I  cannot 
show  you  both  the  beginning  and  the  end  of  every  small  .thing.      I 
have  given  unto  you  a  knowledge  of  the  magnitude  of  the  work 
that  lies  before  you,  even  your  mission  to  the  earth  as*  the   presi- 
dent of  the  high  priesthood ;  and,  if  you  understand  your  mission 
aright,  you  know  that  all  earthly   power  has  to  be  brought   down 
under  your  feet.      You  know  that  I  cannot  fail  to  uphold  you ;  but 
it  seems  that  you  cannot,  in  the  slightest  thing,  place  confidence  in 
me,  unless  you  can  see  perfectly  through  it. 

2.  You  complain  of  me  because  I  do  not  visit  you,  and  speak 
with  you   mouth   to  mouth.      You  know  all  about  my  duty  to  you. 
You  understand  the  place  which  I  hold  in  the  holy  priesthood  in 
connection  with  my  Father,  and    how  I  stand  in  relation  to  you, 
and  to  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth.     You  also  know  that  I  have  a 
work  to  do,  and  that  I  cannot  fail  to  do  it. 

3.  You  fear  your  enemies  too   much.     You   could  not  feel  a 
great   deal  worse  than  you  do  feel  betimes,  if  you  knew  nothing 
about  me.     I  am  pained  to  look  at  you.     I  cannot  persuade  you 
to  place  your  full  confidence  in   me ;   if  you  could  do  this,  you 
would  have  no  trouble.     When  trouble  is  near,  I  will   be    by  your 
side ;  and  I  will   speak  to  you   at  all  times  when  you  need  to  hear 
from  me.     And  when  my  power  is  needed,  I  will  come  up  to  you 
and  talk  to  you  mouth  to  mouth,  and  you  shall  see  me  then  to  your 
satisfaction.     You  must  not  give  way  to  trouble.     Everything' is 
moving  on  aright,  and  the  test  will  shortly  be  here.     Prepare  your, 
self,  for  it  will  come  suddenly ;  and  it  will    be  a  day   long   to  be 
remembered    by  those  who  are   permitted  to  behold  it  and  live, 
And   now,   my  son,  strive  against  the  principle  of  evil  with  all  your 


TO    THE    MILITARY    AUTHORITIES.  139 

power,  and  be  not  faithless ;  but  exercise  confidence  in  me.     I  am 
all  sufficient  for  your  enemies. 

4.  I  will  speak  to  you  again  shortly,  and  tell  you  what  to  do 
in  time  for  you  to  know  how  to  act;  for  you  will  shortly  need  my 
counsel,  and  my  power  also.  Prepare  for  the  day  of  my  power. 
I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts ;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen 
and  Amen. 


REVELATION    GIVEN    IN    ANSWER    TO    AN    ORDER 
FROM  THE  MILITARY  AUTHORITIES  OF  UTAH, 


No.  95.  WEBER,  UTAH,  September  nth,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  Jesus  Christ,  and  I  am  come  to  speak  unto 
you  concerning  your  enemies  who  are  laying  a  snare  for  you  and 
these  my  people  who  are  trusting  in  me.     You  wish  to  know  my 
will  concerning  this  affair  which  now  lies   before  you,   and   I  will 
reveal  it  unto  you.     Mine  enemies  are  seeking  to  obtain  a  clue  to 
justify  them  in  coming  up  against  you  to,  as  they  suppose,  destroy 
you.     But  I  am  controlling  them,  and  I  will  make  them  come  to 
my  terms  ;    for  they  can  do  nothing  save  that  which  I  permit  them 
to  do. 

2.  And  it  is   my   will   that   my   people  should  hearken  to  my 
words  and  obey  them,  that  it  may  be  well  with  them.     They  have 
no  friend  to  look  to  at  this  time  except  me ;   and  they  must  either 
trust  me  now,  or  perish,     There  is  no  other  help  for  them  ;  and  if 
they  will  serve  me  with  all  their  hearts,  (for  this  thing  I   require  of 
them)  I  will  not  leave  them. 

3.  The  cloud  will  soon  burst  upon  the  heads  of  mine  enemies, 
and  .  waste  them   all   away.      My   people   should   not  suffer  their 
spirits  to  droop.     They   must  seek  to  fortify  and  prepare  them- 
selves for  the  test  which  is  coming.     I  love  those  who  are  brave, 
and  they  shall  find  a  friend  in  me  that  will  never  forsake  them ; 
but  the  faint-hearted  and  faithless  I  despise.     I  am  the  Stone  and 
Shepherd  of  Israel — their  only  defense.     And  I  delight  to  defend 
those  who  are  pure  in  heart.      I  glory  in   those  who  trust  in   me ; 
and  they  shall  never  be  disappointed. 


140  TO    THE    MILITARY    AUTHORIT1 KS. 

4.  And,  behold,   I    say  unto  you,   my  servant  Joseph  that,  I 
have  gathered  these  people  together   myself,  and  they  shall  never 
be  scattered  by  mine  enemies.     They  shall  be  subject  to  no  power 
but  mine. 

5.  Let  mine  enemies  fear  and  tremble  before  me;    for  I  shall 
take  them  out   of  existence  quickly.     And  let  them   know   that, 
when  they    wage  war  with  these  my   people,   who   have  yielded 
obedience  to  the  fulness  of  my  gospel,  they  wage  war  with  me,  and 
I  shall  try  if  I   cannot   fight   them.      If  they  knew  their   destiny, 
their  hearts  would  fail  in  their  undertaking ;   but  they  will  not  be- 
lieve it  until  they  feel   it.     Mine   enemies   never  would  believe  in 
my  words  ;    otherwise,  they  might  have  saved  their  lives ;    but  they 
had  to  die  to  prove  that,  when  I  spoke,   I  told  the  truth  concern- 
ing them.     They  are  like  the  unthinking  horse  that  rushes  into  the 
battle — they  cannot  see  the  danger  that   lies   before  them ;   there- 
fore, they  continually  run  into  it,  and  perish. 

6.  And  now,  behold,  I  speak  unto  you  mine  enemies !  And 
I  say  unto  you,  come  up  hither  to  fight  against  my  people,  and 
you  shall  prove  that  I  have  told  you  the  truth.  I  have  said  almost 
enough  about  you  in  the  revelations  which  I  have  previously  given; 
and  now  I  will  tell  you  the  story.  Therefore,  O  ye  mine  enemies ! 
come  up  against  me  as  soon  as  you  can,  and  get  your  trouble  over. 
I  am  ready  for  you.  Be  it  known  unto  you  that  my  people  who 
have  yjelded  obedience  to  the  fulness  of  my  gospel,  shall  never 
comg  tp  ypur  terms, 

.7.  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts,  and  I  have  spoken  these  things. 
Thergfpre,  let  my  people  prepare  themselves  for  the  day  of  my 
power ;  and  ]p  I  cpme  quickly,  I  am  the  Son  of  the  Eternal 
Father;  even  Jesus  Cnrist>  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


.REVELATION  (UVEN  AT  THE   TIME    OF   TRAINING. 


No.  96,  WEBER,  UTAH,  September  i2th,  1861. 

WHEN  it  is  time,  J  \vjlj  come;  and  until  that  day  I  will  guard 
you  by  my  holy  angels.  F@ar  npt,  for  I  will  stand  by  you.  I  am 
watching  the  movements  of  your-  enemies*  I  am  round  about  my 


THE    FIRST    COUNCIL. THE    APOSTLES  HI  P.  141 

people.  What,  therefore,  have  they  to  fear?  Let  them  do  their 
own  duties,  and  leave  the  results  in  my  hands,  and  I  will  deal  out 
to  all  their  just  rewards.  My  people  should  learn  to  obey  me,  and 
let  others  alone.  Let  them  learn  of  me,  for  I  am  meek  and  lowly 
in  heart ;  and  if  they  do  this,  it  is  all  that  I  require  of  them.  I 
am  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  REORGANIZATION  OF  THE   FIRST  COUNCIL.— 
THE  ORGANIZATION  OF  THE  APOSTLESHIP. 


No.   97.  WEIJER,  UTAH,   September   i3th,    1861. 

1.  HEARKEN   unto  my  words,  my  son,  and  obey  them  ;  for  I 
am  about  to  speak  unto  you  concerning  the  priesthood. 

2.  I  commanded  you  to  organize  a  High  Council,  to  consist 
of  six '  members ;  but  now,  as   I  am  about  to  make  some  altera- 
tions in  the  organization  of   my  Church,  that   Council  which  con- 
sists  of   six  members   shall  no   longer  exist  in  my  Church.      The 
First  Council  of  my  Church  shall  now  consist  of  three  persons, 
namely,  the  prophet  and  his  two  counsellors. 

3.  And  you  shall  now  organize  the  apostleship   in   part.     You 
have  ordained   four  persons  to  the  apostleship  already,   and   you 
must  ordain  eight  more.     You  must  only  make  up  the  number  of 
twelve  at   this  time;    but,    in   due  time,  you  shall  call  and  ordain 
twelve  more,  and  then  you  will  have  twenty-four  apostles. 

4.  I   will   regulate  all  things   in  my  Church,  and  make  every- 
thing according  to   the  pattern  which  my  Father  has  shown  unto 
me;  for  I  do  nothing  of  myself.     I  work,  always,  according  to  the 
law.     And,    in   due  time,    I   will  make  known  unto  you  all  things 
which  you  need  to  know. 

5.  And  let  my  servants  whom  I  am  about  to  call  hearken  unto 
me.     Let  them  seek  to  prepare  themselves  for  the  responsibility 
which   I   am  about   to  place  upon  th^m ;  for  they  will  need  great 
humility  and   integrity  of  heart.     I  shall    require   much  at   their 
hands.     Therefore,  let  them  hearken   unto   me;  and,   if  they  will 
do  this,  I  will  uphold  them  to  their  satisfaction.     They  shall  never 
have  cause  to  complain  of  me  for  neglecting  them ;  but  if  they  are 


142  THE    APOSTLESHIP. 

not  humble,  I  will  chasten  them  severely.  If  they  will  walk  before 
me  in  humility,  they  shall  have  nothing  to  fear.  They  must  be 
aware  of  pride,  and  not  let  it  enter  into  their  hearts ;  for  Satan  will 
seek  to  destroy  them.  He  will  strive  to  make  them  believe  that 
they  are  very  great ;  but  they  must  remember  that  he  who  is  most 
like  unto  a  little  child,  is  the  greatest  in  my  kingdom.  I  resist  the 
proud ;  but  I  give  grace  unto  the  humble. 

6.  I  have  called  to  the  apostleship  my  servants  John  Trolsen, 
Gudmund  Gudmundsen,   Niels  Jacobsen,   James   Cowan,   James 
Dove,  James  Mather,  John  R.  Eardley  and  Abraham  Taylor. 

7.  And,    behold,   I   speak  unto    you    concerning    my  servant 
Alexander  Dow.     I   have  called  him  to  preside  over  those  who 
hold  the  office   of  high   priests.     And  he  shall  call  them  together 
from    time    to  time,   according  to  the  revelations  which  I    have 
already   given  through  my  servant   Joseph,  and  to  those  which  I 
shall  hereafter  give  through  him.     He  shall  regulate  himself  in  all 
things  pertaining  to  his  duties  in  this  office  by  my   word,    and   my 
servant  Joseph  will  instruct  him  in  all  cases  when  it  shall  become 
necessary.     Let  him  prepare  himself  for  this  office,  and,  if  he  will 
do  this,  I  will  be  with  him  unto  the  end.     I  am  Jesus  Christ. 

8.  And  let  my  servants,  who  hold  my  holy  priesthood,  prepare 
themselves  to  do  a  work  ;  for,  in  due  time,  I  will  give  unto  all  those 
who  are   faithful   to  their  callings,   honorable   places.      I  am  the 
Lord ;  and  I  am  with  the  faithful  among  my  people.     Let  all    be 
satisfied  with  what  I   have  done ;    for  I   will   give  unto    all  their 
rights,  none  need  to  fear. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.     I  am  Jesus  Christ,  the  Son   of 
the   Eternal  Father.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


CONCERNING  THE  COURSE  THAT  THE  LORD  WILL 

PURSUE   WITH  THE  PROPHET  AND 

HIS  ENEMIES. 


No.  98.  WEBER,  UTAH,  September  i4th,  1861. 

i.     BEHOLD,  I  am   the  light   and  life    of  the  world;  even  he 
who   moves   forth    in    the    midst  of   darkness,  and  the  darkness 


CONCERNING  THE  PROPHET  AND  THE  ENEMIES.      143 

comprehepdeth  him  not.     And  I  am  come  to  speak  unto  you,  my 
servant  Joseph. 

2.  Why  are  you  so  fearful?  Why  do  you  suffer  your  spirit  to 
droop?  You  are  in  pain  continually,  in  consequence  of  your  lack 
of  confidence  in  me.  You  could  not  feel  worse  than  you  do,  if 
you  knew  nothing  at  all  about  me.  As  I  have  said  unto  you  be- 
fore, so  I  say  unto  you  again,  I  am  pained  when  I  look  at  you.  I 
wish  that  you  would  use  your  judgment.  If  you  would  do  this, 
you  would  not  feel  as  you  now  do.  What  can  I  do  with  you,  if 
you  still  continue  to  give  way  to  fear  as  you  have  done  ?  You  lack 
confidence  both  in  me  and  in  my  Father.  Have  we  ever  neglected 
you?  You  know  that  we  have  not.  Have  we  not  opened  the 
heavens  and  revealed  all  heights  of  glory  and  exaltation  to  you? 
Have  we  not  given  unto  you  the  power  to  read  the  rounds  of 
eternity?  Have  we  not  given  unto  you  the  full  keys  of  the  holy 
priesthood.''  You  know  that  we  have.  Have  we  not  shown  unto 
you  the  hosts  of  heaven?  You  know  that  we  have.  You  know  that 
they  have  paraded  before  you  many  times.  Have  you  not  seen  them 
with  their  swords  drawn  ?  You  know  that  you  have.  Have  I  not 
ridden  up  to  you  repeatedly  ?  You  know  that  I  have.  You  know 
all  about  me  that  you  need  to  know.  You  have  the  keys  whereby 
you  can  trace  me  in  all  my  movements.  You  are  not  blind  with 
regard  to  my  duties  towards  you,  and  towards  my  people.  You 
know  that,  if  I  suffer  your  enemies  to  destroy  you  and  these  peo- 
ple, I  shall  have  to  bear  the  blame.  You  know  that  I  am  bound 
to  protect  you  and  these  people,  if  I  act  according  to  the  law  by 
which  I  am  governed ;  and  you  know  that  I  cannot  break  a  celes- 
tial law.  What  are  you  afraid  of?  Why  cannot  you  act  reason- 
ably ?  If  you  would  do  so,  all  would  go  on  right.  Do  you  think 
that  I  am  a  friend  to  evil-doers  ?  Even  if  I  were  inclined  to 
defend  the  principle  of  evil,  I  could  not  do  so,  for  I  am  com- 
pelled to  act  according  to  the  law ;  but  I  am  not  inclined  either  to 
do  or  to  defend  evil.  If  I  had  been,  I  should  not  have  been  here. 
Even  if  my  will  should  incline  to  evil,  I  could  not  do  it ;  for  the 
law  binds  me  to  sustain  the  truth ;  this  you  know.  Why,  then,  do 
you  act  so  strangely  ?  You  seem  to  be  afraid  to  trust  yourself  in 
my  care,  but  you  need  not  to  be  so ;  for  I  would  scorn  to  suffer 
that  any  word  which  I  have  ever  spoken,  should  fall  to  the  ground 


144     CONCERNING  THE  PROPHET  AND  THE  ENEMIES. 

unfulfilled.      I  love  the  truth  as  well  as  you  do,  and  I  will  defend 
it  as  long  as  I  have  the  power  to  do  so. 

3.  I   can   cut  a  clear   way   through  mine  enemies,  and,  when 
they  come  up  against  you,  I  will  do  so ;  this  you  shall  see.     And 
I  will  hold  your  enemies  off'  you  until  I   am  ready  to  destroy  them, 
and,  until  then,  they  shall  not  trouble  you.     I  will    give  unto  you 
all   necessary   information  from  time   to  time.     You  shall  not  be 
taken  by  your  enemies   unawares ;  for  I  will  come  and  talk  with 
you  a  short  time  before  they  come  upon  you.      I  will  visit  you,  and 
tell  you  all  that  you  need  to  know  to  prepare  you  for  that  time.   I  will 
watch  them ;  but  you  need  not  to  look  for  them,  before  you  have 
seen  me.     They  are  setting  themselves  against  me  now,  and  they 
will  not  be  a  great  while  before  they  come  up  against  you. 

4.  They  want  to  take  you  and  your  counsellors ;  but  when  they 
attempt  to  do  so,  I  will  stand  by  you,  and  smite  them  all  dead  in 
one  minute.     They  shall  have  no   power  over  you.     And,  at  that 
time,   I   will  have   placed   a   number  of  my    holy  angels  at  every 
settlement  in  this   Territory.     Where   they  have  armed  men  ap- 
pointed  to  fight  against  me,  I  will  have  my  holy  angels  placed  by 
their  side,  and,  as  I  cut  off  all  the  firstborn  of  Egypt,  so  I  will  cut 
them  all  off  at   once.     I   will  not  leave  alive  any  person  that  has 
organized  himself  in  a  company  to  fight  against  me.    Whether  they 
come  up  against  me,  or  not,  if  they  shall   have  given  their  con- 
sent, that  will  have  been  sufficient  to  condemn  them. 

5.  As   I   have   said   in  a  former  revelation,  so  I  say  unto  you 
again,  I  shall  suffer  a  number  of  your  enemies  to  come  up  here  to 
commence  the  work  appointed  them,  and  then  I  shall  destroy  them 
all ;  both  those  who  come  up  here,  and  those  who  do  not,  who  are 
of  the  same  mind  with  those  who  will  come  against  you.     And  I 
will  make  such  a  slaughter  among  them  that,   after  that  day,   you 
shall  have  no  opposers  left.     At  that  time  you  shall  see  my  power 
made  manifest,  and,  after  that,  you  will  be  perfectly  satisfied,  and 
you  will  not  have  any  more  fears  about  you.      Prepare  for  that  day, 
and  trust  in  me ;  for  I  am  able  to  defend  your  rights. 

6.  WThen   my  holy  angels  go  out   to   war,   they  go  with  their 
resurrected  bodies,  prepared  for  their  enemies.     A  holy  angel,  dis- 
robed of  his  glorified   body,   is  not   prepared   for  war — he  is  de- 
prived of  a  portion  of  his  power  ;  but   mine   angels  are   prepared 


THE  PLOT. THE  COMING  TEST.  145 

for  the  work  which  they  have  to  do.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you, 
my  son,  that  you  shall  both  feel  their  influence  and  see  them  go 
out  to  battle  ;  for  my  holy  angels  delight  in  attending  you  and 
fighting  your  battles.  They  are  one  with  you,  and  are  always 
ready  to  do  their  duty.  You  have  nothing  to  fear;  then  be  of 
good  courage,  and  do  not  give  way  to  misgivings. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.  I  am  he  whose  words  are  quick 
and  powerful,  sharper  than  a  two  edged  swor4 ;  even  Jesus  Christ. 
Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


THE    PlTOT    LAID    BY    THE    ENEMIES.— THE 
COMING   TEST. 


No.  99.  WEBER,  UTAH,  September  i8th,  1861. 

1.  HEARKEN  unto  the  words  of  the  Lord   your  God,  and  pre- 
pare for  the  day  of  my  power,  which  is  near  at  hand.      For,  lo !  I 
shall  come  as  a  thief  in  the  night,  and  but  few  will  stand  to  behold 
my  presence. 

2.  I  am  now  moving  forth  in  the  line  of  my  duty  among  the 
people  of  this  Territory,  and  preparing  them   for  the   day   of  my 
power :    a  day  when  those  who  shall  be  left  alive,  will  behold  such 
scenes  as  will  cause  every  heart  to  sicken ;  for  my  wrath  is  kindled. 
It  is  with  difficulty  that  I  endure  the  insults  of  those  who   profess 
my  name.     I  would  have  slain  them  before  this  time  if  the  law  by 
which  I  am  governed  had  not  restrained  me. 

3.  I  was  compelled  to  commence  an  organization,  and  to   pre- 
pare a  number  of  men  to  preach  the  fulness  of  my  gospel  before  I 
could  manifest  my  power.     This  is  the  reason  that  I  have  so  long 
delayed  the  day  of  my  coming.     I  could  not   avoid   it.      I   could 
not  work  in  any  other  .way  than  that  in  which  I  have  worked.     I 
know  that  both  you  and  your  brethren  have   been  made   the  sub- 
jects of  temptation.     It   has   been   with   great   difficulty  that  you 
have  endured  the  wickedness  of  those  corrupt  people  who  profess 
my  name ;    but  you  shall  not  bear  their  sins  mnch  longer. 

4.  When  they  come  to  this  place  to  train,  they  will  seek  to  lay 
a  plot  by  which  to  ensnare  you  and  your  brethren ;    but  I   will  be 
here,  and  control  them  in  mine  own  way.      I  will  be  their  Captain, 


146  THE    PLOT. THE    COMING    TEST. 

and,  though  they  will  not  see  me,  I  will  lead  them  hither  and 
thither  according  to  my  own  pleasure ;  and  they  shall  do  nothing 
save  that  which  I  lead  them  to  do.  And  I  will  make  them  to  do 
just  that  which  I  wish  them  to  do.  I  have  broken  them  up,  and 
scattered  them,  and  they  have  had  no  power  over  my  people  up 
unto  this  day ;  neither  shall  they  ever  have ;  for  I  will  break  them 
up  and  scatter  them  until  they  shall  come  up  against  me,  at  the 
time  when  every  preparation  shall  have  been  made  for  the  battle, 
and  everything  be  ripe  at  the  head,  and  they  come  out  in  open  con- 
tact with  me,  then,  as  I  have  before  said,  I  will  destroy  them.  Until 
then,  I  will  set  them  one  against  another,  and  break?  them  up,  and 
lead  them  hither  and  thither  to  suit  my  own  purposes.  They  have 
undertaken  a  work  that  will  weary  them.  They  will  find  out  that 
there  is  a  hand  at  work  which  they  can  neither  understand  nor 
control ;  for  I  am  the  Lord,  and  I  am  more  than  sufficient  for 
them.  They  will'  seek  to  compel  my  people  to  be  trained  by 
them ;  but  my  people  must  remember  that  I  am  their  General, 
and  I  will  lead  them  aright ;  but  they  must  take  no  notice  of  mine 
enemies.  And  if  my  people  will  do  as  I  command  them,  which 
is  all  that  I  ask  of  them,  I  will  protect  them,  and  their  enemies 
shall  not  hurt  them.  This  I  am  bound  to  do,  and  my  people  are 
bound  to  obey  my  commandments ;  and,  as  I  have  a  duty  to  per- 
form towards  them,  so,  also,  they  have  a  duty  to  perform  towards 
me.  Let  them  be  sure  that  they  do  their  duty  towards  me, 
and  then  they  can  claim  my  protection.  I  will  meet  them  on 
equal  grounds.  They  must  be  steadfast,  and  trust  in  me,  and  in 
the  move  which  I  will  make  for  their  benefit,  they  shall  see  my 
wonder-working  hand.  Therefore,  I  say  unto  my  people,  that 
they  must  not  train  nor  mix  with  mine  enemies ;  or,  if  they  do,  I 
will  chasten  them  severely.  I  have  separated  them  from  the 
world,  and  they  shall  not  be  united  with  the  wicked  any  more ; 
or,  if  they  are,  I  will  slay  them.  Let  them  trust  in  me,  and  do  as 
I  command  them — this  is  all  that  I  ask  of  them. 

5.  And,  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,  that  you 
may  set  your  feelings  at  rest,  and  stand  to  your  post  like  a  man ; 
and,  if  you  will  do  this,  you  will  never  suffer  affliction  by  your 
enemies,  for  I  will  surround  you  by  my  holy  angels.  O  that  you 
would  cast  all  fear  far  from  you  !  How  you  would  be  relieved  of 


CONDUCT    DURING    TRAINING.  147 

an  unnecessary  burden  which  you  now  carry.  You  are  afflicted 
day  by  day  for  naught ;  then  why  not  rest  in  me?  You  cannot 
gain  anything  by  fretting.  You  cannot  force  things  out  of  their 
regular  channel,  nor  bring  the  day  of  deliverance  before  the  ap- 
pointed time.  All  things  in  heaven  have  to  take  their  regular 
round.  Then  be  satisfied,  and  I  will  come  to  your  deliverance. 
I  am  Jesus  Christ,  the  Son  of  the  Eternal  Father.  Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 

THE     MANNER     IN    WHICH    THE    PEOPLE    SHALL 

CONDUCT    THEMSELVES  WHILE  THEIR 

ENEMIES  ARE  TRAINING. 


No.  ioo.  WEBER,  UTAH,  September  ipth,  1861. 

1.  LET  MY  people  hearken  unto  my  words,   which  are   quick 
and  powerful,  sharper  than  a  two-edged  sword ;  and  lo,  I  will  come 
to  their  deliverance   in  this  case,  which  is  now  at  hand.     If  they 
will  do  this,  I  shall  be  well  pleased  with  them,  and  they  shall   find 
me  a  never-failing  friend.     They  will  need  my  interference  in  this 
case.     Mine  enemies  thirst  for  the  blood  of  my  people,  and  thirst 
they  may.     It  is  in  the  hearts  of  mine  enemies,  who  are  coming  up 
to  this  place  to  train,  to  slay  these  people  who  trust  in  me,   if  they 
cannot  bring  them  to  their  terms.      Mine  enemies  think  that  they 

'have  all  the  power  in  their  own  hands  ;  and  that  they  can  do  as 
they  please  with  these  few  people  who  trust  in  me ;  but  they  will 
see  what  power  they  have,  when  they  come  to  try  their  strength. 
I  shall  not  cut  them  off  this  time — things  are  not  yet  ripe  at  the 
head.  Until  mine  enemies,  who  are  at  the  head,  are  prepared,  I 
shall  confuse  all  others  and  break  them  up  in  their  attempts  to 
commit  violence  on  my  people.  I  will  surround  them  by  my  holy 
angels,  and  force  them  hither  and  thither;  and  I  will  make  them 
do  my  will,  whether  they  are  willing  to  do  it  or  not ;  for  it  is  my 
business  to  control  them. 

2.  All   that  I   ask  of   my  people  is  to  do  their  own  duty.      If 
they  will  do  this,  they  may  safely  depend  on  me ;  but  if   they  do 
not  do  this,  they  will  be  in  danger.      It  is  my  will  that  my  people 
should  mind  their  own  business,  and  stop  at  their  own  homes  while 


148  CONDUCT    DURING    TRAINING. 

mine  enemies  are  training.  Let  my  people  leave  their  enemies  in 
my  hands ;  I  can  manage  them  without  their  assistance.  I  do  not 
call  upon  my  people  to  fight  their  own  battles.  I  will  fight  their 
battles  ;  that  is  my  duty.  And  if  in  any  case  of  emergency,  when 
mine  enemies  are  here,  I  want  to  gather  my  people  together,  I  will 
speak  unto  my  servant  Joseph,  and  he  shall  call  them  together.  I 
am  the  Lord. 

3.  Let  my  people  watch  my  wonder-working  hand  in  this  case, 
and  they  will  gain  a  confidence  in  me  which  they  have  never  before 
possessed.     I  wish  to  train  my  people  so  that  they  will  be  able  to 
place  confidence  in  me.     I  shall    lead  them  through  scenes  which 
may  be  painful  at  the  first  sight ;  but  when  they  are  over,  my  peo- 
ple will  profit  by  the  experience  which  they  will  have  gained. 

4.  After  much   tribulation   cometh  the  blessings.     And  this  is 
the  blessing  which  I  will  give  unto  my   people — even  victory  over 
all  their  enemies.     They  have   nothing  to  fear  if  they  will  walk 
humbly  before  me. 

I  am  he  who   holds   the  keys   of   death   and  hell ;  even  Jesus 
Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION  CONCERNING  TRAINING. 


No.  1 01.  WEBER,  UTAH,  September  2oth,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,   I   am  the   Son  of  the  Eternal 'Father,  and  I  am 
come  to  speak  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph. 

2.  I  have  heard  your  prayers,  and  the  prayers  of  your  brethren, 
which  have  been  offered  up  before  me,  and  I  will  answer  them  to  • 
the  satisfaction  of  all  concerned.     I  will  strengthen  both   you   and 
your  counsellors  to  your  satisfaction.     You  may  depend  fully  on 
me,  for  I  will  never  forsake  you.     I  am   here  now  with  a  number 
of  mine  army,  and  we  will  remain  here  until  the  trouble   is  over. 
You  shall  see  that  I  will  control  things  aright.      Mine  enemies  wish 
to   lay   hold   of  you   and   your  counsellors,  to  destroy  you.     You 
must  not  go  out  among  them  ;  but  both  you  and  your  counsellors 
must  keep  yourselves  secret.     You  must  not  go  out  at  all.     You  must 
give  me  a  chance  to  work,  and  do  not  seek  to  confuse  tilings.     Let 


CONCERNING    TRAINING.  149 

everything  be  kept  as  still  as  possible  among  my  people ;  and  then 
everything  will  go  on  aright. 

3.  And  as  I  have  said  unto  you  before,  so  I  say  unto  you 
again,  I  do  not  want  the  help  of  my  people.  I  will  deal  with  mine 
enemies  myself.  I  will  be  with  yon  to  dictate  you  in  this  affair, 
when  you  need  information  from  me.  I  will  uphold  my  people  to 
their  satisfaction,  also.  Oh,  my  son,  why  do  you  entertain  doubts 
concerning  the  fulfilment  of  my  promises?  If  I  fail  to  protect  you 
and  these  people  in  this  affair,  or  at  any  other  time,  I  will  bear  the 
blame  forever.  You  cannot  "bring  up  one  case  wherein  I  have 
failed  to  protect  you ;  this  you  know.  I  will  deal  honestly  with 
you — never  fear.  Therefore,  rest  yourself  contented.  I  am  here 
by  your  side,  and  I  will  protect  you.  I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even 
so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    GIVEN    AT   THE  TIME  OF  TRAINING. 


No.  102.  WEBER,  UTAH,  September  2oth,  1861. 

WHAT  I  say  unto  you,  I  say  unto  all.  Watch,  and  you  shall  see 
me  scatter  mine  enemies.  You  shall  know  that,  when  I  spoke 
unto  you  concerning  them,  I  told  you  the  truth.  I  am  the  Lord 
of  Hosts,  and  I  control  all  things  according  to  mine  own  pleasure. 
Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


A  REVELATION  CONCERNING  MARY  MORRIS. 


No.  103.  WEBER,  UTAH,  September  24th,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  he  who  moves  forth  in  the  midst  of  darkness, 
and  the  darkness  cpmprehendeth  it  not.     And  I  am  about  to  speak 
unto  you  according  to  your  request. 

2.  You  wish  to  know  my   will  concerning    your  companion. 
You  are  in  trouble  concerning  her.     What  can  I  do  with  her,  if  she 
will  not  stand  by  you  and  take  your  counsel?     If  she  fights  againts 
you,  she  fights  against  me.      If  she  refuses  to  hearken  to   you   and 
obey  you,  she  has  no  part  with  me,  for  I  shall  cast  her  off.      I  have 


150  MARY    MORRIS. 

given  her  unto  you  to  be  your  wife.  She  needs  not  to  think  that 
I  do  not  know  her.  I  do.  I  have  controlled  her  from  her  child- 
hood up  for  a  wise  purpose  in  myself,  and  now  I  have  given  her 
unto  you,  and  it  is  my  will  that  she  should  obey  you  in  all  things 
which  are  lawful  in  me.  Let  her  not  think  that  she  is  not  your 
right  companion.  When  I  have  given  her  unto  you,  she  is. 

3.  Let  her  fight  valiantly  against  the  powers  of   darkness.      If 
she  will  do  this,  I  will  assist  her.     I  will  give  her   power   over  the 
destroyer.      He  will  seek  to  destroy  her.      If  she  will  not  abide  by 
your  counsel,  she  will  be  destroyed  in  the  flesh;  for  I  am  the  Lord, 
and  I  will  destroy  her  if  she  will  not  abide  in  my  law;  and  behold, 
my  law  shall  proceed  from  the  mouth  of  my  servant  Joseph. 

4.  Let  her  seek  to  comfort   him.      I  gave  her  unto  him  for  a 
comforter,  and  not  to  afflict  him.      She  has  given  way  to  the  de- 
stroyer.    Let  her  strive  against  evil,  if  she  wishes  to  do  my  will. 
If  she  will  do  this,  I  will  greatly  bless  her,  for  I  have  chosen  her. 
I  am  the  Lord,  and  behold,  I  will  make  known  unto  you  her  birth- 
right.     Her  lineage   is   that   of   Ephriam,  even  the   royal  seed  of 
Israel.     She  is  also  an  heiress  to  the  first  resurrection,   being  one 
of  the  firstborn  daughters  of  Adam.       Through  her    faithfulness 
thousands  of  her  sex  will  come  to  her  and  call  her  blessed ;    for  I 
have  chosen  her  for  my  servant  according  to  his  request.      I  shall 
control   him   in  all   things.      I  know  what  is  best  for  him.      She  is 
pure  before  me.     I  know  her. 

5.  And  behold,   I   say  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,  you  may 
safely  depend  upon  me.     I  know  what  you  need,  and  I  have  sent 
unto  you   a  companion  of  mine  own  selecting.      Understanding 
your  calling  and  disposition,  I  know  that  you  could  never  be  happy 
with  a  companion  who  is  not  pure.      It   is  contrary  to  the  law  of 
heaven  for  you  to  take  to  yourself  a  wife  who  is  not  pure.     You 
could   not  abide  with  her  according  to  the  law  by  which  you  are 
governed.      That  which  is  pure  cannot  be  united  with  that  which 
is  impure.      I  know  that  you  despise  those  who  are  impure,  as  well 
as   I   do ;  and   I  will  never  afflict  you  with  those.     You  may  rest 
yourself  satisfied  with  those  whom  I  have  sent  unto  you,   for  they 
are  pure.      I  know  what  you  need,  and  I  will  supply  your  needs  in 
all  things  which  may  be  necessary  from  time  to  time. 

6.  And  behold,  I  speak  unto  you  again  concerning  your  com- 


COMING    OF    CHRIST. DESTRUCTION    OF    THE    WICKED.      151 

panion.  Let  her  hearken  unto  my  words,  and  I  will  be  with  her 
unto  the  end,  and  crown  her  with  exaltation  in  the  presence  of  her 
Father  forever  and  forever,  for  I  am  the  Lord,  and  I  have  spoken 
these  things.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  COMING  OF  CHRIST.— THE  DESTRUCTION   OF 
THE  WICKED. 


No.  104.  WEBER,  UTAH,  September  27th,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,   I  shall  come  as  a  thief  in  the  night,  and  but  few 
will  stand  to  *behold  my  appearance ;  for  the  earth  will  shake,  and 
many  will  fall  upon  the  ground  as  dead.     When  I  come  in  power 
to  deliver  my  people  out  of  the  hands  of  their  enemies,   I  shall 
come  as  a  refiner,  to  purify  my  Church  from  all  corruptible  things. 
And   I   will  make  a  change  among  my  people,  and  also  among  the 
nations  of  the  earth ;  for  I  am  weary  of  beholding   the  abomina- 
tions which  exist  among  men. 

2.  The  appointed  time  for   me  to  make   a  change  upon  the 
earth  has  now  come.     I  shall  now  assume  my  rights.     I  shall  now 
rule  upon  the  earth — it  is  my  right.     And  who  can  stay  my  hand? 
I  shall  go  forth  from  conquering  to  conquer,  and  lay  myriads  dead 
before  me.     The   children   of  men   are   filled  with  vanity.     They 
think  that  they  can  stay  my  hand,  and  bring  my  plans  to  naught. 

3.  Even  those  men  whom  I  placed  at  the  head  of  my  Church, 
but  who  are  now  mine  enemies,  think  that  they  can  break   up  my 
arrangements,  bring  my  plans  to  naught,  and  conquer  me.     They 
know   not  what  they  are  doing.     I  can  destroy  them  all  in  one 
minute.     I  will   make  them  do   what  I  want  them  to  do.     They 
shall  have  no  power  to  do  anything  only  what  I  permit  them  to  do. 
They  know  nothing  about  me.     It  is  not  difficult  for  me  to  govern 
them.     I  lead  them  hither  and  thither  at  my  pleasure;  and  at  the 
appointed  time  I  will  bring  them  up  to  a  head.     My  plans  are  all 
laid,  and  I  know  my  business  well.     And  all  those  of    my  people 
who  are  pure  in  heart  I  will  satisfy.     The  rest   I  will  destroy.      I 
will  cut  a  clear  way  through  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth ;  never- 
theless, I  will,  as  much  as  possible,  save  alive  those  who  are  heirs 


152       COMING    OF    CHRIST. DESTRUCTION    OF    THE    WICKED. 

to  the  resurrection ;  but  the  rest  I  will  destroy  whenever  they  cross 
my  pathway. 

4.  I  am  bound  by  law  to  defend  the  principles  of  truth ;  and  I 
shall  protect  the  pure  and  honest  who  trust  in  me.      I  always  work 
on  the  defensive.      I  cannot  turn  out  of  the  regular  channel  which 
I  am  compelled  by  law  to  walk  in.      But  I  can  work  mine  enemies 
up  to   come   against  me,   and  then   I  can  destroy  them.      This  is 
what  I   am   doing.      They  are   seeking  now   to  get  a  clue  against 
you.     They  want    a  reason  that,  as  they  suppose,  will  be  a  justi- 
fiable one  for   coming   up  against  me;  and  I  will  give  them  one. 
I  know  what  they  want,  and  when  I  am  ready  they  shall    have  it. 
I  am  ready  myself,  but  my  people  are   not.      I   am   compelled  to 
wait  for  them,   and  they  are  holding  me,  for  I  can  only  work  with 
them    according  to  that  which  they  can  bear.      If   they   cannot 
receive  much,  I  cannot  reveal  much  unto  them.     I  can  only  work 
with  my  people  as  they  prepare  themselves  for  it. 

5.  They  give   way  to  the   destroyer,  and   suffer  my  spirit  to 
depart  from  them;    and  what  can  I  do  with  them?     They  will  not 
strive  against  the  powers  of  darkness  as  they   ought  to   do ;    but 
they  give  way  to  doubt  and  fearful  forebodings  of  the  future.     They 
fear  that  they  will  be   overtaken  by  the  winter;    and   they  give 
themselves  trouble  when  they  have  no  need  to  do  so.     They  need 
not  to  think   that   I    do   not  know  the   position  in  which  I   have 
placed  them ;    for  I  do.      I  have  taken  them  into  mine  own  care  ; 
and  if  they  will  do  what  I  require  of  them,  I  will  provide  for  them. 

6.  There  are  those  among  my  people  who  are  fearful  of  future 
consequences.     They  have  not  sufficient  confidence  in  me.     They 
fear  mine  enemies.     They  will  not  cling  to  me  as  they  ought  to 
do ;    but  they  give  way  to  the  destroyer,  and  he  gains  the  advan- 
tage over  them.      And    then,   when  they  are   overcome,   they  go 
among  my  people  who  have  not  power  to   detect  false  spirits,  and 
shed  abroad  the  influence  among  them,  and  thus  prepare  the  way 
by  which  the  adversary  gains  advantage  over  the   rest.     And  so 
that  influence  has  run   from   one   to  another  until  all   my  people 
have  partaken  of  it.     They  must  humble  themselves  before  me. 
If  they  will  do  this,  my  spirit  shall  attend  them,  and  I  will  remove 
all  sickness  from  them.       They  have  brought   that  sickness  upon 
themselves  by  giving    way   to    false    spirits,    which  have  afflicted 


COMING    OF    CHRIST. DESTRUCTION    OF    THE    WICKED.        153 

them ;  and  those  spirits  will  always  afflict  my  people  when  they 
gain  the  upper  hand  of  them.  But  if  my  people  would  do  as  I 
have  commanded  them,  they  would  never  be  overcome  by  the 
destroyer.  Let  them  place  their  full  confidence  in  me,  and  serve 
me  with  all  their  hearts.  This  I  require  of  them.  I  will  not 
accept  of  those  who  are  half-hearted.  I  despise  them.  I  can  do 
nothing  with  them.  My  people  know  what  I  require  of  them,  if 
they  would  do  it ;  but  there  are  those  among  them  who  treat  sacred 
things  lightly ;  and  there  are  others  whose  minds  are  fixed  too  much 
upon  the  things  of  the  world,  so  much  so,  that  they  cannot  do 
their  duty  in  my  Church.  My  people  are  all  giving  way.  What 
can  I  do  with  them?  I  pity  them.  They  cannot  exercise  that 
confidence  in  me  which  is  required. 

7.  O  ye  people  who  trust  in  me,  let  us  reason  together.  Ye 
know  that,  by  the  operations  of  my  spirit,  I  have  brought  you  here 
from  different  parts  of  the  Territory,  and  I  have  opened  the 
heavens  to  you,  and  you  can  read  the  rounds  of  eternity ;  you  can 
see  the  principles  by  which  all  things  exist,  both  in  heaven,  on  the 
earth,  and  also  in  hell;  and  what  more  do  you  require  of  me?  If 
I  have  opened  the  heavens  to  you  and  permitted  you  to  see  the  order 
of  all  things,  do. you  not  think  that  I  will  deliver  you  according  to 
my  promise?  What  think  you?  O  ye  people  who  trust  in  me, 
do  not  manifest  such  weakness,  but  rise  up  and  do  your  duty ! 
You  know  that  I  have  protected  you  from  all  your  enemies  up  to 
this  time,  and  I  am  always  ready  to  defend  you.  I  have  sur- 
rounded you  by  my  holy  angels  from  the  time  that  you  gathered 
to  this  place  up  to  this  time ;  but  you  have  not  seen  me.  I  can 
stand  in  your  midst  and  you  cannot  see  me,  except  I  show  myself 
unto  you.  I  have  the  power  to  show  myself  to  those  who  are 
worthy,  and  to  none  else.  I  continually  guard  these  my  people 
with  a  mighty  host  If  they  could  see  them  they  would  be  satis- 
fied at  once,  but  they  cannot.  But  they  'will  'soon  witness  my 
power,  for  it  is  that  which  they  desire  to  see  a  manifestation  of. 
Let  them  prepare  for  it. 

I  am  he  that   was,  and  is,  and  is  to  come ;    even  Jesus  Christ. 
Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


154  TO    THE    PROPHET. 

TO  THE  PROPHET. 


No.   105.  WEBER,  UTAH,  October  4th,   1861. 

1.  WHAT  can  I  do  to  satisfy  you,  my  son?     You  are  continu- 
ally in  trouble.     I  have   spoken  to  you  from  time  to  time  and 
striven  to  comfort  you.     The  principle  of  evil  which  prevails  in  the 
world  bears  you  down  until  you  have  no  pleasure  of  your  life;  and 
you  fear  that  I  shall  not  come  out  and  move  your  enemies  out  of 
the  way.     You  feel  that  I  hold  myself  at  a  distance  from  you,  and 
that  I  will  not  come  up  to  you  and  show  myself  unto  you.     You 
consider  that  I  do  not  act  honest  with  you.     You  say  that  you  can 
see  mine  enemies  before  your  eyes  almost  continually,  and  you  are 
sensible  that  they  will  come  up  against  you.     You  say  that  you  are 
satisfied  that  your  enemies  will  come  up  and  seek  to  destroy  both 
you   and  my  people ;  but  you   say  that  you  are  not  satisfied  with 
my  dealings   with  you.     You  consider  that  I  do  not  sufficiently 
uphold  you.     You  consider  that  inasmuch  as  you  can  see  mine 
enemies,   that  you   ought  to  see  me  and  my  host ;   this  you  con- 
sider is  right. 

2.  But  behold,   I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  you  have  never  seen 
mine  enemies  come  up  against  you  as  yet.     You  have  only  seen  a 
few  men  come  up  to  this  place,  and  when  they  came  they  did  not 
come  to  slay  my  people.     They  only  came  to  gain  a  point,  as  they 
supposed ;    they   were    not   sent    to    destroy    my    people ;     and 
when   they   came    I     confounded    them.       They     had    not    the 
power    to    accomplish    their    designs.        I    have    always   broke 
their  grasp.     They  never  had  the   power  to  do  those  things  which 
they  wanted  to  do ;  and  I  always  will  confound  them  until  I  have 
worked  them  up  to  a  head,   and  then   I  will  destroy  them  accord- 
ing to  my  word.     You  can  see  that  your  enemies  never  have  had 
any  power  over  you,  and  you  should  be  satisfied. 

3.  You  must  judge  of  the  future  from  the  past.     If  I  have 
fulfilled  my  promises   in  the  past,   you  may  be  sure  that  I  shall 
fulfil  them  in  the  future.     WThat  are  you  afraid  of  ?     You  are  afraid 
that  I  am  guilty  of  sympathizing  with  the  wicked  and  neglecting 
the  pure  in  heart.      I   have  heard  thejf:  prayers    and    seen  their 
affiictipns ;  and  I  will  ayepge  them  of  thejr.  gnemies!     As   I   have 


TO    THE    PROPHET.  155 

told  you  before,  I  shall  never  sympathize  with  the  wicked.  You 
need  not  to  fear  because  I  am  compelled  to  delay  it  so  long  before 
I  come  out  in  power.  You  are  losing  confidence  in  me,  and  you 
are  doing  it  without  a  cause.  You  know  very  well  how  I  am 
situated,  and  you  know  that  I  cannot  do  otherwise  than  what  I  am 
doing.  If  you  were  ignorant  of  my  situation,  I  could  put  up  with 
your  insults  better ;  but  you  sin  against  me  wilfully.  I  know  the 
oppression  which  you  are  called  to  bear;  but  it  does  not  mend  your 
situation  for  you  to  keep  wounding  my  feelings  as  you  do.  I  have 
rights  as  well  as  you  have ;  and  I  can  feel  as  well  as  you  can  when 
my  rights  are  trampled  upon. 

4.  I  have   always   done  my  duty  to  you,  whether  you  think  so 
or  not.     I   am   fit  to  be  depended  upon  as  much  as  you  are.     I 
love  the  principle  of  right  as  much  as  you  do;  and  I   can  do  my 
duty   without  being  driven  to  it.      You  may  think  that  I  have 
nothing  to  do;  but  I  am  as  busy  as  you  are.     You  must  know  that 
when  I  have  the   whole   world  to  rule,  that  my  hands  are  full. 
You  know  my  duty  to  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth.     Why  do  you 
act  so  strangely?     I  have  always  done  my  duty.      If  I  ever  fail  to 
fulfil  a  promise  which  I  have  made  unto  you,  then  I  will  take  your 
insults   as  my  just   due ;  and  I   will  not  complain.     Why  do  you 
not  meet  me  on  equal  ground?     You  will  gain  nothing  by  fretting 
and  insulting  me  time  after  time.     You  cannot  force  the  day  of 
deliverance  before  the  time,  nor  move  the  things  of  eternity  out  of 
their  regular  channel.     You  must  know  that  the  ruling  power  is 
in  my  hand,  and  I  shall  work  according  to  the  law ;  and   I  shall 
reveal  the  law  unto  you  ;  and  when  I  have  done  this,  you  will  know 
that   I    have  always   kept  it  while   I  have  been  dealing  with  you, 
while  you  were  laboring  in  the  days  of  your  weakness.     You  are 
almost  ready  to  believe  that  I  punish  you  on  purpose  to  afflict  you, 
even  when  I  could  avoid  it.     But  know  this,   that   I  have  always- 
done  my  best  for  you.     I  am  your  friend,  if  you  could  only  believe 
it ;  and  if  you  do  not  believe  it  now,  you  soon  will  do  so. 

5.  And  as  you  have  complained  against  me  for  not  making  my 
appearance  unto  you,    and   showing  unto  you  the  heavenly  hosts 
also,  I  make  unto  you  this  promise :     That  when  you  see   mine 
enemies  coming  up  against  you,   you  shall  both  see  me  and  the 
heavenly  hosts.     We  shall  be  ready  for  battle  at  that  time.     When 


I$6  PROSPERITY    FOR    THE    RIGHTEOUS,  ETC. 

you  see  one  party,  you  shall  see  the  other  also ;  and  I  moreover  say 
unto  you  that  you  shall  see  me  before  that  day.  You  shall  have  no 
cause  to  complain  against  me.  I  know  that  neither  you  nor  these 
people  can  do  anything  for  yourselves.  It  is  my  business  to  fight 
the  battles  of  my  people,  and  I  will  do  it  to  their  satisfaction. 
Only  let  them  be  faithful,  and  live  by  every  word  which  proceeds 
from  my  mouth.  It  is  all  that  I  require  of  them. 

6.  And  now  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  hearken  to  the 
reproof  which  I  have  given  unto  you,  and  profit  by  it,  that  it  may 
be  well  with  you ;  and  whenever  you  murmur  against  me,  let  it  be 
when  I  deserve  it ;  or  if  you  continue  to  insult  me  as  you  have 
done,  without  a  cause,  I  will  chasten  you  severely.  I  will  not  put 
up  with  such  insults. 

I  will  speak  unto  you  again  shortly.  Let  this  suffice  for  the 
present ;  and  lo,  I  come  quickly.  I  am  the  Bright  and  Morning 
Star;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amem  and  Amen. 


THE    DESRUCTION    OF   THE   WICKED.— FUTURE 

PROSPERITY   FOR   THE  RIGHTEOUS.— THE 

HEALING    OF -THE    SICK. 


No.  1 06.  WEBER,  UTAH,  October  5th,  1861. 

1.  HEARKEN  unto  my  words,   O  ye  my   people  !    for  I  am 
about  to  speak  unto  you. 

2.  You  are  troubled  about  many  things,  about  which  you  have 
no  occasion  to  be  troubled.     You   cannot  change  the  nature  of 
things  by  fretting.     Then  why  do  you  not  reconcile  yourselves  to 
your  lot  ?     I  am  with  you — fear  not ;    for  yet  a  little  while  and  the 
blessing  will  come.     And  after  the  test  is  over,  you  will   be  made 
glad ;   for  you  will  see  no  more   oppression.     O  then,  why  cannot 
you  struggle  against  the  powers  of  darkness   a  few  days  longer? 
I  would  have  delivered  you  before  this  time  if  I   could  have  done 
so ;   but  I  am  compelled  to  act  according  to  the  law.     I  feel  for 
you,  and  I  will  do  all  that  lies  within  my  power  to  bear  you  up. 
I  will  send  my  holy  angels  to  visit  you  \  and  they  shall  cause  you 
to  dream  pleasant  dreams,  and  to  see  visions,     Yea,  my  spirit,  if 


PROSPERITY    FOR    THE    RIGHTEOUS,  'ETC.  157 

you  will  invite  it,  shall  inspire  you  until  you  shall  feel  strong  in 
me.  If  you  will  do  this,  I  will  remove  all  sickness  far  from  you. 
My  people  are  afflicted  when  they  suffer  their  spirits  to  droop,  and 
give  way  to  misgivings.  They  cannot  stand  against  the  destroyer 
unless  they  are  upheld  by  me ;  and  they  cannot  be  upheld  by  me 
unless  they  will  keep  my  commandments.  They  know  their  situ- 
ation; and  it  would  be  well  for  them  if  they  would  cling  to  me 
with  all  their  hearts — it  is  the  best  thing  that  they  can  do.  If  I 
am  not  their  friend,  they  have  none.  Then  let  them  act  so  that  I 
can  lawfully  befriend  them.  I  have  brought  them  here  myself. 
I  have  chosen  them  for  mine  own,  and  I  will  bless  them  with 
eternal  life  if  they  will  only  obey  me. 

3.  The  names  of  all  the  faithful  among  my  people  shall  be 
handed  down  from  generation  to  generation  to  their  honor  for  the 
good  act  which  they  have  done  to  their  fellow  creatures.     They 
are   worthy   of  the  greatest  blessings   that  are  in   store  for  the 
children  of  Adam.     I  am  well  pleased  with  the  faithful.     I  would 
that  all  my  people  were  faithful ;  but  there  are  some  in  my  Church 
who  are  careless  and  neglectful  of  their   duties.     Let  such  repent 
of  their  carelessness,  and  turn  to  me  with  all  their  hearts,  that  it 
may  be  well  with  them. 

4.  My  people  will  soon  be  called  to  take  sides,  either  for  me, 
or  against  me.     They  will  learn  a  secret  in  that  day.     They  will 
then  see  where  the  strongest  power  lies.     I  have  told  them   soon 
enough  for  them  to  make  up  their  minds  as  to  what  they  intend  to 
do.     If  they  expect  to  be   saved  in  the  day   of  my   power,  they 
must  serve  me  with  all  their  hearts.     If  they  will  not  do  this,  I 
will  not  protect  them.      Now  they    know    my   mind  concerning 
them. 

5.  Those  who  profess  to  be  my  people  must  serve  me  with  all 
their  hearts,  otherwise  I  will  not  preserve  their  lives ;   but  I   will 
deliver  them  into  the  hands  of  the  devil,  and  he  will   destroy  them 
in  the  flesh. 

6.  And  inasmuch  as  the  fall  has   now  set  in,   my   people  will 
expect  cold  weather,  and  they  must   prepare  themselves   for  it   as 
much  as  possible ;   but,  for  their  convenience,  I  will  moderate  the 
weather  to  a  certain  extent  until  I  am  ready  to  come  out  in  power 
and  change  their  circumstances — this  I  will  do  shortly.     Let  my 


158  PROSPERITY    FOR    THE    RIGHTEOUS,    ETC. 

people  seek  to  bear  each  other's  burdens.  They  need  not  to  be 
afraid  of  parting  with  their  substance  to  make  both  themselves  and 
those  who  are  destitute  comfortable  for  a  short  time.  And  if  those 
who  are  in  good  circumstances  among  my  people  will  assist  those 
who  are  poor,  I  will  shortly  give  unto  them  ten-fold,  yea,  a  hun- 
dred-fold ;  for  whosoever  relieves  the  poor  and  the  destitute,  do  it 
unto  me  ;  and  I  will  reward  them. 

7.  My  people  need  not  to  think  that   I  intend  to   keep  them 
here  all  winter;    for  I  do  not.     I  shall  break  up  the  plans  of  mine 
enemies,  and  before  the  winter  is  over   I  will  send   them  to  their 
graves ;   for  in  my  heart  I  do  despise  them.     They   cannot  think 
about  anything  else  but  laying  their  plans  to  fight  against  me.     I 
will  give  unto  them  fighting  enough.     O  the  blindness  and  wicked- 

^ness  of  men  to  raise  their  puny  arms  to  fight  against  me!  Let 
my  people  rest  in  me,  and  know  that  I  will  give  unto  them  wealth  ; 
yea,  even  more  than  they  will  know  what  to  do  with.  Those  who 
are  faithful  in  my  Church  will  be.  the  most  wealthy  of  all  people ; 
for  I  am  about  to  place  all  things  in  their  hands;  for  all  things 
which  are  upon  the  earth  are  theirs.  And  I  will  break  down  all 
earthly  power ;  and,  in  due  time,  I  will  place  all  things  in  the 
hands  of  my  people. 

8.  I  have  done  all  in   my  power  to  warn  the   people   of  this 
Territory   of  the  destruction   which  is  coming  upon  them ;   and 
after  all  that  I  have  done,  I  shall  be   compelled  to  destroy  thou- 
sands of  those  who  are  heirs  to  the  resurrection — this   I   cannot 
avoid ;    for  I  cannot  convince  them  in  this  life.     Oh,  how  I   am 
pained  with  the  blindness  and  wickedness  of  men ! 

9.  And,  behold,  I  speak  unto  you  concerning  the  death  which 
has  lately  taken  place  among  my  people.     My  people  may  be  sur- 
prised thereat.     But,  behold,  I  say  unto  you  that  he  was  appointed 
unto  death;   and  I  have  taken  him  from  the   midst  of  my   people 
for  a  wise  purpose  in  myself.     I  had  a  place  appointed   for  him. 
Therefore,  let  not  his  companion  fret  over  her  loss,  for  I  will  pro- 
vide for  her.     I  am  acquainted  with  her  needs,  and  I   will  supply 
them ;    for  I  am  the  Lord. 

10.  And,  behold,  I  say  unto  you,   my  son,   if  my  people  will 
be  faithful  unto  me,  I   will  spare  the  lives  of  all  those  who  are 
not  appointed  unto   death,  and  I  will  heal  them  when  they  are 


CONCERNING    THE    SICK.  159 

sick.  And  when  you  are  called  to  visit  those  who  are  sick,  I  will 
give  unto  you  to  know  whether  they  are  appointed  unto  death,  or 
not.  And  if  they  are  not  appointed  unto  death,  you  shall  lay  your 
hands  upon  their  heads,  and  I  will  heal  them.  My  power  shall 
be  felt  through  you  from  this  time  henceforth.  I  am  the  Lord  of 
Hosts.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    CONCERNING    THE   SICK. 


No.  107.  WEBER,  UTAH,  October  i8th,  1861. 

1.  LET  MY  people  hearken  unto  my   words,   which   are  quick 
and  powerful,  sharper  than  a  two-edged  sword;  for  I  am  about  to 
speak  unto  them. 

2.  It  would    be  well  for  them  if  they  would  hearken  unto  my 
words,  and  obey  them  ;    otherwise  they  will  have  to  suffer  for  it. 
When  I  counsel  them,  I  know  what  I  am  doing.     Those  who  are 
in  good  circumstances  need  not  to  be  afraid  of   parting  with  their 
substances  to  make  those  who  are  poor  in  their  midst  comfortable. 
Some  of  those  who  first  embraced  my  gospel  were  afraid  of  losing 
their  substance ;  and  for  fear  that  the   poor  should  want  anything 
of  them,  they  forsook  the  truth.     Their  eyes   were  full   of  greedi- 
ness.    They  were  afraid  that  others  should  live  as   well  as  them- 
selves ;  but  it  is  ordained  in  heaven  that  the  poor  shall  live  as  well 
as  the   rich.     Therefore,   let  them   know  that  when  I  am  ready,  I 
will  destroy  them,  and  give  their  substance  to  the  poor;  and  who 
can  stay  my  hand? 

3.  All  the  children  of  Adam  have  an  equal  claim  upon  the 
products  of  the  earth,  according  to  the  right  which  they  hold  in  their 
Father's  kingdom  ;  but  the  children  of  the  devil  have  robbed  them 
of  that  right,  and,  for  this  sin,  the  whole  world  is   under  a  curse. 
The  poor  have  never  had  their  rights ;  but  they  have  always  been, 
as  it  were,  trampled  under  the  feet  of  the  rich.      It  will  be  hard  for 
those  who  are  sick  to  abide  my  law ;   but   they  will   now  have   to 
abide  it,  or  perish ;  for  the  devil  has  now  ruled  this  world  his  time 
out.     My  law  is  about  to  come  to  the  earth,  and,  when  it  comes, 


l6o  CONCERNING    THE    SICK. 

it  will  set  all  things  in  order.  The  children  of  men  may  be  pre- 
paring themselves  for  it ;  for  it  will  come  even  before  my  people 
are  aware  of  it.  They  need  not  to  think  that  that  time  is  many 
years  hence,  for  it  is  not.  My  judgments  will  come  upon  the 
nations  of  the  earth  thick  and  fast ;  yea,  as  a  whirlwind.  The 
inhabitants  of  the  earth  little  know  what  awaits  them.  Therefore, 
let  those  among  my  people  who  are  in  good  circumstances  assist 
those  who  are  poor,  that  they  may  find  an  inheritance  among  the 
faithful  of  my  people,  which  they  shall  obtain  if  they  will  do  as  I 
have  commanded  them.  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts. 

4.  And  now,  behold,  I  speak  unto  you  concerning  those  who 
are   sick  among  my  people.     There  are  some  of  them  who  have 
given  way  to  the  destroyer,  and  he  is  afflicting  them.     He  seeks  to 
afflict  all  those  of  my  people  that  he  can  gain  the  upper  hand  of. 
My  people  do  not  seem  to  fully   understand  their  duties ;  if  they 
did,   there  would   not   be  so  many   of  them   sick.     They  should 
struggle  against  unbelief  with  all  their    power.     They  should  pray 
in  their  hearts   continually.     They  must   serve  me  with  all  their 
hearts.     If  they  will   do  this,   there   will  not  be  much  sickness  in 
their  midst ;  but  they  will  be  healthy  and  strong ;  for  mine  angels 
will  continually  attend  them,   and  keep   sickness  far  from  them ; 
but,    by  their  unbelief  and  neglect  of  prayer,    they    drive    mine 
angels  far  from  them.     I  have  told  my  people  often   enough  what 
I  require  at  their  hands,  and  yet  they  will  not  do  it.     If  they   will 
not  do  as  I  have  commanded  them,   they   must  suffer  the   conse- 
quences.    I  have  done  my   duty  to  them ;  but  they  give  way  to 
almost  every  attack  of  the  destroyer.     It  is  not  difficult  for  him  to 
lead  them   astray.     What  can   I   do  with  them  ?     They  will  not 
struggle  against  the  destroyer  as  they  ought  to  do ;  but  they  give  up 
to  him  entirely.     My  holy  angels  are  continually  around  them, 
waiting  to  be  invited ;  but,  by  their  conduct,  they   often   invite  the 
angels   of  the  devil  in   preference  to  my  holy  angels,  whom  they 
drive  away ;  and  the  evil  spirits   surround  and  afflict   them  with 
sickness.     If  they  will  not  do  as  I  have  commanded  them,   I   can 
do  nothing   for  them ;  but  if  they   will  keep  my  commandments, 
my  yoke  will  be  easy,  and  my  burden  light. 

5.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  that  when  any  of  my 
people  are   dangerously  sick,   you   shall  visit  them,  and   lay  your 


f 


MANNER    OF    ADMINISTERING    TO    THE    SICK.  l6l 

hands  upon  their  heads  ;  and,  if  they  are  not  appointed  unto 
death,  I  will  heal  them.  You  need  not  to  lay  your  hands  upon  a 
person  more  than  once,  for  it  is  all  that  I  require.  I  only  need 
your  sanction ;  and  then  if  they  are  not  appointed  unto  death,  I 
will  heal  them.  I  am  compelled  by  law  to  acknowledge  your 
authority  before  I  can  do  anything  among  my  people  upon  the 
earth  ;  and  when  you  have  given  me  your  consent,  I  will  give  unto 
my  people  the  blessing  appointed  by  you. 

6.  When  you  lay  your  hands  upon  the  head  of  a  person  who  is 
sick,  you  shall  express  the  following  words:  "Oh  God,  the 
Eternal  Father,  I,  thy  servant,  according  to  thy  request,  lay  my 
hands  upon  the  head  of  this,  thy  servant  (or  handmaiden),  in  the 
name  of  thy  Son,  Jesus  Christ,  according  to  the  law  of  heaven, 
and  ask  thee  to  look  down  upon  this,  thy  servant  (or  handmaiden), 
who  is  thus  afflicted ;  and,  inasmuch  as  he  (or  she)  is  not  ap- 
pointed unto  death,  wilt  thou  heal  him  (or  her).  Dear  brother 
(or  sister),  by  virtue  and  authority  of  the  holy  priesthood  which  I 
hold,  according  to  my  birthright,  I  command  this  disease  to  depart 
from  you.  From  this  time  be  you  whole.  I  pronounce  this  bless- 
ing upon  you,  ih 4he  name  of  the  Father,  and  of  the  Son,  and  of 
Holy  Ghost.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen."  And  I  will  heal 
them  according  to  your  request. 

I  add  no  more  at  this  time.  I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 

THE  INDEPENDENCE  OF  THE  PEOPLE  OF  GOD. 


No.  1 08.  WEBER,  UTAH,  October  nth,  1861. 

1.  LISTEN  to  the  words  of  the  Lord  your  God ;  even  the  Alpha 
and  Omega,  the  beginning  and  the  end ;   for  I  am  about  to  speak 
unto  you. 

2.  You  are  greatly  afraid  that  I  shall  neglect  you.      Do  you  not 
think  that  I    know  all  about  you,  and  this  people?     Your  enemies 
have  sent  unto  you,  and  unto  a  number  of  this  people,  summonses 
to  appear  before  them,  to  give  unto  them  an  account  of  your  con- 
duct.    What  shall  I  say  unto  you  upon  this  subject?     I  will  tell  you 
what  to  do ;    and  if  you  and  this  people  will  do  as  I  command  you, 


1 62  THE    PEOPLE    OF    GOD. — THE    ENEMIES. 

I  will  uphold  you,  and  take  the  responsibility  upon  myself.  I 
think  that  I  am  able  to  maintain  mine  own  ground  with  them. 
They  feel  determined  to  make  me  give  unto  them  an  account  of 
my  proceedings ;  but  rny  course  shall  never  be  questioned  by  them. 
I  have  begun  a  work,  and  I  am  able  to  carry  it  through.  I  can 
destroy  the  entire  inhabitants  of  this  earth  in  one  day.  What  are 
they  in  my  hands  ?  Scarcely  a  bubble.  But  they  will  soon  try 
what  they  can  do.  They  are  so  blind  that  they  do  not  see  that  I 
am  at  the  head  of  this  work.  They  think  that  there  are  but  a  few 
people  here,  and  that  they  can  do  what  they  please  with  them. 
They  think  that  they  will  have  but  little  trouble  to  bring  them  to 
subjection;  but  they  have  a  lesson  to  learn  which  they  will  not 
learn  until  they  fairly  commence  their  operations  with  my  people ; 
then  I  will  show  them  who  they  are.  I  will  show  them  that  they 
have  trusted  to  a  broken  reed.  They  will  not  know  that  they  are 
deceived  in  their  course  until  they  come  up  against  me.  They 
believe  that  they  are  led  by  me  to  come  up  against  my  people ; 
and  they  think  that  I  shall  uphold  them  in  their  bloody  act.  But 
they  must  look  to  the  devil  for  support.  They  need  not  look  to 
me  for  help.  If  they  would  but  look  around  them  and  study  their 
past  course,  they  would  know  that  I  have  not  been  with  them  for 
many  years.  Their  works  have  failed  in  every  instance ;  whereas, 
if  I  had  been  with  them,  their  works  would  have  prospered.  My 
works  and  designs  are  not  frustrated  by  men.  I  have  never  failed 
to  accomplish  the  work  which  my  Father  appointed  unto  me  by 
law.  That  which  cometh  from  heaven  never  fails;  but  the  works 
and  designs  of  the  devil  are  brought  to  naught.  When  men  be- 
hold a  people  who  are  called  by  my  name  constantly  failing  in  all 
their  attempts  to  build  up,  as  they  suppose,  a  church  unto  me, 
they  may  be  sure  that  I  have  forsaken  them.  If  I  was  at  the  head 
of  a  people,  their  works  would  prosper;  but  those  people  who  pro- 
fess my  name  do  not  even  believe  the  sight  of  their  own  eyes ;  for  they 
do  not  believe  that  their. works  have  failed.  They  know  nothing 
about  the  principles  of  right  and  wrong;  and  they  who  are  thus 
deceived  have  nothing  but  death  staring  them  in  the  face ;  for  they 
have  given  up  their  judgment  to  others;  and  I  have  cursed  all 
such  who  trust  in  man,  and  disobey  my  words.  O  the  blindness 
of  the  children  of  men !  It  is  hard  for  me  to  deal  with  them.  I 


THE    PEOPLE    OF    GOD. THE    ENEMIES.  163 

am   constantly  at   work  for  their  benefit ;  but,  after  all,  I  cannot 
satisfy  them. 

3.  And  behold,  I  speak  unto  you  again  concerning  your  ene- 
mies.    Let  my  people  abide  by  my  words,  for  I  am  about  to  give 
unto  them  a  commandment.     Let  them  mind  their  own  business; 
which   business  is   to  serve   me  with   all   their  hearts.     They  are 
subject   to   none   but   me.     Let  them   leave   their  enemies  in  my 
hands.     They  need  not  to  fear  their  authority ;  for  if   they   were 
backed  up  by  all  the  world  I    am  more  than  a  match  for  them.     I 
care  nothing  about  their  backing.     I  know  all  about  their  authority, 
and  I  will  hold  them  so  that  they  shall  not  have  the  power  to  hurt 
a  hair  of  the  heads  of  my  people  who  are  faithful.     I  am  round 
about  them  continually,  forcing  them  hither  and  thither,   and   con- 
trolling them  in  their  councils.      My  people  need  not  to  think  that 
their  enemies  will  make  any  move  against  them  that  I  shall  not  be 
acquainted   with,    or  that   I    shall   not  have  driven  them  to ;  for  I 
control  them  in  all  their  movements.      My  people  have  nothing  to 
fear,  if  they  will  do  as  I  command  them.     I   want  to  work   mine 
enemies  up  to  a  head ;  this  is  what   I   am   aiming  at.     I  am  com- 
pelled   by   law  to  do  this,  before  I  can  deliver  my  people.     And 
while  I  am  doing  my  duty,  my  people  must  not  be  afraid.     When 
they  see  danger,  they  must  remember  that  I  am  as  near  unto  them 
as  their  enemies  are ;  and  they  must  understand  that  their  deliver- 
ance is  at  hand.     They  should  then  lift  up  their  heads  and  rejoice 
in  me,  and  know  that  I  am  their  shepherd  and  their  defense — even 
the  Lord  of  Hosts. 

4.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,   that   inas- 
much as  you  have  desired  of  me  to  know  the  reason   why  I   have 
not  shown  myself  unto  you   of  late,    I  will  inform  you.     You  say 
that  both  myself  and  the  heavenly  hosts  were  accustomed  to  show 
ourselves  unto  you  in  times  which  are  past,  and  you  want  to  know 
the  reason  why  we  do  not  do  the  same   now.     You  say  that  you 
need  to  behold  our  presence  now    more  than  you   ever  did ;  and 
you  consider  that,  at  the  time  when  our   presence  is  most  needed, 
we  will  not  visit  you.     We  visited  you,  in  the  first  place,  to  show 
unto  you  that  we  existed.     We  considered  that  it  was  our  duty  to 
make  known  unto  you  this  fact,  that  you  might  be  satisfied.     You 
now  know  that  we  do  exist,  for  you  have  seen  us.     And,  inasmuch 


164  THE    PEOPLE    OF    GOD. THE    ENEMIES. 

as  we  have  convinced  you  of  this  fact,  we  do  not  feel  ourselves 
under  the  obligation  of  constantly  showing  ourselves  unto  you. 
To  know  that  we  exist  is  all  that  you  need  to  know.  Should  we 
show  ourselves  unto  you  a  thousand  times,  you  would  not  know 
any  more  about  our  existence  than  what  you  now  know.  When 
you  need  to  see  us,  we  will  come  and  show  ourselves  unto  you ; 
but  we  shall  not  come  unto  you  until  you  are  in  trouble.  Then 
we  will  come  unto  you  and  release  you.  What  more  do  you  re- 
quire at  our  hands  than  this  ? 

5.  You  seem  to  be  afraid  to  make  a  move,  except  you  can  see 
us  before  your  eyes  almost  continually.  We  know  all  about  your 
difficulties ;  therefore,  walk  up  and  do  your  duty,  and  leave  ours 
to  us ;  and  we  will  do  it.  You  know  that  we  have  never  neglected 
you ;  then  why  cannot  you  walk  up  to  your  post  like  a  man  ?  If 
ever  we  neglect  you,  then  you  can  justly  blame  us ;  but  if  we  never 
neglect  you,  you  have  no  right  to  blame  us.  Wait  until  you  have 
a  cause  to  complain  of  us.  If  we  do  not  come  unto  you  when  you 
are  in  trouble,  and  release  both  you  and  this  people  out  of  the 
hands  of  their  enemies,  then  we  are  willing  to  bear  the  blame  for- 
ever. We  know  all  about  your  oppression.  We  feel  for  you,  and 
we  are  .willing  to  do  all  that  lies  in  our  power  to  ease  your  burden. 
Then  know  that  we  are  your  friends,  and  be  contented.  All  things 
are  moving  on  aright,  for  we  are  with  you.  Let  this  suffice  for  the 
present,  and  I  will  shortly  speak  unto  you  again.  You  will  soon 
need  to  hear  from  me,  for  you  will  soon  meet  with  trouble. 

I  am  he  that  was,  and  is,  and  is  to   come ;  even  Jesus   Christ. 
Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


CONCERNING   THE   APPOINTING  OF    OFFICERS    TO 
ADMINISTER    TO    THE    SICK. 


No.   109.  WEBER,  UTAH,  October  i2th,   1861. 

1.  INASMUCH  as   I  have  given  unto  you  the  law  pertaining  to 
the  healing  of  the  sick,  it  is  necessary  that  I  should   speak  unto 
you  again  upon  this  subject. 

2.  You  will  not  be  able  to  attend  to  all  the  sick  yourself; 


THE    APPOINTING    OF    OFFICERS.  165 

therefore,  in  order  to  ease  your  burden,  you  shall  appoint  several 
others  to  act  in  your  place,  under  your  authority.  And  when  you 
have  commissioned  them,  I  will  bless  their  administrations  as 
though  you  administered  to  them  yourself.  All  that  I  require  of 
you  is  your  sanction.  You  cannot  be  present  everywhere  at  oncey 
consequently,  you  must  have  agents  to  act  for  you.  'And  let  those 
agents  whom  you  shall  appoint  act  according  to  the  law ;  for,  if 
they  do  not,  I  will  not  bless  their  administrations.  They  must 
regulate  themselves  always  according  to  my  law.  And,  behold, 
my  law  shall  proceed  from  the  mouth  of  my  servant  Joseph. 

3.  My  servant  Joseph  Smith  sent  elders  out  to  preach  to  the 
world,  and  to  lay  their  hands  upon  the  heads   of  those  who   were 
sick,  and  to  anoint  them  with  oil,  and  pray   over   them,  that  they 
might  be  healed.     This   order   existed  upon  the  earth   when  my 
holy  priesthood  was  upon  the  earth  in  part  only.     But  that  order 
of  things  will  not  exist  under  the  fulness  of  the  holy  priesthood. 

4,  All  miracles   which  now  are,    or  henceforth   shall  be  per- 
formed in  my  Church,  must  be   performed  according  to  the  law 
which  I  have  appointed  for  them.     I   always   work  by  law;   and 
without  law  I  do  nothing.     My  servants   need  not  to  anoint  the 
sick  with  oil  any  more.     They  must  repeat  over  the  heads  of  the 
sick  the  ceremony  which  I  have  given  through  my  servant  Joseph, 
and  then  I  .will  heal  them.     Those  ordinances  which   only  existed 
in  part  in  my  Church,  exist  no  longer.     I  have  committed  the  ful- 
ness of  the  holy  priesthood  to  the  earth,  and  it  will  bring  about  a 
new  state  of  things  altogether.     Everything  that  I  now  do,  I   shall 
do  according  to  a  perfect  law.     I  shall  now,  from   time  to  time, 
give  laws  to  regulate  all  things  in  my  Church,  as   fast  as  my  peo- 
ple can  prepare  themselves  to  receive  them.     My  people  need  to 
begin  to  open  their  eyes,  and  look  around  them,  for  I  shall  work 
fast ;    and  if  they  do  not  strive  to  keep  pace  with  me,  I  shall  con- 
sume them  with   my  judgments ;   for  I  am  compelled   by   law  to 
drive  things  ahead.     Therefore,  let  them  seek  to  keep  up  with  me 
that  they  may  not  perish  with  the  wicked. 

I  now  add  no  more.     I  am  the  light  and  life  of  the  world; 
even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


I  66  THE    ANGELS    IN    HEAVEN. 

THE    ANGELS    IN    HEAVEN. 


No.  no.  WEBER,  UTAH,  October  i5tb,  1861. 

A  REVELATION  given  by  Jesus  Christ,  concerning  the  angels  in 
heaven,  showing  their  power  to  act  as  agents — the  order  in 
which  they  move,  and  the  means  by  which  they  subsist  as  im- 
mortal beings ;  and  showing  also  the  kind  of  earth  on  which 
they  dwell,  and  what  their  duties  to  mortal  beings  who  dwell 
upon  this  earth  are. 

1.  HEARKEN,  my  son,  unto  my  words,  for  I  am  about  to  reveal 
many  things  unto  you  for  your  comfort  and  satisfaction.     You  say 
that  you  wish  to  know  more  about  me,  and  I  will  strive  to  satisfy 
you. 

2.  My  angels  are  all  subject  to  me.     I  have  no  trouble  to  rule 
them,  for  they  all  abide  the   celestial   law,   which   law  is  perfect. 
And  they  are  trained  by  that  law  from  the  time  of  their  celestial 
birth  up  to  the  time  of  their  maturity,  and  even  throughout  all 
eternity.     They  know  nothing  about  any  other  than  a  celestial  law. 
They  are  not  afflicted  and  driven  hither  and  thither  as  men  upon 
the  earth  are.     They  know  no  evil  in  heaven  ;  for  they  are  guided 
by  correct  principles,  and  there  is  no  opposition  where  they  dwell. 

3.  Do  the  angels  in  heaven  grow  up  from  childhood  to  ma- 
turity?    Yes!     How  long  are  they  in  growing  up   from  childhood 
to  maturity?     But  a  few  years  according  to  the  time  which  regu- 
lates mortal  beings.     They  grow  up  to  maturity  much  sooner  than 
those  do  who  are  clothed  with  mortality ;  and  they  are  trained  by 
their  parents  to  abide  every  celestial  law ;    and  they  have  a  perfect 
knowledge  of  all  things.     They  have  no  disposition  to  rebel.     The 
principle  of  good  is   the   prevailing   principle  there.     They   never 
die ;   but  they  always  retain  the  freshness   of  youth.     They  know 
no  pain,  for  they  have  the  power  over  disease,  and,  consequently 
they  never  fall  victims  to  it. 

4.  Have  they  physical  powers  like  those  which  mortal  beings 
have?     Yes. 

5.'    Have  they  flesh  and  bones  like  mortal  being  have?     Yes. 
6.     Are  they,  with  respect  to  their  bodily  form,  like  unto  men 
upon  this  earth?     Yes. 


THE  ANGELS  IN  HEAVEN.  167 

7.  Can  they  labor  with  their  hands?      Yes.      Do  they  earn 
their  subsistence  by  so  doing?     Yes. 

8.  A  celestial  earth  yields  its  fruits  in  its  times  and  in  its  sea- 
sons.    The  angels  of  heaven  need  both  food  and  raiment,  even  as 
mortals  do,  and  they  have  to  work  to  obtain  them.     What   man- 
ner of  food  do  they  live  upon?    They  live  upon  the  fruits  which  the. 
trees  yield  ;   and  also  upon  other  fruits  produced  from  the  earth. 
Does  a  celestial  earth  bring  forth  all  manner  of  produce  for  the 
sustenance    of  its  inhabitants?     Yes.      Do  angels  live  upon  the 
same  kind  of  food  that  mortals  live  upon?      Yes;  to    a   certain 
extent  they  do.     In  what  respect  does  their  food  differ?     What 
do  mortals  live  upon  which  the  angels  of  heaven   do  not?     Mor- 
tals use  animal  flesh,  to  obtain  which   they  shed  blood.      But  the 
angels  of  heaven  do  not  eat  animal  flesh.     In  every  other  respect 
they  live  as  mortals  live,  even  from  the  products  of  the  earth  on 
which  they  dwell. 

9.  Every  earth  supports  its  own  inhabitants,   and  has  laws  to 
govern  and  regulate  it,  adapted   to  its  case,  whether  in  its  first, 
second,  or  third  estate. 

10.  Respecting  the  vegetable  creation :     Do  all  trees  and  herbs 
decay  in  heaven  as  they  do  on  the  earth  ?     No ;  they  grow  up  to 
maturity,  and  always  remain  fresh  and  fruitful.     They  yield  their 
fruits  in  the  seasons  thereof.     A  celestial  earth  is  always  undergoing 
a  process  of  purification ;  it  is  always  undergoing  a  change ;  but  it 
loses  nothing. 

11.  When  an  earth  has  become  celestial,  and  the  resurrection 
of  its  inhabitants  is  completed,  it  ceases  to  grow ;  after  which,  its 
inhabitants  have  not  the  power  to  propagate  their  species  in  that 
world.     Nothing  can  dwell  in  a  celestial  world  but  celestial  beings ; 
for  if  angels  who  are  in  heaven  had  the  privilege  to  propagate  their 
species  there,  they  would  bring  forth  angels  who  would  be  in  their 
first  estate  only,  and  this  could  not  be;  for,  according  to  the  law, 
none  can  enter  a  celestial  world  but  resurrected  beings. 

12.  Resurrected  beings  have  the  privilege  to  visit  earths  whose 
inhabitants  are   mortal.     They   have  the  power,  according  to  the 
law  of  heaven,  to  visit  those  who  are  inferior  to  themselves ;  but 
none  except  those  who  are  celestial  beings  can  enter  heaven.     The 
greater  can  visit  the  lesser ;  but  the  lesser  cannot  ascend  to  heaven 
to  visit  the  greater. 


1 68  THE    ANGELS    IN    HEAVEN. 

13.  Have  the  angels  in  heaven  a  correct  language?    Yes.     Do 
they  all  speak  the  one  language?     Yes.     Do  they  understand  all 
manner  of  languages,  as  people  do  upon  this  earth  ?    Yes.     But  in 
heaven,   although  they  understand  all  manner  of  languages,  they 
all  speak  one  language,  being  compelled  by  law  to  do  so.     They 
have  a  higher  education  in  heaven  than  men  have  upon  the  earth, 
consequently,  they  have   no  confusion  there.     When  will  the  in- 
habitants of  this  earth  all  speak  one  language.''     When  the  earth 
has  undergone  its  last  change  and  become  celestial.     All  the  chil- 
dren  of  Adam,  who  are  heirs  to  salvation,  will  come  forth  in  the 
resurrection  in  their  own  order ;  and,  as  they  each  come  forth,  they 
will  be  taught  the  same   perfect  language,   until   every  son  and 
daughter  of  Adam,  who  are  heirs  to  the   resurrection,   shall  have 
come  forth  and  received  their  education.     Who  will  be  their  teach- 
ers?    Their  own  parents.     They  will  then  all  speak  that    same 
language  which  will  have  been  taught  them  by  their  parents,   who 
will  have   brought  them  forth.     Will  the  children  of  Adam  ever 
learn  a  perfect  language  in  mortality?     No.     A  perfect   language 
will  only  be  spoken  by  a  perfect  people ;  imperfect  beings  must  be 
content  with  imperfect  things. 

1 4.  What  ought  we  to  understand  by  perfection  ?       A  perfect 
people  on  a  perfect  earth  abiding  a  celestial  law.     Will  mortals 
never  abide  a  celestial  law?     No.     Does  not  the  fulness   of  the 
holy   priesthood  bring  about  a   perfect   state   of  things  upon  the 
earth  ?     No,  not  in  every  respect ;  it  brings  that  which  is  perfect  as 
far  as   it  is  revealed;  but   it  brings   only  that  portion  to  a  mortal 
earth  which   mortals  can  abide.     It  does  not  establish  a  celestial 
law  in  all  its  parts ;  for  while  men  are  in   mortality  they  cannot 
keep  a  celestial  law  in  all  things.     The  fulness  of  the  holy  priest- 
hood gives  unto  that  person  who  holds  it  a  perfect  knowledge  of  a 
celestial  law;  but  while   in  mortality  people  are  not  placed  in  cir- 
cumstances in  which  they  can  abide  it  fully ;  hence,   mortals   have 
laws  adapted  to  their  case. 

15.  Does  the  holy  priesthood,  when  it  is  upon  the  earth  in  part, 
bring  about  any  perfect  law  or  doctrine  which  belongs  to  the  gospel 
of  Christ?     No.     What  is  the  difference  between  the  priesthood 
in  part  and  the  holy  priesthood  in  its  fulness?     The  priesthood  in 
part  only  gives  a  knowledge  of  the  things  of  God  in  part ;  but  the 


THE  ANGELS  IN  HEAVEN.  169 

fulness  of  the  holy  priesthood  gives  a  perfect  knowledge  of  all  the 
laws  and  doctrines  which  belong  to  the  gospel  of  Jesus  Christ.  It 
reveals  all  mysteries  both  in  heaven,  upon  the  earth,  and  in  hell — 
even  a  knowledge  of  things  as  they  are.  The  priesthood  in  part 
is  a  foreshadowing  or  representation  of  those  principles  which  are 
fully  explained  under  the  priesthood  in  its  fulness.  While  the 
priesthood  is  upon  the  earth  in  part  only,  a  great  deal  of  deception 
and  many  false  ideas  creep  into  the  Church.  Under  it  the  Lord 
reveals  himself  to  his  people  in  visions,  in  dreams,  in  figures,  in 
parables,  and  in  dark  speeches ;  therefore,  it  allows  much  false- 
hood to  exist  undetected,  which  misguides  the  human  race. 

1 6.  And  now,  behold,  I  speak  unto  you  again  concerning  my 
holy  angels.  You  wish  to  know  by  what  means  they  move  from 
heaven  to  this  earth.  They  are  filled  with  light  and  power.  They 
can  move  like  thought.  They  come  from  heaven  to  the  earth  in 
a  few  minutes,  according  10  your  time.  From  the  time  that  I  first 
called  you  until  now,  I  have  surrounded  you  by  my  holy  angels. 
If  I  had  not  done  so,  Satan  with  his  host  would  have  slain  both 
you  and  these  people  who*  believe  in  me.  I  am  compelled  to 
guard  both  you  and  these  people  continually.  If  I  did  not  do  this, 
Satan  and  his  host  would  destroy  both  you  and  them.  You  should 
know  that  my  holy  angels  are  always  around  you.  You  under- 
stand the  power  of  the  devil  as  well  as  you  understand  my  power. 
You  know  that  he  is  at  the  head  of  one-third  of  my  Father's  family, 
who  fell  with  him  when  my  Father's  family  was  in  its  first  estate. 
And  you  know  that  the  other  two-thirds  of  my  Father's  children 
are  under  my  command.  And  you  know  that  Lucifer  is  con- 
stantly at  war  with  me,  and  with  my  host ;  but  I  have  power  over 
him.  And  you  know  that  he  is  at  war  with  you,  for  you  know 
that  he  has  laid  you  stiff  many  times ;  and  if  my  host  had  not 
delivered  you  out  of  his  hands,  he  would  have  slain  you.  You 
know  how  he  operated  upon  you ;  you  are  not  a  stranger  to  his 
power.  He  has  not  a  body  so  that  he  can  operate  physically 
upon  mortals  as  they  can  operate  upon  each  other;  but  he  can 
strike  them  stiff,  and  take  their  breath  from  their  bodies.  In 
this 'way  he  can  destroy  the  children  of  men.  But  the  angels 
of  heaven  have  bodies  like  unto  those  of  mortal  men,  but  far 
more  powerful  than  they  have.  The  warriors  of  heaven  go  to  war 


170  THE    ANGELS    IN    HEAVEN. 

in  their  resurrected  bodies,  and  they  have  all  power ;  but  disem- 
bodied spirits  have  not.  In  this  respect  I  have  the  advantage 
over  the  devil.  And  I  have  also  another  advantage  over  him.  I 
have  two-thirds  of  my  Father's  children  under  my  command; 
whereas,  Satan  has  but  one-third  under  his  command.  I  have  the 
advantage  over  him  in  every  respect.  How  shall  I  operate  mine 
enemies  when  I  come  to  destroy  them?  My  holy  angels  will 
smite  them  dead  in  one  minute.  You  shall  see  them ;  but  mine 
enemies  shall  not  see  them. 

17.  You    may  ask  me  this  question:     If  my  holy  angels  eat 
food,  where  do  they  obtain  it  from  ?     They  move  about  from  place 
to  place,  and  possess  the  power  to  do  their  own  work,  and  to  sup- 
ply their  own  needs  from  time  to  time.     They  do  not  partake  of 
food  as  often  as  mortals  do,  and  they  are  continually  passing  from 
heaven  to  the  earth,  and  from  the  earth  up  to  heaven,    which  they 
accomplish  in  a  few  minutes. 

1 8.  Is  it  far  from  this  earth  up  to  heaven  ?     Not  as  far  as  the 
children  of  men  have  supposed  that  it  was.     They  are  not  correct 
in  their  calculations.     They  err  in  all  tjieir  ways.     They  know  but 
little    about    correct  principles.     No  person  can  understand   the 
nature  of  an  earth,  the  laws  by  which  it   is  governed,  and  its   rela- 
tionship and  connection  with  other  planets,  except  I  reveal  them 
to  him. 

29.  The  children  of  men  have  had  a  variety  of  ideas  concern- 
ing the  earth  on  which  they  dwell,  and  concerning  the  sun,  moon 
and  stars,  which  rule  the  days,  weeks,  months  and  years,  and 
which  regulate  the  times  and  seasons ;  but  they  are  deceived. 
They  cannot  come  to  a  knowledge  of  these  things,  except  I  reveal 
them  unto  them ;  and  I  shall  reveal  those  things  to  none,  but  to 
him  that  is  an  heir  to  the  fulness  of  the  holy  priesthood.  I  will 
give  unto  him  a  perfect  knowledge  of  all  things,  both  in  heaven 
and  upon  the  earth ;  this  is  his  right.  And  all  the  wisdom  of  the 
world  shall  be  tried  by  him,  and  come  to  his  standard,  for  it  is 
correct ;  and  I  will  lead  him. 

20.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  that  to  every  earth 
which  is  travelling  up  to  perfection  there  is  a  sun,  moon  and  stars, 
to  give  light  thereto.  Therefore,  the  earths  are  independent  of 
each  other,  each  earth  having  a  sun,  moon  and  stars,  to  rule  the 


THE  ANGELS  IN  HEAVEN.  171 

seasons,  and  to  light  them  up ;  and  when  the  earths  to  which  they 
belong   move,   they   move  with   them,   to   give  them  light,  and  to 
regulate  their  seasons   until  those  earths  become  celestial,  and  then 
they  are  swallowed  up  in  a  celestial  light,  and  move  in  one  eternal 
day. 

21.  The  last  celestial  earth  is  near  the  eartfi  upon  which  you 
dwell.     It  is  clear,  like  unto  a  sea  of  glass ;  level,  like  unto  a  plain ; 
and  most   beautiful  to  look   upon.     And  upon  it  there  are  many 
temples  where  the  authorities  in  heaven  meet  to  worship.     There 
is,  also,  a  capital  city  in  heaven,  where  I  and  my  Father,  in  con- 
nection with  a  number  of  others,  dwell.     And  in  that  city  we  have 
a   temple,    where    I    and   my   Father,  and  other  chief  authorities, 
meet.     And,  in  due  time,  I  will  give  unto  you  the  plan  upon  which 
that  temple  is  built,   and   you  shall  build  one  like  unto  it.     And 
this    temple,    which  you    shall    build,  shall    be  built    in    Jackson 
County,  after  the  pattern  which  I  shall  show  unto  you.     And  I  will 
meet  with  you  in  that  temple,  as  one  man  meets  with  another,  and 
converse  with  you  whenever  you  wish  me  to  do  so. 

22.  I  know  what  you  want,  and  I  will  grant  it  unto  you.     Let 
your  heart  be  comforted,  and  know  that  I  am  always  with  you  by 
my  holy  angels.     You  trouble  because  I  have  withheld  from  you 
the  rod.     You  think  that  you  ought  to  have  it.    You  consider  that 
if  you  had   it,   your  mind  would   be   at  rest.     You  need  not  to 
trouble  about  that ;    for  I  will  give   it  unto  you  as   soon  as  you 
need  it. 

23.  I  have  taken  the  responsibility  of  all  things  upon  myself, 
and  I  will  make  things  work  aright.     I  shall  now  begin  to  reveal 
myself  unto  you  in  a  more  satifactory  and  powerful  manner  than  I 
have  hitherto   done.     You  will   now  need  to  hear  from  me  often. 
You  will   soon  have  difficulties  to  contend  with ;  but  when  trouble 
is  near,  you  shall  always  find  me  by  your  side.     I  will  soon  bring 
mine  enemies  up  to  a  head — to  that  point  to  which   I   want  them 
to  come  before   I   destroy  them ;  but,  until  that  time  comes,  they 
shall  not  have  the  power  to  hurt  one   of  those   who  trust   in   me. 
My  people  must  leave  mine  enemies  in  my  hands ;  they  can  do 
nothing  with  them.     And  they  shall   not   do   anything,  save  that 
which  I  permit  them  to  do.     Let   my   people  place  their  full  con- 
fidence in  me,  as  I  have  often  told  them  before.     They  know  that 


172  APPROACH    OF    THE    TEST. 

I  am  with  them,  overruling  everything  for  their  good ;  therefore, 
let  them  leave  everything  in  my  hands,  and  I  will  not  betray  their 
confidence. 

I   am  the  Stone  and   Shepherd  of  Israel,  and  the-  Bright  and 
Morning  Star;  even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen   and  Amen. 


THE   IMMUTABILITY   OF   THE    PURPOSES   OF    GOD. 
THE  NEAR  APPROACH  OF  THE  GREAT  TEST. 


No.  in.  WEBER,  UTAH,  October  22nd,  1861. 

i.  HEARKEN  unto  my  words,  which  I  am  about  to  speak  unto 
you.  Why  are  you  so  low  spirited  ?  Why  do  you  feel  so  bitter 
against  me,  as  though  I  had  broken  the  promises  which  I  have 
made  unto  you?  You  fear  that  I  shall  give  unto  your  enemies  the 
power  over  you,  and  let  all  my  words  fall  to  the  ground  unfulfilled. 
You  feel  that  I  have  already,  in  this  case,  betrayed  your  confi- 
dence. You  feel,  also,  a  backwardness  in  trusting  in  me  for  the 
future.  You  say  that  you  cannot  understand  my  way  of  working ; 
and  that,  on  this  account,  you  cannot  place  your  confidence  in 
me.  In  consequence  of  this,  you  are  oppressed  until  your  life  is 
a  burden  to  you.  What  can  I  do  with  you  ?  You  burden  both 
me  and  yourself  without  a  cause.  You  fear  that  I  shall  neglect 
you.  Do  you  not  think  that  I  know  all  about  your  situation?  I 
know  all  about  it.  You  think  that  I  keep  myself  too  much  at  a 
distance  from  you.  It  seems  that  you  cannot  trust  me  in  the 
smallest  thing  which  you  cannot  see  through.  Should  I  give  unto 
you  the  power  to  see  through  all  things  which  you  have  to  meet 
with,  you  would  not  need  to  exercise  any  faith  in  my  promises ; 
therefore,  you  would  not,  in  any  degree,  live  by  faith.  But  you 
must  live  by  faith, — this  at  present  you  are  compelled  to  do.  Ac- 
cording to  the  law,  I  have  to  work  with  you  gradually.  I  cannot 
reveal  unto  you  all  things  at  once.  And  while  I  am  revealing 
unto  you  one  .thing  after  another,  you  must  exercise  faith  in  me, 
and  you  must  continue  to  do  so  until  I  shall  have  revealed  all 
things  unto  you  ;  and  then  your  faith  will  be  swallowed  in  knowl- 
edge,— then  you  will  walk  by  sight,  and  not  by  faith. 


APPROACH    OF    THE    TEST.  173 

2.  You  think  that  I  do  not  deal  fairly  with  you  because  I   do 
not  give  unto  you  the  rod.     You  consider  that  I   do  not   deal  as 
fairly  with  you  as  I  did  with  my  servant  Moses.     You  think  that 
I  gave  unto  him  the  rod  before  he  was  called  to  use  it  to  encour- 
age him,  and  that  I  ought  to  do  the  same  to  you.     But,  behold, 
I  say  unto  you  that  I  did  not  give  the  rod  unto  him  until  he  was 
called  to  use  it.     The  Bible  does  not  give  a  full  history  of  the  call- 
ing of  my  servant  Moses.     As  I   said   unto  you  before,  so   I   say 
unto  you  again, — I  was  several  years   in  raising  him  up  before  I 
gave  unto  him  the  rod.     I  have  dealt  as  fairly  with  you  as   I  did 
with  him.     I  first  gave  unto  him  the  full  keys  of  knowledge,  and 
afterwards  I  gave  unto  him  the  power ;    and  I  am  doing  the  same 
unto  you  now.     Why,  then,  cannot  you  be  satisfied  ? 

3.  You  say  that,  as  yet,  I  have  not  manifested  the  least  degree 
of  power  that  you   could  perceive.     I  cannot   do   so   until  I  am 
placed  in  a  position  for  it.     And  I  have  never  yet  been  placed  in 
a  position  where  a  manifestation  of  power  was   necessary ;   until 
then,  I  cannot  come  out  in  power;  this  you  should  know.    But  the 
trouble  with  you  is  this :    You  are  afraid  that  I  shall  not  come  out 
in  judgment  upon  mine  enemies  when  it  shall  become  necessary 
for  me  to  do  so.     If  I   do  not,  then  you   may  justly   call  me  a 
traitor.     But  you  know  that,  if  I  do  not   come  out   and   manifest 
my  power  at  that  time,  all   will   be  over  with  you  and  these  my 
people.     You  need  not  to  fear ;   for  I  shall  not  leave  you  alone  to 
be  conquered  by  your  enemies.     I  am  astonished  at  you !     Why 
do  you  suffer  your  spirit  to  droop?     Why  do  you  not  rise  up  and 
set  yourself  against  your  enemies  ?     You  know  the  obligation  that 
I  am  under  to  the  posterity  of  Adam ;  and  you  know  that,  accord- 
ing to  the  law,  I  cannot  fail  to  do  my  duty, — still  you  are  afraid 
of  me.     You  know  that  my  duty  both  to  you  and  to  this  people  is 
to  protect  you  and  them ;  and  yet  you  are  afraid  that  I  shall  falter, 
and    suffer    mine    enemies    to    overcome   you,    and    destroy    my 
work !     O,  why  are  you  so  fearful  ? 

4.  You  are  astonished   at  me  because  I  have  suffered  mine 
enemies  to  come  up  to  this  place  and  take  away  my  people's 
property.     I  will  explain  this  matter  to  you.     You  know  that   I 
have  told  you  before  that  I  intend  to  deliver  all  the  property  that 
now  belongs  to  mine  enemies  into  the  hands  of  my  faithful  people. 


174  APPROACH    OF    THE    TEST. 

And  you  know  that  I  am  governed  by  a  law  of  justice.  I  cannot 
deviate  from  it.  If  mine  enemies  had  never  taken  away  the 
property  of  my  people  as  spoils,  I  could  not,  according  to  the  law, 
take  away  theirs.  But  if  they  take  away  the  property  of  my  people 
contrary  to  the  law,  and  without  their  consent,  then  I  can  take 
away  theirs  also,  and  be  justified  by  the  law  in  doing  so.  When 
they  have  the  disposition  to  unlawfully  take  the  property  of  my 
people,  and  take  it  without  the  owner's  consent,  though  they  do 
not  take  to  the  value  of  fifty  dollars,  they  break  the  law,  and  it  is 
accounted  unto  them  as  though  they  took  all  that  my  people  pos- 
sessed, which  they  would  do  ( for  they  have  the  will )  if  I  should 
permit  them.  Therefore,  if  they  do  not  do  so,  it  will  be  because 
they  cannot ;  and  no  thanks  will  be  due  to  them.  I  shall  suffer 
them  to  go  as  far  as  I  -want  them  to  go,  and  then  I  shall  stop  them 
in  their  course.  I  want  them  to  go  so  far  that  I  can  destroy  them 
and  take  all  their  property  as  spoils,  and  give  it  unto  my  people 
according  to  law.  My  people  shall  not  be  impoverished  much  by 
them,  however;  for  I  will  not  suffer  them  to  take  a  great  deal 
more  of  my  people's  property. 

5.  And  again,  if  mine  enemies  were  not  to  come   up  against 
my  people  to  destroy  them,  I  could  not,  according  to  the  law  by 
which  I  am  governed,    destroy  mine  enemies.     I   always   defend 
the    truth,    and    act  according    to    law.       Therefore,    when    mine 
enemies  come  up  against  my  people  with  a  determination  to  shed 
their  blood,  I  will  lay  them  low. 

6.  But,  behold,  I   say  unto  you,  my   servant  Joseph  that,  it  is 
you  that  mine  enemies  wish  to  slay.    They  think  that,  if  they  could 
destroy  you  and  a  few  others  of  my  people,  they  could  then   do 
whatever  they  might   be   disposed  to   do   with  the   rest.     If  they 
could  accomplish  your  destruction,  they   would  make  the  rest   of 
my  people  their  slaves.     And  I  say  unto  you,  my  servant   Joseph, 
that    they    will   strive  to  entrap  you;    but   I  will   burst   up  their 
schemes,    and   break    up  their  snares,   and  destroy  them.      You 
wish  to  know  when  I  intend  to  come  out  in  judgment  upon  your 
enemies.     As  I   have   said  unto  you  before,  so  I  say  unto   you 
again,  your   enemies    will  set  a  trap  to  ensnare  you.     They  will 
come  up  to  you,  and  strive  to  lay  hold  of  you ;  and  when  they  do 
this,  you  may  know  that  the  day  of  my  power  has   come.     They 


APPROACH    OF    THE    TEST.  175 

will  then  make  their  last  struggle.  At  that  time,  I  will  lay  mine 
enemies  low  by  thousands.  The  last  attempt  that  they  will  ever 
make  in  this  world,  they  will  then* make;  and  it  will  be  to  lay 
hold  of  you.  But  I  will  hold  them  from  you  until  I  am  ready  for 
them  in  every  respect. 

7.  My  people  are  unprepared  for  a  manifestation  of  my  power. 
The  minds  of  many  of  them  are  like  the  fool's  eye, — upon  every- 
thing except  that  which  they  ought  to  be   upon.     My  people  act 
vainly.     They  pay  but  little  attention  to  the  course  which  they  pur- 
sue.    But  they  will  either  have  to  lay  things  to  heart,  or  they  will 
suffer  great  loss. 

8.  I  am  about  to  place  a  test  before  them  that  will  prove  what 
they  are.     They  will  then  either  stand  for  me,  or  fall  with  mine 
enemies.      When   mine  enemies   come   up  to  arrest   my   servant 
Joseph,  he  shall  gather  all   my   people  together,   and  they  shall 
stand  before  mine  enemies  and  choose  then  what  side  they  will 
take ;  and  if  they  go  over  to  the  enemies'  side,  I  will  destroy  them 
in  one  minute.     I  will  save  the  lives  of  none  but  those  who  stand 
firmly  by  my  servant  Joseph ;   for  those  who  uphold  him,  uphold 
me.     I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts. 

9.  My  people  must  show  a  willingness  to  uphold  my  servant 
with  all  their  power,  and   it   shall   be  accounted  unto  them  for 
righteousness.-     That   minute  when  my   servant  Joseph  and  my 
people  stand  before  mine  enemies,  I   will  come  as   a  whirlwind, 
and  the  earth  will  shake  as  by  an  earthquake,  and  many  will  fall 
upon  the    ground  as  dead.      Therefore,   let  my    people    prepare 
themselves  for  that  day,  and  put  away  their  follies,  for  it  is  right 
upon  their  heels  ;   they  have  no  time  to  spare. 

10.  And,  again,  it  is  wisdom  in  me  that  my  people  should  not 
travel  among  their  enemies  as  much  as   they  have  hitherto  done. 
Let  them  stay  at  their  own  homes  as  much  as  possible, — they  have 
no  cause  to  do  otherwise.     Mine  angels  have  hitherto  protected 
them.     But  if  they  do  not  hearken  to  my  advice  in  this  thing,  I 
will  not  protect  them  any  more. 

11.  And  it  would  be  well  for  those  who  have  yielded  obedi- 
ence to  the  fulness  of  my  gospel,  and  who  are  now  absent  from 
this  place,  to  gather  up  here  as  soon  as  they  can,  that  it  may  be 
well  with  them ;   for  if  those  who  have  the  means   do  not  gather 


176  BRIGHAM    YOUNG. 

up  here,  I  will  not  preserve  their  lives.     They  know  their  duty ; 
therefore,  let  them  perform  it. 

12.  And  let  those,  my  servants,  who  are  engaged  in  writing 
the  revelations  which  I  have  given,  use  all  diligence  to  prepare 
them  for  printing.  They  have  no  time  to  spare,  for  I  shall  speedily 
burst  things  up.  And  let  all  my  people  be  diligent  in  their  duties, 
and  I  will  be  with  them  unto  the  end.  I  am  the  Son  of  the 
Eternal  Father ;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    SHOWING    THE    WICKED     CONDUCT 
OF   BRIGHAM   YOUNG. 


No.  112.  WEBER,  UTAH,  October  23rd,  1861. 

1.  HEARKEN  unto  my  words,  O  ye  my  people,  for  I  am  about 
to  speak  unto  you  concerning  your  enemies. 

2.  Prepare  yourselves  for  a  sudden  change,   for  your  enemies 
are  now  on  your  track,  and  they  will  never  stay  their  course  while 
I  permit  them  to  live.     They  are  determined  to  drive  things  ahead; 
and    it  would   be  well   for  my  people  if  they    would    be    more 
diligent. 

3.  The  man   who  now  stands   at  the  head  of  the  old  Church 
has  given  mine  enemies  his  consent  lor  them  to  waste  my  people 
away.     They  have  now  a  free  course  to  work  in.     It  would   be 
well  for  my  people  to  open  their  eyes  and  look  around  them ;  for 
trouble  will  come  upon  them  as  a  thunderbolt,  and  they  will  then 
have  no  time  to   prepare  themselves. .    I  have  told  my  people  in 
time;   therefore,  let  them   now    prepare    themselves.     That  man 
whom  I  called,  and  placed  over  my  Church  for  a  season,  is  blood- 
thirsty.    He  thirsts  for  your  blood,  and  for  the  blood  of   my  ser- 
vants who  are  one  with  you.     He  grinds  his  teeth  in  anger.     He 
says  that  he  will  not  suffer  his  great  name  to  be  profaned.     He 
sits  in  my  servant  Joseph's  seat,  and  thinks  that  he  has  all  power, 
and  that  there  is  'no  power  in  heaven  nor  on  the  earth  that  can 
move  him  out  of  that  seat;   but,  when  I  am  ready,   I   will   remove 
him  in  one  minute.     I    will  show  him  whether  he  has  any  power, 
or  not.     Of  all  men  that  ever  lived  upon  this  earth,  and  held  a 


BRIGHAM    YOUNG.  177 

( 

part  of  the  holy  priesthood,  and  afterwards  fell,  none  other  has 
ever  insulted  me  has  he  has  done.  He  has  committed  all  manner 
of  sin  and  blasphemy.  He  has  striven  to  destroy  the  principle  of 
righteousness,  and  laid  it  all  to  my  charge.  He  has  made  the  peo- 
ple believe  that  he  was  my  servant,  and  that  I  have  upheld  him  in- 
all  his  abominations.  And  thus  he  has  turned  my  people  to 
infidelity,  and  caused  them  to  doubt  the  existence  of  a  just  God. 
In  this  way  he  has  blasphemed  against  me ;  yet  he  thinks  that  he 
is  my  servant,  and  that  I  sustain  him  ;  and  in  this  way  he  justifies 
all  his  abominations.  He  knows  nothing  either  about  me,  or 
about  just  and  righteous  principles.  He  thinks  that  he  is  the  god 
of  this  world,  and  that  nobody  has  a  right  to  question  anything  that 
he  does.  He  thinks  also  that  if  I,  the  Lord,  or  any  other  authority 
upon  the  earth,  dare  to  call  in  question  anything  that  he  does,  he 
will  fight  us  at  once.  He  thinks  that  he  is  the  god  of  all;  that 
what  he  says  is  right ;  and  that  all  other  gods  must  come  to  his 
standard,  and  regulate  their  acts  by  it.  And  thus  he  has  made  use 
of  my  name  to  gain  such  an  unrighteous  influence  over  the  minds 
of  my  people, — professing  to  be  my  servant,  and  acting  as  my 
lord.  He  conducts  himself  as  though  he  were  the  authority 
under  which  I  must  act,  and,  according  to  which,  I  must  even 
square  my  law;  and  that,  if  I  will  not  do  so,  he  will  fight  me. 
He  must  be  the  standard  to  regulate  all  gods  by !  O  the  blind- 
ness and  wickedness  of  that  man !  He  surpasses  in  wickedness 
all  that  have  ever  lived  before  him,  or  that  will  ever  live  after  him. 
4.  And  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  that  your  enemies  have  laid  a 
trap  for  you.  You  know  that  they  have  fined  you,  and  that  you 
have  not  paid  the  fine;  and  should  your  fine  not  be  paid,  they 
will  strive  to  lay  hold  of  you  to  take  you  away,  and  this  would 
bring  the  test  before  the  time ;  for  I  am  not,  as  yet,  quite  ready  to 
cut  them  all  off.  It  would,  therefore,  be  well  for  my  people  to 
pay  your  fine,  and  in  this  manner  to  break  their  hold  of  you,  for  I 
have  not  yet  worked  them  up  sufficiently.  Therefore,  let  my  peo- 
ple loose  your  hands,  and,  if  they  will  do  this,  I  will  make  all 
things  work  aright.  If  they  will  do  their  part,  and  work  with  me$ 
I  will  justify  them.  Mine  enemies  want  to  lay  hold  of  my  servant 
Joseph  now;  but  I  am  not  yet  ready.  They  think  that,  if  they 
can  take  him,  they  will  have  conquered,  and  that  they  can  then 


178  BRIGHAM    YOUNG. 

destroy  my  work.  They  do  not  care  so*  much  about  the  property 
of  my  people ;  that  is  not  the  object  which  they  are  after.  But 
they  are  obliged  to  work  in  a  certain  way.  They  cannot  attain 
the  object  which  they  desire  all  at  once.  They  are  compelled  to 
work  gradually.  I  know  all  their  plans,  and  I  will  reveal  them 
unto  you.  I  wish  to  draw  them  on  yet  a  little  farther ;  but  I  shall 
soon  be  ready  for  them,  and  then  I  will  bring  them  up  to  the 
slaughter,  and  deal  unto  them  as  they  have  desired  to  deal  unto 
my  people. 

5.  I  anf  waiting,  also,  of  my  people;  they  are  not  ready.     But, 
whether  they  are  ready  or  not,  the  test  will  shortly  have  to  come. 
I  shall  not  hold  it  off  much  longer.     I  have  told  them,  time  after 
time,  to   prepare  themselves ;  but   they  do  not  lay  these  things  to 
heart  as  they  ought  to   do.     They  are  too  vain  and  lightminded. 
They  think  that  they  are  ready  for  a  manifestation  of  my  power, 
and  I  cannot  convince  them  to  the   contrary ;  but  they  will   soon 
be  tried  as  to  whether  they  are  ready  or  not. 

6.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  I  will   now  give  unto 
you  a  knowledge  of  the  plans  of   mine  enemies  beforehand,  and 
also  a  knowledge  of  mine  own  intentions  with  respect  to  them — 
even  how  I  intend  to  act  with  them  in  all  their  movements.     From 
this  time  forth,  you  shall  see  your  way  clearly  ;  therefore,  go  about 
your  work  fearlessly,  and  trust  in  me.     And  when  the  test  has 
come,  and  my  people  are  gathered  together,  they  shall  show  them- 
selves ready  to  defend  you,   if  necessary.     And  when   I  see  their 
willingness  to   uphold  you,  I   will,   as  I  have  promised,  come  to 
their  deliverance ;  but  I  wish  first  to  try  them.     I  will  shortly  give 
unto  you  more,  and  I  will  make  known  unto  my  people  their  duty 
from  time  to  time. 

I  am  the  Bright  and  Morning  Star,   even  Jesus  Christ.     Even 
so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


THE    GREAT    TEST.  179 

SOME    CIRCUMSTANCES     FORETOLD     THAT     WILL 

TRANSPIRE    IN    CONNECTION    WITH    THE 

GREAT   TEST. 


No.  113.  WEBER,  UTAH,  October  24th,  1861. 

1.  HEARKEN  unto  my  words,  my  son,  for  I  am  about  to  speak 
unto  you  for  your  comfort  and  satisfaction* 

2.  You  know  that  I  have  spoken  unto  you   before  concerning 
your  enemies.     I  have  told  you  what  the  plan  is  which  they  have 
laid  to  arrest  you.     I  have  also  called  upon  my  people  to  loose 
your  hands,  by  paying  your  fine.     But  suppose  that  mine  enemies 
should  refuse  to  accept  the  pay  which  you  shall  offer  unto  them, 
and  strive  to  obtain  possession  of  your  person,  what  shall  be  done 
then  ?     You  know  that  I  have  told  you  before  that  I  wish  to  draw 
them  on  a  little  farther  and  work  them  up  to  a  head.     I   am  now 

'  speaking  unto  you  to  satisfy  your  feelings.  I  know  your  mind. 
You  want  something  to  depend  upon.  You  want  to  feel  secure. 
You  wish  to  know  what  I  shall  do  with  your  enemies,  if,  when  you 
offer  to  pay  your  fine,  they  will  not  accept  of  it,  but,  instead  there- 
of, strive  to  take  you.  You  need  not  to  trouble  yourself  about 
that.  I  will  manage  that  affair  myself.  Rather  than  your  enemies 
shall  arrest  and  take  you  away,  I  would  cut  off  from  the  earth  two- 
thirds  of  the  inhabitants  of  this  Territory. 

3.  If  I  should  permit  your  enemies  to  destroy  you,   my  work 
would   be  destroyed;  for   I   could   not,   according  to  the  law  of 
heaven,   appoint  another  man  in   your   place.     There   is  but  one 
man  upon  an  earth  that  can  hold  the  full   keys    of  the  holy  priest- 
hood, and  if  he  was  destroyed,  the  full  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood 
would  be  taken  from  the  earth  with  him — another  man  could  not 
take  his  place.     Therefore,  it  would  be  better  that  I  should  cut  off 
the  earth  everything  that  opposes  him,  than  to  let  him  be  destroyed 
by  mine   enemies.     If  I  suffered  him  to  be  destroyed,  all  would  be 
over,  the  devil  would   have  conquered,    the  world  would  be  des- 
troyed,   and  all  the  children  of  Adam  would  return  to  their  native 
element,  and  be  no  more.     Then  how  can  I  neglect   you?     I  am 
compelled  to  take   care   of  you ;  and  in  my  hands  you  are  safe. 
Therefore,  I  say  unto  you  again  for  your  satisfaction,   rather  than 


l8o  THE    GREAT    TEST. 

suffer  your  enemies  to  take  you,  I  will  cut  off'  two-thirds  of  the  in- 
habitants of  this  Territory  in  one  minute.  I  am  on  the  track  of 
your  enemies ;  therefore,  fear  not.  I  have,  from  time  to  time,  as 
you  have  moved  along,  given  unto  you  all  the  encouragement  that 
I  possibly  could. 

4.  And    now  behold,   I  give  unto  you   a  sign.     When   your 
enemies  crowd  upon  you  to  take  you,  then  know  that  the  day  of 
my  power  has  come.     'Whenever  you  see  this,  you  may  know  that 
the  great  day  has  arrived.     Therefore,  leave  your  enemies  in  my 
hands,  and  I  will  bring  them  to  the  right  point.     When  difficulties 
are  near,  I  will  always  acquaint  you  therewith. 

5.  And  behold,  I  speak  unto  you  concerning  those  chief  act- 
ing officers   who   stand   by   and  uphold  you.     Mine  enemies  are 
opposed  to  them,  even  as  they  are  opposed  to  you ;  and  they  seek 
to  entrap  them,  even  as  they  seek  to  entrap   you.     Therefore,   let 
those,  my  servants,  pay  their  just  debts  (if  they  owe  any),  that  mine 
enemies  may  have  no  just  claim  on  them.     And  if  mine   enemies 
deal  with  my  servants  unjustly,  and  sue  them,  they  shall  not  go  to 
law  with  them,  but,  in  that  respect,   they  shall  defy  them.     Mine 
enemies  wish  to  lay  hold  of  them  to  destroy  them.     Therefore,  I 
require  that  my  people  shall  stand  by  those  men  who  are  one  with 
you,  even  as  they  stand  by  you.     And  if  my  servants  will  do  as  I 
have  commanded  them,  I  will  uphold  them  to  their  satisfaction. 
I  will  take  the  responsibility  upon  myself. 

6.  And  behold,   I   speak  unto  you   concerning   my  people  at 
large.     Let  them  conduct  themselves,   both   at  home  and  abroad, 
in  such  a  manner  that  their  enemies  cannot   lawfully  lay  hold  of 
them ;    and,  if  they  will  do  this,  I  will  uphold  them.     I  can   law- 
fully uphold  my  people  if  they  will  do  as  I   command  them.     I 
am  bound  to  take  a  lawful  course  in  all  that  I  do.     Let  my  people 
obey  my  words,  for  I  counsel  them  aright. 

I  am  the  Stone  and  Shepherd  of  Israel,  the   Bright  and   Morn- 
ing Star ;   even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


DESTRUCTION    OF    THE    REBELLIOUS.  l8l 

REVELATION     CONCERNING     THE      DESTRUCTION 
OF  NEARLY  TWO-THIRDS  OF  THE  INHABIT- 
ANTS OF  UTAH  TERRITORY, 


No.  114.  WEBER,  UTAH,  October  25th,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,   I  am  come  to  speak  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph, 
concerning  the  inhabitants  of  Utah  Territory. 

2.  I    have   made   up  my   accounts   with  them.     I  have  been 
working  with   them   ever  since   I   first  called  you,  and  there  are 
many  of  them  who  are  heirs  of  salvation,  whom  I  cannot  turn  from 
their  wicked  course.     They  have  gone  too  far  ever  to  retrace  their 
steps  in  mortality.     I  shall,  therefore,  have  to  destroy  them  in  the 
flesh ;  but  they  shall  come  forth  in  the  resurrection.     Their  des- 
truction in  the  flesh  will  cancel  all  the  sins  which  they  have  com- 
mitted throughout  their  life  times.     If  I  could  have  turned  them 
from  their  sins,  I  should  not  now  have  to  destroy  them ;    but  I  am 
compelled  by  the  law  either  to  turn  them  from  their  sins  or  to  slay 
them.     They  cannot  roam  at  large  regardless  of  my  law  any  longer; 
for  they  are  my  covenant  people,  and   I  have  a  claim  upon  them. 
The  day  of   my  power  has  now  come.     The  time  for  me  to  settle 
accounts  with  them,  and  to  make  known  unto  them  the  covenants 
which  bind  them  to  me,  has  now  arrived.     For,  according  to  the 
covenant  which  they  made  with  their  father,  Adam,  they  are  com- 
pelled  by  the  law  of  heaven  to  sustain  the  principle  of  righteous- 
ness ;   and  should  they  fail  to  do  this,  they  forfeit  their  existence 
in  the  flesh ;   therefore,  I  have  a  claim  upon  them. 

3.  And,   behold,  I  say   unto  you,  my  son,  that  I  shall  destroy 
nearly  two-thirds  of  the  inhabitants  of  this  Territory.     The  sentence 
has  been  passed  upon  them.     I  have  all  their  names  recorded  for 
destruction,  and  I  am  prepared  for  the  work.     And  behold,    I  say 
unto  you  that  of  that  number  on  whom   I   have  passed  the  sen- 
tence of  death,  there  is  more  than  one-half  who  are  fallen  spirits — 
whose  names  are  not  recorded  in  the  Lamb's  Book  of  Life.     And 
inasmuch   as   I  shall  be  compelled  to  destroy  all  whose  names  are 
recorded    for   destruction,    I    shall   destroy,   among  that  number, 
many  thousands  who  are  heirs  to  the  resurrection. 

4.  And  now,   behold,    I  speak  unto  you  concerning  the  other 


1 82  DESTRUCTION    OF    THE    REBELLIOUS. 

one-third  who  shall  be  left.  I  shall  be  able  to  turn  them  from  the 
error  of  their  ways.  I  have  now,  to  a  certain  extent,  broken  them 
loose  from  the  influence  of  the  devil,  so  much  so,  that,  when  I 
come  out  in  power  to  their  deliverance,  I  shall  be  able  to  turn 
their  hearts  entirely  unto  me.  They  are  in  pain,  and  they  are 
wishing  that  I  would  deliver  them,  and  set  them  free.  They  long 
for  something  to  liberate  them,  and  they  are  the  poorest  of  my 
people.  I  have  their  names  recorded  for  salvation,  even  as  I  have 
the  names  of  the  other  two-thirds  recorded  for  destruction.  The 
destinies  of  both  parties  are  fixed.  I  am  settling  my  affairs  as  fast 
as  possible.  Let  all  prepare  for  the  great  day  which  is  at  hand ; 
for  it  will  come  as  a  whirlwind,  and  but  few  will  stand. 

5.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  rny  son,  there  are  some  among 
my  people  who  cannot  fully  understand  the  reason  that  I  called 
upon  my  people  to  pay  your  fine.  It  was  necessary  that  I  should 
bring  mine  enemies  into  a  certain  position,  and  to  a  certain  point, 
before  I  should  be  permitted,  according  to  the  law,  to  destroy 
them.  Mine  enemies  are  too  fast ;  they  are  desirous  of  bringing 
things  to  a  head  at  the  wrong  point,,  and  I  have  to  bring  them  to 
my  terms.  And,  in  order  to  do  this,  I  have  to  use  means  to  break 
their  hold  until  I  have  brought  them  up  to  that  point  to  which  I 
wish  to  bring  them.  They  claim  the  right  to  act  in  their  own 
sphere  independently ;  hence,  I  have  to  outwit  them  by  turning 
their  plans  around.  In  this  manner,  I  overrule  their  plans  for  the 
benefit  of  my  people,  make  their  evil  purposes  work  to  a  good 
end,  and  thereby,  make  man  to  serve  me,  and  the  wrath  of  man 
to  praise  me.  Mine  enemies  claim  the  right  of  freedom  in  action, 
as  well  as  either  I  or  my  people  do.  Therefore,  let  my  people 
understand  that  mine  enemies  have  rights  as  well  as  they  have, 
and  that  those  rights  cannot  lawfully  be  infringed  upon. 

I  now  add  no  more.  I  am  the  Son  of  the  Eternal  Father, 
even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


THE    ROD. APPROACH    OF 'THE    TEST.  183 

REVELATION    CONCERNING    THE    ROD,    AND    THE 
NEAR    APPROACH    OF   THE    GREAT    TEST.  • 


No.    115.  WEBER,  UTAH,  October  25th,   1861. 

1.  LISTEN  to  the  words  of  the  Lord  your  God,  which  are  quick  ' 
and  powerful,  sharper  than  a  two-edged  sword,  and  prepare  your- 
self for  trouble,  for  you  will  soon  meet  with  it. 

2.  As  I  have  said  unto  you  before,  so  I  say  unto  you  again, — 
make  yourself  ready  for  the  great  test,    for  it  is  right  upon  you. 
You  say  that  you  would  not  care  for  trouble  if  you   felt   fully   pre- 
pared for  it.     In  fact,  you  think  that  you  are  prepared  as   far  as 
you  are  concerned ;    but  that  I  am  not  at  my  post.     You  consider 
that,  through  my  neglect,  you  are  entirely  unprepared  for  the  work 
that  lies  before  you ;  and  you  are  angry  with  me  on  account  of  rhy 
backwardness.     You  consider  that  you  ought  to  have  had  the  rod 
of  power  in  your  hand  before  this  time;   and  that  I  ought  not  to 
have  deferred  giving  you  the  rod  until  the  last  extremity,  for  that 
by  so  doing,  your  feelings  are  continually  injured.     You  consider 
that  I  am   blamable  for  such  conduct.     Suppose  that  I  had  given 
unto  you  the  rod  a  few  months  ago,  what  would  it  have  profited 
you,  inasmuch  as  you  did  not  need  to  use  it?     You  would  have 
brought  both  trouble  upon  yourself  and  upon  my  people.     It  is  an 
emblem  of  power  too  sacred  to  be  trifled  with.     Every  time  that 
it  is  wielded  there  is  a  meaning  connected  therewith.     When  it  is 
waved  all  the  hosts  of  heaven  must  move  forth  to  battle.     They 
are  compelled  by  law  to  do  so.     Suppose  that  I  had  given  it  to 
you  a  few  months  ago,  even  as  you  thought  that  I  ought  to   have 
done,  and  that  you  had  taken  it  and  trifled  with   it;  you   would, 
by  so  doing,  have  given  unto  me  a  false  sign,  and   I  should  have 
been  compelled  to  go  out  to  battle ;   for  the  celestial  law,  which  I 
cannot  break,  would  bind  me  to  do  so.     What  would  have   been 
the  result  of  such   an  act  ?     It   would  have  disarranged  all  my 
work,  and  thrown  all  heaven  out  of  order.     But  I  know  my    duty 
better  than  to  give  unto  you  the  rod  before  the  time  when   you 
will  be  called  upon  to  use  it  shall  have  arrived.     I  will  give  it  unto 
you  then,  as  I  have  before  promised  you — I  know  your  pride, — you 
want  to  handle  it.     You  do  not  care  so  much  about  the  result  of 


184  THE  ROD.— APPROACH  OF  THE  TEST. 

a  sign  as  I  do.  Although  I  know  that  you  do  not  wish  to  break 
the  law,  yet  if  you  were  to  have  the  rod  in  your  possession  before 
you  really  needed  it,  you  might  in  an  unguarded  moment  give  a 
false  sign.  And  as  I  feel  in  duty  bound  to  prevent  the  occurence 
of  such  an  event,  you  must  not  consider  that  I  have  imposed 
upon  your  rights  by  withholding  it  from  you.  I  have  done  so  for 
a  wise  purpose  in  myself.  When  I  give  it  unto  you,  I  will  also 
give  you  to  understand  all  that  is  necessary  for  you  to  know  about 
the  use  of  it.  You  shall  never  give  me  a  sign  by  it  only  when  I 
command  you  to  do  so ;  and  when  I  command  you  to  give  me  the 
sign  to  go  to  war,  I  will  do  so  according  to  the  law.  And  if  we 
work  together  in  this  manner,  all  things  will  work  well  between  us. 

3.  You  may  wish  to  know  what  the  rod  is  like.     You  will  soon 
see  it  for  yourself,   and    hold  it   in  your  hand.     Yea,  I  am  just 
about  to  give  it  unto  you.     I  am  near  unto  you,  and  I  will  give  it 
unto  you  suddenly.     Prepare  yourself  to  receive  it.     I  have  shown 
it  unto  a  person  in  this  camp.     He  can  give  you  a  true  discription 
of  it.     I  showed  it  unto  him  that  you  might  hear  of  it,  and  know 
that  it  is  near  unto  you. 

4.  You  feel  as  though  your  heart  would  be  pained   if  you  saw 
your  enemies  coming  upon  you  before  I  had  prepared  you  to  meet 
them.     But  you  need  not  to  fear  about  that,  for  you  shall  see  me 
a  short  time  before  they  come  upon  you,  and  I  will  fully  prepare 
you  to   meet  them ;  you   shall  not  lack  for  anything  at  that  time. 
You  need  not  expect  them  before  you  have   seen   me;  for   I  shall 
ride  up  to  you,  and  that  too,  in  a  moment,  suddenly.     You  know 
my  way  of  moving,  that  it  is  quick.     I  can  ride  up  to  you  at   any 
time  when  I  wish  to  do  so,  for  I  am  around  you   continually.     I 
shall   not  have  far  to  come  when  you  wish  to  see  me.     You  say  in 
your  heart  to  me :     "  Do  but  as  you  have  said  that  you  would  do, 
and  then  I  shall  be  satisfied." 

5.  When  my  enemies  come  to  this  place  to  train,  let  my  peo- 
ple mind  their  own  business,  and  stay  at  their  own  homes,  unless 
my  servant  Joseph  shall  call  them  together.     Let  them   do  as  he 
shall  command  them,   and  I  will  justify  them,  and  uphold  them; 
otherwise,  they  will  see  affliction  and,  death.     I  will  control   mine 
enemies   in  that   affair.     Their  aim   is  to  lay  hold  of  my  servant 
Joseph ;  but  I  will  see  if  I  cannot  control  them.     I  will  hold  them 


THE  PROPHET  REPROVED.  185 

until  they  become  powerless.     I  can  manage  them  without  any 
difficulty. 

6.  And  as  I  have  before  commanded  you,  my  servant  Joseph, 
pay  your  fine  if  they  should  ask  for  it ;  and,  in  this  manner,  break 
their  hold  off  you  at  this  time.  I  will  take  them  irtD  mine  own 
hands  when  they  come,  and  I  will  make  everything  work  well  for 
the  benefit  of  my  people.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, 
that  I  will  move  upon  you  and  dictate  you  when  your  enemies 
are  around  you,  and  you  shall  have  but  little  difficulty  with  them ; 
therefore,  fear  not,  but  be  of  good  courage.  I,  even  the  Lord  of 
Hosts,  am  with  you.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


THE    PROPHET    REPROVED. 


No.  116.  WEBER,  UTAH,  October  26th,  1861. 

i.  WHEN  you  are  ready  to  deliver  my  people,  tell  me,  and  I 
will  send  mine  enemies  up  to  you.  But  you  are  not  ready  for  that 
work  now.  Your  heart  is  faint.  You  cannot  do  anything  as  you 
are  now.  You  feel  as  though  you  had  no  power  to  back  you  up. 
If  you  had  not,  you  could  not  act  much  worse  than  you  do.  Look 
about  you  and  see  whether  there  is  anything  about  you  to  be  afraid 
of.  You  need  not  to  fear ;  I  will  not  send  your  enemies  upon  you 
as  you  are  now.  I  know  that,  if  I  did,  I  could  do  nothing  with 
you.  You  know  how  you  ought  to  act.  You  know  what  is  re- 
quired at  your  hands.  You  need  not  to  be  afraid  of  shadows. 
Wait  until  you  see  something  to  be  afraid  of;  and  if  you  will  do 
this,  it  is  all  that  I  require  of  you.  If  you  will  do  this,  you  will 
never  fear  at  all ;  for  I  will  take  all  fear  away  from  you  at  that 
time  by  standing  by  your  side.  You  shall  see  that  you  have  the 
strongest  power  then.  At  that  time  you  will  be  like  unto  a  lion 
among  lambs.  Everything  will  give  way  before  you.  But  if  you 
see  the  least  trouble  brewing  now,  you  are  on  the  move ;  you  think 
that  it  is  coming,  and  you  are  unprepared  for  it ;  and  thus  it  breaks 
down  your  feelings.  O  let  me  advise  you  to  fear  nothing  until  you 
see  it.  You  might  think  that  I  have  no  power,  and  that  to  trust  to 
me  would*  only  be  like  trusting  to  a  broken  reed. 


1 86  TO    THE    PROPHET. 

2.  And  now,  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  prepare  yourself  to 
deliver  my  people,  and  tell  me  when  you  are  ready;  and  as  I  have 
said  unto  you  before,  so  I  say  unto  you  again,  I  will  send  mine 
enemies  upon  you  when  you  are  ready.  But  you  say  in  your  mind 
that  you  will  never  be  ready  until  I  have  appeared  unto  you,  and 
given  unto  you  the  necessary  preparations  for  the  work.  I  will  do 
this  for  you.  I  do  not  expect  that  you  will  be  ready  until  I  have 
done  this.  I  will  give  unto  you  timely  warning  when  your  enemies 
are  coming  up  against  you.  You  have  every  inducement  given 
unto  you  to  cheer  you  up.  You  have  no  cause  to  be  downcast. 
Then  cheer  up.  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts.  Even  so.  Amen  and 
Amen. 


TO    THE    PROPHET. 


No.  117.  WEBER,  UTAH,  October  26th,  1861. 

WHY  do  you  surmise  this,  that,  and  the  other?  Why  cannot 
you  depend  upon  what  I  have  told  you?  I  know  the  intentions 
of  your  enemies.  If  I  do  not  see  fit  to  turn  them  round  when 
they  come  up  to  this  place  to  lay  hold  of  you,  then  you  may  know 
that  the  time  has  arrived.  I  shall  either  turn  them  round  and 
break  their  hold  of  you,  or  else  I  shall  destroy  them.  I  shall 
either  do  one  or  the  other  of  these  things.  And  what  need  have 
you  to  trouble?  All  things  are  in  mine  hands.  It  matters  not 
which  way  I  turn  them  round  if  I  do  turn  them;  and  .if  I  should 
not  turn  them  round,  but  suffer  them  to  destroy  you,  who  will  have 
to  bear  the  blame  but  myself?  If  you  stand  to  your  post  all  will 
be  right  with  you.  We  must  all  bear  our  own  burdens ;  and  if 
either  of  us  neglect  our  duty,  we  must  bear  the  blame.  One  will 
not  be  blamed  for  the  neglect  of  another;  therefore,  remember 
that  I  am  by  your  si:de.  I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen 
and  Amen. 


THE    TWELVE    PRINCES    OF    ISRAEL.  187 

REVELATION    SHOWING    WHY    AARON     AND     THE 

TWELVE    PRINCES    OF  ISRAEL  HAD 

EACH  A  ROD  OF  POWER. 


No.    1 1 8.  WEBER,  UTAH,  October  29th,   1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  he  who  shuts,  and  no  one  opens;  and  who 
opens,  and  no  one  shuts;  even  Jesus  Christ.     And  I  am  come  to 
explain  this  matter  unto  you. 

2.  Behold,  I  say  unto  you,  that  my  Father  holds  a  sceptre  or 
rod  of  power,  and  when  I  am  compelled  by  law  to  go  to  war  with 
the  inhabitants  of  the  earth,  my  Father  honors  rne  with  that  rod, 
and  I  wield  it  in  his  name  and  according  to  his  command ;    and 
in  consequence,  all  the  heavenly  hosts  obey  me. 

3.  And  there   are  twelve  chief  generals   in  heaven,  who   are 
next  to  me  in  authority ;   and  they,  also,   have  a  rod  each,  and 
when  I  raise  my  Father's  rod,  they  all,  at  the  same  time,  raise  their 
rods,   and  give  their  command.     Those   chief  generals    are   my 
Father's  first  born  sons — those  who  are  next  to   me  by   birthright. 
They  are  subject  to  me,  and  all  the  rest  of  the  inhabitants   of  our 
earth  are  subject  to  them.     An$  thus  my  Father  has  a  rod  which 
I  use.     And  those  twelve  who  are  next  to  me  by  birthright  have 
each  a  rod,  also ;   and  when  these  rods  are  raised,  all  the  hosts  of 
heaven   go  to  war.     There  are,    also,   many   other  authorities  in 
heaven ;  but  they  do  not  have  rods.     Mine  angels  are  all  subject 
one  to  another — the  younger  are  all   subject  to  the   elder;  hence, 
they  all  act  in  their  places,  according  to  their  birthright.     There  is 
perfect  order  with  us,  for  we  have  a  perfect  organization.     We  all 
know  our  duties,  and  we  do  them, 

4.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,   my   son,   we  never  raise   our 
rods  only  according  to  the  law  of  heaven.     We  are  governed  by 
it  in  every  respect ;    therefore,  when  we  raise  our  rods  you   must 
raise  yours,  also.     I  will  tell  you  when  to  raise  your  rod,  and  when 
to  give  the  command.     I  shall  stand  by  your  side  when  you   do 
this,  and  we  shall  raise  our  rods  about  the  same  time.     I  will  give 
unto  you   a  perfect  knowledge   of  all  our  movements   with  our 
enemies. 

5.  You  may  ask :     If  there  are  twelve  chief  generals  in  heaven, 


1 88  THE    TWELVE    PRINCES    OF    ISRAEL. 

what  is  the  reason  that  they  were  not  shown  to  John  the  Revelator? 
He  saw  only  four.  I  showed  unto  him  the  first  four  of  the  twelve, 
and  that  was  sufficient  at  that  time.  There  are  many  things  which 
belong  to  the  fulness  of  the  holy  priesthood  which  I  did  not  show 
unto  my  servant  John.  It  was  not  necessary  for  me  to  reveal  all 
things  unto  him,  for  he  only  held  a  portion  of  the  keys  of  the  holy 
priesthood.  I  only  gave  unto  him  a  partial  figure  of  the  last  mis- 
sion of  the  angel  Gabriel  (the  seventh  angel  to  the  earth). 

6.  And  now,  behold,  I  speak  unto  you  concerning  the  twelve 
Princes  of  Israel.     They   are  the  twelve   sons  of  Adam,  next  to 
Aaron  by  birthright ;  and  they  stand,  in  connection  with  Aaron,  at 
the  head  of  all  Adam's  children  who  are  heirs  to  the  resurrection. 
The  rods  which  they  held  when  they  were  upon  the  earth,  in  the 
days  of  Moses,   were  emblems  of  power,  representing  the  twelve 
rods  which  are  used  by    the   twelve    chief  generals    in   heaven. 
And  the  rod  which  Aaron  used  was  a  representation  of  that  rod  in 
heaven    which   belongs  to  the  Eternal  Father,  and  which  is  now 
used  by  me. 

7.  The  full  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood  give  a  true  knowledge 
of  the  order  which  exists  in  heaven.     Under  them,  earthly  things 
will  pattern  after  heavenly  things.     Hence,   the  twelve  Princes  of 
Israel   on'  the   earth   represent,   in  every  respect,  the  twelve  chief 
generals    who   are  in  heaven.     And  when  this   earth  shall   have 
undergone    its    last    change,    and   become  celestial,  those   twelve 
princes   will  be  the  first  twelve  rulers   in  Adam's  world,  next  in 
authority  to  Aaron ;  and  Aaron  will  use  his  Father's   rod.     Thus, 
when  Adam  shall  have  become  an  Eternal  Father,  and  Aaron  a 
Jesus  Christ,  when  the  twelve  princes  of  Israel  shall  have  obtained 
their  resurrection,   and  this  earth   been   celestialized,   the  twelve 
princes  of  Israel  will  claim  the  ruling  power  over  this  world,   and 
will  again  have  twelve  rods,  which  will  be  given  to  them  by  their 
own  Father,  who  will  also  give  them  all  necessary  power,  and  they 
will  rule  his  kingdom.     All  the  rest   of  Adam's  children  will  be 
subject  to  them. 

8.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,   my   son,   prepare  yourself  to 
receive  your  rod,  and  to  use  it.     We  have  our  rods   with   us,   and 
we  are  ready  to  use  them  as  soon  as  it  shall  become  necessary  to 
do  so.     I  will  reveal  all  things  unto  you  concerning  the  use  of  your 


THE  PROPHET'S  COUNSELLORS.  189 

rod,  and  I  will  always  stand  by  your  side  after  I  shall  have  given  it 
unto  you.  I  have  it  with  me  now,  and  I  can  give  it  unto  you  in 
one  minute ;  therefore,  prepare  to  receive  it.  I  am  the  Bright 
and  Morning  Star;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and 
Amen. 

THE     RESPONSIBILITY     OF     GIVING    COUNSEL    TO 

THE  SAINTS    PLACED    UPON    THE    PROPHET'S 

COUNSELLORS. 


No.  119.  WEBER,  UTAH,  October  3oth,  1861. 

1.  HEARKEN  unto  the  words  of  my  mouth,  my  son,  for  I  am 
about  to  counsel  you  concerning  your  duty  towards   my  people. 
I  do  not  require  of  you  to  attend  to  all   church  business  yourself. 
You   cannot   do  this.      I  have  given   unto  you   counsellors   and 
others  on   whom    I  have  placed  a  responsibility  ;   and  I   expect 
that  every  man  whom  I  have  called  will  do  his  duty,  and  thereby 
lighten  your  burden.     It  is  your  duty  to  receive  revelations  from 
my  mouth,  and  write  them  for  my  people, — even  to  stand  between 
them  and  me,  and  to  give  unto  them  my  words, — this  is   as  much 
as  you  can  well  attend  to. 

2.  You  are  not  required  by  me  to  burden  yourself  with  every 
person's   duty.      Let  those  who  have  duties  to    perform    in    my 
Church  perform  them,  and  then  they  will  ease  your  burden.     You 
cannot  be   present  everywhere  with  my  people,  looking  into  the 
business  of  all  at  once ;   therefore,  you  must  have   others  to  assist 
you.     I  know  that  you  are  burdened   with  this  people   in   conse- 
quence of  the  way  in  which   they   are   now   situated ;    but  I   will 
speedily  place  you  in  a  pleasant  position,  and   you   shall   be  sur- 
rounded by  faithful  men;   but  I  will  give  unto  you   more  of  them. 

3.  Many  of  my  people  have  done  well,  and  I  am  well   pleased 
with  them.     Let  them  continue  to  hearken  unto  my  words,  and  I 
will  shortly  give  unto  them  the  victory  over  their  enemies.     I  will 
change  their  position  in  life.     I  shall  not  keep  them  suffering  here 
but  a  very  short  time  longer.     I  am  now  drawing  things  to  a  head 
at  a  rapid  speed ;   and  when  the  two  powers  come  together   I  will 
destroy  all  mine  enemies  who  dwell  in  this  Territory,  according  to 


190  THE  PROPHET'S  COUNSELLORS. 

my  former  promises.  Let  my  people  work  with  me.  They  must 
remember  that  they  have  duties  to  perform  as  well  as  I  have ;  and 
if  they  will  discharge  those  duties,  they  shall  receive  the  blessings 
promised. 

4.  And,  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  fix  your  mind  upon 
your  own   duty,  even   as   I  have   commanded   you,   and  place  a 
responsibility  upon  your  two  counsellors,  and  all   things  will  work 
well.     Let  them  receive  my  words  from  you,  and  act  upon  them. 
Let  them  regulate   themselves   in  all  their  councils  by   my   word 
which  they  receive  through  you.     If  they  will  do  this,  I   will   give 
unto  them  the  spirit  of  counsel,  and  they  shall  counsel  my  people 
aright.     You  shall  not  be  called  upon  to  give  private  counsel  unto 
my  people,  except  in  such   difficult   cases   as  those  wherein  your 
counsellors  feel  themselves  incompetent  to  give  satisfactory  counsel 
to  those  who  shall  apply  for  it — even  where  revelation  needs  to  be 
given  to  settle  the  matter.     In  such  cases  you   may  be  called  for, 
and  your  word  will  be  and  end  to   controversy.     In   all   extreme 
cases  you  may  be  called  for,  but  not  otherwise. 

5.  And  it  would  be  wise  for  you  to  meet  in  council  with  your 
counsellors,  as  often  as  twice  in  a  week,  to  offer  up  petitions  before 
me  in  behalf  of  yourselves  and  of  my  people  at  large.     If  you  and 
your  counsellors  will  do  this,  I  will   send  the  recording  angel  to 
hear  your  prayers,  and  he  shall  record  them,  and  present  them  to 
my  Father  and  to  the  other  leading  authorities  in  heaven,  and  we 
will  counsel  upon  them.     And  if  it  be   lawful  for  your  prayers  to 
be  answered,  we  will  answer  them  according  to  your  request.     We 
wish  to  hear  from  you  and  from  your  counsellors  in  this  manner, 
at  least  as  often  as  twice  in  a  week.      We  will  take  good  care    of 
you,  never  fear. 

6.  We  are  constantly  directing  you  in  all  your  movements  for 
good.     We  know  that  you   are   but   frail   men,  surrounded   by  all 
manner  of  enemies  who  thirst  for  your  blood ;   but   you   have  no 
need  to  fear  them,  for  I   will   hold  them   as  with  an  iron  grasp. 
They  shall  be   perfectly  powerless.     They   shall   do   nothing  only 
what  I  wish  them  to  do  in  order  to  fill  up  their  cup,  and,  in  so 
doing,  they  shall  not  afflict  my  faithful  people  to  hurt  them  much. 
All  things  will  go  on  aright  with  the  faithful ;    but  the  rest  will   be 
consumed. 

I  now  add   no  more.     I  am  Jesus   Christ.     Even  so.     Amen 
Amen. 


THE    AMERICAN    GOVERNMENT.  19! 

THE  AMERICAN    GOVERNMENT. 


No.  120.  WEBER,  UTAH,  October  3ist,  1861. 

A  REVELATION  concerning  the  origin  and  nature  of  the  American 
Government  and  the  departure  of  modern  legislators  from  its 
principles. — The  apostacy  of  the  apostles  of  the  old  Church. — 
Revealing  the  design  of  the  Almighty  in  commanding  his  saints 
not  to  train  with  their  enemies. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  Jesus  Christ,  and  I  will  reveal  unto  you  the 
design  that  I  had  in  counselling  my  saints  not  to  train  with  their 
enemies. 

2.  According  to  the  decree  of  heaven,   I   was   compelled  to 
establish  a  Republican  form  of  government  upon  this  land,  to  con- 
tinue for  a  season,  until  I  shall  have  accomplished  a  certain  design. 
Notwithstanding  this,  the  order  of  that  great  government  is  con- 
trary to  the  true  order  of  government  which  exists  in  heaven,  and 
which  will  eventually  exist  upon  the   earth.     That  government   is 
an  exception  to  all  other  governments   established   either  by  my 
Father  or  by  any  other  God  connected  with  the  quorum  of  worlds 
to  which  we  .belong.     But   when  we  established  that  government 
we  had  an  object  in  view.     We  inspired  George  Washington  and 
his  associates  to  establish  that  government,    and  to  write  the  law 
which  should  regulate  the  people  who  should  occupy  this  land. 
We  raised  him  up  for  that  purpose.     He  was  before   appointed  to 
that  work.     What  object   had   we  in  view  for  establishing  such  a 
government  upon  this  land?     Our  object  was  to  give  unto  every 
person    the    right  to  liberty  of   conscience   in    religious    matters. 
Under  that  government  they  were  at  liberty  to  act  out  that  which 
was  in  them. 

3.  Under  it  I  could  have  established  my  Church,  if  its  admin- 
istrators  would  have   dealt  with  my  people  according  to  the  law 
which  I  had  caused  to  be  written ;  but  they  would  not.     My  peo- 
ple were  as  free  to  act,  according  to   that  law,   as  they  were ;  but 
they  assumed  power  over  my  people,   and  trampled  their  rights 
under  their  feet,  and,  contrary  to  the  law,  they   shed  the  blood 
of  my  servant  Joseph  Smith,  slew  many  of  my  saints,  and   others 
they  drove  from  their  homes ;  but  I   will  recompense  them  for  it 
all. 


192  THE    AMERICAN    GOVERNMENT. 

4.  They    have   departed   from  the  law  which  I,   at   the  first, 
caused  to  be  written,  and  they  have  framed   laws   of  their  own, 
adapted  to  their  own  corrupt  purposes,  in   order  that  they  might 
shed  human  blood  to  satisfy  their  bloody   appetites.     They  thirst 
for  blood  all  the  day  long,  and  I  will  give  unto  them  blood  until 
they  are  satisfied.     I  will  give  unto  them  blood  to  drink,   for  they 
are  worthy.     I  will  cut  off  the  inhabitants  of  the  United  States  by 
millions  ;    and  I  will  lay  their  land  nearly  waste.     I  will  begin  with 
them  as  soon  as  I  shall  have  purged  my  Church,  and  I  will  leave 
alive  none  but  the  pure  in  heart. 

5.  And  now  behold,  I  speak  unto  you  concerning  the  people 
of  the   old  Church.     They  are  more  corrupt  than  the  inhabitants 
of  the  United  States  are.     They,  also,  thirst  for  the  blood  of  those 
who  cross  them  in  their  pathway.     They  are  continually  thirsting 
for  blood.     They  cause  those  of  my  people  who   are  innocent  to 
swear  oaths  obligating  them  to  shed  the  blood  of  their  fellow  men, 
contrary  to  my  law.     I  claim  the  right  myself  to  inflict  the  penalty 
of  death  upon  the  transgressors  of  my  Church ;   but  they   take   my 
work  out  of  rny  hands.     I  do  not  call  upon  those  whose  hands  are 
steeped  in  blood  to  attend  to  that  business.     When  I  pass  the  sen- 
tence of  death  upon  any  of  my  people,  I  do  it  justly.- 

6.  Those  men  whom  I  called  to  be  apostles  to  lead  my  Church 
under  my  servant  Joseph  Smith,  have  been  pleading  with  several 
of  the   presidents  of  the   United  States   to  admit  them  into  the 
Union   (as  they  call  it);  but   those  presidents    were    ashamed   of 
them,  and  did  not  wish  to  be  disgraced   by  such  an  alliance ;  con- 
sequently, they  would  not  be  united  with  them.     But  they  still  feel 
discontented,  and  continue  to  beg  for  shelter  under  the  wings  of 
their   great    father   and    protector,  (?)  notwithstanding    that    their 
father  (?)  has  driven  them  from  place  to  place,  and  taken  their  all 
away  from  them  time  after  time,  and  slain  their  prophet,  and  also 
many  of  their  brethren.     What  do  those  apostles  by   such   plead- 
ings and  by  such   conduct   say   to  that   government?     They  say 
plainly :     O,    our  father,  we  now  care  nothing  about   our  prophet 
whom  you  have  slain,  and   our  brethren,   whose  blood  you  have 

i  shed,  nor  about  the  many  times  that  you  have  driven  us  from  our 
homes.  We  are  willing  to  forget  all  this,  if,  father,  you  will  only 
permit  us  to  become  one  with  you.  Our  prophet  was  an  imposter, 


THE    AMERICAN    GOVERNMENT.  193 

and  we  were  deceived  by  him !  You  did  justice  when  you  slew 
him,  and  when  you  murdered  our  brethren  in  cold  blood,  and 
when  you  took  all  our  possessions  from  us,  and  drove  us  far  from 
you  into  a  barren  country !  Still,  father,  we  plead  with  you,  and 
say,  O  do  admit  us  into  the  Union  !  We  are  willing  to  acknowledge^ 
father,  that  all  that  you  have  done  unto  us  is  right ;  and  if  you  will 
not  admit  us  into  the  Union,  we  shall  break  our  hearts !  And 
now,  father,  inasmuch  as  we  plead  with  you  in  this  manner,  how 
can  you  refuse  to  accept  of  us?  We  have  no  friend  but  you.  We 
believe  that  we  were  deceived  by  Joseph  Smith.  We  do  not 
believe  now  that  he  was  a  prophet.  We  deny  everything  that  he 
taught  us.  He  led  us  into  trouble,  and  if  you  do  not  help  us  out, 
whatever  shall  we  do?  0,  then,  do  take  pity  on  us,  and  help  us 
out  of  this  difficulty.  If  you  will  do  this,  we  will  be  your  slaves 
forever!  O,  can  you  turn  your  back  upon  us  any  longer?  Do 
accept  of  us,  and  we  will  never  rebel  against  you  any  more.  We 
assure  you  that  we  will  have  nothing  more  to  do  with  the  doctrine 
of  Joseph  Smith.  We  will  bid  adieu  both  to  him  and  to  his 
doctrines  forever !  After  this  we  will  take  good  care  that  his 
doctrines  shall  not  lead  us  into  any  more  trouble.  Therefore, 
father,  we  ask  you  now,  for  the  last  time,  to  receive  us,  or  we 
perish. 

7.  O  ye  people  who  have  yielded  obedience  unto  the  fulness 
of  my   gospel,  hearken   unto  my  words,  for  I  am  about  to  talk  to 
you.     Will  you  obey  me,  or  would  you  rather  make  the  same  ship- 
wreck of  your  faith  that  those  have  done  whom  I  first  called  to  the 
priesthood  under  Joseph  Smith?     Will  you  go  to  their  standard 
and  be  regulated  by  their  laws,  or  would  you  rather  obey  me? 

8.  I   commanded   my  people   not  to  train  with  their  enemies, 
and  why  did   I   do   so?     In   order  that  I  might  obtain  a  clue  on 
mine   enemies.     I  knew  that,   if  my  people  did  not  train,  mine 
enemies   would  fine   them ;  and  that,  if  my  people  would  not  pay 
the  fine,  they  would  take  away   some  of  the   property   which  be- 
longed  to    my    people.     Were  they  justified  by  the  law  of  the 
United    States    in   doing  this?     They    were    not.     Therefore,  by 
extorting  a  fine  from  those  of  my  people   who  are  not  American 
citizens,  and  taking  away  their  property,  they  broke  the  law  which 
they   profess  to  keep.     If  they  never  take  away   another    cent's 


194  THE    AMERICAN    GOVERNMENT. 

worth  of  property  from  my  people,  I  can  now,  according  to  the 
law  of  heaven,  take  away  all  that  they  have.  When  I  commanded 
my  people  not  to  train  with  them,  I  set  a  trap  for  them,  and  I 
caught  them  in  it.  I  have  won  the  first  point  with  them. 

9.  They  will  set   (as  they   suppose)  another  trap  to  ensnare  a 
few  of   my  people.     They  are  gaining  confidence.     They  think 
that  because   my  people  did  not   oppose  them,  but,  on  the  con- 
trary, suffered  them  to  take  whatever  their  feelings  dictated,  they 
won  the  last  cast.     They  feel  proud  now,  and  they  think  that  they 
will  win  the  day.     They  are  constantly  studying  what  scheme  they 
shall  put  in   operation  next.     They  want  to  keep  things  on  the 
move ;  therefore,   I  will   give  unto  them  another  pretext.     They 
have  to  wait  for  me.     They  can  do  but  little  without  me.     I  have 
to  lay  both  their  plans  and  mine   own  too.     And  I  wish  to  lay 
another  plan  for  them  that  will  induce  them  to  come   up  against 
my  people  to   slay  them ;  and   this   I  can  do  without   much  dif- 
ficulty, for  they  are  bloodthirsty.     They  are  ready  for  the  slaughter; 
therefore,  I  will  bring  them  to  that  point. 

10.  But,  when  they  come,  they  will  make  a  pretence  that  they 
do   not  wish  to   slay   all   my   people.     They  will  offer  to  protect 
as  many   of  them  as   will   forsake   me   and  go  over  to  their  side. 
They   will  try  to  make  as  many  of  my  people  as  will  hearken  to 
them  beli'eve  that  they  are  their  best  friends;  but  those  who  may 
be  false-hearted  among  my  people  will  not  have  much  time  to  talk 
with  them,  for  I  shall  speedily  remove  them  out  of  the  way.     Mine 
enemies  will  pretend  that  they  only  want  my  servant  Joseph,  and  a 
few  of  his  brethren,    and  that,  if  my  people  will  let  them  take  those 
few  men,  they  will  not  molest  the  remainder.     But,  as  I  have  said 
unto  you  before,  so  I  say  unto  you  again,  I  will  not  spare  the  lives 
of  any  but  those  who  will  faithfully  stand   by   my   servant  Joseph, 
and  by  my  servants  who  stand  by  him.     I  have  told   my  people 
what  I  mean  to  do;  and  they  can  please  themselves  what  they 
do.     They  will  find  out  that  I  have  told  them  the  truth. 

I  now  add  no  more.     I  am  the  Son  of  the  Eternal  Father ;  even 
Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


THE    ARMY    OF    HEAVEN.  195 

THE   ARMY    OF    HEAVEN. 


No.   121.  WEBER,  UTAH,  November  ist,   1861. 

A  REVELATION  concerning  the  army  of  heaven ;  giving  an  account 
of  their  number,  the  manner  in  which  they  go  to  war,  the  means 
by  which  they  are  supported,  the  manner  of  their  'division  into 
sections  by  their  twelve  chief  commanders,  and  the  nature  of 
their  duties  to  the  promised  seed  of  Abraham. 

1.  LISTEN  to  the  words  of  the  Lord  your  God,  for  I  am  about 
to  draw  near  unto  you,  and  reveal  many  secrets-  unto  you  in   order 
that  you  may  be  prepared  for  the  work  which  I  have  called  you  to 
do.    When  I  reveal  unto  you  the  secret  things  of  heaven  I  am  draw- 
ing near  unto  you.    No  person  can  know  me  except  I  reveal  myself 
unto  him ;   and  I  cannot  reveal  myself  to  any  person  only    accord- 
ing to  the  law  by  which  I   am   governed.     I  am   drawing   nearer 
unto  you  every  day.     I  am  giving  unto   you   a  knowledge   of  the 
most  sacred  things.     I  shall  soon  have  revealed  all  that  is  neces- 
sary for  you  to  know  before  I  come  and  reveal  myself  in   person 
to  you — to  stand  in  your  presence  and  to  be  seen  by  you  during  the 
whole  of  the  time  that  we  shall  be  at  war.     At  such  times,  I   shall 
never  leave  you,  but  I  shall  stand  by  your  side,  and  you  will   see 
me  before  your  eyes  continually — even  as   one   man  sees  another. 
Hitherto  you  have  not  needed   to  see   m9  only  to  convince  you 
that  I  exist ;   and  I  showed  myself  unto   you  to  convince  you   of 
that  fact.     But  I  shall  now  show  myself  unto  you  in  a  more  satis- 
factory manner;   therefore,  prepare  yourself  for  a  visit   from   me, 
for  L  shall  soon  visit  you ;   and  when  I   come,    I  shall  abide   with 
you. 

2.  And   now,  behold,   I    speak  unto  you  concerning  my  war- 
riors.     I    have  told    you    that    they    are    commanded  by  twelve 
generals,  who  are  my  Father's  firstborn  sons.     They  were  ordained 
by  Him  to  fight  the  battles  of  Abraham's   seed ;    for  his   seed   are 
my  covenant  people,  and  I  am  compelled  to  fight   their  battles. 
All  the  warriors  of  heaven  received  their  ordinations  to  the  au- 
thority which  they  hold  ungier  the  hands   of    my   Father,  who  has 
ordained  hundreds  of  millions.     He  now  is,  and  always  has  been 
busily  engaged.     He  has  had  no  time  trifle  away.     All  the  inhabit- 
ants of  our  earth  are  also   busily  engaged.     They  are  not  slothful. 


196  THE    ARMY    OF    HEAVEN. 

3.  The  angels  of  heaven  cannot   officiate  in   any  office  upon 
our  earth  until  they  have  received  an  ordination  from   my   Father. 
They  do  not  all  receive  an  ordination  of  the  same  kind.     Some 
are  appointed  to  one  office,  and  some  to  another ;   but  they  all 
officiate   in  their  own  callings,  and  there  is  no  confusion  among 
them. 

4.  I  revealed  unto  my  servant  John  some   things  concerning 
the   army  of  heaven.      He   saw  them  and  knew  their  number. 
Their  number  is  two  hundred  millions.     They  are  all  horsemen, 
and  they  are  divided  into  twelve  sections,  which  are   commanded 
by  twelve  generals,  each  of  whom   commands   an   equal  number. 
There  are  also  other  officers,  all  of  whom  hold  positions  according 
to  their  birthright,  and  are  subject  from  the  least  unto  the  greatest 
to  those  chief  generals ;   hence,  there  is   no   cause   for   contention 
among  them,  for  they  all  possess  that  which  it  is  their  right  to  pos- 
sess, and  they  are  all  satisfied  therewith. 

5.  It  is  the  duty  of  that  army  to  rule  the  four  quarters  of  this 
earth.     The  first  four  generals  each  rule  one-quarter,  and  the  other 
eight  generals  assist  them.     They  stir  up  the  nations  to  war,   and 
they  quell  them  again.     They  move  forth   among  the  armies  of 
men,  and  turn  them  hither  and  thither  as  it  seemeth  them  good, 
and  no  earthly  power  can    hinder  them.     They  go  to  the  kings 
and  rulers  of  the  earth  when  they  are  sitting  in  council,  and  turn 
them  hither  and  thither  at  their  pleasure.     Kings  and  rulers  are 
all  brought  to  their  terms.     The  needs  of  this  army  are  supplied 
by  that  portion  of  the  angels  who  are  otherwise   engaged.     The 
whole  army  is  not  always  upon  the  earth.     Its   presence  here  is 
not  always  needed.     Sometimes  a  portion  of  it  is  in  heaven,  while 
the  other  portion  is  upon  the  earth.     The  warriors  of  heaven  do 
not  all  come  to  the  earth  together,  except  when  there   is  great 
trouble  upon  the  earth.     At  such  times  they  are  all  needed ;   but 
that  is  very  seldom,  for,  if  necessary,  they  could  cut  off  the  entire 
inhabitants  of  the  earth  in  a  few  minutes.     Some  of  them,  how- 
ever, are  continually  passing  from  the  earth  to  heaven,  and  from 
heaven  to  the  earth.     They  often   exchange   places  for  their   own 
convenience ;   but  there  is,  nevertheless,  always  a  force  upon   the 
earth  sufficiently  large  for  all  necessary  purposes.     They   will   be 
more  busily  employed  in  the  future  than  they  have  been   in  the 


THE    ARMY    OF    HEAVEN.  197 

past, — even  from  this   time   until  their  work  is   finished;   which 
work  is  now  only  fairly  beginning. 

6.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you, — it  will  be  your  duty  to  raise 
your  rod  first,  and  give  the  first   command ;    and   as  soon  as  you 
have  given  your  command  to  the  heavenly  host,   I  will  give  mine 
to  the  twelve  chief  generals,  and  they  will  give  theirs  to  each  of 
their  seperate  sections,  one  after  the  other,  in   quick  succession, 
commencing  with  the  one  who  is  first  according  to  birthright,  and 
ending  with  the  last  of  the  twelve.     In  this  order  the  army   of 
heaven  will  go  out  to  war,  and,  when  they  do  so,  they  will   make 
great  slaughter.     The  armies  of  the  nations  of  the  earth  cannot  be 
compared  with  the  army  of  heaven ;   they  have  not  been  trained 
for  war  as  the  angels  of  heaven  have. 

7.  And  now,  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  seek  to  strengthen 
yourself  for  the  great  work  that  lies  before  you.     I  will  not  send 
your  enemies  upon  you  until  you  are  prepared  to  meet  them, — 
should  I  do  so,   I  should  of  all  men  be  the  most  dishonest.     I 
know  that  your  enemies  would  slay  you  if  I  did  not  prevent  them. 
I  know  that  you  depend  upon  me,  and  I  will  never  betray  your 
confidence.     Therefore,  be  true  to  your  trust,  and  watch  for  the 
day  of  my  power  to  come ;    for  it  will  come  upon  many  as  a  thief 
in  the  night. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.  I  am  the  Stone  and  Shepherd 
of  Israel,  the  Bright  and  Morning  Star ;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even 
so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  FOUR  AND  TWENTY  ELDERS. 


No.  122.  WEBER,  UTAH,  November  2nd,  1861. 

i.  LISTEN  unto  me,  my  son,  and  I  will  speak  unto  you  again. 
Inasmuch  as  there  are  four  and  twenty  elders  in  heaven,  sitting 
upon  four  and  twenty  seats,  under  the  throne  of  my  Father,  and 
there  are  only  twelve  of  them  who  use  rods,  what  part  does  the 
remaining  twelve  of  the  twenty-four  act  upon  our  earth?  They 
are  twelve  generals  who  act  under  the  authority  of  those  first  twelve 
who  use  the  twelve  rods,  being  next  to  them  by  birthright,  and, 


198  THE    TWENTY-FOUR    ELDERS. 

consequently,  they  act  under  them.  What  part  will  those  twenty-four 
apostles  act  under  the  fulness  of  the  holy  priesthood?  Will  they 
all  hold  the  same  authority?  No  ;  one  will  be  subject  to  another 
according  to  their  birthright.  The  lesser  will  be  subject  to  the 
greater;  but  the  apostleship  will  not  be  placed  in  its  right  order 
until  all  the  high  priests  assemble  upon  Mount  Zion.  Other  high 
priests  will  act  in  the  various  places  of  those  twenty-four  legal  heirs 
to  the  apostleship  until  they  come  and  take  their  right  places. 
Behold,  I  am  the  Lord,  and  I  will  call  such  high  priests  as  will  be 
suitable  to  fill  their  places  until  they  come  to  take  their  own  places. 
Some  of  them  are  in  the  spirit  world,  and  a  few  of  them  are  upon 
the  earth ;  and  I  will  place  those  who  are  upon  the  earth,  who  are 
handy  to  come  at,  in  their  own  places.  They  are  valiant  men. 

2.  When   my  kingdom   is  set  up,   and   my  work  has  become 
extensive  upon  the  face  of  the  earth,  I  shall  divide  my  Church  into 
twelve  parts,  and  I  shall  call  every  section  a  stake,   and   I  shall 
place  twelve  apostles  over  those  twelve  stakes,   even  those  of  the 
apostles  who  hold  the  first  birthright,  and  the  remaining  twelve  will 
become  subject  to  them.     This  order   will  exist  upon  the  earth, 
even  as  it  does  in  heaven.     Earthly  things  under  the  fulness  of  the 
holy  priesthood  will  be  a  perfect  representation  of  heavenly  things, 
even  a  perfect  order  of  things. 

3.  What   is  the    difference    between   Holy    Ghosts    and    the 
warriors  of  heaven?     Is  there  any  difference  between  them?     No. 
The  warriors  of  heaven  were  ordained  by  their  Father  both  to  in- 
fluence those  who  are  heirs  of  salvation  and  to  direct  their  foot- 
steps,   and    also   to    fight   their   battles.     The  warriors  are  Holy 
Ghosts. 

4.  As  I  have  said  unto  you  before,  so  I  say  unto  you  again,  it 
is  not  necessary  for  all  the  hosts  of  heaven  to  be  upon  the  earth  at 
once.     It  is  the  duty  of  the  first  four  captains  of  the  Lord's   Host 
to  govern  the  four  quarters  of  the  earth,  even  to  govern  the  heathen 
nations,  who  know  nothing  about  the  gospel,  who  are  fallen  angels. 
And  it  is  the  duty  of  the  three  next  in  authority  to  the  first  four,  to 
take  charge  of  that  portion  of  Adam's  children  who  yielded  obedi- 
ence to  my  gospel   in  the  flesh ;  and  in  times  of  great  trouble  all 
the  hosts  of  heaven  will  come  out  and  assist  those  three  generals. 
They  take  the  charge  of  those  of  Adam's  children  who  yield  obedi- 
ence to  my  gospel  in  times  of  peace ;   and  when  trouble  comes 


THE    TWENTY-FOUR    ELDERS.  199 

upon  them  and  they  need  assistance,  the  first  four  generals  and 
also  the  other  five  come  to  their  assistance ;  and  when  those  twelve 
all  come  out  to  battle,  all  the  armies  of  heaven  go  out  to  war ;  and 
thus  the  whole  army  of  heaven  go  out  to  war  when  they  are  called 
upon  to  do  so. 

5.  What  is  the  reason  that  those  warriors  cannot  be  seen  by 
mortals  on  the  earth,  when  there  are  millions  of  them  upon  the 
earth  continually  ?  They  are  close  by  people  upon  the  earth,  and 
still  they  cannot  see  them.  What  is  the  reason  of  this?  It  is 
darkness  which  mortals  are  enveloped  in.  They  can  see  nothing 
but  that  which  is  mortal  like  unto  themselves.  Can  the  angels  of 
heaven  see  mortals  upon  the  earth  and  know  what  they  are  doing? 
Yes ;  they  know  the  thoughts  of  their  hearts  before  they  have 
spoken  one  word.  They  can  see  and  understand  all  about  mortals; 
but  mortals  can  neither  see  nor  understand  anything  about  them, 
except  I  reveal  it  unto  them.  No  mortal  can  either  see  me  or 
mine  holy  angels  except  I  show  them  unto  him;  and  he  must 
be  transfigured  in  order  to  see  either  me  or  mine  holy  angels.  He 
must  be  enveloped  by  a  holy  influence,  wherein  his  spirit  becomes 
enlightened  by  being  touched  with  that  holy  influence.  It  is  the 
spirit  which  is  within  mortals  that  sees  either  me  or  mine  holy 
angels,  and  not  the  mortal  eye.  None  can  see  me  except  that  I 
envelop  them  in  a  holy  influence,  and  by  that  means  quicken 
their  spirits ;  and  I  shall  do  so  to  none  but  those  who  are  worthy. 
Therefore,  let  those  who  wish  to  see  me  prove  themselves  worthy. 
If  they  will  do  so,  I  will  envelop  them  by  a  holy  influence  and 
quicken  their  spirits,  and  they  shall  both  see  me  and  my  holy 
angels.  And  if  they  do  not  see  me  when  I  come  in  power,  they 
may  know  that  they  are  unworthy  of  that  favor ;  therefore,  if  my 
people  desire  to  see  me,  let  them  prepare  themselves  for  it.  I  am 
he  that  was,  and  is,  and  is  to  come ;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even 
so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


200  LIFE    AND    DEATH. 

REVELATION  EXPLAINING  THE  PRINCIPLES    UPON 
WHICH    MEN    LIVE  AND   DIE. 


No.  123.  WEBER,  UTAH,  November  5th,  1861. 

1.  HEARKEN  to  me,  my  son,  for  I  am  about  to  make  known 
unto  you  those  things  which  you  have  enquired   of  me  to  know. 
You  wish  to  know  why   all   people  do  not   live  to  the  same  age. 
You  are  astonished  that  while  some  live  to  become  old,   others  die 
in  their  childhood.     You  wish  to  know  the  reason  of  this.     You 
think  that  all  people  ought   to   live  to  an   equal  age,  and  that,  if 
they  do  not,  there  is  something  wrong.     I  have  told  you  before 
that  the  children  of  men  neither  gain  nor  lose  their  salvation  while 
in  mortality;    and  that  the  number  of  years   which  they  live  in 
mortality  does  not  give  them  any  advantage  more  than  they  had 
gained  before.     They  either  won  or  lost  their  claim  to  the  resur- 
rection   before  they  entered   into   mortality.     It  was  ordained  in 
heaven   that    each    of  Adam's  children   should  receive  a   mortal 
body;    but   it  was  not  ordained  that  they  should  all  live  to  the 
same  age.     Some  die  at  one  age,  and  some  at  another.     To  the 
one  who  lives  to  an  old  age  there  is  no  more  credit  due  than  to 
the  one  who  dies  young.     Whether  the  children  of  Adam  are  in 
this  world,  or  in  the  spirit   worlds,   it   matters   not.     If  they   are 
striving  to   do  good  they    are    accepted.      Some  people  are  ap- 
pointed to  live  upon  the  earth  for  special  purposes,  and  others  are 
not.     It  is  necessary  for  some  to  live  upon  the  earth  to  an  old 
age,  because  their  services  are  needed.     It  is  also  necessary  that 
others,  in  order  to  fulfil  the  law  of  heaven,  should  take   mortal 
bodies  and   die  in  their  childhood,  because  their  services  are  most 
needed  in  the  spirit  worlds. 

2.  Adam's  children  cannot  all  dwell  upon  the  earth  at  the  same 
time ;    neither  can  they  all  be  absent  at  the  same  time.     They  are 
divided.     Some  of  them  must  dwell  upon  one  earth,   some   upon 
another.     They  are  called  to  inhabit  four  different  earths — even 
this  earth,  and  three  spirit  worlds.     And  in  all  those   worlds,  the 
children  of  Adam  are  called  to  superintend  and  minister  in  temporal 
things.     This  is  their  duty  upon  all  earths  until  they  have  received 
their  resurrection,  and  then  they  will  minister  in  spiritual  things, 


LIFE    AND    DEATH.  2OI 

having  become  celestial  beings.  But  how  can  a  spirit  minister  in 
temporal  things  upon  a  spiritual  earth  ?  The  spirits  which  are  in 
the  spirit  worlds  have  charge  of  the  products  of  the  earths  on 
which  they  dwell;  for  a  spiritual  earth  yields  forth  all  manner  of — 
produce,  even  as  this  earth  does.  Spirits  need  both  food  and 
clothing,  even  as  mortals  do ;  and  high  priests  who  are  called  to 
minister  in  those  spirit  worlds  are  supported  there  by  the  children 
of  Adam,  as  they  are  upon  this  earth.  Therefore,  to  keep  things 
in  order,  in  all  those  worlds,  the  children  of  Adam  must  be 
divided. 

3.  But  before  spirits  can   enter  into  the  two  worlds  called  the 
terrestrial  and  the  telestial  worlds,  they  are  obligated  to  come  and 
take  upon  them   mortal  bodies,   and  die.     All    the    children    of" 
Adam  who  are  heirs  to  the  resurrection  have  a  part  to  act  either 
on  this  earth  or  in  the  spirit  worlds  before  mentioned.     When  I 
take   children   from   this  earth,   I  do  it  in   order  to  send  them  to 
their  own  fields    of    labor.       Such   have   been   appointed    unto 
death. 

4.  Behold,  I  am  the  Lord,  and  I  lay  no  claim  to  fallen  spirits. 
Satan  claims  the  right  to  lead  them,  for  they  belong  to  him ;  but  I 
claim  the  right  to  lead  those  who  are  heirs  to  the  resurrection,  for 
they  belong  to  me.     But  I  overrule  all  Satan's  plans,   and  I   shall 
bring  him  and  his  host  to  naught.     The  reason  that  the  children 
of  Adam  die  before  they  have  grown  up  to  their  full  stature,  is,  in 
many  instances,  because  they  were  before  appointed  unto   death. 
But  there  are  some  cases  wherein  people  die  before  their  appointed 
time.     Such  bring  death  upon  themselves  through  their  own  follies. 
Such    are    condemned    by  the   law  of  heaven,   being  accounted 
unworthy  to  fill  a  place  either  in  the  terrestrial  or  telestial  worlds. 
They  are,  therefore,  compelled  to  return  to  their  father,  Adam,  by 
whom  they  are  chastened  for  their  sins,    and  again  sent  upon  the 
earth    to    fill  their    appointments ;  and  when  they  have  faithfully 
filled  them,   they  are  accounted   worthy  to  pass  on  into  the  spirit 
worlds. 

5.  It  is  the  duty  of   Aaron,  fhe  firstborn  son  of  Adam,  and  a 
few  more  of  Adam's  first  born  sons,  to  take   three  missions  upon 
this  earth  in  mortality.     Aaron  has  not  yet  been  upon  either  the 
terrestrial  or  telestial   worlds ;  but,   at  all  times  when  he  has  not 


202  THE    GREAT    TEST. 

been  upon  this  earth,  he  has  been  with  his  father.  He  will  not  go 
to  those  spirit  worlds  until  he  shall  have  finished  his  last  mission 
upon  this  earth.  He  will  then  go  and  await  his  resurrection,  and, 
in  the  resurrection,  he  will  be  the  first  who  will  come  forth. 

6.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,  that  I  will 
heal  all  those  of  my  people  who  are  sick,  who  are  not  appointed 
unto  death,  after  you  shall  have  repeated  the  ceremony,  which  I 
have  given,  over  their  heads.  My  people  need  not  to  send  for 
doctors,  for  if  they  are  appointed  unto  death,  a  doctor  cannot  heal 
them.  I  will  heal  all  those  who  are  not  appointed  unto  death 
myself;  therefore,  let  my  people  save  all  such  trouble  and  ex- 
pense. I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so,  Amen  and  Amen, 


THE    TIME    OF    THE    GREAT    TEST. 


No.  124.  WEBER,  UTAH,  November  6th,  1861. 

REVELATION  wherein  the  Lord  promises  to  strengthen  the  prophet 
and  the  faithful  among  his  people  so  that  they  may  behold  him 
and  the  host  of  heaven  at  the  time  of  the  great  test ;  and  in 
which  he  reasons  with,  reproves,  and  threatens  with  destruction 
the  rebellious. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  come  to  speak  unto  you,  my   son.     I   know 
what  you  require  at  my  hands.     You  say  that,  if  I  were  ready  to 
deliver  my  people,  you  would  be,  also.     But  you  think  that   I   am 
not  ready.     You  consider  that  I  have  yet  much  to  reveal  unto  you 
before  I  shall  have  prepared  you  to  meet  your  enemies ;    but  I  can 
soon   prepare  you.     I   have  been   revealing  unto  you  the  secret 
things  of  heaven  rapidly,  in  order  that  I  might  prepare  you  to  meet 
your  enemies.     I  am  now  moving  fast.     I  have  yet  a  little  to  reveal 
unto  you,  and  when  I  shall  have  revealed  it,  I   shall  be  ready  to 
come  and  remain  with  you;  and  at  all  times  when  trouble   is   on 
hand   I   shall  abide  with  you.     Should  I  ever  leave  you,  it  will  be 
in  times  of  calm,  when  there  is  peace  between  my  saints  and  mine 
enemies. 

2.  You  say  that  you  cannot  exercise  sufficient  faith  in  me  to 
receive  the  rod.     You  feel   your  weakness  in  this  matter.     What 


THE    GREAT   TEST.  203 

shall  I  do  for  you  ?  I  will  strengthen  you  abundantly.  I  will 
surround  you  by  millions  of  my  holy  angels,  and  I  will  open  your 
eyes  so  that  you  shall  see  them.  You  shall  move  and  act  entirely 
under  their  influence.  You  shall  not  feel  the  weakness  of  human 
nature.  You  shall  feel  strong,  as  though  you  were  the  Lord,  and 
had  all  power  in  your  hands.  You  shall  have  all  the  heavenly  host 
around  you  to  go  to  battle  at  your  command,  and  you  shall  see 
millions  of  them.  You  shall  even  be  among  your  enemies  as  a 
lion  among  lambs.  They  shall  be  as  nothing  before  you. 

3.  As   I  have  said   unto   you  before,  so  I  say  unto  you  again, 
before  you  see  your  enemies  coming  upon  you,  you   shall   see  me 
and   my  holy  angels.     They   shall  surround   you,  and  when  your 
enemies   are   coming  towards   you,  you  shall  constantly  see  them 
before   your  eyes.     I   shall  permit  your  enemies  to  come  close  to 
you,  and  to  my  people,  and  that   for  a  wise   purpose    in    myself. 
They    will    ask   my   people  to   deliver  you   and  a  number  of  my 
servants  up  to  them ;  and  they  will  promise  my  people  that,  if  they 
will  do  so,  they  will  spare  their  lives,  and  let  them  go.     And  some 
of  my  people  will  attempt  to  go  over  to  their  side ;  but  before  they 
arrive   there,    I   will   smite  them  dead.     The   reason  that  I  shall 
suffer  mine  enemies  to  come  so  close  up  to  my  people,  will  be  to 
try  them.     If  they   can   stand  faithful  to  my  servant  Joseph,  and 
not  flinch,  then  they  will  be  worthy  of  a  deliverance ;  but,    if  they 
cannot  do  so,  I  shall  slay  them  with  mine  enemies. 

4.  I   will  give   unto  my  people  who  are  faithful  a  fair  chance. 
When  they  behold  mine  enemies  they  shall  also  see  both   me   and 
the  heavenly  host.     When  they  see  the  one  power,  they  shall  also 
see  the  other;  I  will  deal  fairly  with  them.    Those  who  are  worthy  I 
will  abundantly  strengthen ;  but  there  are  a  few  among  my  people 
who  are  unworthy,  and  I   shall   neither   show  myself,  nor  my  holy 
angels  unto  them.     They  will  be  destroyed. 

5.  I  have  told  those  who  are  unfaithful  what  I  required  at  their 
hands,  and  yet  they  would  not  do  as  I   commanded  them.     They 
treat   my  words   lightly,   and   do  not  even  believe  them ;  but  their 
days  are  numbered.    .  They  will  know  to  their  sorrow  that   I  have 
told   them  the  truth;  but  they  are   not  honest  before  me.     The 
truth  they   do  not   want.      They  have  not  obtained  a  testimony  of 
the   truth   because  they  were  unworthy  of  the  operations  of  my 


204  THE    GREAT   TEST. 

spirit  upon  them ;  and  no  person  can  have  a  testimony  of  the  truth 
except  it  be  given  by  my  spirit;  and  my  spirit  will  give  a  testimony 
to  none  but  to  those  who  are  worthy.  You  will  know  who  those 
unfaithful  people  are  when  I  come  to  move  mine  enemies  out  of 
my  way.  I  have  done  my  duty  to  my  people.  I  have  revealed 
unto  them  the  hidden  mysteries  of  my  kingdom :  this  many  of 
them  know.  All  my  people  might  obtain  a  testimony  of  the 
truth,  if  they  would  seek  it  lawfully,  for  I  will  give  a  testimony  to 
all  those  who  are  worthy.  Therefore,  those  who  have  not  obtained 
a  testimony  should  know  that  they  are  unworthy  of  it. 

6.  Let  those  of  my  people  who  expect  to  be  saved  in  the  day 
of  my  power  rise  up  and  shake  themselves,  and  act  as  though  they 
had  some  life  within  them.     They  are  going  to  sleep.     If  they  do 
not  awake  and  shake  themselves  from  their  slumbers,  I  will  awaken 
them  suddenly.     I  have  told  them  enough  about  their  carelessness. 
I  will  not  tell  them  many  times  more;  but  if  they  do  not  heed  me, 
I  will  slay  many  of  them.     I  have  told  them  time  after  time  what 
I  require  of  them,  and  yet  they  will  not  do  as  I  have  commanded 
them.     If  they  wish  to  be  my  saints,  they  must  work  with  energy. 
They  will   never  accomplish   anything  by  going  to  sleep.     They 
have  something  to  do  as  well  as  I  have,  and   I  call   upon  them  to 
do  their  duty.     I  have  a  claim  on  them,  as  well  as  they  have 
upon  me.     I  have  always  done  my  duty  to  them,  and  if  they  will 
not  willingly  do  their  duty  to  me,    I   will  make   them  do  it,  or 
destroy  them.     They  are   often  calling  upon  me  to  confer  some 
blessing  or  other  upon  them,  and  if  I   do  not  give  unto  them  the 
things  which  they  ask  for,  almost  as  soon  as  the  words  are  cut  of 
their  mouths,  they  are  ready  to  censure  me  for  not  being  true  to 
them.     They  will   not  act   honestly   with   me.     All  that  I  ask  of 
them  is  to  serve  me  with  all  their  hearts ;  but,  instead  of  doing  so, 
they  go  to  sleep  and  suffer  evil  spirits  to  overcome  them.     And,  if 
my  people  will  not  serve  me  with  all  their  hearts,  those  spirits  will 
cause  them  to  deny  the  truth,  as  some  have  already  done,  and  they 
will  not  be  able  to  stand,  for  my  angels  will  not  attend  them. 

7.  My  people  also  bring  sickness  upon,  themselves   by  their 
unfaithfulness.     They    give    way   to   evil  influences    which  afflict 
them,  and  then  they  call  upon  me  to  heal  them.     They  impose 
upon   me  in  almost  every  respect.     They  would  not  have  had  so 


THE    ROD    IS    PROMISED.  205 

much  sickness  among  them  as  they  have  had,  if  they  had  done  as 
I  commanded  them.  Had  they  kept  my  commandments,  they 
could  have  kept  those  evil  influences  far  from  them,  and  then  they 
would  not  have  been  afflicted  by  them.  I  do  not  require  more  at 
the  hands  of  my  people  than  what  they  are  able  to  do.  All  that  I 
require  of  them  is  to  serve  me  with  all  their  hearts.  This  they 
could  do  with  ease  if  they  would ;  and  they  must  do  it,  or  I  will 
not  uphold  them,  and  if  I  do  not,  then  they  will  go  to  destruction. 
I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  PROPHET  IS  PROMISED  THAT,  BEFORE  HE 

IS  CALLED  UPON  TO  DELIVER  THE  PEOPLE 

OF  GOD,  HE  SHALL  RECEIVE  THE  ROD. 


No.   125.  WEBER,  UTAH,  November  yth,   1861. 

1.  WHY  are  you  so  restless  in   your  feelings   when  you  know 
that  I  am    always   with  you  ?      You  are  afraid  lest,    when  your 
enemies  come  against  you,  I  shall  not  be  with  you.     It  seems  as 
though  you  cannot  exercise   sufficient  faith  in   me  to   obtain  the 
blessings  which  belong  to  you,  and  which   I  have   promised  unto 
you. 

2.  Perhaps  you  will  say,   "  If  you  did  not  hold  them  from  me, 
I  could ;   but  you  hold  them   from  me,  and  until  you  shall  give 
them  unto  me,  I  cannot  obtain  them.     You  also  keep  yourself  at 
a  distance  from  me.     You  will  neither  draw  near  unto  me  your- 
self so  that  I  can  see  you,  nor  give  unto  me  the  rod  which  belongs 
to  me.     You  withhold  from  me  my  rights,  and  how  can  I  feel  well 
towards  you  while  you  deal  with  me  after  this  manner?    How  can 
I  place  confidence  in  you?     You  will  reveal  unto  me  revelation 
after  revelation,  as  often  as  I  ask  you  to  do  so.     I  have  no  trouble 
with  you  in  this  respect.     But  what  is  the  reason  that  you  will  not 
pay  me  a  satisfactory  visit?     You  take  a  delight  in  oppressing  me. 
You  know  what  I  require  at  your  hands.     I  have  called  upon  you 
time  after  time  to  strengthen  me.     What  is  the  reason  that  you  will 
not  do  so?     You  know  that  I  cannot  do  the  work  that  you  have 
sent  me  to  do  unless  you  strengthen  me.     All  that  I  ask  of  you  is 


2O6  THE    ROD    IS    PROMISED.' 

tu  prepare  me  for  the  work.  'But,  inasmuch  as  you  do  not  come 
and  manifest  yourself  unto  me  in  a  satisfactory  manner,  it  lessens 
my  confidence  in  you.  There  must  be  some  cause  for  your  back- 
wardness, and,  in  consequence  thereof,  you  are  causing  me  to 
sustain  a  great  injury.  You  are  breaking  my  confidence  in  you, 
and,  apparently,  operating  against  both  yourself  and  me.  You 
either  have  some  cause  for  dealing  with  me  in  this  manner,  or  you 
are  greatly  to  blame.  Then  tell  me  why  you  have  neither  visited 
me  in  a  satisfactory  manner  nor  given  unto  me  the  rod.  Tell  me 
why  I  am  still  left  to  contend  with  such  weakness ;  for,  in  conse- 
quence thereof,  I  am  unfit  to  perform  my  duty." 

3.  Behold,  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts,  and  I  will  make  known 
unto  you  the  reason  of  all  these  things.  There  are  reasons  why  I 
have  not  given  unto  you  the  rod,  and,  also,  why  I  have  not  visited 
you  in  a  satisfactory  manner.  You  have  never,  as  yet,  needed  the 
rod,  neither  has  it  been  necessary  for  me  to  visit  you  in  the  man- 
ner in  which  you  wish  me  to  visit  you.  It  is  contrary  to  the  law 
of  heaven  for  me  to  give  unto  you  the  rod  until  your  enemies  are 
about  to  come  against  you.  Neither  can  I  visit  you  in  a  manner 
that  will  satisfy  you,  except  I  bring  unto  you  the  rod.  It  is  the 
power  that  you  want ;  and  you  cannot  have  the  power  except  you 
have  the  rod.  You  will  not  be  able  to  deliver  my  people  out  of 
bondage  except  you  have  it ;  for  my  angels  are  not  compelled  to 
go  to  war  excepting  when  the  rod  is  waved.  And  inasmuch  as  I 
cannot  bring  unto  you  the  rpd  until  your  enemies  are  about  to 
come  against  you,  I  deem  it  unwise  to  come  to  you  without  it; 
for  I  know  that  after  I  should  have  visited  you,  you  would  not  be 
satisfied.  It  is  not  my  presence  merely  that  you  want,  for  you 
have  seen  me.  It  is  the  power  that  you  need,  and  that  you  must 
have  before  you  can  deliver  my  people.  Therefore,  when  I  come, 
I  will  bring  the  rod  and  place  it  in  your  hand,  and  until  then  you 
will  not  need  to  see  me.  At  that  time,  and  ever  afterwards,  you 
will  have  all  the  power  that  you  need,  and  you  will  have  no  more 
cause  to  complain  against  me.  I  know  that  you  are  now  situated 
that  you  can  do  but  little ;  but  I  shall  shortly  liberate  you.  I  am 
bound  by  law  to  withhold  the  power  from  you  until  you  need  ii ; 
therefore,  strive  to  reconcile  yourself  and  wait  patiently  until  I 
come ;  and  as  soon  as  you  need  to  see  me  I  shall  come ;  and 


THE    ROD    IS    PROMISED.  207 

when  I  come  I  shall  be  as  ready  to  fight  the  battles  of  my  people 
as  hitherto  I  have  been  to  reveal  the  hidden  mysteries  of  my  king- 
dom unto  them.  I  am  not  afraid  of  mine  enemies ;  and  that  my 
people  shall  then  see.  I  have  the  power  to  defend  the  principle 
of  truth,  and  I  will  defend  it.  It  will  be  no  difficulty  for  me  to 
destroy  all  mine  enemies  out  of  my  way. 

4.  But  my  people  are  becoming  weary    of  waiting   for  me. 
They  are  becoming  slothful  and  careless  about  those  things  that 
flow  from  my  mouth.      Many  of  them  think  that  they  have  trusted 
in  me  as  long  as  it   is  necessary  to  do  so.     The  words   of  my 
mouth    will    not    satisfy   them.      They  are  short-sighted  indeed ! 
They  have  not  waited  for  me  long,  as  yet.     They  have  suffered 
but  little  through  obeying  my  commandments ;    neither  will  the 
faithful  ever  suffer  a  great  deal  through  doing  so ;  for  the  day  of 
suffering  for  the  faithful  is  over.     I  will  take  their  burdens  upon 
myself,  and  I  will  bear  them.     Let   not  my  people  grow  weary 
now,    for  they  have  nearly  obtained  the  victory ;    but  rather  let 
them  arouse  themselves,  and  struggle   for  their  liberty,  and  they 
shall  obtain  it.     It  is  worth  struggling  for ;   and  those  who  will  not 
struggle  for  it,  shall  not  obtain  it.     I  will  give  the  victory  unto  all 
those  who  are  worthy ;   therefore,  let  my  people   prove  themselves 
worthy  of  the  promised  blessing,  and  they  shall  obtain  it.     I  am 
the  Lord  of  Hosts. 

5.  And  behold,  I  speak  unto  you  concerning  mine  enemies  : 
They  have  laid  their  plans  to  come  up  against  my  people,   and 
they  will  soon  be  here  to  try  their  skill ;    but  as  soon  as  they  are 
ready,  I  shall  be  ready  also.     And  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  that  I 
will  give  unto  you  sufficient  warning,  so  that  you  may  prepare  my 
people  to  meet  them.     At  that  time  I   will  satisfy  you.     Lift  up 
your  head  and  rejoice,  and  prepare  to  meet  me,  for  I  shall  speedily 
visit  you,  and  remain  with  you. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.     I  am  he  that  was,  and  is,  and 
is  to  come ;   even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


208  THE    PREACHING    OF    THE    GOSPEL. 

THE  DESTRUCTION  OF  THE  WICKED.— PREACHING 

OF  THE  GOSPEL  BEFORE  THE  SECOND 

DESTRUCTION. 


No.   126.  WEBER,  UTAH,  November  8th,   1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  he  that  shuts,  and  no  one  opens,  and  that 
opens,  and  no  one  shuts.     And  I  am  come  to  speak  unto  you,  my 
servant  Joseph. 

2.  You  wish  to  know  how  I  am  about  to  proceed  in  the  deliver- 
ance  of  my  people,   and  I  will  make  known  unto  you  the  course 
which  I  intend  to  take  in  this  matter.     Inasmuch  as  I  have  told 
you  that  I  intend  to  cut  off  two-thirds  of  the  inhabitants  of  this 
Territory,  you  wish  to  know  how  I  intend  to  cut   them   off.     You 
wish  to  know  whether  I  intend  to  destroy  them  all  at  once,  or  not ; 
and  I  will  inform  your  mind  upon  this  subject.     I   do  not  intend 
to  cut  them  all  off  at  once ;  but  I  will  first  cut  off  all  that  stand  in 
my  way.     After  that  I  shall  send  my  people  to  Salt  Lake  City,  the 
central  point  in  this  Territory.     I  shall  march  forth  before  them, 
and  I   shall  lead  the  hosts  of  heaven  before  them  to  battle ;  and 
nothing  that  wishes  to  oppose  me  will  be  able  to  stand  before  them. 
I  am  the  Lord. 

3.  At  the  time  of  the  first  destruction,  I  shall  cut  off  the  chief 
authorities  and  bishops  of  the  old  Church ;  and  thus  I  shall  break 
the  bands  which  now  bind  my  people  together  in  slavery.     When 
the  first  command  is  given,  I  shall  clear  those  officers   out  of  the 
way ;  and  by  so  doing,  I  shall  preach  a  loud  sermon  to  those  who 
will  be  left  alive. 

4.  And  of  those  who  will  be  left  alive,  I  shall  gather  together 
upon  the  public  square,  those  who  will  hearken  unto  me,  as  I  have 
before  said  unto  you.     And  those  who  will  not  hearken  unto  me, 
and  yet  assemble  at  that  place,  I  shall  destroy.     In  this  manner 
I  shall  purge  my  Church.     I  shall  leave  alive  none  but  a  portion 
of  those  who  are  heirs  to  the  resurrection,  and  of  them  I  shall  be 
compelled  to  destroy  nearly  one-half. 

5.  When  I   shall  have  broken  the  bands  which  now  bind  my 
people    together   in    the    old    Church,    I  shall    send  my  servants 
through  this  Territory  to  preach  'to,  and  to  gather  the  people  to  the 
place  appointed.     And  should  any  gather  there  who  are  not  heirs 
to  the  resurrection,  I  shall  destroy  them. 


DESTRUCTION    OF    THE    ENEMIES.  209 

6.  All   those   who  gather  there  will  have    to  pass  through  a 
straight  place,  where  I  and  my  servant  Joseph  will  stand,  in  order 
to  examine  all  that  pass  through ;  and  all  who  will  be  permitted  to 
pass  us,  will  be  accounted  worthy  of  a  place  in  my  kingdom  on 
the  earth.     I  have  given  unto  my  servant  Joseph  the   gift    of  dis- 
cernment in  part.     He  now  possesses  it  to  a  great  degree,  and  when 
I  come  to  him,  I  will  give  it  unto  him   perfectly.     And  when  we 
shall  be  separating  the  sheep  from  the  goats,  I  will  stand  with  him, 
as  one  man  stands  with  another.     And  when  I  shall  have  purged 
my  Church,  there  will  be  but  few  more  than  one-third  of  the  peo- 
ple who  are  now  living  in  this  Territory  left  alive.     Mine  enemies 
little  think  what  lies  at  their  doors ;  if  they  did,  their  hearts  would 
fail  them ;  but  it  is  hidden  from  their  eyes.     They  rush  forward 
like  the  unthinking  horse  does  when  it  rushes  out  into  battle;  and 
they  will  be  destroyed.     They  know  not  what  they  are  doing. 

7.  And   behold,   I  say   unto  you,   my   son,  you  wish  to  know 
how  I  intend  to  destroy  mine  enemies.     It  is  not  wisdom  in  me 
to  reveal  this  secret  fully  unto  you  at  this  time ;  but  I  will  shortly 
reveal  it  unto  you.     I  will  not  withhold  from  you  anything  which 
I   can    reveal    unto  you.     According  to  the  law  by  which  I  am 
governed,  the/e  are  some  things  which,  at  present,  I  am  forbidden 
to   reveal  unto  you ;  but  I  shall  reveal  them  unto  you  when  the  time 
shall  have  come  for  them   to  be   revealed ;  until    then,   I   shall  be 
compelled  to  hold  some  things  from  you.     Everything  will  come 
forth  in  its   own  time  and   place;  and  out  of  its  time  and  place 
nothing  will  be  revealed  by  me. 

8.  You  may  ask  me  the   question :     Can  the  heavenly   hosts 
use  swords  and  guns  and  other  deadly  weapons,  as  men  upon  the 
earth  can  ?     Yes ;  they  can  use  any  kind  of  deadly   weapons  that 
mortal  men   can.     They  can  slay  men   in   many  different  ways. 
They  can  draw  their  breath  out  from  their  bodies,  and  cause  them 
to  fall   dead   by  thousands   without  shedding  their  blood,  or  ap- 
parently wounding  their  bodies.     They   have  the   advantage   over 
mortal  men  in  every  respect,  and  they  are  prepared  for  the  work 
which  they  are  called  to  do.     Therefore,  I  say  unto  you,    my  son, 
let  your  mind  be  at  rest  as  to  the  manner  in  which  I  intend  to  slay 
mine  enemies.     I  will  slay  them  when  they   come  to  lay   hold  of 
you,  and  that  you  shall  see.     I  will  reveal  unto  you  one  thing  after 


210  DESTRUCTION    OF    THE   WICKED. 

another,  as  you  shall  stand  in  need  thereof;  therefore,  be  of  good 
courage,  and  I  will  be  with  you  unto  the  end.     I  am  the  Lord. 

9.  And,  behold,  I  say  unto  you, 'my  people  wish  to  know  what 
I  mean  by  saying  that  I  am  waiting  for  them.     They  think  that,  if 
the  day  of  deliverance  was  before  appointed  by  law,  they  could  do 
nothing  neither  to  forward  nor  yet  to  hinder  the  work.     What  shall 
I   say  unto  them   upon  this  matter?     That   day  has  never  been 
appointed  by  the  law  of  heaven ;  but  when  I  shall  have   brought 
the  two  powers   together,   then  the  time  will  have  come.     I  am 
compelled  by  law  to  bring  those  two  powers  together,  and  in  order 
to  do  this  I  have  to  influence  mine  enemies   to  come   up  against 
me;  and  this  I  could  have  done  long  since,  if- my  people  had  been 
ready  to  preach  my   gospel.     I   wished  to  give  unto  them  all  the 
opportunity  that  I  could,  and  I  have  been  very  urgent  with  them, 
because  I  wanted  them  to  be  well  prepared.     It  would  be  folly  in 
me  to  cut  off  all  mine  enemies  before  I   should  have  prepared   a 
number  of  men  to  preach  to  those   innocent  people  who  will   be 
left  alive.     I  am,  therefore,  waiting  for  those  men   whom  I   have 
called.     They  are  not  fully  prepared  to   preach   my  gospel  in  its 
fulness. 

10.  The  appointed  time  for  me  to  come  out  of  my  hiding 
place  is  when  my  servants  shall  have  prepared  themselves   for  the 
work ;  for  there  is  no  law  in  heaven  which  appoints  the  day  on  any 
other  principle.     When   I  have  a  people  to  deal  with  who  are 
altogether  ignorant  of  me  and  of  my  works,  and  who  are  called  to 
such  a  work  as  that  which  lies  before   my  servants,  the  law  of 
heaven  gives  me  the  privilege  of  doing  the  best  that  I  can  to  in- 
struct and  prepare  them  for  it.     I  am  compelled  by  law  to  destroy 
mine  enemies,  and  to  establish  my  kingdom,  and  to  save  the  world; 
but  I  am  not  compelled  by  law  to  commence  to  deliver  my  people 
on  a  certain  day.     I  have  to  do  this  when  I   can   make  all  things 
ready.     Therefore,  let  my  servants  do  all  that  lies  in   their  power 
to  learn  the   principles   of  my   gospel,   that  they  may  be  able  to 
preach  it  to  others  when  they  shall  be  sent  to  do  so.     I  am  Jesus 
Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


THE    RODS    OR    SCEPTRfiS    OF    POWER.  211 

REVELATION    SHOWING    THE    ORDER    BY    WHICH 
ALL   WORLDS   ARE    GOVERNED. 


No.  127.  WEBER,  UTAH,  November  9th,  1861.    - 

1.  LISTEN  unto  me,  for  I  am  about  to  speak  unto  you  con- 
cerning the  origin   and   order  of  all  rods,  which  are  sceptres  of 
power,  placed  in  the  hands  of  certain  men  according  to  their  birth- 

t  rights. 

2.  There  is  an  order  by  which  all  worlds  are  governed.     To 
every  world  which  has  been  created  there  are  thirteen  rods,  which 
are  used  by  fourteen  persons  who  are  at  the  head  of  the  govern- 
ment of  each  world.     The  first  rod  belongs   to  the  father,  who  is 
the  first  of  the  fourteen,  and  is  used  by  him   and  by  his  firstborn 
son  who  is  the  second  of  the  fourteen.     The  other  twelve  rods  are 
owned  and  used  by  the  remaining  twelve,  who  are  also  firstborns, 
and   whose  birthrights    immediately   follow  the  birthright   of  the 
firstborns. 

3.  The  privilege  to  use  his  father's  rod  is  granted  to  the  first- 
born son,  because  he  is  called  to  act  in  his  father's  stead.     When 
the  world  of  a  high  priest  is  in  its  first  estate,  he   is   seldom   upon 
it.     He  is  absent  on   missions,  preaching  the  gospel   upon   other 
earths  which   are   passing  through   mortality,  or   in  the  terrestrial 
and  telestial  earths,  and,   consequently,  is   almost  entirely  absent 
from  home.     And  inasmuch  as  his  world   needs   to   be   governed, 
and  he  cannot  be  at  home  himself  to  govern  it,  he   places  his  own 
sceptre  in  the  hands  of  his  firstborn  son,  and  he  rules   his  father's 
world  while  it  is  in  its  first  estate,  because  he  is  always  at  home. 
He  never   leaves  his  father's  earth  while   it  is  in  its  first  estate. 
And  when  an  earth  arrives  at  the  first  celestial  point,  where  he  is 
compelled  by  law  to  govern  his   own  earth   and   a  mortal  earth 
below  it,  which  is  depending  upon  him  to  govern,  save  and  exalt  it; 
and  inasmuch  as  a  God  cannot  leave  his  own  earth  according  to 
the  law,  and  come  down  upon  a  mortal  earth  to  lead  his  own  hosts 
out  to  battle,  he  has  to  give  unto   his  firstborn   son  the  power  to 
command  all  his  host  in  his  stead,  and  to  do  this  he  has   to  give 
unto  him  his  sceptre,  and  he  acts  in  the  name  and  by  the  authority 
of  his  father  j   and  the  hosts  of  heaven  obey  the  command  of  the 


212  THE  RODS  OR  SCEPTRES  OF  POWER. 

firstborn  son  as  though  the  Father  himself  was  there  commanding 
them. 

4.  The  inhabitants  of  a  celestial  earth  are  compelled  to  obey 
the  command  of  the  firstborn  son  when  he  acts  under  his   Father's 
authority,  and  in  his  absence.     The  father's  field  of  labor  is   upon 
his  own    earth,  among  his  own  children ;    and   the  firstborn  son's 
field  of  labor  is  upon  this  earth  when  the  full  keys  of  the  holy 
priesthood  are  upon  it. 

5.  The  duty  of  the   Eternal   Father   is   of  a  two-fold   nature.   . 
He  has  two  worlds  to  govern ;   and  in  order  to  perform  both  these 
duties,  he  remains  at  home  with  a  portion  of  his  children,   and 
sends  his  firstborn  son  with  his  host  of  warriors  to  rule  the  inhabit- 
ants of  this  earth  and  establish  his  kingdom,   destroy  the  power 
of  evil,  and  save  the  world.     This  is  the  duty  of  the  firstborn  son. 

6.  And  now,  behold,  I  speak  unto  you  concerning  the  presi- 
dent of  the  high  priesthood  upon  the  earth.     He  claims  the  right 
to  hold  a  rod  of  power  which  belongs  to  his  Father.     And  in  con- 
sequence of  his  Father  being  the  presiding  God  over  a  quorum  of 
Gods,  his  time  is  occupied  in  the  performance  of  his  own   duties, 
and  in  counselling  with  other  Gods  who  are  connected  with  him, 
therefore,  he  cannot  leave  his  own  world ;  consequently,  he  gives 
unto  his  son  his  own  sceptre,  and  sends  him  down  to  the  mortal 
earth  belonging  to  his  quorum  to  rule  it.     He  is  also  compelled  by 
law  to  swear  an  oath  in  the  presence  of  his  son  that  he  will  sustain 
him,  even  should  he  be  compelled  to  call  out  the  entire  inhabit- 
ants of  every  celestial  earth  under  his  command  in  order  to  do  so. 
The  Father  acts  in  one  place,  and  the  son  acts  in  another ;   each 
one  performing  their  separate  duties.     The  son,   in  his   Father's 
absence,  acting  for  him  and  under  his  authority, 

7.  And  it  is  the  duty  of  the  president  of  the  high  priesthood 
on  the  earth  to  command  the  heavenly  host.     He  must  raise  his 
Father's  rod  and  give  the  first  command,  and  when  he  has  done 
so,  Jesus  Christ  must  raise  his  Father's  rod,  and  give  the  second 
command  to  the  twelve  chief  generals ;   and  each  of  them  must 
also  give  their  separate  commands   in  their  own  order,  from  the 
first  to  the  last.     The  reason  that  the  seventh  angel  is  called  upon 
to  give  the  first  command  unto  the  heavenly  host,  even  before 
Jesus  gives  his  command,  is  on  account  of  his  birthright,  he  being 


THE    RODS    OR    SCEPTRES    OF    POWER.  213 

the  firstborn  son  of  a  God  who  rules  over  a  quorum  of  worlds, 
and  his  authority  must  be  acknowledged  first,  and  after  him  the 
authority  of  Jesus  must  be  acknowledged;  and  this  order  con- 
tinues from  the  first  to  the  last. 

8.  Every  world  that  is  created  is  entitled  to  thirteen  sceptres 
or  rods,  which  rods  all  proceed  from  the   first  God  of  all,   and 
they  belong  to  the  Father  and  the  twelve  firstborn -sons  to  all 
worlds,  whether  celestial,  or  mortal,  or  in  their  first  estate.     There 
is  a  set  of  rods  to  each  world,  and  those  rods  remain   upon  their 
own  separate  earths  to  be  used   by  the   firstborn  sons  upon  those 
earths  which  are  in  their  first  estate.     Those  rods   are  not  sent 
from  one   earth  to  another.     While  in  their  first  estate,  each  set 
of  rods  remain  upon  the  earths  to  which  they  belong  until  those 
earths  become  celestial. 

9.  Thirteen  rods  are  a  set ;    and  when  one  world  after  another 
becomes  celestial,  and  are  appointed,  according  to  law,  to  rule  the 
next  mortal  earth  below,  the  firstborn  son  brings  his  Father's  rod, 
and  all  the  rest  of  the  twelve  generals  bring  their  rods  with  them. 
When  they  are  sent  by  their  Father  to  establish  his  kingdom  upon 
the  earth,  and  when  they  have   done  their   work  upon  the  earth, 
and  this  world   has  become  celestialized,  then  Jesus   Christ  will 
give  his  Father  his  rod  back  again,  and  each  of  the  twelve  gen- 
erals will  keep  their  own  rods   upon  their  own  earth.     Jesus  will 
never  use  his  Father's  rod  after  he  has  done  with  it  this  time,  until 
his  Father  becomes  the  president  of  a  quorum   of  Gods;  then  I 
(Jesus  Christ)  shall  use  his  rod  again, — even  as  Moses  will  use  his 
Father's  rod  upon  this  earth. 

10.  This  is  the  order  in  which  all  worlds   are  governed;   both 
those  which  have  been  created,  and  those  which  hereafter  shall  be 
created. 

I  now  add  no  more.     I  am  the  Bright  and  Morning  Star;  even 
Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


214  INSTRUCTION    FOR    THE    SAINTS. 

REVELATION    INFORMING    THE    SAINTS    HOW    TO 

ACT   WHEN    THEIR  ENEMIES  COME  TO 

ARREST    THE    PROPHET    AND 

HIS    ASSOCIATES. 


No.  128.    t  WEBER,  UTAH,  November  gth,  1861. 

i.  WHEN  I  am  ready  to  come  in  power,  I  will  make  it  known 
to  you  in  time  for  you  to  make  all  things  ready  for  it.  You  may 
rest  yourself  perfectly  contented  upon  that  matter.  You  shall  not 
be  insulted  and  imposed  upon  by  your  enemies  much  longer. 
You  need  not  to  fear  the  threats  which  they  may  make  against  you, 
and  think  that,  when  they  come  up  against  you,  I  shall  not  be 
ready  to  meet  them,  for  I  shall.  They  cannot  come  until  I  permit 
them ;  and  I  shall  not  permit  them  until  I  am  perfectly  ready  for 
them.  You  need  not  to  trouble  yourself  about  your  enemies 
bringing  false  debts  against  you,  and  threatening  you  with  the  con- 
sequence if  you  do  not  pay  them.  They  cannot  come  upon  you 
until  the  right  time.  It  is  right  that  they  should  have  a  clue  on 
you  of  some  kind  or  another,  in  order  to  bring  them  up  against 
you.  They  will  pretend  that  what  they  do  against  my  people  will 
be  done  according  to  their  law.  They  will  bring  false  debts 
against  them,  in  order  that  they  may  have  a  pretext  to  come  up 
up  against  my  people  to  shed  their  blood ;  pretending  that  my 
people  are  thieves  and  will  not  pay  their  debts,  and,  consequently, 
deserve  to  be  slain.  They  will  come  up  to  this  place  and  strive  to 
lay  hold  of  you  and  a  few  more  chief  men  who  are  closely  con- 
nected with  you ;  and  they  will  offer  to  spare  the  lives  of  all  the 
rest  of  my  people  if  they  will  deliver  up  to  them  those  men  who 
are  the  ghief  authorities  of  my  Church.  And  in  this  manner  they 
will  lay  their  false  and  hellish  plans  in  order  to  shed  innocent 
blood.  They  wish  to  do  their  bloodthirsty  acts  under  a  pretence 
of  law ;  but  they  will  not  accomplish  their  desire ;  for  I  will  not 
favor  their  bloodthirsty  appetites  sufficiently  to  let  them  kill  one  per- 
son, either  saint  or  sinner.  I  shall  do  all  the  fighting  myself.  They 
will  shed  no  blood,  for  I  will  hold  them  as  tight  as  though  they 
were  screwed  in  a  vise,  until  I  slay  them  all.  I  shall  be  the  exe- 
cutor, and  I  shall  inflict  the  penalty  of  death  upon  those  who  are 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    THE    SAINTS.  215 

worthy  of  it.     I  shall  not  leave  that  work  to  corrupt,  bloodthirsty 
men. 

3.     And,  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  you  shall  not  pay  to 

your  enemies  any  more  unjust  debts.     And  if  they  sue  you,  and 

strive  to  bring  you  before  their  courts  of  law,  you  shall  not  go. 
And  if  they  seek  to  arrest  you,  you  shall  call  my  people  together, 
and  they  shall  show  themselves  willing  to  stand  by  you,  and  pre- 
vent your  arrest,  if  it  becomes  necessary.  Should  but  few  men 
come  to  arrest  you,  my  people  shall  surround  you,  and  when  they 
see  that  they  cannot  take  you,  they  will  go  back  without  you ;  but 
when  they  come  the  second  time,  they  will  come  with  a  great  force, 
feeling  determined  to  take  you.  I  wish  to  take  a  course  to  bring  as 
many  of  them  up  to  this  place  as  I  possibly  can, In  order  to  slay  them. 
If  a  large  number  of  them  should  come  to  take  you  at  the  first 
attempt  which  they  will  make,  then  I  shall  come  out  and  destroy 
them  all.  In  that  case,  I  shall  have  gained  the  point  that  I  am 
striving  for.  All  that  I  wish  is  to  draw  a  large  number  of  them 
up  to  this  place.  I  do  not  want  to  commence  in  this  place  with  a 
few;  and  if  but  few  come  to  try  to  take  you  in  the  first  attempt,  let 
my  people  surround  you,  as  I  have  before  said  unto  you.  They 
shall  not  be  hurt  by  their  enemies.  You  will  see  the  object  which 
I  have  in  view  for  counselling  both  you  and  my  people  in  this 
wise.  I  want  to  bring  a  large  number  of  them  up  at  the  same 
time  before  I  destroy  them.  It  matters  not  to  me  whether  they 
come  in  a  sufficient  number  at  the  first  time,  or  whether  they  shall 
have  to  come  a  second  time.  When  a  sufficient  number  of  them 
come  up  at  once,  I  will  come  out  upon  them.  I  am  compelled  to 
take  a  certain  course.  Therefore,  you  will  now  know  how  to  act 
when  your  enemies  come  up  to  take  you.  I  will  shortly  give  unto 
you  more  upon  this  subject.  Let  this  suffice  for  the  present.  I 
am  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


2l6  THE    HIGH    PRIESTS'  QUORUM. 

MANNER  OF  ORGANIZING  A  HIGH  PRIESTS' 
QUORUM. 


No.  129.  WEBER,  UTAH,  November  nth,  1861. 

1.  LISTEN   unto   me,    my   servant   Joseph,   for   I  am  about  to 
speak  unto  you  concerning  the  organizing  of  the  high  priests  who 
are  in  my  Church  into  a  quorum. 

2.  Inasmuch  as  I  have  organized   the  first   presidency  of  my 
Church,   the   apostleship,   and  the  priesthood  of  Aaron,   it    now 
becomes  necessary   for  me  to   organize  the  high  priesthood,  also. 
It  will  be  of  great  benefit  to  the  high  priests   if  they  will  do  their 
duties ;  but  if  they  do  not,  they  will  suffer  loss.     They  must  gather 
themselves  together  and  instruct  each  other,  and  seek  to  learn  the 
principles  of  the  fulness  of  my  gospel,  and  to  prepare  themselves 
to  preach   it  to  their  fellow   men.     The  high  priests  will  have  to 
bear  the  chief  burden  of  my  Church,  and  they  will  be  assisted  by 
the  priests  of  Aaron.     Much  will  be  required  at  their  hands,  and 
if  they  will  seek,  with  all  their  hearts,  to  prepare   themselves   for 
the  work  which  I  have  called  them  to  do,  I  will  be  with  them  in  a 
powerful    manner,   both  by  visions  and,  by   dreams,  and  also  by 
open  manifestations.     I  will  even   come  into  their  assemblies,  and 
meet  with  them ;  and  those  who  are  sufficiently  faithful  shall  see 
me.       They    shall   know  that  I   am   with  them  when  they  meet 
together  in  a  quorum  capacity,   for  I  will  visit  them.     It  is  their 
privilege  to  see   me  if  they  are  faithful   enough ;  and  if  they  do 
not  see  me  occasionally,  when  they  are  met  together  in  a  quorum 
capacity,  they  may  know  that  they  are  not  sufficiently  faithful.     I 
am  the  Lord,  and  lo,  I  come  quickly. 

3.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  it  is  my  will  that  my  servant 
Alexander  Dow  should  prepare  himself  to  fill  the  office  unto  which 
I  have  called  him.     I  know  his  intentions.     Let  him  seek  counsel 
from  the  mouth  of  my  servant  Joseph,  whose  right  it  is  to  instruct 
him  in  all  his  duties  in  my  Church. 

4.  All  my  people,  whether  high  or  low,  shall  seek  counsel  from 
the  mouth  of  my  servant  Joseph,  and  obey  it.     I  will  uphold  no 
person  who  opposes  him.     His  word  shall  not  be  called  in  ques- 
tion by  my  people;  but  they  shall  obey  his  word  in  all  things,  as 


ETERNAL    PROGRESSION.  217 

though  I  stood  in  their  midst  and  spoke  unto  them  myself.  I  am 
responsible  for  what  he  says  and  does ;  and  if  they  will  obey  him, 
they  will  obey  me,  for  I  am  constantly  with  him,  influencing  him, 
and  he  shall  not  go  astray ;  and,  ere  long,  all  the  world  shall  feel 
his  power.  I  am  the  Lord. 

5.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,  that  you 
shall  give  unto  my  servant  Alexander  Dow  two  counsellors,  such  as 
I  shall  show  unto  you.  And  it  would  be  well  if  you  would  gather 
the  high  priests  together  as  soon  as  you  can,  and  organize 
them  into  a  quorum.  And  let  them  meet  together  in  a 
quorum  capacity  at  least  once  in  each  week,  and  oftener, 
if  they  can  make  it  convenient  Let  them  rise  up  like  men  and 
set  themselves  against  evil.  They  are  my  high  priests,  and  I 
will  take  care  of  them  if  they  will  cling  to  me  with  all  their  hearts. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more  on  this  subject.  Let  this  suffice 
for  the  present.  I  am  the  Stone  and  Shepherd  of  Israel,  and  the 
Bright  and  Morning  Star;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen 
and  Amen. 


REVELATION  CONCERNING  THE  LAW  OF  ETERNAL 
PROGRESSION. 


No.  130.  WEBER,  UTAH,  November  nth,  1861. 

i.  WHAT  shall  I  say  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph?  I  perceive 
that  your  mind  is  much  burdened  in  relation  to  the  principle  of 
eternal  progression.  You  cannot  see  the  order  by  which,  consist- 
ently, the  second  and  third  firstborn  sons,  and  also  all  others  of 
the  sons  of  the  Gods,  who  are  heirs  by  law  to  the  godhead,  can 
become  Gods.  I  have  not,  as  yet,  revealed  unto  you  in  its  fulness 
the  principle  of  eternal  progression.  I  have  only  revealed  unt'o 
you  the  order  by  which  the  firstborn  sons  arrive  at  the  godhead. 
This  I  have  perfectly  revealed  unto  you ;  but  I  have  much  more 
to  reveal  unto  you  concerning  the  principle  of  eternal  progression. 
I  will  shortly  reveal  unto  you  the  order  by  which  all  those  who 
do  not  fall  from  exaltation  in  their  second  estate,  arrive  at  the 
godhead.  The  order  by  which  the  second  firstborn,  and  all  others 


2l8  ETERNAL    PROGRESSION. 

of  the  sons  of  the  Gods,  who  are  heirs  by  birthright  to  the  god- 
head, progress,  differs  somewhat  from  the  order  of  the  firstborn 
sons.  The  firstborn  sons  of  the  Gods  have  an  order  altogether 
different  in  its  nature  from  the  order  by  which  second  firstborn 
and  other  sons  become  Gods. 

2.  No  God  can  have  more  than   one  firstborn   son,   whom   he 
can  call  his  only  begotten  son.     Only   begotten   sons   are   of  the 
royal  blood,  and  are  of  the  first  order ;  and  the  second  born  sons 
are  of  the  second  order;  thus  all  the  sons  of  the  Gods  have  their 
rights,  and  they  follow  each  other  in  their  own   order.     The  first- 
born son  steps  out  first,  and  the  second,  in  course  of  time,  follows 
him ;  then  the  third,   and  so   on,   until  all  who  are  heirs  to  that 
blessing  step  out  to  become  Gods.     Therefore,  the  order  by  which 
the  firstborn  sons  become  Gods,  differs  in  its  nature  to  the  order 
by  which  all  the  rest  arrive  at  the  godhead. 

3.  You  may  rest  yourself  satisfied,  my  son,  in  relation  to   the 
laws  of  eternal  progression.     You  cannot  understand  the  separate 
orders  of  progression  except  I  reveal  them  unto  you.     I  deemed 
it  wise  only  to  give  unto  you  a  partial  knowledge  of  the  principles 
of  eternal  progression  and  exaltation.     I  could  not  reveal  unto  you 
all  things  at   once.     You  know  that  I   have  continued  to  reveal 
unto  you  one  principle  after  another,  from  the  time   that  I   com- 
menced  with   you  until  now.     You  know  that,  if  I  had  revealed 
the  hidden  things  of  my  kingdom  any  faster  unto  you  than  what   I 
have  done,  you  could  not  have  borne  it.     I  have  never,  since  this 
world  began,  revealed  the  hidden  mysteries  of  eternity    to    any 
other  prophet  as  fast  as  I  have  unto  you.     You  have  been  placed 
in  a  more  difficult  position,  and  have  suffered  more  than  any  other 
prophet  who  came  before  you,  or  that  will  ever  succeed   you,    and 
your  situation  compelled  me  to  drive  things  ahead.     Therefore,  I 
was  compelled  to  deal  with  you  in  a  different   manner  to  that   in 
which  I  have  ever  dealt  with  any  other  prophet ;  but  your  afflic- 
tions are  now  almost  over. 

4.  Lift  up  your  head,  and  stand  to  your  post  like  a  man,  and 
I  will  shortly  move  the  wicked  out  of  your  way.     I  know  that  you 
are   weak,   and   able  of  yourself  to  do  but  little.     I  do  not  expect 
much  of  you.     I  will  do  the  fighting.     All  that  I  require  of  you  is 
to  walk  up  to  your  post,  and  I  will  take  your  burden  upon  myself, 
and  bear  it. 


THE    DECEITFULNESS    OF    THE    WORLD.  2 19 

5.  And  now,  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  that  I  will  shortly  reveal 
unto  you  the  principles  of  eternal  progression  and  exaltation  in 
their  fulness.  Therefore,  fret  not,  neither  be  impatient,  but  wait 
my  time,  and  all  will  be  well.  I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  DECEITFULNESS  OF  THE  WORLD. 


No.  131.  WEBER,  UTAH,  November  i2th,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  you  think  that  the  law  of 
heaven  gives  great  scope  unto  the  wicked ;  even  power  to   afflict 
the  pure   in  heart  who  are  compelled  to  bear  their   insults  and 
abuse~to  such  an  extent  that  they  have  no  real  pleasure  upon  the 
earth. 

2.  Both  you  and  my  people  have  suffered  so  much  from  the 
hands  of  your  enemies,  that  you  are  induced  to  believe  that  the 
law  of  heaven  either  gives  unto  the  wicked  the   power  to  oppress 
the  righteous   to  a  painful  and  unreasonable  extent,  or  that  I  do 
not   do   my  duty  in  this  matter,  and  prevent  such  oppression ;  for 
you  consider  that  both  you  and  my  people  are  oppressed  by  them 
until  your  lives   are   a  burden  unto  you.     You  consider  that  they 
have  power  over  you,  and  that  they  trample  your  rights  under  their 
feet,  and  that  there  appears  to  be  no  help  for  you.     You  say  that 
all  that   I  have  yet  done  has  been  to  promise  to  deliver  you,  and 
that  I  have  done  this  repeatedly,  but  that  I  have  never  yet  ful- 
filled my  promises.     You  also  say  that  you  are   weary  of  waiting 
for    me.     You    consider   that    you   cannot  raise  that  amount   of 
courage   which   is  necessary  to  enable  you  to  strive  against  your 
enemies,  while  I,  apparently,  give  unto  them  the  victory  over  you. 
You  consider  that  you  cannot  struggle  against  both  them  and  me ; 
and    that  I  am   assisting  them   by  allowing  their    oppression  to 
remain  upon  you ;  and  that,  because  I  have  allowed  this   state  of 
things  to  continue  so  long,  you  can  hardly  raise  sufficient  faith  to 
believe  that  I   shall   ever  move  it  off  you.     Having  suffered  so 
much,    during  such  a  long  period  of  time,   you  think  that    the 
promise  of  God  is  news  too  good  to  be  true.     You  have  been  so 


220  THE    DECEITFULNESS    OF    THE    WORLD. 

much  accustomed  to  bear  the  oppression  and  abuse  of  your  fellow 
men,  that  you  have  become  inured  to  it ;  and  it  is  difficult  for  you 
to  hope  for  anything  better.  On  this  account  it  is  very  difficult  for 
me  to  make  you  believe  that  I  shall  ever  deliver  you  and  my  peo- 
ple, although  you  know  that,  if  I  act  according  to  the  law,  which  I 
cannot  break,  I  cannot  fail  to  deliver  my  people. 

3.  You  have   seen  but  little  in  the  world  besides  abuse  and 
deceit,  and  having  been  so  often  deceived  by  people  upon  the 
earth,  you  are  almost  afraid  to  believe  and  trust   in   me.     O  how 
hard  it  is  for  me  to  deal  with  men  upon  the  earth  !     But  you  may 
venture  with -safety  to  believe  on   my  word.     If  people   upon   the 
earth  have  deceived  you,   I   have  not,   neither  will  I  ever  do  so. 
All    my  prophets   whom   I  have  sent  upon  the  earth  have  seen  so 
much  of  its  wickedness  and  deceit,  which  are  its  leading  principles, 
that    they   have    scarcely    expected  to  meet   with   anything   else. 
When  the  truth  was  told  them,  they  could  hardly  believe  it.     Even 
when  I  spoke  unto  them,  they  were  almost  ready  to  believe  that  I 
lied,   like  unto  the  children  of  men,  who  will  not  believe  a  word 
that  comes  from  my  mouth  unless  I   give  unto  them   irresistible 
evidence  of  its  truth,  and  then  they  will  scarcely  believe  it,  fearing 
that  it  might  come  from  a  wicked  source.     Do  what  I  will,  I  can- 
not deal  with  them   with  any  degree  of  satisfaction.     The  deceit 
of  this   world  afflicts  the   minds  of  all  people  who  come  into  it 
until  they  have  no  confidence  in  each  other,  nor  yet  in  me.     It  is 
the  foundation  of  all  the  disunion,  affliction  and  sorrow  which  now 
exists  among  men. 

4.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,   my  son,  that  it  is  the  deceit 
which  yon  have  seen  in  the  world  which  has  injured  you.     You 
look  for  nothing  else  but  deceit  among  the  children  of  men.     And 
when  I  speak  unto  you,  you  can  scarcely  believe  me.     To  believe 
what   a    person   says  is  out  of  the  common  course  of  things.     O, 
that  your  mind  could  have  been  kept  unaffected   when  you  have 
seen   the   deceit  that  has   been   practiced  in  the  world.     I  could 
then,  with  greater  satisfaction  both  to  you  and  myself,  have  worked 
with  you ;  for  never  before  has  a  man  been  created  upon  the  earth 
as  unassuming,  honest,  humble  and  faithful  as  you   are.     You   are 
beloved  both  by  me  and  my  Father  above  all  men  that  ever  lived 
upon  the  earth.     You  are  even  equal,  in  honesty  and  virtue,  to  my 


THE    MISSION    OF    MOSES.  221 

Father.  Your  love  of  and  firmness  to  the  truth  surpasses  that  of 
all  others  who  ever  lived  upon  this  earth  before  you,  or  that  will 
ever  succeed  you.  And  oh,  how  it  pains  me  to  see  how  you  have 
been  injured  by  the  deceit  which  you  have  experienced  among^ 
men  !  Oh,  how  it  pains  me  to  endure  the  suspicions  of  the  man 
with  whom  I  am  so  closely  connected,  and  through  whom  I  have 
to  work  and  perform  all  my  miracles  among  men,  and  whose 
right  it  is  to  bring  down  all  power  under  his  feet !  Sut  I  will 
speedily  remove  all  suspicion  far  from  him.  It  has  greatly  afflicted 
me  in  times  past ;  but  I  shall  not  be  burdened  with  it  much  longer, 
for  I  will  suddenly  remove  it  from  him.  And  after  that,  he  will 
not  be  suspicious  of  me  any  more.  I  will  give  unto  him  all  that 
he  wishes  to  have,  and  then  he  will  be  satisfied.  I  am  the  Light 
and  Life  of  the  world ;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and 
Amen. 


REVELATION  CONCERNING  MOSES  WHEN  HE  WENT 

TO    DELIVER    THE    CHILDREN    OF  ISRAEL 

OUT  OF  THE  HANDS  OF  PHARAOH. 


No.  132.  WEBER,  UTAH,  November  i3th,  1861. 

i.  LISTEN  unto  my  words,  which  are  quick  and  powerful, 
sharper  than  a  two-edged  sword,  and  I  will  reveal  unto  you  many 
things.  You  have  often  wondered  how  I  dealt  with  my  servant 
Moses  while  I  was  performing  such  mighty  miracles  through  him, 
in  overthrowing  Pharaoh  and  destroying  Egypt.  I  was  with  him 
myself.  I  stood  by  his  side,  and  he  saw  me  before  his  eyes  con- 
tinually, even  as  one  man  sees  another.  And  I  spoke  unto  him 
mouth  to  mouth.  I  told  him  when  to  raise  his  rod,  and  when  to 
lower  it.  And  when  he  smote  the  Egyptians  with  plagues,  I  stood 
by  his  side  and  told  him  what  kind  of  a  plague  to  smite  Egypt 
with.  And  when  he,  by  virtue  of  his  authority,  pronounced  a 
curse  upon  the  Egyptians,  I  fulfilled  it.  It  was  his  duty  to  pro- 
nounce curses  upon  his  enemies,  and  it  was  my  duty  to  fulfil  them. 
Thus  we  worked  together  in  unison,  each  one  performing  his  own 
part.  If  he  had  pronounced  a  curse  upon  anything,  and  I  had  not 


222  THE    MISSION    OF    MOSES. 

fulfilled  it,  I  should  have  broken  the  celestial  law  of  heaven ;  for 
by  it  I  was  bound  to  make  his  words  good.  He  also  was  com- 
pelled by  the  same  law  not  to  pronounce  a  curse  upon  anything 
until  I  had  told  him  to  do  so.  And  he  never  broke  the  law  of 
heaven  while  he  was  upon  the  earth.  He  never  pronounced  a 
curse  upon  anything  until  I  told  him  to  do  so ;  and  his  word  never 
failed.  When  the  president  of  the  high  priesthpod  is  upon  the 
earth,  and  when  there  is  trouble  on  hand,  I  am  compelled  by  law 
to  stand  by  his  side.  I  cannot  fail  to  do  this ;  but  I  am  not  com- 
pelled by  the  "law  to  stand  by  his  side  when  he  is  not  in  trouble. 
When  he  is  surrounded  by  enemies  who  are  striving  to  destroy 
him,  if  I  did  not  come  and  stand  by  his  side  then,  I  would  have 
broken  the  law  of  heaven.  If  I  should  neglect  him  then,  I  should 
be  of  no  use  neither  to  him  nor  yet  to  my  people ;  if  I  did  that,  I 
should  entirely  neglect  my  duty ;  for  it  is  my  duty  to  fight  the 
battles  of  my  people,  and  to  establish  my  kingdom  upon  the  earth 
forever ;  and  even  when  the  president  of  the  high  priesthood  is 
upon  the  earth  it  is  my  duty  to  guard  him  when  he  is  not  ap- 
parently surrounded  by  enemies.  I  am  compelled  by  the  law  of 
heaven  to  take  care  of  him  from  his  childhood  up.  Mine  angels 
have  guarded  him  from  his  infancy ;  but  he  has  not  always  seen 
them. 

2.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,   my   servant  Joseph,   I   did 
not  give  the  rod  unto  my  servant  Moses  until  he  was  called  to  use 
it.     If  I    had  given  unto  him  the  rod  before  he  was  called  to  use 
it,  I  should  have  broken  the  law  of  heaven ;  for  it  forbids  me  the 
privilege  of  delivering  the  rod  into  your  hands  until  you  are  called 
to  use  it.     I  have  dealt  with  you  even  as  I  dealt  with  my  servant 
Moses,  for  thou  art  he,  and  my  dealings  with  him  are   always  the 
same.     Let  him  come  to  the  earth  whenever  he  may,  he  is  always 
one  with  me,  for  we  work  together. 

3.  When  my  servant  Moses  was  upon  the  earth,  and  when  I 
had  fully  prepared  him,  I  sent  him  to  Egypt  to  deliver  my  people, 
Israel.     I  met  him  there  and   delivered   unto  him  the  rod.     But 
O  how  he  did  murmur  against  me   while   I  was   raising  him   up ! 
And  when  I  sent  him  from  his  father-in-law  in   Midian  to  Pharaoh 
in  Egypt,  I  had  hard  work  to  get  him   started.     He   said  that   he 
could  not  deliver  my  people,  and  that  the  Egyptians  would  laugh 


THE    MISSION    OF    MOSES.  223 

at  him.  Even  after  I  had  given  unto  him  all  the  keys  of  the  holy 
priesthood,  I  had  hard  work  to  move  him.  I  gave  him  all  the  keys 
of  the  holy  priesthood  while  he  lived  with  his  father-in-law,  Jethro. 
I  did  not  wish  him  to  go  to  Egypt  until  I  had  (with  the  exception— 
of  placing  the  rod  in  his  hand),  fully  prepared  him  for  the  work 
which  I  had  called  him  to  do.  He  said  that  he  did  not  wish  to 
go  to  Egypt  to  be  laughed  at,  and  after  this  manner  he  contended 
with  me.  He  fought  against  me  with  all  his  might. 

5.  I  had  promised  to   meet  him  in  Egypt  and  give  unto  him 
the   rod,  and  also  the   power  necessary   for  the  work  that  I  had 
called  him  to  do;  but  he  did  not  fully  believe  me.     He  feared 
that  I   should  not  fulfil  the  promise  that  I  had  made  unto  him. 
He,   therefore,  went  to  Egypt  with  faltering  steps,  murmuring  all 
the  way  until  he  arrived  there.     Nevertheless,  I   met  him  there 
according   to  the   promise  which   I  had   made  unto  him,  and  I 
strengthened  him  until  he  was  satisfied.     And  when  he  saw  that  I 
had  fulfilled  the  promise  which  I  had  made  unto  him,  he  humbled 
himself  greatly  before   me.     At  first,  he  could  \not  believe ;  but 
when  I  had  given  unto  him  the  rod,  he  placed  all  confidence  in 
me,  and  afterwards  his  faith  never  failed.     He   had   the  strongest 
faith  that  ever  a  prophet  had  upon  the  earth. 

6.  And  behold,   I    say    unto  you  my  son  that,  after  I  shall 
have  placed  the  rod  in  your  hands,  your  faith  will   never  fail  you. 
You   will   then  suddenly  become   strong.     You  have   murmured 
against  me  many  times ;  but  you  have  not  murmured  against  me 
any  more  than  Moses  did,  although  the  spirit  that    now  dwells  in 
your  body  is  the  same  that  formerly  dwelt  in  the  body  of  Moses; 
and,  for  convenience,  I  sometimes  call  you  my  servant  Moses,  and 
at  other  times,  my   servant  Joseph.     The  bodies  that  you  have 
inhabited  are  two,  distinct  bodies,  but  the  spirit  is  the  same. 

7.  And  now,  I  say  unto  you,  lift  up  your  head  and  be  strong, 
and  know  that  I  will  be  as  faithful  unto  you  as  I  was  unto  my  ser- 
vant Moses.     You  shall  never  justly  have  cause  to  complain  of  me. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.  Let  this  suffice  for  the  present, 
and  I  will,  shortly,  speak  unto  you  again.  I  am  Jesus  Christ. 
Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


224  THE    FIRST    PRESIDENCY. THE    OLD    CHURCH. 

REVELATION    CONCERNING    THE    FIRST    PRESI- 
DENCY,   AND    THE   TWELVE    APOSTLES    OF 
THE    OLD    CHURCH. 


No.    133.  WEBER,  UTAH,  November  i4th,    1861. 

i.  LISTEN  unto  me,  my  son,  and  I  will  speak  unto  you  con- 
cerning the  apostles  of  the  old  Church.  I  gave  unto  them  a 
chance  to  save  their  lives,  but  they  would  not  accept  of  it.  They 
treated  my  words  lightly.  They  considered  them  scarcely  worthy 
of  their  notice.  They  felt  so  great  that  my  words  had  but  little 
weight  with  them.  While  I  was  sending  revelation  after  revelation 
to  them  for  their  consideration,  they  thought  that,  when  I  should 
see  that  they  would  neither  hearken  unto  them,  nor  respond  to  the 
call  which  I  made  upon  them,  I  should  give  up  the  chase.  They 
thought  that  they  had  me  fast,  and  that,  if  they  should  set  them- 
selves against  me,  I  could  do  nothing.  In  this  way  they  flat- 
tered themselves/ that  they  could  overpower  me — that  I  should  give 
up  to  them,  and  that  they  would  continue  unmolested.  They 
thought  that  they  had  all  the  bishops  and  leading  authorities  under 
their  control,  and  that  I  had  no  chance  at  all  with  them.  They 
set  themselves  against  me  with  all  their  power,  and  called  upon  all 
the  people  throughout  this  Territory,  who.  had  not  received  their 
endowments,  to  come  up  and  receive  them.  They  wanted  help 
•to  fight  against  me;  and  they  thought  that,  if  they  could  get 
all  my  people  bound  to  them  by  their  wicked  oaths,  they  would 
uphold  them  while  they  fought  against  me.  By  so  ~doing,  they 
expected  to  block  up  my  way  so  that  I  could  not  obtain  a  foot- 
hold among  my  people.  They  thought  that  when  I  should  per- 
ceive that  there  was  no  chance  for  me  I  should  (as  they  call 
it)  "let  them  slide,"  and  abandon  my  work;  but,  to  use  their 
language,  "there  is  no  back  out  to  me."  I  can  make  them  give 
way  without  any  difficulty.  They  can  neither  tie  my  hands  nor 
block  up  my  way.  They  can  make  no  bands  that  I  cannot  break, 
and  that  too,  without  putting  myself  to  much  trouble.  Oh,  their 
wickedness !  Of  all  men  who  ever  held  the  apostleship  upon  the 
earth,  they  are  the  most  corrupt ;  none  others  have  ever  insulted 
me  as  they  have.  They  have  done  all  that  lay  in  their  power  to 


THE    FIRST    PRESIDENCY THE    OLD    CHURCH.  225 

destroy  Adam's  posterity,  and  to  send  this  world  back  to  its  native 
element.  Rather  than  suffer  any  of  their  failings  to  be  brought  to 
light,  and  to  be  kno^n  by  their  fellow  men,  they  would  destroy 
Adam's  posterity,  and  disorganize  his  world.  O  what  love  they- 
have  for  their  fellow  men  ( ? )  They  are  not  worthy  of  human 
forms.  What  shepherds  my  people  have  had  to  take  care  of 
them !  My  people  may  blame  me  for  calling  and  placing  those 
men  over  them ;  but  I  did  not  call  them  all.  I  called  only  a  few 
of  them  ;  the  rest  were  called  by  men.  If  I  had  no  better  men  to 
assist  me  than  those,  I  should  be  hard  set  for  help.  I  shall  not 
forget  them  ;  but  I  will  repay  them  for  all  their  abominations 
when  I  shall  have  brought  them  to  the  place  where  I  can  do  so. 
My  people  ought  not  to  blame  me  for  their  unfaithfulness.  I  was 
compelled,  in  the  infancy  of  my  Church,  to  call  some  men  to  act 
in  the  priesthood ;  and  when  I  called  some  of  those  apostles,  I 
had  not  many  men  to  choose  from,  consequently,  I  did  the  best 
I  could. 

2.  Those  who  have  been  called  to  the  apostleship  by  Brigham 
Young,  I  never  called ;  for  I  never  spoke  unto  him.  I  never  gave 
him  the  authority  to  call  any  person  to  the  apostleship;  for  that 
right  does  not  belong  to  him.  He  took  that  authority  upon  him- 
self, as  he  has  done  in  many  other  things.  I  called  him  through 
my  servant  Joseph  Smith  to  preside  over  the  apostleship;  and  I 
never  called  him  to  fill  any  other  office  in  my  Church.  He  has 
assumed  one  thing  after  another.  He  could  not  be  satisfied  until 
he  had  placed  himself  in  Moses'  seat.  If  he  had  not  done  that 
thing,  but  had  humbled  himself  sufficiently,  his  life  would  have 
been  spared ;  but,  in  consequence  of  his  presumption,  I  shall  be 
compelled  by  law  to  move  him  out  of  Moses'  seat.  He  cannot 
sit  in  that  seat  after  I  am  ready  to  move  him  out.  If  he  had 
never  placed  himself  in  it,  it  would  never  have  become  necessary 
to  move  him  out  of  it.  When  he  placed  himself  there,  I  left  him ; 
for  I  never  sustain  that  which  I  have  not  appointed ;  and  I  never 
appoint  except  by  law.  He  unlawfully  assumed  the  rights  of 
another,  which  act  has  led  him  to  destruction ;  and  not  him  only, 
but  also  the  rest  of  the  apostles  who  are  connected  with  him. 
Had  it  not  been  for  that  act,  I  should  not  have  entirely  forsaken 
them.  I  could  not  sustain  another  in  the  place  of  my  servant 


226  THE    FIRST    PRESIDENCY. THE    OLD    CHURCH. 

Moses ;  therefore,  I  abandoned  them ;  and  when  I  did  so,  the 
devil  undertook  to  lead  them,  and  they  did  not  know  the  differ- 
ence. They  do  not  know  me  from  the  devil.  They  are  so  far 
gone  that  they  do  not  know  the  operations  of  my  holy  messengers 
from  the  operations  of  devils. 

3.  The  enquiring  mind  might  think  that  it  was  fore-ordained 
that  Brigham  Young  shquld  assume  the  place  of  the  president  of 
the  high  priesthood ;  but  it  was  not.  It  was  known  in  heaven 
that  he  would  do  that  wicked  act,  and  that  he  would  also  lead  my 
people  to  destruction ;  but  he  was  not  appointed  to  do  it.  It  was 
his  dishonesty,  presumption,  and  blindness  which  caused  him  to 
do  it.  None  of  my  people  were  fore-ordained  to  commit  sin. 
They  do  it  because  they  choose  to  do  it.  Sometimes  they  commit 
sin  wilfully ;  sometimes  on  account  of  blindness.  Some  commit 
sin  under  one  impression,  and  some  under  another;  but  none  are 
compelled  by  an  irresistible  decree  to  do  so.  If  they  were,  I 
could  not  justly  punish  them  for  it.  Such  a  principle  would  for- 
bid all  punishment  for  crime.  Some  of  those  men  who  are  at  the 
head  of  the  old  Church,  committed  sin  because  they  were  blinded 
and  overpowered  by  the  devil ;  and  others  of  them  have  com- 
mitted sin  through  their  carelessness  and  dishonesty.  They  chose 
to  do  it  because  they  loved  it.  But  the  difficulty  with  them  is 
that  when  I  offered  them  deliverance  out  of  the  hands  of  the 
devil,  they  would  not  accept  of  it,  but  continued  to  sin  against 
both  light  and  knowledge,  which  proves  that  they  are  corrupt  men. 
If  I  suffer  the  devil  to  overcome  my  servants,  and  to  lead  them 
into  bondage,  it  is  my  duty,  if  they  will  hearken  unto  me,  and 
accept  deliverance,  to  deliver  them  out  of  his  hands ;  but  if  they 
will  not,  it  proves  that  they  are  as  corrupt  as  the  devil  is  who  led 
them  into  the  sin — that  they  afe  all  of  one  mind.  I  sent  unto 
those  men  offer  after  offer.  I  pleaded  with  them  as  a  father 
pleads  with  his  son ;  and  I  promised  to  pardon  all  the  sins  which 
they  had  committed  while  they  were  in  the  hands  of  the  devil. 
Notwithstanding  all  that  I  offered  them,  they  clung  to  the  devil, 
because  they  loved  him  better  than  they  loved  me.  They  would 
not  accept  of  deliverance  out  of  his  hands.  What  are  they  worthy 
of?  They  are  worthy  of  the  same  treatment  that  the  devil  is ;  for 
they  love  the  devil  better  than  they  love  God,  and  sin  better  than 


THE    FIRST    PRESIDENCY. THE    OLD    CHURCH.  227 

righteousness.  They  ought  to  go  with  the  devil,  and  they  shall  go 
with  him.  I  will  send  them  all  off  the  earth  together ;  for  they 
surpass  in  wickedness  all  men  that  I  ever  called  to  the  priesthood 
before  them.  In  former  times  I  have  seen  my  servants  whom  I 
have  called  to  the  priesthood,  in  trouble,  and  I  have  delivered  them 
out  of  it  time  after  time,  and  they  humbled  themselves  before  me 
with  all  their  hearts,  and  felt  thankful  for  the  blessing  which  I  con- 
ferred upon  them.  But  these  men,  when  I  offered  them  deliver- 
ance, would  not  accept  of  it — they  must  be  slain ;  but  they  cannot 
wear  a  martyr's  crown.  They  have  loved  to  live  with  the  devil, 
and  they  shall  die  with  him.  They  have  been  one  with  him  in 
life,  and  in  death  they  shall  not  be  separated.  O  what  apostles 
they  are  !  They  are  a  disgrace  both  to  me  and  my  Father,  and 
I  do  not  intend  that  they  shall  take  my  name  into  their  corrupt 
mouths  very  many  more  times.  I  will  shortly  stop  their  breath. 
They  shall  not  deceive  my  people  but  a  few  more  days.  They 
use  my  name  to  obtain  an  influence  over  my  people ;  and  while 
professing  to  be  my  servants,  they  act  like  devils ;  and  thus  they 
strive  to  make  my  people  belive  that  I  am  as  corrupt  as  they  are. 
I  now  add  no  more.  I  am  the  light  and  life  of  the  world; 
even  Jesus  Chiist.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


THE    MANNER    IN    WHICH    REVELATIONS    ARE 
GIVEN    TO  THE  PROPHET. 


No.   134.  WEBER,  UTAH,  November  i5th,   1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  you  have  often  desired  to 
know  of  me  the  whole  secret  of  the  manner   in  which   revelations 
are  communicated  to  you ;  but  I   did   not   deem  it  wise  to  fully 
reveal  this  matter  unto  you  until  now. 

2.  As  I  have  often  told  you  before,  I  am  governed  by  law,  and 
I  am  compelled  to  reveal  things  unto  you  in  their  proper  order.     I 
could  not,  when  I  commenced  with  you,  reveal  unto  you  the  deep 
and  hidden  mysteries   of  my   kingdom.     I   was  obliged  to  com- 
mence with  you  in  a  small  way  first.     I  have  revealed,   and  shall 
continue  to  reveal  unto  you  from  time  to  time  as  you  are  able  to 
bear  it,  all  necessary  information. 


228          THE    MANNER    IN    WHICH    REVELATIONS    ARE    GIVEN. 

3.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  that  I  and  my  Father 
and  other  chief  authorities  who  are  nearly  related  to  us   by  birth- 
right, have  a  holy  place  where  we  meet  together  in   council ;  and 
all  the  books  which  contain  the  celestial  law,  and  all  other  laws  by 
which  all  worlds  in  their  first  and  second  estates  are  governed,  are 
in  our  possession ;  and  by  consulting  them  from  time  to  time  we 
obtain  all  the  information  necessary  to  govern   Adam's   posterity. 
All  the  laws  which  will  be  given  to  you  to  govern  this  world  are  in 
our  possession,   and  we  shall  shortly   commence  to  reveal  them 
unto  you.     You  need  not  think  that  the  time  when  I  shall  com- 
mence to  give  unto  my  people  the  law  is  a  great  way  off;  for  when 
I  once  begin,  I  will  move  things  out  of  their  way  quickly.     They 
need  not  to  think  that  I  shall  not  have  an  opportunity  to  give  unto 
them  a  law  before  the  temple  is  built,  for  I   shall.     It  will  be  one 
of  the  first  things  that  I  shall  reveal   unto  my  people   after  I   shall 
have  cut  off  mine   enemies   from  among  them.     I  shall  be  com- 
pelled to  give  unto  them   a  law   in  order  that  I  may  be  able  to 
govern  them ;  for  no  people  can  be  governed  without  a  law.     Let 
my  people  think  about  this,  and  prepare  themselves  for  it. 

4.  When  the  temple  shall  have  been  built  unto  me  in  Jackson 
County,  I  shall  then  begin  to  send  my  law  to  the  nations  of  the 
earth,  and  I  will  make  them  abide   it.     I   will   send   it   from   one 
nation  to  another,   and  I   will  cut  off  everything  that  opposes  it. 
In  establishing  it  throughout  the  earth,  I  shall   cut  off  the   earth's 
inhabitants  by   millions.     But   I   shall  not  give  the  law  unto  the 
nations  of  the  earth  as  soon  as  I  shall  give  it  unto  my  people.     My 
people  will  have  it  first,  because  they  will  need  to  be  governed  by 
it ;  for  it  is  according  to  the  decree  of  heaven  that  the  law  should 
first  be  given  unto  my  people,  that  by  abiding   it  themselves  they 
may  be  prepared  to  send  it  to  the  nations  of  the  earth.     They  will 
receive  it  many  years  before  mine  enemies  will.     They  will  receive 
it  from  me,  but  mine  enemies  will  receive  it  from  them.     This   is 
the  order  in  which  it  will  come   to  the  earth,   and  be  transferred 
from  one  nation  to  another. 

5.  And  now  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,  I  will 
make  known  unto  you  the  way  in  which  I  give  unto  you  the  revela- 
tions of  my  Father.    As  I  have  said  unto  you  before,  so  I  say  unto 
you  again — my  Father  has  a  high  council  in  heaven,  where  we  dwell, 


THE    MANNER    IN    WHICH    REVELATIONS    ARE    GIVEN.  229 

and  the  condition  of  this  earth  is  very  often  brought  before  our 
notice  by  the  ministering  angels,  whose  duty  it  is  to  minister  from 
heaven  to  the  earth,  and  from  the  earth  to  heaven.  And  behold,  I 
say  unto  you  that  we  never  give  you  a  revelation  upon  any  subject 
whatever  until  it  has  first  passed  through  our  council,  where  it  is 
first  written  by  a  recording  angel,  then  tried  by  the  law ;  after- 
wards it  is  signed  both  by  my  Father  and  myself  and  forwarded 
to  you.  We  give  unto  you  the  sense  contained  in  every  revelation 
which  we  send  unto  you.  You  do  not  speak  as  perfect  a  language 
as  we  do.  We  could  not  give  unto  you  a  revelation  in  our 
language,  except  that  you  could  speak  it.  You  know  that  you  are 
not  fluent  in  your  own  language,  and  we  have  to  convey  to  you  the 
ideas  contained  in  our  revelations  in  the  best  and  plainest  manner 
that  we  can.  If  you  were  fluent  in  your  own  language  we  could 
reveal  unto  you  more  perfectly  than  we  do ;  but  with  the  knowl- 
edge you  have  we  are  enabled  to  convey  unto  you  any  idea  that 
we  may  wish  to  convey.  There  is  not  a  perfect  language  now 
spoken  upon  the  earth,  not  even  by  those  who  are  the  most  highly 
educated  among  men.  One  nation  need  not  boast  of  its  language 
being  more  perfect  than  that  of  another  nation,  for  all  languages 
upon  the  earth  are  imperfect. 

6.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  I  am  often  by  your 
side  dictating  you  while  you  are  writing  revelations.  I  can  come 
from  heaven  unto  you  in  a  few  minutes,  according  to  your  time; 
and  when  I  cannot  conveniently  come  myself  to  dictate  you,  I 
send  one  of  the  angels  who  sit  in  council  with  my  Father  and  me, 
who  understands  all  revelations  that  we  send  unto  you,  even  as  we 
understand  them,  and  he  dictates  you,  acting  for  me,  in  my  name, 
and  by  my  authority.  I  am  very  often  with  you  myself,  although  I 
do  not  often  show  myself  unto  you  while  you  are  writing.  I  am  for- 
bidden to  show  myself  unto  you  in  a  manner  that  will  satisfy  you, 
until  I  come  to  remain  with  you.  You  will  now  understand  the 
manner  in  which  we  give  unto  the  revelations  of  our  will.  You 
should  know  that,  when  you  sit  down  to  write  a  revelation,  either 
myself,  or  one  of  the  angels  who  belong  to  the  high  council  of 
heaven,  is  by  your  sicfe  dictating  you.  We  even  put  words  into 
your  mind,  and  we  do  all  with  the  exception  of  writing  them.  I 
am  Jesus  Christ;  even  he  who  is  now  by  your  side  dictating  you. 
Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


230  THE    COMING    OF    THE  ENEMIES. 

REVELATION  CONCERNING  THE  COMING    OF   THE 

ENEMIES  AGAINST  THE  PEOPLE 

OF  THE  LORD. 


No.  135.  WEBER,  UTAH,  November  i6th,  1861. 

1.  LISTEN    unto  my   words,   which   are   quick  and  powerful, 
sharper   than   a  two-edged   sword ;  for   I  am  about  to  speak  unto 
you  concerning  your  enemies. 

2.  They  are  now  preparing  themselves  for  another  struggle  with 
my  people.     They  have   been  very  quiet  of  late ;  but  they  now 
think  that  they  will  set  themselves  in  a  way  that  will  enable  them 
to  accomplish  something  when  they  make  another  attempt.    When 
they  recently  came  up  against  my  people,  it  was  with  the  intention 
of  destroying  them ;  which  they  would  have  attempted  to  do,  had 
my  people  sufficiently  resisted  them.     But  their  plan  fell  through. 
They  did  not  then  accomplish  the  work;  therefore  they  have  to  try 
their  skill  again.     They  think  that  they  will  get  a  clear  hold  the 
next  time  that  they  try  their  luck.    They  now  feel  ashamed  of  them- 
selves on  account  of  being  foiled  in  their  attempt  to   commit  the 
bloody  act ;  and  they  think  that  before  they  quit  the  next  time 
they  try  their  hand,   they   will  make  a  clear  job  of  it.     They  feel 
determined   not  to  be  thwarted  any  more.     I  am  now  ready  for 
them.     I  will  lift  up  a  standard  against  them  when  they  come  the 
next  time,  and  they  shall  meet  with  opposition. 

3.  All    that     I     require    at     the  hands    of    the    chief    shep- 
herds  of   the  old  Church   is  to  send  a  large   company    against 
me.     This   I   require  at  their  hands;  and  if  they   do  not  do  so 
willingly,  I   will   make  them  do  it ;  for  I  will  thwart  them  in  their 
attempts  until  they  come  to  my  terms.     They  are  set  against  others 
of  my  servants  as  much  as  they  are  against  you ;  and  if  they  send 
up  but  a  few  men  to  take  either  you  or  those  men  who  are  closely 
connected  with  you,  and  of  whom  I  have  before  spoken,  my  peo- 
ple shall  prevent  them,  even  if  they  should   be  obliged  to  commit 
violence  upon  them  in  order  to  do  so.     My  people  can  prevent  a 
few  of  them  from  laying  hold  of  you,  or  any  of  my  servants,  with- 
out much   assistance  from  me;  nevertheless,  I  shall    be  present, 
and  if  my  power  is  needed,  I  shall  use  it.     But  I  do  not  wish  to 


THE    COMING    OF  THE    ENEMIES.  23! 

come  out  of  my  hiding  place  to  attend  to  a  few  of  mine  enemies. 
My  people  can  deal  with  a  few  men  themselves  if  they  are  not 
afraid  of  them,  and  are  willing  to  do  so.  My  people  need  not  to 
be  afraid  of  them  so  much  as  to  give  way  to  them,  and  let  them 
take  away  those  whom  they  will  come  for.  I  shall  try  the  in- 
tegrity of  my  people  in  this  matter,  and  see  if  they  are  willing  to 
let  mine  enemies  lay  hold  of  my  servants  and  take  them  away ; 
and  if,  in  consequence  of  such  unfaithfulness  on  the  part  of  my 
people  towards  my  servants,  I  should  be  compelled  to  step  out  to 
destroy  a  few  of  mine  enemies  at  a  time  when  I  do  not  want  to 
do  so,  I  shall  reject  and  destroy  them  all,  and  defend  my  servants 
myself. 

4.  When  mine  enemies  come,  whether  they  be  few  or  many,  I 
shall  be  here,  and  I  shall  watch  the  movements  of  my  people.     If 
my  people  will  do  as  I  command  them,  they  will  take  good   care 
of  my  servants.     Let  them  not  put  me  to  any  unnecessary  trouble 
through  their  unfaithfulness  to  my  servants ;  for  they  must  be  taken 
care  of  either  by  my  people  or  by  me.     I  do  not  require  any  im- 
possibilities at  the  hands  of  my  people.     They  ought  not  to  compel 
me  to  come  out   of  my  hiding  place  to  destroy    mine  enemies 
before  the  time.     When  a  great  number  of  them  come,  then  I  will 
come  out  and  destroy  them  all,  even  as  I  have  said.     Let  my  peo- 
ple do  what  they  can;  and  what  they  cannot  do,  I  will  do  myself. 
I  shall  try  them  to  see  whether  they  are  true  to  me,  or  not ;    and  I 
will  give   unto  them   credit   for  all  the  good  they  do.     I  am  well 
pleased  with  many  of  them,  and  I  hope  that  they   will  be  true  to 
me  in  the  day  of  trial.     I  do  not  wish  to  doubt  their  honesty,  but 
I  feel  in  duty  bound  to  put  them  on  their  guard,  in  order  that  they 
may  save  their  lives  on  that  day. 

5.  I  know  what  mortal  men  are.     They  are  weak,  and  very 
liable  to   become   excited   when  they  are  surrounded  by  enemies. 
If  they  could  keep  themselves  from  becoming  excited,  they  might 
with  safety  be  depended  upon ;  for  where  there  is  no  excitement, 
there  is  certainty.     Let  my  people  be  aware  of  excitement,  and  let 

^them  be  steady-minded,  and  then  they  can  be  depended  upon. 
Let  them  hearken  unto  my  words,  and  obey  them,  and  all  will  be 
well  with  them.  I  am  the  Light  and  Life  of  the  world;  even 
Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  arfd  Amen. 


232  HIGH  PRIESTS'  MEETINGS. 

THE    LAW    BY    WHICH    THE    HIGH     PRIESTS    ARE 

GOVERNED  WHEN    THEY    ARE    ASSEMBLED 

IN    QUORUM   CAPACITY. 


No.  136.  WEBER,  UTAH,  November  lyth,  1861. 

1.  THE  president  of  the  high  priests'  quorum  shall  be  punctual 
in  the  discharge  of  his  duties.     He  shall  take  the  lead,  and  be  an 
example  of  piety  and  goodness  to  those  who  are  of  the  same  order 
as  he  is.     He  shall  appoint  a  place  and  time  for  the  high  priests' 
quorum  to  meet ;   and,  at  the  place  and  time  appointed,  he  should 
be  the  first  to  attend.     He  shall  open  the  meeting  by  singing  and 
prayer ;  and  afterwards,  he  shall  salute  his  brethren  and  deliver  the 
first  speech,  and  in  doing  so  he  shall  not  occupy  more  than  fifteen 
minutes.     He  shall  then  deliver  the  meeting  into  the  hands  of  his 
brethren  for  them  to  occupy  the  remainder   of  the  time,  with  the 
exception  of  about  ten  minutes,  which  shall  be  left  for  him  to  offer 
such  closing  remarks  as  he  may  deem  necessary.     The  high  priests 
who  speak   shall  not  occupy   more  than  ten  minutes  each.     And 
while  they  endeavor  to  speak  in  my  name,   they  shall  seek  the 
guidance  of  the  holy  spirit,  and  if  they  will  do  so,  it  will  influence 
them  and  guide  their  tongues. 

2.  And  while  they  are  met  together  to  edify  each   other,   their 
time  shall  not  be  taken  up  by  those  who  hold  higher  authority  than 
themselves,   except  any  member  of    the  first    presidency    should 
come  into  their  assembly.     They  shall  have  full  liberty  to  address 
the  high  priests  as  the  spirit  shall  lead  them.     They  have  full 
liberty  to  speak  in   any    quorum  meeting  in  my  Church,  for  they 
preside  over  all  the  quorums  of  my  Church,   and  all  other  presi- 
dents therein  are  subject  to  them. 

3.  The  president  of  the  high  priests'  quorum  will,  if  disposed, 
have  the  liberty  to  call  on  any  of  the  apostles  to  address  the  meet- 
ings ;  but,  unless  called  upon,  the  apostles  have  no  right  to  speak 
in  the  high  priest's  meetings.     The  apostles  have  a  quorum  meet- 
ing of  their  own;  therefore,  let  them  attend  to  it,  discharge  their 
own  duties,  and  leave  the  high  priests  to  discharge  theirs. 

4.  Let  all  the  organized  quorums  of  my  Church  attend  to  their 


TO    THE    PROPHET.  233 

own  duties  (and  not  infringe  upon  each  other's  rights),   for  this   is 
lawful  and  right  in  my  sight. 

5.  And  »it  is   wisdom  that  the  high   priests  should  not  occupy 
more  than  two  hours  at  each  meeting ;  and  they  shall  close  eax:h 
meeting  with  singing  and  prayer. 

6.  I  am  the  Lord,  and  I  have  given  this  law ;  therefore,  it  shall 
be   observed  by  the  high  priests  of  my  Church   from  this  time 
henceforth.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


TO    THE    PROPHET. 


No.  137.  WEBER,  UTAH,  November  ipth,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  say  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,  that  you  need 
not  to  let  your  spirit  droop  through  fear  of  your  enemies   coming 
upon  you  before  I  am  ready  for  them.     They  cannot  come  upon 
you  too   soon  if  they  come  in  the  way  that  I  want  them  to  come; 
and  if  they  are  not  willing  to  come  up   against  my  people   in  the 
way  that  I  wish  them  to,  I  will  make  them  do  so,  if  my  people 
will  only  hearken  unto  my  words,  and  assist  me  in  the  way  that  I 
have  commanded  them  to. 

2.  I  have  been  revealing  one  principle  after  another  unto  you 
at  a  rapid  speed,  in  order  to  prepare  you  to  meet  them  when  they 
come  up  against  you.     I  have  revealed  unto  you  almost  all  that  is 
necessary  to  prepare  you   to   meet   your  enemies,  no  matter  how 
soon  they  come  up,  if  they  only  come  right.     I  can  come  up  to 
you  any  time,  even  in  a  minute's  warning.     All  that  you  need  now 
is  for  me  to  come  up  to  you  and  give  unto  you  the  rod;  and  that 
I  can  do  at  any  time  when  it  is  necessary. 

3.  You   understand  the   way  in  which  I  intend  to  work  with 
you.     You   know  the   order  in  which  the  army  of  heaven  will  go 
forth  to  war;  you  are  well   informed  upon  this  matter.     When  I 
am  by  your  side,  continually  telling  you  what  to  do,  what  more  do 
you  require   at  my  hands?     You  say  in   your   feelings  that  you 
require  nothing  more  than  that.    "But,  will  you  come  up  to  me  in 
the  way  which  you  have  promised  to  come,  and  deliver    your  own 


234  T0    THE    PROPHET. 

people  whom  you  have  gathered  together — even  those  who  have 
yielded  obedience  to  the  fulness  of  the  gospel?  Yes.  I  will 
deliver  all  those  of  my  people  who  are  worthy  to  be  delivered.  I 
will  deliver  all  those  who  are  my  friends,  who  love  the  truth. 

4.  Through  your  restlessness  I  am  compelled  to  renew  my 
promises  unto  you  repeatedly.     I  should  not  need  to  tell  you  the 
same  thing  over  and  over  again  so  many  times  as  I  have  done,  if 
you  could  place  your  confidence  in  me.      If  I  told  you  one  thing 
once  or  twice,  it  would  be  all-sufficient.     If  I   told   you  the  truth 
once,  and  you  understood  it,  it  is  all  that  is  necessary.     It  is  as 
good  as  if  I  told  you  the  same  thing  a  thousand  times  over ;  but 
you  are  not  satisfied  except  that  I  will  keep  renewing  my  promises 
unto  you  time  after  time.     You  may  set  your  mind  at  rest.     All  is 
well.     I  am  by  your  side. 

5.  And  behold,   I  say   unto  you,  that  my  people  shall  pay  no 
attention  to  the  calls  of  mine  enemies.      My  people  are  not  subject 
to  them.     I  will  tell  my  people  what  to  do   if  they  will  do  it ;  and 
I  will  take  the  responsibility  upon  myself.     I  will  see   my  people 
through  all  their  difficulties  if  they  will  do  as  I  command  them. 

6.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  I  will  watch  the  move- 
ments  of  mine  enemies,  and   I   will    make  known  unto  you  the 
plans  which  they  are  laying  to  destroy  my  people,  as  they  suppose. 
I  will  give  unto  you  all  necessary  information  from  time  to  time 
concerning  their  movements.     You   shall   not  be  taken  unawares 
by  them ;  but  when  the  test  comes,  you  will  be  perfectly  satisfied 
with  my  dealings  with  you  in  every  respect.     I  cannot  satisfy  you 
until  the  test  comes ;  then  I  can  satisfy  you.     You  do  not  need  to 
be  afraid  of  it  coming ;  for  when  it  comes,  both  you  and    my  peo- 
ple will  be  liberated.     You  will  then  be  set  free,  and  you  will  have 
the  liberty  to  travel  where  you  wish  to  without  the  fear  of  being 
molested  by  an  enemy.     You   will  not   feel   your  weakness  after 
that ;  therefore,   prepare,   for  it   is  close  upon  you.     I  am  Jesus 
Christ,   the   Son   of  the   Eternal   Father.     Even  so.     Amen  and 
Amen. 


TO    THE    PROPHET. 


TO    THE    PROPHET. 


No.  138.  WEBER,  UTAH,  November  ipth,  1861. 

.  You  say  that  you  are  satisfied  that  I  could  give  unto  you  the 
theory  of  the  fulness  of  my  gospel.  You  are  satisfied  that  I  have 
the  power  to  reveal  unto  you  the  secret  things  of  eternity ;  in  this 
respect  you  are  satisfied.  But  you  say  that  you  are  not  satisfied 
in  relation  to  my  power.  You  say  that  you  do  not  know  to  your 
satisfaction  whether  I  have  the  power  to  cut  off  mine  enemies,  or 
not.  O,  how  hard  it  is  for  me  to  deal  with  you.  You  have  not 
confidence  to  believe  that  I  shall  give  unto  you  the  power  over, 
your  enemies ;  but  you  almost  believe  that  I  shall  leave  you,  and 
let  your  enemies  take  you,  and  do  what  they  like  with  you.  You 
actually  believe  that  I  will  not  sustain  you.  You  think  that  I  have 
let  them  drive  you  from  place  to  place,  and  that  I  have  always 
given  them  power  over  you;  and  you  cannot  think  that  I  ever 
intend  to  stay  their  course.  If  I  had  intended  to  let  the  people 
of  this  Territory  go  on  as  they  were  doing,  I  should  not  have  inter- 
rupted them  in  their  course,  and,  consequently  I  should  not 
have  called  you,  and  afflicted  you  with  them.  You  know  that  I 
have  done  nothing,  as  yet,  but  give  unto  you  the  keys  of  the  holy 
priesthood.  I  know  that  I  have  done  but  little,  as  yet.  I  have 
only  been  preparing  you  for  your  work.  I  will  satisfy  you 
that  I  have  the  power  when  the  enemies  come  up  against  me. 
You  must  place  confidence  in  me,  and  go  on  following  the  dic- 
tates of  my  holy  messengers.  And  as  I  have  satisfied  you  with 
the  theory,  I  will  satisfy  you  with  the  power ;  therefore,  go  on, 
and  be  steadfast.  I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and 
Amen. 


236  THE    SAINTS    COUNSELLED    TO    RESIST. 

THE    LORD    PROMISES    TO   VISIT   THE  PROPHET. 
THE  SAINTS  COUNSELLED  TO  RESIST 
THEIR    ENEMIES. 


No.  139.  WEBER,  UTAH,  November  20th,  1861.  . 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Life  and  Light  of  the  world ;  even  he  who 
moves  forth  in  the  midst  of  darkness,  and  the  darkness  compre- 
hendeth  him  not.     And  I  am  about  to  speak  unto  you,  my  servant 
Joseph.     I  am  now  by  your  side  dictating  you ;  therefore,  hearken 
diligently  to  that  which  I  am  about  to  make  known  unto  you ;  for  you 
will  soon  witness  great  scenes.     My  Father  has  sent  me  specially  to 
reveal  things  of  great  importance  unto  you.      I  have  done  all  that 
lay   in  my   power  to  inform  your  judgment,  and  to  post  you  up; 
and  I  shall  now  begin  to  work  with  you  in  a  more  powerful   man- 
ner.    I  am  now  compelled  to  draw  near  unto  you ;  therefore,  pre- 
pare yourself  to  come  into  my  presence,  for  in  a  few  days   I   shall 
unveil  my  face  unto  you,  and  you  shall  see  my  glory.     And  you 
shall  see  all  things  as  they  are  with  me.     I  know  your  desires,  and 
you  shall  be  satisfied. 

2.  Your  enemies  are  determined  to  destroy  you,  and  with  you 
a  number  of  my  servants,  if  they  themselves  are  not  destroyed  in 
the  attempt.     They  say  that  they  see  clearly  enough  that   my  peo- 
ple will  not  humble  themselves  and  be  obedient  unto  them.     They 
say  that  they  have   already  twice  tried  my  people,  and  they  have 
bid  defiance  to  them  and  trampled  their  words  under  their  feet  as 
a  thing  of  naught,   and   they  will  not  endure  it.     They  say,  also, 
that  they  will  slay  every  person  that  has   yielded  obedience  to  the 
fulness  of  my  gospel.     They  should  say,   "  If  we  are  not  slain  our- 
selves in  the  attempt."     They  think  that  their  dignity  has  been 
greatly  insulted  by  my  people. 

3.  When  I  sent  to  their  chief  shepherds  revelation  after  revela- 
tion  for  their  consideration,  they  trampled  my  words  under  their 
feet  as  an  idle  tale,  and  thereby  greatly  insulted  my  dignity ;  and  I 
might  have  said  that  I  would  not  bear  it.     They  did  not  care  for 
my  rights,  or  for  my  dignity   either ;  but   I   bore  their  insults.      I 
did  not  come  out  upon  them  and  cut  them  off  as  soon  as  they  had 


THE    SAINTS    COUNSELLED    TO    RESIST.  237 

insulted  me.  I  sent  unto  them  more  than  thirty  revelations  and 
addresses,  and  they  treated  them  as  idle  tales,  and  even  mocked 
me.  They  thought  that  it  was  beneath  their  dignity  even  to  open 
one  of  those  revelations  and  look  at  it.  They  thought  that  they 
would  be  disgraced  by  such  an  act,  especially  if  any  person  of  as 
noble  blood  as  they  are  of  saw  them  doing  so.  O  no,  they  could  not 
bear  to  hearken  to  a  word  that  had  come  from  the  mouths  of  per- 
sons so  low  and  degraded  as  my  Father  and  I.  They  felt  that 
they  were  of  blood  too  noble  (?)  to  waste  their  precious  time  in 
hearkening  to  such  mean,  degraded  persons  as  we  are !  This  is 
the  spirit  in  which  they  treated  the  words  of  my  mouth.  And 
now,  when  I  have  but  just  begun  to  cross  their  path,  and  to  oppose 
them  in  the  least,  they  are  anxious  to  shed  blood.  They  cannot 
endure  the  least  opposition ;  but  they  thirst  for  the  blood  of  every 
person  who  opposes  them  in  the  least.  I  will  give  unto  them 
blood  enough  before  they  will  be  many  days  older.  I  will  destroy 
every  person  from  among  the  people  that  has  a  desire  to  shed  the 
blood  of  his  fellow  men.  And  when  I  begin  I  will  remove  that 
spirit  from  among  the  people. 

4.  My  people  have  long   desired  to   see   a  change  of  things. 
They  will  soon  see  it;  and  it  will  he  well  for  those  who  are  worthy 
of  deliverance.     Let  all   my   people  strive   to    prove    themselves 
worthy,  that  it  may  be  well  with  them.     I  greatly  fear  that  there 
are  some  of  my  people  who  will  be  caught  in  a  snare.     It  appears 
that  I  shall   not  be  able  to  make  them  understand  it  until  it  comes 
upon  them,  and  then  it  will  be  too  late.     I  have   told  my  people 
what  to  do  to  save  their  lives,  if  they  will   but   do   it ;  but.  if  they 
will  not,  they  must  suffer  the  consequences. 

5.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  that  if  but   a  few   of 
mine  enemies  come  to  take  away  any  of  my  servants,  let  one  or 
two  of  my  servants,  who  are  brave  and  fearless,  walk  up  to  them 
and  ask  them  what  they  have  come  for.     And  if  they  say  that  they 
have   come   to  take  away  any  of  my  servants,  tell  them  that  they 
cannot  take   them   without  taking  all   my  people.     And  let  my 
servants   tell  them  to  go   about  their  business,  and  the  next  time 
they   come,   bring  a   sufficient  force  to  take  all  my  people ;  other- 
wise, they  shall  not  take  away  one  of  them.     Tell  them   that   my 
people  will  either  sink  or  swim  together.     And  if,  after  my  servants 


238  THE    SAINTS    COUNSELLED    TO    RESIST. 

shall  have  delivered  this  message  unto  them,  they  will  not  go  away, 
but  shall  still  continue  to  press  on,  and  seek  to  lay  hold  of  those 
persons  for  whom  they  came,  my  people  shall  hinder  them,  even 
if,  in  order  to  do  so,  they  have  to  commit  violence  upon  them. 
Yea,  they  shall  prevent  them  from  taking  any  of  my  servants,  even 
though  they  should  be  compelled  to  slay  them ;  and  I  will  hold  my 
people  guiltless.  Mine  enemies  shall  not  lay  hold  of  any  one  of 
my  servants  upon  any  consideration  whatever.  My  servants  shall 
not  be  polluted  by  their  filthy  hands.  Let  none  of  my  servants 
shake  hands  with  them;  for  if  they  do,  I  will  not  hold  them  guilt- 
less. Let  my  people  keep  their  hands  clean.  They  must  not 
shake  hands  with  their  enemies,  for,  by  so  doing,  they  would  show 
that  they  were  one  with  them ;  and  they  cannot,  at  the  same  time, 
be  one  with  me  and  one  with  mine  enemies  too.  Therefore,  let 
my  people  keep  their  hands  and  hearts  clean,  that  I  may  bless 
them. 

6.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  it  would  be  well  for 
my  people  to  remain  at  home  as  much  as  they  possibly  can.  They 
will  soon  be  needed;  and  when  their  presence  is  needed  here, 
they  must  not  be  absent.  They  must  not  leave  this  place  more 
than  one  day  at  once.  When  they  leave  in  the  morning  they  must 
return  at  evening.  Let  my  people  pay  attention  to  what  I  say, 
and  I  will  be  with  them  unto  the  end.  I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even 
so.  Amen  and  Amen. ' 


THE  LORD   PROMISES    TO    SMITE    HIS    ENEMIES 
WITH    WEAKNESS. 


No.   140.  WEBER,  UTAH,  November  2ist,   1861. 

i.  LISTEN  unto  my  words,  which  are  quick  and  powerful, 
sharper  than  a  two-edged  sword ;  and  lo,  I  shall  come  unto  you 
quickly.  Prepare  for  me ;  for,  as  I  have  said  unto  you  before,  so 
I  say  unto  you  again, — I  shall  ride  up  to  you  in  a  few  days,  and 
talk  with  you.  I  shall  raise  up  the  veil  that  hides  all  the  heavenly 
hosts  from  your  view,  and  I  shall  let  you  see  them  as  they  are. 


THE    ENEMIES    TO    BE    SMITTEN    WITH    WEAKNESS.  239 

And  after  I  shall  have  raised  up  the  veil,  I  shall  not  drop  it  again 
while  you  are  in  trouble  with  your  enemies.  At  such  times,  both 
myself  and  the  armies  of  heaven  will  be  in  your  sight  continually. 

2.  And  behold,  I  say   unto  you,  it  would   be  well  for  you  to 
make  yourself  perfectly  familiar  with  the  "signs  of  command," 
for  you  will  soon  be  called  to  use  them.     I   shall  be  with  you  at 
that  time;   and  on  that  day  we  shall  stand  together;   and   I  will 
instruct  you — even  mouth  to   mouth ;   therefore,   prepare  yourself 
to  meet  me. 

3.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you  that,  if  but  few  of  mine  enemies 
come  up  to  take  my  servants,  and  my  people  resist  them,  and  send 
them  back  without  those  for  whom  they  come,  they  will  soon  come 
up  against  my  people  with   a  large  force,  determined,  as  they  will 
suppose,  to  make  clean  work  of  it.     My  people  may  conclude  that 
when  mine  enemies  are  resisted,  the  battle  will  have  begun,  and 
that  it  will  soon  be  over.     Let  my  people  be  brave  and  fearless, 
and  I  will  be  by  their  side. 

4.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you  my  servant  Joseph  that,  if  but 
a  few  of  mine  enemies  come  to  take  away  my  servants,  I  will  smite 
them  with  weakness,  and  they  shall  feel  as  though  they  had  no 
power  to  do  anything  with  my   people.     I   will  give   my  people 
power  over  them ;    for  I  will  inspire  my  people  greatly.     But  if  a 
large  number  of  mine  enemies   come  up  against   my  people  the 
first  time,  I  shall  have   gained  the  point   which   I  wish  to  gain, 
without  putting  my  people  to  the  trouble  of  resisting  them,   and 
sending  them  back.     I  will  watch  their  movements.     They  can- 
not take  me  wrong.    I  shall  be  ready,  and  shall  be  here  waiting  for 
them  when  they  come,  whether  they  be  few  or  many.     I  will  make 
known  unto  you,  beforehand,  the   way  in   which  they  intend  to 
come,   so  that   you  may   prepare  to   meet  them;   therefore,   you 
need  not  to  give  yourself  any  trouble  about  it ;  for   they   cannot 
come  upon  you  wrong.     I  am  ready  for  them.      If  they  determine 
to  come  up  in  a  large  company  at  first,  I  shall  know  it,  and  I  shall 
visit  you  before  they  arrive,  and,  at  that  time,  I  will  talk  to  you 
face  to  face.     I  will  unvail  both  myself  and  all  the   heavenly  hosts 
unto  you.     You  shall  see  us  plainly.     And  at  that  time  I  will  give 
unto  you  the  rod,  as  I  have  said  unto  you  before.     And  after   I 
shall  have  given  unto  you  the  rod,  you  will  see  a  great  slaughter. 


240  THE    ENEMIES    TO    BE    SMITTEN    WITH    WEAKNESS. 

I  shall  slay  many  thousands  on  that  day.  There  will  be  dead 
bodies  laying  in  every  settlement  in  this  Territory.  I  will  cut  off 
mine  enemies  in  this  Territory,  even  as  I  cut  off  the  firstborn  of 
Egypt.  I  will  see  whether  I  cannot  open  the  eyes  of  the  people, 
and  make  them  look  around  them.  They  will  want  to  know  what 
the  matter  is.  I  shall  leave  the  people  without  a  shepherd  ;  for 
those  are  the  men  that  I  shall  cut  off  at  the  time  of  the  first 
destruction.  I  shall  station  my  angels  in  every  settlement  in  this 
Territory.  And  when  the  command  is  given  by  you  to  the 
heavenly  hosts,  I  will  give  my  command  to  the  generals,  and  they 
will  give  the  command  to  the  hosts  of  heaven.  And  those  who 
will  be  cut  off  will  all  fall  dead  at  about  the  same  time ;  for  mine 
angels  will  smite  them  dead  as  soon  as  the  command  shall  have 
been  given  unto  them. 

5.  And  as  I  said  unto  you  before,  so  I  say  unto  you  again, — 
if  but  few  of  mine  enemies  come  up  at  the  first,  I  will  smite  them 
with  weakness,  and,  in  this  way,  I  will  give  my  people  power  over 
them ;  but,  in  that  case,  I  shall  not  show  myself  unto  you.    Should 
but  few  of  them  come,  and  my  people  resist  them,  and  send  them 
back,  after  their  departure  I  will  speedily  visit  you,   and  prepare 
you  to  meet  them  when  they  come  the  second  time.     Should  they 
be  compelled  to  come  a  second  time,  they  will  bring  a  large  force 
with  them.     They  will  set  themselves,  as  they  suppose,  so  as  not 
to  be  disappointed  more  than  once.     All  things  will   work  well. 
I  can  bring  them  to  my  terms. 

6.  Let  my  people  do  their  duty,  and  should  it  become  neces- 
sary, assist  me  in  the  way  that  I   have  appointed,  and   all   will  be 
well.     I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    CONCERNING    THE    ROD    OF   MOSES 
AND  THE  BIRTHRIGHT  OF  JOHN  BANKS. 


No.  141.  WEBER,  UTAH,  November  22nd,  1861. 

i.  INASMUCH  as  you  desire  to  know  of  me  as  to  the  manner 
in  which  you  shall  act  after  I  shall  have  placed  the  rod  in  your 
hand,  I  will  make  it  known  unto  you.  I  have  told  you  before  that 


ROD    OF    MPSES. BIRTHRIGHT    OF    JOHN    BANKS.  241 

I  shall  stand  by  your  side  at  that  time  to  tell  you  what  to  do ;  but, 
inasmuch  as  you  press  me,  I  will  make  known  unto  you  all  that  I 
can  concerning  that  matter.  You  will  not  let  me  rest.  You  want 
to  know  all  that  you  possibly  can  beforehand.  You  are  so  afraid_ 
of  being  entrapped  that  you  do  not  like  to  trust  yourself  in  my 
care.  You  are  afraid  lest  I  should  fail  when  both  you  and  my 
people  are  in  your  greatest  difficulties.  You  say  that  you  could 
rest  satisfied  if  you  could  only  feel  sure  that  I  shall  come  to  you 
when  trouble  is  near.  You  fear  lest  there  should  be  some  failure 
made,  which  may  cause  both  you  and  my  people  to  lose  the  cast. 
If,  through  my  neglect,  my  people  should  Lose  the  cast,  I  should 
have  to  bear  the  blame  myself;  but  I  shall  never  make  a  failure.  I 
never  did  such  a  thing,  nor  I  never  shall.  You  may  safely  depend 
upon  me.  See  that  you  do  your  own  duty,  and  all  will  be  right 
with  you.  None  will  suffer  but  those  who  neglect  their  duty. 
This  is  a  time  when  all  my  people  must  either  do  their  duties  or 
perish. 

2.  When  the  day  of  my  power  shall- have  arrived,  none  of  my 
people  will  be  able  to  depart  from  me  and  live  upon  the  earth.     I 
shall  slay  all  those  who  depart  from  me  at  that  time.     Any  person 
who  yields  obedience  to  the  fulness  of  my   gospel,  and   afterwards 
turns  away  from  it,  shall  be  destroyed ;  for  death  is  the  penalty  fc  r 
that  crime.     Therefore,  let  my  people  be  aware  how  they  act  after 
they  have  obeyed  the  fulness  of  my  gospel,  in  order  that  they  may 
save  their  lives. 

3.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,  that  I  will 
make  known  unto  you  the  way  in  which  you  shall  act  after  I  shall 
have  placed  the  rod  in  your  hand.     When  you  raise   it,   you   shall 
hold  it  up  until  I  tell  you  to  lower  it.     You  will  have  to  hold  it  up 
until   I  shall  have  cut  off  many  thousands  of  people,  even  until  I 
shall  have  cut  off  all  those  who  will  be  slain  at  the  first  cutting  off. 

4.  And  behold,    I   say  unto  you,  the  rod  is  very  heavy.     You 
cannot  hold   it  up  long  yourself.     You   will  have  to  hold  it  up  a 
long  time.     You   will  be  obliged  to  call   upon  my  servant  John 
Banks  to  hold  up  your  arm ;  that  is  his  right,  for  he  is  your  coun- 
sellor and  spokesman  by  birthright.     He  held   up  your  arm  many 
times  while  you   were   leading  the  children  of  Israel.     There  are 
but  three  persons   now  living   upon  the  earth  whose  birthright  is 


242  JOHN  BANKS. RICHARD  COOK. 

greater  than  his.  Your  first  counsellor,  Brigham  Young,  I  shall 
destroy ;  and  my  servant  John  Banks  will  then  stand  next  to  you 
by  birthright  as  a  counsellor.  Those  who  are  now  living  upon  the 
earth,  whose  birthright  is  greater  than  that  of  my  servant  John 
Banks,  will  be  called  to  fill  other  places — they  will  not  be  coun- 
sellors to  you. 

5.  If  your  first   counsellor  had  done  his  duty,  and  opened  up 
the  way  for  you  when  I  sent  you  to  him,   he  would  have   retained 
his  place;  but,  on  account  of  his  altogether  refusing  to  do  his  duty, 
I  was  compelled  to  call  another  to  fill  his  place.     I  have  called  my 
servant   Richard  Cook  t6  fill  that  office.     It  is  a  gift  that  I  have 
given  unto  him   because  he  assisted  you  to  commence  my  work. 
He  can  hold  that  place  if  he  continues  faithful ;  otherwise,  he  will 
lose  it.     Let  him  be  aware  lest  he  be  overcome  by  the  destroyer ; 
for  Satan  will  seek  to  try  him  greatly.     He  must   endeavor  to  be 
more  patient.     He  needs  not  to  fear ;  all  things  will  end  aright. 

6.  Let  my  servants  hearken  unto  my  words,  and  act  faithfully 
in  the  places  which  I  have  appointed  unto  them,  and  I  will  be  with 
them   unto  the  end.     I  am  the  Son  of  the  Eternal  Father;  even 
Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


THOSE    WHO    BELIEVE,    AND    WHO    HAVE    NOT 
GATHERED   TO    SOUTH   WEBER,    ARE    COM- 
MANDED TO  DO  SO  IMMEDIATELY. 


No.  142.  WEBER,  UTAH,  November  23rd,  1861. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  Jesus  Christ,  and  I  am  come  to  speak  unto 
you,  my  servant  Joseph,  concerning  my  people.  They  wish  to 
know  what  I  am  going  to  do  with  them.  They  say  that  winter  is 
coming  upon  them,  and  they  begin  to  fear.  They  say  that  they 
did  not  expect  to  be  here  at  this  season  of  the  year;  and  they 
begin  to  fear  lest  I  should  allow  them  to  suffer  by  the  winter's 
blast.  They  wish  to  know  what  I  am  going  to  do  with  them  after 
I  shall  have  come  out  in  power.  They  consider  that  they  will 
want  homes. 


COMMANDED    TO    MOVE    TO    SOUTH    WEBER.  243 

2.  Hearken  unto  me,.  O  my  people,  and  I  will  tell   you  what 
I  intend  to   do  with  you.      I  will  cut  a  clear  way  through  your 
enemies ;    and  to  all  who  will  be  spared  to  need  them,  I  will  fur- 
nish homes.     I  will  cut  off  so  many  of  the   inhabitants   of  GreaL 
Salt  Lake  City  thai  few  of  them  will  be  left  alive.     That  City  will 
be  left  almost  without  inhabitants;  for  it  is  one  of  the  most  wicked 
places  upon  the  earth.     Its  inhabitants   will  commit  all  manner  of 
abominations,  and  justify  themselves  in  doing  so. 

3.  After  the  first  scourge  is  over,  there  will  be  plenty  of  room 
in  that  City  for  my  people,  and  they  will  not  be  molested   much 
by  those  who  will  be  left.     Therefore,  after  the  scourge  is  past,  I 
shall  send  my  people  down  to  that  City,  and  I  shall  there  furnish 
them  with  homes.    They  will  be  well  provided  for  in  every  respect, 
and  they  will  not  be  trampled  upon  by  their  enemies ;    for  there 
will  be  but  few  of  them  left  to  trouble  my  people. 

4.  And  most  of  those  of  mine  enemies  who  will   be  left  alive 
will  be  silent;  for  they  will  find  out  that  that  will  be  the  best  thing 
that  they  can  do.     There  will,  therefore,  be  a  calm  among  mine 
enemies^  in  this  Territory.      They  will  think    a    great   deal    and 
say  but  little.     They  will  fear  and  tremble  exceedingly.     But  at 
the  present  time  I  have  thousands  of  enemies  among  the  members 
of  the  old  Church,  both  those   who  are  heirs   to  the  resurrection 
and  those  who  are  high  priests,  who  are  ready  to  gnash  their  teeth 
with  rage  and  agony.     They   feel  as  though  they  would  like  to 
hurl  me  from  my  throne.     They  seem  to  consider  that  I  am   the 
worst  enemy  they  have.     They  say  in  their  feelings  that  if  it  was 
not  for  me  they  would  not  care;   that  they  could  go  on  trampling 
the  poor  of  my  people  under  their  feet   unmolested.     Oh,  how  it 
pains  them  when  they  hear  that  I  am  at  work !     They  believe  and 
tremble. 

5.  Though  many  of  those  people  who  are   in   the   old  Church 
are  fallen  spirits,  many  of  them   know  that  I  have  commenced  a  ' 
work  upon  the  earth.     There  is  not  an  angel  in  heaven  nor  a  spirit 
that  is  damned  in  hell  that  does  not  know  it.    Even  all  the  inhabit- 
ants of  the  spirit  worlds  know  it.      But,  although  fallen  spirits  who 
are  clothed  in  mortality   know  that   I  have  commenced  a  work 
upon   the   earth,   and   that  they   cannot   stay   my  hand,   yet  such 
knowledge  will  not  prevent  them  from  fighting   against  me.     They 


244         COMMANDED  TO  MOVE  TO  SOUTH  WEBER. 

will  fight  against  me  until  the  last  minute  that  they  are  permitted 
to  live. 

6.  And  when  those  who  are  heirs   of  salvation  are  entirely  led 
by  fallen  spirits,  they  will  do  the  same  thing.     This  is   the  reason 
why  I   shall   be  compelled  to  destroy  so  many  of  them  with  the 
fallen  spirits.      They  have    entirely  given  up  their  judgment  to 
others  who  are  fallen   spirits ;   and  having  devils   as   guides,  they 
are  led  by  them.     Having  resigned  their  judgment,  I  cannot  work 
with  them ;   but  I  can  convince  those  of  the   truth   who  use  their 
ownjudgment ;  and  this  I  am  in  duty  bound  to  do. 

7.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  it  is  my   will  that  all 
those  who  have  yielded  obedience  unto  the  fulness  of  my  gospel, 
and  who  are  now  absent  from  this   place,    should   gather   here   as 
soon  as  they  can,  or  they  will  see  great  trouble.     My  people  must 
gather  themselves  together,  and  set  themselves  for  the  test,   for  it 
is  close  upon  them. 

8.  And  if  there  are  any  people  in  the  surrounding  settlements 
who  believe,  but  who  have  not,  as  yet,  yielded  obedience  unto  the 
fulness  of  my  gospel,  let.  them  also  gather  to  this  place  as  ^soon  as 
they  can ;  and  let  them  lose   no  time,  that  it  may  be  well  with 
them.     I  will  provide  for  all  those  who  will  hearken  diligently  to 
my  words  and  obey  them.     Therefore,  let  those  who  know  my  will 
concerning  them,  obey  it,  or  they  will  be  beaten  with  many  stripes. 

I  now  add  no  more.     I   am  Jesus  Christ.     Even   so.     Amen 
and  Amen, 


REVELATION  TO  THE  PROPHET  ON  IMPORTANT 
MATTERS. 


No.   143.  WEBER,  UTAH,  November  24th,   1861. 

i.  LISTEN  unto  me,  my  son,  for  I  am  about  to  make  known 
unto  you  things  of  great  importance.  I  promised  to  give  unto 
you  timely  warning,  in  order  that  you  might  prepare  both  yourself 
and  this  people  for  the  great  test  which  is  at  hand.  You  will  not 
live  in  pain  but  a  short  time  longer.  I  am  pained  to  see  you.  I 
see  that  you  cannot  lay  hol'd  of  the  promises  which  I  have  made 


TO    THE    PROPHET.  245 

unto  you.     If  you  could,    it  would  greatly   relieve  you  of  an  un- 
neccessary  burden  which  you  carry. 

2.  I  commanded  you  to  gather  together  all  my  people  who  are 
absent  from   this  place.     They  will  not  have  much  time  allotted-., 
them  to  gather  up  here.     I  told  you  that  I  would  not  leave  you  in 
the  dark  as  to  the  time  when  I  intended  to  come  out  of  my  hiding 
place  and  sweep  away  the  wicked  from  among  the  pure  of  my  peo- 
ple.    It  is  necessary   that   you  should  know  something  about  the 
time  when  I  intended  to  do  this. 

3.  You  know  that    I  have  been   backward  in  revealing  some 
things  unto  you  for  a  wise  purpose  in  myself.     As  the  time   draws 
near  I   will  draw   nearer  unto  you;  and  I  will  reveal  unto  you 
all  hidden  things   which   you  ought  to  know.     I  shall   draw  as 
close  up  to  you,  from  day  to  day,  as  your  enemies  do ;  and   when 
they  are  about  to  come  upon  you,  I  will  visit  you  before  they  do; 
and  when  they  come  up  to  you,  I  shall  have  fully  prepared  you  to 
meet  them. 

4.  If  I  should  give  unto  you  the  rod  now,  mine  enemies  would 
get  to  hear  of  it,  and  they  would  be  afraid  to  come  up  against  me, 
and  it  would  break  up  my  arrangements  with   mine  enemies.     It 
would  bring  them  all  into  confusion.     It  would  fill  them  with  fear; 
and  they  would  not  be  able  to  raise  courage   to  come  up  against 
me;  and  in  this  manner  it  would  disarrange  all  my  business,  and, 
thereby,    I   should   break  the  hold   which  I  now  have  on  them. 
They  would  not  come  up  against  me  now.     It  would  strike  terror 
to  their  hearts  which  they  could  not  soon  shake  off.     It  is  as  much 
as  they  can  well  do  now  to  raise  the  courage  to  come  up  against 
me.     Their  hearts  even  pain  them  now  at  the  thoughts  of  coming 
up  against  me ;  therefore,  I  deem  it,  wise  to  keep  all  things  as   still 
as  I  possibly  can,  to  give  them  a  chance.     It  is  their  duty  to  start 
the  test;  and  after  they  have  started  the  work  it  is  my  duty  to 
finish  it ;  and  I  will  finish  it  effectually. 

5.  And  now  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  prepare  yourself 
to  meet  me,  for  I  am  coming  up  to  you  quickly;  for   not  many 
days  will  pass  away  before  I  shall  visit  you,  and  place  the  rod 
in  your  hand.     Prepare  yourself  to  receive  it ;  for  I  will  lay  many 
thousands   low  before  that  time  comes,      I    deemed    it    wise   to 
reveal  unto  you,   within   a  few  days,  the  time  when  I  intended  to 


246  THE    CONFLICT. 

come  out  to  destroy  mine  enemies.  The  day  and  the  hour  I  shall 
not  make  known  unto  you  until  it  comes ;  but  I  have  told  you 
near  enough  for  you  to  prepare  for  it.  It  will  come  soon 
enough  whether  you  and  my  people  are  ready  for  it,  or  not.  You 
say  that  you  are  ready  as  soon  as  I  have  placed  the  rod  in  your 
hand.  You  consider  that  you  are  waiting  for  me.  You  say  that 
you  wish  me  to  come  up  to  you  and  fully  prepare  you  for,  the  work. 
You  consider  that  the  whole  work  is  waiting  for  me.  We  shall 
soon  see  whether  it  is,  or  not.  You  will  find  that  when  it  comes, 
it  will  be  soon  enough  both  for  you  and  my  people.  You  will  see 
that  you  are  none  too  well  prepared  for  it.  Therefore,  listen  unto 
my  words,  and  obey  them,  and  all  will  be  well.  I  am  the  Stone 
and  Shepherd  of  Israel;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen 
and  Amen. 


THE    COMING    CONFLICT. 


No.  144.  WEBER,  UTAH,  November  26th,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  that  it  is  necessary  for  me 
to    speak   unto  you  again  concerning  mine   enemies.     They  are 
now  placed  in  a  position  where  they  are  either  compelled  to  come 
up  against  my  people,  or  else  to  give  up  to  them.    I  am  now  about 
to  try  the  power  of  the   devil ;   and  his  agents  shall  see  what  they 
have  to  trust  to;   and   my  people  shall  see  what  they  have  to  trust 
to.     The  powers  of  heaven  and  earth  are  now  coming  together; 
and  my  people  shall  see  where  the  strongest  power  lies. 

2.  I  have  given  unto  my  people  the  theory  of  the  fulness  of  my 
gospel.     They  have  seen  that,  and  now  they  shall  see  the   power 
of  it.     It  ha*s  been  very  difficult  for  me  to  satisfy  my  people  with 
the  theory  of  my  gospel ;  but  I  shall  fully  satisfy  them  at  once.     I 
shall  come  as  a  whirlwind,  and  surround  my  people  when  they  are 
gathered  together  to  meet  their  enemies.     I  shall  surround  them 
with    my    presence    at    once.      I  shall  surround  them    by    mine 
holy  angels  so  that   no  earthly   power  can  hurt  them.      And  at 
my  appearance  many  of  my  people  will  fall  on  the  ground,  being 
overcome  by  my  presence.     The  shock  will  be  so  great  that  it  will 


THE    CONFLICT.  247 

overpower  them ;  and  through  their  weakness,  not  being  strong 
enough  to  stand  it,  they  will  fall  down  almost  as  dead ;  but  I  will 
strengthen  them,  and  raise  them  up  again,  and  they  shall  see  both 
me  and  my  holy  angels  to  their  satisfaction.  Let  my  people  seek 
to  strengthen  themselves  for  this  event  by  clinging  unto  me  with 
all  their  hearts ;  and  if  they  will  do  this,  I  will  assist  them.  I  will 
draw  near  unto  them,  and  strengthen  them,  if  they  will  draw  near 
unto  me.  I  will  assist  those  that  will  strive  to  assist  themselves. 
My  people  know  how  to  act  in  order  to  gain  strength,  if  they  will 
exert  themselves  to  do  so. 

3.  And  now  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,  that 
inasmuch  as  mine  enemies  are  about  to  visit  you,  it  would  be  well 
for  you  to  appoint  a  few  men,  and  let  them  be  well  prepared  to 
meet  mine  enemies.  And  those  men  whom  you  shall  appoint 
shall  walk  forth  to  meet  mine  enemies,  if  but  a  few  of  them  come 
up ;  and  they  shall  ask  mine  enemies  what  their  business  is ;  and 
if  mine  enemies  tell  my  people  that  they'  are  come  to  collect  the 
fine  which  their  court  placed  upon  my  people  for  not  training  when 
they  were  called  out  to  do  so,  my  servants  shall  tell  them  that  a 
number  of  my  people  whom  they  fined  were  not  American  citizens, 
and  that,  in  consequence  of  this,  they  could  not  compel  my  people 
to  train.  Mine  enemies  cannot  keep  the  law  which  they  profess  to 
be  governed  by.  They  unlawfully  fined  my  people  and  took  away 
their  property  unjustly.  They  trample  their  own  laws  under  their 
feet ;  and  every  person  that  will  not  do  the  same,  they  want  to  shed 
their  blood.  They  will  not  abide  any  law.  They  have  now 
placed  fines  upon  people  who  have  not  been  in  over  two  years, 
who  have  but  little  property,  even  those  who  have  nothing  to  pay 
with ;  and  they  placed  that  fine  upon  them  in  order  to  take  them 
away.  They  knew  that  those  persons  could  not  pay  the  fine,  and 
they  did  that  in  order  to  make  an  inroad  upon  my  people.  They 
thought  that  my  people  would  not  resist  them  as  long  as  they  only 
came  for  property.  Their  first  plan  which  they  laid  did  not 
answer.  They  want  to  do  something  whereby  they  can  feel 
assured  that  they  will  meet  with  resistance.  That  is  what  they 
want.  In  order  to  get  this  hold  on  my  people  they  fined  those 
who  could  not  pay  the  fine,  and  thus,  they  want  to  take  the  person 
instead  of  the  fine.  They  thought  that  when  we  saw  that  they 


248  THE    CONFLICT. 

were  about  to  take  away  our  brethren,  that  we  should  rise  up 
against  them  to  hinder  them.  They  thought  right.  They  have 
laid  the  right  plan  for  bringing  the  matter  up  to  an  issue. 

4.  They  shall  not   touch  one  of  my  people  who  trusts  in  me. 
When  my  servants  go  to  meet  mine  enemies,  if  they  are  called  to 

,do  such  a  thing,  they  shall  tell  mine  enemies  the  situation  of  some 
of  my  people  whom  they  have  fined,  even  that  they  are  so  poor 
that  they  cannot  pay  the  fine ;  and  let  them  tell  mine  enemies  that 
they  shall  not  take  those  men  away  from  this  place  without  taking 
all  my  people  along  with  them.  My  servants  must  tell  thejn  that 
my  people  will  all  rise  or  fall  together  in  this  manner.  My  serv- 
ants shall  talk  to  them  if  it  becomes  necessary. 

5.  But  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  if  I  see  that  they   are 
about  to  come  up  to  my  people  in  a  large  company  the  first  time, 
my  servants  will  not  need  to  deliver  this  message   unto  them.     If 
such  is  the  case,  I  shall  come  to  you  before  they  do.     You  will  be 
perfectly  safe.     The  work  is  in  mine  own  hands,  and  I  will  bring 
it   through.     Give  yourself  no   trouble  at  all.     But  I  tell  you,  my 
son,   you  may   be   preparing  yourself  to  meet  me,  even  to  be  fully 
emerged  into  my  presence.     Although  you   are  well  acquainted 
with  me,  it  will  be  a  sudden  shock  to  you.     You  will  have  all  that 
you  can  bear.     It  will  come  upon  you  so  suddenly.     It  is  the 
sudden  shock  which  you  will  feel.     Your  strength  will  be  greatly 
tried.     If  I  could  reveal  myself  unto  you  in  this  powerful  manner 
gradually,  you  would  not  feel  the  shock  so  much  as  you  will  when 
I  come  upon  you  all  at  once. 

6.  The  law  by  which   I   am  governed  compels   me  to  reveal 
myself  unto  my  people  when  I  come   in  power  all  at   once ;  and 
thus,  it  will  be  hard  for  them  to  endure  my  presence  when  I  come 
in  such  a  powerful  manner.     This  is  the  reason  why  I  have  urged 
upon  my  people  so  much  for  them  to  prepare  themselves  to  meet 
me.     When  I  come,  they  will  need  all  the  strength  which  they  can 
obtain  through  their  faithfulness.     They  will  find  that  they  will 
have  none  too  much  when  I  come,,  let  them  be  as  faithful  as  they 
may. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.     I  am  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


THE    ROD    IS    PROMISED.  249 

THE  PEOPLE  ARE    PROMISED    THAT    THEY    SHALL 

SEE  THE  ROD  BEFORE  THEY  SEE 

THEIR  ENEMIES. 


No.  145.  WEBER,  UTAH,  November  27th,  1861. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  it  becomes  my  duty  to 
speak  unto  you  again.  I  am  compelled  to  draw  near  unto  you, 
for  mine  enemies  are  working  at  a  great  speed,  and  they  will  force 
me  to  come  to  you  speedily ;  therefore,  prepare  for  me.  And  I 
say  unto  you,  my  son,  be  strong  and  of  good  courage.  Mine 
enemies  say  in  their  hearts  that  they  would  rather  die  than  be'  im- 
posed upon  by  my  people.  They  consider  that  it  is  a  shame  for 
them  to  suffer  a  handful  of  people  (as  they  call  them)  to  bid 
defiance  to  them.  They  consider  that  they  are  strong,  and  that 
my  people  would  be  as  nothing  in  their  hands.  Therefore,  they 
are  vexed  with  themselves,  because  they  have  suffered  my  people 
to  run  to  this  length.  They  are  almost  ready  to  mid  fault  with 
each  other  for  suffering  this  thing  to  run  to  such  a  length;  but  now 
they  say  in  their  feelings :  "If  we  have  neglected  our  duties  thus 
far,  we  shall  have  to  rise  up  and  make  the  best  that  we  can  of  a 
bad  job.  We  ought  to  have  bursted  them  up  before  they  had 
made  such  headway.  We  have  nobody  to  blame  but  ourselves ; 
but  now  we  will  see  whether  we  cannot  wipe  them  out  at  all 
hazards."  But  their  hearts  even  fail  them  when  they  think  about 
it.  But  they  need  not  to  blame  themselves  for  neglecting  their 
duties.  They  suffered  my  work  to  go  on  because  they  could  not 
hinder  it.  They  have  not  so  much  power  as  they  thought  they 
had.  If  they  had  a  grain  of  good  sense,  they  might  know  that  I 
was  at  work,  and  that  I  have  foiled  them  in  all  their  movements 
when  they  have  striven  to  operate  against  me.  They  have  not 
had  the  power  to  do  a  thing  against  my  people.  They  have  all 
the  time  been  working  for  me,  to  forward  my  purposes.  I  can 
make  them  serve  me  without  much  difficulty.  Every  move  that 
they  make  is  for  the  benefit  of  my  people.  I  turn  them  hither  and 
thither  at  my  pleasure.  O,  how  their  anger  is  kindled  against  my 
people !  They  say  that  they  will  venture  to  come  against  my  peo- 


250  THE    ROD    IS    PROMISED. 

pie  in  spite  of  all  the  threats  which  I  have  made  against  them. 
They  say  that  they  will  try  what  I  and  my  people  can  do  to  them  ; 
and  that  they  were  never  before  insulted  by  any  people  upon  the 
earth  as  my  people  have  insulted  them. 

2.  But  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  O  ye  mine  enemies,  I   will  see 
whether  I  cannot  insult  you  when  you  come  up  against  my  people. 
Ye  vipers  !  ye  damned  spirits  of  hell !     I  will  pay  you  off  for  all ! 
Ye  are  the  children  of  those  demons   who  have  shed  the  blood  of 
my  prophets  and  apostles  whom  I   sent  to  the  earth.     And  your 
fathers  were  murderers  from  the  beginning,  and  I   will  visit  their 
sins  upon  you.     I  have  longed  for  this  time  to  come — a  time 
when  I  can  settle  with  your  race  for  all  the  blood  which  they  have 
shed.     O,  how  I  have  longed  for  the  time  to  come  when  I  should 
have  the  privilege  of  sweeping  you  off"  the  earth  by  millions  !     Oh, 
how  thankful  I  feel  that  the  day  of  my  power  has   come  !     I  will 
give  you  blood  enough !     My  prophets  and  servants  whom  I  sent 
to  the  earth,   whose  blood  your  race  has  shed,  and  whose  spirits 
you  forced  back  to  me,   have  called   upon  me  many   times  for 
redress,  and  they  are  pleading  with  me  now.     But  when  they  have 
pleaded  with  me,  I  have  not  been  able  to  redress  their  wrongs.  .  I 
have  been  bound  by  law,  and  I  have  been  pained  with  their  cries 
until  I  could  not  rest.     But   I  have  striven  to  satisfy  myself  with 
tl-e  hope  that  my  day  would  come,   and   I   have   promised  myself 
that,  when  that  day  should  arrive,  I  would  slay  those  murderers  by 
millions  !     Yea,   I   feel  that  I   shall  hardly  ever  be  able  to  satisfy 
myself  upon  them. 

3.  And  behold,   I  say  unto  you,    my  servant   Joseph,  before 
mine  enemies  are  through   with -my  people,  they  will  bring  up  a 
large  mob  against  them ;  and  they  will  not  be  long  about  it.     You 
may  contine  to  watch  for  me;  for,   as  I  have  told  you  before,  I 
shall  come  unto  you  suddenly.     I  have  told  you  that  I  shall  visit 
you  before  your   enemies  do.     I  shall  unveil   myself  unto    you 
before  I  unveil  myself  to  my  people.     I  shall  give  unto  you  the 
rod  before  your  enemies   come  into  your  sight ;  but  soon  after  I 
have  given   unto  you   the  rod,   you   will   see  several  hundreds  of 
them — some  from  almost  every  settlement  around.     Mine  enemies 
are  gathering  themselves  together  even  now,  in  order  that  they  may 
be   ready   when  they   are   called   upon.     The   matter  is  now  well 


THE    ROD    IS    PROMISED.  .  251 

understood  by  hundreds  of  them.  I  shall  fully  prepare  you  for 
them  by  the  time  that  they  reach  this  place.  When  they  arrive  I 
will  not  give  unto  them  the  chance  either  to  speak  understandingly 
or  to  raise  their  weapons  of  war.  They  will  then  have  gone  their_ 
length — that  is  all  that  I  require  of  them.  If  I  would  give  unto 
them  the  liberty  to  speak  unto  my  people,  they  would  tell  them 
that,  if  they  would  deliver  up  unto  them  the  chief  men  in  my 
Church,  they  would  spare  the  lives  of  all  the  rest  of  my  people. 
But  they  shall  not  have  the  chance  to  make  such  a  proposal  unto 
them ;  for,  before  they  will  have  had  a  chance  either  to  deliver 
their  message  or  to  do  anything  else  unto  my  people,  I  will  sweep 
them  out  of  existence.  I  shall  take  their  will  for  the  deed ;  for, 
when  they  have  come  up  here,  I  shall  understand  what  they  are 
come  for.  Before  they  will  have  had  the  chance  to  destroy  any  of 
my  people,  I  shall  destroy  them  all. 

4.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  I  shall  not  show  my- 
self unto  my  people  as  soon  as  I  shall  show  myself  unto  you.  I 
shall  not  show  myself  unto  them  until  mine  enemies  come  up  to 
them  ;  but  when  mine  enemies  stand  before  them,  I  will  show 
both  myself  and  my  holy  angels  unto  them.  And  those  of  my 
people  who  are  strong  enough  to  behold  my  presence,  without  fall- 
ing upon  the  ground,  shall  see  mine  holy  angels  smite  mine 
enemies  dead.  The  strong  will  have  that  privilege.  But  rny  peo- 
ple shall  see  the  rod  in  your  hand,  even  before  they  see  me.  Those 
who  are  around  you  when  I  give  the  rod  unto  you  will  see  it 
(should  there  be  any  persons  around  you  at  that  time).  And  all 
my  people  who  gather  up  to  meet  mine  enemies  will  see  the  rod  in 
your  hand  before  they  shall  see  their  enemies,  and  that  will 
strengthen  them,  and  they  will  be  better  able  to  face  their  enemies. 
I  will  do  all  that  I  can  for  my  people  to  strengthen  them  in  the 
trying  day.  Let  them  prepare  for  me ;  for  lo,  I  come  quickly.  I 
am  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


252  HOW   TO    MEET    THE    ENEMIES. 

REVELATION    INSTRUCTING    THE    PROPHET    HOW 
TO    MEET   HIS   ENEMIES. 


No.   146.  .  WEBER,  UTAH,  November  29th,  1861. 

1.  IT  is  necessary  for  me  to  speak  unto  you  again  concerning 
mine  enemies,  and  your  duties  toward   my  people.     I   have  told 
you  many  times  to  prepare  for  me.     I  feel  in  duty  bound  to  warn 
you  of  that  which  is  close  upon  you. 

2.  Although  you  are  so  well  acquainted  with  thejtheory  of  the 
fulness  of  my   gospel,  you  are  not,  as  yet,   acquainted  with  the 
power  of  it.     I  shall  reveal  a  great  secret  unto  you  at  once,  and  it 
will  almost  overpower  you.     You  have  none  too   much  strength 
for   your   place.       Your  office   and  calling  require  you  to  have 
strong   faith.     But  there  have  been   many   strange  things   which 
have  served  to  break  your  confidence.     You  know  that,  as  yet,  I 
have  never  been  placed  in  a  position  where  I  could  give  unto  you 
a  manifestation  of  my  power ;   and  you  have  been  overpowered  in 
your  feelings  with  the  influences  which  have  proceeded  from  your 
enemies.     They  have  always  had  the  upperhand  of  you,  and  they 
have  ridden  over  your  feelings  roughshod ;  and,  because  you  have 
never  had  the   power  to  help   yourself,  it  has   overpowered  your 
feelings,  and  held  you  down,  so  that  you   could  not   raise  that 
amount  of  courage  and  faith   which  was  necessary.     You  could 
not  struggle  against  such  an  influence.     But  I  will  give  unto  you 
the  power  over  that  which  has,  hitherto,  had  the  power  over  you. 
I  will  break  that  influence  down  at  once.     You  have  been  greatly 
afflicted  by  it,  and  by  your  murmurings  you  have  afflicted  me  also. 
But  your  murmurings  against  me  on  this  account  are  near  at  an 
end. 

3.  And  now,  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  I  am   about  to 
speak  unto  you  concerning  mine  enemies  coming  up  to  this  place. 
As  I  have  said  unto  you  before,— »I  shall  visit  you  in  time  for  you 
to   gather    my   people  together  before  mine  enemies  reach  this 
place.     And  I  say  unto  you  that,  as  soon  as   I   shall  have  visited 
you,  and  placed  the  rod  in  your  hand,  you  shall  begin  to  call  my 
people  together;    and    by    the  time  that   all  my   people  will   be 
gathered  together,  mine  enemies  will  be  in  sight.     And  when  they 


HOW    TO.  MEET   THE    ENEMIES.  253 

will  have  reached  to  within  a  few  hundred  yards  of  where  you 
will  stand,  you  shall  raise  your  rod  and  give  your  command ;  or 
they  will,  in  a  few  minutes,  be  at  you ;  for  they  will  come  on 
horses,  and  they  will  ride  fast ;  therefore,  you  must  take  them  irT 
time ;  for  you  know  that  I  cannot  give  my  command  until  you 
have  given  yours.  And  then,  after  I  shall  have  given  mine,  the 
twelve  chief  generals  will  have  to  give  theirs  to  the  heavenly  hosts. 
You  must  give  us  time  to  get  the-  word  of  command  out  of  our 
mouths ;  for  the  heavenly  hosts  cannot, , under  any  circumstance 
whatever,  lawfully  go  to  war  until  we  have  raised  our  rods,  and 
given  the  command  unto  them.  See,  therefore,  that  you  give  us 
time.  If  you  will  do  your  own  duty,  you  will  have  nothing  to 
fear.  If  you  will  give  the  command  soon  enough,  we  will  cut  off 
all  your  enemies  when  they  are  a  few  rods  from  you.  If  you  will 
give  the  command  in  time,  I  will  take  them  in  time.  You  know 
our  situation.  See,  then,  that  you  liberate  us,  as  I  have  com- 
manded you. 

4.  It  will  not  be  a  time  for  trifling ;  but  it  will'  be  a  time  of 
solemnity,  and  a  time  when  all  my  people  will  be  required  to  do 
their  duties.  If  they  do  not,  they  will  perish  !  Some  of  my  people 
are  almost  going  to  sleep ;  but  they  will  open  their  eyes  and  look 
about  them  then.  Those  of  my  people  who  will  not  hear  me,  will 
have  to  feel  me.  There  are  a  few  of  my  people  who  are  unfaith- 
ful, whose  lives  I  cannot  save.  I  can  do  nothing  with  them  but 
slay  them.  Therefore,  my  son,  prepare  for  me;  for  lo,  I  shall 
come  unto  you  quickly.  I  am  Jesus  Christ  Even  so.  Amen 
and  Amen. 


A  WARNING  TO  THE  REBELLIOUS. 


No.  147.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  ist,  1861. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts,  and  I  am  come  to  speak 
unto  you.  Listen  unto  my  words.  My  people  are  getting  dis- 
couraged at  the  severe  weather  which  they  now  have  to  contend 
with.  They  wish  to  know  the  reason  of  such  unpleasant  weather. 
They  say  that  I  promised  to  moderate  the  weather  for  their  benefit, 


254  WARNING    TO    THE    REBELLIOUS. 

and  now  think  that  I  am  breaking  my  promise.  They  think  that 
they  have  ne"ver  seen  worse  weather  than  what  this  is  at  this  time 
of  the  year ;  and  they  say  in  their  ieelings  that  they  do  not  know 
the  reason  of  it.  But  they  say  in  their  feelings,  also,  that  they 
should  like  to  know  the  reason  of  it.  I  have  blest  my  people  with 
pleasant  weather  up  to  tfiis  time.  They  have  never  had  cause  to 
complain  of  me  before.  They  have  suffered  but  little  before  from 
the  inclemency  of  the  weather ;  and  this  unpleasant  weather  which 
my  people  are  now  callefl  to  contend  with,  is  for  a  wise  purpose  in 
myself.  I  do  not  afflict  my  people  without  a  cause,  even  foolishly; 
but  I  have  an  object  in  view  for  all  that  I  do.  All  things  will  work 
together  for  good  to  those  of  my  people  who  are  faithful,  who  are 
willing  to  confess  mine  hands  in  all  things ;  for  I  rule  in  heaven 
and  upon  the  earth  by  mine  angels.  I  bring  everything  to  my 
terms.  Mine  angels  turn  the  governors  of  the  ea*th  hither  and 
thither  according  to  mine  own  good  pleasure ;  therefore,  I  rule  in 
heaven  and  among  the  nations  of  the  earth ;  and  none  can  say,  "what 
doest  thou."  I  am  accountable  to  no  person  on  the  earth;  and 
none  can  stay  my  hand. 

2!  Let  my  people  confess  mine  hand  in  all  things ;  for  I  am 
well  pleased  with  all  those  who  confess  mine  hand  in  all  things. 
My  people  should  know  that  after  the  bitter,  then  cometh  the  sweet, 
and  shortly  after  this  storm  is  over,  cometh  the  blessing  to  my 
people,  which  is  victory  over  their  enemies ;  and  they  will  see  no 
more  oppression  after  that.  My  people  must  not  let  small  things 
trouble  them,  for  this  is  not  a  day  of  small  things ;  but  it  is  a  day  of 
great  events.  My  people  should  be  strong,  for  they  will  have  great 
things  to  deal  with.  This  is  not  a  day  of  weakness ;  but  it  is  a  day 
of  strength,  and  my  people  must  be  strong.  They  have  been  weak 
long  enough.  They  must  cling  to  me  with  all  their  hearts;  and  if 
they  will  do  so,  I  will  strengthen  them  abundantly. 

3.  And  now  behold,  I  speak  unto  you  concerning  mine 
enemies.  They  have  contemplated  burning  up  the  property  of  my 
people;  and  if  I  had  not  prevented  them,  they  would  have  burnt 
up  my  people's  property ;  but  I  have  prevented  them  one  time 
after  another.  I  broke  them  up  from  time  to  time.  If  they  could 
have  done  the  thing  which  they  wished  to  do,  they  would  never 
have  come  up  against  my  people  in  a  large  mob.  They  wanted 


WARNING    TO    THE    REBELLIOUS.  255 

to  waste  away  my  people  by  burning  up  their  property ;  and  in  this 
way  they  wished  to  bring  them  to  want.  They  thought  that  if  they 
could  reduce  them  to  shear  poverty,  they  would  scatter ;  and  in 
this  way  they  thought  that  they  could  break  up  my  people  and_. 
scatter  them  through  this  Territory,  and  make  slaves  of  them ;  and 
they  see  that  all  their  plans  for  scattering  and  destroyi  ig  my  peo- 
ple have  failed.  I  have  prevented  mine  enemies  several  times 
from  setting  fire  to  my  people's  property.  Mine  enemies  did  not 
want  to  raise  a  large  mob  and  come  up  against  my  people  to 
destroy  them,  as  they  supposed,  in  that  way.  They  wished  to 
destroy  them  in  other  ways  ;  and  now  they  are  satisfied  that  they 
cannot  destroy  my  people  in  any  other  way  than  in  raising  a  mob 
and  coming  up  against  my  people  to  destroy  them  in  that  way. 
And,  as  they  have  hitherto  failed  in  every  attempt  which  they  have 
made  to  destroy  my  people,  so  they  will  fail  in  the  last  and  great 
attempt  which  they  will  make  to  try  to  destroy  my  people ;  but  in 
that  attempt  they  will  make  an  end  to  their  own  lives. 

4.  They  consider  now  that  things  have  run  long  enough,  and 
that  they  will  try  now  and  put  a  stop  to  it.  They  hate  to  be 
driven  to  the  necessity  of  raising  a  large  mob  and  sending  them 
up  against  my  people.  But  they  are  compelled  to  do  so.  I  told 
my  people  that  I  would  make  them  come  to  my  terms,  and  they 
have  concluded  now  to  obey  me  without  any  more  trouble.  They 
find  out  that  it  is  no  use  to  rebel  against  me  "any  more;  and  they 
say  in  their  feelings,  "Father,  we  will  obey  you;  although  we 
are  rebels.,  Father,  we  will  obey  you  now.  We  acknowledge  thai 
we  have  been  very  rebellious  children.  O,  Father,  won't  you  for- 
give us?  We  are  willing,  Father,  to  obey  you  now,  because  we 
cannot  help  it.  O,  won't  you  forgive  us  ?  If  we  had  been  willing 
to  obey  you  at  the  first,  what  unnecessary  trouble  it  would  have 
saved  us.  Now  we  see,  Father,  what  weak  and  short-sighted 
creatures  we  are.  We  see  that  it  is  no  use  for  us  to  rebel  against 
you.  You  are  wise,  but  we  are  ignorant.  You  are  strong,  but 
we  are  weak.  And  now,  Father,  will  you  not  forgive  us,  after  we 
have  made  such  a  fair  and  humble  acknowledgement  unto  you?" 
O,  ye  vipers  !  ye  liars  !  ye  hypocrites !  ye  murderers !  You  cannot 
escape  the  damnation  of  hell !  When  you  have  done  your  worst,  I 
can  make  you  obey  me.  In  vain  do  you  struggle  against  me.  I 


256  THE    UNFAITHFUL. 

can  bring  you  to  obedience.  My  course  is  one  eternal  round,  and 
my  purposes  never  fail.  My  plans  cannot  be  frustrated  by  mortal 
men.  I  am  the  Lord  of  hosts. 

5.  And  behold,  I  speak  unto  my  people.  Let  them  strive  to 
make  themselves  contented,  and  not  murmur  against  me;  for  I 
know  their  situation,  and  I  do  all  things  for  the  best.  I  will  lay 
no  more  burdens  upon  them  than  what  they  are  able  to  bear. 
Let  them  humble  themselves  and  prepare  for  me ;  for  lo,  I  shall 
come  as  a  whirlwind,  even  as  a  consuming  fire ;  and  but  few  will 
stand  to  behold  my  appearance.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION   TO  THE    UNFAITHFUL   AND    REBEL- 
LIOUS   PEOPLE. 


No.  148.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  2nd,  1861. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  he  that  shuts,  and  no  opens,  and  that  opens 
and  no  one  shuts ;  and  I  am  about  to  speak  unto  you  concerning 
some  of  those  who  have  yielded  obedience  unto  the  fulness  of  my 
gospel,  who  are  now  losing  my  spirit,  who  fear  they  are  neither 
hot  nor  cold— even  those  on  whom  I  have  placed  a  great  responsi- 
bility,— who  are  unworthy  of  the  least  of  my  favors.  I  need  not 
to  look  for  friends  among  them.  They  trample  my  blessings  un- 
der their  feet  as  a  thing  of  naught.  They  are  almost  unwilling  to 
turn  their  hand  over  to  benefit  their  poor  brethren ;  but  I  will  set- 
tle with  them.  Oh,  how  my  wrath  is  kindled  againt  them !  When 
I  have  sent  the  fulness  of  my  gospel  to  the  earth,  and  opened 
their  way,  and  inclined  their  minds  to  obey  it,  yet  they  are  not 
willing  to  act  their  own  part  in  it.  They  have  had  but  little 
trouble  as  yet.  It  has  cost  them  but  little.  They  are  too  un- 
principled for  me  to  work  with  them  to  any  advantage.  When  I 
have  brought  the  fulness  of  my  gospel  to  their  doors,  and  done 
everything  that  I  possibly  could  for  them,  they  do  not  appreciate 
my  favors.  The  are  too  careless  and  too  unprincipled  to  do  their 
duties.  The  least  thing  that  they  are  called  to  do  appears  to  be 
too  much  for  them.  They  wish  to  have  offices  conferred  upon 
them;  and  when  I  have  given  unto  them  the  desires  of  their 


THE    UNFAITHFUL.  257 

hearts,  and  placed  them  in  honorable  positions,  they  lavish  my 
blessings  away  upon  their  lusts.  It  is  too  much  for  them  to  do 
the  least  duty  which  they  are  called  upon  to  do.  They  cannot 
even  attend  regularly  to  the  public  meetings  for  fear  lest  they 
should  be  called  upon  to  do  something  to  help  the  poor.  Oh, 
how  I  do  despise  them  !  If  all  my  people  were  like  unto  them, 
the  poor  of  my  people  might  perish  at  a  time  when  I  needed 
assistance.  I  do  not  need  to  look  to  them  for  help. 

2.  And  now,  behold,  I  am  the  Lord,  and  I  speak  unto  John 
Trolsen,  Niels  Jacobsen,  and  Niels  Morrisen,  and  I  testify  unto 
them  that  I  am  about  to  settle  with  them.  They  have  but  a  few 
days  allotted  to  them  to  turn  themselves  around  and  begin  to  do 
their  duties.  I  shall  not  be  trifled  with  by  them.  I  have  a  claim 
on  them ;  and  if  they  do  not  humble  themselves  before  me,  and 
satisfy  me  for  their  neglect  of  duty  and  the  manner  in  which  they 
have  insulted  me  by  trampling  my  blessings  under  their  feet,  I 
will  cut  them  off  from  the  earth  in  a  few  days ;  for  I  do,  in  my 
heart,  despise  them.  I  can  do  without  them  if  they  can  do  with- 
out me.  I  need  not  look  to  them  for  help.  I  am  satisfied  con- 
cerning them.  Therefore,  I  say  unto  you,  O  ye  rebellious  and 
unprincipled  men,  look  out  for  me,  for  I  shall  visit  you  as  a  whirl- 
wind if  you  do  not  speedily  repent,  and  retrace  your  steps,  and 
satisfy  me  for  the  many  insults  that  you  have  given  unto  me.  You 
promised  to  be  faithful  unto  me  and  my  people  when  I  conferred 
upon  you  the  apostleship.  You  have  never  done  your  duties 
since  you  received  your  ordinations.  You  are  as  dead  branches. 
You  are  worthy  of  death ;  therefore,  make  up  your  minds  as  to 
what  course  you  are  going  to  take.  You  know  my  mind  in  rela- 
tion to  you.  I  am  the  Son  of  the  Eternal  Father,  even  Jesus 
Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  PROPHET  INSTRUCTED    HOW   TO   ACT   WHEN 
HE  MEETS  HIS  ENEMIES. 


No.  149.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  3rd,  1861. 

i.     WHAT  shall  I   say  unto  you,  my  son?     I  see  that  you  are 
depressed   in   spirit   on   account   of  the   near    approach    of  your 


258  HOW    TO    MEET    THE    ENEMIES. 

enemies,  and  of  your  apparent  lack  of  preparation  to  meet  them. 
You  feel  yourself  unprepared  for  an  attack  by  them.  But  I  have 
now  placed  you  in  such  a  position  that  I  can  prepare  you  to  meet 
them  in  a  short  time.  All  that  I  need  to  do  now  is  to  ride  up  to 
you,  and  place  the  rod  in  your  hand,  and  stand  by  your  side  to 
instruct  you.  This  I  shall  do  in  the  course  of  a  few  days.  Your 
enemies  will  come  up  to  you  in  a  few  days.  You  know  that  I 
have  given  unto  you  a  partial  knowledge  of  the  time  when  you 
may  be  looking  out  for  them.  In  the  time  when  you  need  to  be 
looking  out  for  them  you  will  not  be  disappointed.  Seek  to 
strengthen  yourself  for  that  event.  I  will  give  unto  you  sufficient 
time  to  fully  prepare  my  people  to  meet  them ;  and  when  my  peo- 
ple are  gathered  together,  they  shall  stand  in  the  Fort,  and  the 
high  priests  shall  stand  next  to  you  in  a  rank.  When  I  speak  of 
the  high  priesthood,  it  includes  the  apostleship.  All  apostles  are 
high  priests,  or  should  be ;  therefore,  all  the  high  priests  shall  stand 
next  to  you,  three  abreast  in  a  row,  and  the  apostles  shall  stand 
next  to  you  in  the  row ;  and  the  first  row  shall  be  filled  up  with  the 
president  of  the  high  priests  and  his  counsellors  and  other  high 
priests  who  have  been  in  my  Church  the  longest ;  and  thus  the 
high  priests  shall  stand  in  their  own  order ;  for  I  will  give  unto 
them  an  endowment  that  day  that  they  will  never  forget  while  they 
are  clothed  in  mortality.  Let  them  stand  to  their  posts  like  men. 

2.  And    behold,    I    say  unto  you,   that  the  priests  of  Aaron 
shall  stand   next  to  them   in   their  'order,  three  or  four  abreast,  as 
becomes  necessary.     And  my  people  must  all  be  at  this  place  on 
that  day.     I  will  bring  mine  enemies  up  here  in  the  right  way,  and 
at  the  right  time ;  this  is  my  work. 

3.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  that  those  women  and  children 
who  have  yielded  obedience  unto  the  fulness   of  my   gospel,   shall 
stand  behind  the  priests  of  Aaron,  in  order,  and  the  children  shall 
stand  behind  the  women.     All   things   with   my  people  shall  be 
placed  in  order  on  that  day ;  for  I  am  the  Lord,  and  order  is  my 
first  law.     If  my  people  will  place  themselves  in  order,  as  I  have 
commanded  them,  I  will  accept  of  them.     I   am  the  Lord.     Let 
my  people  be  courageous,  and  set  themselves  for  the  work.     They 
will  need. strength  on  that  day. 

4.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,  that  I  will 


HOW    TO    MEET    THE    ENEMIES.  259 

ride  up  to  you  when  your  enemies  are  many  miles  from  you ;  for 
it  will  take  you  some  time  to  place  my  people  in  perfect  order. 
And  when  I  come  up  to  you  and  place  the  rod  in  your  hand,  I 
shall  assist  you  in  placing  my  people  in  order.  I  shall  talk  to  you 
mouth  to  mouth  on  that  day ;  and  you  shall  see  me  face  to  face 
as  I  am. 

5.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  you  shall  stand  before 
my  people  with  your  counsellors  by  your  side.     You  shall   stand 
between  my   people  and  mine  enemies ;  and  a  large  number  of 
mine  holy  angels  shall  stand  between  your  enemies  and  you ;  and 
they  will  only  let  your  enemies  come  so  near  unto  you.     They  will 
smite  mine  enemies  dead  at  the  right  time.     Only  give  us  the  com- 
mand in  time  as  I  have  commanded  you,  and  we  will  satisfy  your 
troubled  mind  in  a  few  minutes. 

6.  When  we  begin,  my  servant  John  Banks  will  do  his  duty. 
He  knows  what  it  is.     Let  him  hold  up  your  arm,  for  you  will   be 
overpowered  at  that  time  through  the  sudden  shock  which  you  will 
meet  with  all  at  once;  and,    in  consequence  of  this,  you  will  be 
unable  to  raise  the  rod,  and  hold  it  steady  yourself.     Your  nerves 
will  be  affected  until  you  cannot  hold  the  rod  steady.     It  is  heavy, 
and  you  are  a  weak  man.     You  will  drop  it  if  you  are  not  assisted. 
I  know  what  you  rwill  do  if  you  are  not  assisted.     I  feel  in  duty 
bound  to  make  known  unto  you  the  true  position  in  which  you  will 
be  placed  at  that  time ;  therefore,   seek  to   strengthen  yourself  as 
much  as  possible. 

7.  And  behold,    I  say  unto  you,  that  my  servant  John  Banks 
will  feel  his  weakness  greatly.     Even  the  strong  of  my  people  will 
have  enough  to  do  to  stand  upon  their  feet.     Let  all   my   people 
prepare  for  that   day,   for  it   is   at  hand.     I  am  the   son  of  the 
Eternal  Father ;  even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


260  FALSE    REPORTS. 

REVELATION    CONCERNING   THE    FALSE    REPORTS 

WHICH    HAVE  BEEN    CIRCULATED    BY 

THE    ENEMIES. 


No.  150.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  4th,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  say  unto  you,   my  servant  Joseph,  that  all   is 
right.     There   is  nothing  going  wrong  between   my  people   and 
mine  enemies.     I  am  controlling  all  matters   between  my   people 
and  mine  enemies.     It  is  necessary  that  I  should  stir  them  up.     I 
have  done  a  thing  that  will  arouse  them,  and  remind  them  of  their 
duties.     I  do  not  want  them  to  go  to  sleep.     They  know  their 
duties ;   and  if  they  do  not  walk  up  to  them,  I   will  arouse  them. 
They  are  backward.     They  do  not  like  to  walk  up  to  their  posts ; 
therefore  I  am  under  the  necessity  of  arousing  them.      I  am  ready 
for  them  as  far  as  I  am  concerned.     All  that  I  am  waiting  for  is 
my  people  and  them.     I  am  prepared,  and  I   have  prepared  you. 
All  that  remains  to  be  done  to  prepare  you  to  meet  your  enemies 
can  be  done  in  a  short  time.     All  that  is  now  needed  to   prepare 
you  for  your  work,  is  for  me  to  ride  up  to  you  and  give  unto  you 
the  rod,  and  stand  by  your  side  as  I  have  promised  you.     And  it 
is  I  who  is  now  dictating  you.     And  you  are  surrounded  by  the 
heavenly  hosts.     Even  now  they  are  fully  prepared  for  war,  if  they 
were  called   upon  to  go  to  battle  this   day.      I   have  your  rod 
with  me  now,  and  I  can  assure  you  that  it  will  be  but  a  few  days 
before  I  give  it  unto  you.     I  may  say  that   I   am  just  upon  the 
point  of  giving  it  unto  you  now.     This  is   the  nearest  that   I   can 
explain  myself  unto  you  in  this  matter.     You  will  understand  me. 
You  will  have  it  in  your  hand  before  you  have  well  turned  around. 
This  people  are  now  just   upon  the  verge   of  being  gathered  to- 
gether.    Let  them  prepare  themselves  for  that   which   is   coming 
upon  them. 

2.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  it  is  necessary  for  me 
to  arouse  mine  enemies.     The  last  circumstance  which  transpired, 
I,  the  Lord,  caused  it.     I  brought  my   people  and   mine  enemies 
in  contact  with  each  other  for  a  wise  purpose  in  myself.     I  wanted 
to  arouse  mine  enemies  all  around,  that  I  might  bring  up  a  large 


FALSE    REPORTS.  261 

number  of  them  to  this  place.  I  have  now  cast  a  stumbling-block 
before  mine  enemies ;  and  they  will  be  greatly  infuriated  against 
my  people.  Mine  enemies  who  live  in  this  place  will  go  abroad 
and  misinform  others.  They  will  tell  mine  enemies  who  live 
abroad  that  their  lives  are  in  danger.  I  will  promise  them  that 
their  lives  will  be  in  danger  before  they  are  through  with  their  un- 
dertaking. They  should  tell  mine  enemies  abroad  that  it  is  me 
that  abused  them,  and  ask  them  if  they  can  help  themselves.  I 
will  abuse  them  before  they  are  many  days  older.  Thus  mine 
enemies  will  tell  lies  to  the  people  abroad,  and  cause  the  people 
'to  come  up  against  my  people  foully.  Mine  enemies  abroad  will 
believe  the  reports  of  mine  enemies  who  live  in  this  place ;  and 
they  will  not  seek  to  find  out  the  truth  of  the  whole  matter ;  but 
they  will  believe  the  reports  of  liars  without  any  more  evidence ; 
and  thus  they  will  come  up  against  my  people  on  false  evidence. 
This  is  the  stumbling-block  which  I  promised  to  lay  before  mine 
enemies  that  I  might  righteously  destroy  them.  They  will  attempt 
to  destroy  my  people  without  a  just  cause;  and  by  defending  the 
just  and  righteous,  I  shall  lawfully  and  justly  destroy  them.  I 
now  have  them  in  the  right  position,  after  working  with  them  for  a 
time.  I  have  to  do  all  things  according  to  the  law  of  heaven; 
and  it  upholds  me  in  defending  the  principles  of  truth,  justice  and 
righteousness ;  and  thus  I  shall  destroy  mine  enemies  while  I  sus- 
tain those  principles.  If  mine  enemies  never  came  in  contact 
with  those  people  who  teach  and  practice  the  principles  of  right- 
eousness, and  had  never  sought  to  destroy  them,  but  let  them 
alone,  and  gave  unto  them  their  rights,  I  should  never  destroy 
them.  If  I  ever  destroy  people,  it  is  to  defend  that  which  is  right. 
Right  must  rule ;  and  it  is  my  duty  to  defend  it.  This  I  shall  do. 
If  mine  enemies  do  not  wish  to  be  destroyed,  they  must  not  cross 
my  path ;  for,  if  they  do,  I  shall  make  their  existence  short.  I  go 
straightforward.  I  do  not  turn  to  the  right  nor  to  the  left.  I  am 
not  turned  out  of  my  course  by  evil  doers.  I  am  the  Lord  of 
Hosts.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


262  TO  THE  PROPHET. 

REVELATION  TO  THE  PROPHET. 


No.    151.  WEBER,  UTAH,   December  5th,    1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  you  are  troubled  in  your 
feelings.     You  scarcely  know  how  to  contain   yourself,  you  feel  so 
burdened  with  the  work  that   lies  before  you.     You  feel  satisfied 
that   your  enemies  will  be  here  in  the  course  of  a  few  days  at  the 
farthest.     You  are   sure  that  they  will   come  upon  you;  and  you 
say  that  I  hold  myself  at  such  a  distance  from  you  that   you   can- 
not fully  believe  that  I  intend  to  come  to  you  before  your  enemies 
will  be  here.     You  think  that  such  a  sudden   and   powerful   mani- 
festation  from   me   to  you    and   my   people  appears  too  much  to 
believe — even  so  much  that  you  cannot  raise  that  amount  of  faith 
necessary  to  lay  hold  of  that  promise;  and  thus  you  stumble  at  it. 
You  think  that  it  is  too  much  for  mortal  men  eve^  to  look  for  or 
expect,  and,  consequently,  you  think  that  it  is  out  of  the  power  of 
man  to  exercise  faith  in  such  a  promise. 

2.  You  know  that  this  is  a  day   of  great  events.     It   is  not  a 
day  of  small  things.     You   know  that,   years  ago,  when  you  felt 
your  weakness — even  when  you  did  not  exercise  sufficient  faith  in 
me  to  believe  that  I  ever  should  confer  upon  you  such  an  endow- 
ment— I  gave   unto  you  the  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood.     I  did 
not  promise  you  that  I  would  give  unto  you  those  keys,  before  I 
conferred  that  blessing  upon  you.     You  could  not  exercise  faith  in 
a  thing  which  you  knew  nothing  about;  consequently,  I  gave  unto 
you  that  blessing  independently  of  your  faith.     All  that  I  require 
of  you  is  to  do  as  I  tell  you.     If  you  can  raise  faith  enough  to  do 
that,  it  is  all  that  I  require  of  you. 

3.  I  know  that  you  can  do  nothing  with  your  enemies  yourself. 
I  do  not  expect  it  of  you.     If  you  will  do  as  I  command  you,  you 
will   open  the   way   for  me.      I  have  to  work  through  you.      I  can 
do  nothing  upon  the  earth  only  by  your  consent ;  and  if  you   will 
always  liberate  me,    I   will  do  the  work.     I  will  sweep  all  your 
enemies  off  the  earth  whenever  they  cross  your  path.     Then  let  us 
work  together.     Do  your  own   part   of  the  work,  which  will  be 
but  little,  and  do  not  fret  about  me.     I  will  do  mine  own   part   of 
the    work  without   fail.       There  is  no  faltering   to    the  heavenly 
hosts. 


TO    THE    PROPHET.  263 

4.  You   need  not   to  fret  and  trouble  yourself  about  the  great 
day   of   my  power,   which  is  at  hand,  or  because   that  you  can- 
not fully  believe  that  I  shall   bring  unto  you   the  rod.     You   will 
believe  it  when  you  ,  see  it,  and  that  will  be  soon  enough.     Your 
faith  will  not  bring  it  before  the  time,  nor  will  your  lack  of  faith 
keep  it  from  you  one  minute  after  the  time  shall  have  arrived.     Tf~~ 
the   rod  does  not   come  at  the  right  time,  it  will  be  my  fault,  and 
not  yours.     Therefore,   do   not  fret  and  fume  about  things  which 
you  cannot  control,  even  things  which  belong  to  me  to  control.     I 
will   mind  mine  own  business,   if  you  will  mind  yours.      Do  as  I 
tell  you,  and  leave  that  portion  of  the  work  which  belongs  to  me 
in  my  hands,  and  all  will  be  well. 

5.  You  wish  to  know  what  you  are  to  do  with  the  rod  after  I 
shall    have   cut  off  mine  enemies.     You   say  that  you  have  no 
respectable  place  to  put  it.     You  know  that  I  ha^ve  told  you  that  I 
shall  continue  with  you  after  I  shall  have  visited  you;  and  after  the 
scourge  is  over,  I  shall  go  before  you  to  the  city  called  Salt  Lake 
City,  and  there  I  shall  find  you  a  respectable  place  to  put  it.     And 
if  you  should   be   at  a  loss  for  a  respectable  place  to  put  it  for  a 
few  days  until  I  shall  find  you  that  place, — as  I  shall  be  with  you 
all  the  time,  and  shall  continually  move  in  your  presence, — if  you 
will  hand  it  back  to  me  after  you  have  used  it,  I  will  take  care  of 
it  for  you  until   I   shall   find    you  a  suitable  place  to  keep  it,  and 
then  you  can  keep  it  in  your  own  possession  continually.     It  is  not 
an  instrument  to  be  played  with — it  must  be  taken  care  of.     It  is 
your  Father's  rod,  and  it  has  been  in  existence   millions   of  years. 
It  is  made  of  that  kind  of  material  that  will  never  waste  away,  and 
it  has   your   Father's  signature   upon  it.     And  when  you  wave  it, 
your  Father  is  compelled  to  sustain  you,  if  necessary,  with  all  the 
power  which  he  has. 

6.  Behold,  I  am  Jesus  Christ,  and  I  testify  unto  you,  my  son, 
that  I  have  the   privilege  to    call    upon  the  inhabitants  of  other 
celestial  earths — even  many  of  them,  if  I   need  their  assistance ; 
but  I  have  power  enough  without  any  help  from  other   worlds.      I 
do  not  lack  for  power.     I  have  an  abundance  of  it,   and  you  will 
soon  see  a  display  thereof.     Therefore,  my  son,   remember  that   I, 
even  Jesus  Christ,  am  with  you.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


264  INSTRUCTION    FOR    THE    PROPHET. 

\ 

REVELATION  CONTAINING  INSTRUCTIONS  TO  THE 
PROPHET. 


No.  152.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  6th,  1861. 

1.  LIFT  up  you  head,  and  stand  to  your  post  like  a  man,  for  I 
call  upon  you  to  do  so.      Do  not  shrink  from  your  duty ;  for   you 
have  good  backing.     All  the  heavenly  hosts  say  that  they  wish  me 
to  inform  you -that  they  will  uphold  you.     They  say,    "We   will 
fight  your  battles  until  you   are   satisfied.     You  shall  never  have 
cause  to  complain  of  us  for  neglecting  you.     We  delight  in  fight- 
ing your  battles ;  for  that  is  now   our  entire  duty.     We  shall  be 
with  you,  and  we  will  show  you  that  we  are  not   afraid   of  your 
enemies,  when  we  .can  lawfully  attack  them.     We  will   show  you 
that  we  do  not  uphold  them  in  their  abominations  any  more  than 
you  do.     We  have  been  pained  with  their  wickedness  as  well  as 
you  have ;  but  we  have  had  to  bear  with  it  as  well  as  you  have. 
But  we   now  have  them   into  the  right  shape.     We  can  now  do 
something  with  them.     We  have  longed  for  this  time  to  come,  so 
that  we  could  attack  them.     We  wish  to  encourage  you,  for  we  see 
that  your  spirits  droop,  and  that  your  are  in  trouble." 

2.  Behold,  I  am  Jesus  Christ,  and  I  have  given  unto  you,  my 
servant  Joseph,  the  mind  of   all  the  heavenly  host.     They  called 
upon  me  to  reveal  unto  you  their  full  intentions.     They  are   one 
with  you  in  all  things,  and  they  will  satisfy  you  as  soon  as   your 
enemies  come  up  against  you,  which  they  are  now  just  on  the  point 
of  doing.     Mine  enemies  do  not  wish  to  trouble  my  people  about 
their  fines  until  they  shall  have  all  mine  enemies  prepared  for  the 
work   (as  they  suppose).     They  wish  to   make   all    things  ready 
before  they  send  a  messenger  up  to  my  people  to  ascertain  their 
minds  in  relation  to  their  fines.     And  if  mine  enemies  do  send  a 
messenger  up  to  my  people  to  find  out  their  intentions  concerning 
their  fines,    it  will  only  be  to  meet  with  a  denial.     Mine  enemies 
have  heard  that  my  people  intend  to  resist  them ;  therefore,  they 
have  been    preparing   themselves  to    meet    with    resistance  from 
them. 

2.     And  behold,  I   say  unto  you,  my  son,  if  mine  enemies  do 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    THE    PROPHET.  265 

send  a  messenger  up  to  my  people,  they  shall  resist  him,  and  send 
him  away.  I  will  now  give  unto  mine  enemies  a  chance  to  see 
what  they  can  do.  And  I  also  say  unto  you,  my  son,  that  if  a 
messenger  comes,  and  my  people  send  him  away,  which  they  must 
do,  you  may  then,  begin  to  look  out  for  me  and  the  heavenly  hosts; 
for  we  shall  come  unto  you  soon  after  that  messenger  shall  have 
left  this  place,  for  he  will  go  forthwith  to  bring  a  mob ;  and  if  he 
does  not  bring  up  a  mob  against  my  people  on  the  same  day  that 
he  is  resisted,  he  will  do  so  on  the  day  following.  Therefore,  my 
son,  if  you  see  this,  you  must  watch  for  me,  and  you  will  not  be 
disappointed ;  for  I  shall  come  unto  you  suddenly,  as  I  have  before 
promised  you.  You  may  then  begin  to  think  about  gathering  my 
people  together.  But  you  need  not  fear,  for  I  will  come  unto  you 
in  time,  and  give  unto  you  sufficient  time  to  gather  all  my  people 
together,  and  to  place  them  in  order. 

4.  And  I  also  say  unto  you,  mine  enemies  will  speedily  either 
send  a  messenger  up  to  you,  or  they  will  bring  up  a  mob  at  once. 
You  may  begin  to  look  out  for  a  visit  from  them,  either  of  one 
kind  or  the  other.  If  they  conclude  to  send  a  mob  up  to  you  at 
the  first,  I  shall  know  it,  for  I  am  watching  them.  I  feel  in 
duty  bound  to  put  you  on  your  guard.  As  I  have  said  unto  you 
before,  so  I  say  unto  you  again,  I  will  come  unto  you  when  your 
enemies  are  many  miles  from  you.  Before  they  reach  up  to  where 
you  will  be,  you  will  have  all  my  people  placed  in  their  proper 
order,  and  you  will  be  waiting  for  mine  enemies  to  come  up.  You 
will  not  be  hurried  at  all.  You  have  nothing  to  fear.  Therefore, 
let  me  entfeat  you  not  to  let  your  spirits  droop,  for  it  is  painful 
unto  me  to  see  you  so  cast  down.  When  you  suffer  your  spirits 
to  droop  to  such  an  extent,  it  entirely  unfits  you  for  your  place ; 
therefore,  rise  up  and  stand  to  your  post  like  a  man,  and  do  not 
let  your  spirits  fail  you.  I  am  by  your  side.  I  am  Jesus  Christ. 
Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


266  COMMANDED    TO    PREPARE    TO    MEET   THE    LORD. 


THE  PEOPLE  COMMANDED  TO  PREPARE  TO 
MEET  THE  LORD. 


No.    153.  WEBER,  UTAH,   December  yth,    1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  I  am  with  you,  and  you 
shall  see  me  in  the  course  of  a  few  hours.     I  am  watching  mine 
enemies,  and  I  will  bring  them  to  the  right  position.     You  feel  as 
though  you  desired  to  see  me.     You  will  not  be  in  pain  long  on 
that  account ;  for  you  will  see  me  to  your  satisfaction  in  the  course 
of  a  few  hours.     As  I  have  told  you, — get  yourself  ready  to  meet 
me,  and  do  not  shew  such  weakness.     You  are  afraid  that  I  shall 
leave  you  alone;  but  you  have   nothing  to  fear.     Mine  enemies 
are  now  about   ready  to  come   up  against  my  people.     All  that 
they  are   waiting  for  is  to  receive  their  orders,  and  then  they  will 
come  up.     Let  my  people  be   calm  and   steady-minded.     They 
must  not  be  excited.     They  need  to  begin  to  lay  things  to  heart. 
This  is  not  a  time  oi  trifling ;  but  it  is  a  time  of  solemnity. 

2.  And  behold,   I  say  unto  you  that,  it  is  my  will  that  all  my 
people  should  wash  themselves  clean  this  day,  and  prepare  them- 
selves to  meet  me ;  and   when  my  people   are  called  together  to 
meet  me  and  their  enemies,  they   must  come  as  well   dressed  as 
possible;  for  I   am   the   Lord,   and  I   delight   in  cleanliness  and 
respectability.     My  people  must  dress  themselves  as  neat  as  possi- 
ble, and  I  will  accept  of  them.     I  am  the  Lord.      My  people  must 
rise  up  and  do  as  I  have  commanded  them.     They   have  no  time 
to  lose.     Let  them  listen  unto  me,  and  all  will  be  well  with  them. 
I  shall  now  speedily  make  a  change  of  things.     O  how  I  do  wish 
that  you  would  cast  all  fear  far  from  you.     If  you  would  do  this, 
I  could  work  with  you  with  pleasure.     You  know  that  you  cannot 
improve  the  present  condition  of  things  by  fretting.     Your  whole 
fear  is  in  me.     You  fear  that  I  shall   betray  your  confidence,  and 
that  when  I  am  wanted  I  shall   not    be  there.     You   say   in  your 
feelings  that  if  you  knew  that  I  should  cpme  unto  you  when  I  am 
needed,  that  you  could  rest  contented ;  but  ypu  cannot  believe  in 
my  promises  fully,  and  that  is  what  afflicts  you.     You  are  unwill- 


DESCRIPTION    OF    THE    SAVIOR,    ETC.  267 

ing  to  believe  in  a  "thing  except  you    can  see   it.  I   am  honest — 
never  fear. 

I  now  add   no  more.     I  am  Jesus   Christ.  Even  so.     Amen 
and  Amen. 


REVELATION    CONTAINING   A    DESCRIPTION    OF 
THE    SAVIOR. 


No.  154.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  7th,  1861. 

1.  BEHOJLD,  I  am  the  Light  and  Life  of  the  world,  even  he 
who  shines  forth  in  the  midst  of  darkness,  and  the  darkness  com- 
prehendeth  him  not,  even  Jesus  Christ ;  and  I  say  unto  you,  that 
I  cannot  rest  while  I  see  you  cast  down  as  you  are.     What  can  I 
do  for  you  to   minister  unto  your  present  relief?     If  you  could 
endure  as  you  are,  without  murmuring  against  me,  for  a  few  hours, 
it  would  be  all  that  I  should  wish  to  ask  of  you.     I  know  that  you 
are  in  a  peculiar  position,  and  you  need  to  see  me.     This  I  know. 
But  I  am  bound  by  the  law  of  heaven  to  keep  at  a  distance  from 
you,  until  I  come  up  to  you.     I  will  not  keep  you  in  misery  more 
than  a  few  hours.     Then  try  to  contain  yourself  for  the  space  of  a 
few  hours.     I  have  told  you    many    times  that    I    am    by    your 
side. 

2.  You  wish  to  know  how  I  shall  come  unto  you  when  I  come 
to  reveal  myself  fully  unto  you,  and  how  I  shall  approach  you 
when  I  come  to  give  unto  you  the  rod,  and  what  you  may  expect 
to  see  when  you  see  me ;  what  I  am  like ;  what  you  may  look  for ; 
how  I  am  dressed,  and  what  kind  of  a  personage  I  am ;  am  I  a 
large  man  or  a  small  one ;  what  color  of  hair  I  have ;  what  com- 
plexion I  am  of ;  shall  I  be  on  horseback  or  on  foot ;  have  I  your 
rod  with  me  now;  and  where  shall  you  stand  when  I  shall  give  it 
unto  you ;  if  I  have  your  rod,  how  do  I  carry  it  about  with  me ; 
if  I  have  no  means  except  riding  on  horseback,  you  would  think 
that  I  could  not  carry  it  conveniently. 

3.  Behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  that  I  have  many  carriages 
with    me.       I  am  amply  supplied  with  conveyances — all  that    I 
need  while  I  am  attending  to  the  mission  which  I  have  to  perform. 


268  DESCRIPTION    OF    THE    SAVIOR. 

I  shall  come  unto  you  with  my  resurrected  body.  I  am  rather 
large  in  stature;  much  larger  than  you  are.  You  are  small  and 
weakly  now;  but  when  you  are  in  your  resurrected  body  you. are 
very  large  in  stature.  Resurrected  beings  are  larger  in  stature 
that  mortal  men.  I  have  seen  you  in  your  glory ;  but  this  is  a 
time  of  trouble  with  you.  You  feel  small  now;  but  you  will  soon 
feel  that  you  are  the  master  of  the  whole  earth.  You  will  shortly 
stand  in  your  glory  again. 

4.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  that  I  am  of  a  fair  complexion. 
I  have  lightish  hair,  and  my  beard  is  long  and  rather  sandy.  I 
am  of  a  lighter  complexion  than  you  are ;  you  are  rather  dark. 
You  must  pay  attention  to  what  I  say  unto  you.  I  have  given 
unto  you  a  true  description  of  myself  in  every  respect.  I  ride 
upon  a  white  horse;  and  I  shall  be  upon  a  white  horse  when  I 
come  up  to  you.  You  must  look  out  for  Satan ;  for  he  will  seek 
to  visit  you  before  I  do ;  and  he  will  try  to  make  you  believe  that 
he  is  me.  But,  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  that  Satan  does  not  wear 
his  beard,  even  as  I  do,  and  he  is  not  of  the  same  complexion 
that  I  am  of.  You  know  him,  and  you  must  resist  him  and  send 
him  away  from  you.  He  wishes  to  destroy  you.  It  would  be 
well  if  your  companion  or  some  other  person  would  watch  over 
you  while  you  sleep,  and  let  them  shake  you  if  you  make  a  noise, 
for  Satan  is  mad  at  you,  and  he  says  that  he  will  destroy  you  if  he 
can ;  therefore,  you  must  look  out  for  him.  He  intends  to  visit 
you  before  I  do  if  he  can.  He  is  large  in  stature,  and  when  he 
comes  as  he  is,  in  his  right  garb,  he  is  black;  this  you  know.  He 
is  large,  but  not  as  large  as  myself.  If  you  see  us  both,  you  will 
know  us  apart.  You  will  see  me,  as  I  have  told  you  before,  in  a 
few  hours ;  and  when  I  ride  up  to  you  and  give  unto  you  the  rod, 
you  will  be  standing  on  the  outside  of  your  door,  not  far  away 
from  it.  When  I  give  it  unto  you,  I  shall  envelop  you  in  mine 
own  influence.  I  shall  strengthen  you  so  that  you  can  lay  hold 
of  it;  and  as  soon  as  you  have  received  it,  you  must  com- 
mence to  gather  my  people  together,  and  to  place  them  in  order. 
You  may  rest  yourself  contented  until  you  see  me.  You  need  not 
to  look  for  your  enemies  until  you  have  seen  me.  I  will  guide 
you  in  that  respect.  I  arri  not  a  traitor,  and  that  you  shall  soon 
see. 


THE    ENEMIES    DISAPPOINTED,    ETC.  269 

5.  And  behold,   I  say  unto  you,   that  the  angels  are  large  in 
stature — even  as  I  am.     They  are  powerful  in  war.     You   know 
what   resurrected   persons  are  like.     You  have   seen  them   often 
enough.     You  complain  of  me  that  I   have  not   shown  unto  you 
the  heavenly  hosts  of  late.     I   have   kept  them  away  from  you  for 
a  wise  purpose  in  myself.     If  I  had  continued  to  show  them  unto 
you  from  time  to  time,    Satan  would  have  visited  you  also,  and 
afflicted  you  greatly.     When  I  stopped  visiting  you,  Satan  stopped 
afflicting  you.     If  I  had  continued  to  visit  you,  Satan  would  have 
continued  to  visit  you ;  but  when  I  stopped  visiting  you,  he  stopped 
also.     I  had  to  stop  visiting  you  in  order  to  stop  him.     You  know 
his  way  of  working.     You  may  prepare  yourself  now,   for  he  will 
try  you  with  all  his  power. 

6.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  that  I  am  well  pleased 
with  my  people  for    the    willingness    which    they    manifested    in 
responding  to  the  call  which  I  made  upon  them  in  order  that  they 
might    meet    me    neat    and    clean.     My    spirit    shall  abundantly 
strengthen  them.     They   have  strong  faith  in  my  promises,  and  I 
will  abundantly   satisfy  them   for  their  faithfulness.     Let  them  be 
strong,  and  I  will  be  their    Shepherd  forever.     I   am  Jesus  Christ. 
Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


THE    ENEMIES    DISAPPOINTED. 


No.  155.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  8th,  1861. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  about  to  speak  unto  you  concerning  your 
enemies.  Their  hearts  fail  them  to  certain  extent.  Before  they 
sent  a  messenger  up  to  my  people  to  collect  their  fines,  they  were 
all  ready  to  come  up  against  my  people  if  that  messenger  was 
resisted  by  my  people.  Mine  enemies  were  full  of  glee  before 
that  messenger  came  up  to  my  people  to  collect  their  fines;  and 
they  stated  what  they  would  do  if  my  people  resisted  that  messen- 
ger. But  when  that  messenger  returned  to  them,  having  been 
resisted,  their  feelings  changed  to  a  certain  extent.  They  did  not 
think  that  my  people  would  really  resist  them ;  and  when  they  had 
learned  that  my  people  had  so  promptly  resisted  them,  they  were 


270  THE    ENEMIES    DISAPPOINTED. 

smitten  to  their  hearts  with  terror.  They  did  not  know  what  to 
make  of  it.  They  saw  their  position  at  once;  and  they  feel 
now  as  though  they  wanted  time  to  take  their  breath.  They  are 
not  in  such  a  hurry  as  they  were  before.  That  messenger  came 
up  to  my  people  and  met  with  such  a  denial  that  they  would  not 
come  up  against  my  people  if  they  could  help  "it.  But  they  are 
compelled  to  come  now,  or  else  give  up  to  my  people.  They  have 
commenced  a  work,  and  they  must  not  back  out.  They  will  have 
to  come  on,  or  lose  their  credit  as  honorable  devils.  Their  duty 
compels  them  to  come  on. 

2.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  that   I  should  have 
come  up  to  you  before  this  time .  if  they  had  done  their  duty.     I 
fully  expected  that  they  would  have  been  here  before  now.     They 
would  have  been  here  if  their  hearts  had  not  failed  them  in  conse- 
quence of  that  messenger  meeting  with   such   a  positive  denial. 
They  did  not  expect  such  a  denial,  and,  therefore,  it  disarranged 
them,  and  they  wanted  a  little  more  time  to  turn  themselves  round 
and  get  their  breath.     They  say  that  they   will  have  to   come   up 
against  my   people.     They   say  that  they  cannot   back  out   now. 
They  will  try  again  to  muster   fresh  courage.     They   say   in  their 
feelings  that  they  must  make  the  best  of  their  bad  work. 

3.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  that  you  will  soon  see 
them  coming  down  that  bench.     You  need  to  keep   on  the  look- 
out for  me.     I  will  watch  them,  and  you  must  lookout  for  me.     I 
shall  come  unto  you  in  time,  as   I   have  told  you.     All  that  you 
need  to  do  is  to  lookout  for  me.     Give  yourself  no  trouble  what- 
ever.    I  have  commenced  a  work,  and  I  can   carry   it   on.     Woe 
unto  them  that  undertake  to   stay   my  hand !     I  will  send  them 
home  speedily.     Let  my  people  be  calm  and   patient,  and  hold 
themselves  in  readiness  to  be  called  up  when  I  am  ready  to   call 
upon  them.     I  am  round  about  my   people ;    and  I  am  ready  at 
any  time.    I  am  the  Son  of  the  Eternal  Father;  even  Jesus  Christ. 
Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


THE    LORD    PROMISES    TO    VISIT    THE    PROPHET.  271 

\ 


THE  LORD  PROMISES  TO  VISIT  THE  PROPHET. 


No.  156.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  8th,  1861. 

i.  I  AM  come  to  speak  unto  you  again,  my  servant  Joseph.  I 
see  that  you  wish  to  hear  from  me  again.  I  want  to  relieve  your 
feelings  all  that  I  can.  My  heart  aches  for  you  when  I  see  you 
struggling  in  pain.  O  how  soon  I  could  relieve  you  if  I  was  only 
set  at  liberty.  I  long  to  relieve  you.  I  am  coming  to  visit  you, 
as  I  have  promised  you.  You  want  to  know  how  I  shall  come, 
and  what  I  shall  bring  with  me  for  you  when  I  come  to  visit  you ; 
what  kind  of  attire  I  shall  have  on  when  I  come  to  you  and  unveil 
myself  unto  you ;  what  kind  of  a  hat  .1  shall  have  on  when  I  visit 
you ;  when  you  may  fully  expect  a  visit  from  me.  You  ask,  "  Will 
you  answer  me  those  questions?  If  you  would,  it  would  greatly  re- 
lieve my  present  feelings."  I  will  strive  to  relieve  you  as  much  as 
I  possibly  can.  You  may  begin  to  reconcile  yourself  to  your  fate. 
I  am  now  about  to  strengthen  you  abundantly.  You  shall  never 
feel  as  wretched  in  your  feelings  again  as  you  have  felt  during  the 
last  few  days.  I  will  take  care  of  that.  Your  feelings  could  not 
be  discribed  with  the  tongue  of  mortal  man.  Oh  !  the  painful 
feelings  which  you  have  had.  I  must  take  a  course  to  put  an  end 
to  such  feelings  as  those.  I  cannot  bear  to  see  you  in  such 
a  condition.  It  brings  a  horror  indescribable  to  my  heart.  I 
must  lift  you  up,  and  give  unto  you  better  feelings.  I  could  do 
it  in  a  few  minutes  if  my  way  was  clear,  so  that  I  could  come  out 
upon  mine  enemies ;  but  they  have  lingered  thus  far,  and  kept 
your  feelings  in  constant  trouble.  But  they  will  soon  come  up 
now.  I  will  give  unto  you  better  feelings. 

2.  I  shall  be  dressed  in  warlike  apparel  when  I  come  up  to 
you.  My  clothing  will  be  striped  with  red,  even  as  you  have  seen 
the  clothing  of  generals  oVer  the  armies  upon  the  earth.  But  my 
attire  is  far  more  beautiful  than  theirs ;  and  the  apparel  which  the 
armies  of  heaven  wear  is  similar  in  its  nature  to  that  which  I  wear. 
When  the  armies  of  heaven  are  about  to  go  out  to  war,  they  dress 
themselves  in  warlike  apparel.  They  have  all  things  in  proper 
order.  I  wear  a  high  hat,  beautiful  to  look  upon,  with  many  small 


272  THE    LORD    PROMISES    TO    VISIT    THE    PROPHET. 

crowns  on  the  top  of  it ;  and  the  horse  which  I  ride  upon  is  very 
large  and  most  beautiful.  When  you  see  me  you  will  be  so 
astomshed  that  your  natural  strength  will  leave  you  for  a  moment, 
until  I  lay  hold  of  you  and  hold  you ;  but  after  a  few  moments, 
you  will  be  strong,  and  you  will  be  able  to  look  upon  me  steadily 
and  talk  with  me.  I  know  your  weakness,  and  I  will  deal  kindly 
with  you ;  and  after  I  have  made  myself  perfectly  acquainted  with 
you,  you  shall  then  introduce  mt  to  those  of  my  servants  who  are 
closely  connected  with  you  in  the  priesthood;  and  thus  you  shall 
first  introduce  me  to  one  and  then  to  another ;  and  in  this  manner 
you  shall  make  my  people  acquainted  with  me.  I  know  them,  but 
they  do  not  know  me  as  yet.  But  when  you  have  introduced  me 
unto  them,  they  will  know  more  about  me.  I  want  them  to  know 
me  perfectly. 

3.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  that  I  have  your  royal 
robe  with  me,  and  I  will  give  it  unto  you  when  I  give  unto  you  the 
rod ;  and  you  must  put  it  on  before  you  take  the  rod  and  raise   it 
and  give  the  command.     Before  ever  you  take  that  rod  and  raise 
it   you  must  put  on   that  royal  robe  which  I  shall  give  unto  you. 
For  it  is  unlawful    for  you  to  raise  that  rod  and  give  a   command 
except  that  you  have  on  you  the  royal   robe.     The  robe   which   I 
shall   give  unto  you  is   your   Father's   robe,  and  it  is  beautiful  to 
look  upon. 

4.  I  shall  give  unto  you  these  things  which  I  have  promised 
you ;  and   I   shall   endow  yon  with  power  all  at  once  ;  and  I  shall 
do   all  this  before   your   enemies  are  in  sight.     I  shall  do  a  great 
deal  in  a  short  time.     I  cannot  tell  you,  my  son,  to  an  hour  when 
I  shall  come  unto  you  and  give  unto  you  these  things.      I  have  to 
watch  mine   enemies  and  work   as  they  work.      I  am  continually 
watching  mine   enemies ;  and  I  will  tell  you  their  feelings  and  in- 
tentions from  time  to  time.     They  hardly  know  what  to  do.     Their 
minds  change  from  time  to  time.     Sometimes  they  feel  prepared 
to  come  up  against  my  people  to  destroy   them,   as  they   suppose, 
and  at  other  times  their  hearts  fail  them.     When  they  think  about 
destroying  my  people,  they  cannot  jteep   in   one   mind   long ;    and 
thus  they  strive  to  baffle  me  all  that  they  can.     But  they  will  come 
to  my  terms  at  last.     They  are   free   agents,  and  I  am  compelled 
to  give  unto  them,  their  agency.     I  have  to  run  with  them  and  out- 


THE    UNSETTLED    CONDITION    OF    THE    ENEMIES.  273 

wit  them ;  and  in  this  manner  I  have  to  turn  their  evil  purposes  to 
good  ends,  and  bring  them  to  my  terms.  In  this  way  I  make  the 
wrath  of  man  to  serve  me ;  but  I  do  not  even  destroy  the  agency 
of  devils.  All  people  have  their  rights.  I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even 
so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION   SHOWING   THE    UNSETTLED    CONDI- 
TION OF  THE  ENEMIES  OF  THE  LORD. 


No.  157.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  pth,  -1861. 

i.  I  AM  compelled  to  speak  unto  you  again,  for  I  see  that 
things  are  now  beginning  to  work  among  mine  enemies.  They  are 
beginning  now  to  arouse  themselves  again.  They  feel  that,  to  deal 
with  the  matter  with  which  they  now  have  to  deal,  is  a  hard  job ; 
and,  to  a  certain  extent,  their  hearts  fail  them.  They  say  in  their 
feelings  that  they  wish  that  they  knew  how  things  would  come  out. 
They  want  a  prophet  to  tell  them  whether  or  not  they  would  pros- 
per. They  want  a  prophet  that  would  say  to  them,  "Go  up 
against  those  people  and  prosper."  They  want  encouragement. 
Even  though  it  should  be  from  a  false  prophet,  it  would  help  them 
at  this  time.  They  have  a  prophet  in  their  midst.  If  they  would 
ask  him,  he  would  tell  them  whether  they  would  prosper  or  not ; 
but  a  true  prophet  will  not  answer  their  purpose  at  this  time.  If 
a  false  prophet  would  only  tell  them  to  "go  up,  and  prosper,"  it 
would,  at  the  present  time,  relieve  them  greatly.  It  is  a  word  of 
encouragement  that  they  want  to  help  them — no  matter  whence  it 
comes.  Oh,  how  their  hearts  do  pain  them.  They  hate  to  give 
up  to  my  people,  and  they  hate  to  come  up  against  them.  They 
wish  that  they  were  placed  in  such  a  position  that  they  could  drop 
the  thing  altogether.  They  find  themselves  this  day  in  such  a 
position  as  they  did  not  expect  to  be  in ;  and  on  this  account  they 
are  in  pain.  They  see  that  they  have  to  fight  their  way  out  in  the 
best  manner  they  can ;  that,  let  the  matter  turn  out  whichever  way 
it  may,  it  will  cause  them  a  great  deal  of  trouble ;  and  they  think 
that,  if  they  should  lose  the  cast  altogether,  theirs  will  be  a  bad 


274         THE  PEOPLE  COMMANDED  TO  BE  READY. 

case.  They  are  sensible  that  they  will  either  gain  the  cast  or  lose 
it,  and  they  fear  'that  they  will  lose  it;  that  is  what  afflicts  them. 
These  are  the  thoughts  of  their  hearts  ;  therefore,  they  want  encour- 
agement from  some  source  or  other. 

2.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  my  people  must  keep 
together  as  much  as  they  possibly  can.      They  must  not  wander 
far  away,  but  hold  themselves  in  readiness,  so  that  any  time  when 
they  shall  be  called  upon,  they  may  be  here ;  for  things  are  now  in 
a  very  uncertain  condition  among  mine  enemies;  they  work  so 
unsteadily.     Therefore,  when  they  come,  they  will  come  in  a  hurry 
— just  while  the  fit  is  upon  them.     They  are  so  unstable  that,  if 
they  did  not  come  in  this  way,  they  would  not  come  at  all.      There- 
fore, let  my  people  hold  themselves  in  readiness  for  them,  and  all 
wifl.  be  well  with  them. 

3.  And  behold,   I  say  unto  you,   my  son,  that  when  they  do 
come  up  against  my  people,  I  will  destroy   them  speedily ;  for  in 
less  than  two  hours,   according  to  your  time,   after  I  shall  have 
given  unto  you  the  rod,  I  shall  have  slain  many  thousands  of  mine 
enemies ;  therefore,  their  destruction  will  soon   be  accomplished. 
When  I   do  begin  I  shall  work  fast.     Dead  bodies  will  lay  in  all 
parts  of  this  Territory;  for,  at  thaMime,  I  shall  destroy  that  spirit 
of  murder   which  now  prevails,  from   among  this  people.     I  will 
give  unto  those  who  shall  be  left,  something  to  think  about. 

4.  And  behold,  I  speak  unto  you  concerning  the  robe  which 
I   shall   give  unto  you.     When  I  give  it  unto  you,  I  will  tell  you 
how  you  must  wear  it.     I  will  also  help  you  to  arrange  my  people 
in  their  proper  order,  and  I  will  assist  you  to  make  all  things  ready 
for  mine  enemies  by  the  time  that  they  shall  reach  this  place ;  and 
before  they  will   be  in   sight  you  will    be  fully  prepared  for  them. 
I  have  done  all  that  I  possibly  could  to  prepare  you  for  your 
work,  unless  I  should  come  and  reveal  myself  fully  unto  you ;  and 
that  I  cannot  do  until  your  enemies  are  about  to  come  against  you. 
I  have  made  known  unto  you  everything  that  I  possibly  could  in 
order  to  cheer  you  up ;  and  all  that  I  have  promised  I   shall  fulfil 
as  soon  as  the  time  shall  have  come  for  me  to  do  so ;  but  I  cannot 
fulfil  any  promise  which  I  make  until  the  proper  time  for  it  to  be 
fulfilled  has  arrived.     I  will  fulfil  all  my  promises  when  the  proper 
time  for  their  fulfillment  has  come.     There  is  a  time  for  all  things, 


THE  ENEMIES  APPEAR  RELUCTANT.  275 

and    all   things    must   be    done    in    their    own    time    and    order. 
I  add  no  more  at  the  present  time.     I  am  the  Light  and  Life 
of  the  world;  even  Jesus  Chiist.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  ENEMIES  ARE  RELUCTANT  ABOUT  COMING 
AGAINST  THE  LORD'S  PEOPLE. 


No.  158.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  loth,  1861. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Son  of  the  Eternal  Father,  and  I  am 
about  to  speak  unto  you  for  your  satisfaction.  You  see  how  mine 
enemies  strive  to  baffle  me.  They  hate  to  come  to  my  terms. 
They  do  not  want  to  fulfil  the  revelations  which  I  have  given  con- 
cerning them;  and  thus  they  are  turning  and  twisting  about  to 
strive  to  make  me  a  liar.  They  do  not  want  to  come  up  against 
my  people  in  the  way  that  I  have  said  that  they  would.  They 
want  to  come  up  some  other  way  to  make  me  appear  false.  They 
would  rather  never  come,  than  come  in  the  way  which  I  have  said 
that  they  would.  In  fact,  if  they  could  do  without  coming,  it 
would  greatly  relieve  them.  But  they  see  that  they  have  to  do 
something ;  and  what  they  do,  they  will  be  driven  to  it.  O  how 
they  do  hate  to  come  to  my  terms.  If  it  had  not  been  for  fulfill- 
ing my  word,  they  would  have  been  here  before  this  time.  But 
they  want  to  destroy  my  people  and  still  do  it  in  another  way  to 
that  which  I  have  appointed ;  and,  on  this  account,  they  are  now 
lingering  between  two  opinions.  They  see  that  they  cannot  get  at 
my  people  in  any  other  way  than  to  bring  a  large  mob  against 
them ;  and  for  them  to  do  so,  it  would  be  fulfilling  my  word ;  and 
they  do  not  ^  know  what  course  to  pursue  to  make  me  a  liar,  as 
they  would  call  me.  But  they  will  come  to  my  terms  or  do  noth- 
ing at  all.  If  they  do  not  make  a  move  speedily,  I  will.  If  they 
will  not  do  their  duty,  I  will  do  mine.  The  work  has  to  go  on ; 
and  if  they  do  not  speedily  come  on,  I  will  give  unto  you  the  rod, 
and  I  will  start  the  work  myself.  I  will  cut  them  off  for  neglect- 
ing their  duty — even  for  being  traitors  to  the  devil.  They  have 
commenced  the  work  with  my  people.  My  people  never  inter- 


276  THE    ENEMIES    APPEAR    RELUCTANT. 

rupted  them.  They  began  a  work,  and  now  they  are  afraid  to 
proceed  with  it.  But  if  they  do  not  speedily  proceed  with  their 
work,  I  will  commence,  and  I  will  sweep  them  off  the  earth. 
They  need  not  to  think  that  they  can  save  their  lives  now ;  for 
they  cannot.  Inasmuch  as  they  commenced  the  work,  they  have 
given  unto  me  the  first  offence ;  and  if  they  do  not  continue  with 
the  work,  after  starting  it,  it  is  because  they  are  afraid  to  do  so. 
If  they  stay  back,  it  will  be  through  fear  of  their  own  lives.  They 
will  thirst  for  the  blood  of  my  people  as  much  if  they  staid  away 
from  them  as  if  they  came  up  against  them ;  therefore,  I  can  law- 
fully slay  them  now,  whether  they  come  up  against  my  people  or 
not.  But  I  can  bring  them  up  against  my  people  in  the  way  that 
I  have  appointed,  if  I  feel  disposed  to  wait  for  them.  But  I  am 
now  in  a  hurry,  and  they  are  backward.  I  shall  not  wait  on  them 
long. 

2.  I  will  not  hold  my   people  in   suspense  but   a  ve.y  short 
time.     I  will  not   disappoint  my   people.     Let  them  hold  them- 
selves in  readiness,  as  I   have   before  commanded  them;  and   if 
mine  enemies  do  not  very  speedily  come  up,  they  will   not  have 
the  opportunity  to  do  so.     Before  they  sent  that  messenger  up  to 
this  place  to  collect  fines  from  my  people,  they  all  appeared  ready 
to  come  up  against  my  people  forthwith   if  that   messenger  met 
with  resistance ;  and  when  he  returned  to  them,  and  delivered  his 
message,  they  were  discouraged.     They  appeared  to  have  no  spirit 
for  war.     Just  at  that  time  they  were  smitten   with  astonishment. 
They  all  felt  weak.     They  felt   unable  at  that  time  to  come  up 
against   my   people.       They  wanted    encouragement    from    some 
source  or  another.      They    did  not  come  up  against  my  people 
the  day  after  they  were  resisted,  because  they  could  not.     Their 
spirits  were  broken  at  that  time.     There  is  no  other  way  for  them 
to  come  up  against  my  people  but  the  way  which  I  have  appointed 
for  them.     If  they  will  not  come  upon  my  people  in* that  way  very 
soon,  they  will  not  have  the  privilege  to  come  up  to  them  in  any 
way ;  for  I  am  about  to  come  out  upon  them  very  speedily. 

3.  As  I  have  said  unto  you  before, — I  am  about  to  come  unto 
you.     You  must  keep   on  the  lookout  for  me,  and  prepare  your- 
self for  a  sudden  shock ;  for  I  shall  soon  be  with  you   in  the   way 
in  which  I  have  appointed.     You  will  know  what  to  expect.     You 


CONCERNING    PERSONAL    INTERVIEWS.  277 

will  know  me  when  you  see  me.  I  have  described  myself  plainly 
unto  you.  I  have  left  nothing  undone  in  that  respect.  Then 
keep  on  the  lookout  for  me,  as  I  have  commanded  you.  I  am 
the  Light  and  Life  of  the  world ;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    SHOWING    HOW    PERSONAL    INTER- 
VIEWS   BETWEEN  THE  LORD  AND  THE 
PROPHET  SHALL  BE  CON- 
DUCTED. 


No.  159.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  loth,  1861. 

1.  WHAT  shall  I  say  unto  you,  my  son?     I   have  said   almost 
all  that  I  have  to  say  unto  you  in  the  manner  that   I  have  hitherto 
been  accustomed  to  reveal  unto  you.     While  I   have  been  raising 
you  up,  I  have  been  compelled  to  reveal  the  keys  of  knowledge 
unto  you  in  the   way  that  I  have  done.      I  could  not  speak  unto 
you  mouth  to  mouth,  because  it  was  unlawful  for  me  to  do  so ;  but 
when  I  shall  have  fully  raised  you  up,  it  will  be  my  duty  to  speak 
unto  you  mouth  to  mouth ;  this  I  shall  then   be  compelled  to   do. 
You  will  not  be  considered  as  fully  raised  up  until  you   shall   have 
obtained  your  Father'  robe  and  rod.     When  you  shall  have  those 
things  in  your  possession,  you  will  be  fully   raised  up ;  for  I  shall 
never  deliver  those  things  into  your  possession  until  it  is  lawful  for 
me  to  do  so.     And  after  you  shall  have  received  them,   it  will  be 
my   duty  to  reveal  unto  you  the   mysteries  of  my  kingdom  in  a 
more  plain  and  satisfactory  manner — even   to  talk  to  you  mouth 
to  mouth.     This  I  can  do  when  I  shall  have  given  unto  you  your 
robe.     You  will  have  to  put  it  on  whenever  you  wish  to  talk  to  me 
mouth  to  mouth;. for  I  now  wear  my  Father's  robe,  and  when  you 
and  I  shall  meet  together  in  council,  I  shall  come  unto  you  attired 
with  my  Father's  robe,  and  you  must   put  on   your  Father's  robe 
before  you  come  into  my  presence.     If  you  do  not,   you   will   not 
be  able  to  see  my  face ;  therefore,  when  we  meet  together,  we  must 
meet  in  our  robes. 

2.  None  can  put  on  those  royal  robes  except  those  who  hold 


278  CONCERNING    PERSONAL    INTERVIEWS. 

the  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood  in  heaven  and  upon  the  earth.  I 
hold  the  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood  in  heaven,  and  that  entitles 
me  to  my  Father's  robe  and  rod.  And  when  I  put  on  my  Father's 
robe,  and  wield  his  rod,  I  am  clothed  with  all  his  power.  I  work 
in  his  name,  and  by  his  authority — he  sanctions  all  that  I  do. 
And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  as  I  hold  the  keys  of  the 
holy  priesthood  in  heaven,  so  you  hold  the  keys  of  the  holy  priest- 
hood upon  the  earth.  And  as  I  am  entitled  to  my  Father's  robe 
and  rod,  so  you  are  entitled  to  your  Father's  robe  and  rod.  And 
as  I  make  use  of  my  Father's  robe,  and  wield  his  rod,  under  his 
authority,  and  in  his  name,  so  you  put  on  your  Father's  robe,  and 
wield  his  rod,  in  his  name,  and  by  his  authority,  and  he  sanctions 
all  that  you  do.  And  thus  your  authority  must  be  acknowledged 
first,  and  mine  second. 

3.  And  behold,   I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  there  may  be  times 
when  I  shall  be   busily   engaged  in  heaven,  and  shall  not  be  able 
to  come  myself   and  reveal  things  unto  you  mouth  to  mouth ;  but 
when   I   cannot   come  unto  you  myself,   I   shall   send   unto  you 
another  angel  who  is  high  in  authority,  to  talk  to  you  in  my  stead. 
He  will  tell  you  those  things  which  you  may  wish  to  know;  and  I 
shall  put  my  Father's  robe  upon  him  whenever  I  shall  send  him  to 
minister  unto  you ;  but   whenever   trouble  is   around  you,  I  shall 
always  be  with  you  myself. 

4.  I  am  about  to  come  unto  you  suddenly ;  therefore,   I  shall 
reveal  the  hidden  things  of  my  kingdom  unto  you  by  talking  unto 
you  mouth  to  mouth.     Henceforth,  you  will  almost  always  receive 
the  information  which  you  will  need  from  heaven,  either  from  my 
mouth,  or  from  the  mouth  of  a  holy  angel — even  such  a  one  as  I 
shall  appoint  to  minister  unto  you.     I  shall  reveal  but  little  more 
unto  you  in  the  way   in  which  I  have  revealed  unto  you  while  I 
have  been   raising   you    up;    but  almost    the   next    thing   that    I 
shall  do  will  be  to  reveal  to  you  face  to  face.      I   may  say  that 
I  am  coming  to  you  almost  immediately.     I  cannot  tell  you  any 
nearer  when  I  shall  come;  for  one  of  the  next  things  which  you 
will  see  will  be  me. 

I   now   add   no   more.     I   am  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen 
and  Amen. 


TO    THE    PROPHET.  279 


TO    THE    PROPHET. 


No.  160.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  i  ith,  1861. 

1.  WHY  are  you  so  faithless  when  you  know  that    I  am  always 
with   you?     Mine  holy  angels  never  leave  you.     They  are  always 
ready  for  any  emergency.     They  are  never   away   from   you ;  and 
why  are  you  cast  down  in  such  a  manner  as  you  are,  as  though  you 
had  no  guard  over  you?     There  is  no  earthly  power  that  can  come 
near    enough  to    you   to  hurt   you.     When  mine  enemies    come 
around  you,  I  know  their  intentions.     If  they  come  to  this  place 
with  a  full  intention  of  destroying  you,    or  any  of  my  people,  I 
shall  not  let  them  come  near  enough  to  you   to  hurt   any  of  you. 
I   know  the   intentions  of  every  man  that  comes  into  this  place. 
There  is  a  guard  set  over  this  place,  which  consists  of  many  angels; 
and  those   angels   know  the  business  of  every  person  that  comes 
into  this  place.     This  place  is  ruled  by  mine  holy  angels.      Devils 
have  to  be  subject  unto  them  when  they  come  into  this  place ;    for 
I  am  the  Lord,  and  I  have  a  foot  hold  here,  and  I  will  make  them 
give  way.     Let  devils  come  here  and  I  will  show  them  what  they 
are.     I  claim  one   small  spot  upon  the  earth  where  I  can  start  a 
work,  and  I  shall  go  forth  from  that  place  and  destroy  everything 
that  opposes  me ;  for  I  am  the  Lord.     Look  out  for  me,  my  son. 

2.  You  must  place  all  things  in  order  at  home,  and  prepare  for 
dressing  yourself  up  as  neat  and  clean  as  you  possibly  can ;  for  I 
wish  you  to  be  respectably  dressed  when   I    meet   you.     Both   me 
and  mine  holy  angels  are  well  dressed;  much  better  than  you  are 
at  present.     But  you  shall  dress  like  unto  us ;  for  we  will  give  unto 
you  celestial  clothing ;  and  while  you  wear  that   clothing  you  will 
never  die.     When  you  have  to  die  you  will  have  to  take  off  your 
celestial  dress. 

3.  When   you  are   in  full   power  you   will  not  wear  clothing 
which  has  been  manufactured  by  mortal  hands;  but  you  will  wear 
clothing  which  has   been  manufactured  in  heaven  by  holy  angels. 
You   will  not  wear   clothing  that  has   been  manufactured  by  the 
hands   of  fallen   and   sinful  people.     Your  clothing   must  not  be 
soiled  by  the  hands  of  mortals ;  and  while   you  wear  clothing  that 


280  THE  PROPHET  REPROVED. 

has  never  been  soiled  by  sinful  and  deadly  hands,  you  will  live ; 
and  when  you  die  you  will  have  to  take  off  your  celestial  dress ; 
for  you  could  never  die  with  it  on. 

4.  Listen  unto  me,  my  son.  I  am  coming  to  you  speedily.  I 
could  tell  you  when  I  shall  come  to  you.  The  time  is  now 
fixed  for  the  test.  You  must  watch  out^  for  that  influence  resting 
upon  you.  All  is  well.  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts,  even  Jesus 
Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  PROPHET  REPROVED  FOR  HIS  LACK  OF 
FAITH. 


No.    1 6 1.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  nth,  1861. 

1.  O,  HOW  I  am  astonished  at  you  !     I  have  never  before  seen 
a  man  act  as  you  do.     What  are  you   afraid   of?     You   are  filled 
with  fear.     You  have  little  or  no  faith  about  you.     You   seem   to 
place  no  reliance  in  me ;  and  yet  you  cannot  bring  up  one  instance 
wherein  I  have  failed  to  fulfil  my  promises.     What   do  you   mean 
when  you  cannot  believe  that  I  intend  to  come  up  to  you  and  give 
unto   you  power  over  your   enemies.     Do  you  think  that  after  I 
have  been  at  all  the  trouble  which  I  have  to  raise  you  up,  that   I 
am  about  to  let  the  devils  destroy  you  before  you  have  done  any- 
thing   towards   delivering   my   people?     What    think    you?     You 
must  have  a  poor  opinion  of  me.     I  do  not  think  that  I  deserve 
such   treatment  from   you.     I  have   always  tfulfilled  my  promises 
which  I  have  made  unto  you  as  far  as  I  have  gone  with  you.     But 
you  see  trouble  ahead,  and  you  fear  that  I  am  about  to  leave  you 
in  it.     You  are  afraid  before  you  are  hurt. 

2.  I    know  that  you  appear  weak,  very  weak;  but  I  am  com- 
pelled  to   stand  by  you   and   obey  your  command.     You  are  in 
trouble  because   I    do  not   come  unto  you  aud  give  unto  you  the 
power  which  I  have  promised  unto  you.     You  are  weary  of  waiting 
for   me.     You  think  that   I   trifle  too   much   with  mine  enemies. 
You  cannot  see  why  I  should  suffer  myself  to  be  baffled  by  them 
so   much.     You   want   me  to   come  straight  out  upon  them,  and 
move  them  out  of  the  way  at  once.     Because  I  have  been  so  long 


A    WARNING.  28l 

working  with  mine  enemies  to  bring  them  up  to  a  point,  you  are 
losing  confidence  in  me.  You  begin  to  think  that  I  am  trifling 
with  your  feelings ;  and,  on  this  account,  you  are  almost  ready  to 
conclude  that  I  am  not  true  unto  you,  and  that  I  profess  to  be 
your  friend,  when  in  reality  I  am  your  enemy.  You  are  almos 
ready  to  believe  this.  But  I  have  done  all  that  lay  in  my  power  to 
satisfy  you.  In  the  position  in  which  I  have  been  placed,  I  have 
been  compelled  to  work  with  mine  enemies  in  the  way  in  which  I 
have,  as  far  as  I  have  gone  with  you.  But  now  I  can  satisfy  you. 
You  may  look  out  for  me  shortly.  I  may  pay  you  a  visit  to-mor- 
row, and  I  may  lay  your  feelings  at  rest  then.  I  may  lay  many 
thousands  dead  upon  the  ground  on  that  day.  Before  long  I 
will  go  into  the  halls  of  the  great  and  proud  to  give  them  a 
timely  warning.  There  may  not  be  one  soul  left  in  them  to 
tell  the  tale.  Woe  and  lamentations  may  be  heard  throughout 
this  Territory.  I  shall  soon  preach  a  sermon  that  will  never  be 
forgotten.  Therefore,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  prepare  to  meet 
me.  Before  long  you  may  see  me  and  be  fully  satisfied.  You 
must  not  be  disappointed  if  you  see  some  of  your  enemies  in  a 
short  time.  I  will  promise  you  that  you  will  see  me  long  before 
you  see  them.  You  will  be  perfectly  ready  when  they  come  up 
to  where  you  are ;  and  if  you  do  not  see  me  to-morrow,  you  will 
not  see  them  either.  Whenever  you  see  them,  you  will  have  seen 
me  long  before  them.  Therefore,  be  strong,  and  watch  for  me. 
I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


I 

REVELATION    GIVING    THE    SIGN    BY   WHICH    THE 

PROPHET  MAY  KNOW  WHEN  THE  LORD 

WISHES  TO  TALK  WITH  HIM. 


No.  162.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  nth,  1861. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  I  have  told  you  where 
you  will  be  standing  when  I  ride  up  to  you  to  give  unto  you  your 
robe  and  rod.  But  how  shall  I  make  you  understand  when  to 
come  out  of  your  house  to  meet  me  at  that  time  when  I  shall  want 
to  see  you?  How  shall  I  make  you  understand  when  to  stand  at 


282  A    SIGN    FOR    THE    PROPHET. 

the  place  where  I  'have  told  you  to  stand?  You  may  be  in  your 
own  house  at  that  time,  or  you  may  be  in  some  other  place ;  but 
let  you  be  where  you  may,  I  will  give  unto  you  a  sign  by  which 
you  will  know  when  I  wish  to  see  you. 

2.  Let  you  be  where  you  may,  when  I  shall  want  to  see  you,  I 
will  cause  a  powerful  influence  to  rest  upon  you — such  an  influence 
that  you  will  not  be  able  to  resist — and  that   influence  shall   lead 
you  right  to  the  place  where  I   have  appointed  to  meet  you.     Yea, 
I  will  send  many  angels  to  you  wherever  you  may  be  at  that  time, 
and  -they  will  influence  you,   and  lead  you  to  that  place.     And 
when  they  shall  have  led  you  there,  they  will  hold  you  there  until 
I  come  and  unveil  myself  unto  you,  and  talk  with  you. 

3.  I    shall  then   give  unto  you  those    things    which    I    have 
promised.     When  I  unveil  my  face  to  you,  I  shall  lay  hold  of  you 
myself.     And,   as  I  have  said  unto  you  before,  so  I  say  unto  you 
again,  when  mine  angels  have  led  you  to  the  place   where  I   have 
appointed  to  meet  you,  I  shall  not  keep  you  waiting  there  for  me 
more  than  a  minute  or  two  before  I  shall  be  with  you. 

4.  You  will   now  know  what  to  expect  when  that  powerful  in- 
fluence lays  hold  of  you — you  will  understand  it.     Do  not  fight 
against  it,  but  go  with  it,  and  all  will  be   well  with   you.     It  will 
shortly  lay  hold  of  you ;  therefore,  you  may  keep  on  the  look  out, 
for  it  will   lay  hold  of  you  suddenly,  and  lead  you  into  my  pres- 
ence.    I  am  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


DISUNION  AMONG  THE  ENEMIES. 


No.  163.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  i2th,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  I  do  not  want  to  come  up 
to  you  before  the  right  time ;  then  I  will  come.     I  do  not  want  to 
come  to  you  before  your  enemies  shall  have  started  away  from 
their  homes.     I  want  them  to  be  on  their  way  to  this  place  before 
I  ride   up  to  you.     They  have  not  started  away  from  their  homes 
to  come  this  way,  as  yet,  neither  will  they  for  some  time  yet,  even 
should  they  come  at  all  to-day. 

2.  At  present  there  is  confusion  among  them,  and  they  hardly 


DISUNION    AMONG   THE    ENEMIES.  283 

know  what  to  do.  They  are  not  united  as  yet ;  but  there  are  some 
of  them  who  are  laboring  with  the  others  to  bring  them  to  unity. 
They  may  be  united  enough  to  come  up  here  to-day,  or  they  may 
not.  But  they  will  scon  come  to  a  conclusion  as  to  what  course 
they  will  take,  and  if  they  conclude  to  come  up  here  to-day,  they_ 
will  soon  do  so.  And  should  they  conclude  to  do  so,  I  will  tell 
you. 

3.  And  as  soon  as  they  shall  have  started  on  their  way  to  come 
to  this  place,  I  will  send  mine  angels  to  influence  you,  and  to  lead 
you  to  the  place  where  f  have  appointed  to  meet  you.     I  will  not 
neglect  you.     I   know  how  your  feelings  are  pained  through  fear 
that  I  shall  neglect  you  and  this  helpless   people.     You  are  over- 
burdened, and  it  seems  that  you  cannot  rise  up  until  I  help  you; 
therefore,  I  will  come  and  lift  you  up  myself. 

4.  I  have  told  you  the  true  state   in  which  mine  enemies  are 
placed  at  this  time.     They  are  set  the  one  against  the  other :  and 
as  they  now  are,  they  can  do  nothing.     I  am  watching  them ;  for 
this   is  the  day  which  they  have  appointed  to  come  and  wipe  my 
people  out  (as  they  call  it);  but  they  are  not  united  upon  the 
matter ;    some  are  for  it,  and  others  are  opposed   to  it.     There  are 
two   parties   of  them,   the  one   opposed  to  the  other ;  hence,  they 
know  not  what  to  do.     They  are  held  in  this  manner,  for  they 
cannot  come  until  they   shall  all  be  united,  and  they  may  not  be 
unitepl  to-day.     There  are  many  among  them  who  are  opposed  to 
the   act  of  coming  up  against  my  people,  and  those  who  wish  to 
come  are  laboring  with  them  to  persuade  them   to  come   up  and 
assist  them   to  destroy  this   small  handful  of  people  (as  they  call 
them). 

5.  And   now,   I   say  unto  you,  my  son,  I  will  watch  them  and 
see   what  decision  they  come  to,  and  if  they  decide  to  come  up 
against  my   people  to-day,   I  will  visit  you  as  I  have  promised. 
You  shall  see   me  as  soon  as  they  have  started  to  come  this  way. 
I  will  give  unto  you  plenty  of  time  to  make  ready.     But  should  I 
not  visit  you  in  the  course  of  four  or  five  hours,  you  may  conclude 
that  they  are  not  coming  up  against  my  people  to-day.      You  will 
soon  know  whether  they  are  or  not. 

6.  You   must  keep   on  the  look  out  for  that  influence  which 
will  lead  you  into  my  presence.     You  are  on  safe  ground.     Lean 


284  THE    LORD    PROMISES    TO    VISIT  THE    PROPHET. 

on  me,  and  I  will  bear  your  burden.  I  will  speedily  remove  this 
painful  feeling  away  from  you,  for  I  am  pained  to  see  you  strug- 
gling under  it.  Lift  up  your  head  like  a  man;  for  I  am  the  Lord, 
even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  LORD  PROMISES  TO  VISIT  THE  "PROPHET. 


No.   164.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  i2th,   1861. 

1.  LET  not  my  people  be  discouraged  at  the  prospect  which 
seems  to  present  itself  before  them.     They  may  feel  somewhat 
disappointed  and  cast  down  on  account  of  their  enemies  failing  to 
come   up  to  this  place  according  to  their  own  appointment.     On 
their  account  my  people  have  not  been  delivered  as  they  expected 
to  be.     Mine  enemies    seek  to  baffle  and   disappoint   me   all  that 
they  can ;  but  it  is  about  the  last  time  that  they  will  baffle  me. 

2.  If  they  do  not  come  against  my  people  in  the  course  of  two 
or  three  days  from  this  time,  they  will,  for  the  present,  give  up  the 
project.     They  will  either  do  what  they  intend  to   do  to  my  peo- 
ple within  that  time,  or  they  will   give  them   up   until   they  think 
that  they  have  obtained  a  better  hold  on  them.     But  I  shall  only 
give  unto  them  about  two  or  three  days  to  make  up  their  minds  as 
to  what  they  will  do.     If  they   do  not   do  something  within  that 
space  of  time,  I  will  come  unto  you  and  endow  you  with  power, 
as  I  have  promised  you.     After  that  time  I  will  place  all  power  in 
your  hands ;   but  if  they  come  up   against  my   people  within  that 
time,  I  will  endow  you  with  power  when  it  is  needed.     If  they  do 
not  come  up  against  me  within   the  time  that  I  have  specified, 
I    will  not    keep   you   waiting   any    longer;    but   I  will  then  let 
you  loose,  let  things   go  as  they   may   with  mine  enemies.     You 
shall   then   be  as   a  lion   let  loose  among  lambs,  and  you  shall 
destroy  everything  that  stands  in  your  way.     Mine  enemies  need 
not  to  think  that  they  can  tie  my  hands,  for  they  cannot.     I  now 
have  them  under  my  grasp.     I   can   now  lawfully   destroy  them, 
and  that  is  all  that  I  need  to  require'  of  them  ;    although   I   would 
rather  that  they  would  come  up  against  me.     But  if  they  will  not 


CHASTISEMENT    AND    INSTRUCTION.  285 

come  up  against  me  within  the  time  that  I  have  appointed,  I  will 
come  out  upon  them  as  a  whirlwind,  and  sweep  them  off  the  earth 
as  with  a  besom  of  destruction.  I  will  cut  off  that  fallen  race 
from  among  the  heirs  of  salvation.  My  people  have  not  long  to 
wait,  let  mine  enemies  do  whatever  they  may.  I  shall  work  now. 
I  have  about  done  being  baffled  and  driven  about  by  them;  and 
I  shall  now  take  a  straightforward  course.  Let  my  people  place 
their  confidence  in  me,  and  I  will  not  betray  it.  I  am  the  Lord. 
And  let  them  hold  themselves  in  readiness,  as  I  have  before  com- 
manded them. 

3.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  you  must  not  suffer 
your  spirits  to  droop  any  more  than  you  can  help,  for  it  unfits  you 
for  your  office ;  therefore,  struggle  against  such  a  feeling,  that  you 
may  be  well  able  to  do  your  duty.  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts,  and 
I  am  with  you  continually.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION      CONTAINING     CHASTISEMENT,     IN- 
STRUCTION,   AND  A  RENEWAL  OF  THE 
LORD'S  PROMISE  TO  DELIVER 
HIS  PEOPLE. 


No.  165.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  i3th,  1861. 

i.  WHAT  do  you  mean,  my  servant  Joseph,  by  talking  in  the 
way  in  which  you  have  done?  I  have  been  with  you  and  your 
counsellors,  and  I  have  heard  your  conversation  about  me  and  my 
people,  and  about  my  promises  "to  do  this,  that,  and  the  other," 
and  all  my  promises  failing.  You  know  the  situation  in  which  I 
am  placed,  and  you  need  not  to  make  things  appear  so  strange. 
You  know  that  I  have  had  to  deal  with  men  on  whojji  I  have  no 
claim — men  who  are  free  to  act,  and  whose  free  agency  I  cannot 
lawfully  destroy.  And  you  know,  also,  that  they  are  altogether 
opposed  to  me,  and  that,  inasmuch  as  they  are  free  to  oppose -my 
plans,  they  do  so.  They  will  not  come  to  my  terms  if  they  can 
help  it.  They, will  strive  to  baffle  me  all  that  they  possibly  can. 
They  will  not  come  to  my  terms  when  I  want  them  to  do  so;  but 
they  would  do  so,  if  I  could  spare  time  to  wait  for  them.  They 


286  A    DELIVERANCE    PROMISED. 

want  better  backing.  They  feel  afraid  to  undertake  such  a  work 
themselves;  consequently,  they  want  the.  destruction  of  my  people 
to  be  sanctioned  by  another  power ;  and  they  think  that,  if  they 
can  put  the  matter  off  for  a  short  time,  they  will  be  able  to  obtain 
help  from  the  right  source,  and  then  they  will  be  sure  that  all 
things  will  come  off  right  with  them.  It  is  too  great  a  matter  for 
them  to  run  into  lawlessly;  and,  without  good  backing,  they  are 
afraid.  If  it  was  only  a  small  matter,  they  would  not  be  afraid  of 
it ;  but  it  is  a  great  matter,  too  great  for  them  to  undertake  to  put 
a  stop  to  without  good  backing,  which  they  now  wish  to  obtain. 
But  I  shall  not  wait  for  them  over  the  time  which  I  have  ap- 
pointed. 

2.  My   people's  faith  is  beginning  to  fail,  and  I  cannot  keep 
them  in  suspense  in  this  way  by  not  delivering  them.      If  I  do  not 
come  out   now  to  deliver  them,  they  will  depart  from  me,  and  go 
down  to   destruction.     Therefore,    I   shall   be  compelled  to  come 
unto  you  and  give  unto  you  the  rod-  as  I  have  promised ;    or  else, 
I   may  give   up  to  the  devil,   and  let  him  destroy  all.     I  cannot 
delay  the  deliverance  of  my  people  any  longer.     I  must  come  up 
to  you,  and  I  will  come  to  you   at  all  hazards.     I  will  not  suffer 
my  promises  to  fail.     I   cannot   fail  to  do  the  work  which  is  ap- 
pointed unto  me  by  the  eternal  law  of  heaven,   although   I   have 
deferred  the  matter  as  long  as  I  possibly  could.     You  cannot  fully 
believe,  my  son,  that  I  shall  come  to  you  in  the  course  of  a  day  or 
two ;  but   you   may  believe  it.     The  promise  seems  too  much  for 
your  faith  to  lay  hold  of;  but,  great  as  it  may  seem  to  be,  it  will 
be  realized. 

3.  You  shall  not  murmur  against  me  in  the  way  in  which  you 
do;  for,  by  so  doing,  you  keep  me  continually  in  pain,  and  I  can- 
not endure  it.     You  say  that  you  are  oppressed  until  your  life  is  a 
burden  uifto-you.     I  know  it;  but  I  cannot  help  it.     You  oppress 
me  with  the  complaints  which  you  make  against  me.     1  know  what 
ails  you — you   are  overburdened,  so   much   so,  that  you   cannot 
exercise  that  amount  of  faith  and  confidence  in  me  which  is  neces- 
sary in  order  to  fill  your  office ;  and  you  let  others  see  your  weak- 
ness.    You  cannot  even  keep  it  from  them ;  but  you  let  them  see 
how  you  are  cast  down ;  and  thus  your  conduct  tends  to  cause  my 
people  to  be  cast  down  also.     When  they  see  your  spirit  droop, 


A    DELIVERANCE    PROMISED.  287 

theirs  may  well  droop.  You  know  that  my  promises  cannot  fail ; 
but  my  people  do  not  know  it,  They  look  to  you  for  encourage- 
ment; therefore,  when  they  see  you  cast  down,  how  can  they  be 
otherwise?  They  partake  of  the  same  spirit  and  feeling  that  you 
do,  and  consequently  you  are  all  failing  in  your  feelings  together, 
and  are  all  unprepared  for  a  visit  from  me.  * 

4.  But  you  may  say  that  "it  is  the  want  pf  a  visit  from  you  that 
causes  our  spirits  to  droop,  and  if  they  do  droop,  it  is  your  fault ! 
Why  do  you  not  uphold  us  as  you  ought  to  do?     You,  apparently, 
let  your  word  fall  to  the   ground,    and  thereby  destroy  our  con- 
fidence  in  you.     We  are  ever  likely  to  suffer  our  spirits  to  droop 
when  we  feel  that   we   have  nothing  to  depend  upon.     You  have 
promised  deliverance  unto  us  time  after  time,  and   when  we  have 
flattered  ourselves  that  the  day  of  our  deliverance  had  arrived,  we 
have,  hitherto,  been  disappointed ;  consequently,  we  have  not  been 
able  to  prevent  our  spirits  from  drooping,  because  we  fear  that  you 
are  not  true.     We  do  not  know  how  to  place  confidence  in  you. 
We  do  not  know  what  we  ought  to  believe,  or  what  we  ought  not 
to  believe.     We   cannot  understand   you ;  for  your  ways  are  past 
our  finding  out,  and  we  are  at  a  loss  to  know  how  to  act,  or  what 
to  do  to  please  you." 

5.  Hearken  unto  me,  O  my  people,  and  I  will  tell  you  what  I 
require  of  you.     If  you  will  do  as  I  command  you,  day  by  day,  it 
is  all  that  I  require  of  you.      Do  not  trouble  yourselves  so  much 
with  that  which   belongs   to  me.     It   is  my  duty  to  deliver  you  at 
mine  own  time  and  in  mine  own  way ;  and  it  is  your  duty  to  obey 
me.     And  if  I   do  not  deliver  you  as  I  have  promised,  then  you 
will  have  cause  to  let  your  spirits  droop ;  then  you  will  be  able  to 
justly  say  that   I   have  failed  to   fulfil  the  promises  which  I  have 
made    unto    you.     But    I    have  not,   as   yet,   failed  to   fulfil    the 
promises  which  I  have  made  unto  my  people ;  neither  shall  I  ever 
fail  to  fulfil  them.     I  have  only  been  baffled  a  little  by  the  devil, 
and  the  deliverance  of  my  people  has  been   deferred   a    few  days. 
My   promises   have   riot   failed,    nor  never  will.     My   people  are 
ignorant  of  my  way  of  working.     They  are  too  ready  to  charge 
me   with   failing  to  fulfil   my  promises ;  but  they  would  not  have 
such  feelings  concerning  me  if  they  knew  much  about  me.     If  the 
smallest  thing  goes  wrong  with  them,  they  are  ready  to  charge  me 


288  A    DELIVERANCE    PROMISED. 

with  being  false.  They  are  ready  to  throw  away  all  those  precious 
truths  which  they  have  received  through  the  fulness  of  my  gospel, 
because  of  some  small  thing  coming  forth  which  they,  short-sighted 
creatures,  cannot  understand. 

6.  Let   my   people  be  aware  how  they  charge  me ;  for  I  am 
true.     I  am  not  driven  hither  and  thither  by  the  devil  beyond  that 
which  is  lawful.     He»  claims  the  right  to  oppose  and  baffle  me,  if 
he   can;  but  he   cannot  hinder  me  from  eventually  fulfilling  my 
promises.     I  make  no  promise  that  I  cannot  fulfil ;  therefore,  let 
my  people   seek  to  know  me,  and  then  they  will  not  be  so  ready  to 
charge  me  with   being  false.     Oh,  how  my  people  insult  me  with 
their  short-sightedness,  and  wilful  wickedness.     They  know  better 
than  to  charge  me  with  being  false,  if  they  would    use  their  com- 
mon  sense.      I   will   not  take   such  insults   from   them.      If  they 
would  walk  faithfully  before  me,  they  would  have  my  holy  spirit  to 
guide  them,  and  it  would  teach  them  better  than  to  charge  me  in 
that  manner;  for  my  spirit  will  lead  those  who  will  be  led  by  it. 

7.  And   now,   behold,  I  say  unto  you  once  more,  look  out  for 
me.     I   shall  come   in   the  way  that  I  have  appointed,  and  I  will 
not  weary  you  with  waiting  for  me.     You  will  soon  be  in  posses- 
sion of  those  things  which  you  are   wishing  to   see ;  but  you  are 
impatient  for  them.     It  may  be  that  you  will  be  satisfied  when  you 
have  them  in  your  own  possession.     I  shall  soon  try   whether  you 
will  be   or   not.     But,    I  promise  you  that,  if  you  murmur  against 
me  after  I  shall  have  given  them  unto  you,  and  shall  have  removed 
your  enemies  out  of  your  way,   as  much   as  you  do  now,  I  will 
chasten  you  severely.     Continue  to  look  out  for  me,  and  I  will  give 
unto  you  those  things  which  you  want.     I  am  Jesus  Christ.     Even 
so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    IN     WHICH     THE     LORD     EXPLAINS 

WHY   HE    HAS    NOT    DELIVERED 

HIS    PEOPLE. 


No.  1 66.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  i4th,  1861. 

i.     You  may  ask  me   these  questions:     "What  are  you  about 
to  do  now,  seeing  that  your  first  arrangments  appear  to  be  broken 


WHY    THE    PEOPLE    HAVE    NOT    BEEN    DELIVERED.  289 

up?  How  do  you  intend  to  proceed  with  the  work?  If  you  are 
about  to  pay  me  a  visit,  how  will  you  come  ?  And  if  you  are 
about  to  make  any  new  arrangements,  what  are  they?  Are  you 
about  to  show  yourself  unto  your  people,  as  you  first  promised 
them,  or  not?  We  wish  to  know  what  you  are  about  to  do ;  and 
we  want  no  more  disappointments.  We  expect  that  you  have  now 
done  being  baffled  by  the  devil,  and  we  want  you  to  come  out  as 
you  have  promised  us.  We  know  that  when*  you  have  to  wait  for 
the  devil,  you  are  altogether  uncertain ;  for  we  know  that  he  will 
baffle  you,  and  disarrange  your  plans  as  much  as  he  possibly  can ; 
this  we  are  satisfied  of.  But  you  say  that  you  have  done  waiting 
for  him  now,  and  that  you  are  going  to  work  without  him.  You 
are  not  going  to  run  side  by  side  with  him  any  more  in  this  case. 
You  say  that  you  have  now  brought  your  enemies  to  that  point 
where  you  can  lawfully  destroy  them ;  and  we  should  think  that 
that  is  all  that  you  need  to  do.  You  can  now  take  a  straightfor- 
ward course  of  your  own ;  consequently,  we  do  not  expect  to  be 
disappointed  by  you  any  more ;  therefore,  tell  us  now  what  you 
require  of-  us  in  order  that  we  may  prepare  ourselves  to  meet  you. 
We  long  to  see  yoy.  We  are  doing  all  that  we  possibly  can  in 
order  to  be  ready  to  meet  you.  We  have  heard  a  great  deal 
about  you,  and  now  we  would  like  to  see  you,  although  we  know 
that  it  would  be  a  great  shock  to  us  ;  but,  notwithstanding  that, 
we  should  like  to  see  you." 

2.  You  who  are  faithful  shall  see  me.     I  will   promise  you 
that ;  and  you  will  find  that  I  shall  have  visited  you  soon  enough. 
"But  will  you  visit  us  in  the  way  in   which   you  first  appointed? 
Shall  we  arrange  ourselves  in  order  according  to  your  first  ap- 
pointment?"   "Yes.      I    shall    not    break    up   that    arrangement. 
WThen  I  wish  you  to  gather  together,  I  shall  come  unto  my  servant 
Joseph  in  the  way  which  I  first  appointed,  and   I  shall   place  the 
rod  in  his  hand  before  he  commences  to  gather  you  together.     I 
shall  give  unto  him  the  robe  and  rod  at  the  same  time;  and  he 
shall  put  on  his  robe  before  he   steps   forth  to  raise  his  rod  and 
give  the  command. 

3.  And  inasmuch  as  your  enemies  are  not,  apparently,  coming 
up  against  you  soon,  you  will  not  be  cramped  for  time  to  arrange 
matters.     You  can  take  your  own  time,  and  do  all  things  right. 


2 pO  WHY    THE    PEOPLE    HAVE    NOT    BEEN    DELIVERED. 

And  when  you,  my  servant  Joseph,  raise  your  rod,  I  will  cut  off  all 
your  enemies,  let  them  be  wherever  they  may.  They  appointed 
a  time  once  to  come  up  to  this  place  to  slay  my  people ;  but  their 
hearts  failed  them.  They  were  afraid  of  their  own  lives.  It  was 
not  because  they  repented  of  their  evil  act  which  they  wanted  to 
commit.  Neither  have  they  yet  given  up  their  wicked  intention  ; 
but  they  are  laboring  to  obtain  a  better  hold  on  my  people.  They 
did  not  feel  safe  in  coming  up  against  them  without  better  back- 
ing. They  want  some  other  power  to  back  them.  I  know  their 
intentions.  They  want  to  slay  my  people  now  as  much  as  they 
ever  wanted  to  slay  them.  Although  they  have  backed  out  through 
fear,  they  are  waiting  to  get  a  better  foothold.  Their  desire  to 
shed  innocent  blood  is  as  strong  now  as  it  ever  was.  And  shall  I 
suffer  those  bloodthirsty  wretches  to  live  ?  No ;  as  I  live  I  will 
sweep  them  off  the  earth  before  they  shall  have  the  opportunity  to 
lay  a  fresh  plan  to  destroy  my  people.  I  will  promise  them  that 
I  will  not  give  them  the  chance  to  obtain  that  backing  which  they 
are  striving  for.  I  am  at  their  heels  now.  Inasmuch  as  they 
would  not  come  up  against  my  people,  after  appointing  the  time 
to  come,  I  shall  take  the  will  for  the  deed.  » I  wanted  them  to 
come  to  some  point  where  I  could  lawfully  destroy  them.  And  if 
they  ever  had  it  in  their  hearts  to  destroy  my  people,  I  can  destroy 
them.  There  are  many  thousands  now  in  this  Territory  who  thirst 
for  the  blood  of  my  people ;  but  they  cannot  bring  things  into  the 
right  shape,  as  yet,  to  perpetrate  such  a  bloody  act,  and  that  is 
the  reason  why  they  have  not  attempted  it.  They  are  so  blood- 
thirsty that  they  hardly  know  how  to  contain  themselves.  Some 
of  them  are  ready  to  break  through  all  law,  and  to  come  and 
attempt  to  destroy  my  people ;  but  others  who  have  a  little  better 
sense  than  they  have,  hold  them  back.  Those  of  mine  enemies 
who  have  a  little  common  sense  are  afraid  to  come  up  against  my 
people ;  but  those  that  have  no  sense  are  not  afraid  to  come  up 
against  them;  such  cannot  see  where  the  danger  lies;  and  as 
they  know  nothing,  they  fear  nothing.  That  class  of  men  will 
rush  into  any  dangerous  undertaking,  because  they  cannot  see  any 
danger.  They  are  devil's  slaves.  They  are  not  fit  to  be  let  loose 
without  a  guard  to  take  care  of  them.  They  have  to  be  taken 
care  of  by  more  experienced  devils.  They  are  a  constant  burden 


THE    ENEMIES    WARNED.  2QI 

to  experienced  gentlemen  devils.  There  are  different  grades  of 
devils.  Some  are  called  to  fill  responsible  places  both  on  the 
earth  and  in  hell;  and  other  devils  are. governed  by  them.  They 
take  the  charge  of  things  which  belong  to  the  reigning  devil,  and 

they  think  for  those  who  have  not  sense  enough  to  think  for  them- 

selves,  and  take  care  of  them.  The  slave  devils  are  sent  to  do  the 
dirty  work,  and  the  gentlemen  devils  dictate  them.  There  are 
devils  adapted  for  all  kinds  of  dirty  work.  The  gentlemen  devils 
in  this  Territory  have  prevented  their  slaves  from  coming  against 
my  people,  or  they  would  have  come;  for  devils  without  sense 
can  see  no  danger,  consequently,  they  fear  none. 

4.  Are    mine   enemies  who    are    in  this  Territory   worthy  of 
death;  both  the  responsible  devils  and  their  slaves?     Yes.     Shall 
I  destroy  them?     Yes.     Do  I  require  any  more  of  them  before 
I  destroy  them  ?     No ;  I  do  not.     Inasmuch   as  they   would  not 
come  up  after  appointing  a  time,   I  want  no   more   of  them.     I 
am  now  setting  myself  to  destroy  them.     I  will  send  mine   angels 
into  the  palaces  of  the  great,  and  they  will  lay  whole  families  dead. 
They    will  not  leave  one   alive  in   many  great  men's  houses  (so 
called).     I  can  find  the  way  to  them.     They  can  appoint  no  guard 
that  can   stop  my  course.     I  shall  not  ask  any  of  them  whether  I 
may  be  permitted  to  see  them,  or  not.     I  sent  a  prophet  to  a  cer- 
tain person,  and  he  would  not  see  that  prophet;  but  I   will  now 
send  a  messenger  to  him  that  will  not  only  see,  but  penetrate  him. 
His  days  in  mortality  are  now  about  spent.     He  may  now  look 
out  for  a  visitor,  for  he  will  speedily  have  one. 

5.  And  now,   behold,   I   speak   unto  the  inhabitants   of  this 
Territory.     Are  you  prepared  for  a  visit  from  me?  for  I  shall  now 
visit  you  whether  you  are  or  not.     I  have  done  all  that  I  possibly 
could  to  warn  you  of  what  I  am    about  to  do  in  your  midst.     I 
am  now   coming  out  upon   you,   and   I  shall  preach  a  sermon  to 
those  who  will  be  left  that  they  will  understand.     As  I  have  before 
said   unto  you,  my  son,  so  I  say   unto  you  again, — the  first  move 
that  I  shall  make  among  the  people  of  this  Territory  will  be  to  lay 
many  thousands  of  them  dead. 

6.  And  I  say  unto  you  once  again, — you  shall  gather  my  peo- 
ple together,  and  set  them  in  order,  even  as  I   first  commanded 
you.     And  I  will  come  and  show  myself  unto  those  of  my  people 


292     WHY  THE  PEOPLE  HAVE  NOT  BEEN  DELIVERED. 

who  are  faithful,  as  I  would  have  done  if  their  enemies  had  come 
up  and  stood  before  them.  And  after  I  shall  have  called  upon 
you  to  raise  your  rod,  and  you  shall  have  raised  it,  and  given  your 
command,  mine  angels  shall  go  forth  to  war,  and  in  a  few  minutes 
they  will  have  slain  all  that  I  intend  to  destroy  at  the  first  cutting 
off.  I  shall  clear  the  way  for  my  servants  to  go  abroad  through- 
out this  Territory  to  preach  the  fulness  of  my  gospel.  And  when 
I  shall  have  cut  off  a  sufficient  number  for  the  first  time,  I  shall 
come  unto  you  and  tell  you  to  lower  your  rod.  And  as  you  lower 
it,  you  shall  repeat  unto  me  the  sign  for  stopping.  Before  you 
give  the  command  to  the  heavenly  host,  you  shall  have  your  rod 
raised  and  steadied ;  and  when  it  is  raised  and  steadied,  you  shall 
give  the  command.  You  must  be  very  calm  and  deliberate  in 
what  you  do  while  you  are  raising  the  rod.  You  must  not  be 
unsteady  at  that  time.  I  need  not  to  charge  you  with  being 
unsteady,  for  you  are  the  most  steady-minded  man  that  dwells 
upon  the  face  of  the  earth ;  but  inasmuch  as  I  know  the  circum- 
stances in  which  you  are  placed,  it  is  necessary  for  me  to  give  unto 
you  a  strict  charge  concerning  the  rod  before  you  have  it  in  your 
hands. 

7.  Behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  I  gave  unto  you  a  partial 
knowledge  of  the  time  when  I  intended  to  commence  to  deliver 
my  people ;  but  I  did  not  know  fully  how  mine  enemies  would  act 
between  that  time  and  this.  They  have  baffled  me  once,*  and 
thrown  me  a  little  out  of  time.  I  should  have  delivered  my  peo- 
ple inside  trie  time  that  I  specified  unto  you,  if  mine  enemies  had 
not  disappointed  me ;  but  I  shall  not  be  much  out  of  time, 
although  I  have  been  disappointed.  You  know  that  while  I  had 
tadeal  with  enemies  who  took  delight  in  baffling  me,  I  could  not 
appoint  any  positive  time.  They  opposed  me  all  that  they  possi- 
bly could,  and  tried  to  make  my  words  prove  false ;  but  now  that 
I  have  got  through  with  them,  I  can  set  a  time  when  I  intend  to 
come  out,  and  I  can  fulfil  my  promise ;  but  I  could  not  make  a 
positive  promise  while  I  had  to  deal  with  devils  who  claim  the 
right  to  exercise  an  agency  to  work  against  me.  While  I  had  to 
deal  with  such  a  wicked  agency  as  that,  I  had  to  work  by 
stratagem.  I  had  to  strive  to  outwit  the  devil  to  bring  him  to 
my  terms.  But  I  had  not  an  equal  chance  with  him.  He  had  an 
advantage  over  me. 


WHY    THE    PEOPLE    HAVE    NOT    BEEN    DELIVERED.  293 

8.  The  revelations  which  I  have  given  have  been  read  to  my 
people  publicly,  and  mine  enemies  have  heard  them  as  well  as  my 
people  have.  Mine  enemies  could  very  easily  obtain  a  knowledge 
of  my  plans ;  and  when  they  knew  them,  they  strove  to  break  them 
up,  and  to  frustrate  me.  And  even  if  they  had  not  themselves  — 
heard  what  my  plans  were,  and  had  asked  some  of  my  people, 
they  would  have  told  them.  There  are  some  among  my  people 
who  are  ignorant,  who  have  worked  against  me,  who  are  traitors 
to  me.  They  are  not  friends  to  the  trwth,  but  they  are  enemies  to 
it.  They  would  fill  the  mouths  of  mine  enemies.  And  thus  all 
my  plans  have  been  made  public.  Mine  enemies  have  known  all 
about  them  that  they  wished  to  know;  and  they  have  had  the 
advantage  over  me;  for  when  they  knew  my  plans,  they  could 
easily  frustrate  them. 

'  9.  But,  when  mine  enemies  laid  their  plans  against  me,  they 
did  it  in  secret — in  places  which  they  had  which  were  adapted  for 
that  purpose,  and  into  which,  when  assembled,  they  would  not 
admit  a  traitor  to  them ;  and  thus  they  could  keep  all  their  plans 
•  secret.  But  it  was  not  so  with  me.  All  the  Territory  have  been 
able  to  obtain  a  knowledge  of  my  plans ;  therefore,  because  I  have 
not  had  an  equal  chance  with  them,  they  have  been  able  to  frus- 
trate me  in  my  movements ;  but  I  shall,  nevertheless,  accomplish 
my  purposes.  My  promises  will  never  fail.  My  people  should 
understand  the  unfavorable  position  in  which  I  have  been  placed, 
in  that  I  have  had  to  work  against  a  people  under  such  disadvan- 
tages. 

i  o.     Let  all  my  people  prepare  for  me ;  for  lo,  I  shall  come 
suddenly — even  as  a  thief  in  the  night — upon  all  the  rebellious  ! 

I  am  the  Stone  and  Shepherd  of  Israel,   and  the  Bright  and 
Morning  Star;  even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


294  THE    PEOPLE    DISSATISFIED. 

THE    PEOPLE    APPEAR    DISSATISFIED    AND 
RESTLESS. 


No.  167.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  i5th,  1861. 

1.  I  AM  COME  to  speak  unto  you,  my  servant   Joseph.     I   am 
in  haste  to  make  a  change  in  things ;  for  my   people  are  discour- 
aged,  and   they  are  beginning  to  deny  the  truth,  and  to  fall  away. 
I  intend  to  save  the  lives  of  some   of  them.     I    do   not   want   to 
destroy  any  more  of  my  people  than  I  can  help.     I  have  to  hurry 
to  save  the  lives  of  some  of  them.     They  are  ignorant  of  my  situa- 
tion.    If  they  understood  it,  they  would  not  act  as  they  do. 

2.  Mine  enemies  appointed  a  time  to  come  up  against  my 
people,  and  I  prepared  to  meet  them,  but  they  did  not  come ;  con- 
sequently, they  disappointed  me  as  well  as  my  people.     I  have  no 
means   of  knowing  what   devils   will  do  so  long  beforehand ;  they 
change   from  one   thing  to  another  so  often.     They  are  not  gov- 
erned  by   any  fixed  law  by  which  I  can  judge  what  they  will  do. 
Sometimes  I  cannot  tell  what  they  will  do  from  one  day  to  another. 
At  other  times  I  am  aware  of  their  movements.     Their  actions 
depend  upon  the  situation  in  which  they  are  placed. 

3.  I  should  have  no  trouble  with  my  people  if  they  knew  my 
way   of  working.     They   should  know  it ;  they  have  been  taught 
enough ;  and  if  they  had  given  proper  attention  to  what  they  have 
been  taught,   they   could   understand.     But  some  of  them,  seem- 
ingly, love  to  live  in  ignorance.     They  think  that   I  can  do  any- 
thing regardless  of  law.     But  they  should  know  that  I  am  entirely 
governed  by  law.     I   can   do  anything  that   is  lawful;  but   that 
which  is  unlawful,  I  cannot  do.     I  should  have  delivered  my  peo- 
ple inside  the  time  which  I  appointed,  if  mine  enemies  had  come 
against   my  people  at  the  time  which  they  appointed.     But  they 
broke  their  word,   as  devils  will ;  and  thus  they  disappointed  me 
and  my  people.     When  I  appointed  a  time  to  deliver  my  people, 
I   did  it   upon  these  grounds :     That,   if  mine  enemies  come  up 
against  my   people,  at  the  time  which  they  had  appointed,  that  I 
should  deliver  my   people  in  the   course  of  so  many  days.     But 
they  did  not  come  up,  and   consequently  they  interfered  with  the 


THE    PEOPLE    DISSATISFIED.  295 

first  arrangement  which  I  made,  and  prevented  me  from  delivering 
my  people  inside  the  time  which  I  had  appointed ;  therefore,  I  am 
compelled  to  make  other  arrangements. 

4.  I  shall  deliver  my  people  in  the  course  of  a  few  days  from 
the  time  that  I  was  first  disappointed.     My  people  need  not  to  let  _ 
their  spirits  droop  so   much  as  to  render  them  unfit  to  meet  me. 
If  they   do,   I  will   promise  them   that  they  will  see  great  sorrow. 
Can  they  not  keep  their  spirits  up  for  a  few  days?     They  are  not 
so  destitute   of  the  common  necessaries  of  life  that  they  need  to 
murmur  so  soon.     I  have  provided  well  for  them  in  every  respect. 
They  have  pleasant  weather,  as  pleasant  as  they  could  wish  for.     I 
have  moderated  the  weather  for  them ;  and  I  have   done  all  that  I 
could  to  make  them  comfortable.     Some  of  them  are  unwilling  to 
wait  for  me  a  few  days  while  I  prepare  myself  again  after  this  dis- 
appointment.    I  do  not  ask  them  to  wait  for  me  long ;  and  if  I  do 
not  come  and  deliver  them,  I  will  be   willing  for  them   to  charge 
me  with  being  false. 

5.  There   are   some   of  my  servants  who  are  greatly  afraid  of 
me.     They  need  to  be  afraid  of  themselves.     They  are  unprepared 
for  a  visit  from  me.     I  did  not  expect  to  see  such  folly  manifested 
by  them.     They  are  unstable  in  their  ways.     They  do  not  know 
what  ails  them.     They  had  better  turn  themselves  around  as  soon 
as  they  can.    They  have  no  time  to  spare  if  they  wish  to  save  their 
lives ;  for   I   will   promise  them  that '  if  they   feel  as  they  do  now 
when  I  come,  I  will  cut  them  off.     I  will  nut  spare  the  life  of  any 
person  who  has  yielded  obedience  unto  the  fulness  of  my  gospel 
to  operate  against  me.     If  they  wish  to  live  to  do  good,  they  can ; 
but  they  cannot  live  to  fight  against  me.     If  there  are  any  such 
persons  among  my  people  as1 1  have  described,  let  them  turn  them- 
selves round  as  soon  as  they  can ;  for  they  have  no  time  to  spare. 
Some  of  my  people  do  not  know  when  they  are  well  treated ;  but 
they  trample  my  blessings  under  their  feet.     They  do  not  appre- 
ciate them.     I  do  despise  those  who  are  ungrateful. 

6.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  that  it  would  be  well 
for  my  people  to  prepare  themselves  as  well    as    they    can    for 
moving  out  of  this  place  as  soon  as  I  have   moved  their  enemies 
out  of  their  way.     Let  them  get  themselves  ready  as  much,  as  they 
can  during  the  short  time  which  will  be  allotted  them.     But  they 


296  COMMANDED    TO    PREPARE    FOR    MOVING. 

must  not  run  into  confusion.  Let  them  work  steadily  and  orderly. 
Let  them  put  as  many  of  their  wagons  in  order  for  traveling  as  they 
can ;  but  they  must  not  break  up  their  homes  until  I  have  cut  off 
mine  enemies,  and  am  ready  to  move  them  away  from  this  place. 
My  people  must  act  consistently.  They  must  not  throw  them- 
selves out  of  homes  until  I  have  found  them  new  ones.  My  peo- 
ple will  understand  me.  Let  them  be  orderly  in  their  movements. 
Let  them  not  run  into  confusion.  I  am  the  Lord. 

7.  My  people  need  not  to  think  that  I  shall  be  long  before  I 
set  them  at  liberty.  I  shall  work  as  fast  as  I  can.  I  shall  lose  no 
time.  Let  my  people  do  their  duties,  and  all  will  go  on  right. 
My  people  must  not  go  far  away  from  this  place.  They  must  not 
run  about  from  place  to  place  any  more  than  they  can  help. 
They  must  not  forget  that  I  told  them  that  they  must  hold  them- 
selves in  readiness.  I  shall  speedily  come.  Let  them  keep  up 
their  spirits,  and  cheerfully  wait  a  few  days;  that  is  as  long 
as  I  will  require  them  to  wait  for  me.  They  will  find  plenty  to  do 
to  prepare  their  wagons  for  a  trip,  until  I  come.  I  shall  lead  my 
people  out  of  this  place  as  sooi^  after  I  have  destroyed  mine 
enemies  as  I  possibly  can ;  and  I  shall  go  before  them  and  find 
them  homes  myself.  I  shall  tell  my  servant  Joseph  what  to  do 
with  my  people  in  respect  to  finding  them  homes.  I  will  give  unto 
them  good  homes.  They  will  be  satisfied  with  them. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.  I  am  the  Glorious  Branch  of 
Jesse,  and  the  Bright  and  Morning  Star ;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even 
so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION  CONCERNING  THE  DISAPPOINTMENT. 


No.    168.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  .1 6th,  1861. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  about  to  speak  unto  you  for  your  own  satis- 
faction. You  wish  to  know  how  I  am  about  to  deal  with  my 
people.  They  have  been  cast  down;  but  they  are  now  in  good 
spirits,  and  I  have  confidence  in  them.  I  feel  that  they  will  wait 
patiently  for  me  until  I  come  out  and  deliver  them.  I  do  not 


THE    DISAPPOINTMENT.  297 

expect  that  they  will  cause  you  any  more  trouble  through  their 
restlessness.  They  feel  satisfied  at  this  time,  and  they  will  rest 
satisfied  for  several  days.  They  will  wait  for  me  as  long  as  I  wish 
them  to.  It  was  well  for  them  that  they  met  with  a  disappoint- 
ment. They  will  be  better  prepared  to  meet  me  in  the  course  of  two 
or  three  days  than  they  were  three  or  four  days  ago.  That  disap~ 
pointment  which  they  met  with  will  be  the  means  of  strengthening 
them  greatly.  It  has  broken  the  first  snare.  They  are .  through 
the  first  snare ;  and  they  are  stronger  and  better  prepared  in  every 
respect  even  now  than  they  were  three  or  four  days  ago.  I  wish 
to  prepare  them  as  well  as  I  can  to  meet  me. 

2.  Notwithstanding  all  this,   if  mine  enemies    had  come   up 
against  my  people  on  that  day  which  they  had  appointed,  I  should 
have    come    out    of   my  hiding    place  and  swept  them  off  and 
cleared  the  way  for  my  people,   whether  they  had   been  prepared 
for  me  or  not.      But  it  was  better  for  them  that  I  did  not  come  out 
in   power   on  that  day.     They   were  not  prepared  for  me.     They 
wanted  instructing  on  that  matter,  and  they  have  received  instruc- 
tions this  day  that  will   be  of  great  benefit  to  them.     They  have 
learned  a   lesson   this  day  that   will  greatly  help  them  in   every 
respect.     From  the  instruction  which  they  have  received  to-day, 
they  begin  to  learn  that  they  were  not  prepared  to  meet  me.     They 
see  this,  and  they  will  strive  now  to  prepare  themselves  to  meet 
me  when   I  come ;  and  thus  that  disappointment  which  they  met 
with  was  a  great  blessing  unto  them.     Therefore,  I  say  unto  you, 
my  son,  my  people  will  wait  patiently  for  me  until  I  come.     I  will 
not  weary  them  in  waiting  for  me ;  for  I  will  come  while  they  are 
in  good  spirits,   and  they   will  be   much  better  prepared  for  me 
when  I  come,  than  what  they  would  have  been  at  the  first. 

3.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  that  I  will  draw  more 
near  unto  you  day   by  day,  until  I  come  up  to  you  in  the  way  in 
which  I  have  appointed.    I  will  speak  unto  you,  more  or  less,  about 
every  day,   until  I  come   to  you;  and  a  few  hours  before'I  send 
mine  angels  unto  you,  I  will  give  you  to  feel  positively  that   I  am 
about  to  send  mine  angels   unto  you.     And   when  you  feel  that 
influence,  you  may  conclude  that  mine  angels  will  visit  you  in  the 
way  which   I  have  before  appointed,   and  they  will  lead  you  into 
my  presence,  as  I  have  appointed.     Lift  up  your  spirits,  and  I  will 


298        TO  THE  PROPHET  AND  HIS  COUNSELLORS. 

give  unto  you  power  over  that  influence  which  has  oppressed  you. 
You  have  now  almost  overcome  it.  I,  even  the  Lord  of  Hosts, 
am  with  you.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION  TO  THE  PROPHET  AND  HIS 
COUNSELLORS. 


No.  169.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  iyth,  1861. 

1.  You  wish  to  know  the  reason  why  I  do  not  tell  my  people 
correctly  when   I   intend  to  come  and  deliver  them.     You  blame 
me  for  saying  that  I  am  about  to  come  and  deliver   my  people  in 
the  course  of  a  few  days,   and  then  not  coming  within  that  time 
as  I   have  said.     You  want  me  to   give  an  account   to  you  for 
neglecting  to  come  in  the  course  of  a  few  days,  as  I  stated  that  I 
would.     You   say  that,   if  I  will  not  explain  this  matter  to  your 
satisfaction,   you   will  not  be  responsible  for   me   to   my  people. 
You  say  that  -when  I  promise  my  people  that  I   will   deliver  them 
in  the  course  of  a  few  days,  and  I  do  not  do  so  according  to  my 
promise,  you  consider  that  I   do  not  tell  the  truth,  and  that   I  am 
disappointing  both  you  and  my  people;  and  you  consider  that    I 
am  taking  a  course  to  destroy  the  confidence  of  my  people  in  me. 
You  say  that  you  cannot  understand  the  reason  why  I  deal  in  that 
way  with  my  people.     You  think  that  I  do  not  deal  honestly  with 
them ;  and  you  are  afraid  of  me.     You  are  afraid  that  I  shall  lead 
you  into  trouble,  and  leave  you  there.     You  are  afraid  that  I  shall 
defer  the  matter  so  long  that  my  people  will  turn  round  upon  you 
and  charge  you  with  being  false. 

2.  I   shall   never  bring  trouble   upon  you.     I  told  you  that  I 
would  not  weary  you  and  my   people  with  waiting  for   me.     Are 
you  ready  to  meet  me?     If  you  are,  these  people  are  not.     But  I 
suppose  that   I  shall  have  to   come  whether  they  are,  or  not.     I 
shall  destroy  a  number  of  them  when  I  come.     I  cannot  stay  away 
from  you  any  longer.     I  am  comkig.     My   people  should   all  be 
here ;  but  they  arc  not,  and  they  will  not  all  be  here  when  I  come; 
but  I  shall  gather  all  those  together  who  are  here.     I  told  my  peo- 
ple that  they  must  hold  themselves   in  readiness  for   me.     I  told 


TO    THE    PROPHET   AND    HIS    COUNSELLORS.  299 

them  that  they  must  not  go  far  away  from  this  place.  I  told  them 
that  I  should  not  be  more  than  a  few  days  from  the  time  that  I 
was  disappointed  until  I  came.  I  told  them  the  truth.  I  shall 
come  in  a  few  days  from  the  time  that  I  was  disappointed ;  and 
t^at  you  will  see.  I  could  not  tell  you  to  one  day  when  I  could 
be  with  you  in  the  way  which  I  have  appointed ;  but  I  could  tell 
you  very  near.  A  few  days  has  now  passed  since  my  disappoint- 
ment, and  I  am  coming  up  to  you  now. 

3.  My  son,   you   will   not  have  the  chance  to  murmur  against 
me   for  stopping  away   from  you   much  more.     If  you   murmur 
against  me  all  the  time  from  now  until  I  come,  you  will  have  done 
your  share  of  murmuring.     I  want   you   now  to  prepare  yourself 
like  a  man.     I  will  put  an  end  to  your  murmuring,  for  it  is  unen- 
durable.    "When  may  you  expect  to  see  me?"     You  may  begin 
to  look  out  for  me  to-morrow;  and  if  you  do  not  see  me  on  that 
day,  you  may  lookout  for  me  the  day  following — and  so   on,   until 
you   see   me.     You   will  not  be  disappointed  many  times.     I  will 
promise  you  that  you   may  begin  to  lookout  for  me  to-morrow; 
and  you  must  continue  to  look  for  me  until  you  see  me. 

4.  I  understand  the  situation  in  which  you  are  placed,  and  I 
will  not  hold  you  in  trouble.     What  more  can  I   say   unto  you   to 
cheer  your  spirits?     You  need  assistance,   and  you  shall  have  it. 
I  have  told  you  how  you  may  expect  to  -be  guided  into  my   pres- 
ence ;  and  I  have  told  you  how  I  intend  to  receive  you.     Endeavor 
to  keep  yourself  in  a  proper  frame  of  mind  until  I  come  unto  you; 
for  I  do  not  like  to  come  unto  you  when  you  are  so   cross ;  for  it 
is  disagreeable  to  me  to  see  you  so  ruffled  in  your   temper;  there- 
fore, be  as  calm  and  patient  as  you  possibly  can  until  you  see  me. 
I  shall  delight  to  come  unto  you  if  you  are  kind,  and  humble,  and 
calm.     Seek    to   cultivate  that  frame  of  mind  that   I  require  of 
you. 

I   now  add  no  more.     I  am  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen 
and  Amen. 


300      WHY  THE  DELIVERANCE  HAS  BEEN  DEFERRED. 


REVELATION    EXPLAINING    WHY     THE     DELIVER- 
ANCE   OF    GOD'S    PEOPLE    HAS    BEEN 
DEFERRED. 


No.  170.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  iyth,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — you  feel  to  ask  me  these 
questions:     "Why  could  you  not  come  out  and  deliver  your  peo- 
ple at  the  time  when  yuur  enemies  appointed  to  come  up  against 
them?     Why    could  you   not,   without  taking  a  few  more  days, 
deliver  your  people  then,  even  if  your  enemies  did  disappoint  you? 
Why  did  you   disappoint  your  people  in  such  a  manner?     You 
either  have  a  cause  for  this,  or  you  are  greatly  to  blame !     Tell  us, 
then,  what  the  cause  is. " 

2.  Behold,    I  say   unto  you,   my  servant  Joseph, — you  know 
that  I  am  the  first  general  of  the   armies   of  heaven.     I   am   also 
the    first  counsellor  to   my   Father,   and   a   member  of   the  first 
council  in  heaven.     And  I   counsel  with   my   Father  about    all 
matters  that  belong  to  the  government  of  this  earth,  and  we   regu- 
late ourselves  by  law — we  do   nothing  but   that  which  is  lawful. 
And  as  I  am  the  first  general  of  all  the  armies  of  heaven,  it  is  my 
duty  .to  receive  the  law  from  my  Father,  and  to   bring  and   reveal 
it  unto  you ;  and  to  stand  between  my  Father  and  you.     I   am   a 
mediator  to  minister  between  two  powers,  namely,  the   first   presi- 
dent in  heaven  and  the  first  president  of  the  earth.     I  am  not  the 
president  in  heaven ;   my  Father  is  the  president  there,   and  I  am 
his  counsellor,  and  rule  by  his  authority.     And  inasmuch  as  I  am 
his  firstborn  son,  he  has  made  me  the  first  ruler  in   heaven.     All 
my  Father's  children  are  subject  to  me,  and  I  am  subject  to  my 
Father. 

3.  I  do  not  claim  the  right  to  preside  over  the  earth ;  that  is 
your  right.      It  is  my  duty   to   sustain  you.     You   rule  this   earth 
for  the  last  thousand  years,  with  all  power  and  authority,    even  .as 
my  Father  rules   over   heaven.     And   all  the  inhabitants  of  the 
earth  shall  be  subject  to  you  as  the  inhabitants  of  heaven  are  sub- 
ject  to  my   Father;    for  you   hold    an    independent    priesthood. 
When  I  say  "independent"  I  mean  that  you  do   not  depend  on 


WHY  THE  DELIVERANCE  HAS  BEEN  DEFERRED.      301 

men  who  live  upon  the  earth  for  your  power,  nor  to  give  you  the 
victory  over  your  enemies — your  power  comes  from  above.  I  am 
your  general,  and  it  is  my  duty  to  fight  your  battles.  I  have  two 
hundred  million  warriors  under  my  command — a  number  suf- 
ficient to  rule  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth,  and  to  destroy  every- 
thing that  may  stand  in  your  way,  until  your  mission  shall  Tie 
ended.  I  could  destroy  all  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth  in  a  few 
minutes,  if  it  were  necessary  ;  therefore,  'your  power  is  in  me,  and 
not  in  mortal  men.  That  is  what  I  mean  by  saying  "you  hold  an 
independent  priesthood."  You  do  not  depend  upon  mortal  men 
to  fight  your  battles,  although  you  need  them  tc>  assist  you  to 
preach  my  gospel ;  that  is  more  their  duty  than  to  fight.  They 
will  not  be  called  upon  to  fight  a  great  deal.  Those  who  fight 
must  understand  a  perfect  law ;  therefore,  angels  are  ordained  to 
fight ;  and  even  they  must  not  destroy  any  people  only  on  the 
principle  of  justice.  Mortal  men  do  not  understand  a  perfect  law, 
and  until  they  do,  I  will  not,  at  present,  call  upon  them  to  fight 
much.  But  I  will  give  unto  you  a  knowledge  of  a  perfect  law, 
and  you  must  not  send  my  people  to  war  until  you  understand 
that  law,  except  in  some  frivolous  cases — in  such  cases  as  those 
wherein  my  people  are  attacked  by  a  few  of  mine  enemies,  and 
even  then  I  will  speak  unto  you  and  tell  you  what  my  people  shall 
do ;  for  all  things  which  are  done  by  me  are  done  lawfully  and 
justly,  and  that  which  is  not  done  by  me,  I  will  not  sanction.  I 
am  the  Lord. 

4.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — it  has  hitherto  been 
my  duty  to  minister  from  heaven  to  the  earth,  and  from  thence  I 
have  very  often  been  travelling,  or  from  the  earth  to  heaven.     As 
I  have  said  unto  you  before, — I  am  a  member  of  the  high  council 
of  heaven ;  and   I   have  to   make  all  things  known  unto  you  con- 
cerning this  earth.     When  I   shall   have  committed  unto  you  the 
law,  and  commanded  you  to  send   it   forth  to   the  nations  of  the 
earth,  I  shall  sustain  it,  and  I  shall  destroy  everything  that  opposes 
it.     I  will  either  make  all  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth  live  accord- 
ing to  it,  or  I  will  destroy  them. 

5.  And  now,   behold,    I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — you  wish  to 
know   the  reason   why   I  did   not  deliver  my  people  at  the  time 
which  mine  enemies  had  set  to  come  up  against  them  to  (as  they 


302      WHY  THE  DELIVERANCE  HAS  BEEN  DEFERRED. 

supposed)  destroy  them.  I  was  sent  by  my  Father  to  meet  them 
here,  and  I  received  certain  orders  from  him  in  which  he  told  me. 
what  to  do.  He  told  me  that  I  must  come  up  to  you,  and  give 
to  you  the  robe  and  rod  in  time  for  you  to  have  met  them,  if 
they  had  come  up  against  you  at  the  time  which  they  had  ap- 
pointed :  and  he  told  me  that,  if  mine  enemies  should  come  up 
against  you,  I  must  slay  them  all,  and  many  thousands  more,  also. 
He  told  me  that  I  must  cut  a  clear  way  through  mine  enemies, 
and  give  unto  my  people  a  complete  deliverance  out  of  their  hands; 
and  this  I  should  have  done,  if  mine  enemies  had  come  up  against 
you ;  but  that,  should  they  not  come  up  according  to  their  appoint- 
ment, I  must  do  nothing,  but  return  to  him,  and  tell  him  how 
things  had  transpired.  He  told  me,  also,  that  if  mine  enemies 
should  fail  to  fill  their  first  appointment,  he  wanted  me  to  meet 
him  in  council  before  I  should  make  another  move.  The  first 
arrangements  which  my  Father  made  were  broken  up  through  that 
failure,  and  we  had  to  meet  in  council  and  make  other  arrange- 
ments ;  and  we  had  to  take  time  in  order  to  do  so.  We  shall  soon 
prepare  ourselves  again ;  and  when  I  come  again,  my  people  shall 
not  be  disappointed.  I  shall  not  have  to  trust  to  the  failures  of 
mine  enemies  any  more.  I  am  the  Lord. 

6.  My  people  will  readily  see  how  I  have  been  placed,  and 
that  I  could  not  have  done  otherwise  than  I  have  done ;  and  that 
I  have  done  as  my  Father  commanded  me,  and  have  kept  the  law' 
of  heaven.  Let  my  people  be  contented,  and  not  murmur.  If 
they  were  as  faithful  to  their  duties  as  I  am  to  mine,  they  would 
have  nothing  to  fear;  but  they  neglect  their  own  duties,  and  mur- 
mur against  me.  I  am  always  faithful.  I  have  never  failed  to 
fulfil  my  promises,  neither  shall  I  ever  fail  to  fulfil  them.  I  am 
the  Light  and  Life  of  the  world;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


THE    PROPHET   VISITED.  303 

THE    PROPHET   IS    VISITED    BY   THE    LORD. 


No.  171.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  i8th,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  Jesus  Christ,  and  I  have  shown  myself  imtp^ 
you  this  day,  and  you  can  judge  of  my  feelings,  for   I  appeared 
unto  you  as  I  am. 

2.  Oh,  this  short-sighted  people  !     How  long  shall  I  bear  with 
them  after  I  have  explained  to  them,  through  you,  the  reason  why 
I  could  not  deliver  them  at  the  time  when  mine  enemies  appointed 
to  come  up  against  me,  but  failed  to  do  so?    Through  their  failure 
I  was  disappointed,  and  I  have  shown  my  people  to  what  extent  I 
was  disappointed,  and  what  my  Father   required  of  me  if  mine 
enemies  failed  to  come  up  against  me  at  the  time  which  they  had 
appointed.     I  have  shown  unto  my  people  that  I  had  to  return  to 
my  Father  to  deliver  my  report,  and  to  counsel  with  him,  if  mine 
enemies  failed  to  come  up  according  to  their  appointment.     And 
after  delivering  my  report  before  the  high   council   in  heaven,  we 
had  to  sit  in  counsel  upon  the  matter,  and  try  it  by  the  law.     I 
had  to  do  all  this  before   I   could   make  another  move.     I  had 
to  take  time  to  do  all  this ;  and  yet  after   I  have  shown  unto 
my  people  all  these  things,  they  are  not  satisfied.     Some  of  them 
are  without  reason.     But  I  will  recompense  those  dissatisfied  peo- 
ple when  I  come,  but  it  will  not  be  to  their  salvation,  for  I  shall 
destroy  them  in  the  flesh.     O  how  they  have  injured  others  of  my 
people  who  would  have  been  faithful  if  they  had  not   discouraged 
them.     When  my  people  are  discouraged  and  faithless,  and  in  a 
murmuring  mood,  I  cannot  work  with  them.     If  I  come  to  them 
while  they  are  in  that  state    of  feelings,  I  shall  destroy  them.     If 
they  wish  to  meet  me  in  an   acceptable   manner  they   must  raise 
their  drooping  spirits,  and  place  all  confidence   in   me,   and   not 
murmur ;  but  they  must  be  strong  in  me — full  of  faith  and  confi- 
dence— or  I  will  not  accept  of  them.      Those  who  have  these  feel- 
ings which  I  have  described,  are  right  in  my  sight,  if  there  are  any 
such.     But  if  none  of  them  have  those  feelings,  none  of  them   are 
right,  and  consequently  I  cannot  accept  of  them.     If  I  come  and 
find  all  my   people  in  that   murmuring,  faithless,  ungrateful  state 
of  mind,  I  shall  slay  them  all.     They  have  no  cause  to  have  such 


304  THE    PROPHET    VISITED. 

feelings.  I  have  continually  been  with  them,  and  I  have  revealed 
my  will  unto  them  from  time  to  time,  even  as  often  as  they  needed 
to  hear  from  me.  They  have  no  cause  either  to  complain  of  me, 
or  to  let  their  spirits  droop,  for  I  have  done  my  duty  to  them.  If 
I  ever  had  neglected  them,  I  should  not  blame  them  if  they  mur- 
mured against  me.  If  they  had  any  just  cause  to  let  their  spirits 
droop,  and  to  manifest  such  dissatisfaction  as  they  do  against  me, 
I  would  willingly  take  it  from  them.  If  I  had  ever  neglected 
them  in  any  respect,  I  should  take  their  murmurings  and  accept 
them  as  my  just  due.  All  that  I  ask  of  them  is  to  deal  with  me 
justly.  If  they  have  any  just  cause  to  complain  against  me  for 
neglecting  them,  let  them  do  so,  and  I  shall  take  it  as  my  just  due; 
but  if  they  have  not,  let  them  cease  their  complaints  against  me ; 
for  if  they  do  not,  I  will  move  them  out  of  the  way,  for  I  am  the 
Lord,  and  I  will  not  be  insulted  by  mortals.  Let  my  people  think 
about  what  they  .are  doing,  and  turn  themselves  round,  and  culti- 
vate meek  and  humble  spirits,  and  cease  their  complaints  against 
me,  and  let  them  rise  up  and  bestir  themselves,  and  act  as  though 
they  had  some  faith  in  me.  I  wish  them  to  be  energetic,  and  act 
as  though  they  had  some  force  of  character  about  them.  Let 
them  not  go  to  sleep.  They  need  to  be  up  and  doing.  This  is 
not  a  time  to  trifle  with  sacred  matters;  but  it  is  a  time  when  all 
those  of  my  people  who  expect  a  deliverance  should  rise  up  and 
labor  to  obtain  it.  I  do  not  call  upon  my  people  to  do  much  ; 
and  what  they  cannot  do,  I  will  do ;  but  if  they  will  not  do  their 
own  duty,  they  will  perish.  They  must  be  energetic.  They  know 
their  duty ;  and  if  they  will  not  do  it  now,  they  know  what  to 
expect.  I  am  the  Lord. 

3.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  you  know  my  feelings 
toward  you.  I  have  known  your  feelings  ever  since  I  first  visited 
you  up  to  this  day.  You  have  murmured  against  me  many  times; 
and  if  you  had  not  have  been  placed  in  the  position  which  you 
have,  I  could  not  have  borne  with  it;  but  I  knew  the  burden 
which  I  had  placed  upon  you,  and  I  knew  that  your  burden  was 
too  much  for  you  to  bear,  and  that,  you  had  to  relieve  yourself  by 
casting  the  anguish  of  your  afflicted  soul  upon  some  one  ;  and  it 
fell  upon  me,  because  I  was  the  next  to  you ;  and  I  had  to  take  it 
all.  You  could  not  speak  to  any  other  person  but  me.  Oh  !  how 


I 

THE    PROPHET   VISITED.  305 

you  have  afflicted  me.  I  never  think  about  your-  murmuring 
against  me  but  what  I  am  pained.  I  have  never  borne  as  much 
from  any  prophet  upon  the  earth  as  I  have  received  from  you. 
None  has  ever  been  placed  in  as  painful  a  situation  as  you  have. 
If  it  had  not  been  for  the  painful  situation  in  which  you  have  been 
placed,  I  should  not  have  borne  it ;  but  situated  as  you  were,  I 
was  compelled  to  bear  it.  I  knew  that  you  could  not  help  mur- 
muring, for  you  were  overburdened,  and  you  had  to  cast  the 
anguish  of  your  soul  upon  some  one,  and  those  whom  it  fell  upon 
had  to  take  it.  I  could  not  justly  punish  you  for  doing  a  thing 
that  you  could  not  help  ;  therefore,  I  have  borne  your  murmurings 
because  I  could  not  help  it.  I  wish  that  I  was  not  obliged  to 
bear  so  much  of  it.  But  it  is  now  about  over,  and  I  feel  greatly 
relieved.  I  can  come  and  satisfy  you  now.  All  my  work  is  now 
arranged,  and  I  am  at  liberty  to  come  unto  you  as  soon  as  I  wish 
to  do  so.  I  have  been  with  my  Father  in  counsel,  and  he  has 
liberated  me  again.  I  am  now  prepared,  and  I  shall  not  disap- 
point my  people  this  time.  Mine  enemies  may  lookout  for  me 
now.  If  they  will  not  do  their  duty,  I  will  do  mine. 

4.  All  that  I  wanted  was  the  sanction  of  my  Father  before  I 
came  out  upon  mine  enemies,  and  I  have  obtained  it.  I  shall 
soon  be  with  you  for  good.  I  rode  up  to  your  door  this  day,  to 
the  place  that  I  appointed  to  meet  you,  and  you  saw  me,  and  after 
me  came  the  next  general  to  me  in  authority,  and  you  saw  him. 
You  know  our  feelings  toward  this  people.  We  want  them  to  do 
as  I  have  told  them  in  this  revelation ;  for,  if  they  do  not,  we  will 
destroy  them.  As  soon  as  they  have  heard  this  revelation,  they 
must  endeavor  to  be  in  that  frame  of  mind  which  I  have  before 
mentioned,  if  they  wish  to  save  their  lives.  We  want  them  to  pre- 
pare themselves  to  receive  us.  I  have  told  them  what  I  want 
them  to  do  before  I  come.  And  as  soon  as  my  people  have  heard 
the  contents  of  this  revelation,  they  must  begin  with  all  their  power 
to  meet  me  in  the  way  which  I  have  appointed ;  for  soon  after  my 
people  have  heard  this  revelation,  I  shall  come.  I  have  shown 
myself  unto  you  to-day  that  you  might  know  that  I  was  here  and 
ready  to  visit  you.  And  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  if  you  are  not 
dressed  up  neat  and  clean  when  those  impressions  are  made  upon 
your  mind  which  I  promised  should  be  made  previous  to  mine 


306  THE  PEOPLE  ARE  NOT  PREPARED. 

angels  leading  you  into  my  presence,  you  must  make  haste  and 
dress  yourself  and  hold  yourself  in  readiness  to  be  lead  into  my 
presence  by  mine  holy  angels.  And  it  would  be  well  if  my  peo- 
ple would  prepare  themselves  to-morrow,  and  let  them  keep  them- 
selves neat  and  clean  until  I  come.  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts ; 
even  Jesus  Christ,  Even  so.  Amen. 


THE  PEOPLE  ARE  NOT  FULLY  PREPARED  TO 
MEET  THE  LORD. 


No.  172.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  ipth,  1861. 

1.  LET  MY  people  watch  and  pray,  for  they  need  great  faith 
and  humility,  and  they  have  but  a  short  time  to  obtain  it.     If  they 
do  not  obtain  it  in  a  very  short  time,  they  will  not  obtain  it  at   all 
while   in  mortality.     They  were  far  better  prepared  to  meet  me 
several  days  ago  than  what  they  are  now,   and  I  am  ready  to 
deliver  them  now  if  they  were  ready  to  meet  me ;  but  they  are  not, 
and  I  must  either  wait  for  them  until  they  are  ready  to  meet   me 
in  the  way  which  I  have  appointed,  or  I  must  come  unto  them  and 
slay  them    all.     I  must  do  either  one  or  the  other  of  these  things. 

2.  If  my  servant  Joseph  will  give  me  his  consent,  I  will  come 
immediately  if   I   have  to  slay  two-thirds  of  this   people.      I  can- 
not deliver  this   people   until   I  obtain  his   consent.      He  is   the 
governor  over  Adam's  posterity.      I   have  my    Father's   consent 
to  destroy  all  mine  enemies  who  are  in  the  midst  of  my  people  who 
are  in  this  Territory,   and  now  I  have  to  obtain  the  consent  of  my 
servant   Joseph.     He  has  murmured  against  me  time  after  time 
because  I  was  not  ready  to  deliver  my  people,  and  he  has  insulted 
me  time  after  time  on  that  account ;  and  now  I  am  ready,  but  he 
is  not.     He  calls  upon  me  publicly  to  stay   my  hand.     He  says 
that  he  will  not  give  unto  me  his  consent  to  come  unto  my  people 
as  they  are  now.     He  says  that  he  does  not  want  to  have  them 
all    slain   after  calling  upon  me  in  the  way  which  he  has  to  come 
and  deliver  my  people,  and  insulting  me  because  I  did  not  come 
when  he  knew  that   I  could  not  come  (according  to  the  law  by 


THE  PEOPLE  ARE  NOT  PREPARED.  307 

which  I  am  governed  at  those  times),  when  he  called  upon  me  to 
do  so.  But  now  that  I  am  liberated  by  the  law  of  heaven,  and 
sent  to  the  earth  to  deliver  my  people  by  my  Father,  you  are  not 
ready  for  me;  you  will  not  give  unto  me  your  consent. 

3.  You  say  that  my  people  are  not  in  a  proper  state  of  mind  to 
meet  me,  and  on  that  account  you  wish  me  to  wait  until  they  are 
better  prepared  to  meet  me.     Oh,  how  I  have  been  imposed  upon 
both  by  you  and  by  them ;  but  I   will   satisfy  myself  upon  some- 
body.    As   I  live,   I  will  cut  some  of  these   people  off  from  the 
earth.     Those  of  them  who  have  murmured  so  much  against  me, 
I  will  be  satisfied  upon  them.     I   will   avenge   myself  upon  them. 
Let  those  of  my  people  who  intend  to  prepare  themselves  to  meet 
me  in  the  way  which   I  have   appointed,   do   so  as  soon  as  they 
possibly  can,  or  I  will  not  wait  for  them. 

4.  My  servant  Joseph  cannot  keep  me  away  from  my  people 
long,  if  he  acts  according  to  law.     He  cannot   prevent   me  from 
coming  to  deliver  my  people  any  longer  than  while  they  have  had 
time  to  prepare  themselves,  after  hearing  what  I  required  at   their 
hands.     Those  of  my  people  who  feel  disposed  to  humble  them- 
selves and  come  to  my  terms,  will  soon  do   so.     It   will   not  take 
them  long  to  make   up  their  minds.     I   need  not  to  wait  long  for 
them ;  and  the  rest  I  shall  destroy.     My   servant  Joseph   will   not 
stand  between  me  and  my  people  to  keep  me  off  from  them  when 
I  explain   my  situation   to  him.     He   is  not  hard  to  deal  with  in 
many   respects.     He  will  always   give  way  to  that  which  is  right. 
He   will  not  stand  against  a  correct  principle  one  minute  after  he 
is  convinced  of  it. 

5.  And  behold,    I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — you  must  strive  to 
prepare  this  people  to   meet   me  as  soon  as  you   can — those  of 
them  who  are  willing  to  hearken  unto  your  counsel;  and  those  who 
are  not  willing  to  comply  with  my  request,   you   need   not   trouble 
about.     I  shall  deal  with  them.     Therefore,  watch  this  people  and 
strive  to  prepare  them,  as  I   have  commanded   you.     And   when 
you  think  that  they  are  ready  to  meet  me,  tell  me ;   and  when   you 
are  ready  for  me  to  come  up  to  you,  as  I  have  promised  to   do,  I 
will  come  and  clear  everything  out  of  your  way.     You   must   not 
keep   me   waiting  but   a  very  short  time ;  for  I  cannot  wait  long. 
You  know  my  will  concerning  you  and  this  people ;  strive  to  do  it, 


308  THE    PEOPLE    MUST    BE    UNITED. 

and  all  will  be  well.  If  you  hold  me  long,  I  shall  be  under  the 
necessity  of  rising  up  against  you  ;  for  it  is  unlawful  to  keep  a  large 
army  waiting  when  they  are  sent  forth  to  battle.  We  are  waiting 
for  my  people  now.  Do  not  keep  us  waiting  any  longer  than  you 
can  possibly  help.  Therefore,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  work  with 
us,  and  liberate  us,  and  all  will  be  well.  I  am  the  Stone  and 
Shepherd  of  Israel;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and 
Amen. 


THE  LORD  WILL  NOT  DELIVER  HIS  PEOPLE  UNTIL 
THEY  ARE  UNITED  IN  FAITH. 


No.   173.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  2oth,  1861. 

1.  MY  SON,  you  are  anxious  to  know  my  will  concerning  you 
and  this  people.     You  are  in  a  quandary  about  what  I  require  at 
your  hands.     Inasmuch  as  I  told  you  that  I  was  ready  and  wait- 
ing for  you,  you  wish  to  know  how  long  I  am   willing  to  wait  for 
you ;  for  you  say  that  you  do  not  want  to  stand  in  my  way  when  I 
want  to  come  unto  my  people  to  release  them.     You  wish  to  know 
what  I  require  of  you  in  order  for  me  to  be  satisfied  with  you.     I 
will  tell  you  what  I  require  of  you.    You  know  that  this  people  are 
not  prepared  to  meet  me.     Many  of  them   are  double-minded; 
and  a  few  of  those  people  who  have  yielded  obedience   unto  the 
fulness   of  my   gospel  cannot  fully   believe  that   I  ever  intend  to' 
deliver  my  people  as  I  have  promised.     They  have  but  little  faith 
in  my  promises ;  not  even  enough  to  render  them  of  any  use  unto 
me ;  and  they  are  injuring  others  by  their  murmurings. 

2.  My  people  are  not  one  in  me;  but  they  are  divided  in  their 
sentiments.     They  do   not   all   believe  alike.     There  is  confusion 
among  them.     Some  believe  one  thing  and  some   another;  and 
but  few  believe   fully  in   me.     But   I  shall  be  compelled  to  wait 
until  I  can  bring  all  those  who  are  worthy   of  a  deliverance  into  a 
unity  of  faith.     While  there  are  a  few  of   my   people  who  believe 
that  I  shall  speedily  come  and  deliver  my  people  according  to  my 
word,  and  others  who  believe  that  I  shall  not  come  unto  my  peo- 
ple for  months  yet;  and  others  again  who  cannot  fully  believe  that 


THE    PEOPLE    MUST-  BE    UNITED.  309 

I  ever  intend  to  come  while  my  people  are  in  such  a  divided  state 
as  this,  I  shall  not  deliver  them.  I  shall  save  the  lives  of  none 
but  those  who  believe  in  the  promises  which  I  have  made  unto 
them.  Those  that  are  not  one,  are  not  mine.  If  a  people  cannot 

believe  in  my  words  I  cannot  Jawfully  do  anything  towards  deliver- 

ing  them.  I  cannot  deliver  those  people  who  cannot  believe  in 
me.  Those  people  who  do  not  believe  in  the  revelations  which  I 
have  given,  do  not  believe  in  me,  and,  consequently,  they  have  no 
claim  upon  me  any  more  than  other  strangers  have.  If  I  deliver 
a  people  out  of  the  hands  of  their  enemies,  that  people  must 
believe  in  me ;  if  they  do  not,  I  cannot  deliver  them. 

3.  What  do   I  require  at  the  hands  of  my  people  in  order  for 
them    to    prepare    themselves    to    be    delivered  according  to  the 
promises  which  I  have   made  unto  them?     I   require  that  they 
should  believe  every  word  that  proceeds  from  my  mouth,  and  live 
by  them.     When  I  promise  my  people  that  I  am  about  to  deliver 
them,  if  they  are  faithful,  in  the  course  of  a  few  days,  I  require  of 
them  that  they  should  believe  what  I  said.     I  want  them  to  believe 
that   I  mean  what   I  say.     I   do  not  want  them  to  believe  that  I 
shall  probably  come  to  deliver  them  in  a  few  months.     I   do  not 
want  them  to  believe  that  I  mean  months  instead  of  days.     I  want 
them  to  believe  that  I  mean  what  I  say.     Their  faith  is  misplaced, 
it  is  not  rightly  centered — i^  is  a  false  faith.     Those  who  have  such 
a   faith  as  to  believe  that  I  mean  months  instead  of  days,  have  a 
false  faith,  and  if  they  do  not  forsake  it,   they  will  be   destroyed ; 
for  they  will  not  be  expecting  me  when  I  come,  and,  consequently, 
they  will  be   destroyed   by  the   brightness  of  my   coming.     And  * 
again,   there  are  others  who  partly  believe  that  I  never  intend  to 
come.     They  have  a  false  faith,  also,  and  they  are  going  down  to 
destruction.     There  is  but  little  hope  for  some  of  them.     They  are 
without  good  sense.     They  do  not  know  enough  to  save  their  own 
lives.     They  act  unreasonable.     Such  as  those  are  but  little  better 
than  fallen  spirits. 

4.  I  wish  to  give  those  of  my  people  who  are  willing,  a  chance 
to  obtain  a  correct  fajth.     Those  of  my  people  who  are  willing  to 
serve  me  with  all  their  hearts,   who   are  worthy   of  a   deliverance, 
will  soon  obtain  a  correct  faith,  and  live  by  it. 

5.  My  people  haVe  been  disappointed,  which  disappointment 


310  THE    PEOPLE  "MUST    BE    UNITED. 

has  brought  confusion  amongst  them.  My  people  do  not  know 
how  to  center  their  faith  since  they  met  with  that  disappointment. 
But  when  I  reveal  unto  those  who  are  worthy  of  a  deliverance  my 
full  intentions  in  relation  to  the  time  of  their  deliverance,  they  will 
speedily  lay  hold  of  a  correct  faith.  There  are  a  few  among  my 
people  whose  lives  I  cannot  save  if  they  do  not  turn  themselves 
right  around;  for  they  have  never  served  me  in  an  acceptable 
manner.  Their  minds  have  always  been  like  the  fool's  eye.  They 
have  never  laid  the  things  of  my  kingdom  to  heart.  They  are  not 
worthy  to  live  as  they  now  are.  I  am  afraid  that  they  will  not  lay 
things  to  heart  in  time  to  save  their  lives,  because  they  have  not 
sufficient  faith  in  me.  Therefore,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — 
those  of  my  people  who  were  disappointed  and  thrown  into  con- 
fusion, not  knowing  how  to  center  their  faith,  who  are  worthy 
through  their  faithfulness  of  a  deliverance,  they  will  come  to  my 
terms  at  once,  as  soon  as  they  know  what  I  require  at  their  hands. 
They  are  not  hard  to  deal  with  when  they  know  what  to  do.  You 
must  tell  them  what  I  require  of  them,  and  they  will  obey  your 
command  at  once.' 

6.  And  as  soon  as  you  have  brought  them  to  a  unity  of  faith — 
even  to  believe  that  I  am  about  to  deliver  them,  according  to  my 
word,  when  they  are  united,  even  those  that  are   faithful,   and  are 
looking  for  me  to  come,  then  I  will   cqme  suddenly.     All   that   I 
am  now  waiting  for  is  the  faithful  of  my  people  to  become  united, 
with  their  faith  properly  centered  in  me.     I  shall  not  wait  for  those 
who  are  unfaithful,  who  have  never  laid  those  things  to  heart  which 

'  I  required  of  them.     You  now  know  my  will  concerning  you  and 
my  people. 

7.  You  say  that  you  do  not  want  to  stand  in   my   way.     You 
say  that  you  are  willing  that  I  should  deliver  my  people  as  soon  as 
I  feel  disposed  to.     You  say  that  you  want  to  understand  me  per- 
fectly.    You   wish  to  know   how  long  I  am  willing  to  wait  for  my 
people  even  to  give  them   a  chance  to  prepare  themselves  properly 
to  meet  me.       My    people  may    have   the    opportunity   to    hold 
another  public  meeting  or  two ;  and  both  you  and  your  counsellors 
must  instruct  them,  and  strive  to  unite  them  by  properly  inform- 
ing their  minds  in  relation  to  the  faith  which  they  must  exercise  in 
me  to  be  prepared  to  meet  me ;  and  when  my  people  are  prepared 


THE  PEOPLE  CAN  BE  UNITED.  311 

to  meet  me,  I  will  not  stay  away  from  them  another  hour.  I  am 
ready  to  come  unto  them  now,  if  they  were  ready  to  receive  me. 
You  know  what  I  am  waiting  for.  Prepare  for  me ;  for  lo,  I  come 
quickly,  even  as  a  consuming  fire,  upon  all  the  rebellious.  I  am 
the  Bright  and  Morning  Star;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION     INFORMING     THE    PROPHET    THAT 

HE  CAN  BY  ONE  DAY'S  INSTRUCTION  UNITE 

THE  FAITH  OF  THE  PEOPLE. 


No.  174.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  2ist,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  say  unto  you  my  son,  I  know  what  those  things 
are  which  you  want,  and  you  shall  have  them. 

2.  You  consider  that  I  dealt  with  my  servant  Moses  in  a  more 
satisfactory  manner  than  I  have  done  with  you  ;  that  so  sure  as  I 
made  a  promise  to  him,  I  fulfilled  it.     You  say  that  when   I  told 
him  time  after  time  to  tell   Pharaoh  that   I   would  bring  plagues 
upon  Egypt,  I  fulfilled  my  word ;    that  when  I  threatened  to  bring 
a  certain  plague  upon  Egypt  on  the  morrow,    I   did  so ;  and  that 
according  to   my   word,  I   brought  different   plagues  upon   Egypt 
until  I  compelled  Pharaoh  to  let  my   people  go ;   that  I   not   only 
fulfilled  all  the  promises  which  I  made  through  him  in  Egypt,  but 
that  I  continued  to  do  so  as  long  as  he  lived  upon  the  earth ;   that 
when  he  smote  the   rock,  the   water  gushed  out;  that   when  he 
waved  his  rod  over  the   Red  Sea,  the   waters   divided ;  and  that 
whenever   he  made  a  promise  to  the,   Children    of  Israel,    that 
promise  I  fulfilled. 

3.  You  consider  that  I  have  not  worked  as  satisfactorily  with 
you  as  I  did  with  him ;   that  I  have  worked  with  you   in  a  round- 
about manner;  and  not   in  that  plain,   positive  and  satisfactory 
manner  that  I  did  with  him ;  that  in  many  things  I  have  kept  you 
in  the  dark,  so  that  you  could  not  see  as  far  into  the  future  as  you 
desired  to  see ;  and  that  in  consequence  you   have  never,  as  yet, 
been   satisfied  with  my  way  of  working  with  you.     My  son,  you 


312  THE    PROPHET    IS    DOWNCAST. 

should  consider  that,  inasmuch  as  I  have  only  been  raising  you  up, 
you  have  not,  as  yet,  been  endowed  with  the  full  power  of  your 
office;  but  I  am  just  upon  the  point  of  endowing  you  therewith. 
You  are  weary  of  waiting  for  it,  for  while  you  are  held  in  and 
afflicted  with  weakness,  as  you  have  hitherto  been,  you  have  no 
pleasure  in  living ;  and  you  say  that,  if  I  ever  intend  to  endow  you 
with  the  power  of  your  office,  which  I  have  so  long  promised  you, 
it  is  time  that'  I  was  preparing  to  do  so.  You  consider  that  I  have 
dallied  with  you  long  enough. 

4.  But    behold,    I    say   unto  you,    my    son, — I    should    have 
endowed  you  with  the  power  of  your  office  before  this  time,  if 
my  people  had  been   ready  to  receive  me,   but  they    have    not. 
They  have    delayed    my    work  through  their  double-mindedness. 
Had  they  been  united,  as  they  ought  to  have   been,   you   would 
have  had  your  robe  and  rod  in  your  own  keeping  before  this  time. 
You   must,   therefore,   blame  them,   and  not  me.     You  are  cast 
down  in  your  feelings   because  those   things  have  been  withheld 
from  you  so  long;  and  because  of  your  weakness  and  disappoint- 
ments, you  now  feel  indifferent  about  them,    and   about  me,   also. 
You  consider  that  you  have  been  imposed  upon  both  by  me  and 
these  people,    and  that   through  them  you   are  afflicted,  and  still 
kept   in  weakness.     You  consider  that  the  robe  and  rod  belong  to 
you,   and  that  it  is  as   little  as  I  could  do  to  give  unto  you  that 
which  belongs  to  you.     You  even  say  in  your  feelings  that  life  is  a. 
burden  to  you,  and  that  all  you  now  require  of  me,  is  to  take  you 
from   the   earth,   which   you   think   would  be  a  great  relief  to  you. 
You  say  that  you  should  like  to  enjoy  life  like  other  people  enjoy 
it ;  but    that  you  have  not,  for  several  years,  been  able  to  do  so ; 
that  the  manner  in  which  I  have  worked  with   you  has   destroyed 
all  your  happiness ;  that  I  have  strained  your  mind,  and  destroyed 
your  inward  parts  by  working  with  you  in  such  an  uncertain   and 
painful  manner   while  I  have  been  raising   you  up;  and  you  con- 
sider that,  if  I  cannot  work  with  you  in  a  way  that  wrill  satisfy  you 
better,   and  to  strain   both   your   mental  and  physical  powers  less 
than  I   have  done,    you  cannot  endure  it.      You    wish  to  know 
whether  I  am  about  to  work  with  you  in  a  more  easy  and  pleasant 
manner,  or  not.    If  I  am  not,  you  say  that  you  never  can  endure  it. 

5.  You  would  like  to  know  how  I  intend  to  work  with  you  for 


THE  PEOPLE  CAN  BE  UNITED.  313 

the  future.  I  will  answer  you  this  question.  I  shall  work  with 
you  in  as  plain  and  satisfactory  a  manner  after  I  shall  have  given 
unto  you  your  rod,  as  I  did  with  Moses  when  he  brought  all  those 
plagues  upon  Egypt.  Your  word  will  not  fail  any  more  in  the 
future  than  his  did  in  the  past.  I  shall  not  strain  your  mind  at  all- 
after  I  shall  have  endowed  you  with  the  power  of  your  office.  I 
shall  then  talk  with  you  as  one  man  talks  with  another.  Your 
days  of  affliction  are  now  past. 

6.  I  want  you  to  unite  my  people  as  I  have  commanded  you, 
and  I  promise  you  that,   when  you  shall  have  done  so,  you  will 
soon  see  me ;  for  I  will  not  remain  away  from  you  one  hour  after 
you  are  ready  for  me  to  come  unto  you.     I  do  not  want  to  remain 
away  from  you  any  longer  than  I  can  help,  for  I  am  now  in   pain 
in  consequence  of  having  to  wait  for  my  people;   therefore,    my 
son,   let   your  heart  be   comforted,    for  I  am  with  you.      I  sent  a 
holy  angel,  who  is  in  authority,  unto  you  to  talk  with  you,  and  to 
comfort  you.     I  have  done  all  that  I  possibly  could  to  uphold 
you  until  I  can  come  unto  you  myself  to  place  all  power  in  your 
hands.     After  that,  you  will  never  again  feel  your  weaknesses  you 
have  hitherto  done.     Your  own  weakness  has  greatly  afflicted  you. 
You  know  what  I  am  now  waiting  for;  therefore,  strive  to  bring 
my  people  to  order,  and  to  a  unity  of  faith.     That  is  all  I  require 
at  your  hands.     You  can  do  this  in  one  day  after  you  commence ; 
for  you  have  great  influence  with  them.     They  have  all  confidence 
in   you.     You  can  very  easily,   by  one   day's  instructions,  bring 
them  to  a  proper  state  of   mind  to  mtet  me ;  and  I  will  not  hold 
myself  from  you  after  you  are  ready  for  me. 

7.  You  need  not  to  be  afraid  to  tell   my  people  that  I  shall 
come  as  soon  as  they  are  united,  for  fear  that  I  shall  disappoint 
you  all ;  for  I  shall  not.     I  know  your  feelings,   my   son,    in  this 
matter.     You  do  not   like  to  tell  my  people  that  I  shall  come  as 
soon  as  they  are  united,  lest  I  should  not  come  according  to  your 
word.     You  fear  that,  if  you  did  this,  and  I  did  not  come  accord- 
ing to  your  word,  the  people  would  blame  you,  and  I  should  come 
off  clear.     You  do  not  like  to  be  responsible  for  another,  no  mat- 
ter how  true  he  may  be  ;  but  my  people  will  understand  my  word, 
and  I  make  unto  them  this  promise,  that,  as  I  live,    I  will  come 
unto  them,   and  deliver  them  as  soon  as  they  are  united  in  the 


314          A  VOTE  OF  THE  PEOPLE  TO  BE  TAKEN. 

way   which   I   have  appointed.      All  that  I  ask  of  them  is  to  unite 
themselves  in  one  faith,  even  as  they  shall  be  taught.     • 

I  now  giv'e  unto  you  no  more.     I*  am  the  Son   of  the  Eternal 
Father ;  even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  PROPHET  IS  INSTRUCTED  TO  ASCERTAIN,  BY 

VOTE,    HOW  MANY  OF  THE  PEOPLE  BELIEVE 

IN  THE  LORD'S  WORDS. 


No.  175.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  22nd,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  say  unto  you,   my  son, — that  inasmuch  as  you 
have  held  two  public  meetings  this  day,   and   striven  to  unite  my 
people  as  I  commanded  you,  it  has  had  a  very  good  effect   upon 
their  minds.     The  majority   of  them   are  willing  and  prepared  to 
come  to  my   terms.     You  will  have  but  little  difficulty  to  unite 
them  in  the  way  which  I  have  appointed.     When  my  people  meet 
again,  as  they  will  do  to-morrow,  you  shall  hold  a  testifying  meet- 
ing as  usual.     You  must  deliver  the  meeting  into  the  hands  of  my 
people,  and  let  as  many  of  them  as  can  speak  their  feelings.     No 
one  must  speak  long;  but  my  people  must(  speak  short  and  to  the 
point.     I  wish  to  hear  from   as  many  of  them  as  I  possibly  can ; 
for  I  shall  be  there  myself  to  hear  their  testimonies ;  and  a  mighty 
host  of  my  holy  angels  will  be  with  me.     We  shall  come  to  hear 
an  expression  from  the  people.     WTe  shall  see  whether  they  are 
united  or  not.     We  will  pour  out  the  influence  of  mine  holy  angels 
upon  my  people   in  great  abundance,  if  my  people  will  open  the 
way  (or  them. 

2.  I  am  well  pleased  with  the  course  which  both  you  and  your 
counsellors  took  with  my  people  in  the   day  that  has   past.     You 
have  done  much  good  towards  my  people  in  uniting  their   faith, 
even  as  I  commanded  you.     They    see   the   necessity    of  being 
united,  as  they  have  been  taught.     They   will,   therefore,    come  to 
my  terms  when  they  are  tried,  as  they  will  be ;  for  I  shall  find  out, 
by  a  public  vote,  how  many  of  my  people  will  come  to  my  terms ; 
and  almost  all,  if  not  all,   my  people  will  vote.     You  shall  call 


A    VOTE    OF    THE    PEOPLE    TO    BE    TAKEN.  315 

upon  them  to  vote  just  before  you  close  the  meeting;  and  my  peo- 
ple shall  vote  after  this  manner :  You  shall  stand  upon  your  feet 
and  ask  my  people  how  many  of  them  are  willing  to  believe  and 
live  by  every  word  that  proceeds  from  my  mouth ;  and  you  shall 
ascertain  by  a  vote  how  many  of  my  people  there  are  who  believe___ 
that  I  mean  what  I  say  when  I  speak  unto  them,  when  I  say  days. 
I  want  to  know  how  many  of  my  people  believe  that  I  mean  days. 
I  want  to.  know  how  many  of  my  people  have  a  correct  faith.  To 
have  a  correct  faith  they  must  believe  that  I  mean  days  when  I 
say  days.  To  have  a  correct  faith  they  must  be  looking  out  for 
me  to  come  day  by  day.  To  have  a  correct  faith  they  must 
believe  that  I  shall  not  be  more  than  two  or  three  days  at  the 
farthest,  after  they  have  held  their  testifying  meeting,  which  I  have 
previously  spoken  of.  To  have  a  correct  faith  they  must  begin  to 
look  out  for  me  after  Monday,  and  they  must  continue  to  look  out 
for  me  until  I  come.  I  can  assure  them  that  I  shall  not  weary 
them  much  by  looking  out  for  me.  I  do  not  want  to  tell  them 
any  nearer  the  time  when  I  shall  come.  I  have  told  them  near 
enough.  Let  them  prepare  themselves  to  meet  me ;  for  lo,  I  shall 
come  as  a  whirlwind  to  release  my  afflicted  people.  I  am  the 
Lord  of  Hosts. 

3.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — that  I  will  work  with 
you  in  a  pleasant  and  satisfactory  manner  from  this  time  forth.'  I 
will  not  strain  your  mind  in  this  matter  which  lies  before  you.  I 
will  strengthen  you  from  this  time  forth ;  and  when  I  am  fully 
ready  to  come  up  to  you  (when  I  say  ready,  I  mean  when  my  peo- 
ple are  ready  for  me  to  come.  I  was  ready  myself  several  days 
since,  but  I  am  waiting  for  them)  I  shall  give  you  to  feel  that  I 
am  ready  to  send  my  holy  angels  unto  you  to  influence  you,  and 
to  lead  you  into  my  presence.  And,  as  I  have  said  unto  you 
before, — if  you  are  not  dressed  up  when  that  feeling  comes  over 
you,  you  must  make  haste  and  prepare;  for  mine  angels  will 
influence  you  shortly  after  that  feeling  has  taken  possession  of  you, 
and  they  will  lead  you  into  my  presence,  as  I  have  said  unto  you 
before ;  and  when  they  bring  you  into  my  presence,  I  will  lay  hold 
of  you,  and  I  shall  prevent  you  from  falling  to  the  earth.  You  are 
very  weak  in  body,  and,  in  consequence  of  your  bodily  weakness, 
you  cannot  very  well  endure  a  sudden  shock;  and  on  that  account 


316  THE    PROPHET    IS    DOWNCAST. 

I  shall  be  as  gentle  with  you  as  I  possibly  can.  Therefore,  my 
son,  trust  in  me,  and  all  things  will  go  on  right.  I  am  the  Light 
and  Life  of  the  world ;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and 
Amen. 


THE  PROPHET  FEELS  DOWNCAST. 


No.  176.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  22nd,  1861. 

i^  I  SEE,  my  son,  that  you  are  borne  down  in  your  feelings 
until  you  are  unable  to  do  your  duty,  and  I  am  pained  for  you ; 
but  you  see  that  I  cannot  help  you  until  I  can  come  up  to  you  in 
the  way  which  I  have  appointed.  It  is  now  that  you  want  assist- 
ance. This  is  a  hard  time  with  you. 

2.  You  say  that  it  is  too  much  for  you  to  exercise  faith  in  me 
to  expect  such  a  great  'manifestation  from  me ;  but  you  know  that 
such  a  manifestation   as  the   one  which  you  are  called   upon  to 
exercise  faith  in,  must  be  given,  or  Adam's  posterity  will  all  be  lost. 
This  you  know.     If  you  can  exercise  faith  enough  in  me  to  do  as 
I  command  you,  it  is  all  that  I  require  of  you.     I  will  not  disap- 
point you.     You  are  afraid  that  I  shall  not  come  after  promising 
my  people  that  I   would ;  and  you  think  that,  if  I  make  such  a 
mistake  as  that,  all  is  over  with  you.     You  want  to  know  what  I 
am  going  to  do  with  you,  if  I  should  make  such  a  mistake  as  that. 
You  wish  to  know  whether  I   am  about  to  deliver  you  into  the 
hands  of  my  people,  or  other  wicked  people,  to  slay  you ;  for  you 
say  that  you  do  not  want  to  be  delivered  into  the  hands  of  wicked 
people,   if  I  fail  to   deliver  my  people  according  to  my  promises. 
If  I  fail  to  deliver  my  people,  you  want   me   to  take  you  from  the 
earth  forthwith.     You  do  not  want  to  be  delivered  into  the  hands 
of  wicked  men  to  do  as  they  please  with  you, — even  to  put  you  to 
all  manner  of  misery,  and  to  torture  you  until  you  are  dead.     You 
want  me,  if  my  word  fails,  to  take  you  from  the  earth.     As  soon 
as  my  words   have   failed,  you  think  that  I  ought  at  least  to  have 
that  much  honor  about  me  as  to  take  you  from  the  earth  at  once. 
You  think  that  it  is  my  duty  to  do  that  much  for  you. 

3.  O,  my  son,  I  will  satisfy  you  in  the  course  of  two  or  three 


CONCERNING  THE  PROPHET  AND  THE  PEOPLE.       317 

days  at  the  farthest.  I  will  never  deliver  you  into  the  hands  of 
your  enemies ;  I  will  promise  you  that.  If  I  do  not  come  unto  my 
people  and  deliver  them,  it  will  be  because  I  have  not  the  power 
to  do  so ;  and  I  can  assure  you  that  I  do  not  lack  for  that.  Rest 
yourself  satisfied.  I  will  come  unto  you  and  deliver  my  people 
according  to  my  promise.  I  need  not  to  tell  you  that  if  I  do  not, 
that  I  will  take  you  from  the  earth  according  to  your  request.  I 
speak  in  this  manner  in  order  to  satisfy  you.  Rest  in  me.  I  am 
the  Lord.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


THE    CONDITION    OF    THE    PROPHET    WHEN     HE 

WAS   FIRST    CALLED.— THE    PEOPLE    ARE 

WILLING  TO  OBEY  THE  LORD. 


No.  177.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  23rd,  1861. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Lord,  ar>d  I  have  seen  the  movements 
of  my  people  this  day.  I  told  you  that  it  would  not  require  much 
work  for  you  to  unite  the  faith  of  this  people.  They  are  not  hard 
to  deal  with  when  they  have  confidence  in  their  leaders.  My  peo- 
ple have  confidence  in  you,  and  even  in  my  servants  who  assist 
you ;  and  their  confidence  shall  increase  in  you  abundantly.  I 
have  given  unto  you  power  over  them  all.  The  influence  which 
you  have  obtained,  I  have  given  unto  you.  When  you  have  made 
a  promise  unto  my  people  I  have  fulfilled  it,  as  far  as  I  have  gone 
with  them.  This  is  what  has  given  you  an  influence  with  them, 
and  even  power  over  them.  They  will  give  up  to  you,  because 
they  know  that  I  am  with  you ;  for  they  know  that  it  is  not  within 
the  power  of  man  to  reveal  to  his  fellow  men  such  light  and 
knowledge  as  you  have  made  known  unto  them.  They  are  not 
ignorant  of  the  power  of  mortal  men.  They  will  submit  to  you  at 
once,  because  they  know  that  I  am  with  you.  If  they  did  not 
know  that,  you  would  have  no  more  power  over  them  than  any 
other  man ;  therefore,  you  have  gained  your  influence  through  me. 
I  have  always  been  with  you  by  mine  holy  angels  from  the  time 
that  I  first  called  you,  up  to  the  present  time ;  and  I  have  never, 


318      CONCERNING  THE  PROPHET  AND  THE  PEOPLE. 

in  such  a  short  time,  bestowed  such  light  unto   mortal  man  upon 
the  earth  as  I  have  unto  you. 

2.  I  gave  unto   my   servant  Moses  the  full  keys   of  the  holy 
priesthood  when  he  was  upon  the  earth ;  but  I  did  not   raise  him 
up  as  fast  as  I  have  raised  you  up.     I  took  more  time  to  raise  him 
up  than  what  I  could  take  this  time.     I  have  been  hurried  this 
time.     My  servant  Moses  was  placed   in  more  favorable  circum- 
stances than  you  have  been.     I  could  take  time  then  to  raise  him 
up,  because  he  was  placed  in  good  circumstances.     But  this  has 
not  been  the  case  with  you.     You   could   not  possibly  have   been 
placed  in  worse  circumstances  than  you  were  placed  in   when  I 
first  visited  you;   and   on   that  account  I   had  to  raise  you   up 
quickly.     You  could  not  have  endured  it  if  I  had  not  done   so. 
I  raised  you  up  as  fast  as  I  possibly   could,   because   I  was   com- 
pelled to  do  so.     Your  situation   in  the   world   compelled  me  to 
work  fast.     You  had  no  home  when  I  first  visited  you.     You  were 
severed  from  all  earthly  ties ;  ami  you  had  been  tossed  from  place 
to  place  for  years  before  I  called  you.     You  had  but  little  pleasure 
of  your  life  for  years  before  I  calle'd  you,  and  even  after  I  called 
you,  you  had  still  less.     You  are  weary  of  being  afflicted   as  you 
have  been.     You  want   a  change   of  things.     You   do  not   care 
which  way  it  comes.     You   shall  have   one  now.     You  have  my 
people  in  such  a  position  that   I   can  do  something   with   them. 
This  is  all  that  I  have  been  waiting  for  for  the  last  few  days. 

3.  I  met  with  my  people  to-day,  according  to  my   word,  and  I 
heard  an  expression   from   my   people,  and  they  appeared  to  be 
willing  to  live  by  every  word  that   proceeds   from  my   mouth,  and 
they  appeared  to  manifest  a  willingness  to  watch  for  me,  as  I  had 
commanded  them.    I  am  well  pleased  with  their  manner  of  voting. 
I  could  not  expect  any  more  at  their  hands  in  that   respect.     But 
they  are  too  light-minded.      They   trifle    too   much  with   sacred 
things.     They  are  not  solemn  enough ;  for  this  is   a  solemn  time, 
and  my  people  should  be  thoughtful.     I    will   promise  them   that 
they  will  feel  solemn  before  they  are  through   with  the  test  which 
they  are  about  to  meet  with.     It  would   be   a  great  benefit   unto 
them  if  they  would  prepare  themselves  for  it  in  the  way  which   I 
have  appointed ;  but  they  will  not  do  that  until  they  are  compelled 
to  do  so.     They  think  that  they  have   done  well   to  unite  them- 


CONCERNING  THE  PROPHET  AND  THE  PEOPLE.      319 

selves  as  well  as  they  have,  and  I  think  so  to.  They  think  that  I 
should  be  satisfied  with  their  efforts.  I  see  that  they  cannot  bring 
their  minds  to  a  proper  state  of  solemnity  at  present ;  but  they  will 
be  solemn  enough  when  I  come.  I  shall  have  to  be  satisfied  with 
them,  and  deliver  them  as  the  now  are ;  for  I  cannot  bring  them 
any  nearer  to  the  standard  that  I  wish  to  bring  them  to  than  what 
they  are  at  present.  This  is  the  best  opportunity  that  ever  I  have 
had  with  them ;  and  if  I  do  not  take  them  now,  I  never  can 
deliver  them ;  for  I  am  persuaded  that  they  will  never  be  better 
prepared ;  therefore,  I  shall  take  them  now.  They  may  be  watch- 
ing for  me,  as  I  have  commanded  them.  I  am"  the  Lord. 

4.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — that  you  must  wear 
your  seven  locks  of  hair  until  I  come.     Your  hair  must  be  divided 
into   seven    parts,    because    you    are    the   seventh  angel,    and    a 
deliverer;  but  none  of  the   rest   of  my  people   must   divide  their 
hair  in  seven  parts ;  for  it  is  unlawful   for  them  to  do  so.     They 
must  wear  their  hair  otherwise.     I  will  reveal  more  unto  you  upon 
this  subject  hereafter.     Let  this  suffice  for  the  present.     I  am  the 
Lord. 

5.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — it  is  time  for  you  to 
begin  to  raise  your  spirit,  and  begin  to  watch  for   me ;  for  I  shall 
then  strengthen  you  at  once.     You  know  the   way  I   am  about   to 
come,  and  the  arrangements  that  I   am  about  to  make  with   my 
people  when   I  come.     In  gathering  them  together,  to  stand   in 
their  own  own  order,  you  will  attend  to  these  things.     I  am  the 
Lord  of  Hosts.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION   IN   WHICH   THE   PEOPLE   ARE   COM- 
MANDED TO  BE  ORDERLY. AND  CALM. 


No.  178.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  24th,  1861. 

i.  I  WISH  to  speak  unto  you  again,  my  son.  I  want  you  to 
hold  yourself  in  readiness.  I  can  assure  you  that  you  need  to  be 
preparing  yourself.  My  people  have  tolerably  good  weather.  I 
have  moderated  the  weather  for  their  convenience.  I  shall  take  my 


320  REQUESTED  TO    BE    ORDERLY    AND    CALM. 

people  away  from  this  place  very  soon  after  I  have  moved  the 
obstacles  out  of  their  way.  I  told  my  people  some  days  ago  to 
get  their  wagons  ready  for  a  quick  move;  but  they  have  not 
altogether  done  as  I  commanded  them  in  this  respect ;  therefore,  I 
shall  have  to  do  the  best  that  I  can  with  them  as  they  are.  They 
are  but  mortal,  and  I  cannot  look  for  a  great  deal  from  them  at 
present.  I  will  do  the  best  that  I  can  with  them.  I  shall  soon 
gather  them  together,  for  I  have  nothing  to  wait  for  now. 

2.  My   people  are  moving  about  after  wood  and  other  things. 
I  wish  that  they  were  through  with  that  work,  so  that  all  things  in 
this  place  might  be"  perfectly  calm  and  quiet;  for  I  do   not  like  to 
come  unto  my  people  while  they  are  all  in  a  bustle  and  confusion. 
As   soon  as  they  can   bring  themselves  into    perfect    order    and 
quietude,   I  will  come  unto  them.     Let  them   get   through  with 
their  work  and  bustling  as  soon  as  they  can.     If  there  are  any  of 
my  people  who  lack  for  wood  to  burn,  let  them  get  up  as  much  as 
will  serve  them  for  a  few  days — even   for   as   long  a  time  as  they 
will  need  to  stop  in  this  place.     Possibly  it  may  not  be  that  all  my 
people  can  get  the  privilege  to  move   out  of  this  place  the  same 
day;  but  I  will  move  them  all  as  fast  as  I  possibly  can.     I  know 
how  anxious  they  are  to   be   delivered,    and  to  move   out  of  this 
place.     They  have  been  confined  here  long  enough.     They   shall 
be  liberated  as  soon  as  they  have  made  all  things  ready  in  the  way 
which  I  have  appointed.     Therefore,  let  those  of  my  people  who 
have  no  wood  to  burn,  procure  some  as  soon  as  they  possibly  can ; 
and  as  soon  as  they  have  done  so,  let  all  the  Camp  of  Israel  come 
to  order.     I   want  a  perfect  silence  and   calmness  in  the  whole 
Camp.     I  want  no  confusion  nor  disorder  whatever  when  I  come. 
And  as  soon  as  all  my  people  can  arrange  all  their   matters   and 
come  to  that  perfect  order  and  silence  which  I  have  spoken  of, 
then  I  will  come   suddenly  to  their   deliverance,    and   I  will  lay 
many  thousands  low  tfiat  day.     Their  bonds  will  then  be  broken. 
They  need  to  humble  themselves   greatly  before  me,  in  order  that 
I  may  strengthen  them.     If  they   will  do  this,   I  will  strengthen 
them  to  their  satisfaction ;  therefore,  let  my  people  hearken  unto 
my  words,  and  diligently  obey  them,  and  lo,  I  come  quickly,  even 
the  Lcrd  of  Hosts. 

3.  And  behold,  I  speak  unto  you  concerning  your   dress  pre- 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    THE    PROPHET.  321 

vious  to  your  coming  into  my  presence.  You  must  dress  yourself 
up  in  white  linen.  Your  linen  dress  must  not  be  soiled  ;  for  you 
must  put  your  robe  over  your  linen  dress  when  I  have  given  it 
unto  you.  I  will  show  you  how  you  must  wear  your  robe,  and 
you  must  wear  it  in  the  way  which  I  shall  show  unto  you.  When 
you  are  dressed  in  white  linen,  and  mine  angels  shall  lead  you  into 
my  presence,  I  shall  have  with  me  your  robe  and  rod,  and  I  shall 
give  unto  you  your  robe  first,  and  I  shall  show  unto  you  your  rod 
when  I  give  unto  you  your  robe.  As  I  have  said  unto  you  before, 
so  I  say  unto  you  again, — I  shall  give  unto  you  your  robe  the  first, 
but  I  shall  hold  your  rod  in  mine  own  possession  until  you  have 
put  on  your  robe,  and  then  I  shall  give  it  unto  you  while  you  use 
it ;  and  then  you  must  give  me  back  your  robe  and  rod,  and  I  will 
take  care  of  them  until  you  have  a  proper  place  of  your  own  to 
keep  them.  As  soon  as  you  have  your  robe  in  your  own  posses- 
sion, you  must  tell  my  servants  to  gather  my  people  together  as 
quickly  as  possible  without  confusion ;  and  my  servants  must  place 
my  people  in  order  when  they  are  gathered  together,  as  I  have- 
shown  unto  them  in  a  revelation  which  I  gave  some  days  ago. 
You  will,  my  son,  then  have  something  else  to  do  than  run  about 
to  place  my  people  in  order.  You  must  stand  by  my  side  and 
talk  to  me.  I  will  tell  you  how  my  people  must  be  placed,  and 
you  must  talk  to  my  servants  and  to  the  people.  I  will  talk  to 
you,  and  you  must  talk  to  the  people,  and  introduce  me  to  those 
of  my  people  who  are  worthy.  I  want  to  talk  to  you  mouth  to 
mouth.  I  want  you  to  see  me.  I  see  you  all  the  time  when  I  am 
here ;  but  you  have  not  seen  me  as  often  as  you  wished  to ;  but 
you  will  soon  see  me  as  often  as  you  desire  to,  after  I  have 
broken  the  bonds. 

4.  Keep  your  clothing  ready  so  that  you  can  put  it  on  quickly 
when  you  are  called  upon  to  do  so.  When  that  feeling  comes 
over  you  which  I  have  spoken  of,  you  must  then  hurry  and  dress 
yourself  in  white  linen,  as  I  commanded  you ;  for  you  will  have  no 
more  time  allotted  unto  you  after  that  feeling  comes  over  you  than 
you  will  need  to  dress  you  and  get  yourself  ready  to  be  led  into 
my  presence  by  mine  holy  angels ;  therefore,  prepare  yourself  to 
meet  me.  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts ;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


322  "COMMANDED  TO  PREPARE. 

THE  PROPHET    IS    COMMANDED    TO    PREPARE    TO 
MEET  THE  LORD. 


No.   179.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  24th,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,    I  say  unto  you,   my  servant  Joseph,   I  am  in  a 
hurry  to   speak  unto   you  again,    although    I  know  that  it  is  very 
troublesome  to  you  to  write  so  much.     You   will  soon  have  done 
being  troubled  so  much  with  writing  under  such  unfavorable  cir- 
cumstances.    You  may  ask  me  why  you  cannot  use  your  Father's 
rod  without  first  putting  on  his  robe.     A  celestial  law  forbids  any 
God  the  privilege  of  taking  his  sceptre  into  his  hand,  and  raising 
it,  and  giving   a   command,    until  he  has  first  put  on  the   royal 
robe.     You  are  called  to  use  your  Father's  robe  and  his  rod  in  his 
stead,  and  by  his  authority,  as  though  your  Father  was  here  to  use 
them  himself.     He  sanctions  all  that  you  do. 

2.  And  behold,    I   say  unto   you, — that  the  ground  on  which 
you  will  stand  when  you  raise  your  rod,  and  give  your  command, 
is  holy  ground.     I  have  sanctified  it  for  the  purpose.     I  know  the 
spot  of  ground  where  you  will  stand.     I  will  lead  you  to  it  at  the 
time.     The  place  where  you  must  stand  when  you  give  the  com- 
mand must  be  made  perfectly  clean,  and  you  must  have  something 
put  under  your  feet  to  stand  upon.     Your  feet  must  be  kept  per- 
fectly clean.     You  should  stand  in  linen  shoes  when  you  give  the 

,  command.  All  your  clothing  which  you  have  on  while  you  have 
the  rod  in  your  hand  should  be  white  linen — not  soiled.  If  you 
have  not  all  those  things  in  your  own  possession  now,  you  must 
make  haste  and  obtain  them.  My  people  will  assist  you.  You 
have  no  time  to  lose.  You  will  have  all  that  you  can  do  to  get 
ready  for  me  by  the  time  that  I  want  to  come  to  you ;  for  I  can 
assure  you  that  the  time  of  my  coming  is  near.  You  will  under- 
stand me.  And  when  you  have  put  on  your  robe,  and  you  are 
about  to  come  to  that  place  where  you  must  stand  when  you  give 
your  command,  you  must  put  on  your  slippers  and  walk  to  the 
place  where  you  must  stand,  and  when  you  have  come  to  that 
place,  you  must  take  off  your  slippers  and  put  on  your  linen  shoes. 
The  place  on  which  you  stand  must  be  beautified;  for  it  is  most 


COMMANDED    TO    PREPARE.  323 

holy.  I  have  already  appointed  the  place  and  sanctified  it ;  and  I 
will  lead  my  servant  to  that  place.  My  people  will  beautify  it  for 
you.  I  will  tell  you  how  it  must  be  beautified,  and  you  must  tell 
my  people,  and  they  will  soon  beautify  it  according  to  the  orders 
which  they  will  receive  from  you.  They  will  not  keep  you  waiting 
long.  All  things  will  go  on  in  an  orderly  manner.  I  am  the 
Lord. 

3.  I  need  not  to  tell  you  any  nearer  than  I  have  done  when 
you  may  expect  to  see  me.  You  know  near  enough.  You  under- 
stand my  way  of  working,  and  you  can  see  a  little  ahead.  I  am 
^with  you  continually.  O,  how  pleased  I  am  that  the  time  has 
come  when  I  can  put  an  end  to  all  that  abomination  which  exists 
among  those  people  who  are  in  this  Territory,  who  are  continually 
blaspheming  mine  holy  name.  O,  what  a  delight  I  shall  take  in 
bursting  the  oppressive  bonds  that  have  bound  the  pure  of  my 
people,  and  setting  them  free !  I  love  the  poor  and  honest,  and  I 
will  fight  their  battles.  I  am  thankful  that  the  time  has  come 
when  I  can  relieve  your  troubled  feelings.  My  trouble  with  you 
is  now  at  an  end,  and  that  is  a  great  relief  to  me,  as  well  as  it  is  to 
you.  I  shall  work  with  you  in  a  different  way  now,  than  I  have 
hitherto  done.  I  can  satisfy  you  for  the  future,  and  that  is  a 
source  of  pleasure  unto  me ;  for  I  do  not  like  to  be  complained  of. 
1  wish  to  have  the  good  will  of  those  with  whom  I  am  so  closely 
connected.  I  want  to  work  with  them  in  a  perfect  union.  This 
I  shall  do  for  the  future.  You  would  not  be  a  hard  man  to 
deal  with  if  you  were  not  oppressed  to  such  an  unreasonable 
sxtent ;  it  is  that  which  has  caused  you  to  murmur  against  me. 
But  I  shall  remove  that  oppression  off  you,  then  you  will  not 
murmur  against  me,  but  we  shall  work  together  in  unison.  This 
is  why  I  want  you  to  prepare  for  me,  my  son.  Lo,  I  come  quickly. 
I  am  the  Bright  and  Morning  Star;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


324  .   COMMANDED    TO    PREPARE    FOR    MOVING. 

THE    PEOPLE   ARE    REQUESTED  TO    BE   PREPARED 
FOR    MOVING. 


No.  1 80.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  25th,  1861. 

i.  You  ARE  somewhat  astonished  at  such  unfavorable  weather 
as  this  at  this  time.  You  cannot  understand  the  reason  of  it. 
You  think  that  it.  is  a  very  unlikely  thing  to  expect  me  to  come 
and  deliver  my  people  at  such  an  unfavorable  time  as  this.  You 
say  that  my  people  have  never  experienced  harder  weather  than 
this  since  I  gathered  them  to  this  place,  and  they  think  it  hard  to 
have  such  weather  at  this  time  when  they  expect  to  be  delivered 
every  day — even  according  to  my  words.  My  people  think  that 
I  am  working  against  both  them  and  myself.  They  think  they 
should  have  very  good  weather;  but  instead  of  that  they  think 
that  it  could  not  be  much  worse.  I  can  moderate  the  weather 
for  their  benefit  when  they  are  ready  for  me  to  visit  them.  I  sent 
this  unfavorable  weather  at  this  time  for  a  wise  purpose  in  myself. 
My  people  do  not  know  all  things  as  yet.  I  study  their  benefit, 
and  they  do  not  always  know  when  I  am  working  in  their  favor. 
But  they  must  place  themselves  in  my  hands,  and  believe  that  I 
will  overrule  all  things  for  their  good.  When  my  people  have 
procured  sufficient  wood  to  last  them  for  a  few  days,  and  have 
brought  themselves  to  order,  and  to  that  calmness  which  I  have 
before  spoken  of,  then  I  will  come  as  I  have  said.  But  my  peo- 
ple have  not  procured  sufficient  wood  to  last  them  for  a  few  days, 
as  I  commanded  them.  They  must  do  this,  or  else  they  will 
suffer  when  I  come  to  deliver  my  people.  They  will  not  have 
much  of  an  opportunity  to  obtain  wood  to  burn  after  I  have  re- 
moved their  enemies  out  of  their  way.  Their  time  will  then  be 
taken  up  in  others  ways  than  in  getting  wood.  All  their  time  will 
be  taken  up  in  preparing  themselves  to  move  out  of  this  place. 
They  should  be  at  work  now  procuring  wood,  as  I  have  com- 
manded them.  It  is  hard  for  me  to  make  my  people  understand 
me.  I  suppose  they  think  that  they  now  have  enough  wood  to 
last  a  few  days ;  but  they  have  not.  They  should  be  at  work  now 
getting  wood.  They  must  go  to  work  with  all  their  power,  and 


COMMANDED    TO    BE    PREPARED.  325 

they  must  not  slacken  in  their  exertions  until  they  have  obtained 
sufficient  wood  to  last  them.  I  know  what  my  people  need,  and  I 
will  counsel  them  aright  if  they  will  obey  me ;  but  if  they  will  not, 
they  will  suffer  for  it.  I  have  waited  long  enough  for  them.  I 
have  waited  for  them  one  week,  and  they  are  not  ready  for  me 
yet.  How  long  must  I  wait  for  them  ?  I  can  soon  moderate  the 
weather  for  that  circumstance  when  my  people  are  ready  to  meet 
me.  When  they  are  ready  for  me  there  will  be  nothing  in  the 
way.  I  will  take  good  care  of  that.  My  people  feel  the'  need  of 
being  delivered.  They  have  suffered  in  the  wet  and  cold  long 
enough.  I  can  moderate  the  weather  suitable  to  the  circum- 
stances in  a  very  short  \irne.  Therefore,  let  my  people  bring  up 
enough  wood  to  last  them,  as  soon  as  they  can,  in*  order  that  their 
time  may  be  spent  otherwise — even  in  preparing  themselves  to 
move  out  of  this  place  as  soon  as  possible  after  the  test  is  over ; 
for  I  do  not  want  my  people  to  remain  in  this  place  any  longer 
than  they  can  possibly  help  after  I  have  moved  mine  enemies  out 
of  their  way.  This  is  not  the  place  for  them  after  that  event.  It 
would  be  gratifying  unto  me  if  my  people  would  move  out  of  this 
place  the  day  after  I  have  moved  mine  enemies  out  of  their  way ; 
but  they  will  not  be  able  to  do  it.  It  will  be  a  busy  time  among 
my  people  while  they  are  preparing  to  move  out  of  this  place. 
After  the  scourge  is  over  they  will  not  have  time  to  do  anything 
else  than  to  prepare  to  move. 

2.  My  people  will  see  why  I  want  them  to  obtain  as  much 
wood  as  they  will  need  for  the  present ;  for  they  will  not  have  any 
time  to  procure  it  after  the  scourge  is  over.  Therefore,  let  them 
attend  to  that  matter  now,  and  all  will  be  well.  I  am  the  Lord  of 
Hosts ;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


326  THE    ORDER    IN    WHICH    THE    PEOPLE    MUST    MOVE. 

REVELATION    SHOWING    THE    ORDER    IN    WHICH 

THE  PEOPLE  OE  THE  LORD   MUST  MOVE 

FROM  THIS  PLACE  TO  GREAT 

SALT  LAKE  CITY. 


No.  1 8 1.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  25th,  1861. 

• 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — after  I  shall  have  cut 
off  your  enemies  out  of  your  way,  you  must  lead  my  people  from 
this  place  to  Great  Salt  Lake  City,  and  both  I  and  my  holy  angels 
will  go  before  you ;  and  if  those  of  mine  enemies  who  shall  be  left 
alive  should  rise^ip  against  you,  and  attempt  to  injure  either  you  or 
any  of  my  people,  I  will  slay  them  when  they  make  the  attempt. 

2.  You  know  that   I   have  told  you  that- 1  ride  upon  a  white 
horse — large  and  beautiful ;  therefore,  you  must  ride  upon  a  white 
horse,  also.     I  will  go  before  you.     I  shall  only  be  a  few  steps  in 
advance  of  you  until  we  reach  the  city.     As  I  am  the  first  general 
in  heaven,  so  you  are  the  first  general  upon   the   earth ;  therefore, 
as  I  ride   a  white  horse,    so   you,    whenever,  from  this  time  forth 
until  your   mission  is  ended,   you   have   occasion  to  ride  upon  a 
horse,  must  ride  one  of  the  same  color. 

3.  You  and  my  people  must  march  forth  from  this  place  in  the 
following  order:     You  must  ride  behind  me  upon  a  white  horse; 
my  servant  John  Banks  must  ride  oh  one  side  of  you  upon  a  black 
horse ;  my  servant   Richard   Cook  must  ride  on  the  other  side,  of 
you  upon  a  red  horse ;  and  my  servant  John  Pason  must  ride  upon 
a  pale  horse.     You  four  will   represent  the  four  captains  of  the 
heavenly  host.      Earthly  things  must  pattern  after  heavenly  things; 
therefore,  as  four  chief  generals  lead  all  the  heavenly  host,  s®  four 
chief  generals   must   lead  Adam's  posterity.     These  four   leading 
men  upon   the  earth   represent   the   four  first  generals  who  are  in 
heaven — as  there  are  four  first  leaders  in  heaven,  so  there  must  be 
four  first  leaders  upon  the  earth.     And  after  you  and  your  three 
brethren  who  will  be  on  horseback,  will  follow  the  apostles  in  three 
wagons  drawn  by  horses,  and   next  the  high   priests,    in   wagons 
also,  with  their  president  at  their  head.     The   high   priests  should 
be  drawn  by  horses ;  therefore,  let  them  raise  all  the  horse  teams 


THE    ORDER    IN    WHICH    THE    PEOPLE    MUST    MOVE.  327 

that  they  possibly  can ;  but,  if  they  cannot  obtain  horses  sufficient 
to  draw  them,  they  must  make  out  with  oxen.  I  would  that  my 
people  had  sufficient  horse  teams  to  move  them  all ;  but  they  have 
not;  therefore,  they  must  do  the  best  that  they  possibly  can. 
After  the  high  priests  will  follow  the  priests  of  Aaron,  with  their- 
president  at  their  head.  All  things  must  go  on  in  proper  order. 
Each  man  who  is  not  otherwise  engaged,  and  who  can  possibly  do 
so,  must  take  care  of  his  own  companion  and  family.  The  wives 
and  children  of  those  men  who  stand  at  the  head  of  my  Church 
who,  on  account  of  their  being  otherwise  engaged,  will  not  be 
able  to  take  care  of  them,  must  be  taken  care  of  by  others  who 
are  partly  liberated,  and  who  will  be  able  to  take  care  of  them. 
In  this  order,  my  people  must  travel  to  their  journey's  end. 

4.  And   behold,    I  say   unto  you,    my  son, — you  will  not  be 
called  to  raise  your  rod  and  give  your  command  for  every  frivolous 
case.     If  but  a  few  of  mine  enemies  should  rise  up  either  against 
you  or  any  of  the  rest  of  my  servants,  and  you  will  give  me  your 
consent,  I  will  cut  them  off  without  putting  you  to  the  unnecessary 
trouble  of  raising  your  rod,  and  giving  your  command.     You  need 
not  to  raise  your  rod  and  give  your  command  for  trifles ;  but  when 
a  few  hundreds  or  a  few  thousands  of  people   stand  in  your  way 
and   oppose  you,   and  you  wish  to  have  them  destroyed,  it  will -be 
necessary  for  you  to  raise  your  rod  and  give  your  comTnand.     But 
in  cases  of  small  importance,  you  need  not  to  do  so ;  all  that  you 
need  to  do  then,   will  be  to  give  me -your   consent  by  word  of 
mouth,  and  I  will  always  cut  them  off  according  to  your  word — 
that  I  can  do,  according  to  the  law  by  which  I  am  governed.     You 
may  meet  with  such  small  cases,  and  when  you  do,  you   will   now 
know  how  to  deal  with  them. 

5.  I  have  now  told  you  the  order  in  which  you  and  my  people 
must  move  away  .from  this  place,  and  also,  how  to  deal  with  your 
enemies ;  therefore,   prepare  yourself  to  do  your  duty,  and  make 
all    things    ready;  for  lo,    I  come  quickly.     I  am  Jesus  Christ. 
Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


328          THE    MEETING    OF    THE    LORD    AND    THE    PROPHET. 

REVELATION     CONCERNING     THE     MANNER     IN 

WHICH    THE    LORD    WILL    MEET 

THE    PROPHET. 


No.  182.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  25th,  1861. 

1.  WHAT  more  can  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  than  what  I  have 
said?     I  must  come  to  you  next.     You   understand  the  signs  of 
the   times.     I  need   not  to  say  a  great  deal  more  unto  you  at  this 
t;me.     There  is  no  necessity  for  it  now.     I   have  said  all  that   I 
need  to  say  unto  you  until  I  change  the  condition  of  things ;  that 
appears  to  be  my  next  work.    You  want  me  to  come  quickly.    You 
do  not  want  me  to  linger ;  and   I  will  promise  you  that  I  will  not 
linger.     I  do  not  see  anything  more  that   I   can   reveal   unto  you 
that    would    be    of  much   benefit  to  you.     You    understand  my 
present  situation.     I  need  not  keep  you  writing  unless  I  had  some- 
thing to  reveal  unto  you. 

2.  You  know  by  your  own  feelings  that  the  test  has  come,  and 
you  know  that,   if  I  fulfil  the  promises  which   I  have  made  unto 
my  people,  I  cannot  delay  the  matter  any  longer.      I  cannot  delay 
the"  test  any  longer,  and  still   fulfil  my   promises.     You  know   my 
situation  very  well.     You  know  that  it  is  your  duty  to  be  watching 
for  me.     You  know  the  feelings  which  you  now  have.     You  must 
wash  yourself  early  to-morrow  morning.     You  understand  what  I 
mean.      You  must  put  all  your  underclothing  on,  and  also  put  on 
your  every-day   clothing,   and  after  you  have  had  your  every-day 
clothing  on  but  a  very  short  time,  that  first  feeling  will  come  over 
you.      I  will  impress  that  feeling  upon  you  so  clearly  that  you  can- 
not misunderstand  it;  and  when  that  feeling  comes  over  you,  you 
must  make  haste  and  dress  yourself  up  in  white  linen ;  for  as  soon 
as   you  are  dressed   up,    mine    angels    will    guide    you    into    my 
presence.     You  must  give  way  to  them  and  all  will  be  well.     You 
will  behold  strange  scenes  at  that  time.     I  shall  meet  you  at  your 
own  door,  where  I  first  appointed  to  meet  you,  and  give  unto  you 
your  robe ;  and  when  I  have  given  unto  you  your  robe,  I  will  lead 
you  to  the  place  where  you  must  stand  when   you   raise  your  rod 
and  give  the  command, — even  that  place  which  I  have  sanctified, 


THE    PROPHET    LACKS    CONFIDENCE.  329 

which  is  most  holy ;  and  my  people  shall  beautify  it  and  make  it  a 
proper  place  for  both  you  and  me  to  stand  upon ;  for  I  shall  stand 
close  by  you.  There  must  be  room  made  for  both  of  us  to  stand 
upon. 

3.  I  need  not  to  say  anything  more  unto  you  upon  this  subject. 
I  have  said  enough  unto  you  at  present.  You  know  now  what  to 
expect ;  therefore,  watch  for  me.  I  will  immerge  you  into  my 
presence  as  gently  as  I  possibly  can.  I  know  that  you  are  very 
weak  in  body,  and  I  will  deal  with  you  accordingly.  I  am  the 
Light  and  Life  of  the  world ;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen 
and  Amen. 


THE  PROPHET  APPEARS  TO  LACK  CONFIDENCE. 


No.   183.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  26th,   1861. 

1.  WHY  cannot  you  be  good  natured?     You  are  afraid  that  I 
shall  let  the   right  time  pass  by,   and  not  come  and   fulfil  my 
promises.     You  think  that  I  have  but  a  short  time  in  which  to 
fulfil   my  promises.     You   think  that   I  have  delayed  so  long  that 
you  begin  to  fear  that  I  am   going  to  fail  all  together.     You  are 
satisfied  that  I  cannot  have,  at  the  furthest,  more  than  a  few  hours 
to  arrange  matters  and  to  come  to  you.     If  I  do  not  come  in  that 
length   of  time,    you  think  I  shall  fail   altogether;   and,   if  such 
should  be  the  case,  you  think  that  you  will  be  in  a  difficulty ;  and 
you   think  that   your  confidence  will  have  been  betrayed  beyond 
that  of  any  other  man  that  ever  lived  upon  the  earth. 

2.  I   know   that  I  have  but  a   few  hours  allotted  me  to  turn 
myself  around  and  to  come  and  deliver  my  people.     If  I  do  not 
come  in  that  length  of  time,  my  promises  to  my  people  will  fail  to 
a  certain  extent ;  but   I  can   deliver  my  people   inside  the  time 
which  I  appointed ;  if  I  do  not,  I  ask  no  more  of  you,  and  I  will 
bear  the   blame,  and  I  will  do  unto  you  according  to  your  desire. 
I  will  deal  fairly  with  you,  never  fear.     You  greatly  fear  that  I  arn 
about  to  break  my  word,  and  destroy  both  you  and  my  people.     If 
I  fail  to  fulfil  my  promise  in  the  deliverance  of  my  people,  I 


330  THE    LORD    PROMISES    TO    FULFIL    HIS    WORD. 

know  that  both  you  and  my  people  would  be  destroyed,  and  this 
world  would  also  be  destroyed.  But  I  shall  make  no  such  mis- 
takes as  those. 

3.  You  see  where  I  stand  in  connection  with  you  and  my  peo- 
ple ;  and  I  see  my  position,  also ;  and  I  shall  make  the  best  of  it. 
I  know  that  I  have  driven  things  to  the  last  extremity.     I  wish  you 
to  be  good  natured,  my  son  ;  and  do  not  allow  such  an  idea  to  enter 
your  mind  as  to  think  that   I  shall  not  come   according  to  my 
word;  for  I  shall.     I  am  about  to  come  unto  you  immediately.     I 
shall  soon  be  through  with  mine  enemies. 

4.  After  I  come  unto  you  it  will  be  a  very  little  work  for  us  to 
destroy   mine  enemies  who   are  in   this  Territory.     I  shall  come 
quickly,  and  I  shall  soon  accomplish  my  work.     You  think  that  it 
is  a  great  thing  to  destroy  all  mine  enemies  in  this  Territory  ;    but 
I   consider  it  but   a  trifle.     I  can   do  it  all  in  a  very  short  time. 
Therefore,  my  son,  let  me  entreat  you  to  be  good  natured   for  an 
hoi^r  or  two,  and  after  that  space  of  time  I  shall  begin  to  satisfy 
you.     I  do  not  ask  anything  more  of  you  than  that.     If  I  do  not 
begin  to  satisfy  you  after  that  length  of  time,  you  may   grumble 
against  me  as  hard  as  you  like,  and  I  will  take  it.     You  now  know 
what  to  look  for  in  the  course  of  a  couple  of  hours.     I  have  told  you 
now  near  enough.     You  do  not  need  to  know  any  nearer  the  time 
when  I  shall  come.     Therefore,  watch  for  me  in  the  way  which  I 
have  appointed ;  for  lo,  I  come  quickly ;    even  the  Lord  of  Hosts. 
Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


THE    PROPHET    IS    INFORMED    THAT    HIS    BIRTH- 
RIGHT ENTITLES  HIM  TO  THE  ABILITY 
FOR  THE  OFFICE  HE  HOLDS. 


No.  184.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  27th,  1861. 

i.  I  WISH  to  speak  unto  you,  my  son,  once  more.  I  see  the 
position  in  which  you  are  placed  with  this  people.  You  wish  me 
to  find  another  man  to  take  your  place  ;  for  you  say  that  you  can- 
not endure  the  oppression  which  I  place  upon  you.  You  say  that 


BIRTHRIGHT    AND    ABILITY.  33! 

the  waY  i°  which  I  work  through  you  does  not  satisfy  you.  In 
fact,  you  say  that  you  cannot  bear  the  burden  which  I  have  placed 
upon  you.  You  say  that  I  have  never  worked  with  you  at  all  in  a 
way  that  has  satisfied  you ;  and  you  say  that  you  do  not  want  to 
keep  murmuring  against  me  on  that  account.  You  wish  me  to 
call  another  man  and  place  him  in  your  place.  You  say  that  I 
might  find  another  man  that  would  not  murmur  against  me  as 
much  as  you  do,  and  you  do  not  wish  to  stand  in  the  way  of  a 
better  man;  therefore,  you  want  me  to  find  another  man  and 
bring  him  to  you,  and  you  say  that  you  will  lay  your  hands  upon 
him  in  the  sight  of  all  the  congregation.  You  wish  me  to  work 
through  him  as  I  have  done  through  you ;  and  you  want  me  to 
take  you  from  the  earth. 

2.  But  behold,   I  say   unto  you,    my  son,  you  require  that  at 
my   hands    which  I  cannot   do.     You   know  that  I   cannot  call 
another  man  and  place  him  in  your  place ;  and  if  I  could  do  such 
a  thing,  I  do  not  want  to  do   it.     I   could  not   find  another  man 
upon  the  earth  that  could  have  borne  as  much  as  you  have  borne 
under  any  circumstance  whatever.     No  other    man  upon  the  earth 
possesses  the  necessary  abilities  for  such  an   office   as   yours ;  and 
those  abilities  I  could  not  give  to  another  man  until  he  inherited 
them  by  birthright.     I  could  not  give  such  abilities  as  those  to  any 
man  before  the  time  had  come  for  him  to   have  them.     To  have 
the  abilities  which  you  have,  a  man  must  hold  the  keys  of  the  holy 
priesthood  by  birthright.     Therefore,   the  abilities  which  you  pos- 
sess cannot  be  given  to  another. 

3.  Make  yourself  as  contented  as   you   possibly   can.     I   will 
make  all  things  right  with  my  people.     I  know  that  they  are  fret- 
ful, and  they  do  not  know  what  ails   them.     I  have  them   in   my 
care,   and   I   will  bring  them  to  the  right  position,  no  matter  how 
they  fret  and  fume.     I  can  manage  them,  if  you  cannot,  and  that 
you  shall  see.     I  will  make  them  do  what  I  want  them  to  do.     I 
have   a  claim   on  them.     They   are  not  devils ;  but  they  are  the 
chosen  seed,   and  I   am  about  to  try  them,  no  matter  how  they 
reason  their   own   case  and  murmur  against  me  for  breaking  my 
promises.     I   shall  not   break  my  promises ;  but  I  shall  try  these 
people.     They  need  not  to  think  that  they  will  get  through  with- 
out being  tried.     I   cannot  confer  such  a  blessing  upon  them  as 


332  THE    DISAPPOINTMENT. 

they  expect  to  receive  without  trying  them  severely.  I  have  given 
unto  my  people  the  full  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood,  and  they  have 
never  been  tried  as  yet.  That  knowledge  which  they  have 
received  through  the  fulness  of  my  gospel  has  never  been  tested  as 
yet. 

4.  There    are    many    of   my    people    who   have   been    made 
acquainted   with  the   principles   of  the  fulness  of  my  gospel  to  a 
great  extent,  and  when  the  smallest  thing  seems  to  cross  their  path- 
way, they  are  ready  to  deny  all  that  they  have  been   receiving  for 
many  months.     What  faith  have  they  in  me?     They  have  no  faith 
worth   mentioning.     But   I  shall  try  them  according  to  the  privi- 
leges which   they  have  had  to  obtain  both  faith  and  knowledge, 
and  if  they  have  not  that  faith   and  knowledge  which  will   enable 
them  to  stand  that  trial  which   is   appointed   for  them,  they  will 
perish  in  the  flesh ;  for  the  trial  will  come  upon  them.     What  is  it 
that  is  trying  my   people  now?     A  little   disappointment.     They 
think  that  I  ought  to  have  come  out  in  power  (as  they  call  it)  and 
delivered  them  before  this  time;  and  because  I  have  disappointed 
them  a  little,  and  they  have  not  yet  been  delivered,  they  are  down- 
cast  in  their  feelings,  and   are  ready  to  deny  all  that  they  have 
received. 

5.  When   I  come  shall   I  find  faith  upon   the  earth?     It  is 
unlawful  for  me  to  confer   a  blessing  upon  a  people  until  I  have 
first  tried  them.     I   could   not  confer  a  blessing  upon   Abraham 
until  after  I  had  tried  him.     I   commanded  him  to  offer  up  his 
only  son  upon  the  altar;  and  I  had  made  a  promise  unto  him  that 
I  would  bless  his  seed  after  him  forever ;  and   yet   I   commanded 
Abraham  to   offer  up  the  man  through  whom  that  seed  should 
come.     If  I   tried  my  people  in  that  way,  they  would  think  that  I 
was  very  unreasonable.     But  Abraham  had  to  be  tried  in  that  way 
before  he  could  be  called  the  father  of  the  faithful.     That  was  a 
great  blessing  conferred   upon  him;  and   if  he   could   not   have 
endured  the  trial  through  which  that  blessing  came,  he  could  not 
have  received  the  blessing.     If  he  endured  the  trial,  he  claimed 
the  blessing ;  but  if  he  had  not  endured  the  trial,  he  never  could 
haye  leceived  that  blessing;  for  it  is  unlawful  to  confer  a  blessing 
upon  a  single  person  or  a  people   without  that  person  or  that  peo- 
ple have  first  endured  a  trial  which  was  appointed  by  law  for  that 


A   TRIAL    BEFORE    THE    BLESSING.  333 

blessing;  and  if  my  people  do  not  endure  the  trial  which  is 
appointed  by  law  for  the  blessing  which  lies  before  them,  they 
cannot  receive  the  blessing ;  therefore,  I  shall  try  them,  and  as 
many  of  my  people  as  can  endure  the  trial  which  is  appointed  for 
the  blessing,  can  receive  the  blessing.  Let  my  people  prepare 
themselves  to  endure  the  trial,  and  they  shall  receive  the  blessing. 
It  is  coming  right  upon  them. 

6.  Let  my  people   watch  for  me,   for  lo,   I   am  coming  as  a 
whirlwind ;  and  my  people  will  soon  be  called  to  endure  the  trial. 
They   need  not  to  lose  their  precious  time  by  murmuring  about 
small  things.     This  is  a  day  of  great  events,  and  my  people  should 
know  that  those  of  my  people  who  murmur  at  every  small  thing 
which  crosses  their  path,  will  not  endure  the  trial  that  lies  before 
them.     My  people  may  ask  what  trial  it  is  which  they  will   be 
called  to  pass  through.     They  will  know  soon  enough.     Let  them 
keep  themselves  dressed  up  neat  and  clean  as  I  first  commanded 
them,  and  they  will  soon  understand  what  the  trial  is. 

7.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph, — you  need 
not  to  trouble  yourself  about  this  people ;  but  deliver  them  into  my 
hands  and  I   will  take  charge   of  them.     If  you  cannot  manage 
them,   I   can,   and  I   will  bring  them  to    my  terms.     You  have 
suffered  enough  on  their  account. 

I  now  add   no  more.     I  am  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen 
and  Amen. 


A  TEST  IS  PLACED  BEFORE  THE  PEOPLE. 


No.  185.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  28th,  1861. 

i.  I  WILL  speak  unto  you,  my  son,  concerning  my  people  for 
your  benefit.  You  know  that  I  have  taken  a  course  to  disap- 
point my  people.  I  was  compelled  to  do  so  in  order  that  I  might 
show  unto  them  their  follies.  They  did  ndl  understand  my  way 
of  working,  and  I  was  compelled  to  take  a  course  to  teach  them, 
and  I  could  not  do  this  without  taking  a  course  to  disappoint 
them,  and  thereby  to  destroy  the  false  ideas  which  they  have  of 
my  character ;  and  after  I  have  removed  the  false  ideas  which  they 


334  THE  TEST. 

have  of  me,  then  it  opens  the  way  for  me  to  show  unto  them  my 
true  character.  If  I  did  not  first  destroy  falsehood,  I  never  could 
establish  truth  in  its  place,  inasmuch  as  falsehood  reigns  univer- 
sally, and  all  people  have  partaken  of  it,  and  they  do  not  under- 
stand the  truth. 

2.  If  ever  the  children  of  men  are  made  to  understand  the 
truth  as  it  is,  they  will  first  be   compelled  to  forsake  falsehood ; 
and  when  they  have  forsaken  falsehood,  truth  can  take  its  place. 
Truth  and  falsehood  cannot  occupy  the  same   place.     All   people 
must  be  led  either  by  truth   or  falsehood.     There  is   only  those 
two  principles  in  the  world,  and  all  people  are  led  by  either  one 
or  the  other  of  them ;  and   when   falsehood  has  taken   deep  root 
in  the  minds  of  people,  it  is  very  difficult  to  remove  it   and   estab- 
lish truth  in  its  place.     In   doing  so  it  becomes  very   painful  to 
those  who  are  thus  operated  upon  by  an  opposite  principle.     It  is 
very  hard  for  a  people  to  forsake  that  which  has  led  them  all  their 
lives.     If  something  comes  along  which   condemns  that  principle 
which  has  led  them  all  their  lives,  they  look  upon  it  with  suspicion, 
and  they  begin  forthwith  .to  try  it  by  that  false  principle  which  has 
formerly  led  them.     They   may   wish  to   ask   me  this   question : 
"Have  we  been  led  by  false  principles  all  our  days?"     I  answer 
them,  Yes. 

3.  Behold,   I  am  the  Lord   of  Hosts,   and   I  testify  unto  all 
mankind  that  I  have  never  given  one  key   pertaining  to  the  holy 
priesthood,   in  its   fulness,   to   any  prophet   for   several  thousand 
years,  until  I  had  opened  the  last  seal. 

4.  The  world  of  mankind  have   been  led  by    mystery,    and 
figures,  and  parables,  and   dark  speeches   which  the   children   of 
men    could    not   understand;   consequently   the    devil  has  taken 
advantage  of  them. 

5.  When  there   was  nothing   revealed  by    me   to    guide    the 
human  race,  the  children  of  men  were  more  apt  to  take  those 
figures,  and  parables,   and  dark  speeches  ,wrong  than  they   were 
li^ht,  because  the  prevailing  influence  in  the  world  was   evil   and 
false.     It  obscured  the  little  light  that  was   brought  to  the   world 
by  mine  holy  angels ;  for  they  were  restrained  by  law  from  reveal- 
ing much  to  the  children  of  men,  and,  on  that  account,  the  influence 
of  the  devil,  which  is  a  false  influence,  prevailed   over  that  small 


THE    TEST.  335 

/ 

glimmering  of  light  which  proceeded  forth  from  mine  holy  angels ; 
and  thus,  through  a  false  influence  operating  upon  Abraham's 
seed,  they  misunderstood  those  parables,  and  figures,  and  dreams, 
and  dark  speeches  which  were  given  unto  them  by  the  prophets 
and  righteous  men ;  and  thus  mankind  have  been  without  a  true 
standard  whereby  they  might  find  out  whether  they  were  righteous 
or  not.  When  they  have  undertaken  to  judge  any  matter,  they 
were  more  likely  to  judge  wrongfully  than  rightfully,  because  they 
did  not  know  me  nor  my  ways.  I  never  revealed  my  attributes 
unto  them.  They  knew  me  not.  A  true  knowledge  of  myself 
was  withheld  from  the  children  of  men  until  the  time  came  for 
the  last  seal  to  be  opened,  and,  at  the  opening  of  that  seal,  a  true 
knowledge  of  myself  and  my  attributes  was  revealed  unto  the 
children  of  men. 

6.  All  things  both  in  heaven,  and  upon  the  earth,  and  in  hell, 
and  in  all  other  worlds,  are  made  plain  through  the  keys  of  the 
holy  priesthood.  These  keys  try  all  things  both  in  heaven,  and 
upon  the  earth,  and  in  hell,  and  upon  all  other  earths  which  have 
been  created  and  are  travelling  up  to  perfection;  and  those  of" 
my  people  who  cannot  lay  down  all  those  things  which  they  pos- 
sess at  the  feet  of  him  who  holds  the  keys  of  my  kingdom,  cannot 
be  delivered  by  me.  He  that  has  cattle,  horses,  houses,  lands, 
wife,  children,  man  servants,  maid  servants,  gold  or  silver,  that 
cannot  lay  it  all  at  the  feet  of  my  servant  Joseph,  cannot  be  my 
disciple,  nor  be  delivered  by  me,  nor  by  any  member  of  my 
Church ;  but  all  those  who  will  do  this,  with  free  and  open  hearts, 
I  will  deliver,  and  they  shall  be  members  of  my  Church,  and  I 
will  bless  them  abundantly.  Gold  and  silver,  and  horses,  and  cat- 
tle, and  all  other  kinds  of  property  shall  be  no  object  unto  them. 
They  shall  have  an  abundance  of  all  things.  But  those  of  my 
people  who  cannot  do  this  with  all  their  hearts — even  willingly — 
need  not  to  offer  up;  for,  if  they  do,  I  will  not  accept  of  them. 
I  shall  know  whether  they  offer  up  with  all  their  hearts,  or  not. 
They  know  what  I  require  at  their  liands  before  I  shall  deliver 
them.  If  they  do  not  offer  up  in  the  way  which  I  have  ap- 
pointed, I  shall  not  deliver  them.  They  cannot  deceive  -me. 
I  shall  be  there  when  the  vote  is  taken.  My  people  will  be  called 
upon  to  vote  either  for  me  or  against  me. 


336  THE    PEOPLE    MUST    BE    PREPARED. 

7.  You  must  stand  up,  and  call  upon  those  who  are  willing,  to 
lay  all  things  at  your  feet — even  according  to  my  request — to 
•stand  upon  their  feet ;  and  after  they  have  stood  upon  their  feet, 
and  have  sat  down  again,  you  shall  call  upon  those  who  did  not 
stand  up  to  do  so,  if  there  be  any ;  and  if  there  are  any  who  are 
opposed  to  me  when  they  are  standing  upon  their  feet,  the  clerk 
must  take  their  names ;  and  when  my  people  are  gathered  together 
to  meet  me,  they  must  not  come  and  stand  in  the  rank  with  the 
rest  of  my  people ;  my  people  must  take  care  of  that ;  and  when  I 
come  to  deliver  the  faithful  .of  my  people,  I  will  destroy  them  all. 
My  people  now  know  what  I  require  at  their  hands  before  I  can 
deliver  them.  Therefore,  let  all  those  who  wish  to  be  delivered 
comply  with  my  request,  and  they  shall  receive  the  blessing.  I 
am  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  LORD  WILL  NOT   DELAY   HIS   COMING   WHEN 
THE  PEOPLE  ARE  PREPARED. 


No.  1 8 6.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  28th,  1861. 

1.  I  WISH  to  speak  unto  you  again  for  your  own  satisfaction 
that  you  may  know  what  to  expect  in  relation  to  my    coming. 
I  have  told  you  the  reason  why  I  took  a  course  to  disappoint  my 
people.     I  did  it  in  order  that  I  might  have  an  opportunity  after 
their  disappointment  to-  bring  them   to  a  knowledge  of  a  correct 
principle ;  for  I  could  not  have  done  this  without  I  had  first  dis- 
appointed them,  and  thereby  show  them  the  folly  of  their  course. 
After  I  had  done  that,  it  gave  me  a  good   opportunity  to   correct 
their  judgment   and  put  the'm  right;  this    I    have   almost    done. 
Another  meeting  or  two  will  fully  prepare  them  to  meet  me  ;  and 
when  they  are  prepared,  I  shall  not  remain  away  from   them  one 
hour  after  you  have  taken  tHe  vote  of  my  people  upon  the  matter 
which  I  commanded  you  to  place  before  them ;  then  I   will  be 
ready  to  come  and  deliver  those  who  comply  with  my  request. 

2.  All   that  I  am  waiting  for  now  is  to  try  my  people ;  that  is 
the  test  which  I  have  so  long  spoken  of.     It  has  come  at  last,  and 


THE    LORD    PROMISES    TO    COME.  337 

the  deliverance  of  my  people  will  follow  it  in  quick  succession. 
You  may  not  see  more  than  one  night  pass  over  after  that  vote  has 
been  taken  before  my  people  are  divided,  if  there  is  any  division ; 
and  if  there  is  none,  it  will  be  all  the  better.  Therefore,  I  say 
unto  you,  my  son, — that  you  may  begin  to  look  out  for  me  theday__ 
after  that  vote  has  been  taken.  I  shall  not  disappoint  you  as  I 
have  done  before  when  I  was  disappointing  my  people  on  purpose 
to  bring  them  to  a  knowledge  of  the  truth  as  it  is  in  me.  I  shall 
have  nothing  to  disappoint  you  for  this  time ;  and  I  shall  not  dis- 
appoint you  this  time ;  therefore,  you  may  begin  to  look  out  for 
me  on  Monday  morning. 

3.  You  may  possibly  see  me  on  Monday.  I  may  deliver  my 
people  on  Monday ;  but  if  I  should  not  come  on  Monday,  I  shall 
surely  come  on  Tuesday ;  that  you  may  depend  upon.  As  I  live, 
I  will  come  and  deliver  my  people  either  on  Monday  or  on  Tues- 
day. You  know  now  my  full  intentions.  Prepare  yourself  to 
meet  me,  and  hold  yourself  in  readiness,  for  I  shall  come  accord- 
ing to  my  word.  I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and 
Amen. 


THE    PEOPLE    ARE    STILL    UNPREPARED. 


No.  187.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  30th,  1861. 

i.  I  WISH  to  speak  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,  for  your  own 
satisfaction.  You  know  that  I  told  you  that  I  intended  to  deliver 
my  people  on  Monday  or  Tuesday.  But  you  see  yourself  that  I 
have  not  had  the  opportunity  to  deliver  my  people  to-day.  I 
swore  an  oath  unto  you  that  I  would  deliver  my  people  either  on 
Monday  or  on  Tuesday  if  my  people  were  ready  10  meet  me. 
I  did  not  mean  that  I  would  come  and  deliver  my  people  if  they 
were  not  ready  for  me.  I  shall  fulfil  the  promise  that  I  made 
unto  you,  when  my  people  are  ready  for  me.  I  shall  not  come 
unto  my  people  until  they  are  prepared  for  me,  if  they  can  make 
themselves  ready  to  meet  me  in  the  course  of  two  or  three  days; 
but  if  they  cannot  make  themselves  ready  in  that  time,  I  shall 
come  upon  them  when  they  are  unprepared ;  for  I  shall  not  wait 


338  THE    LORD    PROMISES    TO    COME. 

more  than  two  or  three  days  under  any  circumstances  whatever. 
I  cannot  wait  more  than  that  length  of  time.  Therefore,  my  son, 
if  you  can  prepare  my  people  to  meet  me  td-morrow,  I  will  come 
to-morrow ;  but  if  they  cannot  make  everything  ready  to  meet  me 
by  midday,  I  shall  not  come  to-morrow,  for  I  want,  at  least,  one 
part  of  the  day  to  gather  my  people  together  and  to  place  them 
in  their  own  order.  I  do  not  wish  to  be  cramped  for  time. 
Let  me  come  whenever  I  may,  I  do  not  want  things  to  be  carried 
on  hurriedly;  therefore,  I  want  sufficient  time  allotted  me,  because 
I  work  in  order — without  confusion. 

2.  I  do  not  want  you  to  understand  that  it  will  take  me  a  few 
hours  to  cut  off  mine  enemies,  for  it  will   not ;    for  my  army  can 
destroy  the  inhabitants  of  this  Territory  in  less  time  than  that. 

3.  I  want  to  come  to  my  people  in  the  fore  part  of  the  day, 
in  order  to  give  my  people  as  good  an   opportunity  as  I   possibly 
can  to  prepare  themselves  to  move  out   of  this  place  soon  after 
their  deliverance.     When  they  are  delivered,  I  wish  them   to  have 
the  whole  day  before  them ;  therefore,  when  I  visit  you,  it  will  be 
early  in  a  morning.     If  you  do  not  see  me  early  in  a  morning, 
you  need  not  look  for  me  that  day.     Therefore,  if  you  can  make 
all  things  ready  for  me  by  to-morrow  morning,  I   will  come  and 
deliver  my  people ;  but,  if  you  cannot,  I  shall  not  deliver  my  peo- 
ple to-morrow.     You  know  that  I  have  told  you  how  you  may 
expect  to  be  led  into  my  presence.     You  will  give  attention  to  all 
those  things ;  and  if  you  want  me  to  come  speedily,  open   the  way 
for  me.     I  am  waiting  for  my  people. 

I  now  add  no  more.     I  am  the  Bright  and  Morning  Star ;  even 
Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  PEOPLE  ARE  REQUESTED  TO  CONSECRATE 
THEIR  PROPERTY. 


No.  188.  •  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  3oth,  1861. 

i.     I  AM  near  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph,  and  I  am  watching 
the  movements  of  my  people  this   night.     My  servants  feel  very 


REQUESTED  TO  CONSECRATE.  339 

anxious  to  prepare  my  people  to  meet  me  to-morrow  morning ;  and 
I  will  promise  them  that  if  they  can  get  through  that  portion  of 
work  which  they  are  now  so  busily  engaged  in  this  night,  in  an 
orderly  manner,  I  will  come  unto  you  to-morrow  morning  in  the 
way  which  I  have  before  appointed.  If  my  people  think  that  they 
can  get  ready  to  meet  me  to-morrow,  let  them  labor  with  all 
diligence  to  do  so,  and  I  will  not  disappoint  them.  You  may  use 
your  influence,  my  son,  to  encourage  them  to  prepare  to  meet  me 
to-morrow. 

2.  As  I  have  said,  you  need  not  be  afraid  of  me  disappointing 
them;  for  I  shall  not  disappoint  them  if 'they  are  ready.     All  that 
I   wish   them  to  do   is  to  consecrate  all  their  property  in  the  way 
which  I  have  appointed.     I  will  not  wait  for  any  of  my  people  to 
come  here  who  are  now  absent.     All  that   I  require  now  is  for 
all  those  of  my  people  who  are  here  to  consecrate.     I   shall   not 
wait  for  any  who  are  absent.     I  knew  that  my   people  would  not 
all  be  here  when  they  were   wanted.     Therefore,   let   my  servants 
work  diligently,  if  they  feel  so  disposed,  until  they  are  through  with 
my  people,  and  then  they  shall  see  me  to-morrow. 

3.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — that  if  you  see  that 
there  is  a  possibility  of  my  people  being  fully  prepared  to  meet  me 
to-morrow,  you  must  prepare  yourself  to   meet   me  early  in  the 
morning.     You  must  have  all  your  linen  clothing  ready  to  put  on. 
You  know  what  is  required  of  you  to  fully   prepare  you.     Attend 
to  all  those  things,    for  I   shall  come  suddenly,  and  I  shall  soon 
clear  the   way  for  my  people.     I    am    Jesus    Christ.     Even    so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION  ENJOINING  IMMEDIATE  COMPLIANCE 
WITH  THE  LAW  OF  CONSECRATION. 


No.  189.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  3oth,  1861. 

i.  I  AM  in  a  hurry  to  speak  unto  you,  my  son,  for  my  people 
have  no  time  to  lose  i.i  preparing  themselves  to  meet  me.  I  have 
seen  their  offerings  which  they  have  made  according  to  my  request, 
and  with  many  of  them  I  am  well  pleased ;  for  they  have  done  all 


340  REQUESTED    TO    COMPLY    IMMEDIATELY. 

that  I  required  of  them.  There  are  a  few  who  offered  up  grudg- 
ingly; but  not  many.  The  majority  of  them  have  come  to  my 
terms  with  all  their  hearts.  I  have  accepted  of  their  offerings,  and 
I  will  deliver  them.  But  I  call  upon  those  few  of  whom  I  have 
spoken  to  repent.  I  need  not  mention  their  names.  Those 
who  are  guilty  will  know  who  I  mean.  They  know  very  well  that 
they,  did  not  offer  up  with  all  their  hearts;  and  if  they  do  not 
repent,  and  become  whole-hearted,  I  will  not  deliver  them ;  but, 
when  I  come,  I  will  slay  them,  let  them  stand  wherever  they  may. 
Should  they  even  stand  in  the  ranks  with  the  faithful  of  my  people, 
my  holy  angels  would  pick  them  out  and  slay  them ;  therefore, 
they  had  better  give  up  with  all  their  hearts,  as  the  rest  of  my  peo- 
ple have  done,  for  I  will  accept  of  none  but  the  whole-hearted. 
They  cannot  deceive  me  by  hiding  themselves  in  the  crowd,  nor 
thereby  escape  my  judgments.  If  they  do  not  do  as  I  have  com- 
manded them  in  this  revelation,  I  shall  slay  them  as  I  have  said. 
They  now  know  my  will  concerning  them ;  they  had,  therefore, 
better  decide  as  to  the  course  which  they  intend  to  take.  I  am 
the  Lord. 

2.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — all  my  people  who 
are  willing  to  consecrate,  must  bring  in  a  list  of  their  property  and 
deliver  it  into  the  hands  of  my  servant  John  Banks  as  soon  as  they 
can ;  for  I  shall  not  come  and  deliver  them  until  they  have  done 
so ;  but  after  they  have   done  so,    I  will  come  and  deliver  them. 
Therefore,  let  my  people  go  to  work  and  make  out  all  their  lists  of 
property  to-night,  if  they  can ;  and  they  can  do  this  if  they  will  put 
themselves  to  a  little  trouble  in  order  to  do  so.     I  wish  them  to 
understand  that  they  must  not  linger  in  this  matter.     Let   all  this 
work  be  done  to-night,  and  I  will  soon  show  my  people  what  I  am 
about  to  do.     They  have  wanted  to  know  a  little  more  about  me, 
and  they  shall  soon  know  it. 

3.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — you  must  appoint  a 
clerk  to  record  all  the  property  of  my  people  which  they  may  con- 
secrate, and  let  that  matter  be  attended  to  in  a  proper  and  orderly 
manner.     And  when  my  servant  John  Banks  shall  have  received 
those  lists  from  my  people,  he  must  deliver  them  into  the  hands  of 
the  clerk  who  may  be  appointed  to  record  them,  and  see  that  they 
are  properly  recorded  ;  this  will  be  his  duty  from  this  time  hence- 


ANOTHER    PROMISE.  34! 

forth.     Therefore,    my  people  will   deliver  their  lists  of  property 
into  his  hands. 

4.  And    again,    I    say    unto    you, — my    people    must    have 
the   lists  of  all  their  property   which  they    intend    to  consecrate 
brought  in  to  my  servant  John  Banks  before  midday  to-morrow, 
at  the  furthest.     They  must  bring  them  in  to-night  if  they  possibly 
can. 

5.  And  behold,   I  say  unto  you, — my   people   must  not  run 
about  from  place  to  place;  but  they  must   hold    themselves    in 
readiness,  and  watch  for  me.     These  things  are  all  that  I  require 
of  my  people,  and  if  they  will  do  them,  I  will  do  my  duty  to  them. 
Let  them  hearken  unto  my  words,  and  diligently  obey  them,  and 
all  will  be  well.     I  am  the  Son  of  the  Eternal  Father ;  even  Jesus 
Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


ANOTHER     PROMISE. 


No.  190.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  3ist,  1861. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  say  unto  you,    my  son,   I   see  the  position   in 
which  you  are  placed  with  my  people.     They  cannot  get   ready  to 
meet    me   this    day    by    the    time   that    I    wanted    to    come.      I 
felt  satisfied   last  evening  that  my  people  could  not  get  everything 
ready  to  meet  me  this  morning,  and  I  shall  not  come  to-day.     Let 
all  my  people  settle  up  their  accounts  to-day,  and   prepare  them- 
selves for  a  visit  from  me  to-morrow  morning ;    and  if  they  will  do 
this,  I  will  surely  come  to-morrow  morning.     I   am   satisfied  that 
my  people  have  done  all  that  they  possibly  could  to  prepare  them- 
selves to  meet  me  to-day ;  but  they  have  not  been  able  to  make 
all  things  ready,  and,  on  that  account,  I  cannot   come  this  day. 
I  want  to  come  as  soon  as  my  people  will   prepare  themselves  to 
meet  me.     They  may  do  this  to-morrow, morning  without  hurry- 
ing themselves. 

2.  My  servants  must  show  unto  my  people  the   necessity  of 
fully  preparing  themselves  to-day  to  meet  me  to-morrow ;  for,  as  I 
live,  I  shall  come  to-morrow  if  my  people  are  prepared   to  meet 


342  THE  PROPHET'S  FAITH. 

me.  Therefore,  if  my  people  wish  to  see  me  on  that  day,  they 
can,  if  they  will  prepare  themselves  to  do  so.  If  they  do  not  see 
me  on  that  day,  it  will  be  entirely  their  own  fault.  If  they  do  not 
prepare  themselves,  they  will  have  to  see  me  whether  they  are 
ready  or  not.  I  shall  not  wait  for  them  more  than  another  day 
or  two.  My  people  now  know  my  mind ;  therefore,  if  they  wish 
to  see  me,  let  them  prepare  themselves  by  to-morrow.  I  am  the 
Lord  of  Hosts.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


THE    PROPHET    POSSESSES    GREAT    FAITH. 


No.  191.  WEBER,  UTAH,  December  3ist,  1861. 

1.  IT  is  hard  for  me,  my  son,  to  work  with  you,  for  I  have  to 
work  against  your  lack  of  faith  to  such  an  extent  in  some  things, 
and  in  other  things  you  have  an  abundance  of  faith.    You  have  an 
abundance  of  faith  in  the  theory  of  my  gospel.     I  have  no  trouble 
in  revealing  unto  you  the  revelations   of  my   will.     By  your  faith 
you  can   draw   a  revelation  from  me  at  any  time,  and  on  almost 
any  subject.     I  have  no  trouble  with  you  in  this  respect.     I  could 
not  give  unto  my  servant  Joseph  Smith  the  revelations  of  my  will 
as  easy  as  I  can  give  them  unto  you.     He  had  not  as  strong  faith 
in  that  respect  as  you  have.     It  was  hard  for  me  to  work  with  him 
on  that  account ;  for  he   had  not  sufficient  faith  to  draw  them. 
When  I  gave  unto  him  the  revelations  of  my  will,  I  had  to  do  it 
against  his  faith.     When  I  wanted  to  give  unto  him  a  revelation,  I 
had  to  force  it  upon  him.     He  had  no  faith  to  draw  it,  and,  on 
that  account,  I  did  not  give  unto  him  any  more  revelations  than  I 
could  possibly  help.     It  was  very  difficult  for  me  to  work  through 
him ;  but  with  you  it  is  to  the  contrary.     I  have  no  trouble  to  give 
unto  you  the  revelations  of  my  will.     I  cannot  hold  them  from  you. 
You  draw  them  from  me. by  your  faith,  and  it  is  pleasant  for  me 
to  give  them  unto  you.     You  have  great  faith  in  the  theory  of  my 
gospel ;  but  it  is  hard  for  you  to  exercise  faith  in  the  power  of  it, 
although  you  know  that  the  power  of  it  will  be  given. 

2.  When  I  come  unto  you,  I  shall  have  to  force  myself  upon 


THE  PROPHET'S  FAITH.  343 

you.  You  have  not  sufficient  faith  to  draw  me ;  consequently,  I 
shall  be  compelled  to  force  myself  upon  you.  I  wish  that  you 
could  draw  me ;  but  you  cannot.  You  know  that  I  have  to  come 
speedily  ;  and  thus  I  have  to  work  with  you  in  this  respect,  even 
against  faith,  and  it  is  hard  for  me  to  make  you  believe  that  I  arn 
coming  up  to  you  to  give  unto  you  the  power  of  your  office — even 
as  I  gave  unto  you  the  theory  of  the  fulness  of  my  gospel. 

3.  You  seem  to  work  against  me  in  relation  to  the  conferring 
of  power  upon  you.  If  you  could  draw  that  blessing  upon  you  by 
your  faith,  it  would  be  much  better  both  for  you  and  for  me ;  but 
it  seems  that  you  cannot.  I  shall  be  compelled  to  force  it  upon 
you,  and  I  shall  do  so  very  speedily.  I  am  very  sorry  that  it  is  so 
hard  for  you  to  exercise  faith  in  my  coming  to  endow  you  with 
power.  You  know  that  I  have  promised  it  unto  you,  and  you 
should  know  that  shall  fulfil  my  promise.  You  know  that  I  can- 
not fail.  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts ;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION  PROMISING  TO  PRESERVE  FAITHFUL 

THOSE    WHO    HAVE    HITHERTO 

BEEN  FAITHFUL. 


No.   192.  WEBER,  .UTAH,  January  ist,  1862. 

1.  Lo,  I  come,  and  all  nature  shall  feel  the  shock!     The  earth 
shall  reel,  and  men's  hearts  shall   fail  them !     The  cloud  is   now 
gathering  !     This  you   feel.     You  know  that  I  am  coming,  for  I 
have  given  unto  you  a  true  feeling,  and  you   shall   not  be   disap- 
pointed.    You  will  understand  my  movements,  for  I  will  not  hide 
anything  from  you. 

2.  My  people   are   unsettled  in  their  minds,  and  there  are  a 
number  of  them  who  wish  to  leave  this   place,  for  their  faith   is 
failing   them.     They    begin    to    think    I    never    intend  to   come. 
Others   of  my  people  wish  to  leave  this  place  for  a  few  days;  and 
my  people  in  general  wish  to  scatter.     What  shall  I  do  with  them  ? 
Shall  I  let  them  scatter?     I  know  that  they  want  both  food  to  eat, 


344  THE    FAITHFUL. 

and  wood  to  burn ;  and  I  know,  also,  that  they  cannot  hold 
together  more  than  a  few  days  longer.  I  know  all  about  their 
situation.  Their  faith  is  failing  them,  and  that  is  the  worst  of  all. 
But,  shall  I  suffer  any  of  my  people  who  have  been  faithful 
hitherto,  to  leave  me  now?  No,  I  shall  not.  I  will  hold  them  as 
with  an  iron  grasp.  I  will  stop  them.  There  are  those  among  my 
people  who  would  like  to  leave  this  place  to-morrow.  When  my 
people  are  about  to  scatter,  then  I  shall  come  and  stop  them,  and 
I  will  find  them  something  better  to  do  than  to  forsake  the  truth. 
As  I  have  gathered  them  together,  so  I  will  take  care  of  them;  but 
they  must  not  go  away  from  this  place.  Let  them  hearken  unto 
my  words,  and  obey  them,  and  I  will  take  care  of  them.  If  they 
go  away  they  may  be  caught.  I  can  scarcely  give  them  liberty  to 
£>e  absent  one  day^  although  I  know  that  many  of  them  are  nearly 
destitute  of  wood,  and  that  they  have  but  little  opportunity  to 
obtain  it ;  but  I  am  coming  to  their  deliverance. 

3.  How  soon  shall  I  come?  I  am  now  preparing  myself  to 
come.  But  you  say,  "I  thought  that  you  were  prepared?"  Mine 
army  of  warriors  are  with  me  upon  the  earth,  and  have  been  for 
many  days.  They  are  ready  to  receive  their  appointments ;  and  I 
am  now  stationing  them  throughout  this  Territory.  I  am  now 
appointing  the  different  generals  their  separate  work,  and  those 
generals  will  appoint  mine  angels  their  work.  I  have  the  names 
of  all  those  whom  I  intend  to  slay  the  first  time  of  cutting  off; 
and  those  generals  will  place  an  angel  by  the  side  of  each  of  those 
whose  names  are  recorded  for  destruction ;  and  when  I  shall  have 
set  those  warriors  in  order,  and  an  angel  shall  have  been  placed 
by  the  side  of  each  of  those  of  mine  enemies  whom  I  intend  to 
cut  off  this  time,  then  I  will  come  and  give  unto  you  your  rod; 
and  when  you  shall  have  given  your  command,  I  will  give  mine 
unto  the  generals  of  mine  army,  and  they,  theirs,  to  the  heavenly 
hosts ;  and  then  mine  angels  will  slay  mine  enemies  all  at  once. 
I  am  now  at  work  arranging  mine  army.  That  is  all  that  I  have 
to  do  before  I  come  unto  you ;  and  that  is  a  very  short  work  for 
me  to  do ;  and  when  I  shall  have  accomplised  it,  I  shall  come  to 
you,  as  I  have  said.  You  may,  therefore,  form  an  idea  as  to  how 
long  I  shall  be  before  I  am  with  you.  When  I  come,  I  shall  be 
very  likely  to  visit  you  the  first  thing  in  a  morning. 


PEOPLE    WILL    FORSAKE    PRINCIPLE.  345 

4.  My   people  ought  not  to  leave  this   place  on  any  account 
whatever.     Some  of  them   will   go  away  to  obtain  such  things  as 
they  think   they   need ;  but  it  is   not  safe  for  any  of  them  to  be 
absent  from  this  place  one  day.     I  have  now  told  my  people,  and 
they  can  please  themselves  as  to  what  they  do.     I  know  they  have- 
been  disappointed  before,  and  that  has  partially  broken  their  con- 
fidence in  me ;  but  if  they  will  do  as   I   have   commanded   them, 
they  will  be  benefitted   by  it ;  for   I  do  not  always  mean  to  disap- 
point them. 

5.  You  say,   my  son, — that  you  wish  that  something  would 
transpire  to  force  me  out  of  my  hiding  place  to  deliver  my  peo- 
ple ;  that  you  do  not  care  what  it  may  be,  for  you  think  that  I  shall 
never  come  to  my  people  until  I  am  compelled  to  do  so,  and  that 
I  will  not  come  of  my  own  free  will ;  but  I  can  assure  you  that  I 
shall.     What  can  I  say  more  unto  you  ?     I  will  accomplish  my 
work,  and  save  my  people,  if  they  will  obey  me.     I  am  the. Light 
and  Life  of  the  world ;  even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and 
Amen. 


REVELATION  SHOWING  THAT   PEOPLE   WILL   FOR- 
SAKE PRINCIPLE  IN  THEIR  ENDEAVORS 
TO  AVOID  TROUBLE. 


No.  193.  WEBER,  UTAH,  January  3rd,  1862. 

i.  I  WISH  to  speak  unto  you  again  concerning  those  people 
who  have  yielded  obedience  unto  the  fulness  of  my  gospel.  You 
are  afraid  that  I  shall  lead  you  into  trouble  by  deferring  their 
deliverance.  You  are  afraid  that  I  shall  weary  them  so  much  that 
they  cannot  endure  it,  and  thus  overpower  them  with  hardships 
until  their  spirits  are  broken  and  they  give  up ;  and  that  through 
too  many  hardships  they  will  be  led  to  give  up,  and  thus  deny  me, 
as  some  have  already  done  who  never  have  endured  anything. 
You  say  that  you  know  what  mortals  are.  You  say  that  if  I  over- 
burden them,  they  will  deny  either  me,  or  anything  else.  You  say 
that  they  will  bear  only  so  much,  and  if  you  place  any  more  than 


346  PEOPLE    WILL    FORSAKE    PRINCIPLE. 

that  upon  them,  that  they  will  turn  around  upon  me,  and  curse 
both  me  and  everything  else  that  proceeds  from  me.  You  know 
that  this  is  a  thing  which  mortals  are  guilty  of. 

2.  They  will  bring  themselves  into  trouble,  and  they  will  give 
way  and   deny  anything ;  yea,   even  the  sight  of  their  own  eyes. 
If  you  press  them  hard  enough  they  will  break  through  anything, 
regardless  of   principle.     They  do  not  study  principle  in  an  ex- 
tremity ;  but  they  study  how   to  avoid  trouble,  and  they  forsake 
principle.    They  can  see  nothing  else  but  getting  out  of  an  unpleas- 
ant position  the  best  way  that  they  can ;  that  is  all  that  they  care 
about  knowing  then.     They  do  not  look  at  the  consequence  that 
will  follow  the  course  which  they  take  when  they  forsake  principle ; 
and  thus  mortals  can  only  bear  so  much  before  they  will  give  up. 
But  there  are  some  that  will  bear  more  than  others.     All  people 
cannot  bear  the  same  amount  of  hardships  before  they  give  way. 
Some -will  give  way  sooner  than  others;  and  those  that  give  way  in 
the  least  difficulties  are  the  most  worthless.     The  purest  material 
will  endure  the  most,  because  there  is  the  least  dross  about  it.     I 
know  what  mortals  can  bear.     I  know  the  nature  of  them  all,  and 
I  know  how  much  I  can  lay  upon  them  before  they  will  entirely 
give  up  and  deny  everything ;  for  they  will  do  this  if  you  place  too 
much  upon  them. 

3.  When    I    have    gathered    a    people   together,  the    law    of 
heaven  compels  me  to  place  a  trial  upon  them  before  I  can  confer 
a  blessing  upon  them ;  and  in  placing  this  trial  upon  my  people, 
some  of  them  will  give  way  and  deny  me,  while  others  will  endure 
that   trial  without  much  difficulty ;  such  is  the  difference  in  the 
nature  of  people.     Some  will  not  endure  the  trial  which  merits  that 
promised  blessing,  and  consequently  they  cannot  receive  it.     No 
person  can  receive  a  blessing  at  mine  hands  without  they  endure 
the  trial  which  was  appointed  by  law  for  that  blessing.     There  is 
no  blessing  that  can  be  conferred  upon  Abraham's  seed  but  there 
is  a  trial  connected  with  it ;  and  before  a  people  can  be  permitted 
to  enjoy  the  blessing,  they  must  first  endure  the  trial  which   was 
appointed  for  that  blessing.     If  they  cannot  do  that,  they   never 
can  partake  of  the  blessing.     Before  a  people  can  enjoy  the  sweet, 
they  must  first  partake  of  the  bitter ;  and  when  they  have  earned  a 
blessing,  they  can  enjoy  it. 


A    TRIAL    BEFORE    THE    BLESSING.  347 

4.  And  now  I  am  placing  a  trial  upon  my  people  just  before 
I  give  unto  them  the  blessing.     Some  of  them  will  not  endure  it ; 
but  they  will  deny  me  altogether  on  account  of  a  slight  trial  which 
I  am  compelled  to  place  upon  them  before  I  can  deliver  them.     I 
do  not  wish  to  afflict  my  people  by  trying  them,  if  I   could   give_ 
unto  them  the  blessings    without  it;  but   I  cannot.     If  a  people 
must  have  one,  they  must  have  the  other.      Merit  and  reward  go 
hand  in  hand.     Where  you  find  one  you  find  the  other.     They  are 
based    upon    the    principle  of  justice,  which  is  an  unchangeable 
principle,  and  is  sustained  by  all  glorified  beings.     Therefore,  the 
faithful  of  my  people  will  know  my  situation,  and  they  will  not  think 
that  I  am  too  hard  on  them.     When  I  try  tham  according  to  the 
law  by  which  I  am  governed,  I  do  not  wish  to  be  any  harder  upon 
them  than   I   can  help.     I  do  not  delight  in  afflicting  those  who 
trust  in  me ;  hut  I  strive  to  make  their  burdens  as  light  as  I  possi- 
bly can.     I  have  done  all  that  I  possibly  could  for  my  people  as 
time  has  passed  along. 

5.  I  know  all  about  their  situation,  and  I  feel  for  them.     I  will 
release  them  in  time.     I   know  their  destitute  state  both  for  wood 
and   provisions.     I   will  deliver  them  before  they  are  called  on  to 
suffer  for  those  things  which  are  most  needed.     Many  of   my  peo- 
ple have  been  faithful,   and  I  will   not  lay  more  upon  them  than 
what  they  are  able  to  bear.     I  will  not  break  them  down  before  I 
come  to  deliver  them.     The  law  of  heaven  does  not  bind  me  to 
lay  a  burden  upon  my  people  which  they  are  unable  to  bear.      But 
there  are  those  among   my   people  who  are  unwilling  to  bear  the 
slightest  burden  and  endure  the  smallest  difficulty.     If  they  are 
called   upon  to  bear   with   the   least  inconvenience,  they  begin  to 
murmur  against  me,  and  charge  me  with  being  oppressive.     What 
are  such  people  good  for?     I  have   no  use  for  them.     They   are 
unworthy  to  merit  the   least  blessing.     I  suppose  that  they  think 
they    ought    to    have    blessings  without    meriting   them.       They 
feel  that  they  are  something  extra,  and  that  they  have  no   right  to 
be  tried. 

6.  All  those  who  receive  a  blessing  at   my  hands   must  abide 
the  trial  which  was  appointed  for  that  blessing.     None  can  escape 
the  justice  of  my  law.     Therefore,  my  son,  you  may  expect  to  see 
a  few  people  among  those  whom  I  have  gathered  together,  who 


348  ANXIOUS    TO    BE    DELIVERED. 

will  not  endure  that  trial  which  is  appointed  for  my  people  to  pass 
through  before  they  can  claim  the  blessing  which  lies  before  them. 
Many  of  my  people  will  endure  the  trial,  and  enjoy  the  blessing ; 
but  a  few  will  deny  me  and  fall,  and  be  destroyed  by  the  bright- 
ness of  my  coming,  and  lose  that  blessing  which  they  greatly 
desired  to  partake  of.  Therefore,  let  those  of  my  people  who 
wish  to  receive  the  blessing  endure  the  trial  valiantly,  and  they 
shall  receive  it ;  for  I  am  coming  to  give  unto  them  their  reward. 
I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  PEOPLE  ARE  ANXIOUSLY  AWAITING  A   MANI- 
FESTATION OF  THE  POWER  OF  GOD. 


No.    194.  WEBER,  UTAH,  January  3rd,  1862. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  say  unto  you,  my  servant  Joseph, — you  feel  dis- 
satisfied with  me  because  I  have  not  made   known  unto  you  the 
exact  time  of  my  coming.     You  desire  to  know  why  I  have  kept 
this  secret  from  you  up  to  this  time.     You  say  that  it  would  have 
saved  you  much  uneasiness  if  you  had   known   it.     You   say  that 
on  account  of  not  knowing  that  secret,  you  have  not  known  how  to 
counsel  my  people,  and  that  you  are  set  fast  with  them.     You  say 
that  you  do  not  know  what  to  do  with  them.     You   say  that   you 
feel  as  though  you  were  bound  with  them  ;  and  you   say  that  you 
should  be  well  pleased  with  me  if  I  would  give  you  liberty.     You 
say  that  you  can  do  no  more  for  them  than  what  you  have   done, 
and   you  now   wish  to   deliver  them  into  my  hands  to  see  what  I 
can  do  with  them.     You  say  that  they  are  very  restless,  and  it  is 
out  of  your  power  to  pacify  them.     You   say  that   nothing  but   a 
manifestation  of  my  power  will  satisfy  them. 

2.  But  I  can  assure  you  that  the  manifestation  of  my   power 
which  they  are  looking  for,  and  which  I  have  promised,  will  move 
some  of  them  out  of  the  way  when   it  comes.     I  am  greatly  sur- 
prised at  some  of  my  people.     If  they  saw  a  manifestation   of  my 
power,  and  were  permitted  to  live  through  it,  they  would  do  little 
or  no  good  afterwards ;  for  after  they  had  seen  it,  they  would  say 


THE    UNBELIEVING.  349 

that  it  was  of  the  devil,  and  not  by  the  power  of  God.  Those  who 
cannot  believe  in  the  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood,  and  in  the  reve- 
lations which  proceeds  from  my  mouth,  would  not  believe  that  it 
was  me  when  they  saw  me ;  but  they  would  say  that  I  was  the 
devil.  They  would  not  know  me  from  the  devil.  Those  people- 
who  do  not  believe  in  the  revelations  which  I  have  given,  deny  my 
power,  and  they  do  not  know  me.  What  claim  have  they  on  me 
to  deliver  them?  I  will  send  them  speedily  to  their  graves  when  I 
come. 

3.  Through  their  wickedness  they  force  min'e  holy  angels  far 
from   them,   and  they   cling  close   to  the   devils,  and  invite  their 
influence,  and  through  it  they  deny  the  truth.     What  have  they  to 
do  with  me?     I  have  had  enough  of  such  saints.     They  profess  to 
be  saints  and  act  like  devils !     They  cannot   believe  the  sight  of 
their  own  eyes.     What  can  I  do  with  people  who  deny  the  sight  of 
their  own  eyes,  as  some  of  those  people  do  who  profess  my  name? 
But  there  are  not  many  of  my  people  who  are  so  unbelieving  as  to 
deny   everything.     But   I  shall  slay  all  those  who  deny  the  revela- 
tions which  I  have  given.     A   ipanifestation   of  my  power  would 
not   benefit   them.     They   would   not  believe  that  it  was  from  me 
any  more  than  they  would  believe  that  the  revelations  which  I  have 
given  were  from  me.     That  spirit  that  will  deny  one,  will  deny  the 
other;  therefore,   such  do   not  believe  in   me;   they   are  infidels, 
and  will  deny  my  power,  and  defy  the  Holy  Ghost.     They  have 
committed   a  sin  which  is  unto  death,  and  there  is  no  forgiveness 
for  them  in  the  flesh  ;  and  I  shall  slay  them  when  I  come. 

4.  None   of  my  people  have   had   a  justifiable  cause  to  allow 
their  feelings  to  run  to  such  extremes  as   that, — even  to   deny  all 
that  I  have  revealed,  as  some  have  done.     But  my  people  may  say 
that  none  of  them  have"  done  that.     There  are  some  among  my 
people  who  have  done  this  in  their  feelings.     They  have   denied 
me  altogether,  and  I  have'  cursed  them,  and  if  they  were  permitted 
to  live  upon  the  earth,  their  flesh  would  consume  away  upon  their 
bones,  and  their  eyes  would  drop   out  of   their  sockets.     If  they 
were   permitted   to   live   upon  the   earth,   they   would  never  have 
another  day's  happiness ;  and  when  they  died,  they  would  die  such 
a  death  as  I  have  before  described.     The  Holy  Ghost  will  never 
operate   upon  them  again  while  they  are  in  mortality.     But  as  I 


350  THE    UNBELIEVING. 

have  said  unto  you  before, — I,  will  put  an  end  to  their  existence 
when  I  come,  and  I  will  set  a  mark  upon  them  in  order  that  the 
rest  of  my  people  may  know  them  and  shun  their  company  dur- 
ing the  time  that  they  are  permitted  to  live.  Those  of  my  people 
who  are  led  by  the  Holy  Ghost  will  know  them  when  they  see 
them,  for  I  will  show  them  unto  the  faithful  of  my  people ;  but 
they  will  not  hurt  any  of  my  people  with  their"  evil  spirits,  which 
lead  them,  while  they  are  permitted  to  live  among  them. 

5.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — you  wish  to  know 
when  I  am  about  to  come.  I  have  never  been  able  to  tell  you 
this  exactly.  I  cannot  tell  this  so  long  before  the  time;  and 
because  I  have  had  so  many  difficult  circumstances  to  meet  with 
which  have  baffled  me.  But  I  can  tell  you  as  near  as  a  day  before, 
or  may  be  a  little  nearer.  When  I  get  within  a  day  of  the  time  of 
my  coming,  then  I  can  tell  you,  and  very  likely  I  may  do  so.  I 
do  not  want  to  promise  you  that  too  positively ;  but  I  will  do  all 
that  I  can  to  satisfy  and  encourage  you.  This  much  I  can  tell 
you,  that  my  coming  is  very  near.  You  know  your  own  feelings 
in  relation  to  my  coming.  It  is  as  near  as  you  feel  that  it  is.  You 
know  that  I  have  never  suffered  you  to  be  deceived  in  your  feel- 
ings. Your  feelings  are  correct ;  follow  them,  and  counsel  my 
people  according  to  them.  If  you  will  always  do  this,  you  will 
counsel  them  aright ;  for  I  will  influence  you  aright.  And  if  you 
follow  your  impressions,  you  will  never  go  astray.  I  am  the  Lord 
Hosts ;  and  lo,  I  come  quickly.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    CONCERNING    THOSE     PEOPLE   WHO 
WERE  ACTUATED  BY  HYPOCRISY   AND  CON- 
SECRATED PROPERTY  UNWILLINGLY. 


No.  195.  WEBER,  UTAH,  January  6th,  1862. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — tm's,  my  people,  have 
consecrated  their  property  according  to  my  commandment,  and  I 
may  try  the  sincerity  of  some  of  those  who  have  consecrated  their 
property  unto  me ;  and  if  1  prove  them  dishonest,  I  shall  withdraw 


UNWILLING    TO    CONSECRATE.  351 

my  holy  spirit  from  them, '  and  I  shall  destroy  them  for  their 
hypocrisy  and  wickedness.  There  are  many  of  my  people  who 
consecrated  their  property  with  all  their  hearts,  and  they  would 
give  it  up  at  any  time  when  it  was  called  for,  and  their  hearts  are 
right  before.  But  there  are  others  of  whom  I  am  jealous,  whom  I 
intend  to  try ;  and  if  they  resist  me  after  they  have  delivered  them- 
selves and  all  that  they  had  into  my  hands  for  my  disposal,  then 
I  shall  withdraw  my  spirit  from  them,  and  destroy  them  in  the 
flesh ;  for  I  am  the  Lord,  and  I  rule  in  heaven  above,  and  upon 
the  earth  beneath;  and  who  can  stay  my  hand?  I  speak  the 
word,  and  it  shall  be  obeyed.  I  regard  not  the  persons  of  men, 
only  according  to  their  obedience  to  me.  I  will  accept  of  none 
but  the  whole-hearted.  If  any  person  loves  their  earthly  substance 
more  than  they  love  my  gospel,  they  shall  not  enjoy  it.  I  will  not 
accept  of  idolatrous  people.  If  the  principles  of  my  gospel  are 
not  worth  all  that  a  man  possesses,  he  cannot  have  them ;  for  it 
will  take  all  that  he  possesses  to  purchase  them.  If  a  person  can- 
not give  up  all  their  worldly  substance,  it  proves  that  he  loves  his 
worldly  possessions  best ;  and  where  a  man's  heart  is,  there  his 
treasure  is  also;  and  that  person  who  worships  his  worldly  sub- 
stance, and  not  me,  is  an  idolater,  and  he  cannot  be  a  member  of 
my  Church ;  for  no  idolater  can  enter  into  my  kingdom.  My  laws 
cannot  be  broken. 

2.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — you  are  displeased 
with  me  for  giving  this  people  the  power  over  you.  You  say  that 
you  cannot  do  anything  with  them.  You  say  that  they  will  only  do 
what  they  feel  disposed  to  do,  and  that  you  cannot  help  yourself; 
and  you  desire  to  know  what  you  are  to  do  with  my  people  if, 
when  you  give  unto  them  a  commandment,  which  has  come  from 
my  mouth,  they  will  not  obey  it.  You  must  deliver  them  into  my 
hands,  and  I  will  destroy  them  if  they  will  not  obey  my  command- 
ments which  I  give  unto  them  through  you.  You  need  not  to  put 
yourself  to  the  least  trouble,  but  deliver  them  into  my  hands,  and 
I  will  move  them  out  of  your  way  at  once ;  for  I  am  coming  to 
settle  all  disputes  with  all  parties  among  my  people  here  and 
throughout  this  Territory.  It  is  hard  to  make  my  people  under- 
stand me.  O  how  some  of  them  love  the  things  of  this  world 
which  are  perishable.  If  they  would  obey  me,  I  would  give  unto 


352  JUDGMENT    UPON    TRAITORS. 

them  never  failing  riches  and  life  everlasting;  but  they  strain  at  a 
gnat  and  swallow  a  camel.  They  will  strain  and  stumble  over  one 
of  the  simple  laws  of  my  kingdom ;  and,  on  the  other  hand,  they 
will  swallow  the  devil  and  all  his  works  without  the  least  difficulty. 
What  can  I  do  with  such  a  generation  of  people?  They  are  un- 
worthy of  the  least  of  my  blessings. 

3.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — your  feelings  are 
greatly  agitated  when  you  behold  those  traitors  who  have  forsaken 
me  and  who  are  now  my  most  bitter  enemies.  I  will  promise  you 
this,  that  they  shall  not  live  upon  the  earth  more  than  a  few  days. 
I  will  move  them  out  of  the  way  when  I  come ;  for  I  despise 
them  as  much  as  you  do.  I  know  that  you  have  been  afflicted  in 
your  feelings  every  time  that  you  have  seen  them.  They  have 
been  proud  of  their  abominations,  and  have  mocked  me  day  by 
day.  I  will  lay  everyone  of  them  low  when  I  come.  As  I  live, 
I  will  not  spare  the  life  of  one  of  them ;  for  they  will  be  smitten 
from  the  earth.  I  can  assure  you  that  I  am  coming  unto  you 
fully  as  soon  as  you  expect  to  see  me.  You  know  your  present 
feelings.  You  may  depend  that  my  coming  is  close  upon  you. 
Prepare  for  me,  for  I  am  coming  as  a  whirlwind.  I  am  Jesus 
Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    SHOWING    THAT    ALL    PEOPLE   WHO 
ARE  HEIRS  OF  SALVATION  MUST  ABIDE 
THE  ETERNAL  LAW  OF  CON- 
SECRATION. 


No.  196.  WEBER,  UTAH,  January  yth,  1862. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — you  feel  to  ask  me  what 
I  am  doing.  You  wish  to  know  what  I  am  waiting  for.  You 
wish  to  know  whether  I  am  waiting  for  another  mob  to  rise  up  and 
come  up  against  my  people.  You  say  that  if  I  am  waiting  for 
this,  you  should  like  to  know  it ;  for  you  say  that  there  is  some- 
thing about  me  which  you  do  not  fully  understand ;  and  that  you 
would  like  to  understand  my  movements  more  fully  than  what  you 


CONSECRATION.  353 

have  hitherto  done.  You  say  that  you  are  weary.  You  do  not 
want  to  wait  any  longer  for  me ;  and  you  say  that  if  I  would  come, 
it  would  greatly  relieve  you. 

2.  What  shall  I  say  unto  you  concerning  these  thiqgs?     I  can 
assure   you  that   I   am  not   waiting  for  another  mob   to  rise  up_ 
Mine   enemies  have   done   all  that   I   require  of  them  to  warrant 
their  utter  destruction  in  the  flesh.     Then  what   am  I  waiting  for? 
"Are  you  waiting  for  your  people,  or  are  you  not  ready?     Answer 
me  this  question,  and  it  will  set  my  feelings  at  rest."     I   am   wait- 
ing   for    my    people.     I    called    upon    them    to    consecrate   their 
property,  and  they  did  so;  and  now  I  wish  to  try  the  honesty  of. a 
few  of  my  people  of  whom  I  am  jealous ;  and  if  they  deliver  up 
with  all  their  hearts,  I  have  nothing  more  to   wait    for.     I  want   a 
perfect  giving  up  by  all  my  people  who  expect  to  be  delivered;  and 
it  must  not  be  given  grudgingly,  but  with  free  and  generous  hearts ; 
and  those  who  cannot  do  this,  I  wish  them  to  withdraw   from  the 
rest  of  my  people  as  soon  as  they   can ;  for  as   soon   as   they  will 
have  withdrawn   from  among   my   people,   I  will  come.     This  is 
what  I  am  now  waiting  for.     If  there  be  none  in  the  midst  of  my 
people  but  those   who  are  willing  to  offer  up  with  all  their  hearts, 
the  sooner  that  they  manifest  their  complete  devotion,   the  better; 
for  I  will  come  as  soon  as  they  have  done  this. 

3.  They  are  holding  me  from  delivering  the  faithful  of  my  peo- 
ple.    I  want  all  things  right  with  my  people  before  I  deliver  them. 
The  law  by  which  I  am  governed   compels  me  to  have  all  things 
right  with  my  people  before  I  can  release  them.     If  all  my  people 
(so  called)  will  not  offer  up,  they  are  not  all  of  one  faith ;  they  are 
not  all  one  in  me,  and  consequently  they  are  not   mine,   and   can- 
not lay  any  just  claim  on  me  in  mortality.     Those    of  my  people 
who  will  offer  up  with  all  their  hearts,  according  to  my  law,  have  a 
claim  upon  me  to  deliver  them  and  to  fight  their  battles ;  for  they 
have  honored  that  eternal  law  of  consecration,  which  law  cannot 
be  broken,  for  it  is  an  eternal  law;  and  those   of  my  people  who 
abide  that  law  become  one  in  me,  as  I  am  one   with   my   Father. 
Without  an   obedience  to  that   law,   a  people  can  never  become 
one. 

4.  This  law  is  upheld  by  all  Gods ;  and  without  an  obedience 
unto  it,  no  person  can  obtain  eternal  life.     It  is  the  gateway  into 


354  CONSECRATION. 

celestial  glory ;  all  angels  are  regulated  by  that  law ;  upon  it  all 
true  happiness  hangs ;  all  glorified  beings  are  held  together,  and 
are  governed  by  it ;  it  is  the  great  law  of  heaven ;  upon  it  all  other 
laws  are  based ;  it  is  a  celestial  law,  and  my  people  will  have  to 
abide  it  under  the  fulness  of  the  holy  priesthood.  Some  portion 
of  the  celestial  law  will  be  kept  by  mortals,  and  some  portion  of  it 
will  not.  The  celestial  law  regulates  all  things  upon  a  celestial 
earth,  and  there  are  some  portions  of  a  celestial  law  which  mortals 
can  abide,  and  other  portions  that  they  cannot,  and  the  portion 
which  mortals  can  abide,  they  will  be  compelled  to.  My  people 
need  not  think  that  they  can  stand  against  it,  for  they  cannot ;  for 
there  is  not  a  God  who  rules  on  high  that  does  not  sustain  it. 
My  people  cannot  evade  it,  no  matter  what  they  do.  They  will 
have  to  abide  it  or  be  slain.  There  is  not  a  person  now  living 
upon  the  earth,  nor  ever  will  live  upon  it,  but  what  will  either  have 
to  abide  that  law  or  perish.  None  can  ever  break  it  and  live. 
As  it  reaches  one  nation  of  people  after  another,  and  they  reject 
it,  they  will  be  swept  off  from  the  earth  until  it  has  conquered  all 
things  and  brought  all  mine  enemies  under  my  feet ;  and  those 
who  oppose  it,  are  not  my  friends,  nor  friends  to  the  principles  of 
righteousness  ;  and  I  shall  treat  them  as  I  do  fallen  spirits.  I 
shall  move  them  off  the  earth  as  they  cross  my  pathway.  My 
people  should  know  that -they  will  either  have  to  obey  that  law  or 
perish ;  and  if  there  is  one  person  among  my  people  who  will  not 
abide  that  law,  I  will  slay  him,  and  I  will  give  his  property  to  the 
poor. 

5.  I  will  make  all  people,  either  living  or  dead,  consecrate 
their  property  as  I  come  in  contact  with  them.  This  law  has  to 
be  kept  by  the  children  of  men,  or  else  they  will  have  to  perish ; 
it  is  either  one  or  the  other  with  them.  Therefore,  I  want  all  my 
people  to  show  themselves  as  they  are.  If  they  will  not  give  up 
with  all  therr  hearts  and  abide  this  law,  let  them  come  out  against 
it,  and  separate  themselves  from  the  rest  of  my  people  who  will 
abide  it,  and  when  they  have  done  this,  if  there  should  be  any 
opposed  to  it,  I  will  come  and  deliver  the  rest ;  and  if  there  be 
none  opposed  to  it,  let  my  people  all  give  up  at  once,  for  there  are 
a  few  of  my  people  who  have  held  back,  and  I  am  waiting  to  see 
what  conclusion  they  will  come  to.  Therefore,  let  all  my  people 


THE    PEOPLE    DESIRE    A    GREATER    MANIFESTATION.  355 

clear  the  way  for  me.    They  know  my  will;  for  lo,  I  come  quickly. 
I   am  the  Stone  and  Shepherd  of  Israel,   and   the  Bright  and 
Morning  Star;  even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION     DESCRIBING     THE     AMOUNT     OF 

TESTIMONY    GIVEN    TO    GOD'S    PEOPLE 

CONCERNING    HIS   WORK. 


No.  197.  WEBER,  UTAH,  January  8th,  1862. 

1.  BEHOLD,    I  say    unto  you,   my    servant    Joseph, — I  made 
unto  you  a  promise  that  I  would  deliver  my  people  in   time ;   that 
I  would  not  let  them  suffer  either  for  wood  or  provisions,  and  you 
shall  see  that  I  will  fulfil   my  promise   to  your  satisfaction.     You 
may  now  safely  begin  to  prepare  for  me.     You  know  what  prepar- 
ations will  be  necessary  for  such  an  event  as   the  one   which  lies 
before  you,  for  I   have  told  you  often  enough.     I  have  been  feel- 
ing after  a  few  of  my  people,  and  nearly  all,  if  not  all  of  them,  will 
come  to  my  terms  ;  but  if  there  should  be  a  few  who  will  not   do 
so,  they  must  not  be  suffered  to  come  into  the  rank  when  my  peo- 
ple shall  be  gathered  together  to  meet   me ;    none  shall  be  per- 
mitted to  stand  there  but  those  who  have  consecrated  according  to 
my  appointment.     I  know  that   my   people  think  it   is   hard   for 
them,  considering  the   amount  of  testimony  which   I   have  given 
unto  them,  to  entirely  give  up  unto  me.     I  desire  to  reason  with 
them  upon  that  matter.     They  think  that   I  have  not  given   unto 
them  a  sufficient  evidence  that  I  have  commenced  a  work,  or  that 
I  am  leading  them.     They  say  that  they  have  never,  as  yet,  seen 
me  nor  any  of  my  holy  angels;  neither  have  they  seen  a  manifesta- 
tion of  my  power,  and  that,  notwithstanding  this,  I  call  upon  them 
to  make  a  full  and  complete  sacrifice   of  all  that   they  haVe   unto 
me.     They  cannot  understand  it.      They  say  that,  considering  the 
limited  amount    of  knowledge    which  they   have    received,    it    is 
almost  too  much  for  them  to  subscribe  to. 

2.  My  people  all  know  that  I  am  at  work,  and  that  I  have  com- 
menced to  organize  my  Church  in  their  midst ;  that  they  have  felt 


356  CONCERNING  THE  PROPHET. 

the  operations  of  my  holy  angels  upon  them  many  times ;  that  my 
spirit  bears  testimony  to  the  words  of  my  servant,  the  prophet,  and 
to  the  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood  which  he  has  brought  to  the 
earth.  They  know  that  he  has  opened  the  heavens,  and  revealed 
unto  them  the  rounds  of  eternity — even  all  the  heights  above,  and 
depths  below;  that  he  has  made  known  unto  them  the  nature  of 
all  things  both  in  heaven  and  upon  the  earth,  and  also  their  own 
origin  and  destiny.  They  know  very  well  that  all  mysteries  have 
been  solved  by  him ;  that  he  has  progressed  far  beyond  their 
limited  knowledge  and  comprehension ;  that  his  wisdom  cannot 
be  approached  by  mortal  men ;  he  leaves  them  all  in  the  shade ; 
they  are  fools  compared  to  him.  His  wisdom  circumscribes  all 
the  world,  and  will,  shortly,  circumscribe  all  eternity.  All  former 
prophets  fall  into  the  shade  when  compared  to  him.  He  makes 
clear  to  the  human  mind  all  the  dark  mysteries  which  they  have 
introduced  into  the  world,  over  which  thousands  have  stumbled. 
Nothing  comes  amiss  to  him.  He  is  the  master  of  the  whole 
world. 

3.  My  people,  if  they  know  anything  at  all,  know  that  what  I 
have  said  is  true.     They  are  all   living  witnesses  to  it.     Have  they 
no  testimony  of  me  and  of  my  truth?     It  is  now  several  thousand 
years  since  any  people  had  so  great  a  testimony  as  these  few  peo- 
ple who  have  yielded  obedience  to  the  fulness  of  my  gospel  have. 
Hundreds  and  thousands  of  people  have  sought   to   serve  me  to 
the  best  of  their  abilities,  and  have  laid   down  their  lives  for  the 
little  truth  which  they  thought  they  had   received ;   but  the   little 
truth  which  they  received  bears  no  comparison  to  the  light  which 
these,    my  people,   have   received.      They  endured  by  faith,  and 
have  never,  as  yet,  received  the  object  for  which  they  suffered  and 
died ;    yet  it  appears  too  much  for   some  of  my  people  even   to 
consecrate  the  little  property   they   have  just   before  they   receive 
that  blessing  for  which  so  many  thousands  have  suffered  and  died 
without  obtaining. 

4.  Some  of  my   people  whom   I   have   gathered  together  are 
unwilling  to  put  themselves  to  the  least  inconvenience  by  striving 
to  bring  about  that  promised  blessing.    I  have  not  called  upon  any 
of  them  to  sacrifice  their  lives.      I  have  only  called  upon  them  to 
consecrate  their  property  in   obedience  to  the  law  of  heaven,  and 


COMMANDED    TO    REMAIN.  357 

my  people  must  either  do  so,  and  deliver  themselves  into  my  hands, 
or  they  can  never  be  saved.  Therefore,  those  of  my  people  who 
will  not  consecrate  their  property,  if  there  be  any  such,  will  have 
to  consecrate  their  lives ;  for  I  shall  take  them,,  and  then  their 
property  will  do  them  no  good.  They  will  lose  both  their  liv^s 
and  their  property  at  once !  Therefore,  let  all  those  of  my  people 
who  wish  to  save  their  lives  and  prosper  upon  the  earth,  obey  my 
commandments,  and  they  shall  so.  I  am  the  Lord,  and  I  will 
uphold  then.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


THE    LORD    COMMANDS   THOSE    MEN    WHO    HAVE 

WIVES  AND  CHILDREN  ABSENT,  TO  REMAIN 

AT    THE    GATHERING    PLACE. 

No.    198.  WEBER,  UTAH,  January   loth,    1862. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — I  see  the  true  position 
of  my  people.  There  are  quite  a  number  of  men  here  who  have 
yielded  obedience  unto  the  fulness  of  my  gospel,  who  are  laboring 
under  great  disadvantages  in  consequence  of  the  absence  of  their 
families.  They  are  put  to  much  inconvenience  in  almost  every 
respect.  They  feel  very  much  for  their  families  who  are  absent 
from  them,  whom  they  would  like  that  I  should  take  care  of,  and 
whose  lives  they  would  like  that  I  should  save  when  my  overflow- 
ing scourge  passes  through  this  Territory.  I  know  the  feelings  of 
those  men  towards  their  wives  and  children,  and  I  will  make  unto 
them  a  promise  that,  inasmuch  as  their  wives  and  children  are  one 
with  them,  and  with  my  work,  and  will  not  fight  against  it,  I  will 
preserve  their  lives,  and  bring  them  into  the  fulness  of  my  gospel, 
and  my  servants  shall  enjoy  the  society  of  their  wives  and  children 
again.  My  servants  need  not  to  trouble  themselves  on  account  of 
their  families,  for  I  will  take  care  of  them  inasmuch  as  they  are 
worthy ;  but  if  there  are  any  of  my  servants  who  have  wives  and 
children  absent  from  this  place,  who  are  not  one  with  them,  but 
who  are  mine  enemies,  who  are  fighting  against  the  truth,  who 
have  time  after  time  resisted  the-  promptings  of  my  holy  angels, 


358  THE    WORTHY    WILL    BE    PROTECTED. 

I 

and  have  utterly  refused  to  be  led  by  them,  and  still  continue  to 
do  so, — such  I  shall  destroy  *\vhen  I  come ;  for  their  names  are 
recorded  for  destruction. 

2.  I  have  sent  my  holy  angels  to  operate  upon  every  person  in 
this  Territory   who  is   an   heir  to   the  resurrection,  and  they  have 
striven   with   them,   and   some  of  them   have   given  way   to  their 
operations,    and   mine  holy  angels  are  now  leading  and  watching 
over  them,  and    they  feel,  to  a  certain  extent,  as  these  my  people 
do.     They   are  longing   for  a  day  of  deliverance  to  come — they 
feel  as  though   they  were  in  bondage — even  as  those  of  my  people 
do  who  have  yielded  obedience  to  the   fulness  of  my  gospel ;  but 
they  do  not  understand  my  plans  as  well  as  these,  my  people,  do ; 
but   I  have   broken  them  loose   from  the  grasp  of  the  devil,  and 
when  I  break  the  bonds  which  now  bind  them,  I  shall  be  able  to 
turn  them  entirely  unto  me.     This  I  shall  do  directly.     Therefore, 
I  shall  save  the  lives  of  that  class  of  people.     Their  names  are  all 
recorded  for  salvation,  and  I  shall  take  good  care  of  them. 

3.  But  there  are  others  in  the  old  Church  who  are  heirs  to  the 
resurrection,  who  have  resisted  the  operations  of  my  spirit.     I  sent 
my  holy  angels  to  operate  upon  them,  and  after  they  had  labored 
with  them  for  a  time,  and  could  not   turn  them  to   righteousness, 
they  wrote  down  all  their  names,  and  handed  them  to  me ;  those  I 
shall   destroy.     I   am  compelled  either  to  turn  a  people  to  me,  or 
destroy  them  ;  therefore,   when  I  come,  I  shall  utterly  destroy  all 
those  heirs  of  salvation  whom  I  could  not  turn  unto  me. 

4.  There  is,   also,   another  class  of  people  in  the  old  Church 
unto  whom  I  never  sent  my  holy  angels,  in  order  to  lead  them  to 
salvation.     They  have  no  claim  on  me.     They  are  influenced  by 
the  devil  and  his  angels,  and  their  names  are  all  down  for  destruc- 
tion.    The  first  slaughter  which  I  shall  make  in  this  Territory  will 
not  .leave   many  of  them  alive.      I   shall  be  hard  on  that  class  of 
people,  for  they  are  fallen  spirits.     They  have  deceived  the  rest  of 
the  people,  and  led  many  of  them  to  destruction.     I  have  now  in 
my  possession  the  names  of  all  those  of  all  classes  whom  I  intend 
to  destroy.     Therefore,  my  way  is  perfectly  clear  before  me,  and  I 
am  coming  speedily.     I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts. 

5.  And  behold,    I   speak   unto  you  again  concerning  those  of 
my  servants  whose  families  are  absent  from  this  place.     Let  them 


THE    WORTHY    WILL    BE'  PROTECTED.  359 

make  themselves  contented  concerning  their  families ;  for  I  will 
take  care  of  as  many  of  them  as  are  worthy,  and  those  of  them 
who  are  not  worthy  I  shall  destroy.  •  If  my  servants  were  with 
their  families,  and  their  families  wer£  not  worthy  to  live,  they  could 
not  save  their  lives.  Nothing  can  be  done  to  help  those  who  are 
condemned  to  die;  neither  can  anything  be  done  to  injure  those 
whose  'names  are  down  for  salvation  and  deliverance.  All  are  in 
my  hands,  and  I  will  give  unto  them  their  rights. 

6.  And  let  those  of  my  servants,  of  whom  I  have  spoken,  trust 
in  me,  and  be  contented  as  they  are.  They  must  not  go  to  their 
families  now;  but  they  must  remain  where  they  are  until  I  shall 
have  delivered  my  people,  and  then  they  can  have  those  of  their 
wives  and  children  who  shall  be  left  alive,  again.  All  things  will 
be  right  with  the  faithful  of  my  people.  I  am  the  Lord,  and  I  am 
coming  speedily.  My  people  will  not  have  time  now  to  go  any 
great  distance  to  see  their  families,  and  to  return ;  for  I  am  just 
upon  the  point  of  coming  to  my  people ;  therefore,  let  them  stay 
in  this  place,  and  keep  themselves  as  clean  as  possible ;  for  I,  the 
Lord  of  Hosts,  am  coming  to  their  deliverance.  Even  so.  Amen 
and  Amen. 


REVELATION    IN   WHICH    THE    LORD    REFUSES  TO 
MAKE  ANY  ADDITIONAL  PROMISE  CONCERN- 
ING THE  TIME  OF  HIS  COMING. 


No.  199.  WEBER,  UTAH,  January  nth,  1862.' 

i.  WHAT  can  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  to  satisfy  you?  I  can 
see  that  you  are  oppressed  in  your  feelings  until  you  scarcely  know 
how  to  endure  it.  You  see  that,  for  some  cause  or  other  which 
you  do  not  fully  understand,  I  continue  to  defer  the  deliverance 
of  my  people  day  after  day,  and,  on  this  account,  you  are  in  great 
trouble.  If  you  understood  the  cause  of  it,  you  would  be*  perfectly 
satisfied ;  but  you  do  not.  You  say  that  you  do  not  know  how 
long  I  intend  to  baffle  my  people,  as  I  have  baffled  them  for  the 
last  few  weeks;  but  that  you  would  like  to  know;  that  in  conse- 


360  ADDITIONAL    PROMISES    UNNECESSARY. 

qrence  of  ray  people  being  baffled  by  me  so  much,  you  do  not 
know  how  to  understand  me ;  and,  on  *that  account,  you  do  not 
know  how  to  prepare  yourself  to  meet  me,  neither  do  you  know 
when  to  look  for  me.  You  s^.y  that  you  want  something  positive 
from  me,  which  both  you  and  my  people  would  be  able  to  depend 
upon ;  that  if  I  do  not  give  it  unto  you,  that  neither  you  nor  my 
people  will  know  when  to  look  for  me,  and  that  you  wilf  all  be 
taken  unawares,  and,  consequently,  be  found  altogether  unpre- 
pared -to  meet  me. 

2.  Should  such  be  the  case,  you  think  that  I,  and  not  my  peo- 
ple,  ought  to   bear  the   blame;  for  you  say  that  my  people  have 
already  prepared  themselves  once  or  twice  to  meet  me,  and  I  dis- 
appointed  them.     Therefore,   they  do  not  know  when  to  look  for 
me  unless  I  give  unto  them  a  positive  statement  with  regard  to  the 
time  of  my  coming,  and,  even  if  I  should  do  that,  you  say  that  my 
people  would  not  place  confidence  in  what  I  should  say ;  that  they 
would  expect  to  be  disappointed,   as  they  were   before;  that  they 
would  not  believe   in  another  promise,   should  I  make  one  unto 
them ;  that   it   is  of  no  use  whatever  for  me  to  make  any  more 
promises    unto   them    until    I  shall  have  fulfilled  those  promises 
which   I   have  already  made,   and  that  to  do  so,  is  my  next  duty 
unto  my  people.     You  also  say  that,  inasmuch  as  I  have  promised 
to  come  and  deliver  my  people,  I  shall  do  it ;  and  such  being  the 
case,  you  wish  to  know  how  my  people  can  prepare  themselves  to 
meet  me  when    they  do  not  know  the   time   of  my   coming;  that 
under  such  circumstances,   you   can  see  no  other  chance  for  me, 
than  to  come  upon  them  unawares ;  for  you  say  that  they  will  not 
be.lieve    another    promise    on    that    subject  on  any   consideration 
whatever.     Therefore,  you  wish  to  know  what  course  I  am  about 
to  take  with  them,  in  order  to  give  unto  them  a  true  knowledge  of 
the  time  of  my  coming. 

3.  I  told  my  people,  some  time  ago,  to  keep  themselves  neat 
^and   clean,   and   to   watch  for  me  until  I  come,  and  all  those  who 

have  observed  that  commandment,  and  will  continue  to  do  so,  will 
not  be  taken  unawares ;  but  those  of  my  people  who  have  not  kept 
that  commandment  will  be  taken  unawares.  If  my  people  are 
wise,  a- hint  unto  them  is  sufficient. 

4.  The  hour  of  my  coming  is  nearer  than  many  of  my  people 


HYPOCRITES.  361 

suppose  that  it  is.  I  shall  not  tell  my  people  to  prepare  for  me 
any  more.  I  have  once  told  them  how  to  prepare  themselves  to 
meet  me.  1  shall  come  as  a  thief  in  the  night  upon  some  of  them, 
and  I  shall  catch  them  going  to  sleep ;  for  when  some  of  my  peo- 
ple little  expect  me,  lo,  I  come. 

5.  Some  of  my  people  are  already  beginning  to  think  that  1 
am  delaying  my  coming,  and  their  faith  is  beginning  to  fail  them. 
It  is  time  for  such  to  begin  to  look  out  for  me,  for  I  am  cording 
to  awaken  them.  My  people  being  in  such  a  condition  is  one  sign 
of  my  coming.  I  shall  come  when  the  faithless  least  expect  me, 
I  shall  come  as  a  thief  in  the  night  upon  the  blind  and  rebellious^ 
and  I  fear  that  there  are  a  few  of  that  kind  among  my  people, 
They  will  be  caught  in  a  snare ;  but  the  wise  and  obedient  will  not 
be  caught  in  a  snare.  They  will  look  for  me  at  the  right  time, 
and  they  .will  not  be  disappointed,  for  my  spirit  shall  guide  them 
aright ;  but  it  will  guide  none  but  them.  My  spirit  will  remain 
with  the  faithful,  and  lead  them  into  all  truth,  I  shall  deliver 
them,  and  none  else.  I  shall  not  come  upon  them  as  a  thief  in 
the  night ;  for  they  will  understand.  They  are  my  friends,  and 
will  not  be  deceived ;  for  I  am  their  Shepherd  and  Defense  for- 
ever; even  the  Lord  of  Hosts.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen, 


REVELATION  CONCERNING  HYPOCRITES. 


No.  200.  WEBER,  UTAH,  January  nth,  1862. 

i.  I  HAVE  heard  your  prayer,  my  son,  and  I  am  come  to 
answer  it.  You  greatly  desire  to  know  of  me  the  reason  why  I 
delay  so  long  the  deliverance  of  my  people.  I  will  make  it  known 
unto  you.  I  will  make  known  unto  you  the  true  situation  in  which 
I  am  placed,  as  regards  my  people.  The  law  of  heaven  compels 
me  to  enforce  the  law  of  consecration  upon  them,  and  deliver 
those  who  will  abide  it,  and  none  else.  I  called  upon  all  those  of 
my  people  who  were  willing  to  abide  that  law  to  consecrate  their 
property ;  and  nearly  all  of  them,  if  not  entirely  all,  came  forth, 
gave  in  their  names,  and  stated  the  amount  of  property  which  they 
had ;  and  they  signified,  both  by  vote  and  by  deeding  their 


362  HYPOCRITES. 

property  over  to  me,  when  called  upon  to  do  so,  that  they  would 
abide  that  law.  But  when  I  sent  my  servant  unto  some  of  them, 
they  would  not  give  up  to  him  any  portion  of  their  property. 

2.  But  behold,   I  say  unto  you,  O  ye  hypocrites !  I  will  have 
your  property,  and  your  lives,  also  !     Ye  cannot  mock  me !     I  did 
not    want    you    to  vote,   neither    to  come    and    deed    over   your 
property  to   me  if  you  did  not   intend  to  give  it   up  when   my 
steward  called  for  it. 

3.  There  are  hypocrites  among  my  people  who  are  worthy  of 
death,   and  they  will  have  their  reward ;  for   I  will  give  it  unto 
them.     They  show  how  much  they  love  my  work.     They  place  a 
greater  value   upon  a  little  perishable  property,  than  they  do  upon 
the   principles  of  eternal  truth.     But   those   principles  cannot  be 
purchased  by  them.     Such  men  are  unworthy  of  a  standing  among 
the  honorable  men  of  the  earth.     They   are   men  of  no  principle 
whatever.     There  is  nothing  about  them  worth  saving.     They  are 
entirely  worthless.     They   are  not  equal  to  honorable  devils ;  for 
devils   will  sometimes   keep  their  word,   and,  to  a  certain  extent, 
their  fellow  devils  can  depend  upon  them ;  but  some  of  these  peo- 
ple with  whom  I  have  to  deal,  have  nothing  honorable  about  them. 
There  is  no  dependence  at  all  to  be  placed  in  them.     They  are  a 
disgrace  to  their  kind.     They  are  of  no  use  to  me,   but,   instead 
thereof,  they  hinder  me  from  coming  to  deliver  the  faithful  of  my 
people.     I  have  been  waiting  to  try  those   of  whom   I  was  sus- 
picious,  and  I  am   now  satisfied   concerning  them.     You  do  not 
know  them   all ;  for   I  have  not   shown  them  all  unto  you.     If  I 
were  to  send  my  steward  unto  them  for  a  portion  of  their  property,  ^ 
and  wait  for  a  denial,  in  order  that  you  might  know  them,  it  would 
hinder  me  for  a  considerable  time  from  coming  to  set  the  faithful 
of  my  people  free. 

4.  »  And  behold,  I  give  unto  you   a  commandment, — you  shall 
not   suffer  any   person  who  has  positively  denied  my  steward  the 
privilege  of  taking  a  portion  of  his  property  for  the  support  of  the 
poor  who  have  consecrated  their  property  both  by  vote  and  deed, 
to  stand  in  the  rank  with  my  people  when   they  shall  be  gathered 
together  to  meet  me.     Such  are  rejected  by  me.     I  am  the  Lord. 

5.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — I  will  not  waste  my 
time  in  trying  the  rest  of  those  of  whom  I  am  jealous,  by  sending 


HYPOCRITES.  363 

my  steward  unto  them,  and  waiting  for  a  denial  from  them ;  for  it 
would  occupy  too  much  time.  I  know  their  intentions  as  well  as 
if  I  tried  them  in  that  way.  Therefore,  I  shall  suffer  all  those 
whom  I  know  to  be  hypocrites,  but  whom  you  do  not  know,  to 
come  into  the  rank  with  the  rest  of  my  people,  and  I  shall  sla^ 
them  there. 

6.  I  shall  deliver  none  but  the  whole-hearted.     I  have  no  more 
time  to  spend  with  hypocrites.     I  shall  now  come  to  give  unto  all 
persons   their  reward.     Those  hypocrites   will   speedily    find    me 
upon  them.     They  have  hindered   me  for  a  time,  but  they  shall 
hinder  me  no  more.     I  want  no  more  of  them.     I  will  now  have' 
their   property.      Let   them  blaspheme  and  gnash  their  teeth  as 
much  as  they  may,  it  will  avail  them  nothing.     I  gave  them  a  fair 
chance  to  give  up  their  property  honorably ;  but  they   would  not. 
They  might  have  saved  their  lives,  and,  in  due  time,  have  gained 
much  more  property  than  they   now  possess.     They  think  that, 
possibly,  I  shall  never  come ;  but  they  need  not  to  think  any  such 
thing.     Some  of  those   corrupt   men  who  forsook  the  truth  at  the 
beginning   of  my   work,   try  to   comfort  themselves  with  the  hope 
that  I  shall  never  come ;  but  oh !  how  they  are  deceived  by  the 
devil!     I   will  now  show   them  their  condition.     The  thing  that 
they  have  greatly  feared  is  now  at  their  doors.     Oh,  how  they  have 
wished  that  my  servant  was   a  false   prophet,  and  that  this  work 
which  I  have  commenced  might  go  down  !     When  they  have  seen 
it  prosper,  it  has  cut  them  to  their  hearts  like  daggers.     They  are 
now  in  hell,  and  their  flesh  is  wasting  away  from  their  bones ;  for 
they   are  cursed  !     They  have  had  no  pleasure  of  their  lives;  but 
they  have  been  in  hell  ever  since  they  departed  from  the  truth,  and 
their  misery  has  been  great.     I  am  now  about  to  send  them  home 
to  recompense  them  for  all.     The  ways  of  transgressors  are  hard ; 
but  the  ways  of  truth  are  the  ways  to  true  happiness,  and   those 
who  walk  therein  are  sure  to  find  it. 

7.  Lo,    I    come    as   a  whirlwind,   and  but  few  will  stand  to 
behold  my  appearance ;  for  I  shall  come  as  a  refiner  and  purifier, 
to  set  my  house  in  order.     I   am  the  Lord  of  Hosts.     Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


364  RICHARD  COOK  AND  JOHN  BANKS. 

REVELATION    CONCERNING    RICHARD    COOK    AND 
JOHN    BANKS. 


No.  201.  WEBER,  UTAH,  January  i4th,  1862. 

1.  LISTEN  unto  me,  my   son,  for  I  am  about   to   speak  unto 
you  concerning   my   servants   Richard    Cook    and    John    Banks. 
There  are  hard  feelings  existing  between  them.     They  do  not  see 
alike ;   neither  do  they  work  in  union ;   they  are  not  one  in  me. 
What  shall  I  do  with  them  ?     They  cannot  fill  those  offices  which 
I  have  appointed  unto  them.     They  allow   small   things  to  throw ' 
them  into  confusion,  and  thereby  it  causes  great  disunion  to  exist 
not  only  with  them,  but  throughout  the  Camp.     When  my  people 
see  a  contentious  spirit  with  those  men,  they  are  very  apt  to  par- 
take of  it.     When  a  contentious  spirit  controls  men  who  are  at  the 
head  of  my  Church,  that  same  spirit  runs  throughout  the  body  of 
the  people.     They  all  feel  its  influence,  more  or  less.     Those  men 
who  stand  at  the  head  of  my   Church   should  watch   themselves. 
They  should  watch  that  spirit,  and  guard  against  it ;   or,  if  they  do 
not,  they  will  soon  do  more  injury  than  they  have  ever  done  good. 
I  will  not  suffer  that  spirit  to  exist   in  my  Church ;   if  I   do,  my 
Church  will  be  destroyed  at  once. 

2.  My  servants  should  know  better  than  to  give  way  to  such 
a  spirit  as  that;  for,  by  so  doing,  they  become  my  greatest  enemies, 
and  I  shall  be  compelled  to  cast  them  off.     I  .shall  not  allow  that 
spirit  to  remain  among  my  people.     If  my  servants   will   not   put 
that  spirit  away  from  them,  I  will  .yisjt  them,  and  I  will  remove  it, 
and  I  will  remove  them  with  it.     I   will  not  suffer  that  spirit  to 
have  a  place  in  my  Church.     I  called  them   to  be   counsellors  to 
my  servant  Joseph,  to  assist   him ;   but  if  (they  give  way  to  that 
contentious  and  aspiring  spirit,  they  will  very  soon  become  his  most 
bitter  enemies,  and  fight  against  the  truth,  and  strive  to  destroy  it. 
They  would  do  this  if  they  were  permitted  to  proceed ;   but  I  will 
stop  that  spirit,  if  they  dp  not   stop  it  themselves.     They   know 
better  than  to  give  way  to  such  a  spirit   as  that.     It   would  soon 
destroy  my  work  if  I  should  suffer  it  to    exist ;    but  I  shall  stop  it 
immediately,  if  I  am  compelled  to  remove  those  two  men  to  do 


RICHARD  COOK  AND  JOHN  BANKS.  365 

so.  It  would  be  better  to  slay  them,  and  thereby  stop  that  spirit, 
than  to  let  it  continue  until  it  had  taken  possession  of  all  these 
people,  and  then  be  compelled  to  destroy  them ;  but  I  shall  not  do 
that.  If  I  am  compelled  to  destroy  any  person,  I  shall  destroy 
those  who  first  gave  way  to  it. 

3.  I  will  watch  those  two   men,  and   if  they   do  not  cast  that 
spirit  from  them,  I  shall  come  as  a  whirlwind  and  destroy  them. 
They  may  decide  on  what  they  intend  to  do.     They  know  my  will 
concerning  them.     They  shall  not  destroy  my  people.     If  I  am 
compelled  to  destroy  them,  I  shall  call  others   to  take  their  posi- 
tions.    I  can  perform  my  work  without  the  assistance  of  quarrel- 
some and  contentious  men. 

4.  As  concerning  my  servant  Richard   Cook, — he   suffers   the 
the  things  of  this  world  to  twine  around  his  heart   until   he  is   en- 
tirely unfitted  for  the  office  which  I  have  appointed  him.     He 
seeks  to  evade  the  truth  as  it  is.     He  seeks  to  soften  it  to  suit  the 
people ;   and  he  has  not  preached  the   law  of  consecration  in  its 
right  spirit.     He  has  sought  to  evade  the  truth.      He  is  afraid  of 
hurting  the  feelings  of  my  people,  and  thus  he  is  operating  against 
me  and  the  truth  as  it  is.     He  is   doing  an   injury  to  the  truth; 
he  seeks  to  take  the  face  of  it  and  pervert  it — even  to  soften  it  to 
suit  the  people.     He  has  not  preached  my  gospel  in  its  true  spirit. 
He  is  afraid  that  he  may  hurt  the  feelings  of  the  people.     He  has 
not  yet  gained  possession  of  the  right  spirit  of  my  gospel  in   its  ful- 
ness.    His  worldly  substance  twines  around  his   heart,  and  holds 
him  as  with  fetters  of  iron ;   and  he  has   never  had  the   power  to 
break  loose   from  it.      His  heart  seems  to  be  bound   up  in  this 
world's  goods,  until  it  appears  that  he  cannot  break  the  bonds  that 
bind  him;  and  when  he  attempts  to  preach  my  gospel,  he  preaches 
like  a  man  in  bonds.     He  has  to  watch  himself  lest  he  should  go 
too  far.     If  he  feels  that  my  spirit  is  about  to  lead  him  out  a  little 
further  than  he  desires  to  go,  he  will  either  stop  or  take  up  another 
subject ;  and  in  that  way  he  will  quench  my  spirit  and  force  it 
away  from  him;  this  is   preaching  my  gospel  in  bonds.     Those 
who  do  this  are  men  who  will  not  let  my  spirit  dictate  them ;   but 
they  war  against  it ;   they  will  only  go  so  far ;   they  are  determined 
to  lead  my  spirit  instead  of  being  led  by  it. 

5.  My  servant  Richard  Cook  is  doing  great  injury  to  my  peo- 


366  RICHARD  COOK  AND  JOHN  BANKS. 

pie  by  the  course  which  he  has  taken.  He  has  not  consecrated 
his  property  with  all  his  heart.  He  is  still  in  bonds.  I  have  not, 
as  yet,  accepted  of  his  offering.  He  has  not  done  it  with  all  his 
heart ;  and  he  is  holding  others  from  doing  it.  He  is  fearful.  He 
is  afraid  that  I  shall  never  come  and  deliver  my  people ;  but  he 
need  not  be.  I  can  assure  him  that  I  shall  come  too  soon  for 
him  if  he  does  not  make  an  acceptable  offering,  and  rid  him- 
self of  that  spirit  which  is  gradually  destroying  him.  Let  him  rise 
up  like  a  man  and  prepare  himself;  and  let  him  not  show  such 
weakness.  He  understands  the  principles  of  my  gospel ;  but  he 
acts  very  inconsistently.  If  he  would  use  his  judgment,  he  would 
not  act  as  he  does.  If  he  desires  to  become  useful  unto  the 
perishing  children  of  Adam,  let  him  consecrate  his  property  in  a 
lawful  manner,  so  that  he  can  be  accepted  of  me,  and  live  through 
the  day  of  my  power ;  and  let  him  place  himself  in  such  a  position 
that  he  can  preach  my  gospel  freely,  and  not  in  bonds,  for  I  do 
not  accept  of  any  such  preaching.  He  has  spent  months  of  his 
precious  time,  just  through  suffering  the  things  of  this  world  to 
twine  around  his  heart  until  it  is  so  hard  for  him  to  liberate  him- 
self. O  how  hard  it  is  for  those  of  this,  world  who  have  riches  to 
obey  my  law.  Their  riches  will  canker  with  them.  Therefore, 
let  my  servant'  Richard  Cook  give  heed  unto  my  words,  and 
obey  them,  that  it  may  be  we1!  with  him  when  I  come;  for  lo, 
I  come  quickly.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 

6.  And  behold,  I  speak  unto  you,  my  son,  concerning  my  ser- 
vant John  Banks.  He  has  preached  my  gospel  in  its  true  spirit ; 
but  there  are  some  things  about  him  which  are  not  right.  He  has 
a  very  stubborn  will.  He  is  not  very  humble.  He  must  guard 
against  his  natural  temper ;  it  causes  him  to  go  to  extremes ;  and 
when  he  starts  on  a  wrong  course,  it  is  difficult  to  set  him  right 
again.  He  is  not  an  humble  man.  He  is  not  easily  persuaded. 
It  is  very  hard  for  him  to  control  his  own  nature.  If  he  does  not 
strive  to  overcome  his  temper,  it  will  lead  him  to  destruction. 
When  he  goes  wrong,  he  must  be  informed  of  it.  His  temper  will 
not  change  my  laws.  He  will  be  compelled  either  to  submit  to 
be  put  right  when  he  is  wrong,  or  be  destroyed.  Therefore  let  him 
guard  against  his  temper,  and  be  humble,  so  that  my  servant  can 
work  with  him  in  a  pleasant  manner.  I  know  that  he  feels  very 


RICHARD  COOK  AND  JOHN  BANKS.  367 

important,  so  much  so,  that  he  thinks  that  my  servant,  the  prophet, 
can  hardly  teach  him  anything.  He  thinks  that  he' is  about  equal 
in  knowledge  with  the  prophet ;  but  he  need  not  think  this.  His 
knowledge  is  but  trifling  when  compared  with  the  knowledge  of 
my  servant,  the  prophet,  whose  wisdom  circumscribes  not  only  the_ 
wisdom  of  my  servant  John  Banks,  but  that  of  all  the  world.  The 
wise  men  of  the  earth  are  fools  compared  with  him.  Therefore, 
let  no  man  upon  the  earth  think  that  they  are  his  equal ;  for  they 
are  not ;  when  they  think  so,  they  are  deceived  by  the  devil,  and 
they  know  not  what  they  are  doing. 

7.  I  know  my  servant  John  Banks.  I  know  the  intentions  of 
his  heart.  He  does  not  like  to  concede  to  a  man  and  acknowl- 
edge him  as  his  superior ;  but  he  will  be  compelled  to  do  it  now; 
for  I  will  uphold  my  servant,  the  prophet,  and  I  will  destroy  every 
person  who  opposes  him.  I  do  not  care  who  they  are;  I  will 
uphold  all  men  in  their  rights.  I  will  never  uphold  one  man  in 
in  taking  away  another  man's  rights.  If  anything  happens  which 
appears  to  operate  against  the  feelings  of  niy  servant  John,  he 
rises  up  against  it  at  once.  It  does  not  make  any  difference 
whether  it  is  right  or  wrong,  if  he  thinks  that  it  is  wrong,  he  is 
satisfied.  When  he  has  given  his  judgment  upon  any  subject,  he 
thinks  that  it  should  be  an  end  to  all  controversy.  It  is  very  hard 
for  a  prophet  to  deal  with  a  disposition  of  this  kind ;  such  a  dis- 
position is  assuming;  it  will  place  itself  in  the  judgment  seat. 
Such  a  spirit  will  lead  a  person  down  to  destruction  if  they  do  not 
overcome  it.  It  would  be  well  if  men  knew  the  spirit  that  is 
leading  them.  That  spirit  which  will  not  be  in  subjection  to  the 
man  who  holds  the  keys  of  my  kingdom,  and  thinks  itself  equal 
to  my  servant,  is  not  of  me ;  but  it  is  the  spirit  of  Lucifer.  Be 
aware  of  that  spirit ;  for  those  who  invite  it  will  be  led  down  to 
destuction.  Therefore,  let  those,  my  servants,  humble  themselves 
before  me,  and  do  as  I  have  commanded  them  Let  them  cast 
far  away  from  them  that  rebellious  and  aspiring  spirit  which  is 
breeding  confusion  among  them,  and  let  them  work  together  in 
union ;  or,  if  they  do  not,  I  shall  suddenly  visit  them,  as  I  have 
promised  them.  They  know  better  than  to  act  as  they  have  done. 
They  could  not  act  much  worse  if  they  went  to  work  purposely  to 
destroy  my  work.  I  am  much  displeased  with  them.  I  am  the 
Lord  of  Hosts.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


368  THE    REBELLIOUS. 

THE  PEOPLE  ARE  INSTRUCTED  NOT  TO    POLLUTE 

THEMSELVES  BY  USING  THE  PROPERTY 

OF  THE  REBELLIOUS. 


No.  202.  WEBER,  UTAH,  January  i5th,  1862. 

1.  BEHOLD,   I  say  unto  you,   my  servant  Joseph, — I  see  the 
true  position  in  which  I  am  placed  with  these  people  whom  I  have 
gathered  together.     I  have  seen  their  intentions,  and  I  know  what 
they  are.     With  a  great  many  of  my  people  I  am  well  satisfied, 
and  I  require  no  more  of  them.     But  there  are  some  who  are  fear- 
ful— they  are  afraid  to  trust  themselves  in  my  hands ;  but  they  are 
in  my  hands  continually,  and  they  cannot  get  out  of  them,  either 
in  this  world  or  in  the  spirit  worlds ;  for  I  shall  never  loose  them, 
let  them  go  wherever  they  may,  and  I  shall  not  fail  to  bring  them 
to  my  terms,  either- in  this  world  or  some  other.     I  shall  not   fail 
to   do  the  work  unto  which   my   Father  appointed  me.     I  can 
humble  the  rebellious  when  I  set  about  it. 

2.  There,  are  a  few  individuals   among  my  people  who  have 
consecrated  their  property  both  by  vote  and  deed ;  but  they  have 
not,   as  yet,   consecrated   it   in  their  hearts.     They  are,   in  their 
hearts,  holding  on  to  it,  and  think  that  they  will  wait  for  a  short 
time  to  see  what  I  will  do,  and  they  say  that  they  will  do  nothing 
more  than  they  have  done,  until  they  shall  have  seen  a  manifesta- 
tion of  power  from  me;  that  when  they  shall  have  seen  it,  they 
will  consecrate  their  property  in  a  proper  and  lawful  manner ;  but, 
until  then,  they  think  that  they  will  hold  on  to  their  property. 

3.  Behold,  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts,  and  I  am  about  to  speak 
unto  those  people   who   reason  in   the   manner  which    I    have 
described.     What  do  you  think  that  I  want  with  your  property? 
Your  property  is  as  filthy  rags  unto  me !     I   would  not  touch  it 
with  one  of  -my  fingers  !     It  is  as  filthy  as  you '  are — it   is   cursed, 
and  so  are  you.     It  is  not  your  property  that  I  want,  for  you  own 
none ;  it  does  not  belong  to  you.     You  are  thieves  in  your  hearts. 
You  hold  fast  to  that  which  does  not  belong  to  you.     There  is  no 
thief  that  is  willing  to  let  go  that  which  he  has  stolen ;  it  sticks  as 
close  to  him  as  his  own  heart's  blood.     To  separate  a  thief  from 


THE  REBELLIOUS  AND  THEIR  PROPERTY.         369 

stolen  property,  you  must  first  destroy  him,  and  then  you  can  take, 
unmolested,  the  property  which  he  has  stolen.  This  is  the  way  in 
which  I  shalfact  with  those  thieves  who  are  in  the  midst  of  my 
people.  I  shall  take  them,  and  the  property  which  they  hold  will 
be  left.  But  neither  I,  nor  the  faithful  of  my  people,  will  need  a- 
particle  of  it. 

4.  The  poor  of  my  people  will  have  more  property  than  they 
will  know  what  to  do  with  without  touching  their  (so  called)  cursed 
property.     I  shall  not  slay  them  because  I  need  the  property  which 
they  hold.     I  will  take  care  that  none  of  the  faithful  of  my  people 
pollute  their  hands  with  it.      The  property  which  has  life,  that  they 
hold   in  their   possession,  shall  perish  with  them.     It  shall  follow 
them  into  the  spirit  worlds,  and  they  can  have  it  there.     They  will 
die  for  it,   and  they  ought   to  have  it.     They  were  one  with  it  in 
life,  and  in  death  they  shall  not  be  separated,   only   while   it   shall 
have  time  to  die  and  follow  them.     And  oh,  what  a  joyful  meeting 
it  will  be  when  they  and  their  property  meet   together  again  !     A 
man  will  then  be  able  to  say  to  his  horse  :     "  O,  how  I  love  thee ! 
How  near  thou  art  to  my  heart !     I  died  for  thee.     Nothing  could 
separate  us  while  in  mortality,  and  nothing  shall  separate  us  here  I 
I  shall  never   forget  the  many  times  that  I  have  ridden  thee,  and 
the  many  happy  times  which  we  have  spent  together;  and  now 
thou    hast    followed  me,    we   will    again  have  many  happy   days 
together.     O,  how  I  love  thee !    No  tofrigue  can  tell  the  love  which 
I   have   for  thee.     We   are   one,  and   we  will  never  be  separated. 
Thou  art  mine,  and  I  am  thine  to  all  eternity.    We  have  lived  and 
died  together.     We  are   one  in  very  deed.     Thou  art  one  in  me, 
and  I  am  one  in  thee.     Who  are  like  unto  us  ?  " 

5.  Oh,  ye  idolaters !     How  can  you  inherit  my  kingdom  upon 
the  earth?     But  you  will  say.  that  you  are  not   idolators.     I   say 
that  you  are,  and  that,  too,  of  the  worst  kind.     You   have  sinned 
against  a   fulness   of  light.     How   can  you  escape  my  judgment? 
But  you  will  say  that  you  have   not   seen   much.     You   will   deny 
the  sight  of  your  own  eyes.     You  are  in  the  gall  of  bitterness,  and 
in  the  bonds  of  iniquity.     You  will  not  acknowledge  the  truth. 
There  is  no  such  thing  as  convincing  you   of  it.     You    will   deny 
that  the  sun  shines  when  you  see  it. 

6.  I  am  now  speaking  figuratively  in  order  to  show  you  your  true 


370  THE    REBELLIOUS. 

character.  The  individual  that  will  deny  the  work  which  you  have 
embraced,  will  deny  that  the  sun  shines  when  he  sees  it.  Eyesight 
is  of  no  use  to  him,  neither  are  his  senses ;  for  he  will  deny  that 
he  knows  anything.  Such  people  have  a  delusive  spirit  that  will 
deny  all  the  truth  that  comes  from  heaven.  It  is  the  spirit  of  the 
devil;  and  for  a  saint  who  is  possessed  by  such  a  spirit  there  is  no 
help.  Such  a  spirit  cannot  be  cast  away  from  him  while  in  mor- 
tality. He  has  to  be  slain  to  separate  him  from  it.  All  those  who 
have  yielded  obedience  unto  the  fulness  of  my  gospel,  and  after- 
wards turn  away  from  it,  become  possessed  by  such  spirits,  and 
will  be  destroyed  in  the  flesh.  Those  who  deny  the  keys  of  the 
holy  priesthood  and  the  revelations  which  I  have  given,  deny  both 
me  and  my  Father,  and  also  the  Holy  Ghost,  with  all  that  is  good. 
Let  my  people  be  aware  of  that  spirit ;  for  if  they  partake  of  it,  it 
is  sure  death  unto  them. 

7.  My  people  know  that  I  have  committed  the  full  keys  of  the 
holy  priesthood  to  the  earth.     But  the  devil  strives  very  hard  to 
make  those  of  my  people,  whom  he  can  get  near  enough  to  to  influ- 
ence, believe  that  they  know  nothing  either  about  me,  nor  the  keys 
of  the  holy  priesthood.     He  strives  to  make  them  deny  all  truth, 
and  to  believe  that  there  is  no  God,  neither  any  hereafter.     In  this 
way  he  leads  men  to  destruction. 

8.  Do  my   people  know  anything  about  me?     Yes,  they  do. 
If  the  devil  has  not  blinded  their  minds,  they  know  that  they  have 
the  full  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood  in   their  midst.     Have  I  not 
protected  those  who  have  yielded  obedience  to  my  gospel  ?     Have 
I  not  commenced  a  work  in  their  midst,  and  gathered  them  here 
from  almost  all  parts  of  this  Territory?     Have  I   rot   opened  the 
last  seal?     Have  I  not  upheld  my  people  in  every  respect,  accord- 
ing to  my  promises  ?     If  they  know  anything  at  all,  they  know  that 
I  have.     If  all  this,  is  true,  my  people  are  compelled  to  trust  me 
for  the  future ;  for  as  sure  as  I  have  fulfilled  all  my  promises,  in 
their  times  and  seasons,  while  my  people  have  been  in  weakness, 
which   I   could  fulfil,   so  sure  I  shall  fulfil  those  promises  which 
pertain  to  the  giving  unto  my  people  the  power  over  their  enemies, 
and  establishing  my  kingdom  upon  the  earth  never  more  to  be 
prevailed  against ;  but  to  break  down  all  other  kingdoms,   and  to 
stand  forever.     This   is  the  power  which  I  am  about  to  give  unto 
my   people.     I  am  the   Lord  of  Hosts.     Even   so.     Amen   and 
Amen. 


THE    WEAK    AND    FAITHLESS.  371 


THE  LORD  INFORMS  HIS  PEOPLE  THAT  THE    LAW 

OF    HEAVEN    COMPELS    HIM    TO    LABOR 

WITH  THE  WEAK  AND  FAITHLESS 

BEFORE  HE  CAN  LAWFULLY 

DESTROY  THEM. 


.No.  203.  WEBER,  UTAH,  January  i5th,  1862. 

1.  I   WISH  to  speak  unto  you,  my  son,  concerning  my  people. 
I  can  assure  you  that  there  are  some  of  them  who  are  unprepared 
to  meet  me.     A  few  of  them  have  been  very  backward  in  coming 
to   my   terms.     They  have   not   consecrated   with  all  their  hearts, 
and  I  have  been  laboring  with  them.     I  am  compelled  by  the  law 
of  heaven  to  labor   with  those   who  are   weak  and  backward,  to 
show  unto  them  the  truth  as  it   is,   and  to  leave  them  without 
excuse ;  and  if  they  will   not  turn  round   after  I  have   done   my 
duty  to  them,  and  shown  mercy  unto  them  to  the   extent   of  the 
law, -I  can  justly  destroy  them.     This  is  what  has  held  me  so  long 
from  my  people ;  but  if  they  had  all  come  to  my  terms  at  the  first, 
I  should  have  had  nothing  to  wait  for,  and  I  should  have  delivered 
my  people  weeks  ago.     Those  of  them  who  came  to  my  terms  at 
the  first,  have  been  called  to  suffer  the  inconveniences  incident  to 
such   circumstances   as,   at  the  present  time,  they   are  called  to 
endure,  which  are  very  painful   unto  them,  and  which,   for  some 
time  past,  have  caused  them  so  much  suffering — indeed,  the  faith- 
ful have  always  had  to  suffer  on  account  of  the  wicked. 

2.  My  people  are  all  together,  both  the  innocent  and  the  guilty, 
and  while  such  is  the  case,  and  until  the  guilty  shall  have  filled  up 
their  cup,  the  innocent  must  suffer  with  them;  but  when  the  guilty 
shall  be  destroyed,  the  faithful  will  be  delivered.     I  will  not  hold 
the  faithful  of  my  people  in  pain  and  suffering  any  longer  on  their 
account  than  while  I  can  settle  my  affairs  with  those  few  hypocrites 
who  are  among  them. 

3.  My  bowels  yearn  for  the  faithful  of  my  people.     I  see  their 
sufferings,  and  I  long  to  come  to  their  release.     I  will  work  as  fast 
as  I  can  with  those  hypocrites  to  bring  them  to  that  point  where  I 
shall  be  able  either  to  save  them,  or  lawfully  destroy  them,  and   I 


372  THE    UNFAITHFUL. 

may  say  that  I  have  about  done  so,  and  I  am  coming  speedily  to 
my  people.  Let  them  raise  their  drooping  spirits  and  keep  on  the 
lookout  for  me ;  for  I  shall  come  and  release  them.  They  will 
then  be  satisfied,  and  their  joy  will  be  full,  for  I  shall  abundantly 
reward  them  for  all  the  sufferings  which  they  have  endured  in  this 
place.  Let  them  keep  their  spirits  up ;  for  lo,  I  come  quickly ; 
even  the  Lord  of  Hosts.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  CLERK  IS  COMMANDED  TO  OBLITERATE  THE 

NAMES  OF  APOSTATES  FROM  THE 

RECORD  BOOK. 


No.   204.  WEBER,  UTAH,  January  iyth,   1862. 

1.  I  AM  COME  to  speak  unto  you  again,  my  servant,  for  I  am 
compelled,  through  the  difficult  circumstances  in  which  my  people 
are  placed,  to  speak  unto  you  often,  in  order  to  bear  them  up-  and, 
even  by  so  doing,  I  can  scarcely  create  faith  within  them.     They 
let  their  spirits  droop  in  spite  of  all  that  I  can  do  in  that  respect. 
They   want  to  see  a  manifestation  of  my  powrer,  and  they  say  in 
their  feelings  that  their  minds  would  then  be  forever  at   rest ;  and 
that  nothing  short  of  that  will  satisfy  them.     Oh,   how  they  are 
afflicted  in  their  minds !     They  fear  that   I   shall   leave  them  to 
perish.     If  they  could  only  feel  satisfied  in  their  minds  that  I  shall 
come  and  release  them,  according  to  my  promise,  they  would  wait 
contented ;  but  they  fear  that   I   shall   not   come,  and  that  is  the 
cause  of  all  their  trouble. 

2.  What  can  I  do  to  satisfy  them?     A  promise  from  me  would 
not  pacify  their  feelings  to  any  great  extent.     They  will  never  be 
satisfied  until   I  come.     I   know  that   I   cannot  satisfy  them  by 
promises ;  but   I  have  a  better  way  than  that  wherein  to  satisfy 
them,  and  I  wish  to  hold  the  faithful  of  them  together  until  I  can 
lawfully  do  so.     My  people  know  my  situation,  for  I  have  told  it 
unto  them   often  enough.     I   have  to  work  by  law,  and  I  cannot 
deviate  from  it.     I  cannot  come  unto  them  immediately ;  there- 
fore,  I   have  to  take  a  course  to  hold  them  together,  until  I  can 


THE    UNFAITHFUL.  373 

come.  I  shall  not  stay  away  from  them  one  minute  after  the  law 
of  heaven  permits  me  to  come  unto  them.  It  is  very  hard  for  me 
to  deal  with  mortals ;  for  they  are  ignorant  of  the  law  of  heaven, 
and  they  can  see  little  or  nothing  but  their  own  situation.  I  will 
take  care  of  my  faithful  people,  and  I  will  delivet  them  in  time. 
I  will  put  no  more  upon  them  than  what  they  are  able  to  bear.  I 
know  how  to  treat  mortals,  and  I  do  not  put  any  more  upon  them 
than  what  they  ought  to  bear.  I  am  their  Judge. 

3.  Some  of  my  people  are  in  better  circumstances  than  others 
are,  and  they  have   suffered  but  little   inconvenience ;  but  others 
have  suffered  much.     My  people  have  not  all  suffered  alike;  and 
those  who  have  suffered  the  least  have  been  the  first  to  give  way 
and  to  depart  from  the  truth ;  but  I  will  yet  try  them  as  they  were 
never  tried  upon  this  earth,  and,  either  living  or  dead,  I  will  make 
them   endure   the  trial  from  which  they  have  shrunk.     It  would 
have  been  better  for  them  to  have  endured  it,  and  thereby  to  have 
saved  their  lives.      There  is  is  a  trial  which  lies  before  all  of  Abra- 
ham's seed,  and,  either  living  or  dead,  they  will  have  to  endure  it. 
People  need   net  to  think  that  they  can  ward  off  that  trial,  and 
shun  it,  for  they  cannot ;  it  will  come. 

4.  I  shall  speedily  try  those  who  yielded  obedience  unto  my 
gospel,  and,  in  order  to  shun  the  trial  which  lay  before  them,  have 
forsaken  me  and  denied  the  truth.     I  will  bring  a  trial  upon  them 
which  will  waste  them  all  away.     Those  who  unrighteously  seek  to 
save  their  lives  will  lose  them.     When  my  people  forsake  the  truth, 
the  devil  makes  them  believe  that  I  shall  never  come ;  but  I  shall 
speedily  convince  them  that  they  are  in  the  devil's  hands,  and  that 
he  has   deceived  them.     All    is  now  -over   with    some    of  them, 
and  others    will    soon  be  in    the  same  condition,   for  they  have, 
already,  denied  the  truth  in  their  hearts ;  but  they  are  not,  as  yet, 
fully  known  among  my  people.     Now  is  the  trying  time,  and  it  will 
take  away  all  the  useless  and  corrupt-hearted   from  among   them. 
Nothing  will  be  left  but  the  whole-hearted,  and  I  will  take  care  of 
them. 

5.  When  they   begin  to  fail,    I  will  (as  they  call  it)  take  the 
screws  off  them.     The   lightest  material  will  be  blown  away  first ; 
but  when  the  good   begins   to  go,    I   shall  stop  the  mill.     I  shall 

'  save  all  the  good,  and  only  blow  away  the  chaff.     This  I  am  com- 


374  THE    UNFAITHFUL. 

pelled  to  do.  I  know  all  those  who  are  worth  saving.  Should  I 
save  the  lives'  of  the  hypocrites,  they  would  do  me  no  good ;  but, 
on  the  contrary,  they  would  fight  against  me.  I  know  better  than 
to  save  their  lives.  I  shall  purge  them  out.  I  shall  not  deliver 
one  of  them,  if  they  remain  among  the  faithful  of  my  people 
undetected^  and  gather  with  them  in  the  rank  to  meet  me,  I  shall 
slay  them  there.  But  previous  to  that  time,  I  shall  purge  out  as 
many  of  them  as  I  possibly  can.  But  the  time  allotted  to  me  for 
that  purpose  is  now  almost  spent.  I  have  forced  a  number  of 
them  out,  and  my  servant,  the  clerk,  must  blot  out  their  names 
from  the  list  which  contains  the  names  of  those  who  have  yielded 
obedience  to  the  fulness  of  my  gospel,  in  order  that  those  who 
shall  be  appointed  to  that  work  may  not  get  into  confusion  when 
they  shall  call  over  the  names  of  my  people  as  they  place  them  in 
the  rank  to  meet  me. 

6.  I  do  not  want  any  more  hypocrites  in  the,  rank  than  what  I 
can  well  avoid.     It  would  be  so  painful  to  the  faithful  to  see  them 
slain  while  standing  in  their  midst;  therefore,  I  will  purge  out  as 
many  of  them* as  I   possibly  can.     I  have  not  sufficient  time  to 
purge  out  many  more;  for  I  shall   be  compelled  to  come  and 
release  the  faithful  of  my  people.     They  have  arrived  at  the  far 
end,  and  it  is  impossible  for  me  to  remain  away  from  them  much 
lunger.      I  am  coming  unto  them  in  time,  according  to  my  word. 
They   can   endure  this  week  out,  for  it  is  nearly  spent,  and  soon 
after  it  shall  be  quite  spent,  I  will  come.     The  faithful  of  my  peo- 
ple can  endure  that  much  longer. 

7.  I  have  been  compelled  to  delay  the  deliverance  of  rny  peo- 
ple so  long  as  I  have  done,  on  account  of  the  hypocrites  who  are 
in  their  midst ;  but  now  I  have  about  done  with  them,  and  when  I 
shall  have  entirely  done  with  them,  it  will  be  a  great  relief  to  me. 
O,  how   I  long  to  meet  with  my  people !     I   want  to  come   unto 
them  as  much  as  they  want  to  see  me,  and  I  am  coming  after  this 
present  week  shall  be  spent.     My  coming  is  that  near. 

8.  My  people  now  know  how  to  preparte  themselves  to  meet 
me.     I  shall  tell  them  the  .time  of  my  coming  no  nearer  at  present. 
I  know  that  they  cannot  exist  as  they  now  are ;  it  is  impossible. 

9.  I  will  now  show  those  hypocrites  their  mistake.     The  devil 
has  persuaded  them  that  I  shall  never  come;  but  oh,  how  he  has 


THE    SUFFERING    POOR.  375 

fooled  them  !  They  would  not  believe  what  I  told  them  ;  but  they 
would  rather  believe  the  devil.  But  they  shall  now  see  who  told 
them  the  truth.  I  cannot  save  the  lives  of  some  people ;  for  they 
would  sooner  believe  the  devil  than  they  would  believe  me,  because 
they  love  lies  better  than  they  love  the  truth. 

I  now  add  no   more.     I  am  the  Light  and  Life  of  the  world ; 
even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  PROPHET  IS    INSTRUCTED    HOW  TO  RELIEVE 

THE    SUFFERING    POOR    AMONG  THE 

PEOPLE. 


No.  205.  WEBER,  UTAH,  January  i8th,  1862. 

i.  You  WISH  to  know  what  you  are  to  do  with  the  poorest  of 
my  people — even  those  who  are  suffering  the  most.  It  is  right  for 
my  people  to  bear  burdens  according  to  their  strength,  so  that 
they  may  be  equal.  ButT  have  not  brought  them  to  the  point 
yet ;  neither  can  I  do  so  while  they  remain  in  weakness.  I  have 
gone  as  far  with  them  as  I  can  go  at  present.  I  do  not  expect  so 
much  from  them  now  as  I  shall  require  of  them  when  I  shall  have 
given  them  the  power  of  the  gospel ;  they  will  then  have  to  abide 
that  portion  of  my  law  which  they  would  not  now  be  able  to  abide. 
I  have  only,  as  yet,  given  unto  them  the  first  law  of  my  kingdom, 
and  a  number  of  them  cannot  endure  even  that.  Such  being  the 
case,  what  would  they  do  should  I  give  unto  them  the  whole 
law?  They  could  not  endure  it  as  they  now  are,  and  I  know 
better  than  tc  force  it  upon  them.  I  have  only  tried  them,  as 
yet,  with  the  first  law.  But  after  the  power  of  my  gospel  shall  be 
given,  they  will  have  to  abide  the  full  law.  Therefore,  my  people 
ought  not  to  think  that  I  am  hard  on  them,  for  I  am  not.  I  am 
as  gentle  and  as  easy  with  them  as  the  law  of  heaven  permits  me 
to  be.  They  should  not  think  that  I  require  too  much  at  their 
hands,  seeing  that  I  have  revealed  unto  them  the  keys  of  the  holy 
priesthood.  The  calls  which  I  have  made  upon  them  are  not 


INSTRUCTED    NOT    TO    HARBOR    HYPOCRITES.  376 

equal  to  the  knowledge  which  I  have  given  unto  them ;  conse- 
quently they  are,  even  now,  in  my  debt ;  therefore,  I  have  not 
been  hard  with  them.  But  as  they  continue  to  increase  in  knowl- 
edge and  power,  I  shall  continue  to  require  more  at  their  hands 
until  I  have  enforced  the  fulness  of  my  law  upon  them.  They 
will  gradually  grow  from  little  to  'more  until  they  can  abide  it.  I 
shall  not  bring  it  all  upon  them  at  once;  they  could  not  endure 
it ;  therefore,  I  shall  work  with  them  gradually,  and  in  such  a  way 
that  the  faithful  and  whole  hearted  can  endure  it — none  else  can 
inherit  my  kingdom  upon  the  earth.  I  shall  save  the  lives  of  all 
those  who  are  worthy — not  one  of  them  will  be  destroyed. 

2.  My   people   need   not  to  fret  when  they  see  people  leaving 
them  ;  for  none  will  leave  but  those  whom  I  have  rejected.     They 
were  cast  off  because  they  were  unworthy  before  me.     Mine  angels 
would   not  abide   with  them,  because  they  could  do  nothing  with 
them ;  consequently,  they    cast  them   off,   and   gave  them   up  to 
devils,   whose   company  they  invited,   and   they  have  led  them  to 
destruction.     I   shall  reject  none  but  the  hypocrites  whom  I  can 
do   nothing  with;  all   such   I  shall  cast  off,   for  no  idolater  can 
inherit  my  kingdom.     Mine  angels  claim  the  right  to  rule  Abra- 
ham's seed  in  mortality,  whom  they  either  lead  to  salvation  or  cast 
off  and    destroy.     Therefore,   the  faithful  of  my  people  must  not 
fret  on  account  of  those  whom  I  have   cast   off.     No  matter  how 
closely  they   may  be   connected   with   them,  they  must  withdraw 
from  them  altogether,  and  let  them   go,   and  not   take   sides  with 
them;  or,  if  they  do,  they  will  partake  of  their  influence,  and  go  to 
destruction   with  them.     They  must   not  let  any  person  abide  in 
their  house  who  has  denied  the  revelations   which   I   have  given ; 
for  I   have  rejected  such  persons,  and  their  names  are  down  for 
destruction ;  and  if  any  of  my  people  open  their  doors  and  admit 
them   into  their  house,   I  will  cast  them  off,  also ;  for  that  spirit 
which   denies  me  and   my   Father,  and  the  Holy  Ghost,  shall  not 
have  an  abiding  place  with  the  faithful  of  my   people;  I   will  not 
suffer  it. 

3.  My  people  now  know  my  mind  concerning  that  spirit.     My 
people  are  ignorant,  and  they  do  not  know  how  to  detect  delusive 
spirits.     They  are  very  easy  overcome  by  them.    That  spirit  which 
will  lead  a  person  to  deny  the  revelations  that  I  have  given,  is  the 


THE    SUFFERING    POOR.  377 

spirit  of  Lucifer,  and  it  will  deny  me  and  all  truth.  If  there  are 
any  such  among  the  faithful  of  my  people,  let  them  withdraw  from 
them,  for  they  are  not  of  me ;  I  have  rejected  them,  and  I  will 
reject  all  those  who  open  their  doors  to  admit  any  into  their  houses, 
or  even  sympathize  with  them.  When  they  are  doing  so,  they  are 
sympathizing  with  the  devil,  and  are  my  most  bitter  enemies. 
They  are  enemies  to  all  truth.  When  they  open  their  doors  to  let 
a  delusive  spirit  into  their  house,  it  proves  that  they  are  one  with 
it ;  if  they  were  not,  they  would  not  be  willing  to  admit  it  into 
their  house.  A  person  is  known  by  the  company  he  keeps. 
Therefore,  let  all  my  faithful  people  guard  against  false  spirits  if 
they  wish  to  save  their  own  lives;  for  if  they  do  not,  they  will  lose 
them.  I  am  the  Lord. 

4.  And  now,  behold,  I  speak  unto  you  concerning  the  poor  of 
my  people.     It  is  very  difficult  for  them  to  obtain  either  wood  or 
provisions.     My  eyes  are  upon  all  these  things.     They  are  now  in 
great  need  of  wood.     What  shall  I  do  with  the  poor  of  my  peo- 
ple, seeing  that  this  is  the  case?     And  not  only  this,  but  some  of 
them  have  very   unpleasant  places  to  live  in,  and  they  are  very 
uncomfortable  indeed.     What  shall  I  do  for  them  to  relieve  them 
speedily?     I  will  tell  you.     As  I  am  about  to  come  speedily,  and 
as  my  people  will  not  need  their  meeting  tent  much  more,  it  would 
be  well  if  the  poorest  of  my  people,  even  those  who  are  the  most 
uncomfortable,  would  move  into  it  after  my  people  have  held  their 
Sunday  and  Monday   meetings ;    for  my    people   will    not    meet 
much  longer  in  that  tent.     It  will  accommodate  a  great  many 
poor  families  for  a  few  days.     In  this  way  they  will  have  a  speedy 
relief. '   They  can  then  use  their  old  houses  for  fire  wood. 

5.  After  I  have  delivered  my  people,  and  while  they  are  pre- 
paring to   move  to  the   central   point  in  this  Territory,  even  the 
place   which  is  appointed  by  me  for  the  gathering  place,  they  can 
make  use  of  tfreir  old  houses  for  fire  wood  while  they  remain  in 
this   place.     But   they   must  not  remain  in  this  place  any  longer 
than  they  can  help  after  I  have  moved  their  enemies  out  of  their 
way.      Lo,  I    come    quickly.      I    am   the  Lord  of  Hosts;   even 
Jesus   Christ.     Even   so.     Amen  and  Amen, 


37^  CONCERNING    APOSTATES. 

REVELATION    INSTRUCTING    THE    PROPHET    HOW 
TO  DEAL  WITH  APOSTATES. 


No.  206.  WEBER,  UTAH,  January  ipth,  1862. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts,  and  I  am  come  to  speak 
unto  you  concerning  those  people  who  have  denied  the  truth,  and 
whom  I  have  rejected.     They  are  going  about  from  place  to  place 
among  my  people,  and  are  striving  to  destroy  them.     My  people 
are  not  able  to  detect  their  false  spirit;  and  if  great  care  is   not 
taken,  a  number  of  them  will  be  overcome  by  it.     If  they  sympa- 
thize  with   it,   it  will  obtain   power  over  them,  and  consequently 
some  of  them  might   have  to  be  slain,   who  otherwise  might  be 
saved.     Satan  seeks  to  deceive,  and  lead  my  people  to  destruction. 
They  know  him   not.     There  are  some  of  my   people  who  have 
sympathized  with  a  false  spirit,  and  it  is  now  laying  hold  of  them ; 
and  if  they  do -not  humble  themselves  before  me,  they  will  be  over- 
come, for   I  will  cast  them  off;    and  before  they  are  aware  of  it, 
they  will  be  destroyed. 

2.  My  people  should  know  that  a  spirit  which  denies  the  reve- 
lations which   come  from   my  mouth,  is  of  the  devil;  for  I  shall 
never  deny  my  own  words.      My  spirit  is  a  spirit  of  truth.     It  is 
true  in  all  its  movements,  and  it  leads  into  all   truth.     It   will  not 
contradict  that  which  I  have  spoken ;  but  it  will  confirm  my  word. 
It  is  one  with  me  in  all  things ;  we  are  not  divided.     When  those 
who  have  yielded  obedience  unto  the  fulness  of  my  gospel,  and 
afterwards  deny  the  truth,  go  forth  among  my  people  to   deceive, 
and  lead  them  to  destruction,  they  strive  to  make  them  believe 
that  they  are  good,  honest,  intelligent,  and  truthful  saints,  and  that 
they    know   too    much    to    be  deceived.     Thus,  with  their  lying 
mouths,  and  with  poison  under  their  tongues,  they  go  from  place 
to  place  seeking  to  deceive  my  faithful  people ;  and  by  deceiving 
them,   and  leading  a   delusive  spirit  upon  them,  they  cause  their 
death,  and  thus  become  murderers  of  the  foulest  kind.     Through 
their  hellish  guile  they  lay  traps  for  the  destruction  of  the  innocent. 
They  are  most  mean,  hellish  and  corrupt  of  all  people  who  expect 
to  obtain  a  resurrection  from  the  dead.     They  labor  with  all  their 


APOSTATES.  379 

might  to  shed  innocent  blood,  and  thus  they  are  instruments  in 
the  devil's  hands  to  destroy  the  lives  of  Adam's  faithful  children. 
Such  murderers  must  be  watched,  and,  at  all  hazards,  be  cast  out 
from  among  my  people ;  for  it  would  be  better  to  take  their  lives 
than  to  permit  them  to  deceive  and  destroy  the  innocent,  which 
they  would  do,  should  they  be  permitted  to  continue  in  their 
present  course. 

3.  And  behold,  I  give  unto  you  a  commandment,— you  shall 
stop  the  wicked  course  of  those  apostates,  even  should  you  have 
to  put  them  to  death  in  order  to  do  so.  You  need  not  to  fear  any 
authority  in  this  Territory,  nor  yet  in  the  United  States.;  for  I  will 
uphold  and  sustain  you  in  doing  so.  I  am  now  coming  unto  you, 
myself,  to  give  unto  you  the  power  of  your  office.  I  shall  be  with 
you  before  you  shall  have  had  much,  if  any,  trouble  with  apostates. 
I  now  deliver  them  into  your  hands,  and  you  must  deal  with  them 
as  I  have  commanded  you.  I  am  the  Stone  and  Shepherd  of 
Israel,  the  Bright  and  Morning  Star.  Even  so.  Amen  and 
Amen. 


THE    PEOPLE    ARE  INSTRUCTED  TO   HOLD    SMALL 

MEETINGS  AT   VARIOUS    PLACES    IN 

THE  CAMP. 


No.  207.  WEBER,  UTAH,  January  22nd,  1862. 

i.  I  AM  COME  to  speak  unto  you  again,  my  son.  You  see 
that  things  are  drawing  to  a  close  in  this  place  with  my  people. 
They  have  apparently  destroyed  their  public  meeting  room — 
families  are  moving  into  it.  My  people  seem  determined  to  force 
me  out  of  my  hiding  place  to  deliver  them.  They  now  have  no 
place  where,  under  any  circumstance,  they  can  be  assembled;  and 
I  perceive  that  I  shall  be  compelled  to  come,  for  they  cannot 
remain  here  in  their  present  condition ;  something  must  be  done. 
Therefore,  my  son,  you  see  that  I  must  now  come  in  order  to 
make  my  promises  good.  But,  at  present,  there  is  much  confusion 
in  the  Camp.  Hard  feelings  exist  in  the  minds  of  some  of  my 


380  THE    WEAK    AND    FAITHLESS. 

people  against  each  other.  Let  them  make  their  wrongs  right, 
and  become  properly  united.  There  must  be  no  contention 
among  them.  They  must  deal  justly  with  each  other.  They 
must  put  away  from  them  all  selfishness,  and  every  one  must  love 
his  brother  as  himself.  If  they  will  cultivate  that  spirit,  there  will 
be  no  confusion  or  hard  feelings  among  them.  They  must 
do  this  in  order  to  prepare  themselves  to  meet  me;  for,  as  I 
have  said,  I  am  speedily  coming.  Satan  seeks  to  stir  up  con- 
tention among  them,  and  to  bring  them  into  confusion,  in  order 
that  he  may  destroy  them.  Some  of  them  are  very  weak  and 
short-sighted ;  they  suffer  him  to  gain  the  upperhand  of  them  in 
almost  every  frivolous  thing  that  crosses  their  path.  What  can  I 
do  with  such  weak  and  short-sighted  people  ?  They  are  a  con- 
stant trouble  to  me  and  to  the  faithful  among  my  people.  They 
cannot,  beforehand,  see  the  result  of  the  smallest  act  of  their  lives. 
They  cannot  see  anything  but  the -object  which  they  wish  to  gain. 
They  do  not  consider  the  results  which  necessarily  follow  their  acts. 

2.  But  how  blessed  are  they  who  can  see  into  the  future,  who 
are   endowed    with    the    gift  of  fore-knowledge,    who  are  peace- 
makers ;    for  the  reward  of  their  labors  shall  be  given  unto  them. 
They  shall  inherit  perfect  peace.     They  shall  find  great  treasures 
of  knowledge.     They  shall   inherit  the  good  things  of  the  earth 
when  the  wicked  are  cut  off;  for  my  sole  delight  is  in  them. 

3.  And  behold,  I   say  unto  you,  my   son, — you  complain   of 
not  having  the  power  to  govern  my  people.     You  say  that  you  are 
nearly  run  over  by  some  of  them ;  that  they  will  do  as  they  choose 
to  do,  and  that  you  cannot  help  yourself;   and  you  wish  to  know 
what  you  are  to  do  with  such  men.     You  must  keep  your  eye 
upon  them.     If  they  do  not  go  among  my  people  to  strive  to 
destroy  them,  you  need  not  to  trouble  yourself  about  them,  but 
let  them  do  as  they  choose.     If  they  wish  to  go  to  destruction, 
they  may  do  so ;   but  they  shall   not  have  the  liberty  to  run  at 
large  among  my  people  to  give  the  devil  power  over  them. 

4.  There  are  a  few  among  my  people  who  are  rebellious,  and 
you  can  do  no  good  by  counselling  them,  for  they  will   not   obey 
you.     I  know  them,  and  when  I  come  I  will  send  them  to  their 
graves ;    until  then,  you  may  let  them  take  their  own  course ;    but 
they  must  not  be  permitted  to  go  abroad  among  the  faithful  of 


THE    REBELLIOUS.  381 

my  people  to  seek  to  infuse  their  poisonous  influence  into  their 
minds  in  order  to  destroy  them.  Srch  a  wicked  act  I  will  not 
endure  from  them.  If  they  commit  it,  they  shall  instantly  die.  I 
am  the  Lord. 

5.  And  as  I  have   said  unto  you    before, — my  people  have 
destroyed  their  public  meeting  room.     They  have  no  place  where- 
in to  meet  together,   even  to  hear  the  revelations  read  which   I 
shall  give  from  this  time  until  I  come.     I  shall  speak   unto  them 
several  times  more,  and  I  wish  them  to  pay  diligent  heed  to  what 
I  shall  say  unto  them.     I  shall  come  unto  them  in  time  to  release 
them.     But  before  that  time,  I   want  to  reveal   a  few  more  im- 
portant things  unto  them  as  fast  as  I  can  coveniently  do  so. 

6.  They  must  humble  themselves  greatly  before  me,  for  they 
need  great  humility.     I  am  about  to  talk  unto  them  in  a  plain  and 
pointed  manner,  and  I  shall  search  their  hearts,  and  find  out  their 
full  intentions ;   and  if  there  are  any  among  them  who   cannot  sac/ 
rifice  all  things  for  the  gospel's  sake,  they  will  fall  by  the  hands  of 
the  destroying  angels ;   for  I  cannot  deliver  any  person  who  can- 
not make  a  full  and  complete  sacrifice  of  all  things.     My  people 
should  lay  these  things  to  heart,  and  try  themselves  thereby,  and 
see  if  they  can  make   such   a  sacrifice.     If  they    cannot  do  this, 
they  may  conclude  that  there  is  no  deliverance  for  them ;    but,  on 
the  other  hand,  sudden  death.     I  deal  honestly  with  them.     I  tell 
them  what  I  can  do,  and  what  I  cannot  do.     They  may  depend 
upon  what  I  say.     I  do  not  want  to  deceive  them ;   neither  do  I 
want  them  to  deceive  themselves.     They  can  save  their  lives  by 
doing  what  the  law  requires ;  but,  otherwise  they  cannot. 

7.  The  law  is  about  to  be   enforced   upon  my  people;   there- 
fore, I  want  them   to  understand   it  as  it   is.     They  cannot  get 
around  it.     They  need  not  think  that  they   can.     When  the  law 
is  presented  to  a  people,  life  and  death  is  also   presented  to  them ; 
for,  to  obey  it,  is  life ;    but  to  reject  it,  is  death.     I  fear  much  for 
some  of  my  people ;  for  they  are  determined  to  run  in  the  face  of 
the  law,  and  think  that  they  will  not  be  slain.     They  need  not  to 
think  any  such  thing ;   for,  if  I  cannot  convince  them  to  the  con- 
trary by  my  word,  I  shall   convince   them   by  my   power  when   I 
come.     They  are  like  the  unthinking  horse  that  rushes  into  battle 
and  is  destroyed.     I  want  to  save  the  lives  of  as  many  of  my  peo- 


382       THE  PEOPLE  MUST  HEAR  THE  REVELATIONS. 

pie  as  I  possibly  can.  If  they  had  as  much  thought  for  them- 
selves as  I  have  for  them,  not  one  of  them  would  lose  their  lives 
through  transgression.  But  they  do  not  think  about  what  they  are 
doing.  O  how  they  permit  the  devil  to  deceive  them  !  They  may 
think  that  L  do  not  tell  the  truth ;  but  I  do.  They  work  against 
common  sense.  Their  intellects  are  of  no  use  to  them.  They  act 
as  though  their  heads  were  of  less  value  to  them  than  a  turnip. 
They  could  make  some  use  of  a  turnip;  for  when  they  were 
hungry  they  could  eat  it ;  but  their  heads  are  of  no  use  to  them. 
Their  legs  have  carried  such  heads  about  long  enough.  It  is  time 
that  they  were  lying  in  their  graves,  where  I  shall  soon  send  them. 
I  shall  deal  honestly  with  my  people  whether  it  be  in  saving  their 
lives,  or  destroying  them. 

8.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — inasmuch  as  you 
have  no  place  wherein  to  assemble  with  my  people,  to  read  unto 
them  the  revelations  which  I  shall  give  unto  them,  you  must  use 
your  own  judgment  in  relation  to  this  matter.  You  must,  by 
some  means,  let  all  my  people  hear  the  revelations  as  I  shall  give 
them  unto  you.  Do  the  best  that  you  can.  It  would  be  well 
for  my  people  to  assemble  themselves  in  small  numbers  through- 
out the  camp,  to  hold  meetings,  and  thereby  seek  to  edify 
and  build  each  other  up.  In  this  way  they  must  endeavor  to 
strengthen  each  other  for  a  few  days  until  I  come.  I  shall  come 
speedily  to  their  release.  They  may  keep  on  the  lookout  for  me. 
I  am  the  Bright  and  Morning  Star;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION  CONTAINING  AN  OATH  TO  BE  SWORN 

BY  THOSE  WHO  HAVE  YIELDED  OBEDIENCE 

TO  THE  FULNESS  OF    THE  GOSPEL. 


No.  208.  WEBER,  UTAH,  January  23rd,  1862. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts,  and  I  am  about  to 
divide  these  people  whom  I  have  gathered  together.  I  am  about 
to  cast  some  of 'them  off.  I  will  now  lay  a  stumbling-block  before 


THE    FAITHLESS.  383 

them.  I  have  trifled  with  them  long  enough,  and  I  will  now 
purge  the  false-hearted  from  among  the  faithful  of  my  people.  I 
I  am  astonished  at  them  !  They  show  how  much  they  appreciate 
the  blessings  which  I  have  conferred  upon  them.  Oh,  the  sin  of 
ingratitude  which  they  have  committed  against  me !  But  they 
shall  meet  with  their  reward.  They  are  so  afraid  of  me  that  they 
cannot  do  their  own  duties.  They  are  so  afflicted  with  fear  that 
they  have  no  pleasure  of  their  lives.  They  are  afraid  to  make  the 
least  move,  lest  they  should  lose  something  which  would  never 
again  be  replaced.  Such  fearful  people  are  of  no  use  to  me.  I 
can  do  very  well. without  their  assistance.  They  are  a  constant 
burden  unto  themselves.  They  make  their  lives  miserable  by  their 
dark  forebodings,  and  they  are  continually  striving  to  post  them- 
selves up  against  a  failure.  O,  what  faith  they  have  in  the  full 
keys  of  the  holy  priesthood  which  they  know  that  they  have 
received !  O,  how  they  insult  me  with  their  wickedness  !  I  can 
make  nothing  of  them.  They  fear  that  I  shall  never  come  to 
deliver  my  people.  They  are  not  willing  to  risk  all  for  the  light 
which  they  have  received,  as  hundreds  of  others  have  done.  They 
say  that  they  want  to  see  t>he  power  of  my  gospel,  and  that,  then, 
they  will  consecrate.  I  have  given  unto  them  the  full  keys  of  the 
holy  priesthood,  and  I  have  called  upon  them  for  but  little,  as  yet. 
I  only  called  upon  them  to  consecrate  their  property,  and  to  make 
a  complete  offering  up  in  their  hearts  of  all  they  possessed.  I  did 
not  intend  to  take  it  all  away  from  them  until  I  had  given  unto 
them  a  manifestation  of  my  power,  and,  even  after  that,  they  will 
need  means  to  live  upon,  if  they  abide  my  law. 

2.  After  I  shall  have  committed  unto  my  people  the  power  of 
my  gospel,  I  shall  commence  to  give  unto  each  of  them  a  steward- 
ship ;  but  I  shall  not  do  this  while  my  Church  is  in  weakness.  I 
only  call  for  a  sacrifice,  in  the  heart,  of  all  that  people  have,  and 
if  these  people  had  made  such  a  complete  sacrifice,  they  would  not 
have  withheld  their  property  when  I  sent  my  steward  for  only  a 
small  portion  of  it.  If  they  withheld  a  little  from  him  when  I  sent 
him  for  it,  it  proves  that  they  are  hypocrites,  and  that  they  had 
never,  in  their  hearts,  consecrated  a  particle  of  it ;  if  they  had  done 
so,  they  would  have  allowed  my  steward  to  take  not  only  a  little, 
but  all  that  they  had,  and  they  would  not  have  offered  one  word 


384  THE    HYPOCRITES. 

of  complaint.  If  my  steward  had  met  with  a  person  of  this  kind, 
he  would  have  said  at  once:  "That  person  has  consecrated  in 
his  heart,  and  that  is  enough.  He  shall  retain  his  property.  He 
has  fulfilled  the  law,  and  I  shall  only  take  a  little  from  him  now, 
for  he  will  let  his  property  go  whenever  it  is  called  for.  He  is 
willing  either  to  hold  it,  or  to  let  it  go ;  therefore,  it  is  right  for 
him  to  hold  it  as  it  seemeth  me  good."  I,  the  Lord,  can  work 
with  such  a  person.  He  is  willing  to  obey  me  in  all  things.  He 
is  not  an  idolator.  He  loves  the  truth  above  all  things ;  he  can 
sacrifice  everything  else  for  it.  Such  persons  I  have  accepted,  and 
they  shall  inherit  the  earth  and  possess  wealth  in  .abundance,  until 
their  souls  are  satisfied. 

3.  O  ye  hypocrites  and  deceivers !     I  need  not  to  look  to  you 
for   help.     I  have  sent  my  steward  unto  you  to  try  you,  and   I  am 
now   satisfied  concerning  you.       I  did  not  want   much   of  your 
property   to  assist  the  poor  before  I  came  to  deliver  the  faithful  of 
my  people ;  but  I   wanted  to  try  you  who  profess  to  have  conse- 
crated your  property. 

4.  The  hypocrites  may  fl.ee  away  to  save  their  lives ;  but  I  will 
follow  them  up  and  slay  them,   no   matter  where  they  go.     They 
need  not  to  think  that  they  can  save  their  lives   by   running  away. 
They  are  as  safe  here  as  they  would  be  in  any  other  place.     They 
cannot    run  away   from  me.     I   am  about  ready  to  recompense 
them.     I  am  bringing  things  to  a  point   as  fast  as  I   can.     They 
are  working  at  a  rapid  rate.     I  am  now  about  to  draw  the  dividing 
line  between  the   hypocrites   and  my  faithful  people.     The  hypo- 
crites, though  they  have   not  seen  me,  begin  to  tremble  already ; 
but  I  can  tell  them  that  they  will  tremble  when  I  come. 

5.  The    inhabitants    of  this    Territory    may  begin  to  prepare 
themselves  for  a  visit  from  my  destroying  angels,  who  will  speedily 
lay  dead  about  one-half  of  the  inhabitants  of  this  Territory.     They 
need  not  to  think  that  they  can  get  out  of  my  way,  and  shun   my 
judgments,  for  they  cannot.    When  I  come,  one  of  the  first  things 
that  I  shall  do  will  be  to  weed  that   little  crop.     But  I   shall  not 
hurt  the  whole-hearted.     I  know  them ;   they  are  mine,  and  I  will 
separate  them  from  the  false-hearted.     My   people   know  what  I 
require  of  them.     They  might   as    well  humble  themselves,  and 
obey  my  law,   and  thereby  save  their  lives,  as  to  rebel  against  it, 


THE    RICH    SHOULD    ASSIST    THE    POOR.  385 

and  lose  them.  If  they  had  allowed  my  steward  to  take  that  por- 
tion of  their  property  which  he  called  for,  for  the  support  of  my 
poor,  it  would  have  been  all  that  I  required  of  them  at  that  time. 
I  did  not  want  to  strip  them  of  all  that  they  had  until  the  law 
should  be  put  in  full  force,  which  cannot  be  until  I  shall  have- 
delivered  my  people.  I  have  only,  as  yet,  been  showing  unto 
them  the  nature  of  that  law,  and  I  shall  not  call  upon  them  to  keep 
it  fully  until  I  give  unto  them  a  stewardship.  But  I  want  the  rich 
of  my  people  to  hand  out  their  substance  to  feed  the  poor,  now 
that  it  is  needed ;  for  it  will  not  be  needed  when  I  have  delivered 
all  the  spoil  of  mine  enemies  into  their  hands.  Now  is  the  time, 
and  not  after  their  deliverance,  that  the  poor  of  my  people  need 
assistance.  If  those  of  my  people  who  are  in  good  circumstances 
wish  to  do  good,  let  them  help  the  poor  who  are  in  their  midst, 
and  not  keep  their  property  from  them  until  I  come ;  for  then  they 
will  not  need  it.  They  will  have  an  abundance  of  property,  even 
more  than  they  will  be  able  to  take  care  of.  If  the  wealthy  of  my 
people  cannot  assist  the  poor  who  are  in  their  midst,  their  property 
is  of  no  use  to  me ;  for  if  I  ever  need  the  property  of  the  rich,  I 
need  it  to  feed  and  clothe  the  poor,  when  the  poor  need  it;  and  if 
the  rich  cannot  deliver  it  into  my  hands  when  I  can  use  it  to  good 
advantage,  I  do  not  want  it  at  all.  If  persons  wish  to  do  good  to 
their  fellow  creatures,  it  should  be'  when  they  are  needy,  even  when 
they  can  appreciate  a  favor.  They  will  not  need  the  assistance  of 
the  rich  when  they  become  rich  themselves.  Therefore,  if  the 
rich  who  are  now  among  my  people  cannbt  assist  their  poor 
brethren  while  they  need  assistance,  the  poor  of  my  people  will 
have  nothing  to  thank  them  for.  But  I  will  bless  the  poor  abund- 
antly with  the  good  things  of  the  earth ;  for  my  sole  delight  is  in 
them;  they  are  my  chosen  ones;  they  have  no  earthly  object 
which  twines  around  their  hearts ;  their  dependence  is  in  me ;  the 
truth  is  all  in  all  with  them ;  they  are  my  chosen  people,  and  they 
shall  inherit  the  earth  forever.  The  rich  I  need  not  to  look  to  for 
much ;  for  if  I  do,  I  shall  be  disappointed.  The  poor  are  my 
hope,  and  I  will  raise  them  up,  and  make  them  the  head  over  all 
things,  and  the  rich  who  are  permitted  to  live  shall  serve  them.  I 
will  bring  down  their  high  heads,  even  to  the  ground  ;  for  I  am  the 
Lord.  I  resist  the  proud,  and  exalt  the  poor  and  humble. 


386  PRESIDENT    OF    THE    AARONIC    PRIESTHOOD. 

6.  And  behold,  I  speak  unto  you  concerning  the  president  of 
the   priesthood   of  Aaron.     It   is  his  duty  to  be  the  first  steward 
over  all  temporal  matters,  under  the  direction  of  the  presidency 
of  the  Melchisedec  priesthood,  and  also  to    meet    with    them    in 
counsel   from   time  to  time,  to  report  unto  them  the  state  of  tem- 
poral affairs   among   my  people.     He  shall  receive  counsel  from 
them   upon   all   important   matters.     He  shall  not  have  the  power 
to  make  such  calls  upon  the  rich  for  the  support  of  the  poor  as  he 
may  think  fit ;  but  he  shall   receive  his  authority  from  the  presi- 
dency of  the  high  priesthood.     He  shall  make  no  call  upon  the 
rich  of  my  people  for  property,  until  he  has  first  obtained  permis- 
sion from  them,  and  when  he  does  so,  he  shall  receive  a  note  from 
them   signed  by  their  hands,   and  he   shall  present  the  note,  or 
notes,  to  the  person,   or  persons,    unto  whom  he  shall  apply  for 
property  to  assist  the  poor,  in  order  that  no  undue  and  unreason- 
able calls  shall  be  made  upon  the   more  wealthy  of  my  people. 
Every  precaution   must  be  taken  against  wrong,  in  order  that  all 
things  among  my  people  may  be  conducted  in  truth  and  honesty. 
Behold,   I  am  the  Lord,   and   I   do  not  censure  my  servant,  the 
bishop,  for  being  dishonest.     He  has  been  very  diligent,  and  faith- 
ful in  his  office,  and  he  is  not  blamable.     I  am  well  pleased  with 
his   course.     I  cannot   bring  about  a  perfect  organization  all  at 
once ;  but  I  have  to  do  it  gradually.     I   have   not  givtn  these  in- 
structions because  the  bishop  has  done  wrong;  but  because  it  is 
the   order  of  the  priesthood.     He  must  consult  the  presidency  of 
the  high  priesthood   upon  all  important  matters;  for  this  is  his 
duty. 

7.  And  now,   behold,   I  speak  unto  you  again  concerning  my 
people,  and  I  make  known  unto  you  what  I  require  at  the  hands 
of  all  those  whom  I  shall  deliver.     I  require  of  them  that  they 
shall  take  an  oath  in  my  presence,   in  the  presence  of  my  holy 
angels,  and  in  the  presence  of   my  servant,  the  prophet,   and  his 
counsellor,  or  counsellors,  as  the  case  may  be.     I  shall  be  present 
when  my  people   are   called  upon  to  take  that  oath,  and  I  shall 
deliver  none  but  those  of  my  people  who  will  take  that  oath  in  all 
honesty  and  sincerity  of  heart.     I  do  not  wish  a  hypocrite  to  swear 
that  oath,  lest  I  should  consume  him  in  a  minute;  for  I   will  not 
suffer  hypocrites  to  swear  that   oath.     When  my   people  shall  be 


THE  PEOPLE  WILL  BE  TRIED.  387 

called  to  swear  it,  they  shall  stand  in  my  presence,  and  in  the 
presence  of  my  holy  angels.  Although  I  may  not  show  myself 
unto  them  at  that  time,  yet  they  may  feel  my  power  penetrate  them 
to  their  innermost  souls.  They  will  feel  that  I  am  there,  though 
they  do  not  see  me;  for  I  shall  smite  hypocrites  dead  if  they— 
come  there  to  stand  in  my  presence  to  mock  me.  I  will  speak 
unto  you  again^  and  make  known  unto  you  the  time  when  you 
shall  call  my  people  together  to  take  that  oath.  I  will  try  my 
people's  honesty.  You  need  not  to  care  how  many  of  them  rise 
up  against  you  at  that  time ;  for  I  will  stand  by  your  side,  and 
should  all  the  world  be  against  you,  I  am  more  than  a  match  for 
them.  I  could  lay  the  whole  earth  desolate  in  a  few  minutes, 
should  it  be  necessary.  I  am  not  to  be  mocked  by  hypocrites. 
I  will  speedily  perform  an  act  that  will  awaken  those  who  are 
asleep  in  this  Territory.  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts. 

8.  And  ndw,  behold,  I  give  unto  you  the  oath  which  my  peo- 
ple shall  swear  in  my  presence,  in  the  presence  of  my  holy  angels, 
and  also  in  the  presence  of  you,  and  of  your  counsellors  ;  and  all 
those  people  who  do  not  swear  this  oath,  shall  have  their  names 
taken  off  of  the  list,  and  they  shall  not  stand  in  the  rank  with  my 
faithful  people.  The  male,  or  female,  shall  stand  before  you  and 
your  counsellors,  and  express  the  following  words:  "I,  the  ser- 
vant (or  hand  maiden)  of  the  Lord;  present  myself  before  him, 
and  his  servants,  on  this  solemn  occasion,  to  swear  an  oath  in 
their  presence.  And  I  hereby  swear  that  I  will  abide  all  the 
laws  which  he  shall  reveal  unto  his  people  while  I  remain  upon  the 
earth,  at  the  peril  of  my  life ;  and  that  I  will  faithfully  abide  all 
the  counsels  of  the  Lord  which  he  has  already  given,  and  which 
he  shall  hereafter  give  through  his  servant,  the  prophet ;  and  that 
I  will  walk  blamelessly  before  the  Lord  until  the  day  of  my  death. 
This  oath  I  swear  in  the  presence  of  the  Lord,  of  his  holy  angels, 
and  of  his  servants,  who  are  my  witnesses  that  I  have  bound  my- 
self unto  the  Lord  by  an  oath  which  cannot  be  broken."  After 
repeating  these  words  he  (or  she)  shall  kiss  the  written  word  of  the 
Lord.  No  person  can,  after  having  sworn  this  oath,  and  broken 
it,  live  upon  the  earth ;  for  death  is  the  penalty  for  breaking  this 
oath. 

I   now  add   no   more.     I   am  the  Lord  of  Hosts ;  even  Jesus 
Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


THE    OATH. 


REVELATION    SHOWING    THE    MANNER   IN   WHICH 

THE    OATH    SHALL    BE  ADMINISTERED 

TO    THE    PEOPLE. 


No.  209.  WEBER,  UTAH,  January  25th,  1862. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — it  is  lawful  for  all  of 
Abraham's  seed  to  swear  the  oath  whicft  I  have  now  placed  before 
these  few  people  who  have  yielded  obedience  to  the  fulness  of  my 
gospel;  and  all  people  who  shall  hereafter  enter  into  my  Church, 
under  the  fulness  of  my  gospel,  shall  swear  that  oath,  or  they  shall 
have  no  part  in  my  kingdom.  None  shall  have  a  place  in  my 
Church  who  will  not  take  that  oath.  When  the  fulness  of  my 
holy  priesthood  was  upon  the  earth  among  the  children  of  Israel, 
they  all  took  that  oath  before  I  delivered  them.  The  law  of 
heaven  forbade  me  to  deliver  them  until  they  had  taken  it.  It  is 
an  oath  which  has  to  be  sworn  by  two-thirds  of  Adam's  posterity. 
They  swore  it  while  in  their  first  estate  in  the  presence  of  their 
father,  Adam.  But  the  other  third  would  not  swear  it ;  and,  on 
that  account,  their  names  were  blotted  out  of  the  Lamb's  Book  of 
Life.  They  would  not  sustain  the  principles  of  righteousness; 
but  they  set  themselves  against  them.  They  would  not  abide  the 
law  of  the  Lord,  and  consequently  they  have  neither  part  nor  lot 
with  him.  They  are  under  another  power ;  and  they  labor  to 
destroy  all  truth  and  righteousness.  Those  of  my  people  who 
will  not  swear  the  oath,  partake  of  the  influence  of  the  devil,  and 
lend  him  their  assistance  to  destroy  those  same  principles  of  truth 
and  righteousness  which  they,  in  their  first  estate,  swore  to  sus- 
tain. Those  of  therA  who  are  the  children  of  Adam,  swore  it  upon 
this  earth  when  it  was  in  its  first  estate ;  and  those  of  them  who 
are  high  priests,  swore  it  in  the  presence  of  their  Fathers  on  earths 
which  have  become  celestial.  All  those  who  are  heirs  to  the  resur- 
rection have  sworn  an  oath  in  the  presence  of  their  father,  Adam, 
to  uphold  every  principle  of  truth  and  righteousness ;  and  if  they 
fail  to  do  so,  they  forfeit  their  mortal  existence.  And  inasmuch 
as  two-thirds  of  Adam's  children  swore  an  oath  in  their  first-estate, 
and  bound  themselves  unto  their  father  to  uphold  all  truth  and 


CONCERNING    THE    OATH.  389 

righteousness ;  so  in  like  manner  they  will,  again,  be  called  upon 
to  swear  the  same  oath  while  in  mortality;  and  if  they  will  not 
swear  it  when  it  is  presented  to  them,  they  are  traitors,  and  are 
guilty  of  treason  against  the  government  of  God ;  and  all  such  I 

shall  slay ;  for  I  am  compelled  by   law  to  do  so.     I  slew  all  the 

children  of  Israel  who  were  guilty  of  treason  against  my  govern- 
ment. Not  one  of  them  who  were  guilty  of  that  crime  ever  escaped 
my  judgments. 

2.  My  people  must  humble  themselves  greatly  before  rne,  and 
mind  what  they  are  doing.     They  are  now  approaching  my   laws, 
and  they  need  to  be   solemn,   and  very  careful   lest  they  should 
break  one  of  them,  and  be  slain.     They  need  not  to  think  that  I 
deal  hard  with  them.     If  I  enforce  a  law  upon  them,  it  is  no  more 
than  what  both  I  and  my  holy  angels  abide — we  abide  a  perfect 
law,  and  we  never  break  it  in  the  least  degree.     I  do  not  call  upon 
my  people  to  do  a  thing  which  I  do  not  do  myself.     I   do  .much 
more    than    I   shall  ever  require  at   their  hands   while  they  are 
clothed   with  -mortality.     I  require  nothing  more  of  mortals  than 
what  they  are  well  able  to  live  up  to,  if  they  will  exert  themselves 
to  do  $o ;  but  if  they  suffer  themselves  to  go  to  sleep,  the  smallest 
duty  is  a  trouble  to  them ;  even  the   smallest  requirement    which 
the  gospel   makes  upon  them  is  too  much  for  them  to  attend  to. 
A  person  who  is  asleep,  and  without  energy,  is  of  no  worth.     He 
will  turn  around  and  deny  all  truth  on  account  of  his  laziness  and 
dishonesty.     He  is  not  worthy  to  bear  the  name  of  a  man.     What 
are  such  men  good  for?    They  are  too  lazy  to  carry  their  worthless 
bodies  about  with  them,  and  I  promise  them  that  I   will  speedily 
relieve  them  of  that  burden. 

3.  I   am  very  sorry  that  I  have  such  worthless  people  to  deal 
with.     I  am   compelled  to  make  use  of  language  suitable  to  their 
cases.     I  have  to  make  myself  appear  very  low,  in  consequence  of 
being  compelled  to  use  very  common-place  language  in  order  to 
deal  with,  and  describe,  such  unprincipled  and  worthless  people  as 
some   of  my  people   are.     But  after  all  that  I  can  do,  in  showing 
unto  them  their  foolishness,  I  cannot  put  them  to  shame.    They  are 
as  presumtious,  blind,  rebellious  and  wicked  as  the  devil  himself. 
Language  will  not  penetrate  them  at  all.     I  have  tried  that  method 
with  them,  and  it  is  all  to  no  purpose ;  but   I  will  penetrate  them. 


390  CONCERNING    THE    OATH. 

I  shall  not  be  afflicted  by  them  but  a  few  more  days,  at  the 
furthest.  I  shall  soon  assemble  my  people  to  take  the  oath,  and 
as  soon  as  they  are  well  through  with  that  matter,  I  will  come.  I 
have  nothing  whatever  to  wait  for  after  that  business  is  well  over, 
and  all  things  are  arranged. 

4.  I  will  reveal  unto  you  the  manner  in  which  you  shall  admin- 
ister the¥  oath  unto   my   people.     You  must  commence  with  the 
high   priesthood,    and  when  you  shall   have   administered  it  unto 
them,  you  must  administer   it  unto  the  priests  of  Aaron.      After 
them,  you  shall  call  upon  the  women  in  their  order,   as   you  shall 
have  called  upon  the  men  in  their  order,  commencing  with  your 
own  wife ;  and   lastly,  you  shall  call  upon  the  boys  who  have  been 
baptized,   but   not  ordained.     When  you   call  upon  my  people  to 
swear  the  oath,  as  many  as  twelve  persons  may  stand  before  you  at 
a  time;  and  when  either  you,  or  one  of  your  counsellors   (as  the 
case  may  be),  stand  before  them  to  administer  the  oath  unto  them, 
those  who  are  assembled  shall  repeat  the  oath,  word  by  word,  after 
the   person   administering,   and   after  they  have   repeated  it,  they 
shall  come  to  one  of  my  servants  who  shall  hold  the  book  of  reve- 
lations in  his  hand,  and  they  shall  kiss  it,  one  by  one. 

5.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — you  must  be  there 
yourself.     You  need  not  administer  the  oath  unto  my  people  your- 
self, unless  you  feel  disposed  to  do  so.     You   may  have  the  privi- 
lege to  call  upon  one  of  your  counsellors  to  administer  the  oath  in 
your  stead,  and  I   will   sanction   it  as  though  you  administered  it 
yourself.     If  you   authorize  another,   he  acts  under  you,  and  the 
thing  done,  is  as  though  you  had  done  it  yourself.     I  am  the  Lord 
of  Hosts. 

6.  And  behold,    I  say   unto  you,  my  son, — I  will  speak  unto 
you   again,   and   make   known  unto  you  the   way  and  manner  in 
which  you  shall  arrange  all  things  relating  to  the  affair  which  now 
lies  before  you.     Be  of  good  courage ;  for  I  am  with  you.     I  am 
the   Lord  of  Hosts;    even  Jesus   Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and 
Amen, 


INSTRUCTED    TO    PREPARE    TO    SWEAR    THE    OATH.  391 

REVELATION  INSTRUCTING  THE  PEOPLE  TO    SET- 
TLE ALL  DIFFICULTIES,  AND  PREPARE  THEM- 
SELVES   TO    SWEAR  THE  OATH. 


No.  210.  WEBER,  UTAH,  January  2yth,  1862. 

1.  I  WISH  to  speak  unto  you,  my  son,  concerning  my  people. 
Insasmuch  as  I  am  about  to  call  upon  them  to  take  an  oath,  it  is 
necessary  that   they   should  bring  themselves  to  perfect  order,  and 
to  settle  all  their  difficulties   with  each  other.     They   must   do  so 
before  they  come  into  my  presence,  or  I  will  cast  them  off.     I  will 
not  suffer  stubborn  and  rebellious  people  to  take  that  oath.     Those 
who  swear  it  must  be  very  humble  and  submissive,  so  that   I   can 
deal  with  them.     They  must  have  no  hardness  of  feeling  towards 
each   other.     If  they  wish   to  be  accepted  of  me,  they  must  put 
from    them   all   such   feelings,   and    become  one.      I   want   none 
but    the    honest    and    humble.      Such    I   can    deal    with;    but    I 
can   do   nothing  with  the  proud  and  rebellious  but  destroy  them, 
which  I  shall  do.     Therefore,  if  there  are  any  in  the  midst  of  my 
people  who  have  hard  feelings  against  their  brethren,  or  sisters,  let 
them  make  such  things  right,  and  become  one  with  them,  in  me. 
They   need  not  to  present  themselves  before  me   and  my   holy 
angels   to  take  the  oath  if  they  will  not  first  do  as  I  command 
them.     They  will  now  know  my  mind  concerning  them. 

2.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — when  you  call  upon 
my  people  to  stand  before  you  to  take  the  oath,  you  shall  put  the 
following  questions  to  them  :     "Are   you  who  present  yourselves 
before   me  on   this  solemn  occasion  at  perfect   peace  with  each 
other?"     "Are  you  willing  to  be  united  according  to  the  require- 
ments of  the  gospel  of  Jesus  Christ — even  to  become  one  in  him?" 
And  when  you   have   put  these  questions  to  them,  they  shall  all 
express   their  feelings ;  and  should  there   be  any  standing  before 
you  who  shall  not  be  able  to  satisfactorily   answer  these   questions 
in  truth  and  honesty  before  me,  you  must  command  them  to  stand 
on  one  side ;  they  must  not  take  the  oath,  for  they  are  rejected  by 
me.     Therefore,   let  my  people  prepare  themselves   in   a  proper 
manner  to  answer  the  questions,  and  to  take  the  oath.     Those  who 


392  .        CONCERNING    THE    OATH.  " 

« 

• 

intend  to  keep  my  law,  and  become  members  of  my  kingdom, 
need  to  be  preparing  themselves  to  take  the  oath  in  order  that  they 
may  not  be  cast  off  when  they  present  themselves  before  me ;  for 
they  will  then  have  no  time  to  do  so ;  it  will  then  be  too  late. 
Therefore,  let  them  prepare  themselves  in  time,  that  it  may  be  well 
with  them.  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts. 

3.  And  behold,   I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — as  soon  as  my  peo- 
ple shall   be  well  through  with  taking  the  oath,  I  shall  come  and 
deliver   them.     After   I   shall  have  finished  that  business,  I  shall 
have  nothing  more  to  wait  for.     You  may  depend   upon  what  I 
say  unto  yon.     You  understand  the  signs  of  the  times.     To  take 
the  oath  is  the  last  thing  that  I  shall  call  upon  my  people  to  sub- 
scribe to,  before  I  come  to  deliver  them. 

4.  Let  them  .gather  themselves  together,    and  hold  as  many 
meetings  as  they  possibly  can  until   I  call  upon  them  to  take  the 
oath.      And  let  my  servants  thoroughly  instruct  them,  so  that  they 
may  understand  what  they  are  about  to  do,  in  order  that  that  mat- 
ter may  have  a  due  bearing  upon  their  minds;  that  they  may  enter 
into  it  understandingly,  and  not  under  any  false  impressions.     Let 
them  cultivate  my  spirit,  and  it  will  lead  them  aright  in  all  things, 
and  strengthen  them,  and  give  unto  them  power  to  keep  my  laws 
as  fast  as  I  shall  reveal  them  unto  them.     If  they   are  willing  to 
invite  my  holy  'angels  to  constantly  attend  them,  they  will  not  lack 
for  power  to  keep  my  laws.     I  am  all  sufficient   for  them,   if  they 
will  only   cling   close  to  me.     If  they  will  be  faithful  unto  me,  I 
will  be  faithful  unto  them.     My  yoke   is  easy,    and  my  burden  is 
light.     Let  my  people  fully  prepare  themselves  for  that  which  lies 
before  them,  and  all  will  be  well  with  them.     Lo,  I  come  quickly. 
Even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION  CONCERNING  NIELS  JACOBSEN. 


No.   211.  WEBER,  UTAH,  January  28th,    1862. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts,  and,  according  to  your 
request,  I  speak  unto  you  concerning  Niels  Jacobsen.  I  know 
him.  I  called  him  many  years  ago,  while  my  Church  was  in  weak- 


EXCITEMENT.  393 

ness,  to  preach  my  gospel,  and,  in  that  day  he  did  some  good.  At 
times  he  was  overcome,  and  committed  sins  before  me,  which  I 
forgave  him.  I  understand  his  nature.  I  knew  that  he  was  an 
excitable  person,  and  that,  on  account  of  his  excitability,  and  not 
because  he  desired  it  in  his  heart,  he  time  after  time  committed 
sins,  and  was  thereby  led  away  from  me.  When  he  came  to  his 
senses,  and  saw  his  true  position,  he  would  humble  himself  before 
me ;  and,  knowing  his  nature  as  I  did,  I  could  not  do  otherwise 
than  forgive  him. 

2.  Where   there   is    excitement,    there  is  uncertainty.     Many 
people  whose  hearts  were  honest,  who  might  have  lived  upon  the 
earth   as  shining  lights  to  their  fellow  creatures,  who  might  have 
been  examples  of  piety  and  goodness  to  all  those  by  whom  they 
weie  surrounded,  have  destroyed  their  lives  by  excitement.     It  has 
destroyed  both  them  and  their  talents,  and  robbed  the  world  of 
their  services,   which  otherwise  might  have  been  of  much  benefit 
to  the  human  race.     But,  alas  !  they  are  gone ;   and  many  others, 
on  account  of  the  same  failing,  will  follow  them.     It  is  the  greatest 
failing   that  mortals  have.     No    matter  how  many  talents  a  man 
may   possess,   or  how  brilliant  they  may  be,  if  he  has  that  failing, 
those   talents    are    rendered    worthless.       Such    men    cannot    be 
depended  upon ;  for,  with  them,   all  things  are  uncertain.      Men 
who  are  called  to  hold  responsible  offices  in  my  Church,  must  not 
give  way  to  excited  feelings ;  but  they  must  strive  to  overcome 
them.     They  must  never  act  under  excitement ;  but  when  they  act 
they  must  be  calm  and  deliberate,  and  thus  allow  all  their  senses 
to  operate  at  the  same  time,  and  what  they  do,  will  be  done  ac- 
cording to  their  best  judgment,  and  they  will  be  justified  before  me. 

3.  All   people  have  not  judgment   alike — some    have    better 
judgment  than  others.     All   people  who  are  heirs  to  the  resurrec- 
tion  will,    sooner  or  later,   have  to  regulate  themselves,  and  their 
judgments,  by  my  words.     I  am  their  Chief  Judge,  and  they  must 
regulate  themselves  by  me.     Their  senses  and  judgments  must  all 
be  swallowed  up  in  mine;  this  is  their  duty.     But  if  they  will  not 
do  it,  I  will  not  hold  them  guiltless.     Their  judgment  is  worthless, 
unless  they  regulate  it  by  mine.     I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts.     But 
when   men  are  excited,   they   neither  regulate   themselves  by  my 
words,   nor  use  their  own  judgments.     They  can  only  see  one 


394  CONCERNING    NIELS    JACOBSEN. 

object  before  them.  They  do  not  think  of  the  consequences 
which  may  follow  their  reckless  course,  and  consequently  they 
are  doomed  to  suffer  bitterly  in  this  world. 

4.  And  now,  behold,  I  speak  unto  you  again  concerning  Niels 
Jacobsen.  I  called  him  into  the  fulness  of  my  gospel,  and  gave 
unto  him  an  honorable  place  among  my  people.  He  might  have 
prospered  in  his  office  and  calling  among  them,  and  have  gained 
to  himself  a  name  that  would  never  have  perished  from  the  earth ; 
but  through  excitement,  he  turned  traitor  to  me  and  to  my  work, 
and  sought  to  do  me  an  injury.  He  knew  not  what  he  was  doing. 
He  has  fought  against  his  best  friend ;  and  he  now  has  no  friend 
upon  the  earth,  who  can  befriend  him  in  the  least  degree,  if  I  am 
not  his  friend.  What  can  I  do  with  him?  He  is  miserable.  Can 
I  restore  him  to  his  former  office  as  an  apostle  ?  No,  I  cannot. 
He  has  broken  the  covenant  which  he  made  with  me  when  I  con- 
ferred the  apostleship  upon  him.  Before  he  was  ordained  to  the 
office  of  an  apostle,  he  covenanted  with  me  in  the  presence  of  all 
my  people  that  he  would  be  true  to  his  trust ;  but  now  he  has 
betrayed  both  my  confidence  and  the  confidence  of  my  people; 
and  should  I  restore  him  to  that  office,  my  people  would  not  be 
able  to  place  confidence  in  him ;  therefore,  he  cannot  be  restored 
to  the  apostleship.  But  if  he  wishes  to  remain  among  my  people, 
and  will  humble  himself  sincerely,  and  walk  worthily  before  me,  I 
will  forgive  him  his  sins,  and  he  may  hold  the  office  of  a  high 
priest,  and  become  a  member  of  the  high  priests  quorum ;  for  that 
is  his  birthright.  But  if  he  will  not  accept  of  the  offer  which  I 
now  make  unto  him,  but  will  fight  against  me,  I  will  slay  him 
when  I  come  to  deliver  my  faithful  people.  If  he  concludes  to 
humble  himself  before  me,  let  him  make  all  .his  wrongs  right.  Let 
him  withdraw  those  false  statements  which  he  made  to  mine 
enemies,  wherein  he  falsely  represented  my  people,  and  plant  the 
truth  in  their  stead.  This  I  require  at  his  hands,  and  if  he  will  do 
it,  I  will  accept  of  him.  He  now  knows  my  mind  concerning 
him.  He  can  do  as  seemeth  him  good. 

I  now  add  no  more.  I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen 
and  Amen. 


THE    MISSION    OF    MICHAEL.  395 

REVELATION     CONTAINING     ITEMS     CONCERNING 
THE  POWER  OF  THE  GOSPEL  AND  THE  MIS- 
SION OF  MICHAEL,  THE  ARCH-ANGEL, 
TO  THE  EARTH. 


No.  212.  WEBER,  UTAH,  January  3oth,  1862. 

i.  I  SEE,  my  son,  that  your  duties  are  very  burdensome  unto 
you  in  consequence  of  continued  sickness  which  has  been  brought 
upon  you  through  past  hardships  which  you  were  compelled*  to 
endure ;  you  could  not  possibly  have  avoided  them,  for  they  were 
connected  with  your  calling.  Your  office  is  the  highest  that  ever 
was  conferred  upon  mortal  man  upon  this  earth,  and  its  nature  is 
such  that  the  greatest  hardships  are  connected  with  it.  I  see  that 
you  are  unable  to  do  your  duty.  You  are  almost  always  in  pain. 
Your  inward  parts  are  very  much  injured,  and,  in  consequence 
thereof,  you  are  unable  to  fully  discharge  your  duty.  I  know  that 
you  have  done  all  that  you  possibly  could  do.  What  can  I  do  for 
you,  seeing  that  you  are  so  weak  and  sickly?  I  know  that  no 
other  man  can  act  in  your  place.  Other  men  may  do  their  own 
duties  ;  but  they  cannot  do  yours.  If  all  my  servants  would  strive 
with  all  their  power  to  do  their  own  duties,  they  might  relieve  you 
to  some  extent.  They  are  not  equally  faithful.  Some  of  them  do 
all  that  they  possibly  can  to  assist  you ;  but  others  might  do  more 
than  what  they  have  done  if  they  would  exert  themselves.  My 
servants  cannot  write  the  revelations  of  my  will  from  my  mouth. 
You  could  not  appoint  another  in  your  stead  to  do  this;  for  it  is 
unlawful,  under  the  fulness  of  the  gospel,  to  give  revelations  to 
any  other  man ;  and  I  shall  not  do  so  until  the  seventh  thousand 
year  is  expired,  and  your  mission  is  ended.  But  after  your  mis- 
sion is  ended,  I  shall  work  through  Michael,  the  Arch-Angel,  until 
I  come  to  make  all  things  anew  and  to  raise  this  world  from  mor- 
tality to  immortality,  which  will  be  the  last  time  that  I  shall  come. 
I  shall  work  through  him  during  the  short  time  which  will  inter- 
vene between  the  time  when  the  seventh  angel  shall  have  finished 
his  mission  upon  the  earth  and  the  time  of  my  last  coming.  That 
space  of  time  will  be  very  short,  and  it  will  be  allotted  to  Michael 


396  THE    MISSION    OF    MICHAEL. 

to  gather  together  all  of  Abraham's  seed  who  will  be*  living  at  that 
time,  and  to  fight  the  last  battle  which  will  be  fought  in  mortality 
between  them,  and  the  false  prophet,  and  his  fallen  spirits.  In 
that  battle  all  fallen  spirits  then  living  upon  the  earth  will  be  slain 
by  Michael  and  his  angels.  And  shortly  after  that  battle  is  fought, 
I  shall  make  my  last  appearance  upon  the  earth  to  make  all  things 
anew.  The  seventh  angel  will  almost  finish  the  work  of  this 
dispensation.  He  will  not  leave  much  to  be  done  by  Michael ; 
therefore,  Michael  will  have  but  a  very  short  mission  upon  the 
earth  when,  for  the  last  time,  he  comes  to  act  his  part  to  his 
childen  in  mortality. 

2.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — my  servants  might 
assist  you  in  some  things.  If  they  cannot  help  you  in  one  way, 
they  might  in  another ;  every  little  in  this  great  work  will  help  it 
on,  and  ease  your  burden.  Those  who  love  you  and  the  truth  will 
assist  you  with  all  their  power,  which  is  all  that  I  require  at  their 
hands ;  but  if  they  will  not  do  this,  they  are  blamabie.  If  they 
would  only  look  at  you,  they  would  see  that  you  have  spent  all 
your  strength  for  them ;  that  you  are  so  weak  that  you  can  scarcely 
speak  unto  them  at  all.  No  man  could  do  more  than  what  you 
have  done  for  the  seed  of  Abraham.  You  have  suffered  more 
than  ever  mortal  man  suffered  before,  myself  not  excepted.  I  suf- 
fered greatly  while  I  was  upon  the  earth,  and  when  they  crucified 
me  upon  a  cross ;  while  it  lasted,  I  suffered  as  bitterly  as  you 
have  ever  suffered ;  but  it  was  soon  over.  But  your  sufferings 
have  continued  for  years,  and  have  been  gradually  undermining 
your  constitution  until  they  have  almost  destroyed  your  physical 
powers ;  you  have  not  had  any  rest  from  them ;  they  are  continu- 
ally gnawing  at  you  while  you  are  held  in  weakness ;  but  when  I 
come  unto  you,  I  will  relieve  you  at  once.  I  will  heal  you,  and 
make  you  perfectly  strong,  and  put  all  things  straight ;  but  until 
then,  I  am  compelled  to  take  a  certain  course  with  you ;  for  while 
I  am  giving  unto  you  the  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood  and  the 
theory  of  my  gospel,  I  cannot  give  unto  you  the  power  thereof. 
I  am  compelled  to  confine  myself  to  that  branch  of  the  work;  and 
even  in  doing  that  I  have  to  reveal  unto  you  one  thing  at  a  time. 
When  I  shall  have  given  unto  you  the  leading  keys  of  the  holy 
priesthood,  the  law  of  heaven  will  compel  me  to  give  unto  you  the 


THE  POWER  OF  THE  GOSPEL.  397 

power  of  your  office.  My  first  duty  to  you  was  to  give  unto  you 
the  theory  of  my  gospel,  and  my  second  duty  is  to  give  unto  you 
the  power  of  it ;  and  I  cannot  -  heal  you  before  I  give  unto  you 
that  power. 

3.  When  I  give  unto  the   children   of  men  the  priesthood  in 
part,  I  give  unto  them  the  little  power  which  is  connected  with  it, 
which  is  the  power  to  heal  the  sick,  and  to  cast  out  devils.     When 
the  theory  of  that  priesthood  is  given,  the  power  connected  with  it 
is  given  at  the  same  time.     But  such  is  not  the  case  when  the  ful- 
ness of  the  holy  priesthood  is  given — the  theory  and  the  power 
thereof  are  given  at  different  times.     There  is  a  great   difference 
between  the  priesthood  in  part  and  the  fulness  of  the  holy  priest- 
hood :    one  claims  all  power,  and  the  other  claims  but  little ;  each 
has  its  lawful  and  righteous  claim ;   but  one  differs  altogether  from 
the  other  in  its  nature  and  privileges. 

4.  Therefore,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — it  is  my  will  that  my 
servants  should  assist  you  as  much  as  lies  in  their  power,  and  my 
holy  angels  shall  strengthen  them  abundantly ;   they  shall  lack  for 
nothing  in  that  respect. 

I  now  add  no  more.     I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts ;   even  Jesus 
Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


THE    HIGH    PRIESTS    ARE    COMMANDED    TO    PRE- 
PARE   THEMSELVES    TO    PREACH    THE 
FULNESS  OF  THE  GOSPEL. 


No.  213.  WEBER,  UTAH,  February  ist,  1862. 

i.  You  SAY  that  you  want  me  to  come  and  deliver  my  people 
as  soon  as  they  shall  have  taken  the  oath ;  that  it  appears  to  you 
as  though  that  ought  to  be  the  last  thing  to  be  required  of  my  peo- 
ple before  I  come  unto  them,  and  that  if  I  do  not  come  as  soon 
as  they  have  done  that  thing,  you  can  see  trouble  before  you. 
You  think  that  it.  is  quite  probable  that  there  will  be  a  number  of 
my  people  who  will  not  take  the  oath,  and  should  such  be  the 
case,  that  it  would  bring  great  confusion  into  the  camp,  and  bring 


398  COMMANDED    TO    SETTLE    ALL    DIFFICULT!!*. 

trouble  upon  you.  and  that  you  would  want  me  to  come  ancHquell 
it ;  for  you  would  be  entirely  without  power  to  do  so.  You  say 
that  if  I  require  anything  more  at  the  hands  of  my  people  before  I 
can  lawfully  come  to  deliver  them,  besides  taking  the  oath,  you 
would  like  me  to  attend  to  it  now,  and  to  reserve  the  administra- 
tion of  the  oath  until  the  last.  (  What  can  I  say  unto  you  concern? 
ing  these  matters?  I  know  that  you  are  powerless,  and  that  your 
whole  dependence  is  in  me.  I  know  how  you  look  at  things. 
You  see  them  as  they  are,  to  a  certain  extent ;  but  you  have  not, 
as  yet,  seen  them  perfectly.  I  have  only  given  unto  you  the  lead- 
ing keys  of  the  holy  priesthood,  and  I  have  yet  many  things  to 
reveal  unto  you,  which  are  connected  with  those  keys ;  but  I  shall 
not  reveal  them  unto  you  until  after  I  shall  have  given  unto  you 
the  power  of  your  office.  The  law  of  heaven  only  binds  me  to 
give  unto  you  the  leading  keys  of  the  priesthood  before  I  give 
unto  you  the  power  thereof.  I  have  already  given  unto  you  those 
keys,  and  I  could  now  lawfully  come  unto  you ;  but  I  am  waiting 
for  my  people  to  prepare  for  me.  The  whole  work  is  waiting  for 
them.  They  continue  to  call  upon  me  to  come  and  release  them, 
but  they  themselves  are  in  <my  way.  Therefore,  let  them  prepare 
themselves  for  me,  and  when  they  are  ready,  I  will  come. 

2.  Let  all  those  of  my  people  who  expect  to  be  accepted  by 
me,  settle  all  their  difficulties  with  each  other — they  must  do  so 
before  I  can  accept  of  them.  They  have  not  as  yet  done  so.  They 
are  slow  to  hearken  unto  me  and  to  obey  my  words.  They  stand 
in  their  own  light,  and  labor  against  their  own  interest.  I  have  told 
them  what  to  do;  but  they  will  not  do  as  I  have  commanded 
them.  They  keep  me  away  from  them ;  for  I  cannot  come  until 
they  make  themselves  ready  in  the  way  that  I  have  appointed. 
The  first  thing  that  I  require  of  them  is,  to  settle  all  their  dif- 
ficulties with  each  other,  and  after  that,  I  want  them  to  sit  in  judg- 
ment upon  their  own  hearts,  and  see  whether  they  can  honestly 
swear  the  oath  which  I  have  placed  before  them,  or  not.  Those 
of  them  who  can  do  so,  are  right  in  my  sight ;  but  those  who  can- 
not, need  not  attempt  to  swear  it,  for  they  will  be  rejected.  I 
want  my  people  to  be  very  thoughtful,  for  this  is  a  solemn  time. 
They  will  either  save  their  lives,'  or  lose  them,  in  the  enterprise 
which  lies  before  them.  No  person  who  has  once  yielded  obedi- 


MANY  THINGS  TO  BE  REVEALED.  399 

ence  unto  the  fulness  of  my  gospel  can  refuse  to  swear  that  oath, 
and  afterwards  live  upon  the  earth.  I  will  send  all  traitors  home 
when  I  come.  I  shall  convince  them  of  the  truthfulness  of  my 
words  at  once.  They  think  that  I  shall  never  come,  and  I  shall 
not  convince  them  to  the  contrary  more  than  one  minute  before 
they  will  all  lay  dead  upon  the  ground.  When  I  cannot  convince 
people  by  my  word,  I  can  convince  them  another  way.  But  when 
I  do  convince  them,  it  is  then  too  late  for  them  to  repent.  Oh, 
the  screams,  the  lamentations,  and  the  groans  which  will  proceed 
from  the  dying,  and  from  those  who  will  be  left  alive  to  behold 
the  scene !  It  will  sicken  the  hearts  of  the  stoutest  men  upon  the 
earth  !  The  wicked  people  of  the  earth,  never  would  believe  me 
when  I  spoke  concerning  them.  I  have  always  had  to  sweep  them 
from  the  earth,  and  I  shall  have  to  do  the  same  thing  now. 

3.  And  behold,    I   say   unto  you,   my  son, — you  need  not  to 
fear  those 'who  may  refuse  to  take  the  oath,  be  they  few  or  many. 
I  will  take  care  of  them  myself;  for  I  shall  be  present  when  they 
are  called  upon.     I  shall  take  the  work  into  mine  own  hands,  and 
everything  shall  go  right.     I  require  no  more  at  the  hands  of  my 
people  than  to  take  the  oath,  and  when  they  shall  have  done  that, 
I  will  come.     They  now  know  what  stands  in  my  way.     If  they 
wish  me  to  come,  let  them  do  as  I  have  commanded  them.     Iain 
the  Lord. 

4.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — when  you  assemble 
my  people  to  take  the  oath,  after  having  administered  it  to  the 
apostles,   you  must  administer  it  to  those  of  the  high  priests  who 
are  willing  to  swear  it.     And  it  would  be  well  if  you  had  a  place 
which  would  hold  as  many  as  one  hundred  people  at  a  time.    And 
when  you  have  gathered  as  many  people  together  as  will  fill  the 
room,  you  must  administer  the  oath  to  them,  and  then   dismiss 
them,  and 'call  others  who  have  not  sworn  it.     In  this  manner  you 
must  administer  it  unto  all  those  who  are  worthy ;  and  as  soon  as 
they  shall  have  sworn  it,  I  will  come  and   release  them.     I   shall 
soon  make  known  unto  you  when  you  shall  commence  to  adminis- 
ter the  oath  unto  my  people.     They  will  very  soon  be  called  upon 
to  attend  to  that  business.     Let  them  prepare  for  it.     I  am  the 
Lord  of  Hosts. 

5.  And  behold,  I  speak  unto  you  concerning  the  high  priests 


400     COMMANDED  TO  PREPARE  TO  PREACH  THE  GOSPEL. 

of  my  Church.  I  am  about  to  place  a  great  responsibility  upon 
them.  I  shall  speedily  send  them  throughout  the  length  and 
breadth  of  this  Territory  to  gather  together  those  whom  I  shall 
leave  alive  after  the  first  scourge,  and  the  priests  of  Aaron  shall 
assist  them.  They  will  need  to  be  well  acquainted  with  the 
principles  of  the  fulness  of  my  gospel,  so  that  they  may  be.  fully 
prepared  to  teach  them  to  the  ignorant.  They  must  be  very 
humble  and 'submissive,  so  that  my  holy  angels  may  be  well  able 
to  work  through  them ;  this  I  require  at  their  hands.  Let  them 
avail  themselves  of  every  opportunity  which  presents  itself,  to  learn 
all  that  they  possibly  can ;  for  they  will  need  it  when  they  are 
called  to  go  abroad.  Let  them  hearken  unto  my  words,  and  obey 
them,  and  I  will  be  with  them  unto  the  end.  I  am  the  Stone  and 
Shepherd  of  Israel,  the  Bright  and  Morning  Star;  even  Jesus 
Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION  DENOUNCING  POLYGAMY  AS  PRAC- 
TICED IN  THE  OLD  CHURCH.— INSTRUCTIONS 
FOR  THE  SETTLEMENT  OF  FAMILY 
DIFFICULTIES. 


No.  214.  WEBER,  UTAH,  February  3rd,  1862. 

i.  I  CALLED  upon  all  my  people  who  intend  to  take  the  oath 
which  I  have  placed  before  them,  to  settle  all  their  difficulties  with 
each  other  before  they  are  called  to  stand  before  me  to  take  that 
oath,  and  some  of  them  have  settled  their  disputes ;  but  others  of 
them  are  backward  in  doing  so.  They  say  in  their  feelings  that 
they  do  not  see  the  possibility  of  becoming  reconciled  with  those 
who  have  offended  them ;  that  their  grievances  are  of  such  a  na- 
ture that  they  cannot  see  how  they  can  be  settled.  They  wish  to 
know  what  to  do  to  satisfy  me,  and  whether,  or  not,  there  is  any 
chance  for  them  to  do  so.  There  is  a  chance  for  them  if  they 
will  do  as  I  command  them.  Inasmuch  as  there  are  difficulties 
of  long  standing  existing  in  families,  which  difficulties  have  broken 


THE    INFLUENCE    OF    SATAN.  40! 

their  peace,  and  set  them  one  against  another,  they  ought  to  con- 
sider that  the  false  and  lying  influence  under  which  those  dif- 
ficulties were  brought  about  has  been  the  cause  of  their  disunion 
and  miserable  grievances  with  each  other.  But  when  I  cast  the 
devil  and  his  band  out  of  my  Church,  their  influence  will  go  with  — 
them,  and  will  no  more  exist  among  my  people ;  for  my  spirit  will 
then  rule  in  my  kingdom;  in  it  there  will  be  no  confusion ;  all  will 
be  peace,  for  my  people  shall  have  my  law  to  govern  them,  and  I 
shall  continually  be  with  them  to  take  care  of  them.  They  will 
not  be  left  any  more  to  the  destroyer  as  they,  for  many  years  past, 
have  been.  Such  a  state  of  things  had  to  be  according  to  law. 
While  Satan  has  ruled  among  my  people  he  has  brought  them  into 
misery  and  confusion  until  they  do  not  know  what  they  are  doing. 
They  are  in  hell.  They  know  nothing  but  misery.  Their  lives 
are  a  burden  to  them.  They  are  held  by  the  chains  of  the  devil, 
and  they  know  not  what  ails  them.  They  long  to  be  liberated. 
They  feel,  at  times,  as  though  they  were  about  to  be  overcome  by 
the  current  of  evil ;  for  it  appears  so  strong  that  it  almost  carries 
them  away  with  it.  Some  of  my  people  are  almost  ready  to  cease 
striving  against  it,  and  to  go  with  it ;  but  they  ought  to  know  that 
I  am  close  by  their  side,  and  that  I  will  shortly  give  unto  them 
the  victory.  I  will  catch  them  before  they  faint.  Mine  eyes  are 
over  them  for  good,  and  I  will  quickly  release  them.  I  am  the 
Lord  of  Hosts. 

2.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — my  people  must 
consider  that  they  have  been  under  the  influence  of  the  devil, 
and  that  that  influence  has  caused  so  much  hatred,  confusion, 
division  of  feelings,  and  even  fornication  to  exist  among  them. 
These  are  the  fruits  which  have  been  produced  by  the  evil  spirits 
which  have  led  the  people  of  the  old  Church ;  and  those  who  have 
yielded  obedience  to  the  fulness  of  my  gospel  are  not,  as  yet,  en- 
tirely free  from  that  influence.  Some  of  them  have  drunk  deeper 
into  it  than  others  have,  and  have,  thereby,  given  the  devil  greater 
power  over  them,  and  they  cannot  be  fully  liberated  until  I  come 
in  power  to  set  them  free.  But  others  of  them  who  have  not 
drunk  so  deeply  into  that  influence,  are  partially  delivered,  so 
much  so  that  they  can  have  comparative  peace  in  their  families, 
and  also  with  their  neighbors ;  while  others  are  bound  so  fast  in 


4O2  CONCERNING    POLYGAMY. 

in  the  snares  of  the  devil,  that  they  cannot  loose  themselves ;  there- 
fore, I  shall  have  to  liberate  them  by  power. 

3.  Those  shepherds  of  the  old  Church,  who  were  ordained  by 
my  servant  Joseph  Smith,  have  led  my  people  into  all   manner  of 
abominations  by  giving  unto  them  a  plurality  of  wives  contrary  to 
my  will.     I  did  not  command  my  servant  Joseph  Smith  to  teach 
my  people  to  practice  that   doctrine.     I   only   made  known  unto 
him  that  such  a  doctrine  belonged  to  my  kingdom.      I   did   not 
give  it  as  a  doctrine  to  be  practiced  by  the  people  of  my  Church 
while  they  were  in  weakness.     That  doctrine  belongs   more  par- 
ticularly to  the  fulness  of  my  gospel.     But  those  people  misunder- 
stood me,  and  run  into  it,  and  they  have,  thereby,  run  themselves 
to  destruction.      They  have   filled  the  Church  with  adultery  by 
running  into  that  doctrine  without  authority,  and  contrary  to  my 
will  and  to  the  order  of  my  kingdom.     I  am  the  Lord,  and  I  do 
not,  in  that  respect,  sanction  their  works ;   for  I   do  not  sanction 
what  I  have  not  appointed ;  and  I  do  not  appoint  except  by  law. 

4.  There  are  those  who  have  yielded  obedience  to  the  fulness 
of  my  gospel  who  have   been  caught  in  that   snare,  and,  on  that 
account,  have  had  great  difficulties  to  contend  with,  which  they 
otherwise  might  have  avoided.     I  never  sanctioned  those  unions ; 
consequently,  nothing  but  trouble  and  misfortune  have  attended 
them.     My  people  have  been  called  to  endure  unspeakable  misery 
on  that  account. 

5.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — inasmuch  as  there 
are  some  of  my  people  who  are  still  laboring  under  these  dif- 
ficulties, who  seem  to  be  entirely  bound  up,  and  who  do  not  know 
what  to  do,  I  will  tell  you  what  I  require  of  them.     Let  them,  as 
much  as  they  possibly  can,  forgive  each  other  all  past  offences ; 
and  if  they  will  do  this,  I  will  accept  of  them ;   for  I  know  their 
situation.     This  is  as   far  as   they  can  now  go  towards  settling 
their  difficulties ;   but  when  I  come,  I  will  fully  settle  all  their  dis- 
putes, and  give  unto  each  of  them  their  rights ;  but  as  this  cannot 
be  done  until  I  come,  let  them  do  as  I  have  commanded,  and  the 
remainder  I  will  settle  when  I  come.     Lo,  I  come  quickly — even 
the  Lord  of  Hosts.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


AN    EXPRESSION.  403 

AN  EXPRESSION  FROM  THE  ARMY  OF  HEAVEN. 


No.  215.  WEBER,  UTAH,  February  4th,  1862. 

i.  WE  are  coming!  we  are  coming!  we  are  coming  to  war !" 
We  shall  make  a  slaughter.  Therefore,  look  out  for  us.  We  are 
the  warriors  of  heaven,  the  sons  of  the  Eternal  Father,  whose  right 
it  is  to  reign.  We  understand  your  feelings,  and  we  will  speedily 
set  them  at  rest.  Look  out  for  us,  for  lo,  we  come,  we  come,  we 
come  quickly — even  the  warriors  of  heaven.  Even  so.  Amen 
and  Amen. 


REVELATION  DISCLOSING  THE  INTENTION  OF  THE 

ENEMY  TO  DESTROY  THE  SAINTS  IF 

THEY  SWEAR  THE  OATH. 


No.  216.  WEBER,  UTAH,  February  4th,  1862.  . 

1.  Lo,   I  COME!  I  come!  I  come!  even  the  Lord  of  Hosts; 
for  mine  enemies   are   on  the   watch  tower,  watching  the  move- 
ments of  my  people ;  and  they  say  in  their  hearts,  that  if  my  peo- 
ple take  the  oath,  they  will  come  out  upon  them,  and  put  them  all 
to  death ;  that  they  have  endured  enough  from   them,  and  that 
they  will  bear  with  them  no  longer.     They  should  say,   "If  we  are 
not  put  to  death  ourselves."     I  will  promise  them  that  they  shall 
not  have  the  power  to  hurt  one  of  my   faithful  people;  for   I   will 
take  care  of  them.     I  will  make  mine  enemies  do  what  I  want 
them  to  do.     If  they  will  not  serve  me  willingly,  I  will  make  them 
answer  mine   own   purposes.     I   will   bring  them   to  those  points 
which  I  wish  to  bring  them  to.     They  cannot  do  anything,  except 
what  I  permit  them  to  do ;  for  I  control  them,   even   as  I   control 
those  who  are  heirs  to  the  resurrection. 

2.  My  Father  has  given  me  the  power  over  all  races  of  people 
who  dwell  upon  the  earth,   and  they  are  subject  to  me.     If  the 
wicked  will  not  serve  me  in  one  way,  I  will  make  them  serve  me 


404  THE    BOASTINGS    OF    THE    ENEMY. 

in  another ;  for  I  have  the  power  over  them.  They  cannot  even 
move  one  of  their  fingers,  without  my  permission.  I  could,  in  a 
few  minutes;*  lay  them  all  in  the  dust,  where  they  could  not  move. 
Their  breath  and  lives  are  in  my  hands.  They  cannot  do  the 
smallest  thing  without  my  permission.  In  vain  do  they  boast  of 
their  power  and  greatness.  I  will  speedily  show  them  what  they 
are,  and  try  how  much  power  they  have — even  as  soon  as  my  peo- 
ple shall  have  done  as  I  have  commanded  them.  They  have 
boasted  of  their  power,  and  even  challenged  the  whole  world  to 
battle.  They  are  for  wiping  out  (as  they  call  it)  everything  that 
crosses  their  path.  But  should  a  few  thousands  of  people  come 
up  against  them,  they  would  run  into  the  mountains  and  hide  their 
heads  in  the  clefts  of  the  rocks,  or  in  some  other  secret  place 
(behind  the  sage  brush,  for  instance),  and  they  would  watch  for 
their  enemies  with  fear  and  trembling;  they  would  raise  their 
heads  and  peep  out  from  their  hiding  place,  and  if  they  heard  a 
bush  shake  with  the  wind,  or  from  some  other  cause,  they  would 
drop  their  heads  again.  O  what  brave  men  to  challenge  the  world 
to  battle !  Let  them  hide  their  faces  in  shame ;  for  they  are  like 
the  devil  who  is  at  their  head — he  is  the  greatest  coward  upon  the 
earth ;  for  if  he  saw  the  least  danger,  he  would  run  fit  to  break  his 
neck ;  and  the  rest  of  his  band  are  like  him. 

3.  If  they  fight,  it  must  be  in  secret,  where  they  can  take  the 
advantage  of  their  opponent — where  he  has  no  chance  whatever 
with  them;  and  thus  they  will  slay  him.  O  what  champions  they 
are  in  war !  There  is  not  an  honorable  act  about  them.  They 
are  rotten  and  unprincipled  in  all  their  actions,  like  the  devil  him- 
self. Rather  than  to  challenge  the  world  to  battle,  they  need  to 
hide  their  cowardly  faces.  I  will  shortly  try  their  strength.  I  will 
stop  their  boasting  as  soon  as  my  people  will  open  the  way  for  me. 
My  people  are  now  holding  me.  I  cannot  come  and  deliver  them 
until  they  have  sworn  the  oath.  But,  seemingly,  some  of  my  peo- 
ple will  not  settle  their  difficulties,  although  I  have  called  upon 
them  several  times  to  do  so ;  and  if  they  do  not  very  speedily 
settle  them,  I  will  come  and  accept  of  those  who  are  ready.  All 
my  people  are  ready  to  take  the  oath,  with  the  exception  of  a  few 
who  are  stupid  and  rebellious.  They  know  what  to  do  to  satisfy 
me;  but  they  will  not  do  it.  They  are  gazing  all  around  them, 


CONCERNING    THE    OATH.  405 

and  their  minds  are  upon  almost  everything  but  what  they  ought 
to  be  upon ;  but  if  they  do  not  heed  me  now,  it  will  be  too  late 
for  them  to  do  so ;  for  I  am  about  to  appoint  the  day  for  my  peo- 
ple to  commence  taking  the  oath.  It  may  take  as  much  as  two 
days  to  get  through  that  business.  Mine  enemies  are  waiting  to 
see  it  commence,  and  if  they  do  not  then  do  something,  it  will 
be  because  they  cannot.  I  will  take  care  of  them  myself,  and 
bring  them  to  the  right  point. 

4.  But  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — I  shall  be  driven  to 
the  necessity  of  coming  to  release  my  people  as  soon  as  the  taking 
of  the  oath  is  well  through.  I  know  the  feelings  of  mine  enemies 
towards  my  people,  and  I  will  take  them  while  they  are  hot. 
When  my  people  have  taken  the  oath,  it  will  arouse  their  enemies, 
and  bring  them  into  the  right  state  of  mind  for  me  to  sweep  them 
off  the  earth — it  will  stir  them  up.  Therefore,  let  those  of  my 
people  who  have  not  settled  their  difficulties  as  yet,  settle  them  as 
soon  as  they  can,  that  it  may  be  well  with  them ;  for  lo,  I  come,  I 
come,  I  come  quickly;  even  the  Lord  of  Hosts.  Even  so.  Amen 
and  Amen. 


REVELATION  INSTRUCTING  THE   SAINTS  TO  HAVE 
THEIR  WHEAT  GROUND. 


No.   217.  WEBER,  UTAH,  February  5th,   1862. 

i.  IT  WOULD  be  well  for  my  people  to  gather  up  as  much 
wheai  as  they  can,  conveniently,  and  send  it  to  the  mill  to  be 
ground,  in  order  that  they  may  have  sufficient  flour  to  serve  them ; 
for  mine  enemies  are  fully  set  against  them.  They  will  strive  to 
use  my  people  up,  and  even  to  starve  them  out.  They  have  it  in 
their  hearts  to  close  their  grist  mills  against  my  people,  and  not  to 
grind  for  them.  In  this  way  they  want  to  starve  them  out,  and 
destroy  them.  They  suffered  their  mills  to  grind  for  my  people  up 
to  this  time,  continually  supposing  that  they  would  scatter  and 
come  to  naught ;  but  they  now  see  that  instead  of  scattering,  they 
increase  in  numbers,  and  become  more  united.  Therefore,  mine 


406  INSTRUCTED    TO    HAVE    THE    WHEAT    GROUND. 

•  enemies  consider  that  they  must  now  take  another  course  to  use 
them  up  and  to  put  an  end  to  their  lives.  But  their  conclusion 
not  to  grind  any  more  wheat  for  my  people  has  come  too  late.  I 
do  not  want  them  to  grind  much  more.  They  will  grind  as  much 
as  I  want  them  to  grind.  My  people  will  have  sufficient  flour  to 
serve  them,  if  ttiey  will  gather  up  their  wheat  and  take  it  to  the 
mill  forthwith.  Let  them  get  as  much  wheat  ground  this  week  as 
they  can ;  for  they  may  not  have  the  chance  to  get  any  ground 
after  this  present  week.  If  they  will  do  as  I  have  commanded 
them,  they  will  not  lack  provisions ;  for  I  will  come  and  place  all 
mills  and  wheat  in  their  possession  before  their  supplies  shall  be 
exhausted.  But  if  they  do  not  send  their  wheat  to  the  mill  and 
get  it  ground,  they  may  be  brought  to  want  before  I  deliver  them. 
I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts. 

2.  And   behold,  I  say   unto  you,   my  son, — it  is  my  will  that 
my  people  should  settle  all  their  disputes  this  week ;  this  I  require 
at    their  hands.     I   have  told  them  in  time,   therefore,  let  them 
attend  to  it ;  for  lo,  I  come  quickly.     I  am  weary  of  hearing  their 
murmurings  against  me  on  account  of  my  absence  from  them.     I 
want  to  come  unto  them  as  strongly  as  they  want  to  see  me.     I  do 
not  stay  away  from  them  because  I  love  to  afflict  them;  but  because 
the  law  of  heaven  forbids  me  to  come  unto  them  before  they  have 
taken  the  oath,  and  bound  themselves  unto  me. 

3.  Behold,    I   am  Jesus  Christ.     I  swore  an  oath  in  the  pres- 
ence of  my  Father,  that  I  would  abide  a  celestial  law;  and  all  the 
inhabitants  of  our  earth  swore  the   same   oath.     And   we   are  for- 
bidden to  hold  communion  with  Adam's  children  while  they  are  in 
mortality,  in  a  plain  and  positive  manner — even  as  one  man  holds 
communion  with  another — until  they  have  bound  themselves  by  an 
oath  unto  their  father,   Adam,  as  we  bound   ourselves  unto  our 
Father  by  a  celestial  law.     In  order  for  two  persons,  one  celestial, 
and  the  other  mortal,   to  enter  into  each  other's  society  and  hold 
communion,  they  must  both  be  bound  by  an  oath  to  sustain  the 
same  cause — they  must  be  of  one  order,  holding  equal  privileges. 
When  my  people  have  taken  the  oath  which  I  have  placed  before 
them,  they  may  have  the  privilege  to  behold  my  face,  and  the  faces 
of  my  holy  angels.     This  right  they  can   claim  after  they  have 
sworn  the  oath ;  but  not  before.     Nevertheless,  they  will  not,  even 


CONCERNING    OATHS.  407 

then,  have  the  privilege  of  conversing  with  my  holy  angels,  as  they 
converse  with  each  other;  but  they  may  see  them  occasionally, 
and  speak  with  them,  and  know  perfectly  that  they  exist.  My  holy 
angels  have  taken  three  oaths :  the  first,  in  their  first  estate ;  the 
second,  in  their  second  estate ;  and  the  third,  which  is  a  celestial 
oath,  in  their  third,  or  celestial  estate.  But  my  people  have  not, 
as  yet,  sworn  their  second  oath ;  and  how  can  they  expect  to  be 
equal  with  my  holy  angels,  who  are  so  far  in  the  advance  of  them  ? 
My  people  will  see,  at  once,  that  they  are  a  long  way  behind  my 
holy  angels  in  point  of  progression.  Therefore,  let  them  consider 
who  they  are ;  and  if  they  want  to  see  me  and  my  holy  angels,  let 
them  swear  the  oath  which  I  have  placed  before  them,  and  they 
shall  both  see  us  and  talk  with  us. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.     I  am  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so 
Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION   CONCERNING  THE  BLESSINGS  TO  BE 
DERIVED  FROM  SWEARING  THE  OATH. 


No.  218.  WEBER,  UTAH,  February  6th,  1862. 

i.  LISTEN  unto  my  words,  which  are  quick  and  powerful, 
sharper  than  a  two-edged  sword;  for  I  am  about  to  speak  unto 
you  again  concerning  *my  people.  O  how  anxious  they  are  to  see 
me,  and  to  witness  my  power.  I  am  as  anxious  to  see  them  as 
they  possibly  can  be  to  see  me ;  for  I  am  weary  of  hearing  their 
complaints.  I  know  that  they  are  put  to  much  inconvenience ; 
and  some  of  them,  on  account  of  my  delaying  my  coming,  suffer 
their  faith  to  fail  them.  But  they  should  know  that  I  cannot  come 
unto  them  until  they  are  ready  to  receive  me.  I  have  told  them 
what  is  in  my  way;  and  as  soon  as  they  have  complied  with  my 
request,  I  will  come  unto  them.  They  have  a  duty  to  perform,  as 
well  as  I  have,  and  why  do  they  not  do  it  ?  If  they  will  do  their 
part,  I  will  come  and  do  mine.  But  the  difficulty  with  them  is, 
that  they  are  backward  -io  coming  forward  and  acting  their  own 
part.  They  continue  to  call  upon  me  to  come  and  deliver  them, 


408  CONCERNING    THE    OATH. 

which  I  cannot  do,  until  they  have  opened  the  way  for  me*;  but 
this  they  will  not  do  within  any  reasonable  time.  Through  their 
folly  they  block  up  my  way,  and  destroy  themselves.  What  can  I 
do  with  them  ?  I  require  but  little  from  them.  I  have  only  called 
upon  them  to  consecrate  their  property,  and  swear  an  oath  of 
allegiance  to  the  government  of  heaven.  I  require  nothing  from 
them  that  is  hard,  if  they  are  honest. 

2.  If  they  ever  expect  to  be  saved  and  exalted  by  the  govern- 
ment of  heaven,   they  must  sustain  it.     All  people  who  swear  an 
oath  of  allegiance  to  that  government,  and  sustain  it  with  all  their 
power,    are  sustained  by   it ;  this  is  just.     It  will  grant  unto  them 
eternal  life,  and  exalt  them  to  thrones  and   dominions,   principali- 
ties and  powers,  in  the  presence  of  the  Gods  forever.     It  will  place 
all  things  in  their  hands ;  for  all  things  are  theirs.     But  there  are 
people  who  do  not  take  this  oath,  who  will  possess   nothing ;  who 
will  have  to  endure  both  the  first  and  the  second  death ;    who  are 
angels  of  the  devil ;  and  who  are  doomed  to  suffer  the  wrath  of 
God  in  the  lake  of  fire  and  brimstone;  for  they  are  rebels  against 
the  government  of  God.     They  rebel  against  God,   and  perish  by 
his  power.     Therefore,  let  my  people  be  aware  of  rebelling  against 
my  government,  lest  they,  also,  perish.     I   am  in   duty  bound  to 
make  all  things  clear  to  my  people  concerning  the  oath,  in  order 
that  they  may  well  understand  what   they  are  doing.     They  may 
now  see  the  advantages  to  be  derived  from  swearing  the  oath;  and 
the  losses  to  be  sustained  from  utterly  refusing  to  swear  it.      But 
some  of  my  people  say  in  their  feelings  thafthey  would  swear  the 
oath,   if  they   were  satisfied  that  I  would  come  and  deliver  them, 
after  they  should  have  done  so.     O  how  fearful  and  suspicious  my 
people  are !     They  are  afraid  to  make  a   move  for  fear  that  I 
should  betray  them ;    but  they  need  not  fear  to  do  what  I   com- 
mand them,   for  I  shall   never  betray  them.     I  will  shortly  show 
them  what  they  long  to  see.     They  must  not  be  excited,  but  they 
must  be  calm,  and  I  will  work  all  things  aright ;  nothing  shall  go 
wrong.     They  need  not  fret  or  be  excited  about  what  they  may 
see  or   hear.      All   mine  enemies  are  in  my  hands,  and  they  shall 
do  nothing   but  what  I   permit  them  to   do.     I  am  the  Lord  of 
Hosts,  and  lo,  I  come  quickly.  ,  • 

3.  Mine  enemies  will  work  while  they  have  the  opportunity — 


OF 


COMMANDED    TO    SETTLE    ALL    DISPUTES.  409 

this  right  they  claim ;  'and  I  claim  the  right  to  stop  them  when 
they  have  gone  far  enough,  and  I  shall  exercise  that  right.  When 
I  permit  mine  enemies  to  work,  my  people  ought  to  be  satisfied 
with  what  they  do ;  for  they  are  only  doing  their  duty.  I  will  con- 
trol them  aright. 

4.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — it  would  be  well  if 
my  people  would  make  all  their  wrongs  right,  and  put  everything 
straight,  and  hold  themselves  in  readiness  to  be  called  upon  to 
swear  the  oath ;  for  they  will  be  called  upon  suddenly.  Now  is 
the  time  for  them  to  settle  all  their  disputes.  There  may  not  be 
many  difficulties  existing  among  my  people  now — they  have  settled 
many  of  them.  Let  those  who  still  have  difficulties  to  settle, 
settle  them  as  soon  as  possible,  in  order  that  all  things  may  be 
right  with  my-  people — that  they  may  be  ready  to  take  the  oath 
when  called  upon  to  do  so.  They  have  no  friend  but  me ;  there- 
fore, they  had  better  do  as  I  have  commanded  them,  that  they 
may  find  favor  in  my  sight,  and  in  the  sight  of  all  glorified  beings ; 
for  we  have  all  power,  and  independent  of  us  no  animated 
creature  exists.  We  hold  in  our  hands  the  destinies  of  all  flesh  ; 
and  we  uphold  no  one  but  those  who  love  the  law  of  the  Lord, 
and  are  willing  to  be  governed  by  it. 

I  now  add  no  more.  I  am  the  Light  and  Life  of  the  world ; 
even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    CONCERNING    THE    DRESS    OF    THE 

PROPHET,  AND    THE  DECORATIONS  OF 

THE  ROOM  IN  WHICH  THE  OATH 

SHALL  BE  ADMINISTERED. 


No.   219.  WEBER,  UTAH,  February  8th,  1862. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Light  and  Life  of  the  world,  and  I  am 
come  to  speak  unto  you  again.  O  how  restless  you  are !  You  are 
not  willing  to  give  me  time  to  do  that  which  I  am  compelled  by 
law  to  do.  You  ought  to  know  that  I  cannot  come  until  my  peo- 
ple have  finished  taking  the  oath.  I  am  preparing  them  to  take  it 


410  THE    REBELLIOUS. 

as  fast  as  I  can.  You  should  blame  them,  and  not  me.  I  am  wait- 
ing for  an  opening  so  that  I  can  come ;  they  prevent  me  from 
coming ;  they  will  not,  in  any  reasonable  time,  open  the  way  for 
me.  But  you  would  say,  "  Do  not  wait  for  those  rebellious  peo- 
ple, but  come  to  deliver  those  who  have  settled  their  difficulties, 
and  are  well  worthy  of  a  deliverance.  You  cannot  see  what  use 
it  is  for  me  to  wait  for  stubborn  and  rebellious  people ;  for  you 
think  that,  by  so  doing,  I  may  weary  the  faithful  of  my  people, 
and  destroy  them ;  that  their  patience  is  already  exhausted ;  that 
they  will  not  endure  it  much  longer ;  and  that  it  would  be  better 
for  me  to  come  and  accept  of  those  who  are  ready.  By  so  doing, 
you  think  that  I  may  save  some."  I  am  not  waiting  for  those  that 
I  know  will  never  come  to  my  terms ;  but  I  have  been  waiting  for 
some  of  my  people  who  have  had  difficulties  of  Ipng  standing, 
which  they  hardly  knew  how  to  settle,  until  I  had  made  it  known 
unto  them.  They  have  had  the  misfortune  to  fall  into  the  hands 
of  the  destroyer,  and  drink  so  deeply  into  his  influence,  that  it  is 
very  difficult  for  them  to  separate  themselves  from  it.  Such  are 
worthy  of  a  deliverance,  and  I  have  been  waiting  a  short  time  for 
them ;  for  I  have  greatly  pitied  them.  I  will  not  cast  them  off 
because  of  that  misfortune ;  but  I  will  deliver  them.  I  shall  wait 
for  none  but  those.  They  are  now  about  ready  for  me,  and  lo,  I 
come  to  their  deliverance.  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts. 

2.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — it  would  be  well  if 
you  would  make  all  necessary  preparations  for  administering  the 
oath.  You  have  a  meeting  room  which  will  hold  as  many  as  one 
hundred  persons  at  a  time ;  and  you  had  better  have  it  white- 
washed and  cleaned  as  soon  as  possible,  so  that  it  may  be  respect- 
able for  me  and  my  holy  angels  to  meet  in  with  my  people ;  for 
we  shall  be  there.  And  it  would  be  well  for  you  to  have  a  plat- 
form made  to  reach  across  the  room,  even  fr.om  one  side  of  it  to 
the  other.  And  you  must  also  have  a  desk  to  reach  across  the 
room,  to  separate  you  and  your  counsellors  from  those  who  shall 
present  themselves  before  you  to  swear  the  oath.  They  must 
stand  on  one  side  of  the  desk,  and  you  and  your  counsellors  on 
the  other  side.  They  shall  stand  in  front  of  the  desk,  and  face  you 
and  your  counsellors.  One  of  your  counsellors  must  stand  at  your 
right  side,  and  the  other  at  your  left  side.  They  shall  stand  upon 


THE  MANNER  OF  TAKING  THE  OATH.          41  I 

their  feet,  and  one  of  them  shall  administer  the  oath,  and  the  other 
shall  hold  the  book  of  revelations  in  his  hand  while  those  who 
shall  have  sworn  the  oath,  kiss  it,  one  by  one.  You  shall  appoint 
two  men  as  conductors  to  assemble  the  people,  and  to  place  them 
in  order  before  you  to  swear  the  oath ;  and  when  one  set  of  per- 
sons have  sworn  the  oath,  those  two  men  shall  conduct  them  to 
their  seats,  and  bring  up  another  set,  and  place  them  in  order. 
Thus  they  shall  continue  until  all  my  people  who  will  do  so  shall 
have  sworn  the  oath.  And  a  clerk  shall  be  appointed  to  take  the 
names  of  all  those  who  shall  swear  the  oath,  and  he  shall  sit  by  the 
side  of  the  first  presidency,  in  order  that  all  things  may  be  con- 
ducted in  a  proper  and  orderly  manner.  None  of  my  people  shall 
stand  in  the  rank  to  meet  me  but  those  who  shall  have  sworn  the 
oath.  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts. 

3.  And  I  say  unto  you, — when  my  people  are  about  to  swear 
the  oath,  you  must  dress  yourself  in  white  linen.     You  must  wear 
white  linen  all  the  time,  even  from  the  time  that  my  people  shall 
commence  to  swear  the  oath,  until  they  shall  have  finished.     And 
you  must  sit  upon  a  seat  which   must   be   elevated,   between  your 
counsellors,  -who   must   dress  themselves   well;  but  they  need  not 
dress  themselves  in  white  linen — no  person  but  you  must  do   that. 
You  must  divide  your  hair  into  seven  parts.     I  will  stand  by  your 
side,  and  you  shall  know  it  to  your  satisfaction.     And  my  people 
must  dress  themselves  in  their  best  when  they  shall  come  to  stand 
before  me.     I  wish  them  to  be  as  neat  and  clean  as  possible  when 
they  meet  me.     I  know  that  some  of  them  are  very  poor  in  cloth-  • 
ing,  but  I  will  supply  their  needs  at  once.     I  am  not   ashamed  of 
the  poor  and  honest,  no  matter  how  poor  they  are  in  clothing  and 
other  useful  things.     I  will  supply  their  needs  in  every  respect.     I 
am  the  Lord. 

4.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you, — as  soon  as  the  administering 
of  the  oath  is  well  through,  you  may   begin   to  look  for  me ;  for 
mine  enemies  may  force  me  to  come  in  a  hurry.     I  shall  permit 
them  to  come  to  this  place,  if  they  wish  to  do  so.     Behold,  I  say 
unto  you,  my  son,  the  taking  of  the  oath  will  very  likely  stir  them 
up.     But   whether  they   come   against  my   people,   or  not,  I  will 
deliver  the  faithful  as  soon  as  they  are  well  through  swearing  the 
oath.     If  they  come,  it  will  be  all  right ;  and  if  they  do  not  come, 


412  HANS  PETER  SMITH  CALLED. 

it  will  be  equally  right.  I  shall  slay  them,  no  matter  where  they 
may  be.  They  have  done  enough.  I  am  not  waiting  for  them  to 
do  any  more ;  but  I  am  waiting  for  my  people. 

5.  I  shall  soon  show  unto  you  the  place  which  I  have  conse- 
crated, on  which  you  must  stand  when  you  raise  your  rod  and  give 
the  command.  It  is  not  very  far  from  your  own  door.  I  know 
that  you  want  to  see  me,  as  much  as  you  possibly  can  do ;  and  I 
want  to  satify  you.  I  do  not  like  to  hear  you  murmur  against  me 
so  much.  Therefore,  prepare  for  me ;  for  lo,  I  come.  I  am  the 
Lord  of  Hosts ;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION     CALLING     HANS   PETER    SMITH    TO 
THE  APOSTLESHIP. 


No.  220.  WEBER,  UTAH,  February  zoth,  1862. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  Jesus  Christ,  and  I  am  come  to  speak  unto 
you  concerning  the  apostleship.     Inasmuch  as  there  is  a  vacant 
place  in  that  quorum  which  needs  filling,  it  would  be   well   if  you 
would  fill  it ;  for  I  am  about  to  administer  the  oath  unto  my  peo- 
ple.    But  before  I  do  so,  I  want  that  quorum  complete  as  far  as 
it  has  yet  been  organized. 

2.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you, — you   shall  call   and   ordain 
my  servant  Hans  Peter  Smith  to  the  office  of  an  apostle ;  for  he  is 
worthy  before  me.     His  heart  is  right  in  my  sight.     I  know  his  in- 
tentions.    He  has  sought  to  serve  me  with  all  his  heart,  and  I,  the 
Lord,  have  great  confidence  in  him ;   and  through  his  faithfulness 
he  may  bring  many  thousands  to  a  knowledge  of  the  truth.      He 
may  gain  to  himself  a  name  that  will  never  be  forgotten  by  those 
who  may  be  closely   connected   with  him — that  the  tide   of  time 
will  never  wear  away;   but  that  will  be  renewed  by  succeeding 
generations,  down  to  the  end  of  time.     He   will  need   no  monu- 
ments erecting  in  memory  of  his  name ;  for  his  good  deeds  will  be 
handed  down  from  generation  to  generation.     I  am  the  Lord,  and 
through  his  faithfulness  I   will   be  with  him   until  his   mission   is 
ended ;  and  he  shall  live  upon  the  earth  as  long  as  he  shall  desire. 


THE    OATH.  413 

0 

He  shall  have  all  the  power  granted  unto  him  which  he  may  ask 
for,  to  enable"  him  to  fill  the  responsible  mission  which  may  be  ap- 
pointed unto  him ;  for  I  am  the  Lord,  and  I  have  confidence  in 
him.  Therefore,  let  him  accept  of  this  appointment,  and  all  will 
be  well  with  him. 

3.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — you  must  call  a 
meeting  of  the  Danish  saints  as  soon  as  you  can,  and  place  him 
before  them,  and  ordain  him  to  the  office  of  an  apostle,  as  I  have 
commanded ;  for  lo,  1  come  quickly.  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts ; 
even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


THE    DAY   APPOINTED    ON   WHICH   TO    SWEAR 
THE    OATH. 


No.  221.  WEBER,  UTAH,  February  nth,  1862. 

i.  You  SEE  trouble  around  you,  my  son;  but  I  am  as  near 
unto  you  as  your  enemies  are.  I  will  make  them  do  what  I  want 
them  to  do.  My  people  need  not  fear  them,  for  I  am  leading  them, 
and  they  shall  not  have  power  to  do  anything  except  what  I  per- 
mit them  to  do.  They  want  to  arrest  some  of  my  people.  They 
consider  that  they  have  been  imposed  upon  by  them.  But  I  will 
show  them  their  weakness.  I  will  confound  them,  and,  by  that 
means,  I  shall  work  them  up  until  they  will  be  very  apt  to  assem- 
ble all  their  forces,  and  come  up  against  my  people,  if  I  do  not 
prevent  them.  I  will  promise  them  that,  if  they  intend  to  come 
up  against  my  people  in  a  proper  manner,  they  will  have  to  do"  it 
speedily ;  for  I  shall  come  and  cut  them  off  as  soon  as  my  people 
shall'have  finished  swearing  the  oath;  but,  until  then,  I  will  hold 
them  so  that  they  shall  not  have  power  to  injure  one  of  my  faithful 
people.  Nevertheless,  I  call  upon  my  people  to  do  what  they  can 
to  hinder  mine  enemies  from  taking  any  of  my  people  prisoners, 
if,  in  order  to  do  so,  they  shall  have  to  slay  them.  They  can  pre- 
vent a  few  of  mine  enemies  from  doing  so,  even  without  my  assist- 
ance ;  and  this  they  must  do.  I  only  call  upon  my  people  to  do 

that   which  they  are  able  to   do,   and  what   they  cannot  do,   I 
will  do. 


414  A    DAY    APPOINTED. 

% 

2.  If  you  can  make  all  things  ready  for  my  people  to  com- 
mence taking  the  oath  to-morrow,  do  so,  and  I  will  come  and 
stand  by  your  side.  I  shall  be  ready  as  soon  as  you.  You  need 
not  linger,  supposing  that  I  am  not  ready,  for  I  am,  and  waiting 
for  you.  As  soon  as  my  people  shall  have  taken  the  oath,  my  way 
will  be  clear.  But  if  you  cannot  make  all  things  ready  to  com- 
mence administering  the  oath  to-morrow,  you  must  begin  the  fol- 
lowing day ;  for  you  must  not  linger.  I  will  do  my  part — never 
fear.  Therefore,  as  soon  as  you  can  make  all  things  ready,  com- 
mence, and  I  will  be  there  with  you ;  and  mine  angels  shall  guard 
this  place  while  my  people  shall  be  taking  the  oath ;  they  will  keep 
everything  quiet  in  this  Fort.  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts.  And  inas- 
much as  mine  enemies  are  now  on  the  move,  it  would  be  well  if 
you  would  get  through  your  work  as  soon  as  possible,  in  order 
that  I  may  be  set  at  liberty.  I  will  baffle  my  people  no  more 
with  mine  enemies  after  they  shall  have  finished  taking  the  oath. 
Let  them  prepare  themselves ;  for  lo,  I  come.  I  am  Jesus  Christ. 
Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  PROPHET  COMMANDED   TO   ADMINSTER  THE 

OATHS    OF  THE  HIGH  PRIESTHOOD 

TO  THE  HIGH  PRIESTS. 


No.  222.  WEBER,  UTAH,  February  i3th,  1862. 

i.  LISTEN  unto  me,  my  son,  for  I  am  about  to  speak  unto 
you  concerning  the  high  priests  of  my  Church.  I  am  well 
pleased  with  my  people  for  the  prompt  and  faithful  manner 
in  which  they  came  forward  and  swore  the  oath  which  I  placed 
before  them.  I  was  present  myself,  and  I  saw  every  person  who 
took  the  oath.  My  holy  angels  guarded  this  place,  and  kept  every- 
thing quiet.  My  people  are  about  through  with  the  taking  of  the 
oath.  There  may  be  a  few  who  were  absent  when  the  main  body 
of  my  people  were  taking  it,  and  if  they  are  one  with  them,  they 
had  better  come  to  this  place  as  soon  as  they  can,  and  swear  that 
oath ;  but  if  they  are  not,  they  need  not  come  and  present  them- 


THE  HIGH  PRIESTS'  OATH.  415 

selves  before  me  to  do  so.  Those  who  have  not  sworn  the  oath, 
but  who  intend  to  do  so,  will  need  to  hurry,  or  they  may  not  have 
the  opportunity  to  do  so  before  I  come  out  in  power.  They  have 
no  time  to  lose.  I  have  told  you  that  you  must  not  suffer  any 
person  to  come  into  the  rank  but  those  who  have  taken  the  oath. 
Those  few  stragglers  will  understand  me.  If  they  are  one  with 
the  body  of  my  people,  let  them  come  to  this  place  forthwith ;  but 
if  they  are  not,  they  may  remain  where  they  are,  and  I  will 
promise  them  that,  when  I  come,  I  will  lay  them  low.  I  will  show 
them  the  traitor's  doom.  When  people  have  yielded  obedience 
unto  the  fulness  of  my  gospel,  they  have  no  right  to  leave  this 
place,  and  go  to  live  among  mine  enemies ;  they  might  as  well 
never  obey  my  gospel,  as  to  do  so ;  for  they  cannot  keep  the  faith 
and  live  among  mine  enemies.  I  have  but  little  hope  of  such  per- 
sons. They  are  neither  hot  nor  cold.  They  are  very  likely  to 
turn  traitors  to  me.  They  are  not  valiant  either  for  me  or  for  the 
devil.  They  are  good  for  nothing  on  either  side;  therefore,  I 
place  no  dependence  in  them. 

2.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — the  high  priests  of 
my  Church  must  swear  another  oath  before  I  deliver  my  faithful 
people,  and  send  them  through  this  Territory  to  preach  the  fulness 
of  my  gospel.  They  have  not,  as  yet,  sworn  an  oath  of  the  holy 
priesthood.  They  have  only  sworn  the  oath  which  belongs  to  the 
sons  and  daughters  of  Aaron.  The  high  priests  are  compelled  by 
law  to  first  swear  that  oath,  and,  by  so  doing,  acknowledge  the 
lesser  priesthood.  If  they  did  not  do  so,  they  could  never  have 
the  privilege  granted  unto  them  to  swear  the  oath  of  the  holy 
priesthood.  There  is  no  priesthood  without  an  oath;  and  the 
greater  has  always  to  acknowledge  the  lesser.  The  children  of 
Aaron  have  to  swear  one  oath  in  mortality ;  but  the  high  priests 
have  to  swear  two.  All  high  priests  have  to  acknowledge  the 
priesthood  of  Aaron  by  swearing  the  oath  which  belongs  to  it;  but 
inasmuch  as  all  high  priests  cannot  be  upon  the  earth  in  mortality 
while  the  fulness  of  the  holy  priesthood  is  upon  the  earth,  those 
high  priests  who  are  upon  the  earth  will  stand  for  those  high  priests 
who  are  in  the  spirit  worlds,  and  act  for  them ;  and  what  they  do 
in  their  stead,  will  be  as  valid  as  though  they  were  here  to  act  for 
themselves.  All  high  priests  cannot  be  upon  the  earth  and  act 


4i 6  THE  HIGH  PRIESTS'  OATH. 

their  part  in  mortality  at  the  same  time.  Their  duties  are  on  this 
earth  and  in  the  spirit  worlds.  They  are  rightly  divided.  There 
are  some  of  them  upon  every  earth  where  Adam's  children  are 
living;  for  it  is  their  duty  to  save  Adam's  covenant  children.  But 
when  the  first  resurrection  is  about  to  commence,  they  will  all 
leave  their  fields  of  labor  for  a  short  •  time  and  come  forth  upon 
this  earth  with  their  resurrected  bodies,  and  commence  it ;  and 
when  they  are  through  with  that  duty,  they  will  return  again  to 
their  various  fields  of  labor. 

3.  And  now,  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — you  must 
assemble  the  high  priests,  and  administer  unto  them  the  second 
oath — even  the  oath  which  belongs  to  the  holy  priesthood.  You 
must  make  all  things  ready,  and  administer  it  unto  them  as  soon 
as  you  can,  and  all  will  be  well.  I  am  the  Stone  and  Shepherd  of 
Israel,  the  Bright  and  Morning  Star;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even 
so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION  APPROVING   THE   CONDUCT   OF    THE 
PEOPLE   IN  SWEARING   THE    OATHS. 


No.  223.  WEBER,  UTAH,  February  i5th,  1862. 

i.  I  SEE,  my  son,  that  you  are  about  through  with  administer- 
ing the  oath  unto  my  people.  I  have  been  present  all  the  time, 
and  I  have  seen  all  that  my  people  have  done ;  and,  as  far  as  they 
have  gone,  I  am  well  pleased  with  them.  I  have  poured  out  great 
blessings  upon  them ;  for  I  have  made  them  the  first-fruits  of  my 
kjngdom.  All  others  of  Abraham's  seed  will  have  to  receive  the 
truth  at  their  hands — they  are  my  chosen  ones.  I  was  enabled  to 
work  upon  them  in  a  manner  that  I  could  not  work  upon  many 
others.  There  are  thousands  of  people  now  living  in  this  Terri- 
tory whom  my  holy  angels  have  been  able  to  influence  to  a  cer- 
tain extent,  but  not  sufficiently  to  cause  them  to  leave  all  they 
had  and  come  up  to  this  place.  They  believe  in  me  in  part ;  and 
when  I  move  the  obstacle  out  of  their  way,  they  will  turn  unto  me 
with  all  their  hearts.  They  are  waiting  to  see  me  make  a  move 


A    CHOSEN    PEOPLE.  417 

that  will  release  them.  But  many  of  these  people  whom  I  have 
gathered  to  this  place,  were  easier  to  work  upon.  I  could  in- 
fluence them,  and  draw  them  to  this  place  with  greater  ease  than 
I  could  the  others.  But  I  did  not  want  to  bring  many  people 
to  this  place.  I  only  wanted  to  gather  a  few  hundreds  of  people,- 
so  that  I  might  teach  them  the  principles  of  the  fulness  of  my  gos- 
pel, and  thereby  prepare  them  to  teach  those  principles  to  those 
who  will  be  left  alive  after  the  overflowing  scourge  shall  have 
passed  through  this  Territory ;  this  I  was  compelled  by  law  to  do 
before  I  could  cut  off  mine  enemies.  I  gathered  to  this  place 
those  whom  I  could  influence  with  the  greatest  ease;  and  I  have 
made  them  the  head  over  those  whom  I  could  not  influence  suf- 
ficiently to  bring  them  to  this  place.  Those  whom  I  have  brought 
here,  who  have  been  taught  the  principles  of  the  fulness  of  my 
gospel  fyy  my  servant,  the  prophet,  shall  carry  those  principles 
through  the  length  and  breadth  of  this  Territory,  even  to  those  who 
were  not  valiant  enough  to  leave  all  and  follow  me,  as  they  have 
done:  those  who  have  not  gathered  to  this  place  shall  receive 
those  principles  at  their  hands,  for  they  are  my  chosen  servants, 
and  the  first-fruits  of  my  kingdom,  and  I  will  give  unto  them  great 
stores  of  knowledge  and  wisdom ;  for  I  am  the  Lord,  and  I  have 
chosen  them. 

2.  Behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — when  I  shall  have  cleared 
the  way  for  the  preaching  of  my  gospel,  you  shall  send  my  servants 
throughout  this  Territory,  two  by  two, — a  high  priest  and  a  priest 
of  Aaron  shall  go  together,  and  they  shall  gather  all  those  people 
who  will  give  heed  to  them  to  Great  Salt  Lake  City,  that  they  may 
be  tried  ;  for  they  will  all  have  to  pass  through  a  strait  gate,  where 
both  the  president  of  the  earth  and  Jesus  Christ  will  stand.  And 
if  any  fallen  spirits  present  themselves  for  admittance,  they  will  be 
refused — such  cannot  pass  that  strait  gate ;  but  they  will  be  slain 
there  and  then.  When  my  servants  shall-have  gone  through  this 
Territory,  and  gathered  all  those  who  will  listen  to  their  testi- 
mony, I  will  send  mine  angels  through  the  Territory  with  the 
second  scourge,  and  they  will  cut  off  all  those  who  shall  have  re- 
fused to  hearken  unto  my  servants.  I  shall  spare  the  lives  of 
none  who  will  not  gather  to  the  central  point,  as  they  will  be  com- 
manded by  my  servants  who  will  labor  among  them. 


41 8  COMMANDED    TO    PREPARE    TO    PREACH. 

3.  And  inasmuch  as  my  people  are  through  with  the  taking  of 
the  oath,  you  wish  to  know  what  I  am  about  to   do  now.     What 
can  I  say  unto  you  upon  this  matter?     I  know  that  you  want  me 
to  come.     You  do  not  want  to  hear   of  anything  else.     Nothing 
else  will  satisfy  you  but  my  coming.     You  say   in  your  feelings 
that   my   people  have  endured  as   long  as  they  can  endure;  that 
those  who  own  mills  will  not  suffer  their  miller  to   grind   for  my 
people;  and  you  want  to  know  what  they  must  do.     I  will  tell 
you  what  my  people  must  do.     They  must  put  down  the  name  of 
every  miller  who  refuses  to  grind  for  them ;    and  when   a  miller 
shall  have  once  refused  to  grind,  they  must  not  ask  him  again,  but 
they  must  go  to  another,  and  so   continue  until   they   shall  have 
tried  all  the  millers  within  ten  or  fifteen   miles   of  this   place.     If 
all  those  millers  refuse  to  grind  for  my  people,  I   will  come  and 
cut  them  off,  and  also  the  owners"  of  the  mills,  and  I  will  deliver 
the  mills  into  the  hands  of  my  people.     But  if  there  should  be 
one  miller  found  within  fifteen  miles  of  this  place,  who  will  grind 
for  my  people  with  a  willing  and  generous  mind,  I  will  save  the 
life  of  that  miller.     Let  my  people  do  as  I  command  them  in  this 
respect,  and  I  will  come  and  deliver  them  before  they  suffer  for 
want  of  food.     I  am  watching  over  them.     They  are  safe  in  my 
hands. 

4.  Let  my  servants  use  all  dilligence  to  learn  as  much  as  they 
possibly  can,  in  order  that  they  may  be   fully  prepared  to  preach 
the  fulness  of  my  gospel  after  I   shall  have  removed  the  obstacle 
out  of  their  way.     I  know  that  you  are  weary  of  waiting  for  me. 
It  is  the  power  of  your  office  that  you  want ;   you  do  not  want  to 
hear  of  anything  else.     It  seems  almost  impossible  for  me  to  keep 
your  spirits  up  by  giving  unto  you  the  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood ; 
they  do  not  satisfy  you.     I   cannot   sufficiently  encourage  you   to 
raise  even  that  amount  of  courage  which   is  necessary  to  induce 
you  to  walk  up  and  do  your  duty.     You  have  nothing  to  be  afraid 
of.     You  know  that  I  am  always  with   you ;    and  when   you  need 
the  power  of  your  office,  I   shall  give  it  unto  you.     You  should 
rise  up,  and  walk  forth  among  my  people,  and  preach  unto  them 
in  the  spirit  of  your  office,  and  not  suffer  your  spirits  to  droop  so 
much.     You  have  no  cause  to  give  way  to   such  an  extent,  or  to 
labor  in  fear ;   for  you  know,  as  well  as  you  need  to  know,  that  I 


DELIVERANCE    PROMISED.  419 

cannot  fail  to  come  unto  you  and  give  unto  you  the  power  o  fyour 
office  when  you  need  it.  You  should  act  in  your  office  in  the 
spirit  of  it,  and  not  distrust  me  so  much.*  I  will  do  mine  own 
part ;  and  if  you  do  not  do  yours,  you  will  be  blamable.  There- 
fore, cast  all  fear  far  from  you,  and  walk  forth,  and  do  your  duty 
undauntedly,  and  I  will  always  be  by  your  side  to  fight  your 
battles.  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts ;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  LORD  REASSURES  HIS  PEOPLE  THAT  HE  WILL 

COME  TO  THEIR  DELIVERANCE  AFTER 

THEY  HAVE  TAKEN  THE  OATH. 


No.   224.  WEBER,  UTAH,  February  i8th,   1862. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  he  whose  words  are  quick  and  powerful, 
sharper  than  a  two-edged  sword; \even  Jesus  Christ.  I  am  about 
to  speak  unto  you  concerning  my  people.  Mine  eyes  are  upon 
them  for  good.  I  see  the  strainings  of  their  minds  which  are  so 
fixed  upon  my  coming  that  they  do  not  want  to  hear  of  anything 
else.  They  are  weary  of  receiving  nothing  but  the  keys  of  knowl- 
edge, for  they  do  not  satisfy  them.  My  people  should  know  that 
I  am  compelled  to  give  unto  them  a  knowledge  of  my  gospel 
before  I  can  give  unto  them  the  power  thereof;  and,  while  I  am 
doing  so,  they  ought  to  be  satisfied,  and  rest  assured  that  inasmuch 
as  I  have  given  unto  them  a  knowledge  of  my  gospel,  I  shall  also 
give  them  the  power  of  it.  TJiey  should  make  themselves  con- 
tented with  one  thing  at  a  time.  I  am  working  with  them  as  fast 
as  they  can  endure  it.  I  am  compelled  to  load  them  along,  little 
by  little,  until  I  get  them  to  the  point  where  I  can  give  unto  them 
the  power  of  the  gospel.  But  some  of  my  people  will  not  let  me 
work  with  them.  They  are  continually  wishing  to  see  a  manifes- 
tation of  my  power.  What  is  the  reason  of  this?  It  is  because 
they  have  not  sufficient  faith  in  me ;  they  do  not  fully  believe  in 
my  promises ;  they  are  not  willing  to  trust  themselves  in  my  hands 
and  do  as  I  command  them.  Nevertheless,  they  are  continually 


420  CONCERNING    EVIL. 

in  my  hands,  and  they  cannot  get  out  of  them ;  therefore,  they  had 
better  reconcile  themselves  to  their  fate.  If  they  will  allow  me,  I 
will  take  good  care  of  them.  They  shall  not  suffer  beyond  what  is 
common  to  mankind.  I  shall  lay  no  more  upon  them  than  what 
the  law  of  heaven  compels  me  to  do,  before  I  come  to  deliver 
them.  They  aie  not  compelled  to  endure  any  more  than  what 
others,  who  have  been  clothed  in  mortality,  have  endured.  The 
inhabitants  of  all  glorified  worlds,  when  in  mortality,  had  to 
endure  as  much  as  Adam's  race  has  endured.  We  know  all  about 
the  sufferings  of  Abraham's  seed ;  for  we  passed  through  similar 
sufferings  before  they  came  forth  into  mortality.  We  know  what 
all  mortal  beings  have  to  pass  through.  Adam's  race  need  not  to 
think  that  they  will  get  through  any  easier  than  we  did  when  we 
were  in  mortality.  We  had  to  fight  our  way  through  evil,  and 
they  will  have  to  do  the  same.  They  need  not  to  think  that  their 
sufferings  are  greater  than  have  ever  before  been  endured  by 
mortal  beings ;  for  all  mortals  have  the  same  amount  of  evil  to 
fight  their  way  through  to  exaltation  and  glory.  Therefore,  as  all 
are  treated  alike,  all  ought  to  be  satisfied  with  their  fate,  and  not 
murmur  so  much  while  they  are  receiving  their  just  due. 

2.  Some  of  these  people  who  yielded  obedience  to  the  fulness 
of  my  gospel,  turned  round  against  me,  and  denied  all  the  truth 
which  I  have  revealed.  Did  they  think  that  the  truth  could  be 
changed  by  their  corrupt  and  empty  hearts?  Did  they  suppose 
that  if  they  turned  away  from  it  that  its  nature  would  change,  and 
that  my  work  would  come  to  an  end?  Such  are  in  the  gall  of 
bitterness,  and  I  will  visit  them  as  with  a  whirlwind.  I  will  not 
spare  one  of  them.  They  thought  that  by  running  away  they 
could  change  the  common  course  of  things ;  and  that  they  should 
never  be  brought  to  an  account  for  their  wickedness.  O  how  the 
devil  has  destroyed  them.  If  they  had  hearkened  unto  my  holy 
angels,  they  never  would  have  denied  me;  but  they  rebelled 
against  my  holy  angels,  who  withdrew  from  them  and  cast  them 
off,  and  delivered  them  into  the  hands  of  the  devil  that  he  might 
buffet  them  until  the  day  of  their  death.  They  cannot  be  liberated 
from  him  till  then ;  for  after  a  holy  angel  has  cast  a  person  off  on 
account  of  their  transgressions,  it  is  unlawful  for  him  to  influence 
that  person  again  while  he  is  in  mortality.  The  angel  against 


HIGH    PRIESTS    AND    PRIESTS    OF    AARON.  421 

whom  he  has  sinned,  will  be  the  angel  to  execute  the -penalty  of 
death  upon  him.  My  people  must  consider  that  my  holy  angels 
cannot  be  trifled  with.  They  should  give  way  to  them ;  and  if 
would  do  so,  they  would  lead  them  into  all  truth. 

3.  And  behold,   I   speak  unto  you  concerning  the  high  priests 
of  my  Church,  and  also  the  priests  of  Aaron.     I  gathered  them  to 
this  place  in  order  that  I   might  reveal   unto  them  the    hidden 
mysteries    of    my    kingdom   which  belong  to   the  fulness  of  my 
gospel,   that  I  might  prepare  them  to  preach  my  gospel  after  I 
shall  have  cleared  the  way  for  them.     This  was   the  main  object 
I  had  in  view  in  gathering  my  people  to  this  place.     I  could   not 
lawfully  destroy  mine   enemies  in  this  Territory  until  I  had  pre- 
pared a  number  of  men  to  preach  to  those  who  should  be  left 
alive,  and  gather  them  to  the  place  which  I  have  appointed.     But 
many  of  my  servants  do  not  strive  to   prepare  themselves   for  the 
work  which  lies  before  them  as  they  ought  to  do ;  but,  instead  of 
doing  so,  they  are  continually  calling  upon  me  to  come.     I  am 
waiting  for  them  to  prepare  themselves.     If  they  would  have  con- 
fined themselves,  even  months  ago,  to  their  own   duties,    I  should 
have  come  unto  them  and  delivered  them   before  now ;  but  they 
could  not  do  their  own  duties  for  fear  that  I  should  not  do  mine. 
They  were  afraid  that   I  should  lead  them  into  a  snare;  conse- 
quently, they  have  neglected  their  own   duties,  and  prolonged  the 
deliverance  of  my  people.     What  can  I  do  with  them?     I  cannot 
wait  for  them.     I  must  come  and  deliver  my  people,  whether  they 
are  prepared  for  the  work  that  lies  before  them,  or  not. 

4.  My  people  need  not  to  hang  their  heads,  and  conclude  that 
I  am  not  coming  yet ;  for,  as  I  have  said,  I  am  coming  as  soon  as 
the  oath  is  well  through  with.     Let  my   people  set   all  things  in 
order  in  the  Camp,  and  have  their  bodies  and  clothing  as  clean 
as  possible.     I  told  them,  some  time  ago,  to  put  their  wagons  in 
order,  ready  for  a  quick  move.     Have  they  done  as  I  commanded 
them  in  that  matter?     If  they  have  not,  let  them  do  so  as  quickly 
as   possible.     There  is  none  too   much  time  allotted  them  to  do 
what  they  have  to  do.     They  will  see  that  when  I  come  they  will 
not  be  fully  prepared  for  me.     But  I  shall  have  to  come,  whether 
they  are   prepared  or  not.     Let  them  do  as  I  have  commanded 
them,  and  prepare  themselves  to   meet  me  as   well  as  they  can ; 


422  CONCERNING    THE    DISAPPOINTMENTS. 

and  I  will  accept  of  all  my  faithful  and  honest  people.  Therefore, 
let  them  rest  in  me,  and  I  will  not  betray  their  confidence ;  for  lo, 
I  come  quickly.  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts ;  even  Jesus  Christ. 
Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    SHOWING    THE    REASON    WHY   THE 
LORD    HAS    DISAPPOINTED    HIS    PEOPLE. 


No.  225.  WEBER,  UTAH,  February  2oth,  1862. 

i.  Lo,  I  COME;  but  who  among  my  people  will  stand  when 
I  appear?  For  nature  will  shake,  and  men  will  fall  upon  the 
ground  as  though  they  were  dead.  The  sensation  will  be  so 
strong  that  people  who  will  not  be  smitten  dead  will  feel  that  it  is 
impossible  for  animated  beings  to  live  through  the  scene.  I  know 
what  many  of  my  people  think  about  my  coming ;  they  treat  it 
lightly,  even  as  as  a  small  occurrence.  I  am  round  about  my  peo- 
ple continually  by  my  holy  angels,  and  I  hear  all  their  conversa- 
tion concerning  my  ma'y  of  working  with  them.  Some  of  them 
are  very  much  dissatisfied  with  it.  They  say  that  they  would  not 
work  in  the  way  that  I  do,  if  they  were  in  my  place ;  that  they 
would  work  in  a  plain  and  positive  way,  so  that  people  could  un- 
derstand them.  But  if  they  were  placed  in  the  same  position  that 
I  am  placed  in,  they  would  work  with  mortals  just  in  the  same 
way  that  I  do.  Some  of  them  who  blame  me  for  my  way  of 
working  have  forgotten  how  they  worked  when  they  were  in  power 
as  mediators.  They  worked  with  the  mortal  people  whom  they 
had  to  deal  with  just  in  the  same  way  that  I  work  with  them  now. 
They  need  to  close  their  mouths,  and  say  no  more  about  what 
they  would  do  if  they  were  in  my  place.  I  know  what  they 
have  done,  and  ihat  is  enough  for  me  to  know  about  them. 
But  I  can  assure  them  that  they  are  now  so  blind  that  they  do  not 
know  what  they  are  doing.  They  are  losing  my  spirit.  They 
cannot  see  their  way  clear  before  them.  They  are  ready  to  catch 
at  a  straw  to  hold  themselves  from  falling.  Such  is  their  weakness 
after  all  the  privileges  which  they  have  had  to  learn  the  principles 


CONCERNING    THE    DISAPPOINTMENTS.  423 

of  my  gospel.  But  I  can  assure  those  dissatisfied  people  that  I 
am  about  to  make  a  change  with  them.  I  can  do  nothing  right 
for  them.  They  are  like  a  troubled  sea.  They  are  afraid  lest 
they  should  be  brought  to  want ;  and  when  they  look  a  few  days 
ahead,  and  imagine  that  they  see  a  little  poverty  before  them,  they 
begin  to  fear,  and  ask  "What  shall  be  done?"  as  though  they  had 
no  faith  at  all  in  me.  Have  I  ever  forsaken  them?  Have  they 
not  been  provided  for  up  to  this  time?  They  are  afraid  before 
they  are  hurt.  They  put  themselves  to  a  great  deal  of  unneces- 
sary trouble.  I  know  all  about  their  situation,  and  I  shall  lay  no 
more  upon  them  than  what  the  law  of  heaven  compels  me  to  do ; 
that  much  they  will  have  to  endure,  let  them  murmur  against  me 
as  much  as  they  may.  What  better  are  they  than  other  mortals? 
All  mortals  have  to  fight  their  way  through  the  powers  of  dark- 
ness; and,  while  doing  so,  they  all  have  to  suffer.  Therefore, 
inasmuch  as  all  are  treated  alike,  all  ought  to  be  satisfied.  My 
people  murmur  because  I  have  disappointed  them  a  few  times. 
Why  have  I  disappointed  them  so  much?  I  have  done  so  to  see 
if  I  could  show  unto  them  their  follies.  I  wished,  by  giving  unto 
them  blank  disappointments,  time  after  time,  to  show  unto  them 
that  they  were  not  prepared  to  meet  me ;  but  it  appears  that  I 
cannot  teach  them  much  by  taking  that  course  with  them ;  for, 
instead  of  that  bringing  them  to  their  senses,  convincing  them  of 
their  follies,  and  showing  unto  them  that  they  were  not  prepared 
to  meet  me,  it  has  worked  the  opposite  way  with  them.  They 
turned  around  upon  me,  and  charged  me  with  being  false ;  and 
like  fools,  they  laid  the  whole  blame  upon  me,  and  strove  to 
justify  themselves.  I  should  think  that  a  blank  denial  from  me 
ought  to  teach  a  sensible  person  something.  All  people  who  have 
half  a  grain  of  sense  will  admit  at  once  that  I  know  more  than 
they  do.  But  some  of  my  people  act  as  though  they  had  no  sense 
at  all.  If  they  had  their  proper  senses,  it  would  go  hard  with 
them  ;  for  I  would  chasten  them  severely.  There  are  those  among 
my  people  who  think  nothing  of  setting  themselves  against  me,  and 
sitting  in  judgment  upon  my  course  and  condemning  it.  They 
pretend  that  they  know  how  I  ought  to  act ;  that  they  know  how 
things  ought  to  be  conducted  in  my  Church,  arid  that  if  I  would  do 
as  they  would  like  me  to  do,  I  should  do  right.  They  have  not  as 


424  THE    DISAPPOINTMENTS. 

much  good  sense  as  a  brute  beast.  There  are  a  few  sensible  peo- 
ple in  my  Church,  and  there  are  others  who,  if  they  have  any  good 
sense,  do  not  make  use  of  it.  They  act  wildly.  There  is  no 
steadiness  about  them.  They  do  not  appear  to  collect  their  senses, 
and  bring  them  to  bear  upon  the  most  trifling  thing  ;  but  they  run 
wildly  and  thoughtlessly  at  every  simple  thing  with  which  they 
have  to  do. 

2.  If  my  people  had  been  prepared  to  meet  me  without  my 
having  to  disappoint  them  in  order  for  me  to  prepare  them  for 
that  event,  I  should  not  have  disappointed  them  once.  The  object 
I  had  in  view  for  disappointing  them  so  many  times,  was  to  show 
unto  them  that  they  were  unprepared ;  and  I  thought  that,  after  I 
had  disappointed  them  the  first  time,  they  would  have  understood 
at  once  the  reason  of  such  a  disappointment ;  that  they  would  have 
sought  to  prepare  themselves  in  such  a  manner  to  meet  me  as  to 
be  disappointed  no  more.  I  can,  in  that  way,  teach  sensible  peo- 
ple ;  they  will  understand  me  at  once.  The  wise  of  my  people 
have  understood  me ;  but  they  are  but  few.  They  are  now  ready 
to'  meet  me,  and  lo,  I  will  come  and  deliver  them.  I  am  the 
Lord  of  Hosts ;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    CONCERNING    THE    PRINCIPLES    OF 
LIGHT   AND   DARKNESS. 


No.  226.  WEBER,  UTAH,  February  2ist,  1862. 

i.  I  HAVE  heard  your  prayer,  my  son,  and  I  am  come  to 
answer  it.  You  wish  me  to  make  known  unto  you,  positively, 
what  I  am  about  to  do  with  my  people,  seeing  that  I  cannot, 
apparently,  bring  them  to  that  point  which  I  should  like  to  bring 
them  to.  You  say  that  it  appears  to  you  that  the  course  which  I 
have  been  taking  with  them  during  the  last  few  months,  has  had  a 
tendency  to  drive  them  further  from  me,  instead  of  bringing  them 
nearer  unto  me ;  that  in  consequence  of  disappointing  them  so 
many  times,  I  have  almost  broken  their  confidence  in  me ;  that 
they  will  not  scarcely  believe  anything  that  I  say.  And  you  say 


LIGHT    AND    DARKNESS.  425 

also  that,  when  you  undertake  to  explain  unto  them  the  reason  of 
so  many  disappointments,  and  apparent  contradictions,  which  I 
have  made  in  the  revelations  which  I  have  given,  your  explana- 
tions do  not  satisfy  them ;  that  they  will  not  even  listen  to  any 

explanations. 

2.  My   people   should   consider  that  they  are  mortal,  and  sur- 
rounded by  a  false  and  evil  influence.     They  do  not  see  as  I  see; 
for,  to  do  so,   they  must  be  where  I   am,  and  move  under  the  in- 
fluence of  light  and  truth,  even  as   I   do.     They  are    mortal,   and 
are  of  the  earth,  earthy;   and  all  that  they  see  in  the  world  is  of  a 
worldly  nature.     They   see   and   understand  it  according   to  the 
influence  of  the  devil  which  prevails  in  the  world.     It  is  an  influ- 
ence of  da-rkness ;  consequently,   it  is   false.     And   when  mortals 
under  that  influence  judge  anything,  their  judgment  is  the  judg- 
ment of  devils — even  a  false  judgment.     And  thus,  while  people 
are  under  that  false  influence,  they  will  rise  up  against  me,  and  sit 
in  judgment  upon  my  course.     While  people  are  under  the  in- 
fluence of  the  devil,  they  see  things  as  he  sees  them. 

3.  Light  and  darkness  are  in  direct  opposition  to  each  other. 
Light  can  never  be  judged  by   darkness.     The   darkness  which 
envelops  mankind,  understands  things  in  one  way,  but  the  light 
of  heaven  sees  them  in   another  way.     My  people   need  not  to 
think  that  they   can   see  things  aright   under  that  false  influence. 
They  can  only  see  things  aright  in  proportion  as  they  are  enlight- 
ened by  my  spirit ;  and  my  spirit  will  only  enlighten  them  accord- 
ing to  their  faithfulness.     If  people  are  not   enlightened  by  my 
spirit,  they  know  nothing  whatever  about  me,  but  are   wholly  con- 
trolled by  the  influence  of  darkness.     No  people  can  possess  the 
light  of  heaven  if  they  are  not  faithful  and  true  to  the  source  whence 
that  light  comes.     There  are  only  two  influences  in  existence — the 
influence  of  light   and  the  influence  of  darkness.     All  animated 
beings  move  forth  and  act  under  one  or  the   other   of  those  influ- 
ences ;  and  according  to  the  influence  which  they  are  under,   they 
see  and  understand  aH  things. 

4.  And  inasmuch  as  my  people  are  not  fully  enlightened,  they 
cannot  see  all  things  as  I  do.    They  are  influenced  more  by  the  devil 
than  they  are  by  me,  for  the  influence  of  darkness  which   is  in  the 
world  is  more  powerful  than  the  influence  of  light  and  truth  which 


426  LIGHT    AND    DARKNESS. 

they  have  as  yet  feceived.  They  are  overpowered  by  darkness, 
and  it  -appears  very  hard  for  them  to  fight  their  way  through  it. 
But  when  I  come,  my  people  will  have  the  greatest  influence ;  and 
the  faithful  will  have  perfect  victory  over  the  devil  and  his  in- 
fluence. My  influence  will  then  be  the  prevailing  influence  in  my 
Church;  for  my  influence  is  greater  than  the  influence  of  the 
devil.  Both  devils  and  their  influence  will  have  to  give  way  to  me 
and  my  influence,  for  I  will  sweep  them  off  the  earth. 

5,  My    people  think  that  I    have  contradicted  myself  many 
times ;  but  if  they   were  celestial  beings,   and  could  see  as  I  see, 
they  would  know  that  I  have  never  contradicted  myself.     They  are 
under  one  influence   in  the   world,   and   I   am  under  another  in 
heaven.     When  I   speak  the  truth  as  it  exists  in  heaven  unto  men 
upon  the  earth,  it  clashes  with  that  false  influence  which  is  in  the 
world.     All  mortal  'men  act  under   that  influence,  until  they  be- 
come enlightened,   and  then  they,  in  part,  see  as  I  see.     Thus  the 
true  influence  from  heaven  comes  in  open  contact  with  the  false 
influence   of  the   earth  and  produces  a   clash ;  and  wThen  a  clash 
takes  place,  the  children  of  men  forthwith  begin  to  judge  and  con- 
demn the  things  which  come  down  from  heaven  by  the  things  which 
exist-  upon  the  earth ;  and  thus  my  people  wish  to  try  me,  and  all 
my  works,  by  the  devil's  standard.     They  should  know  that  light 
will  clash  with  darkness,  and  truth  with  error;  that  I  am  true,  and 
that  all  the  revelations  which  I   have  given  are  also  right  and  true. 
My  words  cannot  be  tried  by  the  carnal   mind ;  for  the  things  of 
heaven  cannot  be  discerned  by  the  natural  man. 

6.  My  people  are  very  much  grieved  with  me,  because   I  will 
not  submit  to  be  tried  by  the  devil.     If  they  wish  to  please  me, 
they  must  believe  every  word  that  proceeds  from   my  mouth,  and 
live  by  it,  no  matter  how  my  words  may  appear  to  contradict  each 
other.     My  people  must  consider  that  they  are  mortal,  and  in  the 
hands  of  the  devil;  and  if  they  wish  to  be  delivered  out  of  his  hands, 
they  must  do  as  I  command  them ;  there  is  no  other  way  for  them 
to  obtain  a  deliverance.     They  are  too  poor  and  depraved  to  judge 
me.     Let  them   forsake  their  follies,  and  learn  to  obey  my  words, 
no  matter  how  inconsistent  they  may  appear;  for,  by  so  doing,  they 
may  save  their  own  lives.     My  ways  are  not  as  man's  ways.     It  is 
my  duty  to  command,  but  it  is  man's  duty  to  obey ;  therefore,  let 


THE    PEOPLE    ARE    DESTITUTE.  427 

my  people  obey  me,  and  all  will  be   well   with   them.     I   am   the 
Lord. 

7.  My  people  wish  to  know  when  I  shall  deliver  them.  They  say 
that  they  are  in  great  poverty  and  distress.  Some  of  them  are  very 
bare,  and  in  want  of  the  common  necessaries  of  life ;  and  I  know" 
that  it  is  impossible  for  them  to  endure  their  present  circumstances 
much  longer.  My  people  are  almost  destitute  of  everything ;  but 
I  am  watching  them,  and  I  will  come  and  deliver  them  before 
they  are  called  to  suffer  the  want  of  food.  I  shall  speedily  be  with 
them  to  release  them.  They  need  not  to  let  their  spirits  droop ; 
for  I  shall  speedily  come  unto  them,  and  then  they  will  be  re- 
warded for  all  the  inconveniences  which  they  have  suffered  in  this 
place.  Let  my  people  help  each  other,  and  ease  each  other's  bur- 
dens as  much  as  they  possibly  can;  and  I  will  reward  them  when 
I  come.  Lo,  I  come  quickly.  I  am  the  Bright  and  Morning 
Star;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  s"o.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    CONCERNING    THOSE    PEOPLE    WHO 

HAVE    BEEN    OVERCOME    BY    AN    EVIL 

INFLUENCE. 


No.  227.  WEBER,  UTAH,  February  22nd,  1862. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  that  you  may  be  watch- 
ing for  me ;  for  trouble  has  commenced  among  my  people,  and 
the  devil  is  gaining  a  fast  hold  on  'the  minds  of  some  of  them. 
They  have  given  way  to  him,  and  a  few  of  my  people  have  denied 
me  in  their  hearts ;  and  even  a  number  of  men  who  are  now  in 
high  standing  among  my  people  have  given  way  to  a  false  spirit, 
and  it  is  gradually  destroying  them.  If  they  do  not  speedily  re- 
trace their  steps,  it  will  be  all  over  with  them.  They  are  blinded 
by  the  devil  already,  and  they  wish  to  hide  their  feelings,  in  order 
that  they  may  hold  their  places  among  my  people;  but  they  are 
not  fit  to  labor  in  their  offices.  They  are  in  possession  of  fake 
spirits,  and  you  must  stop  them  from  acting  in  their  offices.  You 
must  put  others  in  their  places.  You  need  not  fear  what  they  can 


428  THE    DIVISION. 

do.  If  you  will  take  this  course  with  them,  it  will  either  bring 
them  to  repentance,  or  destroy  them  at  once ;  it  will  have  a  right 
effect  upon  them.  You  need  not  be  astonished  if  you  see  my 
people  divide  into  two  parties,  and  if  the  opposite  party  should 
be  led  by  men  of  high  standing.  If  you  should  see  them  draw 
quite  a  number  of  this  people  with  them,  you  need  not  be  as- 
tonished. There  is  quite  a  number  of  this  people  whom  I  shall 
not  deliver,  and  I  am  about  to  withdraw  my  spirit  from  them.  If 
I  was  to  deliver  them,  they  would  not  abide  my  law  after  their 
deliverance.  I  know  all  those  who  will  obey  my  law ;  these  I 
will  hold  by  my  spirit ;  not  one  of  them  shall  be  destroyed  ;  they 
have  been  reconciled  to  my  way  of  working;  they  have  been 
willing  to  let  me  dictate,  and  have  murmured  but  little,  if  any, 
against  me.  But  those  dissatisfied  people  who  have  almost  con- 
tinually been  sitting  in  judgment  upon  my  course,  and  condemn- 
ing me  by  the  influence  of  the  devil,  which  they  are  in  possession 
of,  they  shall  not  be  benefited  in  this  life  by  my  works  which  they 
have  so  often  condemned.  I  have  told  my  people  ofte,n  enough 
what  to  do  to  save  their  own  lives;  but  some  of  them  would  not 
do  as  I  have  commanded  them ;  but  they  have  almost  continually 
been  finding  fault  with  me. 

•  2.  And  inasmuch  as  a  division  is  likely  to  take  place  among 
my  people^  all  these  murmurers  will  come  out  against  me ;  and 
when  you  see  my  people  begin  to  form  themselves  for  a  division, 
you  may  then  begin  to  prepare  for  me.  I  will  manage  things  with 
those  straggling  apostates  until  I  am  ready  to  withdraw  my  spirit 
from  all  those  who  I  do  not  intend  to  deliver.  I  want  to  hold  the 
hypocrites  together  until  I  am  ready  to  cast  them  all  off.  I  want 
to  keep  them  as  quiet  as  I  possibly  can  until  I  am  ready  to 
destroy  all  of  them.  As  I  cut  of  Korah,  Dathan,  and  Abiram, 
and  the  princes  of  Israel,  so  I  will  cut  off  all  the  apostates  who 
depart  from  me.  When  I  have  withdrawn  my  spirit  from  all  the 
hypocrites  who  are  among  my  people,  they  will  all  gather  together 
with  their  leader,  and  form  themselves  into  a  body  to  oppose  me ; 
and  as  soon  as  ever  they  have  all  united  to  oppose  me,  then  I  will 
come  out  of  my  hiding  place  and  consume  them.  This  is  a  true 
sign  of  my  coming  which  I  have  given  unto  you.  You  may 
depend  upon  this.  I  am  talking  untu  you,  and  not  to  my  people. 


RICHARD    COOK    AND    JOHN    BANKS    APPOINTED.  429 

You  may  look  out  for  trouble  with  the  heads  of  my  Church  ;  and 
that  opposite  party  will  form  itself  by  the  direction  of  that  head 
which  will  come  out  of  my  Church.  That  head  is  already  begin- 
ning to  prepare  himself  for  his  work. 

3.  You  will  not  have  to  wait  long  to  see  a   slaughter.     Yotr 
must  keep  your  eyes  open   and  watch  that   opposite   spirit.     You 
must  take  charge  of  the  main  branch  in  this  place,  and  appoint  my 
servant  Richard  Cook  over  another  meeting  place ;    and  you  shall 
appoint  my  servant  John  Banks  over  another  branch  in  this  place. 
You  must  appoint  them  to  preside  over  those   meetings  which  I 
shall  show  unto  you. 

4.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son,  that  when  I  withdraw 
my  spirit  from  those  people  whom   I   do  not  intend  to  deliver,  I 
will  pour  out  my  spirit  in  great  abundance  upon  those  of  my  peo- 
ple whom  I  intend  to  deliver.     You  must  strive  to  hold  my  faith- 
ful people  together,  and  I  will  assist  you,  and  all  things   will   go 
right.     I  shall  be  with  you  for  good  in  a  few  days.     I  shall  not  be 
more  than  a  few  more  days  before  I  come  in  power.     I  am  speak- 
ing to  you   now.      I  shall  not    disappoint    you.      Keep   all  your 
linen  clothing  ready  to   put  on  at  a  few  minutes   warning,  and 
watch  both  the  hypocrites  who  are  in  the  midst  of  my  people  and 
also  for  me ;   for  lo,  I  come  in  the  course  of  a   few  days.     I  am 
the  Lord   of  Hosts;   even   Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and 
Amen. 


REVELATION  CONCERNING  THE  SPIRIT  OF 
APOSTACY. 


No.   228.  WEBER,   UTAH,  February  23rd,   1862. 

i.  I  WISH  to  speak  unto  you  again  concerning  things  of  great 
importance.  The  spirit  of  apostacy  is  in  the  midst  of  my  people, 
and  it  is  making  great  havoc  with  some  of  them.  If  you  see 
scores  of  these  people  come  out  against  me  and  deny  the  truth, 
you  need  not  be  surprised.  None  will  leave  the  truth  but  those 
whom  I  have  rejected;  and  I  shall  withdraw  my  spirit  from  those 


430  THE    SEPARATION. 

whom  I  have  rejected ;  and  after  I  have  withdrawn  my  spirit  from 
a  number  of  the  people,  they  will  fall,  and  Satan  will  take  full 
possession  of  them,  and  they  will  deny  me,  and  thirst  for  your 
blood,  and  for  the  blood  of  all  the  rest  of  my  faithful  people.  But 
I  will  guide  them  aright,  and  bring  them  to  the  right  position.  As 
soon  as  I  have  separated  them  from  the  faithful  of  my  people,  I 
will  come  and  consume  them.  After  their  leader  has  gone  from 
among  the  faithful  of  my  people,  they  will  speedily  go  around  him, 
and  set  themselves  against  my  faithful  people ;  and  as  soon  as  he 
has  drawn  them  all  around  him,  and  a  proper  division  has  taken 
place  between  the  hypocrites  and  the  faithful  of  my  people,  then  I 
will  come. 

2.  AVhen  the   hypocrites  turn   against   me,   they  will  desire  to 
commit  violence  upon  the  faithful  of  my  people ;  but  I    will  sur- 
round them  by  my  holy  angels,  and  force  them  to  a  certain  place 
where  I  want  them  to  stand  when  I  destroy  them ;  and  I  will  hold 
them  powerless  until  I  slay  them. 

3.  I  have  selected  a  place  where  I   intend  to  separate  these 
people.    I  will  show  you  the  place  which  I  have  appointed  for  that 
purpose.      I   will   make   known  unto  you,  from  time  to  time,  how 
things  are  working  with  the  hypocrites  who  are  in  the  midst  of  my 
people.     You  shall  know  all  about  them ;  and  I  will  shortly  show 
unto  you  the  man  who  will  lead  the  hypocrites.     I  will  force  him 
out  from  among  my  people,  and  you  shall  see  him   as  he   is ;  and 
the  rest  of  my  faithful  people  shall  see  him.     You  need  not  be  sur- 
prised if  you   see   a  number  of  men,   who  are  in  high  standing, 
gather  around  him  and  sustain  him. 

4.  There   are  a  number  of  men   in  the  apostleship  who  are 
losing  my  spirit,  and  I  have  but  little  or  no  hope  for  them ;  they 
are  going  down  to  destruction.     But  the  majority  of  that  quorum 
will  be  very  likely  to  stand  and  receive  their  deliverance.     It  would 
be  well  if  that  quorum  was  disorganized,  and  the  dividing  line  was 
drawn  between  the  faithful   and   the  unfaithful,  in  order  that  the 
faithful   might  not  be   injured   by  the  influence  of  those  apostate 
apostles. 

5.  When   you   divide   the  apostleship,  you  may  know  that  the 
trouble   has   commenced.     You   must   attend  to  this  matter  when 
the  apostles  assemble  in  their  next   meeting.     I  am  coming  unto 


THE    PROPHET    COMMANDED    TO    BE    PREPARED.  431 

you  in  a  few  days,  as  I  told  you  in  the  last  revelation.  I  have 
trifled  long  enough  with  this  people.  I  will  force  the  apostates 
to  act.  I  could  not  come  until  I  had  divided  the  hypocrites  from 
the  faithful  of  my  people.  I  come  as  a  man  of  war.  I  come 
when  my  power  is  needed.  I  come  to  defend  the  truthful  and  the — 
innocent.  I  come  to  fight  your  battles.  I  will  lay  everything  low 
that  opposes  you  until  your  mission  is  ended ;  for  I  am  the 
Lord. 

6.  And  I  speak  unto  you  again  concerning  your  linen  dress. 
See  that  you  have  all  those  things  ready  so  that  you  can  dress 
yourself  quickly ;  for  I  shall  come  unto  you  suddenly  when  my 
time  has  come.  Cast  all  fear  far  from  you,  and  walk  forth  among 
this  people  and  instruct  them,  so  that  they  may  understand  my 
ways.  Some  of  these  people  have  departed  from  me  because  they 
did  not  understand  my  way  of  working,  and,  on  that  account,  the 
devil  has  gained  the  power  over  them.  They  gave  up  to  him. 
They  wanted  to  sit  in  judgment  upon  my  words,  and  try  them  by 
their  own  wisdom ;  and  because  that  my  words  differed  from  their 
idea  of  things,  they  condemned  me  and  left  the  truth.  They 
wanted  to  be  my  judge.  O  the  blindness  and  ignorance  of  mortal 
men !  How  the  devil  does  destroy  them !  If  the  children  of 
Abraham  would  do  as  I  command  them,  not  one  of  them  would 
be  slain  by  the  hands  of  the  destroying  angels  ;  but  they  give  way 
to  the  devil  and  suffer  him  to  blind  their  eyes,  and  destroy  them. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts. 
Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    CONCERNING  JOHN  PARSON. 


No.  229.  WEBER,  UTAH,  February  25th,  1862. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Light  and  Life  of  the  world,  even  Jesus 
Christ,  and  I  am  come  to  speak  unto  you  concerning  John  Parson. 
I  called  him  and  gave  unto  him  an  honorable  place  in  my  Church. 
I  made  him  the  president  over  the  apostleship,  and  I  have  sus- 
tained him  in  that  office  up  to  the  present  time;  and  I  enlightened 


432  CONCERNING    JOHN    PARSON. 

him  greatly.  I  placed  him  where  he  had  the  opportunity  of  learn- 
ing the  principles  of  the  fulness  of  my  gospel,  as  far  as  they  have 
been  revealed  unto  my  people  through  my  servant,  the  prophet. 
When  he  was  humble  he  did  some  good  to  this  people  whom  I 
gathered  to  this  place.  He  labored  diligently  for  a  few  months  to 
assist  me  to  establish  my  work  upon  the  earth ;  and  when  he  was 
humble  I  accepted  of  his  labor,  and  greatly  blessed  him  with  light 
and  knowledge ;  but  he  grew  large  in  his  own  conceit,  and  began 
to  condemn  me.  He  thought  that  his  judgment  was  superior  to 
mine,  and  he  treated  my  words  as  a  thing  of  naught.  He  -raised 
himself  up  and  condemned  me,  and  I  have  withdrawn  my  spirit 
from  him,  and  he  is  now  led  by  the  'devil.  He  will  do  all  that  lies 
in  his  power  against  me ;  but  he  will  not  hurt  one  person  whom 
I  have  chosen.  I  will  be  with  them  by  mine  holy  angels,  and  I 
wilHhold  them.  He  will  only  gather  together  those  whom  I  have 
withdrawn  my  spirit  from  and  cast  off.  I  will  give  them  unto  him, 
and  they  shall  die  with  him.  He  wishes  to  be  a  leader,  and  he 
shall  have  the  desire  of  his  heart  until  he  has  gathered  out  from 
among  my  people  all  the  hypocrites.  His  pride  and  conceit  have 
destroyed  him.  He  knows  not  what  he  is  doing.  He  has  greatly 
injured  a  few  of  the  members  of  his  quorum.  He  suffered  the 
devil  to  overcome  him,  and  he  led  a  delusive  spirit  upon  the  mem- 
bers of  his  quorum,  and  a  few  of  them  are  greatly  injured  by  that 
false  spirit  which  he  led  upon  them. 

2.  It  will  be  very  difficult  for  some  of  them  to  come  out  from 
under   that  influence ;  if  they  do  so,  they  will  have  to  exert  them- 
selves greatly.     I  have  but  little  hope  for  some  of  them.     When 
people  are  in  possession  of  a  delusive  spirit,    they  know  not  what 
they  are  doing.     They  believe  that  they  are  all  right,  and  that  every 
other  person  who  does  not  see  and  understand  things  as  they  do, 
are  wrong,  and  they  will  seek  to  contend  with  them,  to  see  if  they 
cannot  put  them   right.    '  All  people  who  are  in  the  possession  of 
the  spirit  of  Lucifer  will   do  so.     The  devil  makes  them   believe 
that   they   are   right,   and  that  every   person  that  opposes  them  is 
wrong.     There    is   but  little   chance  for  people   who  are   so   far 
deceived  by  the  devil,  to  repent  and  to  turn  unto  me  again. 

3.  And  behold,  I  give  unto  you  a  commandment :     You  shall 
disorganize  the  quorum  of  the  twelve:  for  I  have  cast  off  John 


THE    APOSTLESHIP    MUST    REMAIN    DISORGANIZED.  433 

Parson.  He  shall  preside  no  more  over  that  quorum.  He  is  a 
traitor  to  me,  and  I  will  show  him  the  traitor's  doom.  And  when 
you  disorganize  the  apostleship,  you  shall  ask  them  how  many  of 
them  are  willing  to  uphold  you  and  your  counsel ;  and  those  who 
will  uphold  you  with  all  their  power,  I  will  accept  of,  and  they  - 
must  meet  with  you  in  your  council,  and  place  themselves  under 
your  influence. 

4.  You  must  not  organize  the  apostleship  again  until  some  time 
after   I   have  delivered  my   people.     I  will  send  unto  you  a  man 
who  will  fill  that  office  faithfully ;  until  I  send  him   unto  you,   the 
apostleship  must   remain  disorganized;  and   when  you  have   dis- 
organized the  apostleship,  if  there  should  be  any  members   of  that 
quorum  who  will  not  sustain  you,  but  who  take  the  opposite  course, 
such   I   have  rejected;  and   as  soon  as  John  Parson  and  those  of 
his   fellows   who   may   fall   with   him,  if  there  should  be  any  such, 
have  gathered  all  the  hypocrites  together  to  one  place,  then   I   will 
come.     They  have  long  wanted  to  see  me,  but  they  shall  feel  me 
then.     I  want  the  hypocrites  separated   from   the  faithful ;  and  as 
John   Parson   would   not  serve  me  in  mine  own  appointed  way,  I 
will  make  him  do  my  dirty  work. 

5.  I   will  make  traitors  serve  me  either  in  one  way  or  else  in 
another  until  the  day  of  their  death.     And  when  he  has   gathered 
all  the  hypocrites  together,  I  will  come  out  of  my  hiding  place  and 
consume  them  all,  as  I  did  Korah,  Dathan,  and  Abiram,  who  rose 
up   against   my   servant   Moses.     I   always  destroyed  his  enemies 
when  he  was  upon  the  earth  before,  and  I  shall  do  the  same  now. 
I  am   sworn   to  do  so.     Those  who  do  not  believe  that  I  shall  do 
so,  let  them  try  me.     Whenever  they  try  me  they  will  find  out  that 
I  will  sweep  them  off.     I  should  have  done  it  before  now  if  I  had 
been  compelled  to ;  but  my  people  have  never  as  yet  seen  a  mani- 
festation of  my  power,  because  I    have   never  been  compelled  to 
manifest  it.     They  shall  see  a  manifestation  of  my  power  when  I 
have  divided  this  Camp.     I  shall  speedily  come,  for  all  things  will 
be   ready  for  me   very  shortly.     I   will  force  things  up  to  a  head 
rapidly  among  my  people.     I  know  that  you  are  weary  of   waiting 
for   me.     I   am    coming.     Watch    for    me.     I    am   the    Lord  of 
Hosts. 

6.  And  behold,   I    say    unto   you,    my  son, — that    you  must 


434  CONCERNING    JOHN    PARSON. 

gather  the  apostles  together  to-morrow,  or  the  day  following,  and 
break  up  that  quorum  as  I  have  commanded  you;  and  you  must 
read  this  revelation  both  before  the  twelve,  when  they  are  assem- 
bled together,  and  also  in  the  public  meeting  of  the  saints.  I 
want  the  apostates  to  withdraw  from  my  faithful  people  as  soon  as 
they  can  ;  for  I  want  to  come  and  put  all  things  right.  I  am  the 
Lord  of  Hosts.  Lo,  I  come;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    CONCERNING   JOHN    PARSON. 


No.  230.  WEBER,  UTAH,  February  2yth,  1862.  • 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  he  that  shuts,  and  no  one  opens,  and  that 
opens,  and  no  one  shuts,  even  Jesus  Christ ;  and  I  .am  about  to 
speak  unto  you  again  concerning  my  servant  John  Parson,  accord- 
ing to  your  request.  He  says  he  will  not  fight  against  me.  He 
says  that  he  is  willing  to  act  his  part  as  one  of  my  apostles. 
It  seems  by  what  he  says  that  he  intends  to  be  true  to  me.  If 
this  is  his  determination,  I  will  uphold  him  as  an  apostle ;  but  he 
must  guard  against  evil  influences,  for  Satan  has  a  particular  spite 
against  him,  and  is  continually  upon  his  track.  He  is  not  aware  of 
all  the  wiles  and  the  cunning  of  the  devil  as  yet ;  and  it  is  well  for 
him  to  give  up  the  presidency  of  the  apostleship.  If  he  was  per- 
mitted to  hold  it  in  his  own  hands,  Satan  would  destroy  him  and 
many  more  of  his  brethren ;  for  I  have  not,  as  yet,  given  unto 
them  the  power  to  detect  false  spirits.  This  power  will  be  given  to 
the  apostleship  when  I  have  given  unto  my  servant  the  power  of 
his  office ;  until  then,  the  twelve  must  deliver  themselves  into  the 
hands  of  my  servant  Joseph,  and  he  must  instruct  them  upon  all 
points  of  doctrine  which  will  be  necessary  for  them  to  know. 
They  should  know  that  they  do  not  understand  all  things  as  yet. 
They  need  to  be  taught  much.  Let  them  guard  against  pride  and 
worldly  wisdom,  for  it  is  foolishness  in  my  sight.  My  ways  are 
not  as  the  ways  of  man.  It  is  the  duty  of  mortals  to  give  up 
to  me. 


CONCERNING    JOHN    PARSON.  435 

2.  My  servant  John  Parson  is  the  first  person  I  called  to  the 
apostleship,  and  he  has  done   much   good   in  preaching  to  those 
people  whom  I  gathered  here.     He  has  done  his   part  in   preach- 
ing.    I  have  no  fault  to  find  with   his   labors ;    but  he  has  not,  as 
yet,  the  power  to  detect  false  spirits.     They  have   the   power   over 
him  as  yet. 

3.  I  have  a  person  whose  birthright  is   great,  and  whose  judg- 
ment is  excellent,  whom  I   intend  to  place  over  the   apostleship ; 
and  inasmuch  as  my  servant  John  Parson  is  faithful,  he  shall  be 
his  counsellor,  even  one  with  him.     Let  my  servants  (the  twelve) 
be  satisfied  with  what  I  have  done,  for  all   things  will  work  right. 
I  know  what  is  best  for  them,  and  I  will  satisfy  all  the   faithful   of 
my  people  shortly. 

4.  I  intend  to  purge  from  among  my  people  all  the  hypocrites, 
as  fast  as  I  can ;    and  it  is  likely  that  men  will  break  out   from  the 
high  priesthood,  and  gather  together  those   people   whom   I  have 
rejected.     I  want  them  separated  from  the  faithful,  and  then  I  will 
come  and  clear  them  out  of  the  way.     I  cannot  deliver  those  who 
will  not  abide  my  law.     The  law  is   placed  before  them  in  part ; 
and  those  who  will  not  abide  that  little  which  I  have  already  given 
unto  my  people,  would  not  abide  the  full  law  if  I  was  to  deliver  it 
to  them.     I  will  deliver  those  who  will  fully  abide  that  portion  of 
the  law  which  I  have  revealed  unto  them — and  none  else.     Life 
and  death  are   now  placed   before   my   people;   they  can  choose 
which  they  will.     My  people  should  know  what  I  require  at  their 
hands.     The  conditions  whereby  either  life   or  death  are  gained 
are  now  placed  before  my  people.     They   can  save  their  lives,  if 
they  wish,  or  lose  them.     I  have  done  my  duty   unto   my  people ; 
let  them  take  whatever  course  they  may.     I  am  coming  to  put  all 
things  right.     I  am  the  Son  of  the  Eternal  Father;   even  Jesus 
Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


436  THE    DESTITUTE    CONDITION    OF    THE    PEOPLE. 

REVELATION    CONCERNING    THE     KEYS     OF     THE 
PRIESTHOOD. 


No.  231.  WEBER,  UTAH,  February  28th,  1862. 

1.  I  WISH  TO  speak  unto  you,    my  son,  concerning  these  my 
people.     You  say  that  when  you  survey  the   people  who  compose 
this  Camp,  you  find  that  there  are  a  number  of  them   destitute   of 
those  things  which  render  the   existence   of  mortals  tolerable ;  that 
you  feel  for  those  destitute  people ;   and  that  you  can  do  but  little 
to  help  them ;  for  you  feel  that  your  hands  are  tied.     You  say  that 
you  can  see  a  backwardness  in  some   of  those   who   are  tolerably 
well  circumstanced  to  help  the   poor;    and,  on  this  account,  the 
poor  are  called  to  suffer  more  than  they  ought  to  suffer ;    and  that 
it  is  unreasonably  hard  for  them  to  endure.     If  those  who  are  in 
good  circumstances  will  assist  the   poor  of  my  people,   they   will 
please  me.     They  need  not  to  be  afraid  to  let  their  substance  go 
to  feed  and  clothe  the  poor.     I  do  not  intend   to  strip  them   and 
bring  them  down  to  poverty   before  I   deliver  them.     They  need 
not  to  be  afraid  of  my  bringing  them  to  wapt  before  I  place   fresh 
means  in  their  hands.     If  they  will  assist  the  poor  of  my  people 
now  that  they  need  help,  I  will  give  unto  them  an  abundance   of 
property — even  as  much  as  they  can   desire — inasmuch  as  they 
wish  to  use  it  in  a  proper  manner.     But  I  want   the   needs  of  the 
poor    supplied    now.      They    will    need   no  help  from   the  more 
wealthy  of  my  people  after  I   have   delivered  them ;   they  will  all 
have  an  abundance  of  wealth  then. 

2.  I  gathered  a  few  people  to  this  place,  in  order  that  I  might 
prepare  a  number  of  men  to  preach  the  fulness  of  gospel ;  and  I 
have  continued  to  put  off  the   day  of  deliverance   in   order  that  I 
might  give  unto  my  servants  all   possible   opportunity  of  learning 
the  doctrines  contained  in  the  fulness  of  my  gospel.     My  servants 
should  learn  the  doctrines  of  my  Church  as  fast  as  they   can,   for 
they  will  find  that  when  I  send  them  through  this  Territory,  they 
will  know  none  too   much  about  them.      Let  my  servants  post 
themselves  as  much  as  possible  while  they  have   an  opportunity  to 
do  so.     They  should  also  strive  to  sustain  my  work  by  adminis- 


CONCERNING    THE    KEYS    OF    THE    PRIESTHOOD.  437 

tering  to  the  necessities  of  the  poor  who  are  in  their  midst;  for, 
by  so  doing,  they  will  help  themselves,  and  gain  time  and  oppor- 
tunity to  learn  the  doctrines  of  my  Church,  and  thus  accomplish 
the  purpose  for  which  I  gathered  them  to  this  place. 

3.  My  people  have  consecrated  their  property  according  to  the~ 
law  which  I  have  given-  unto  them,  and  they  have  sworn  the  oath 
which  I  placed  before  them,'  and  they  have  thereby  bound  them- 
selves to  me,  and  to  abide  my  law  as  it  is  revealed  unto  them 
through  my  servant,  the  prophet.  The  first  law  which  I  gave  unto 
them  was  the  law  of  consecration,  which  they  have  sworn  to  abide, 
and  not  only  that  law,  but  every  other  law  which  I  shall  hereafter 
give  unto  them.  And  inasmuch  as  they  have  bound  themselves  to 
me  by  an  oath  which  cannot  be  broken,  and  they  refuse  to  let  any 
portion  of  their  property  go  for  the  support  of  the  poor,  or  other 
Church  purposes,  when  a  lawful  call  is  made  upon  them  by  the 
steward,  I  will  withdraw  my  spirit  from  them,  and  cast  them  off; 
such  break  my  law,  and  I  shall  destroy  them.  I  am  the  Lord.  A 
breach  of  that  oath  is  death ;  therefore,  all  those  who  will  faithfully 
abide  my  law  as  far  as  I  have  revealed  it  unto  them,' I  will  deliver. 
Those  who  will  not  abide  the  little  which  I  have  already  given 
unto  them,  would  not  abide  the  remainder  of  my  law  which  has 
yet  to  be  revealed,  if  I  should  deliver  them.  Those  who  will  not 
acknowledge  the  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood  which  they  now  have 
in  their  midst,  would  not  acknowledge  the  power  of  my  gospel, 
should  they  see  it.  For  a  people  to  deny  the  keys  of  the  holy 
priesthood,  they  have  to  deny  the  sight  of  their  own  eyes,  and  the 
whole  of  their  senses  at  the  same  time.  If  such  people  should  see 
me  and  my  holy  angels,  and  witness  a  manifestation  of  my  power, 
it  would  not  satisfy  them ;  for  the  spirit  that  will  deny  the  keys  of 
knowledge  which  I  have  given  unto  my  people,  will  deny  all  truth, 
no  matter  how  visible  and  powerful  it  may  be.  My  people  have 
their  eyesight  and  senses,  and,  to  a  certain  extent,  they  both  see 
and  understand  the  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood ;  and  if  they  can- 
not believe  in  them,  they  cannot  believe  in  me  at  all.  Whosoever 
understands  perfectly  the  keys  of  knowledge,  sees  me  in  all  my 
glory ;  but  without  this  knowledge,  no  person  can  know  me  per- 
fectly. Through  the  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood,  I  am  revealed 
unto  the  children  of  men ;  but  without  them,  neither  I  nor  my 


CONCERNING    TIIK    KEYS    OF'    THK    PRIESTHOOD. 

leather  could  be  revealed  unto  them.  Through  those  keys  I  work 
and  reveal  all  things ;  but  without  them  I  do  nothing  among  men. 
Therefore,  that  spirit  that  will  deny  the  keys  of  the-holy  priesthood, 
will  deny  the  power  of  it.  Let  my  people  be  aware  of  that  spirit, 
for  it  is  the  spirit  of  Lucifer,  the  devil.  He  strives  to  make  my 
people  believe  that  those  keys  are  a  small  thing ;  yea,  even  a  thing 
of  naught ;  and  thus  strives  to  destroy  my  people  by  causing  them 
to  undervalue  the  greatest  of  all  blessings  which  can  be  conferred 
upon  the  human  race. 

4.  The  full  keys  of  knowledge  are  the  greatest  of  all  gifts  com- 
mitted to  mortals ;  for,  without  them,  there  is  no  resurrection  from 
the  dead  ;  without  them,    no  salvation  can  be  given  to  Abraham's 
seed  ;  without  them,  no  light  can  be  given  to  mortal  beings  ;  with- 
out them,   there  would  be   no  channel   of   communication   open 
between   heaven   and  earth ;  without  them,   Jesus  Christ  and  the 
army  of  heaven   could   never    come   out  to  battle,   and  go  from 
conquering  to   conquer;  without  them,   the  power  of  the  gospel 
never  could  be   committed  unto   man ;  without   them,  this   world 
would  go  back  to  its  native   element,   and  exist   no  more  in  an 
organized  form ;  for,  through  them,  and  by  them,   all  things   both 
in  heaven  and  upon  the  earth,  and  also  in   hell-,   exist.     O  ye  my 
people !  be  aware  how  you  speak  about  the  keys  of  the  holy  priest- 
hood ;  or  you  will  speedily  go  down  to  the  pit.     Those  who  speak 
against  the  priesthood,  and  against  him  who  holds  the  keys  thereof 
upon  the  earth,  speak  against  me  and  my  Father,  and  all  his  holy 
angels,  and  also  against  all  glorified  beings.     I  have  forewarned 
my  people  of  all  these  things,  and  if  they  run  recklessly  into  these 
sins,  I  shall  bring  swift  judgment  upon  them.     I  am  the  Lord. 

5.  Let    my  people  hearken  unto  my  words,   and  obey  them, 
that  all  may  be  w^ell  with  them.      I  know  what  they  want,   and   I 
will  give  it  unto  them.     Let  them  prepare  for  me ;  for  lo,   I  come 
quickly  to  their  release.      I   am   the  Lord  of  Hosts ;  even  Jesus 
Christ.     Even  so.      Amen  and  Amen. 


HOW    TO    PROVIDE    FOR    THE    POOR.  439 

THE    PROPHET    INSTRUCTED    HOW    TO    PROVIDE 
IMMEDIATE  RELIEF  FOR  THE  POOR. 


No.    232.  WEBER,  UTAH,  March  ist,  1862. 

1.  You  are  in  great  trouble  concerning  the  poor  of  my  people. 
You   see  that  they  are  suffering  much  for  the  necessaries  of  life, 
and  that   they   must  either  have  speedy  relief,  or  their  sufferings 
will  be  unendurable  to  them.     You   wish   to  know  of  me  what  to 
do  to   speedily   relieve   them.     You   say  in  your  feelings  that  you 
cannot  rely  upon  a  number  of  those  people   who  have   embraced 
the  fulness  of  my  gospel ;  that  you  can  plainly  see  that  they  have 
not  consecrated  their  property ;  that  they  are   only   mocking  me ; 
for  their  consecration  was  a  mock  consecration ;  that   if  the   least 
call  should  be  made  upon  them,  they  would  murmur  and  make  all 
manner  of  excuses  to  get  around  it.      Do  they  suppose  that   they 
will   meet  with   a   deliverance  at   my   hands?     I   will  send  them 
speedily  to  their  graves.     I  can  provide  for  the  poor  of  my  people 
without  their  assistance.     I  do  not  want  the  help   of  those  hypo- 
crites ;  I   only  wish  to  tiy   them,   for  this  I  am  compelled  to  do 
before   I   can   destroy  them — the   law  of  heaven   compels  me  to 
do  so. 

2.  I  know  the  thoughts  of  those  who  are  heirs  to  the  resurrec- 
tion, and  what  they  will  do  before  they  do  it ;  but  I  do  not  pretend 
to   understand   all  the  movements  of  fallen  spirits.     They  are  out- 
laws ;  they   are  not   governed  by   my  law,   but  they  run  at  loose 
ends.     Their  course  is  uncertain.     There  is  nothing  belonging  to 
their  course  that  can  be  depended  upon,  or  from  which  any  sure 
calculations  can  be  made.     I  can  make  just  and  true  calculations 
on  the  heirs  to  the  resurrection ;  for  they  are   governed  by  law  in 
whatever  world   they  reside.     The  law   has   a  claim  upon  them 
while  they  are  in  mortality;  and  if  they  will  not  abide  it  when  it  is 
placed  before  them,  I  am  compelled  to  cut  them  off  the  earth  and 
send   them   to  the   spirit   world,   where  they  will  be  compelled  to 
abide  the  law. 

3.  Abraham's   seed  need  not  think  that  they  can  get  around 
or  shun  my  law,  for  they  cannot ;  they  will  have  to  abide  my  law, 


44°  HOW    TO    RELIEVE    THE    POOR. 

let  them  go  where  they  may.  Therefore,  my  people  who  have 
yielded  obedience  to  the  fulness  of  my  gospel,  might  as  well  make 
up  their  minds  to  abide  my  law.  They  need  not  writhe  and  twist, 
fret  and  fume,  and  make  so  many  excuses  when  my  servant,  the 
steward,  is  sent  unto  them  for  a  portion  of  that  which  they  have 
consecrated ;  for  it  does  not  belong  to  them — it  is  mine ;  and  I 
wish  to  use  some  of  it  for  the  support  of  my  humble  poor.  I  will 
either  have  that  which  my  people  have  consecrated  unto  me,  or  at 
least  as  much  of  it  as  I  need  for  present  uses,  or  I  will  have  the 
lives  of  those  who  have  made  such  a  mock  consecration.  I  will 
not  be  mocked  by  those  hypocrites.  Although  I  know  the  inten- 
tions of  my  people,  yet  I  have  to  send  my  steward  unto  them,  to 
meet  with  a  denial  from  them,  before  they  are  condemned  by  me. 
If  any  persons  who  have  consecrated  their  property  refuse  to  allow 
my  steward  to  take  away  that  portion  which  he  has  been  sent  for, 
such  break  my  law,  and  are  condemned  to  die ;  such  I  shall  with- 
draw my  spirit  from,  for  they  are  no  longer  members  of  my 
Church.  When  I  come  I  will  destroy  them.  I  am  the  Lord. 

4.  You  wish  to  know  what  can  be  done  to  administer  unto  the 
poor   of  my  people  instant  relief,   seeing   that  they  are  suffering. 
You  must  speak  of  the  distress  of  the  poor  of  my  people  publicly. 
And  let  those  of  my  people  who  have  means  carry  some  of  their 
substance  to  the  poor,    and  thereby  supply  their  needs  for  a  few 
days — even  until  something  more  can  be  done  for  them. 

5.  I   will  make  an   alteration  in  the  arrangement  of  things  in 
the  course  of  a  few  more  days.     The  most  wealthy  of  my   people 
must  consider  the   distress   of  the  poor,   and  administer  to  their 
necessities   as  I  have  commanded  them,  and  all  will  be  well  with 
them.     Let   my  people  humble  themselves  greatly  before  me  dur- 
ing the  next  few  days,  in  order  that  they  may   be  prepared  for  a 
change,   for  they   will  witness  one.     They  will  see  what  it  will  be 
when  it    comes.     They  will  need  great  humility  to  enable  them  to 
meet  it.     I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts. 

6.  Let  my  people  keep  on  the  look  out  for  me,  for  lo,  I  come. 
It  would  be  well  for  them  to  sit  in  judgment  upon  their  own 
hearts,  and  ask  themselves  this   question:     "Have  we   honestly 
consecrated  our  property  according  to  the   law  which  has  been 
revealed  unto  us?"    If  they  have,  they  are  right,  and  have  nothing 


CONCERNING  PROPERTY.  441 

to  fear ;  but  if  they  have  not,  they  have  great  cause  to  fear.  I 
have  told  them  often  enough  what  the  law  of  heaven  requires  at 
their  hands.  They  are  not  so  ignorant  as  they  are  wilful  and 
rebellious.  O  that  all  those  who  have  embraced  the  fulness  of  my 
gospel  were  valiant  for  the  truth,  but  they  are  not.  Some  of  them 
think  a  great  deal  more  of  a  little  perishable  property  than  they 
think  of  the  keys  of  knowledge,  which  are  the  greatest  gifts  that 
can  be  conferred  upon  mortals.  I  have  done  all  that  I  possibly 
could  to  prepare  my  people  to  meet  me;  but  they  are  very  back- 
ward in  doing  as  I  have  commanded  them.  They  will  soon  have 
to  stand  in  their  own  lot,  and  receive  their  own  reward ;  for  lo,  I 
come  to  give  it  unto  them.  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts.  Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    CONCERNING  PROPERTY. 


No.  233.  WEBER,  UTAH,  March  3rd,  1862. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts,  and  I  wish  to  speak  unto 
you  again.     You  say  that  you  see  the  situation  of  those  who  have 
embraced  the  fulness  of  my  gospel  who  have  property ;  that  you 
cannot  obtain  their  property  because  of   mine  enemies  standing  in 
the  way,  and  on  that  account  it  is  of  no  use  to  you  ;  and  that  there 
are   a  number  of  such  men  who  can  do  but  liitle  or  nothing  to 
help  my  poor  people ;   therefore,   it    makes    it   harder   upon    the 
wealthy  of  my  people  who  have  property  at  their  command.     You 
say,   also,   that  the  property  which   is   at   command  will   soon  be 
exhausted  ;  and  you  would  like  to  know  what  you  are"to  do  then. 
I  will  answer  you  this  question.     I  will  come  and  deliver  my  peo- 
ple long  before  they  shall  have  used  up  their  property  which,  by 
them,   is   accessible.     I   will  not   strip  the  wealthy  of  my  people 
who  have  means  to  appropriate  for  the  support   of  my  poor ;  but 
they  shall  have   sufficient  for  their  owja  use  until  I  deliver  them ; 
such  shall  not  be  brought  to  want ;  they  need  not  to  fear   poverty, 
for  they  shall  never  be  called  to  partake  of  it. 

2.  I  know  that  there  are  a  number  of  men  in  my  Church  who 


442  f         CONCERNING    PROPERTY. 

have  an  abundance  of  property  ;  but  they  cannot  make  use  of  it ; 
therefore,  it  is  of  no  use  to  me,  neither  will  it  be  when  I  liberate 
it ;  for,  at  that  time,  all  my  people  will  have  an  abundance  of 
wealth.  Property  which  I  cannot  make  use  of  now,  is  of  no  use 
to  me.  I  want  assistance  now,  and  not  after  awhile  ;  therefore, 
those  who  cannot  now  make  use  of  their  property,  to  assist  my 
cause,  will  never  be  able  to  help  me  in  that  respect.  Those  of  my 
people  who  are  generous,  who  have  assisted  me  with  both  their 
means  and  talents,  I  will  abundantly  bless.  Their  good  deeds 
shall  never  be  forgotten,  but  shall  shine  upon  the  pages  of  history 
for  their  children  and  their  children's  children  to  behold,  even 
down  to  the  latest  generation. 

3.  There  are  those  among  my  people  who  have  an  abundance 
of  property  in  their  possession,  which  does  not  fully  belong  to 
them — which  property  they  consecrated  unto  me;  but  such 
property  I  shall  not  ^ise,  for  I  do  not  acknowledge  it  as  being 
consecrated  unto  me.  I  do  not  call  upon  my  people  to  hand  out 
such  property  for  the  support  of  my  work  in  general — such  people 
are  free.  Let  them  take  care  of  it,  and  pay  their  just  debts.  Some 
of  my  people  are  placed  under  very  peculiar  circumstances;  there- 
fore, I  have  to  do  the  best  I  can  with  them.  There  are  among 
my  people  those  who  hold  property  in  their  possession  which  they 
do  not  own.  I  do  not  call  upon  such  persons  to  assist  my  work 
with  that  means.  I  consider  that  none  of  my  people  can  conse- 
crate any  property  unto  me  but  that  which  they  own.  I  do  not 
depend  on  that  which  I  cannot  use.  I  shall  accept  of  all  those 
who  are  whole-hearted,  whether  their  property  is  accessible  by  me 
or  not.  If  they  are  willing  to  give  up  all  that  they  have  unto  me, 
I  shall  in  such  cases  take  the  will  for  the  deed.  I  have  no  other 
way  in  justifying  them.  I  have  to  consider  the  situation  of  peo- 
ple, and  deal  with  them  accordingly.  I  know  the  motives  of  all 
my  people,  and  I  shall  deal  with  them  lawfully.  I  shall  lay  mat- 
ters plainly  before  them.  I  shall  try  them.  I  shall  weigh  them  all 
and  see  what  weight  they  are  before  I  deliver  them ;  and  all  those 
who  are  heavy  enough  I  .shall  deliver;  but  the  rest  I  shall  blow 
away,  and  send  them  to  their  graves.  Those  who  are  weighty, 
will  abide  my  law ;  but  those  who  will  not,  are  too  light  to  obtain 
a  deliveiance  at  my  hands.  My  law  is  the  scales  whereby  all  my 


EARTHLY  THINGS  AND  HEAVENLY  THINGS.        443 

people  will  be  tried.  Those  who  are  weighty,  claim  a  deliverance 
— it  is  their  due.  Let  my  people  prepare  themselves  for  a  severe 
trial ;  for  they  are  about  to  pass  through  one.  Let  my  people 
hearken  unto  my  words,  and  diligently  obey  them,  that  it  may  be 
well  with  them ;  for  lo,  I  come.  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts ;  even 
Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    SHOWING    HOW     EARTHLY    THINGS 

IN    THE    HOLY  PRIESTHOOD    PATTERN 

AFTER   HEAVENLY   THINGS. 


No.  234.  WEBER,  UTAH,  March  5th,  1862. 

i.  JOHN,  the  Revelator,  in  the  fourth  chapter  and  the  fourth 
and  fifth  verses  of  his  book,  gives  us  the  following:  "And  round 
about  the  throne  were  four  and  twenty  seats :  and  upon  the  seats 
I  saw  four  and  twenty  elders  sitting,  clothed  in  white  raiment ; 
and  they  had  on  their  heads  crowns  of  gold.  *  *  *  And 
there  were  seven  lamps  of  fire  burning  before  the  throne,  which 
are  the  seven  spirits  of  God."  Who  are  the  four  and  twenty 
elders  spoken  of  by  John,  the  Revelator?  They  are  four  and 
twenty  of  the  Eternal  Father's  firstborn  sons,  even  the  chief  rulers 
in  heaven.  Is  Jesus  Christ  included?  Yes;  he  is  the  first  mem- 
ber in  that  quorum,  and  consequently  their  president,  under  his 
Father.  He  is  also  the  first  of  the  twelve  chief  generals  in  heaven. 
Who  are  the  "seven  spirits  of  God"  spoken  of?  They  are  the 
"seven  angels  who  go  in  and  out  of  the  temple,"  and  who  "pour 
out  the  vials  of  the  wrath  of  God  upon  the  earth  "  at  the  sounding 
of  the  trumpets  of  the  presidents  of  the  seven  dispensations  of 
Adam's  earth.  Are  they  included  in  the  four  and  twenty  elders 
spoken  of?  Yes.  Who  compose  the  first  council  in  heaven? 
God,  the  Eternal  Father;  Jesus  Christ,  his  firstborn  Son,  and  the 
second  captain  of  the  Lord's  Host,  who  is  next  to  Jesus  Christ  by 
birthright,  and  who  rides  upon  the  black  horse.  These  three  form 
the  first  quorum  in  heaven,  and  are  the  head  over  all.  The  first 
four  captains  of  the  Lord's  Host,  the  first  of  whom  is  Jesus  Christ, 


444  THE    FOUR    AND    TWENTY    ELDERS. 

were  appointed  by  the  Eternal  Father  to  rule  the  four  quarters  of 
the  earth — one  to  each  quarter.  The  next  three  captains  have  the 
charge  of  a  branch  of  holy  angels  who  are  Holy  Ghosts,  or  minis- 
tering angels  to  the  children  of  men ;  and  they  do  not  go  to  war 
except  in  cases  of  necessity.  The  remaining  five  of  the  first  twelve 
generals,  with  the  second  twelve  of  the  twenty-four,  assist  the  first 
seven  generals,  and  act  under  their  jurisdiction,  in  their  own 
places,  according  to  their  birthrights.  There  are  one  hundred 
and  forty-four  thousand  chief  rulers  in  heaven,  who  are  the  first- 
born sons  of  the  Eternal  Father,  and  who  rule  according  to  birth- 
right :  all  things  are  in  perfect  order  there. 

2.  Are  there  four  and  twenty  elders  connected  with  this   earth, 
as   there   are   in  heaven?     Yes.      Who  are  they?      Seth,   Enos, 
Cainan,   Mahalaleel,  Jared,  Enoch,   Methuselah,  Lamech,  Noah, 
Shem,  Arphaxad,  Salah,  Eber,  Peleg,  Reu,  Serug,  Nahor,  Terah, 
Abraham,   Isaac,    Jacob,    Joseph,   Reuben   and    Dan.      Are   the 
seven  presidents  of  the  earth  included  in  the  twenty-four?     Yes; 
and    Moses    being  the   first    one    by    birthright    is  the   president 
thereof.     He  who  holds  the  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood  upon  the 
earth  must  be  the  president  of  the  twenty-four   apostles ;  for  that 
is  the  highest  quorum  upon  earth.     Jesus  Christ  is  the  president 
of  the  four  and  twenty  elders  in   heaven,  and  Moses  is  the  presi- 
dent of  the  twenty-four  apostles  upon  the  earth,  being  their  head 
by  birthright.     Earthly  things  must  pattern   after  heavenly  things. 

3.  Are  there  any  instances  on  record  of  earthly  things  pattern- 
ing after  heavenly  things?     Yes;  in  the   case   of  Abraham,  Isaac 
and  Jacob.     Abraham  is  a  representation  of  the  Eternal  Father ; 
Isaac,  of  Jesus  Christ,  the  first-begotten  *of  and  first  counsellor  to 
the  Eternal  Father;    and  Jacob,  of  the  next  general  by  birthright 
to   Jesus    Christ,   who   is    the   second    counsellor  to  the   Eternal 
Father,  being  a  representative  of  the   Holy  Ghosts.     The  offering 
up  of  Isaac  by  his  father,  Abraham,  is  a  type  of  the  offering  up  of 
Jesus  Christ  upon  the  cross.    Thus  earthly  things  pertaining  to  the 
holy  priesthood  pattern  after  heavenly  things. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no   more.     I  am  Jesus  Christ,   even  he 
who  has  dictated  you.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


THE    TRIAL.  445 

REVELATION     CONCERNING     THE     GREAT     TRIAL 

THROUGH  WHICH  THE  SAINTS  WILL  BE 

CALLED  TO  PASS  BEFORE  THEY 

CAN  BE  DELIVERED. 


No.  235.  WEBER,  UTAH,  March  6th,  1862. 

1.  WHAT  can   I  say   unto  you,   or  even  do  for  you,  to  satisfy 
you  ?     You  know  the  true  situation  of  my  people,  in  almost  every 
respect,  even  as  I  do — that  they  are  not  prepared  for  a  visit  from 
me  ;  and  that  if  I  were  to  come  to-day,  I  should  be  compelled  by 
the  law  of  heaven  to  slay  a  number  of  them.     Seeing  that  this   is 
the  case,  what  would  you  have  me  to  do?     Some   of  my  people's 
minds  are  like  the  fool's  eye — upon  almost  everything  but  that 
which  they  ought  to  be  upon.     They  are  continually  calling  itpon 
me  to  come  and  deliver  them;  but  they  neglect  to  prepare  them- 
selves for  the  event  which  they  so  much  pray   for.     I  am   waiting 
for  them  to  prepare  themselves  for  it. 

2.  They   are  hindering  me  from  coming  to  the  faithful  of  my 
people.     I   am  compelled  to  show   mercy  unto  such,  and  to  use 
time  to  go  the  rounds  of  the  law  with  them.     If  I  had   no  such 
characters  to  deal  with,  I  could  come  and  deliver  my  faithful  peo- 
ple ;  but  while  there  are  such  characters  among  my  people — even 
those  who  take  such  a  round-about  course  to  get  around  my  law — - 
I  am  compelled  to  take  a  round-about  course  with  them,   until   I 
bring  them   to   a  point   where  I  can  lawfully  dispense  with  them ; 
and  while  I  am  doing  so,  I  am  wasting  time  and  wearing  away  the 
patience  of  those  who  are  prepared  for  a   visit  from   me.     I   have 
told  them   often   enough  what  hinders  me,   and  yet  they  will  not 
clear  the  way  for  me.     They   have  hindered  me  for  weeks,  and 
they  are  now  calling  upon  me  the  most  for  deliverance.     They  are 
blind.     They  cannot  see  their  own  duties ;  and  yet  they  think  that 
all   is  right  with  them ;  but  they  are  the  furthest  from  the  mark  of 
any  of  my  people,  and  are  hindering  the  deliverance  of  my  people. 
They  need  not  think  that  I  am  not  ready,  for  I  am.     I  have  been 
ready  many  weeks ;  but  I   have  been  prevented  from  coming  by 
such  people  as  I  have  spoken  of.     If  my  people  would  look  to 


446  THE    TRIAL. 

their  own  duties,  and  do  them,  they  would  open  the  way  for  me  ; 
but  as  long  as  I  have  to  take  such  a  round-about  course  with  those 
of  whom  I  have  spoken,  in  order  to  deal  with  them  according  to- 
law,  I  am  wasting  time  and  delaying  the  deliverance  of  my  peo- 
ple, week  after  week,  until  I  am  injuring  both  my  servant,  the 
prophet,  and  my  faithful  people.  Some  of  the  unfaithful  have 
departed  from  me ;  but  some  of  them  yet  remain.  How  much 
longer  shall  I  wait  for  them,  and  thereby  afflict  the  faithful  of  my 
people?  Not  much  longer. 

3.  I  am  about  to  put  my  people  through  a  process  of  trial 
which  will  purge  out  from  among  them  all  the  hypocrites.     After 
this  trial  is  through  with,  there  will  be  none  left'  among  my  peo- 
ple but  those  who  will  abide  my  law  as  far  as  I  have  revealed  it. 
I   will  speedily  put  them   through  this   trial,   and  then  you   will 
know  to  your  satisfaction   what  kind  of  people  you  have  to  deal 
with. 

4.  You   are  much   oppressed  in   your  feelings  in  consequence 
of  the  deliverance  of  my  people  being  so  long  delayed ;  and  you 
are  almost  ready  at  times  to  break  out   upon  me,    and  blame   me 
for  being  the  cause  of  it ;  but  you  need  not  do  so,  for  I  have  told  you 
what  has  been  in  my  way.     I  know  that  it  is  hard  for  you  to  have 
to   deal   with   short-sighted   mortals ;  for  they  are  continually  tor- 
menting you  with  their  complaints,   and  wishing  to  know  of  you 
when   I  shall  come  to   release  them.     I  will  promise  them  that  I 
shall  come  as  soon  as  they  are  ready  for  me.     I  am  about  to  make 
a  change  with  them.     Let  those  who  wish  to  save  their  lives  greatly 
humble  themselves  before  me,  or  they  will  not  stand.     They  know 
not  what  is  coming  upon  them  in  the  course  of  a  few  days.     If 
they  did,  they  would  humble  themselves  before  me  in  such  a  man- 
ner as  they  have  never  humbled  themselves  before.     They   must 
remember  that  I  have  told  them   of  it   before   it   comes.     I   have 
given   them  a  chance  to  prepare  for  it,  and  if  they  feel  disposed, 
they  can  do  so. 

5.  I  wish  my  faithful  people  to  understand  that  I  am  not  going 
to  keep  them  here  much  longer.     I  will  not   weary   their  patience 
by  waiting  for  those  foolish  people  of  whom  I  have  spoken ;  but  I 
will    bring   them  to  the  test  and  try  them.     They   will   not  go 
through    the  next  test,   for   it   will   purge  them   out.     I   shall  be 


THE    TWELVE    SONS    OF    JACOB.  447 

obliged  to  put  my  faithful  people  through  the  test  with  them ;  but 
they  will  not  be  hurt,  for  I  will  take  care  of  them ;  but  I  will  not 
uphold  the  hypocrites ;  they  will  go  to  destruction.  Lo,  I  bring 
the  trial  upon  my  people  speedily.  Let  them  prepare  for  it ;  for 
none  but  the  faithful  will  go  through  it  safely. 

I  now  add  no  more.  I  am  the  Stone  and  Shepherd  of  Israel, 
the  Bright  and  Morning  Star;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen 
and  Amen. 


REVELATION- CONCERNING  THE  BIRTHRIGHTS  OF 
THE  TWELVE  SONS  OF  JACOB. 


No.  236.  WEBER,  UTAH,  March  6th,  1862. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Alpha  and  Omega,  even  the  beginning 
and  the  end.  I  am  come  to  make  known  unto  you  the  particulars 
concerning  the  birthrights  of  the  twelve  sons  of  Jacob.  The 
account  of  them  as  recorded  in  the  Bible  is  not  correct ;  there  is 
confusion  in  it ;  but  I  will  make  known  unto  you  the  true  order 
thereof.  You  know  that  I  have  told  you  that  there  are  four  and 
twenty  elders  in  heaven  who  form  a  quorum.  I  am  the  first  mem- 
ber in  that  quorum  by  birthright,  and  my  Father's  second  first- 
born-son is  the  second  member  in  that  quorum,  even  as  Moses 
and  Elias  are  the  two  first  members  in  the  quorum  of  the  twenty- 
four  apostles  which  belongs  to  the  fulness  of  the  holy  priesthood 
on  Adam's  earth.  As  I  and  my  Father's  second  firstborn  son  are 
the  first  two  of  the  first  twelve  generals  in  heaven,  so  the  first  two 
of  the  second  twelve  generals  in  heaven  stand  at  the  head  of  the 
remaining  ten  of  the  second  division.  These  divisions  when 
united  constitute  the  quorum  of  the  twenty-four;  and  as  I  and 
my  Father's  second  firstborn  son  are  the  first  two  in  that  quorum, 
we  rule  over  it,  I  am  the  firstborn  son  of  my  Father,  and  you 
are  the  firstborn  son  of  Adam,  as  pertaining  to  the  holy  priest- 
hood ;  and  as  my  Father  ordained  and  anointed  me  to  preside  over 
his  posterity,  so  Adam  ordained  and  anointed  you  to  preside  over 
two-thirds  of  his  children — even  those  whose  names  are  written 


448  THE    PRIESTHOOD    IN    PART. 

in  the  Lamb's  Book  of  Life.  The  other  third  belongs  to  Cain, 
Adam's  second  born  son.  Twenty-four  apostles  form  a  quorum 
under  the  fulness  of  the  holy  priesthood ;  but  twelve  apostles  only 
form  a  quorum  under  the  priesthood  in  part.  The  prophet, 
Joseph  Smith,  had  fourteen  apostles  who,  with  himself,  made 
fifteen.  How  can  this  order  of  the  priesthood  in  part  be  a  repre- 
sentation of  the  first  order  in  heaven,  seeing  that  the  first  order  of 
heaven  consists  of  thirteen  persons  only,  including  the  Eternal 
Father?  It  is  represented  in  the  following  manner:  Joseph 
Smith  being  the  sixth  angel,  holding  the  priesthood  Jn  part,  and, 
in  his  day,  the  only  prophet  in  power  upon  the  earth,  represented 
the  Eternal  Father.  His  first  counsellor  represented  Jesus  Christ, 
and  his  second  counsellor  represented  the  Eternal  Father's  second 
firstborn  son.  Ten  of  his  twelve  apostles  represented  the  remain- 
ing ten  of  the  first  twelve  generals  in  heaven ;  and  the  other  two 
apostles  represented  the  two  chief  generals  of  the  second  twelve  in 
heaven. 

2.  Abraham,   Isaac  and  Jacob  also  represented   the  Father, 
Son  and  Holy  Ghost ;   and  ten  of  the  twelve  sons  of  Jacob  repre- 
sented the  remaining  ten  generals  of  the  first  twelve   in   heaven. 
The  last  two  of  Jacob's  twelve  sons   represented  the   first   two   of 
the  second  twelve  generals  in  heaven.    And  in  this  manner  earthly 
things  in  the  holy  priesthood  pattern  after  heavenly  things. 

3.  With  respect  to  Jacobs  sons :     You  know  that  Jacob  had 
four  wives ;    and  that,  according  to  the  heavenly  order,  no   woman 
can  have  two  sons  to  hold  a   first  birthright ;    therefore,  the  first- 
born sons  of  those  four  wives  held  the  first  birthright ;    after  them 
came  the  four  secondborn  sons,   and  so  on  with  the  remaining 
four,  according  to  their  own  order.     Their  places   according  to 
their  birthrights  are  as  follows :     Joseph,  Reuben,  Dan,  Gad,  Ben- 
jamin, Simeon,  Naphtali,  Asher,    Levi,  Judah,  Issachar,  Zebulun. 
Joseph,  although  he  was  not  born  the  first,  held  the  first  birthright. 
The    devil    gained    the   advantage    of   Jacob's    father-in-law,   and 
sought  to   confuse  and  break  up  my  arrangements  with   Jacob. 
He  succeeded  in  frustrating   me   in  the  beginning  of  that   affair. 
Reuben,    who   was  the  second  by   birthright,   came   first;    but  I 
threw  him  out  of  that  place   and  gave   it  unto  Joseph,  for  it  be- 
longed to  him.     I  overruled  the  devil  in  that  instance,  as  I  do  in 


THE    PEOPLE    MUST    BE    INFORMED.  449 

all  others.  I  always  give  him  the  start,  but  I  overtake  him  before 
he  goes  too  far.  It  is  but  little  trouble  for'  me  to  overthrow  him 
when  the  law  of  heaven  gives  me  liberty  to  do  so. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.  Let  this  suffice  for  the  present, 
and,  from  time  to  time,  I  will  give  unto  you  all  necessary  infor- 
mation. I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  PROPHET  AND  HIS  COUNSELLORS  INSTRUCT- 
ED TO  INFORM  THE  PEOPLE  OF  THEIR 
TRUE  POSITION. 


No.  237.  WEBER,  UTAH,  March  8th,  1862. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — I  wish  you  and  your 
counsellors  to  spare  no  pains  in  showing  unto  my  people  their  true 
position  before  me.  You  know  that  they  have  not  looked  aright 
at  the  things  which  relate  unto  my  coming.  Some  of  them  have 
looked  at  that  event  in  almost  every  other  way  than  that  in  which 
they  ought  to  look  at  it.  They  treat  it  as  a  light  and  frivolous 
thing — as  something  which  they  have  been  called  to  witness  almost 
every  day.  But  when  they  are  called  to  witness  my  coming,  the 
sensation  will  be  so  great  that  their  hearts  will  pain  them.  They 
cannot  form  a  correct  idea  of  such  an  event.  If  they  could  see  it 
as  it  will  be,  they  would  not  call  upon  me  to  come ;  but  during 
the  time  that  will  be  allotted  them  from  this  day  to  the  day  of  my 
coming,  they  would  be  wholly  occupied  in  humbling  themselves 
before  me,  and  calling  upon  me  for  mercy.  Instead  of  calling 
upon  me  to  come,  they  would  rather  call  upon  me  to  give  unto 
them  a  little  more  time  to  prepare  themselves  for  that  event.  If 
some  of  my  people  could  fully  see  what  is  needed  to  prepare  them- 
selves for  my  coming,  they  would  see  at  once  that  they  have  spent 
considerable  time  to  little  profit ;  and  they  would  .do  more  in  a 
few  days  towards  preparing  themselves  for  that  thrilling  and  im- 
portant event,  than  they  have  done  during  many  months  which  are 
past.  They  have  done  but  little,  as  yet,  towards  preparing  them- 
selves for  that  which  they  have  to  meet  in  a  few  days.  They  have 


45°  INFIDELITY    AMONG    THE    PEOPLE. 

almost  continually  been  calling  upon  me  to  come,  instead  of  pre- 
paring themselves  for  "that  event,  and  thereby  doing  their  own 
duties,  and  leaving  mine  to  me. 

2.  There  is  a  great  deal  of  infidelity  among  my  people;  some 
of  them  even  doubt  my  coming  to  deliver  them.     Some  of  my 
servants  who  are  now  in  high   standing  have   such  feelings ;  they 
are  loosing   my  spirit.     My  holy  angels  despise  them,  and  da  not 
want  to  come  near  such.     They  are  almost  continually  murmuring 
in  their  feelings — nothing  seems  to  go  right  for  them.      If  my  peo- 
ple would  cling  unto  me  with  all  their  hearts,  they  would  have  no 
such  dark  and  miserable  feelings  as  they  are  called  to   endure  at 
times,  for  my  holy  angels  would  continually  be  round  about  them, 
to  chase  far  from  them  all   evil   spirits.     If  they  were  sufficiently 
faithful   before   me,  they  would  be  enlightened  by  my  holy  angels, 
and  continually  enjoy  great  peace  of  mind.     But  they  continually 
give  way  to  the  devil  and  allow  him  to  buffet  them,  and  lead  them 
into  all  manner  of  misery;  and  in  consequence  of  their  ignorance 
and  laziness,  they  go  about  with  hell  in   their  hearts.     Some   peo- 
ple  are  too  lazy   and   indolent  to  serve  me,  or  to  save  their  own 
lives — the  least  duty  in  my  kingdom  is  too  much  for  them  to  per- 
form.    O  how  I  do  despire  lazy  people  ;  there   is  no  dependence 
in  them.     If  you  confer  an  office  upon  them,  they  are  too  lazy  to 
act  in  it ;  but,  seemingly,  they  would   rather  go  about  with  their 
heads  down,  counselling  with  devils,  and  being  led   by  them   into 
all  kinds  of  misery,  until  they  have  no  pleasure  of  their  lives,  than 
they  would  rise  up  and  shake  themselves,  and  act  in  their  offices  in 
the  spirit  of  them.     They  give  way  to  every  devil  that  approaches 
them,  and  fall  victims  to  his   influence.     If  such   do   not   quickly 
rise  up  and  shake  themselves,  and  begin  to  act  in  the  spirit  of  their 
offices,  I  will  cast  them  off.     I  did  not  call  them  to  the  holy  priest- 
hood, and  give  unto  them  honorable  places  in  my  Church,  to  give 
way  to  devils,  and  thereby  bring  the  influence  of  the  devil  among 
my   people,   to   destroy  them ;   by  so  doing,  they  become   mine 
enemies. 

3.  I  will  not  suffer  that  any  person  who  has  been  called  to  fill 
an   office   in  my  Church  shall  preach  unto  my  people,  except  he 
shall  be  in  possession  of  the  Holy   Ghost ;  such  will   cast   a  good 
influence  among  those  people  whom  they  may  be  called  to  address. 


FALSE    INFLUENCES.  451 

But  should  a  person  in  possession  of  an  evil  influence  address  my 
people,  he  would  spread  that  influence  among  them,  and  thereby 
injure  them  greatly.  Therefore,  persons  who  are  in  possession 
of  such  a  spirit,  shall  not  administer  to  my  people.  Let  my  peo- 
ple be  aware  of  the  spirits  which  operate  upon  them,  and  cling  tD 
my  spirit,  which  leads  into  all  truth,  and  they  will  not  go  about  in 
misery,  with  their  heads  down ;  but  they  will  enjoy  peace  of  mind, 
and  be  satisfied  with  my  course.  They  will  acknowledge  my  hand 
in  all  things. 

4.  Some  of  my   people  have  already  begun  to  make  calcula- 
tions as  to  what  will  take  place  among  them  when  the  Spring  opens. 
Some  think  that  they  will  begin  to  scatter ;  but  they  need  not  look 
so  far  ahead-  as  that ;  there  is  something  nearer  home  which  ought 
to  occupy  their  attention.     They   may  be  called  to  behold  great 
scenes   before  that  time.     There   is  a  trial  right  at  their  doors, 
which  will  open  the  eyes  of  some  of  my  people,  and  shut  the  eyes 
of  others.     Let  them  think  about  it,  and  not  about  what  will  take 
place  when  the  Spring  opens.     Let  them  prepare  for  it,  for  it  is  at 
their  door. 

5.  And  behold,   I    say   unto  you,    my  son, — you  must  labor 
fa'thfully  with  my  people  until  I  come,  and  try  to  save  as  many  of 
them  as  you  possibly  can  ;  for  I  shall  come  in  the  course  of  a  few 
days.     It  is  time  for  my  people  to  lay  things  to  heart.     Let  them 
do  as   I   have   commanded   them ;  and   all  that  will  do  so,  I  will 
save.     I  am  He  that  was,   and   is,   and  is   to   come ;  even   Jesus 
Chaist.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    CONCERNING   THE    APOSTLES. 


No.   238.  WEBER,  UTAH,  March  nth,  1862. 

i.  I  SEE,  my  son,  that  you  are  greatly  oppressed  in  your  feel- 
ings on  account  of  this  people.  You  say  that  you  can  make  but 
little  progress  towards  bringing  them  to  my  terms ;  that  they  do 
not  seem  to  understand  my  ways ;  and  what  makes  the  matter  still 
worse,  you  cannot  teach  them ;  for  there  are  many  of  them  who 


45  2  THE    APOSTLES. 

either  will  not  or  cannot  understand  what  I  require  at  their  hands. 
You  say  that  after  you  have  taught  them  their  duties,  they  will  not 
do  them  j  but  rather  rise  up  and  sit  in  judgment  upon  my  words, 
and  condemn  my  course ;  that  they  must  be  either  wilfully  wicked, 
or  very  ignorant ;  but  that  you  cannot  see  how  that  can  possibly 
be  the  case  after  you  have  taught  them  so  much ;  that  there 
are  a  number  of  them  who  will  go  where  they  please  with- 
out coming  to  ask  your  counsel;  that  some  of  them  disregard 
your  counsel ;  that  you  have  but  little  control  over  the  people  at 
large ;  and  that  they  have  not,  as  yet,  learned  obedience  unto  me. 
2.  You  say  that  you  are  completely  heartsick  at  being  held 
powerless  so  long  by  me ;  that  I  gave  unto  you,  some  time  ago, 
twelve  apostles  to  strengthen  your  hands,  and  to  help  to  bear 
you  up ;  but  that  some  of  them  seem  to  be  the  weakest  men  in 
the  Camp ;  that  they  cannot  even  keep  themselves  straight ;  that 
they  cannot  even  bear  their  own  burdens,  let  alone  assisting  you 
to  take  care  of  my  people ;  and  that  they  will  go  about  contending 
with  one  another  about  the  meaning  of  the  revelations  which 
have  came  from  my  mouth.  They  show  how  worthy  they  are  of 
the  office  of  apostles.  They  are  a  disgrace  to  the  holy  priesthood ; 
and  they  will  do  almost  anything  but  their  own  duty,  which  is  to 
live  by  every  word  that  proceeds  from  my  mouth.  What  dignified 
characters  they  are(?)  What  helps  (?)  they  are  unto  you  in  going 
about  breathing  out  treason  against  the  government  of  heaven. 
Some  of  them  are  well  worthy  of  death ;  and  if  they  were  in  pos- 
session of  good,  sound  sense  I  would  not  pass  by  their  wicked- 
ness. They  will  not  use  that  common  sense  which  came  into  the 
world  with  them  ;  but  they  let  the  devil  rob  them  of  it.  O  what 
unprincipled  people  I  have  to  deal  with !  But  I  will  open-  the 
way  for  you,  so  that  you  may  obtain  better  men  to  place  in  the 
apostleship  than  some  of  those  who  are  now  holding  that  office ; 
for  some  of  them  are  unworthy  of  the  least  office  in  the  holy 
priesthood.  I  shall  not  suffer  men  who  hold  the  office  of  apostles 
to  fight  against  me,  and  to  act  the  part  of  traitors  to  my  govern- 
ment. Therefore,  if  those  men  of  whom  I  have  spoken  do  not 
humble  themselves  before  me,  and  cease  their  sitting  in  judgment 
upon  the  revelations  of  my  mouth,  and  condemning  them,  I  will 
move  them  out  of  the  apostleship ;  for  I  will  not  suffer  that  mor- 


THE    UNBELIEVING    AND    FAITHLESS.  453 

tal  men  shall  sit  in  judgment  upon  my  words,  after  I  have  clearly  . 
shown  unto  them  the  consequences  of  doing  so.  I  will  not,  after 
this  jevelation  has  been  read  in  the  hearing  of  the  people,  suffer 
any  man  who  holds  the  office  of  an  apostle,  or  that  of  a  high 
priest,  to  sit  in  judgment  upon  the  revelations  of  my  mouth ;  if 
any  do  so,  I  will  reject  them,  and  withdraw  my  spirit  from  them, 
and  destroy  them.  Hereafter  there  will  be  no  forgiveness  for  this 
crime  ;  the  penalty  will  be  inflicted.  And  such  as  shall  be  guilty 
of  this  sin  after  this  time,  I  will  reveal  them  unto  you ;  and  when 
I  do  so,  you  must  read  their  names  before  the  congregations  of 
my  saints ;  and  you  shall  blot  their  names  out  of  the  list  of  those 
who  swore  the  oath  which  I  placed  before  my  people.  Those 
who  will  live  by  the  words  of  my  mouth,  and  not  sit  in  judgment 
upon  them  and  condemn  them,  I  will  deliver;  but  -none  else.  I 
will  not  suffer  that  my  course  shall  be  questioned  by  mortal  beings 
who  expect  salvation  at  my  hands;  it  is  their  duty  to  obey,  and  not 
to  dictate.  If  they  know  more  than  I  do,  why  do  they  call  upon 
me  to  direct  their  course,  and  deliver  them  out  of  the  hands  of 
the  devil?  If  they  can  deliver  themselves,  why  do  they  not  do  so? 
I  do  not  want  the  trouble  and  aggravation  which  I  have  with  them. 
I  can  assure  them  that  I  do  not  want  to  be  afflicted  by  their 
foolishness  if  they  can  do  without  my  help ;  but  if  they  expect  to 
be  delivered  by  me,  they  must  do  as  I  command  them.  Those 
that  I  deliver,  I  deliver  upon  mine  own  terms ;  and  those  of  my 
people  who  cannot  come  to  my  terms,  cannot  be  assisted  by  me. 
It  is  high  time  that  my  people  should  begin  to  learn  a  little  good 
sense.  I  am  weary  of  dealing  with  such  ignorant  people  as  some 
of  them  are.  If  I  could  only  convince  them  that  they  are  fools, 
and  that  they  know  but  little  or  nothing,  as  they  ought  to  do,  I 
could  do  something  with  them ;  but  some  of  them  are  so  blinded 
by  the  devil  that  they  almost  think  that  they  know  everything,  and 
consequently  that  there  is  nothing  more  for  them  to  learn.  I 
cannot  work  with  such  fools.  I  can  do  nothing  with  them  but 
smite  them  dead.  I  will  speedily  make  such  men  open  their  eyes, 
and  shut  them  again  in  quick  succession.  People  must  be  fools, 
and  blind,  when  they  think  that  they  know  more  than  I  do.  O  what 
presumption  poor  ignorant  mortals  are  guilty  of  when  they  dare  to 
rise  up  and  sit  in  judgment  upon  my  course,  and  condemn  it !  If 


454  INSTRUCTED  TO  HE  PREPARED. 

I  was  not  merciful,  I  should  smite  all  who  are  guilty  of  that  crime 
dead  in  one  minute,  and  I  shall  do  so  the  next  time  they  are 
found  guilty  of  it.  I  will  bear  with  them  no  longer;  for  after  I 
have  told  my  people  this  time,  I  shall  have  shown  mercy  unto 
them,  until  mercy  will  have  no  more  claim  on  them — justice  will 
next  fall  upon  them.  Therefore,  if  my  people  wish  to  save  their 
lives,  let  them  reflect  upon  what  they  are  doing.  Life  and  death 
are  now  placed  before  them,  and  they  can  choose  either  of 
them.  My  wrath  is  kindled  against  those  who  are  foolish  and 
unprincipled  among  my  peopler  I  cannot  bear  with  them  any 
longer. 

3.  I  am  quickly  coming  unto  you;  therefore,  look  put  for  me. 
I  will  quickly  speak  unto  you  again,  and  I  will  tell  you  how  you 
must  prepare  for  me.  I  have  something  more  to  reveal  unto  you 
before  I  come ;  for  you  are  not  fully  prepared  to  enter  into  my 
presence.  I  will  fully  prepare  you  to  meet  me.  Lo,  I  come,  I 
come,  I  come  speedily.  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts.  Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    CONCERNING   MERCY,  JUSTICE,  AND 
JUDGMENT. 


No.   239.  WEBER,    UTAH,  March  i3th,   1862. 

i.  WHILE  you  look  at  the  people  who  compose  this  Camp,  you 
say  in  your  feelings  that  you  see  among  them  some  who  will  not 
meet  with  a  deliverance  at  my  hands  when  I  come,  unless  a  great 
change  is  wrought  in  them  quickly;  that  you  very  much  doubt 
whether  they  will  alter  much  for  the  better ;  and  that,  knowing 
their  destiny,  you  are  pained  when  you  look  at  them.  You  con- 
tinue to  call  upon  me  to  have  mercy  on  them,  and  save  their  lives, 
if  I  possibly  can ;  but  you  know  my  situation,  my  son, — that  I  can 
only  show  mercy  until  it  has  had  its  claim  upon  mortals.  Justice 
has  a  claim  as  well  as  mercy ;  but  justice  cannot  interfere  with  any 
persons  in  my  kingdom  until  mercy  has  had  its  claim  upon  them, 
according  to  the  law. 


MERCY,    JUSTICE    AND    JUDGMENT.  455 

2.  You  wish  to  know  what  mercy  and  justice  are.     You  say  in 
your  feelings  that  you  know  what  the  men  of  the  world  call  mercy 
and  justice,  but  their  opinion   does  not   satisfy  you;  for  you  feel 
certain   that   men  of  the   world  know  but  little  or  nothing  aright. 
You  place   no  dependence  in  their  wisdom.     You  know  that  it  is. 
all   foolishness  in  my   sight,   and  that   it  is  all  of  the  devil,  being 
fully  controlled  by  his  influence.     You  want  to  see  things  as  I  see 
them,  and  not  as  the  devil  sees  them.     You  are  not  willing  to  take 
the  devil  to  be  your  standard  of  right.     You  want  to  see  things  as 
they  are ;  and  as  you  know  that  a  perfect  knowledge  of  all  things 
exists  only  in  the  heavens,  you  wish  to  be  taught   by  me,    so  that 
you  may  always  understand  aright.      Mercy  and  justice  are  eternal 
principles  which  belong  to  my  gospel,  and  are  based  upon  eternal 
laws,  each  having  a  claim  upon  mortal  beings.     Mercy  has  a  claim 
upon  two-thirds  of  Adam's  posterity  who  willingly  abided  the  law 
of  God  while  in  their  first  estate.     It  is  the  first  law  of  the  gospel, 
and  the  foundation  upon  which  all  the  remaining  portions  of  the 
law   are   based.     Justice   is  the  next  principle  of  the  gospel,  and 
steps  in  after  mercy  has  had  its   claim ;  and  judgment,   being  the 
third  principle   of  the  gospel,   holds    the    third    and    last    claim. 
Mercy   has  «no   claim  on   fallen   spirits,  because  they  rejected  the 
whole  law  of  God;  consequently,  justice  is  the  first   principle  that 
will  lay   hold   on   them,   and  judgment  is  the  second  and  last  that 
has  any  claim  upon  them.     Justice  and  judgment  claim  the  right 
to  utterly  waste  away  and  destroy ;  but  mercy  will  save,  exalt  and 
glorify  all   those   who  come  under  its  claims.     It   passes  by   all 
fallen  spirits,   and  justice  and  judgment  claim  them,  and  utterly 
waste  them  away,  both  temporally  and  spiritually. 

3.  By  mercy  all  the  rest  of  Adam's  children  are  saved,  because 
they  were  true  to  the  law  of  their  Father  while  in  their  first  estate ; 
therefore,  when  they  come  forth  into  their  second   estate,   and   are 
blinded  by  the  devil,  mercy  claims  them.     They  will  be  rewarded 
according  to  the  works  they  perform  while  they  see,  and  not  ac- 
cording to  the  works  they  perform  while  they  are  blinded   by  the 
devil.     The  children  of  Abraham  in  mortality  are  condemned  in 
proportion  to  the  privileges  which  they  have  of  obtaining  light  and 
knowledge;  and  when  any   of  them   become  so  blinded  by* the 
devil  as  to  be   swamped  in  sin  and  blasphemy,  it  is  a  mercy  be- 


4^6  rONCKKNINV.     MKRCV    AND    JUST1CF. 

stowed  upon  them  by  me,  if  I  cut  them  off,  and  thereby  put  them 
out  of  their  misery ;  for  no  person  can  be  put  to  greater  misery 
than  to  be  buffeted  by  the  devil. 

4.  Mercy   can  operate  in   different  ways.     When  persons  are 
suffering   under  a   miserable   influence,  it  is  a  mercy  to  ease  their 
pain,  even  if  by  so  doing  you  have  to  put  an  end  to  their  mortal 
existence;  for   it   will  separate   them   from  the  evil    spirit    which 
haunts  them",  which  could  not  otherwise  be  removed.     When  per- 
sons yield  obedience  to  the  fulness  of  my  gospel,  and  afterwards 
surfer  the  devil  to  overcome  them,  even  so  much  as  to  cause  them 
to  deny  my  work,  that  spirit  never  can  be  separated  from  them  in 
mortality ;  such  the  law  of  heaven  compels  me  to  slay  out  of  their 
misery ;   for  their  misery  never  could  come  to  an  end  until  they 
should  either  be  slain  or  die  a  mortal  death ;  therefore,  the  mercy 
which  I  owe  unto  them  claims  their  death  at  my  hands,   in  order 
to  ease  their  pain.     If  my  people  wish  to  save  their  lives,  let  them 
be  aware  of  false  spirits. 

5.  It  will  be  a  mercy  conferred  upon  two-thirds  of  the  people 
of  this  Territory  for  me  to   slay  them,  or  rather  one-third  of  the 
two-thirds;  for  one-third   are  fallen  spirits  who  claim   no  mercy. 
Justice  will  be  inflicted  upon  them,  and  mercy  bestowed  upon  the 
other  third  who  are  blinded  by  the  devil.     When  people  are  so  far 
blinded  by  the  devil -that  mine  angels  cannot  influence  them  and 
turn  them  from  their  wicked  ways,  the  law  of  heaven  compels  me 
to   slay  them.     It  is   a  mercy  conferred  upon  them  to  stop  their 
wickedness,  and  to  put  an  end  to  their  misery. 

6.  You  say  that  you  are  very  sorry  for  some  of  those  who  have 
yielded  obedience  to  the  fulness  of  my   gospel  who   now  stand  in 
dangerous    places,  and  who  will  not,  seemingly,  abide  that  portion 
of  my  law  which  I  have  revealed  unto  my  people.     You  need  not 
to  trouble  about  them.      I  have  laid  that  small  portion  of  my  law 
plainly  before  them,  and  if  they  will  not  abide  it,  they  will  have  to 
abide  the  consequences  of  their  disobedience. 

7.  You  have  done  your  duty  to  my  people;  and  if  they  should 
all  be  destroyed,   you  would  have  nothing  to  fret  about.     If  you 
had  failed  to  do  your  duty  to  them,  you  might  fret ;  but  I  have  no 
fault  whatever   to  find  with  you.     You  could  do  no  more  to  save 
the  lives  of  my  people  than  what  you  have  done ;  and  if  they  will 


THE    SEPARATION.  457 

not  exert  themselves,  but  are  too  lazy  to  save  their  own  lives,  after 
you  have  taught  them  the  way,  let  them  perish  and  go  down  to 
destruction ;  such  are  well  worthy  of  death.  I  will  promise  such 
lazy  and  unprincipled  people  that  they  will  meet  with  no  sympathy 
from  me.  I  have  done  my  duty  to  them,  and  if  they  would  only 
do  theirs,  all  would  be  right  with  them.  If  they  will  rrot  do  their 
duties,  what  can  either  you  or  I  do  for  them  ?  We  cannot  save 
their  lives  when  the  law  of  heaven  seals  the  sentence  of  death  upon 
them.  It  is  the  law  that  either  saves  a  people  or  destroys  them. 
Let  my  people  think  about  whatythey  are  doing;  and  if  they  wish 
to  save  their  lives,  let  them  abide  my  law,  and  live  by  every  word 
that  proceeds  from  my  mouth.  If  they  will  do  this,  all  will  be  well 
with  them. 

I   now  give  unto  you  no  more.     I  am  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION   CONCERNING   THE    SEPARATION    OF 
THE   REBELLIOUS  FROM  THE  FAITH- 
FUL OF   THE  PEOPLE. 


No.  240.  WEBER,  UTAH,  March  i5th,  1862. 

1 .  WHAT  can  I  say  unto  you  to  satisfy  you  ?    You  are  at  a  loss 
to  know  what  you  shall  do  with  a  number  of  these   people.     You 
say  that  you  cannot  make  them  understand  what  I  require  at  their 
hands;  that  to  teach  them  appears  to  be  of  no  use;  and  what  to 
do  with  them,  you  do  not  know.     You  say  that  inasmuch  as  they 
are  in  the  midst  of  my  faithful   people,  and  will  neither  abide  my 
law,   nor  move   out  from  among  them,  unless  they  are  removed, 
they  will  bring  my  work  to  a  standstill,  which  must  never  be   the 
case ;  therefore,  something  must  be  done  to  remove  them. 

2.  Behold,   I   say  unto  you,   O  ye  rebellious  and  stiff-necked  « 
people  !     I  can  bend  your  stiff  necks,  even  to  the  ground.     I  can 
separate  you  from*  my  faithful  people,  and   this  I  am  about  to  do ; 
therefore,  you  may  be  setting  yourselves  for  that  separation,  for  it 


45  8  THE    SEPARATION. 

will  come  upon  you  suddenly.  You  would  not  give  heed  unto  me 
when  you  might  have  done  so,  and  thereby  have  saved  your  own 
lives ;  therefore,  now  that  your  accounts  are  made  up,  there  is  no 
more  chance  for  you  in  mortality ;  in  mercy  to  you,  I  will  now 
send  you  home. 

3.  I  will,  from  this  day,  withdraw  my  spirit  from  those  whom 
I  have  rejected,   and  from  this  very  hour  they  will  begin  to  go 
down ;  they  will  begin  to  hunt  each  other  up  and  club  together ; 
and  they  will   continue  to   do  so  until  they  have  drawn  out  from 
among  the  faithful   all  the  false-hearted ;  and  when  they  shall  have 
done  so,   I   will  pay  them  off.     When  I  shall  have  entirely  with- 
drawn my  spirit  from  them,  they  will  speedily  separate  themselves 
from  the  faithful  of  my  people.     I  have  suffered  my  holy  angels  to 
linger  around  them,  to  stay  them,  and  to  hold  them,  until  I  should 
be  ready  to  cast  them  all  off  together.     I   shall  now  withdraw  my 
holy   angels  from   them,   and  deliver  them  into  the  hands  of  the 
devil,  and  he  will  take  possession  of  them,  and  they  will  then  rage 
and  thirst  for  your  blood,  and  also   for  the  blood  of  my   faithful 
people.     I  will  force  them  to  the  right  point,  where  I  intend  to 
destroy  them.     I   shall  deal  with  them  aright.     When  they   are 
gathered  together,    I  will  see  that  they  are  laid  low  in  mine  own 
appointed    way.     My    people    will    see   how    mine    enemies    are 
destroyed,  when  the  enemies  have  gathered  themselves  together. 

4.  The    faithful   of  my  people  need  to  be  setting  their  hearts 
for  a  painful  scene.     They  must  put  away  from  them  all  sympathy 
towards  the  false-hearted  whom   I  have  rejected,  no  matter  how 
closely  they   may   be  connected  to  them  by  relationship.     They 
will  have  to  break   asunder  all  family  ties  existing  in  families  in 
which  false-hearted  people  are  found ;  for  if  they  are  found  sym- 
pathizing with  those  whom  I  have  rejected,  they  will  be  slain  with 
them.     The  false-hearted   will  be  slain  for  refusing  to  abide  my 
law;  but  the  rest  who  will  be  slain,  will  be  slain  for  sympathizing 
with  them.     In  sympathizing  with  the  false-hearted,  they   partake 
of  their  spirit,  and  thus  become  one  with  them,  and  equally  guilty 
before   me.     Therefore,  let  the  faithful  of  my  people,  if  they  wish 
to  save  their  lives,  be  aware  of  sympathizing  with  the  rebellious ; 
for  they  are  about  to  be  placed  in   dangerous  places,   where  they 
will  need  to  keep  their  eyes  wide  open.     It  will  be  all  that  the 


DESTRUCTION    OF    THE    HYPOCRITES.  459 

most  faithful  of  my  people  will  be  able  to  do  to  save  their  lives. 
Sympathy  for  the  condemned  will  be  that  which  will  try  them  the 
most.  I  greatly  fear  for  them  in  that  respect.  When  death  is 
staring  the  false-hearted  of  this  people  in  the  face,  it  will  try  the 
courage  of  the  faithful  to  behold  it.  Let  my  people  think  about 
their  situation;  for  they  will  be  tried  before  they  get  through. 
They  will  see  their  position  suddenly.  Let  them  seek  to  humble 
themselves  greatly  before  me,  in  order  that  I  may  strengthen  them 
for  that  which  they  have  to  meet ;  but  if  they  do  not  do  so,  but 
few  of  them  will  go  through  the  test  alive. 

5.  When  all  the  hypocrites  are  gathered  together  from  among 
my  people,  I  will  come,  and  I  will  superintend  the  destruction  of 
the  hypocrites  who  are  in  the  midst  of  my  peopje ;  and  if  any 
help  is  needed,  I  shall  be  there  to  render  assistance  to  my  faithful 
people.  When  you  need  further  information  upon  this  subject, 
I  will  reveal  it  unto  you.  Let  this  suffice  for  the  present,  and  as  I 
have  said,  I  will  speedily  force  out  the  false-hearted  in  a  body ; 
therefore,  look  out  for  them.  I  am  the  Lord,  and  I  am  continu- 
ally by  your  side  to  fight  your  battles.  Even  so.  Amen  and 
Amen. 


REVELATION   CONCERNING   JOHN   COOK   AND 
RICHARD    COOK. 


No.  241.  WEBER,  UTAH,  March  iyth,  1862. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Son  of  the  Eternal  Father,  even  Jesus 
Christ,  and  I  am  come  to  speak  unto  you  concerning  John  Cook 
and  Richard  Cook.  I  have  seen  their  works  in  the  midst  of  my 
people  from  the  commencement  of  my  work  in  this  place.  They 
have  done  some  good  in  assisting  me  to  start  my  work  here. 
They  placed  considerable  confidence  in  me  in  the  commencement 
of  my  work.  I  inspired  them  greatly  at  that  time.  They  are  men 
who  are  naturally  very  suspicious,  which  suspicion  creates  a  lack 
of  confidence — a  fearfulness.  Suspicion  is  a  principle  which 
destroys  faith  in  the  object  of  a  pursuit.  It  renders  the  person 


460  EXCITEMENT    AND    SUSPICION. 

in  whom  it  is  found  almost  useless,  because  it  destroys  his  con- 
fidence in  his  undertaking,  and  therefore  it  produces  'double- 
mindedness ;  and  a  double-minded  person  is  unstable  in  all  his 
ways.  Suspicion  is  a  great  failing  in  that  person  in  whom  it  is 
found.  Excitement  and  suspicion  are  two  of  the  greatest  failings 
which  mortal  men  can  be  guilty  of;  either  of  them  will  destroy 
that  person's  future  usefulness  if  the  person  does  not  strive  against 
them,  and  overcome  them.  Suspicion  is  the  greatest  failing  that 
those  men  have.  Their  suspicion  makes  it  difficult  for  me  to 
work  with  them ;  it  destroys  their  confidence  in  me ;  and  in  con- 
sequence of  that,  they  are  continually  seeking  to  post  themselves 
against  a  failure,  and  thus  they  are  double-minded  and  unstable  in 
the  faith  of  my  gospel ;  and  while  they  are  in  that  condition  of 
mind,  they  cannot  preach  my  gospel  with  the  spirit  of  it.  No 
person  can  preach  my  gospel  with  the  spirit  of  it  but  those  who 
are  whole-hearted. 

2.  When  people  who  are  double-minded  undertake  to  preach 
.my  gospel,  they  do  more  injury  by  their  preaching  than  they  do 
good.  They  lull  my  people  to  sleep,  and  thereby  give  the  devil 
advantage  over  them :  such  are  unprepared  to  preach  my  gospel 
in  the  spirit  of  it,  until  they  have  overcome  their  suspicions,  and 
are  fully  able  to  trust  in  me ;  and  when  they  have  overcome  all 
suspicion  against  me,  they  will  be  fully  prepared  to  preach  my 
gospel  in  the  spirit  of  it ;  if  they  can  overcome  it,  it  will  be  well 
for  them ;  but  if  they  do  not  overcome  it,  it  will  overcome  them. 
Their  integrity  will  be  tried  in  that  matter.  They  will  never  over- 
come their  suspicion  before  I  come  and  deliver  my  people,  if  they 
do  afterwards.  Time  will  tell  what  they  will  do.  If  they  con- 
tinue in  as  good  standing  as  they  are  in  even  now,  I  will  deliver 
them  when  I  come.  I  will  try  them  fairly,  and  see  if  I  cannot 
destroy  their  suspicion  at  once ;  and  if  they  still  continue  to  be 
suspicious  and  half-hearted  after  they  have  seen  a  manifestation  of 
my  power,  then  I  will  cast  them  off  at  once.  If  they  cannot  place 
all  necessary  confidence  in  me  after  the  deliverance  of  my  people, 
then  I  shall  settle  with  them.  They  seem  to  have  the  advantage 
over  me  at  present ;  but  I  shall  speedily  have  the  power  over 
them.  They  are  hard  men  to  deal  with.  They  are  almost  con- 
tinually looking  out  for  failures.  They  musfe  have  a  very  low 


CONCERNING    SUSPICION.  461  ' 

opinion  of  me  to  be  continually  suspecting  me.  I  think  that  I 
am  as  honest  and  true  to  my  word  as  they  are  to  theirs.  They 
may  yet  prove  the  truth  of  my  words  in  that  respect. 

3.  It  is  a  grievous  sin  in  my  sight  for   a  person  to  be  sus- 
picious of  me ;    such  doubt  in   my  honesty   and  truthfulness,  and  7 
by  their  acts  charge  me  with  guilt   when  I   am   innocent.     They, 
therefore,  lay  false  charges  against  me ;    and  they  ought  to  know 
something  about  the  sin  of  laying  false  charges   against   any  per- 
son upon  the  earth,  let  alone  against  me. 

4.  I  love  the  whole-hearted — those  who  do  not  desire  to  ques- 
tion my  course,  but  are   willing  to   deliver  themselves  into  mine 
hands,  and  live   by   every   word   that    proceeds   from   my  mouth, 
believing  that  I  shall  deal    with  them  honestly,  and  do  all  things 
aright — such  I  delight  in.     But  the  suspicious  and  fearful  I  take 
no  pleasure  in;   they  are   a   continual   aggravation  unto   me.     I 
have  no  pleasure  in  them,  and  they  have  no  pleasure  in  them- 
selves;  for  through  their  fearfulness  they  cannot   enjoy  the   full 
spirit  of  my  gospel ;   but  they  are  constantly  in  fear;    it  is  a  con- 
stant canker  worm  to  their  souls,  and   eats   away  their  peace  of 
mind,  which  they  might  otherwise  enjoy.     They  have  no  pleasure 
in  themselves,  neither  have  I  any  pleasure  in  them.     I  can   assure 
them    that   they    need  not   be  suspicious  of   me.      I  shall  fulfil 
my  words  to  the  sorrow  of  a  number  of  this   people.      If  people 
are  sensible  they  will   save  themselves  the  trouble   of  being  sus- 
picious of  me.     If  they  need  to  be  suspicious  of  any  person,  it 
should  be  of  themselves,  lest  they  should  fall  short  of  doing  their 
own  £>art,   and  thereby   be  cast  off,  and  sent   home  again,  from 
whence  they  came,  in  shame  and  disgrace,  having  failed  to  faith- 
fully fill  the  mission  to  which  they  were  appointed.     If  any  people 
need  to  fear,  it  is  them.     Let  the  suspicious   look  well  to  them- 
selves ;   and  let  them  take  care  that  their  suspicions  do  not  send 
them  home  again. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.     I  am  the  Bright  and  Morning 
Star;   even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


462  THE    SPIRIT    OF    HYPOCRISY. 

THE     PROPHET     COMMANDED    TO     EXPOSE     THE 
SPIRIT  OF  HYPOCRISY. 


No.   242.  WEP.ER,    UTAH,  March   i8th,   1862. 

1.  LISTEN  unto  my  words,   which   are   quick  and    powerful, 
sharper  than  a  two-edged  sword  ;  for  I  am   about  to  speak   unto 
you  again  concerning  the  false-hearted  among  my  people.     I  am 
about  to  make  known  unto  you  how  you  shall  deal  with  them,  in 
order  to  purge  them  out  from  among  the  faithful  of  my  people. 

2.  You  wish  to  know  what  I  call  a  hypocrite.     I   will  answer 
you  to  your  satisfaction.     A  hypocrite  is  a  person  who  is  double- 
minded — half-hearted ;  who  has  not  a  single  eye  to  an  object,  but 
who  has  a  two-fold  object  in  view  in  what  he  does.     Such  persons 
are  fearful  and  unbelieving,  and   are  under  condemnation  before 
me.     My  spirit  cannot  influence  them  to  any  great  extent.     They 
cannot  receive  a  perfect  testimony  of  the  truth.     It  is  impossible 
to  satisfy  them ;  for  they  will  not  acknowledge  that  which  they  can 
see,  hear,  taste  or  handle.     They  are  in  the  possession  of   a  spirit 
from   Lucifer,   which   causes  them  to  deny   me  and  all  the  truth 
which  I  have  revealed.     Persons  who  would  deny  the  keys  of  the 
holy  priesthood,  which  they  have  seen,  and  the  operations  of  my 
spirit,  which  they  have  felt,  would  deny  anything  that  might  come 
from   me,   no  matter  how   powerful   a  manifestation  it  might  be. 
Such   persons  are  deceived   by  the   devil.     A  lying  spirit  has  so 
deep  a  hold  on  them,  on  account  of  their  suspicions,  that  they  are 
almost  destroyed.     There  is  little  or  no  chance  for  them.     Mine 
angels  cannot  influence  such  persons.     They  will  not  come  to  my 
terms.     They   perish  in  the  midst  of  light,  and  being  blinded  and 
deceived  by  the  devil,  they  consider  that   all   is   deception.     They 
measure  all  truth  by  the  spirit  of  the  devil.     I  have  told   my  peo- 
ple often  enough  how  to  shun  those  false  spirits;  but  some  of  them 
would  not  pay  attention  to  what   I   said.     They  need  not  blame 
anybody  for  their  disaster  but  themselves.     It  is  their  half-hearted- 
ness  and  suspicion  that  has  led  them  to  destruction. 

3.  Who  are  they  whom  I  call  my  faithful  people?    Those  who 
acknowledge  my  hand  in  all  things ;  who,  with  undivided  hearts, 


DESCRIPTION    OF    A    FAITHFUL    SAINT.  463 

are  willing  to  live  by  every  word  that  proceeds  from  my  mouth ; 
whose  eyes  are  single  to  my  glory ;  who,  being  reconciled  to  my 
course,  are  satisfied  with  it ;  who  have  no  darling  object  which 
they  place  before  the  truth ;  but  who  first  seek  my  kingdom  and 
its  righteousness,  and  allow  all  other  things  to  follow  in  their  owrt 
order ;  who,  having  consecrated  hearts,  are  willing  to  place  them- 
selves and  all  that  they  have  upon  the  altar  as  a  sacrifice.  Such 
are  mine,  and  shall  see  me  in  my  glory.  Unto  them  I  will  give 
the  good  things  of  the  earth,  and  they  shall  feed  in  a  fat  pasture ; 
for  their  hearts  are  right  in  my  sight.  But  the  hypocrites  I  will 
visit ;  and  inasmuch  as  they  will  not  abide  a  law  here,  I  will  send 
them  where  they  will  have  to  abide  a  law.  They  are  continually 
dissatisfied  with  my  way  of  working,  and  are  found  sitting  in  judg- 
ment upon  my  words  and  condemning  them,  because  they  will  not 
bear  the  scrutiny  of  the  devil.  Such  are  in  the  gall  of  bitter- 
ness. 

4.  While    my   people   are  ignorant,   I  have  to  bear  with  their 
follies ;  but  they  have  been  taught  too  much  to  be  ignorant  at  this 
late  hour ;  therefore,  they  will  now  have  to  pay  the  penalty  of  their 
sins. 

5.  And  now,  behold,  I   give  unto  you  a  commandment,  my 
son :     You  must   walk  forth  among  these  people,  as  a  lion  walks 
through  a  thicket,  and  you  shall  expose  that   evil  spirit  which  the 
hypocrites   among  my  people   are  in    possession  of.     You    shall 
expose  it  wherever  you  find  it,  whether  in  high  or  low  places. 
You  need  not  to  fear  how  many  of  the  people  turn  away  and 
oppose  you,  for  I  will  stand  by  your  side  ready  for  any  emergency. 
You  need  not  fear,  should  two-thirds  of  them  turn   against  you  to 
become  mine   enemies.     You  shall   maintain  your  ground  in  this 
place  until   I  have  cut  a  clear  way  for  you  through  this   Territory. 
I  wish  the  false-hearted  among  these  people  to  know  that  I  am  the 
master  of  this  Fort.     I   claim  this  spot  of  ground  upon  which  to 
commence  my   kingdom,   and   all   the  power  of  the  world  cannot 
move  me  off  it ;  but  when  I  am  ready,  I  will  send  my  faithful  peo- 
ple throughout  this  Territory  to  preach  my  gospel.    The  hypocrites 
may  rage  and  foam,  and  lay  claim  to  what  they  have  a  mind,  but 
I  will  show  them  that  I  am  the  master  in  this  place,  and  they  shall 
receive  nothing  but  what  I  please  to  give  unto  .them.      Death  will 
be  their  portion,  for  in  my  heart  I  despise  traitors. 


464  THE    HYPOCRITES. 

6.  I  wish  you  to  force  out  the  hypocrites  from  among  my  peo- 
ple as  soon  as  you  can.    If  you  will  expose  them,  you  will  speedily 
force  them  to  a  head.     I  do  not  want  the  deliverance  of  my  faith- 
ful people  to  linger  any  longer  on  account  of  the  hypocrites  who 
have  held  them  in  bondage  during  so  many   weeks.     My  faithful 
people  have  suffered  enough  on  account  of  the  hypocrites.     They 
shall  suffer  no  longer  on  their  account.     I  will  now  force  them  out 
of  the  midst  of  my  faithful   people ;  and  when  I  have  separated 
them  from  the  faithful,  I  will  attend  to  them.     Should   they  be  as 
numerous  as»  the  faithful,   or  nearly  so,   and  I  see  that  it  will  be 
difficult  for  them   to   destroy  the  hypocrites,  I  shall  not  call  upon 
them  to  slay  them ;  but  I  will  come  and  give  unto  you  your   robe 
and  rod,  and  I  will  slay  them  myself.     I  will  not  overburden  you 
in  this  thing.     You   shall  have  an  abundance  of  power  to  do  the, 
work  which  I  shall  call  upon  you  to  do. 

7.  You  may  keep  yourself  in  readiness  to  meet  me;  for  I  may 
ride  "up  to  you  suddenly  while  you  shall  be  purging  out  the  hypo- 
crites from  among  my  people.     You  must  keep  on  the  lookout  for 
me ;  for  I  shall  be  round  about  you  during  the  whole  of   the  .time 
that  you  will  be  engaged  in  that  work ;  and  if  I  see  that  you  are 
in  danger,   I  shall  come  unto  you   in  an  instant.     I  will  come 
when  my  presence  and  power  are  needed.     You  will  know   me 
when  you  see  me;  for  I  have  described  myself  plainly   unto  you. 
Therefore,  do7  as  I  have  commanded  you,  and  all  will  be  well.     I 
am   the  Stone  and  Shepherd  of  Israel,  the  Bright  and  Morning 
Star;  even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    DESCRIBING   THE    LAST    TEST    PRE- 
VIOUS TO  THE  COMING  OF  THE  LORD. 


No.   243.  WEBER,  UTAH,  March  2oth,  1862. 

i.  LISTEN  unto  my  words,  and  pay  attention  to  what  I  am 
about  to  say  unto  you.  You  say  that  you  cannot  see  how  you 
can  purge  out  the  false-hearted  who  are  in  the  midst  of  my  faith- 
ful people  by  taking  the  course  which  I  have  appointed ;  that  it 


THE    LAST   TEST.  465 

does  not  matter  .how  you  roar  in  their  midst,  and  expose  false 
spirits,  for  after  all  that  you  may  do,  they  will  still  hang  together. 
You  think  that  the  plan  which  I  have  adopted  will  not  fully 
answer;  that  unless  I  have  something  more  searching  than  that,  I 
cannot  effect  a  separation  between  the  false-hearted  and  the  faith- 
ful ;  that  if  I  want  to  separate  them  I  ought  to  put  them  through  a 
trying  test,  such  as  will  purge  out  the  false-hearted;  and  that  I 
cannot  accomplish  it  in  any  other  way.  But  you  say  that  you 
cannot  see  what  trying  test  I  can  put  them  through,  unless  I  come 
to  do  it  myself,  which,  at  present,  you  think  I  am  unwilling  to  do ; 
for  you  think  that  I  am  too  fond  of  placing  the  whole  burden  of 
the  people  upon  you.  You  say  that  you  are  entirely  tired  out  with 
my  present  course ;  that  week  after  week  passes  away,  and  nothing 
appears  to  be  done.  You  feel  as  though  everything  was  at  a  stand- 
still in  consequence  of  my  not  coming ;  that  I  know  well  enough 
that  you  can  do  nothing  with  the  people;  and  that,  apparently,  I 
will  not  come  to  your  assistance.  You  wish  to  know  what  is  to  be 
done  with  the  people ;  whether  I  am  about  to  come  unto  them  to 
put  them  through  a  test  myself,  or  whether  I  intend  that  you 
should  put  them  through  a  test,  and  thereby  strive  to  purge  out 
the  false-hearted  from  among  the  faithful.  You  wish  to  know  what 
my  intentions  really  are ;  how  I  intend  to  purge  out  from  among 
my  people  all  those  who  offend.  You  say  that  many  of  my  people 
are  placed  in  such  difficult  circumstances  as  regards  their  property 
and  families,  that  you  cannot  see  how  I  can  possibly  try  them  by 
the  law  of  consecration,  should  I  wish  to  do  so.  You  wish  to 
know  what  I  am  intending  to  do  in  such  cases. 

2. .  I  have  a  way  to  try  them  all,  no  matter  what  their  circum- 
stances may  be.  I  have  a  strait  place  to  put  them  through;  and 
I  shall  not,  at  that  time,  oppress  you  with  too  much  mental  labor. 
I  shall  bring  on  this  test,  the  last  one,  and  put  my  people  through 
it  myself.  After  I  shall  have  commenced  I  shall  soon  be  through 
with  it.  This  last  test  will  take  place  at  my  coming.  •  You  wish 
to  know  what  it  will  be.  I  will  tell  you.  I  know  the  hearts  of  all 
these  people.  Their  intentions  are  all  fully  known  to  me,  and  I 
shall  judge  them  righteously.  I  know  all  their  names,  and  I 
understand  all  their  works ;  and,  no  matter  how  difficult  their 
circumstances  may  be,  I  can  find  a  way  to  try  them,  which  I  shall 


466  THE    LAST   TEST. 

do  when  I  come.  I  shall  command  you  to  gather  all  the  people 
to  the  place  which  I  shall  appoint ;  and  I  shall  stand  by  your 
side,  and  you  shall  call  upon  the  people  to  step  up  and  take  their 
places  in  the  rank,  and  should  a  hypocrite  step  up,  I  shall  send 
mine  angels  to  pick  him  out  and  take  him  to  a  place  which  I  shall 
appoint  for  all  the  hypocrites  to  stand  in  until  I  shall  have  placed 
all  my  faithful  people  in  the  rank.  My  faithful  people  will  stand 
in  one  place,  and  the  hypocrites  in  another.  After  I  have  done 
this,  I  shall  give  unto  you  your  rod,  which  will  be  just  when  I  want 
you  to  use  it.  But  I  shall  first  give  unto  you  your  robe,  and  you 
must  put  it  on  before  you  place  my  people  in  the  rank,  even  as 
soon  as  you  have  dressed  yourself  in  white  linen. 

3.  I   will  give   unto  you  to  see  the  place   on  which  you  and  I 
will  be  called  to  stand,   in  time  for  my  people  to  beautify  it.     I 
shall  stand  with  you  all  the  time  that  you  will  be  placing  my  peo- 
ple in   the  rank.     I  shall  keep  all  these  particulars  back  until  the 
last.     I  will  reveal  them  unto  you  in  their  own  order. 

4.  When   I   come  unto   you,    I  shall  be  gentle  both  with  you 
and  my  faithful  people  until   I  have  separated  the  hypocrites  from 
the  faithful.     I  shall  then  give  unto  you  your  rod,   and  when  you 
shall  have  given  your  command,  you  may  look  out ;  for  as  soon  as 
you  shall  have  done   so,  you   must  prepare  yourself  for  a  mighty 
shock.     It  will  be  all  that  you  will  be  able  to  do  to  hold  the  rod, 
even  when  you  are   well   assisted.     The  stoutest-hearted  persons 
will  have  enough  to  do  to  stand  upon  their  feet ;  for  I  shall  shake 
the  earth,  and  it  will  reel  to  and  fro  as   a  drunken   man.     People 
will  fall  upon  the  ground  as  dead,  and  all  animated  nature  will  feel 
as  though  it  was  impossible  to  live  through  the  shock;  for  never 
since  this   world   came  forth   into   mortality  have  human    beings 
been  called  to  experience  such  a  shock  as  the   world   of  mankind 
will   witness  at   my  coming.      If  they   only  knew   what   is   close 
upon  them   they  would  be  striving  to  prepare  themselves  for  it ; 
but  it  will  take  them  unawares. 

5.  When   I  shall  have  purified  my  Church,  and  cleansed  this 
Territory,    I   shall  go  to  the  United  States,  and  I  shall  lay  low  the 
inhabitants  of  that  land  by  millions.     I  shall  lay  that   land   nearly 
waste ;  for  I  shall  establish  my  kingdom  upon  it.     More  than  two- 
thirds  of  the  inhabitants  of  that  land  are  fallen  spirits ;  and  when  I 


THE    LAST    TEST.  467 

shall  have  destroyed  them,  that  land  will  be  almost  desolate. 
After  I  have  started,  I  shall  make  a  slaughter.  I  am  the  Lord  of 
Hosts. 

6.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — it  is  my  will  that  in 
your  preaching  you  should  be  heavy  on  the  hypocrites,  and  expose 
all  false  spirits.  Purge  out  as  many  of  them  as  you  possibly  can 
until  I  come  to  put  my  people  through  the  last  test ;  for  I  shall  be 
with  you  speedily  to  remain  with  you.  I  know  that  you  are  weary 
of  struggling  with  these  people  to  assist  them  to  keep  their  heads 
above  water,  and  to  overcome  the  devil ;  but  with  all  that  you  can 
possibly  do,  he  overcomes  a  number  of  them  ;  and  when  you  see 
it,  it  discourages  you,  and  you  are  constrained  to  call  upon  me  to 
assist  you.  You  feel  as  though  the  devil  and  the  people,  without 
my  interference,  were  too  much  for  you ;  therefore,  you  continue 
to  call  upon  me  to  come  and  assist  you  in  a  powerful  manner.  I 
know  your  situation,  and  when  your  burden  becomes  too  heavy 
for  you  to  bear,  I  will  come  and  help  you.  I  am  watching  over 
you  continually,  and  I  am  ready  to  render  you  assistance  when- 
ever you  need  it.  Strive  to  bear  up  under  your  burden  and  be 
patient  until  I  have  brought  my  work  to  a  head ;  and  then  I  will 
render  you  all  the  assistance  which  you  could  ask  for.  I  am  Jesus 
Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    GIVING    A    FULL  DESCRIPTION  OF  A 

HYPOCRITE    UNDER    THE    FULNESS    OF 

THE    GOSPEL. 


No.  244.  WEBER,  UTAH,  March  2ist,  1862. 

i.  A  HYPOCRITE  is  a  person  who  is  double-minded;  who  is 
half-hearted ;  who  has  not  a  single  eye  to  an  object ;  but  who  has 
a  two-fold  object  in  view  in  what  he  does ;  who  is  fearful  and 
unbelieving ;  who  is  careless  and  indolent ;  who  is  perishing  by 
darkness  in  the  midst  of  a  fulness  of  light ;  who  is  suffering  under 
dark  and  miserable  influences  when  they  might  enjoy  light,  liberty 


468  DESCRIPTION    OF    A    HYPOCRITE. 

and  happiness ;  who  is  calling  out  for  more  testimony  of  the 
truth  when  he  is  in  the  midst  of  an  abundance  of  testimony,  but 
who  cannot  see  it;  who  professes  to  be  a  servant  of  the  Lord, 
but  is  in  reality  a  servant  of  the  devil;  who  professes  to  enjoy 
the  spirit  of  truth,  but  who  is  led  by  a  false  spirit ;  who  continues 
to  justify  his  own  course,  and  condemns  every  other  person  who 
does  not  see  things  as  he  sees  them ;  who  takes  darkness  for 
light,  and  light  for  darkness ;  who  cannot  see  his  way  clear,  but 
who  is  bewildered;  who  cannot  truthfully  understand  his  own 
position ;  but  who  flatters  himself  that  he  is  one  thing,  when  in 
reality  he  is  another ;  who  professes  to  have  faith  in  my  gospel, 
but,  in  reality,  has  not.  Such  persons  are  entirely  deceived  by  the 
devil,  and  are  laboring  under  gross  mistakes,  taking  the  spirit  of 
truth  for  a  false  spirit,  and  a  false  spirit  for  the  spirit  of  truth. 
Such  have  not  settled  faith  in  my  work;  but  they  ebb  and  flow; 
they. are  up  and  down,  just  as  a  spirit  operates  upon  them,  no 
matter  what  kind  of  a  spirit  it  may  be ;  and  when  it  ceases  to 
operate  upon  them  they  fall  flat  in  their  feelings.  They  are  good 
for  nothing  only  while  they  are  operated  upon.  They  have  but 
little  or  no  force  of  character  about  them.  They  are  altogether 
governed  by  influences,  and  the  influence  which  often  operates 
upon  them  is  a  false  one,  and  it  is  the  most  congenial  to  their  feel 
ings.  They  do  not  want  to  put  themselves  about  much,  in  order 
to  gain  an  influence  to  operate  upon  them ;  therefore,  the  influ- 
ence of  the  devil  suits  such  persons,  because  it  is  always  near ; 
it  needs  no  straining  or  exertion  on  their  part.  They  are  too  lazy 
to  strive  to  win  the  influence  of  the  Holy  Ghost  to  lead  them  into 
all  truth,  because  they  cannot  obtain  it  unless  they  are  willing  to 
live  by  every  word  that  proceeds  from  my  mouth,  and  acknowl- 
edge my  hand  in  all  things.  They  cannot  serve  me  acceptably 
without  some  energy  and  force  of  character,  and  that  does  not 
suit  them.  They  want  to  go  an  easier  way  than  that.  They  wish 
to  pass  along  with  as  little  trouble  as  they  possibly  can.  No  per- 
son can  serve  me  in  an  acceptable  manner  unless  he  is  whole- 
hearted. This  is  the  cause  why  the  hypocrites  are  always  in  dark- 
ness and  misery.  They  cannot  serve  me  without  energy ;  for  it 
requires  a  constant  labor  on  their  part  to  keep  all  my  laws  as  fast 
as  I  shall  reveal  them  unto  my  Church, 


THE    SAINTS    MUST    EXERT    THEMSELVES.  469 

* 

2.  All  lazy  and  indolent  people  will  be  cast  out  of  my  Church; 
for  such  will  not  abide  my  laws.  When  individuals  will  not  abide 
my  law,  my  faithful  people  must  not  sympathize  with  them ;  for  it 
is  forbidden  by  the  law  of  heaven.  All  Abraham's  seed  are  able 
to  abide  my  law  if  they  will  exert  themselves  to  do  so ;  but  if  they 
will  not  exert  themselves,,  they  will  have  to  perish  in  the  flesh. 
Therefore,  those  of  my  people  who  intend  to  stand,  and  receive  a 
deliverance  at  my  hands,  will  have  to  be  energetic,  and  have  force 
of  character  about  them ;  nothing  else  will  enable  them  to  stand 
through  the  test.  Those  who  expect  to  be  accepted  of  me,  must 
be  up  and  doing  with  all  their  might,  or  they  will  fall  short  of  that 
which  they  are  looking  for.  I  have  told  my  people  many  times 
what  they  must  do  to  win  the  prize,  and  if  they  lose  it,  it  will  be 
their  own  fault.  I  have  laid  a  small  portion  of  my  law  before 
my  people,  and  those  of  them  who  will  abide  it,  I  will  deliver. 
Therefore,  let  my  people  run  well  for  the  prize,  and  win  it,  and 
they  shall  receive  it,  for  I  will  give  it  unto  those  who  win  it. 
I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen 
and  Amen. 


REVELATION  CONCERNING  THE  DELIVERANCE  OF 

PERSONS  FROM  THE  INFLUENCE 

OF  THE  DEVIL. 


No.  245.  WEBER,  UTAH,  March  22nd,  1862. 

i.  I  AM  about  to  speak  unto  you  again.  You  see  some  peo- 
ple apparently  departing  from  me,  whose  hearts  are  apparentjy 
honest,  but  who  need  integrity  and  that  force  of  character  which 
is  necessary  at  this  trying  time ;  and  you  wish  to  know  what  I  am 
am  intending  to  do  with  such  persons.  You  think  that  they 
are  not  wilfully  wicked  and  dishonest,  fully  intending  to  fight 
against  the  truth  at  the  risk  of  all  consequences,  choosing  evil 
rather  than  good,  because  they  love  it  best ;  that  they  are  not  wil- 
fully perishing  in  the  midst  of  light  and  truth,  when  .they  could 
save  themselves.  If  they  were  as  guilty  as  some  of  those  who 


470  THE    INFLUENCE    OF    THE    DEVIL. 

« 

hive  departed  from  me  are,  you  consider  that  they  would  be  well 
worthy  of  death,  and  that  I  ought  not  to  have  any  sympathy  for 
them ;  but  you  think  that  these  are  not  under  equal  condem- 
nation. 

2.  I  will  promise  you  that  I  shall  not  spare  the  wilfully  wicked. 
I  will  spare  those  who  are  honest,  but  weak — who  in  their  hearts 
love  truth  and  righteousness,  but  have  not  a  sufficient  amount   of 
integrity  of  heart  to  stand  to  the  truth  in  this  trying  time;    who 
have  been  overcome  by  false  spirits  in   consequence  of  advantages 
having  been  taken  with  them  by  other  persons    who  were  not  only 
overcome  by  the  devil,  but  who  in  their  hearts  were  also  wicked. 

3.  There  have  been  such  wicked  persons  in  my  Church,  who, 
because  they   have   had  the  power,  have  aided  the  devil  to   ob- 
tain power  over  those  who  were  closely  connected  with  them  by 
family  ties,  and  other  bonds  of  friendship ;  and   a   number  of  my 
people  have  been  overcome  and  have  departed  from  me,   and  are 
now  suffering  under  the  influence  of  the  devil,  on  account  of  those 
wilful  and  wicked  hypocrites.     They  have  worked  against  me  with 
all  their  power,  and  have  sought  to  break   my   hold   on   mankind. 
But,    as   I   live,    I   will   pay  them   for  it  all ;  but  the  virtuous,  the 
truthful  and  the  honest  whom  they  have  given  the  devil  the  advan- 
tage over,  I   will  favor  with   another  chance  when  those  cursed 
hypocrites  shall  be   dead.     The  fowls   of  the  air,  and  the  wild 
beasts  of  the  field  shall  eat  their   corrupt   and  rotten  carcasses. 
They  shall  not  be  favored  with  a  grave ;   their  day  is  over.     But  I 
will  give   unto  the  weak   and  honest  whom  they  have  overcome, 
another  chance,  under   more   favorable  circumstances  than  what 
they   were   placed  in  when  they  were  overcome   by  those"  wilful 
hypocrites.     I  will  give   unto  them   a  fair  chance  for  their  lives, 
an^d  I  will  see  what  they  will  do  at  a  time  when  they  cannot  have 
the  least  shadow  of  a  doubt  in  my  work.     Inasmuch  as  they  were 
taken  advantage  of  by  others,  in  the  days  of  their  weakness,  I  will 
see  how  they  will  act  when  they  shall  have  seen  my  power ;  but  if 
they  do  not  then  walk  up  and  do  their  duty,  I  will  cut  them  off. 

4.  When  weak-minded  people  give  way  to  the  devil,  and  he 
obtains  the  upper  hand  of  them,  it  is   unlawful   for  me  to   deliver 
them  out  of  his  hands  until  I  come  with  the.  power  of  the  gospel ; 
until  then,  I  have  to  let  them  go  where  the  devil  chooses  to  lead 


THE    INFLUENCE    OF    THE    DEVIL.  471 

them.  To  deliver  such  a  person  out  of  the  hands  of  the  devil,  I 
should  have  to  manifest  a  great  degree  of  power,  even  more  than 
the  law  of  heaven  allows  me  to  use  while  I  am  only  giving  the 
keys  of  the  holy  priesthood.  While  I  am  thus  engaged,  I  cannot 
manifest  much  power.  I  am  compelled  by  law  to  confine  myself 
to  one  thing  at  a  time.  I  can,  however,  while  I  am  giving  the  the- 
ory of  my  gospel,  liberate  a  person  from  a  fallen  spirit,  if  that  spirit 
has  not  obtained  possession  of  him ;  but  if  it  has,  I  am  compelled 
to  let  it  remain  with  him  until  I  can,  according  to  the  law,  bring 
the  power  of  the  gospel. 

5.  When  the  devil  obtains  the  full  power  over  a  people,  it  takes 
the  full  power  of  the  priesthood  to  break  his  hold  and  to  conquer 
him.  It  requires  not  only  the  theory,  but  also  the  power  of  the 
gospel  to  accomplish  it;  consequently,  when  the  devil  has  obtained 
the  full  possession  of  a  person,  he  lawfully  holds  him  in  his  grasp 
until  the  power  of  the  priesthood  comes  and  liberates  him.  But 
if,  while  I  am  revealing  the  theory  of  the  gospel,  the  devil  buffets 
and  tempts  a  person,  and  that  person  does  not  wholly  give  up  to 
him,  but  fights  against  him  and  tries  to  assist  himself  and  help 
my  holy  angels  to  liberate  him,  I  can  lawfully  assist  that  person, 
and  deliver  him  out  of  his  hands.  But  if  a  person  has  fully  given 
himself  up  to  the  devil,  he  has  to  be  taken  out  of  the  hands  of  the 
destroyer  independently  of  his  own  exertions.  Therefore,  let  my 
people  be  aware  of  what  they  are  doing,  and  not  give  way  to  the 
devil,  but  shun  all  temptation,  that  it  may  be  well  with  them ;  for 
lo,  I  come,  I  come,  I  come  speedily ;  even  the  Lord  of  Hosts. 
Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    CONCERNING    THE    IMPRISONMENT 
OF  PETER  MOSS. 


No.  246.  WEBER,  UTAH,  March  22nd,  1862. 

i.  I  AM  in  a  hurry  to  speak  unto  you  again,  although  I  know 
that  it  is  very  straining  upon  your  mental  powers  to  write  from 
my  mouth  so  much  at  once ;  nevertheless  I  am  compelled  through 


472  IMPRISONMENT    OF    PETER    MOSS. 

the  force  of  circumstances  to  speak  often  unto  you  at  this  time. 
I  am  just  upon  the  point  of  coming  unto  you,  to  remain  with 
you,  and  to  speak  unto  you  personally.  You  will  need  to  see 
me  very  soon.  This  is  as  near  as  I  can  now  tell  you  the  time  of 
my  coming.  You  will  soon  be  placed  in  a  position  where  you  will 
not  be  able  to  proceed  without  my  powet.  The  devil  is  closing 
in  upon  you  from  all  around,  and  he  is  about  to  try  what  he 
can  do. 

2.  My    people    must    remain    at    home  as   much  as  possible. 
When  they  go  abroad  among  mine  enemies,  they  are  in  danger  of 
being  trapped  by  them.     It  is  not  safe  for  them  to  go  among  their 
enemies ;  therefore,   if  they  wish  to  be  safe,  let  them  stop  in  this 
place.     But  when   they  are  compelled  to  go  abroad  in  search  of 
cattle,  quite  a  number  of  them  must  go  together ;  for  should  a  few 
of  mine  enemies  see  a  number  of  my  people  together,  they  will  not 
molest  them.     If  my   people  will   do  as  I  command  them,  I  will 
take   good  care  of  them.     Some  of  my  people  have  been  disobe- 
dient,  and  have  run  about  from  place  to  place  in  great  danger, 
and  if  I  had  not  guarded  them,  they  would   have   suffered   by  the 
abuses  of  mine  enemies.     I  have  protected  them  so  far,   but  if 
they  do  not  hearken   unto   my  words,  and  obey  them,  I  will  not 
continue  to  protect  them. 

3.  Mine  enemies  have  now  one  of  the  members  of  my  Church 
in  their  hands ;  but  had  he  asked  counsel  of  my   servant   Joseph, 
he  would  not  be  in  that  trap.     I   suffered  him  to  fall  into  their 
hands  in  order  that  others  might  learn  from  his  disaster.     Never- 
theless, he  is  in  my  hands,  and  I  will  bring  all  things  aright  in  his 
case.     My  hand  is  in  that  affair.     Let  his  parents  rest  themselves 
contented,  and   I  will  work  all  things  well  for  him.     When   my 
people  do  as  I  command  them  they  will  always  be  right. 

4.  I  shall  bring  things   to   a   head   in  mine  own  way.      Mine 
enemies  will  have  to  come  to  the  point  to  which   I  wish  to  bring 
them.     I  can  make  them  do  my  will.     My  people  will  not  be  put 
to  the  necessity  of  going  out  of  this  place  after  many  more  cattle 
for   Church  purposes;  they  are  about  through  with  that  tedious 
work.     It   will   not  be  needful   for  any  of  my  people  to  go  out  of 
this  place  many  more  times,  on  any  account  whatever ;  for  I  am 
about  to  wind  up  my  affairs  with  my  people,  and  also  with   mine 
enemies. 


THE    FAIHFUL    WILL    BE    GREATLY    BLESSED.  473 

5.  I   shall  pour  out  my  spirit  upon  my  faithful  people  in  a 
powerful   manner,   and  they   will   feel  like  lions;  and    the    false- 
hearted will  tremble  and  fear,  and  withdraw  from  their  midst ;  for 
it'  will  lay  hold  on  them  as  pain  lays  hold  of  a  woman  in  travail 
when  the  time  of  her  deliverance  has  come.     I  shall  separate  my 
people  by  the  power  of  my  spirit.     The  hypocrites  will  not  be  able 
to  partake  of  it.     They  will  strive  to  get   out   of  its  way.     It  will 
make  them  miserable,  for  they  cannot  enjoy  it  as  my  faithful  peo- 
ple can.     To  the  faithful   it   will  produce  happiness ;  but  to  the 
unfaithful,  misery.     I  wish  the  false-hearted  to  get  out  of  the  midst 
of  my  people  as  soon  as  they  can.     They  must  understand  that  I 
shall  not  trifle   with  them.     It  is  of  no  use  for  people  to  flatter 
themselves  that  they  will   meet  with  a  deliverance  at  my  hands  if 
they  will  not  abide  my  law.     They  might  as  well  withdraw  now  as 
to  wait  until  I  send  mine  angels  to  pick  them  out.     I   shall   deal 
honestly  with  them.     They  know  the  conditions  on  which  I  can 
deliver  them. 

6.  I  am  well  pleased  with  some  of  my  people,   but  displeased 
with  others  of  them.     It  is  hard  for  me  to  deal  with  some  who  are 
in  the  midst  of  my  people.     They  keep  my  wrath  burning  against 
them  continually  through  the  unprincipled  course  which  they  take. 
They  do  not  appear  to  make  use  of  their  common   senses,  no 
matter  how  much  I  tell  them  what  I  require  at  their  hands.     They 
either  do  not  understand  me,  or  they  are  determined  that  they  will 
not  do  my  will. 

7.  You  must  come  out  heavy  upon  the  false-hearted  who  are 
among  my  people,  and  pur-ge  out  as  many  of  them  as  you  possibly 
can,   and  I   will   be  with  you  and  watch  over  you  while  you  are 
doing  so.     I  shall  continue  to  purge  out  the  hypocrites  until  I 
come  to  settle  all  difficulties  with  all  parties.     Those  who  are  now 
found  filthy,  will  remain  filthy  until  death  has  been  inflicted  upon 
them  as  the  penalty  for  their  sins;  and  those  who  are   found  right- 
eous among  my  people,  shall  be   righteous  still ;  for   I  know  what 
course  thev  will  all  take.     I  have  tried  them,  so  that  I  know  them, 
and  I  will  bring  all  things  right  with  them.     Let  the  faithful  con- 
tinue to  trust   in  me ;  for  I  am  their  Shepherd,  and  I  will  defend 
their  rights,  and  bring  them  off  more  than  conquerers.     I  am  with 
them  unto  the  end.     Even  Jesus   Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and 
Amen. 


474  THE  PAYMENT  OF  DEBTS. 

REVELATION  CONCERNING  THE  PAYMENT  OF 
DEBTS  BY  APOSTATES. 


No.  247.  WEBER,  UTAH,  March  24th,  1862. 

1.  LISTEN  unto   my   words,   which  are  quick    and    powerful, 
sharper  than  a  two-edged  sword ;  for  lo,  I  come  quickly  to  plead 
your  case  with  the  inhabitants  of  this  Territory  in  a  way  that  they 
will  understand   me.       They   seemingly    cannot    understand    the 
theory  of  my  gospel;  but  they  will    understand  that  which    will 
come  next. 

2.  I  stood  by  your  side  yesterday  while  you  were  addressing 
my  people,  and  I  dictated  your  words  while  you  spoke  unto  them, 
and  although  you  preached  a  good  and  penetrating  sermon,  I  shall 
preach  unto  them  a  still  better  one.     I   want  you  to  set  things  on 
the   move,  both   in   the  midst  of   my   people   and    among    mine 
enemies  abroad,  and  my  holy  angels  shall  render  you  all  the  assist- 
ance which   your    circumstances  may  require.     You  need  not  to 
fear   when    trouble    seems    to  disturb  this  long  calm    which  has 
existed  both  among  my  people  and  among  mine  enemies  abroad ; 
for  trouble  will  roll  right  upon  you,  and  upon  my  faithful  people ; 
and  the   apostates  who  go  out  from  among  them  will  be  the  ring- 
leaders of  this  trouble.     They  will  be  the  means  of  stirring  up  the 
trouble ;  for  the  devil  of  all  devils  is  in  their  midst   spurring  and 
inspiring  them  to  make  a  disturbance  among  my  faithful   people. 
They  will   invite  the  devils  from  all  around  to  come  up  to  this 
place  to,  as  they  suppose,  assist  them  to   destroy  my  faithful  peo- 
ple.    They  are  the  most  corrupt  and  blood  thirsty  of   all  mine 
enemies,  for  Lucifer,  the  devil,  is  continually  inspiring  them.     He 
will  speedily   run  them  to  a  head — to  a  point  where  they  can  get 
no  further ;  and  that  will  be  the  last  of  them.     I  have  now  told 
you   who   will   commence  the  test.     You    must  keep  an  eye  on 
them. 

3.  And  inasmuch  as  the  apostates  have  consecrated  their 
property,  both  by  oath  and  deed,  it  is  justly  mine  according  to 
their  own  agreement,  and  they  shall  pay  their  just  debts.  I  wish 
them  to  understand  that  they  own  nothing.  What  they  call  theirs, 


THE  PAYMENT  OF  DEBTS.  475 

is  mine,  for  they  gave  it  unto  me,  and  I  wish  them  all  to  under- 
stand that  I  shall  hold  it.  If  they  wish  to  go  to  the  devil  they 
shall  not  take  away  my  property  with  them.  If  they  are  babes 
and  fools  big  enough  to  let  the  devil  fool  them,  they  cannot  fool 
me  ;  for  I  will  either  make  them  walk  up  to  the  covenant  which 
they  have  made  with  me,  or  else  I  will  strip  them  of  all  they  have; 
and  if  they  leave  me,  they  shall  leave  naked  and  stripped  of  all 
that  they  have.  The  devil  that  fools  them  cannot  fool  me.  They 
may  call  upon  their  fellow  devils  and  devils'  slaves  from  all  around 
to  fight  against  me,  and  the  sooner  that  they  gather  together,  the 
sooner  I  shall  come  to  release  my  faithful  people.  I  want  them 
to  make  haste ;  and  what  they  do,  I  want  them  to  do  it  quickly. 

4.  My  servant,   the  steward,   shall  make  out  a  bill  against  all 
those  who  apostatize,  of  all  that   they   have   received  »  out  of  the 
store-house,  and  hand  it  to  them,  and  they  must  pay  it  before  they 
shall  be  permitted   to  move   at  all.     And  if  there  are  some  who 
wish   to  go  over  to  the   devil,   who  cannot  settle  their  bills,  they 
must  call  upon  some  of  their  fellow  hypocrites  to  assist  them  to  do 
so.     I   should   think  that  their  brethren   would  be   willing  to  do 
almost  anything  to  liberate  them  out  of  the  hands  of  such  a  tyrant 
as  they  think  that  I  am.     I  am  hard   on  all   devils'  slaves,    even 
those  whom  I  have  enlightened  as  I  have  enlightened  these  peo- 
ple.    They  know  too  much  to  be  permitted  to  act  like  devils ;  for 
wvhere  I  have  given  much,  I  require  much.     When   people   are  in 
the  possession  of  devils,  they  always  think  that  my  course  is  hard. 
They   may   know  that   when   I  am  hard  on  them   they  are  in  the 
possession  of  false  spirits ;  and  I  am   compelled  to  destroy   false 
spirits,  even  if  I  have  to  destroy  the  persons  possessed  by  them  at 
the  same  time;  but  the  devil  makes  such  persons  believe  that  they 
are  right,  although  they  know  that  they   are  as   miserable   as  they 
possibly  can  be.     If  such  ever  knew  anything  about  the  operations 
of  my  spirit,  they  know  that  it  produces  peace  and  happiness ;  but 
apostates  know  that  they  have  no  such   feelings ;  for  they  are  as 
miserable  as  the  devil  can  possibly  make  them,  and  they  want  to 
destroy  everything  that  they  possibly  can. 

5.  And  behold,   I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — you  must  continue 
to  purge  out  from  among  my  faithful  people  as  many  of  the  hypo- 
crites as  you  possibly  carr;  and  while  you  are  doing  so,  you  must 


47 6  R.    J.    LIVINGSTONE    AND    J.    O.    MATHER    CALLED. 

keep  on  the  lookout  for  me ;  for  I  am  round  about  you  continu- 
ally. Be  of  good  courage,  for  you  have  nothing  to  fear.  I  will 
speak  unto  you  again  speedily.  I  shall  now  speak  unto  you  often 
until  I  come  to  remain  with  you.  You  will  be  satisfied  with  my 
way  of  working  with  you  from  this  time  henceforth. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.     I  am   Jesus   Christ.     Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    CALLING    RICHARD  J.    LIVINGSTONE 

AND   JOHN    O.    MATHER   TO   THE 

APOSTLESHIP. 


No.  248.  WEBER,  UTAH,  March  25th,  1862. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  Jesus  Christ,  and  I  am  come  to  speak  unto 
you  concerning  the  apostleship.     I  called  upon  you,  some  time 
ago,  to  organize  a  quorum  of  twelve  apostles,  and  I  told  you  that 
I  did  not  need  more  than  that   number  at  that  time.     But  it   is 
now  wisdom  in  me  to  call  two  more   men  to  the   apostleship.     I 
have  an  object  in  view  in  doing  so.     I  want   men   of  integrity  to 
fill  the  office  of  apostles,  such  as  will  not  sit  down  to  be  run  over 
by  devils ;  men  who  have  confidence  both '  in   me  and   in  them- 
selves; who   feel  themselves  of  too   dignified  a  character  to   sit 
down  and  listen  to  damned  spirits ;    for  those  who  do  so  are  a  dis- 
grace to  the  holy  priesthood,  and  I  will   have  none  such  in  the 
apostleship.     I  want  those  that  will  conduct  themselves  in  such  a 
manner  that   my  holy   spirit   can  continually  abide  with  them,  to 
lead  them  into  all  truth ;    such  as  are  always  faithful  before  me — 
whose  hearts  are  honest — who  are  honorale  before  me,  and  not 
treacherous — such  I  delight  in.     They  shall  be  the  chief  rulers  in 
my  kingdom,  and  their  seed  after  them  shall   be  honored  in  the 
midst  of  my  people  forever.     I  am  the  Lord. 

2.  And  now,  behold,  I  make  known  unto  you   those  whom  I 
have  called.     I  have  called  Richard  John   Livingstone   and  John 
O.  Mather  to  the  office  of  apostles ;   and  you  shall  lay  your  hands 


THE    APOSTLES.  477 

upon  them  and  ordain  them  to  that  office,  for  their  hearts  are 
honest  before  me,  and  I  have  confidence  in  them.  And  inas- 
much as  they  will  be  faithful,  they  will  bring  many  thousands  to  a 
knowledge  of  the  truth,  and  I  will  endow  them  with  all  the  power 
that  they  may  stand  in  need  of  until  their  mission  is  ended.  I 
will  speedily  burst  asunder  the  fetters  that  now  bind  them,  and 
they  shall  be  like  lions  let  loose  among  lambs ;  they  shall  tear 
asunder,  and  none  shall  deliver  out  of  their  hands.  Millions  of 
the  warriors  of  heaven  shall  go  before  them  to  tear  up  and  destroy 
everything  that  rises  up  against  them  ;  for  I  am  the  Lord,  and  I 
will  tear  asunder  and  waste  away  everything  that  opposes  my  ser- 
vants unto  the  end.  My  faithful  servants,  the  apostles,  shall  be  like 
lion's  whelps — they  shall  continue  to  grow  in  strength ;  they  shall 
tear  asunder  and  destroy  every  enemy  that  they  shall  lay  their 
grasp  on.  Their  grasp  shall  never  be  broken  by  an  enemy ;  for 
I,  the  Lord,  am  their  strength.  I  love  the  faithful ;  my  whole 
delight  is  in  them,  and  I  will  fight  their  battles  forever. 

3.  I  do  not  care  about  having  a  great  many  men  to  com- 
mence my  work  with.  If  one-half  of  those  who  have  yielded 
obedience  unto  the  fulness  of  my  gospel  should  depart  from  me, 
even  then  I  should  have  sufficient  left  to  commence  my  work 
with ;  for  I  do  not  look  unto  men  upon  the  earth  for  power.  I 
shall  furnish  the  power  to  establish  my  kingdom  upon  the  earth, 
and  to  overthrow  the  devil ;  for  I  have  an  abundance  of  it.  I  do 
not  need  to  employ  all  my  power  to  break  the  devil's  hold  off 
Abraham's  seed.  When  I  have  once  made  a  start,  my  people  will 
see  what  they  have  to  trust  to.  I  will  take  the  sharp  edge  off  the 
devil.  He  will  not,  after  I  have  once  made  a  breach  upon  him, 
look  as  large  as  he  now  does ;  but  his  servants  will  fear  and  trem- 
ble ;  their  hearts  will  be  smitten,  and  they  will  begin  to  go  down 
from  the  time  that  I  shall  first  manifest  my  power.  I  shall  shake 
the  whole  earth,  and  all  flesh  will  feel  the  shock ;  and  from  that 
time  all  embodied  fallen  spirits  will  be  heart  smitten;  but  my 
chosen  people  will  be  encouraged,  and  rise  up  and  gain  strength. 
They  will  become  strong;  but  the  opposite  race  will  become 
weak.  This  will  be  the  commencement  of  my  power;  after  that, 
I  shall  tear  up,  break  asunder  and  waste  away  until  I  shall  have 
purified  the  earth  and  made  it  a  celestial  abode ;  for  the  hour  of 


47 8  THE  COMING  OF  THE  LORD. 

my  judgment  is  come.     Therefore,  let  all  flesh  prepare  themselves 
for  a  visit  from  me,  for  I  am  now  coming  to  pay  them  one. 

4.  I  wish  all  my  servants  who  intend  to  stand  faithful  unto  me 
to  prepare  themselves  with  all  diligence  to  preach  the  fulness  of 
my  gospel ;  for  I  require  it  at  their  hands.  I  will  fight  the  battles 
of  my  people.  I  shall  never  call  upon  them  to  fight  much,  if  any. 
I  will  attend  to  my  own  duty ;  and  let  my  people  attend  to  theirs. 
If  they  will  do  so,  all  will  go  on  right.  I  now  give  unto  you  no 
nore.  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION  SHOWING  HOW  THE  EARTH  WILL  BE 
SHAKEN  AT  THE  COMING  OF  THE  LORD. 


No.   249.  WEBER,    UTAH,  March  26th,   1862. 

1.  I  WISH  to  speak  unto  you  concerning  my  coming;  for  it  is 
necessary  that  you  should  understand  more  about  it.     How  shall 
I   come?   and   by   what   means   shall  I  shake  all  nature?     I  shall 
bring   all  my   power,   even  the  whole  army  of  heaven,  with  me  to 
shake  the  world  and  ail  things  which  it  contains.     I  only  need  to 
bring  a  few  of  mine  angels  to  cleanse  this  Territory.     Mine  army 
will   be   scattered  throughout  the  whole  earth,  and  large  numbers 
of  them,  yea,  even  millions  of  them,  will  be  placed  at  the  head  of 
each  of  the  governments  of  the  earth. 

2.  When  I  give  unto  you  your  rod,  and  you  shall  have   given 
your  command,  I  shall  give  my  command  to  the  remaining  chief 
generals  of  the  army  of  heaven,  and  they  will  all  give  their  separate 
commands  in  the   different   places  where  they   will  be  stationed. 
While  a  small  portion  of  mine  army  lays  low  mine  enemies  in  this 
Territory,  the  remainder   of  mine  army  will  shake  all  the  thrones 
upon  the  earth  to  their  center,  and  all  the  kings  and  rulers  of  the 
earth  will  be  heart  smitten.     They  will  feel  as  though  their  natural 
strength  had  left  them,  and  they  will  never  regain  it.     After  I  have 
given   them  a   shake,  and  broken   down  their  spirits,  I  will  keep 
them  *down.     After  I  have  once  smitten  them  with  terror,  I   will 


HOW  THE  EARTH  WILL  BE  SHAKEN.  479 

crowd  heavily  upon  them.     The  devil  will  not  then  feel  as  large 
as  he  now  does. 

3.  The  army  of  heaven  are  all  horsemen — they  will  all  come 
on  horses ;  and  when  they  drop,  at  once,  upon  the  earth,  they  will 
make  it  shake  and  reel  as  a  drunken  man.     This   earth  exists  in 
space,   and  moves   in  its  orbit.     It  is  situated  near  the  center  of 
space ;  and  when  it  has  made  one  more  move,  or,  in  other  words, 
become  celestial,  it  will  be  placed  in  the  central  portion   of  space, 
which   is   beyond   all  the  power  of  evil.     From  the  time  of  the 
creation  of  a  world  until  it  has  arrived  to  the  point  at  which  this 
world  has  arrived,  it  has  to  fight   its  way  through   evil,   being  as- 
sisted by  power  from  above.     And  in  consequence  of  the  manner 
in  which  the  earth  now  floats  in  space,  it  cannot  bear  more  than  a 
certain  weight  before  it  gives  way.     It  will  not  bear  a  great   deal 
more  than  what  is  now  upon  it.     It  is  even  now  loaded  down ; 
and  when  two  hundred  millions  of  an  army,  with  their  horses  and 
all  their  equipage  of  war,    drop   down   upon   it,  it  will  be  over- 
balanced and  borne  down  in  space,  and  it  will  reel  to  and  fro  like 
a  drunken  man  by  the  sudden  shock  which  it  will  receive.     I  shall 
not  have  the  whole  army  of  heaven  with  me,  only  when  I  come  to 
commence  my  work ;  for  the  earth  would  not  bear  them  continu- 
ally.    I   shall  only   have   as  many  of  them  on  the  earth  as  it  will 
bear — even  sufficient  to  do  the  work  which  I  have  to  do.     There- 
fore, one  portion  of  mine  army  will  be  upon  the   earth,   and  the 
other  portion  will    be    in    heaven.      They  will   change   about  as 
suits  me.     They  are  all  delivered  into  my  hands,  and  are  subject 
to  me;  and  I  will  make  all  things  work  well. 

4.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — you  must  run  things 
up  to  a  head  as  soon  as  you  possibly  can ;  for  we  are  all   ready  to 
drop   down  upon  the   earth   as   soon   as   you  shall  have  done  so. 
You  must  do  so  with  all  your  might,  and  put   away   from   you  all 
fear  of  consequences  which   may   arise  from  the  course  which  I 
shall  lead  you  to  take.     I  am  just  upon  the  point  of  coming  unto 
you,  and  you  will  see  me  to  your  satisfaction.     I   am  now  waiting 
until  you  have  run  things  up  to  a  head ;  and  when  you  have  done 
so,  I  shall  then  be  compelled  by  law  to  come  and  liberate  you ; 
but  until  then,  I  cannot  come.     I  will  lead  you  aright. 

5.  Let  all  my  people  abide  your  counsel,   and   not*  run  into 


480          CONCERNING  THE  ARMY  OF  HEAVEN. 

things  before  they  are  sent.  I  know  that  they  are  very  restless  to 
run  into  mischief  with  mine  enemies  before  the  time.  Let  them 
be  contented  until  the  proper  time ;  for  they  will  be  let  loose  soon 
enough ;  it  is  right  on  their  heels.  Let  them  prepare  themselves 
for  the  test,  and  they  will  see  as  much  as  will  satisfy  them.  Let 
this  suffice  for  the  present,  and  I  will  shortly  speak  unto  you  again. 
I  am  the  Son  of  the  Eternal  Father ;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION   SHOWING   THE    MANNER    IN   WHICH 

THE  ARMY  OF  HEAVEN    WILL  RECEIVE  THE 

COMMANDS  AT  THE  COMING  OF 

THE  LORD. 


No.  250.  WEBER,  UTAH,  March  2yth,  1862. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  he  who  shuts,  and  no  one  opens,  and  that 
opens,  and  no  one  shuts ;   even  the  Son  of  the  Eternal   Father. 
I  am  about  to  speak   unto  you   again.     I  have   shown  unto  you 
how  I  intend  to  shake  all  nature.    You  may  wish  to  know  whether 
I  have  had  a  portion  of  mine  army  stationed  in  this  place,  or  not; 
and  if  I  have,  whether  they  have  ever  stood  upon  the   earth,  or 
not.     I  will  inform  you.     I  have  had  a  portion  of  mine  army  here 
to  guard  my  faithful  people  from  wicked   men  and   disembodied 
devils.     If  I  had  not  done  so,  my  people   would  have  all  been 
destroyed  long  ago.     A  portion   of  mine  army  has   been  in  this 
place  ever  since  you  first  arrived  here ;   it  came  with  you,  and  has 
since  remained.     If  I   had  not  guarded  you,  Satan  would  have 
destroyed  you  before  this  time. 

2.  The  warriors  of  heaven  have  not,  as  yet,  planted  their  feet 
upon  the   earth.     They  have   a   fulness   of  knowledge,  and  have 
power  over  all  elements,  even  power  to  cut  their  way  through  space 
almost  as  quick  as  thought.     They  have  power  to  move,  even  from 
one  end  of  the  earth  to  the  other,  in  a  few  seconds.      There   is 
nothing  on  the  earth  that  can  travel  as  swiftly  as  they  can.     Those 
of  them  who  have  guaided  this  place  have  been  stationed  in  the 


CONCERNING  THE  ARMY  OF  HEAVEN.  481 

air  at  a  short  distance  from  the  earth ;  for  it  is  unlawful  for  them 
to  stand  upon  the  earth  until  I  come  unto  you  and  give  unto  you 
your  robe  and  rod.  I  shall  be  the  first  person  of  all  the  heavenly 
host  to  descend  upon  the  earth ;  but  I  shall  not  do  so  when  I  give 
unto  you  your  robe.  My  horse  will  not,  even  then,  plant  his  feet 
upon  the  earth ;  but  I  shall  bend  down  and  give  unto  you  your 
robe.  My  horse's  feet  will  be  near  the  ground,  but  they  will  not 
touch  it.  Both  I  and  my  holy  angels  have  the  power  to  stand 
anywhere  in  space,  because  we  have  a  fulness  of  knowledge  and 
power  over  all  things.  My  horse  will  not  set  his  feet  upon  the 
ground  until  you  have  a  place  beautified  to  stand  upon ;  but  when 
this  is  done  my  horse  shall  stand  upon  the  ground  by  your  side, 
and  then  I  will  give  unto  you  your  rod.  My  horse  will  be  the 
first  celestial  horse  to  set  his  feet  upon  the  earth.  A  portion  of 
mine  army  will  be  with  me ;  but  they  will  have  to  wait  until  you 
have  given  your  command  before  their  horses  can  descend  to  the 
earth. 

3.  When  I  come  to  you,  all  the  heavenly  hosts  will  be  stationed 
in  their  various  places,  ready  to  descend  upon  the   earth   at   once, 
which  they  will  do  after  I  shall  have  given  my   command     The^ 
earth   will  then  reel  and  shake,  and  lower  in   space,   as  I  have 
before  said  unto  you.     Oh,  how  the  wicked  men  of  the  earth  will 
be  heart  smitten ! 

4.  If  only  a  small  portion  of  my  army  will  be  needed  to  slay 
mine  enemies  in  this  Territory,  how  shall  the  other"  portions  of  my 
army,  which  will  be  stationed  throughout  the  nations  of  the  earth, 
know  when  to  descend  upon  the  earth,  seeing  that  they  will  be   so 
far  away  from  you?  for  it  would  seem  to  you  impossible  for  them 
to  hear  your   command.     I   will  inform  you   what   course  I  am 
about  to  take  in  order  to  make  them   know  when  you  will  give 
your  command,  so  that  they  may  descend  upon  the  earth   at  once. 
Before   I  come  unto  you,    I  shall  have    portions   of  mine  army 
placed  at  the  head  of  every  government  upon  the   earth,  and   I 
shall  visit  them  all  before  I  come  unto  you,  and  tell  the  general 
of  each  of  them  that  I  am  coming  unto  you.     I  shall   place  them 
all  in  readiness  before  I  come  unto  you.     When  I  go  to  the  first 
of  them,  I  shall  tell  him  that  he  is  the  first  that  I  have  visited,  and 
that  I  have  to  visit  the  others  and  inform  them  also  that   I   am 


482  CONCERNING  THE  ARMY  OF  HEAVEN. 

coming  unto  you,  and  I  shall  tell  him  how  long  I  shall  be  in  visit- 
ing* them.  They  will  all  know  perfectly,  even  to  one  minute, 
when  I  shall  visit  you ;  and  I  shall  have  ambassadors  by  my  side, 
and  as  soon  as  I  am  about  to  give  my  command,  they  will  fly 
Jike  lightning  to  every  part  of  the  earth  where  portions  of  mine 
army  will  be  stationed,  and  inform  them  that  I  was  giving  the 
command  when  they  left  me.  They  will  all  then  descend  upon 
the  earth  at  once  with  all  their  equipage  of  war.  We  have  per- 
fect order  in  our  army.  We  have  no  such  confusion  as  there  is 
among  the  armies  of  the  earth  :  we  make  true  calculations ;  but 
they  do  not  understand  perfect  order.  Therefore,  my  son,  con- 
tinue to  hold  yourself  in  readiness,  and  I  will  come  unto  you 
speedily,  for  things  are  now  nearly  at  a  head  between  mine 
enemies  and  my  people ;  they  cannot  run  much  longer.  I  will 
soon  satisfy  you.  I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and 
Amen. 


REVELATION  PROMISING  THAT  THE  ENEMIES  WILL 

NOT  BE  PERMITTED  TO  COME  UP  AGAINST 

THE  SAINTS  UNTIL  THE  RIGHT  TIME. 


No.  251.  WEBER,  UTAH,  March  28th,  1862. 

i.  LISTEN  unto  my  words,  which  are  quick  and  powerful, 
sharper  than  a  two-edged  sword.  I  see  that  your  feelings  are 
somewhat  unsettled  at  the  thought  of  that  which  lies  before  you. 
You  see  trouble  threatening  you  from  mine  enemies  abroad,  and 
you  want  to  know  my  mind  concerning  them.  You  say  that  you 
thought  that  I  did  not  intend  to  wait  any  longer  for  them,  seeing 
that  they  disappointed  my  people  when  they  threatened  to  come 
against  them ;  that  I  was  going  to  take  the  will  for  the  deed,  and 
trouble  no  more  about  them;  that  they  had  the  disposition  to 
come  up  to  this  place  to  put  all  my  people  to  death,  and  that  they 
would  have  dene  so  had  they  not  been  overruled;  that  you  can- 
not see  what  more  I  can  require  of  them  to  warrant  their  utter 


CONCERNING    THE    ENEMIES.  483 

destruction ;  that  I  know  that  they  are  filled  with  the  desire  to 
shed  the  blood  of  my  people ;  that  you  are  satisfied  that  I  have 
held  them  powerless,  and  that  I  have  nothing  to  thank  them  for ; 
therefore,  you  cannot  see  how  I  can  be  waiting  for  them  to  do 
anything  more  than  what  they  have  done ;  and  you  wish  to  know 
whether  I  am  waiting  for  them  to  come  up  against  my  people, 
or  not. 

2.  I  am  not  waiting  for  them;  but  I  am  waiting  more  particu- 
larly  for   my  people.     I  want  the  hypocrites  cast  out  from  among 
them  as  soon  as  possible,  even  all  that  can   be  cast   out   before  I 
come.     But  while  I  am  doing  this,  mine  enemies  are  being  worked 
up.     The  severe  way  in  which  I  shall  deal  with  those  who  aposta- 
tize from  my  Church  will  work  them  up,  and  they  would  come  up 
-against  my  people  in  great  numbers  should  I   permit  them  to  do 
so ;  but  I  shall  take  them  in  time.     If  they  had  come  up  against 
my  people,  when  they  attempted  to  do  so,  I   would  have   suffered 
them  to  come  into  this  Fort,  and  I  would  have  slain  them  here ; 
but  seeing  that  they  failed  to  come  at  that  time,  I  shall  not   suffer 
them  to  come  into  this  place  when  they  make  their  next  attempt. 
They  will   be  about  ready   to   come  up  again  by  the  time  that  I 
have  purged  from  among  my  people  a  few   more  hypocrites.     I 
have  withdrawn  my  spirit  from  the  hypocrites,   and  the  devil  is 
leading  them  away  one  by  one.     They  are  clubbing  together,  and 
making  their  arrangements  for  going  away ;  but  I  shall  catch  them 
upon  the  move  and  stop  them  from  going  far   from  this  place.     If 
they  had  intended  to  get  far  away  before  the  day  of  my  coming, 
they  should  have  apostatized  some  time  ago.     They  have  delayed 
their  apostacy  till  too  late  an  hour  for  them  to  get  far  away  from 
this  place,  even  if  they  were  to   start   immediately ;  consequently, 
they   may    reconcile  themselves  to  their  fate,  for  I  am  coming 
speedily,  and  I  will  send  them  home.     They  need  not  think  that 
they  can   get  out  of  my  way  by  running  to  this,  that,  or  the  other 
place.     They  might  as  well  stand   their  ground.     They  will  gain 
nothing  by  attempting  to  run   away,  for  I  shall  find  them,  no  mat- 
ter where  they  go. 

3.  You  may  ask  me  this  question  :     "If  mine  enemies  attempt 
to  come   up -against  this  people,  how  near  this  place  shall  I  allow 
them  to  come?"     I  shall  pay  very  little  attention   to  them  at  all; 


484  CONCERNING    THE    HYPOCRITES. 

for  I  am  not  waiting  for  them.  I  am  waiting  for  my  faithful  peo- 
ple to  purge  the  hypocrites  from  among  them  ;  and  as  soon  as  they 
shall  have  purged  out  as  many  of  them  as  they  can  by  taking  the 
course  that  they  are  now  taking  with  them,  even  by  exposing  them, 
I  will  come  and  deliver  them.  I  will  take  good  care  that  mine 
enemies  do  not  come  against  my  people  before  that  is  done.  I 
will  keep  them  away  until  the  right  time.  I  shall  work  all  things 
aright  with  them.  You  do  not  wish  me  to  per-mit  them  to  come 
within  sight  of  my  people ;  for  you  say  that  my  people  have  all 
the  burden  placed  upon  them  that  they  are  now  able  to  bear; 
and  you  think  that  if  I  were  to  bring  mine  enemies  into  their 
sight  while  they  are  burdened  as  they  are  now,  and  not  having  as 
yet  seen  me,  I  should  be  very  unreasonable ;  tha£  I  should  destroy 
all  my  faithful  people ;  that  I  should  entirely  overpower  them,  and 
consequently  they  would  deny  me,  and  fall  into  the  hands  of  the 
devil;  and  that  all  the  blame  would  be  justly  placed  upon  me. 
But  I  can  assure  you  that  I  shall  not  destroy  them  by  placing  too 
much  upon  them;  for  I  will  give  unto  them  an  abundance  of 
strength  to  meet  every  painful  circumstance  which  lies  before 
them. 

I   now  add  no  more.     I  am  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen 
and  Amen. 


REVELATION  CONCERNING  PREPARATIONS  TO  BE 
MADE  FOR  THE  COMING  OF  LORD. 


No.  252.  WEBER,  UTAH,  March  2pth,  1862. 

i.  Lo,  I  COME,  I  come,  I  come.  Therefore,  look  out  for  me. 
You  have  some  preparations  to  make,  my  son,  before  you  will,  in 
every  respect,  be  prepared  for  me.  I  told* you  some  time  ago 
that  you  must  have  a  white  horse.  He  must  be  large  and  gentle, 
and  in  good  order,  even  beautiful  to  behold,  and  one  of  the  best 
that  can  be  found.  My  horse  is  very  large  and  beautiful.  There 
are  no  horses  upon  the  earth  that  can  be  compared  with  him  for 
beauty ;  and  it  is  my  will  that  you  should  have  as  large  and  fine  a 


COMMANDED    TO    PURCHASE    A    HORSE.  485 

horse  as  can  conveniently  be  found.  My  people  must  buy  one  of 
that  description  for  you  as  soon  as  they  can.  There  must  be  no 
time  lost  in  attending  to  that  matter.  I  have  delayed  this  item  of 
business  until  the  last,  because  I  did  not  wish  to  put  my  people  to 
unnecessary  trouble  in  taking  care  of  horses  so  long  before  the  time 
that  they  would  be  needed ;  but  now  it  must  be  attended  to  im- 
mediately. Four  horses  will  be  needed,  as  I  have  before  informed 
you.  My  people  may  have  the  other  three  horses  in  their  own 
possession,  and  if  they  have,  they  must  let  my  servants  have  them; 
but  if  they  have  not,  they  must  be  obtained.  You  must  ride  a 
white  horse,  and  my  servant  John  Banks  must  ride  a  black  horse, 
and  my  servant  Richard  Cook  must  ride  a  red  horse,  and  my 
servant  John  Parson  must  ride  a  pale  horse.  These  horses  must 
be  found  immediately. 

2.  I  will  now   show  my  people  what  Jthey  have  longed  to  see. 
If  there  are  any  of  them  absent  from  this  place  who  wish  to  do  my 
will,  they  had  better  gather  into  this  place,  even  to  the  main  body 
of  my  people,  immediately.     And  if  my  people  wish  to  be  favored 
by  me,  it  is  time  for  them  to  cease  running  about   from   place  to 
place.     They  should  begin  to  settle  themselves  here,  and  prepare 
for  me.     I  do  not  wish  to  tell  them  the  exact  day  of  my   coming. 
They  may  judge  of  its  near  approach  by  the  signs  of  the  times. 
Let  them  consider  what  mine  enemies  are  doing,   and  the  plans 
which  they  have  laid  to  catch  them.     They  have  fined  a  number 
more  of  my  servants ;  and  it  is  their  intention  to  come  up  to  this 
place  with  a  sufficient  force  (as  they  suppose)  to  take  .away  those 
for  whom  they  have  writs  issued.     But  I   will  promise  them  that 
I  shall  catch  them.     I  know  what  mine   enemies  are  doing,  and  I 
shall  lead  them  a  long  way. 

3.  My  people  must  know  that  my  coming  is  very  near.     They 
must  know  that  mine  enemies  must  come  up  against  them  in   a 
very  short  time,  if  they  act  according  to  their  own  law;  and  I  can 
assure  my  people  that  they  would  do  so  if  I  do  not  prevent  them ; 
for  they  now  feel  strong   because  they  believe  that  the  revelations 
which  I  have  given  have  all  failed,  and  they  now  think  that  I  have 
nothing  to  do  with  this  work ;   that  they  are  right,  but  that  this 
work  is  of  the  devil.     Last  year  they   were  very  weak,  but  during 
the   last  three  months  they  have   gathered  strength  wonderfully. 


486  THE    OPINION    OF    THE    ENEMY. 

They  very  much  wanted  a  prophet  last  summer;  but  now  they 
can  do  without  one,  for  they  feel  strong.  They  now  think  that  by 
coming  up  here  they  can  put  an  end  to  the  works  of  the  devil 
which  are  carried  on  in  this  place  by  a  very  smart  devil ;  for  they 
think  that  my  servant  Joseph  is  the  smartest  devil  that  ever  lived, 
and  that  all  other  devils  are  not  fit  to  hold  a  candle  to  him. 
They  consider  him  the  master-piece  of  all  devils ;  and  they  think 
right  in  that  respect,  for  he  will  show  them  where  the  devils  be- 
long, and  he  will  put  them  all  in  their  right  places.  They  swear 
one  to  another,  that  he  is  the  most  bare-faced  devil  that  they  ever 
saw  or  read  of.  But  they  say  that  they  will  endure  with  his  abuse 
no  longer;  that  they  will  now  try  what  he  is  made  of.  But  I  can 
assure  them  that  they  have  hardly  begun  to  take  abuses  from  him; 
for  just  about  the  time  that  they  will  be  getting  ready  to  come  up 
against  him,  and  try  him,  as  they  say,  he  will  show  them  what 
abuse  is.  They  consider  that  his  abuse  unto  them  surpasses  any- 
thing that  they  ever  endured  before,  and  it  has  been  hard  for 
them  to  bear  it ;  and  if  they  could  have  prevented  it,  they  would 
not  have  borne  it ;  but  they  could  not  help  it — they  had  to  take  it. 

4.  Therefore,  my  son,  make  all  things  ready,  and  I  will  come 
unto  you  long  before  your  enemies  are  ready  to  come  upon  you. 
I  will  promise  you  that   you  will  never  see  them  alive ;  but  you 
may  see  some  of  their  dead  bodies.     And  as  I  have  said  unto  you 
before,  my  people  may  judge  by  the  movements  of  mine  enemies 
that  my  coming   will  take  place  in  a  very  few  days.     Therefore, 
let  them  humble  themselves  greatly  before  me,  in  order  that  they 
may   be   prepared   to  meet  that  event  in  an  acceptable  manner. 
Let  them  obtain  those  four  horses   immediately.     They  must  not 
delay  that  matter.     And  after  they  have  obtained  them,  they  must 
keep  them  up,  and  clean  and  feed  them  well  until  I  come.     They 
may  be  able  to  obtain  them  two  or  three  days  before  I  come ;  and 
they  may  not  obtain  them  one  day  before  that  time ;  but  should 
they  obtain  them  two  or  three  days  previous  to  that  event,  they 
must  take  good  care  of  them. 

5.  You  must  continue  to  purge  out  from  among  my  people  as 
many  of  the  hypocrites  as  you  can.     And  behold,  I  give  unto  you 
a  commandment :     You  must  stop  hypocrites  from  going  into  the 
houses  of -my  faithful  people.     You  must  not  suffer  them  to  mingle 


CONCERNING    THE    HYPOCRITES.  487 

with  my  faithful  people.  If  hypocrites  go  into  the  houses  of  any 
of  my  faithful  people,  the  inmates  thereof  shall  tell  them  to  go 
about  their  business,  and  also  tell  them  that  if  they  are  found 
going  into  the  houses  of  any  of  the  faithful  saints,  after  being  once 
notified  not  to  du  so,  they  will  be  slain ;  for  I  will  not  suffer  them 
to  go  into  their  houses,  breathing  out  poison,  and  seeking  to 
destroy  the  innocent.  If  they  will  not  keep  out  of  the  houses  of 
my  faithful  people,  they  will  be  slain.  If  they  wish  to  let  the  devil 
destroy  themselves,  they  may  do  so ;  but  they  shall  not  have  the 
privilege  to  give  the  devil  the  advantage  over  the  faithful  who  seek 
to  do  well,  and  struggle  to  save  their  lives.  If  the  hypocrites,  are 
determined  to  go  among  my  faithful  people  to  destroy  them,  it 
shall  be  life  for  life ;  therefore,  if  the  hypocrites  wish  to  live  a  few 
days  longer,  they  will  keep  out  of  the  houses  of  my  faithful  people. 
If  they  give  the  devil  power  over  one  of  my  faithful  people,  and 
on  that  account  I  should  be  put  to  the  necessity  of  destroying  the 
life  of  that  person,  I  promise  them  that  I  will  have  their  lives  first. 
It  shall  be  blood  for  blood  with  them. 

6.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — you  shall  appoint 
my  servants,  the  apostles,  to  look  over  this  Fort  and  Camp,  and 
they  shall  go  from  house  to  house  among  my  people,  and  they 
shall  teach  them,  and  see  that  everything  is  going  on  aright.  They 
must  look  well  after  the  hypocrites  They  must  strive  to  find  out 
the  feelings  of  all  my  people,  and  when  they  see  a  person  who  has 
a  false  spirit ;  and  who  is  about  to  apostatize,  they  must  report  that 
person  to  the  first  presidency,  and  such  shall  be  dealt  with  right- 
eously. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.  I  am  the  Bright  and  Morning 
Star;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


PREPARATIONS    FOR    THE    COMING    OF    THE    LORD. 


REVELATION    CONCERNING    THE    GATHERING    OF 

CATTLE,  AND  FURTHER  PREPARATIONS 

FOR  THE  COMING  OF  THE  LORD. 


No.  253.  WEBER,  UTAH,  April  ist,  1862. 

1.  You  say  that  it  appears  very  likely  to  you,  that  after  mine 
enemies   have    placed    fines   upon  my   people,  they  will  make  a 
general   drive   of  all  the  cattle  which  belong  to  my  people  to  one 
place,   and  dispose   of  them   in  order  to  pay  the  fines  which  they 
have   imposed   upon   my  people.     By  this  means  they  think  that 
they  will  be  enabled  to  draw  out  quite  a  number  of  my  people  to 
look   after  their  cattle ;  and  that  if  they  succeed  in  doing  so,  they 
will  take  them  prisoners.     It  is  a  trap  that  they  are  laying  to  catch 
as  many  of  my  people  as  they  possibly  can ;   therefore,  my  peo- 
ple  must   be    aware  of  them.     If  my  servant,  the  steward,  would 
send  a  number  of  men  out  upon  the  range  to  gather  up  the  cattle 
which  belong  to  my  people  and  bring  them  to  this,  place,  he  would 
act  wisely.     He  should  head  mine  enemies  in  this   matter ;  and 
should   my  people  succeed   in  gathering  together  and  securing  all 
their  cattle,   they  must  keep  them  up  for  a  day  or  two,  until  mine 
enemies  have  made  their  drive,  after  which,  my  people  may  turn 
their  cattle  out  again  in  a  fresh  place,  and  keep   an  eye   on  them 
for  a  few  days.     I  will  force  things  up  to  a  head  quickly.     But  if 
mine  enemies  head  my  people  and  drive  all  their  cattle  into  one  of 
their  settlements,  my  people  must  not  go  after  them  to  bring  them 
back,   and  thereby  be  caught  by  their  enemies.     They  must  let 
them   go.     But    my   people   will  not  be  too  late  to  gather  up  their 
cattle,  if  they  are  wide  awake.     They  must  strive   to  outwit   mine 
enemies  and  confound  them ;  if  they   would   do  as  I  command 
them,  they  would  always  outwit  mine  enemies. 

2.  I    see   that  my  people  have  neither  teams  nor  wagons  suf- 
ficient to  move  them  all  away  from  this  place  at  once ;  but  as  soon 
as  I  shall  have  cut  off  mine  enemies  out   of  the  way,  there  will  be 
plenty  of  teams  and  wagons  which  my  people  may  obtain  without 
putting  themselves  to   much  inconvenience.     I    will  place  within 
the  reach   of  my  people  an  abundance  of  everything  which  they 


CONCERNING    THE    HORSES    AND    SWORDS.  489 

may  need.  They  should  have  all  their  wagons  in  order  ready  for 
a  move.  I  have  already  spoken  unto  them  a  time  or  two  con- 
cerning this  matter;  and  if  they  have  attended  to  it,  it  is  all  right ; 
but  if  they  have  not,  they  must  do  so  immediately,  for  I  shall  be 
with  them  suddenly,  and  they  will  then  have  no  time  to  attend  to 
these  things. 

3.  I  see  that  you  have  succeeded  in  obtaining  a  white  horse ; 
and  you  wish  to  know  what  I  think  about  him,   and   whether  he 
will  suit  me,  or  not.     He  is  not  very  large,  but  he  is  the  best  that 
you  can  now  conveniently  obtain ;  he   will  answer  for  the  present. 
He    is    not    half   so    large    as    my  horse  is.     After  I  shall  have 
removed  the  obstacle  out  of  your  way,  you  shall  have  a  larger  and 
a  better  horse  than  he  is ;  for  you  will  then  have  an  abundance  of 
horses   to   make  a  selection  from.     You  shall  have  the  best  horse 
that  can  be  found ;  but,  for  the  present,  I  will  accept  of  the   one 
which  you  now  have.     You  wish  to  know  whether  a  mare  will  not 
answer  as  well  as  a  horse.     I  will  answer  you.     Those  four  horses 
of  which   I  have   spoken  must  be  horses— mares  will  not  answer. 
My  servant  John   Banks   should   have  a  larger  and  better  horse 
than  the  one  which  they  have  obtained  for  him,  for  it  is  not  at  all 
suitable ;  it  is  too  small.     Therefore,   my  people  should  strive  to 
purchase  a  larger  and  a  better  horse  for  him. 

4.  It  is  my  will  that  my  servants  should  have  four  nice  horses, 
in    good  condition ;  and  that  they  shall  have  good  saddles  and 
bridles,  and  be  well  rigged  for  the  occasion.     And  you  must  have 
your  horses  mane  divided  into  seven  parts,  and  each   part   plaited 
and  tied  at  the  ends  with  white  ribbon.     The  first  part  must  hang 
down  his  forehead,  and  the  other  six  must  hang  down  by  the  side 
of  his  neck.     You  must  have  a  glittering  sword  in  your  hand,  and 
my  servant  John  Banks  must  hold  a  pair  of  balances  in  his  hand, 
and  my  servant  Richard  Cook  must   have   a  sword  in  his  hand, 
and  must  ride  by  your  side ;  and  my  servant  John   Parson  must 
carry  my  law,  even  that  portion  of  it  which  I  have  given  unto  my 
people,  which  is  life  and  death ;  and  hell  will  both  go  before  him, 
and  follow  after  him.      Death  and  hell  shall  flee  before  you  and 
your  three  brethren ;  and   you  shall  drive  the   devil   and  all  his 
agents  off  the  earth  until  the  end  of  your  missions. 

I    now  give  unto  you  no  more.      I   am  the  Light  and  Life  of  the 
world ;  even  Jesus  Christ.     Evert  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


490  CONCERNING  CONSECRATED  PROPERTY. 

REVELATION    COMMANDING    THE    PROPHET    NOT 

TO  ALLOW  APOSTATES  TO  TAKE   AWAY 

CONSECRATED  PROPERTY. 


No.   254.  WEBER,  UTAH,  April  3rd,  1862. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  [am  he  that  shuts,  and  no  one  opens,  and  that 
opens,  and  no  one  shuts ;  and  I  am  about  to  speak  unto  you.      It 
would   be  well   if  my  people  would   obtain  those  four  horses  of 
which    I    have    spoken,   and   also  their  rigging,  as  soon   as  they 
possibly  can ;  lor  if  they  do  not  do   so,   they   will   not  be   ready 
for  me  by  the  time   that  I  have  to  come,  which  is  almost  imme- 
diately. 

2.  •  I  am  about  to  make  a  move  among  my  people.     I  will  try 
them  and  see  whether  they  will  abide  my  law   or  not.     I   do  not 
want  any  more  of  their  hypocrisy.     I  will  now  show  them  that  the 
property    which    is    held   by  them   belongs  to   me.     I  shall  now 
assume  my  rights.     I  will  not  be  trifled  with  by  these  foolish  and 
unprincipled  people  any  longer;  therefore,  they  may  now  prepare 
themselves  for  the  trial  which  is  coming  upon  them.      I   will   now 
show  them   what  the  law   of  consecration   is,   and  I  will  try  how 
many  of  them  have  consecrated  according  to  the  law ;  and  I   fear 
that  when   I   do  so,   nearly   one-half  of  them  will  not  subscribe  to 
that  law.     If  one-half  of  them  do  so  in  a  proper  and  an  acceptable 
manner,  it  will  be  as  many  as  I  ever  expected  to  do  so  at  this  try- 
ing time,  and  thereby  obtain  a  deliverance  at  my  hands ;  for  many 
of  them  have  fixed  their  hearts  upon  the  little  property  which  they 
hold  in  their  possession ;   it  lies  nearest  to  their  hearts.     Such  are 
hypocrites  before  me,  and  I  shall  not  deliver  them.     I  shall  deliver 
none  but  the  whole-hearted.     The  rest  are  idolaters. 

3.  And  now,  behold,  I  give  unto  you  a  commandment :  •  You 
shall  suffer  no  more   apostates  to  take  away  property  which  they 
have  consecrated   unto   me  both    by   oath  and  deed ;  and  if  they 
attempt  to  do  so,  you  must  appoint  men  to  stop  them  on  the  spot. 
If  they  wish  to  leave  my  people,  they  must  leave   empty-handed ; 
they  shall    not    take    away  with  them  that  which  belong  to  me. 
They  may  call  upon  the  devils  alfr  around  to  come  and  assist  them 


CONCERNING    CONSECRATED    PROPERTY.  491 

to  take  away  property ;  but  they  will  see  what  they  will  gain  by 
doing  so.  And  when  my  servant,  the  steward,  needs  any  property 
for  Church  purposes,  he  shall  receive  a  note  from  the  first  presi- 
dency, signed  by  their  hands,  and  he  shall  go  and  take  away  that 
portion  of  property  specified  in  the  note,  without  asking  the  con- 
sent of  the  parties  holding  it ;  and  when  he  has  done  so,  he  shall 
give  the  note  unto  them.  I  see  that  these  people  either  do  not 
understand  the  law  of  consecration,  or  else  they  are  corrupt  hypo- 
crites ;  but  they  are  not  so  blind  and  ignorant  as  they  are  fearful 
and  dishonest.  You  say  in  your  feelings  that  you  now  see  trouble 
before  you  ;  but  you  need  not  to  be  afraid  of  it.  You  must  launch 
right  into  it.  I  am  now  waiting  for  you  to  open  'the  way  for  me. 
As  soon  as  you  get  fast  with  these  people  by  enforcing  my  laws 
upon  them,  I  will  come  and  cut  off  everything  that  stands  in  your 
way.  I  am  waiting  for  you  to  run  things  up  to  a  head ;  therefore, 
do  so  as  fast  as  you  can,  and  when  you  are  brought  to  the  neces- 
sity of  putting  people  to  the  test,  in  order  to  enforce  my  law  upon 
them,  you  may  know  that  I  am  coming  unto  you.  Should  you  see 
this  take  place,  you  may  know  that  it  will  not  be  more  than  one 
day  before  I  come..  You  must  remove,  and  that  too  without 
sympathy,  either  male  or  female,  who  attempts  to  break  my  law. 
None  of  my  faithful  people  shall  sympathize  with  such  persons ; 
for  if  they  do,  they  shall  share  the  same  fate.  When  you  begin  to 
put  hypocrites  to  death,  you  will  stir  up  mine  enemies  abroad,  and 
they  would  soon  come  up  against  you  if  I  were  to  permit  them  to 
do  so ;  but  I  will  take  them  in  good  time.  You  wish  to  know 
what  you  are  to  do  if  the  faithful  of  my  people  (so  called)  will  not 
go  forth  at  your  command  and  put  traitors  to  death.  You  must 
try  them,  and  see  what  they  will  do ;  and  if  those  whom  you  call 
upon  first,  refuse  to  obey  your  command,  you  must  have  their 
names  put  down.  You  must  then  call  upon  others,  and  if  they 
refuse,  you  must  put  their  names  down  also,  and  try  others  until 
you  have  tried  all  my  people,  if  it  becomes  necessary ;  and  if  they 
all  refuse  to  obey  your  command,  I  will  come  and  slay  them 
instantly.  I  shall  be  by  your  side  while  you  are  engaged  in  that 
work. 

4.     And  behold,   I  say  unto  you, — it  would  be  well  if  my  peo- 
ple would  obtain  those  four  horses  immediately.     They  must  lose 


49 2  THE    LAW    OF    CONSECRATION. 

no  time,  for  if  they  do,  they  will  be  too  late,  and  it  will  be  their 
own  fault,  for  I  have  given  unto  them  an  abundance  of  time  to 
attend  to  this  matter.  I  shall  bring  things  up  to  a  head  suddenly. 
Up  to  this  time  I  have  been  moving  slowly ;  but  I  will  now  force 
all  things  between  my  people  and  mine  enemies  up  to  a  head.  I 
shall  now  touch  all  parties  to  the  quick.  The  false-hearted  may 
look  around  for  places  to  hide  themselves  from  my  presence,  and 
from  the  presence  of  my  holy  angels.  Therefore,  my  son,  do  as  I 
have  commanded  you,  and  I  will  lead  you  aright  in  all  these  mat- 
ters. You  will  understand  the  movements  of  my  spirit ;  therefore, 
act  accordingly,  and  all  will  be  well.  I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even 
so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    CONCERNING    THE    LAW    OF 
CONSECRATION. 


No.   255.  WEBER,  UTAH,  April  5th,  1862. 

i.  WHAT  CAN  I  say  unto  you  at  this  time?  for  I  see  that  you 
wish  to  hear  from  me  again.  You  wish  me  to  keep  things  on  the 
move ;  for  you  say  in  your  feelings  that  you  wish  to  see  me,  and 
see  me  make  a  change  in  this  Territory,  and  you  shall  have  your 
desire  granted  unto  you  speedily.  Things  are  upon  the  move, 
and  I  will  control  them  aright.  My  people  must  be  subject  to 
your  counsel,  and  all  will  be  right  with  them.  They  must  not 
manifest  a  disposition  to  run  into  anything  before  they  are  sent ;  if 
they  do,  they  may  bring  trouble  before  the  proper  time.  I  wish 
to  have  all  things  connected  with  the  deliverance  of  my  people 
work  up  to  a  head  together,  in  order  that  they  may  all  meet  and 
burst  in  a  proper  manner  at  once.  I  will  lead  you  aright ;  there- 
fere,  let  my  people  be  controlled  by  me,  and  abide  your  counsel 
in  all  things.  They  must  not  interrupt  men  who  come  into  their 
midst  to  deliver  writs  unto  those  whom  they  have  fined  for  neg- 
lecting to  train.  If  such  men  are  civil,  they  must  be  treated  with 
civility ;  and  if  they  bring  their  writs  into  the  houses  of  my  peo- 
ple, my  people  are  not  obliged  to  receive  them  from  their  hands. 


THE    LAW    OF    CONSECRATION.  493 

The  men  who  bring  them  can  either  leave  them  in  the  houses  of 
my  people,  or  take  them  away  again.  If  my  people  are  wise  they 
will  understand  me.  I  wish  to  run  all  things  up  to  a  head  to- 
gether. If  my  people  are  not  cautious  and  obedient  they  may. 
by  running  too  fast,  bring  trouble  upon  themselves  before  other 
things  are  brought  up  to  a  head ;  but  such  must  not  be  the  case, 
and  to  prevent  it  my  people  must  strictly  abide  your  counsel.  I 
am  at  the  head  of  #11  matters ;  and  if  my  people  will  be  obedient 
unto  me,  I  will  make  all  things  work  aright. 

2.  I  shall  now  put  the  law  of  consecration  in  full  force;   and 
those  who  rebel  against  it,  I  shall  put  to   death.     The  putting  of 
my  law  into  force  will  stir  up  mine  enemies,  and  it  will  work  them 
up  to  ahead,  if  nothing  else  will.     I  only  wish  to  work  up  mine 
enemies  in  proportion  as  my  people  progress  in  my  work,  which 
they  can  only  do  gradually,  for  I   cannot  bring  them  all  at  once  to 
the  point  at  which  I  can  deliver  them.     I  have  to  train  them  until 
I  have  brought  them  to  a  point  at  which  I  can  enforce  a  law  upon 
them,  so  that  I  can  deliver  them.     I  have  held  mine  enemies  off 
on  account  of  my  people  not   being   ready  for  a   deliverance ;   for 
they  could  not  learn  the  nature   of  my  laws,  nor  understand  my 
work  in  general,  any  quicker  than  they  have  done.     But  I   shall 
now  put  the  law  in  full  force  among  my  people,  and  I  shall   also 
let  mine  enemies  loose;  and  as  soon  as   I  have  done  so,  I   shall 
slay  them.     Both  my  people  and  mine  enemies  will  come  to   a 
head  at  once. 

3.  When  my  servant,    the    steward,    shall  be  called  to   take 
property  from  my  people  for  Church  purposes,  he  shall  go  into 
the  houses  of  tjje  persons   unto  whom   he  shall  be  sent,  and  he 
shall  inquire  into  their  circumstances,  and  by  that   means   he  will 
come  to  a  knowledge  of  their  true  situation ;    and  -if  they   have 
nothing  to  spare,  he  shall  not  take  anything  from  them.     He  shall 
not  reduce  my  people  to-extreme  poverty;  but  he  shall  leave  them 
sufficient  to  work  upon.     He  shall  not  take  away  from  a  family 
the  last  cow,  or  the  last  yoke  of  cattle,  or   the  last  wagon,  or  the 
last  horse,  or  the  last  animal  of  any  kind  which  they  have ;  neither 
shall  he  take  away  their  household  furniture,  or  their  bedding,  or 
their  clothing,  unless  they  have  more  than  they   really  need  for 
their  own  use.     And  when  my  steward  shall  inquire  of  any  of  my 


494  'I'HE    LAW    OF    CONSECRATION. 

people  as  to  what  property  they  have  in  their  possession,  they  shall 
answer  him  truly ;  and  if  they  have  in  their  possession  anything 
more  than  what  the  law  allows  them,  he  shall  take  it  away  with 
him  for  Church  purposes ;  but,  as  I  have  said,  he  shall  not  reduce 
my  peopfle  to  poverty.  Those  of  my  people  who  have  not  large 
families,  who  have  both  a  horse  team  and  an  ox  team,  must  give 
up  their  oxen  to  the  steward ;  but  those  who  have  large  families, 
even  as  many  as  ten  in  number  in  a  family,  m&y  hold  in  their  pos- 
session, if  they  have  them,  two  wagons  and  two  yokes  of  cattle, 
or  one  yoke  of  cattle  and  one  span  of  horses  ;  this  is  as  near  as 
such  families  shall  be  stripped.  Therefore,  my  servant,  the  stew- 
ard shall  regulate  himself  by  this  law  while  he  administers  in  his 
office  among  my  people. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.     I  am  the  Light  and  Life  of  the 
world  ;    even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION  SHOWING  THE  ORDER  OF  THE  KING- 
DOM OF  GOD  UPON  THE  EARTH. 


No.  256.  WEBER,  UTAH,  April  8th,  1862. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Light  and  Life  of  the  world,  even  Jesus 
Christ,  and  I  am  come  to  speak  unto  you  concerning  the  high 
priesthood,  and  also  the  priesthood  of  Aaron.  Each  priesthood 
has  its  claims.  In  heaven  there  is  only  one  priesthood,  which  is 
the  high  priesthood ;  but  on  the  earth  there  are»two  priesthoods, 
which  are  the  high  priesthood  and  the  lesser  priesthood.  The 
missions  of  the  angels  of  heaven  are  of  one  nature — the  angels  all 
act  under  one  order  of  priesthood.  But  inasmuch  as  there  are  two 
distinct  orders  of  priesthood  upon  the  ea'rth,  and  each  priesthood 
holds  separate  claims,  the  earthly  mission  which  is  administered 
under  the  order  of  the  Lord  is  of  a  two-fold  nature ;  therefore,  it 
differs  in  some  respects  from  the  order  of  heaven.  In  heaven 
there  are  twelve  first  generals  over  the  whole  host  of4  heaven,  and 
there  are  twelve  other  generals  who  are  next  in  authority  to  the 
first  twelve ;  there  is,  also,  a  third  twelve,  who  are  subject  to  the 


THE    ORDER    OF    THE    KINGDOM.  495 

second  twelve,  and  thus  this  order  continues  down  to  the  last 
order  of  generals.  All  the  generals  of  the  whole  army  of  heaven 
are  in  separate  divisions,  having  twelve  in  each  division,  and  the 
inferior  division  is  subject  to  the  superior  division  by  birthright. 
This  is  the  order  of  the  generals  over  the  whole  army  of  heaven. 
And  in  due  time  there  will  be  four  and  twenty  leading  generals 
upon  the  earth,  as  there  are  in  heaven,  and  also  other  divisions  of 
generals  below  them ;  so  that  when  my  kingdom  shall  be  set  up 
on  the  earth,  the  armies  of  the  earth  will  pattern  after  the  armies 
of  heaven.  You  are  the  first  general  over  the  armies  of  the  earth, 
even  as  I  am  the  first  general  over  the  armies  of  heaven ;  and  as  I 
am  a  man  of  war,  you  must  be  a  man  of  war  also.  And  in  due 
time  you  must  have  eleven  more  generals  who  must  be  high  priests 
by  birthright,  even  those  of  the  highest  birthright  that  can  be  found 
upon  the  earth ;  and  you  and  they  will  form  the  division  of  the 
firs\  twelve  generals  on  the  earth.  The  second  twelve  generals 
must  be  selected  out  of  the  priesthood  of  Aaron,  and  Aaron  him- 
self must  be  the  first  of  that  number.  The  remaining  eleven  must 
be  the  firstborn  sons  of  Adam,  and  they  with  Aaron  will  form  the 
second  division  of  generals,  each  one  standing  in  his  own  place, 
according  to  his  birthright.  All  the  re$t  of  the  generals  who  will 
be  chosen,  will  be  chosen  from  the  Aaronic  priesthood.  There  will 
only  be  twelve  generals  chosen  out  of  the  high  priesthood,  and 
they  will  be  the  first  twelve  generals — even  the  rulers  over  all 
other  generals,  and  all  the  armies  of  the  earth  must  be  subject  to 
them. 

2.  The  kingdom  which  I  shall  establish  upon  the  earth,  will  be 
a  temporal  kingdom,  even  a  kingdom  of  kings  and  priests  unto 
me ;  and  they  will  be  the  temporal  ministers  of  the  law  which  I 
shall  establish  upon  the  earth ;  for  it  belongs  to  them.  Thus  out 
of  the  priesthood  of  Aaron,  kings  and  rulers,  generals  and  captains, 
and  also  priests,  will  be  called  to  administer  the  law.  'The  high 
priests  will  act  in  their  own  places,  and  will  be  the  ministers  of  the 
everlasting  gospel,  to  carry  it  in  power  to  the  nations  of  the  earth. 
Through  the  high  priests  the  gospel  will  go  to  Aaron's  children, 
which  gospel  is  from  above,  and  is  the  power  of  God.  The  high 
priests  who  are  from  above  bring  the  gospel  with  them,  and 
through  the  power  of  the  gospel,  which  will  be  administered  by  the 


496  THE    ORDER    OF    THE    KINGDOM. 

high  priests,  the  faithful  seed  of  Abraham  will  gain  the  upper  hand 
of  the  seed  of  Cain,  and  have  a  temporal  kingdom  established  for 
them,  which  is  their  right.  The  priests  of  Aaron  entirely  depend 
upon  the  high  priests  for  the  power  over  their  enemies,  and  to  be 
made  a  kingdom  of  kings  and  priests ;  therefore,  the  powers  which 
are  from  above  are  invested  in  the  high  priests,  and  the  powers  of 
the  earth  belong  to  Aaron's  children  who  will  be  the  ministers  of 
a  temporal  law  when  it  shall  be  established  upon  the  earth  for 
them  by  the  high  priests.  If  the  second  twelve  generals  of  the 
twenty-four  will  be  chosen  out  of  the  Aaronic  priesthood,  what  will 
be  the  position  of  the  second  twelve  who  are  apostles  and  high 
priests  by  birthright?  What  will  be  their  calling?  They  will  be 
ministers  of  the  gospel,  tq  carry  it  to  all  nations — even  twelve 
traveling  apostles ;  and  all  other  high  priests  in  the  midst  of  the 
nations  where  they  may  be  sent  will  be  subject  unto  them.  But 
they  will  not  be  called  to  be  twelve  generals  like  unto  the  first 
twelve — their's  will  be  a  different  mission  altogether.  The  first 
twelve  generals  on  earth  will  be  called  to  represent  the  high  priest- 
hood on  earth ;  and  inasmuch  as  the  high  priesthood  is  of  a  higher 
order  than  the  Aaronic  priesthood,  it  must,  according  to  the  law 
of  heaven,  be  acknowledged  the  first.  Therefore,  if  twelve  chief 
generals  had  not  first  been  called  out  of  the  high  priesthood,  in 
order  to  acknowledge  that  priesthood,  twelve  generals  could  never 
have  been  chosen  out  of  the  Aaronic  priesthood,  neither  could  a 
temporal  kingdom  be  established  on  the  earth;  for  the  greater 
priesthood  must  be  acknowledged  before  the  lesser  can  be— the 
higher  priesthood  always  opens  the  way  for  the  lesser  priesthood. 

3.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — in  due  time  you 
must  wear  a  dress  suitable  to  your  position  as  the  first  general  of 
the  armies  of  the  earth,  even  a  royal  dress ;  and  you  shall  have  a 
hat  most  beautiful  to  look  upon,  having  seven  crowns  of  gold  upon 
the  top  of  it,  with  many  diamonds  set  therein.  You  cannot  dress 
yourself  in  a  royal  dress  now ;  but  I  will  tell  you,  when  I  come, 
how  you  shall  dress  yourself  to  go  before  my  people.  I  know 
what  you  need,  and  I  will  give  it  unto  you.  The  eleven  generals 
who  are  next  unto  you  by  birthright  shall  also  have  dresses  pro- 
vided for  them  suitable  to  the  positions  which  they  may  be  called 
to  hold  as  the  chief  generals  of  the  armies  of  the  earth.  The  first 


CONCERNING    THE    SPIRIT    OF    SYMPATHY.  497 

seven  shall  wear  crowns  according  to  their  various  positions ;  and 
I  will  deliver  the  kingdoms  of  the  earth  into  their  hands  in  quick 
succession.     They   shall  have  an  abundance  of  territory  to  spread 
themselves  upon,   and  great  multitudes  of  people  shall  be  subject, 
unto  them. 

4.  I  shall  lay  low  the  inhabitants  of  this  earth  by  millions.  I 
shall  lav  low  everything  that  opposes  me.  Therefore,  as  I  have 
often  said  unto  you  before,  so  I  say  unto  you  again, — hold  your- 
self in  readiness  for  a  visit  from  me ;  for  I  am  drawing  nearer  unto 
you  every  day.  You  will  do  no  more  than  turn  yourself  round 
before  you  see  me  face  to  face,  and  then  you  will  be  abundantly 
satisfied.  Therefore,  hold  yourself  in  readiness,  for  lo,  I  come 
unto  you  quickly.  I  am  the  Bright  and  Morning  Star ;  even  Jesus 
Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION  WARNING  THE  SAINTS  AGAINST  THE 
SPIRIT  OF  SYMPATHY  FOR  TRANSGRESSORS. 


No.  257.  WEBER,  UTAH,  April  loth,  1862. 

i.  You  WISH  to  know  why  I  am  so  backward  in  speaking 
unto  you.  You  seem  to  think  that  there  must  be  some  cause  for 
my  backwardness ;  for  you  say  in  your  feelings  thafc  you  have 
never  seen  me  so  backward  in  speaking  unto  you  as  I  seem  to  be 
at  the  present  time,  and  you  would  like  to  know  the  reason  of  it. 
I  will  answer  you.  I  take  little  or  no  pleasure  in  speaking  unto 
a  number  of  these  people  who  have  yielded  obedience  unto  the 
fulness  of  my  gospel,  for  they  are  guilty  of  the  sin  of  ingratitude. 
They  neither  lay  my  words  nor  the  principles  of  my  gospel  to 
heart,  and  I  cannot  save  the  lives  of  such.  But  they  will  do 
almost  anything  else.  They  will  leave  their  homes  and  come 
here  and  consecrate  their  property  and  give  it  up  when  I  call  for 
it.  They  will  swear  the  oath  which  I  have  placed  before  my  peo- 
ple, and  they  will  go  where  they  are  sent,  no  matter  where  it  may 
be.  They  will  do  all  this ;  but  they  will  not  lay  the  principles  of 
my  gospel  to  heart  and  seek  to  learn  and  understand  them,  so 


498  THE  CARELESS  AND  INDOLENT. 

that  they  may  be  prepared  to  preach  them  to  those  who  now  sit  in 
darkness.  They  are  spending  their  most  precious  time  to  little  or 
no  purpose ;  for  they  think  about  themselves,  and  no  one  else. 
If  they  can  save  themselves,  it  is  about  all  that  they  think  of.  A 
person  who  can  do  no  more  than  save  his  own  life  in  my  king- 
dom, is  not  "worth  much ;  he  is  little  better  than  nothing,  even 
next  to  nothing,  and  he  might  as  well  be  out  of  existence ;  for  if 
he  lives,  he  lives  to  little  purpose.  There  are  those  of  this  class 
among  my  people.  Their  minds  are  like  the  fool's  eye — upon 
almost  everything  else  but  that  which  they  ought  to  be  upon.  I 
gathered  my  people  to  this  place  in  order  that  I  might  teach  them 
the  principles  of  the  fulness  of  my  gospel,  so  that  they  might  be 
fully  prepared  to  preach  them  to  those  who  are  now  sitting  in 
darkness ;  and  if  they  neglect  to  learn  those  principles,  they  might 
as  well  have  remained  away  from  this  place ;  for  I  shall  not  ac- 
complish, through  them,  the  purpose  for  which  I  gathered  them 
here,  even  to  prepare  them  to  carry  my  gospel  to  those  who  now 
sit  in  darkness  ;  for  if  they  do  not  understand  it  themselves,  they 
will  not  be  able  to  preach  it  unto  others.  Those  who  possess  my 
spirit  to  any  great  extent  will  strive  to  learn  the  principles  of  my 
gospel,  in  order  that  they  may  be  made  a  blessing  unto  their  fel- 
low creatures  who  are  now  sitting  in  darkness. 

2.  My  people  stand  in  their   own  light.     They   labor   against 
their  own  interest.     They  block   up   my  way  so  that   I   am  com- 
pelled   to  «work  with    them   so    slowly    that   it    takes    me  an  un- 
reasonable length  of  time  to  bring  them  up  to  that  point  at  which 
I  can  deliver  them.     If  I  could  have  worked  with  them  faster,  I 
should  have  delivered  them  long  ago ;   but  they   are   so  slow  that 
they  are  wearing  themselves  out,  and  even  destroying  themselves; 
and  for  that  which  is  the  result  of  their  neglect  of  duty,  they  con- 
tinually blame  me ;    but  I  cannot  bring  things  up  to  a  head   only 
in  proportion  as  I  can  prepare  my  people;    and   if  they   are  slow 
to  hearken  unto  and  obey   my  words,  I   am   compelled   to  bring 
things  up  to  a  head  slowly.      I  cannot  work  with  my  people   faster 
than  what  they  will  permit  me. 

3.  I  now  wish  to  bring  them  to  another  point,  even  to  the  last 
point  to  which  they  can  be  brought  before  their  deliverance ;    but 
many  of  them  are  unprepared  for   it — it   will  pinch  them  tightly. 


CONCERNING    THE    SPIRIT    OF    SYMPATHY.  499 

They  are  so  full  of  sympathy  for  the  devil  and  his  servants  that 
they  do  not  wish  to  see  them  hurt.  They  will  cry  over  them,  and 
plead  with  me  for  them,  that  I  may  not  hurt  them  ;  and  if  they 
see -that  I  do  not  hear  and  answer  their  prayers,  and  let  the  devil 
go  on  destroying  everything  as  he  has  done,  they  mourn  greatly. 
They  say:  "O  Father,  have  mercy  on  him,  and  do  not  hurt 
him,  for  we  cannot  bear  to  see  him  hurt.  We  know  that  we  are 
in  his  hands,  and  that  he  has  punished  us  all  our  days,  but  O 
Father,  do  not  hurt  him,  for  we  cannot  bear  to  see  him  hurt, 
although  we  know  that  he  has  never  taken  pity  on  us,  but  has 
afflicted  us  all  our  days ;  but  notwithstanding  all  this,  we  cannot 
endure  to  see  him  hurt.  Father,  have  mercy  on  him,  and  do  not 
hurt  either  him  or  any  of  those  who  uphold  him,  for  we  cannot 
bear  to  see  it.  O  Father,  be  merciful  to  him,  and  do  not  hurt 
him.  Is  there  no  other  way,  Father,  to  deal  with  him  without 
hurting  him  ?  If  there  is,  won't  you  be  pleased  to  deal  with  him 
in  some  other  way?  O  how  you  would  relieve  our  feelings,  for 
we  cannot  bear  to  see  him  hurt ;  therefore,  O  Father,  do  have 
mercy  on  him,  and  do  not  hurt  him,  for  we  cannot  endnre  it. 
And  now,  remember,  if  you  do  hurt  him,  we  will  forsake  you,  and 
we  will  go  and  assist  him ;  for,  if  we  can  help  it,  we  will  not  have 
him  hurt;  we  are  his  friends." 

4.  O  ye  hypocrites  !  Ye  enemies  to  all  truth  and  justice !  Ye 
friends  of  corruption,  and  enemies  to  all  righteousness  !  How 
can  you  escape  the  justice  of  the  law  of  God?  Ye  are  as  whited 
walls  and  painted  sepulchers,  even  full  of  rottenness !  Some  of 
you  may  have  a  fine  outside,  but  you  are  rotten  within  !  You 
cannot  endure  to  see  justice  executed ;  but,  in  your  hearts,  you 
wish  to  prevent  it.  Ye  enemies  of  all  truth  and  righteousness ! 
How  can  you  expect  to 'meet  with  a  deliverance  at  my  hands?  I 
might  as  well  deliver  the  devil  himself  as  to  deliver  you  ;  for  you 
are  one  with  him,  and  you  must  share  his  fate.  It  is  high  time 
for  these  people  to  begin  to  examine  their  own  hearts,  and  see 
whether  they  are  filled  with  sympathy  towards  those  who  break 
my  laws,  or  not ;  for  if  they  are,  they  are  not  my  friends ;  they 
are  my  bitterest  enemies.  They  prove  by  their  actions  that  they 
are  as  corrupt-hearted  as  Lucifer  is,  and  they  are  his  best  friends. 
Let  my  faithful  people  be  aware  of  that  spirit,  for  it  is  the  spirit  of 


500  THE    PEOPLE    WILL    BE    TRIED. 

Lucifer,  the  devil ;  and  many  of  these  people,  if  they  do  not 
guard  against  it  with  all  their  might,  will  be  overcome  by  it,  and 
be  destroyed.  It  is  the  most  powerful  hold  that  Satan  has  on 
these  people,  and  if  they  are  not  very  careful,  he  will,  at  one  time, 
destroy  more  of  them  by  it  than  he  has  destroyed  since  my  peo- 
ple came  to  this  place. 

5.  My  people  are  now  about  to  be  tried  to  see  whether  they 
are  true  to  my  laws,  or  whether  they  wish  to  see  them  trampled 
upon  and  perverted  by  transgressors.  When  I  try  them  in  this 
way,  I  shall  know  who  is  true  to  me,  and  who  is  not.  Those  who 
are  true  to  me  will  uphold  my  law  when  it  is  executed  upon  the 
transgressors ;  they  will  be  my  friends,  and  will  always  be  ready 
to  execute  the  law  upon  transgressors.  The  next  move  that  I  will 
make  among  my  people  will  be  to  try  them,  and  they  will  then 
show  what  they  are;  therefore,  let  them  all  prepare  themselves 
for  it,  for  it  is  right  upon  them,  and  none  will  go  through  it  but 
those  whose  hearts  are  right  before  me. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.  I  am  the  Son  of  the  Eternal 
Father ;  even  Jesus  Christ  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION  CONCERNING  THE  ACCEPTANCE  OF 
THE  HORSES  AND  SWORDS. 


No.  258.  WEBER,  UTAH,  April  i2th,  1862. 

i.  You  wish  to  hear  from  me  again.  You  will  not  let  me  rest 
unless  I  continue  to  speak  unto  you.  You  are  determined  that  I 
shall  speak  unto  you  at  least  as  often  as  every  other  day ;  and  you 
wish  to  hear  irom  me  even  oftener  than  that.  It  will  be  much 
easier  for  me  when  I  can  come  unto  you  and  speak  unto  you 
mouth  to  mouth.  I  have  had  to  move  backward  and  forward 
through  space,  even  from  heaven  to  the  earth,  and  from  the  earth 
up  to  heaven,  for  years,  even  ever  since  I  commenced  to  speak 
unto  you.  Every  time  that  you  have  received  a  revelation  from 
my  Father,  either  I,  or  one  of  the  members  of  the  first  council  in 
heaven,  have  had  to  bring  it  unto  you,  and  stand  by  your  side  to 


CONCERNING    REVELATIONS.  501 

dictate  you  until  you  have  written  it ;  and  as  it  takes  you  quite  a 
length  of  time  to  write  a  revelation,  it  causes  it  to  be  very  tedious 
for  those  who  bring  the  revelations  unto  you.  It  is  very  painful 
for  a  heavenly  messenger  to  remain  still  long  in  one  place ;  for 
the  nature  of  a  holy  angel  is  to  be  quick  and  lively,  and  to  move 
about  from  one  place  to  another.  Therefore,  when  I  come  to 
speak  unto  you  mouth  to  mouth,  I  shall  be  relieved  of  a  great  bur- 
den. I  shall  not  have  to  remain  still  in  one  place  so  long  at  a 
time.  I  have  brought  unto  you  almost  all  the  revelations  which 
you  have  received ;  consequently,  my  burden  hitherto  has  been 
very  heavy.  But  I  am  now  about  to  be  relieved  of  that  burden ; 
for  I  am  now  coming  to  talk  with  you. 

2.  You  must  do  as  I  command  you,  and  thereby  open  the  way 
for  me.     I  shall  look  to  you  to  commence  the  work,  even  to  give 
me  a  start ;  and  when  you  shall  have  done  this,    I   will   sweep  off 
your  enemies.     I  will  open  the  way  for  you  to  your  satisfaction. 
You  will  understand  me.     I  shall  be  with  you  in  one  day  after  you 
shall  have  commenced  the  work,  and  even   sooner  than  that,  if  it 
becomes  necessary.     I  can  stir  mine  enemies  when  I  am  ready, 
and  I  can  also  stir  the  hypocrites  who  are  in  the  midst  of  my  peo- 
ple, even   such  as  have  not  been  penetrated  before  to  any  great 
extent.     I  can  find  the  way  to  every  heart  to  see  whether  they  are 
sound  or  not.     Therefore,  my  son,  do  as  I   shall  command  you, 
and  I  will  make  all  things  work  well. 

3.  You  may  continue  to  hold  yourself  in  readiness,  so  that  you 
may  not  be  taken  unawares.     You  know,  to  a  certain  extent,  what 
is  needed  in  order  for  you  to  be  fully  prepared  to  meet  me ;  for  I 
shall  come  unto  you  in  an  instant.     I  have   told  you  how  I  shall 
first  come  unto  you,   and  you  must  look  for  me  to  approach  you 
in  the   manner  that  I  have  described,  so  that  you  will  not  be  dis- 
appointed. 

4.  You   wish  to   know  whether   I   will  accept  of  those  horses 
which  you  have  obtained  or  not.     I  have  seen  them,  and  I  don't 
see  that  you  could,  at  this  time,  do  any  better  than  you  have  done. 
I  have  spoken  unto  you  before  concerning  your  horse,  and  I  told 
you   I  would  accept  of  him  until  you  could  obtain  a  better  one ; 
and  I  will  accept  of  the  others  on  the  same  condition.     They  will 
answer  until  better  horses  can  be  obtained  to  replace  them.    They 


5  02  CONCERNING    RICHARD    COOK. 

are  not  fine  horses  at  all,  and  they  would  not  be  accepted  by  me 
were  it  not  for  the  poverty  of  my  people ;  for  I  know  their  situa- 
tion, and  I  have  to  deal  with  them  accordingly.  Therefore,  I  shall 
have  to  accept  of  those  horses  to  commence  with ;  but  I  will  soon 
find  better  horses  than  those.  My  people,  as  yet,  have  had  to  be 
content  with  small  things ;  but  I  will  turn  the  common  current 
of  things.  I  will  place  the  riches  and  the  valuable  things  of  the 
earth  in  the  hands  of  mine  own  covenant  people.  I  will  wrench 
them  out  of  the  hands  of  the  fallen  spirits  who  now  possess  them, 
and  I  will  give  them  unto  the  rightful  owners  thereof. 

5.  And  behold,   I   say  unto  you,  my  son, — you  wish  to  know 
whether  I  will  accept  of  the  two  swords  which  you  have  obtained, 
or  not.     They  are  not  at  all  suitable  for  the  circumstance ;  but   if 
better  ones  cannot  be  obtained  immediately,  they  will  have  to  do 
until  I  come,  and  then  I  will  talk  about  a  suitable  sword  for  you. 
Set  you  mind  at  rest,  and  I  will  attend  to  that  matter  for   you.     I 
see  what  you  need,  and  I  will  assist  you.     Do  what  you  can,  and 
what  you  cannot  do,  I  will  do  for  you ;  for   I  am  perfectly  able  to 
do  all  that  you  require  of  me. 

6.  And  as   concerning    my    servant,    Richard   Cook,    let  him 
guard  against  sympathy,  for  he  is  very  weak  upon  that  point,  and 
if  he  is  not  very  careful  when  he  is  tried  in  that  matter,  Satan  will 
overcome  him  and   destroy  him.     Let  him  take  timely  warning, 
and  if  he  will  do  so,  he  may  save  his  life ;  but  if  he  will  not  do  so, 
Satan   will   surely  destroy   his  mortal  life.     Therefore,  let  him  set 
himself  against  that  weakness,  that  it  may  be  well  with  him.     The 
sword  which  he  now   has   will  answer  for  the  present ;  but  if  he 
overcomes  Satan,  a  suitable  sword  will  be  provided  for  him  at  the 
proper  time.     Let  him  do  his  duty,  and  all  will  be  well  with  him. 
I   am   the   Light  and  Life  of  the  world,  even  Jesus  Christ.     Even 
so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


CONCERNING    JOSEPH    ASTLE   AND    WILLIAM    JONES.  503 

REVELATION     CONCERNING     JOSEPH    ASTLE    AND 
WILLIAM     JONES. 


No.  259.  WEBER,  UTAH,  April  T4th,  1862. 

1.  BEHOLD,    I  am  he  that  shuts,  and  no  one  opens,  and  that 
opens,  and  no  one  shuts ;  even  Jesus  Christ.     And  I  am  about  to 
speak  unto  you  concerning  my  servants,'  Joseph  Astle  and  William 
Jones.     My  people  have  desired  to  know  the  reason  of  their  being 
taken  from  the  earth  at  such  a  time  as  this,  even  when  their  assist- 
ance was  so   much  needed  among   my  people.     I   will  make  it 
known  unto  them. 

2.  There  is  an  order  connected  with  the  fulness  of  my  gospel, 
which  has  to  be  observed  both  by  me  and  my  Father,  and  we  can- 
not pass  over  it.     That  order  is  as  follows :     This  mortal  earth  on 
which  you  stand  is  next  in  point  of  progression  to  our  earth,  which 
is  celestial ;  and  as  the  holy  priesthood  runs  down  from  one  world 
to    another,    and    this,  earth  being  the  next  in   progression    and 
authority   unto  ours,    it   is  the  first  world  to  be  honored  with  the 
full  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood ;  and  the  president  over  mine  elect, 
even  over  Abraham's  seed,  must  dwell  upon   it  during  one   thou- 
sand years,   even  until  his  mission  is  completed ;  but  the  remain- 
ing six  angels  must  rule  in  the  spirit  worlds,  for  they  could  not 
have  existed  upon  this  earth  for  any   great  length  of  time.     The 
devil  would  have  destroyed  their  mortal  lives,  because  they  did  not 
hold  the  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood ;  and  consequently  not  being 
able  to  defend  themselves  against  the  devil,  they  could  not  remain 
upon  the  earth,  but   they  had   to  go  and  rule  in  the  spirit  worlds 
where  the  laws  of  the   Lord  are  administered,   even  where  Satan 
has  little  or  no  power.     There  they  can  exist  and  fill  their  separate 
places    in    the    holy    priesthood    without  being  hindered'  by    the 
devil. 

3.  Those  worlds  where  the  six  angels  now  dwell  are  governed 
by  the  laws  of  the  Lord ;  and  all  fallen  spirits  when  there  have  to 
be  subject  to  those  laws;  therefore,  fallen  spirits  do  not  like  to  be 
in  those   spirit   worlds.     They  are   almost  continually  tormenting 
my    people  upon   this  earth   where  the  government  of  the  devil 


504  CONCERNING    JOSEPH    ASTLE    AND    WILLIAM    JONES. 

exists.  But  they  do  not  trouble  that  portion  of  my  people  who 
are  in  the  spirit  worlds,  because  they  have  not  the  power  to  do  so. 
They  do  not  rule  in  those  worlds ;  they  only  rule  upon  this  earth 
for  a  certain  length  of  time,  ai>d  that  is  the  only  privilege  they 
have  by  way  of  governing.  Therefore,  they  like  to  be  upon  the 
earth  where  the  government  of  Lucifer  and  the"  Beast  exists,  and 
there  is  where  they  spend  the  most  of  their  time.  They  would 
never  leave  this  world  at  all  to  go  to  the  spirit  worlds  if  they  could 
help  it ;  but  they  cannot,  for  they  have  to  go  there  to  provide 
themselves  with  food  and  clothing. 

4.  And  now,  behold,  I  speak  unto  you  concerning  my  servants 
William  Jones  and  Joseph  Astle.     I  was  compelled  by  the  law  of 
the  holy  priesthood  to  send  messengers  from  the  earth  to  the  spirit 
worlds  to  bear  testimony  unto  the  inhabitants  thereof    that  I  have 
raised  up  a  prophet,  and  committed  unto  him  the  full  keys  of  the 
holy  priesthood,  and  that  I  have  opened    the   last   seal.     I  could 
not  send  my  holy  angels  to  testify  to  these  things,  for  it  would  be 
out  of  order  for  me  to  do  so ;  but  I   can   send   them  down   upon 
the  earth  both  to  testify  to  the  truth  of  the  everlasting  gospel,  and 
to  fight  the  battles  of  mine  own  covenant  people  who  are  upon  the 

•earth.  But  I  cannot  send  them  to  the  spirit  worlds  to  testify  unto 
the  inhabitants  thereof  of  the  fulness  of  the  gospel.  I  am  com- 
pelled to  send  high  priests  from  the  earth  to  the  spirit  worlds  to 
testify  to  the  inhabitants  thereof,  concerning  my  work  upon  the 
earth.  Mine  angels  testify  unto  mortal  beings  of  all  things  which 
belong  to  the  gospel ;  but  messengers  from  the  earth  must  testify 
unto  the  inhabitants  of  the  spirit  worlds  of  what  they  witnessed 
concerning  the  fulness  of  my  gospel  while  they  were  upon  the 
earth  previous  to  their  death.  Therefore,  I  took  my  servants 
William  Jones  and  Joseph  Astle  to  testify  unto  my  servant  Joseph 
Smith  and  to  the  five  other  angels,  that  I  have  commenced  to 
establish  my  kingdom  upon  the  earth,  in  order  that  they  might  be 
preparing  themselves  to  make  up  their  accounts  and  to  set  all 
things  in  order,  ready  to  meet  the  seventh  angel,  and  give  unto 
him  an  account  of  their  stewardship ;  for  this  they  will  have  to  do 
in  their  own  order,  commencing  with  the  first  angel,  and  so  on  up 
to  the  sixth. 

5.  Behold,   I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts,  and  I  testify  unto  all  my 


CONCERNING   JOSEPH    ASTLE    AND    WILLIAM    JONES.  505 

people  that  I  took  my  servants  Joseph  Astle  and  William  Jones 
from  the  earth  to  testify  to  my  work  and  to  represent  it  to  my  ser- 
vant Joseph  Smith  and  to  the  remaining  five  angels ;  for  they  were 
valiant  for  truth,  and  were  counted  by  me  worthy  to  be  my  repre- 
resentatives,  even  to  represent  my  work  to  the  presidents  over 
those  spirit  worlds.  They  have  been  promoted  to  great  honors, 
and  are  considered  by  the  six  angels  of  the  Churches  to  be  valiant 
for  truth,  and  they  are  very  highly  esteemed  by  them,  and  are  con- 
sidered worthy  of  the  great  honors  which  have  been  conferred 
upon  them.  They  have  spoken  to  large  multitudes  in  the  presence 
of  my  servant  Joseph  Smith  and  others  of  the  angels  of  the 
Churches.  O  how  they  delight  in  those  worlds  to  hear  that  I  have 
opened  the  last  seal,  and  commenced  to  establish  my  kingdom 
upon  the  earth  !  O  how  they  love  the  society  of  those  two  mes- 
sengers whom  I  have  sent  unto  them  to  bear  testimony  to  the 
work  which  I  have  commenced  upon  the  earth.  I  have  already 
sent  two  high  priests  unto  them,  and  I  shall  send  another  unto 
them ;  for  they  need  three  witnesses  to  bear  testimony  to  the  same 
thing  before  the  testimony  can  be  complete  according  to  the  law ; 
therefore,  I  shall  take  another  high  priest,  even  one  who  is  valiant 
for  truth,  as  the  other  two  were,  from  among  my  people,  and  send 
him  into  the  spirit  worlds,  and  he  will  be  promoted  to  great  honor. 
The  other  two  were  valiant  men ;  they  would  not  betray  their  trust, 
and  they  are  honored  wherever  they  go.  Great  multitudes  are 
often  found  crowding  around  them  to  hear  them  speak.  O  that 
all  those  who  have  embraced  the  fulness  of  my  gospel  were  as 
valiant  for  truth  as  they  are,  for  if  they  were  they  would  do  honor 
to  their  profession.  I  now  need  valiant-hearted  men — cowards  are 
of  no  use  to  me.  I  want  valiant-hearted  people  who  will  sustain 
my  law,  who  love  the  truth,  and  who  will  fight  for  it  with  all  their 
power ;  such  I  delight  in,  and  they  are  mine  forever.  I  am  the 
Stone  and  Shepherd  of  Israel,  the  Bright  and  Morning  Star ;  even 
Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


506  THE    SPIRIT    OF    SYMPATHY. 

REVELATION  CONCERNING  SYMPATHY  FOR 
TRANSGRESSORS. 


No.  260.  WEBER,  UTAH,  April  i5th,  1862. 

i.  I  SEE  that  you  are  greatly  oppressed  in  your  feelings  on 
account  of  my  people.  You  say  that  you  can  see  great  weakness 
manifested  by  some  of  them,  and  you  greatly  fear  that  one-half  of 
them  will  not  stand  the  test ;  that  they  will  begin  to  sympathize 
with  those  whom  I  shall  condemn,  and  on  whom  the  penalty  of 
death  will  have  to  be  inflicted ;  that  if  the  spirit  of  sympathy  for 
the  condemned  should  take  hold  of  one  individual,  it  would  have 
a  tendency  to  cause  many  more  to  do  the  same  thing ;  and  that 
that  spirit  would  run  from  one  person  to  another  until  one-half  of 
my  people  would  have  caught  it.  Some  of  them  very  likely  will 
catch  that  spirit,  and  if  they  do,  it  may  run  from  one  to  another 
until  it  has  destroyed  quite  a  number  of  these  people;  for  if  that 
spirit  obtains  a  fair  start,  it  will  not  stop  until  it  has  taken  hold  of 
all  those  who  are  weak-minded,  and  such  as  are  not  grounded  in 
the  truth.  If  my  people  are  not  very  careful,  many  of  them  will 
thus  be  destroyed.  If  they  wish  to  save  their  lives,  they  must 
guard  against  sympathy.  They  must  not  give  way  to  it  at  all,  but 
they  must  set  themselves  against  it  with  all  their  might,  and  feel 
determined  to  overcome  it,  and  by  doing  so,  they  will  overcome 
the  devil  and  save  their  lives  and  live  long  upon  the  earth  to  do 
much  good  to  their  fellow  creatures.  My  people  must  know  that 
my  law  must  be  put  in  force ;  that  my  kingdom  cannot  exist  upon 
the  earth  without  laws ;  that  those  who  abide  my  laws,  exist  by 
them ;  and  that  those  who  break  them,  must  perish  by  them. 
Even  the  most  ignorant  of  my  people  must  surely  know  this ;  and 
if  they  turn  against  me,  and  sympathize  with  those  who  break  my 
Jaws,  they  do  it  wilfully,  and  are  well  worthy  of  death.  They  sin 
against  both  light  and  knowledge,  with  their  eyes  wide  open; 
therefore,  they  are  wilful  sinners  before  me.  If  my  people  know 
anything  at  all  about  me,  they  know  that  my  law  cannot  be  altered 
to  suit  people's  strange  whims  and  sympathies.  The  minds  of 
some  of  them  are  like  the  fool's  eye — continually  moving  from  one 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    THE    PEOPLE.  507 

foolish  object  to  another;  and  if  it  were  possible  for  me  to  change 
my  law  to  suit  them  to-day,  it  would  be  wrong  for  them  to-morrow. 
I  might  continue  to  change  it  day  by  day,  and  even  hour  by  hour, 
and  yet  not  please  them ;  but  by  doing  so,  I  should  destroy  all 
law  and  order,  and  consequently  all  righteousness ;  therefore,  I" 
should  become  as  corrupt  as  the  devil  himself,  and  there  would  be 
neither  truth  nor  righteousness,  honesty  nor  certainty,  to  my 
course.  If  I  trie.d  to  please  everybody,  I  should  please  nobody; 
I  should  soon  become  a  devil,  and  cease  to  exist;  for  I  could  no 
more  exist  eternally  than  devils  can. 

2.  Let  my  people  cease  their  foolishness,  and  make  themselves 
well  acquainted  with  substantial  principles  that  will  save  them. 
Let  them  cast  away  all  shadows,  and  take  hold  of  substances,  in 
order  that  they  may  save  themselves.  Let  them  cast  far  from  them 
all  their  foolish  and  false  traditions  which  they  have  learned  in  the 
world.  Let  them  take  hold  of  the  truth  as  it  is,  and  live  the  life 
of  saints,  and  not  the  life  of  hypocrites,  who  are  continually  fooled 
and  deceived  by  the  false  traditions  of  the  world  and  the  devil. 
If  they  wish  to  save  themselves,  they  must  learn  to  understand  the 
truth  as  it  is,  and  live  by  it.  Previous  to  their  embracing  the  ful- 
ness of  my  gospel  they  were  trained  in  falsehood ;  but  it  is  high 
time  for  them  to  leave  all  their  false  notions ;  for  false  principles 
will  never  save  them.  They  are  so  slow  to  get  rid  of  their  false 
ideas  of  things  that  it  is  very  hard  to  make  them  believe  that  they 
learned  but  little  about  me  correctly  previous  to  embracing  the 
fulness  of  my  gospel,  and  consequently  the  devil  holds  them  in  his 
chains  and  makes  them  believe  that  they  are  right  when  they  are 
wrong.  He  persuades  them  that  they  know  something,  and  that 
all  that  comes  in  contact  with  their  standard  of  right,  is  wrong ; 
that  they  need  not  to  trouble  themselves ;  for  if  they  will  only  con- 
tinue to  do  as  they  are  doing,  all  will  be  right  with  them.  In  this 
way  he  throws  his  snares  around  them,  and  holds  them  in  his 
chains,  and  he  is  lulling  them  to  sleep,  and  leading  them  down  to 
destruction ;  but  they  perceive  it  not,  and  when  such  are  severely 
tried,  the  devil  will  take  his  last  grasp  on  them,  and  destroy  them. 
They  are  in  his  snare,  and  all  that  he  has  to  do  is  to  make  one 
strong  pull  to  destroy  them.  They  did  not  liberate  themselves 
from  his  snares  when  they  might  have  done  so;  but  they  suffered 


508  THE    SPIRIT    OF    SYMPATHY. 

him  to  make  them  believe  that  they  knew  a  great  deal,  when  they 
knew  nothing,  as  they  ought  to  have  known  it ;  thus  he  led  them 
to  reject  the  truth,  and  to  prefer  his  wisdom  to  mine,  and  the  dark- 
ness of  the  world  to  the  light  of  heaven.  They  have  never  appre- 
ciated the  light  of  the  fulness  of  my  gospel ;  but  they  have  thought 
that  they  had  light  when  they  had  darkness,  and  consequently 
they  were  contented  with  it.  But  they  never  knew  the  light  of  the 
gospel ;  for  had  they  ever  known  it,  they  would,  never  have  been 
contented  with  darkness.  Such  cannot  appreciate  the  light  and 
the  blessings  of  my  gospel ;  they  are  in  the  bonds  of  iniquity,  and 
in  the  snare  of  the  devil,  and  he  will  take  them  when  he  takes  his 
last  pull. 

3.  And  now,  I  say  unto  you  my  son, — you  wish  to  know 
what  you  are  to  do  to  stop  the  spirit  of  sympathy  if,  when  I  put 
my  law  in  force  upon  the  transgressor '  thereof,  my  people  should 
give  way  to  the  spirit  of  sympathy  to  a  great  extent.  I  will  tell 
you,  my  son,  what  you  shall  do.  I  shall  be  by  your  side  at  that 
time,  and  I  shall  have  all  mine  army  placed  in  order,  ready  to 
drop  down  upon  the  earth  in  a  moment ;  and  if,  when  the  people 
are  divided,  the  sympathizers  should  be  the  strongest  party,  and  it 
should  become  necessary,  I  shall  not  call  upon  you  to  put  any  per- 
son to  death,  but  I  shall  slay  them  myself  upon  the  spot  where 
they  will  stand  before  I  give  unto  you  your  rod,  or  even  show 
myself  unto  my  people.  The  law  of  heaven  grants  unto  me  the 
privilege  to  cut  off  a  few  hundreds  of  people  at  any  time  when 
they  are  in  your  way,  without  you  raising  your  rod  and  giving  your 
command ;  for  you  may  not  always  be  placed  in  a  position  where 
you  can  take  up  your  rod,  and  give  your  command  at  a  minute's 
warning.  You  may  see  times  when  your  enemies  will  crowd  upon 
you  in  an  instant,  even  when  you  will  have  no  time  at  all  to  take 
your  rod  in  your  hand  and  to  give  your  command ;  and  should  I 
not  at  such  times  instantly  defend  you  by  cutting  off  your  enemies, 
they  would  destroy  you.  The  law  of  heaven  gives  me  the  liberty 
to  head  your  enemies  !n  every  move  which  they  attempt  to  make 
against  you ;  therefore,  if  I  am  put  to  the  necessity  of  coming  out 
to  your  defense,  before  the  time  that  I  have  appointed  to  come 
unto  you,  I  shall  do  so.  I  shall  have  all  things  perfectly  ready 
before  I  give  unto  you  a  commandment  to  put  my  law  in  full 


CONCERNING    THE    HYPOCRITES.  509 

force.  You  need  not  to  be  afraid  of  putting  my  law  in  force  when 
I  command  you,  supposing  that  I  am  not  ready,  for,  as  I  have 
said  unto  you  before,  so  I  say  unto  you  again, — if  it  becomes 
necessary,  I  will  cut  off  all  the  hypocrites  that  may  first  separate 
themselves  from  my  faithful  people;  and  I  will  afterwards  place 
my  faithful  people  in  rank,  and  give  unto  you  your  rod;  and  when 
you  have  given  your  command,  I  will  make  a  sweep  among  mine 
enemies  in  this  Territory ;  but  if  you  have  the  power  in  your  own 
possession  to  put  to  death  all  those  who  turn  traitors  to  me  and 
break  my  law,  you  must  do  so  without  my  assistance.  What  you 
cannot  do,  I  will  do ;  but  what  you  can  do,  you  must  do ;  for  this 
is  your  duty. 

I   now  give  unto  you  no  more.     I  am  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION      CONTAINING      INSTRUCTIONS      FOR 
THE    BISHOP. 


No.  261.  WEBER,  UTAH,  April  lyth,  1862. 

i.  LISTEN  unto  my  words,  which  are  quick  and  powerful, 
sharper  than  a  two-edged  sword,  for  I  am  about  to  speak  unto 
you.  I  know  that  you  are  laboring  under  great  difficulties  among 
these  people,  and,  at  times,  you  scarcely  know  what  to  do  with 
them.  They  are  so  slow  to  learn  the  principles  of  my  gospel  that 
they  weary  you  out  with  waiting  for  them.  I  cannot  teach  them 
the  principles  of  the  fulness  of  my  gospel  any  faster  than  they  can 
receive  them ;  and  through  the  slow  manner  in  which  they  receive 
them,  you  are  held  in  weakness  an  unreasonable  length  of  time. 
I  feel,  at  times,  almost  ready  to  cast  them  off,  and  send  you  to 
another  place  to  commence  my  work  in  some  other  way,  and  to 
save  as  many  of  the  innocent  people,  who  are  now  in  the  old 
Church,  as  I  can.  My  people  have  burdened  my  mind  very 
much,  in  consequence  of  their  being  so  slow  to  hearken  unto  and 
obey  my  words.  It  appears  that  they  cannot  learn  the  nature  of 
the  fulness  of  my  gospel  in  any  reasonable  length  of  time.  They' 


510      CONCERNING  THOSE  WHO  HAVE  CONSECRATED. 

weary  every  holy  angel  who  has  anything  to  do  with  them,  as  well 
as  wearying  out  both  you  and  me.  What  can  I  do  with  them? 
I  cannot  lawfully  cast  them  off  as  long  as  they  continue  to  struggle 
against  evil,  and  strive  to  learn  the  principles  of  my  gospel,  even 
if  they  learn  them  but  slowly.  If  they  are  as  faithful  as  they  know 
how  to  be,  I  have  to  bear  with  them.  When  they  do  the  best 
they  can,  it  is  not  very  good ;  and  when  they  learn  as  fast  as  they 
can,  it  is  but  very  slowly.  This  is  a  time  when  my  people  need 
to  learn  fast,  and  not  a  time  to  trifle.  It  is  too  painful  to  those 
who  stand  at  the  head  of  my  people  to  be  held  in  suspense  so 
long  if  it  could  be  avoided.  My  people  might  ease  their  own 
burdens  and  the  burdens  of  my  people  if  they  would  only  come 
to  my  terms  quickly.  They  think  so  much  about  the  property 
which  they  have  consecrated  unto  me,  and  dally  so  long  before 
they  are  willing  to  let  that  portion  of  it  go  which  I  call  for,  that 
it  is  a  great  barrier  in  their  way  to  prevent  them  from  learning  the 
principles  of  my  gospel.  Property  twines  around  the  hearts  of  some 
of  my  people,  and  appears  to  be  all  in  all  with  them;  it  is  the  main 
thing  that  prevents  them  from  learning  the  principles  of  my  gos- 
pel. They  are  so  afraid  of  it  being  taken  away  from  them  that 
they  can  scarcely  think  about  anything  else.  Such  are  held  in 
the  snare  of  the  devil,  and  are  doing  all  that  they  can  to  bring  my 
work  to  a  stand.  Some  of  my  people  do  not  know  their  own 
hearts.  They  think  that  they  are  living  in  an  acceptable  manner 
before  me,  when  they  are  not;  for  no  person  is  living  in  an 
acceptable  manner  before  me  whose  heart  is  placed  upon  property 
which  he  holds  in  his  possession.  He  cannot  serve  me  and  his 
property  too ;  for  I  will  accept  of  none  but  the  whole-hearted. 
When  people  have  their  hearts  set  upon  property,  they  ought  to 
know  that  they  are  not  accepted  of  me.  My  people  know  well 
enough  what  I  require  of  them.  They  know  the  conditions  on 
which  they  can  be  saved ;  but  yet  they ,  will  continue  to  act  the 
part  of  idolaters  in  spite  of  all  that  I  have  taught  them.  What 
can  I  do  with  them  but  cut  them  off  as  cumberers  of  the  ground  ? 
They  must  know  that  no  idolater  can  inherit  my  kingdom  upon 
the  earth,  and  yet  they  continue  to  let  the  devil  fool  them.  When 
will  my  people  learn  good  sense?  They  have  learned  enough 
nonsense  in  the  world,  and  it  appears  almost  impossible  for  them 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    THE    BISHOP.  51  I 

to  get  rid  of  it,  and  learn  good  sense  instead  thereof.  They  can 
never  be  saved  by  false  knowledge,  for  it  will  lead  them  down  to 
destruction.  If  they  would  do  as  I  command  them,  they  might 
save  themselves.  They  should  know  that  I  am  the  standard  for 
them  to  go  by.  But  they  treat  my  words  lightly,  and  perish  by 
them  in  the  midst  of  light.  I  am  well  satisfied  that  I  can  make 
but  little  headway  with  these  people  by  talking  to  them. 

2.  I  told  my  people,  a  few  days  ago,  that  I  intended  to  put 
my  law  in  full  force  upon  the  transgressors  thereof.     I   am   now 
giving  unto  them  a  little  time  to  consider  the  matter  over,  and  to 
prepare  themselves  for  it ;   and  after  they  have  had  a  little  time  to 
do  so,  I  shall  draw  them  up  to  the  law.     I  do  not  want  to  bring  it 
upon  them  unawares;  but  I  want  to  make  them  acquainted  with  it, 
and  also  to  give  unto  them  a  fair  chance  to  prepare  themselves  for 
it.     I  do  not  take  my  people  unawares.     I  let  them 'see  what  they 
are  about  to  enter  into  beforehand,  which  is  just.     But  the  devil 
works  in  secret,  and  thereby  seeks  to  take  advantage  of  innocence. 
He  works  in  the  dark.     He  works  deceitfully,  in  order  to  ensnare 
and  destroy  the  innocent. 

3.  You  hear  complaints  made  by  my  people   about  their  desti- 
tute condition  with  regard  to  food.     Let  my   servant,  the  steward, 
"take   the    surplus  property  from  the    people,  and  purchase  food 
therewith,  and  let  him  supply  the  needs  of  the  poor  of  my  people, 
that  they  may  have  no  just  cause  to  murmur.     The  poor  must  be 
fed.     The  steward  must  not  suffer  his  hands  to  be  tied  by  these 
people ;    but  he  must  go  and  take  property  from   those   who  have 
more  than  the  law  allows  them  to  have,  even  if  he  has  to  take  it 
by  force.     There  is  an  abundance  of  property  in  the  possession  of 
my  people  to  supply  the  needs  of  the  poor,  and   much  more  than 
will  be  used  by  my  people  before  I  come  to  place  fresh  means  in 
their  hands.     All  that  I  am  now  waiting  for  is  my  people.     I  wish 
to  give  unto  them  a  short  time  to  consider  the   matter  which   now 
lies  before  them,  in  order  that  they  may  prepare  themselves  for  it ; 
and  when  this  is  done,   I  shall  come.     I  shall  look   for  you  to 
open  the  way  for  me,  if  it  is  possible  for  you  to  do  so.     You  know 
what  I  require  at  your  hands,  in  order  to  open  the  way  for  me. 
I  will  overrule  everything  for  your  convenience,  so  that  you  may 
have  as  little  trouble  as  possible;  for  I  know  that  it  is  all  you   can 


512         THE  ETERNAL  PROGRESSION  OF  WORLDS. 

do  to  bear  the  burden  that  is  placed  upon  you;  but  I  will  make  it 
as  light  as  I  possibly  can  for  you.  Therefore  rest  contented  until 
you  see  my  face ;  for  lo,  I  come  unto  quickly ;  even  the  Lord  of 
Hosts.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION     SHOWING     THE     ORDER     OF     THE 
ETERNAL  PROGRESSION  OF  WORLDS. 


No.  262.  WEBER,  UTAH,  April  ipth,  1862. 

1.  BEHOLD,   I  am  he  who  searcheth  the  hearts  and  trieth  the 
reins  of  the  children  of  men ;  who  penetrates  through  the  mists  of 
darkness,  and  lighteth  up  all  animated  nature ;  who  walketh  not  in 
crooked  paths;  but  whose  course"  is  one  eternal  round ;  whose  pur- 
poses never  fail ;  who  speaks  the  word,  and  all  the  inhabitants  of 
the  earth   either  obey  or  perish;  even  the    son    of  the    Eternal 
Father.     And   I  am   come  to  reveal  unto  you   the  order  of  the 
eternal  progression  of  worlds,  and  the  order  in  which  they  exist  in 
space. 

2.  I    have    before    revealed    unto  you   the   order  of  the  first 
quorum   of  worlds,   in  connection  with  which  the  first  God  sits 
enthroned  in  majesty  in  a  large  globe,  from  which  the  laws  that 
govern  all  worlds  proceed.     The  first  quorum  of  worlds,  not  in- 
cluding the  world  of  the  first  God,  numbers  one  hundred  and  forty- 
four  thousand,  and  they  are  all  on  a  level  with  each  other  in  space, 
and   being  the  worlds  of  the   firstborn  sons  of  the  first  God,  they 
form  the  first  rank. 

3.  All   quorums  of  glorified  worlds  stand  below  each  other  in 
space.     The  firstborn  sons  of  the  first  God  form  the  first  quorum, 
and  their  firstborn  sons  form  the  second  quorum,  and  each  of  the 
second  quorum  has  his  world  next  to  and  immediately  underneath 
his  Father's  world. 

4.  In  the  quorums  of  the  firstborn  sons,  the  firstborn  son  of  a 
Cjpd   always   redeems  the  earth  immediately  below  his  Father's  in 
point  of  progression.     In  all  other  quorums,  the  son  who  holds  the 


THE  ETERNAL  PROGRESSION  OF  WORLDS.         513 

first  birthright  redeems  the  earth  immediately  below  his  Father's. 
You  are  the  first  person  in  power  in  the  quorum  of  high  priests, 
and  I  am  the  last  person.  You  are  that  much  in  advance  of  me 
by  birthright,  but  we  both  belong  to  the  same  quorum.  Adam  is 
not  yet  connected  with  the  quorum  to  which  my  Father  belongs ; 
but  he  belongs  to  it.  And  when  his  world  becomes  celestialized, 
he  will  take  his  place  as  the  last  God  in  that  quorum,  in  like  man- 
ner as  his  Father  is  the  last  God  of  the  quorum  to  which  my 
Father's  Father  belongs. 

5.  Each  perpendicular  quorum   consists   of  a  Father  and  his 
sons.     Every  God  who   has  not  already   obtained  a    quorum    of 
worlds  for  his   sons  may   have  one  in  due  time,  for  it  is  his  privi- 
lege.    Some  Gods   have  already  a  quorum  of  worlds  exalted  for 
their  firstborn   sons,   and   all   Gods  will   have  the  same  privilege. 
Some  Gods   are  in  advance   of  others   by  birthright,  and  conse- 
quently have  greater  dominion.    They  all  stand  in  their  own  order, 
one   in   the   advance  of  another.       One  hundred    and   forty-four 
thousand  quorums   of  worlds,    lacking  one  quorum,  were  created 
and  became  celestial  before  the  second  born  sons  of  the  first  God 
had  the  liberty  to  become   redeemers ;  and   when  they  had  that 
liberty,  they  redeemed  the  quorum  of  worlds  belonging  to  the  last 
quorum  of  firstborn  sons.     There  are  now  in  existence  more  than 
one  hundred  and  forty-four  thousand  and  one  quorums  of  glorified 
worlds,  one  quorum  below  another  in  space. 

6.  A  new   world  comes   into  existence  every  seven  thousand 
years,    and  as   one  world  steps   forth  into   mortality,   another   is 
created;  therefore,   worlds  are  also  exalted    in  their    own    order. 
There  are,   however,  three   stationary  worlds,  which  were  created 
for  the  accommodation  of  all  traveling  planets,  that  do  not  follow 
the  above  rule.     They  are  stationed  in  space  for  the  accommoda- 
tion of   each  quorum  of  traveling  worlds,  and  they  remain  with  it 
until  it  is  glorified.     They  are  then  lowered  in  space  to  accommo- 
date another  quorum,  and  they  remain  with  that  quorum   until  it 
has   become  glorified  also ;   and  so  they  continue  to  be  used   for 
the  accommodation  of  all  worlds  that  come  into  existence.     There 
is  only   one  quorum   of  worlds  traveling  up  to  perfection  at  the 
same   time.     One    quorum    must    be    completed    before  another 
quorum   can  commence;  therefore,   there  can  be  but  one  world 


514  THE    ETERNAL    PROGRESSION    OF    WORLDS. 

passing  through  mortality  at  the  same  time.  If  such  was  not  the 
case,  there  would  be  great  confusion.  The  priesthood  runs  in 
order  from  one  world  to  another ;  and  the  heavenly  host  attend  to 
only  one  thing  at  a  time,  and  thus  they  prevent  confusion.  •  There 
is  only  one  redeemer  called  to  operate  at  the  same  time.  There 
is  but  one  God  ruling  over  a  mortal  earth  at  the  same  time. 
There  is  but  one  angel  holding  the  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood 
upon  a  mortal  earth  at  the  same  time;  and  there  can  be  but  one 
chief  devil  at  the  same  time. 

7.  Behold,  I  am  Jesus  Christ,  and  it  is  my  duty  to  be  the 
representative  of  the  holy  priesthood  to  man  upon  earth.  I  stand 
in  the  presence  of  my  Father  to  represent  all  Gods  and  all  powers, 
both  in  the  heavens  and  upon  the  earth,  and  also  in  hell,  and  all 
glory  and  dominion  connected  with  eternal  beings ;  for  besides 
me,  there  is  at  present  no  Savior  in  power. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.  Let  this  suffice  for  the  present, 
and  I  will  shortly  speak  unto  you  again.  I  know  what  you  need, 
and  I  will  come  and  give  it  unto  you.  I  am  the  Son  of  the 
Eternal  Father.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    CONCERNING    THE    ETERNAL    PRO- 
GRESSION OF  WORLDS. 


No.  263.  WEBER,  UTAH,  April  191)1,  1862. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — you  seem  as  though  you 
were  set  fast.  You  do  not  seem  to  understand  the  true  position 
of  Adam's  earth  which  is  now  passing  through  mortality.  You 
cannot  find  a  place  for  it  in  any  of  the  quorums.  You  say  that  I 
have  told  you  that  my  Father  is  the  last  God  in  that  quorum  of 
worlds  over  which  your  Father  presides ;  that  Adam  is  not  con- 
nected with  that  quorum,  neither  can  he  be  connected  with  the 
quorum  of  high  priests  over  which  you  preside.  You  say  that  if 
there  are  only  one  hundred  and  forty-four  thousand  Gods  in  a 
quorum,  you  cannot  see  where  Adam  and  his  world  can  be  placed, 


THE  ETERNAL  PROGRESSION  OF  WORLDS.         515 

for  that  all  the  quorums  are  filled  «p  without  his  world,  unless 
there  are  one  hundred  and  forty-four  thousand  and  one  worlds  in 
a  quorum. 

2.  As  the   first   God   of  all   has   one  hundred  and  forty-four 
thousand   firstborn   sons,   and  each  of  them  has  a  glorified  world, 
which,  with  their  Father's  world,  make  one  hundred  and  forty-four 
thousand  and  one  worlds  in  the  first  quorum,  so  each  of  his  sons 
who  own  the  first  quorum  of  glorified   worlds,  has  one  hundred 
and  forty-four  thousand  firstborn  sons  whose  glorified  worlds  stand 
in  perpendicular  columns   or   quorums,    directly  under  their  own 
Father's,  which  make,  with  their  Father's,  one  hundred  and  forty- 
four  thousand   and   one  quorums.     The  horizontal   quorum  over 
which  your  Father  presides  will,  when  complete,  only  number  one 
hundred   and   forty-four  thousand   worlds.     Adam's   world    is  in 
mortality,   and   is  not   as  yet  connected   with  any  quorum.     But 
when  it  becomes   celestial,   it  will  join  and  complete  the  quorum 
over  which   your  Father  presides,  and  take  its  own  place  next  to 
my  Father's  world.     Adam's  world  will,  therefore,  occupy  its  own 
place  in  space  as  all  other  celestial  worlds  do. 

3.  Therefore,   let  my  people  rest  contented,  and  act  well  their 
own  part,  and  in  due  time  I  will  make  all  things  perfectly  plain, 
even  those  things  which  may  be  necessary  for  them  to  know. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.  I  will  shortly  speak  unto  you 
again.  I  am  the  Bright  and  Morning  Star;  even  Jesus  Christ. 
Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION     CONTAINING    FURTHER     INFORMA- 
TION   ON   THE    SUBJECT    OF    ETERNAL 
PROGRESSION. 


No.   264.  WEBER,  UTAH,  April  2ist,  1862. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — you  wish  to  understand 
the  true  nature  of  the  first  world  which  is  owned  by  the  first  God, 
the  manner  in  which  it  was  created,  and  the  kind  of  material  of 
which  it  is  formed.  You  also  wish  to  understand  the  true  nature 


516         THE  ETERNAL  PROGRESSION  OF  WORLDS. 

of  the  one  hundred  and  forty-four  thousand  worlds  which  belong 
to  the  firstborn  sons  of  the  first  God,  the  manner  in  which  they 
were  created,  by  whom  they  were  created,  and  the  manner  in 
which  they  were  redeemed. 

2.  Behold,  I  am  the  Lord   of  Hosts,  and  I   will  reveal   these 
things  unto  you  in  a  manner  in  which   you   will   be  well  able   to 
understand  them.     The  first  world  of  all,  which  is  owned  by  the 
first  God,  never  passed  through  a  mortal  estate ;    it  was  never  sub- 
ject unto  death,  for  it  was  never  inhabited  by  fallen  spirits  as  other- 
worlds  which  have  since  been  created  have  been.     It  was  formed 
of  pure  material,  and  consequently  fallen  spirits  could  not  proceed 
from   nor  receive  organized  bodies  out  of  it.       Inasmuch    as  it 
was  pure,   nothing  impure   could  possibly    spring    forth    from  it. 
Fallen  spirits  always  proceed  from  impure  material.     All  material, 
whether  good  or   bad.   yields  or  produces  its   own   kind,   conse- 
quently, the  first  world  has  always  been  celestial,  and  never  sub- 
ject to  death.     It  is  altogether  different  in   its   nature   from   other 
worlds  which  have  been  created  since  it  was  created.     But  other 
worlds  which  have  since  been  created   have  been  formed   of  two 
kinds  of  material — pure  mixed  with   impure.     The   first   world  is 
many  times  larger  than  any  other  world,  and  it  took  much  longer 
to  create  it  than  it  has  taken  to  create  any  other  world  since ;  yea, 
it  took  more  than  one  hundred  times  as  long.     None  other  world 
can  be  compared  with  it  for  size.     Other  worlds  almost   appear  as 
nothing  by  the  side  of  it.     It   rules   all   other  worlds,  for  it  was 
created  for  that   purpose.     With   respect  to  time,  one  day  with  all 
celestial  worlds  is  equal  to  one  thousand  years  of  the  time  of  mor- 
tal earths ;    for  celestial  worlds  are  all  ruled  by  the  first  God,  who 
is  the  time-keeper.     All  other  worlds  are  ruled  by  his  world.     All 
laws  were  discovered   or    made    by  him;   therefore    all    celestial 
worlds  are  governed  by  his  laws.      He  discovered  the  principles 
upon  which  those  laws   were  based  in  his  own  world,  and  being 
assisted  by  his   two   firstborn   sons,  who  are  next  to  him  in  au- 
thority, and  are  his  counselors,  he  framed  those  laws. 

3.  The  world  of  the  first  God  was  created  by  his   own  wisdom 
and  power,  with  the  assistance  of  his  own  children.      But  when  he 
first  commenced  to  create  it  he  had   but  little  help,  for  he  then 
had  no  posterity  to  assist  him  ;    therefore,  he  commenced  his  work 


THE    ETERNAL    PROGRESSION    OF    WORLDS.  517 

without  any  person  to  assist  him  except  his  wife.  She  rendered 
him  all  the  assistance  she  possibly  could.  But  as  time  rolled 
along,  his  family  increased,  and  he  obtained  more  help,  even  until 
his  world  was  well  finished.  After  it  was  created,  it  ascended 
in  space;  and  as  it  ascended  in  space,  it  continued  to  grow 
during  many  hundreds  of  thousands  of  years;  and  as  it  grew 
and  ascended,  other  worlds  were  created  for  the  first  God's  sons, 
beginning  with  his  firstborn  son,  each  of  whom  stepped  out  in 
their  own  order  to  create  worlds  for  themselves,  being  assisted 
by  their  Father  to  do  so  until,  at  length,  each  of  the  firstborn 
sons  had  had  a  world  created  for  him. 

4.  But  how  did  these  one  hundred  and  forty-four  thousand 
firstborn  sons  come  into  existence,  seeing  that  the  first  God  of 
all  had  but  one  wife  to  begin  with?  If  he  had  one  hundred  and 
forty-four  thousand  firstborn  sons,  he  must  have  had  one  hundred 
and  forty-four  thousand  wives ;  and  if  such  was  the  case,  where 
did  they  come  from?  There  was  a  time  when  the  first  God  was 
the  only  being  in  existence,  and  there  was  only  one  woman  who 
was  equal  with  him  in  age.  I  shall  not  reveal  unto  you  at  this 
time  the  manner  in  which  the  first  two  came  into  existence ;  but 
it  suffketh  me  to  say  that  they  were  in  existence  as  the  first  two 
beings,  and  they  are  still  in  existence,  and  are  now  the  first  King 
and  Queen  over  all  animated  beings. 

5.  The  first  God  begat  many  sons  and  daughters,  a*nd  he  gave 
unto  his  firstborn  son  his  firstborn  daughter  to  wife,  and  started 
him  out  to  create  and  people  a  world  for  himself.  The  first  God 
took  his  own  second  born  daughter  to  be  his  second  wife,  and  he 
begat  many  sons  and  daughters  also  by  her,  and  he  took  her  first- 
born daughter  to  be  his  third  wife.  And  the  second  born  daugh- 
ter which  he  had  by  his  second  wife,  he  gave  to  his  firstborn  son 
by  his  second  wife.  He  took  all  his  firstborn  daughters  which  he 
had  by  his  wives  to  be  his  wives,  with  the  exception  of  the  first- 
born daughter  of  his  first  wife,  until  he  had  obtained  one  hundred 
and  forty-four  thousand  wives.  He  has  as  many  firstborn  sons  as 
he  has  wives ;  for  he  had  a  firstborn  son  by  every  wife ;  and  his 
firstborn  son  took  his  firstborn  daughter  to  wife,  and  his  last  first- 
born son  took  his  last  firstborn  daughter  to  be  his  wife,  with  these 
exceptions  all  the  sons  of  the  first  God  took  their  own  mother's 


518  THE    ETERNAL    PROGRESSION    OF    WORLDS. 

second  born  daughters  to  be  their  wives.  Inasmuch  as  nature  pro- 
vided a  first  wife  for  the  first  God,  he  gave  unto  his  firstborn  son 
his  firstborn  daughter,  and  unto  his  second  firstborn  sons  he  gave 
his  second  born  daughters. 

6.  You  will  readily  perceive,  my  son,  th.at  the  first  world  of  all 
is   entirely   different  in  its   nature  to   all   other  worlds.     It  is  an 
exception  to  them  all,   being  created  celestial,  and  never  having 
been  subject  to  death  and  darkness.     No  devil  had  any  power  to 
destroy  that   first  family,  nor  yet  to  break  up  any  of  their  arrange- 
ments.    They  were  not  divided  into  two  parties  in  direct  opposi- 
tion to  each  other,  as  the  families  of  all  other  worlds  are  divided, 
in  consequence  of  fallen  spirits  being  among  them.     Fallen  spirits 
cause  death  to  overtake  a  world,   and  to  destroy   both  it  and   its 
inhabitants   for  a   certain  length  of  time.     Each  race   of  people 
which  belongs  to  an  earth  claims  its  separate  rights ;  and  when  the 
rebels    against  the  government   of  the  Gods   rule  a  world,  they 
always   bring   death   and  destruction  into  it.     They  always  keep 
their  hold  on  a  world  until  they  are  overpowered  by  the  angels  of 
the  Gods.     If  they  were  not  overpowered  by  holy  angels,  they 
would  destroy  the   earth   on  which  they   exist ;  but  they  are  con- 
quered and  destroyed  by  the  angels,  and  the  worlds  are  all  saved 
through  mediators,  whose  right  it  is  to  destroy  all   fallen  spirits  on 
the  earths  which  they  are  appointed  to  redeem.     Thus  you  will  see 
that  all  other  quorums  of  worlds  must  differ  in  some  respects  from 
the  first  quorum.    The  firstborn  sons  of  the  first  God  never  passed 
through  death  on  their  Father's  earth — they  were  all  born  celestial; 
but  their  sons,  and  the  sons  of  all  other  Gods,  are  subject  to  death; 
they  have  to  pass  through  it  before  they   can   become  celestial 
beings.     The  first  quorum  of  Gods  never  having  been  made  sub- 
ject to  death,  are  a    quorum   of   independent    Gods.     They    are 
independent   because   they  needed   no  assistance  to  help  them  to 
overcome  evil ;  they  had  full  power  over  it,  and  in  this  consists 
their  independence.     If  the  first  God  and  his  firstborn  sons  had 
not  been  independent,  evil  would  have  prevailed  over  them  and 
destroyed  them.     There  was  no  power  in  existence  greater  than 
that  which  they  possessed  for  them  to  look  to  for  assistance  ;   they 
were  all  powerful,  and  consequently  independent. 

7.  You   wish  to  know  by  what  means  all  the  firstborn  sons  of 


THE    ETERNAL    PROGRESSION    OF    WORLDS.  519 

the  first  God  obtained  worlds.  The  first  God  sent  his  children  to 
assist  his  firstborn  son  to  create  a  world,  and  it  took  them  seven 
thousand  years  to  create  it ;  and  when  it  was  created  and  had 
taken  its  place  in  space,  it  hung  right  underneath  the  Father's 
world,  and  was  owned  by  the  firstborn  son.  After  this,  the  Father 
assisted  his  second  firstborn  son  to  create  a  world  for  himself,  in 
like  manner  as  he  before  assisted  his  first  firstborn  son;  and  so  he 
continued  to  assist  his  sons  one  by  one  until  he  had  a  worjd  each 
created  for  them ;  and  as  a  new  world  came  into  existence  every 
seven  thousand  years,  the  column  to  which  it  belonged,  with  the 
first  God  at  the  head,  made  a  move  higher  in  space,  until  all  his 
sons'  worlds  stood  in  one  long  string  underneath  his  own.  And 
when  this  was  done,  and  his  quorum  was  completed,  he  sent  his 
last  firstborn  son  to  redeem  his  first  firstborn  son's  world.  The  last 
member  of  the  quorum  of  high  priests  always  redeems  the  world 
belonging  to  the  first  member  of  that  quorum.  The  last  member 
is  always  in  power  when  the  world  of  the  first  member  is  in  the 
hands  of  a  devil,  upon  the  same  principle  that  Jesus  Christ,  being 
now  the  last  member  of  that  quorum,  redeems  Adam's  world, 
which  at  present  stands  at  the  head  of  the  quorum.  Adam's  world 
being  in  mortality,  represents  the  world  which  is  owned  by  the 
first  God.  It  appears  to  stand  between  two  quorums  of  worlds, 
and  does  not  appear  to  be  claimed  by  either  of  them.  In  the  first 
quorum  of  all  there  are  one  hundred  and  forty-four  thousand 
worlds,  not  including  the  world  belonging  to  the  first  God,  and 
which  appears  to  stand  outside  of  a  quorum,  as  Adam's  world 
appears  to  do ;  therefore,  Adam's  world  represents  the  first  great 
central  world.  And  Moses'  world,  standing  at  the  head  of  a 
quorum  of  worlds,  which  are  traveling  up  to  perfection,  represents 
the  world  owned  by  the  firstborn  son  of  the  first  God.  He  stands 
at  the  head  of  a  quorum  .of  Gods,  under  his  Father,  as  Moses 
stands  at  the  head  of  a  quorum  of  high  priests  under  his  Father. 
The  quorum  of  high  priests,  including  Adam  and  Abel,  numbers 
one  hundred  and  forty-four  thousand  and  one,  and  represents  the 
first  quorum  of  all  which,  with  the  first  God,  numbers  one  hun- 
dred and  forty-four  thousand  and  one. 

8  ]     I  do  not  wish  to  weary   you   by   writing  any   more  at   this 
time,  for  I  know  that  you  are  weary ;   but  I  have  more   to  reveal 


520  THE    ETERNAL    PROGRESSION    OF    WORLDS. 

to  you  upon  this  subject,  and  I  will  reveal  it  unto  you  as  fast  as 
you  are  able  to  write  it.  I  have  a  great  deal  to  do  in  a  short 
time.  I  am  coming  quickly  unto  you  to  talk  with  you  mouth  to 
mouth,  and  I  will  then  put  all  things  right;  therefore,  look  out  for 
me,  for  lo  I  come,  I  come,  I  come.  I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even 
so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    CONCERNING    THE    ETERNAL    PRO- 
GRESSION OF  WORLDS. 


No.  265.  WEBER,  UTAH,  April  22nd,  1862. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts,  and  I  am  come  to  speak 
unto  you  again.     There  are  some  things  connected  with  this  great 
subject  which  you  say  in  your  feelings  you  do  not  as  yet  compre- 
hend.    You   would   like  to  know  upon  what  principle  those  hun- 
dred and  forty-four  thousand  firstborn  sons  of  the  first  God  obtain 
each  one  hundred  and  forty-four  thousand  wives,  seeing  that  their 
worlds  were  all  created  and  placed   in  a  perpendicular  line  before 
the  first  of  them  had  been  redeemed.     You  feel  assured  that  none 
of  those  firstborn  sons  of  the  first  God  could  ever  become  redeem- 
ers, excepting  the  last  member  of  that  quorum  ;  and  that,   such 
being  the  case,  you  do  not  see  how  they  could  obtain  wives  out  of 
the   worlds   of  other  Gods  so   far  below  them;   that  they  could 
never  become  redeemers  after  their  own  worlds  had  been  glorified 
and  they  themselves  become  Gods. 

2.  The  last  firstborn  son  of  the  first  God  redeemed  the  world 
of  the    first  firstborn   son.     He   was  the   first  person    that    ever 
redeemed  a  world,  and  after  the  world  belonging  to  the  firstborn 
son  of  the  first   God   was  celestialized,  another  world,  which  was 
owned  by  the  second  firstborn  son  of  the   first   God,   entered  into 
mortality,  and  became  subject  to  death,  and  the   firstborn  son  of 
the  first  God's  firstborn  son,  redeemed  it  for  him.     And   when  it 
had  been  redeemed  and  become  celestial,  the  world  belonging  to 
the  third  firstborn  son  of  the  first   God  came  forth  into  mortality, 
and  was  redeemed  by  the  firstborn  son  of  the  first   God's  second 


THE  ETERNAL  .PROGRESSION  OF  WORLDS.         52! 

firstborn  son.  The  first-born  sons  of  the  first  quorum  of  Gods 
were,  with  one  exception,  redeemers ;  but  none  of  the  first  quorum 
of  Gods  have  been  redeemers,  except  the  last  member  of  that 
quorum ;  consequently,  they  are  all  independent  Gods.  They 
were  born  long  before  the  first  world  was  completed,  and  they 
assisted  their  Father  to  complete  it.  The  first  God  had  a  numer- 
ous family  before  his  world  was  fully  formed  and  ready  to  take  its 
place  in  space;  and  when  it  had  made  one  move  up  in  space,  he 
assisted  his  firstborn  son  to  create  a  world  for  himself,  to  create 
which  it  took  seven  thousand  years.  And  when  it  was  finished, 
he  gave  unto  his  firstborn  son  his  firstborn  daughter  to  wife,  and 
they  then  commenced  to  beget  their  posterity.  The  first  God  then 
sent  his  second  firstborn  son  to  create  a  world  for  himself,  and  he 
assisted  him  as  he  had  previously  assisted  his  first  firstborn  son  to 
create  his  world. 

3.  And  in  like  manner  he  assisted  all  his  firstborn  sons  to 
create  worlds  for  themselves ;  and  as  each  son  had  a  world  created 
for  him,  his  Father  gave  unto  him  a  wife.  He  gave  unto  each  of 
his  sons,  who  had  worlds  created,  a  wife  of  his  own  daughters, 
every  seven  thousand  years.  Thus  when  all  his  firstborn  sons  had 
their  worlds  created,  and  occupied  their  own  places  in  space,  he 
had  to  give  unto  them  one  hundred  and  forty-four  thousand  of  his 
daughters  at  once;  but  when  he  had  only  one  thousand  worlds 
formed  for  one  thousand  of  his  sons,  he  only  gave  unto  them  one 
thousand  of  his  daughters  at  once.  As  each  world  was  created 
and  took  its  place  among  the  others  that  had  been  created  before 
it,  the  number  of  daughters  given  out  increased  one,  so  that  the 
last  son  who  had  a  world  created  for  him  might  have  a  wife  as 
well  as  those  sons  had  who  had  had  worlds  created  for  them,  and 
wives  given  unto  them  before  he  had.  Inasmuch  as  he  had  a 
world  created  for  him,  he  claimed  the  right  to  have  wives  as  well 
as  his  brothers  who  were  in  advance  of  him  by  birthright.  There- 
fore, when  all  the  firstborn  sons  of  the  first  God  had  their  worlds 
glorified,  they  had  received  from  their  Father  one  hundred  and 
forty-four  thousand  wives  each.  He  gave  unto  them  one  hundred 
forty-four  thousand  times  one  hundred  and  forty-four  thousand,  or 
twenty  billion,  seven  hundred  and  thirty-six  million,  of  his  own 
daughters  to  be  their  wives.  Thus  the  firstborn  sons  of  the  first 
God  obtained  their  wives. 


^22  THE    ETERNAL    PROGRESSION    OF    WORLDS. 

4.  In  what  way  did  the  firstborn  sons  of  those  one  hundred  and 
forty-four  thousand  firstborn  sons  of  the  first  God,  who  constituted 
a  quorum  of  redeemers,  obtain  their  wives  after  they  had  filled  the 
office  of  redeemers?  They  were  ministers  of  the  gospel,  even  high 
priests,  and  as  such  they  each  helped  to  save  one  hundred  and 
forty-four  thousand  mortal  worlds,  including  their  own,  and  they 
each  took  one  wife  from  every  mortal  earth  on  which  they  minis- 
tered, excepting  their  own ;  and  while  they  were  ministering  the 
gospel  on  these  niortal  earths,  their  own  earths  were  growing  and 
traveling  up  to  perfection,  and  their  families  were  continually  upon 
the  increase.  Thus  they  each  took  one  hundred  and  forty-four 
thousand  mortal  missions ;  and  they  each  took  one  wife  from  each 
God  whose  world  was  passing  through  mortality  for  whom  they 
labored.  In  this  manner  all  redeemers  obtain  their  number  of 
wives.  Every  God  gives  unto  the  high  priests  who  minister  unto 
his  family  and  save  it,  one  wife  each  of  his  firstborn  daughters. 

5.  I  do  not  wish  to  weary  you  any  longer  at  this  time  by 
straining  your  mind  upon  this  subject.  It  is  painful  for  you  to  sit 
so  long  at  once ;  but  I  have  but  little  more  to  reveal  unto  you 
before  you  will  be  able  to  see  it  all  clearly.  From  this  time,  it  will 
not  be  so  straining  to  your  mind  as  it  has  been  for  the  last  few 
days.  Since  I  commenced  to  reveal  this  subject  unto  you,  it  has 
been  painful  indeed  to  you ;  but  I  have  now  revealed  unto  you 
the  greatest  portion  of  it.  .Rest  contented,  and  know  that  either  I 
or  my  holy  angels  are  continually  by  your  side.  I  am  Jesus 
Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION     CONCERNING     THE     CREATION     OF 

WORLDS. 


No.   266.  WEBER,  UTAH,  April  23rd,  1862. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Light  and  Life  of  the  world,  even  Jesus 
Christ;  and  I  am  about  to  speak  unto  you  again.  You  say  in 
your  feelings  that  you  wish  to  understand  the  order  of  the  second 
born  sons  of  the  first  God,  even  those  whose  right  it  is  to  start  the 


THE  CREATION  OF  WORLDS.  523 

second  rank  of  quorums  after  the  firstborn  sons  have  become 
glorified.  You  wish  to  know  how  their  worlds  came  into  existence. 
They  came  into  existence  in  the  same  order  as  the  worlds  of  the 
second  firstborn  sons  do.  Their  worlds  were  created  one  by  one 
every  seven  thousand  years,  and  stood  in  space  in  a  perpendicular 
column,  even  as  the  first  quorum  did  at  the  beginning.  When  the 
first  God's  firstborn  son's  world  had  become  celestial,  another 
world  was  added  to  the  bottom  of  the  column  which  it  had  left. 
As  the  first  quorum  of  worlds  came  up  to  perfection,  one  by  one, 
they  surrounded  the  first  world,  and  stood  on  a  horizontal  plain 
with  it.  The  first  world  of  all,  with  all  other  worlds  which  stand 
below  it,  ascended  in  space,  in  order  to  make  room  for  other 
worlds  as  they  should  be  created.  As  new  worlds  are  being 
formed  the  material  of  which  they  are  made  condenses,  and  a 
vacuum  or  atmosphere  is  formed  of  rarefied  or  less  dense  matter 
suitable  for  them  to  move  in ;  thus  every  new  world  makes  room 
for  itself.  All  pure  material  works  harmoniously  together  to 
accommodate  itself  and  to  supply  its  own  needs;  therefore,  all 
celestial  beings  work  together  for  their  mutual  benefit.  There  is 
always  room  for  new  planets  as  fast  as  they  roll  into  existence,  and 
there  will  be  to  all  eternity;  for  they  assist  to  make  room  for 
themselves.  Space  is  continually  being  formed  as  well  as  new 
worlds  are.  Space,  therefore,  can  never  be  filled.  If  it  could  be 
filled,  there  would  be  an  end  to  eternal  progression,  for  the  way  of 
all  worlds  would  be  blocked  up  and  their  motion  prevented.  They 
would  all  become  powerless,  and  blend  together  in  one  solid  mass, 
and  all  animated  nature  would  be  destroyed.  Such  would  be  the 
case  if  space  did  not  continue  to  enlarge  as  new  worlds  came  into 
existence. 

2.  The  second  born  sons  of  the  first  God  arrive  at  the  God- 
head upon  the  same  principle  as  his  firstborn  sons  did,  and  all 
others  ot  his  sons,  including  his  third,  fourth,  fifth  and  sixth  born 
sons,  and  so  on'  throughout  all  his  sons  to  all  eternity,  will  become 
exalted  on  the  same  principle.  I  have  now  given  unto  you  the 
order  of  the  progression  of  worlds  to  all  eternity.  When  you  are 
able  to  trace  out  the  order  of  the  first  and  second  born  sons  of 
the  first  God,  you  will  be  able  to  trace  out  that  of  all  others ;  for 
this  is  the  complete  order  of  eternal  progression. 


524  THE'   SCEPTER    OF    POWER. 

3.  And   behold,   I   say   unto  you,  my  son, — you  wish  to  know 
something  more  concerning  the  rod  which  was  used  by  my  servant 
Moses,   whether   it  was  owned  by   your  Father  or  not.      It  is  not 
your  Father's  rod ;  but  your  Father  holds  the  jurisdiction   over  it 
while  this  earth  of  Adam's  is  in  mortality.     Your  Father  has  a  rod 
of  his  own ;  therefore,  he  does  not  own  the  seventh  angel's  rod ;    it 
belongs  to  the*  first  God.     It   is  his  scepter,  and  the  person  who 
uses   it,   uses  it   in  his  name  and  by  his  authority,  for  he  is  his 
representative  upon  the  mortal  earth ;  he  rules  by  it  as  though  the 
first  God  was  present  himself.     You  are  the  first  God's  represent- 
ative to  all  Adam's  posterity.     It  is  your  duty  to  display  all  power, 
glory,  majesty  and  dominion  to  Abraham's  seed.     You  will   stand 
upon  the  earth  with  the  scepter  of  the  great  first  God  in  your  hand, 
and  he  is  compelled  by  law  to  sustain  his  own  representative.     Be- 
ing a  celestial  God,   he  cannot  come  himself.     It  is  unlawful  for 
him  to   leave   his  throne  and  come  down  upon  a  mortal  earth  to 
represent  his  glory,  majesty  and  dominion ;  therefore,  each  seventh 
angel   stands   upon   each   mortal   earth  in  his  name   and   by  his 
authority  to  represent  his  greatness  to  mortals. 

4.  Adam,    who   now  seems  to  stand  disconnected  with   any 
quorum,   represents   the  first  God,  and  his  being  weak  and  power- 
less for  seven  thousand  years,  represents  the  first  God  being  shorn 
of  his  power  for  seven  thousand  years ;  for  he  gives  his  rod,  which 
is  his  power,  to  every  seventh  angel   who  has  to  come   in  contact 
with  devils  and   break  their  hold,  and  save  the  worlds.     He  has 
not  this  to  do,  and  therefore  he  does  not  need  his  power;  but  they 
need  it,  and  he  gives  it  unto  them.     He   is,   himself,  beyond  the 
power  of   Satan ;  but  they  are  not,  and  therefore  they  use  his  rod. 
They   are  the  legitimate  rulers  over  every  mortal  earth.     Adam 
does  not  use  that  rod  because  he  is  not  in  power;  but  Moses  being 
the  president  of  a  quorum  of  one  hundred  and  forty-four  thousand 
high  priests  upon  Adam's  earth,    is   in   power,   and   therefore  uses 
that    rod.     Adam    sanctions   the  authority   of  the  man   who  was 
appointed  by  the  first   God  to  be  the  seventh  angel  to  his  world 
'by  bringing  him  forth  into  mortality  and  ordaming  him  in  the  flesh 
to  preside  over  his  posterity  and  save  his  world.     When,  the  power 
is  needed,  it  is  given. 

5.  You  wish  to  know  whether  there  are  one  hundred  and  forty- 


CONCERNING  ETERNAL  PROGRESSION.  525 

four  thousand  and  one  worlds  in  all  those  quorums  which  have 
become  celestial.  I  will  answer  you  this  question.  There  are  one 
hundred  and  forty-four  thousand  and  one  .worlds  in  the  first 
quorum ;  but  there  are  only  one  hundred  and  forty-four  thousand 
in  every  other  quorum  which  has  become  glorified.  The  world 
which  is  passing  through  mortality  is  always  an  odd  world,  and 
represents  the  first  world  of  all,  which  is  an  odd  world.  There  are 
but  two  odd  worlds  in  existence,  one  is  above  all  other  celestial 
worlds,  and  the  other  is  below  them.  The  mortal  earth  is  placea 
below  to  represent  the  first  world  of  all.  There  are  one  hundred 
and  forty-four  thousand  and  one  worlds  in  the  first  quorum,  and 
there  are  one  hundred  and  forty-four  thousand  and  one  worlds  in 
the  last  quorum  which  belongs  to  the  high  priests,  including 
Adam's  world.  Each  of  the  other  quorums  number  one  hundred 
and  forty-four  thousand  only.  This  order  will  exist  to  all  eternity. 
There  is  always  a  world  passing  through  mortality,  that  the  name 
of  the  first  God  may  always  be  glorified,  and  his  authority  acknowl- 
edged by  mortal  beings  when  his  representative  is  upon  the  earth ; 
but  when  his  representative  is  not  upon  the  earth,  his  name  is  not 
known,  neither  is  his  power  and  glory  understood  by  mortal  beings. 
He  can  have  but  one  representative  upon  a  mortal  earth.  All 
other  high  priests  hold  the  priesthood  in  part,  and  are  subject  to 
the  devil.  But  inasmuch  as  the  first  God  has  all  power  over  evil, 
even  so  his  representative  has  power  over  all  evil  also. 

6.  I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.  Let  this  suffice  for  the  pres- 
ent, and  I  will  shortly  speak  unto  you  upon  another  subject.  I 
shall  stir  my  people  when  I  am  through  with  this  subject;  there- 
fore, they  may  be  preparing  themselves  for  it.  I  have  but  little 
more  to  reveal  unto  you  upon  this  subject,  and  I  will  give  it  unto 
you  as  fast  as  you  can  write  it,  until  I  have  revealed  it  all  unto  you 
so  that  you  can  understand  it,  which  is  all  that  is  necessary.  Let 
my  people  prepare  themselves  to  meet  me ;  for  lo,  I  come  quickly. 
I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


526  CONCERNING    ETERNAL    PROGRESSION. 

REVELATION    SHOWING    THE    POSITIONS    OF    THE 
MEMBERS    OF   THE    FIRST    QUORUM. 


No.  267.  WEBER,  UTAH,  April  24th,  1862. 

1.  You  SAY,  my  son,  that  you  would  like  me  to  continue  to 
reveal  unto  you  the  principles  of  the  eternal  progression  of  worlds 
as  fast  as  possible,  until  I  have  revealed  them  all ;   that  I  need  to 
hurry  and  get  through  with  this  subject,  so  that  I  may  talk  to  you 
upon  other  matters ;   for  you  say  that  you  see  difficulties  before 
you,  and  you  do  not  want  me  to  hold  you  to  the  subject  of  pro- 
gression of  worlds  any  longer  than  I  can  possibly  avoid ;  that  you 
want  to  get  through  with  it  so  that  your  mind  may  be  at  liberty  to 
dwell,  to  some  extent,  upon  other  things. 

2.  I  wish  to  fully  clear  up  this  subject  in  this  revelation,  and 
then  you  will  be  at  liberty  to  direct  your  attention  to  other  things. 
The  subject  of  eternal   progression  is  a   difficult   one  for  you   to 
write  upon,  in  consequence  of  your  lack  of  language  to  make  it 
clear  to  the  understanding  of  men.     In  fact,  there  are  some  things 
connected   with  this   subject  which   you   have    not  been  able  to 
express.     But   I  have  taken  the  small  portion  of  language   with 
which  you  are  acquainted  and  I  have  used  it  as  well  as  I  possibly 
could  to  express  through  you  those  things  which  I  wish  to  make 
known.     That  which  you  are  unable  to  express  in   writing,  I   will 
always  show  you  in  another  way,  so  that  you  shall  never  lack  for  a 
thorough  understanding  of  all  principles  which  may  be  necessary 
for  you  to  know. 

3.  You  now  see  clearly  the  order  of  the  eternal  progression  of 
worlds,  even  how  they  exist  in  space,   and  the  manner  in  which 
new  worlds  are  created.     You  understand  the  nature  of  the  first 
world  of  all,  even  how  it  came  into  existence,  and  how  it  ascended 
in  space,  and  how  a  long  string  of  worlds  were  created  under  it, 
and  also  how  those  worlds  followed  it,  and,  ultimately,  surrounded 
it,   and  that  they  were   owned  by  independent  Gods.     You  also 
understand  the  order  by  which  the  worlds  of  the  firstborn  sons  of 
those  first  Gods  came  into 'existence,  and  how,  when  they  became 
glorified,  they  stood  under  the  first   quorum,  each  son's  world  un- 


THE    FIRST    WORLD.  527 

derneath  his  Father's  world.  The  first  world  is  an  exception  to 
that  order;  for  there  is  no  other  world  directly  under  it.  It 
stands  in  the  center  of  one  hundred  and  forty-four  thousand 
worlds  belonging  to  the  firstborn  sons  of  the  first  God  who  owns 
it.  The  world  owned  by  the  firstborn  son  of  the  first  God  stands 
by  the  side  of  his  Father's  world,  the  center  of  each  being  on  a 
horizontal  line.  The  first  world  being  so  much  larger  than  the 
second,  extends  much  higher  and  lower  in  space  than  it  does. 
All  the  worlds  which  are  owned  by  the  first  quorum  of  Gods  are 
not  one  hundreth  part  as  large,  nay,  not  one  thousandth  part  as 
large  as  the  first  world  is.  I  do  not  wish  to  tell  you  at  this  time 
how  much  larger  it  is  than  other  planets  are ;  but  you  will  readily 
perceive  that  the  world  owned  by  the  firstborn  son  of  the  first 
God  could  not  stand  underneath  it.  It  is  the  world  of  the  first- 
born son  of  the  first  God  that  stands  at  the  head  of  the  column 
of  worlds  belonging  to  the  presidents  of  quorums.  This  order 
continues  throughout  all  quorums;  therefore,  you  now  see  the 
order  of  eternal  progression. 

4.  Be  content,  and  know  that  I  am  with  you  unto  the  end. 
You  will  now  have  trouble,  my  son,  with  the  devil,  for  he  has 
deceived  a  number  of  these  people,  in  spite  of  all  that  I  have  said 
unto  them.  They  would  give  way  to  him,  and  let  him  overcome 
them ;  but  I  will  pay  them  for  their  wilful  wickedness.  They 
would  not  strive  against  evil,  because  they  were  corrupt-hearted ; 
therefore  I  will  speedily  give  unto  them  their  just  reward. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.  I  am  the  Son  of  the  Eternal 
Father;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    CALLING   PETER    C.     KLEMGARD    TO 

COLLECT   THE    FIREARMS,    AND    TAKE    THE 

OVERSIGHT    OF    THEM. 


No.   268.  WEBER,  UTAH,  April  25th,  1862. 

i.     BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Light  and  Life  of  the  world;  even  Jesus 
Christ.     I  am  about  to  speak  unto  you  concerning  the  gathering 


528  CONCERNING    FIRE-ARMS    AND    AMMUNITION. 

together,  to  one  place,  of  the  fire-arms  and  ammunition  belonging 
to  my  people.  I  should  have  spoken  unto  you  before  upon  this 
subject  if  I  had  not  been  otherwise  engaged.  You  know  that  I 
have  had  no  opportunity  to  do  so,  because  I  have  had  to  keep 
you  writing  upon  other  subjects  as  fast  as  it  was  possible  for  you 
to  write.  But  knowing  that  it  was  necessary  to  attend  to  that 
matter  before  I  should  have  the  opportunity  to  speak  unto  you,  I 
moved  upon  my  servants  to  attend  to  it,  intending,  as  soon  as  I 
should  have  an  opportunity,  to  explain  the  matter  unto  you,  in 
order  that  you  might  fully  understand  it.  I  have  to  work  in  a 
way  to  make  all  things  work  together  and  burst  at  the  same  time ; 
and  to  do  this,  I  have  to  work  in  mine  own  way.  I  know  how  to 
bring  things  up  to  a  head  at  once,  and  how  to  burst  them  when  I 
have  done  so.  You  will  see  that  when  I  have  done  so,  I  will 
cause  a  commotion.  I  will  shake  all  things  to  the  center.  All 
things  are  working  well. 

2.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — it  would  be  well  for 
you  to   gather  together  all  the  fire-arms  and  ammunition  to  one 
place,  even  near  to  your  own  house,  and  appoint  a  person  to  take 
charge  of  them ;   and  he  shall  be  subject  to  your  counsel  in  all 
things.     You  must  appoint  a  faithful  man  to  fill  that  office,  and  he 
shall  be  counseled  by   none  but   you  while  he  is  acting  in  that 
office.      Your  counselors  may  counsel   my    people    in    all    other 
things  as  far  as  they  may  be  able  to  do  so;    but  I  shall  not  give 
unto  them  the  power  to  counsel  the  man  whom  you  shall  appoint 
to  that  office.     I  will  counsel  you,  and  you  shall   counsel  him.     I 
will  wholly  control  that  matter  through  you.     Let  not  my  servants, 
ytmr  counselors,  think  that  I   am  slighting  them ;   that  is  not  my 
intention.      I    will  respect  them  in    their   places.      If  that  man 
should  be  counseled  by  many  individuals   he  might  be   misled, 
and  thereby  cause  great  trouble  and   confusion,  which  will  not  be 
the  case  if  he  is  only  counseled  by  one  person.     My  servants  will 
understand  me  aright. 

3.  You  must   appoint   Peter  Christian   Klemgard  to  fill  this 
office  of  which  I  have  spoken.     I  know  him,  and  have  confidence 
in  him.     Let  Kim  accept  of  the  appointment  and  fill  it  faithfully, 
and,  in  due  time,  he  shall  be  promoted  to  great  honors   in  my 
kingdom.     He  shall  reap  the  reward  of  Tiis  labors  in  an  after  day. 


CONCERNING    FIRE-ARMS    AND    AMMUNITION.  529 

When  he  shall  have  gathered  together  all  the  arms  and  ammuni- 
tion, he  shall  take  charge  of  them,  and  no  person  shall  take  away 
a  gun  or  a  pistol  without  his  consent.  Should  any  person  attempt 
to  do  so,  he  shall  be  stopped.  If  my  servant  should  not  be  able 
to  stop  them,  he  shall  call  upon  others  to  assist  him,  and  any  per-^ 
son  who  refuses  to  assist  him  shall  be  punished.  He  shall  not 
suffer  more  than  five  guns  or  pistols  to  go  out  in  one  day,  unless 
more  than  that  number  of  persons  are  called  to  go  out  on  the 
range  in  search  of  cattle  or  horses.  In  such  cases,  he  shall  not 
suffer  more  than  ten  guns  or  pistols  to  go  out  at  the  same  time ; 
and  those  who  take  them  out  shall  return  them  the  same  day  to  my 
servant.  But  if  it  is  impossible  for  the  persons  to  return  the  same 
day,  they  shall  deliver  up  the  arms  immediately  upon  their  return. 
My  servant  shall  not  give  unto  any  person  more  than  five  rounds 
of  ammunition ;  and  those  who  may  not  be  called  to  use  it,  shall 
return  it  unto  him ;  they  shall  not  waste  it.  I  am  the  Lord,  and 
they  cannot  hide  their  actions  from  me.  I  see  every  move  which 
my  people  make,  and  I  will  reward  them  according  to  their  works; 
for  I  am  the  Lord,  and  who  can  stay  my  hand?  I  have  all 
power  both  in  heaven  and  upon  the  earth,  and  I  will  bring  all 
mine  enemies  under  my  feet. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.     I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts.     Even 
so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION  CONCERNING  THE  PORTRAIT  AND 
PROCLAMATION  OF  THE  LORD. 


No.  269.  WEBER,  UTAH,  April  29th,  1862. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Alpha  and  Omega,  the  beginning  and 
the  end,  even  the  Lord  your  God,  whose  words  are  quick  and 
powerful,  sharper  than  a  two-edged  sword.  I  am  about  to  speak 
unto  you  upon  an  important  subject.  You  say  that  you  can  see 
great  difficulties  ahead  of  you ;  that  they  are  right  upon  you ;  and 
you  wish  to  know  whether  I  am  willing  to  sustain  you  or  not ; 
whether  I  have  mine  army  stationed  throughout  the  world,  even  at 


530  THE    LAST    TF.ST. 

the  head  of  all  the  governments  thereof.  In  short,  you  wish  to 
know  whether  I  have  all  things  ready,  so  that  if  I  was  needed  I 
could  come  unto  you  in  one  instant.  I  will  inform  you  concern- 
ing this  matter.  Should  you  need  to  see  me  the  next  minute,  I 
am  perfectly  ready  to  come  unto  you.  I  am  always  ready  to  do 
my  own  part,  and  if  you  will  do  your  part,  it  is  all  that  I  require 
at  your  hands.  You  need  not  fear  that  I  shall  not  be  ready 
when  I  am  needed,  for  I  shall.  I  am  always  ready  to  do  my 
duty,  and  I  never  fail  to  do  it.  All  that  I  ask  of  you  is  to  open 
the  way  for  me ;  this  is  your  duty.  You  need  not  fear  that  after 
you  have  opened  the  way  for  me,  I  will  not  come  and  open  the 
way  for  you.  I  will  speedily  satisfy  you  upon  this  matter. 

2.  The  last   test  has  now  begun,    and  it  will  not  stop  until  I 
come.     I  will  work  all  things  connected  with  it  myself.     You  need 
not  trouble   yourself  as   to   which   way   things   will  go ;  for  I  will 
make  all  things  go  aright.     You  must  be  led  by  me  in  all  things, 
and  you  will  always  be  led  aright. 

3.  I  will  now  see  if  I  cannot  penetrate  the  hypocrites  who  are 
among  these  people.     They  take  but   little   notice  of  my  words. 
They  do  not  believe  them;  neither  do  they  believe  that  I  intend  to 
cut  them  all  off,  although  I  have  told  them  so  many  times  that  I 
would  do  so.     They  must  be  fools  !     But  I  will  undeceive  them  at 
once.     It  is  their   unbelief  which  causes  them  to  act  the  part  of 
hypocrites ;  for  if  they  fully  believed  that  I  should  cut  off  all  hypo- 
crites, they  would  not  act  as  they  do.     But  when  I   commence  to 
cut  them  off  from  the  earth,  they  will  -be  taken  by  surprise.     They 
will  be  surprised  at  my  fulfilling  the  promises  which  I  have  so  often 
made.     What  fools  they  must  be !     They  will  shortly  call  out  for 
the  devil  to  help  them  ;  but  they  will  call  upon  him  in  vain.    They 
will  call  upon  those  blasphemers  who  stand  at  the  head  of  the  old 
Church  to  assist  them,  even  upon  those  who  have  blasphemed  my 
holy  name  in  the  midst  of  my  house.     O  ye  hypocrites  and  blas- 
phemers !     Ye  cannot  help  yourselves  in  this  case.      Your  dooms 
are   fixed  !     You  may  strive  to  come  up  against  me  to  attempt  to 
deliver  your  fellow  hypocrites-  out  of  my  hands,   but  when  you  do 
this,   I  will  take  hold  of  you.     I   have  set  a  trap  for  you.  and  I 
I   shall   catch   you  in  it.      I   can   make  you  come  to  my  terms  at 
last. 


THE    SEPARATION.  53! 

4.  And  behold,   I  give  unto  you  a   commandment,  my  son : 
You  shall  now  prepare  yourself  and  get  all  things  ready  for  a  test 
between  my  faithful  people  and  the  hypocrites.      And  when  I  call 
upon  you  to  separate  my  people  into  two  companies,  you  must  do 
so ;  and  when  that  is  done,  you  shall  command  the  faithful  of  my 
people  to  slay  all  the  hypocrites.     They  shall  not  leave  one  of  them 
alive.     You  shall  continue  the  work  until  you  have   cut   off  every 
hypocrite  that  comes  within  your  reach ;  and  when  you  have  done 
so,   you   will   have   done   your  part,  and  will  have  opened  the  way 
for  me.     It  will  stir  mine  enemies,  and  then  I  will  meet  them. 

5.  I   do   not  call   upon  you  to  preach  unto  this  people  any 
more   on   this  side  of  my   coming ;  neither   do   I  forbid   you   the 
privilege  of  talking  to  them  when  you  feel  to  do   so.     I  wish  you 
to  prepare  for  war;  for  this   is   now  your   duty.      I  will  tell  you 
when  to  separate  these  people;  and   when   you  do  so,  you  must 
gird  on  your  sword  and  mount  your   horse,  aud  ride  a  few  rods 
from   the  main  body   of  my  people,  and  call  upon  all  those  who 
will  abide  my  law  faithfully  and  execute   it   upon  the  transgressors 
thereof,   to  come  over  to  you ;  and  those  who  will  not  live  by  my 
law,  and  defend  it  unto  death,  will  be   rejected  by  me.     All  the 
members  of  my  kingdom  must  both  live  my  law  and  defend  it. 

6.  I   am  about  to   reveal  unto  you  the  place  where  you  and  I 
shall  stand,  even  that  spot  of  ground  which  must  be  beautified.      I 
shall  show  it  unto  you  in  time  for  you  to  have  it  beautified.     You 
must  have  linen,  pure  and  white,   laid  down  for  you  and   me  to 
stand  upon.     You  may  lay  carpets  or  some  other  suitable  things 
underneath  the  linen.     Your  horse  must  be  as  white  as  he  possibly 
can  be  made ;    and   you    must  be  dressed   in   white  throughout. 
My  horse  is  white;   therefore,  the  ground  on  which  both  you  and 
I  shall  stand  must  be  white  also;   the  upper  covering  thereof  must 
be  white  linen.     Therefore  prepare  these  things,  and  have  them 
all  in  readiness,  in  order  that  when   the   time   comes  you  may  not 
be  detained;    for  you  will  then   have  no  time  to   spare.      I  shall 
come  suddenly ;  therefore  all  things  must  be  ready  in  proper  time. 

7.  And   now,   behold,  I   say  unto    you, — before   I    can    come 
unto  you   I  must  cast  my  shadow  before  me,  and  give  unto  you 
my  proclamation,  and  you  must  sign  it  with  your  own  hand ;    this 
you  have  the  power  to  do,  for  you  hold  the  same  keys  of  the  holy 


532  THE  PORTRAIT  AND  PROCLAMATION. 

priesthood  as  I  do.  If  you  did  not,  you  could  not  sign  my  name 
for  me.  You  wish  to  know  what  my  shadow  and  -proclamation 
are  that  you  must  sign  for  me.  I  will  inform  you.  My  shadow 
is  my  portrait ;  and  you  must  have  a  portrait  drawn  both  of  me 
and  my  horse.  My  horse  must  be  drawn  large,  and  in  a  circle. 
He  must  be  drawn  larger  than  my  servant  Gudmund  Gudmundsen 
drew  him  when  he  drew  the  twelve  generals  and  their  horses,  and 
he  must  be  drawn  white. 

8.  When  my  servant  draws  my  portrait,  he  must  represent  me 
as  a  large  man,  with  rather  long  features,  and  a  long  sandy  beard. 
I  can  scarcely  describe  unto  you  the  color  of  my  hair ;    but  it  is 
somewhat  light — much   lighter   than   yours.      My  hat  is  tall  with 
seven  crowns  upon  the  top  thereof.     I  am   dressed   as   a  man   of 
war.     This  is  the  description  of  my  portrait. 

9.  And  now  I  will  give  unto  you  my  proclamation.      It  is  as 
follows:     "To  all  nations  and  people  of  all  languages  who  dwell 
upon  the  face  of  the  earth,  be  it  known  unto  you  that  I  am  about 
to  establish  my   Kingdom   upon  the  earth,  and  all  people  shall 
either  abide  my  law,  or  perish.     My  law  is  eternal,  and  will  pre- 
vail, for  I  will  defend  it.     I  am  the  King  of  Israel,  even  the  King 
of  kings   and  Lord   of  lords  unto   Abraham's  seed;    even   Jesus 
Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen." 

10.  And  when  it  is  printed,  you  must   sign  it   for  me.     And 
you  shall  carry  my  portrait  and  proclamation  upon  the  front   of 
your  hat,  that  all   my  people   may  read   it.     You  must  have  my 
portrait  drawn  and  my  proclamation  printed   as  soon  as  you  pos- 
sibly can,  and  wear  them  upon  your  hat,  as   I   have   commanded 
you.     I  will  inform  you  when  to  wear  them.     Watch   the   move- 
ments of  my  spirit  upon  you,  and  you   will   never  err,  for   I   will 
always  make  you  understand  me  aright. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.  I  am  the  Stone  and  Shepherd 
of  Israel,  the  Bright  and  Morning  Star.  Even  so.  Amen  and 
Amen. 


CONCERNING  DUTY.  533 

REVELATION  CONCERNING  THE  DUTY  OF  THE 
LORD,  AND  THE  DUTY  OF  THE  PROPHET. 


No.  270.  WEBER,  UTAH,  May  ist,  1862. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  Jesus  Christ,  and  I  am  about  to  speak  unto 
you  concerning  your  duty.     You  have  a  duty  to  perform  as  well 
as  I  have,  and  each  of  us  must  do  our  own  duty  in  order  that  all 
things   may  go   on   aright.      Therefore,    it  is  right  that  you  should 
know  your  duty,  in  order  that  you  may  be  able  to  do  it.    It  is  your 
duty  to  cleanse  your  Church.     Wben  I  say  your  Church,  I  mean 
the   Church   over  which  you   preside.     The  people  whom  I  now 
include  in  your  Church,  are  those  who  have  yielded  obedience  to 
the  fulness  of  my  gospel.     I   include   none  else,  although  you  are 
the  president  over  all  Abraham's  seed.     I   have  spoken  unto  you 
in  this  way  in  order  that  you  may  understand   me  aright.      I  want 
you  to  cut  off  all  the  hypocrites  who  have  embraced  the  fulness  of 
my  gospel  and  have  turned  traitors  to  me.     Your  Church,  at  pres- 
ent, consists  of  those  who  have  yielded  obedience  to  the  fulness  of 
my  gospel ;  but  as  people  continue  to   obey   it,   your    Church  will 
gradually  increase  in  strength   and  numbers  until   all  people  who 
will  be  permitted  to  live  upon  the  earth  will  yield  obedience  unto 
its  laws. 

2.  You  knov^  that  your  Church  must  be  small  to  begin  with ; 
for   it  could  not  be  otherwise,  because  Abraham's  seed  is  blinded 
by   the   devil   so  that  you   cannot,  as    yet,  use   them  ;  but  I   will 
wrench  them  out  of  his  hands.      I  will  give  unto  you  all  your  own 
in   due   time ;  but   at  present  you   must  be   satisfied  with    small 
things.     Your   power   and   influence  will  gradually  increase  upon 
the  earth.     You  cannot  deal  with  the  children  of  Abraham  only  as 
you  can  approach  them  through  the  fulness  of  my  gospel.      When 
they  hear  it  and   refuse  to   obey   it,  they  are  in  your  hands,  and 
you    shall  deal   with  them ;   but   you  cannot  lawfully  punish  them 
before  they   have  had  the   privilege   of  hearing   it.       This  is  my 
law  unto  all  those  whose  names  are  written  in  the  Lamb's  Book  of 
of  Life.     But  you  can  lawfully  punish  all  those  people  who  have 
yielded    obedience    unto   the    fulness    of  my   gospel,    and    have 


534  CONCERNING    DUTY. 

departed  from  it ;  but  those  who  have  had  the  privilege  of  obeying 
it,  and  have  refused  to  do  so,  I  shall  cut  off  myself.  I  do  not  ask 
you  to  cut  these  off;  but  I  do  call  upon  you  to  cut  off  all  those 
who  have  turned  traitors  to  me,  even  all  such  as  come  within  your 
reach  ;  but  those  of  that  class  who  may  get  out  of  your  reach,  so 
that  you  cannot  get  at  them  without  putting  yourself  to  great 
inconvenience,  I  will  destroy,  myself.  And  when  you  have  cut  off 
all  those  who  may  be  within  your  reach,  you  will  have  done  your 
part.  You  must  cut  off  all  the  hypocrites  out  of  your  Church  from 
this  time  henceforth.  The  strongest  party  will  always  both  live 
my  law  and  defend  it,  so  that  you  will  always  have  an  abundance 
of  power  to  do  your  own  part ;  but  should  there  ever  be  a  time 
when  the  hypocrites  are  the  strongest  party,  I  will  cut  them  off  for 
you.  I  will  always  do  for  you  that  which  you  cannot  do  yourself; 
for  this  is  my  duty. 

3.  My  duty  is  to  cut  off  all  your  enemies  abroad,  even  to  over- 
throw  the  nations   of  the  earth,   in  order  to  clear  the  way  for  my 
servants  to  preach  the  gospel  and  establish  my  law  throughout  the 
whole  earth ;  this  I  can  soon  do  after  I  commence.     The  inhabit- 
ants of  the  earth  shall  know  that  I   am  the   master.      I   have  now 
revealed  unto  you  both  your  duty,  and  mine   own.     We  have  all 
the  power  necessary  to  do  the  work  which  we  have  to  do. 

4.  You  must  have  the  linen  and  the  carpets  ready  so  that  they 
can   be   laid  down  with  little  trouble,  and  you  must  have  all  other 
things   in   readiness   also;  for   I  am   about  to   call   upon  you  to 
divide  this  Camp,  and  to  cut  off  all  the  hypocrites ;  and  after  you 
have  done  so,  I  shall  come  unto  you.     I  shall  be  with  you  in  the 
course   of  one   day   after  that  time.     I  will  take  your  enemies  in 
time.     They  will  never  trouble  you  while  they  are  alive.     There- 
fore, prepare  for  me ;  for  lo,  I  come  quickly.     I  am  Jesus  Christ. 
Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  ARMY  OF  THE  KINGDOM.  535 

REVELATION    INSTRUCTING    THE    PROPHET    HOW 

TO  ORGANIZE  THE  ARMY  OF  THE 

KINGDOM. 


No.  271.  WEBER,  UTAJI,  May  2nd,  1862. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  Jesus  Christ,  and  I  wish  to  speak  unto  you 
concerning  the  organization  of  an  army.      I  am  about  to  organize 
an  army,  in   the  midst  of  my  people,  which  shall  continue  in  my 
kingdom  while  this  world  is  in  mortality.      The  duty,  of  this  army 
will   be  to  cleanse   my   kingdom  by  cutting  off  all  hypocrites  who 
may  embrace  the  fulness  of  my   gospel,    and  afterwards   will  not 
abide  my  law ;  all  such  characters  shall  be  cut  off  by  this  army.    I 
want  none  in  this  army  but  true-hearted  men,  who  will  defend  my 
law,  and  execute  it  upon  all  those  who  break  it.    I  want  no  traitors 
in   this  army.      My   people   will  understand  me.     It  is  my  will,  if 
arms  can  be  found,  that  all  those  men  who  have  yielded.obedience 
to  the  fulness  of  my  gospel  should  join   the  army,   in  connection 
with   those   of  their   brethren  who  have  already  joined  ;  but  if  suf- 
ficient arms  cannot  be  found  for  all,  they  need  not  be  discouraged; 
for  if  they  are  true  to  my  law,  I  will  accept  of  them  as  though  they 
were  soldiers  in  the  ranks.     He  that  honors  my  law,  honors  me ; 
but  he  that  rejects  my  law,  is  rejected  by  me.     I  am  the  Lord. 

2.  And  it  is  right  that  the  army  should  be  organized  into  com- 
panies,  of  twelve   in  each  company,  not  including  the  captains  of 
the  companies.     The  captains  of  the  companies  being  included, 
will  make  thirteen  in  each  company.     This   is  the   way   in   which 
they  should  be  organized  into  companies :    There  should  be  seven 
companies,   and  a  captain  over  each  company ;  and  the  seventh 
captain  must   be  the   commander  of  the  seven  companies.     He 
shall  have  ninety  men  in  his  company,  including  the  six  captains. 
And  when  I  have  cut  off  albyour  enemies  out  of  your   way,   and 
your   Church  increases   in  numbers,  your  army  will   increase  also, 
until  it  will  become   numerous ;  and  in  due  time  you  will  have  a 
a    mighty  army.      When   you  have   organized   seven    companies, 
with  ninety  men  in  each  company,  exclusive  of  the   captains,  you 
shall  appoint  one  of  those  captains  as   commander  over  the  seven 


•536  THE    ARMY    OF    THE    KINGDOM. 

companies.  He  shall  be  commander  of  six  hundred  and  thirty- 
six  men.  The  seventh  captain  shall  always  be  the  commander. 
He  shall  always  be  the  chief  commander  of  the  divisions  of  the 
army  below  him,  even  when  your  army  numbers  millions.  This  is 
the  order  in  which  your  army  shall  be  organized. 

3.  You  may  wish  to  know  what  I  mean  by  calling  it  your 
army.  It  is  your  army.  You  are  the  president  over  the  whole 
earth,  even  as  I  am  the  president  over  heaven,  under  my  Father. 
I  do  not  call  it  mine  army,  because  it  is  not  mine  army.  Mine 
army  consists  of  holy  angels,  who  are  celestial  beings  ;  but  .your 
army  will  consist  of  mortal  men.  It  is  my  duty  to  bring  mine 
army  to  assist  you,  because  your  people  are  in  the  hands  of  the 
devil;  they  are  now  his  slaves;  consequently,  they  are  of  no  use  to 
you.  You  cannot  u°>e  your  own  people  until  I  have  delivered 
them  into  your  hands  by  destroying  the  power  of  the  devil.  If  I 
did  not  do  this,  you  could  never  gain  a  foothold  upon  the  earth  to 
commence  to  set  up  a  temporal  l^ingdom  for  Abraham's  seed. 
You  are  wholly  dependent  upon  me  to  open  a  way  for  you,  and  to 
give  unto  you  your  rights  and  to  make  you  the  president  over  your 
own  people.  All  the  power  necessary  to  accomplish  this  is  in 
mine  own  hands.  I  am  your  general,  and  at  the  appointed  time, 
even  I  when  can  bring  all  things  to  a  head,  I  shall  be  commanded 
by  you.  Therefore,  let  the  faithful  of  my  people  form  themselves 
into  companies,  and  prepare  themselves  to  cut  off  all  hypocrites, 
which  is  their  duty ;  but  those  who  will  not  do  this,  must  not  join 
the  army ;  for  I  want  true  men,  and  none  else.  Let  those  who 
wish  to  become  soldiers  ask  themselves  this  question,  "Will  I  live 
the  law,  and  execute  it  upon  the  transgressor  thereof?  "  If  they 
will  not  do  this,  they  need  not  go  into  the  ranks ;  for  I  will  not 
accept  of  them.  They  should  know  that  military  men  must  be 
true  men. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.  I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


THE    FORESHADOWING.  537 

REVELATION     SHOWING     HOW     THE    COMING    OF 

THE  KINGDOM  OF  GOD  MUST  BE 

FORESHADOWED. 


No.  272.  WEBER,  UTAH,  May  3rd,  1862. 

1.  Lo,   I  AM  come  to  speak  unto  you  again,  my  son,  to  make 
known  unto  you  what  you  must  do.     This  is  a  time  of  war,  and 
you  must  prepare  for  it.     There  are  duties  which  you  have  to  per- 
form before  I  can  lawfully  come  and  cut  a  clear  way  through  your 
enemies,  so  that  you  can  set  up  a  kingdom  upon  the  earth  for  the 
house  of  Israel.     I  wish  you  to  foreshadow  my  coming,  and  also 
the  coming  of  the  first  eleven  generals  over  my  host.     You  need 
not  foreshadow  any    more    of   my    generals.     If  you  foreshadow 
the    first  twelve  it   is  all  that   I  require  at    your   hands    in    this 
respect. 

2.  You  must   call  out  eleven  men  besides  yourself,  even  your 
two  counselors  and  nine  of  the  apostles  who  were  first  called  to  the 
apostleship.     And  you  must  have  twelve  horses  for  the  twelve  men 
to   ride  upon,   and  they   must  travel  four  abreast ;  and  each  man 
must  be  well  dressed.     The  white,  the  red,  the  black  and  the  pale 
horses  must  form  the  first  rank,  and  lead  off,  and  the  others  must 
follow  in  their  own  order.     And  they  must  all  travel  seven  times 
around  this  Fort,  and  shout  a  loud   "hosanna"  seven  times;  and 
the  twelve  generals  over  the  heavenly  host  will  be  there  to  witness 
the  sight ;  and  directly  afterwards  we  will  come  unto  you  suddenly. 
The  faithful  of  my  people  will  then  see  us  as  we  are,  for  we  will 
fully  unveil  ourselves  unto  them,  and  they  shall  look  upon  us  until 
they   are  satisfied.      And  when  those  twelve  men  ride  around  this 
Fort,  you  must  have  your  sword  drawn,  and  my  servant  Richard 
Cook  must  have  his  sword  drawn  also,  and  my  servant  John  Banks 
must  have  his  balances  in  his  hand,  and  my  servant  John  Parson 
must  carry  my  law.     When  all  this  has  been  done,  the  coming  of 
the  twelve  generals  over  all  the  heavenly  host  will  have  been  fore- 
shadowed.    They   will  then  be  at  liberty  to  come  and  deliver  the 
faithful  of  my  people.     But  the  shadow  must   go  before   the   sub- 
stance ;  for  it  is  an  eternal  principle.     There  is  no  substance  with- 


538  THE    FORESHADOWING. 

out  a  shadow;  therefore,  all  substances  cast  their  shadows  before 
them. 

3.  You   must  also  foreshadow  the  setting  up  of  my  kingdom 
upon  the  earth.     You  must  have  tie  same  men  and  horses  in  the 
second  case  as  in  the  first ;  and  you  must  ride  round  the  Fort  seven 
times,  in  precisely  the  same  order  as  in  the  first  case,  and  my  peo- 
ple shall  give  unto  the  prophet  seven  cheers.     They  shall  hail  him 
as  lord  over  the  whole  earth  ;  for  this  is  his  right.    His  power  shall 
drive  all  evil  from  the  earth,  and  his  influence  shall  reign  and  rule 
forever.     He  shall  break  all  nations  to  pieces  as  a  potter's   vessel 
is    broken;    for    I    am    the    Lord,    and    I    will    give    unto   him 
power  over  all  evil.     No  enemy  shall  ever  stand  befor*  him  unto 
the  end. 

4.  And   now,   behold,  I  speak  unto  you  concerning  the  priest- 
hood after  the  order  of  Aaron.     You  must  select  twelve  men  out 
of  the  priesthood  of  Aaron,   and  they  must  have  twelve  rods  of 
wood  to  represent  the  twelve  rods  which  belong  to  the  twelve 
princes   of  Israel;  and  they  must  have  twelve  horses,  and  they 
must  travel  four  abreast.     The   bishop  and  his  counselors,  with 
another  man,  must  form  the  first  rank;  and  the  men  must  all  be 
well  dressed,  and  they  must  travel  around  this  Fort  twelve  times, 
in  order  to  acknowledge  the  twelve  princes  of  Israel.     This  will  be 
their  shadow ;  but  in  due  time  the  substance  will  come. 

5.  The  twelve  firstborn  sons  of  Adam  will  again  be  upon  the 
earth,  and  take  their  own  places  as  the  twelve  princes  of   Israel. 
All  things  which  were  not  done  away  with  at  my  first  coming  will 
be  restored  by  the  fulness   of  my  gospel.     And  when  the  twelve 
princes  of   Israel  again  come  to  the  Dearth  to  take  their  places,  I 
shall  give  unto  them  their  twelve  rods ;  for  they  will  be  the  rulers 
over  all  Abraham's  seed,  in  temporal  things;  but  I  shall  give  those 
rods  to  none  of  Aaron's  sons  but  the  legal  heirs  to  them.     Inas- 
much, therefore,   as  I  am  about  to  establish  a  kingdom  upon  the 
earth  for  the  house  of  Israel,  I  must  acknowledge  the  first  rulers 
in   that   kingdom   by  sending  their  shadows  before  them.      I  must 
acknowledge  all  leading  authorities,  both  in  heaven  and  upon  the 
earth,  by  casting  their  shadows  before  them.     This  I  am  doing  at 
the   commencement  of  my   kingdom.     Therefore,   do  as  I  have 
cammanded  you,  and  all  will  be  well.     I  am  Jesus  Christ.     Even 
so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


THE    LORD    PROMISES    TO    PROVIDE.  539 


THE     LORD    PROMISES    TO    SUPPLY    THE    PEOPLE 
WITH  FOOD.— CONCERNING  THE  FORE- 
SHADOWING OF  THE  ROD 
OF  MOSES. 


No.  273.  WEBER,  UTAH,  May  6th,  1862. 

1.  LISTEN   unto    my    words,   which   are   quick  and  powerful, 
sharper  than  a  two-edged  sword ;  for  I   am   about  to  speak  unto 
you  concerning  the  present  situation  of  my  people,   and  also   the 
preparing  of  the  people  for  the  great  event  which  lies  before  them. 
You  look  at  the  situation  of  my  people,  and  you  are  greatly  pained; 
for  you   see  that  they   are   destitute  of  food,  and  you  cannot  see 
what    can  be  done  for  them.     You    say  that   every   way   seems 
blocked  up,  so  that  my  people  cannot   obtain  that  which  is  neces- 
sary for  their  subsistence ;  and  what  to  do  to  relieve  them,  you  do 
not  know.     If  I  can  do  anything  for  them,  you  say  that  you  would 
like  me  to  do  it.    You  do  not  wish  to  see  them  brought  to  extreme 
poverty ;  but   if  I  do  not  speedily  supply  their  needs,  you  say  that 
such  will  be  the  case.     You  say  that  you  fully  depend  upon  me  to 
provide   for   mine  own  people ;  that  I  must  know  that  you  can  do 
nothing  for  them  ;  that   I  suffer  your  enemies  to  keep  your  hands 
tied,  so  that  you  can  do  nothing  either  for  yourself  or  them ;  and 
therefore  you  fully  depend  upon  me  to  supply  their  needs. 

2.  You  call  them  my  people.     In  one  sense  they  are  my  peo- 
ple ;  but   in   another  sense  they   are  not.     Strictly  speaking,  they 
are  your  people,  because  they   sprung  from  you.     You   have  the 
first  claim  on  them,  Aaron  has  the  second,  and  I  have  the  third. 
Thus,  there   are  three   persons  who  each  have  separate  claims  on 
Abraham's   seed.     You  have  the   first  claim,  because  by  you  the 
holy  priesthood  came  to  the  earth.    To  you  and  your  seed  belongs 
the  government  over   Adam's  posterity.     You   are  their  lawgiver. 
You  are  the  child  of  promise,  who  was  ordained  to  "bruise  the  ser- 
pent's head,"  and  to  destroy  his  power,  and  to  establish  righteous- 
ness, universally  and  eternally,   over  the  face  of  the  whole  earth ; 
therefore,  you  have  the  first  claim  upon  Abraham's  seed.     Aaron 
has  the  second  claim  on  Abraham's  seed,  because  the  lesser  priest. 


540  CONCERNING    THE    THREE    CLAIMS. 

hood  came  to  the  earth  through  him  to  them.  He  stands  at  the 
head  of  all  those  of  Adam's  children  whose  names  are  written  in 
the  Lamb's  Book  of  Life.  Under  the  president  of  the  high  priest- 
hood he  is  the  lawgiver  to  Adam's  posterity.  He  has  the  second 
claim  because  he  was  the  second  person  to  operate.  He  had 
introduced  his  seed  upon  the  earth  long  before  I  came  to  the 
earth  and  was  crucified  upon  the  cross.  Seth  was  born  long  before 
the  death  of  Abel.  Cain,  Abel  and  Seth  were  all  upon  the  earth 
at  the  same  time.  Seth  was  grown  up  to  manhood  before  Cain 
slew  Abel ;  and  Abel  had  a  seed  upon  the  earth  before  Cain  slew 
him,  and  his  seed  has  continued  upon  the  earth  ever  since.  The 
Bible  does  not  give  a  full  account  of  Cain,  Abel  and  Seth.  There 
are  many  things  contained  in  the  Bible  which  are  wrong' as  they 
now  are,  because  they  have  been  altered,  and  the  true  sense  there- 
of has  been  destroyed;  but  in  due  time  I  will  put  right  all  things 
contained  in  that  Book.  Those  three  men  have  each  a  seed  upon 
the  earth  which,  in  the  beginning,  started  from  them,  and  has  con- 
tinued upon  the  earth  ever  since.  Adam  knew,  long  before  either 
Cain  or  Abel  were  born,  that  Cain  would  slay  Abel  when  he 
should  have  the  opportunity  to  do  so.  Adam  knew  them  both 
more  than  a  million  years  before  that  circumstance  took  place. 
He  had  no  occasion  to  wait  until  that  circumstance  had  taken 
place  in  order  to  know  that  it  would  take  place ;  for  he  knew  it 
long  before  either  Cain  or  Abel  had  a  spiritual  existence.  There- 
fore, Aaron  has  the  second  claim.  I  was  called  to  operate  the  last. 
My  blood  was  spilt  upon  the  cross  for  all  Abel's  children  whose 
names  are  written  in  the  Lamb's  Book  of  Life,  and  therefore,  I 
hold  the  last  claim.  It  is  my  duty  to  finish  the  work,  and  to  do 
that  for  you  and  Aaron  which  you  cannot  do  for  yourselves.  You 
are  both  in  weakness ;  but  the  power  is  in  my  hands,  and  I  have 
to  deliver  and  save  Abraham's  seed  through  you  and  Aaron,  We 
have  each  a  part  to  act,  and  we  have  to  work  together  in  perfect 
union.  I  hold  the  last  claim  because  I  am  celestial.  I  am  not  of 
this  earth.  All  the  claim  that  I  have  on  Aaron's  children  is  to 
save  them,  and  raise  them  from  mortality  to  immortality,  even  to 
eternal  life.  This  is  my  duty,  and  until  I  have  accomplished  it,  I 
"shall  not  have  finished  my  work  as  a  Mediator  and  a  Savior  to 
"Abraham's  children.  Therefore,  it  is  my  duty  to  operate  the  last 
and  to  finish  the  whole  work. 


THE    LORD    PROMISES    TO    PROVIDE.  54! 

3.  You  look  unto  me  to  supply  the  needs  of  these  people;  for 
you   say  that   it  is  my  duty  to  do  it,  and  that  you  do  not  wish  to 
have  your  mind  burdened  with  that  which  belongs  to  me ;  for  you 
think  that  ^you   have   enough  to  bear  without  being  thus  afflicted. 
You  say  that  you  wish  me  to  do  mine  own  duty,  and  you  will   do 
yours.     If  you  will  do  your  duty,  that  is  all  that  I  require  at  your 
hands.     You  need  not  fret  about  the  poverty  of  these    people,  for 
I  will  provide  for  them  myself.     I  will  continue  to  open  a  way  for 
them,    so   that   they   will   have  sufficient   food  until  I   deliver  an 
abundance  of  everything  into  their  hands,  which  I  shall  do  .as  soon 
as  they  can  get  all  things  ready  for  the  test.     They  will  not  need 
a  greal  deal  more  provision  in  this  place ;  but  what  they  do  need, 
I  will  open  a  way  for  them  to  obtain.    I  will  provide  for  them  from 
day  to  day,  as  I  have  hitherto  done.     I  have  supplied  the  needs  of 
these  people  in  this  place  up  to  the  present  time,  so  that  they  have 
not,  to  any  great  extent,   lacked   bread.     Therefore,   rest  yourself 
contented  and  trust  in  me,  and  I  will  supply  the  needs  of  my  faith- 
ful people  unto  the  end.     I  am  the  Lord. 

4.  And  now,  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — I  wish  to  speak 
unto  you   upon   another   subject.     You  must  have  a  rod  made  of 
wood,   as   much   as  five  feet  in  length,  with  a  large  ball  on  the  top 
of  it,  in  order  to  foreshadow  the  rod  which  I  am  about  to  give  unto 
you.     It  must  be  made  as  neat  as  possible.     As  I  have  said  unto 
you  before,  so  I  say  unto  you  again, — the  shadow  must  go  before 
the  substance ;  therefore,  you  must  foreshadow  the  rod  which  I  am 
about  to  give   unto  you   before  you  can  lawfully  take  it  into  your 
hands.     And   when  you   travel  seven  times  around  this  Fort  the 
second  time,   you   must  hold  your  sword  in  your  right  hand,  and 
the  rod   in  your  left  hand  until   you  have   ridden  round  the  Fort 
seven  times.     If  you  had  only  your  rod  to  carry,  it  would  be  right 
to  carry  it  in  your  right  hand ;  but   inasmuch  as   you   have  both  a 
sword   and   a  rod  to  carry  at  once,  you  must  carry  your  sword   in 
your  right  hand,  and  the  rod  in  your  left  hand. 

5.  I    do  not,   at  this  time,  wish  to  give  unto  you  the  signature 
of  the  first  God,  which  is  engraven  upon  the  rod  which  I  shall  give 
unto  you ;  but  when  I  give  it  unto  you,  you  will  see  the  signature 
engraven  upon  it.     I  shall  keep  that  signature  secret  until   I  give 
unto  you  the  rod ;  for  it  is  unlawful  for  me  to  reveal  it  unto  you 


542  THE    PROCLAMATION    AND    SIGNATURE. 

until  I  give  unto  you  the  rod ;  and  when  I  do  this,  you  will  have 
the  power  of  your  office  at  once ;  but  while  you  are  in  weakness  I 
cannot  reveal  that  secret  unto  you.  I  cannot  do  that  which  the 
law  forbids  me  to  do.  But  you  may  place  the  following  signature 
upon  the  rod  which  my  people  will  make  for  you,  as  a  shadow  of 
that  signature  which  is  upon  the  rod  which  I  shall  give  unto  you : 
"To  all  nations  and  people  of  all  languages  that  now  dwell  upon 
the  earth :  Be  it  known  unto  you  that  I  am  sent  by  the  great  King 
of  Kings,  and  Lord  of  Lords,  to  rule  over  all  Adam's  posterity; 
and  being  his  representative,  I  hold  in  my  hand  this  emblem  of 
power,  unto  which  all  nations  and  kingdoms  of  the  earth  must 
bow;  for  I  am  the  legitimate  ruler  over  all  the  earth,  and  my 
authority  is  sanctioned  by  the  first  God ;  therefore,  I  hold  in  my 
hand  an  emblem  of  power  to  represent  his  scepter  which  will 
shortly  be  given  unto  me."  You  must  sign  this  proclamation  with 
your  own  hand ;  for  there  is  none  upon  the  earth  greater  than  you. 
And  when  you  have  signed  it,  I  will  sanction  it.  I  will  sanction 
all  that  you  do,  and  I  will  lead  you  aright  in  all  things.  You  must 
sign  it  in  the  following  manner:  "I  am  Joseph  Morris,  President 
of  the  Melchisedec  Priesthood."  This  signature  will  answer  until 
I  give  unto  you  the  rod  which  is  signed  by  the  first  God.  This  is 
only  a  shadow  to  go  before  the  substance. 

6.  And   it  is  my  will  that  my   servant  Richard  Cook  should 
wear  a  printed  card  upon  the  front  of  his  hat ;  and   he  must   have 
these  words  printed  upon  it:     "Life,  prosperity,  glory  and   exalta- 
tion— the  reward  of  the  law-abiding  citizens  of  my  Kingdom.    But 
the  reward  of  those  who  break  my  law  will  be  death  and  destruc- 
tion." 

7.  And  now,  behold,   I   speak  unto  you  concerning  the  rod 
which  is  to  represent  Aaron's  rod.     It  must  have  a  large  ball  upon 
the  top  of  it,  much  larger  than  the  other  rods ;    a»d  leaves  and 
branches  must  be  painted  upon  it.     It  must  be  made  to  look  as 
though  it  was  blossoming.    My  people  must  beautify  all  those  rods 
as  well  as  they  possibly  can.     I   will  not  hold  you  any  longer  at 
this  time;  but  I  will  speak  unto  again.      I  am  the  Light  and  Life 
of  the  world ;  even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


CONCERNING  THE  ROYAL  ROBE.  543 

REVELATION  CONCERNING  THE  PROPHET'S  ROBE. 


No.  274.  WEBER,  UTAH,  May  yth,  1862. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Light  and  Life  of  the  world,  even  Jesus 
Christ,  and  I  am  about  to  speak  unto  you  again.  You  wish  to 
know  something  more  about  the  royal  robe  which  I  have  promised 
to  give  unto  you.  It  belongs  to  the  first  God ;  and  the  rod  which 
I  shall  give  unto  you  belongs  to  the  first  God  also.  They  were 
both  delivered  into  the  hands  of  your  Father  when  his  world 
entered  into  mortality.  Previous  to  that  time  you  received  your 
ordination  under  the  hands  of  your  own  Father,,  and  he  was 
assisted  by  two  other  Gods,  who  were  his  counselors.  By  these 
three  Gods  you  were  ordained  to  rule  over  Adam's  posterity,  even 
to  be  their  lawgiver,  and  to  either  bring  those  of  them  who  are 
in  mortality  to  obedience  to  -the  law^  or  else  to  destroy  them  from 
off  the.  face  of  the  earth,  until  the  law  has  become  universal.  It  is 
your  calling  to  accomplish  this  work,  even  to  make  all  crooked 
places  straight,  and  rough  places  smooth.  After  you  had  received 
your  ordination  under  the  hands  of  your  own  Father  to  rule  over 
Adam's  posterity,  the  first  God  sanctioned  your  ordination  by  giv- 
ing his  own  rod,  which  is  his  scepter,  unto  your  Father,  and  also 
his  own  robe;  and  your  Father  was  compelled  by  law  to  give  them 
to  you  when  you  took  your  mission  to  this  earth.  Just  previous  to 
taking  your  first  mission  to  this  earth  of  Adam's,  you  came  to  our 
earth,  which  is  celestial,  and  you  brought  with  you  the  robe  and 
scepter ;  and  when  you  left  our  world  to  come  upon  this  earth  on 
your  first 'mission,  you  left  them  with  my  Father  who  is  compelled 
by  law  to  take  care  of  them  until  you  need  them,  and  when  you 
need  them  he  is  compelled  by  law  to  send  them  •  unto  you.  He 
cannot  withhold  them  when  you  need  them,  for  you  first  brought 
them  unto  him,  and  he  is  compelled  to  give  them  unto  you  when 
he  has  given  unto  you  the  leading  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood, 
even  when  he  has  raised  you  up ;  but  he  is  compelled  to  give  unto 
you  the  theory  of  the  gospel  before  he  can  give  unto  you  the 
power  thereof.  The  robe  and  rod  which  you  brought  unto  us  are 
always  either  in  our  possession  in  heaven,  or  else  in  your  posses- 


544  THE    ROBE    AND    THE    ROD. 

sion  upon  the  earth.  I  shall  give  unto  you  the  rod  directly  after 
you  have  foreshadowed  it.  When  you  took  your  first  mission  to 
this  earth,  Adam  sanctioned  the  ordination  which  you  received 
under  the  hands  of  your  Father  by  ordaining  you  to  preside  over 
all  his  posterity.  This  is  according  to  the  order  of  the  holy  priest- 
hood. You  have  the  sanction  of  the  first  God,  the  sanction  of 
your  own  Father,  and  also  the  sanction  of  Adam ;  therefore,  you 
have  the  sanction  of  three  Gods,  which  completes  your  appoint- 
ment. The  Eternal  Father  sanctions  all  that  they  have  done  in 
your  appointment ;  therefore,  you  will  be  in  full  power  as  soon  as 
I  have  given  unto  you  your  robe  and  rod. 

2.  Your  Father  has  a  robe  and  rod  of  his  own  which  he  holds 
in  his  own  possession.     He  did  not  give  them  unto  you  when  you 
came  to  take  your  mission  on  Adam's  earth;    but  he  gave  unto 
you  the  robe  and  rod  of  the  first   God.     But   when   you   were   a 
redeemer,  and  filled  the  office  which    I   am  now  filling,  you  used 
your  Father's  robe  and  rod,  even  as  I  am  now  using  my  Father's 
robe  and  rod ;   but  you  have  never  used  them   since,  neither  will 
you  ever  be  called  to  use  them  again. 

3.  You  wish  to  know  whether  I  am  pleased  with   the   rigging 
which  you  have  obtained  for  your  horse,  and   also  your   sword. 
They  are  not   at  all  suitable  for  the  occasion.     My  people  should 
strive  to  obtain  a  suitable  sword,  and  more  suitable   rigging  for 
your  horse.     I  know  that  my  people  are   poor   and  unable  to  do 
a  great  deal  either  for  you  or  the  rest  of  my   servants.     But  it   is 
not  lawful  for  the  rest  of  my  servants  to  have  their  horses   rigged 
as  beautifully  as  your  horse  should   be  rigged.     My   people   must 
consider  your  position,  and   give  honor  to  whom   honor  is   due. 
Every   man   should   be   treated  according  to  the  rank  which  he 
belongs  to.     When  the  rest  of  my  servants  are  called  to  hold  the 
same  office  up(3n  other  mortal  earths  as  you  are  now  called  to  hold 
upon  this  earth,  they  will  be  entitled  to  every  blessing  and  endow- 
ment which  you  are  now  entitled  to. 

4.  I  do  not  particularly  wish  to  blame  my  people  •    but  they 
are  very  forgetful  and  short-sighted.     I  wish  to  stir  up  their  minds 
to  look  at  all  things  aright.     They  are  very  apt  to  run   over  au- 
thority, and  undervalue  it,  which  is   a  great  sin,   even  the  sin   of 
ingratitude,  and  would  lead  a  people  down  to  destruction.     My 


AUTHORITY    SHOULD    BE    RESPECTED.  545 

people  must  respect  their  leaders  according  to  the  rank  and  place 
which  they  hold.  They  must  not  forget  to  do  this ;  for  if  they  do, 
they  will  see  great  affliction..  I  do  not  want  my  servants  to  mis- 
understand me.  I  do  not  wish  to  blame  or  censure  them  for 
assuming  that  which  does  not  belong  to  them,  for  they  have  nor 
done  so ;  but  I  wish  to  stir  up  the  minds  of  my  people  in  order 
to  put  them  in  a  way  to  look  at  things  aright.  They  are  so  apt  to 
err  in  their  ways  that  if  I  were  not  to  speak  in  this  manner  at 
times,  they  would  almost  forget  that  there  are  any  men  in  their 
midst  who  hold  any  authority  at  all,  and  consequently  my  servants 
would  lose  their  influence  over  them.  My  people  must  under- 
stand that  if  they  fight  against  those  men  whom  I  have  called  to 
lead  them,  they  fight  against  me.  If  my  servants  are  faithful,  and 
uphold  my  servant,  the  prophet,  my  faithful  people  shall  uphold 
them.  But  my  people  shall  not  uphold  any  man  who  will  not  up- 
hold my  servant,  the  prophet ;  for  such  persons  are  not  of  me — 
they  are  rejected  by  me ;  therefore  my  faithful  people  shall  uphold 
none  such.  I  am  the  Lord. 

5.  All  my  servants  must  stand  in  their  own   places,  and   be 
faithful  to  my  servant,  the  prophet;    and  my  people  must   uphold 
my  servants  as  they  would  uphold  me  if  I  were  in  their  midst ;   for 
those  that  my  servant  Joseph  has  called,  I  have  called.     I  called 
them  through  him,  and  I  will   uphold  them  as  long  as  they  are 
faithful  to  him.     If  they  are  faithful   unto  him,  they  are   faithful 
uuto  me ;   for  I  shall  always  lead  him  aright. 

6.  And  now,  my  son, — it  would  be  well  if  you  could  obtain  a 
better  sword,  and  better  rigging  for  your  horse  than  you  now  have; 
but  if  you  cannot  do  so,  I  will  accept  of  that  which  you  now  have. 
I  will  shortly 'speak  unto  you  again,   and  make  known  unto   you 
some  things  which  you  will  need  to  know  before  my  coming.     I 
am  now  quickly  winding  up  affairs,  in  order  that  the  way  may  be 
clear  before   me.       I  shall   come   speedily.      I  am  the  Glorious 
Branch  of  Jesse,  the  Bright  and  Morning  Star;   even  Jesus  Christ. 
Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


546          THE  FORESHADOWING  OF  THE  ROBE. 

REVELATION  SHOWING  HOW  THE  PROPHET'S  ROBE 

AND  THE  ROBE  OF  JESUS  CHRIST  MUST 

BE  FORESHADOWED. 


No.  275.  WEBER,  UTAH,  May  8th,  1862. 

T.  I  AM  about  to  speak  unto  you  again,  my  son;  for  my  work 
presses  me  very  much  at  present,  and  will  continue  to  do  so  until 
I  come  unto  you  in  power,  which  I  shall  do  very  soon  after  you 
have  foreshadowed  my  coming.  You  know  that  the  substance  is 
not  long  before  it  makes  its  appearance  after  the  shadow  has  been 
seen;  and  so  it  will  be  with  respect  to  my  coining.  As  soon  as 
the  shadow  shall  have  passed  before  my  people,  the,  substance  will 
begin  to  make  its  appearance  ;  for  the  substance  is  connected  with 
the  shadow ;  they  both  go  together.  It  is  impossible  for  a  shadow 
to  exist  without  a  substance ;  where  one  is  the  other  must  be. 

2.  And  now,  behold,  I  speak  unto  you  concerning  the  fore- 
shadowing of  that  robe  which  I  shall  give  unto  you ;  for  you  must 
foreshadow  that  also.  You  must  have  a  robe  made  of  fine  white 
linen,  and  you  must  wear  it  when  you  ride  around  the  Fort  tile 
second  seven  times.  You  will  foreshadow  me  and  the  remaining 
eleven  generals  over  all  the  heavenly  hosts  when  you  ride  around 
the  Fort  the  first  seven  times,  and  at  that  time  you  must  carry  with 
you  my  proclamation  and  signature  upon  the  front  of  your  hat,  as 
I  have  said  unto  you  before.  You  must  foreshadow  me  as  a  man 
of  war  upon  that  occasion.  You  need  not  wear  the  robe  which 
my  people  must  malj:e  for  you,  nor  yet  carry  your  rod ;  but  you 
must  have  a  drawn  sword  in  your  hand,  and  my  proclamation  and 
signature  upon  the  front  of  your  hat ;  and  you  must  wear  your 
light  checked  dress.  If  you  had  an  officer's  dress,  it  would  please 
me  much  better ;  for  if  you  had,  I  should  be  much  better  fore- 
shadowed than  when  you  wear  plain  clothing.  But  on  account  of 
the  poverty  of  my  people,  they  cannot  obtain  those  things  which 
would  be  the  most  proper  and  suitable  for  the  occasion ;  therefore, 
I  shall  have  to  accept  of  those  things  which  they  can  obtain.  I  do 
not  require  impossibilities  at  their  hands.  To  properly  foreshadow 
me,  and  the  remaining  eleven  generals,  those  twelve  men  who  will 


THE  FORESHADOWING  OF  THE  ROBE  AND  ROD.     547 

be  called  to  foreshadow  us,  should  be  dressed  in  military  apparel. 
They  should  each  have  an  officer's  dress,  and  the  first  seven  of 
them  should  wear  crowns  according  to  their  birthright,  even  from 
one  crown  up  to  seven.  In  this  manner  we  should  be  properly 
foreshadowed.  But  when  my  people  have  done  the  best  they  can, 
we  shall  have  to  accept  of  their  work. 

'3.  You  will  foreshadow  your  own  robe  and  rod  the  second 
seven  times  that  you  ride  around  the  Fort,  and  you  will  foreshadow 
my  robe  and  rod  at  the  same  time.  Your  robe  must  be  made  long 
and  wide  at  the  bottom,  and  it  should  be  one  foot  longer  than 
from  your  shoulder  to  the  ground.  You  must  wear  it  when  you 
ride,  for  it  is  not  for  you  to  walk  in;  and  you  must  wear  your 
checked  dress  under  it.  It  must  be  made  with  sleeves,  and  it 
must  wrap  around  your  body.  It  must  cover  your  body,  and  not 
one-half  of  it  only.  A  robe  such  as  the  people  of  the  old  Church 
wear  only  covers  one  side  of  a  person ;  they  are  only  half  robes, 
and  represent  the  priesthood  in  part.  If  my  servant  Joseph-  Smith 
had  known  the  nature  of  his  robe,  and  what  it  represented,  he 
would  have  known  that  he  only  held  the  holy  priesthood  in  part ; 
for  the  robe  covering  only  one  side  represented  imperfection  and 
weakness,  even  the  priesthood  in  part.  If  he  had  had  a.  perfect 
robe  to  cover  him  all  around,  with  sleeves  in  it,  it  would  have 
proved  that  he  held  the  full  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood ;  for  the 
man  that  holds  a  perfect  priesthood  must  wear  a  perfect  robe. 
Therefore,  my  son,  you  must  wear  a  perfect  robe,  because  you 
hold  a  perfect  priesthood. 

4.  You  wish  to  know  what  kind  of  a  hat  you  are  to  wear  when 
you  carry  my  proclamation  and   signature.     You   should  wear  a 
black  hat  at  that  time ;  a  white  hat  would  not  be  proper  for  you  to 
wear.     Your   outside  covering  must  be  of  different  colors.     You 
must  appear  as  much   like  a  man  of  war  as  you  possibly  can  when 
you  foreshadow  me ;  but  when  you  go  around  the  Fort  the  second 
seven  times,  you  must  wear  a  white  hat  and  your  white  robe.     At 
that  time,  you  need  not  carry  my  proclamation  around  with  you. 

5.  When  you  foreshadow  the  heavenly  and  earthly  orders,  you 
must  have  your  horse's  mane  plaited  in  seven  parts,  and  each  part 
must  be  tied  at  the  bottom,   with   white   rosettes  attached.     Your 
horse    must  be   washed  clean,   even  as   white   as   possible  for  the 


548  CONCERNING  THE  PROPHET. 

occasion,  and  you  must  also  have  your  own  hair  divided  into  seven 
parts.  You  do  not  seem  to  put  yourself  to  much  trouble  about 
dividing  your  hair  into  seven  parts ;  but  you  wear  it  plain  almost 
continually,  as  though  it  was  of  little  consequence  whether  your 
hair  is  divided  ,or  not.  You  must  get  some  person  to  attend  to 
the  dividing  of  your  hair  every  day.  You  must  wear  your  hair  in 
seven  locks  continually.  You  have  no  need  to  have  such  things 
neglected  for  the  want  of  a  little  more  help. 

6.  You  are  very  much  afraid  of  putting  any  person  about,  in 
the  least,  on  your  account.  How  much  have  you  been  put  about 
on  these  people's  account  ?  A  thousand  times  more  than  they 
will  ever  put  themselves  about  for  you.  But  few  of  my  people 
appreciate  the  gift  which  I  have  sent  unto  them.  They  do  not 
seem  to  know  that  they  have  the  best  and  most  unassuming  man 
in  their  midst  that  ever  trod  upon  this  earth  as  a  prophet.  If  I 
should  take  him  away  from  them,  they  would  never  meet  with 
another  man  like  unto  him  for  justice,  virtue  and  integrity ;  for 
there  is  none  upon  the  earth.  He  will  face  anything  for  truth.  I 
could  not  find  another  man  upon  the  earth  that  could  have  done 
what  he  has  done.  He  will  suffer  all  manner  of  abuse,  and  never 
give  way.  He  never  gave  way  upon  this  earth.  But  when  I  have 
to  deal  with  some  men,  they  give  way  over  a  thing  of  naught  and 
betray  their  trust.  He  has  never  done  this,  although  he  has  been 
placed  in  the  most  trying  circumstances  that  ever  man  was  placed 
in.  If  a  man  would  give  way  at"  all,  he  would  give  way  when 
placed  in  such  circumstances  as  those  which  my  servant  has  been 
placed  in.  When  a  man,  being  placed  in  such  circumstances  as 
my  servant  has  been  placed  in,  overcomes  them,  he  overcomes  all 
things ;  therefore,  he  is  entitled  to  rule  over  all  things — even  to 
rule  the  earth  with  a  rod  of  iron,  and  dash  the  nations  into  pieces. 
There  are  some  of  my  people  who  have,  to  a  certain  extent,  appre- 
ciated my  blessings ;  but  there  are  others-  who  have  not  done  so. 
Such  people  appear  to  know  nothing  about  the  gift  of  a  prophet  to 
lead  a  people,  which  is  the  greatest  of  all  gifts  unto  mortals.  They 
%do  not  know  how  to  treat  a  prophet;  if  they  did,  they  would 
watch  for  my  law  at  his  mouth,  and  run  with  delight  to  obey  it. 
They  should  treat  him  as  they  would  treat  me  if  'I  were  in  their 
midst.  Tney  respact  me  because  they  cannot  see  me,  or  talk  to 


CONCERNING    THE    THREE    PRISONERS.  549 

me  as  they  can  talk  to  him ;  but  if  I  were  in  their  midst,  and  they 
could  see  my  face  as  they  can  see  his,  they  would  think  as  little  of 
me  as  they  do  of  him.  The  person  who  despises  my  prophet, 
despises  me ;  who  loves  and  respects  him,  loves  and  respects  rrie ; 
who  obeys  him,  obeys  me ;  for  I  am  one  with  him,  and  he  is  one 
with  me. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.     I   am  the   Son   of  the  Eternal 
Father ;    even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    CONCERNING   THE    TWO    CONFLICT- 
ING POWERS,  AND  THE  THREE  PRISONERS. 


No.  276.  .    WEBER,  UTAH,  May  9th,  1862. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts,  even  Jesus  Christ,  and 
I  am  about  to  speak  unto  you  again.  You  wish  to  know  what 
you  are  to  do  with  those  three  men  whom  my  people  brought  into 
this  place,  and  who  have  departed  from  me,  and  who  are  now  my 
most  bitter  enemies.  You  know  my  law,  and  it  will  be  inflicted 
upon  them  at  the  right  time.  They  are  condemned  by  my  law  to 
perish,  and  they  shall  perish  at  the  right  time.  They  are  traitors 
to  my  government,  and  death  is  the  traitor's  doom.  You  must 
keep  a  strong  guard  over  them,  and  keep  them  in  this  place,  and 
my  people  must  feed  them  and  guard  them  until  I  am  ready  to 
divide  this  Camp.  I  will  divide  this  Camp  as  soon  as  you  are 
through  with  foreshadowing  my  coming.  I  want  to  get  through 
with  that  work  as  soon  as  I  can ;  for  I  want  to  purge  out  from 
among  my  faithful  people  all  the  hypocrites  as  soon  as  I  possibly 
can,  for  mine  enemies  all  around  are  getting  worked  up  at  a  rapid 
rate  at  this  time,  more  so  than  what  they  have  been  before.  They 
perceive  that  things  are  fast  working  up  to  a  head  with  my  people; 
and  as  fast  as  my  people  come  up  to  a  head,  they  come  up  to  a 
head.  Both  powers  will  meet  at  the  right  time,  and  then  there 
will  be  a  crash.  The  power  of  two  worlds  will  come  together 
when  I  come;  for  when  I  come  I  shall  bring  all  the  warriors  of 
heaven,  which  consists  of  the  whole  power  of  our  earth,  with  me. 


550  THE    ENEMIES    ARE    RESTLESS. 

When  I  speak  of  power,  I  mean  all  the  military  power  of  our 
earth.  The  inhabitants  of  this  earth  will  feel  their  weakness  when 
the  power  of  our  earth  has  been  brought  to  bear  upon  them. 
Therefore,  when  I  come,  two  worlds  will  come  in  contact  with 
each  other,  and  the  power  of  heaven  will  destroy  that  power  which 
has  ruled  this  world  for  six  thousand  years,  and  raise  it  to  immor- 
tality, to  exist  for  all  eternity. 

2.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — mine  enemies  who 
are  abroad  are  getting  restless.    They  wish  to  get  a  clue  on  my  peo- 
ple, so  that  they  may  have,  as  they  suppose,  a  just  cause  to  come 
up  against  my  people  to  "use  them  up"  (as  they  call  it).     They 
are   waiting  for  rny   people  to   do  something  so  that  they  can  lay 
hold  of  them  according  to  their  laws.      I  will  give  unto  them  what 
they  are  waiting  for  as  soon  as  all  things  are   made   ready   in   this 
Camp.    All  that  I  am  waiting  for  is  for  my  people  to  get  all  things 
ready  so  that  I  can  come.     You  understand  me  aright.     I  do  not 
wish  you  to  punish  those  three  men  until  I  tell  you,  and  then  you 
must  do  as  I  command  you.     You  must  keep  a  good  guard  over 
them,  and  treat  them  properly,  and  I  will  keep  your   enemies  off 
until  I  am  fully  ready  to  destroy  them,  and   then  I  will  let  them 
all  loose,  and  smite  them  all  dead  as  soon  as  I  have  done  so; 
and  I   will  supply  the  needs  of  my  people   until  that  is   done. 
After  that,  they  will  have  an  abundance   of  everything  to   render 
them  happy.     In  due  time  they  shall  be  the  richest  of  all  people. 
Therefore,  my  son,  be  diligent,  and  assist  me  as  well  as  you  can 
to  make  all  things  ready,  so  that  I  can  come  and  release  my  faith- 
ful people,  and  show  unto  them  my  glory ;    for  this  is  what  I  shall 
do  speedily. 

3.  I  need  not  reveal  unto  you  any  more  at  this  time.     You 
know  how  to  deal  with  those  three   men.      Do  as  I  have  com- 
manded you,   and   all   will  be   right.      I   will  take   care   of  your 
enemies  who  are  abroad.     Leave  them  in  mine  hands.     They  will 
never  trouble  you  alive.     Therefore,  rest  content,  and  know  that 
I  am  with  you  to  do  that  for  you  which  you  cannot  do  for  yourself. 

I   now  add  no  more.     I   am  the  Light  and  Life  of  the  world; 
even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


THE    ROBE    OF    AARON.  551 

REVELATION  SHOWING  HOW  THE  ROBE  OF  AARON 
MUST  BE  FORESHADOWED. 


No.  277.  WEBER,  UTAH,  May  ioth,  1862. 

1.  You  wish  to  know,  my  son,  whether  I  have  anything  more 
to  make   known   unto  you,    in   order   to  fully  prepare  you  for  the 
event  which  is  close  upon   you.     I   will  answer  you.     There  are 
several  important  items  which  I  have  yet  to  make  known  unto  you, 
in   order  that   all  things   may  be  made  ready  for  my  appearance, 
and   I   will   reveal  them  unto  you,  from  day  to  day,  whenever  you 
need  information.     I  cannot  reveal  unto  you   all  things  at   once ; 
but  I  have  to  give  unto  you  a  knowledge  of  things  gradually,  as 
you  need  it.     My  work  is  a  progressive  work.    It  commences  very 
small,  and  it  increases  daily,  and  it  will  increase  until  it  will  finally 
fill  the  whole   earth.     You  "know  that  everything  that  exists  must 
have   a  beginning,   and  that   which   has  a  beginning  must  have  a 
maturity ;  but  my  gospel  will  never  arrive  at  a  maturity  upon  this 
earth  of  Adam's  until  it  has  raised  it   from  mortality  to  immor- 
tality. 

2.  And  now,  behold,  I  speak  unto  you   concerning  a  robe  to 
foreshadow  Aaron's   robe,  which   must  be  worn   by   my   servant 
William  Harris   when  he  and  eleven  more  of  the  priests  of  Aaron 
who  may  be   selected  for  the  occasion,   travel  around  the  Fort 
twelve  times.     It  must  be  made  with  sleeves  attached,  and  it  must 
wrap  around   his  whole  body.     But   it   must  not  be  made  more 
than  half  as  wide  at  the   bottom  as  your  robe  must  be,   neither 
must   it  be  as  long;  it  must  not  reach  to  within  six  inches  of  his 
feet.    But  as  far  as  the  making  of  it  is  concerned,  it  must  be  made 
in  the  same  shape  as  yours.     It  must  be  a  perfect  robe,  with  the 
exception  of  it  being  short.     It  being  short  represents  the  weak- 
ness of  the  Aaronic  priesthood — its  inability  to  defend  itself  against 
the  enemy.     It  not  covering  the  man  entirely,  shows  that  there  is 
something  lacking.     The   man   who  wears  the  robe  represents  the 
power  of  the  devil  over  an  earth  in  mortality,  and  the   robe  repre- 
sents the  power   of  the   priesthood  which  he  holds.     Therefore, 
Aaron's  robe  represents  his  priesthood  being  too  weak  to  over- 


552  CONCERNING  THE  ROYAL  ROBE. 

power  the  devil,  and  liberate  itself  from  under  his  power.  But  the 
robe  which  has  been  made  for  you,  represents  the  first  God's  robe, 
which,  being  much  longer  than  the  man  who  wears  it,  represents 
an  abundance  of  power.  It  i.s  the  royal  robe  of  the  Melchisedec 
priesthood,  and  it  is  the  only  one  that  comes  down  from  heaven  to 
the  earth.  It  is  owned  by  the  first  God,  and  it  Comes  down  to 
every  mortal  earth  to  be  worn  by  every  seventh  angel.  It  being 
so  long,  represents  power  over  evil;  and  it  being  so  wide,  repre- 
sents a  superabundance  of  power.  The  person  who  represents  the 
power  of  the  devil  appears  to  be  small  in  that  robe ;  lor  it  will 
wrap  around  him  several  times,  which  represents  that  the  power  of 
the  devil  is  small  when  compared  with  the  power  of  the  holy 
priesthood. 

3.  You  wish  to  know  whether  there  are  any  marks  or  signs  to 
be  placed  upon  the  robes.     There  are  signs  upon  the  robJe,  and  a 
signature  upon  the  rod  which  I  shall  give  unto  you ;  but  it  is  un- 
lawful  for   me  to  reveal  them  unto  you  until   I  give  unto  you  the 
robe  and  rod,  and  then  you  will  see  them   for  yourself.     But  you 
may  place  the  following  inscription  upon  the  robe  which  has  been 
made  for  you:     "This  robe  represents  the  power  of  the  Melchise- 
dec priesthood,  and  foreshadows  the  first  royal  robe  which  is  about 
to  be  given  unto  me,  it  being  my  legitimate  right  to  wear  it.     And 
being  the  representative  of  the  great  King   of  Kings  and-  Lord  of 
Lords  to"  all  Adam's  posterity,  I  stand  upon  the  earth  in  his  stead, 
having  my  mission  signed  and  sealed  by  him.     And  as  a  token  of 
my  appointment,  I  hereby  present  myself  before  the  inhabitants  of 
the  earth  with  the  symbol  of  his  robe  upon  me,  and  of  his  rod  in 
my  hand."     And  you  shall   sign  the  above  in  the  following  man- 
ner :     "I  am  the  President  of  the  Melchisedec  Priesthood,  and  the 
Representative    of  the    first   God   to    all  Adam's   posterity,   even 
Joseph  Morris.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen." 

4.  And    now,    behold,    I  say   unto  you  concerning   the  robe 
which  must   be  made  to  foreshadow  or  represent  Aaron's  robe. 
You  wish  to  know  the  inscription  which  must  be   placed  upon   it. 
It  is  as  follows  :     "To  all  nations  and  people  of  all  languages  who 
novv  dwell  upon  the  face  of  the  earth  :     Be  it  known  unto  you  that 
I   stand   upon  the  earth  in  Aaron's  stead,  with  the  symbol  of  his 
robe  upon  me,  and  of  his  rod  in  my  hand.     And  having  received 


THE  ROBE  AND  ROD  OF  AARON.  553 

mine  appointment  from  Jesus  Christ,  and  from  his  prophet  upon 
the  earth,  I  act  in  the  name  of  Jesus  Christ,  and  by  his  authority, 
in  Aaron's  stead,  until  he  shall  come  forth  to  act  in  his  own  place. 
My  robe  represents  his  priesthood,  and  my  rod  his  power."  You 
shall  sign  the  above  in  the  following  manner :  "  I  ar»  Jesus  Christ, 
who  first  called  my  servant  William  Harris,  and  his  appointment 
was  sanctioned  by  the  president  of  the  high  priesthood,  even 
Joseph  Morris.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen." 

5.  Both  you  and  my  servant  William  Harris  must  each  have 
his  own  inscription  fastened  to  the  front  of  his  robe,  and  carry  it 
upon  his  breast,  so  that  they  may  be  read  by  those  who  may  wish 
to  read  them.  They  must  be  printed,  so  that  they  may  be  read 
without  any  difficulty.  Let  my  people  labor  with  all  diligence  to 
get  all  things  ready,  so  that  I  may  not  have  to  wait  for  them  an 
unreasonable  length  of  time.  I  have  waited  for  them  long  enough. 
Therefore,  let  them  make  all  things  ready  as  soon  as  they  possibly 
can,  for  I  am  coming  speedily.  Even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    CONCERNING    THE    ROBES    OF    THE 
TWO    PRIESTHOODS. 


No.   278.  WEBER,  UTAH,  May  i2th,  1862. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  he  that  shuts,  and  no  one  opens;  and  that 
opens,  and  no  one  shuts;  even  Jesus  Christ.  I  am  come  to  speak 
unto  you  again.  I  can  assure  you  that  mine  enemies  are  now 
being  worked  up  in  their  feelings  at  a  rapid  speed.  They  hardly 
know  how  to  contain  themselves.  They  do  not  know  what  to 
think  about  my  people  taking  up  prisoners.  They  say  that  my 
people  are  taking  the  law  into  their  own  hands,  and  that  they  are 
against  all  the  laws  of  the  country.  They  also  say  that  the  act 
which  my  people  have  committed  pertaining  to  those  prisoners 
proves  to  their  satisfaction  that  my  people  are  opposed  to  their  law 
and  are  rebels  to  their  government ;  and  they  declare  that  they 
will  not  stand  it.  I  can  assure  them  that  they  will  have  to  stand  it ; 


554  THE  ROBES  OF  THE  PRIESTHOODS. 

for  they  will  have  to  bear  it.  I  will  now  show  unto  them  who  is 
master.  I  wish  you  to  drive  things  ahead  as  fast  as  you  can  until 
all  things  are.  made  ready  for  me  to  come  and  visit  you.  I  can 
assure  you  that  my  people  have  no  time  to  trifle  away ;  but  they 
must  work  wit]}  all  diligence  until  all  things  are  made  ready  for 
me  to  come.  I  have  to  keep  mine  enemies  back  even  now.  They 
are  restless  to  come  up  against  my  people,  and  I  have  to  break 
them  up  and  confuse  them  in  order  to  keep  them  back.  I  want 
my  people  to  hurry  and  make  all  things  ready  as  soon  as  they 
possibly  can ;  for  I  do  not  want  to  be-  put  to  the  necessity  of  hold- 
ing mine  enemies  back  any  longer  than  what  I  can  avoid.  I  want 
to  sweep  them  off  the  earth,  and  be  avenged  on  them ;  but  I  can- 
not do  so  until  all  things  are  made  ready  for  me  to  come.  There- 
fore, let  my  people  work  with  all  diligence  to  make  things  ready 
as  soon  as  they  can,  and  I  will  then  come  and  deliver  the  faithful. 
I  am  the  Lord. 

2.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — as  soon  as  you  have 
foreshadowed  my  coming,  you   shall  divide  this  Camp;  for  there 
are  hypocrites  among  these  people   whom  you  could  never  pene- 
trate  by  preaching  unto  them  ;  but   you  shall   penetrate  them  as 
soon  as  they  are  separated  from  the  faithful.     They  are  deceived 
by  the  devil ;  he  makes  them  believe  that  they   are   all   right,  and 
the  contrary  they  will  not  know  until  they  are  separated,  and  stand 
before  the  faithful  to  be  slain  by  them.     It  will  be  the  duty  of  the 
faithful  to  slay  the  hypocrites,   and   cleanse   my  Church  from  all 
lawless  and  rebellious  characters.     I  shall  give  unto  you  a   com- 
mandment to  divide  this  Camp  as  soon  as  you  have  foreshadowed 
my  coming ;  and  after  the  Camp  has  been  divided,  and  the  hypo- 
crites shall  have  been  cut  off,  I  shall  come  unto  you  in  the  course 
of  one  day,   and  then   I   shall  cut  you  a  clear  way  through  your 
enemies  to  your  satisfaction.    I  shall  let  mine  enemies   loose  as 
soon  as  the  hypocrites  shall  have  been   cut   off,   and   I    shall   slay 
them. 

3.  You  wish  to  know  whether  the  remaining  eleven  apostles  who 
will  be  called  to  ride  with  you  seven  times  around  this  Fort,  should 
wear  robes  as  well  as  yourself.     I  will  inform  you.     It  is  not  neces- 
sary on  this  occasion,  in  consequence  of  tie  poverty  of  my  people. 
We  shall  dispense  with  that  matter ;  for  my  people  are  unable  to 


THE  ROBES  OF  THE  PRIESTHOODS.  555 

fit  out  all  my  servants  as  they  should  be  fitted  out  if  my  people 
were  more  wealthy.  I  do  not  wish  to  burden  my  people  in  fitting 
out  my  servants  any  more  than  I  can  possibly  help.  When  they 
have  done  all  that  they  .can,  I  require  no  more  of  them ;  but  in 
due  time  all  the  high  priests  will  be  called  to  wear  the  robes  of  the 
Melchisedec  priesthood,  which  robes  are  represented  unto  people 
upon  the  earth  by  your  robe,  for  they  will  be  made  like  it,  even 
long  and  wide,  to  represent  the  power  of  the  high  and  holy  priest- 
hood ;  therefore,  one  robe  will  suffice  to  represent  the  power  of  the 
Melchisedec  priesthood.  The  eleven  apostles  might  have  the 
privilege  to  wear  robes  when  they  travel  around  this  Fort,  as  well 
as  you,  if  they  had  them ;  but  my  people  are  too  poor  at  present 
to  purchase  them  for  my  servants.  All  ihe  robes  of  the  holy 
priesthood  are  made  alike,  and  all  robes  of  the  Aaronic  priesthood 
are  made  alike  also ;  therefore,  one  robe  of  each  kind  will  be  suf- 
ficient to  represent  the  power  and  authority  of  the  two  priesthoods. 
The  eleven  priests  of  Aaron  might  also  wear  robes  like  unto  the 
bishop's  when  they  travel  with  him  twelve  times  around  this  Fort, 
if  they  had  them.  All  priests,  whether  high  priests  or  Aaronic 
priests,  are  entitled  to  the  privilege  of  wearing  the  robes  which 
belong  to  their  priesthood,  when  they  can  be  obtained  for  them. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.     I  am  the   Son  of  the  Eternal 
Father;  even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION     INSTRUCTING     THE     PROPHET     TO 

ORGANIZE    SEVEN    COMPANIES    OF    SOLDIERS 

AS    A    COMMENCEMENT    OF   THE   ARMY 

OF  THE    KINGDOM. 


No.  279.  WEBER,  UTAH,  May  i5th,  1862. 

i.  You  CONSIDER  that  I  have  been  extremely  backward  in 
speaking  unto  you,  and  you  say  in  your  feelings  that  you  would 
like  to  know  the  reason  of  it.  What  can  I  say  unto  you?  What 
reason  can  I  assign  for  neglecting  to  speak  unto  you  for  the  last 
few  days  ?  I  looked  down  upon  you,  and  I  saw  the  position  in 


556  THE    ORGANIZATION    OF    AN    ARMY. 

which  you  were  placed.  I  saw  that  you  had  a  number  of  other 
matters  to  attend  to,  and  that  your  whole  time  was  taken  up  in 
attending  to  them,  so  much  so  that  you  had  no  time  to  sit  down 
to  write  from  my  mouth ;  therefore,  I  considered  that  I  should  ac;t 
very  unreasonably  to  press  you  to  write  under  such  circumstances. 
I  have  to  act  reasonably  in  all  my  movements.  I  can  only  reveal 
unto  you  the  mysteries  of  my  kingdom  gradually,  for  you  cannot 
receive  all  things  at  once.  I  have  to  work  with  you  just  as  the 
circumstances  in  which  you  continue  to  be  placed  compel  me. 
As  you  need  fresh  information  upon  one  subject  after  another,  I 
am  compelled  by  law  to  impart  it  unto  you.  I  will  never  neglect 
you — never  fear.  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts. 

2.  And  behold,  I  speak  unto  you  concerning  the  organization 
of  a  small  army  in  the  midst  of  my  people.  You  must  have  an 
army  of  valiant,  faithful  men  who  will  both  live  my  law  and  cut 
off  those  who,  after  having  yielded  obedience  to  the  fulness  of  my 
gospel,  will  not  abide  it ;  such  persons  shall  be  cut  off  by  this 
army  when  commanded  by  the  proper  authority  to  do  so.  As  I 
have  said  unto  you  before,  so  I  say  unto  you  again, — you  must 
have  seven  companies,  with  twelve  men  in  each  company,  not 
including  the  captains  of  the  companies.  And  the  soldiers  com- 
posing these  companies  must  be  chosen  men,  even  chosen  by  you ; 
for  I  want  none  in  this  army  but  those  who  are  too  honorable  to 
betray  their  trust.  I  do  not  want  more  than  seven  companies  to 
commence  with ;  that  number  will  be  sufficient  at  present.  You 
must  gather  together  all  the  men  of  this  Camp,  and  select  seven 
companies  out  of  them.  You  must  select  none  for  soldiers  who 
are  over  three-score  years  old ;  neither  shall  you  select  any  who 
are  under  eighteen  years  old ;  but  you  shall  choose  your  soldiers 
from  eighteen  to  sixty  years  of  age.  And  those  whom  you  may 
choose  shall  swear  an  oath  which  must  be  sworn  by  all  soldiers 
who  may  be  called  into  your  army  upon  the  earth,  and  by  none 
else;  and  that  soldier  who  may  stand  in  the  rank  and  break 
that  oath,  after  swearing  it,  must  be  punished  as  soon  as  he  has 
broken  it. 

3.  Inasmuch  as  I  have  called  upon  you  to  organize  seven  com- 
panies, with  a  captain  over  each  company,  the  seventh  captain 
must  command  the  whole  division.  And  when  the  division  shall 


THE    ORGANIZATION    OF    AN    ARMY.  557 

be  called  out  to  cut  off  the  hypocrites,  the  soldiers  must  stand  in  a 
block,  one  company  behind  another.  The  first  company,  com- 
manded by  the  first  captain,  must  form  the  first  line,  and  they 
must  stand  next  to  those  who  shall  be  executed.  The  second 
company  must  stand  behind  the  first,  and  the  third  company 
behind  the  second,  and  so  on,  including  the  seventh  company 
which  must  stand  behind  the  sixth.  And  when  they  shall  be 
called  to  operate,  you  must  give  the  first  command  to  the  captain 
of  the  seventh  company,  and  he  shall  give  his  command  to  the 
first  captain.  The  first  captain  shall  then  give  his  command  to 
his  company,  and  they  shall  fire  the  first ;  after  which  they  shall 
all  kneel  down,  unless  there  should  be  some  who  fail  to  do  their 
duty ;  such  shall  not  be  permitted  to  kneel  down,  but  they  shall 
stand  up  in  the  ranks.  The  second  captain  shall  then,  after  hav- 
ing received  command  from  the  seventh  captain,  give  his  com- 
mand to  the  second  company,  and  they  shall  shoot  those  of  the 
first  company  who  fail  to  do  their  duty  when  commanded.  And 
in  this  manner  each  company  shall  always  cut  off  those  in  the 
company  before  them  who  may  fail  to  do  their  duty  in  the  rank. 
In  this  order  your  army  shall  be  arranged  and  operate  when  they 
shall  be  called  upon  to  do  so  by  the  captains.  But  if  after  the 
seventh  captain  shall  have  given  his  command  to  the  six  com- 
panies the  hypocrites  should  not  be  cut  off,  he  shall  give  his  com- 
mand to  his  own  company,  and  should  they  fail  to  do  their  duty, 
you  must  give  your  command  to  me,  and  I  will  see  if  I  cannot 
find  power  to  cut  them  off.  If  the  army  which  you  have  will  not 
cut  off  the  hypocrites  after  you  have  gone  the  regular  round  with 
them,  then  I  will  cut  them  off  instantly ;  but  I  feel  persuaded  that 
you  will  not  need  my  help  on  that  occasion. 

4.  There  are  some  valiant  men   in  the  midst  of  my  people, 
who  will  not  give  way  when  they  are  tried ;    but  they  will  be  faith- 
ful unto  you.     There  are  sufficient  of  them  to  cut  off  all  the  false- 
hearted out  of  your  way  without  troubling  me   with   such   a  small 
affair,  and  you  may   depend  upon  them   with  safety.     Therefore, 
my  son,  drive  things  up  to  a  head  as  fast  as  you  can,  and  be  sure 
to  make  all  things  ready  for  a  sudden  burst ;    for  such  will  be  the 
case.     Make  ready  for  it.     I  am  the  Lord. 

5.  And  now,  behold,  I  give  unto  you  the  oath  which  must  be 


558  THE  SOLDIER'S  OATH. 

sworn  by  all  those  who  may  be  called  to  constitute  the  army  of 
Israel  frum  this  time  until  your  mission  is  ended ;  and  they  shall 
either  abide  it  or  perish  in  the  rank.  The  oath  is  as  follows : 
"  Having  been  chosen  and  elected  by  him  who  holds  the  keys  of 
authority  upon  the  earth,  and  whose  legitimate  right  it  is  to  call 
me  to  be  a  soldier,  I  hereby  set  my  hand  to  swear  a  solemn  oath 
in  the  presence  of  the  Father,  arid  of  the  son,  and  of  his  servant, 
the  prophet,  that  I  will  faithfully  abide  the  law  of  God,  and  defend 
it  until  death  at  the  peril  of  my  life,  feeling  it  my  duty  and  calling 
to  do  so;  and  as  a  soldier  I  will  obey  my  commander.  Agreeably 
to  the  order  of  heaven,  I  swear  this  oath  before  the  Father,  the  Son, 
and  these  earthly  witnesses ;  they  being  my  witnesses  that  I  have 
bound  myself  to  the  Lord  and  his  prophet  to  faithfully  defend  the 
law  of  God  until  the  day  of  my  death."  And  when  those  whom 
you  may  call  to  be  soldiers  have  repeated  this  oath,  they  must  kiss 
the  written  word  of  the  Lord,  and  have  their  names  recorded  in  a 
book  as  military  men,  which  is  the  highest  honor  that  can  be  con- 
ferred upon  them  in  mortality.  It  is  the  highest  position  that  men 
of  their  rank  can  ever  be  called  to  occupy ;  for  they  will  always 
be  closely  connected  with  the  highest  authority  upon  the  earth. 
My  servant  Joseph  will  always  be  their  general.  They  will  always 
be  more  closely  connected  with  him  than  other  members  of  the 
Church  will  be.  They  will  be  his  strength  and  the  main  pillars  of 
my  kingdom  upon  the  earth ;  and  they  will  be  continually  inspired 
by  the  warriors  of  heaven  who  will  be  at  their  backs  pressing  them 
forward,  and  strengthening  them,  and  fitting  them  for  their  duties. 
I  will  abundantly  assist  them  by  my  holy  angels  who  shall  be 
their  constant  companions.  I  do  not  wish  to  weary  you  any 
longer  at  this  time ;  but  I  will  soon  speak  unto  you  again,  and 
make  known  unto  you  some  things  which  you  need  to  know. 

I  now  add  no  more.     I  am  the  Bright  and  Morning  Star ;  even 
Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.      Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  RODS  OF  THE  PRINCES  OF  ISRAEL.         559 

REVELATION    SHOWING    HOW    THE  TWELVE  RODS 

OF    THE   TWELVE    PRINCES    OF  ISRAEL 

MUST    BE    FORESHADOWED. 


No.  280.  WEBER,  UTAH,  May  lyth,  1862. 

1.  BEHOLD,    I  am    Jesus  Christ,   even  the  Son  of  the  Eternal 
Father,   and  I  am  about  to  speak  unto  you  concerning  the  twelve 
priests  of  Aaron  who  have  been  appointed  to  carry  those  twelve 
rods  which  have  been  made  to  foreshadow  the  twelve  rods  of  the 
twelve  princes  of  Israel.     Each  man's  name  must  be  written  upon 
the  rod  which  he  may  be  appointed  to  carry ;  for  those  twelve  men 
are  called  to  represent  the  twelve  princes  of  Israel,   whose   names 
are  written   upon  their  rods.      Each  prince  has  his  name,  number 
and  standing  written  upon  his  own  rod.     Aaron  is  number  one, 
and  his   inscription,   which  is   the  first,    is  written  upon  his  rod. 
The   next   prince   is   number  two,  and  the  second   inscription  is 
written  upon   his  rod.     The   third   prince  by   birthright   has  also 
his  name  and  the  third   inscription  written  upon  his  rod  and  so 
on,  throughout  the  whole  twelve  princes. 

2.  I   need  not,   at  this  time,   reveal   unto  you  the  names  and 
inscriptions  of  the  twelve  princes  of  Israel ;  but  I  will  reveal  unto 
you  the   inscriptions   which   must  be  written  and  placed  upon  the 
twelve  rods  which  must  be  carried  around  this  Fort  by  the  twelve 
priests  of  Aaron.     That  rod  which  must  be  carried  by  my  servant 
William    Harris,   which  will  represent  or  foreshadow  Aaron's  rod, 
must  have  his  name,  number  and  the  following  inscription  placed 
upon  it:     "Behold,  I  am  William  Harris,  even  number  one;  and 
I   present   myself  before  this  people,  and  also  before  all  mankind, 
in   Aaron's  stead,   to  represent  or  foreshadow  his  name,  number 
and   inscription,   he   being  the   firstborn   son   of  Adam,   and  the 
legitimate  ruler   over  all  Abraham's  seed — even  over  the  elect  of 
God." 

3.  .  And  now,   behold,   I  give  unto  the  inscription  which  must 
be  placed  upon  the  second  rod  :     "  Behold,  I  am  William  Magee, 
even  number  two ;  and  I  present  myself,  with  this  rod  in  my  hand, 
before  this  people,  and  also  before  all  mankind,  in  the  stead  of 


560  INSCRIPTIONS    FOR    THE    RODS. 

the  second  firstborn  son  of  Adam,  to  represent  or  foreshadow  his 
name,  number  and  inscription,  he  being  the  second  ruler  over  all 
Abraham's  seed — even  over  the  elect  of  God." 

4.  And   behold,   I   give   unto  you   the  third  inscription,  also : 
".Behold,  I  am  Thomas  Parker,  even  number  three;  and  I  present 
myself  with   this   rod   in   my  hand  before   this   people,  and   also 
before  all   mankind,   in   the  stead  of  the  third   firstborn  son   of 
Adam,  to  represent  or  foreshadow  his  name,  number  and  inscrip- 
tion, he  being  the  third  ruler  over  all  Abraham's  seed — even  over 
the  elect  of  God."     I  need  not  reveal  unto  you.  any   more   of  the 
inscriptions  for  those  twelve  men ;  for  the  remaining  nine  are  like 
the  first  three  which  I  have  revealed  unto  you,  with  the  exception 
of  the  names  and  numbers.     Each  man  must  have  his  own  name 
and  number  upon  the  rod  which  he  may  be  called  to  carry.    These 
inscriptions  must  be  printed  as  soon  as  possible,  and  placed  upon 
the  rods. 

5.  Let   my   people  labor  with  all  diligence  to  make  all  things 
ready  for  me  to  come  unto  them.     I  want  to  come  unto  them,  and 
I   will   come  unto  them   as  soon  as  they  have  opened  the  way  for 
me.     I  want  to  come  unto  them  as  much  as  they  want  to  see  me, 
and  even  more  so.     But  I  cannot  come  to  deliver  them  until  they 
have  made  all  things  ready  for  me.     They  have  but  little  more  to 
do  before  they  are  entirely  ready  for  me.     And  when  I  do  come 
unto  them,  I  will  suddenly  burst  the  bonds  which  now  hold  them, 
and  I   will  set  them  free.     They  will  afterwards  have  no  cause  to 
complain  of  me  at  all;  for  the  balance  of  power  will  be  in  their 
hands,  and  the  faithful  will  see  no  more  oppression ;  they  will  have 
the  power  over  all  their-  enemies.     I  will  cut  off  everything  that 
opposes   my  people  after  they  have  once  opened  the  way  so  that 
I  can  come  untcuthem,  after  which  they  will   always  be  satisfied. 
Therefore,  let  them  labor  diligently,  and  prepare  for  me  as  soon  as 
they  can,  and  I  will  then  come  unto  them,  and  satisfy  them. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.  I  am  the  Glorious  Branch  of 
Jesse,  and  the  Bright  and  Morning  Star;  even  Jesus  Christ. 
Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


THE  PROPHET'S  SON.  561 

REVELATION    CONCERNING    THE    DEATH  OF-  THE 
'PROPHET'S  SON. 


No.  281.  WEBER,  UTAH,  May  ipth,  1862. 

1.  LET   not  your  spirit   droop   because  of  the  death  of  your 
child,  for  it  is  all  right ;  I  know  all  about  it.     You  need  not  think 
that  I  take  no  delight  in  your  interest  and  happiness,  for  I  do.     I 
suffer  nothing  to  happen  which  is  painful,  but  that  which  is  lawful, 
and  that  I  cannot  help;  for  I  must  act  according  to  the  law.     You 
look  back  at  the  many  misfortunes  that  you  have  had  with  all  your 
children,  and  you  blame  me  for  them  all.    You  have  bitter  feelings 
towards   me,    because  you   think   that   I  care  nothing  at  all  about 
your  interests  and  happiness  upon  the  earth ;  that,  in  some  things, 
I   do   not   notice  you  at  all ;  but  that  I  suffer  the  devil  to  destroy 
your  children,   one  after  another,  without  putting  myself  about  in 
the  least  to  prevent  him.     You  say  that  if  I  ever  did  care  anything 
about  your  interests  and  happiness,  you  would  like  me  to  explain 
myself,   and   show  unto  you  just  reasons  for  taking  your  children 
from  you  in  the  way  which  I  have  done;  that  if  I  can   do  this,    it 
will  ease  your  feelings.     You  wish  me  to  do  my  duty  towards  you, 
seeing  that  I  know  your  situation  very  well,  and  that  you  can  do 
nothing  yourself  towards  breaking  the  hold  of  the  devil  off  you ; 
and  you  say  that,   if  I   will   not  do  this  for  you,  I  am  of  no  use 
whatever  to   you.     You  are  prejudiced  against  me,  for  you  think 
that  I  neglect  you,  when  I  do  not.     You  are  setting  your  feelings 
against  me,  because  of  your  sufferings  in  consequence  of  the  death 
of  your  children;  for  they  lie  near  unto  you.     It  afflicts  you  greatly 
when  they  are  taken  away  from  you,  and  you  begin  to  think  that  I 
give,  the   devil  the  upper  hand  over  you  in  almost  every  circum- 
stance.    You  think  that  I  either  neglect  my  duty,  or  I 'must  be  too 
weak  for  the  devil.     You  would  like  to  know  whether  I  intend  to 
uphold  you,  or  continue  to  let  the  devil  have  the  upper  hand  over 
you.     You   say  that   you  are  entirely  heart-sick  of  being  held  in 
weakness  so  long. 

2.  What   can  I   say   unto  you,  seeing  that  you  make  so  many 
complaints  against  me?     I  know  that  you  are   greatly  displeased 


562  CONCERNING    THE    PROPHET'S    CHILDREN. 

with  me,  because  of  the  death  of  your  children.  You  were  preju- 
diced against  me  even  before  the  death  of  this  last  child  ;  but  your 
prejudice  has  now  increased  four-fold  to  wrM  it  was  before.  It  is 
almost  impossible  for  me  to  satisfy  a  prejudiced  mind.  I  know 
very  well  that  if  you  once  set  yourself  against  a  person  it  is  almost 
impossible  to  change  you,  for  you  are  of  such  an  unchangeable 
nature  that  it  is  almost  impossible  to  change  your  mind  after  it 
has  once  become  set.  You  are  immovable  in  your  feelings,  and  I 
fear  that  should  you  once  become  prejudiced  against  me,  I  could 
scarcely  turn  you ;  and  how  could  I  work  with  you  under  such 
circumstances?  You  would  always  suspect  me  and  be  jealous  of 
me ;  in  short,  you  would  lose  confidence  in  me,  and  we  could  not 
work  together  with  any  degree  of  satisfaction.  I  know  that  you 
are  so  oppressed  that  you  hardly  know  how  to  pass  one  day  after 
another,  and  you  continue  to  lay  the  blame  on  me  for  it  all.  You 
believe  that  if  I  would,  I  could  do  better  for  you  than  I  have 
done,  and  it  seems  almost  impossible  for  me  to  convince  you  to 
the  contrary.  What  can  I  do  with  you?  I  am  satisfied  that  your 
feelings  are  set  against  me;  but  I  can  do  no  more  than  tell  you 
the  truth,  which  I  have  always  done,  and  shall  continue  to  do  unto 
the  end,  whether  you  believe  me  or  not ;  but  if  you  do  not  believe 
me,  it  will  be  an  injury  to  you,  and  it  will  work  very  much  against 
your  interest,  and  put  you  to  much  inconvenience. 

3.  I  can  assure  you  that  I  have  not  taken  your  children  away 
from-  you  in  order  to  afflict  you ;  but  I  have  done  it  because  you 
were  not  placed  in  a  position  to  take  care  of  them.  You  know 
tnat  it  was  the  best  thing  that  I  could  do  for  you,  to  take  your 
children  to  myself,  and  take  care  of  them ;  for  you  could  not  take 
care  of  them  yourself.  While  I  have  been  raising  you  up  and  pre- 
paring you  for  your  office  during  many  years,  even  before  you  had 
any  children  at  all,  I  always  knew  what  you  would  have  to  pass 
through,  and  I  took  your  children  off  the  earth  in  order  that  they 
may  not  be  ill-treated  by  those  people  into  whose  hands  they  might 
have  fallen;  for  I  can  assure  you  that  if  I  had  suffered  them  to 
have  lived,  they  would  have  suffered  great  affliction  and  abuse; 
but  knowing  that  you  could  not  have  taken  care  of  them  yourself, 
it  was  my  duty  to  take  them  to  myself  and  take  care  of  them  for 
you.  Your  children  must  be  taken  good  care  of,  for  they  are 


CONCERNING  THE  PROPHET'S  SON.  563 

celestial,  both  males  aqd  females ;  they  are  of  the  royal  seed  of 
heaven.  I  suffered  one  of  your  daughters  to  remain  upon  the 
earth  for  a  special  purpose ;  and  during  the  last  few  years  she  has 
met  with  much  ill  treatment  from  her  mother  and  her  mother's 
husband,  and  I  have  cursed  them  both,  and  I  will  pay  them  for 
their  cruelty  towards  that  child.  Since  the  time  that  your  name 
went  throughout  the  length  and  breadth  of  this  Territory  as  a 
prophet,  your  child  has  been  despised  by  them.  They  abuse  and 
despise  it  because  of  you,  and  they  look  upon  it  with  hatred  in 
their  hearts,  and  are  almost  ready  to  take  its  life ;  but  I  will  take 
care  of  it.  My  eyes  are  continually  over  it,  and  I  will  watch  it, 
and  I  will  settle  with  those  who  have  thus  ill-treated  it.  I  will 
deliver  them  both  into  your  hands,  and  you  shall  deal  with  them 
as  seemeth  good  unto  you. 

4.  And  now,  behold,  I  speak  unto  you  concerning  the  child 
which  I  have  just  taken  away  from  you.  I  know  who  he  is,  and 
you  know  him  also.  This  is  the  second  time,  within  a  very  few 
years,  that  he  has  been  to  the  earth  and  taken  a  body  and  returned 
unto  me.  He  lived  upon  the  earth  but  a  very  few  months  at  the 
first  time  of  his  coming,  and  he  then  returned  to  me,  and  he  has 
since  been  on  a  short  mission  into  the  spirit  world.  Previous  to 
sending  him  upon  the  earth  the  second  time,  I  sent  for  him,  and 
he  returned  from  his  mission,  and  I  sent  him  to  the  earth  to  take  a 
body,  as  your  son,  the  second  time;  and  shortly  after  he  was  born 
he  returned  unto  me,  and  he  is  now  in  heaven  in  the  presence  of. 
my  Father,  counseling  with  him.  I  saw  him,  and  spoke  unto  him 
before  I  came  to  speak  unto  you.  We  shall  not  send  him  into  the 
spirit  world  any  more  before  he  has  finished  his  mission  upon  the 
earth.  He  was  counseling  with  my  Father,  before  I  came  to  give 
unto  you  this  revelation,  about  going  to  see  his  father.  He  said 
that  he  should  like  to  go  and  see  his  father  before  he  took  another 
mortal  mission,  and  my  Father  will  grant  him  the  privilege  to  do 
so.  He  promised  to  return  unto  us  in  the  space  of  a  few  days; 
for  the  time  for  him  to  take  his  mortal  mission  has  now  come. 
And  when  he  returns  to  our  earth  from  his  visit,  he  will  remain 
with  us  until  we  send  him  down  to  you  again,  which  will  make  his 
third  time  of  coming  to  the  earth  within  the  space  of  a  few  years. 
We  shall  send  him  unto  you  again  as  soon  as  we  possibly  can 


564  CONCERNING  THE  PROPHET'S  SON. 

according  to  the  law.     You  will  speedily  have  him  with  you  again 
to  comfort  you. 

5.  All  that  I  have  done.  I  have  done  according  to  the  law, 
and  this  you  will  know  in  due  time ;  and  what  you  do  not  now 
know,  you  will  know  hereafter.  When  he  comes  to  the  earth  to 
fill  his  mission,  you  must  train  him  in  a  particular  way.  When  he 
comes  unto  you  again,  I  shall  speak  unto  you  from  time  to  time, 
and  make  known  unto  you  how  you  shall  train  him,  and  the  kind 
of  food  which  he  shall  eat ;  for  nothing  unclean  shall  ever  enter 
into  his  mouth.  He  shall  be  pure  from  his  mother's  womb. 
While  he  is  in  power,  which  will  only  be  for  a  few  years,  he  will 
have  the  power  to  call  fire  down  from  heaven  to  burn  up  the 
inhabitants  of  the  earth.  He  will  have  power  to  turn  the  waters 
into  blood,  and  to  smite  the  earth  with  a  curse  as  often  as  he  wills. 
He  will  destroy  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth  by  thousands,  and  he' 
will  be  a  terror  to  many  nations  until  the  day  of  his  death ;  for  he 
will  wield  your  power  for  a  few  years.  While  he  is  in  power,  he 
will  rule  in  his  father's  name  and  by  his  father's  authority  wher- 
ever he  goes.  He  will  not  be  with  his  father.  He  will  be  in  one 
place,  and  his  father  will  be  in  another ;  and  wherever  he  goes,  he 
will  wield  his  father's  authority,  even  as  I  wield  my  Father's 
authority ;  and  as  I  was  in  power  one  thousand,  two  hundred  and 
three-score  days  when  I  was  upon  the  earth,  after  I  had  been 
ordained  by  Moses  upon  the  Mount,  so  he  will  be  in  full  power 
.one  thousand,  two  hundred  and  three-score  days ;  and  during  that 
time  he  will  prophecy,  and  smite  the  earth  with  a  curse  as  often 
as  he  may  wish  to  do  so,  until  his  mission  is  ended.  And  as  I 
rose  from  the  dead  the  third  day,  and  ascended  into  heaven,  so  he 
will  ascend  from  the  earth  the  third  day ;  for  his  spirit  will  enter 
into  his  body  and  quicken  it  again,  and  lift  it  up  from  the  earth  in 
like  manner  as  my  body  was  lifted  up  from  the  earth.  He  will  be 
in  power  upon  the  earth  the  same  number  of  days  that  I  was  in 
power  upon  the  earth.  I  foreshadowed  his  mission,  for  in  some 
respects  his  mission  is  like  unto  mine.  He  is  a  prophet ;  but  I 
am  a  Redeemer;  nevertheless,  we  must  both  be  in  power  the  same 
length  of  time,  and  both  lift  up  our  bodies  again  from  the  earth 
after  having  lain  the  same  number  of  days.  In  these  respects,  our 
missions  are  alike. 


CONCERNING  THE  PROPHET'S  SON.  565 

6.  Earthly  things  and  heavenly  things  must  both  agree  under 
the  fulness  of  the  holy  priesthood.  Your  son  must  come  to  the 
earth  three  times  before  he  can  enter  upon  his  mission,  in  order  to 
acknowledge  the  three  estates  of  man,  viz:  The  first,  or  spiritual 
estate ;  the  second,  or  mortal  estate ;  and  the  third,  or  celestial 
estate.  Twice  he  has  to  return  from  the  earth  shortly  after  having 
.  received  a  body ;  but  the  third  time  he  will  have  to  remain  upon 
the  earth  until  he  has  completed  his  mission.  When  he  came 
upon  this  earth  on  his  first  mission,  he  lived  upon  the  earth  during 
eight  months,  which  represented  a  specified  time,  even  a  certain 
number  of  years  during  which  a  world  is  traveling  in  its  first  estate, 
even  from  the  time  that  a  world  is  first  created  until  it  enters  its 
second  estate.  When  he  came  the  second  time,  he  only  lived  a 
few  hours,  and  he  mourned  all  the  time,  even  from  his  birth  to  his 
death.  His  short  life  represented  death,  and  his  mourning  repre- 
sented sorrow,  both  of  which  attend  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth 
when  in  its  second  or  mortal  estate.  His  coming  to  the  earth  the 
third  time  to  remain  for  many  years  and  to  fill  a  mission  of  power, 
represents  the  third  or  celestial  estate  of  man.  His  spirit  raising 
up  his  body  towards  heaven,  after  its  having  lain  dead  upon  the 
ground  three  days,  represents  the  power  of  the  holy  priesthood 
over  death.  He  therefore  represents  the  power  of  the  holy  priest- 
hood to  all  Adam's  posterity,  bidding  defiance  to  the  devil  to  hold 
his  body ;  for  he  will  raise  it  up  again  in  spite  of  the  devil  and  all 
his  power.  He  represents  a  triumphant  priesthood,  even  as  I  did 
when  I  rose  from  the  dead  the  third  day.  All  high  priests  hold 
the  keys  of  death  and  hell.  Therefore,  my  son,  make  yourself 
contented,  and  be  satisfied  with  what  I  have  done,  and  I  will  send 
him  back  to  you  as  soon  as  I  can ;  and  when  he  comes  again,  he 
shall  remain  with  you  to  comfort  you,  and  you  shall  enjoy  his 
society  for  many  years. 

7.  Let  your  companion  be  comforted,  and  I  will  give  unto  her 
both  sons  and  daughters.  I  am  well  pleased  with  her,  for  she  has 
been  patient ;  and  inasmuch  as  she  will  be  faithful  before  me,  I 
will  greatly  bless  her. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more ;  but  I  will  shortly  speak  unto  you 
again.  I  am  the  Son  of  the  Eternal  Father ;  even  Jesus  Christ. 
Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


566  CONCERNING    THE    JUDGMENTS    OF    GOD. 

REVELATION    SHOWING    THE    ORDER    IN     WHICH 

THE    SAINTS    MUST    MOVE    FROM    SOUTH 

WEBER    TO    SALT    LAKE    CITY. 


No.  282.  WEBER,  UTAH,  May  2oth,  1862. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Light  and  Life  of  the  world,  even  Jesus 
Christ,  and  I  wish  to  speak  unto  you  again.      I  am  about  to  reveal 
unto  you   the  order  in  which   my   people   shall   march  out  of  this 
place  to  the   central  point  of  this  Territory  after   I   have  cleared 
the  way  for  them,  which   I  shall  do  as  soon  as  my  people  will 
cleared  the  way  for  me.     I  shall  cut  off  all  your  enemies   in   this 
Territory,  and  shake  every  throne  to  the   center,  and   break  the 
spirits   of  all   kings  and  rulers  until    they    will    become    entirely 
powerless ;    for    I   will  place   large  armies   at  the   head  of  every 
kingdom  upon  the  earth,  and  I  will  shake   the  thrones  more  than 
any   other  thing  upon  the  earth.     Towers,  castles,  churches  and 
thrones  will  be  cast  down  level  with  the  ground.     I  will  find  the 
idle  hands  something  to  do  to  build  them  up   again.     I   will   give 
unto  the  inhabitants  of  this  earth   one  shake  that  they  will   never 
forget;   yea,  I  will  give  unto  the   wicked  such  a  shake  that  they 
will  never  again  be  able  to  recover  themselves ;   their  spirits   will 
remain  broken  as  long  as  they  may   live   after   it.     When   I   have 
once  broken  their  spirits  I  shall  sweep  them  down ;  for  I  will  pour 
out  one  judgment  after  another  so  heavily  and  so   fast  that  they 
will  be  weary  of  their  existence ;   they  will   desire   to  die.     They 
will  never  again  have  any  solid  courage  in  them  to  fight  against 
me,  for  they  will  see  that  it  will  be  of  no  use  to  do  so.     My  power 
is  so  much  greater  than  theirs  that  it  will  break  them  down  at 
once. 

2.  When  I  have  shaken  the  eirth,  and  cut  off  the  wicked  out 
of  this  Territory,  I  shall  gather  the  eleven  first  generals  unto  me, 
and  you  shall  see  us,  and  talk  with  us  until  you  are  satisfied ;    and 
not  only  shall  you  see  us,  but  the  faithful  of  my  people  shall  see 
us,  and  look  upon  us  as  one   man  looks   upon  another.     We  will 
go  before  my  faithful  people,  and  lead  them  forth  out  of  this  place 
to  the  place  which  I  have   appointed,  where  I   intend  to   separate 


THE    ORDER^TO    BE    OBSERVED    IN    MOVING.  567 

the  sheep  from  the  goats.  We  shall  have  a  portion  of  our  army 
with  us.  We  shall  not  need  the  whole  army  of  heaven.  After 
the  whole  army  has  shaken  the  earth,  one  portion  of  them  will 
return  home,  and  remain  there  until  they  are  needed  a^ain,  and 
then  I  shall  call  for  them.  But  the  other  portion  of  the  army 
will  be  with  me  and  the  remaining  eleven  generals,  and  we  will 
go  before  you  and  the  faithful  of  this  people,  and  lead  you  unto 
perfect  victory. 

3.  And  now,  behold,  I  am  about  to  make  known  unto  you  the 
order  in  which  this  people  shall  march  out  of  this  place  to  the 
place  which  I  have  appointed.     There  must  be  twelve  men  of  the 
high  priesthood,  including  yourself,  that  must  go  before  my  peo- 
ple on  horseback,  and  they  must  travel   four  abreast,  even  in  three 
tiers,  and  they  must  be  followed  by  the  high  priests  who  are  in 
the  army;   and  if  you  need  more  high  priests  to   make  up   any 
deficiences  in   any  company,  you  can  call  them  if  there  are  any  of 
the  right  age. 

4.  You  must  put  Alexander  Dow  in  the  first  company  of  the 
high  priests  while  my  people  march  down  to  the  place  which   I 
have  appointed.      He  is  pa&  age ;   but  on  account  of  the  position 
which  he  holds  in  the  high  priesthood,  he  must  travel  in  the   first 
company  of  high  priests;  this  he  must  do,  if  he  is  faithful  before 
me.     Satan  seeks  to  overcome  him  and  destroy  him,  which  he  will 
do  if  he  is  not  very  careful.     He  gives  way  to  a  false  spirit  from 
Lucifer,  and  it  strives  to  make  him  believe  that  it  is  my  spirit.      It 
seeks   to   deceive   him.     It   has  already  got  a  strong  hold  on  him; 
and  if  he  does  not  humble  himself  greatly  before   me,  and   seek 
the  counsel  of  my  servant,  the  prophet,  and  abide  it,  he  will  be 
destroyed.     He  cannot  detect  my  spirit  from  a  false  spirit.     The 
devil  has  the   power  over   him,    and   he   has   deceived   him   and 
led  him  astray.     Therefore,  if  he  wishes  to   save  his  own  life,   let 
him  humble  himself  greatly  before  me,  and  take  the  counsel  of  my 
servant,  the  prophet,    that   it  may  be  well  with  him.     Let  all  my 
people  be  aware  of  false  spirits ;  for  they  have  not  the   power  to 
detect   them   fully  as  yet.     They  should  be  humble  and  obedient 
before  me,  and  then  I  would  detect  the  devil  for  them.     I  would 
keep  all   false  spirits  away  frcm  them  if  they  would  only  be  faith- 
ful  enough   before   me.     Therefore,    my  servant  Alexander  Dow 
now  knows  my  will  concerning  him.     I  am  the  Lord. 


568  THE    ORDER    TO    BE    OBSERVED    IN    MOVING. 

5.  And  behold,   I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — the  remaining  four 
apostles  must  be  in  the  first  rank  with  the  high   priests,    and  they 
must  walk  next  to  those  first  twelve  on  horseback.      And  after  the 
high  priests  that  may  be  enrolled  in  the  army,  the  twelve  priests  of 
Aaron,  with  their  rods  in  their  hands,  must  follow,  and  lead  up  the 
Aaronic  priesthood.    The  army  will  march  on  foot  in  proper  order, 
even  as  soldiers  do ;  and  they  must  all  carry  their  arms  with  them, 
with   the   exception   of  those   twelve   Aaronic   priests  who  will  be 
called  to  carry  the  twelve  rods.      The  first  two  of  the  first  four,  the 
second  four  who  will  compose  the  second  tier,  and  the  first  one  of 
the  third  tier  of  the  twelve  apostles  who  will  ride  on  horseback, 
must  each   carry  a  sword  in   his  right  hand — seven  of  the  twelve 
must  carry  a  sword  in  their  right  hands  to  represent  the  first  seven 
generals  over  the  army  of  heaven,  and  also  the  seven  angels  of  the 
seven   Churches.      The   seven   swords   being  in   their  right  hands 
represents    a    contest    with   the   devil.     A  sword   represents  war. 
Two  others   of  the  twelve  will  represent  the  two  Olive  Branches. 
One  of  them  must  carry  a  pair  of  balances   in   his  hand,    and   the 
other   must  carry  my   law.      The  law  and  the  balances  represent 
justice.     Therefore,  there  will  be  three  out  of  the  twelve  who  will 
not   be  called  upon  to  carry   anything.     They  will  represent  the 
three  first  Gods,  who  aie  independent.     Their  carrying  nothing  in 
their  hands  to  defend  themselves  with,  represents  an  independent 
priesthood,  even  the  power  of  the  Gods  over  all  evil.     Their  being 
the  last  of  the  twelve,  even  behind  them,  represents  the  first  three 
Gods  who  are  the  highest  .of  all   Gods   in  authority,  and    being 
behind  all  other  Gods,  it  is  their  duty  to  back  up  all  other  Gods 
who   are  below  them.     They  are  at  the  back  of  all  other  Gods, 
following  them  up  and  pressing  them  on  to  their  duties.     And  it 
will  be  the  duty  of  those  men  and  boys  who  are  able,  who  may  not 
be  ranked  with  the  soldiers,  to  take  care   of  the  women  and  chil- 
dren, and  drive  the  teams  after  .the  army. 

6.  But  all  this  people  will  not  stand  to  receive  a  deliverance; 
for  some  will  suffer  the  devil  to  overcome  them  and  destroy  them. 
You  will  know  what  you  have  to  count  upon  after  the  test  is  over; 
for  this  people  will  be  tried  severely;  and   I  am  about  satisfied 
that  some  people  will  not  come  through  it  alive.     Such  as  have  a 
weak  place  about  them,   will   have  that  weak  place  probed;  they 


CONCERNING    THE    HYPOCRITES.  569 

will*  have  hard  work  to  see  through  the  test.  Let  such  seek  to 
fortify  themselves,  in  order  that  they  may  not  be  overcome  by  the 
devil  and  destroyed  by  him ;  for  at  that  time  he  will  have  great 
power  over  the  weak.  My  people  must  remember  that  I  have  told 
them  the  nature  of  the  trial  before  it  comes;  and  if  they  will  suffer 
the  devil  to  overcome  them  and  destroy  them,  it  will  be  their  own 
fault.  I  have  told  them  how  to  prepare  themselves,  and  if  they 
wiH  do  as  I  have  commanded  them,  it  will  be  well  with  them ; 
but  if  they  will  not,  they  will  have  to  surfer  the  consequences 
arising  from  their  disobedience. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.     I  am  the  Son  of  the  Eternal 
Father;   even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION  IN  WHICH  THE  LORD  EXCUSES  THE 

AGED  OF  HIS  PEOPLE  FROM  WITNESSING 

THE    DESTRUCTION    OF    THE 

HYPOCRITES. 


No.  283.  WEBER,  UTAH,  May  22nd,  1862. 

i.  LISTEN  unto  my  words,  which  are  quick  and  powerful, 
sharper  than  a  two-edged  sword ;  for  I  am  about  to  speak  unto 
you  upon  important  matters.  In  looking  $ver  this  people,  you  see 
in  their  midst  a  number  of  aged  people  whom  you  consider  are 
rendered  very  weak  and  feeble  by  old  age,  and.  incapable  to 
endure  the  first  test,  which  now  lies  before  these  people.  When  I 
speak  of  the  first  test,  I  mean  the  dividing  of  this  Camp — the 
separating  of  the  hypocrites  from  the  faithful ;  and  when  this  is 
done,  the  slaying  of  the  hypocrites  by  the  faithful.  This  is  what  I 
mean  by  the  first  test.  The  next  test  will  be  my  coming  to  shake 
the  earth  and  to  destroy  your  enemies.  Both  the  first  and  the 
second  tests  will  almost  come  at  the  same  time.  The  second  test 
will  immediately  follow  the  first  test.  Not  more  than  one  day  will 
pass  over,  after  the  first  test  is  through  with,  before  the  second 
test  will  commence ;  for  I  shall  come  as  soon  as  you  have  cut  off 


570  CONCERNING    THE    AGED    PEOPLE. 

the  false-hearted  from  among  these  people.  I  will  divide  this 
Camp  by  my  holy  angels.  They  shall  do  that  work.  You  will 
have  no  trouble  to  separate  the  false-hearted  from  the  faithful ;  for 
my  holy  angels  will  do  it. 

2.  And  now,    behold, '  I  speak  unto  you  concerning  the  aged 
people   of  ray   Church,   who  are  rendered  weak  and  feeble  by  old 
age.     Those  people  who  are  near  seventy  years  of  age  and  upwards, 
who  are  known  to  have  been   faithful  unto  me,  shall  not  see  the 
first  test.     Satan  shall  not  have  the  privilege  to  take  the  advantage 
of  their  weakness ;  but  they  shall  remain  in  a  house,  or  houses,  as 
the  case  may  be,  and  they  shall  not  come  out  to  behold  the  scene; 
neither  shall  children  under  fourteen  years  of  age  be  permitted  to 
come    out  of  their  houses   to  behold  the    scene;  but  they    shall 
remain  shut  up  in  their  houses  until  the  first  test    is  through  with, 
after  which  they  may  have  the   privilege  to  come  out   of    their 
houses.     The    old    people    and    the    children,    such  '  as    I    have 
described,  shall  be  gathered  together  and  put  into  such  houses  as 
shall  be  appointed  for  that  purpose  until   the   first  test  is  over; 
and  the  aged  people  and  the  young  boys  and  girls  must  take  care 
of  the  infant  children   during  the   absence  of  their   parents   who 
may  be  passing  through  the  test.     This  will  be  their  duty.     The 
first  test  will  be  over  in  the  the  space  of  a  few  hours  at  the  longest; 
therefore,  the  faithful  women  of  my  Church  will  not  be  kept  long 
away  from  their  infants ;  but   the  hypocrites  shall  never  see  their 
children  any  more  in  this  life.     They   shall  not  have  them  to  cor- 
rupt them  and  to  lead  them  down  to  destruction.     I  will  give  their 
children   unto  those  who  will  take  good  care  of  them,  and  train 
them   up   according  to  my  law.     The  faithful  of  my  people  shall 
have  everything  to   make  them  happy;  for  in  due   time  I    will 
deliver  all  things  into  their  hands.     I  am  the  Lord. 

3.  And   behold,   I    say   unto  you,   my  son, — the  first  test  will 
commence  as  soon  as  you  have  foreshadowed  my  coming.     When 
you  commence  to  foreshadow   my  coming,  you  may  know  that  I 
shall   not   be  more   than  two   or  three  days  before  I  come.     The 
foreshadowing  and  the  first  and  second  tests  will  all  be  completed 
in  the  short  space  of  four  or  five  days  from  the  time  that  the  fore- 
shadowing will  commence;  therefore,   you  can   now  make    your 
calculations  as  to  the  time  of  my  coming.     And  when   I   come 


THE    ROBE    AND    ROD.  •  571 

unto  you,  I  shall  approach  you  in  the  way  which  I  have  before 
described  unto  you.  I  shall  send  a  number  of  my  holy  angels 
unto  you  to  influence  and  lead  you  into  my  presence,  and  I  shall 
reach  down  and  give  unto  you  your  robe,  as  I  before  said  unto 

you,  even  at  the  front  of  your  own  door.      I   shall   give   unto   you 

your  robe  and  rod  just  in  the  way  which  I  have  before  described 
unto  you.  I  have  told  you  before  how  to  use  your  rod  when  you 
give  your  command.  You  shall  raise  your  rod  and  steady  it 
before  you  commence  to  give  the  command,  and  you  shall  not 
drop  it  again  until  I  tell  you,  and  then  you  shall  drop  it,  and  raise 
it  again  suddenly,  and  give  unto  me  the  sign  for  stopping,  after 
which,  you  shall  lower  your  rod  for  good.  Your  way  will  then  be 
clear.  You  may  then  place  your  army  in  order  for  starting  out  of 
this  place,  and  traveling  to  the  place  which  I  have  appointed. 
Therefore,  my  son,  make  all  things  ready  for  me,  so  that  I  can 
come  unto  you ;  for  I  am  restless.  I  want  to  clear  the  way  for 
you.  Prepare  for  me ;  and  lo,  I  come  unto  you  quickly.  I  am 
the  Son  of  the  Eternal  Father;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    CONCERNING  THE    DESIGN    OF   THE 
ENEMIES    OF    THE    PEOPLE    OF    GOD. 


No.  284.  WEBER,  UTAH,  May  23rd,  1862. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts,  and  I  am  about  to  speak 
unto  you  again.  You  wish  to  know  what  you  are  to  do  to  obtain 
two  more  horses,  seeing  that  two  of  those  that  were  chosen  by  me 
for  a  certain  purpose  have  been  stolen.  You  are  satisfied  that  you 
will  need  two  more  horses  in  their  stead,  and  how  to  obtain  them 
you  know  not.  You  think  that  it  is  about  time  that  you  had  them 
in  your  possession ;  that  the  test  is  so  near  that  there  is  no  time  to 
spare  to  hunt  for  fresh  horses,  and  you  wish  to  know  how  to  obtain 
them  in  the  easiest  way.  You  say  that  you  would  like  to  know 
whether  I  will  accept  of  mares  instead  of  horses,  seeing  that  the 

i 


572  THE    FORESHADOWING,    ETC. 

horses  which  you  first  obtained  have  been  stolen.  I  will  answer 
you.  I  will  accept  of  mares  in  the  place  of  horses  if  horses  can- 
not be  obtained  in  time,  seeing  that  you  have  once  obtained 
horses  according  to  my  commandment  unto  you.  But  you  need 
not  trouble  yourself  about  that  matter.  I  will  open  the  way  for 
you  so  that  you  can  obtain  such  things  as  you  may  stand  in  need 
of;  therefore,  leave  that  matter  in  my  hands,  and  when  either  horses 
or  mares  are  needed,  they  will  be  brought  forth.  I  will  influence 
you,  and  lead  you  aright,  and  provide  for  you  everything  which 
you  may  need.  I  know  where  there  are  plenty  of  horses-  and 
mares,  and  I  will  give  unto  you  that  which  you  may  stand  in  need 
of.  You  need  not  put  yourself  about  in  the  least  because  you 
cannot  obtain  the  things  which  you  think  you  need ;  for  if  I  do 
not  place  such  things  in  you  hands  immediately,  you  may  know 
that  it  is  not  my  will  for  you  to  receive  them  immediately.  I  will 
give  unto  you  everything  in  the  right  time.  It  is  my  duty  to  give 
unto  you  everything  which  you  need,  and  this  I  can  do,  and  none 
can  hinder. 

2.  My  purposes  and  designs  are  not  frustrated  by  mortal  men, 
or  disembodied  devils.     I  walk  not   in  crooked  paths.     I   work, 
and  none  can  hinder,  and  I  will   convince  the  inhabitants   of  the 
earth  of  this  in  the  space  of  a  few   more   days,    and  they  may  be 
setting  themselves  for  it.     Therefore,  my  son,  set  your  feelings  at 
rest.     I  will  accept  of  such  horses  or  mares  as  I  think  fit  to  pro- 
vide for  you ;  and  although  they   will   be   speedily  needed,  I  can 
speedily  find  them,  and  I  will  find  them  for  you  in  time. 

3,  I  shall  call  upon  you  to  foreshadow  my   coming  as  soon  as 
my  people  can  make  all  things  ready  for  it.     If  they  will  be  dili- 
gent, and  work  with  all  their  might,  they  can  have  all  things  made 
ready  in  the  course  of  four  or  five  days  more  at  the  furthest,  for 
they  have  but  little  more  to  do  to  make  ready  for  it.     If  my  peo- 
ple are  not  diligent,  and  will  not  labor  with  all  their  might,  I  shall 
spur  them  up.     They  had  better  work  with  all  their  might  to  save 
themselves  further  trouble.     If  they  do  not,  they  will  have  trouble 
before  they  are  fully  ready  for  it.     I  shall  give   unto  them  a   suf- 
ficient length  of  time  to  make  all  things  ready,  and  if  they  will  not 
use  that  time  to  advantage,  they  will  have  to  suffer   for  their  sloth- 
fulness  and  negligence.     They  should  open  their  eyes,  and  look 


CONCERNING    THE    THREE    PRISONERS.  573 

about  them,  and  work  with  all  their  might,  for  they  have  no  time 
to  trifle  away.  They  must  work  while  they  have  the  opportunity 
to  do  so.  If  they  will  work  diligently,  they  will  have  all  things 
ready  in  time ;  but  if  they  do  not,  they  will  be  caught  in  a  trap. 

4.  And  behold,   I   speak    unto   you    concerning    those    three 
prisoners  who  are  in  this  place.     I  am  the  •  Lord  of  Hosts,  and  I 
delivered  them  into  the  hands  of  my  people  for  a  special  purpose. 
They  are  my  prisoners.     My  influence  brought  them  to  this  place, 
and  I  shall  deal  with   them  as   seemeth  good  unto  me.     I  can 
make  mine  enemies  stir  at  the  right  time.     I   know  how  to  work 
them  up.     They  have   often   said  that  they   would  not  come  up 
against  my  people  as  a  mob,    and   I   can  assure   them  that  they 
never  shall.     They  will  make  the  attempt  to  come  up  against  my 
people,  but  I  will  sweep  them  off  long  before  they  have  had  the 
privilege  of-  reaching  this  place.     They  would  obey  me  if  I  would 
permit  them.     O  how  obedient  they   are   unto  me.     They  would 
do  as  I  command  them  with  all  their  hearts.     They  long  for  the 
time  to  come  when  they  can  have   the  privilege  of  doing  what  I 
commanded  them  to  do  a  few  months  ago.     They  then  said  that 
they  would  not  obey  me ;    but  they  have  repented  of  that  sin  ever 
since,  and  they  say  in  their  feelings,    "Father,  we  will  obey,  you 
now,  for  we  have  had   no   solid  comfort  since  the  time  that  we 
refused  to  obey  you.     Oh,  Father,  how  we  do  repent !     We  have 
regretted  ever  since  we  did  not  do  as   you   commanded  us  a  few 
months  ago.     Will  you  forgive  us,   Father?  and  we  will  now  do 
what  you  then  commanded   us   to  do,  with  all  our  hearts,  souls, 
might  and  strength,  for  we  have  had   no  solid   pleasure   since   we 
rebelled  against  you.     We  know,  Father,  that  it  is  the  best  thing 
that  we  can  do  to  obey  you  whenever  you  speak.     We  are  poor, 
ignorant  creatures.     We  do   not  know  what  is  the  best  for  us ; 
and   now,    Father,   we  acknowledge   our  weakness  and  ignorance. 

0  Father,  will  you  forgive  us  for  our  rebellion  t  and  we  will  now 
obey  you  with  all  our  hearts." 

5.  O  ye  hypocrites  !     Ye  vipers  !     Your  race  is  now  run.      Ye 
rebellious    and    blood-thirsty    race!     I   will    now    give    unto   you 
blood  enough.     You  will  obey  when  you  cannot  help  yourselves. 

1  can  bring  you   to  obedience.     I   can   answer  mine  own  ends 
with  you,  and  make  you  do  what  I  want  you  to  do.     I  do  not 


574  CONCERNING    THE    ENEMIES. 

want  to  save  you;  but  I  shall  make  use  of  you  to  bring  to  pass 
mine  own  purposes.  Ye  are  vessels  of  wrath,  doomed  to  suffer  in 
the  lake  of  fire  and  brimstone — this  is  your  doom.  O  ye  hypo- 
crites, you  shall  not  now  have  the  privilege  to  come  up  to  this 
place  against  my  people.  Ye  might  have  come  up  into  this  Fort 
a  number  of  months  ago,  if  ye  had  dene  as  I  commanded  you, 
and  I  would  have  smitten  you  all  dead  in  this  place. 

6.  I  will  control  mine  enemies,  and  I  will   bring  them   to  the 
right  point.     You  need  not   trouble   yourself  at   all    about  them  ; 
but  make  all  things  ready  for   me  as   soon  as   possible,  so  that   I 
can  come  unto  you ;    for  you  will  need  me  shortly.      1  will  be  with 
you  when  I  am  needed.     Those  prisoners  are  in  my  hands,  and  I 
shall  deal  with  them  as  seemeth  good  unto  me. 

7.  And  behold,  I   give   unto  you   a  commandment,  my    son. 
You   shall  pay  no  attention  to  sheriffs,   lawyers,   petty  governors 
and  devil's  slaves ;  for  I  will  pay  them  all  off  at  once.     They  will 
never  trouble  you  at  all.     You  shall  hold   those   prisoners   until   I 
tell  you  what  to  do  with  them ;  and  what  I  command   you  to    do, 
you  must  do.     Should  any  officers  of  the  law  command  you  to  let 
those  prisoners  go,  and  threaten  you  with  the  consequences  if  you 
continue  to  hold  them,  you  must  tell   those  officers  that  you  fear 
no  consequences,  and  that  you  pay  no  more  regard  to  them   than 
what  you  do  to  the  dirt  under  your  feet ;   and  should  they  threaten 
to  send  up  a  mob  against  these  people,  to  sweep  them   off,  tell 
them  to  send  it  as  soon  as  they  can.     You  need  not  be  afraid,  my 
son,  that  you  will  not  have  all  things  ready  by  the  time  that   your 
enemies  will  be  prepared  to  come  up  against  you ;    for  should  they 
attempt  to  come  up  against  you  to-morrow,  I   am    ready  for  them, 
and  I  would  cut  them  all  off.     I  need  not  wait  until  I  have  given 
unto  you  the  rod,  and  until  you  have  given  your  command ;   for  I 
have  the  privilege,  at  any  time,  to  cut  off  a  few   hundreds  of  peo- 
ple  who    may  attempt   to   injure   or  commit  violence    upon    my 
people :    this  I  can   do  according  to   law,   without  the   raising  of 
your  rod.     You  understand  the  principle  by  which  I  can  do  this. 
Therefore,  I  am  ready  for  your  enemies  whenever  they  make  the 
attempt  to  come.      Make  all  things  ready  for  me   as  soon  as    you 
can,  and  deliver  all  your  enemies  into  my  hands,  and  I  will  attend 
to  them.     They  will  never   trouble  you   while  they  are   alive.     I 


THE    SABBATH    DAY.  575 

need  not  give  unto  you  any  more  at  present  Let  this  suffice, 
and  I  will  shortly  speak  unto  you  again.  I  am  the  Light  and  Life 
of  the  world ;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION  CONCERNING  THE  SABBATH  DAY. 


No.  285.  .  WEBER,  UTAH,  May  23rd,  1862. 

1.  INASMUCH  as  some  of  my  people  have  been  to  inquire  of 
you  whether  they  should  work  to-morrow,  seeing  that  things  are  so 
pressing,  I  wish  to  speak  unto  you   upon  this   subject.     It  is  not 
necessary  for  my  servants  to  labor  on  that  day  which  is  called   the 
Sabbath  day ;  for  it  is  a  day  that  has  been  set  apart  by  the  world 
of  mankind  to   worship   me,   as   they   suppose.     They  know  that 
there  should  be  a  Sabbath  day,  and  they  call  the  day  that  is  now 
set  apart  to  worship  me,  the  Sabbath   day,    and  it  will  have  to 
remain  as   such   at  present ;  but   in   due   time  I  will  put  all  such 
things  right.     I  have  to  let  things  be  until  the  time  arrives  that  I 
can  lawfully  change  them,  and  put  that  right  which  is  now  wrong. 
All  things   which   are   now  wrong,   in   due   time  I   will  put  right, 
through   you.     There   is  nothing  right  in  the  world ;  for  the  devil 
has  turned  everything  upside  down,  and  changed  the  true  sense  of 
everything  that   he  has  anything  to  do  with.     He  has  had  to  do 
with  everything  that  belongs  to  this  earth  for  six  thousand  years, 
and  his  influence  has  been  the  prevailing  influence  for  that  length 
of  time,  with  the  exception  of  a  number  of  years  while  the  fulness 
of  the  holy   priesthood    was  upon  the  earth.     His  influence  is  a 
false  influence,   and   by  it  all  mankind,   or  rather  all  Abraham's 
seed,  have  been  deceived. 

2.  All  things   in  this  world  are  wrong  for  me,    but  they  are 
right  for  the  devil.     Any  thing  that  is  wrong  for  the  Gods,  is  right 
for  the  devil.     He  claims  all  that  they  throw  away.     They  lay  no 
claim  at  all  to  rotten  and  false  material,  for  it   all  belongs  to  the 
devil.     The  Gods  claim   all  that  is  true  and  right,  even  all  that  is 
endurable ;  for  all  true  material  will  endure  in  an  organized  form 
to  all  eternity.     Pure  material  will  never  waste  away,  nor  diminish 


576  THE  INFLUENCE  OF  SATAN. 

in  the  least ;  for  it  has  the  power  within  itself  to  sustain  itself ;  and 
being  the  most  powerful  material,  it  cuts  its  way  through  all  im- 
pure material,  and  loses  nothing.  It  continually  disorganizes  the 
impure  material.  In  this  way  all  false  and  impure  material  con- 
tinues to  lose  its  power.  It  can  never  exist  in  an  organized  state 
long  enough  to  arrive  at  any  height  of  glory  and  exaltation.  It  is 
so  rotten  and  deceitful  that  it  continually  destroys  its  own  organ- 
ization. It  cannot  continue  in  an  organized  form  more  than  a  few 
years,  compared  with  eternity. 

3.  The  devil  is  such  a  fool,  and  so  ignorant,  that  he  destroys 
his  own  existence,   and  the  existence  of  everybody   who  comes 
under  his  influence,  except  those  whose  right  it   is  to  wield  the 
full  power  of  the  priesthood.     All  the  rest  he  destroys.     O  that  all 
Abraham's  seed  knew  what  a  fool  they  have  had  to  lead   them   in 
this   miserable  world ;  if  they  knew  this,   they   would  be  glad  to 
come  out  from  under  his  influence;  but  they  are  blinded  by  him 
so  much   that  they   cannot   see   at   all.     They  are  continually  in 
misery,  groping  their  way  through  the  world  without  a  friend  in  it 
that  can  benefit  them  at  all.     They  need  not  look  to  their  fellow 
creatures   for  help ;  for  none  can  help  them  but  me.     Their  help 
must  come  from  above.     I  will  assist  them  if  they  will  permit  me, 
and  they  need  not  look  to  any  other  source  for  any  help.     I   am 
the  Lord  of  Hosts. 

4.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — it  is  my  will  that  my 
servants  should  not  work  on  that  day  which  has  been  set  apart  to 
worship  me ;  but  they  may  labor  until  late  this  evening,  and  com-  • 
mence  early  on  Monday  morning,  if  they  feel  to  do  so,  and  that 
will   answer  as  well  as   working   on   the   day  which  is  called  the 
Sabbath   day.     They   must   assemble  with  the  rest  of  my  people, 
and   worship  me  with  all  their  hearts,  and  I  will  bless  them  abun-* 
dantly. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.     I  am  the   Son  of  the  Eternal 
Father;  even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


COMMANDED    TO    REORGANIZE    THE    ARMY.  577 

% 

REVELATION      INSTRUCTING     THE     PROPHET     TO 

REORGANIZE  HIS  ARMY  ACCORDING  TO 

A  FORMER  REVELATION. 


No.   286.  WEBER,  UTAH,  May  26th,  1862. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  he  who  moves  forth  in  the  midst  of  darkness, 
and  the  darkness  comprehendeth  me    not— even    Jesus    Christ ; 
and  I   am   about   to  speak  unto  you  again.     It  would  be  well  for 
you  to  set  your  army  in  order,  according  to  the  revelation  which 
I   lately   gave   unto  you.     You  must  make  such  alterations  in  the 
army  as  will  be  necessary,  according  to  the  instructions  contained 
therein,     ^ou  will  understand  me.     You  know  what  ought  to  be 
done  in  order  to  have  your  army  properly   arranged,   according  to 
the  pattern  which  I  have  given  unto  you  ;  therefore,  attend  to  this 
matter  as  soon  as  you  can,  and  all  will  be  well.     And   as   soon  as 
my  people  have  made  all  things  ready,  I  will  give  unto  you  a  com- 
mandment to  commence  to  foreshadow   my  coming.     I   am   now 
waiting  for  them. 

2.  Your  enemies  'abroad   seem   to  trouble  you,  and  you  fear 
that  I  shall  let  them  loose  before  you  have  made  all   things   ready 
for   me  to   come   out   to  meet  them.     You   say  that  you  see  the 
situation  of  these  people,  and  you  are  afraid  that  they  do  not  work 
fast  enough  for  me,  and  that  I  shall  let  their  enemies  loose   upon 
them  to   drive  them  to  their  duty,  and  to  chastise  them  for  their 
negligence  and  slothfulness.     You  say  that  you  do  not  like  to  be 
brought   into   difficulty  through   the   unfaithfulness  and  neglect  of 
those  of  my  people  who  have  never  laid  my  work  to  heart  as  they 
ought  to  have  done  ;  and  that  you  wish  me  to  hold  your  enemies 
from   you  until  you  are  through  with  both  the  foreshadowing  and 
the  first  test ;  and  you  think  that  you  will  then  be  fully  ready  for 
them.     I  can  assure  you  that  you  will  be  ready  for  them  then.      I 
will  make  unto  you  this  promise :    I  will  either  keep  your  enemies 
from    you   until   you  are   ready  for  them,  or  I  will  smite  them  all 
dead   at  once.     It   matters    not    how.  soon   they   may   make   the 
attempt  to  come  up  against  these  people;  for  whenever  they  make 
that  attempt,  I  will  cut  them  all  off.     I  should  like  to  bring  them 


578  THE  PROPHET  FEELS  OPPRESSED. 

to  that  point,  and  I  can  do  so  without  any  difficulty.  Therefore, 
rest  yourself  contented  concerning  your  enemies,  and  be  of  good 
courage,  and  I  will  suddenly  strengthen  you.  I  know  that  you 
feel  weak  and  much  oppressed  at  this  time ;  but  I  will  lift  you  out 
of  weakness  all  at  once.  The  oppression  which  you  are  called  to 
endure,  works  against  you ;  it  holds  you  down,  and  serves  to 
depress  your  spirits ;  it  gives  the  devil  great  power  over  you  to 
such  an  extent  that  you  cannot  enjoy  life.  Your  happiness  is 
destroyed  through  the  influence  of  the  devil  which  has  prevailed 
in  the  worrd  for  so  long  a  time ;  but  as  soon  as  I  come  you  will  be 
relieved  of  that  burden,  for  mine  influence  will  be  the  greatest 
influence  in  the  world ;  the  influence  of  the  world  will  then  have  to 
bow  to  it,  and  all  my  faithful  people  will  be  relieved  of  that  false 
and  oppressive  influence  all  at  once.  They  will  n»t  then  feel 
oppessed  as  they  do  now ;  therefore,  let  them  be  of  good  courage, 
and  they  will  be  relieved  speedily.  Let  them  work  diligently,  and 
make  all  things  ready  as  soon  as  they  can.  I  am  the  Lord. 

3.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — it  would  be  well  if 
my  people  wrould  have  an  eye  to  those  horses  which  will  be  needed. 
If  my  servants  cannot  obtain  horses  enough  for  the  occasion,  I 
will  accept  of  mares  instead  thereof.  I  will  accept  of  the  best 
horses  or  mares  which  they  can  obtain.  When  they  have  done  the 
best  that  they  can,  I  require  no  more  of  them. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.  I  am  the  Bright  and  Morning 
Star;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    IN    WHICH    THE    LORD    REASSURES 

THE  PROPHET  THAT  THE  ENEMIES 

WILL  BE  DESTROYED. 


No.  287.  WEBER,  UTAH,  May  27th,  1862. 

i.  You  are  much  troubled  in  your  feelings,  my  son,  and  you 
have  many  complaints  to  make  against  me.  You  seem  to  find 
much  fault  with  my  way  of  working  at  present.  What  can  I  do  to 


°F  THE 

'IVER  SIX'S 


THE    PROPHET    EXPRESSES    DISSATISFACTION.  579 

satisfy  you?  You  feel  to  complain  of  me  for  suffering  mine 
enemies  to  steal  those  two  horses,  after  you  had  put  yourself  to  so 
much  trouble  to  obtain  them.  You  wish  to  know  whether  I  pay 
any  attention  at  all  unto  your  enemies,  or  whether  I  intend  to  let 
them  run  at  large,  and  steal  from  my  people  what  they  have  ar 
mind  to  do.  You  say  that  if  I  do  pay  any  attention  to  them,  and 
regard  the  interests  and  welfare  of  these  people,  you  would  like  me 
to  show  unto  you  the  reason  why  I  suffered  mine  enemies  to  steal 
those  horses ;  for  that  you  cannot  fully  see  through  that  act ;  if  y^ou 
could,  your  feelings  would  be  somewhat  relieved.  You  also  say 
that  I  have  always  permitted  your  enemies  to  come  into  this  place 
whenever  they  have  wished  to  do  so ;  that  you  cannot  see  a  time 
when  I  have  ever  restrained  them,  in  the  least,  from  doing  what 
they  wanted  to  do.  If  I  have  ever  restrained  them  from  com- 
mitting any  violent  act  upon  these  people,  you  say  that  I  have 
done  it  in  such  a  way  that  you  could  not  see  it ;  for  that  you  never 
saw  me  interfere  with  your  enemies  in  any  plain  and  satisfactory 
manner. 

*2.  You  say  that  you  are  entirely  tired  of  shadows ;  that  you 
want  to  see  me  begin  to  do  something,  and  not  talk  so  much ; 
that  you  should  like  me  a  deal  better  if  I  would  only  prove  to  you 
that  I  am  as  ready  to  fight  as  I  am  to  talk ;  that  I  seem  to  mani- 
fest so  much  mercy  and  sympathy  towards  that  blood-thirsty  race 
that  is  in  the  midst  of  the  people  in  this  Territory,  that  I  entirely 
discourage  you.  You  think  that  I  would  rather  talk  than  act ;  in 
fact,  you  are  afraid  of  me  neglecting  my  duty.  You  begin  to  think 
that  I  am  sympathizing  with  fallen  spirits,  and  with  those  who 
have  been  corrupted  by  them.  You  say  that  I  afflict  you  severely 
with  causing  you  to  bear  their  threats,  abuses  and  robberies ;  that 
you  would  like  to  know  how  much  more  abuse  I  wish  yofi  to  take 
from  them  ;  that  if  you  had  the  power  in  your  own  hands  you 
would  never  trouble  me  for  help;  that  I  am  so  slow  to  make  any 
kind  of  a  move  that  will  count,  that  I  have  entirely  wearied  you 
out ;  that  you  cannot  see  why  I  should  put  up  with  so  much  from 
devils  as  I  do ;  that  in  consequence  of  suffering  so  much  from 
devils,  I  am  destroying  your  confidence  in  me.  You  cannot  see 
any  just  cause  for  putting  up  with  them  so  long,  and  you  are  afraid 
that  I  am  giving  way  to  the  devils  and  turning  traitor  to  you.  You 


580  THE    PROPHET    EXPRESSES    DISSATISFACTION. 

are  so  worked  up  in  your  feelings  against  me,  in  consequence  of 
your  oppression,  that  you  are  almost  ready  to  charge  me  with 
being  a  friend  of  the  devil,  and  an  enemy  to  righteousness ;  but  I 
suppose  that  I  shall  have  to  bear  your  false  charges  until  I  can 
convince  you  to  the  contrary.  I  should  not  bear  so  much  from 
you  if  you  were  not  oppressed  to  such  an  unreasonable  extent.  I 
I  know  that  you  cannot  help  murmuring,  and  I  have  to  put  up 
with  it ;  but  it  is  unpleasant  to  me. 

3.  I  am   no   more  the  friend  of  the  devil  than  you  are ;  for  I 
despise  both  him  and  his  works  as  bad  as   you   do;  neither  am  I 
afraid   to  fight  when  the  way  has  been  opened  for  me.     I  shall  be 
as   ready  to  fight,  when  the  time  has  come  for  me  to  do  so,  as  I 
have  ever  been  to  talk.     I   am  always   ready   to    do    my  duty, 
whether  you  think  so  or  not.     Your  prejudice  against  me  will  not 
change  the  truth;  but  it  will  injure  you  very  much.     I  have  done 
all  that   I   possibly   could  to  keep  down  prejudice  in  your  mind 
against  me ;  but  it  seems  almost  impossible  for  me  to  do  so,  for  if 
I  put  it  down  in  one  case,  it  will  rise  again  in   another.     You   are 
not    satisfied    with   my   way  of  working.     I  do  not  work  plainly 
enough  for  you.    You  cannot  see  every  move  which  I  make  among 
these  people  and  among  mine  enemies.     You  wish  to  see  both  me 
and   my  holy  angels   come   and   go,   and  to  do  this,  that  and  the 
other.     You  want  to  see  us  all  just  as  we  are,  and  you  say  in  your 
feelings  that  you  will  never  be  satisfied  until  you  do  see  us,  know- 
ing that  it  is  your  right  to  see  us.     You  want  no  mystery  at  all. 

4.  I   know  that   it  is  your  privilege  to  see  us;  but  you  are  not 
willing  to  give  me  time  to   confer  that   blessing   upon   you.     You 
cannot   have  the  privilege   of  fully  beholding   me   and  my   holy 
angels  and  watching  us  move  about  from  place  to  place,  even  as 
one  maia  sees  another,  until  you  are   endowed   with  the  power  of 
your  office.     We  must  first  come  unto  you  all  together  before  you 
can  see  us  to  your  satisfaction.     You   shall   then  stand   and   talk 
with  us,  and  handle  our  hands.     You   shall   then  see  resurrected 
beings  until  you  are  fully  satisfied ;  for  they  shall  continually    be 
with  you,  ministering  in  your  presence.     You  shall  see  them  smite 
your  enemies  dead   whenever  they  approach  you.     Your  life-guard 
will   consist  of  holy   angels,  and   not  mortal  men ;  for  they  are  a 
surer  guard  than  mortal  men  are.      I  shall  not  place   you  in  the 
hands  of  mortal  men. 


THE  GUARDIAN  ANGELS.  581 

5.  It  will   be  the   duty  of  your  soldiers  to  cut  off  hypocrites 
from   among  your   own   people.      I    am  your  guardian  angel,  and 
mine  army,  which  numbers  two  hundred  million,  will  be  your  life- 
guard.    They  are  all  at  my  command,    and  I  am   at  your  com- 
mand ;  therefore,    I  am   your  guardian   angel,   and  mine  army  is— 
your   life-guard.     You  need  not  fear  a  few  of  mine  enemies,  such 
as  your  life-guard  may  think  fit  to  admit  into  this  place ;  for  I  shall 
suffer   nothing  to  come   into  this   place  but  for  a  wise  purpose  in 
myself.     Should  you  see  a  few  men  come  into  this  place,  you  may 
know  that   your  guards   know  their  business,  and  that  they  have 
admitted  them.      We  suffer  none  to  come  into  this  place  but  those 
whom   we   admit.     There  is  no  power  upon   the  earth  that  could 
come  into   this    place  if  we   did   not  admit  it.      This   place  has 
been  guarded  ever  since  you  came  into  it,  and  it  will  be  guarded 
until  you  go  out  of  it ;  and  when  you  go  ©ut  of  it,  your  guard  will 
go  with  you.     Ever  since  you  came  into  this  place  there  has  been 
one   of  the   first  generals  with   all  his  host,  which  numbers  about 
eighteen  million,    planted  here,   and  they  have  been  guarding  you 
and   my   people,   and  no  person   has  ever  entered  into  this  place 
but  those  whom  the  general  has  admitted.     No  earthly  power  can 
approach  you  ;  therefore,  you  have  nothing  to  fear.     Put  far  away 
from  you  all  prejudice  against  me ;  for  there  is  no  cause  whatever 
for  it.    If  I  ever  suffer  your  enemies  to  come  upon  you,  I  will  then 
bear   the    blame.     Wait   until   you   have  a  just  cause  before  you 
blame  me,  and  then  I  will  willingly  bear  it ;  but  do  not  act  unrea- 
sonably.    If  you  are  oppressed  to  an  unreasonable  extent,  strive  to 
bear  it,  and  do  not  begin  to  blame  me  without  a  just   cause.     I 
feel  for  you,  and  I  will  release  you  as  soon  as  I  can ;  therefore,  be 
patient.     I  am  one  with  you,  and  always  ready  to  assist  you. 

6.  And   as  concerning  those  horses  which  mine  enemies  stole 
away  from  my  people, — I  suffered  them  to  commit  that  act  for  a 
wise  purpose  in  myself.   » You  know,  my  son,  that  all  their  judges, 
lawyers,    presidents  and   bishops   sanctioned  that   act  when  they 
knew,  at  the  same  time,  that  those  horses  were  stolen.     Those  per- 
sons who   stole   them   were   counseled  to  do  so  by  men  who  now 
stand  in  high  authority  in  this  Territory.      Do   I  require  anything 
more  of  those  judges,  lawyers,   presidents  and  bishops  than  .what 
they  have  already  done?     I  am  taking  a  course  to  dra'w  all  the 


582  COXCKRNINC,    THE    ENEMIES. 

head  authorities  of  this  Territory  into  the  snare  which  they  have 
been  laying  for  the  pure  of  my  people,  and  I  shall  catch  them  in 
it.  They  have  striven  with  all  their  power  to  rob,  cheat  and 
destroy  the  poor  of  my  people,  and  now  I  will  destroy  them — this 
is  just — it  is  the  reward  of  their  own  hands,  for  they  have  justly 
merited  it.  It  is  my  duty  to  give  unto  every  person  the  reward  of 
his  own  works,  and  I  will  do  so.  Deliver  all  things  into  my  hands, 
my  son,  and  I  will  manage  them  well. 

7.  Mine  enemies  are  now  studying  what  to  do  to  bring  this 
people  into  subjection  to  them.  They  say  that  they  can  see  that 
blood  will  have  to  be  shed;  and  I  can  assure  them  that  blood  will 
be  shed,  but  it  will  be  their  blood.  As  soon  as  they  have  pre- 
pared themselves  to  make  a  move  against  my  people,  I  will  catch 
them.  All  that  I  want  of  them  is  to  draw  themselves  together  in 
a  body,  ready  to  start  up  to  this  place ;  and  when  they  have  done 
this,  I  will  slay  them.  They  shall  not  live  one  minute  after  they 
have  done  this.  They  will  come  to  this  point  as  soon  as  my  peo- 
ple can  get  ready  for  me  to  come.  I  will  break  them  up  and  con- 
fuse them,  so  that  they  cannot  operate  until  I  am  ready  to  destroy 
them  all,  arid  then  I  will  let  them  loose.  Therefore,  be  of  good 
courage,  and  know  that  I  am  with  you  unto  the  end.  Even  Jesus 
Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION     INSTRUCTING     THE     PROPHET     TO 
WEAR    SEVEN    WHOLE    CROWNS    UPON    HIS 
.  HAT   WHEN    HE    FORESHADOWS 
THE    LORD. 


No.  288.  WEBER,  UTAH,  May  28th,  1862. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts.  I  wish  to  speak  unto 
you  again.  You  wish  to  know  of  me  how  you  are  to  march  out 
of  this  place  at  the  head  of  this  people,  and  I  will  make  it  known 
unto  you.  When  you  go  before  these  people  to  the  place  which  I 
have  appointed,  you  must  be  dressed  as  a  man  of  war.  You  will 
not  need  to  carry  a  rod  in  your  hand  when  you  are  on  the  march 
from  this  place;  but  you  must  carry  a  sword  in  your  hand. 


CONCERNING    THE    CROWNS.  583 

2.  Before  you  commence  to  march  out  of  this  place,  you  will 
have  used  the  rod ;  and  when  you  have  used  it,  you  will  return  it 
to  me  to  take  care  of  it  for  you  until   you  have   a   place  prepared 
where  you  can  take  care  of  it  yourself;    but,  until  then,  I  will  take 
care  of  it  for  you.      Therefore,  you   will   only  need  to  carry  your 
sword  while  you  are  on  the  march  from   this  place.      And   as   you 
travel  you  must  foreshadow  or  represent  me  to  the  people  until 
ycu  arrive  at  your  journey's  end.     You  should  have   seven  whole 
crowns,  in  order  to   properly  represent   me   to  the  people.     You 
have    but    one    whole  crown    now,   and  that  is  not  sufficient  to 
properly  represent  me   to  the   people.      Although   I   shall   march 
before  you,  and  you  will  see  me,  mine   enemies,   or  rather  those 
whom  I  shall  have  left  alive,  will  not  see  me.     I  shall  be  unveiled 
to  you  and  to  some  of  the  most  Jaithful  of  my  people;    but  I  shall 
be  veiled  to  all  others ;   therefore,  you  will  have  to  represent  me 
unto  them ;  and  to  do  this  correctly,  you  should  have  six  more 
whole  crowns  made,  but  you  need  not  have  them   made   as  large 
as  the  central  crown.     You  can  have  them  made  in  the  course  of 
two  or  three  days.     You  need  not  fear  your  enemies  coming  upon 
you,  for  I  will  hold  them  until  the  right  time.     Do  as  I  command 
you,   and  I  will   take   care   of  your   enemies.      When   you  have 
obtained  six  more  whole  crowns,  you  will  be  able  to  cast  a  pretty 
correct  shadow  of  me;   but  you  could  not  do  so  with  but   one 
crown,  for  I  wear  seven  perfect  crowns,  and  you  must  also  wear 
seven  perfect  crowns,  in  order  to  cast  a  perfect  shadow  of  me. 

3.  Let   my   servant,    or  servants,   work   with   all   diligence   to 
make  those  six  crowns ;   and  while  they  are  being  made,  let  my 
people  make  all  other  things  ready,  for  I  do  not   want  to  wait  any 
longer  for  them  than  while  those  crowns  are  being  made.     Let 
my  people   strive  to   make  themselves  ready  altogether,  and  not 
have  to  wait  for  each  other ;  for   as  soon   as  those   crowns  shall 
have  been  made,  the  foreshadowing  must  commence.     It  will  take 
but  a  short  time  to  make  those  crowns  if  my  servant  Gudmund 
Gudmundsen  can  obtain  a  little  assistance.     He  has  been  very 
diligent  in  doing  his  duty,  and  I  am  well  pleased  with  him.     He 
will  not  lose  his  reward   for  his  diligence   and   faithfulness  to  my 
work ;    for  his  labors  shall  be  as  bread  cast  upon  the  waters — seen 
after  many  days — yea,  for  many  generations ;    and  his  name  will 


584  CONCERNING  THE  PROCLAMATION. 

become  great  upon  the  earth,  for  he  is  a  man  without  guile ;  guile 
is  not  found  in  his  mouth ;  he  is  pure  before  me,  even  as  pure  as 
he  can  be  at  the  present  time.  But  my  people  will  be  purer  in 
due  time'  than  they  now  are.  They  will  know  much  more  than 
they  know  now,  and  have  the  power  to  carry  it  out  in  their  lives. 
This  will  raise  them  in  the  scale  of  perfection.  My  people,  as  yet, 
know  but  little  about  purity;  but  when  my  law  has  been  fully 
revealed  unto  them,  they  will  know  .what  purity  is  to  a  great  extent. 
They  now  know  but  little  about  it;  consequently,  but  little  is 
required  of  them. 

4.  You  wish  to  know,  my  son,  whether  it  is  necessary  for  you 
to  carry  my  proclamation  on  the  front  of  your  hat  when  you  travel 
from  this  place  to  the  place  which  I  have  appointed.  Twill  inform 
you.  You  must  carry  my  proclamation  on  the  front  of  your  hat 
until  you  have  represented  me  before  the  people.  You  must  wear 
it  until  I  tell  you  to  take  it  off;  and  when  you  take  it  off,  I  will 
represent  myself  to  the  people  of  this  Territory  who  may  be  left 
alive.  Therefore,  you  must  wear  my  proclamation,  and  those  six 
additional  crowns,  until  I  tell  you  to  take  them  off,  after  which  I 
^hall  stand  before  all  people,  and  as  many  as  can  look  upon  me 
unveiled,  shall  see  me  as  I  am.  I  shall  then  stand  before  them  to 
represent  myself;  but,  until  then,  you  must  represent  me  unto 
them.  I  shall  show  myself  unto  those  who  have  yielded  obedience 
unto  the  fulness  of  my 'gospel  before  I  show  myself  unto  those  who 
will  be  left  alive  in  the  Territory.  You  must  first  foreshadow  me 
unto  those  in  this  Fort  who  have  embraced  my  gospel,  and  then  I 
will  come  and  show  myself  unto  them.  They  are  the  first-fruits  of 
my  kingdom,  and  consequently  are  entitled  to  the  first  visit  from 
me ;  therefore,  I  shall  pay  to  them  the  first  visit.  And  I  shall  cut 
off  their  enemies  before  you  will  be  called  to  foreshadow  me  unto 
those  who  will  be  left  alive ;  and  after  you  have  foreshadowed  me 
unto  them,  I  will  stand  before  them  unveiled,  andahey  shall  look 
upon  me  and  see  me  as  clearly  as  one  mortal  man  sees  another. 
I  shall  first  show  myself  unto  my  people  in  this  place,  when  I 
come  to  deliver  them ;  and  secondly,  I  shall  show  myself  unto 
such  as  will  be  left  alive  after  the  overflowing  scourge  shall  have 
passed  through  this  Territory.  In  this  way  I  shall  make  myself 
manifest  unto  all  those  whom  I  shall  leave  alive  after  I  have  cut 


CONCERNING  THE  ENEMIES.  585 

off  mine  enemies.  Those  who  will  be  left  alive  will  gather  around 
you  and  my  servants  by  thousands  to  hear  you  preach,  and  they 
will  believe  the  words  which  will  flow  from  your  mouths,  with  all 
their  hearts,  and  they  will  seek  to  enter  into  my  Church  with  all 
their  power.  You  will  then  have  little  or  no  trouble  to  convince 
people  of  the  truthfulness  of  your  mission;  for  they  will  believe  it 
with  all  their  hearts,  and  seek  diligently  to  become  one  with  you. 
Therefore,  my  son,  be  of  good  courage,  and  make  all  things  ready 
for  me  as  soon  as  you  can ;  and  lo,  I  come  quickly.  I  am  Jesus 
Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    CONCERNING    THE     ENEMIES,    THE 
PRISONER,    AND    THE    FORESHADOWING. 


No.   289.  WEBER,  UTAH,  May  2pth,  1862. 

i.  WHAT  can  I  do  for  you  to  relieve  your  mind  from  so  much 
oppression?  You  understand  my  situation  very  well.  You  know 
that  I  cannot  cut  off  your  enemies  until  they  have  gathered  them- 
selves together  and  made  the  attempt  to  come  up  against  my  peo- 
ple with  the  intention  to  destroy  them.  When  they  have  gathered 
themselves  together  to  some  place,  and  made  the  attempt  to  come 
up  against  this  place,  then  I  will  send  one  of  the  captains  of  our 
hosts,  and  he  shall  cut  them  all  off  in  an  instant.  I  am  watching 
their  movements,  and  I  am  ready  for  them,  no  matter  how  soon 
they  make  the  attempt  to  come  up  to  this  place.  But  you  say  in 
your  feelings  that  you  do  not  believe  I  should  cut  your  enemies  off 
if  they  were  to  make  the  attempt  to  come  up  against  this  people 
before  the  foreshadowing  is  through  with ;  for  you  say  that  you 
cannot  see  how  I  could  be  ready  for  them  before  my  coming  has 
been  foreshadowed.  You  say  that  you  cannot  see  how  the  sub- 
stance could  come  before  the  shadow.  You  think  that  if  I  was  to 
cut  them  off,  that  I  should  have  to  bring  the  substance  to  do  it; 
for  you  think  that  no  shadow  would  cut  off  hundreds  of  people ; 
but  I  can  assure  you  that  I  shall  not  be  put  to  the  necessity  of 
cutting  them  off  before  my  coming  has  been  foreshadowed.  I  will 


586  CONCERNING    THE    ENEMIES. 

keep  them  off  until  the  right  time.  You  need  not  fear  that  you 
will  be  troubled  with  them  before  I  am  fully  ready  for  them,  for 
you  will  not. 

2.  They  are  striving  with  all  their  power  to  get  ready;  and  I 
have  sent  mine  angels  unto  them  to  take  charge  of  them,  and  if 
they  work  too  fast,  mine  angels  will  confuse  them  and  hinder  them 
until  the  right  time  has  come.  They  are  now  both  doing  and 
undoing,  and  they  cannot  make  headway  as  fast  as  they  wish  to, 
and  they  do  not  know  what  is  the  matter.  They  consider  that 
they  ought  to  have  been  up  to  this  place  before  this  time,  and 
have  finished  their  work  with  my  people.  They  are  hindered,  and 
they  do  not  know  what  it  is  that  hinders  them.  It  is  mine  angels 
who  are  with  them,  confusing  them,  and  holding  them  back.  That 
general  and  those  angels  who  are  now  with  them,  will  control  them 
and  let  them  gather  themselves  together  in  a  solid  body  to  start  up 
to  this  place,  and  as  soon  as  they  are  started,  mine  angels  will  lay 
them  all  low.  You  may  depend  upon  what  I  tell  you,  for  I  shall 
do  as  I  have  said.  Let  not  your  spirit  droop,  for  all  things  will  work 
right.  Things  will  not  be  as  bad  as  you  think  that  they  will.  You 
have  not  much  confidence  in  this  people.  You  look  on  the  dark 
side,  and  you  almost  imagine  things  will  work  worse  among  this 
people  when  the  first  test  comes  than  what  they  really  will.  I  can 
assure  you  that  there  are  some  true-hearted  men  in  the  midst  of 
my  people,  who  will  cut  off  anything  which  you  command  them 
to.  They  will  stand  by  you  unto  death.  They  are  not  all  false- 
hearted ;  and  that  you  will  see  when  they  are  tried.  There  are 
some  men  in  the  midst  of  my  people  who  will  stand  trying  unto 
death.  They  will  not  give  way  when  they  are  tested.  My  peo- 
ple are  not  all  corrupt  and  worthless.  There  is  an  abundance  of 
faithful  people  m  this  Camp  to  cut  off  the  hypocrites,  and  they 
will  do  so  when  you  command  them  to  do  it;  for  my  spirit  shall 
rest  upon  the  faithful  of  my  people  to  that  extent  that  they  will 
feel  no  weakness  at  all.  They  shall  feel  my  spirit  work  upon  them 
in  such  a  powerful  manner  as  they  have  never  felt  it  work  upon 
them  before,  and  it  will  qualify  them  for  the  work  that  lies  before 
them.  I  will  tell  you  how  to  divide  the  Camp  and  to  slay  the 
hypocrites  as  soon  as  you  are  through  with  the  foreshadowing  of 
my  coming ;  for  the  dividing  of  this  Camp  will  immediately  follow 
the  foreshadowing. 


CONCERNING    THE    PRISONER.  587 

3.  You   wish  to  know  when  I  intend  to  show  unto  you  the 
place  which  I  have  appointed  for  you  and  me  to  stand  upon  when  « 
I   come.     You  begin  to  think   that  it  is  time  for  me  to  begin  to 
show  unto  you  that  spot  of  ground ;  for  you  say  that  you  can  see 
that  my  coming  is  not  far  off;  and  you  say  that  you  would  like  me 
to  show  unto  you  that  spot  of  ground  a  little   beforehand.     I   will 
show  it   unto  you  as  soon  as  you  are  through  with  foreshadowing 
my  coming.     I   will  show  it  unto  you   in  time.     You  need  not 
to   fear.     All  things  shall  come  along  in  their    right   time    and 
order. 

4.  I  see  that  those  men  who  were  on  guard  have  let  one  of 
their  prisoners  go ;  but  I  will  take  care  of  him.     He  is  not  out  of 
my  hands,  if  he  has  escaped  from  my  people.     I  will  pay  him  off. 
He  will   gain  nothing  by   running  away,  for  I  will  cut  him  off  as 
soon  as  I  come;  yea,  I  will  cut  off  all  those. corrupt-hearted  hypo- 
crites who  have   wilfully  departed   from  me.     Those  that  escape 
your  sword,  I   will   slay,   so   that  no  hypocrite  will  escape  justice. 
There  are  men  now  in  the  midst  of  this  people  who  are  hypocrites. 
They  are  not  fit  to  be  trusted  in  any  place.     If  you  place  any  con- 
fidence at  all  in  them,  they  will  betray  you.     They  are  corrupt  at 
heart.     There  is  no  honor  at  all  in  them.     They  think  nothing  at 
all    about    an    honorable    principle.     They   love   dishonesty    and 
rottenness  too  much  to  respect  honesty  and  act  honorably.     They 
are  as  corrupt  as  that  influence  is  which  leads  them.     There  is  no 
soundness  in  them.     No  matter  what  privileges  they  have,  or  what 
light  they  live  and  move  in,  they  reject  it  all,  and  like  a  sow  that 
has  been  washed,  they  turn  to  their  wallowing  again,  because  they 
love  sin   and  the   devil  the  best,  and  most  of  them  will  meet  the 
same  fate  as  he  will.     Such  are  not  worthy  of  an  existence  upon 
the  earth ;  neither  shall  they  have  one. 

5.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — that  you  may  com- 
mence to  foreshadow  my  coming  as  soon  as  ever  you  have  a  mind 
to  do  so ;  that  matter  is  in  your  hands.  Arrange  things  so  that 
you  can  make  a  start  as  soon  as  possible.  You  know  the  situa- 
tion of  this  people.  The  twelve  generals  of  our  host  will  be  there 
to  witness  the  scene.  It  would  be  well  if  my  people  would  all 
wash  themselves  this  day,  and  prepare  themselves  for  that  circum- 
stance, let  it  take  place  whenever  it  may.  The  commencing  of 


588  CONCERNING  THE  FORESHADOWING. 

that  matter  is  for  you  to  decide.  I  leave  it  in  your  hands,  and 
whenever  you  commence  it,  we  will  all  be  there  to  witness  the 
sight.  You  know  how  to  conduct  it.  Work  according  to  the 
pattern  which  I  have  given  unto  you,  and  all  will  be  well.  I  am 
the  Lord. 

6.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you, — when  you  have  foreshadowed 
me  as  a  man  of  war,  with  seven  perfect  crowns  upon  your  head, 
then  you  must  represent  the  six  angels  who  all  hold  the  priestho6d 
in  part,  by  wearing  upon  your  hat  six  half  crowns.  You  must 
have  those  six  half  crowns  upon  your  hat  when  you  represent  the 
order  of  the  earth.  Having  two  sets  of  sixes,  you  will  have  the 
power  to  foreshadow  or  represent  both  the  heavenly  and  earthly 
orders.  I  will  tell  you  how  to  act  from  time  to  time.  You  will 
not  be  misled  in  the  smallest  thing ;  therefore,  commence  the  fore- 
shadowing when  you  please  to  do  so,  and  I  will  be  with  you  on 
that  occasion,  as  well  as  on  all  others. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more  at  present.  I  am  the  Light  and 
Life  of  the  world ;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and 
Amen. 


REVELATION  CONCERNING  THE  FORESHADOWING. 


No.  290.  WEBER,  UTAH,  May  3oth,  1862. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  he  that  shuts,  and  no  one  opens;  and  that 
opens,  and  no  one  shuts;  even  the  Son  of  the  Eternal  Father; 
and  I  am  in  a  hurry  to  speak  unto  you  this  morning.  I  see  that 
you  are  about  to  foreshadow  my  coming  this  day.  You  are  for 
rushing  things  ahead.  I  see  that  you  are  determined  to  open  the 
way  for  me.  You  are  perfectly  right  in  foreshadowing  my  coming 
to-day.  I  did  not  hardly  expect  that  you  would  rush  things  ahead 
as  you  appear  to  be  doing.  I  see  that  if  I  keep  pace  with  you  I 
shall  have  to  hurry.  I  will  hurry,  I  will  move  side  by  side  with 
you.  I  will  not  let  you  pass  me;  but  I  will  be  as  quick  as  you 
are,  let  you  be  as  quick  as  ever  you  may.  I  know  what  you  want. 
You  want  to  get  through  with  the  foreshadowing,  and  then  you 


THE    FORESHADOWING.  589 

think  that  my  way  will  be  opened  so  that  if  mine  enemies  should 
make  the  attempt  to  come  upon  you,  that  I  might  be  at  liberty  to 
cut  them  off  according  to  the  law ;  for  you  think  that  the  sub- 
stance cannot  come  before  the  shadow ;  and  after  the  shadow  of 
a  person  has  been  seen,  you  think  that  the  next  object  that  makes 
its  appearance  must  be  the  person  himself — he  must  follow  his 
own  shadow.  You  have  no  faith  in  a  substance  making  its  appear- 
ance before  its  shadow  has  been  seen.  You  could  not  possiby 
believe  that  I  should  cut  off  mine  enemies  before  my  coming  has 
been  foreshadowed.  You  could  not  believe  that  I  was  always 
ready  to  cut  off  your  enemies ;  for  you  think  that  it  is  contrary  to 
the  principles  of  my  kingdom  for  me  to  bring  the  substance  before 
the  shadow,  and  I  could  not  pacify  you  by  telling  you  that  I  was 
always  ready  for  them.  I  never  intended  to  cut  them  off  before 
my  coming  had  been  foreshadowed ;  but  I  intended  to  hold  them, 
and  keep  them  from  approaching  my  people  to  injure  them  until 
my  coming  had  been  foreshadowed.  When  I  told  you  that  I  was 
always  ready  for  your  enemies,  let  them  make  the  attempt  to 
come  up  against  you  whenever  they  might,  that  did  not  satisfy 
you.  I  was  always  ready  to  confuse  them,  and  break  them  up, 
and  hold  them  in  weakness  to  prevent  them  from  injuring  either 
you  or  any  of  my  faithful  people.  This  I  have  done  up  to  this 
day,  and  both  you  and  this  people  ought  to  be  satisfied  and 
acknowledge  that  I  have  done  my  duty  towards  them  as  far  as 
things  have  gone.  If  my  people  will  give  me  credit  for  what  I 
have  done,  it  is  all  that  I  ask  of  them ;  this  I  am  entitled  to ;  this 
is  my  right,  and  I  ask  for  no  more.  I  am  the  Lord. 

2.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son  that,  both  I  and  the 
remaining  eleven  generals  will  be  present  with  you  this  day. 
They  will  leave  their  respective  stations  and  appoint  other  generals 
to  take  their  places  until  they  return  after  the  foreshadowing  is 
over.  They  have  stations  throughout  the  whole  earth  where  the 
armies  of  heaven  gather  in  large  groops ;  and  thus  the  armies  of 
heaven  are  stationed  in  different  places  throughout  the  whole 
earth;  and  all  the  leading  generals  will  leave  their  various  stations 
to  witness  this  great  scene,  for  it  will  be  the  greatest  scene  which 
has  ever  been  witnessed  on  this  earth  of  Adam's  either  by  mortal 
men  or  by  holy  angels.  This  day  the  foundation  of  a  kingdom 


590  CONCERNING  THE  PROPHET. 

will  be  laid  that  will  bear  rule  over  the  earth.  It  will  drive  the 
power  of  the  devil  from  the  surface  of  the  whole  earth.  This  day 
is  the  gate-way  to  the  power  of  your  office ;  it  will  launch  you  right 
into  power,  and  make  you  the  president  over  the  whole  earth  at 
once.  Your  commands  shall  be  obeyed  by  all  kings  and  rulers 
of  every  name  and  nature  from  this  day  henceforth,  and  you  shall 
tread  down  and  destroy,  and  none  shall  hinder ;  for  when  thou 
shalt  speak  after  this  day  is  over,  it  shall  be  as  though  I  had 
spoken.  Thy  word  shall  be  as  the  word  of  God,  for  thou  shalt 
be  as  a  god  to  all  Adam's  posterity.  They  shall  either  obey  thy 
command,  or  be  cut  off  from  the  earth,  for  thou  art  the  legitimate 
ruler  over  the  whole  earth,  and  those  who  refuse  to  obey  thy  com- 
mand shall  perish,  whether  they  be  fallen  spirits,  or  heirs  to  the 
resurrection,  it  matters  not.  Thou  art  the  head  over  all,  and  thy 
command  shall  be  obeyed  as  though  thou  was  God ;  for  I  am  the 
Lord,  and  I  will  uphold  thee.  Therefore,  my  son,  as  soon  as  the 
foreshadowing  is  through  with,  the  test  will  commence,  which  is 
the  dividing  of  the  Camp.  Prepare  for  this  test,  my  son,  for  it 
will  be  severe  on  the  hypocrites.  It  will  move  them  all  off  the 
earth.  You  will  no  sooner  have  laid  down  that  rod  which  was 
made  to  foreshadow  your  own  rod,  than  you  will  be  called  upon 
to  take  your  own  rod  in  your  hand,  and  then  you  will  have  the 
power.  One  rod  will  follow  the  other. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more  at  present.     I  am  the  Son  of  the 
Eternal  Father;  even  Jesus  Christ.     Even  so.    Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    APPROVING    THE    FORESHADOWING, 

AND    SHOWING    HOW    THE    ORDER  OF 

THE  GODS  IS  REPRESENTED 

ON  THE  EARTH. 


No.  291.  WEBER,  UTAH,  May  3ist,  1862. 

i.  Lo,  I  am  come  to  speak  unto  you  again.  I  see  that  you 
are  through  with  the  foreshadowing.  Both  I  and  the  eleven 
generals  were  present,  according  to  promise,  and  we  saw  all  that 


HOW  THE  ORDER  OF  THE  GODS  IS  REPRESENTED.    591 

was  done.  We  were  well  pleased  with  the  manner  in  which  all 
things  were  conducted  on  that  occasion.  We  took  the  lead  our- 
selves, and  made  everything  go  according  to  our  minds  and  wills. 
WTe  were  as  busy  controlling  and  arranging  things  as  my  servants 
were.  We  were  one  with  them  in  their  labors  on  that  occasion. 
We  are  now  ready  to  make  another  move  as  soon  as  you  are 
ready ;  but  the  next  move  will  be  a  painful  one  to  all  those  who 
have  yielded  obedience  unto  the  fulness  of  my  gospel — to. the 
faithful  as  well  as  to  the  hypocrites ;  but  it  will  be  much  more 
severe  on  the  hypocrites  than  it  will  be  on  the  faithful,  for  the 
hypocrites  will  lose  their  lives.  The  faithful  will  have  to  slay  them, 
and  this  will  be  a  painful  task  to  some  of  my  faithful  people.  It 
will  be  more  painful  to  some  of  them  than  it  will  be  to  others ; 
even  the  stoutest  heart  will  feel  it. 

2.  I  am  compelled  by  law  to  make  three  separate  and  distinct 
moves  in  the  setting   up   of  my  kingdom,  in  order  to  endow  my 
servant  with  power  to  bear  rule  over  all  the  earth.     I  have  to  work 
by  threes  in  this  matter,  for  it  is  a  matter  which  concerns  all  Gods, 
and   must  have   the  sanction  of  all  leading   authorities    in   the 
heavens.     The  first  three  Gods  must  be  acknowledged,  in  the 
setting  up  of  my  kingdom  upon  the  earth,  by  three  distinct  moves 
being  made  by  my  people,  which  moves  represent  the  first,  second 
and  third  estates   of  man,  as  well  as  acknowledging  the  authority 
of  the  first  three  Gods.     The  ruling  authority  of  the  Gods  is  em- 
bodied in  three  persons ;  and  the  three  estates  of  man  were  first 
instituted  to  represent  or  acknowledge  the  three  leading  authorities 
in   the   heavens.     The   leading   authorities  of  the  Gods  consist  of 
threes.     The  leading  authorities  of  a  mortal  earth  consist  of  seven; 
and   the   leading   authorities  of  the  lesser  priesthood  consist  of 
twelves. 

3.  When  the  fulness  of  the  holy  priesthood  is  upon  the  earth, 
and  my   kingdom   established,   the  several   authorities  have  to  be 
acknowledged.     The  order  of  threes  has  to  be  acknowledged  the 
first,  because  it  represents  the  first  three  Gods,   and  the  authority 
of  the  Gods.     The   order  of  sevens  has  to  be  acknowledged  tbe 
next,  because  it  represents  the  leading  authorities   of  the  high 
priesthood  upon  the   earth.     And  the  leading  authorities  of  the 
lesser  priesthood  must  be  acknowledged  the  next  by  twelves. 


592          HOW   THE    ORDER    OF   THE    GODS    IS    REPRESENTED. 

4.  A  literal  descendant  of  Aaron  may  act  without  counselors, 
because  he   does  not   belong  to  the  higher  order  of  priesthood — 
even  the  holy  order  of  the  Gods ;  therefore,   the  priests  of  Aaron 
do  not  need  a  quorum  of  three.     They   must   represent  their  own 
order  of  priesthood,  which  is  the  order  of  twelves.     Threes,  sevens 
and  twos  exist  in  the  lesser  priesthood,  even  as  they   exist  in  the 
high  priesthood;  but  the  Aaronic   priests  must  not  divide  them- 
selves into  those  orders — they  must  remain  in  twelves  undivided. 
It  is  their  duty  to  confine  themselves  to  that   order  of  priesthood 
while  in   mortality ;  but  when   they   arrive   at  the  higher  order  of 
priesthood,  they  will  have  the  privilege  to  divide  their  twelves  into 
threes,  sevens  and  twos. 

5.  When  Adam's  children  have  become   celestial,    they    will 
have  many  twelves  to   divide  into  those  orders ;  for  those  are  the 
orders  in  every   celestial  world;  and  it  is  the  order  of  the  holy 
priesthood   upon  the  earth.     The  order   of  threes  represents  the 
first  three  Gods ;  the  order  of  sevens   represents  the   seven  angels 
of  the  seven  Churches,  and  the  order  of  twos  represents  the  two 
Olive  Plants.     I  hold  the  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood'  in  heaven, 
and  by  taking  my  two  brothers,  who  are  next  to  me  by  birthright, 
to  be  my  counselors,  we  three  represent  the  first  three  Gods ;  and 
by  taking  seven  more  of  the  twelve  generals  to  represent  the  seven 
angels  of  the  seven  Churches,   it  leaves  two  to  represent  the  two 
Olive  Plants. 

6.  Although  my  Father  is  the  first  president   of  our  earth,  he 
is  not  included  in  the  twelve  of  whom  I  have  spoken ;  but  he  is  of 
a  higher  order.     He   represents  the  first  God   of  all,  who  is  the 
president  over  all,  and  who  is  not  connected  with  any  quorum  of 
Gods.     The  firstborn  son  o(  the  first  God  is  the  first  person  in  the 
first    quorum  of  Gods,   and   consequently  he  holds  the   keys  of 
authority  over  that  quorum.     The  -last  glorified  God  always  repre- 
sents the  first   God,  in   not  being  connected  with  his   sons  in  a 
quorum  capacity.     He  belongs  to  one  order,  and  his   sons  belong 
to  another.     He  is  a  God,   and   is  ranked  with  the  order  of  the 
Gods ;   but  his   sons  are  of  a   lower  order ;   they  are  angels,  and 
possess   no  power  only  what  they  receive  from  him.     I  am  the 
firstborn  son   of  my  Father,  and  I  hold  the   keys  of  the  lower 
order,  which  is  an  order  of  holy  angels.     I   preside  over  all  my 


HOW  THE  ORDER  OF  THE  GODS  IS  REPRESENTED.    593 

Father's  posterity.  There  are  twelve  of  us  who  are  the  twelve 
generals  over  the  lower  order.  I  am  entitled  to  two  counselors  of 
the  same  order  as  myself,  even  my  two  brothers  who  are  next  to 
me  by  birthright.  The  president  of  every  order  in  the  holy  priest- 
hood is  entitled  to  two  counselors.  You  are  entitled  to  two  coun- 
selors; but  your  first  two  counselors  are  presidents  or  lords  over 
dispensations ;  therefore,  you  cannot  use  them  to  any  advantage, 
neither  can  you  take  the  two  Olive  Plants  to  be  your  counselors, 
for  they  are  the  counselors  of  the  first  and  second  angels.  You 
have  to  take  the  next  two  to  them  by  birthright  to  be  your  coun- 
selors. The  remaining  six  angels  must  all  have  two  counselors 
each  before  you  can  have  your  second  set  of  counselors. 

7.  How  does  the  earthly  order  represent  the  heavenly  order? 
Your  office  is  of  a  two-fold  nature.  You  represent  the  first  God 
of  all,  who  sent  you  to  Adam's  posterity,  in  Adam's  stead ;  and 
your  two  counselors  represent  the  two  counselors  of  the  first  God. 
You  represent  the  first  God  in  Adam's  stead,  because  his  ruling 
time  is  not  yet  come ;  but  he  will,  eventually,  represent  the  first 
God  himself  to  his  own  posterity,  and  take  the  reins  of  govern- 
ment into  his  own  hands.  He  will  represent  the  first  God  to  his 
posterity  as  my  Father  now  does  to  his  posterity.  Adam  is  not 
yet  a  celestial  God ;  therefore,  the  next  angel  to  him  takes  the 
reins  of  government,  and  represents  the  first  God,  in  his  stead, 
until  he  comes  to  do  it  himself.  You  are  filling  two  offices  at 
present.  You  hold  the  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood  upon  the 
earth,  and  you  are  acting  as  the  representative  of  the  first  God  in 
Adam's  stead ;  but,  in  due  time,  Adam  will  fill  that  office  himself. 
It  takes  both  my  Father  and  me  to  fill  the  offices  to  the  inhab- 
itants of  our  earth  that  you  are  now  filling  to  Adam's  posterity. 
You  hold  the  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood,  even  as  I  do,  and  you 
represent  the  first  God  to  Adam's  posterity,  even  as  my  Father 
represents  him  to  his  posterity.  And  inasmuch  as  your  office  is 
of  a  two-fold  nature,  you  claim  two  counselors  to  assist  you  to  fill 
your  office ;  and  when  both  you  and  your  two  counselors  have 
been  taken  to  represent  the  first  God  and  his  two  counselors,  you 
then  claim  to  represent  me  and  my  two  counselors,  and  to  do  so 
you  take  two  more  counselors  to  assist  you  to  act  in  your  own 
office  as  president  of  the  high  priesthood  on  earth.  You  will  see 


594  CONCERNING  THE  THREE  MOVES. 

your  own  position.     Act  well  your  part,  and  I  will   be   with  you 
continually.      I  am  the  Lord. 

8.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — I  am  compelled  to 
make  three  moves  when  I  begin  to  establish   my   kingdom   upon 
the  earth,  in  order  to  acknowledge  the  leading  authorities   of  the 
holy  priesthood  and  the  three   estates   of  man.     I  am  compelled 
to  work  by  threes  when  I  have  anything  to  accomplish   through 
the  Melchisedec  priesthood ;   for  I  cannot  do  the  smallest  thing 
through  that  priesthood  without  acknowledging  the  first  authorities 
thereof.     The  foreshadowing  of  my   coming  is  the  first  move   of 
the  three,  and  represents  the  first  estate  of  man,  and  also  the  first 
law,  which  is  mercy.     The  foreshadowing   being  a  pleasant  sight 
to  beholders,  represents  mercy,  which  produces  perfect  happiness 
to  the  partakers  thereof. 

9.  The  next  move  which  I  shall  make,  even  the  second  move, 
will  be  the  execution  of  the  law  upon  transgressors,  and  will  repre- 
sent death  and  justice,  and  the  second   estate.     Its  being  painful, 
represents  death  and  misery  that  attend  the  second  estate;  and 
its  short  duration  represents  the  short  duration  of  man   upon  the 
earth,  and  also  the  short  time  which  a -world  occupies  in  passing 
through  mortality. 

10.  The  third   move  which  I  shall  make   will   be  the   great 
deliverance  which  I  shall  bring  to  my  people  at  my  coming,  and 
it  will  represent  a  celestial  reward. .    My  faithful  people  will  then 
be  no  longer  slaves  to  the  devil ;    for  it  will  be  a  celestial  reward 
unto  them,  and  give  unto  them  power  over  the  devil.     It  will  be 
pleasant  for  the  faithful  to  pass  through ;   but  no  hypocrite  will  be 
made  a  partaker  of  it ;  for  the  test,  which  represents  death,  will 
take  them  away.     None  will   receive  that  reward  but  those  who 
are  found  worthy   before  me.     My  people  have   a  representation 
of  death  to  pass  through   before   they   can  receive  that   celestial 
reward.     Let  my  people  prove  themselves  worthy  of  that  reward, 
and  they  shall  receive  it. 

11.  And  now,  my  son,  you  must  look  out  for  the  next   move 
which  I   shall  make.     It   will  be  hard  on  you  as  well  as  on  the 
rest;  but  I  will  bring  all  who  are  worthy  safely  through  it.     My 
people  may  be  preparing  themselves  for  it,  for  it  is  about  to  come 
upon  them — it  will  not  linger,  but  it  will  come  speedily.     It  will 


THE    ENEMIES    WILL    BE    RESTRAINED.  595 

will  be  a  heart-rending  scene.     There  is  not  a  heart   that  will  not 
be  penetrated. 

12.  And  now,  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — I   am  about 
to  show  to  you  the   place  which   I  have   appointed  for  you  and 
me  to  stand  upon.     I  will  lead  you  to  the  place  by  a   number   of 
my  holy  angels,  and  they  shall  show  it   unto   you  ;    but  you   must 
not  show  it  unto  any  other  person  until  I  tell  you.     It  is  not  far 
from  your  own  door.     You  may  now  expect  me  to  manifest  my- 
self unto  you   in   a   plain   manner.     Therefore,   lookout   for  that 
influence,  for  it  will  soon  come  upon  you. 

13.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you, — I   will  hold  your   enemies 
back  until  you  are  perfectly  ready  for  them.     They  shall  answer 
your  purposes.     They  shall  do  as  you  wish   them  to  do ;   for  I 
know  that  you  feel  as  I  feel  towards  them.     You  do   not-  want  to 
save  them ;  but  you  want  them  to  answer  your  own  purposes;  and 
that  they  shall  do.     You  shall  have  the  desire  of  your  heart.    They 
are  now  laboring  with  all  their  might,  but  they  can  make  no  head- 
way, for  mine  angels  confuse  them,  and  break  them   up,  and  keep 
them   doing  and   undoing.     They  shall  not  make  any  headway 
until  you  are  fully  ready  for  them  to  gather  themselves  together  to 
make  a  start,  and  then  I  will  permit  them  to  do  so ;   and  as  soon 
as  they  have  done  so,  I  will  cut  them  all  off  instantly. 

I  need  not  reveal  unto  you  any  more  at  present.  Let  this  suf- 
fice, and  I  will  come  unto  you  speedily.  I  am  the  Son  of  the 
Eternal  Father;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION   CONCERNING   HUMAN   FEELINGS. 


No.  292.  WEBER,  UTAH,  June  3rd,  1862. 

i.  Lo,  I  COME  unto  you  speedily  to  release  you.  I  see  that 
you  are  in  trouble  again.  You  are  often  in  trouble,  and  you  find 
many  things  to  complain  about.  I  cannot,  apparently,  keep  on 
the  right  side  of  you,  no  matter  what  I  do.  You  are  afraid  of 
these  people  being  brought  to  want  bread ;  and  should  such  be 
the  case,  you  say  that  you  know  that  you  would  have  to  bear  the 


59^  NATURAL    FEELINGS. 

blame,  and  not  me ;  for  that  they  know  very  well  that  they  could 
not  get  at  me  to  avenge  themselves,  consequently,  they  would  turn 
upon  you.  You  say  that  they  do  not  study  much  about  the  right 
of  any  matter  when  they  are  brought  into  a  tight  place ;  but  they 
turn  upon  you  and  blame  you  for  all  their  afflictions,  no  matter 
how  innocent  you  may  be.  You  say  that  you  have  had  experience 
enough  with  people  on  this  earth  to  know  how  they  will  act  when 
they  are  brought  into  a  tight  place ;  that  they  will  blame  the  per- 
son that  is  nearest  to  them ;  such  is  the  failing  of  many  mortal 
beings.  They  work  upon  feelings,  and  not  upon  principle ;  and 
while  such  is  the  case,  confidence  cannot  be  placed  in  them. 

2.  When  people  are  led  by  feelings,  they  will  run  any  way  or 
do  anything  that  their  wild   and  false  fancies  lead  them  to  do. 
They  are-like  a  wave  of  the  ocean,  tossed  about  first  into   one  atti- 
tude, and  then  into  another,  just  as  the  wind   blows   upon  them; 
such  is  the  uncertainty  of  people  who  act   upon  human  feelings. 
Human  feelings  in  a  mortal  world  are  not  of  me,  but  they  are  of 
the  devil.     Mortal  beings  have  been   trained   under  the  influence 
of  .the  devil,  which  is  a   false   influence,  and  it  gives  unto  mortal 
beings  a  false  feeling,  and  leads  them  down  to  destruction. 

3.  The  natural  man  sees  and  feels  as  the  devil   does,  and  his 
standard  of  right  is  the  devil's  standard  of  right ;   therefore,  how 
can  mortal  beings  who  follow  their  natural  feelings  be  right?     The 
natural  feelings  of  mortal  beings  have   been   given  unto  them  by 
their  parents  from  generation  to  generation,  even  as   far  back   as 
the  days  of  Cain,  who  had  natural  feelings  that  led  him  to  break 
my  law,  and  to  commit  murder.     He  also   introduced  into  the 
world  all  manner  of  wickedness  according  to  his  natural  feelings. 
He  was  the  first  person  that  had   natural   feelings,  and,  through 
following  them,   they   led  him  to  bre,ak  my  law,  and   trample  it 
under   his    feet    as    long    as    he   could.      He   is    the    founder  of 
natural  feelings ;  they  sprung  from  him.     How  many  are  there  of 
my  people  who  wish  to  be  led   by  natural   feelings?     Those  who 
call  themselves  after  my  name,  and  wish  to  do  so,  are  not   of  me, 
but  they  are  of  the  devil  who  gave  unto  them  those  feelings ;    such 
mine  , angels   will  not   influence.     Such   characters   will   take  the 
devil's  side  when  I  divide  this  Camp.     But  those  who  are   willing 
to  put  their  natural  feelings  on  one  side,  and  cling  to  my  law  with 


NATURAL    FEELINGS.  597 

all  their  hearts,  mine  angels  will  influence  and  strengthen  at  the 
test.  Those  who  will  stand  through  the  test  will  have  to  put  away 
their  natural  feelings,  and  act  upon  principle.  My  law  will  regu- 
late all  things ;  it  is  the  standard  of  right  to  those  who  embrace 
my  gospel,  and  not  only  to  those,  but  also  to  all  mankind.  It 
will  do  away  with  natural  feelings  as  it  approaches  them,  until  it 
has  sent  them  to  hell,  whence  they  came.  The  devil  shall  take 
them  back  again,  and  perish  with  them.  The  pure  in  heart  have 
no  other  feelings  than  to  honor  my  law.  They  take  it  to  be  their 
standard,  and  put  away  their  natural  feelings.  My  people  will 
know  who  I  claim  as  mine.  I  shall  bring  mine  own  people  safely 
through  the  test,  because  they  have  a  claim  upon  me. 

4.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — you  blame  me  for 
suffering  mine  enemies  to  block  up  the  way  of  my  people  so  that 
they  cannot  obtain  food  and  other  necessary  things  to  subsist 
upon  until  I  am  ready  to  deliver  them.  You  say  that  I  might 
have  kept  the  way  open  for  my  people  to  obtain  food;  but  it 
appears  to  you  that  the  way  is  now  blocked  up  so  that  you  can 
see  no  chance  for  my  people  to  obtain  those  things  which  they 
need  to  sustain  them,  and  what  to  do  you  do  not  know.  You  say 
that  you  can  see  plainly  enough  that  I  am  not  ready  to  come  unto 
you  and  give  unto  you  your  rod,  or  in  other  words,  my  people  are 
not  yet  ready,  for  that  there  is  considerable  to  be  done  before  I 
can  come.  You  say  that  the  test  has  not  taken  place  as  yet ;  that 
you  can  see  that  I  have  more  to/eveal  unto  you  concerning  the 
preparation  of  both  you  and  my  people  for  the  test ;  therefore, 
you  wish  to  know  what  these  people  are  to  do  for  food  until  I 
come  and  place  fresh  means  in  their  hands.  You  may  set  your 
feelings  at  rest  concerning  that  matter.  I  will  continue  to  open 
the  way  for  them  to  obtain  food  until  I  place  the  whole  Territory 
in  their  hands,  which  I  shall  speedily  do.  I  shall  make  others 
subject  unto  them.  They  shall  be  the  heads  in  my  kingdom ; 
and  those  who  come  in  after  them  shall  be  subject  unto  them.  I 
know  that  you  are  troubled  to  know  what  these  people  must  do  to 
obtain  food.  You  do  not  wish  to  see  them  go  hungry  while  there 
is  an  abundance' of  food  in  the  Territory  in  the  possession  of 
devils  and  devils'  slaves ;  but  you  wish  me  to  open  the  way  for 
them  to  obtain  sufficient  food.  You  also  wish  me  to  hurry  and 


598  MORE    TO    BE    REVEALED. 

reveal  unto  you  all  that  I  have  to  reveal  before  I  come.  You 
say  that  you  wish  me  to  show  unto  you  the  place  that  I  have 
appointed  to  meet  you,  and  for  us  to  stand  upon.  You  wish  to 
know  when  I  intend  to  show  it  unto  you.  You  want  to  see  it 
before  the  test  takes  place.  I  will  promise  you  that  I  will  show 
it  unto  you  before  the  test  takes  place,  but  not  long  before ;  for 
as  soon  as  I  have  shown  it  unto  you,  I  shall  bring  on  the  test. 
You  say  that  you  are  satisfied  that  I  have  more  to  reveal  unto  you 
before  the  dividing  of  this  Camp  takes  place. 

5.  I  have  more  to  reveal  unto  you  before  that  time,  but   not 
much.     I  can  soon  reveal   unto  you  all  that  I  have  to  reveal.     I 
would  have  spoken  unto  yesterday  had  you  not  been  sick.     When 
I  saw  that  you  was  sick  I  did  not  wish  to  trouble  you  until  your 
health   was  better.     I  am   aware  that  you  are  still  unwell ;    but  I 
am  compelled  to  speak  unto  you  to-day,  seeing  that   you  are   able 
to  write.     I  know  that  it  has  been  very  painful  to  you  to  sit  and 
write  from  my  mouth  to-day,  although  you   are   very   much   better 
in  health  than  you  were  yesterday.    When  you  are  sick,  it  prevents 
you  from  doing  your  duty ;  for  it  is  all  that  you  can  do  when  your 
health  is  tolerable  to  act  your  own  part.     You  are  often  sick; 
therefore,  I  have  to  work  very  gently  with  you.     If  you  were  more 
healthy  I  could  work  much  faster  through  you,  for  you  would  be 
able  to  write  more  than  what  you  have  hitherto  been  able  to  do. 
I  have  had  to  consider  your  health,  and  deal  with  you  accordingly. 
But  when  I  come,  I  will  heal  you  at  once,  and  you  will  have  good 
health. 

6.  And  now,  behold,  I  say  unto  you, — you  need  not  trouble 
yourself  about  the  destitute  condition  of  these  people.     They  shall 
not  want  for  bread ;    for  when  they  are  apparently  out   of  flour,  I 
will'  open  a~way   for  them   to   obtain   more,  until   I  place  all  the 
means  in  this  Territory  in  the  hands  of  my  faithful  people.     Mine 
enemies  can  make  no   bonds   that  I  cannot  break ;    neither  can 
they  set  any  trap  that  will  catch   my  faithful  people.     The  trap 
which  they  have  laid  for  these  -people  shall  catch  themselves.     It 
will  be  with  them  as  it  was  with  Hainan,  who  built  a  gallows  to 
hang  himself  upon.       When  Haman  built  the  gallows   with  the 
intention  to  hang  Mordecai,  he  did  not  think  that  he  was  building 
it  to  put  an  end  to  his  own  existence ;   and  so  it  will  be  with  mine 


MORTAL    BEINGS.  599 

enemies.  They  are  building  a  gallows  to  hang  my  people  upon, 
but  Haman-like,  they  shall  be  hung  upon  it  themselves.  All 
things  will  soon  be  ready  so  that  I  can  put  them  upon  their  own 
gallows.  I  am  the  Lord. 

7.  I  do  not  wish  to  hold  you  any  longer  at  this  time;  but  I 
will  speedily  speak  unto  you  again.  I  will  speak  unto  you  as  fast 
as  you  are  able  to  write  until  the  division  of  the  Camp  takes  place, 
and  then  I  shall  have  about  done  speaking  unto  you  in  the  way 
in  which  I  now  do.  I  know  that  it  is  painful  to  you  to  write  so 
much  at  once ;  but  you  will  be  relieved  of  that  tedious  burden,  to 
a  certain  extent;  when  I  come.  I  am  Jesus  Christ,  the  son  of  the 
Eternal  Father.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    CONCERNING    MORTAL   BEINGS. 


No.  293.  WEBER,  UTAH,  June  4th,  1862. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Light  and  Life  of  the  world.  I  wish  to 
speak  unto  you  concerning  mortal  beings,  and  the  manner  in 
which  I  have  to  reveal  unto  them  the  mysteries  of  my  kingdom, 
until  I  come  and  show  myself  unto  them  plainly  and  move  forth 
in  their  sight.  Being  mortal,  they  have  a  mortal  understanding, 
and  I  have  to  work  with  them  in  a  two-fold  manner.  Mortality 
signifies  falsehood,  darkness,  ignorance,  death  and  imperfection. 
There  is  nothing  but  falsehood  and  misrule  in  a  wofld  that  is  in 
mortality.  The  devil  brought  mortality,  which  produces  misery 
and  death,  into  the  world ;  therefore,  he  is  the  founder  thereof. 
When  I  speak  to  mortal  beings  I  have  to  talk  to  them,  to  a  certain 
extent,  as  they  talk  to  each  other,  and  when  I  do  so,  in  one  way 
they  understand  me,  but  in  another  way  they  do  not.  They  do 
not  understand  me  aright  by  their  natural  understanding,  for  it  is 
of  the  devil.  The  natural  man  understands  things  as  the  devil 
does,  who  first  gave  him  his  natural  feelings  and  understanding. 
Though  I  speak  to  mortal  men  in  their  own  language,  they  4o  not 
understand  my  meaning ;  but  they  understand  me  according  to 
their  understanding  of  words ;  being  deceived,  and  neither  seeing 


600  MORTAL    BEINGS. 

nor  understanding  anything  aright,  they  do  not  understand  me 
aright.  All  mortal  beings  have  a  false  understanding ;  but  I  have 
a  true  understanding.  Mortal  beings  understand  my  words  in  one 
way,  but  I  understand  them  in  another;  they  have  a  wrong  under- 
standing of  them,  but  I  understand  them  aright. 

2.  The  devil  does  not  understand  my  language,  because  he 
has  a  false  understanding.     The  same   language  being  spoken,  he 
would  understand  it  in  one  way,  but  I   should  understand   it   in 
another  way.     He   would   understand   it  according  to  darkness, 
but  I  would  understand  it  according  to  light.     Inasmuch  as  Satan 
is  an  angel  of  darkness,  and  I  am  an  angel  of  light,  we  cannot  see 
alike,  for  light  and  darkness  are  directly  opposite  in  their   natures ; 
they  see  nothing  alike;  for  the  principle  of  light  sees  all  things  as 
they  are,  but  the  principle  of  darkness  does  not.     Therefore,  it  is 
impossible  for  mortal   beings,   who  are  deceived  by  the  devil,  to 
understand  my  words,  although  I  speak  plainly  unto  them.     The 
natural   man  cannot    understand   me    when    I   speak    unto    him, 
because  he  is  not  of  me.      He  could  understand  the   devil  very 
well,  if  he  were  to  speak  to  him,  because  all  darkness  is  alike,  and 
it  understands  all  things  alike.     Light  also  sees  all  things  alike.    It 
sees  all  things   one  way;   but  darkness  sees  the  same   things  in 
another  way. 

3.  The   natural  man  should   know  that,  naturally,  he   cannot 
understand  me  when  I  speak.     If  there  is  no   better  way  for  him 
to  find  me  out,  he  can   never   understand  me ;   for   I  continually 
move  in  the  midst  of  darkness,  and  the  darkness  comprehendeth 
me  not.     But  I  cannot  move  in  the  midst  of  light  without   being 
seen   by   the   angels    of  light;    I    cannot   move   forth   to  do  the 
smallest  thing  but  they  see  me  as  I  am.     But  I  can  go  anywhere 
among   mortal   beings,  and   do  anything  in  their  midst,  but  they 
cannot  see  me.     I  can  stand  close  by  a  person's   side  and  smite 
him   dead,   and  he   would  not  see  me  do  it.     Oh,  how  mortal 
beings  are  deceived   by  the  devil!      The  natural    man  can  see 
nothing  at  all  that  is  of  any  benefit  to  him.      He  is  deceived   in 
everything.     There  is  no  way  to  make  the  carnal  mind,  or  natural 
man,  understand  me  when  I  speak  to  him,  for  he  takes  my  words 
to   mean  something  different  to  what  they  do   mean.     When   I 
stand  close  by  his  side,  he  cannot  see  me;  and  when  I  speak 


MORTAL    BEINGS.  6oi 

unto  him,  he  cannot  understand  me ;  and  if  I  were  to  smite  him 
dead,  he  would  not  know  who  had  done  it.  Oh,  the  blindness  of 
mortal  beings  ;  yet  how  they  boast  of  their  light  and  wisdom.  Oh, 
how  they  are  destroyed  by  the  devil.  Oh,  the  difference  between 
them  and  the  holy  angels  who  see  all  things  aright ;  who  cannot 
be  blinded  and  deceived;  who  see  everything  as  it  is.  No  move 
can  be  made  that  holy  angels  cannot  see.  There  is  nothing  hid 
from  their  eyes.  But  mortal  beings  cannot  see  anything  as  it  is ; 
neither  can  they  understand  anything  aright.  They  are  fooled 
with  everything  with  which  they  have  to  do ;  and  such  being  the 
case,  how  can  they  understand  anything  about  me?  They  know 
me  not  unless  my  spirit  has  enlightened  them.  My  spirit  will 
explain  the  meaning  of  my  language  unto  all  those  who  possess  it, 
for  it  is  enlightened,  even  as  I  am,  and  it  understands  all  my 
words  aright,  and  it  will  explain  their  meaning  unto  all  those  who 
are  truly  faithful  before  me. 

4.  I  have  to  work  with  mortal  beings  in  a  two-fold  manner. 
Firstly,  I  have  to  speak  unto  them  through  a,  prophet,  and  when  I 
have  done  so,  I  have  to  send  my  holy  angels  to  explain  my  words 
unto  them.  Mine  angels  will  give  unto  them  to  see  and  under- 
stand what  I  mean  when  I  speak  unto  them ;  if  they  did  not  do 
so,  my  people  would  take  me  wrong ;  they  would  misunderstand 
me  altogether.  If  my. word  was  not  explained  unto  them  by  my 
holy  angels,  it  would  destroy  them.  Thus,  after  I  have  spoken  to 
a  people,  I  have  to  send  unto  them  an  interpreter  to  make  them 
understand  my  words.  If  mortal  beings  could  see  and  under- 
stand all  things  aright,  even  as  holy  angels  do,  they  would  under- 
stand me  when  I  speak,  without  interpreters ;  but,  in  consequence 
.of  their  blindness,  I  have  to  send  mine  angels  to  influence  them, 
to  enlighten  them,  and  to  lead  them  aright.  It  would  be  well  for 
mortal  beings  if  they  understood  their  true  position.  But  the 
devil  makes  them  believe  that  they  have  a  great  deal  of  knowl- 
edge, and  that  their  judgment  is  most  excellent,  when,  in  reality, 
they  know  nothing  aright;  for  they  are  deceived  in  everything 
that  they  have  to  do  with  while  they  are  under  the  influence  of  the 
devil.  Both  me  and  my  holy  angels  have  to  take  full  charge  of 
them,  even  as  a  mother  takes  charge  of  her  sucking  child — they 
are  perfectly  helpless. 


602 


CONCERNING    SATAN. 


5.  The  devil  himself  is  dependent  upon  us  for  his  present 
existence.  He  would  have  destroyed  himself  more  than  a  million 
years  ago,  had  it  not  been  for  our  government  which  preserved  him 
and  kept  him  alive.  He  was  such  a  fool  that  he  would  have  put 
an  end  to  his  own  existence ;  but  we  took  pity  on  him,  and  saved 
his  life,  because  we  did  not  want  him  to  die  until  he  had  done  his 
work.  We  saved  his  life  to  accommodate  ourselves,  even  to  do 
his  own  work.  Therefore,  we  have  led  him  along  up  to  the 
present  time.  When  he  came  forth  into  mortality  and  cgm- 
menced  a  government  of  his  own,  he  was  such  a  fool  that,  when 
he  had  only  had  a  mortal  body  a  few  years,  he  killed  himself, 
and,  with  very  few  exceptions,  he  killed  everybody  that  came  after 
him.  -  He  had  to  return  into  the  spirit  worlds  under  our  form  of 
government  again,  in  order  that  we  might  save  his  spiritual  body 
alive ;  for  he  says  that  he  does  not  want  to  die,  but  he  wants  to 
live  as  long  as  he  can.  He  is  now  in  great  trouble ;  for  the  time, 
when  he  must  die. is  now  drawing  so  near  that  he  does  not  know 
what  to  do.  We  shall  save  his  life  until  he  has  done  his  own 
work,  and  answered  our  ends.  We  do  as  we  like  with  both  him 
and  his  band;  but  we  are  always  very  mindful  to  work  to  our 
advantage.  My  people  have  had  a  wonderful  monster  as  their 
leader  for  six  thousand  years.  I  should  think  that  by  this  time 
they  are  tired  of  him. 

I  do  not  wish  to  hold  you  any  longer  at  this  time,  my  son ;  but 
I  will  soon  speak  unto  you  again.  I  am  the  Glorious  Branch  of 
Jesse,  and  the  Bright  and  Morning  Star;  even  Jesus  Christ. 
Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    SHOWING   THE    ORIGIN   AND    CAUSE 
OF    FEAR. 


No.  294.  WEBER,  UTAH,  June  4th,  1862. 

i.  LISTEN  unto  my  words,  which  are  quick  and  powerful, 
sharper  than  a  two-edged  sword,  for  I  am  about  to  speak  unto 
you  again.  You  say  in  your  feelings  that  you  wish  me  to  make 


THE  ANGELS  ARE  AT  WORK.  603 

haste  and  drive  things  ahead  so  that  I  can  come.  I  can  assure 
you  that  I  am  working  faster  than  what  you  think  I  am.  I  have 
many  different  points  to  watch,  for  I  have  to  "watch  the  devil,  and 
when  He  has  laid,  as  he  supposes,  a  plan  that  will  destroy  my  peo- 
ple, I  have  to  send  a  number  of  mine  holy  angels  to  upset  his 
plan,  or  plans,  as  the  case  may  be,  and  in  this  way  I  hold  him  in 
weakness.  He  cannot  make  any  headway  against  my  people, 
because  I  continually  break  up  his  plans.  If  I  had  not  broken 
up  his  plans  many  times,  he  would  have  destroyed  my  people 
long  ago ;  but  mine  holy  angels  move  hither  and  thither  and 
break  up  the  many  plans  which  mine  enemies  lay  against  my  peo- 
ple, and  no  mortal  being  can  see  them.  They  do  as  they  have  a 
mind  to  do  with  mortal  beings.  They  turn  them  hither  and 
thither  as  it  pleases  them ;  and  in  this  way  mine  enemies  obey 
me  as  well  as  my  own  covenant  people  do.  I  have  never  failed, 
as  yet,  to  bring  mine  enemies  to  those  points  which  I  desired  to 
bring  them  to,  according  to  the  law  by  which  I  am  governed.  I 
am  entirely  controlled  by  law,  both  in  my  treatment  of  devils  and 
in  all  other  things.  I  have  never  failed  to  make  everything 
according  to  the  pattern  which  my  Father  gave  unto  me.  I  work, 
and  none  can  hinder.  Therefore,  I  bring  all  people  to  my  terms, 
let  them  be  of  whatever  race  they  may,  for  I  have  all  power  both 
in  heaven  and  upon  the  earth. 

2.  My  people  are  right  when  they  confess  my  hand  in  all 
all  things  ;  for  I  suffer  nothing  to  exist  which  operates  against  the 
general  interest  of  my  work,  only  that  which  ought  to  exist  by  law; 
and  when  it  is  lawful  to  change  anything,  I  change  it.  Nothing 
exists  now  only  according  to  law ;  and  when  anything  is  changed, 
it  will  be  changed  by  law.  All  things  are  controlled  by  law.  My 
people  need  not  to  fret  and  fume  about  some  things  going  wrong. 
They  fear  too  much  that  something  exists  which  ought  not  to 
exist;  and  they  cannot  help  but  be  troubled  more  or  less. 
What  is  it  that  troubles  them?  It  is  ignorance  and  blindness; 
they  fear,  and  fear  is  from  the  devil.  The  angels  of  heaven  do 
not  fear  anything.  They  keep  a  perfect  law,  because  they  delight 
in  it.  They  know  no  fear,  because  they  have  a  perfect  knowledge 
of  all  things,  and  consequently  they  do  not  fear  being  brought 
into  difficulties  by  those  things  which  Jhey  understand  perfectly. 


604  CONCERNING    FEAR. 

They  understand  all  things,  and  they  have  power  over  all  things, 
and  consequently  there  is  nothing  for  them  to  fear.  But  mortal 
beings  fear  everything,  because  they  do  not  understand  anything 
correctly,  and  that  is  what  causes  them  to  fear.  They  are  in  con- 
stant misery  through  fear;  for  fear  is  misery;  it  is  hell;  it  is  a 
constant  canker  worm  to  the  souls  of  mortal  beings ;  it  destroys 
all  happiness  where  it  exists  to  a  great  extent.  Those  persons 
who  fear  are  always  in  trouble  and  misery.  Their  lives  are  a 
burden  unto  them. 

3.  Fear  is  a  principle  of  the  devil.     It   is   not  of  me.     There 
is  not  a  heavenly  messenger  on  any  celestial  earth  that  knows  fear. 
It  is  not  a  principle  of  my  gospel.     It  is  from  hell.      But  faith  and 
confidence  are  principles  of  my  gospel,  and  as  they  grow  and  in- 
crease with  mortal  beings,  tney   drive  fear  away   from   them,  and 
gradually  produce  happiness  in  their  stead.     Let  my   people  cling 
to  the  principles  of  my  gospel,  and  seek  to  understand  them,  and 
seek  to  cast  all  fear  far  from  them,  in  order  that  they   may  enjoy 
some   portion   of  happiness  while  they  live,  and  not  let  the  devil 
always  hold  them  in  chains,  and  thereby  destroy  their  happiness. 
They  need  not  let  any  fear  creep  over  them  on  my  account,  sup- 
posing that  I  shall  neglect  them,  for  I   shall  not.      I   shall  do  my 
duty  to  them.     They  must  know  that  I  have  always  done  my  duty 
to  them  since  I  first   brought    them    to   this  place;    and  if  they 
would   worship   me  with    all  their  hearts,  and  do  as- 1  command 
them,  I  would  bring  them  all  safely  through  the  test.      But  some 
will   not   do  as  I  command   them ;    such  will   perish.     I  am  the 
Lord. 

4.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,   my  son, — mine  enemies  are 
in  great  confusion.     They  cannot  agree  upon  the  subject  of  com- 
ing up   against  my   people.      One   party   wants  to   come  up  here 
and  "wipe  my  people  out"  (as  they  call  it)  immediately.      They 
are  almost  crazy  to  come  up.      But  there  is  another  party  which  is 
opposed  to  coming  up  now,  and  this  party  is  holding  them  back ; 
and  they  are  almost  ready  to.  fight  with  each   other,   and,  being 
divided,  they  cannot  make  any  headway.     One  party  says  that  my 
people  have  done  enough  to  be  "wiped  out, ;'  and  the  ether  party 
says  that  they  want  to  wait  a  little  longer  to  see   my  people   do   a 
little  more;,  and  they  tellttie  opposite  party  that  if  they  will   wait 


CONCERNING    THE    ENEMIES.  605 

a  little  longer,  that  they  will  have  all  the  hold  on  my  people  that 
they  desire;  and  they  tell  them  that  my  people  are  gradually 
growing  worse  every  day ;  and  they  also  tell  them  that  if  they  will 
only  be  quiet  a  little  longer,  my  people  will  commit  murder,  and 
they  say  that  when  they  see  this,  they  shall  be  as  ready  to  come 
up  against  my  people,  and  '(  wipe  them  out,"  as  they  are.  In  this 
way  they  talk  to  the  opposite  party  to  pacify  them  and  restrain 
them.  I  can  assure  them  that  I  do  not  need  their  assistance.  I 
can  hold  them  back.  They  are  all  equally  guilty  before  me,  for 
they  all  thirst  for  the  blood  of  my  people ;  but  one  party  is  a  little 
more  foolish  than  the  other.  I  will  not  hold  them  in  confusion 
lung.  I  can  assure  them  that  I  will  give  unto  them  what  they 
want.  I  will  unite  them,  and  as  soon  as  I  have  done  so,  I  will 
send  them  all  together  into  the  spirit  world.  As  soon  as  they  are 
united,  they  shall  all  die.  It  will  be  the  first  time  that  ever  they 
were  united  in  this  world,  and  they  cannot  die  at  a  better  time. 

5.  You  wish  to  know  whether  it  will  be  long  before  I  bring  on 
the  test.  It  will  not  be  long,  for  it  is  just  upon  the  point  of  com- 
ing now.  I  have  but  little  more  to  reveal  unto  you  before  it 
comes.  I  shall  be  with  you  in  the  test.  I  shall  have  everything 
ready  so  that  I, can  come  unto  you  as  soon  as  the  test  is  over. 
When  the  test  commences,  I  shall  be  a  looker-on.  I  shall  be  with 
you  to  set  how  things  proceed ;  but  I  shall  not  manifest  my  power 
then,  without  it  is  needed.  If  it  is  not  needed  then,  it  will  be  in 
a  few  hours  afterwards.  I  shall  show  unto  you  the  place  where 
we  must  stand  before  the  test,  and  I  shall  have  everything  ready 
so  that  I  can  come  unto  you  in  less  than  one  hour  after  it  is  over, 
if  it  should  be  necessary.  As  soon  as  ever  you  have  cut  off  the 
hypocrites  who  are  in  the  midst  of  this  people,  your  enemies  will 
unite  to  come  up  against  you.  I  shall  let  them  gather  themselves 
together  then,  and  make  an  attempt  to  come,  and  then  I  will  cut 
them  off,  as  I  have  said;  but,  until  then,  I  will  hold  them. 
Therefore,  my  son,  place  your  confidence  in  me,  and  know  that  I 
am  with  you  unto  the  end.  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts ;  even  Jesus 
Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


606  THE  PROPHET  FEELS  OPPRESSED. 

REVELATION  CONCERNING   THE    DUTIES    OF    THE 
ANGELS    OF    HEAVEN. 


No.  295.  WEBER,  UTAH,  June  5th,  1862. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Light  and  Life  of  the  world,  even  he 
who  moves  forth  in  the  midst  of  darkness,  and  the  darkness  com- 
prehendeth  me  not ;   who  speaks  the   word  and   all  the  heavenly 
hosts  obey ;    even  Jesus   Christ.     I   am  about  to  speak  unto  you 
again.     I  know  your  feelings  very   well,  and  also  the   manner  in 
which  you  are  oppressed.     I  know  what  you  need  as   well  as  you 
can  tell   me.     I  know  what   holds   you  down  and  destroys  your 
happiness.     I  know  that  you  have  no  pleasure  of  your  life  through 
having  to  endure  so  much  oppression ;    but  it  cannot  be  avoided. 
You  know  that  you  must  necessarily  bear  the  evils  of  the  world 
until  the  day   of  power  has  come.     The   influence  of  the  world 
oppresses  you,  and  you  cannot  help   yourself,   neither  can  I  help 
you   until  all  things   are  made  ready  for  me  to  come  unto  you. 
Much  has  had  to  be  done  to  prepare  for  me  since  I  first  sent  you 
to  this  Fort.     I  could  not  give  unto  you  the  power  of  your  office 
without  making  some  preparations  or  taking  some  preliminary  steps 
towards  commencing  a  kingdom.     I  am  compelled  to  bring  things 
into  such  a  shape  that  I  can  have  a  people  to  come  to  who  believe 
in  me ;   who  will  have  been  taught  the  principles  of  my  gospel, 
and  who  will  have  had  the  opportunity  of  being  taught  the  nature 
of  my  true  character,  so  that  they  may  know  what  to  expect  when 
they  see  me.     I  must  reveal  unto  a  people  mine  attributes   before 
I  can  come  and  show  myself  unto  them.     Therefore,  until  I  have 
done  so,  I  cannot  come  unto  you  altogether,  neither  can  you  have 
the  power  of  your  office ;    for  when  you  receive  the  power  of  your 
office,  I  shall  have  to  come  and  stand  by  your  side,  and  talk  with 
you  mouth  to  mouth,  and   remain  with  you.     After  that  time,  a 
portion  of  mine  army  will  always  be  upon  the  earth. 

2.  When  you  receive  the  power,  of  your   office,    I   and   all  my 
holy  angels  will  have  to  be  upon  this  earth.     All  the  heavenly 
hosts  are  subject  to  me ;   and  when  I  am  upon  the  earth,  I  am 
subject  to  you ;   but  when  I  am  in  heaven,  I  am  subject  to  my 


THE  "DUTY  OF  THE  ANGELS.  607 

Father.  I  am  a  swift  messenger,  and  my  duty  is  to  minister 
between  two  powers.  I  am  also  a  revelator.  I  receive  all  reve- 
lations upon  all  subjects  connected  with  my  Church,  and  also  the 
law,  from  my  Father.  I  am  a  revelator  to  you,  and  you  are  a 
revelator  to  all  Abraham's  seed.  The  reason  why  I  do  not  do  for 
you  now  what  you  wish  me  to  do  is,  because  it  is  unlawful  for  me 
to  do  it.  I  am  not  yet  under  your  command.  I  am  subject  to 
my  Father.  I  have  hitherto  been  busily  engaged  in  carrying 
revelations  from  my  Father  unto  you,  and  I  still  have  to  do  so, 
for  I  have  not  yet  finished  that  work;  and  while  I  am  thus 
engaged,  I  shall  not  be  subject  to  your  command.  I  shall  be 
subject  to  my  Father  until  I  come  and  stand  by  your  side. 
When  my  Father  shall  send  me  to  stand  by  your  side  to  endow 
you  with  power,  he  will  then  deliver  me  and  all  the  army  into 
your  hands,  and  you  will  have  full  control  over  us  from  that  time 
until  your  mission  is  ended;  and  during  that  time,  my  Father 
will  have  no  control  over  us.  Our  duty  will  then  be  to  cut  off  all 
your  enemies  upon  the  earth.  Inasmuch  as  you  are  the  president 
of  the  earth,  our  Father  will  deliver  us  entirely  into  your  hands, 
and  we  shall  be  subject  to  your  command ;  for  we  cannot  serve 
two  masters.  While  we  remain  upon  the  earth  we  shall  be  sub- 
ject to  you ;  but  when  we  return  to  heaven,  we  shall  be  subject 
to  our  Father.  He  has  given  unto  us,  the  warriors  of  heaven,  a 
mission  to  the  earth  to  fight  your  battles  for  one  thousand  years, 
and  when  we  once  begin,  we  will  make  a  slaughter.  During  the 
time  that  we  shall  be  subject  to  you,  my  Father  will  have  no  con- 
trol either  over  me  or  any  other  person  who  belongs  to  the  army 
of  heaven.  Should  he  undertake  to  dictate  one  of  them  contrary 
to  your  wish,  he  would  break  the  law  by  which  all  Gods  are 
governed ;  for,  after  he  shall  have  delivered  us  into  your  hands  for 
one  thousand  years,  he  will  not,  until  that  time  is  expired,  have 
any  control  over  us;  but  when  we  have  done  serving  you,  we 
shall  be  subject  to "  our  Father  again.  And  now,  my  son,  you 
know  what  you  have  to  trust  to  when  we  come  unto  you.  You 
have  been  much  tioubled  in  your  feelings,  because  we  have  not 
worked  to  please  you  at  times.  You  have  thought  that  we  ought 
to  have  been  subject  to  you  before  this  time,  and  to  have  done 
many  things  to  relieve  you;  but  if  we  had  done  so,  we  would 


608  THE  DUTY  OF  THE  ANGELS. 

have  broken  the  law  of  heaven ;  we  would  have  obeyed  you  when 
we  were  not  subject  to  you,  but  were  subject  to  our  Father.  It  is 
unlawful  for  us  to  have  more  than  one  master  at  a  time ;  we  have 
to  get  through  with  one  master  before  we  can  serve  another.  You 
will  now  understand  your  own  situation,  and  ours  also.  Let  us 
work  well  together,  and  each  of  us  act  our  own  part,  and  then  all 
things  will  go  on  well. 

3.  One  reason   why   we  cannot  be   subject  to  you  before  we 
come  unto  you  altogether  is,  because  you  do  not  know  enough  to 
control  us.     You  might  give  unto  us  false  commands,  and  there- 
by bring  us  into  confusion.      Our  Father   has   to   control   us   until 
he  has  fully  -prepared  you  to  take  charge  of  us ;    and  when  he  has 
done  so,  he  will  give  us  into  your  hands,  and   we   will  be   faithful 
unto  you.     We  will  cut  off  everything  that  you  tell  us   to   cut   off. 
When  our  Father  delivers  us  into  your  hands,  you  will  know  how 
to  control  us  aright ;    for  what  you  do   not  know,  I   will   tell   you, 
so  that  there  will  not  be  anything  lacking. 

4.  You  think  that  I  am  very  backward  in  bringing  on  the  test; 
but  I  can  assure  you  that  I  am  bringing  things  up  to  a  head  at  a 
rapid  speed.     You  may  know  by  this  revelation,  which  I  am  now 
giving  you,  that   I   am   now  preparing  you  to  take  the  reins   of 
government  into  your  own  hands,  and  showing  you  what  you  have 
to  trust  to.     The   strength  from  our   earth  is   great.      Behold,   I 
am  Jesus  Christ,  and   I  have  two  hundred  million  angels  in  my 
army,  who  will  be  under  your  command,  and  if  that  number   is 
not  sufficient,  you  can  have  as  many  more ;  for,   should  it  become 
necessary,  my  Father  would   send   a   dispatch   unto  your   Father, 
who  is  the  president  of  that  quorum  to  which  my  Father  belongs, 
for  more  help,   and   he  would  soon  respond  to   it.     But   I   can 
assure  you  that  you  will  not  need  any  help  from  any  other  earth 
besides  ours ;   for  we  have   power  enough  to  overthrow  the  devil, 
and  to  drive  his  influence  from  Adam's  earth,  and  save  it.     There- 
fore, rest  satisfied  and  trust  in  me,  and  know  that  I  am  with  you 
unto  the  end. 

5.  Satan  works  hard   at   my  people.     Let  them  be  diligent, 
and  guard  against   him,   for  he  will  deceive  some  of  them,  and 
destroy  them.      They  cannot  be  too  watchful  and  diligent.      They 
have  no  time  to  trifle  away  in  idleness  and  unprofitable  conversa- 


THE    IDLE    AND    UNFAITHFUL.  609 

tion  ;  and  of  this  they  will  be  convinced  very  shortly.  There  are 
idle,  slothful  people  in  this  Camp,  who  trifle  away  their  most 
precious  time  to  no  purpose.  Such  are  hypocrites,  and  shall  not 
live  in  the  midst  of  these  people.  They  will  not  work  if  they  can 
help  it ;  neither  will  they  put  themselves  about,  in  the  least,  ta 
assist  my  work.  Their  hearts  are  not  in  my  work.  They  are 
corrupt  and  filthy  before  me.  They  are  here  to  assist  the  devil 
to  work  against  my  faithful  people.  They  cast  their  poisonous 
influence  out  of  their  mouths  whenever  they  have  an  opportunity 
to  do  so.  They  are  as  vipers  in  the  midst  of  this  people,  going  in 
secret  and  striving  to  poison  as  many  as  they  can ;  thus,  they 
are  traitors  to  me.  At  the  test  I  will  force  them  out  from  among 
my  faithful  people,  and  they  shall  then  be  destroyed  in  the  sight 
of  my  people.  Oh,  how  I  despise  them.  Their  race  is  about 
run.  They  know  who  I  mean.  They  know  very  well  that  they 
despise  work,  and  that  they  are  hypocrites.  They  know  that  their 
hearts  are  not  in  my  work;  that  they  go  about  in  the  midst  of 
these  people,  in  secret,  striving  to  poison  the  minds  of  as  many  of 
my  people  against  the  truth  as  they  can.  They  do  not  believe 
the  revelations  which  come  from  my  mouth,  because  they  are  too 
idle  and  worthless  to  seek  the  assistance  of  my  holy  spirit  to  guide 
them.  They  are  led  by  damned  spirits,  and  they  go  about  among 
my  people  leading  those  damned  spirits  upon  them. 

6.  Let  my  servants,  the  apostles,  who  visit  my  people,  look 
at  themselves,  and  see  if  they  are  right  in  my  sight.  Let  them 
examine  their  own  hearts,  and  see  that  all  is  right  with  them. 
Some  of  them  are  dying  away  through  slothfulness  and  indolence,, 
and  are  afraid  lest  they  should  do  too'  much  work.  They  give 
way  to  idleness,  and  through  it  the  devil  is  destroying  them.  If 
they  do  not  rise  up  and  shake  therflselves,  and  work  with  dili- 
gence, I  will  come  out  upon  them  as  a  whirlwind,  and  cut  them 
off".  I  did  not  call  them  to  the  apostleship  to  give  way  to  the 
devil,  and  to  become  mine  enemies,  as  some  of  them  are  now  fast 
becoming.  They  are  going  to  sleep.  They  have  forgotten  their 
calling,  and  are  fast  becoming  devils'  slaves ;  and,  before  they  are 
well  aware  of  it,  the  devil  will  destroy  them,  if  they  do  not  rise 
right  up. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.      I  am  Jesus  Christ.      Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


6lO  THE    MANSIONS    IN    HEAVEN. 

REVELATION    CONCERNING    THE    MANSIONS    IN 
HEAVEN. 


No.  296.  WEBER,  UTAH,  June  yth,  1862. 

1.  You  ARE  determined  to  keep  me  going.     You  will  not  let 
me  rest  unless  I  speak  unto  you  every  day,  and  when   I   do  so,  it 
takes  up  a  great  deal  of  my  time,  for  some  days  I  have  to  remain 
by  your  side  as  much  as  seven  or  eight  hours  at  once,    dictating 
you ;   and  after  I  have  dictated  one  revelation  to  you,    I  have  to 
go  to  my  Father  and  remain  awhile  with  him  in  counsel,  in  order 
to  obtain  another  revelation,  before  I  can  come  unto   you   again. 
By  continuing  this  practice  from  day  to  day,  it  becomes  very  hard 
on  me,  for  almost  all  my  time  is  spent   in   doing   so,  and  I  have 
but  little  left  to  remain  at  home  with   my  companion.     Both  my- 
self and  all  the  warriors  of  heaven  have  companions  and  mansions 
according  to  our  birthrights.     We  have   pleasant  homes,  such  as 
mortal  beings  never  saw,  and  there  is  everything  around  us  that  is 
delightful.     I  have  the  most  beautiful  mansion  in  heaven,  except- 
ing my  Father's.     I  have  only    one  mansion,  but   my   Father  has 
many.     I  only  need  one,  because   I  have   only  one   companion. 
None  of  the  captains   of  our  host  have  more  than  one  mansion 
each,  and  in  like  manner  all  the  heavenly  host  have  each  a  man- 
sion beautified  according  to  his  rank  and  birthright ;    consequently 
there  are  many  mansions  in  heaven  owned  by  me  and  my  brethren. 

2.  Before  my  Father  sent  you  to  this  earth  on  this  last  mis- 
sion, you  always  lived  with  me  when   you   were   upon   our  earth. 
You  have  lived  in  my  mansion  thousands  of  years.     It  is  not  your 
duty  to  go  on  missions  in  the  spirit  worlds,  as  the  other  six  angels 
do,  for  their  missions  chiefly  lie   in  the  spirit  worlds;    but  your 
mission   chiefly  lies   in  this  mortal  world ;    and  oftentimes  when 
you  have  not  been  upon  this  earth,  you  have  been  with  me   at  my 
home.     I  know  you  well,  and  you  know  me  well.     There  is  not  a 
feeling   of  your   nature   but   what  I  wrell  understand,  and  I  know 
how  to  deal  with  you.     When  I  come  unto  you,  you  will  know  me 
at  once,  for  your  spirit   is  perfectly   acquainted  with   me,  and   as 
soon  as  I  show  myself  unto  you,  you  will   know   me.     You  were 


CONCERNING  THE  TEMPLE.  6ll 

with  me  when  I  sent  the  prophet,  Joseph  Smith,  to  the  earth  to 
open  the  sixth  seal.  He  was  sent  by  your  command  to  prepare 
the  way  for  you.  All  high  priests  are  sent  to  the  earth  by  your 
sanction.  You  give  me  your  sanction,  and  I  send  them  on  their 
missions.  When  you  are  not  upon  this  earth  upon  a  mission,  it  is 
your  duty  to  be  with  me  at  my  home,  for  I  always  have  to  work 
through  you  whe-n  I  have  anything  to  do  pertaining  to  Adam's 
earth ;  therefore,  it  is  your  duty  to  be  with  me  when  you  are  not 
on  a  mission  to  the  earth ;  and  when  you  are  upon  your  mission 
upon  the  earth,  it  is  my  duty  to  be  with  you.  We  must  always  be 
together  either  in  heaven  or  upon  the  earth,  because  I  cannot 
do  anything  without  you,  and  you  cannot  do  anything  without 
me;  cur  labors  lie  together;  1  hold  the  power,  and  you  hold 
the  authority.  My  power  cannot  be  made  use  of  to  do  any- 
thing upon  Adam's  earth  without  the  consent  of  him  who  holds 
the  authority  over  that  earth;  and  your  authority  is  useless  with- 
out my  power  to  back  it  up ;  and  my  power  wilt  not  accomplish 
anything  unless  I  have  the  opportunity  to  make  use  of  it. 
Therefore,  we  must  either  work  together,  or  nothing  will  be  ac- 
complished. The  power  and  the  authority  must  both  go  together, 
and  then  all  things  will  work  well ;  and  in  order  for  us  to  operate 
together,  we  must  both  be  together,  and  talk  together,  as  two  mor- 
tal men  talk  to  each  other  when  they  meet.  I  must  be  close  by 
your  side  almost  continually.  We  talked  to  each  other  when  we 
were  together  at  my  home,  and  we  must  now  do  the  same. 

3.  When  you  have  a   temple   built.  I  will  stay  with  you  in  it 
most  of  my  time ;    but,   as  yet,  I  have   no  house  built   upon  the 
earth  where  I    can  stay  with  you ;    and   until  a  temple  shall  be 
built  where  we  can  constantly  meet  and  counsel  together,  we  shall 
Cither  have  to  meet  together  in   the   open  air,   or  in  some   other 
place,  such  as  can  be  obtained  for  that  purpose.     But  I  want  to 
have  a  temple  built  as   soon  as  possible,  so  that   we   can  have   a 
proper  place  to  meet  in. 

4.  I  will   soon   clear  the  way  for  you,  so  §  that  you  can  take 
the   faithful   of  my   people  back  to  the  center  stake  of  Zion,  to 
commence  to  build  a  temple   in   Jackson   county,  even  the   place 
appointed,  where  the  first,  great  temple  must  be  built.     In  a  very 
short  time  you  will  be  there ;    for  as  soon  as  I  have  well  cleansed 


6l2  THE    GOODNESS    OF    GOD. 

this  Territory  from  corrupt  people,  and  gathered  the  few  who  are 
honest,  whom  I  shall  leave  alive,  into  my  Church,  and  set  all 
things  in  order,  I  shall  lead  them  forth  to  the  place  where  the  first 
temple  shall  be  built.  After  I  come,  I  shall  soon  have  all  things 
made  ready  so  that  I  can  move  my  people  out  of  this  Territory ; 
for  this  is  no  fit  place  for  my  faithful  people.  I  will  find  them  a 
better  home  than  this.  Therefore,-  my  son,  I  shall  soon  move  my 
people  to  a  goodly  land,  and  they  shall  enjoy  the  good  things  of  the 
earth,  for  I  will  give  unto  them  their  inheritances,  and  they  shall 
enjoy  them  without  being  molested  by  their  enemies.  Great  bless- 
ings lie  before  them ;  for  I  will  make  them  the  head  over  all 
things.  • 

5.  And  now,  behold,  I  speak  unto  you  concerning  my  Father. 
I  told  you  before  that  he  has  many  mansions.  You  may  wish  to 
know  the  reason  why  my  Father  has  so  many  mansions,  when  his 
sons  have  but  one  each.  You  know,  my  son  that,  neither  I  nor 
any  of  the  rest  of  my  brechren  have  any  offspring.  We  are  upon 
a  celestial  earth  where  nothing  but  celestial  beings  dwell,  and  we 
have  but  one  wife  each;  therefore,  one  mansion  each  is  sufficient 
for  us.  But  my  Father  has  many  wives.  I  need  not  tell  you  the 
number,  for  you  know  it  yourself.  Therefore,  my  Father  needs 
many  mansions  to  accommodate  his  large  family.  His  children  are 
better  supplied  than  he  is,  in  proportion  to  the  families  they  have. 
Our  Father  loves  his  sons  and  daughters  even  better  than  he  loves 
himself.  He  would  put  himself  abou  t  to  any  extent  to  bless  and 
benefit  them.  He  feels  that  he  cannot  do  too  much  for  them, 
and  they  love  him  because  he  is  so  good  to  them.  He  shows 
unto  us  an  example  worthy  of  imitation,  and  we  will  do  anything 
that  he  requires  at  our  hands.  We  all  dwell  in  perfect  union. 
We  can  hardly  do  enough  for  each  other.  Our  Father  is  the 
leading  person  upon  our  earth,  and  we  all  drink  into  his  influence*, 
and  follow  his  example,  and  thus  we  know  no  evil  when  we  are  at 
home  with  our  Father.  But  when  we  come  to  the  earth  to  you, 
we  meet  evil  spirits ;  but  we  have  all  power  over  them,  and  we 
will  keep  them  far  "away  from  those  who  are  faithful  to  our  Father. 
We  want  nothing  to  do  with  hypocrites.  We  do  not  like  to  come 
near  them.  They  are  not  worthy  of  our  society.  Our  Father 
tells  us  to  have  nothing  to  do  with  them;,  not  to  spend  our 


THE    FLAG   OF    INDEPENDENCE.  613 

precious  time  with  them  ;  but  to  leave  them  alone  until  he  has 
delivered  us  into  your  hands,  and  when  you  give  unto  us  your 
command,  he  says  that  we  must  cut  them  all  off.  He  tells  us  to 
strengthen  the  faithful  now,  and  to  save  their  lives,  and  this  we 
will  do. 

6.  And  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — my  people  have 
made  a  flag  of  independence,  even  a  flag  of  my  kingdom,  and  I 
am  well  pleased  with  it ;  but  they  must  not  wave  it  until  all  things 
are  made  ready  so  that  I  can  come  out  of  my  hiding  place  and 
cut  off  their  enemies.  They  must  not  wave  it  until  I  tell  you  to 
do  so.  It  is  right  that  it  should  be  waved  just  as  the  power  is 
about  to  come,  even  a  few  hours  previous  to  my  coming.  As 
soon  as  it  has  been  waved,  the  power  should  come.  A  flag  of  my 
kingdom. is  not  an  article  to  be  played  with.  It  should  be  waved 
at  the  proper  time ;  therefore,  I  will  tell  you  when  you  must  wave 
it.  I  have  but  little  more  to  reveal  unto  you  before  I  come. 
Therefore,  be  patient,  and  get  all  things  ready  as  soon  as  you  can; 
for  lo,  I  come,  I  come,  I  come  quickly ;  even  the  Lord  of  Hosts ; 
even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    SHOWING     HOW   THE    SAINTS    HAVE 
BEEN    PROTECTED. 


No.  297.  WEBER,  UTAH,  June  9th,  1862. 

i.  BEHOLD,  I  am  the  Lord  of  Hosts,  even  the  Son  of  the 
Eternal  Father.  I  wish  to  speak  unto  you  again.  Inasmuch  as 
my  army  has  not  yet  been  delivered  into  your  hands,  and  seeing 
that  none  of  my  holy  angels  have  had  the  privilege  to  set  their  feet 
upon  the  earth,  or  even  to  slay  any  person,  you  wish  to  know  by 
what  means  your  enemies  are  held  off  you.  I  will  inform  you, 
and  not  only  so,  but  I  will  show  unto  you  how  I  have  opened  the 
way  for  my  people,  and  supplied  their  temporal  needs  up  to  the 
present  time.  These  were  duties  which  I  had  to  attend  to, 
because  I  had  not  delivered  the  power  into  your  hands.  The 
power  is  all  in  my  hands  until  I  deliver  it  unto  you;  consequently, 


6  14  CONCERNING    THE    MESSAGE. 

I  have  had  to  attend  to  all  such  matters ;  but  when  I  give  the 
power  into  your  hands,  you  will  have  to  attend  to  all  such  matters 
yourself,  even  as  I  have  done. 

2.  And  now,  behold,  my  Father  speaks  unto  you  through  me : 
"Behold,  I  am  the   Eternal  Father,  and   I  shall  give  my  power 
into  your  hands,  because  you  need  it,  but  I  do  not.     I  shall  give 
it  into  your  hands  as  soon  as  I  have  prepared  you  for  it,  which  I 
have  now  done,  as  nearly  as  it  is  possible  for  me  to  prepare  you. 
Therefore,  the  next  move  which   I  shall  make  with  you  will  be  to 
give  the  power  unto  you ;    but,  previous  to  doing  so,  I  shall  send 
unto  you  my  message,  giving  up  to  you  all  claims  to  mine  army, 
which  is  my  power,  for  one  thousand  years,  and  .you  will  hold  all 
jurisdiction  over  it  until  your  mission  is  ended.     This  message  I 
shall  speedily  send  unto  you,  for  I  have   but   very  little  more  to 
reveal  unto  you  before  I   do  so.     My  message  is   a  deed  of  my 
power,  and  you  must   consider  that   when   you  have  received  it, 
you  have  received  my  power ;  for  when  I  send   my   message  unto 
you,  I  give  up  all  claims  to   mine   army  unto  you,   and  you  will 
command  it   in  my  stead,  with  the  same  authority  as  I  should 
command  it  myself,  were   I   upon  the   earth.     I  shall  both  sen'd 
unto  you  my  message  and  show  unto  you  the  spot  of  ground   on 
which  we  shall   stand  before  the  test  is  brought   on,  so  that  all 
things  will  be  made  ready  for  me  to  come.     Mine  army  will  be  in 
your  hands,  and  you  will  have  the  privilege  to  use  them  in  the 
first  test  if  you  need  them ;  but,  if  you  do  not  need  their  power  at 
that  time,  it  would  be  unwise  for  you  to  call  upon  them.     Do  not 
call  upon  them  when  you  do  not  need  their  assistance ;  and  when* 
you  do  need  it,  they  will  be  ready  to  assist  you.     They  are  always 
ready  to  do  their  duty." 

3.  Behold,    I  am   Jesus  Christ,   and   I  shall  come  unto  you 
altogether  as  soon  as  the  test    is  over ;    for  mine  enemies  are  all 
ready  and  waiting  for  the  test.     They  are  waiting  until  my  people 
have  shed  some  blood,  and  they  say  that  when  they  see  this,  they 
will  be  ready  to  come  upon  my  people.     The  man  that  stands  at 
the  head  of  the  old  Church   says  that  as  soon  as   my  people  have 
shed  blood,  he  will  give  his  consent,  with  all  his  heart,  to  all  who 
are  in  the  old  Church  to  come  up  against  my  people  to  put  them 
to  death.    This  is  the  conclusion  which  he  has  come  to ;  this  is  the 


HOW    THE    ENEMIES    HAVE    BEEN    RESTRAINED.  615 

decided  point  that  he  has  come  to,  and  it  is  the  point  to  which  I 
intended  to  bring  him ;  and  as  soon  as  he  has  given  his  consent 
to  those  who  are  anxious  to  come  up  against  my  people,  and  have 
gathered  themselves  together,  and  just  made  a  start  to  come  this 
way,  I  will  cut  off  that  man  and  all  his  seed ;  not  a  vestige  of  him 
shall  be  left ;  and  I  will  also  cut  off  his  blood-hounds  and  one- 
half  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  Territory  at  the  same  time.  And 
now,  my  son,  I  have  made  known  unto  you  his  intentions ;  there- 
fore, you  will  know  how  to  prepare  for  him.  We  shall  all  he 
under  your  command  when  he  gives  his  consent  to  his  blood- 
hounds. When  he  wields  the  power  of  the  devil,  you  shall  wield 
my  power.  You  shall  meet  him  at  the  right  place. 

4.  And  now,  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  my  son, — you  wish  to 
know  how  I  have  held  mine  enemies  back  from  my  people.  I 
have  told  you  before  that  I  have  had  a  large  army  stationed  upon 
this  spot  of  ground  to  protect  you  and  these  people  whom  I  have 
gathered  here.  One  of  the  captains  of  our  host  has  been  stationed 
here  with  his  army,  and  he  received  a  commandment  from  both 
me  and  my  Father  to  take  charge  of  the  old  Church,  and  it  has 
been  his  duty  to  watch  them  in  all  their  movements,  and  when 
they,  being  assisted  by  the  damned  spirits,  have  fixed  a  plan  to 
come  up  against  my  people,  or  to  waste  them  away,  that  captain 
has  sent  a  number  of  holy  angels  to  drive  all  the  devils  away  from 
the  men  who  set  the  plan,  and  they  have  thereby  been  smitten  with 
weakness,  until  they  have  become  utterly  powerless.  That  captain 
has  always  a  number  of  his  angels  going  about,  watching  the 
movements  of  those  men  of  the  old  Church ;  and  if  they  are  likely 
to  execute  a  plan  which  would  injure  my  people,  they  make  their 
report  to  the  captain,  and  he  sends  a  sufficient  number  of  angels 
to  drive  the  devils  all  away,  and  thus  break  up  all  their  plans,  and 
smite  them  with  weakness,  and  change  their  minds,  and  thus  their 
plans  are  broken  up  for  a  time ;  but  the  devils  soon  gather  around 
them  again,  and  start  them  to  lay  another  plan;  but  I  break  up  all 
their  plans  in  the  way  I  have  described  unto  you.  Thus  the  devil 
is  doing  through  them,  and  I  am  undoing,  so  that  he  can  make  no 
headway  until  I  permit  him ;  but  at  the  right  time,  I  will  let  them 
unite  to  die,  for  in  death  they  should  be  united.  When  mine 
enemies,  even  the  heads  of  the  old  Church,  counsel  their  people 


6l6  HOW    THE    ENEMIES    HAVE    BEEN    RESTRAINED. 

not  to  trade  with  my  people,  neither  to  grind  their  wheat  for  them, 
I  send  my  holy  angels  unto  those  people  who  have  been  counseled, 
and  they  drive  the  devils  away  from  them,  and  give  unto  them  an- 
other feeling,  and  then  they  want  to  trade  with  my  people.  They 
follow  the  spirit  that  works  upon  them ;  and  as  my  spirit  has  the 
most  powerful  influence,  it  drives  the  devils  away  from  the  people 
unto  whom  they  are  sent.  In  this  manner  I  continue  to  open  the 
way  for  my  people  to  obtain  that  which  is  necessary  for  them  ;  but 
I  shall  block  up  my  people's  way  just  before  I  come  to  deliver 
them — they  will  have  used  up  all  their  flour  before  I  come.  I  can 
bring  my  people  unto  this  point  at  any  time  in  the  course  of  two 
or  three  days;  for  I  can  suffer  the  devil  to  shut  up  all  the  mills 
against  rny  people,  whenever  I  have  a  mind  to  do  so.  My  peo- 
ple need  not  think  that  the  test  is  far  off,  for  it  is  not — it  is  right 
at  their  door.  I  am  just  about  to  give  up  to  my  servant,  the 
prc  phat. 

Let  my  people  humble  themselves  greatly  before  me,  that  it  may 
be  well  with  them  when  I  come ;  for  lo,  I  come  quickly.  I  am 
the  Lord  of  Hosts ;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION    CONCERNING   THE    PERFECTION    OF 

THE  GODS,  AND  THE  PERFECTION  OF 

HOLY   ANGELS. 


No.    298.  WKDFR,  UTAH,  June  loth,  1862. 

i.  LISTEN  unto  my  words  which  are  quick  and  powerful, 
sharper  than  a  two-edged  sword ;  for  I  am  about  to  speak  unto 
you  concerning  the  leading  authorities  of  heaven.  There  are  some 
things  which  you  still  need  to  know,  that  you  do  .not  now  know. 
It  is  said  in  the  New  Testament  concerning  my  coming: — "But  of 
that  day  and  hour  knoweth  no  man,  no,  not  the  angels  of  heaven, 
but  my  Father  only."  You  may  wish  to  know  how  this  can  be, 
seeing  that  it  is  also  said  that  holy  angels  have  arrived  at  a  fulness 
of  knowledge.  If  the  angels  of  heaven  have  received  a  fulness 


THE  PERFECTION  OF  HOLY  ANGELS.  617 

of  knowledge,  in  what  sense  have  they  received  a  fulness?  They 
have  received  that  fulness  which  belongs  to  holy  angels  in  their 
third,  or  celestial  estate ;  but  holy  angels  have  not  arrived  at  the 
fulness  of  the  Gods.  Their  fulness  is  to  see  as  they  are  seen,  and 
to  behold  the  presence  of  their  Father,  and  mothers,  and  to  under- 
stand the  nature  of  everything  which  is  below  them,  even  the 
nature  of  all  kinds  of  material.  They  have  the  power  over  all  evil, 
because  Jhey  dwell  upon  an  earth  where  no  evil  exists ;  where  no 
darkness  exists  ;  but  where  all  is  light ;  where  there  is  no  deception, 
nor  misrule ;  but  all  things  are  seen,  and  understood  by  holy  angels 
as  they  are  seen,  and  they  cannot  be  deceived  by  ^devils,  for  they 
have  power  over  them,  and  over  the  principle  of  evil  by  which  they 
are  actuated.  The  perfection  of  angels  is  not  the  perfection  of 
Gods.  There  are  different  degrees  of  perfection  connected  with 
Gods  and  angels.  It  is  the  duty  of  angels  to  fight,  and  to  sustain 
the  law  which  is  administered  by  their  Father  to  a  mortal  world. 
Their  Father  is  the  lawgiver,  and  they  sustain  the  law  after  he  has 
given  it ;  he  holds  all  authority,  and  they  hold  all  power,  it  being 
invested  in  them ;  but  they  cannot  operate  without  the  consent  of 
their  Father  who  holds  the  authority.  Therefore,  the  authority  is 
invested  in  a  God,  but  the  power  is  invested  in  his  angels.  The 
perfection  of  a  God  is  to  hold  the  authority ;  but  the  perfection 
of  holy  angels  is  to  hold  the  power.  They  cannot  work  without 
authority ;  therefore,  they  have  to  look  up  to  a  person  who  is  of  a 
higher  rank  than  themselves  to  give  unto  them  the  privilege  to  act, 
before  they  can  do  so.  Angels  cannot  look  to  themselves  for 
authority,  for  they  only  possess  the  power.  No  one  person  can 
possess  both  power  and  authority.  A  person  whose  birthright  en- 
titles him  to  be  a  commander,  must  confine  himself  to  his  own 
duty,  and  those  commanded  by  him  must  be  the  executors.  The 
commander  possesses  the  authority,  but  his  army  possesses  the 
power.  Thus  you  see,  my  son,  that  there  is  a  difference  between 
the  person  who  holds  the  authority,  and  the  army  which  possesses 
the  power.  The  authority  may  be  invested  in  one  person,  but  the 
power  may  be  invested  in  millions ;  for  the  power  of  an  army  con- 
sists in  its  number,  union,  and  good  training.  Therefore,  the 
perfection  of  an  angel  is  one  thing,  but  the  perfection  of  a  God  is 
another  thing. 


6l8  THE  REDEEMING  OF  WORLDS. 

2.  Behold,  I  am  Jesus  Christ,  even  the-  first  captain  over  all 
the  heavenly  host ;  but  I  do  not  know  my  Father's  intentions  only 
as  he  reveals  them  unto  me.  He  does  not  tell  me  all  his  inten- 
tions at  once ;  but  he  reveals  his  mind  and  will  unto  me  one  thing 
at  a  time ;  and  as  he  reveals  unto  me,  I  reveal  unto  you ;  he  gives 
unto  me  revelations,  and  then  I  give  them  unto  you.  My  Father 
has  redeemed  a  world,  and  exalted  it  from  mortality  to  immor- 
tality, but  I  have  not.  My  Father  knows  all  about  redeeming  a 
world,  for  he  has  passed  through  that  experience  millions  of  years 
ago;  he  is  far  in  advance  of  me.  I  have  to  look  unto  him  for 
counsel  and  instruction,  and  I  am  wholly  guided  by  him.  He 
has  books  which  it  is  unlawful  for  me  to  open  and  look  into.  I 
shall  not  know  all  about  the  redeeming  of  a  world  until  I  have 
redeemed  one ;  for  it  is  unlawful  for  my  Father  to  reveal  that 
knowledge  unto  me,  only  as  I  progress  in  the  work  of  redemption. 
All  Gods  understand  the  process  of  redeeming  worlds,  because 
they  have  passed  through  it,  and  consequently  they  are  entitled 
to  the  privilege  of  looking  into  all  those  books  which  give  a  full 
account  of  the  process  by  which  all  worlds  are  redeemed.  The 
redeeming  of  a  world  is  the  greatest  work  that  the  Gods  are  ever 
engaged  in ;  it  is  the  most  difficult  work  that  they  have  to  do.  No 
holy  angel,  who  has  not  redeemed  a  world,  has  the  privilege  to 
open  those  books  which  give  an  account  of  the  process  of  redeem- 
ing worlds.  That  knowledge  cannot  be  imparted  unto  them  until 
they  have  gained  it  by  experience;  but  after  they  have  once 
redeemed  a  world,  they  are  entitled  to  the  privilege  of  opening  the 
books,  and  reading  them  from  time  to  time,  in  order  to  refresh  their 
memories  of  what  they  have  once  passed  through.  Therefore, 
there  are  different  degrees  of  knowledge  and  perfection.  There- 
fore, my  son,  I  have  shown  unto  you  my  Father  and  his  holy 
angels  as  they  are,  and  I  have  also  laid  open  to  you  their  rights 
and  privileges.  Therefore,  you  can  now  perceive  that  neither  I 
nor  any  of  the  holy  angels  know  either  the  day  or  the  hour  when 
my  Father  will  send  us  all  unto  you ;  but  I  shall  continue  to  bring 
revelations  as  my  Father  gives  them  unto  me,  until  I  have  brought 
the  last  one  unto  you,  and  then  he  will  send  all  his  army  unto  you. 
I  can  tell  you  this  much.  I  have  almost  done  bringing  revela- 
tions unto  you,  for  my  Father  has  told  me  so.  He  says  that  I 


CONCERNING    THE    FIRST    FOUR    GENERALS.  619 

have  about  finished  that  work ;  that  he  is  about  to  send  unto  you 
his  message ;  and  that  he  will  then  have  done  revealing  unto  you 
in  this  manner. 

3.  You  wish  to  know  the  exact  order  in  which  the  first  four 
generals  in  heaven  stand.  I  will  reveal  it  unto  you.  I  am  the 
first  general,  and  I  ride  a  white  horse,  as  I  have  told  you  before. 
The  next  general  to  me  by  birthright  rides  a  red  horse.  He  it  is 
that  has  had  his  army  guarding  you  up  to  this  time,  and  that 
has  taken  charge  of  the  old  Church.  I  could  not  bring  mine 
army  to  guard  you  myself,  because  I  am  a  swift  messenger,  and 
a  revelator  from  my  Father  to  you,  and  this  will  be  my  employ- 
ment until  I  have  brought  the  last  revelation  unto  you,  and  then  I 
shall  come  to  you  myself.  Inasmuch  as  I  have  been  otherwise 
engaged,  and  could  not  guard  you  myself,  I  sent  the  next  general* 
unto  me  with  his  army  to  act  for  me,  even  to  guard  you,  and  to 
take  charge  of  the  old  Church,  until  I  shall  be  liberated.  The 
third  general  rides  a  black  horse.  I  sent  him  unto  you  to  give 
unto  my  people  a  little  of  his  history,  and  it  was  interesting  unto 
them.  He  only  gave  unto  them  a  small  portion  of  his  history ; 
therefore,  I  may  send  him  again  to  give  a  little  more  of  it.  I  will 
not,  however,  positively  promise  this,  unless  my  servant  Joseph 
wishes  him  to  come  again.  If  he  wishes  to  hear  from  him  again, 
I  will  send  him,  and  he  shall  do  what  my  servant,  the  prophet, 
wishes  him  to  do.  He  has  not  been  stationed  here  ;  none  other  of 
the  generals  have  been  stationed  here  except  the  one  that  rides  the 
red  horse.  The  person  that  rides  the  pale  horse  is  the  fourth 
captain,  or  general,  of  the  heavenly  host,  and  he  carries  the  law 
with  him  to  regulate  all  the  army.  The  generals  look  unto  him 
for  the  law  to  regulate  them  in  their  movements,  for  they  are 
always  governed  by  law. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.  Let  this  suffice  for  the  present, 
and  I  will  shortly  speak  unto  you  again.  I  am  Jesus  Christ. 
Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


620  THE    DUTY    OF    THE    LORD. 

REVELATION    CONCERNING    THE    DUTY    OF    THE 
LORD,  AND  ALSO  CONCERNING  THE  TEMPLE, 
AND   THE    MESSAGE. 


No.  299.  WEBER,  UTAH,  June  nth,  1862. 

i.  WHAT  can  I  say  unto  you  this  morning  to  comfort  you? 
I  am  in  a  hurry  to  speak  unto  you  to-day ;  but  you  look  for  me 
to  speak  unto  you  every  day ;  and  it  is  very  tedious  for  me  to  do 
so.  I  have  spoken  unto  you  every  day,  with  a  very  few  excep- 
tions, for  some  time,  and  it  appears  that  you  continue  to  look  for 
it.  You  should  consider  that  I  have  other  things  to  attend  to 
*to  besides  talking  to  you.  I  have  the  entire  army  of  heaven  to 
attend  to.  The  burden  of  arranging  the  army  rests  on  me.  When 
I  can  come  unto  you  altogether,  to  be  entirely  under  your  con- 
trol, it  will  be  a  great  relief  unto  me,  for  I  shall  not  have  to  travel 
as  much  as  I  have  had  to  do  while  I  have  been  raising  you  up. 
My  chief  work  will  then  be  to  remain  with  you,  and  cut  off  your 
enemies.  My  duty  will  be  more  stationary  then,  and  all  my  cap- 
tains will  continue  to  visit  me  for  instruction.  I  shall  appoint 
unto  them  their  fields  of  labor.  I  shall  be  controlled  by  you,  and 
they  will  be  controlled  by  me;  this  is  the  order  in  which  we  must 
work  together.  I  shall  always  be  with  you,  and  I  shall  see  what 
you  stand  in  need  of  from  day  to  day,  even  continually,  with  the 
exception  of  a  few  minutes,  or  a  few  hours,  as  the  case  may  be, 
when  I  may  take  a  trip  to  my  Father  to  counsel  with  him  upon 
some  important  matters  concerning  the  law  which  I  shall  give 
unto  you ;  for  my  Father  only  gives  unto  me  the  law  a  little  at  a 
time ;  and,  on  this  account.  I  shall  have  to  go  up  to  him  time 
after  time  to  bring  the  law  unto  you  by  degrees.  If  my  Father 
would  give  unto  me  the  entire  law  at  once,  then  I  should  not 
have  to  continue  to  go  up  to  him  time  after  time  to  bring  it  unto 
you  a  little  at  a  time,  as  I  shall  have  to  do ;  this  is  the  way  that 
my  Father  works.  He  gives  unto  me  a  little  at  once,  and  as  he 
gives  it  unto  me,  I  shall  give  it  unto  you.  Therefore,  my  son,  I 
shall  be  absent  from  you,  betimes,  for  a  few  minutes,  or  a  few 
hours,  as  the  case  may  be.  In  order  for  me  to  be  with  you  con- 


CONCERNING    THE    MESSAGE.  62! 

tinuaily,  I  shall  need  a  temple  built,  so  that  I  can  be  with  you. 
In  that  temple  the  laws  will  be  kept.  When  the  laws  have  been 
fully  given,  there  will  be  one  room  in  that  temple  set  apart  ex- 
pressly for  the  law  to  be  deposited  in.  It  will  be  set  apart  for 
you  and  me  to  meet  in  to  read  the  law,  and  to  counsel  together 
upon  all  important  matters. 

2.  You  will  take  the  reins  of  government  into  your  hands   as 
soon  as  my  Father  has  sent  unto  you  his  message.      His  message 
will  come  unto  you  first,  and  then  I  shall  show  unto  you  the  place 
where  we  must  both  stand.     I  shall  show  unto  you  the   place  as 
soon  as  you  have  received  my  Father's  message ;   for  his   message 
is  one  of  the  last  things  which  will   be  given  unto  you.     It  is  a 
giving  up  unto  you. 

3.  As  soon  as  I  have  shown  unto  you  the  place  where  we   will 
stand,  I  shall  bring  on  the  test,  and  as  soon  as  the  test  is  over,  I 
shall  give  unto  you  your  robe  and   rod.     You  will  see  your   way 
clear   when  you  have  received   my   Father's  message.     You  will 
know  what  to  look  for  the  next.     These  things  will  all  come  on  in 
their  own  order,  without  any  confusion.     I    may   ask  you   if  you 
are  now  ready  to  receive   my   Father's   message.     You  may  turn 
round  on  me,  and  ask  me  if  I  am  ready  to  bring   it  unto  you,  and 
after  I  have  brought  it  unto  you,  whether  I  am  fully  ready   to  sus- 
tain it.     Your  answer  is  to  me  that  you  are  ready  to  receive  it  as 
soon  as  I  am  ready  to   sustain  it.     I  will  promise  you  that  I  will 
sustain  it  as  soon  as  I  have  brought  it.     You   may  wish  to  know 
what  it  will  be  like  when   it  comes.     Will  it  be  long,  or  short?     I 
will  answer  you.     It  will  be  quite  lengthy  for  a   President's   mes- 
sage.     My  Father  is  a  King,  or  President,  over  a  celestial  world, 
and  when  he  has  to  give  up  his  army  to  another  president  over 
another  world,  he  has  to  send  his  message   to  that  president  unto 
whom  he  intends  to  send  his  army ;   this  is  the  order  by   which  all 
Gods  work  with  other  powers  that  are  dependent  upon  them  for 
assistance. 

4.  A  president's  message,  wherein  he  gives  up  all  his  claim  to 
his  army  to  another  president,  signifies   that  he   has  given   up  all 
claim  to  his  army  until  it  is  given  back   to  him  again.     He  has 
deeded  them  to  another  president  whom  they  they  must  serve ; 
for  it  is  the  duty  of  the  army  to  do  so  until  it  has  filled  the  con- 


622  THE    WORKS    OF    SATAN. 

tract.     You  will  understand  our  duty,  as  the  warriors  of  heaven, 
to  you  when  you  have  received  our  Father's  message. 

5.  What  more  can  I  say  unto -you  at  this  time?  I  have  not  a 
great  deal  to  reveal  unto  you  to-day,  because  I  think  that  it  is  not 
necessary  to  reveal  unto  you  so  much  every  day.  It  is  too  painful 
for  you  to  write  it,  as  well  as  being  tedious  unto  me  to  remain  so 
long  by  your  side.  Let  this  suffice  for  the  present,  and  I  will 
speak  unto  you  again  shortly.  I  am  the  Bright  and  Morning 
Star;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION  CONCERNING  THE  WORKS  OF  SATAN, 
AND   ALSO    CONCERNING   THE    SEPARA- 
TION OF  THE  PEOPLE. 


No.  300.  WEBER,  UTAH,  June  i2th,  1862. 

i.  INASMUCH  as  my  Father  is  about  to  deliver  both  me  and 
all  his  army  into  your  hands,  you  wish  to  know  how  you  are  to 
make  use  of  us,  or,  in  other  words,  the  principle  by  which  you 
shall  work  with  us ;  for  you  think  that  it  will  not  do  for  you  to  go 
to  work  with  us  in  an  uncertain  manner.  You  think  that  there 
must  be  some  lawful  way  for  us  to  work,  in  order  that  we  may 
always  act  justly  and  righteously  in  every  move  that  we  may 
make ;  for  we  must  go  to  war  in  righteousness,  and  not  in  un- 
righteousness;  for  devils  do  that,  and  we  must  not  do  as  devils 
do,  or  else  we  would  be  no  better  than  what  they  are.  They 
work  in  unrighteousness,  but  we  must  work  in  righteousness,  and 
in  a  lawful  manner.  Devils  do  everything  unlawfully,  and  the 
consequence  of  an  unlawful  course  being  pursued  by  them  has 
filled  the  world  with  darkness,  misrule  and  wickedness  of  every 
name  and  nature.  They  have  turned  all  things  upside  down,  and 
destroyed  the  true  sense  of  everything  that  exists  in  the  world ; 
this  is  the  result  of  the  labors  and  actions  of  a  lawless  race  of  peo- 
ple. They  brought  death  and  misery  upon  themselves  and  upon 
the  law-abiding  sons  and  daughters  of  Adam.  Nothing  but  death 


CONCERNING    THE    WORKS    OF    SATAN.  623 

and  destruction  follow  their  course.  They  have  thrown  every- 
thing out  of  order,  turned  things  wrong  side  up,  and  destroyed 
the  true  sense  of  everything,  so  that  there  is  not  anything  that  can 
be  seen  aright.  When  things  are  out  of  order,  and  in  confusion, 
and  a  person  looks  at  them  who  is  perfectly  right,  he  sees  them  as 
they  are — all  wrong.  A  person  must  be  right  himself  before  he 
can  see  the  things  which  are  wrong  as  they  are.  It  takes  a  perfect 
rule  to  try  an  imperfect  rule  by,  and  a  true  coin  to  try  counterfeit 
dollars  which,  being  of  ah  equal  size,  would  both  be  of  similar 
weights . 

2.  Darkness   would   not  pass  a  sentence   upon   itself,   but   it 
would  justify  itself.     How  can  a  thing  which  is  wrong  be  tried  by 
another  which  is  wrong? — it  is  impossible.     That   which   is   right 
must  try  that  which  is  wrong.     One  thing  that  is  wrong,  and  an- 
other thing  that  is  right,  will  not  both  agree,  for  they  are  entirely 
opposite  to  each  other  in  their  nature.     How   then   is  it   possible 
for  this  world  to  be  right  when  the  devil  has  had  the  control  of  it 
for  so  many  thousands  of  years.     He  is  in   opposition  to  all  Just 
and  righteous  laws.     He  will  not  endure  any  law  which  proceeds 
from  heaven,  if  he  can  help  it.     He  has  broken   every  law  which 
has   proceeded   from   the  first  council  of  Gods,  and  he  has  dis- 
seminated his  own  lawless  principles  in  the  world,  and  by  them 
he  has  destroyed  all  mankind.      Death  is  brought   upon  a  people 
through  a  violation  of  law. 

3.  The  nature  of  everything  that  exists  in  the  world  has  to  be 
changed;  for  all  things  in  the  world  are  now  wrong,  and  it  is   my 
duty  to  put  them  all  right.     All  mortal   beings   should  know  that 
they  do  not  know  anything   as   they  ought  to  know   it.     I  call 
upon  Abraham's  seed  to  lay  down  all  their  worldly  wisdom  which 
they  have  received  from  the  devil ;   this  1  require  of  all  those  who 
are  heirs  to  eternal  life,  for  I   will  not  accept  of  those  ,  who  con- 
tinue to  hold  to  their  worldly  wisdom ;   as  long  as  they  do  that, 
they  hold  to  the  devil,  for  they  know  nothing  only  what  he   has 
told  them,  except  they  have  been  taught  by  my  holy  angels.     I 
will  not  accept  of  a  person  who  will  not  give  up  the  devil ;   and  in 
giving  up  the  devil,  he  will  have  to  give  up  all   that  the  devil  has 
taught  him,  and  the  devil  has  taught  him  all  that  he  has  learned 
in  the  world,  unless  he  has  been  enlightened  by  my  spirit;   and 


624  CONCERNING    THE    WORKS    OF    SATAN. 

whatsoever  a  person  knows,  which  he  has  learned  in  the  world, 
that  my  spirit  has  not  taught  him,  is  of  the  devil,  and  is  rejected 
by  me ;  for  the  devil  has  deceived  mankind,  and  cast  his  bane- 
ful influence  everywhere,  and  any  mortal  being  who  is  not  en- 
lightened cannot  see  anything  in  the  world  aright.  How  can  a 
person  who  never  saw  anything  else  but  darkness  know  what  light 
is?  And  how  can  a  person  who  never,  in  mortality,  knew  any- 
thing else  but  wrong,  know  what  right  is?  It  is  impossible  for 
them  to  know  what  right  is  unless  they  are  taught  right  and  right- 
eous principles  by  a  personage  who  moves  in  eternal  light ;  who 
can  see  all  things  as  they  are ;  who  does  not  move  in  darkness,  but 
sees  all  things  in  a  true  light ;  who  does  not  look  at  the  deceitful 
garb  which  is  wrapped  around  all  things ;  but  who  penetrates  the 
outer  covering,  or  the  devil's  garb,  and  unfolds  all  things  so  that 
they  can  be  seen.  It  is  my  duty  to  take  the  false  garb  off  of 
everything  which  the  devil  has  placed  it  upon. 

4.  When   mortal  beings  have  looked  at  anything,   they  have 
only  seen  the   outside,   even  the  devil's   garb,   and  consequently 
mortal  beings  have  seen  nothing  but  the   outside  shell,  which   is 
the  devil's   shell.     The  devil  has  a  covering  for  everything,  and 
no  person  can  see  things  as  they  are  unless  the   false   covering   is 
taken  off,  and  it  cannot  be  taken  off  only  by  me,  under  the  ful- 
ness of  the  holy  priesthood.     When  I  begin,  I  can  throw  off  this 
garb,  so  that  all  things  can  be  seen  aright.     The  devil  puts  it  oh, 
but  I  take  it  off  again.     Let  my  people  be  aware  of  his  false  garb, 
and  not  be  caught  in  a  mantle.     Let  them  forsake  the  devil,  and 
cling  to  me,  and,  in   due  time,  I   will   show   unto  my  people   all 
things  as  they  are.     I  want  my  people  to  give  themselves  entirely 
into  my  hands,  and  I  will   lead  them   into   all   truth.     They  now 
know  what  I  require  at  their  hands.     I  will  not  accept  of  people 
who  will  not  fully  give  up  to  me ;   this  they  will  have  to  do  to  be 
saved  by  me.     I  cannot  work  with   a  people   who   will  not   place 
themselves  in  my  hands;    my  people  know  very  well  that   it  is 
their  duty  to  do  so.     They   must  know  that  I  cannot  work  with 
them  if  they  will  not  give  up  to  me.     I  require  at  their  hands  only 
what  is  right.   .  Let  them  do  their  own  duty,  and  all   will   be   well 
with  them.     I  am  the  Lord. 

5.  And  now,  my  son,  you  wish  to  know  how  you  are  to  pro- 


CONCERNING    THE    SEPARATION.  625 

ceed  with  us  after  our  Father  has  delivered  us  into  your  hands. 
You  wish  to  know  who  you  are  to  cut  off.  I  will  tell  you.  When 
you  lead  my  people  out  of  this  place,  you  shall  cut  off  every  per- 
son who  may  rise  up  against  you  with  the  intention  of  injuring 
either  you  or  any  of  the  rest  of  my  faithful  people  who  are  with 
you ;  but  you  must  not  cut  off  any  person  who  does  not  cross 
your  path,  or  retard  your  progress.  You  shall  go  straightforward 
when  you  have  started  to  the  place  which  I  shall  send  you  to ; 
and  everyone  who  opposes  you,  I  will  cut  off,  as  you  bid  me 
to  do.  And  when  you  have  arrived  at  the  place  which  I  have 
appointed,  namely,  at  the  head  of  the  old  Church,  you  shall  send 
my  servants  out  to  preach  to  those  whom  I  shall  leave  alive  in  the 
Territory,  and  my  servants  shall  gather  as  many  of  the  people 
as  will  hear  them  up  to  the  head  of  the  old  Church  to  be  tried, 
and  Jo  pass  through  the  strait  gate,  if  they  are  worthy.  As 
many  of  them  as  are  worthy  shall  pass  through;  but  all  those 
who  oppose  my  servants,  and  seek  their  lives,  I  shall  cut  off.  My 
angels  will  go  before  my  servants  when  they  travel  through  this 
Territory  to  gather  the  pure  of  my  people  who  have  been  deceived 
by  the  devil ;  my  angels  will  clear  the  way  for  them ;  but  those 
who  refuse  to  gather  up  to  the  head  of  the  Church,  according  to 
the  command  of  my  servants,  I  shall  cut  off,  and  in  this  manner 
I  shall  purify  my  Church  from  rebellious  and  wicked  characters. 
You  shall  cut  off  all  those  who  seek  to  oppose  you  in  your  onward 
course ;  and  you  shall  cut  off  all  those  who  refuse  to  gather  up  to 
to  be  Jried ;  this  will  take  away  all  the  rebellious.  You  will  now 
see  your  way  clear.  I  will  remove  out  of  your  way  all  those  whom 
you  cannot  use.  You  shall  rule  this  world  to  your  satisfaction. 

I  need  not  say  unto  you  any  more  unto  you  at  present.  Let 
this  suffice  for  this  time,  and  I  will  soon  speak  unto  you  again.  I 
am  the  Stone  and  Shepherd  of  Israel,  and  the  Bright  and  morn- 
ing Star;  even  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


626  THE    TWO    PRISONERS. 

REVELATION    CONCERNING  THE  TWO    PRISONERS. 


No.  301.  WEBER,  UTAH,  June  i3th,  1862. 

i.  I  WISH  to  speak  unto  you  concerning  the  two  prisoners.  I 
had  an  object  in  view  in  bringing  those  prisoners  here  and  retain- 
ing them  until  this  time.  I  told  my  people  that  I  could  bring  a 
mob  up  against  them  when  I  was  ready  for  a  mob  to  come ;  and 
I  was  ready  for  them  to  do  what  they  have  done.  My  words  will 
not  fall  to  the  ground  unfulfilled.  The  object  I  had  in  view  in 
retaining  those  prisoners,  was  to  bring  up  mine  enemies  to  this 
place,  in  order  to  fulfil  my  words ;  therefore,  I  have  accomplished 
what  I  wished  to  do  through  those  prisoners.  I  can  dispense  with 
them  now.  I  can  divide  this  camp  without  them.  I  have  almost 
finished  now.  If  you  let  them  out,  I  will  cut  them  off  my- 
self. Do  as  I  tell  you  and  all  will  be  right.  My  Father  has 
already  given  unto  me  his  message,  and  I  will  give  it  unto  you 
speedily.  I  shall  be  fully  prepared  for  them  by  the  time  they  are 
ready  to  make  another  move.  This  is  a  move  to  divide  this  camp, 
and  it  is  already  about  divided.  This  move  was  necessary  to  be 
made  in  order  to  divide  the  camp ;  and  when  that  is  done,  I  have 
no  more  use  for  mine  enemies.  They  do  just  what  I  want  them 
to  do,  and  they  cannot  do  anything  else.  I  am  compelled  to  take 
a  course  to  divide  this  camp ;  and  while  I  purge  out  the  hypocrites, 
the  process  is  severe  on  the  faithful.  Nothing  but  a  severe  course 
being  taken  will  purge  out  the  hypocrites ;  therefore,  while*  I  am 
doing  this,  you  must  be  reconciled  to  it.  Rise  up  like  a  man,  and 
do  not  let  your  spirit  droop.  The  storm  will  soon  be  over.  My 
turn  will  soon  come,  so  be  of  good  courage.  You  may  let  out 
those  prisoners,  for  I  do  not  want  them  any  longer.  I  will  cut 
them  off  myself  when  I  come.  '  I  am  now  about  to  give  unto  you 
my  Father's  message,  as  I  told  you  before,  and  then  you  shall 
gather  together  all  the  faithful ;  and  if  there  should  still  be  any 
hypocrites  remaining,  who  have  not  left  with  mine  enemies,  you 
shall  seperate  them  from  the  faithful,  and  slay  them,  as  I  have  com- 
manded you.  You  will  see  what  you  have  to  trust  to,  as  soon  as 
I  have  stayed  the  course  of  mine  enemies  this  time. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.  I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


INSTRUCTION.      '  627 

INSTRUCTIONS    FOR    THE    PROPHET. 


No.   302.  WEBER,  UTAH,  June  i3th,  1862. 

1.  BEHOLD,  I  am  Jesus  Christ,  and  I  come  near  unto  you.     I 
know  your  condition.     I  wish  to  try  this  people  before  I    deliver 
them.    I  will  put  a  stop  to  the  present  course  in  a  short  time.    The 
enemies  shall  go  so  far,  and  then  I  will  stop  them — they   have 
almost  gone  far  enough — I  will  stop  them  at  the   right   time.       I 
know  you  feel  discouraged,  and  feel  as  though  I  had  forsaken  you 
and  this  people;  but  I  have  not,  and  that  you  shall  soon  see.     Be 
still,  and  faint  not.     They  have   commenced  the  work,  but  I  will 
finish  it.     As  soon  as  this  scrimmage  is  over,  I  will  give  unto  you 
my  Fathers  message,  and  then  I  will  sweep  them  off.     You  need 
not  fear ;  I  will  stop  them  at  the  right  time.     The  hypocrites  that 
are  in  the  midst  of  this  people  will  go  over  to  the  other  side.     As 
soon  as  they  have  drawn  from  among  this  people  all  the  hypocrites, 
then  I  will  put  a  stop  to  their  present  course.      I   have   suffered 
them  to  come  and  do  what  they  have  done,  in  order  that  they  may 
draw  out  all  the  hypocrites.     None  will  leave  me  and  go  over  to 
the  other  side  but  those  people  who  are  false  before   me — who 
have  not  my  spirit  to  strengthen  them.     The  true  and  faithful  will 
stand  firm  ;   but  the  false-hearted  will  go.     Those  that  stand  faith- 
ful and  maintain  their  ground  through  this,   I  will  deliver.      You 
do  not  think  that  I  should  suffer  this  .to  take  place;    but  I  have 
suffered  it  for  a  wise  purpose.      This  is   a   trying   day  to   some. 
The  clouds  all  around  appear  dark  to  my  people;  but  a  bright 
cloud  will  soon  make  its  appearance. 

2.  .  You  begin  to  think  that   I  am  betraying  your  confidence, 
because  you  are  in  trouble  at  this  time,   but  you  will  find  me   a 
friend  when  I  am  needed,  even  when  this  scrimmage  is  over.     Oh, 
how  I  do  wish  that  I  was   let   loose,    I   would   make  a   slaughter 
among  them.     You  consider  it  hard  that  I  should  let  my  enemies 
loose  upon  you  before  I  have  given  unto  you  the  power  of  your 
office.     I  have  told  you  before  that  I  have  only  done  this  to  draw 
out  the  unfaithful  from  among  the  faithful..     When   I   have   done 
this,  I  will  stop  them  ;     and  until  I  have  done  this,  I  shall  let  them 


628  A    COMMUNICATION. 

continue  to  fire.  Both  you  and  the  faithful  must  depend  on  me, 
and  you  will  be  right.  You  must  not  give  up  to  them,  but  stand 
them  out,  and  I  will  sustain  you.  You  must  take  notice  of  how 
many  of  these  people  go  over  to  the  other  side.  All  such  you 
must  set  down  as  hypocrites ;  these  I  will  not  deliver. 

I  need  not  say  any  more  unto  you  at  this  time.  Let  this  suffice 
for  the  present.  I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so.  Amen  and 
Amen. 


A   COMMUNICATION  FROM  THE  .SECOND    CAPTAIN 
OF   THE    LORD'S    HOST. 


No.  303.  WEBER,  UTAH,  June  i3th,  1862. 

1.  ACCORDING  to  the  request  of  my  Father  and  my  brother, 
Jesus  Christ,  I   speak  unto  you  in  haste.     I  received  my  appoint- 
ment from   my   Father  and  my   brother,    Jesus   Christ,  to  guard 
both  you  and  my  people,  and   I   will  do  it.     I   know  what  your 
enemies  are  doing  at  this  time.     I  will  control  them  aright.     I 
know  all  about  them.     I  have  suffered  them  to   gather  themselves 
together  as  on  the  present  occasion. 

2.  My  Father  has  not,   as   yet,  sent  his   message   unto  you; 
and,  until  he  has  done  so,  I  am  not  allowed  the  privilege  of  cut- 
ting your  enemies  off;   but  I  will  break  them  up,  and  turn  them 
another  way.     They  shall  have  no  power  neither  over  you  nor  any 
of  the  rest   of  my  faithful   people.     I   know  what   your  enemies 
want.     They  are  tco  impatient.     They  must  wait  a  little  longer. 
You  will  speedily  receive  my  Father's   message,  and  then   it  will 
liberate  me.     I  do'  not  like  to  try  your  feelings  by  suffering  a  mob 
to  come  in  sight ;    but  I  am  compelled  to  do  what  I  am    doing  at 
this  time.     I,  the  Second  Captain  of  the  Lord's  host,  have  suffered 
them  to  come  thus  far   according  to   my   Father's  request,  and   I 
will  turn  them  the  right  way — fear  not.      I  wish  to  try  my   people 
before  I  deliver  them.     I  had   an  object  in  view  for  doing  this ; 
it  will  have  the  desired  effect.     I  will  make  it  work  right.     Let 
my  people  be  still  and  composed,  and  I  will  take  care  of  them. 


CONCERNING    THE    ENEMIES.  629 

Stand  to  your  post  like  a  man,  and  do  not  give  up  any  person  to 
them ;  bur  watch  them.  They  are  as  nothing  in  my  hands.  I 
can  turn  them  any  way  that  I  desire  to. 

I  now  give  unto  you  no  more.    I  am  the  Second  Captain  of  the 
Lord's  host.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


REVELATION     CONCERNING    THE    ENEMIES,    AND 

THE    COURSE    THAT    THE    LORD    WILL 

PURSUE  WITH  HIS  PEOPLE. 


No.  304.  WEBER,  UTAH,  June  i5th,  1862. 

1.  I  WISH  to  speak  unto  you  this  morning  to  encourage  you. 
I  know  that  you  have  none  to  whom  you  can  look  for  strength  but 
me.     It  is  my  duty  to  strengthen  you ;  for  I  can  administer  unto 
you  all  the  strength  which  you  need.     I  heard  the  prayer  that  you 
offered  up  this  morning,  and  I  will  answer  every  word  of  it ;  for  I 
was  by  your  side  when  you  offered  it  up,  and  dictated  you  while 
you  spoke.     I  wished  you  to   pray   after  that   manner  so  that   I 
could  answer  your  prayer. 

2.  I  will  confuse  those  men  who  are  shooting 'at  my  people, 
either  with  cannons  or  muskets.     I  will  blind  their  eyes,  so  that 
they  will  not  be  able  to  shoot  to  the  mark.     Mine  angels  shall  be 
the  busiest  persons  in  the  war.     Oh,  how  they  shall  confuse  those 
men  this  day.     This  is  the  third  day  of  the   war ;    it   is   my   day, 
(Sunday).     I  have  told  you  to  a  certain  extent  how   I   shall  act 
with  mine  enemies  to-day.     I  need  not  say  any  *  more  unto  you 
on  that  head  at  this  time,  but  I  wish  you  to  know  that  I    am  by 
your  side,  and  that  I  shall  not  leave  you.       Everything   is   about 
ready,  and  the  time  is  come  when  I  shall  have  to  come  and  show 
myself  plainly  unto  you. 

3.  My  faithful  people  have  nearly  spent  their  physical  strength, 
and  used  up  their  ammunition,  and  when  they  have  done  so,  and 
are  not  able  to  defend  themselves  against  their  enemies  any  longer, 
they  will  have  done  their  own  part,  and  will  be  pronounced  faithful 
before  me,  having  done  their  duty.     Until  my  people  have  come 


630  CONCERNING    THE    DELIVERANCE. 

to  this  point,  I  cannot  lawfully  come  to  their  release.  A  people 
must  spend  their  own  strength  and  means  before  they  have  a  law- 
ful claim  on  me  for  assistance,  and  when  they  have  done  so,  I  am 
compelled  by  law.  to  come  and  assist  them.  If  I  should  fail  to  do 
so  at  that  time,  I  should  break  the  law,  and  that  a  celestial  mes- 
senger cannot  do,  if  he  could,  he  would  be  a  sinner,  and  no  sinner 
can  exist  in  heaven. 

.  4.  I  have  now  shown  unto  you,  my  son,  my  people's  duty  in 
the  test,  and  also  my  duty  unto  them.  You  may  judge  by  what  I 
have  told  you  how  near  my  coming  is.  When  you  see  the  am- 
munition of  my  people  used  up,  and  they  have  no  means  left  to 
defend  themselves,  and  mine  enemies  begin  to  make  headway  and 
force  themselves  into  this  camp,  you  may  know  that  the  time  of 
my  coming  has  arrived.  You  may  judge  by  this  how  near  my  com- 
ing is.  I  may  turn  them  another  way,  and  I  may  not.  I  do  not 
want  to  tell  you  any  nearer  at  this  time  what  turn  I  shall  take  with 
them,  but  it  sufficeth  me  to  say,  that  I  shall  make  such  a  turn  with 
them  as  will  bring  the  deliverance  of  my  faithful  people,  even  to 
their  satisfaction,  with  shouts  of  joy  and  praise  to  my  name.  My 
people  will  soon  find  me  their  never-failing  friend  ;  but  they  can- 
not prove  my  faithfulness  and  fidelity  to  them  in  a  test  until  I  have 
first  proved  theirs  to  me. 

5.  I  have  not  shown  myself  unto  you  in  a  plain,  visible  and 
satisfactory  manner  up  to  this  time ;  but  I  cannot  hide  my  face 
from  you  many  more  hours.  I  shall  have  to  unveil  myself  to  you 
and  this  people  in  the  course  of  a  few  hours,  if  I  do  not  turn  mine 
enemies  another  way ;  but  I  will  not  satisfy  you  at  this  time;  what 
I  shall  do  you  will  soon  know.  Should  I  turn  mine  enemies  an- 
other way,  it  would  delay  my  coming  a  little  longer,  and  it  would 
give  you  a  little  more  time  to  properly  arrange  your  business  with 
my  people.  I  know  that  you  are  crowded  at  this  time,  for  your 
enemies  are  upon  you,  and  you  do  not  know  what  to  do  with 
them.  If  I  were  to  turn  them  another  way,  and  hold  them  for  a 
short  time,  you  think  it  would  be  better  for  you,  as  you  would  have 
time  to  make  all  necessary  arrangements,  so  that  there  would  be 
no  confusion  at  the  time  of  the  deliverance  of  the  people ;  but  I 
will  not  promise  at  this  time  that  I  will  do  this ;  neither  will  I 
promise  you  that  I  will  bring  on  the  test  forthwith.  You  will 


CONCERNING    THE    DELIVERANCE.  631 

very  soon  see  what  I  shall  do.  Watch,  for  it  will  come  right 
which  ever  way  it  comes.  I  am  either  ready  to  bring  on  the  test, 
or  rather  the  deliverance  of  this  people,  right  now,  or  I  am  ready 
to  turn  mine  enemies  another  way,  and  delay  it  a  little  longer. 
Should  I  turn  them  another  way,  I  should  permit  them  to  gather 
together. again,  and  make  an  attempt  to  come  up  against  my  peo- 
a  second  time,  and  then  I  should  cut  them  all  off  as  soon  as  they 
had  started.  This  I  should  do  if  I  prolong  the  deliverance  of  this 
people ;  but  as  I  have  said  before,  I  shall  not  tell  you  at  this  time 
what  course  I  shall  take.  Should  I  conclude  to  bring  the  deliver- 
ance of  my  people  right  on  when  mine  enemies  begin  to  enter  this 
Fort,  I  should  paralyze  them  all ;  I  should  hold  them  so  fast  by 
mine  holy  angels  that  they  could  neither  move  limb  nor  joint.  I 
could  send  one  thousand  angels  to  one  thousand  mortal  men,  one 
angel  to  one  man,  and  those  angels  would  hold  the  men  so  that 
they  could  not  move.  One  angel  is  stronger  than  four  mortal 
men ;  he  can  do  more  than  half  a  dozen  men ;  he  can  cut  off  half 
a  dozen  men  in  less  than  two  minutes.  Mortal  men  are  not  to  be 
compared  to  holy  angels  for  power. 

6.  Behold,  I  am  Jesus  Christ,  and  I  could  cut  off  that  mob, 
which  they  call  one  thousand  men,  myself.  But  they  lie;  there 
is  not  one  thousand  of  them,  nor  seven  hundred  either.  I  could 
tell  how  many  there  are  of  them  if  it  was  necessary,  but  it  is 
not.  But  be  they  many,  or  few,  I  could,  with  all  their  boasting, 
go  from  one  to  another  and  slay  them  all  with  my  own  hands  in 
less  than  fifteen  minutes.  I  could  go  forth  alone,  and  with  my 
own  hands  I  could  cut  off  all  your  enemies  as  fast  as  they  attemped 
to  approach  you.  I  can  assure  you  that  you  have  nothing  to  fear. 
I  am  true  to  you,  and  that  you  shall  see  when  I  have  brought 
things  to  that  point  where  I  can  lawfully  come  and  fight  your 
battles.  Oh,  my  son,  you  have  nothing  to  fear  while  y-ou  have 
such  a  warrior  as  I  am  by  your  side,  and  I  shall  always  be  by 
your  side  from  this  day  out,  with  the  exception  of  a  few  hours, 
occasionally,  when  I  may  be  visiting  my  Father  to  obtain  informa- 
tion upon  some  matters  connected  with  our  mission.  Don't  be 
discouraged ;  I  will  stop  them  all  directly,  or  I  will  cause  them  to 
cease  firing  at  this  point.  I  will  make  all  things  work  right.  I 
can  assure  you  that  I  will  put  a  stop  to  their  present  course 


632  CONCERNING    THE    DELIVERANCE. 

directly.  They  will  do  their  best  while  I  permit  them  ;  but  if  I  do 
not  see  fit  to  turn  them  another  way  before  I  destroy  them,  I  will 
come  to  the  deliverance  of  my  people  like  a  thunderbolt.  You 
will  know  presently  what  conclusion  I  have  come  to.  Should  I 
come  to  the  deliverance  of  my  people  before  I  send  mine  enemies 
away,  the  first  thing  that  I  should  do  would  be  to  paralyze  all 
mine  enemies,  and  then  I  should  come  to  you,  and  call  you  by 
name.  I  shall  call  you  by  name  whenever  I  come,  and  when- 
ever I  call  you,  you  need  not  be  afraid  to  come  to  me.  Should 
I  do  such  a  thing  to-day,  all  the  guns  would  soon  be  still, 
nothing  would  move,  for  all  mine  enemies  would  be  paralyzed, 
and  soon  after  that,  would  all  be  dead.  Therefore,  my  son,  if 
I  come  now,  you  know  how  I  shall  come;  but  if  I  do  not 
come  now,  I  shall  have  more  time  to  arrange  matters,  and  my 
coming  would  differ  in  some  respects  from  what  it  would  be  if  I 
should  come  now ;  for  the  circumstances  in  which  I  am  placed 
now,  are  very  different  from  what  they  may  be  in  the  course  of  a 
few  days.  If  I  was  to  visit  you  now,  I  should  be  cramped  to 
make  all  things  agree  with  the  former  revelations  which  I  have 
given  unto  you,  showing  how  I  intend  to  come ;  but  if  I  have 
sufficient  time,  I  can  make  all  my  statements  concerning  the 
deliverance  of  this  people  agree. 

I  need  not  say  any  more  to  you  at  this  time.  Look  out  for  me ; 
for  lo,  I  come  unto  you  quickly.  I  am  Jesus  Christ.  Even  so. 
Amen  and  Amen. 


A    PROPHECY.  633 

A    PROPHECY    DELIVERED     BY    THE    PROPHET, 

JOSEPH    MORRIS,    AT   A    MEETING 

OF   THE    SAINTS. 


WEBER,  UTAH,  March  gth,  1862. 

i.  BEHOLD,  verily,  verily,  verily,  thus  saith  the  Lord  of  Hosts 
unto  the  people  who  compose  this  Camp :  I,  the  Lord,  am  coming 
unto  you  speedily.  Yea,  I  say  unto  you,  I  will  in  a  lew  days  come 
and  deliver  you.  You  know  not  how  near  my  coming  is;  if  you 
did,  you  would  fall  down  upon  your  faces  in  humility  before  me. 
I  have  seen  your  temptations,  and,  time  after  time,  I  have  sent  my 
holy  angels  to  deliver  you  from  them.  I  will  deliver  many  of  my 
people  who  have  been  tempted;  for  many  of  them  are  honest 
before  me.  Because  of  their  honesty,  I  have  delivered  them  out 
of  the  hands  of  the  destroyer,  and  when  I  come,  they  shall  behold 
my  face,  and  see  my  glory ;  but  some  of  my  people  will  fall  by  the 
shaft  of  death.  My  holy  angels  shall  abunandtly  strengthen  the 
faithful  of  my  people;  and  I  will  speedily  lead  them  out  of  this 
place,  for  I  am  well  pleased  with  them.  Through  the  integrity  of 
their  hearts  I  will  deliver  them  and  .make  them  rulers  in  my  king- 
dom, and  they  shall  be  the  first  to  receive  an  inheritance.  I  will 
preserve  their  lives,  and  with  a  mighty  hand,  and  with  an  out- 
stretched arm,  I  will  go  before  them  and  clear  their  way,  and  they 
shall  be  the  pioneers  to  the  Land  of  Promise.  But  a  few  years 
will  pass  away  before  they  will  commence  their  journey  across  the 
plains,  at  the  head  of  ten  thousand  saints.  Yea,  verily,  verily,  thus 
saith  the  Lord :  I  will  go  before  them,  and  they  shall  behold  the 
faces  of  my  holy  angels ;  they  shall  be  surrounded  by  a  halo  of 
celestial  light ;  they  shall  cross  both  lakes  and  rivers  as  though  they 
were  walking  on  dry  ground,  and  no  power  shall  stand  before  them. 
And  I  will  bless  the  faithful  of  my  people  with  long  life,  and  give 
unto  them  their  inheritances  in  the  Promised  Land ;  they  shall 
inherit  the  good  things  of  the  earth,  for  I  will  bless  them,  their  seed, 
and  their  seed's  seed,  even  from  generation  to  generation.  I,  the 
Lord  of  Hosts,  have  spoken  it.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 


634  INTERPRETATION    OF    A    TONGUE. 


A     TONGUE     GIVEN      THROUGH      THE      PROPHET, 

JOSEPH    MORRIS,    IN    FELLOWSHIP 

MEETING. 


INTERPRETATION  BY  SISTER  MARGARET.  COOK. 


WEBER,  UTAH,  March  9th,  1862. 

1.  VERILY,  verily,  verily,  thus  saith  the  spirit  of  the  Lord  unto 
you,  oh  ye,  my  people :     Prepare  yourselves   for  the  great  events 
about  to  take  place.     Oh,  that  your  eyes  were  open  to  see  things 
as  they  will  shortly  transpire,  for  they  will  be  such  as  it  will  be 
hard  for  human  beings  to  behold  ;  therefore,  prepare  yourselves  for 
that  which  you  will  shortly  witness,  for  it  will  be  hard  for  mortality 
to  behold  that  which  is  about  to  be  revealed.     Let  the  faithful  of 
my  people  prepare  themselves  as  far  as  mortality  can  be  prepared, 
for  I,  the  Lord,  will  reveal  all  you  will   be   able  to  bear ;    I   will 
show  you  all  you  will  be  able  to  see. 

2.  Oh,  ye  saints,  when  I  am  at  home  by  my  own   fireside,   I 
think  of  you.     When  I  reflect  on  the  condition  of  this  people,  oh 
how   I   mourn !     How  I  mourn  for  the  unfaithful, — not   for   the 
faithful. 

3.  For  thus  saith  the  Lord  unto  you  who  are  faithful  among 
my  people :  I  will  be  with  you,  and  I  will  give  mine  angels  charge 
concerning  you.     As  I" live,  saith  the  Lord  of  Hosts,  not  a  hair  of 
your  heads  shall  be  injured,   and  ye   shall  be  guarded   from   the 
power  and  grasp  of  the  wicked  one.     I  will  be  strength  to  you  in 
your  weakness,  and  a  light  to  you  in  your  darkest  hours.      I   will 
be  round  about  you  as  a  wall  of  fire.     Oh,  lift  up  your  heads,   ye 
saints  of  God,  for  verily,  verily,  thus  saith  the  Lord,   your   deliver- 
ance is  at  hand. 

4.  Oh,  prepare,  prepare  yourselves  for  that  event.      Put  away 
from  you  all  your  follies  and   light-mindedness,  for  you  will  need 
great  humility  ;    and  when  people  are   light-minded,   the   spirit  of 
humility  is  not  there.     Therefore,  I  say  unto  you  again  and  again, 
put  from  you  your  light-mindedness,  your  light  speeches,  and  your 
unprofitable  conversation,  and  cleave  unto  me  with  all  your  heart, 
soul  and  strength. 


INTERPRETATION    OF    A    TONGUE.  635 

5.  Love  your  neighbor  as  yourself.      Share  with  your  brethren 
and  sisters  the  comforts  of  life,  if  you  have  them  and  they   have 
not,  and  I,  the  Lord,  will  be  with  you  both  by  night  and  by  day. 
I  will  lead  you  forth  with  a  high  hand  and  an  outstretched  arm.    I 
will  go  before  you,  and  I  will   be  with  you  as  I  was  with  my  peo- 
ple anciently,  and  the  enemy  shall  have  no  power  over  you. 

6.  But  oh,  the  scenes  that  you  will  behold,   even  things  that 
will  make  your  hearts  to  melt  within  you.     Oh,  if  you  could  only 
behold  the  scenes  through  which  you  will  be  called  to  pass,  you 
would  humble  yourselves  as  in  sack-cloth  and  ashes  before  me; 
for  I,  the  Lord,    am  about  to  come  out  as  in  flaming  fire,  to  take 
vengeance  on  those   who   obey   not   my  laws.       Prepare,   prepare 
yourselves  for  that  which  is  coming  upon  you.     I  will  very  nearly 
lay  waste  the  City  of  the  Salt  Lake.     I  will  slay  the  wicked   who 
reside  there,  and  in  all  parts  of  this  Territory.     I  will  begin,  as  I 
before  told  you,  with  those  who  stand  at  the  head  of  my  Church, 
for  they  have  led  my  people  into  wickedness.      I  will  slay  them 
and  their  seed  also,  and  likewise  the  other  false  shepherds  of  my 
flock,  for  they  have  committed  abominations  in  my  sight.      The 
news  of  their  slaughter  shall  go  throughout  the  earth;  yea,   the 
sound  of  their  abominations  shall  go  from  nation  to  nation,  for  I 
detest  them  more  than  I  detested  the  abominations  of  the  inhabi- 
tants of  Sodom  and  Gomorrah.     Oh,  how  I  detest  them.     But  yet 
there  are  a  few  honest  among  them  whom   I  will  deliver;    their 
cries  have  come  up  before  me. 

7.  Oh,  the  cries !     Oh,  the  sorrows !     Oh,  the  anguish  of  the 
fair  daughters  of  my  people !     I   feel  for  them,  for  I  love  them 
as  I  love  my  sons,  and  I   will  deliver  them.      They  have  been 
oppressed  and  trampled  under  foot.      They  have  been  led  into 
difficulties  and  sins  by  my  sons,  until  my  heart  is  grieved  for  them. 
Oh !  my  sons,  my  sons,  my  sons,  ye  have  tried  and  oppressed  my 
daughters,  and  ye  have  rent  from  them  their  rights  and  their  privi- 
leges ;  but  I  declare  unto  you  that  as  ye  have  measured  unto  them, 
so  I  will  measure  unto  you ;  as  ye  have  put  them  through  the  fire, 
so  ye  shall  go  through  the  fire. 

8.  And  again  I  say  unto  you  my  people,  be  humble  and  faith- 
ful,  or  you  shall  not  escape   my   judgments;  for   lo !  I  come,   I 
come,  I  come,  saith  the  Lord  of  Hosts.     Even  so.     Amen. 


636  ORDER    OF    TWELVES    AND    TWENTY-FOURS. 

THE  ORDER  OF  TWELVES  AND  TWENTY-FOURS. 


AN    ARTICLE    BY    THE    PROPHET,  JOSEPH     MORRIS. 


WEBER,  UTAH,  March  29th,  1860. 

1.  WE  FIND  it  written  in  the  Bible,  that  when  prophets  erected 
temples  and  altars,  they  erected  them  with  twelve  stones,  as  in  the 
case  of  Elijah,  when  he  repaired  the  altar* that  was  broken  down. 
Where  did  this  order  originate?    In  heaven  ;  it  is  an  eternal  order 
there.     Are  there  temples  and  altars  in  heaven?     Yes.      Rev.  15  : 
5,  gives  the  following:    "And  after  that  I  looked,  and,  behold,  the 
temple  of  the  tabernacle  of  the  testimony  in  heaven  was  opened : 
and  the  seven  angels   came  out  of  the  temple."      Rev.    16  :    17: 
"And  the  seventh  angel  poured  out  his  vial  into  the  air;  and  there 
came  a  great  voice  out  of  the  temple  of  heaven,  from   the  throne, 
saying,  it   is  done."     Rev.  u  :   19:     And  the  temple  of  God  was 
opened  in  heaven,  and  there  was  seen  in  his  temple  the  ark  of  his 
testament."     Rev.    6:9:     "And  when  he  had  opened  the  fifth 
seal,  I  saw  under  the  altar  the  souls  of  them  that  were  slain  for  the 
word  of  God,  and  for  the  the  testimony  which  they  held."      Rev. 
9  :   13:     "And  the  sixth  angel  sounded,  and  I  heard  a  voice  from 
the  four  horns  of  the  golden  altar  which  is  before  God."     Rev.  14  : 
15:     "And  another  angel  came  out  of  the  temple."      Rev.    14: 
17-18:     "And  another  angel  came  out  of  the  temple  which  is  in 
heaven."     "And  another  angel  came  out  from  the  altar,  which  had 
the  power  over  fire."     Rev.  15:  8:     "And  the  temple  was  filled 
with  smoke  from  the  glory  of  God." 

2.  John,  in  Rev.  21  :   12,  in  speaking  ,of  the  New  Jerusalem, 
says  that,  "it  had  a  wall  great  and  high,  and  had  twelve  gates,  and 
at  the  gates  twelve  angels,  and  names  written  thereon,   which  are 
the  names  of  the  twelve  tribes  of  the  children  of  Israel."    Rev.  21  : 
14:     "And  the  wall  of  the  city  had  twelve  foundations,   and   in 
them  the  names  of  the  twelve  apostles  of  the  Lamb."     From  this 
we  learn  that  there  are  both  temples  and  altars   in   heaven,   the 
erection  of  which  was  practiced  there  before  it  was  upon  the  earth. 
And  it  is  in  accordance  with  the  eternal  order  of  heaven  that  the 


ORDER    OF    TWELVES    AND    TWENTY-FOURS.  637 

lesser  should  pattern  after  the  greater;    therefore,   earthly  things 
must  pattern  after  heavenly  things. 

3.  But  why  could  they  not  erect  temples  and   altars  of  stone, 
without  erecting  them  upon  twelve  stones?     Because,  to  do  other- 
wise would  not  be  in  accordance  with   the  eternal  law  of  heaven. 
And  the. Lord  will  not  sanction  anything  save  that  which  is  done 
according  to  law ;  for  he  is  always  regulated  thereby ;    without  law 
he  does  nothing. 

4.  All   Gods  are  subject  to  the  same  laws,   and  those   laws 
cannot  be  changed;    therefore,   the  course   of  the   Gods   is   one 
eternal  round. 

5.  Rev.  4:  4,  reads  as  follows :     "And  round  about  the  throne 
were  four  and  twenty  seats  :  and  upon  the  seats  I  saw  four  and 
twenty  elders  sitting."      Tenth  verse,  same  chapter  reads  :     "And 
the  four  and  twenty  elders  fall  down  before  him  that  sat  on  the 
throne."     Rev.  n  :   16:     "And  the  four  and  twenty  elders,  which 
sat  before  God  on  their  seats,  fell  upon  their  faces,  and  worshipped 
God."     Rev.  5:   14:     "And  the  four  beasts  said,   Amen.      And 
the  four  and  twenty  elders  fell  down   and   worshipped  him   that 
liveth  forever  and  ever."     We  learn  from  this  that  there  must  be 
another  order  in  heaven  higher  than  the  first  one.       In  the  first 
case  we  read  of  the  Lord  working  by  twelves ;  but  in  the  second 
case  we  read  of  him  working  by  twenty-fours.     What  is  the  cause  of 
this?    In  heaven  they  have  a  fulness  of  knowledge ;  but  on  the  earth 
they  have  only  a  knowledge  of  the  things  of  God  in  part.     Therefore, 
the  order  of  heaven  is  in  advance  of  that  of  the  earth.     But  when 
the  fulness  of  the  holy  priesthood  is  committed  to  the  earth,  its  in- 
habitants will  enter  into  a  higher  order  of  things  than  that  to  which 
they  are  now  subject.     They  will  enter  into  the  same  order  that 
exists  in  heaven. 

6.  The  four  and  twenty  elders  who  are  in  heaven,  referred  to 
by  John  the  Revelator,  represent  the  twenty-four  apostles  who  will 
be  ordained  in  the  Church,  under  the  fulness  of  the   holy  priest- 
hood.    When  that  which  is  perfect  is  come,  then  that  which  is  in 
part  will  be  done  away,  and  the  will  of  the  Lord  will  be  done  on 
the  earth,  as  it  is  now  done  in  heaven.      It  is  necessary  that  the 
children  of  men  should  understand  the  order  by  which  the  Lord 
works  among  them,  and  from  which  he  cannot   deviate.      When 


638  INTERPRETATION    OF    A    TONGUE. 

they   understand  the  laws  by  which  he  works,   they  know  him, 
whom  to  know  is  life  eternal. 

7.  We  read  that,  through  obedience  to  the  laws  of  heaven, 
many  miracles  have  been  performed  upon  the  earth,  such  as 
cleansing  the  leprosy,  dividing  the  waters  of  the  Red  Sea,  and 
quenching  the  violence  of  fire.  The  order  by  which  the  "Lord 
works  and  performs  all  his  wonders  among  men,  is  the  order  of 
ones,  threes,  sevens,  twelves  and  twenty-fours,  and  aside  from  these 
orders,  he  does  nothing.  They  were  instituted  in  the  council  of 
the  first  God,  and  are  handed  down  from  one  God  to  another  and 
cannot  be  changed ;  therefore,  they  are  eternal. 


THE    TESTIMONY    OF     THE     THIRD    C'APTAIN    OF 

THE    LORD'S    HOST,    GIVEN    IN    A   TONGUE 

THROUGH  THE  PROPHET,  JOSEPH 

MORRIS,  IN  THE  SAINTS' 

MEETING. 


INTERPRETATION    BY    DAVID    RICHARDS. 


WEBER,  UTAH,  June  8th,  1862. 

1.  BE  IT  KNOWN  unto  you  that  I  am  the  Third  Captain  of  the 
Lord's  army,  and  I  am  here  by  you,  and  a  portion  of  the  army  of 
heaven  are  along  with  me.     Our  swords  are  glistening  in  the  air, 
and  we  are  dressed  in  military  uniform,  and  if  you  could  look  on 
us,  the  brightness  of  the  sight  would  blind  you.     You  cannot  be- 
hold us  at  the  present ;   but  if  you  were  permitted  to,  it  would  be 
a  wonderful  sight.     It  is  not  so  with  us,  because  we  are  familiar 
with  such  sights ;   but,  at  present,  let  this  matter  not  trouble  you; 
nor  think  about  it.     With  permission  I  have  come  to  visit  you  to- 
day, because  I  wish  to  relate  to  you  some  of  my  history,  that  the 
faithful  among  you  may  be  comforted ;    and  when  the  prophet  will 
give  me  his  permission,  then  I  will  do  so. 

2.  Some   of  you   have  wondered   many   times,   and    thought, 
"Have  the  angels  who  are  now  in  heaven,  at  any  time,  on  a  mortal 


TESTIMONY    OF    THE    THIRD    CAPTAIN.  639 

earth,  passed  through  such  circumstances  as  these  that,  at  present, 
are  prevailing  on  our  mortal  earth?"  You  wonder  if  we,  at  any 
time,  were  in  such  a  place  as  you  are  in  now.  I  will  explain  this 
matter  unto  you.  We  were  in  just  such  circumstances,  and  in  just 
such  a  place  as  you  are  in.  We  had  a  camp  and  a  fort,  and-  a — 
river  that  did  run  close  by  it,  like  yours  which  you  call  Weber 
River,  and-  from  that  river  I  have  carried  willows,  like*  some  of  you 
do,  and  I  have  had  to  go  up  into  the  canyon  to  haul  logs,  and  my 
feet  have  been  frozen.  When  I  first  came  to  the  camp,  all  the 
clothes  that  I  had,  consisted  of  a  coat  and  overshirt  and  a  pair  of 
cotton  pants,  and  a  pair  of  very  bad  shoes.  I  had  a  wife  and 
two  children ;  one  was  four  years  old,  and  the  other  was  two  years  . 
old.  My  wife  had  two  dresses.  One  of  the  children  had  two 
dresses,  and  the  other  only  had  one  dress.  I  had  to  lie  in  my 
wet  clothes  three  nights,  until  I  was  wet  all  over,  (so  terrible  was 
the  rain )  which  caused  me  to  suffer  much  more  than  many  of  you 
have  suffered,  and  I  was  not  the  only  sufferer,  for  my  children 
had  to  suffer  as  much  as  I  did,  being  without  shoes,  except  some 
that  was  not  fit  to  wear. 

3.  I  was  upon  the  earth  when  Adam   was  the  seventh   angel, 
and  I  preached  the  gospel  under  him.     I  was  'twenty-three  years 
old,  which  was  considered  a  man's   age,     I   was  the  fifth  person 
that  was  baptized  into  the  fulness  of  the  gospel,  and  I  was  then  an 
ignorant  creature,  and  many  believed  that   I  had  not  good  sense, 
and  it  was  even  thought  so  by   the   saints  in  the  camp,  until   the 
great  test  come  on.     I  was  looked  upon  as  a  short-sighted  person, 
and  I  was  very  much  despised ;    but  after  the  test  was  over,  I  was 
blessed  abundantly,  and  became  a  man  of  wisdom,  and  now  I  am 
the  Third  Captain  of  the  Lord's  host,  that  is  my  birthright. 

4.  Now,    although  you   are  weak    and    ignorant,    do    not  be 
downcast  because  you  do  not  know  much,  for  the  Lord  will  bless 
you,  and  strengthen  you,  after  you  have  gone  through  the  test,  so 
that  you  will  be  strong,  and  wise  also.     Some  of  you  wonder  why 
that  person  (the   Third   Captain)   is  not  upon  this   earth,  like  I 
have  been   upon   my  Father's  earth,   and  why  he  has  not  come 
forth   and  embraced  the  fulness  of  the  gospel,   as   I  have  done. 
You  do  not  know  whether  he  is   in  your  midst  or  not.     I   have 
only  to  say  that   he   is  on  this  earth ;  but  it   is  not  yet  revealed 


640  INTERPRETATION    OF    A    TONGUE.  ^ 

where  he  is.  You  also  wish  to  know  if  we,  when  we  expected  to 
be  delivered,  were  disappointed  like  you  have  been.  Yes ;  we 
expected  the  Lord,  day  by  day,  and  time  after  time ;  but  we  were 
disappointed,  like  you  have  been.  We  swore  the  oath,  like  you 
have  done ;  and  after  we  had  done  so,  we  believed  that  we  would 
see  the  deliverance  the  next  day  after,  but  we  were  disappointed ; 
but  when  ouf  deliverance  came,  we  had  eaten  up  the  test  bushel 
of  wheat,  and  killed  the  last  animal  we  had,  or  traded  it  off;  and 
at  that  time  we  were  surrounded  by  our  enemies  who  had  come 
up  to  take  our  lives,  and  all  hell  was  against  us.  But  as  soon  as 
the  test  was  over,  and  we  had  killed  the  hypocrites,  then  our 
enemies  became  more  enraged,  so  that  we  could  not  trade  with 
them  any  more. 

5.  You-  would  ask  me  how  many   we  had   in  our  camp,   and 
how  many  were  killed?     I  will  answer  you.     We  killed  thirty-five 
in  one  day,  even  on  the  day  of  the  test,  and  after  we  had  done  so, 
the  enemies  came  up  all  around   us  with  their   murderous   instru- 
ments, but  they  were  slain. 

6.  We  had  a  city,  and   was  going  to  it  like  you,  and  in  the 
same  order  that  you  wanted  to  go  to  Great  Salt   Lake  City.     Our 
enemies  disputed  'with   us  on  the  road;    but   when   the   prophet 
gave  his  command,  they  were  slain,  and  sent  from  number  two  to 
number  four  (see  diagram).     Your   circumstances   are  like   unto 
ours.     You  expect  a  deliverance  shortly.     Some  of  you  think  that 
you  will  not  be  driven  into   such  circumstances  as  we  were ;  but 
this  you  do  not  know.     You  are  in  the  hands  of  the  Lord  ;    and 
when  he  sees  that  it  is  necessary  that  you  should  pass  through  such 
scenes,  he  can  shut  down  the  gates  so  that  in  one  day  you  would 
be  in  just  such  circumstances  as  we   were   in,    that  is,  when   he 
wishes  to  do ;    but  when  it  is  possible  for  you  to  escape  such  cir- 
cumstances I  will  supplicate  the  Lord  for  you. 

7.  I  will  now  offer  up  a  short   prayer  in  your  midst,    for  we, 
the  angels  of  God,  do  pray  as   well   as   you :     O   my   Father  and 
God,  I  am  on  a  visit  to  this  Camp  to-day,  by  thy  permission,  and 
come  before  thee  now,  and  supplicate  thee  to  bless  these  thy  peo- 
ple who  are  assembled  this  day  to  worship  thee.      Let  them  feel 
the  influence  of  thy  holy  angels  who  are   to   comfort  and  to  bless 
them ;  and  I  pray  thee,  Father,  to  bless  the  faithful,  that  they  may 


TESTIMONY    OF    THE    THIRD    CAPTAIN.  641 

become  strong,  and  that  they  may  be  able  to  stand  the  test  that  is 
before  them,  and  give,  dear  Father,  when  it  is  right  in  thy  sight, 
what  they  need,  that  they  not  be  in  such  trying  circumstances  as 
we  were  in  before  our  brother  came  to  deliver  us.  We  know  not 
the  day  nor  the  hour  when  thou  wilt  deliver  them  from  this  place ;~ 
only  thou  alone  knowest  this,  dear  Father;  but  we  know  that  the 
day  draws  nearer,  and  for  that  I  pray  thee  to  strengthen  the  faith- 
ful that  they  may  continue  to  be  faithful,  and  that  they  may  stand 
and  become  stronger  from  day  to  day.  And  I  pray  thee,  Father, 
to  bless  the  prophet  and  his  counselors,  and  all  thy  faithful  people 
here.  I  ask  these  blessings  for  them,  and  leave  my  blessing  upon 
them.  Even  so.  Amen  and  Amen. 

8.  And  now,,  after  I  have  prayed  for  you  to   my  Father,  I  will 
relate  unto   you   a  little  more  of  my  experience.     Some  oT  you 
wonder  if  we,  in  our  experiences  of  the   Lord's   coming,  have  not 
set   stakes.      O   how  many  have    been    disappointed    by    setting 
stakes,   and   have  apostatized,   and    have    been   destroyed.      But 
the  setting  of  stakes    is   not  the  greatest  evil;    but   being  disap- 
pointed because  the  Lord  does  not  come  at  the  time  appointed, 
they  lose  confidence  in  God  and   in  his  word.     We  believe  that 
the  great  test  will  come  before  he  comes ;    but  when  he  comes  he 
will  try  every  man  and  every  woman.     But  oh  !   you  cannot  com- 
prehend the  happiness,  and  the  joy,  and  the   thanksgiving,    which 
was  in  the  fort  the  day  after  the  test;    and  you  cannot   compre- 
hend now  how  busily  we  were  engaged  to  make  ourselves  ready  to 
go  to  the  city.     You  may  ask,   "How  could  you  go?  for  you  had 
not  one  animal  left.     How  could  you  get  teams?"     I  answer:    It 
was  no  trouble  for  us  to  obtain  teams,  because  there  were  plenty  of 
horses  and  oxen  left  for  us  to  move.     We  had  every  earthly  bless- 
ing in  our  hands.     You  wish   to  know  whether,  or  not,   we  had 
tea,  coffee,  beer,  liquor,  and  all  such  things.     I  answer,  yes.     You 
wish  to  know   what  we  did   with  those  things.     We   used  them 
when  it  was  necessary.     We  were  like  you ;  we  were  a  long  time 
without  them. 

9.  After  the  test,  the  prophet  soon  had  the  power  of  the  gov- 
ernor in  his  own  hands,  and  all  who  would  not  obey  the  law  were 
slain,  for  he  had  that  power.     I  lived  ninety  years.     Some  of  you 
wonder  if  there  was  such  a  man  as  Brigham  in  that  time.      I  an- 


642  TESTIMONY    OF    THE    THIRD    CAPTAIN. 

swer,  yes ;  we  had  precisely  such  a  man.  He  would  cheat,  mis- 
lead and  beguile  our  daughters  and  wives.  You  ask,  "Had  you 
in  your  time  any  prisoners  at  you  place?''  Yes;  we  had  three  like 
you,  and  one  escaped  in  the  same  manner  as  yours  did,  and  I  was 
so  mad  the  next  morning  that  I  could  have  slain  the  guard ;  but 
all  things  worked  for  our  good,  and  so  it  will  be  with  you.  Con- 
cerning the  one  who  escaped  out  of  prison:  he  is  in  our  hands, 
and  we  will  have  our  eyes  upon  him. 

10.  You  wish  to  know  whether  or  not  polygamy  is  a  true  prin- 
ciple.     I  answer,  yes,  in  the  right  time  and  in  the  right  place ;.  but 
I  thank  God  that  I  did  escape  it  until  I  had  preached  the  fulness 
of  the  gospel.    You  ask  me,  "Will  polygamy  be  practiced?"    I  an- 
swer, yes,  in  the  Lord's  own  time,  then   it  will  be  necessary.     Be 
satisfied  with  what  I  have  told  you,  and  I  witness  and  testify  that 
it  is  true.     I  am  the  Third  Captain  of  the  Lord's   host  who  has 
spoken  in  your  midst. 

11.  We,  the  holy  angels,  are  satisfied  with  many  of  you,  even 
with  the  faithful  among  you,  and  I  pray  that  they  may  be  stronger, 
(and  they  will  be);   but  from  this  time  the  hypocrites  shall  go 
down.     Even  so.     Amen  and  Amen. 


AN     ARTICLE     ON     COUNSELORSHIP. 


BY    THE    PROPHET,    JOSEPH    MORRIS. 


WEBER,  UTAH,  March  i5th,  1861. 

i.  IT  is  written  in  the  book  of  Doctrine  and  Covenants,  that 
a  president  of  the  high  priesthood  should  have  two  counselors. 
Why  was  this  order  introduced  upon  this  earth?  Because  it  is  ac- 
cording to  the  eternal  order  of  the  Gods  that  earthly  things  must 
pattern  after  heavenly  things.  Where  did  this  order  originate? 
With  the  first  God  of  all.  He  took  unto  him  two  counselors, 
who  were  the  next  Gods  below  him  in  authority,  and  from  those 
three  who  form  the  First  Presiding  Quorum,  all  laws  originated, 
and  have  been  transmitted  from  one  God  to  another. 


COUNSELORSHIP.  643 

2.  According  to  the  eternal  order  of  the  Gods,   it  takes  one 
hundred  and  forty  and  four  thousand  Gods  to  form  a  quorum,  and 
the  first  God  of  a  quorum  presides  over  all  the  rest  of  his  quorum, 
and  the  two  Gods  who  are  the  next  below  him  in  authority  are  his 
counselors. 

3.  The  Eternal  Father,  whom   we  worship,    is   the   last   God 
glorified;    and  his  sons  and  daughters   who  have  received  their 
resurrection,  constitute  his  power.     They  go  at  his  bidding  and 
come  at  his  call.     And  his  sons  are  ministering  angels^  appointed 
to  minister  to  the  inhabitants  of  this  earth    who  are  heirs   of  salva- 
tion.    It  is   their  chief  duty  to  minister  to  this  world  of  ours,  and 
rule  it. 

4.  Has  the  Eternal  Father  counselors?.     Yes,  but  not  as  other 
Gods  have.     His  firstborn  son,  Jesus  Christ,  is  his  first  counselor, 
and  the  holy  ghosts,  who  number  millions,  fill  the  place  of  second 
counselor;  but  other  presiding  Gods   each   have   counselors,  who 
are  two   persons  that   can  be  present    with   him.      The   case  of 
the  Eternal  Father  whom  we  worship,   differs  from   that  of  other 
Gods.     He  dwells  in  heaven,   and   rules  upon  this   earth  by  his 
agents;  whereas,  other  Gods  are  not  under  the  same  obligations 
to  this  earth  that  he  is,  and  therefore   do   not  need  to  have  their 
agents  here. 

5.  It  is  also  written  in  the  book  of  Doctrine  and  Covenants, 
that  a  literal  descendant  of  Aaron  can  act  in  the  office  of  bishop 
without  counselors.      Thus  high  priests  after  the  order  of  Mel- 
chisedec   must  have  two   counselors;   but  a  priest   of  Aaron   can 
act  without  them.     What  is  the  reason  of  this?      The   priests  of 
Aaron  have  not  yet  received  their  resurrection ;  therefore  they  act 
under  a  lower  order  of  things,  and  are  not  subject  to  a  celestial 
law,  as  high  priests  are.     But  when  the  priests  of  Aaron  shall  have 
received,  their  resurrection,  they  will  have  to  keep  a  celestial  law 
as  high   priests   do;  but   their   duty  now  is  to  minister  in  tem- 
poral things,   and   consequently  they  have   an  order  adapted  to 
their  case. 

6.  All  worlds,  when  they  enter  into  their  second  estate,    will 
abide  the  same  law  as  this  does  now ;  consequently,  when  Adam's 
sons  leave  the  lesser  priesthood,  and  become  celestial  messengers, 
holding  the  orifice  of  the  high  priesthood,  other  Aaronic  priests  will 


644  THE    ORDER    OF    SEVENS. 

come  forth  upon  other  earths  that  will  succeed  this  in  a  state 
of  mortality.  Therefore,  the  Aaronic  priesthood  is  as  eternal 
as  the  Melchisedec  priesthood,  and  both  are  as  eternal  as  the 
Gods  are. 


AN    ARTICLE    ON    THE    ORDER    OF    SEVENS. 


BY    THE    PROPHET,  JOSEPH     MORRIS. 


1.  THE   EARTH    continues    in   mortality   during  a    period    of 
seven  thousand  years,   which   period  is  divided  into  seven  equal 
parts,  called  dispensations.     There  are  also  seven  high  priests  who 
are  appointed  to  preside  over  the  several   dispensations.      These 
high  priests  are  called  in  the  Scriptures  the  seven  angels  of  the 
seven   churches.     Their  names  were  Seth,  Enos,  Cainan,  Mahala- 
leel,  Jared,  Enoch  and  Methuselah.      They   were   born   into  the 
world  in  the  following  order :     Seth  first,   Enos  second,   Cainan 
third,  Mahalaleel  fourth,  Jared  fifth,  Enpch  sixth,  and  Methuselah 
seventh.     They  were  ordained  by  Adam  in  the  Garden  of  Adam- 
on-di-Ahman.     The  holy  priesthood  takes  root  upwards  and  runs 
downwards,  or  in  other  words,   the  holy  priesthood  originates  in 
heaven,  and  comes  thence  to  the  earth.     But  there  is  a  principle 
which  regulates  many  of  the   works   of  the  Lord,   and   which   in 
many  instances  causes  the  first  to  be  last,  and  the  last  to  be  first. 
Therefore,  the  order  in  which  these  high  priests   preside,    is   the 
reverse  of  that  in  which  they  were  born.     Methuselah,  though  the 
last  one  born,  is  the  first  angel,  and  presides  over  the   first  thous- 
and years.     Enoch,  the  second;  Jared,  the  third;  Mahalaleel,  the 
fourth ;  Cainan,  the  fifth ;  Enos,  the  sixth ;  and  Seth,  the   seventh. 
The    seventh    is    the    senior    and    presides    over    the    other    six. 
The  seven  angels  in  connection  with  Jesus  Christ,  open  the  seven 
seals  when  they  go  forth  to  fill  their  respective  missions. 

2.  The  seven  angels  are  subject  to  each  other,   and  succeed 
each  other  in  presiding.     Two  of  them,  Enos  and  Seth,  the  sixth 
and  the  seventh  angels,  are  obligated  by  law  to  fill  three  missions 


THE    ORDER    OF    SEVENS.  645 

on  the  earth.  Enos  filled  his  second  mission  to  this  earth  in  the 
person  of  Elijah,  and  his  third  in  the  person  of  Joseph  Smith. 
Seth  filled  his  second  mission  in  the  person  of  Moses,  and  is  filling 
his  third  in  the  person  of  Joseph  Morris.  He  is  the  president  of 
the  high  prieshood,  and,  as  such,  will  continue  to  preside  over  the— 
church  and  kingdom  of  God  till  the  close  of  the  seventh  thousand 
years.  He  will  then  resign  the  presidency  of  the  work  to  Adam, 
who  will  assemble  his  forces,  and  lead  them  against  those  fallen 
spirits  that  will  then  be  upon  the  earth,  and  who  have  been  spoken 
of  as  the  great  army  of  "Gog  and  Magog."  Adam  will,  in  turn, 
be  succeeded  by  Jesus  Christ,  who  will  finish  the  work ;  and,  after 
the  earth  has  been  celestialized,  deliver  it  up  to  his  Father.  The 
Father  will  then  deliver  it  to  Adam,  for'whom  it  was  made ;  and 
and  he  will  reign  over  it  "as  an  Eternal  God  forever.  These  prin- 
ciples are  often  foreshadowed  in  the  old  Scriptures,  as  will  be  seen 
by  reference  to  the  following  quotations  :  Rev.  i:  20,  reads  as 
follows:  "The  mystery  of'the  seven  stars  which  thou  sawest  in 
my  right  hand,  and  the  seven  golden  candlesticks.  The  seven 
stars  are  the  angels  of  the  seven  churches :  and  the  seven  candle- 
sticks which  thou  sawest  are  the  seven  churches."  Rev.  1:4: 
"Grace  be  unto  you,  and  peace,  from  him  which  is,  and  which  was, 
and  which  is  to  come ;  and  from  the  seven  spirits  which  are  before 
his  throne."  Rev.  3:  i:  "And  unto  the  angel  of  the  church  in 
Sardis  write  :  These  things  saith  he  that  hath  the  seven  spirits  of 
God,  and  the  seven  stars ;  I  know  thy  works,  that  thou  hast  a 
name  that  thou  livest,  and  art  dead."  Rev.  4:5:  "And  out  of 
the  throne  proceeded  lightnings  and  thunderings  and  voices :  and 
there  were  seven  lamps  of  fire  burning  before  the  throne,  which 
are  the  seven  spirits  of  God."  Rev.  5:6:  "And  I  beheld,  and, 
lo,  in  the  midst  of  the  throne  and  of  the  four  beasts,  and  in  the 
midst  of  the  elders,  stood  a  lamb  as  it  had  been  slain,  having  seven 
horns  and  seven  eyes,  which  are  the  seven  spirits  of  God  sent 
forth  into  all  the  earth."  Rev.  8:2:  "And  I  saw  the  seven 
angels  which  stood  before  God  ;  and  to  them  wrere  given  seven 
trumpets."  Zechariah  3:9:  "For  behold  the  stone  that  I  have 
laid  before  Joshua ;  upon  one  stone  shall  be  seven  eyes :  behold, 
I  will  engrave  the  graving  thereof,  saith  the  Lord  of  Hosts,  and  I 
will  remove  the  iniquity  of  that  land  in  one  day."  Zech.  4 :  10: 


646  THE    ORDER    OF    SEVENS. 

"For  who  hath  despised  the  day  of  small  things?  for  they  shall  re- 
joice, and  see  the  plummet  in  the  hand  of  Zerubbabel  with  those 
seven ;  they  are  the  eyes  of  the  Lord,  which  run  to  and  fro 
through  the  whole  earth."  Zech.  4:  2:  "I  have  looked,  and 
behold  a  candlestick  all  of  gold,  with  a  bowl  upon  the  top  of  it, 
and  his  seven  lamps  thereon,  and  seven  pipes  to  the  seven  lamps 
which  are  upon  the  top  thereof. 

3.  Who  are  these  seven  spirits  refeired  to  in  these  quotations? 
They  are  the  seven  angels.  What  should  be  understood  by  the 
stone  which  was  laid  before  Joshua?  The  stone  represents  the 
seventh  angel.  The  eye  represents  light.  There  being  seven 
eyes  engraven  upon  the  stone,  represents  the  light  of  the  seven 
dispensations  which  will  be  possessed  by  the  seventh  angel.  The 
stone  being  laid  before  Joshua,  represents  that  at  the  time  when 
the  seventh  angel  should  commence  his  mission,  Joshua  should 
be  upon  the  earth,  and  that  they  would  come  in  collision,  the  one 
with  the  other.  Joshua  6:4:  "And  seven  priests  shall  bear 
before  the  ark  seven  trumpets  of  ram's  horns:  and  the  seventh  day 
ye  shall  compass  the  city  seven  times,  and  the  priests  shall  blow 
with  the  trumpets."  And,  again,  Elisha  told  the  Assyrian  leper  to 
go  and  wash  in  Jordan  seven  times.  Num.  23 :  1-29  :  Balaam,  the 
prophet,  commands  Balak,  the  king,  "Build  me  seven  altars,  and 
prepare  me  here  seven  oxen  and  seven  rams."  Leviticus  8:  u: 
"And  he  sprinkled  thereof  upon  the  altar  seven  times."  Exodus 
12  :  15  :  *"  Seven  days  shall  ye  eat  unleavened  bread."  Exodus 
13:6:  "And  in  the  seventh  day  shall  be  a  feast  unto  the  Lord." 
Gen.  7:2:  "Of  every  clean  beast  thou  shalt  take  to  thee  by 
sevens,  the  male  and  his  female."  Deut.  16:  15:  "Seven  days 
shalt  thou  keep  a  solemn  feast  unto  the  Lord  thy  God."  Deut. 
16:  9  :  "Seven  weeks  shalt  thou  number  unto  thee."  Tenth 
verse:  "And  thou  shalt  keep  the  feast  of  weeks  unto  the  Lord 
thy  God  with  a  tribute  of  free  will  offering  of  thine  hand." 
Exodus  29  :  37  :  "Seven  days  shalt  thou  make  an  atonement  for 
the  altar  and  sanctify  it."  Leviticus  4:  17:  "And  the  priest 
shall  dip  his  finger  in  some  of  the  blood,  and  sprinkle  it  seven 
times  before  the  Lord,  even  before  the  vail."  The  i3th  chap., 
54th  verse,  in  speaking  of  the  leprosy,  says:  "Then  shall  the 
priest  command  that  they  wrash  the  thing  wherein  the  plague  is, 


THE    ORDER    OF    SEVENS.  647 

and  he  shall  shut  it  up  seven  days  more."  The  i4th  chap.,  i6th 
verse:  "And  the  priest  shall  dip  his  right  finger  in  the  oil  that  is 
in  his  left  hand,  and  shall  sprinkle  of  the  oil  with  his  finger  seven 
times  before  the  Lord."  The  38th  verse,  speaking  of  the  plague, 
says:  "Then  the  priest  shall  go  out  of  the  house  to  the  door  of™ 
house,  and  shall  shut  up  the  house  seven  days."  The  i6th  chap., 
1 9th  verse  says :  "And  he  shall  sprinkle  of  the  blood  upon  it 
with  his  finger  seven  times,  and  cleanse  it."  The  i4th  verse: 
"And  before  the  mercy  seat  shall  he  sprinkle  of  the  blood  with 
his  finger  seven  times." 

4.  What  should  we  understand  by  these  ceremonies  being 
repeated  seven  times?  It  was  done  to  acknowledge  the  seven 
presidents  of  the  earth,  whose  authority  must  be  acknowledged ; 
and  when  that  is  done,  the  Lord  ratifies  the  administration  of  men 
who  are  called  to  officiate  in,  the  holy  priesthood.  Hence,  while 
Samson  wore  his  seven  locks,  he  had  the  sanction  of  the  seven 
presidents  oi  the  earth,  and  retained  his  strength ;  but  when  he 
suffered  them  to  be  cut  off,  he  lost  the  sanction  of  the  seven  presi- 
dents, and  consequently  lost  his  power. 


AN    ARTICLE    ON    ORDINATION. 


BY  THE  PROPHET,  JOSEPH  MORRIS. 


WEP.ER,  UTAH,  May  gth,  1861. 

i.  THE  subject  of  ordination  is  a  subject  that  has  occupied  the 
attention  of  thousands,  many  of  whom  have  been  lost  in  confusion 
while  contemplating  it,  because  they  have  not  understood  its  true 
order.  They  have  regarded  the  ordination  which  a  high  priest  re- 
ceives upon  the  earth  as  though  it  conferred  office  upon  him  finally 
and  independently  of  any  prior  or  subsequent  ordination,  whereas, 
a  high  priest  must  receive  his  ordination  to  that  office  in  heaven 
before  he  can  receive  it  upon  the  earth.  If  this  were  not  the  case, 
earthly  things  would  not  pattern  after  heavenly  things,  but  heavenly 
things  would  pattern  after  earthly  things,  and  thus  the  greater 


648  ORDINATION. 

would  pattern  after  the  lesser,  and  this  could  not  be,  for  earthly 
things  must  pattern  after  heavenly  things.  There  are  many  who 
boast  of  the  ordination  which  they  receive  under  the  hands  of 
some  man  upon  the  earth,  and  take  it  for  granted  that  such  earthly 
ordination  is  sufficient.  Suppose,  for  instance,  that  a  prophet  of 
the  Lord  should  place  his  hands  upon  the  head  of  a  man  who  was 
only  an  heir  to  the  priesthood  of  Aaron,  and  ordain  him  to  the 
office  of  a  high  priest,  would  he  be  a  high  priest  in  consequence 
of  such  ordination?  No;  he  would  be  a  priest  of  Aaron,  only; 
and  if  he  officiated  in  the  office  of  a  high  priest  he  would  deceive, 
•for  the  Holy  Ghost  would  not  be  subject  to  him.  He  would  be 
an  imposter,  for  while  he  made  pretentions  to  be  that  which  he 
was  not,  he  would  deceive  every  person  to  whom  he  administered. 

2.  Holy  Ghosts  are  resurrected  persons,  and  are  all  beyond  the 
power  of  death.      They  are  ministering  angels,  appointed  to  direct 
the  footsteps  of  mortals  upon  this  earth.     How,  therefore,  can  they 
become   subject  to  the  sons  of  Aaron   who  are  in  their  second 
estate  only,  and  are  all  subject  to  the  power  of  death  ? 

3.  With  respect  to  the  mission  of  Joseph  Smith  to  this  earth  : 
we  are  informed  that  he  received  his  ordinations,  pertaining  to  the 
flesh,  under  the  hands  of  Peter,  James,  and  John.      Was  that  the 
first  ordination  he  received  to  become  a  Prophet?     No.     He  re- 
ceived his  first  ordination  under  the  hands  of  his  own  Father  upon 
a  celestial  earth,  which  ordination   was  understood,  acknowledged, 
and  again  sealed  upon  him  by  Adam  in  the  Garden  of  Adam-on- 
di-Ahman ;  his  name  was  then  called  Enos.     By  this  we  perceive 
that  Joseph  Smith   was  a  prophet  before  Peter,  James  and  John 
appeared  to  him.    Then  what  authority  did  they  confer  upon  him? 
None.     They  simply  ordained  him  to  the  office  of  a  high  priest,  in 
order  that  the  previous  ordinations  which  he  had   received  might 
be  acknowledged  upon  the  earth  by  the  people  to  whom    he  had 
to  minister ;  otherwise,  they,  being  ignorant  of  his  authority,  would 
not  have  acknowledged  him  as  a  prophet. 

4.  The  Lord  said  unto  Jeremiah  :     "  Before  I  formed  thee  in 
the  belly,  I  knew  thee ;  and  before  thou  earnest  forth  out  of  the 
womb,  I  sanctified  thee,   and  I  ordained  thee  a   prophet  to  the 
nations."     Peter,  also,  in  his  first  epistle,   first  chapter,  twentieth 
verse,    when   speaking   of  Jesus,   says:      "Who  verily  was   fore- 


ORDINATION.  649 

ordained,  before  the  foundation  of  the  world."  In  tire  Old  and 
New  Testament  we  find  the  principle  of  fore-ordination  often 
mentioned.  In  the  account  of  the  mission  of  Jesus  Christ,  we 
read  that  he  chose  twelve  apostles,  and  ordained  them  to  the 
apostleship  before  he  had  received  an  ordination  in  the  flesh. 
For  after  he  had  called  and  ordained  the  apostles,  he  took  Peter, 
James  and  John  with  him,  and  went  upon  the  mount,  and  was 
transfigured  before  them.  And  while  there,  Moses  and  Elias  ap- 
peared, and  ordained  him  to  the  high  priesthood.  If  Jesus  had 
the  power  to  officiate  in  the  holy  priesthood  before  he  was  ordained 
in  the  flesh,  of  what  benefit  was  it  to  him  to  receive  an  ordination 
from  Moses?  None  at  all,  so  far  as  power  is  concerned.  Jesus 
had,  before  that  time,  been  ordained  to  the  office  of  a  high  priest 
in  heaven ;  but  it  was  necessary  for  him  to  receive  an  ordination 
upon  the  earth  to  the  same  authority,  in  order  that  that  which  had*" 
been  done  in  heaven  might  be  acknowledged  upon  the  earth,  for 
earthly  things  must  pattern  after  heavenly  things. 

5.  The  Eternal  Father  rules  in  heaven,  and  Moses  rules  upon 
the  earth ;  therefore,  Jesus  being  an  heir  to  the  fulness  of  the-  holy 
priesthood,  had  to  receive  an  ordination  from  them  both,  in  order 
to  fulfil  the  law,  and  acknowledge  their  authority. 

6.  Where,  and  by  whom,  did  Moses  receive  his   first  ordina- 
tion to  hold  the  presidency  of  this  earth?      In  -a   council   of  the 
Gods.     His  own  Father,  assisted  by  the   two   Gods   who   are  his 
counselors,  and  who,  with  him,  form  the  Presidency  of  a  Quorum 
of  Gods,  ordained  him. 

7.  Where,  and  by  whom,  did  he  receive  his  second  ordination 
to  the  same  authority?  In  the  Valley  of  Adam-on-di-Ahman,  under 
the  hands  of  Adam.     His  name  was  then  called  Seth.     And  when 
he  came  to  deliver  the   Children   of   Israel   out   of  the   hands   of 
Pharaoh,  he  received  an  ordination  to  the  office  of  a  high   priest, 
under  the  hands  of  Jethro.      Did  that  ordination  give  him  power 
to  deliver  the  Children  of  Israel?     No,  it  did  not.       It  was  only 
acknowledging  on  the  earth  that  which  the  Gods  had   before  done 
in  heaven.      It  did  not  give  him  any  power.       If   Jethro   could 
have  conferred  the  power  upon  Moses  to  deliver  the  Children   of 
Israel,  he  surely  could  have  delivered  them  himself;  but  if  he  did 
not  possess  the  power  to  deliver  them  himself,  he  could  not  confer 


650  ORDINATION. 

it  upon  another.  Where  did  that  power  come  from?  It  come 
from  heaven.  Those  Gods  who  first  ordained  him,  sustained  him 
by  sending  to  him  the  power  to  deliver  Israel.  No  person  can  give 
that  to  another  which  he  himself  does  not  possess.  No  man  on 
earth  can  confer  power  upon  high  priests ;  their  power  must  come 
from  above.  There  were  many  high  priests  among  the  Children 
of  Israel  in  the  days  of  Moses ;  but  they  could  neither  deliver  their 
brethren  nor  themselves.  They  held  the  office  of  high  priests  as 
well  as  Moses,  but  they  did  not  hold  as  much  power  as  he  did. 

8.  From  this  we  learn  that  all  high   priests   do   not   hold  the 
same  degree  of  power.     There  must  be  a  cause  for  this.     The  or- 
dinations which  they  receive  in  the  flesh  are  of  but  little  avail ;  the 
power  must  come  from  above,  and  there  is  but  one  man  through 
whom  that  power — which  is  the  ruling  power — can  come.     Moses 

Jbs  that  man ;  he  holds  the  full  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood. 

9.  Where  did  I,  who  now  hold  the  full  keys  of  the  holy  priest- 
hood, receive  my  ordination  to  that  authority?     In  heaven.     Have 
I  received  an  ordination  upon  the  earth  in  this  dispensation  to  the 
office^  of  a  high  priest?     Yes;  in  the  High  Priests'  Quorum,  Great 
Salt  Lake  City.     Did  that  ordination  confer  any  power  upon  me, 
more  than  a  similar  ordination  has   upon  other  members  of   that 
quorum?     No;  it  was  only  acknowledging  that  ordination  upon 
the  earth  which  I  first  received  in  heaven.       It   was  there  that  I 
received  the  office  of  president  of  the  high  priesthood  pertaining  to 
this  earth,  and  thence  I  shall  receive  the  power.      I  hold  my  au- 
thority as  independently  as  the  Gods  of  eternity  hold  theirs,  hav- 
ing gained  it  by  the  law  of  eternal  progression. 


CELESTIAL    MARRIAGE.  651 

AN    ARTICLE    ON    CELESTIAL    MARRIAGE. 


BY  THE  PROPHET,  JOSEPH  MORRIS. 


AN     EXPLANATION     TO     THE     REVELATION     WHICH     WAS    GIVEN    TO 
JOSEPH    SMITH    UPON    CELESTIAL    MARRIAGE. 


WEBER,  UTAH,  June  4th,  1861. 

1.  HE  INQUIRED   of  the  Lord,  to  know  wherein  he  justified 
Abraham,  Isaac  and  Jacob,  as  also  Moses,   David  and  Solomon, 
as  touching  the  doctrine  of  them  having  many  wives  and  concu- 
bines.    It  should  be  understood  that  Moses  wrote  this  law,   and 
that  it  was  observed  by  the  children  of  Israel.      They  had  both 
wives  and  concubines.     If  they  had  not  yielded  obedience  to  that 
law,  they  would  have  beerfunder  condemnation ;  but  this  law  was 
given  to  be  kept  by  the  children  of  men,  to  regulate  them  in  mor- 
tality.    It  has  nothing  to  do  with  eternity.     Not  being  a  celestial 
law,  it  was  given  to  raise  up  a  rightous  seed ;  and  when  men  were 
found  in  transgression,  those  wives  were  taken   from  them   and 
given  to  others,  as  in  the  case  of  Saul.     When  he  transgressed  the 
commandment  of  the  Lord,  his  wives  were  taken  from  him  and 
were  given  to  David ;  after  which  he  transgressed  and  lost  them 
also ;  thus  we  see  that  when  men  rebelled  against  the  Lord,   and 
broke  his  commandments,  they  could   not  keep  their  women ;  but 
they  were  taken  away  from  them,   and  given  to  those  who   were 
more  worthy.     It  is  not  lawful  for  a  wicked  man  to  have   a  plur- 
ality of  wives. 

2.  We  read  of  the  children  of  Israel  having  concubines;  what 
are  they?     What  is  the  difference  between  a  wife  and  a   concu- 
bine?    A  wife  is  a  woman  who  kept  her  first  estate;    whose  name 
is  recorded  in  the  Lamb's  Book  of  Life,  and  an  heir  to  the  resur- 
rection ;  of  the  seed  of  Abraham,  and  consequently  an  heir  to  the 
promises  made  to  him.     What  is  a  concubine?     A  woman  who  is 
a  fallen  spirit ;  who  kept  not  her  first  estate ;    whose  name  is  not 
recorded  in  the  Lamb's  Book  of  Life ;  not  an  heir  of  salvation ;  of 
the  seed  of  Cain;  of  Gentile  blood;  doomed  to  suffer  both  the 
first  and  second  death.     She  is  given  to  one  of  the  sons  of  Israel, 


652  CONCERNING    CELESTIAL    MARRIAGE. 

according  to  law,  to  raise  up  seed ;  and  through  her  husband  her 
seed  becomes  sanctified.  Angels  which  are  heirs  of  salvation 
come  forth  through  her ;  in  this  case,  the  unbelieving  wife's  seed 
is  sanctified  by  her  husband's ;  and  when  she  has  filled  her  appoint- 
ment with  him  according  to  law,  she  leaves  him,  and  goes  to  her 
own  place. 

3.  We  read  that  the  kings  and  prophets  of  old  had  both  wives 
and  concubines,  and  they  were  taken  from  one   and  given  to  an- 
other;  they  could  not   hold   them   in   wickedness.     But  if  those 
women  had  been  sealed  to  those  men  for  eternity  by  the  celestial 
law,  there  is  no  power  in  heaven  nor  on  the  earth  that  could  sepa- 
rate them  again,  for  the   celestial   law  is  as  unchangeable   as  the 
Gods  are ;  that  law  cannot  be  changed. 

4.  Although  the  kings  and  prophets  had  so  many  wives   for 
time,  y^et  they  can  have  but  one  sealed  to  them  each  for  eternity. 
The  prophets  of  Israel  called  it  Sealing  in  their  day,  but  it  was  not 
sealing  for  eternity ;  it  was  marrying  for  time  according  to  the  law 
of  Moses.     They  did  not  understand  the  sealing  power  for  time 
and  all  eternity.     They   only    held  the  priesthood  in  part ;   they 
did  not  hold  the  keys   of  a   dispensation.      They  were   sent   to 
be  prophets  to  the  kings,  holding  no  sealing  power  for  eternity. 
Their  missions  were  to  administer  the  law  of  Moses   for  time. 
They  had  nothing  to  do  with  sealing   for  eternity.      That  law  was 
not    revealed  unto  them;   and  it   will  not  be   revealed  until  the 
dispensation  of  the  fulness  of  times  is  ushered  in. 

5.  When  the  prophet,    Joseph   Smith,  united  more  than  one 
woman  to  one  man,  he,  like  the  ancient   prophets,  called   it  seal- 
ing, when,  in  fact,  the   celestial  law  had  never  been  revealed  to 
him ;   but  he  knew  no  better  than   to  call  it   sealing    for  eternity. 
He  did  nothing  but  marry  for  time,  like  the  ancient  prophets  did. 
The  foregoing  shows  that  Moses  wrote  that  law   in  order  to  regu- 
late marriages  among  the  children   of  men  for  time,  and  not  for 
eternity. 

6.  The  prophet,  Joseph  Smith,  speaks   of  certain  angels  who 
cannot  enlarge,    but   must   remain   single,   without  exaltation,    in 
their   saved  condition,  to  all   eternity,   not   having  the  power  to 
become  Gods.     Whom  are  they  who  will  be  deprived  of  the  bless- 
ing of  exaltation  ?     Those  who  are  overtaken  by  the  second  fall, 


CONCERNING    THE    REBELLION.  653 

which  is  a  fall  from  exaltation ;  having  broken  the  law  of  the 
Lord,  they  have  thereby  rendered  themselves  unworthy  of  a  part- 
ner for  eternity. 

7.  In  due  time  a  law  will  be  written  in  Zion  which  will  regu- 
late all  families ;    and  those  who  cannot  abide  that  law  must  suffer 
the  consequences  ;  if,  after  once  receiving  a  wife  by  the   celestial 
law  she  is  taken  away  from  them,  they  will  remain  single  to  all 
eternity,  and  henceforth   will  never  become   Gods,   but  angels  of 
God  to  all  eternity.     That  which  is  sealed  on   the  earth,  will  be 
sealed  in  heaven,  and  cannot  be  changed  to  all  eternity. 

8.  Where  do  angels  fall  from  salvation?     In  their  first  estate. 
What  is  the   cause  of  their   first   fall?      Rebellion  against  God. 
They  resisted  the  Holy  Ghost,  which  is  the  power  of  God,   and 
consented  to  the  shedding  of  innocent  blood.      There  is  no  fallen 

•spirit  that  has  not  denied  the  Holy  Ghost,  and  consented  to  the 
shedding  of  innocent  blood.  They  are  continually  thirsting  after 
blood,  if  they  are  crossed  in  their  pathway.  They  set  themselves 
against  the  Lord,  to  pull  down  every  principle  of  truth  and  virtue. 

9.  Where  does  the  second  fall  take  place?      In  the  second 
estate,  in  mortality.     By  what  means  is  this  fall  brought  about? 
By  transgressing  a  celestial  law. 

10.  When  male  and  female  are  sealed  together  by  the  celestial 
law,  and  cannot  conduct  themselves  according  to  it,   but  are  sep- 
erated  according  to   the  law   of  the   holy   priesthood,    they    will 
remain  single  to  all  eternity,  having  once  had  an   opportunity  of 
becoming  great,   but  have  forfeited  that   blessing  through  trans- 
gression ;  therefore,  they  have  to  be  content  without  an  exaltation 
to  all  eternity ;  but  all  others  will  become  Gods  in  due  time. 


654  THE    RESURRECTION. 

AN    ARTICLE    ON    THE    RESURRECTION. 


BY  THE  PROPHET,  JOSEPH  MORRIS. 


CONCERNING  the  resurrection  of  Jesus  Christ.  Showing  that  he 
received  a  resurrection  contrary  to  the  natural  process,  in 
order  that  he  might  convince  the  whole  House  of  Israel  that 
he  was  the  true  Messiah,  and  that  he  held  the  keys  of  the  res- 
urrection, and  also  showing  the  reason  why  he  was  called  the 
"Only  begotten  Son  of  the  Father." — The  order  of  the  first 
resurrection,  and  also  of  the  whole  House  of  Israel. — The 
resurrection  of  Lazarus. — The  nature  of  transfiguration.— The 
preservation  of  the  three  Hebrews  from  the  flames — of  Daniel 
while  in  the  lion's  den,  and  the  power  possessed  by  holy  angels 
over  fire  and  other  elements. 

1.  THE  RESURRECTION  of  the  dead  is  a  birth — a  spiritual  or 
celestial   birth,    wherein    children   are   born   of  immortal   parents 
in  a   similar  manner  as,   in  their  second   estate,   they   are   born 
of  mortal  ones. 

2.  It  may  be  asked,  if  the  resurrection  of  the  dead  is  brought 
about  by  a  natural  process,  why  did  Jesus  rise  from  the  dead  on 
the  third  day  with  the  same  body  that  had  been  crucified?      The 
peculiar  circumstances  attending  the  mission  of  Jesrs  Christ,  and 
the  duties  required  of  him,  were  entirely  unlike  those  required  of, 
or  attending  any  of  the  sons  of  Adam.     He  had  previously  passed 
through  a  mortal  estate,  and  had  been  resurrected  in  connection 
with  his  own  Father's  family ;  but  none  of  the  sons  of  Adam  have 
even  yet  been  resurrected.     Neither  his  birth,   his   death,   nor  his 
resurrection  were  of  the  general  order.      He  left  his   resurrected 
body    with    his   Father,   and   took   another  body    on   this    earth, 
adapted  to  the  mission  which  he  had  to  fill.     This  body  was  not 
entirely  mortal — it  was  half  immortal,   being   begotten  by  an   im- 
mortal Father  and  born  of  a  mortal  mother.     It  was  begotten  by 
the  first  captain  of  the  Lord's  host,  whose  duty  it  was  to  do   that 
for  him  (Jesus)  which  he  could  not  do  for  himself,  and  to  provide 
such  a  body  for  him  as  his  mission  required. 

3.  As  the  Eternal  Father  begat  his  firstborn  son,  Jesus  Christ, 
both  in  the  first  and  second   estates,  so  also  he  begat  him,   and 


THE    RESURRECTION.  655 

of  his  sons,  him  only,  in  the  third  estate.  Hence,  as  he  did  not 
beget  any  other  except  him  in  the  third  estate,  it  is  truly  said  of 
him  that  "He  is  the  only  begotten  Son  of  the  Father."  Adam  is 
a  high  priest  who  is  next  in  authority  to  the  Eternal  Father,  and 
when  he  assisted  the  Father  in  the  resurrection  of  his  posterity,  he" 
begat  the  Eternal  Father's  second  firstborn  son,  who  is  by  birth- 
right the  first  captain  of  the  Lord's  host,  and  who  is  spoken  of  by 
John  the  Revelator  as  riding  upon  a  black  horse.  Being  the  next 
firstborn  son  to  Jesus  Christ,  he  is  also  the  next  to  him  in  au- 
thority, and  is  constantly  associated  with  him,  acting  as  his  coun- 
selor and  forerunner. 

4.  The  mission  of  Jesus  Christ  is  of  a  two-fold  nature,   con- 
sisting, firstly,  of  the  office  of  Savior,  and  secondly,  of  the  office 
of  Mediator,  to  fill  which  offices  he  needed  also   a  body  of  a  two- 
fold nature. 

5.  His  mission  as  Savior  required  him  to  have  a  body  partly 
mortal,  and   to  die  upon  a  cross,  and  by  rising  from  the  dead  on 
the  third  day  to  break  the  bonds  of  death,  and  overcome  its  power. 
In  order  to  do  this,  the  seeds  of  immortality   were  sown   in  his 
body,   consequently   death   could   not    hold   him.       He  held  the 
power  of  the  resurrection  within  himself,  and  also  the  keys  of  the 
resurrection  to  Adam's  posterity;    therefore,   he  said,    "I   am   the 
resurrection  and  the  life.      I  have  the  power  to  lay  down  my  life 
and  to  take  it  up  again." 

6.  His    mission    as    Mediator    requires    him    to    be    present, 
alternately,    with  his  Father  in  heaven,  and  with  his  servants  upon 
the  earth;  and,  as  "mortality  cannot  inherit   immortality,"  or  in 
other  words,  "mortal  beings  cannot   enter  a   celestial  world,"   it 
was  necessary  for  him  to  have  a  body  partly  immortal,  so  that  he 
might  be  able  to  enter  the  Father's  presence.     And  it  was  neces- 
sary also  for    him  to  have  and  retain  his  crucified  body,   in  order 
that  he  might  show  to  scattered  Israel  the  marks  of  his  wounds, 
and  by  so  doing  convince  them  that  he  was  the  true  Messiah.     To 
portions  of  them    he  has  at  different  times  done  this  since  his  visit 
to  the  spirits  in   prison.      He  first  appeared  to  the   apostles  at 
Jerusalem,  and  afterwards  to  the  apostles  of  the  Nephites  on  the 
American  Continent.     He  has  also  visited  other  portions  of  the 
House  of  Israel,  and  will  finally  visit  the  Jews  at  Jerusalem,  who 


656  THE    RESURRECTION. 

will  be  the  last  people  to  be  convinced  of  the  truth  of  his  mission. 
At  that  time  he  will  stand  upon  the  Mount  of  Olives,  and  the 
Jews,  who  will  have  gathered  to  that  place  in  unbelief,  will  look 
upon  him  whom  their  forefathers  pierced,  and  as  they  examine  the 
prints  of  the  nails  in  his  hands,  and  the  mark  of  the  spear  in  his 
side,  they  will  be  overcome  by  a  spirit  of  wonder  and  of  deep 
humility,  while  the  power  of  God  will  irresistibly  seal  conviction 
upon  their  minds  that  the  lowly  and  rejected  Jesus  of  Nazareth  is 
indeed  the  King  of  the  Jews — their  long  looked  for,  and  at  last, 
welcome  Messiah. 

7.  Jesus  was  a  stumbling-stone  to  the  Jews ;  hence,   he  said, 
"Whosoever  shall  fall  upon  this  stone  shall   be   broken;    but   on 
whomsoever  this  stone  shall  fall,  it  shall  grind  them   to   powder." 
The  Jews  thought  that  when  the  Messiah  appeared,  he  would  come 
as  a   mighty  deliverer  to  establish  them   forever ;  but  they  were 
mistaken.     He  was  born  of  humble  parents,  and  instead  of  estab- 
lishing himself  as  their  king  and  deliverer,  he  was  led  like  a  lamb 
to  the  slaughter,  and  was  crucified.     They,  consequently  stumbled 
over  him,  and  were  broken  and  scattered  among  all  nations ;   their 
hopes  were  blasted ;    their  eneimies   fell   upon   them,   and   drove 
them  from  their  own  lands,   and   took   possession   of  them  ;    and 
Jerusalem,  their  Holy  City,  has  been  trodden  under  the  feet  of 
the  Gentiles  until  the  present  day.     But  they  will  return,   rebuild 
their  city,  and  possess  their  own  lands ;  for  this  promise  has  been 
made  unto  them ;    and  they  will  gather  in  unbeli^". 

8.  Although  they  were  mistaken  in  supposing  that  the  Messiah 
was  coming  as  their  deliverer  in  the   first    place,  yet,   when   he 
comes  the  second  time,  their  hopes  will  be  realized,  for   he   will 
then  be  their  deliverer.     He  will  destroy  their  enemies  from  before 
them,  and  they  will  no  more  be  driven  from  their  own  lands. 

9.  When  he  shall  have  convinced  them,   he   will   have   con- 
vinced all  the  world  that  he  is  their  Redeemer,  and  that  he  holds 
the  keys  of  the  resurrection  to  Adam's  posterity. 

10.  The  objects  for  which  his  crucified  body  is  retained,  will 
then  have  been  accomplished ;  he  will  then  abandon  it,  and  return 
to  that  body  which  he  obtained  by  a  natural  process  from  his  im- 
mortal parents  in  his  third  estate. 

11.  Concerning  the  resurrection  of  Adam's  posterity,  Ezekiel 


THE    RESURRECTION.  657 

informs  us  that  he  saw  a  vision,  and  that  in  that  vision  he  saw  a 
valley  filled  with  dry  bones ;  that  the  bones  came  together,  bone 
to  its  bone ;  that  flesh  and  skin  came  upon  and  covered  them,  and 
that  they  stood  upon  their  feet  an  exceeding  great  army.  What 
are  we  to  understand  by  this  vision?  That  it  is  a  figure  represent-- 
ing  the  resurrection  of  the  whole  House  of  Israel  of  whom  none 
will  be  lost.  They  are  the  elect  of  God — the  heirs  of  salvation — 
the  sheep  spoken  of  by  the  Savior,  for  whom  he  suffered  his  blood 
to  be  shed,  that  through  his  death  and  sufferings  they  might 
receive  a  glorious  resurrection,  and  enter  into  a  fulness  of  joy. 

12.  The  heirs  of  salvation   will  be  resurrected   in   their  own 
order,  according  to  their  birthright,  or  the  right  they   hold  to  be 
born  in  a  celestial  estate,  in  the  same  order  as  that  in  which  they 
were  born  in  their  first  or  spiritual  estate. 

13.  The  resurrection  will  be  commenced  by  one  hundred  and 
forty-four  thousand  high  priests,  including  and  headed   by  Father 
Adam,  who,  accompanied  by  their  celestial  wives,   will  be  assem- 
bled on  Mount  Zion  for  that  purpose.      Father  Adam   has   one 
hundred    and    forty-four  thousand   firstborn  sons,   and  the  same 
number  of  firstborn  daughters,  of  whom,   in  the  resurrection,  he 
will  beget  his  firstborn  son  and  his  firstborn  daughter  only.     The 
second    firstborn    son    and    his    wife,    and    the    second    firstborn 
daughter  of  Adam,  will  be  begotten  by   Moses,   who  is  the  high 
priest  next  in  authority  to  Adam,   and  who   will   take  his   second 
firstborn  daughter  to  wife ;  and  this  order  will  continue  until   all 
of  Adam's  firstborn  sons  and   daughters  and  his  firstborn  sons' 
wives  shall  have  been  resurrected ;   and  theirs  will  constitute  the 
first  resurrection.    The  firstborn  sons  of  Adam  will  then,  with  their 
wives,  hold  the  keys  of  the  second  resurrection,  in  consequence  of 
their  having  power  to  beget  immortal  bodies.     They  will,  then,  in 
the  same  order  as  that  in  which  the  firstborn  sons  and  daughters 
of   Adam    were   resurrected,   beget   one   hundred   and   forty-four 
thousand  of  the  sons  of  Adam  and  their  wives,  whose  birthright  is 
next  to  their  own.      Those  of  the   second  resurrection  will  then 
hold  the  keys  of  the  third  resurrection,   and  beget   one  hundred 
and  forty-four  thousand  more  of   the   sons   of    Adam   and   their 
wives,  who  will  hold  the  keys  of  the  fourth   resurrection.      This 
order  will  be  continued  until  all  of  the  sons  and  daughters  of 


658  THE    RESURRECTION. 

Adam,  who  kept  their  first  estate,  shall  have  been  resurrected. 

^14.     The  mode  and  order  of  the  resurrection  in  every  world 
are  the  same. ' 

15.  In  Adam's  family,    John   the   Baptist   fills   the   office   of 
counselor  and  forerunner  to  his  elder  brother,  Abel,   who  will   be 
the  Savior  to  the  world  that  will  succeed  this  in  a   state   of  mor- 
tality.     It  is  an  eternal  principle  that,  in  every  world   the  younger 
act  as  counselors  and  forerunners  to  the  elder,  who  are  next  above 
them  by  birthright.      Thus,  Elias  (or  Enos)  acts  as  counselor  and 
forerunner  to  Moses   ( or  Seth ),    and   restores   that   priesthood   in 
part  which  Moses  restores  to  its  fulness. 

1 6.  Concerning  the  resurrection  of  Lazarus,  it  is  asked:      By 
what  power  was  he  raised,  and  what  was  the  nature  of  his  resur- 
rection?    His  mortal  body  had  not  decayed,  and    Jesus  holding 
the  power  of  the  holy   priesthood,   called  the  spirit   back  to  the 
dead  body,  and  by  this  means  quickened  it '  again.      It   was   not 
changed  to  a  celestial  body,  but  remained  what  it  was  before — a 
mortal  body  subject  to  death. 

17.  We    have    heard    of   cases    where   individuals  have  been 
in  a  trance;  in  such  cases  the  spirit  sometimes  leaves  the  body 
for  several,  days,   and  then   returns   to  it   again.       The    case    of 
Lazarus  was  very  similar  to  that  of  a  trance ;  his  spirit  returned  to 
his  body  before  it  had  commenced  to.  decompose. 

1 8.  In  connection  with  the  above,   how  shall  we  understand 
the  statement  found  in  the  Bible  that  Elijah  took  his  mortal  body 
to  heaven?     We  have  simply  to  say   that  that   statement   is   not 
true.     He  did  not  take  his  mortal  body  to  heaven — he  left  it  be- 
fore he  arrived  there. 

19.  What  is  transfiguration?     It  is  a  state  of   being  wherein  a 
mortal  man  is  enveloped  in  a  holy  influence,   consequent  upon  a 
visitation  from  the  Lord  or  his  holy  angels,  by  which  he  becomes 
spiritually  minded,  and  can  behold  the  face  of  God   or   celestial 
beings,  whose  faces,  without  such  change,   he  could  not  behold, 
as  God,  holy  angels  and  the  things  of  God  are  spiritually  dis- 
cerned.      Prophets  undergo  this  change  for  special  purposes ;    as 
in  the  case  of  Moses,  to  whom  the  Lord  appeared  on  the  Mount, 
and  in  whose  presence  he  wrote  upon  the  tables  of    stone   with 
his  finger. 


CONCERNING    MIRACLES.  659 

20.  As  concerning  miracles,   we   read   that   many   have  been 
performed  upon  the  earth  ;  such,  for  instance,   as  the  preservation 
of  the  three  Hebrews,  who,  though  cast  into  a  fiery  furnace  heated 
seven  times  more  than  it  was  wont  to  be  heated,  remained   unin- 
jured; and  of  Daniel,  who  was  preserved  from  the  ravenous  grasp 
of  lions  when  cast  into  their  den. 

21.  Both  the  Hebrews  and  Daniel  were  preserved  by  the  holy 
angels,  between  whom  and  mortal  beings  there  is  a  material  differ- 
ence.    The  angels  of  the  Lord  have  power  over  the  elements  of 
fire,  the  ferociousness  of  wild   animals,   and  other  destructive  in- 
fluences to  which  mortals  are  subject.      Understanding  the   dan- 
gers to  which  mortals  are  exposed,    and  possessing  the  power  to 
deliver  them  therefrom,  they  are  appointed  to  minister  to   beings 
in  mortality,  to  direct  their  footsteps,    and   preserve  them   from 
destruction;     in    filling   which   appointment,    they  have   wrought 
those  many  wonders,  called  miracles,  an    account    of   which    we 
find  on  record. 

22.  The  Lord    reveals  himself   to   whomsoever  he  will,   and 
his  gifts    and    callings  are   unto   none   but  those   who   are  heirs 
to  them. 


AN    EXPLANATION     OF     THE     FIRST     THREE 
CHAPTERS     OF     GENESIS. 


AN    ARTICLE    BY    THE    PROPHET,    JOSEPH    MORRIS. 


WEBER,  UTAH,  March  ist,  1861. 

1.  THERE  ARE  eternal,  fixed  laws  by  which  all   Gods  work 
and  are  regulated,  and  those  laws  first  originated   in  the  council 
of  the  first  Gods.     When  the  laws  were  made,  the  first  God  signed 

-  them  with  his  own  hand ;  and  he  is  sworn  to  sustain  them.  The 
Lord  says  that  his  course  is  one  eternal  round.  All  Gods  are 
governed  by  those  eternal  laws,  and  upon  this  principle  the  Lord 
could  justly  say  that  his  purposes  never  fail. 

2.  Moses   said   that,     "In   the    beginning    God   created    the 


660  CONCERNING    THE    CREATION. 

heaven  and  the  earth."  What  God  was  it  who  created  this  earth? 
It  was  Adam's  own  Father  who  gave  the  command  for  it  to  be 
formed  out  of  unorganized  matter,  and  his  own  sons  created  it  for 
Adam,  his  firstborn  son ;  and  when  it  was  first  formed,  it  was  a 
dark  body,  and  the  Lord  saw  that  it  was  necessary  for  them  to 
have  light,  and  he  commanded  them  to  create  the  sun,  moon  and 
stars  to  give  it  light,  and  these  lights  rule  the  seasons,  both  days, 
weeks,  months  and  years,  and  they  were  placed  in  the  firmament 
above  to  reflect  their  light  upon  the  earth. 

3  This  world  has  moved  one  hundred  and  forty-four  thousand 
times  since  it  was  created;,  and  when  this  world  moves,  the  sun, 
moon  and  stars  move  with  it,  to  give  it  light ;  and  from  the  time 
that  it  was  first  created,  until  it  becomes  celestial,  it  will  continue 
to  grow;  and  as  it  has  grown  the  inhabitants  have  increased  upon 
it.  This  world  has  supported  its  own  inhabitants,  both  in  food 
and  raiment. 

4.  We  may  ask  the  question,    Do  angels  eat  food  and  wear 
clothing  in  their  first  estate  ?    Yes.    We  may  also  ask  the  question, 
Where  did  the  seeds  come  from  to  this  earth  which  yield  forth  all 
all  kinds  of  fruit?     The  seed  is  in  the  earth,  and  is  self  existent 
like  all  other  matter;  and  when  a   world  is  created,  all  trees  and 
herbs  spring  forth  upon  it  to   supply  the  inhabitants ;  in  fact,   all 
worlds  support  their  own  inhabitants,  whether  they  are  temporal, 
or  spiritual,  or  eternal.- 

5.  Was  the   animal  creation   first  spiritually   created?      Yes; 
and  they  were  used  by  men  in  their  spiritual  estate  as  they   are 
now  used  by   them  in  their  temporal   estate ;  when  man   moves, 
they  move  with  him,  to  be  used  by  him,  for  they  were  created  for 
the  use  of  man,  and  are  as  eternal  as  he  is. 

6.  How  long  was  it  from  the  time  that  they  commenced   to 
form  this  world  to  the  time  when  they  finished  it?     Six  thousand 
years ;   and  the  seventh  thousand  year  is  called  the  Lord's  Sab- 
bath ;  having  finished  creating  this   world   in   six  thousand   years, 
he  called  the  seventh  the  Sabbath  of  rest,  and  that  is   the   reason 
why  the  Lord  commanded  people  upon   this   earth   to   labor  six 
days,  and  to  rest  from  all  their  labors  on  the  seventh. 

7.  One  day  with  the  Lord  is  one  thousand  yeais,  according  to 
the  time  which  regulates  all  the  celestial   worlds.     The  sun   re- 


CONCERNING  THE  GARDEN  OF  EDEN.  66 1 

volves  around  that  great  central  planet  ( see  diagram )  once  every 
thousand  years ;  and  all  Gods  are  regulated  by  it;  but  with  us 
twenty-four  hours  is  called  one  day;  therefore,  the  Lord  calls 
upon  all  people  to  keep  the  Sabbath  day  holy ;  and  if  they  do  not 
do  this,  they  break  that  commandment,  and  are  guilty  before  the" 
Lord. 

8.  With  respect  to  the  animal  creation  :   all  things,  whether  of 
the  vegetable   or  animal  creation,  had  a  spiritual  growth   before 
they  had  a  temporal  one ;  and  all  that  has  a  temporal  growth  will 
have  an  eternal  growth ;  therefore,  trees  and  herbs  of  all  kinds  will 
have  a  resurrection  as  well  as  all  species  of  animals. 

9.  Moses  informed  us  that  the   Lord   God  planted  a  garden 
eastward    in    Eden,    and   there  he   put  the    man   whom   he   had 
formed.     What  garden  was  that  referred  to  by  Moses?     It  was 
the  whole  earth.     What  tree  was  that  standing  in  the  midst  of  the 
garden,  representing  the   principle  of  good   and   evil,   which  the 
woman  was  commanded  not  to  touch?     It  was  the  devil.     Good 
was  already  in  the  world,  and  he  brought   the   evil.     Which   way 
did  he  bring  the  evil?     He  beguiled  Eve;  she  gave  way  to  him, 
and  he  begot  Cain  who  was  a  murderer,  for  he  slew  his  brother. 
Who  was  Cain?     He  was  the  second  born  son  of  Adam.     Why 
did  he  murder  his  brother,  Abel?     Because  he  is   a  fallen   angel. 
He    fell    in  his   first   estate,  and   one-third  of  Adam's   sons   and 
daughters  fell  with  him  in  like  manner  as   Lucifer  and  his   band 
fell.     Had  Lucifer  once  a  mortal  body?     Yes;    and   all   who  fell 
with  him   had  mortal  bodies  on  the   mortal  earth  that  preceded 
this;    but  they   lost  their   mortal   bodies,   and   never  obtained  a 
resurrection ;  and  they  will  finally  meet  with  their  second   death, 
which  is  the  death  of  the  spirit.     They  will  be   cast  into  that  lake 
burning  with  fire  and  brimstone,  which  is  the  second  death. 

10.  What  was  the  cause  of  Cain's  fall?  He  sought  to  take 
away -the  birthright  from  Abel,  the  firstborn  son,  and  this  could 
not  be  done;  therefore,  he  concluded  to  establish  himself,  and  he 
revolted  from  under  his  father's  government,  and  drew  one-third 
of  Adam's  children  with  him.  When  he  fell,  Adam  entered  into 
a  covenant  with  him,  which  is  as  follows:  "Now,  my  second 
born  son,  seeing  that  you  have  revolted  from  under  my  govern- 
ment, and  sought  to  establish  a  government  of  your  own,  in 


662  THE    AGREEMENT. 

opposition  to  me,  as  my  firstborn  son  ruled  in  the  first  estate,  so 
you  shall  lead  off  in  the  second  estate ;  and  it  shall  come  to  pass 
that  if  you  can  conquer  me  and  my  prophets,  you  shall  hold  the 
world  in  your  grasp;  but  if  I  conquer  you,  I  will  not  leave  one  of 
you  alive,  neither  temporally  rior  spiritually."  Therefore,  Cain 
claimed  the  right  to  come  first  upon  this  earth  in  its  second-estate, 
according  to  the  eternal  law  of  the  Gods ;  and  when  he  came  into 
it  he  led 'death  into  it,  he  being  an  angel  of  death;  that  is  the 
reason  that  death  was  passed  upon  all  flesh. 

IT.  The  firstborn  son  always  holds  the  birthright.  Abel  ruled 
this  world  in  its  first  estate ;  he  held  the  birthright  in  that  estate ; 
but  as  this  is  the  second  estate,  and  Cain  is  the  second  born  son 
of  Adam,  he  (Cain)  claims  the  right  to  come  first  to  lead  off,  and 
in  doing  so,  he  brought  death  upon  the  other  two-thirds  of  Adam's 
children  who  kept  their  first  estate,  whose  names  are  recorded  in 
the  Lamb's  Book  of  Life ;  they  are  the  elect  of  God ;  the  seed  of 
Abraham ;  and  Jesus  Christ  was  sent  by  his  Father  to  break  the 
bonds  of  death,  and  to  open  the  way  for  all  those  angels  who  kept 
their  first  estate,  that  they  might  receive  their  glorious  resurrection. 
He  was  crucified  upon  the  cross,  and  received  his  resurrection, 
and  became  the  first-fruits  of  the  resurrection  to  all  those  who  are 
heirs  to  it.  If  he  had  not  broken  the  barriers  of  the  tomb,  all 
those  angels  who  kept  their  first  estate  must  have  remained  in 
their  graves  forever. 


QUESTIONS    ANSWERED   IN  THE    SCHOOL    OF   THE 

PROPHETS    BY    THE     PROPHET, 

JOSEPH    MORRIS. 


1.  WILL    THE    children    of  Adam    receive    their   resurrected 
bodies  before  the  earth  moves  to  its  celestial  or  third  estate?     No; 
the  first  resurrection  only  will  take  place. 

2.  Will  the  high  priests  who  are  upon   the   earth  at  the  time 
the    first    resurrection    commences,    be   quickened  and   act  inde- 
pendently   while    their  spirits   are  engaged   in  the   first   resurrec- 
tion ?     Yes. 


QUESTIONS    ANSWERED.  663 

3.  What  is  the  reason  that  the  first  wife  of  a  high  priest  comes 
with  him  upon  every  earth   to  commence   the   first  resurrection? 
Because  the  second  wife  by  marriage  is  the  youngest  by  birthright ; 
consequently,  she  cannot  briug  forth  any  of  a  higher  birthright 
than  herself. 

4.  Why  does  the  Second   Captain  of  the   Lord's  host,  or  the 
second  firstborn  son  of  the  Eternal  Father,  beget,  upon  this  earth, 
a  body  for  Jesus  Christ?     Because  he  is  the  next  to  him   in   au- 
thority, and  comes  to  do  that  for  Jesus  which  he  (Jesus)  cannot 
do  for  himself. 

5.  Why   is  Adam,    in  the  book    of  Doctrine  and  Covenants, 
called  the  seventh  angel?     Because  he   was   called  the   seventh 
angel  to  the  Eternal  Father's  earth,    hence,  he  is  the  arch-angel 
to  this  earth. 

6.  Why  do  the  inhabitants  of  this  earth  worship  the  Eternal 
Father?     Because  he  has  to  save  and   exalt  this  world,  in  conse- 
quence of  Adam,  who  is  the  father  of  the  inhabitants  of  this  earth, 
not  having  become  a  God. 

7.  What  is  meant  by  baptism  for  the  dead,  and  in   what   way 
will  it  be  brought  about?     It  is  the  living  being  baptized  for  the 
dead,  and  will  be  performed  in  the  temple,  when  built  in   Jackson 
County,  and  will  be  brought  about  by  the  supervision  of  Moses. 


A     LETTER     CONTAINING     PRINCIPLE     AND 
DOCTRINE. 


UTAH,  November  i9th,  1860. 
PRESIDENT  BRIGHAM  YOUNG, 

DEAR  SIR  : — Since  I  last  wrote  to  you,  a  few  more  ideas  have 
occured  to  my  mind  which  I  should  like  to  make  known  to  you. 
You  know  that  the  prophet,  Joseph  Smith,  told  you  that  a  time 
would  come,  when  the  curtain  that  hides  the  eternal  worlds  from 
the  view  of  mortals,  would  be  rolled  up  and  all  hidden  things 
would  be  revealed.  And  he  said  that  another  angel  would  sound 


664  CONCERNING    MOSES. 

his  trump  both  long  and  loud,  and  that  all  nations  should  hear  it, 
and  that  he  should  cast  down  the  Roman  Catholic  power.  He 
also  told  you  that  the  Lord  would  raise  up  a  prophet  like,  unto 
Moses,  and  that  he  should  deliver  you  out  of  the  hands  of  all 
your  enemies,  and  lead  you  back  to  the  Land  of  Promise  with  a 
mighty  hand  and  an  outstretched  arm.  He  also  told  you  that 
the  Lord  would  give  unto  his  people  a  great  endowment,  and  yet 
the  Lord  has  now  caught  you  unprepared. 

Moses  said  when  upon  earth,  "A  prophet  shall  the  Lord  your 
God  raise  up  unto  you  of  your  brethren  like  unto  me ;  him  ye 
shall  hear  in  all  things  whatsoever  he  shall  say  unto  you.  And'  it 
shall  come  to  pass,  that  ej/ery  soul  who  will  not  hear  that  prophet, 
shall  be  destroyed  from  among  the  people."  But,  if  he  had  told 
you  the  whole  secret,  he  would  have  said,  "Behold,  I  am  Moses, 
and  it  shall  come  to  pass  in  the  latter  days,  when  my  words  shall 
be  lightly  esteemed  among  men,  and  the  laws  which  I  have  given 
for  the  government  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth  shall  be  trod- 
den under  their  feet,  behold,  I  shall  come  again,  and  those  laws 
shall  be  had  again  among  the  people.  And  it  shall  come  to  pass, 
that  all  who  will  not  give  ear  to  my  words,  shall  be  cut  off  from 
among  the  people."  But  it  would  have  been  revealing  too  much 
to  the  people  at  that  time. 

Unless  the  full  keys  of  the  holy  priesthood  are  upon  the  earth, 
the  kingdom  of  God  can  never  triumph  over  its  enemies,  but  it 
must  go  down.  Suppose  that  two  great  empires  were  at  war  with 
each  other,  and  the  the  one  conquered  the  other,  the  one  that  was 
conquered  must  remain  under  the  one  that  conquered  it  until  a 
reinforcement  should  come  to  its  assistance,  and  deliver  it. 
Then  why  do  you  fight  against  that  reinforcement  which  the  Lord 
has  sent  you?  Why  not  open  the  way  for  it? 

Who  was  Cain  ?  In  the  flesh,  he  was  the  firstborn  son  of  Adam 
and  Eve,  but  in  the  spirit,  he  was  their  second  born  son.  Who 
was  his  father?  Lucifer,  the  devil.  WTas  it  right  for  Cain  to 
come  first  into  this  world,  and  lead  death  into  it?  Yes?  Why 
so?  When  he  fell  in  his  first  estate,  his  father  entered  into  a 
covenant  with  him,  which  is  as  follows:  "Now,  my  second  born 
son,  seeing  that  you  have  revolted  from  under  my  government, 
and  have  sought  to  set  up  a  government  of  your  own,  in  opposi- 


RE-INCARNATION.  665 


tion  to  mine.  Inasmuch  as  my  firstborn  son  ruled  in  the  first 
estate,  you  shall  lead  off  and  rule  in  the  second  estate.  And  it 
shall  come  to  pass  that,  if  you  conquer  me  and  my  prophets,  you 
shall  hold  the  world  in  your  grasp,  and  I  will  lose  all ;  but,  if  I 
conquer  you,  I  wilf  not  leave  one  of  you  alive,  neither  temporally" 
nor  spiritually." 

What  spirit  was  that  which  inhabited  the  body  of  Judas,  who 
betrayed  the  Savior?  It  was  that  same  spirit  that  inhabited  the 
body  of  Cain?  What  spirit  was  that  which  inhabitated  the  body 
of  Cain?  The  same  spirit  that  inhabits  the  beast  which  is  now 
in  your  midst.  Why  did  that  spirit  come  forth  in  the  latter  days, 
and  enter  into  the  Church  of  Christ  to  destroy  it.  That  he 
might  hold  his  grasp,  and  destroy  the  world. 

What  spirit  was  that  which  inhabited  the  body  of  Abel?  The 
same  spirit  that  inhabited  the  body  of  Aaron,  who  holds  the  keys 
of  the  lesser  priesthood.  And  when  "Abel  was  slain,  the  Lord 
promised  to  *give  unto  Eve  another  seed  in  his  place,  who 
was  Seth. 

What  spirit  was  that  which  inhabited  the  body  of  Seth?  The 
spirit  next  in  authority  to  Adam.  Why  was  he  the  firstborn  son 
of  Adam  after  the  death  of  Abel  ?  Because  he  holds  the  full  keys' 
of  the  holy  priesthood.  If  he  had  not  come  forth,  the  devil 
would  have  held  this  world  in  his  grasp  forever.  He  received 
his  ordination  in  a  council  of  the  Gods,  to  preside  over  Adam's 
posterity,  having  power  to  command  the  host  of  heaven.  And 
afterwards,  he  received  his  ordination  under  the  hands  of  his 
mortal  father,  Adam,  to  the  same  authority. 

What  spirit  was  that  which  dwelt  in  the  body  of  Enos  ?  It  was 
the  same  spirit  that  dwelt  in  the  body  of  Elijah  the  prophet, — the 
same  spirit  that  dwelt  in  the  body  of  Joseph  Smith. 

Previous  to  the  death  of  Adam,  he  ordained  seven  high  priests 
to  preside  over  his  posterity,  and  they  were  the  seven  angels 
spoken  of  by  John  the  Revelator,  represented  by  the  seven  stars, 
standing  in  the  midst  of  the  seven  golden  candlesticks,  of  whom 
Seth  was  the  first. 

What  spirit  was  it  that  dwelt  in  the  body  of  Moses  ?  The  same 
that  dwelt  in  the  body  of  Seth.  What  spirit  is  it  that  now  dwells 
in  the  body  of  your  humble  servant?  The  same  spirit  that  dwelt 


666  THE    PROPHET    DESIRES    A    RECONCILIATION. 

in  the  bodies  of  Moses  and  Seth.  Why  was  it  sent  forth  upon 
this  earth  now?  To  cast  the  devil  out  of  the  Church,  and  lead  it 
triumphant  over  all  its  enemies.  The  holy  priesthood  runs  down- 
wards, and  takes  root  upwards ;  so  that  the  first  is  last,  and  the 
last  first,  throughout  all  the  works  of  the  Lord. 

Oh,  how  I  feel  the  responsibility  of  my  office !  Do  not  add  to 
my  burden,  I  entreat  you;  for  if  you  do,  you  will  run  my  cup  over. 
I  want  you  to  open  my  way  without  causing  me  any  further 
trouble.  Why  should  you  burden  me  ?  I  am  now  weighed  down.  " 
If  you  will  not  burden  me,  I  will  not  burden  you  any  more  than 
I  can  help.  Why  should  we  be  a  burden  to  each  other.  I  wish 
you  to  consider  my  situation.  I  am  sick ;  therefore,  what  you  do, 
do  it  quickly,  for  I  cannot  wait.  I  have  no  place  to  stop  at,  and 
if  you  are  my  friend,  prove  it  now,  for  this  is  the  time  that  I  need 
help.  You  have  promised  to  be  faithful  to  me ;  now  show  it. 
Oh,  what  a  burden  it  would  remove  from  my  shoulders,  if  I  could 
only  feel  that  my  way  was  open  so  that  I  could  come  up  without 
any  trouble.  For  if  you  stand  against  me,  I  know  the  conse- 
quences that  will  arise  from  it.  I  have  suffered  every  thing  a  man 
could  suffer,  and  live,  to  save  this  people,  and  I  do  not  wish  to  see 
them  destroyed.  Now,  therefore,  if  you  love  your  fellow  creatures, 
you  will  open  my  way  at  once.  I  have  heard  your  pleadings,  and 
willingly  grant  your  request.  And  now,  what  is  there  in  the  way? 
I  am  willing  to  meet  you  and  to  converse  with  you,  and  hear  your 
complaints,  and  minister  all  the  comfort  to  you  that  lies  in  my 
power;  and  if  I  have  ever  written  anything  to  you  that  you  do 
not  understand,  I  am  perfectly  willing  to  explain  it  to  your  satis- 
faction. I  will  remove  everything  out  of  your  way  that  I  possibly 
can.  You  will  excuse  my  imperfections  in  writing  and  spelling, 
for  I  have  had  to  write  under  very  unfavorable  circumstances.  I 
am  not  above  being  taught  by  a  child  that  can  teach  me  anything. 
I  am  willing  both  to  teach  and  to  be  taught.  I  hope  to  live  and 
learn,  for  I  do  not  know  all  things  yet.  I  now  add  no  more,  but 

remain, 

Yours,  etc. 


AN    ADDRESS.  667 

AN     ADDRESS    TO    PRESIDENT    BRIGHAM    YOUNG. 


UTAH,  December  2ist,  1860.  — 
PRESIDENT  BRIGHAM  YOUNG, 

DEAR  SIR  : — I  must  acknowledge  that  I  am  astonished  when  I 
think  of  the  wilful  blindness  and  rebellion  of  men  who  profess  to 
be  the  servants  of  the  Lord.  But  when  I  trace  the  Bible  and 
Book  of  Mormon,  and  see  how  men  acted  who  were  kings  and 
judges,  there  are  very  few  cases  wherein  they  have  not  destroyed 
themselves  in  the  flesh.  Oh,  what  a  shame  it  is  that  men  on 
whom  the  Lord  has  placed  a  little  authority,  should  destroy  them- 
selves therewith.  What  is  the  cause  of  this?  It  is  rebellion. 
When  they  commence  to  go  astray  they  will  not  stop,  but  continue 
to  go  on  until  the  Lord  is  obliged  to  cut  both  them  and  their  seed 
off  from  the  earth.  Oh,  how  my  heart  pains  me  when  I  think  of 
the  situation  of  this  people.  They  are  going  on  like  a  lamb  to  the 
slaughter.  Their  shepherds  have  been  warned,  but  they  have 
not  warned  the  flock,  and  destruction  will  come  upon  them  in  one 
day.  Can  the  Lord  stay  his  hand?  No,  he  cannot.  Will  he  give 
up  to  the  devil,  and  let  him  take  all?  Will  Jesus  Christ  suffer 
that  his  blood  shall  have  been  shed  in  vain?  Did  he  suffer  upon 
the  cross  for  naught?  Have  all  the  apostles  and  prophets  that 
have  come  upon  this  earth  time  after  time,  and  suffered  their  blood 
to  be  shed  for  the  testimony  of  Jesus,  done  all  this  in  vain?  Has 
all  the  blood  of  the  saints  that  has  been  shed  upon  the  earth,  from 
the  days  of  Adam  to  this  time,  been  spilt  in  vain?  Shall  all'  the 
sons  and  daughters  of  Adam  who  kept  their  first  estate,  who  are 
heirs  of  the  resurrection,  lie  in  the  tomb  forever?  Must  this 
world  go  back  to  its  native  element,  and  be  cast  out  of  the  rank 
of  the  worlds  that  are  traveling  up  to  perfection?  Shall  Father 
Adam  lose  his  world,  and  all  his  posterity,  and  possess  nothing? 
If  the  Lord  suffers  the  devil  to  hold  his  grasp  now,  all  is  lost. 
Oh  !  ye  apostles,  I  wish  to  ask  you  a  question.  Shall  we  sit  down 
and  let  the  devil  take  all?  I  will  speak  for  myself — the  devil  shall 
never  hold  this  world  in  his  grasp.  If  you  will  not  act  your  part, 
the  Lord  will  call  others  and  put  them  in  your  places.  If  you  do 


668  AN    ADDRESS. 

not  wish  to  be  subject  to  the  man  who  holds  the  keys  of  the  king- 
dom, you  can  take  your  own  course.  I  have  never  been  an 
enemy  to  you,  and  you  will  find  that  out  hereafter.  You  have 
always  treated  me  as  an  enemy,  but  you  will  find  out  that  you 
have  chosen  the  weakest  side,  and  that  you  cannot  stay  the  hand 
of  the  Almighty.  You  may  set  yourselves  against  him  as  strongly 
as  you  please,  but  you  will  go  down.  You  shall  know  that  the 
Lord  Omnipotent  reigneth,  and  raiseth  up  at  his  pleasure,  and  he 
will  not  ask  you  who  he  shall  call  to  rule  his  kingdom.  He  can 
do  his  own  work  without  you ;  he  does  not  ask  you  any  odds ; 
when  you  have  done  your  worst,  he  can  accomplish  his  purposes. 
You  may  have  the  power  to  destroy  a  few  thousand  people,  but 
better  do  that  than  to  let  all  be  destroyed. 

When  the  Lord  raises  up  some  men  to  thrones  of  *  eminence, 
how  soon  they  forget  the  pit  from  whence  they  were  taken,  and  the 
rock  from  whence  they  were  hewn.  Oh,  ye  who  profess  to  be  the 
apostles  of  Jesus  Christ,  where  did  the  Lord  find  you?  He  found 
you  earning  your  bread  by  the  sweat  of  your  brow.  None  of 
you  were  raised  in  a  royal  palace.  He  found  you  as  he  found 
me,  and  now  you  are  ashamed  of  me;  and  what  do  you  know? 
You  do  not  know  your  right  hand  from  your  left.  You  can 
scarcely  center  one  principle  that  belongs  to  the  gospel  of  Jesus 
Christ.  You  have  been  preaching  redemption  during  many  years, 
and  there  is  not  one  of  you  that  can  tell  me  what  a  redeemed  being 
is.  And  you  have  been  trying  to  preach  about  the  resurrection  of 
the  dead,  eternal  judgment,  election,  reprobation,  fore-ordination, 
and  the  baptism  of  the  dead,  all  of  which  are  the  first  principles 
of  the  gospel  of  Jesus  Christ.  Oh,  ye  proud  hearted  men,  what 
do  you  know  about  these  principles.  If  you  know  anything  about 
them,  you  have  received  your  knowledge  from  the  man  whom  you 
have  despised.  I  wish  I  could  once  get  into  your  company,  I 
would  tell  you  a  few  secrets.  I  would  show  you  that  you  never 
knew  much  about  the  gospel  of  Jesus  Christ ;  but  you  shut  your 
doors  against  me.  and  there  is  no  chance  for  me  to  get  the  privi- 
lege to  talk  with  you.  I  have  striven  with  all  my  power  to  pene- 
trate your  hard  hearts,  but  it  appears  to  be  all  in  vain.  When  men 
are  given  up  to  wickedness,  they  will  trample  the  words  of  the 
Lord  under  their  feet  as  they  would  an  idle  tale.  But  be  it  known 


AN    ADDRESS.  669 

unto  you,  that  I  have  never  written  a  word  unto  you  that  will 
not  answer  the  end  for  which  it  was  sent,  either  to  your  salvation 
or  destruction.  You  have  shut  your  ears  and  hearts  against  the 
truth,  determined  to  take  your  own  course ;  but  can  you  maintain 
your  ground  against  that  God  who  sent  you  here?  You  shall  see 
whether  you  can  or  not.  Before  your  spirit  left  those  celestial 
worlds  to  come  here,  you  foresaw  all  that  you  are  now  pass- 
ing through,  and  you  took  an  oath  of  the  holy  priesthood,  and 
promised  to  be  true  to  your  trust,  and  do  you  now  falter?  I  have 
done  my  duty  to  you  whether  you  think  so  or  not.  My  skirts  are 
clean  of  your  blood.  If  I  had  not  given  unto  you  the  Keys  of  the 
Holy  Priesthood,  which  no  other  man  ever  did,  you  might  have  an 
excuse.  Now  select  the  most  clever  man  among  you,  and  let  him 
use  his  own  faculties  and  write  as  I  have  done ;  let  him  write  reve- 
lation after  revelation,  and  give  the  Keys  of  the  Holy  Priesthood 
that  have  never  before  been  given  by  man.  If  you  can  do  this, 
you  are  clear  and  can  go  on  as  you  are  doing ;  but  if  you  cannot 
do  this,  you  are  under  condemnation,  and  your  destruction  will  be 
just.  You  have  acted  as  if  you  had  no  part  at  all  to  act,  and 
left  it  all  to  me.  I  can  do  my  own  part,  but  I  cannot  do  yours. 
You  must  do  it  yourselves,  or  it  must  go  undone,  and  you  must 
suffer  the  consequences. 

I  have  now  said  and  done  all  that  I  could  do  for  you,  except 
you  will  humble  yourselves  and  comply  with  the  Lord's  request. 
If  you  will  do  this,  I  will  be  with  you  with  all  my  heart,  and  you 
shall  prove  that  I  am  a  never-failing  friend;  but  as  long  as  you  go 
on  sustaining  the  power  of  the  devil  upon  me  and  upon  this  peo- 
ple, you  keep  my  feelings  worked  up  against  you.  There  are  but 
two  ways  before  you.  You  must  take  "either  one  or  the  other  of 
them ;  the  one  leads  to  death,  and  the  other  leads  to  life.  I  must 
now  leave  the  matter  with  you ;  do  as  you  please. 

Yours,  etc., 


670  A    LETTER. 

A  LETTER  FROM   THE   PROPHET   TO   HIS   FRIEND. 


WEBER,  UTAH,  July  9th,  1861. 
MR.  GEORGE  LESLIE, 

DEAR  BROTHER  : — Having  received  information  the  other  day, 
per  Brother  Joseph  Astel,  that  you  were  desirous  of  hearing  from 
me,  I  gladly  avail  myself  of  the  first  favorable  opportunity  to 
accede  to  your  wishes. 

Believing  that  you  have  heard  a  great  many  rumors  with  respect 
to  my  calling,  and  the  course  that  I  am  pursuing,  and  that  in  con- 
sequence of  such  rumors,  your  first  and  greatest  anxiety  will  be  to 
have  some  reliable  information  relating  thereto,  I  propose  giving 
you  a  brief  detail  of  my  experience,  and  pray  that  the  spirit  of 
truth  may  lead  you  to  draw  just  and  righteous  conclusions 
therefrom. 

In  the  fall  of  1857,  a  few  months  before  the  move  "South,"  I 
obtained  a  revelation  of  the  mind  and  will  of  God  concerning 
matters  and  things  in  this  Territory,  and  having  been  most  shame- 
fully— most  cruelly  abused  by  James  C.  Snow,  who  was  then 
President  of  the  Stake  at  ^rovo,  I  wrote  him  a  lengthy  letter,  in 
which,  by  the  aid  of  the  Holy  Ghost,  I  defended  myself  against 
the  calumnies  and  misrepresentations  of  my  enemies,  announced 
that  I  was  called  of  God,  and  exposed  the  wickedness  of  that 
delusive  spirit  by  whiph  he  was  led,  and  by  which  he  governed 
the  people,  and  under  the  influence  of  which  he  took  from  me 
my  wife,  forced  her  to  commit  adultery  with  another  man,  robbed 
me  of  my  character,  and  stamped  it  with  almost  every  crime  of 
which  he  had  any  knowledge. 

After  the  return  from  "South,"  I  received  another  revelation, 
containing  a  knowledge  of  the  keys  of  the  priesthood,  explaining 
the  principles  by  which  the  Gods  were  exalted  and  governed,  and 
by  which  all  who  obtain  such  power  and  glory  must  also  become 
Gods.  It  also  gives  an  explanation  of  those  one  hundred  and 
forty-four  thousand  whom  John  saw  standing  with  Jesus  upon 
Mount  Zion,  spoken  of  in  the  i4th  chapter  of  Revelations.  Since 
that  time  I  have  had  continual  visitations  from  the  Lord,  and 


A    LETTER.  67  I 

have  received  and  written  to  President  Young,  from  thirty  to  forty 
revelations  and  addresses. 

The  Lord  having  called  me  to  be  a  prophet,  seer  and  revelator 
to  his  Church,  I  wrote  to  President  Young  and  informed  him 
thereof,  requested  him  to  bring  the  matter  before  the  people,  and 
thereby  honor  the  word  of  the  Lord.  I  also  sent  him  the  "  Keys 
of  the  Priesthood,"  and  other  revelations  at  different  times,  in 
which,  as  well  as  in  all  the  letters  that  I  addressed  to  him,  he  was 
commanded  to  inform  the  people  what  the  Lord  was  doing,  and 
what  he  was  about  to  do,  and  to  stand  up  in  the  dignity  and 
power  of  his  calling,  and  make  known  the  glad  tidings  to  Israel 
that  the  Lord  had  raised  up  another  prophet  to  redeem  them  from 
bondage,  and  take  them  back  to  their  inheritances  in  Jackson 
County,  Missouri,  which  place  is  the  place  of  the  inheritance  of 
the  saints  of  God. 

For  two  years  and  a  half,  I  wrote  to  and  labored  with  President 
Young  in  the  most  faithful  manner,  revealing  to  none  but  to  him 
and  his  immediate  associates,  the  designs  and  purposes  of  the 
Almighty.  During  this  time,  I  suffered  trials  and  privations  of 
various  kinds,  and  often  prayed  the  Lord  to  remove  from  me  a 
burden  that  I  seemed  scarcely  able  to  bear.  My  mind  was 
wholly  occupied  with  the  things  that  the  Lord  had  revealed  to  me, 
so  much  so,  that  I  had  no  pleasure  in  conversation  that  did  not 
relate  to  God  and  Godliness.  I  was  as  a  cipher  among  the  peo- 
ple. If  I  was  silent,  I  was  looked  upon  and  ridiculed  as  dull  and 
stupid ;  if  I  spake,  I  spake  that  which  occupied  my  whole  atten- 
tion, and  was  either  derided  as  a  fanatic,  stigmatized  as  crazy,  or 
treated  as  an  imposter.  Under  such  circumstances,  with  which  I 
had  to  cope  from  the  date  of  my  first  visitation  from  the  Lord  to 
the  time  that  I  arrived  in  this  place,  I  had  no  less  than  twenty- 
eight  different  homes,  or  rather  stopping  places,  for  I  had  no 
place  of  residence  worthy  the  sacred  name  of  home  before  I 
came  here. 

In  the  fall  of  1860,  as  I  was  going  to  Great  Salt  Lake  City,  to 
deliver  two  letters  or  addresses  that  I  had  written  to  President 
Young,  I  met  Brother  John  Cook  near  the  Warm  Springs.  We 
entered  into  a  conversation,  in  which  I  told  him  who  and  what 
I  was,  and  what  the  Lord  was  about  to  do.  He  invited  me  to  his 


672  A    LETTER. 

house,  which  invitation  I  accepted  after  transacting  my  business 
in  the  City,  and  it  has  ever  since  been  a  home  where  I  have  been 
well  cared  for. 

On  my  arrival  here,  I  was  introduced  to  John  Cook's  brother 
Richard,  who  was  at  that  time  bishop  of  this  ward,  to  whom  I  un- 
folded the  great  and  precious  things  which  the  Lord  had  revealed 
to  me. 

After  a  few  days  spent  in  the  careful  and  prayerful  examina- 
tion of  the  revelations  I  had  received,  and  the  doctrines  em- 
bodied therein,  he  came  to  the  conclusion  that  they  were  from 
heaven.  Others  began  to  investigate  also,  and  their  investigations 
likewise  resulted  in  a  conviction  of  the  truth  and  divinity  of  my 
mission,  and  of  the  revelations  which  God  had  been  pleased  to 
give  through  me.  In  consequence  of  this,  a  notice  was  sent  to 
Brother  Cook  by  W.  Woodruff,  stating  that  he  and  John  Taylor 
would  be  at  Weber,  on  the  nth  day  of  February,  and  would  hold 
a  meeting  at  1 1  o'clock.  The  members  of  the  ward  were  noti- 
fied, and  a  full  meeting  was  the  result.  In  this  meeting,  seventeen 
individuals  expressed  themselves .  convinced  that  the  Lord  had 
raised  me  up  as  prophet,  seer,  and  revelator  to  his  Church,  and 
because  they  thus  expressed  themselves,  they  were  "cut  off"  from 
the  Church.  This  was  the  first  time  that  I  had  been  publicly 
proclaimed  as  God's  prophet,  and  W.  WToodruff  stood  up  and 
prophesied  that  my  influence  should  from  that  time  go  down. 
Since  that  time,  however,  the  spirit  of  the  Lord  has  rested  upon 
the  people,  and  they  have  come  from  almost  all  parts  of  the  Terri- 
tory to  inquire  after  these  strange  things  that  have  so  mysteriously 
been  brought  about. 

On  the  third  day  of  April,  I  received  a  revelation  from  the 
Lord,  commanding  all  who  believed  in  my  testimony  and  mission 
to  be  baptized  into  the  fulness  of  the  gospel,  which  I  have  been 
sent  to  restore.  On  the  6th  day  of  April,  the  reorganization  of 
the  Church  was  commenced  with  six  members,  and  the  spirit  of 
the  Lord  so  rested  upon  the  people,  that  in  one  week — by  the 
1 3th  of  April,  the  Church  numbered  fifty-three  members,  and  at 
the  expiration  of  three  months,  it  numbered  upwards  of  two 
hundred  souls. 

The   gifts    of   the  spirit  are  enjoyed,   and   our   meetings    are 


A    LETTER.  673 

rendered  peculiarly  interesting  by  tongues,  interpretation  of 
tongues,  prophesyings,  and  all  the  blessings  which  distinguished 
Mormonism  from  Sectarianism  in  the  prophet  Joseph  Smith's  day, 
and  which  now  distinguishes  those  who  have  embraced  the  gospel 
in  its  fulness,  from  their  brethren  around  them  who  have  only  em~ 
braced  it  in  part.  Each  of  the  prophets  who  have  been  before 
me,  taught  the  gospel  in  part  only,  because  they  only  held  the 
priesthood  in  part. 

Joseph  Smith,  whom  we  all  acknowledge  was  the  greatest 
prophet  that  had  ever  lived  up  to  his  time,  ( Moses  excepted )  re- 
ceived a  revelation  from  the  Lord  on  January  i  pth,  1841, — sec. 
103,  par.  10,  Doctrine  and  Covenants — wherein  the  Lord  says: 
"There  is  not  a  place  found  on  earth  that  he  may  come  and 
restore  again  that  which  was  lost  unto  you,  or  which  he  hath  taken 
away,  even  the  fulness  of  the  priesthood."  The  Lord  has  refer- 
ence in  this  place  to  the  temple  that  was  to  have  been  built,  and 
you  will  observe  that  it  was  not  built  during  Joseph's  life-time. 
The  fulness  of  the  priesthood  remained  to  be  given,  but  it  was 
not  Joseph's  prerogative  to  possess  it.  It  was  to  be  reserved  for 
that  prophet  who  should  arise  after  Joseph's  day,  and  to  whom 
reference  is  made  in  Doctrine  and  Covenants,  sec.  51,  par.  3; 
sec.  101,  par.  3. — Bible:  Deut.  18:  17-20;  Acts,  3:  22-23; 
Second  Book  of  Nephi,  chap.  2,  par.  2—3 ;  Times  and  Seasons, 
page  6  7  3. 

The  seventh  seal  is  now  opened,  and  great  and  important 
things  are  about  to  transpire,  as  you  will  perceive  from  the 
prophecy  given  by  the  spirit,  December  21,  1860.  Besides  this 
prophecy,  there  have  been  a  great  number  of  revelations  given, 
wherein  the  Lord  speaks  of  the  great  and  marvelous  works  that 
he  is  about  to  peiform,  which,  for  the  power  that  shall  b£  mani- 
fested in  the  deliverance  and  salvation  of  the  righteous,  and  the 
destruction  of  the  wicked,  has  never  found  a  precedent.  You  will, 
however,  readily  perceive  that  to  bring  about  such  a  state  of 
things,  there  needs  to  be  a  perfect  establishment  of  the  priesthood 
after  the  heavenly  order.  This  is  being  done.  Under  the  fulness 
of  the  gospel,  there  are  but  two  priesthoods,  and  the  officers  of 
each  order  are  independent  in  their  own  sphere,  and  all  are  called 
to  office  according  to  their  birthright.  The  high  priesthood  con- 


674  A    LETTER. 

sists  of  the  first  presidency  of  the  Church,  viz. :  the  prophet  and 
his  two  counselors,  twenty-four  apostles,  and  the  quorum  of  high 
priests ;  this  completes  the  high  priesthood.  The  lesser  priest- 
hood is  comprised  of  bishops  and  Aaronic  priests.  The  bishops 
are  the  firstborn  sons  of  Adam ;  the  Aaronic  priests  are  their 
younger  brothers.  The  members  of  the  high  priesthood  are  sons 
of  the  Gods  of  other  worlds,  even  as  Jesus  was  the  son  of  the 
Eternal  Father. 

There  is  much  more  that  might  be  said  upon  these  matters,  but 
it  could  be  conveyed  to  you  much  better  verbally  than  in  writing, 
and,  being  desirous  that  you  should  understand  these  things,  I 
hereby  tender  to  you,  and  to  all  the  honest  in  heart  in  the  region 
of  country  where  you  dwell,  and  every  where  else,  an  invitation  to 
come  here  and 'spend  a  few  days  in  the  investigation  of  these 
things,  and  your  time  will  not  be  mis-spent. 

Please  accept  my  kind  regards,  and  tender  the  same  to  your 
family,  to  Thomas  Thorpe  and  his  wife  and  sister  Mary.  Give 
my  best  love  to  my  dear  child,  of  whose  health  and  prosperity  I 
would  be  glad  to  hear,  and  whom  I  would  very  much  like  to  see. 
Remember  me  kindly  also  to  Henry  Beale,  and  believe  me  to 
remain, 

Your  friend  and  well-wisher, 


EXPLANATION    OF    A    VISION.  675 


EXPLANATION    OF    THE    VISION    OF    EZEKIEL. 


BY    THE    PROPHET,  JOSEPH     MORRIS. 


1.  EZEKIEL  (i:  9-15.)  said  that  he  saw  four  living  creatures, 
whose  appearance  was  as  the  likeness  of  a  man ;  that  every  one  of 
them  had  four  faces  and  four  wings ;  that  their  wings  were  linked 
together,    and    that    they    went    straightforward,    and  turned  not 
when  they  went. 

2.  What  should  we  understand  by  this  vision?      Their  faces 
represent  light ;  their  wings  represent  power  to  move  forth  quickly ; 
their  wings  being  linked  together  represent  union ;  and  their  going 
straightforward,  and  turning  not  when  they  went,  represent  a  strict 
adherence  to  the  order  of  heaven. 


NOTICE    TO    CLOSE    THE    OFFICE. 


WEBER,  UTAH,  August  3oth,  1861. 
BROTHERS  JOHN  PARSONS  AND  MARK  H.  FORSCUTT, 

DEAR  BRETHREN  •„ — After  the  interview  of  this  morning,  we 
have  come  to  the  conclusion  that  it  is  prudent  to  close  the  office 
for  the  present.  Please  remove  your  personal  property,  and  hand 
to  us  the  key  during  the  course  of  the  day.  We  remain, 

Yours  truly, 

JOSEPH  MORRIS, 
RICHARD  COOK, 
JOHN  BANKS. 


ERATTA: — Weber  should  be  omitted  in  date  line  on  page  636. 
Date  of  revelation  107  should  be  Oct.  8th. 


INDEX. 

[THE  NUMBERS  REFER  TO  THE  PAGES.] 


AARON,  robe  of,  how  foreshadowed,  551-2. 

Adam,  posterity  of,  exaltation  of,  10. 

Address  to  Brigham  Young,  667-9. 

American  Government,  191-4. 

Anointing,  manner  of,  21  ;  females,  22  ;  high  priests,  22. 

Angels  in  heaven,  concerning  the.  166-171. 

Angels  of  heaven,  duties  of  the,    606-9;  perfection  of,  616-19. 

Apostacy,  spirit  of,  429-30. 

Apostates,  how  to  deal  with,  378;  names  of  to  be  obliterated  from 

record  book,  372-4;  the  payment  of  debts  by,  474-5. 
Apostles,  oath  for,   20;  concerning  the,  451-3;    of  old  Church, 

224-6.         „, 

Apostleship,  selection  of  men  to,  48-9  ;  organization  of,  141-2. 
Army  of  heaven,  195-7;  manner  of  receiving  commands,  480-1  : 

expression  from,  403. 
Army   of  the   Kingdom,  how   to    organize,   535-6;  commanded 

to   organize   seven   companies  as   commencement  for,   555-8; 

prophet  instructed  to  reorganize  the,  577—8. 
Astle,  Joseph,  rev.  concerning,  503-5. 
Atonement,  114-15. 

BANKS,  John,  appointed  spokesman,  137  ;  birthright  of,  241 ;  rev. 

concerning,  364-7. 

Baptism,  manner  of  administering,  78;    concerning,  85,  86. 
Bishop,  instructions  for  the,  509-11. 
Birthright,  Prophet  informed  of  his,  330-3. 
Burns,  Moses,  rev.  concerning,  119. 

CAPTAIN,  Second,  communication  from,  628;  Third,  testimony  of, 
638-642. 

Celestial  marriage,  article  on  651-3. 

Christ,  coming  of,  151-3;  robe  of,  546-8. 

Church,  reorganization  of,  76,  77  ;  first  council  of,  107,  108;  old, 
concerning  apostles  of,  224-6;  old,  rejected,  24;  of  Christ, 
manner  of  anointing  females  in,  22;  of  Christ,  destruction  of 
idolatrous  members  of,  41. 

Clerks  reproved,  133-4. 

Cloud  now  gathering,  53,  54. 

Cook,  Richard,  concerning,  37,  39,  93,  364-7,  459-61;  appoint- 
ment of,  77. 

Cook,  John,  concerning,  38,  459-61. 


678  INDEX. 

Confirming,  manner  of,  23. 

Conflict,  coming,  246-248. 

Command,  signs  of,  35. 

Comet,  concerning  the,  122;  the  great,  18,  19. 

Consecrate,  people  requested  to,  338,  339. 

Consecrated  property,  apostates  not  to  take  away,  490,  491. 

Consecration,  concerning  law  of,  492,  493  ;  immediate  compliance 
enjoined  with  the  law  of,  339,  340;  heirs  of  salvation  must 
abide  the  law  of,  352-354. 

Council  of  the  church,  107-8;  first,  reorganization  of,  141-2. 

Counselors,  revelation  to,  298-9;  instructed  to  inform  the  peo- 
ple, 449,  450;  prophet's,  responsibility  placed  upon,  189,  190. 

Counselorship,  article  on,  642,  643. 

Covenant,  the  marriage,  129. 

Cowan,  James,  called  to  apostleship,  142. 

Creation  of  worlds,  522-525. 

Crops,  sowing  and  reaping  of,  116-117. 

Crowns,  seven,  prophet  instructed  to  wear,  582-58*4. 

Cursing,  manner  of,  48. 

DARKNESS,  principles  of,  424,  425,  426. 

Day  of  God's  vengeance,  120,  121. 

Death,  principles  of  explained,  200,  201. 

Debts,  concerning,  103,  104. 

Deliverance  of  God's  people,  28;  why  deferred,  300-302. 

Devil,  influence  of  the,  469-471. 

Disappointment,  rev.  concerning  the,  296,  297. 

Dove,  James,  called  to  the  apostleship,  142. 

EARDLEY,  John  R.,  called  to  the  apostleship,  142. 

Earth,  showing  how  it  will  be  shaken,  478,  479. 

Earthly  things  pattern  after  heavenly  things,  443,  444. 

Elders,  four  and  twenty,  197-199. 

Enemies,  the  saints  counseled  to  resist  the,  236,  237  ;  the  Lord 
promises  to  smite  the,  238-240;  disappointed,  269,  270;  con- 
cerning destruction  of,  96,  97;  saints  counseled  not  to  seek  re- 
dress from  the,  112,  113;  the  course  that  the  Lord  will  pursue 
with  the,  142,  143,  144;  plot  laid  by,  145,  146  ;  the  coming  of 
the,  230,  231;  the  prophet  instructed  how  to  meet  the,  252; 
prophet  instructed  how  to  act  when  he  meets  the,  257-259; 
unsettled  condition  of  the,  273,  274;  reluctant  to  come  against 
the  Lord's  people,  275,  276;  disunion  among  the,  282,  283; 
disclosing  the  intention  of,  403,  404;  design  of  the,  571-574; 
destruction  of  reassured,  578-582;  will  not  be  permitted  to 
come  up  until  right  time,  482,  483. 

Eternal  progression,.  217,  218. 


INDEX.  679 

FAITH,  prophet  reproved  for  lack  of,  280,  281  ;  concerning  the 
prophet's,  342. 

Faithful  people  to  be  preserved,  343,  344. 

Family  difficulties,  instructions  for  settlement  of,  400,  401. 

Farley,  Robert,  commanded  to  move,  60. 

Father,  Eternal,  progression  of,  10. 

Fear,  origin  and  cause  of,  602-605. 

Females,  manner  of  anointing,  22. 

Fire-arms,  Peter  Klemgard  appointed  to  take  charge  of,  527-529. 

Firth,  John,  rev.  concerning,  51,  52. 

Food,  the  Lord  promises  to  supply  the  people  with,  539-542. 

Foreshadowing  of  the  kingdom  of  God,  537,  538;  rod  of  Moses, 
539-542;  revs,  concerning  the,  585-588,590;  approval  of 
the,  590-595- 

Forscutt,  Mark  H.,  called  to  apostleship,  102;  revelation  con- 
cerning, 128,  1.29. 

GENESIS,  first  three  chapters  of,  explained,  659-662. 

God's  people,  deliverance  of,  28;    describing  amount  of  testimony 

given  to,  355,  356. 

God,  Judgments  of,  65,  66;    faithfulness  of,  78. 
Gods,  order  of,  how  represented,  590-595  ;  perfection  of,  616-19, 
God's  purposes,  immutability  of,  172-175. 
Gospel,  preaching  of  before  second  destruction,  208-210;  oath  to 

be  sworn  by  those  who  have  yielded  obedience  to  the  fulness  of 

the,  388;  power  of  the,  395,  396;  high  priests  commanded  to 

preach  the  fulness  of  the,  397-399. 
Government,  American,  191-194. 
Gudmundson  Gudmundson  called  to  the  apostleship,  142. 

HARRIS,  William,  revelation  concerning,  101,  102. 

Heaven,  angels  in,  166-171;  army  of,  195-197;  mansions  in, 
610-613. 

Heavenly  things,  earthly  things  pattern  after,  443,  444. 

High  priesthood,  manner  of  ordaining  men  to,  23;  prophet  com- 
manded to  administer  the  oaths  of  the,  414,  415. 

High  priests,  commanded  to  preach  the  fulness  of  the  gospel,  397, 
400;  disobedient,  15;  manner  of  anointing  the,  22. 

High  priests'  quorum,  manner  of  organizing,  216;  how  governed 
when  assembled,  232. 

Horses  accepted,  500-502. 

Human  feelings,  concerning,  595-598. 

Hypocrite,  description  of  a,  467,  468. 

Hypocrites,  concerning  the,  361-363;  judgment  upon,  19,  20; 
the  aged  excused  from  witnessing  destruction  of  the,  569,  570. 

Hypocrisy,  prophet  commanded  to  expose  spirit  of,  462-464; 
people  who  are  actuated  by,  350-352. 


68o  INDEX. 

INFLUENCE,  evil,  those  who  have  been  overcome  by,   427,  428. 
Interviews,    personal,    how    conducted  between  the  Lord  and   the 

prophet,  277,  278. 
Israel,  rods  of  the  princes  of,  559  ;  deliverance  of  children  of,  221. 

JACOBSEN,  Niels,  called  to  apostleship,  142;  revelation  concerning, 

392,  394- 

Jacob,  twelve  sons  of,  447,  448. 
Jones,  John  E.,  called  to  apostleship,  102. 
Jones,  William,  revelation  concerning,  503-505. 
Judgments,  upon  the  wicked,  50  ;    to  come,   65,   66;    concerning, 

454-456. 
Justice,  concerning,  454-456. 

KENDALL,  William,  concerning,  45,  119. 

Kingdom,  army  of,  how  to  organize,  535,  536;  instructed  to  or- 
ganize seven  companies  for  the  army  of,  555-558;  of  God, 
how  foreshadowed,  537,  538;  of  God,  order  of,  494-496. 

Klemgard,  Peter  C.  appointed  to  take  charge  of  fire-arms,  527-529. 

LADY,  elect,  manner  of  anointing,  21,   22. 

Language,  concerning,  52. 

Lands,  foreign,  saints  in,  71,  72. 

Law,  all  things  regulated  by,  98;  of  consecration,  492,  493. 

Leslie,  George,  letter  to,  670-74. 

Life,  principles  of,  200,  201. 

Light,  principles  of,  424-426. 

Livingstone,  Richard  J.,  called  to  apostleship,  476,  477. 

Lord,  people  not  prepared  to  meet  the,  306,  307  ;  the  manner  in 
which  he  will  meet  the  prophet,  328;  the,  will  not  delay  his 
coming  when  the  people  are  prepared,  336 ;  coming  of,  prep- 
arations to  be  made  for,  484-486;  duty  of  the,  533,  534,  620, 
621;  the,  informs  his  people  that  the  law  of  heaven  compels 
him  to  labor  with  his  people  before  he  can  lawfully  destroy 
them,  371. 

MANSIONS  in  heaven,  concerning  the,  610-613. 

Marriage,  celestial;  article  on,    651-653;  revelations  concerning, 

134,  135;  covenant,  129* 
Mather,  James,  called  to  the  apostleship  142. 
Mather,  John  O.,   "     "         "         476,477. 
Members  of  first  quorum,  position  of,  526,  527. 
Men  commanded  to  remain  at  Weber,  357,  358. 
Mercy,  concerning,  454-456. 
Message,  concerning  the,  620,  621. 
Meetings,  instructed  to  hold  small,  379-382. 
Michael,  the  arch-angel,  mission  of,  395,  396. 


INDEX.  68 1 

Military  authorities,  answer  to,  139,  140. 

Morris,  Joseph,  revs,  concerning,  39,  43,  99,  100,  128. 

Morris,  Mary,  rev.  concerning,  149,  150. 

Mortal  beings,  concerning,  599-602. 

Moss,  Peter,  imprisonment  of,  471,  472. 

Moses,  rev.  concerning,   221-223;  rod  of,  25,   240,  241;  rod   of 

promised,  68,  69,  70. 
Murderers,  the  Lord's  indignation  against,  130,  131,  132. 

OATH,  for  prophet's  counselors,  20;  apostles,  20;  high  priests', 
2 1 ;  the  prophet  commanded  to  administer  the  to  high  priests, 
414,  415;  deliverance  promised  after  taking  the,  419,  421; 
conduct  of  people  approved  in  swearing  the,  416,  417,  418; 
day  appointed  on  which  to  swear  the,  414;  the  blessing  to  be 
derived  from  swearing  the,  407,  408 ;  manner  of  administering 
the,  390;  people  instructed  to  prepare  to  swear  the,  391 ;  those 
who  have  yielded  obedience  to  the  fulness  of  the  gospel  should 
swear  the,  387. 

Officers,  manner  of  electing,  105;  chief  acting  officers,  81-85; 
appointment  of  to  administer  to  the  sick,  -164,  165. 

Ordination,  article  on,  647-650;  advising  slowness  of  speech  in, 
80 ;  concerning,  80. 

Ordaining,  manner  of,  23. 

Order  of  Gods,  how  represented,  590-595  ;  of  twelves,  636,  637  ; 
of  sevens,  644-647;  of  twenty-fours,  636,  637. 

PARSONS,  John,  rev.  concerning,  129,  37,  93,  431-435;  com- 
manded to  move,  60;  appointed,  77. 

People,  poor,  how  to  provide  relief  for,  439,  449  ;  separation  of, 
457,  458,  622-625;  the  course  the  Lord  will  pursue  with  his, 
629-632  ;  of  God,  deliverance  of,  16,  17  ;  commanded  to  pre- 
pare to  meet  the  Lord,  266 ;  why  not  delivered,  288-293  '•>  dis- 
satisfied and  restless,  294-296;  not  fully  prepared,  306,  307; 
not  delivered  until  united,  308-310;  willing  to  obey  the  Lord, 
317-319;  commanded  to  be  orderly  and  calm,  319-321  ;  re- 
quested to  be  prepared  for  moving,  324,  325  ;  test  placed 
before  the,  333-336;  still  unprepared,  337,  338;  requested 
to  consecrate,  338,  339 ;  anxiously  awaiting  a  manifestation  of 
the  power  of  God,  348-350;  why  disappointed,  422;  the  man- 
ner of  conduct  while  enemies  are  training,  147  ;  righteous,  future 
prosperity  for,  156-8;  of  God,  independence  of,  161-163; 
wicked,  destruction  of,  208-10;  promised  that  they  shall  see 
the  rod  before  enemies,  249-51 ;  rebellious,  warning  to,  253-5  ; 
believers,  commanded  to  move  to  South  Weber,  244;  of  God, 
warning  to  the,  62  ;  must  be  warned,  63  ;  faithless,  chastened, 
94-5  ;  instructed  not  to  use  the  property  of  rebellious,  368-70. 


682  INDEX. 

Portrait  of  the  Lord,  description  of,  529-532. 

Powers,  conflicting,  549,  550. 

Power  of  God,  people  awaiting  a  manifestation  of,  348-350. 

Poor,  suffering,  bow  to  relieve,  375-377. 

Polygamy,  as  practiced,  denounced,  400-2. 

Priesthood,  keys  of,  10-15;  reorganization  of  holy,  17-18;  holy, 
an  oath  of,  20-1  ;  officers  under  the  fulness  of  the  holy,  81-3  ; 
concerning  keys  of,  436-8. 

Priesthoods,  two,  robes  of,  553-5. 

Princes  of  Israel,  twelve,  rods  of,  559-60;  twelve,  each  have  a 
rod,  187-8. 

Prisoner,  concerning  the,  585-8, 

Prisoners,  the  three,   549-50;    the  two,   626. 

Progression,  eternal,  revelations  concerning,  217-18,  512-22. 

Promise,  renewal  of,  285-7  ;  another,  341  ;  no  additional,  359-60. 

Proclamation  of  the  Lord,  529-32. 

Presidency,  first,  revelation  concerning,  224-6. 

Property,  revelations  concerning,  441-2  ;  consecrated,  apostates 
not  allowed  to  take  away,  490-1. 

Prophet's  son,  death  of,  561-565;  benefactors,  blessings  for,  33; 
robe,  543-545  ;  robe,  how  foreshadowed,  546-548. 

Prophet,  concerning  the,  32,  43,.  47,  138,  154,  155,  186,  233-4, 
244,  245,  262,  263,  279;  called,  9;  the  Lord  promises  to 
visit  the,  236,  237,  271,  272,  284;  duty  of  the,  533,  ^534;  re- 
proved for  lack  of  faith,  280,  281  ;  reproved,  185;  visited,  303 
-5;  feels  downcast,  316;  condition  of  when  called,  317-19; 
commanded  to  prepare  to  meet  the  Lord,  322-3;  commanded 
to  tarry  at  Weber,  67-8;  appears  to  lack  confidence,  329-30  ; 
informed  of  his  birthright,  330-3 ;  instructed  to  ascertain  how 
many  believe  in  the  Lord's  words,  314-15  ;  instruction  for  the, 
126-7,  2^4"5>  627;  possesses  great  faith,  342;  advised,  55-6; 
and  others  reproved,  73-5  ;  sickness  of,  88  ;  dress  of  the,  409- 
ii  ;  manner  of  sealing  the  44;  commanded  to  collect  the  reve- 
lations, 109-10. 

Prophetess,  manner  of  sealing  the,  44. 

Prophecy  to  the  inhabitants  of  Utah,  40;   by  the   prophet,  633. 

QUORUM,  High  Priests',  manner  of  organizing,  216;    positions  of 

members  of  first,  526-7. 
Questions  answered  in  School  of  the  Prophets,  662-3. 

REVELATIONS,  former,  explained,  85-6 ;  sense  of  must  remain  un- 
changed, 125-6;    manner  of  giving,  227-9. 
Reports,  false,  circulated  by  enemies,  260-1. 
Rebellious  people,  rev.  concerning,  256-7;  warning   to,  253-255. 
Re-baptism,  backsliders  cannot  have  a,  no. 


INDEX.  683 

Resurrection,  article  on,  654-9. 

Rich,  the,  commanded  to  assist  the  poor,  105-6. 

Rod,  rev.  concerning,  183-4  ;•  promised  before  deliverance,  205-7  ; 

why  Aaron  and  twelve  princes  had  a,  187-8;    prophet's  543-5. 
Rod  of   Moses,   concerning  the,    25,    240-1;    promised,    68-70; 

foreshadowing  of,  539-42. 
Robe,    prophet's,    543-5  ;    how   foreshadowed,    546-8 ;    of  Jesus 

Christ,  how  foreshadowed,  546-8;  of  Aaron,  how  foreshadowed, 

55*,  552- 
Robes  of  the  two  priesthoods,  553-555. 

SABBATH  DAY,  revelation  concerning  the,  575,  576. 

Salt  Lake  City,  concerning  the  gathering  to,  31  ;  the  order  in 
which  the  saints  must  move  to,  326,  327,  566-568. 

Saints,  how  protected,  613-616;  counseled  not^  to  seek  redress, 
112,  ri3;  counseled  to  resist  their  enemies,  236,  237;  com- 
manded to  gather  to  South  Weber,  92  ;  triumph  of  the,  96,  97; 
informed  how  to  act  when  enemies  come  to  arrest  the  prophet, 
214,  215;  in  foreign  lands,  71,  72;  instructed  to  have  wheat 
ground,  405. 

Sacrament,  concerning  the,  85,  86. 

Satan,  works  of,  622—625. 

Savior,  description  of  the,  267,  268. 

Salvation,  heirs  of,  must  abide  the  law  of,  352-354. 

School  of  the  Prophets,  concerning  the,  87  ;  questions  answered 
in  the,  662,  663. 

Sealing,  manner  of,  44. 

Sevens,  order  of,  article  on,  644-47. 

Shepherds  of  Israel,  destruction  of,  29. 

Shepherds,  false,  destruction  of,  36  ;  wicked,  destruction  of,  52-3. 

Sick  people,  healing  of,  85-6  ;  officers  appointed  to  administer  to 
the,  164-5;  concerning  the,  159-61. 

Signs  of  command,  35. 

Smith,  Hans  Peter,  called  to  the  apostleship,  412. 

Smith,  Jr.,  Joseph,  revelation  concerning,  90. 

Son  of  the  prophet,  death  of,  561-65. 

Sons,  firstborn,  10. 

Spirit  of  sympathy,  saints  warned  against  the,  497-99. 

Swords  accepted,  500-2. 

TAYLOR,  Abraham,  called  to  apostleship,  142. 

Temple,  holy,  9;  rejection  of,  25;    concerning  the,  620-1. 

Test,  great,  near  approach  of,  183-4  ;  172-5  ;  time  of  great,  202-4  ; 

first,    46,   59;    saints   commanded  to   prepare   for   first,    58-9; 

coming,  145-6;    last,  described,   464-7;    great,   circumstances 

to  transpire  in  connection  with,  179-80. 


684  INDEX. 

Testimony,  describing,  amount  of  given  to  God's  people,  355-6; 
of  third  captain,  638-42. 

Tongue,  through  the  prophet,  634-5. 

Training,  revelation  concerning,  148;  revelation  given  at  time  of 
149-50. 

Traitors,  removal  of,  115;  work  of,  120-1;  the  Lord's  indigna- 
tion against,  130-2. 

Transgressors,  warning  against  the  spirit  of  sympathy  for,  497-9  > 
concerning  sympathy  for,  506—8. 

Trolsen,  John,  called  to  apostleship,  142. 

Trumpet,  the  purchase  of  a,  advised,  115. 

Twelves,  order  of,  636-7. 

Twenty-fours,  order  of,  636-7. 

UTAH,  destruction  of  the  inhabitants  of,   181-2;   prophecy  to  in- 
habitants of,  40. 

WEBER,  saints  commanded  to  gather  to,  91  ;  warning  to  the  in- 
habitants of,  57  ;  prophet  commanded  to  tarry  at,  67,  68. 

Wicked  people,  concerning  destruction  of,  151-3,  156-8. 

Worlds,  order  by  which  governed,  211-12;  creation  of,  522-25; 
eternal  progression  of,  51 2-5  2  2. 

World,  deceitfulness  of  the,  219-20. 

YOUNG,  Brigham,  chosen,  9 ;  revelation  to,  26 ;  the  wicked  con- 
duct of,  176-77;  letters  to,  663-64,  667-69. 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 


AN  INITIAL  FINIS  Of  25 


WILL   BE  AfS 
THIS    BOOKlO 
WILL  INCR 
DAY     AND 
OVERDUE. 


O  RETURN 
IE   PENALTY 
E  FOURTH 
H     DAY 


LIBRARY  USE 

RETURN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 

LOAN  DEPT. 

THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  BEFORE  CLOSING  TIME 
ON  LAST  DATE  STAMPED  BELOW 


REC'n  LD     JUl  7 


70-5PW*10 


102s) 


LD  62A-30m-2,'69 
(J6534slO)9412A — A-32 


General  Library 

University  of  California 

Berkeley 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


